Mobile Offshore Units

Rules for Mobile Offshore Units. -.
July 2000
Page 28 - Pt.O Ch.1 Sec.4
C. The integration Process
D. Documentation
E. Testing at Manufacturer
F. Testing Onboard
Sec.2 System Design
A. Design Principles
B. Data Communication Network
C. Work Stations
D. Data Communication Protocol
Sec.3 Qualifications and Operational Procedures
A. General
B. Qualifications
PART 7 CHAPTER 1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Sec.l Application of Rules
A. General
B. Application of the Rules
Sec.2 Scope of Rules for Units in Operation
A. Scope of Mandatory Rules
PART 7 CHAPTER 2
PERIODICAL SURVEY REQUIREMENTS
Sec.l General Requirements
A. Survey Intervals and Conditions
B. Alternative SUlVey Arrangements
C. Provisions for Hull Surveys
D. Proeedures for Class Related Services
Sec.2 Survey Extent - Main Class
A. Definitions
B. Annual Survey
C. Intermediate Survey
D. Renewal Survey
E. Renewal Survey - Machinery and Safety Systems
F. Tailshaft Survey
G. Thrusters for PropUlsion
H. Boiler and Steam Generator Survey
I. Thennal. Oil Heater Survey
Survey EJrtn&t. ,Allllitinnal C,lass. S[lI'l'jal Srrvir .. amI
Type Notations
A. Accommodation Unit
B. Drilling Units
C. Fire Fighters
D. Offshore Loading Buoy
E. Oil Production Units
F. Support Unit and Support Unit (N)
Sec.4 Survey Extent - Additional Class. Special Equipment and
Systems Notations
A. Crane
B. Drilling Plant
C. Drilling Derrick
D. Diving Systems
E. Dynamic Postioning System
F. Periodically Unattended Machinery Space and Machinery
Centralized Operated
G. Additional Fire Protection
H. Helicopter Deck
I. Integrated Computer Systems
J. Position Mooring Equipment
K. Production Plant
PART 7 CHAPTER 5
MANAGEMENT OF SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENTAL
PROTECTION (SEP)
Sec. 1 Safety and Environmental Protection (SEP)
Classification
A. General
B. Scope and Application
C. Classification and Notation
D. Classification
Sec. 2 Safety and Environmental Protection (SEP) Management
System
A. Leadership and Administration
B. Leadership Training
C. Planned Inspection and Maintenance
D. Critical Operation and Condition Analysis and Controls
E. Incidents
F. Emergency Preparedness
G. Safety Rules and Work Pennits
H. Knowledge and Skill Training
I. Personal Protective Equipment
J. Occupational Health and Hygiene
K. SEP Management System Review and Evaluation
LI
N!<W-gyik!i!!g. M!\i9[ RaJ;ljn .J!m!
Acquisitions
M. Personal Communication
N. Safety Meetings
O. Personnel Recruitment and Orientation
P. Purchasing and Sub-Contractor Management
DET NORSKE VERITAS
'j

.,.j
I

.",
)
- \

,---,
',)
i

C-j
-..../
1
Li6rary 2 1 AUG 2002
10/ o/ung cr au
RULES FOR
CLASSIFICATION OF
MOBILE OFFSHORE UNITS
iQ)NV
PART 0 CHAPTER 1
-", "'". n; K:'ft:- .
': c', u; ,
.. '

AMENDMENTS AND INDEX
JULY 2000
SECTIONS
INTRODUCTION
PAGE
1 Current Rule Booklets ......................................................................................... 1
2 Instructions to Users ........................................................................................... 2
3 Amendments and Corrections ................................................................................ 8
4 Systematic Index ............................................................................................... 21
DET NORSKE VERITAS
Veritasveien I. N-1322 Hovik. Norway Tel.: +4767579900 Fax: +47675799 11
CHANGES IN THE RULES
The following rule chapter has been revised aod updated as of. .
1 July 2000:
Pt.O Ch.l User lnfonnation, Amendments and Index

Conunents to the Rules may be sent bye-mail tomi203@dnv.com.
some corrections and clarifications are given
in Sec.3 C?f this chapter.
For subscription orders or information about sUbscription terms, please use distribution@tinv.com.
Comprehensive information about DNV and the Society's services is found at the Web site http://www.dnv.com
C> Det Norske Veritas
Computer Typesetting by Division Technology and Products, Det Norske Veritas
Printed in Norway by Det Norske Veritas July 2000 .
7.00.2500

tha muimum cOfTlponution shan novcr exceed USD 2 million. .
ahlll meln the Foundation Oet Norake Veritas IS well as In its subsidilries, directors, officers, employees, agents snd sny other acting on behalf

',;'
,

':J

Sec.3 Design Principles
A. Principal Requirements
Sec.4 Systems
A. General
B. Blowout Prevention System
C. Marine Riser System
D. Heave Compensation and Tensioning System
E. Hoisting, Rotating and Pipe Handling System
F. Bulk Storage, Drilling Fluid Ciroulation and Cementing System
G. Well Test and Flare System
Sec.S Structural and Mechaoical Components
A. General
B. Specific Component Requirements
Sec.6 Piping
A. General
B. Piping Design
C. Supporting Elements
Sec.7 Manufacture, Workmaoship aod Testing
A. General
B. Manufacture
C. Nondestructive Examination (NDE)
D. Testing
App.A: Supplementary Requirements of the Norwegian
petroleum Directorate (NPD) and the Norwegiao Maritime
Directorate (NMD)
A. General
B. Design Principles
C. Systems
App.B: Supplementary Requirements of the U.K. Health and
Safety Executive (HSE)
A. General
B. Materials
C. Systems
D. Piping
PART 6 CHAPTER 6
OIL PRODUCTION PLANT
Sec.l General
A. Aroli!ll!lilln
B. Defmitions
C. Recognised Codes and Standards
D. Approval Principles
E. Documentation
Sec.2 Materials and Corrosion Protection
A. General
B. Specific Requirements
C. Material Certificates
D. Corrosion Protection
E. Erosion
A. General
B. Systems
Sec.4 Production, Injection and Utility Systems
A. General
B. Safety Systems
C. Relief, Depressurising and Disposal Systems
Sec.S Piping
A. General
B. Design Requirements
Sec.6 Equipment
A. General
Sec.7 Riser Systems
A. General
Rules for Mobile Offshore Units, July 2000
Pl.O Ch.1 Sec.4 - Page 27
Sec.8 Structures
A. General
Sec.9 Electrical Installations
A. General
Sec.IO Instrumentation and Control Systems
A. General
s.c.ll FIre Protection aod Extinction
A. General
Sec.U Maoufacture, Workmanship and Testing
A. General
B. Manufacture
C. Non-destructive Examination (NDE)
D. Testing
petroleum Directorate (NPD)
A. Requirements of Appendix A
App.B: Supplementary Requirements of Health and Safety
Executive (HSE)
A. Requirements of Appendix B
PART 6 CHAPTER 7
DYNAMIC POSITIONING SYSTEMS
A. The Rules
B. Defmitions
C. Grouping of Dynamic Positioning Systems
D. Classification
E. Documentation
F. DP-Systems not built under the Survey of the Society
G. Pian Approval and Survey during Construction
H. Survey and -Test upon Completion
I. Surveys for Maintenance of Class
Sec.2 General Design
A. Rule Application
B. Defmitions
Ci - FODition -Hoiding-Far.fonnnno.
D. Redundancy and Independence
E. System Arrangement
Sec.3 Controller and Measuring System
A. System Arrangement
B. Measuring System
C. Sensors
D. Display Units
E. Monitoring
F. Internal Communication
Sec.4 Thrusters
A. General
Sec.S Power Systems
A. Scope of Classification
B. Electric Power System
Sec.6 Environmental Regularity"Numbers, ERN
A. Concept Description
Sec.7 Spare Parts
A. Spare Parts
PART 6 CHAPTER 8
INTEGRATED COMPUTER SYSTEMS (leS)
A. Classification
B. Defmitions
DEI" NORSKE VERITAS
MISCELLANEOUS NOTATIONS
Sec.l General R"'Iuirements
A. Classification
B. Definitions
C. Documentation
Sec.2 Helicopter Decks
A. General
B. Design Loads
C. Strength Requirements
Sec.3 Cranes
A. General
B. Design Loads
C. Overturning and Sliding
D. Testing
E. Stsbility
Sec.4 Diving Systems
A. General
B. Position Keeping
C. Arrangement
D. Electrical Systems
E. Fire Prevention, Detection and Extinction
F. Sanitsry Systems for Class II SF and III SF Diving Systems
G. Testing
H. Stability and Floatability
PART 6 CHAPTER 2
POSITION MOORING (POSMOOR)
A. Classification
B. Documentation
C. Structural Arrangement for Mooring Equipment
Sec.2 Environmental Conditions and Loads
A. Environmental Conditions
B. Environmental Loads
Sec.3 MOOring System Analysis
A. Method
B. Operation Conditions
C. Safety Factors and Premises
8";':4 Thruster AssiSted Mooring System
A. Classification
B. System Requirements
Sec.S Mooring Equipment
A. Anchors
B. Anchor Lines
C. Fairleads
D. Windlasses, Winches and Stoppers
E. Tension Measuring Equipment
Sec.6 TeSts
A. Test of Windlass/Winch
. B. Test of TA and ATA Systems
App.A: Supplementary R"'Iuirements of the Norwegian
Maritime Directorate (NMD) and the Norwegian Petroleum
Directorate (NPD)
A. General
B, Main Part
PART 6 CHAPTER 3
PERIODICALLY UNATTENDED MACIDNERY SPACE
(EO)
Sec. 1 General R"'Iuirements
A. Classification
B. Defmitions
C. Documentation
D. Sigoboards
Sec.2 System Arrangement
A. General
B. Automatic Control System
C. A1arm System
D. Safety System
E. Bridge Control of Propulsion Machinery
F. Communication System
G. Computer Based Systems
Sec.3 Extent of Monitoring and General R"'Iuirements
A. Monitoring
B. Arrangeme!lt on the Bridge
C. Arrangement in the Engine Room
D. Electric Power Supply
Sec.4 Precautions Against Fire
A. Shielding
B. Fire Detection
C. Fire Alann System
D. Remote Control
Sec.5 Testing
A. General
B. Testing of Remote Control System
C. Blackoui Test
D. Testing of Boiler Plant
PART 6 CHAPTER 4
ADDITIONAL FIRE PROTECTION (F-AM)
Sec. 1 General Requirements
A. Classification
B. Defmitions
C. Documentation
D. Sigoboards
Sec.2 Acrommodation
A. General
B. Fire Protection
C. Fire Extinguishing Systems
D. Fire Instruction
Sec.3 Machinery Spaces
A,o Goo.ra1
B. Oil Systems
C. Ventilation
D. Fire Pumps
E. Main Extinguishing System
F. Halon Total Flooding Extinguishing System
G. High-Expansion Foam Extinguishing System
H. Local Extinguishing Systems
1. Hose Stations
J. Dry Powder Extinguishers
K. Fireman' s Outfit
PART 6 CHAPTER S
DRILLING PLANT (DRILL)
Sec.l General
A. Application
B. Deftnitions
C. Recognized COdes
D. System Design Review
E. Equipment Certiftcation
F. Documentation
Sec.2 Materials
A. General
C. Corrosion
D. Material Certificates
DET NORSKE VERITAS
CONTENTS
SEC. 1 CURRENT RULE BOOKLETS .................... 1 proved Products ........ .
C 600 Recommended Practices
4
............ 4
A. Current Rule Booklets .......................................... 1
A 100 Current rule booklets..................................... I
D. Computer Programs ............................................ 6
D 100 General..................................... ................ 6
SEC. 2 INSTRUCTIONS TO USERS .............. 2
D 200 NAUTlCUS............................. .................. 6
D 300 PILOT ................................. : .................... 6
A. Introduction ....................................................... 2
A 100 Introduction booklet ...................................... 2
A 200 Present booklet ............................................ 2
D 400 SESAM................................... .................. 6
D 500 DNV Electronic Rule Book ......... .................... 7
D 600 DNV Exchange ............................... ............ 7
A 300 Ring binders ............................................... 2
E. Other DNv Rules . ............... ......... ......... ..... 7
E 100 General....................... .. ............... .. ........... 7
B. The Rules .......................................................... 2
B 100 Format ...................................................... 2 SEC. 3 AMENDMENTS AND CORRECTIONS ... 8
B 200 Numbering and cross references ....................... 3
B 300 Definitions............ ........................ ............. 3
B 400 Units........................................................ 3
A. Introduction ... ............ ........... ... ........ 8
A 100 General..................... .... .... ....................... . 8
,')
,---_/
~
B 500 Index and tables of contents ............................ 3
B 600 Amendments.. .. .... ...... ........................ ....... .. 4
B 700 Reprints from the rules .................................. 4
C. Guidelines and Notes ............................................ 4
B. Amendments and Corrections ................ '" .. .. 8
B 100 General......... ............................................ 8
SEC. 4 SYSTEMATIC INDEX ............................... 21
C 100 General...................................... ............... 4
A. Introduction .... ........... ............... 21
C 200 Guidelines..... .. .. ........ ...... ........................... 4
A 100 General.................................................... 21
C 300 Classiftcation Notes .. .............. ...................... 4
J
{ ~ )
C 400 Standards for Certification .............................. 4
C 500 Registers of Approved Manufacturers and Type Ap-
B. Systematic index ................................................ 21
B 100 General..................................... ............... 21
.)
J
(,)
,-,
0 )
. ~
()
,
\') .')
,"J
"

')

)

C. Documentation
Sec.2 Drilling Units
A. General
B. Struciural Arrangement and Strength
C. Stability and Floatability
D. Mooring and Towing Equipment
E. Drilling Plant, Equipment, Structures and Systems (Additional
Class Notation: DRILL or DRILL (Nil
F. Pumping and Piping Arrangement
G. Protection against Fire and Explosion
H. Electrical Installations in Hazardous Areas
I. Machinery Installations in Hazardous Areas
J. Safety Features
Sec.3 Pipe Laying Units
A. General
B, Structural Arrangement and Strength
C. Mooring Equipment
D. Pipe Laying Equipment and Installation
E. Stability and Floatability
Sec.4 Dredgers
A. General
B. Structural Arrangement and Strength
PART 5 CHAPTER 4
OIL PRODUCTION AND STORAGE UNITS
A. Classification
B. Defmitions
C. Documentation
D. Accessibility and Facilities for SUIVeys on Location
E. Commissioning Testing
Sec.2 Oil Production Facilities and Arrangement of Unit
A. General
B. .Basic Requirements
Sec.3 Structural Strength
A. General
Sec.4 Hazardous Areas and Ventilation
"A: ____ __ _
B. Basic Requirements
Sec.5 Machinery and Piping Arrangement
A. General
B. Combustion Equipment and Combustion Engines
C. Use of Gas and Crude Oil for Auxiliary Boilers and Turbines
D. Piping Arrangement
Sec.6 Fire Protection and Extinction
A. General
B. Structural Fire Protection
C. Fire Fighting
A. General
Sec.8 Instrumentation and Control Systems
A. General
Sec.9 Materials
,A. General
Sec.l0 Stability and Floatability
A. General
Petroleum Dir"!'lOrate
A. Scope of Appendix
B. Supplementary Requirementa
Rules for Mobile Offshore Units" July 2000
Pt.O Ch.1 Sec.4 - Page 25
PART 5 CHAPTER 5
OFFSHORE LOADING BUOYS
A. Application
B. Defmitions
C, Recognized Codes and Standards
E. Documentation
F, Spare Parta
G. Accessibility and Facilities for Surveys on Location
Sec.2 Loading/Unloading Facilities and Arrangements
A, General
B. Environment
C. Arnmgements
D. Marking and Warning Signboards
E. Fluid Transfer Systems
F. Equipment Design
A. General
A. Classification
B. Materia1s and Structural Categorization
C. Design Loads
D. Loading Conditions
E. Local Strength
Sec.5 Anchoring and Mooring
A. General
B. Anchoring
C. Mooring
Sec.6 Stability and Watertight Integrity
A. Classification
B. Intact Stability
C. Damage Stability
Sec.7 Piping, Equipm"'lt and Loading Hoses
A. General
B. Piping
C. Mechanical Equipment
D: -
A. General
A. General
Sec.l0 Fire Safety
A. General
B. Fire Control and Extinction
Sec.11 Control Systems
A. General
C. -,Gas Detection System
D. Alarm System
Sec.12 Manufacture, Sea Transport and Commissioning
A, General
B. Manufacture of Equipment and Piping
C. Installation and Commissioning
App.A: Supplementary R"'l,!irements of the Norwegian
Petroleum Directorate (NPD)
A. General
-B. Structural Strength
C. Anchoring and Riser System
PART 6 CHAPTER 1
DEf NORSKE VERITAS
Rules for Mobile Offshore Units, 'July 2000
B. Stationary Accumulator Batteries. Electric Starting
Arrangements for Auxiliary Engines. Charging stations for
Battery Trucks
C. Distribution
D. Circuit Protection
E. Control Gear for Motors and other Consumers
F. Choice of Cable Types
G. Earthing
H. Equipment and Enclosures
I. Insulating Materials
J. Marking
Sec.4 Switchgear and Control Gear Assemblies
A. Main and Emergency Switchboards
B. Distribution Switchboard
C. Enclosures for Motor Control Gear
D. Testing and Certification
Sec.5 Rotating Machines
A. Requirements Common to Generators and Motors
B. Additional Requirements to Generators
Sec.6 Static Convertors
A. Transfonners
B. Static Convertors with Semiconductors
Sec.7 Cables
A. Construction
B. Approval
Sec.8 Miscellaneous Equipment
A. Enclosures
B. Switchgear. Control Gear
C. Fuse-gear
D. Socket-outlets
E. Lampholders
F. Luminaires
G. Heating Equipment
H. Explosion-Protected Equipment
I. Marking
Sec.9 Installation and Testing
A. Principles
B. Essential and Important Equipment

D. Testing
Sec.l0 A.C. Supply Systems above 1 kV to and including 11
kV
A. General Requirements
. C. System Design
D. Switchgear and Controlgear Assemblies
E. Rotating Machines
F. Static Convertors
G. Cables, Construction and Testing
H. Miscellaneous Equipment
I. Installation and Testing
Sec.11 Electric Propulsion
C. Electrical System Design
D. Control System Design
E. Tests
PART 4 CHAPI'ER 5
INSTRUMENTATION AND AUTOMATION
A. Classification
B. Documentation
C. Design Principles
D. Pneumatic and Hydraulic Equipment
PART 4 CHAPTER 6
F1RE PROTECTION, DETECTION AND EXTINCTION
A. Classification
B. Defmitions
C. Documentation
Sec.2 Flre Detection and Fire Fighting
A. General
B. Fire Water System
D. Fire Detection Systems
E. Firemen's Outfit and Breathing Apparatus
F. Arrangements in Machinery and Working Spaces
G. Provisions for Helicopter Facilities
H. Storage of Gas Cylinders
I. Miscellaneous
Sec.3 Structural Fire Protection
A. General
B. Fire Integrity
PART 5 CHAPTER 1
UNITS FOR TRANSFER AND/OR OPERATION IN ICE
Sec.l Units for Occasional Transit and/or Operation in First
Year Ice Conditions. Tentative Rules
A. Classification
B. Defmitions
C. Documentation
D. Ice Strengthening
PART 5 CHAPTER 2
ACCOMMODATION UNITS AND OTHER OFFSHORE
SUPPORT UNITS
A. Classification
B. Defmitions
C. Documentation
Sec.2 Accommodation Units
A, Gonoral
D. Machinery and Systems
Sec.3 Fire Fighters
A. General
C. Self-Protection of the Unit. (Class Notation I)
D. Water Monitor System
E. Foam Monitor System. (Class Notation' III)
F. Pumps and Piping
G. Mobile Fire Fighting Equipment
H. Fireman's Outfit
Sec.4 Crane Units
A. General
D. Testing
PART 5 CHAPTER 3
DRILLING UNITS AND OTHER UNITS FOR OFFSHORE
OPERATIONS
A. Classification
B. Defmitions
DEI" NORSKE VERITAS
\)
, rJ
'I

J
(J
)
Contents
SECTION 1
CURRENT RULE BOOKLETS
A. Current Rule Booklets
A 100 Current rule booklets
101 The following list covers the current rule booklets:
PART 0
Chapter 1
PART 1
Chapter I
PART 2
Chapter I
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
PART 3
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
PART 4
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
PARTS
Chapter I
{;hanl!<r Z .
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
PART 6
Chapter I
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
Chapter 7
Chapter 8
PART 7
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
INTRODUCTION
User Infonnation. Amendments and Index ........................................... .. . ......................... July 2000
REGULATIONS
General Regulations ........... . ................................................................ July 1999
MATERIALS AND WELDING
General Requirements for Materials (See Rules for Classification of Ships, Pt.2 Ch.1, January 1993) ......... ..
Metallic Materials (See Rules for Classification of Ships, Pt.2 Ch.2, January 1996) ..................... .
Welding (See Rules for Classification of Ships, Pt.2 Ch.3, January 1996) ................. .
STRUCTURES AND EQUIPMENT - MAIN CLASS
January 1996
January 1996
January 1996
Structural Design, General ...................................................................................................... January 1998
Special Designs, Equipment and Stability ..................................................................................... January 1998
MACHINERY AND SYSTEMS MAIN CLASS
Machinery and Systems Design, General ......................................................................................... July 1998
Propulsion and Auxiliary Machinery .......................................................................................... January 1996
Boilers, Pressure Vessels, Thermal-Oil Installations and Incinerators ....................................................... July 1998
Electrical Installations ............................................................................................................ January 1994
Instrumentation and Automation ................................................................................................ January 1999
Fire Protection, Detection and Extinction ......................................................................................... July 1992
SPECIAL SERVICE AND TYPE ADDITIONAL CLASS
Units for Transit and/or Operation in Ice ......................................................................................... July 1985
, """", ,;" ,., It I. t ", r"., rl " ,.; I ".f f'_
Drilling Units and other Units for Offshore Operations ........................................................................ July 1998
Oil Production and Storage Units ............................................................................................... January 1996
Offshore Loading Buoys ............................................................................................................. July 1990
SPECIAL EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS ADDITIONAL CLASS
Miscellaneous Notations ..................................................................................................... ... January 1998
Position Mooring (POSMOOR) ................................................................................................ January 1996
Periodically Unattended Machinery Space (EO) .......................................................................... September 1982
Additional Fire Protection (F-AM) ............................................................................................. January 1985
Drilling Plant (DRILL) ........................................................................................................... January 1993
Oil Production Plant .............................................................................................................. January 1994
Dynamic Positioning Systems ....................................................................................................... July 1989
Integrated Computer Systems (leS) ...................................................................................... : .... January 1999
UNITS IN OPERATION
General Requirements ................................................................................................................ July 1994
Periodical Survey Requirements .................................................................................................... July 1999
(pending)
(pending)
Management of Safety and Environmental Protection (SEP) .............................................................. January 1998
DEI" NORSKE VERITAS
Page 2 - Pt.O Ch.l Sec.2
SECTION 2
INSTRUCTIONS TO USERS
Contents
A. Introduction
A 100 Introduction booklet
A 200 Present booklet
A 300 Ring binders
B. The Rules
B 100 Fonnat
B 200 Numbering and cross references
B 300 Defmitions
B 400 Units
B 500 Index and tables of contents
B 600 Amendments
B 700 Reprints from the rules
C. Guidelines and Notes
C 100 General
C 200 Guidelines
C 300 Classification Notes
C 400 Standards for Certification
proved Products
D. Computer Programs
D 100 General
D 200 NAUTICUS
D 300 PILOT
D 400 SESAM
D 500 DNV Electronic Rule Book
D 600 DNV Exchange
E. Other DNV Rules
E 100 General
A. Introduction
101 The Introduction Part a is included as guidance for the
users and is not to be considered as a part of the rule re-
quirements.
201 This booklet gives brief instructions to the users and
include a systematic index as well as a list of corrections to
the rules.
202 Format and editorial details of the rules are described
in the following to facilitate easy use of the present edition
of the rules.
203 Guidelines and notes as defined and listed in C have
been worked out to aid the users of the rules. Guidelines and
Classification Notes are published as a companion volume
to the rules, while Standards for Certification and Registers
of Approved Manufacturers as well as Registers of Type
Approved Products are obtained separately upon request.
204 Computers play an ever increasing partin the evalu-
ation of technical feasibility, determination of scantlings and
plan approval. A summary of the NAUTICUS, PILOT and
SESAM computer systems is given in D to inform users
looking for computer power.
A 300 Ring binders
301 The introduction booklets and the rules are published
in one single ring binder.
302 The mechanism in the binder provides for two stages
of opening. The half open position is recommended for
general reading and use of the rules. The full open position
should only be used for insertion of new chapters or removal
of old chapters. Every effort has been made to deliver a high
quality binder. Defective binders may be retomed to the
Society for a free replacement. Additional binders for
working files, historical files, etc., may be supplied at a
nominal charge.
B. The Rules
B 100 Fonnat
101 The Rules for Classification of Mobile Offshore Units
are published as a ring binder with seven parts (Pt.), each
consisting of chapters (Ch.) appearing as separate booklets.
The seven parts are listed in Table B1.
Table Bl Format of the Rules
Pt. I Regulations
Pt.2 Materials and Welding
Pt.3 Structures and Equipment - Main Class
Pt.4 Machinery and Systems - Main Class
Pt.5 Special Service and Type - Additional Class
Pt.6 Special Equipment and Systems - Additional Class
Pt.7 Units in Operation
Parts I and 2 contain general regulations, parts 3 to 6 cover
newbuilding requirements and part 7 deals with units in op-
eration.
A list of updated rule chapters is printed in Sec. I of this
booklet.
102 Relevant reqnirements in Pt.l to 4 are to be satisfied
for the assignment of main class. The requirements stated in
Pt.5 to 6 are applicable to additional class and are in general
complete for the relevant notation. This implies that re-
quirements regarding e.g. electrical installations may be
found in Pt.4, 5 or 6 depending on the class notation in
question.
103 The introduction booklet giving current status of the
rules in the form of dates relevant to each chapter will be
issued with each set of amendments. It is important that the
users check that the date on the front page of the relevant
rule chapter corresponds with that given in Section I of the
latest introduction booklet. Amendments to the rules will
normally be published twice yeady, in January and in July.
104 The front page of each chapter or booklet has a stan-
dard format which should be self-explanatory.
105 The chauges introduced in the latest edition of each
chapter will be stated on the page immediately after the front
page.
106 The first section in each chapter will normally be
termed General Requirements and will contain subsections
covering such aspects as application of the rules, definitions
of symbols and terms, list of documentation etc.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
\')
:)
:J

)
'J
F. Testing Onboard
Sec.3 Steam Turbines
A. General
Sec.4 Gas Turbines
A. General
Sec.S Gear Transmissions
A. General
B. Certification and Testing
C. Arrangement of Machinery
D. Design and Construction
E. Monitoring
F. Assembly and Testing Onboard
Sec.6 Shaft.ing and Vibrations
A. General
C. Shafting Arrangement and Vibrations
D. Design and Scantlings
E. Monitoring
Sec.7 Propellers
A. General
C. Arrangement and General Design
D. Scantlings
E. Control and Monitoring
F. Testing Onboard
Sec.8 Thrusters
A. General
C. Thruster and General Layout
Sec.9 Turbochargers
A. General
C. Arrangement
D. Design
It conii'oliind"Monitonng
Sec.l0 Compressors
A. General
C. Compressor Arrangement and General Layout
Sec.ll Jacking Machinery
A. General
C. Design and Construction
D. Control and Monitoring
E. Testing Onboard
PART 4 CHAPTER 3
BOILERS, PRESSURE VESSELS, THERMAL-OIL
INSTALLATIONS AND INCINERATORS
A. Classification
B. Defmitions
C. Documentation
D. Seamless Gas Cylinders
E. Signboards
Sec.2 Materials
A. Material Requirements
Sec.3 Arrangement
A. Boilers and Pressure Vessels
B. Thennal-Oil Insta1lations
C. Incinerators
D. Exhaust Gas Boiler/Economisers
Sec.4 General Design Requirements
A. General
B. Design Criteria
C. Scantlings of Shells and Flat and Dished Ends
D. Openings and Compensations
E. Covers for Inspection Openings and Manholes
F. Heat Exchanger Tubes
Sec.S Particular Design Requirements for Boilers
A. Shells and Headers of Cylindrical Sections
B. Headers of Rectangular or Irregular Sections
C. Dished Ends
D. Flat Plates Supported by Stays
E. Furnaces and Fireboxes of Cylindrical Fonn, Uptakes,
Cross-tubes and 0 gee Rings
F. Stays
G. Tubes
H. Access and Inspection Openings
Sec.6 Mountings and Fittings
A. General
B. Safety Valves
C. Stop Valves and Check Valves
D. Blow Down Valves and Test Valves for Boiler Water
E. Gauges
Sec.7 Instrumentation and Automation
A. General
B. Boilers
C. Exhaust Gas Boilers/Economisers
D. Water Heaters
E. Thennal-oil Heaters
F. Incinerators
Sec.8 Manufacture, Workmanship and Testing
A. Manufacture
B.
C. Heat treatment
D. Testing
E. Marking
App.A: Types and Minimum Dimensions of the Inspection
Openings in Boilers and Pressure Vessels
A. Defmitions and Dimensions
PART 4 CHAPTER 4
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS
Sec.1 General Requirements
A. Classification
B. Definitions
C. Documentation
D. Signboards
A. Maximum Voltages, Voltage and Frequency Variations
B. Capacity and Arrangement of Generators and Power Convertors
C. Emergency Source of Power and Emergency Installation
D. Environmental Conditions
E. Electrical Equipment in Gas-dangerous Areas
F. Equipment
G. Earthing of Non-Current-Carrying Parts
H. Electromagnetic Noise and Interference
Sec.3 System Design
A. Supply Systems
DET NORSKE VERITAS
Rules for Mobile Uffshore Units, July 2000
B. Defmitions
C. Documentation
Sec.2 Column-StabiIized Units
A. General
B. Air Gap
C. Design Loads
D. Overall Strength
E. Local Strength
F. Resistance Against Collision, Dropped Objects, Fire and
Explosion
Sec.3 Self-elevating Units
A. General
B. Air Gap
C. Design Loads
D. Overall Strength
E. Local Strength
F. Overturning Stability on the Sea Bed
G. Resistance Against Collision, Dropped Objects, Fire and
Explosion
Sec.4 Steering Arrangements
A. General
B. Materials
C. Arrangement and Details
D. Design Loads and Stress Analysis
E. Sternframes
F. Rudder Nozzles
G. Rudder Stocks and Pintles
H. Steering Gears
I. Testing
Sec.S Mooring and Towing Equipment
A. General
B. Structural Arrangement for Mooring Equipment
C. Equipment Specification
D. Anchors
E. Mooring Chain and Accessories
F. Steel Wire Ropes
G. Windlass and Chain Stoppers
H. Fairleads
I. Wire Bod Attachments
AffiiiigemenliifioDeV!ees for T6Wllig .
Sec.6 Stability
A. General
B. Assumptions and Criteria
Sec.7 Watertight Integrity, Freeboard and Weathertight Closing
Appliances
A. General
B. Watertight Integrity
C. Freeboard
D. Weathertight Closing Appliances
E. Ventilators and Air Pipes
F. Inlets, Discharges and Scuppers
G. Side Scuttles and Windows
H. Testing of Doors and Hatches
I. Closing Arrangements for Doors and Hatches
App.A: Supp!ementory Requirements of the Norwegian
Petroleum Directorate
B. Main Part
PART 4 CHAPTER I
MACHINERY AND SYSTEMS DESIGN, GENERAL
See.1 General Requirements
A. Classifica.tion
B. Definitions
C. Documentation
D. Signboards
Sec.2 Materials
A. General
B. Machinery Parts
C. Piping Systems
A. Arrangement
B. Construction and Function
C. Reliability and Availability
Sec.4 Platform Piping Systems
A. General
B. Ballast, Bilge and Drainage Systems General
C. Ballast and Bilge Systems for Column Stabilized Units
D. Ballast and Bilge System for Self-elevating Units
E. Air, Overflow and Sounding Pipes
F. Storage and Transfer Systems for Liquids with Flashpoint
below 60C (e.g. Helicopter Fuel)
Sec.S Machinery Piping Systems
A. General
B. Cooling Systems
C. Lubricating Oil Systems
D. Fuel Oil"Systems
E. Feed Water and Condensate Systems
F. Steam Systems
G. Hydraulic Power Supply
H. Pneumatic Power Supply
I. Pneumatic Starting Arrangements
J. Thermal Oil Systems
Sec.6 Pipes, Pumps, Valves, F!exib!eHoses and Detachable Pipe
Connections etc.
A. Pipes
B. Pumps
C. Valves
D. F!exib!e Hoses
E. Detachable Pipe Connections
F. Seawater Strainers
G. Socket Welded Joints
Sec.7 Manufacture, Workmanship Inspection and Testing
JI.: .. _. . .... .. -
B. Brazing of Copper and Copper Alloys
C. Pipe Bending
D. Joining of Plastic Pipes
E. Hydrostatic Tests of Piping
F. Functional Testing
Sec.S Recommended Spare Parts
A. General
PART 4 CHAPTER 2
PROPULSION AND AUXILIARY MACHINERY
A. Classification
B. Documentation
C. Certification
D. Design and
F. Testing
G. Signboards
Sec.2 Diesel Engines
A. General
C. Arrangement
DET NORSKE VERITAS
,)
\'-_/
i)
.. .......,

)

...J
()
J
)
107 Each subsequent section in the chapter will begin at
the top of the page and will commence with a table of con-
tents for the section.
201 A combination of digits and letters is used for easy
reference. It is felt that this combination provides better vi-
sibility with regard to levels, and is easier to handle than a
five digit string, e.g. Pt.3 Ch.! Sec.! AIOO,
Tab!e B2 Numbering
Level Reference example Principle
Part Pt.3
Chapter Ch.1 always a number
Section Sec. I
Subsection A always a letter
Item 100 always a nwnber
202 Figures are numbered in increasing order within each
section, e.g. Fig.!, Fig.2 etc. The figure number and title
are given immediately under the figure.
203 Tables are numbered in increasing order within each
subsection, e.g. Table A!, Table A2 etc. The table number
and title are placed in the top left hand comer of the table.
204 Each chapter is written as self-contained as possible.
Cross references are generally given at the highest level
consistent with feasibility to find the subject matter:
a) From part to part, e.g. see Pt.2 Ch.1 (i.e. down to
chapter).
b) From chapter to chapter within the same part, e.g. see
Ch.! Sec.3 (i.e. down to section). Reference to sub-
section, e.g. Ch.! Sec.3 A may be used where necessary
for clarity.
c) Within a chapter,
e.g. section to section, see Sec.4 A!OO (i.e. down to
item)
e.g. within a section, see AI03
e.g. within a subsection, see 103.
B 300 Defmitions
301 Symbols and terms are in general defined at. one of
three levels in the rules. A definition given at higher level
is normally not repeated at a lower level, and references are
not made to the definitions at higher level. When a symbol
or term is defined elsewhere than in either of the three gen-
eral levels, proper reference is made.
302 The first (higher) level of definitions is given in a se-
parate subsection in Sec.! of the chapter in which the sym-
bol or term is used. This level defines symbols and terms
which are generally applied in the chapter or booklet.
303 The second (intermediate) level of definitions is given
in subsection A of the section in which the symbol or term
is used. This level normally defines symbols and terms oc-
curring in various connections within the section.
304 The third (lower) level of definitions is given in con-
nection with the formula or expression in which the symbol
or term is used. The definition is normally given imme-
diately following the formula and in any case within the
same item as the formula.
B 400 Units
401 The units generally used in the rules are the SI-units
(International System of Units). Commonly used base and
multiple units are given in Table B3. Some derived units and
Pt.O Cn.1 Sec.2 - Page 3
their conversion relation to the TS-units (Technical Metric
System of Units) are given in Tables B4 and B5, respec-
tively. When other units are used these are particularly
stated.
Table B3 Base or mu!tiple SI-units
Quantity Symbol Nam(!
Length m metre
cm centimetre
mm millimetre
Mass kg kilogram
t tonne
Time s second
Electric current A ampere
Table B4 Derived SI-units
Quantity Symbol Name/definition
Frequency Hz hertz - lis
Force N newton = kgm/s2
kN kilonewton
Pressure kN/m" kilopascal
bar =1 Pa
Stress N/mm' - MPa, megapascal
Bending moment Nm -J, joule
Torsional moment kNm
Work, energy J joule=Nm
Heat kJ kilojoule
Power kW kilowatt
Heat flow xate W watt
Temperature C centigrade
Tab!e BS SIlTS Conversion relation
Sf-unit TS-conversion relation
IN 0,1020 kp
I kN/m 0,0102 kp/cm
I N/mm 10,20 kp/cm
INm 0,1020 kpm
- IJ .. _" ....-.- ... 0, 1020.kpm. .. _-_.-

IkJ 0,2388 kcal
IkW 1,36 Hp
IW 0,860 kcallh
B 500 Index and tahles of contents
501 A master index has been prepared for the complete
rules in the form of a systematic index. This index is pre-
sented in Sec.4.
The systematic index gives reference to sections and sub-
sections within each part/chapter.
Th; master index will be updated as required when
are amended.
502 Two levels of table of contents are given at the be-
ginning of each chapter. A table of sections only is given
on the front page of the chapter, providing the starting page
number for each section within the chapter. A complete ta-
ble of sections, subsections and main items is also included
giving page number references at subsection level.
503 A table of subsections and main items is also included
at the beginning of each section. In these tables page num-
bering is not given.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
Rules for Mobile Offshore Units, JUly :WOO
B 600 Amendments
601 Technical amendments to the rules are the results of
formal proposals from the technical staff at the Society and
are based on practical experience from units in service as
well as comprehensive theoretical studies, research and de-
velopment. These proposals are always discussed with re-
gional technical committees consisting of representatives of
builders, marine engine builders, steel manufacturers, own-
ers, maritime governmental bodies, insurance company as-
sociations and technical universities before being submitted
to the Board for a decision.
602 Amendments to the rules may be undertaken at any
time, but will normally be published twice a year, in January
and July, and will be forwarded to subscribers of the rules
as revised chapters or in Pt.O Ch.l Sec.3.
603 The superseded chapters may be filed in a separate
binder for future reference.
701 Reprints from the rules are available from the Society
on request. There is currently no subscription scheme for
reprints. While the Society will publish details of amend-
ments to the rules in the press and in its own magazines, no
special notification of amendments to buyers of reprints will
be undertaken.
c. Guidelines and Notes
C 100 General
101 In an effort to aid the various parties involved in the
classification of ships, the Society has issued Guidelines and
Classification Notes giving practical information regarding
classification and other relevant regulations as well as guid-
ance in new fields of technology. These publications are
available. as a complementary volume to the rules, on a
purchase or subscription basis, and contains Guidelines and
.... ..
Guidelines and Classification Notes may also be purchased
individually.
102 Products which are to be approved for installation
onboard a vessel classed with the Society may be granted
type approval. The Society has issued Registers of Ap-
proved Manufacturers and Type Approved Products con-
taining the names of manufacturers and types of products
which have been granted approval. The approval is time
limited and updated lists are normally published annually.
C 200 Guidelines
201 Guidelines are publications which give information
and advice on technical and formal matters related to the
design, building, operating, maintenance and repair of ves-
sels and other objects, as .well as the services rendered by
the Society in this connection. Aspects conceming classi-
fication may be included in the publication.
A list of current Guidelines is given in Table Cl.
301 Classification Notes are publications which give prac-
tical information on classification of ships and other objects.
Examples of desigu solutions, calculation methods, specifi-
cations of test procedures, as well as acceptable repair
methods for some components are given as interpretations
of the more general rule requirements.
A list of current Classification Notes is given in Table C2.
401 Standards for Certification (previously Certification
Notes) are pUblications which contain principles, accept cri-
teria and practical information related to the Society's con-
sideration of objects, personnel, organizations, services and
operations, in connection with issuance of certificates or
declarations, which are not necessarily related to classifica-
tion.
A list of current Standards for Certification is given in Table
C3.
C 500 Registers of Approved Manufacturers and Type
Approved Products
501 Register of Approved Manufacturers, see Table C4.
502 Register of Type Approved Products, see Table C5.
503 The Registers are normally updated annually.
601 Recommended Practices (RP) are issued as a supple-
ment to DNV Rules for Classification or DNV Offshore
Standards and other recognised codes used by the industry.
RPs form a part of the technical basis for DNV classification
and verification services as well as offering DNV's inter-
pretation of good engineering practice for general use by the
industry. A list of Recommended Practices is given in Table
C6.
Table Cl Guidelines
(1) Design and Classification of Roll on/Roll off Ships, May
1980.
(2) Prevention of Hannful Vibration in Ships, July 1983.
(3) Internal Control. Mobile Offshore Units. (Owners' Control
System), September 1983.
5 Recommended Content of Information on Damage Control
in Dry Cargo Ships, November 1997.
(6) Condition Assessment Program, September 1991.
(7) Safety and Quality Management, May 1992.
9 Advisory Service Condition Survey Programme, July 1993
10 DNV Recommended Reporting Principles for Ultrasonic
Thickness Measurement of Hull Structures, September 1993
11 Renewal Survey, Survey Planning, September 1993
12 Crew Manning Offices, System Development, September
1996
"
13 Interference Between Trawl Gear and Pipelines, September
1997. .
14 Free spanning Pipelines, June 1998.
DET NORSKR VERITAS
.:)

)

'")
) )
MUles TOr Moone UTTsnore UnilS I .JUly LUUU
SECTION 4
SYSTEMATIC INDEX
A. Introduction
A 100 General
B. Systematic index
B 100 General
Contents
A. Introduction
A 100 General
101 This master index has been prepared for the complete
Rules for Mobile Offshore Units in the form of a systematic
index. The systematic index gives reference to sections and
subsections within each part/chapter.
B. Systematic index
B 100 General
101 The current systematic index is as follows:
PART 1 CHAPfER 1
GENERAL REGULATIONS
Sec.l Classification Principles
A. Defmitions
B. The Classification Concept
Sec.2 Scope of Rules and Class Notations
A. Scope of Rules
B. Class Notations
Sec.3 Classification Procedure
A. Assignment of Class
Retention of Class B .
C.
D.
E.
V aJidlfy and 'lSsuance 01 ihe C"rlmCit1t,
Suspension and Withdrawal of Class
Appeals
Sec.4 Legal Provisions
A. Liability and Jurisdiction
PART 2 CHAPfER 1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MATERIALS
A. Classification
PART 2 CHAPfER 2
METALLIC MATERIALS
A. Classification
PART 2 CHAPfER 3
WELDING
A. Classification
PART 3 CHAPfER 1
STRUCTURAL. DESIGN GENERAL
A. Classification
B. Defmitions
C. Documentation
D. Appendix to the Classification Certificate
Sec.2 Materials
A. General
B. Structural Steel
C. Alternative Structural Materials
A. General
B. Environmental Conditions
C. Strength Analysis
D. Deflections and Vibrations
Sec.4 Design Loads
A. General
B. Environmental Data
C. Flow Induce4 Forces
D. Local Pressures and Forces
E. Accidental Impact Energy
Sec.5 Overall Strength
A. General
B. Design Load Conditions
C. Calculation Methods
D. Usage Factors and Pennissible Stresses
E. Structures Other than Steel
Sec.6 Plating and Stiffeners
A. General
B. Bending
C. Buckling
Sec.7 Girders and Girder Systems
A. General
B. Bending and Shear
C. Buckling
D. Complex Girder Systems
E. Girder Brackets
Sec.8 Weld Connections
A. General
B. Types of Welded Steel Joints
C. Size of Connections
D. Welding of Aluminium Structures
Sec.9 Corrosion Protection
A. General
B. Acceptable Corrosion Protection
C. Cathodic Protection
D. Coating
Sec.l0 Fabrication
A. General
B. "Fabrication Planning
C. Material Identification, Cutting and Fonning
D. Tolerances, Assembly, Welding and Heat Treatment
E. Repairs
F. Welding of Aluminium Structures
G. Corrosion Protection Systems
H. Testing during Fabrication
I. Records and Documentation
PART 3 CHAPTER 2
SPECIAL DESIGNS, EQUIPMENT AND STABILITY
A. Classification
DET NORSKE VERITAS
Table EI Requirements for documentation of instrumentation systems
020 030 040 050 060 070 080 090 100 110 115 120 135 140 150 160 170 180 190 200
JOy
X X X X X
TCM X X X X
For class notation DYNPOS T:
DYN
I Ix xl Ix X I X I I X I I I X I Ix
I I
YEO
I I I
XIXI I X I I I I I I I
For class notation DYNPOS AUTS,
DYN X X X X X X X X
PORI X X X X X X
YEO X X X
For class notation DYNPOS AUT,
DYN X X X X X X X X
PORI X X X X X
POR2 X X X X X X
YEO X X X
For class notation DYNPOS AUTR,
DYN X X X X X X X X
COA X X
PORI X X X X
POR2 X X X X
POR3 X X X X
YEO X X X
For class notation DYNPOS AUTRO,
DYN X X X X X X X X X X
COA X X
PORI X X X X X X
POR2 X X X X X X
POR3 X X X X X X
YEO X X X X
Instrumentation systems: Documentation types:
DYN Dynamic positioning control and monitoring system 030 Functional description
COA Consequence analysis facility 040 System block diagrams (1')
PORI Position reference system no. 1 060 User interface description
P-oBition-rofoz:onoo -- -070 FO\Jolof.- Dupply -1lr-filIlgomont (+) -
--
POR3 Position reference system no. 3
YEO Vessel orientation system
JOy
Joystick
TMC Thruster control mode selection
T Required also for type approved systems

One copy is to be submitted for
Pt.6Ch.S
Sec.1 Page 2
In Table Dl fourth row down. Delete "TIN" and insert
"ICS".
080 Arrangement and layout (1')
090 Cable routing layout drawing (1')
110 Data sheets with environmental specifications
135 Failure mode and effect analysis (FMEA) I redundancy
test procedure (1')
140 Test program for application software at manufacturer (1)
160 Operation manual*
In Table Dl seventh row down. Delete "TIN" and insert
"ICS".
In Table D 1 the Documentation type 120 should read "Do-
cumentation related to software".
DEr NORSKE VERITAS

1
'-_/
-"
I

/J
)
. _-/
J
i)
-
()
)
Table C2 Classification Notes
No. 4.1 Guidance Manual for Inspection and Repair of
Bronze Propellers, October 1992.
No. 4.2 Guidance Manual for Inspection and Repair of Steel
Propellers, October 1992.
No. 4.3 Repair of SurfacelDimension by means of Metal
Coating, January 2000.
No.6. Fire Test of Components Intended for Use in Piping
Systems on Board Ships, May 1980. (Reprint of
1975.)
No. 6.1 Fire Test Methods for Plastic Pipes, Joints and
Fittings, January 1987.
No.7. Ultrasonic Inspection of Weld Connections, May
1980. (Reprint of November 1978.)
No. 10.1 Ships and Mobile Offshore Units. Alternative Sur-
vey Arrangements for Machinery and Automation
Systems, January 1999.
No. 13. Erosion and Corrosion in Piping Systems for Sea
Water, May 1980. (Reprint of January 1979.)
No. 14. Instrumentation and Automation. Programmable
Electronic Systems, May 1991.
No. 20.1 Stability Documentation - Ships Newbuildings,
February 1990.
No. 20.2 Lightweight Determination - Ships (Inclining Test
and Lightweight Survey), February 1990.
No. 20.3 Systems for Stability Control of Mobile Offshore
Units in Operation. Tentative Guidance for Ac-
ceptance, December 1995
No. 21.1 Approval and Certification of the Software of
Loading Computer Systems, June 1998.
No. 30.1 Buckling Strength Analysis, July 1995.
No. 30.3 Buckling Criteria of LNG Spherical Cargo Tank
Containment Systems - Skirt and Sphere, December
1997.
No. 30.4 Foundations, February 1992.
No. 30.5 Environmental Conditions and Environmental
Loads, March 2000.
No. 30.6 Structural Reliability Analysis of Marine Struc-
tures, July 1992.
No. 30.7 Fatigue Assessment of Ship Structures, September
.- = '1998:--- . --_ .. ".- _. ,--._._-
No. 30.8 Strength Analysis of Hull Structures in High Speed
and Light Craft, August 1996.
No. 31.1 Strength Analysis of Hull Structures in Bulk Carri-
ers, June 1999.
No. 31.2 Strength Analysis of Hull Structures in Roll on/Roll
off Ships, May 1980.
No. 31.3 Strength Analysis of Hull Structures in Tankers,
February 1999 .
No. 31.4 Strength Analysis of Main Structures of Column
Stabilized Units (Semisubmersible Platforms), Sep-
tember 1987.
No. 31.5 Strength Analysis of Main Structures of Self-Ele-
vating Units, February 1992.
No. 32.1 Strength Analysis of Rudder Arrangements, Janu-
ary 1984.
No. 32.2 Strength Analysis of Container Securing Arrange-
ments, July 1983.
No. 33.1 Corrosion Prevention of Tanks and Holds, July
1999.
No. 41.2 Calculation of Gear Rating for Marine Trans-
mission, July 1993.
No. 41.3 Calculation of Crankshafts for Diesel Engines, July
1988.
No. 42.1 Dual Fuel Arrangement for Diesel Engines with
High Pressure Gas Injection, January 1999.
I
I No. 45.1 I Compatibility, December 1995.
Table C3 Standards for Certification
Series No.1 Certification Services
No. 1.2 Type Approval (December 1996).
No. 1.3 Quality System Certification (December 1996).
Series No.2 Approval Schemes
No. 2.4 Environmental Test Specification for Instrumenta-
tion and Automation Equipment (May 1995)
No. 2.5 Certification of Offshore Mooring Steel Wrre Ropes
(May 1995)
No. 2.6 Certification of Offshore Mooring Chain (August
1995).
No. 2.7-1 Offshore Containers. (May 1995).
No. 2.7-1 Type Approval of Lifting Sets for Offshore Con-
Annex 1 lainers (November 1996).
No. 2.7-2 Offshore Service Containers. (December 1995).
No. 2.9 Approval Programmes - Components, Manufactur- :
ers, Service Suppliers (November 1991 to July
2000).
No. 2.10 Diesel Engine Driven Power Plants- Certification,
Testing and Inspections (July 1991).
No. 2.11 Certification of Gas Burning Internal Combustion
Engine Installations (January 1999).
No. 2.12 Type Approval of Marine Equipment on Behalf of
Marine Safety Agency (MSA), UK (December
1996)
No. 2.13 Standard for Certification of Offshore Mooring Fi-
bre Ropes (January 1999)
No. 2.14 Standard for Certification of Maritime Simulator
Systems (January 2000).
Table C4 Register of Approved Manufacturers
101 Metallic Materials and Welded Boilers, Pressure Vessels
and Seamless Gas Bottles Class I-II.
102 Service Suppliers.
Table C5 Register of Type Approved Products
L- .. _
___ __ __ ____ 0_=
2 Welding Consumables.
3 Containers, Cargo Handling, Lifting Appliances and Mis-
cellaneous Equipment.
4 Machinery Components.
5 Mechanical Equipment and Piping.
6 Electrical Equipment and Systems.
c
7 Instrumentation and Automation.
8 Fire Safety.
9 Drilling and Well Control Equipment.
DEr NORSKE VERITAS
I
!
Table C6 Recommended Practices
Corrosion Protection of Ships, 2000.
RP-B401 Cathodic Protection Design, 1993.
RP-C202 Buckling Strength of Shells, 2000.
RP-C203 Fatigue Strength Analysis of Offshore Steel Struc-
tures, 2000.
RP-E301 Design and Installation of Fluke" Anchors in Clay,
2000.
RP-E302 Design and Installation of Drag-in Plate Anchors in
Clay, 2000.
RP-E305 Onbottom Stability Design of Submarine Pipelines,
1988.
RP-F101 Corroded Pipelines, 1999.
RP-F104 Mechanical Pipeline Couplings, 2000.
RP-FI06 Factory Applied External Pipeline Coatings for Cor-
rosion Control, 2000.
RP-0401 Safety and Reliability of Subsea Systems, 1985.
RP-0501 Erosive Wear in Piping Systems, 1996.
D 100 General
101 Computers, networks and information systems play
an increasingly imporlant role in the evaluation of designs,
the following-up of newbuildings and ships in operation, as
well as the continuous learning and knowledge sharing pro-
cess of the classification society. As the shipping industry
shifts from paper-based production to digital production,
also digital exchange of information becomes imporlant,
both within the individual company and between companies.
cated programs for various rule checking and structural
analysis according to the DNV Rules.
206 NAUTICUS HULL may be ordered from the local
DNV office or from DNV Software, N-1322 H0Vik, Nor-
way, tel: +4767577650 or fax: +47675772 72, e-mail:
software.nauticus@dnv.com.
207 NAUTICUS gradually replaces the ship analysis sys-
tem PILOT (see 300), and incorporates the ship related parts
of the general purpose finite element program SESAM (see
400).
D 300 PILOT
301 The PILOT program system comprises DNV's pro-
grams for strength analysis according to DNV Rules. In-
cluded are programs for analysis of hull section scantlings,
deck houses and superstructures, pillars, rudders, propel-
lers, marine gears, etc. Also included are programs for 3-D
beam element model analysis, ship stability and strength
analysis as well as miscellaneous other programs. Informa-
tion about the various PILOT programs can be obtained
from DNV Software, N-1322 H0Vik, Norway (Fax +4767
577272).
302 All PILOT programs will eventually be replaced with
new NAUTICUS programs (see 200).
D 400 SESAM
401 SESAM is a general purpose finite element program
system developed by DNV. The system incorporates ad-
vances made during the last decade in structural and solid
mechanics, numerical analysis and computer technology.
SESAM is designed to handle static and dynamic analysis
of:
- 2- and 3-dimensional truss/frame structures
- 2- and 3-dimensional membrane structures
D 200 NAUTICUS - Ihi!' and thick shell structures
- ax.-symmetnc solids
201 NAUTICUS is the information and analysis system - 3-dimensional solids
for the DNV classification activity. With its life cycle prod- - layered structures (plating with stiffeners).
uct model approach the system accumulates and makes
available information about a ship from design to scrapping. Geometrical as well as material non-linearities may be taken
Object orientation enables intelligent linking and efficient into account. Particular emphasis is placed upon the devel-
-
faces with task oriented views make the. information easily 402 SESAM includes integrated program packages for
access.ble for the end-user. W.th a Wide area computer . I' f . d f h
network the information is available throughout the DNV extensive ana YS1S 0 manne an 0 s ore structures, as:
organisation, and Internet links accommodate external users. _ ships
202 With NAUTICUS, DNV aims at improved knowledge - mobile offshore units (column stabilised and self-elevat-
sharing and decision support, which means enhanced, faster mg).
and consistent high level services to DNV's customers - tenslOn leg platforms
throughout the world. - fixed steel and concrete platforms.
203 Ship modelling, analysis and rule checking applica- For these structures the analysis may include integrated cal-
tions will be made available to external users as the software culation of loads, response, capacity imd checking against
is released. Normally, new versions will be released twice codes, etc.
a year, following the cycles of the rule editions. 403 Several alternative methods are available. The multi-
204 NAUTICUS HULL provides an efficient analysis tool level superelement technique may be used for static as well
for the naval architect who may work with familiar hull el- as dynamic analysis. For dynamic analysis several methods
ements in a user-friendly graphical environment, having for free vibration and forced response analysis are available.
access to a wide range of analysis options that are re-using Programs for calculation of hydrodynamic load distributions
the same digital model of the ship. In addition to the tradi- are integrated in SESAM. The same geometry input is used
tional rule checking there are direct calculation options for for both the hydrodynamic analysis and the structural anal-
fatigue life, ultimate hull girder capacity, oil spill after ysis. The loads are automatically transferred to the structural
structural damage, life cycle costs for different hull designs model. Fluid-structure and soil-structure interaction may be
and maintenance schemes, as well as the broad range of taken into account.
features offered by the SESAM system (see 4(JQ). 404 ADVANCE is SESAM's advanced structoral analysis
205 Rule Check, which is one of the NAUTICUS HULL tool offering solutions to highly non-linear response prob-
packages, covers inter alia rule checking of section scan- lems. It has additional features geared towards solving
tlings, such as hull girder strength, local strength, and problems that are specific to the maritime and offshore in-
buckling of plates and stiffeners. In addition there are dedi-
DET NORSKE VERITAS
:)

J

/)
502 Electrical load calculation during dynamic positioning
operation is to be submitted for approval.
503 For AUTRO the following is to be submitted for ap-
proval:
- cable routing layout drawing
- fire and flooding separation arrangement.
E 600 Failure Mode and Effect Analysis (FMEA)
601 For AUTR and AUTRO, documentation of the reli-
ability of the dynamic positioning system is required in the
form off a failure mode and effect analysis (FMEA). Alter-
natively, redundancy tests according to 700 are to be carried
out.
602 The purpose of an FMEA is to give a description of
the different failure modes of the equipment referred to its
functional task. Special attention is to be paid to the analysis
of systems where an item may enter a number of failure
modes and thus induce a number of different effects on the
dynamic positioning system performance. The FMEA is to
include at least the information specified in 603 to 605.
603 A functional breakdown of the dynamic positioning
system, or SUb-system into functional blocks is to be made.
The functions of each block is to be described. The break-
down is to be performed to such a level of detail that the
functional interfaces between the sub-functions within the
respective functions are shown.
604 A description of each l'hysically and functionally in-
dependent item and the assocmted failure modes with their
failure causes related to normal operational modes of the
item is to be furnished.
605 A description of the effects of each failure mode alone
on other items within the system and on the overall dynamic
positioning system is to be made.
E 700 Redundancy tests
701 Altemate to an FMEA, the redundancy may be doc-
umented in a test procedure covering all relevant failure
modes, and which is subsequently verified during sea trials.
702 The test procedure for redundancy is to be based on
simulation of failures, and is to be performed under as real-
istic conditions as feasible.
703 The redundancy test procedure is to be submitted for
approval.
E 800 Instruction manuals
801 The following documentation related to the dynamic
positioning system is to be kept onboard:
- operation manual
- maintenance manual.
E 900 Program for tests and trials
901 Program for tests and trials is to be submitted for ap-
proval. Requirements for the program are described in sub-
section H.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
Hules tor Mobile uttsnore units I .JUly 4!UUU
App.A Page 20
The following text to be insened at beginning of the Appen-
dix:
NATIONAL REGULATIONS
DRILL IN)
The Norwegian Petroleum Directorate has introduced sig-
nificant amendments in the 1998 edition of "Acts, regu-
lations and provisions for the petroleum activities". The
supplementary technical requirements found in Pt.6 Ch.5
Appendix A will not be updated accordingly as completely
new rules covering NPD verification are under development.
As a consequence the Society's services related to assign-
ing additional class notations with IN) will be based directly
on the technical requirements found in the latest edition of
the relevant NPD Regulations and Guidelines. The technical
requirements given in Appendix A of these rules ,are with-
drawn.
The scope and methodology of the Society's services re-
lated to assigning class notations with IN) as described in
the Appendix A 's is still valid and will continue to form the
basis for the Society's extent of involvement for IN)-nota-
tion.
A detailed scope of work related to NPD verification will be
prepared for each specific project where class notations
with IN) is requested by the client.
Pt.6 Ch.6
Sec.1 Page 5
A new paragraph E102 has been added:
102 For documentation of instrumentation and automation,
including computer based control and monitoring, see Pt.4
Ch.5 Sec. I.
In paragraph E201 the items:
- Control systems
- Process shutdown systems (cause and effect charts)
- Injection shutdown system
have been deleted, and in E202 the items:
- Process shutdown system philosophy
____ __
have been deleted. Paragraph E205 has been rewritten:
205 For specific requirements related to documentation
of instrumentation and automation, including computer
based control and monitoring, see Pt.5 Ch.4 Sec. I.
In paragraph E301 the item:
- Control and monitoring systemslinstrument list.
Sec.2 Page 8
Item BI06 has been amended to read:
106 Impact test specimens are to be sampled from a 10-
. cation not less than 2 mm below the surface for thickness,
up to 50 mm, while at t/4 mm for greater thicknesses.
Sec.7 Page 21
In paragraph A401 the item:
- Drawings and description of control and safety systems.
has been deleted, and a new A402 added:
including computer based control and monitoring, see Sec.!.
Sec.10 Page 25 .
Item A300 "Documentation" has been deleted.
App.A Page 30
The follnwing text to be insened at beginning of the Appen-
dix:
Class notations with IN)
lations and provisions for the petroleum activities ". The
supplementary technical requirements found in Pt. 6 Ch.6
requirements given in Appendix A of these rules are with-
drawn.
tion.
with (N) is requested by the client.
Pt.6 Ch.7
Sec.1 Page 5
In paragraph D402 the follnwing is to be added at the end:
Pt.4 Ch.5 Instrumentation and Automation.
Subsection E has been rewritten as follnws:
E. Documentation
E 100 General
101 The submitted documentation is to describe the oper-
ating conditions for the vessel.
E 200 General documentation
... a01- Caloulation-of the environm.ntnl fegularity--number--
evaluation, em, is to be submitted for approval. The position
holding performance is to be quantified according to the
concept for em, see Sec.6.
E 300 Instrumentation and automation
Ch.5 Sec. I.
302 For the instrumentation systems listed, documentation
is to be submitted according to Table E!. The upper row of
Table E! refers to the documentation types defined in Pt.4
Ch.5 Sec.! C200, except documentation type 135, which
refers to the Failure Mode and Effect Analysis described in
600 or the Redundancy Test Procedure described in 700.
E 400 Thruster documentation
401 Documenta'tion to be submitted according to main
class.
402 Descriptions and calculations for thruster character-
istics. This is to include descri'ption of thrust output and
power input CUIVes, response time for thrust changes,
rection changes for azimuth thrusters, and anticipated thrust
reductions due to interaction effects.
E 500 Electric power system documentation
501 Documentation to be submitted according to main
class.
DEr NORSKE VERITAS
,)
1/)
,------."
1
.oj
)
."J
()
) )
405 SESAM is developed by DNV in cooperation with
leading organisations in the maritime and offshore indus-
tries. The SESAM system is available from DNV Software,
N-1322 H0Vik, Norway, tel: +47675776 50 or fax +47
67 57 72 72, e-mail: software.sesam@dnv.com.
501 The DNV Electronic Rule Book contains the present
Rules for Classification of Ships and is issued at each revi-
son of the Rules. It comprises the complete and updated
edition:
- all chapters are consolidated and up-to-date
- amendments and corrections in Sec.3 are consistently in-
corporated at their proper place.
502 The Electronic Rule Book has powerful means to ra-
pidly find items of specific interest. Rule extracts may be
printed, or copied to documents.
503 The Electronic Rule Book CD-ROM may be ordered
from your local DNV station or from the DNV distribution
department, N- 1322 H0Vik, Norway or fax: +47 67 57
9320.
D 600 DNV Exchange
601 D NV Exchange is a PC and web-based class infor-
mation service for shipowners. The system provides reli-
able, up-to-date information on class and survey statos,
certificates, conditions of class and a wealth of other infor-
mation for management and technical staff alike. Shipboard
installations are also available.
602 Information included in the. current system comprises:
- Full classification statos of your vessels in the form of
charts, warning lamps and tables. Owner's Page is in-
cluded as a simple means for owners to monitor addi-
tional sUIVeys, audits, certificates, etc. which are not
covered by the class.
HUles Tor Moone uTTsnore units, JUlY LUUU
Pt.O Ct!.1 Sec.2 - Page 7
- An information bank describing DNV's primary class and
statotory services. Access to DNV Rules for Classifica-
tion of Ships may also be obtained - and the first CD-
ROM is supplied free of charge for instalIation with DNV
Exchange.
- Experience-based information from DNV's records in the
form of all updated issues of Casualty Information. Fur-
ther, there are pointers to the latest updates in the DNV
Rules, and IMO Requirements Timescale lookup tool.
- Search for any DNV employee, office or department,
using maps, hierarchical menus and alphabetic searches.
603 A version of DNV Exchange wiI\ also provide access
to the information available from the additional class nota-
tion NAUTlCUS.
604 The current Internet based version of "D NV Exchange
Basic H provides access to class status information, DNV
Directory, Service Suppliers publications and Service Expe-
rience such as Casualty Information. This version is avail-
able free of charge to alI owners.
605 Data is extracted daily from DNV's databases and
made available on DNV's Exchange home page on the In-
ternet, protected by username and password
(http://exchange.dov.com). On request, data may also be
sent bye-mail or on diskette.
606 For more information on DNV Exchange, please
contact DNV Software, N-1322 H0Vik, Norway, tel: +47
67 57 76 50, fax: +47 67 57 99 11, e-mail:
dov .exchange@dov.com
E. Other DNV Rules
E 100 General
101 DNV has developed and publishes Rules for other
objects than Mobile Offshore Units. Please see the current
list of publications.
DEr NORSKE VERITAS
HUles TOr MOOlle UTTsnore UnitS, .JUly LUUU
SECTION 3
AMENDMENTS AND CORRECTIONS
A. Introduction
A 100 General
Contents
B. Amendments and Corrections
B 100 General
A. Introduction
A 100 General
101 This section includes amendments and corrections de-
cided by the Board, but not yet incorporated in the current
rule chapters. Information on the coming into force date of
new amendments is given on the cover inside of this chapter.
Previous amendments are referred to in earlier issues.
In addition corrections of misprints and clarifications of the
text may be included.
B 100 General
101 Current amendments and corrections are as follows:
Pt.1 Ch.1
Sec.9 Page 30
Paragraph A309 has been rewritten as follows:
309 For instrumentation and automation, including com-
puter based control and monitoring, see PtA Ch.5 Sec.l.
Pt.3 Ch.2
Under "Changes in the Rules n, Sec.2 Column-Stabilised
Units, the reference in the second bullet point should read
nCh.l SecA DlOO".
Sec.1 Page 1
A new paragraph C102 has been added:
puter based control and monitoring, see PtA Ch.5 Sec. I.
Sec.4 Page 11
- remote control diagram according to PtA Ch.5
should be deleted, and in paragraph A303 the item:
- rudder angle indicator
should be deleted. A new paragraph A304 has been added:
Sec. 1 Page 3 Sec.4 Page 12
Items B601 and B602 have been amended to read:
601 The Society will not disclose any information received 302 Synthetic bearing materials are to be of an approved
or reports made in connection with classification to any type.
other than those entitled thereto or those having been given
the right to receive information by legislation, court decision Sec.4 Page 16
supplYiJr m-'Item G302 has been amended to read:
formation may take place electronically and on a continual
basis e.g. by on-line access to the Society'S databases. 302 The maximum surface pressure Pm for the various
, bearing combinations is to be taken as:
Guidance note:
Table B1 indicates which parties will be entitled to various kinds Pm = 7000 kN/m
2
for steel against stainless steel or bronze
of information. Pm = 4500 kN/m
2
for steel against white metal, oillubri-
. cated
--e-n-d-o-f--G-u+d-a-n-c-e--n-o-t-e--- Pm 5500 kN/m2 1) for steel against synthetic materials,
602 The Society will not disclose information that can be
considered as the property of another party except when this
party's permission is given in writing.
-Pt.2 Ch.1, Pt.2 Ch.2 and Pt.2 Ch.3
For amendments and corrections related to Pt.2, see Rules
for Classification of Ships; Pt.O Ch.l Sec.3 BlOO.
Pt.3 Ch.1
Sec.1 Page 2
The last reference in C101 should read: see 300.
A new paragraph CI04 has been added:
'puter based control and monitoring, see Pt.4 Ch.5 Sec. I.
water or oil lubricated.
1) Surface pressure exceeding the specified limit may be accepted for rub-
ber bearing applications in accordance with bearing manufacrurer's spe-
cification and when verified by tests andlor service experience.
Sec.S Page 23
In the first column of Table CI, the second equipment num-
ber on each line should be reduced with 1 -one- to avoid the
ranges ,to be overl'apping.
Sec.S Page 24
In Table D2, the sub-headings of the column called "single"
should read "Weld" and "Base", and not the other way
round as it is printed.
Sec.S Page 30
The wt reference in item H202 should read:
see Ch.l Sec.2 Table B2.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

J
)

'J
,)
)
,
.
nUII::.s lur IVIUUIlt:: urUUi, .JUlY LUUU
Pt.O Ch.1 Sec.3' - Page 17
Table Cl Requirements for documentation of instrumentation systems
1020' r 030 I 040 I 050 I 060 I 070 I 080 I 090 I 100
For class notation F-AM:
FDO 1 I X I X I
I IXIXI I
LDE I I X I X I
I I X I I I
Instrumentation systems:
FDa Fire doors control and monitoring system
LDE Local fIre detection and extinguishing system
--
Sec.2 Page 3
The reference to saLAS 1974 Ch.II-2, Part A, Reg.3 in
AIOI, A102 and B201 is corrected to:
Pt.4 Ch.6 Sec.1 B200.
Sec.3 Page 7
The reference to Pt.4 Ch.I Sec.8 in E101 is corrected to:
PtA Ch.6 Sec.2 C.
110 1115 I 120 I 130 I 140 I 150 1160 I 170 1180 1190 I 200
xl
I I I I I I I
XIXI I I I I I I
Documentation types:
030 Functional description
040 System block diagrams (T)
070 Power supply arrangement (1')
080 Arrangement and layout (T)
Pt.6 Ch.S
Sec.l Page S
In paragraph F201 the item:
- control and monitoring system
I I
I I
should be deleted. Parajvaphs F204 and F20S and Table
Fl have been added as follows:
including computer based control and monitoring, see PtA
Ch.5 Sec. I.
20S For the instrumentation systems listed, documentation
is to be submitted according to Table Fl. The upper row of
Table Fl refers to the documentation types defilled in PtA
Ch.5 Sec.1 C200.
Table Fl Requirements for documentation of instrumentation systems
1020 030 I 040 050 1060 070 I 080 I 090 I 100 I 110 I 115 I 120 I 130 I 140 150 160 I 170 180 1190 200
For class notations DRILL and DRILL(N)
BOP X X X X X X
DRI X X X
HET X X X X
HOP X X X X X
R!R X
WfF X X X
",,0,
, - -- -
BOP Blow-out prevention control and monitoring
DR! Drilling fluid circulation, bulk storage and cementing
system control and monitoring
HET Heave compensation and tension control and monitoring
HOP Hoisting, rotating and pipe handling control and moni-
toring
R!R Riser system control and monitoring
WfF Well test and flare system control and monitoring
Sec.2 Page 6
104 Impact test specimens are to be sampled from a lo-
cation not less than 2 mm below the surface for thickness,
up to 50 mm, while at 114 mm for greater thicknesses.
X
X X
"", .. -" .. , '" -......
050 System diagrams (P&IDs, D&IDs, etc.) (T)
060 User interface description
070 supply arrangement (1')
100 Instrument and equipment list (T)
140 Test program for application software at manufacturer (1')
200 Schematic diagrams of input and output circuits ('n
- --
DET NORSKE VERITAS
B. Documentation
B 100 Plans and particulars
Ch.S Sec. I.
102 For requirements related to fire protection, detection
and extinction, see PtA Ch.6 Sec.I.
is to be submitted according to Table BI. The upper row of
Table B 1 refers to the documentation types defIned in PtA
Ch.5 Sec.1 C200.
Table Bl Requirements for documentation of instrumentation systems
I 020 1
030 040 050 1060 070 080 I 090 100 I 110 I 115 1120 130 I 140 I 150 I 160 170 1180 190 I 200
For class notation EO:
EPC X X X X
EWC X X X X
Fua X X
FWC X X
HYD X X
Lua X X
PNE X X
SCM X X
SWC X X
EPC Generator and electrical power system control and
monitoring
EWC Engineer and watch call alarm system
Fua Fuel oil system control and monitoring
FWC Feed water and condensate system control and moni-
toring
HYD Hydraulic power system control and monitoring
Lua Lubricating oil system control and monitoring
PNE Pneumatic control and monitoring system
SCM Steam system control and monitoring
SWC Sea and fresh water system control and monitoring
C. Operation and maintenance manuals
C 100 General
Jill _ lln
board. For the required content of the manuals, see PtA
Ch.5 Sec. I C200.
Guidance note:
It may be convenient that the operation and maintenance material
is arranged as a master manual covering the complete instru-
mentation and automation installation in the engine room, with
reference to particular manuals for the subsystems.
---e-n-d-o-f--G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e--n-o-t-e--
102 On the bridge and at the control stand in the engine
room, instructions are to be fitted, stating routines to be
followed in connection with transfer of control to/from en-
gine room, and precautions to be taken at alarm condition.
Sec.S Page 9
Item D101 should read:
101 Recording of the following parameters may be re-
quired:
X
X
050 System diagrams (P&lDs, D&lDs, etc.) (T)
- steam pressure,
- water level in boiler,
- automatic actions such as start andlor stop of burners,
alanns, etc.
Pt.6 ChA
Sec.1 Page 1
The reference to Pt.4 Ch.1 Sec.8 in A101 and C101 is cor-
rected to: PtA Ch.6.
The Guidance note to item A102 is deleted.
Sec.1 Page 2
New paragraphs C105 and C106 and Table C1 have been
added:
lOS For documentation of instrumentation and automation,
Ch.5 Sec. I.
is to be submitted according to Table CI. The upper row
of Table C 1 refers to the documentation types defined in
PtA Ch.5 Sec. I C200.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
J J
--)
-.
C)
-J
C)
rJ )
Sec.6 Page 33
- details of any remote control and signals.
Paragraphs A304 to A306 have been renumbered A305 to
A307, respectively.
Sec.7 Page 39
- schematic diagrams of local and remote control of wa-
tertight doors and hatches.
puter based control and monitoring, see Pt.4 Ch.5 Sec. I.
Sec.7 Page 41
The last sentence of B502 should read:
The capacity is to be sufficient for 3 movements (closed-
open-closed).
Sec.7 Page 46
In Table 11, at the end after NA means "not applicable" the
following is added:
Non-frequently used doors and hatches are those which are
assumed not to be in use for the day to day operation of the
entire unit.
Note 3) in Table 11 should read:
3) Mechanical locking:
by means of wedges, bars, cleats or similar devices which are self-
locking (in the case of powered hatches).
App.A Page 49
puter based control and monitoring, see Ch.5 Sec. I.
Sec.S Page 17
A new paragraph A203 has been added:
puter based control and monitoring, see Ch.S Sec. I.
Sec.6 Page 22
Sec.6 Page 34
Item F300 has been rewritten as follows:
F 300 Testing of system stability
301 The system stability is to be checked throughout the
normal operating range including misfiring (see C301) of
one cylinder (per engine), and during impacts due to en-
gaging clutches etc. (see C401).
Guidance note:
This can to be made by observing the fuel rack oscillations. The
oscillation range (double amplitude) should not exceed the ac-
ceptable percentage of the full stroke from idling to maximum
continuous rating.
--e-n-d--o-f-G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e--n-o-t-e-
302 Measurements of vibrations on power take-off gener-
ators driven from the main engine's reduction gear are to
be carried out at 90 %, 100 % and (at least) lOS % of rated
(generator) speed with unloaded generator and service ship
speed under steady state operation. The measurements are
to be made near both bearings in vertical, horizontal and
axial directions.
Frequency analyses are to be made in the range 2 to 100
Hz.
The vibrations velocities are not to exceed the following:
A new item A 2.3.3 has been added as follows: - 4,6 mmls per frequency component for vibrations
caused by mternal sources

is to be paid to ensure good electrical contact.
Guidance note:
Good electrical contact may be verified by measuring the resist-
ance through bolted connections R (max) = 0.10 ohm. If the
measured resistance exceeds R (max), serrated washers are to
be used between bolt head and steel, and between nut and steel.
The extent of verification shall be agreed upon between the
owner and the yard.
PtA Ch.2
Sec.1 Page 1
---c-n-d--o-f--G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e--n-o-t-e--
A new paragraph B102 has been added:
Paragraphs B102 to B104 have been renumbered B103 to
B105, respectively.
Sec.2 Page 5
In Table AI, under "Plans", the item:
- schematic diagram of engine control and safety system
on the engine 5)
Vibrations caused by internal sources are defined as those
caused by the generator rotor and the shaft couplings be-
tween the generator and gearbox. This means the first and
second order of the generator speed as well as any coupling
response to torsional and axial vibrations.
Sec.7 Page 35
puter based control and monitoring, see Ch.5 Sec. I. .
Sec.S Page 3S
- functional description of control system and monitoring
system including the respective systems power supply.
Sec.9 Page 41
DET NORSKE VERITAS
In paragraph B203 the last part has been amended as fol-
lows:
If each forged wheel is individually controlled by an ap-
proved non-destructive examination method, the overspeed
test may be waived except for wheels of the type test unit.
For wheels without a bore, the overspeed test may be omit-
ted.
Sec.10 Page 43
puter based control and monitoring, see Ch.5 Sec. 1.
Sec.ll Page 46
In paragraph A301 the items:
- remote control system
- monitoring system (if applicable)
PI.4 Ch.4
Sec.1 Page 1
Item A201 has been amended as follows:
201 Publications by International Electrotechnical Com-
mission (lEC) or other internationally I nationally recog-
nized standards, are to represent the latest edition that was
put into force at least 6 months prior to date of agreement
for unit classification.
Guidance note:
Where references are made to lEe standards in these rules, it is
to be understood that also other standards may be considered.
However, if equipment is offered to non-lEe standards, the
manufacturer must provide evidence that the chosen standard is
equivalent to lEe or comparable in such a way that it provides
an equipment design suitable for the intended installation and
use. E.g . documentation of an established track record for the
equipment may fonn part of the documentary evidence for de-

--e-n-d-o-f--G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e--n-o-t-e--
Guidance note:
It should be noted that the various national authorities have
different acceptance criteria with respect to standards than DNV.
Sec.1 Page 3
A new paragraph CJOI has been added:
101 The data listed in 102 to 108 is to be submitted for
approval.
Guidance note:
The data for electrical installations should preferably be submit-
ted in separate documents, but will also be accepted as part of
other documents when being specially noted in the submittal
letter.
Paragraphs CJOI to CI07 have been renumbered CJ02 to
CJOB, respectively.
In paragraph CI06 the items:
- Steering gear's control and alarm system
- Control and position indication of watertight doors
- Power management system description.
are deleted. A new paragraph CI09 has been added:
Sec.2 Page S
In the Guidance note to A301 the second reference should
be corrected to: Pt.4 Ch.5 Sec.S B204.
PI.4 Ch.S
Sec.1 Page 3
In item CJ03 the term "description of functions covered by
software" should be replaced by "documentation related to
software".
Sec.1 Page 4
In item C213 the term "Description of functions covered by
software" should be replaced by "Documentation related to
software II.
software".
Sec.1 Page S
In Table CI the Documentation type 120 should read "Do-
Sec.1 Page 6
In Table C2 the Documentation type 120 should read "Do-
Sec.1 Page 7
Sec.2 Page 9
In item ASOI the first sentence should read: Redundancy,
e.g. manual operating facilities, is to be built in to the extent
necessary for maintaining the safe operation of the vessel.
PI.4 Ch.6
..
In paragraph CJ02 the item:
- Fixed fire detection and alarm systems in accommodation
spaces, service spaces, machinery spaces and cargo
spaces, if required. Specification and location of detec-
tors, equipment alarms and call points. Wiring diagram
for the system.
is replaced by:
spaces, if required:
Specification and location of detectors, alarm devices,
call points and cable routing layout drawings.
A new paragraph CJ03 has been added:
PI.S Ch.2
Sec.1 Page 1
puter based control and monitoring, see Pt.4 Ch.S Sec.l.
DEr NORSKE VERITAS
')
:J
)

. /)
) ')
PI.6 Ch.2
Sec.1 Page 3
A new paragraph BlOB has been added:
Ch.S Sec.1.
In paragraph B202 the items:
- system schematics for remote thrust control system
- system schematics for automatic thrust control system
- power distribution schematics for thrust control systems
Rules tor Mobile uttsnore units. ,JUlY LUUU
should be deleted, and in paragraph B203 the item:
- layout of remote thrust control operator panels
should be deleted. Paragraph B206 and Table BI have been
added as follows:
is to be submitted according to Table Bl. The upper row of
Table Bl refers to the documentation types defined in Pt.4
Ch.5 Sec. 1 C200, except documentation type 13S, which
refers to the Failure Mode and Effect Analysis or the re-
dundancy test procedure described in 20S.
Table BI Requirements for documentation of instrumentation systems
1020 030 040 I 050 I 060 070 I 080 I 090 100 I 110 115 I 120 I 135 I 140 I 150 160 1170 180 1190 200
For class notations POSMOOR TA and ATA (Mobile Offshore Units);
ATA X X X X X X X X X
COA X X
POR X X X X
SIM X X
YEO X X X X X
JOy
X X X X X
TCM X X X X
In addition for ships:
WWS
I I I
X I X I X I X I
I I I I I
ATA Automatic thruster control system
COA Consequence analysis facility
JOY Joystick
POR Position reference system
SIM Simulation facility
TCM Thruster control mode selection
YEO Vesse1 orientation system
WWS Winch and windlass control and monitoring
T fQ!, _
One copy is to be submitted for information only
Sec.3 Page 6
Item A103 2) should read:
2) 1 hour average wind speed in combination with a
gust spectrum corresponding to a 10 year return pe-
riod, combined with a 100 year return period seas-
tate and current.
Sec.3 Page 9
In item A602 the word vessels should be corrected to units.
The second sentence of the Guidance note should read:
If no data is available, the following is to be used:
In Table A2 in item A603 the fifth line should be amended
to read:
[Bottom 3) c=. 0,4 1 - 0,3 -I
App.A Page 20
The following text to be inserted at beginning of the Appen-
dix:
POSMOOR (N)
040 System block diagrams (1')
130 Failure mode description (T)
- -
POSMOOR V (N)
lations and provisions tor the petroleum activities n. The
supplementary technical requIrements found in pt.6 Ch.2
Appendix A wilJ not be updated accordingly as completely
new rules covering NPD verification are underdevelopment.
ing additional class notations with (N) will be based directly
drawn.
lated to assigning class notations with (N) as described in
the Appendix A's is still valid and will continue to form the
basis for the Society's extent of involvement for (N)-nota-
tion.
A detailed scope of work related to NPD verification will !Ie
Pt.6 Ch.3
Sec.1 Page 1
Subsections B and C have been replaced by the following:
DEf NORSKE VERITAS
Table El Requirements for documentation of instrumentation systems
020 1030 040 1050 060 I 070 080 I 090 100 I 110 115 I 120 130 I 140 I 150 I 160 170 I 180 I 190 I 200
For class notation Offshore Loading Buoy:
CVA X X X
ODE X X X X X
LOA X X X X X X
CVA Cargo valves and pumps control and monitoring system
ODE Flammable gas detection system (permanent system
only)
LOA Offshore loading and offloading control and monitoring
system
Sec.S Page 11
The Guidance note in item B20i shouid read:
Guidance note:
The anchoring system may he designed according to Operation
Condition I, intact, provided the consequence of failure is neg-
ligible for the environment and the people that operate the buoy.
App.A Page 21
Existing items BlOO to B300 is replaced by:
B 100 General
For requirements concerning -structural strength, reference
is made to Pt.3 Ch.2 Appendix A.
X
X X X
X X X
050 System"diagrams (P&IDs, D&IDs, etc.) (T)
140 Test program for application software at manufacturer (T)
190 Cause and effect diagram (T) .
200 Schematic diagrams of input and output circuits (T)
PI.6 Ch.1
Sec.3 Page 6
A new item A303 is added as follows:
puter based control and monitoring, see Pt.4 Ch.5 Sec.I.
Sec.4 Page 7
New paragraphs A303 and A304 and Table Ai have been
addeii:
Ch.5 Sec.I.
is to be submitted according to Table A2. The upper row
of Table A2 refers to the documentation types defined in
Pt.4 Ch.5 Sec. I C200.
Table A2 Requirements for documentation of instrumentation systems
I
.oHiOll1O' 1lS"1120 I 130l140UOll&l 170l180oI1901200 I
For all class notations dermed in 100:
I
BOS X X X X
!
CLB X X X X .
DBD X X
DVC X X X X X
ENC X X X X X X X X X
LAU X X X X
021 X X X
1RA X
BOS Breathing gas control and monitoring system 030 Functional description
CLB Closed circuit breathing control and monitoring system 040 System block diagrams (T)
DBD Diving bell depth measurement system 050 System diagrams (P&IDs, D&IDs, etc.) (T)
DVC Diving bell communication system 060 User interface description
ENC Environmental control and monitoring system 070 Power supply arrangement (T)
LAU Diving bell commQnication system 080 Arrangement and layout (T)
021 Oxygen indication system 100 Instrument and equipment list (T)
1RA Trace coD.taminant analysing system 110 Data sheets with environmental specifications
DEr NORSKE VERITAS
.j.
,J
!)

()
."J
()
OJ
,)
;
Sec.2 Page 2
In paragraph A30i the line reading: = 9,80665 m/s2
should be deleted.
Paragraph A402 has been omended to read:
402 The following calculations are to be submitted for
approval for column-stabilised units:
- calculation proving satisfactory strength and stability after
damage, or flooding, as specified in E, including re-
quirements for reserve buoyancy and watertight integrity.
Paragraph BJ02 has been deleted.
B20 i has been amended to read:
201 The local and overall strength of the unit is to be
checked for the heeled condition corresponding to damage,
or flooding as'specified in E, including requirements for re-
serve buoyancy. Environmental loads need not be taken
into account in the strength calculations. An ultimate
strength analysis will be accepted.
Sec.2 Page 3
The three last sentences of the Guidance note in paragraph
B203 have been rewritten as follows:
The unit is in any way controlled for the heel angle corre-
sponding to the damage stability requirement in Pt. 3 Ch.2
Sec.6 B400, usually being assumed as 17 for the strength
control. The corresponding acceptable usage factor is 0,75.
With a usage factor of 0,95 for the "extreme damage con-
ditions", the global strength need not be controlled if the
deck is submerged at heel angles of less than about 20 .
PI.S Ch.3
Sec.2 Page 3
In Table Ai, the entries for documentation types 120 and
ISO and the corresponding explanations are deleted.
PI.S Ch.4
Sec.1 Page 1
Paragraphs AJ04 to AJ06 have been rewritten as follows:
104 The following aspects are covered by this chapter:
- arrangement
- structural strength and materials
- hazardous areas and ventilation
Pt.O Ch.l Sec.3 - Page 11
- machinery and marine piping arrangement
- fire protection and extinction
- electrical installations
- instrumentation and control system for marine and safety
related systems.
Explosion and fire hazards due to the production plant are
accounted for as basis for evaluation of the aspects above
where relevant.
lOS Production plant is to be in accordance with Pt.6
Ch.6. Alternatively, the class notations in 201 may be given
to units with production systems, based on the assumption
that hydrocarbon processing facilities installed have been
subjected to verification in accordance with relevant national
authority regulations or recoguised codes and standards.
Evidence Qf such verification is to be made available to the
Society for evaluation upon request.
106 The position keeping system is to be in accordance
with Pt.6 Ch.2 and Pt.6 Ch.7.
Alternatively, the class notations in 201 may be given to
units with production systems, based on the assumption that
the position keeping system has been subjected to verifica-
tion in accordance with relevant national authority regu-
lations or recognised codes and standards.
Evidence of such verification is to be made available to the
Sec.1 Page 2
Ch.5 Sec. I.
In paragraph C203 the item:
- remote control of crude oil and ballast piping system if
installed.
hr!l!i!l 9?IJ.'U!yJ.
- all instrumentation systems and devices for liquid level
indication
should be deleted. Paragraph C206 has been replaced by
the following:
is to be, submitted according to Table CI. The upper row
of Table Cl refers to the documentation types defined in
Pt.4 Ch.5 Sec. 1 C200.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
A new Table CI has been included:
1020 030 040 I 050 I 060 070 I 080 I 090 I 100 I 110 115 I 120 130 I 140 150 1160 170 1180 190 I 200
For all class notations defmed in A200 and A300:
CTL X X X X
CTO X X X X
CVA X X X
ESD X X X X X X X
F&G X X X X X X X
lEG X X X X X X
LDE X X X X
PSD X X X X X X X
RIR X
RDD X X X
eTL Cargo tank level measurement system
eTO Cargo tank overflow protection system
eVA Cargo valves and pumps control and monitoring system
ESD Emergency shut-down system
F&G Fire and gas system
lEG Inert gas control and monitoring system
PSD Process shut-down system
RIR Riser system control and monitoring
RDD Relief, depressurising and disposal system control and
monitoring
Sec.S Page 10
- circuit diavrams showinv the workinv princinles of the
__
is deleted. A new paragraph C202 has been added:
including computer based control and monitoring, see Sec.l.
Sec.S Page 12
Items D 102 and D 1 OJ have been renumbered D I OJ and
DI04 respectively and a new item D102 has been added as
follows: .
102 For units with crude oil pump rooms', centrifugal
.crude oil pumps are to be equipped with a double seal ar-
rangement designed to collect any leakage from the sbaft
seal. A system for remote leakage alarm is to be provided.
X X
X
X
X X X X X
X X X X X
X X
X
X X X X X
020 System philosophy (T)
070 Power supply arrangement (1)
190 Cause and effect diagram (T)
Sec.S Page 13
A new subsection E has been added as follows:
E. Manufacture, Workmanship and Testing
E 100 Non-destructive testing
101 Piping is to be subject to NDT in accordance with
requirements in Pt.4 Ch.l Sec.7 A500.
102 Class III piping essential for safe and reliable opera-
tion of the production and storage systems are to be subject
to random NDT in addition to visual examination as re-
quired in Pt.4 Ch.l Sec.7 A50!.
Guidance note:
Typical systems are those related to crude oil storage and han-
dling, tank venting systems, closed hazardous drain systems, fire
water piping, hydraulic oil systems, process cooling systems etc.
-e-n-d--o-f-G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e-n-o-t-e-
".
103 The extent of NDT for class III piping is minimum to
be 5 % of joints for butt welds (radiographic testing) or 5 %
of joints for fillet welds (MPIlDye Pen). The complete 'cir-
cumference of selected joints is to be examined. The extent
of testing may be re-evaluated based on the results of the
examination. As far as practicable, the performance of all
welders and welding procedures are to be covered.
104 NDT operators are to be certified in accordance with
requirements in Pt.4 Ch.l Sec.7 AS03. Acceptance criteria
are to be as defined in Pt.4 Ch.l Sec.7 A504.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
:)
,J

'J
!
'1
"
!
\
t
:J
:)
:)
iJ
105 Defect acceptance criteria for other materials are to
be as defined in ASME B3!.3, chapter VI, Normal Flnid
Service, or other acceptable standard.
Sec.S Page 19
Sub-paragraph B600 "Internal Communication and Aumn
system" and items B601 through B604 are deleted.
A new sub-paragraph B600 "Emergency Alarms" and new
items B601 to B607 has been added as follows:
B 600 Emergency alarms
601 Emergency alarm systems are to be provided to warn
personnel onboard the unit in case of danger. The following
systems are to be provided:
- general emergency alarm
- fire alarm
- gas detection alarm
- toxic gas alarm (e.g. hydrogen sulphide)
- fire extinguishing medium release alarm (C0
2
or other
gases with lethal concentrations)
- power-<>perated sliding watertight door closing alarm.
The alarms are to be easily distinguishable.
Guidance note:
Reference is made to IMO Resolution A.830(19) "Code on
Alarms and Indicators, 1995" for details on priorities, grouping,
locations and types. including colours, symbols etc.
National Authorities may have specific requirements deviating
from the IMO Resolution. These will nonnally be acceptable for
Classification purposes. .
--e-n-d-o-f---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e--n-o-t-e--
A new sub-section has been added as follows:
B 700 Internal communication
701 A two-way communication system is to be provided,
making it possible at any time (also during blackout) to call
all regularly manned areas from the control station, naviga-
tion liridge and engine rooms.
App.A Page 22
dix:
Oil Production Unit IN)
Oil Production and Storage Unit IN)
nificant amendments in the 1998 edition of "Acts,regu-
the relevant NPD Regulations and Guidelines. The technir:al
drawn.
basis for the Society'S extent of involvement for IN)-nota-
tion.
602 The emergency warning systems are to be so installed Pt.S Ch.S
that as to be clearly perceptible in all parts of the unit. :;Se:::c"'.c.:1"'P"'a"'g"e:,:27--:-__ --:----,:-___ :--:-:= __ :-:--
603 The warning signals given over the general emer- !n item A502 the second reference to the NPD regulntions
gency alarm system are to be capable of being supplemented IS amended to:
by instructions over a public address system. _ Regnlations conceming load bearing structures in the pe-
604 The system is to be connected to an Uninterrupted troleum activities stipulated 7 September 1992.
Power Supply with capacity of 18 hours supply or to the Sec 1 Page 4
main and emergency source of power with automatic change .
- -uveL'- '" --,-.,,-,--- -- .... -.. ,------'.- '.'
. 102 For documentation of instrumentation and automation,
605 FIre and gas alarms throughout the vessel are nor- including computer based control and monitoring see Pt 4
mally to be initiated manually from the control station. Ch.5 Sec.!. ' .
606 In areas where, due to high noise lev.els, the A new paragraph E20J and Table EI have been added:
alarm may not be fully effechve the acoushc alarm IS to be .. . .
supplemented with an optical signal. 203 For the mstrumentallon systems listed, documentahon
IS to be subIDItted accordmg to Table El. The upper row of
607 Requirements for manual fire alarm call points are Table El rE\fers to the documentation types defined in Pt.4
given in Pt.4 Ch.6 Sec.9. Ch.5 Sec. 1 C200.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
A new Table CI has been included:
1020 030 040 I 050 I 060 070 I 080 I 090 I 100 I 110 115 I 120 130 I 140 150 1160 170 1180 190 I 200
For all class notations defmed in A200 and A300:
CTL X X X X
CTO X X X X
CVA X X X
ESD X X X X X X X
F&G X X X X X X X
lEG X X X X X X
LDE X X X X
PSD X X X X X X X
RIR X
RDD X X X
eTL Cargo tank level measurement system
eTO Cargo tank overflow protection system
eVA Cargo valves and pumps control and monitoring system
ESD Emergency shut-down system
F&G Fire and gas system
lEG Inert gas control and monitoring system
PSD Process shut-down system
RIR Riser system control and monitoring
RDD Relief, depressurising and disposal system control and
monitoring
Sec.S Page 10
- circuit diavrams showinv the workinv princinles of the
__
is deleted. A new paragraph C202 has been added:
including computer based control and monitoring, see Sec.l.
Sec.S Page 12
Items D 102 and D 1 OJ have been renumbered D I OJ and
DI04 respectively and a new item D102 has been added as
follows: .
102 For units with crude oil pump rooms', centrifugal
.crude oil pumps are to be equipped with a double seal ar-
rangement designed to collect any leakage from the sbaft
seal. A system for remote leakage alarm is to be provided.
X X
X
X
X X X X X
X X X X X
X X
X
X X X X X
020 System philosophy (T)
070 Power supply arrangement (1)
190 Cause and effect diagram (T)
Sec.S Page 13
A new subsection E has been added as follows:
E. Manufacture, Workmanship and Testing
E 100 Non-destructive testing
101 Piping is to be subject to NDT in accordance with
requirements in Pt.4 Ch.l Sec.7 A500.
102 Class III piping essential for safe and reliable opera-
tion of the production and storage systems are to be subject
to random NDT in addition to visual examination as re-
quired in Pt.4 Ch.l Sec.7 A50!.
Guidance note:
Typical systems are those related to crude oil storage and han-
dling, tank venting systems, closed hazardous drain systems, fire
water piping, hydraulic oil systems, process cooling systems etc.
".
103 The extent of NDT for class III piping is minimum to
be 5 % of joints for butt welds (radiographic testing) or 5 %
of joints for fillet welds (MPIlDye Pen). The complete 'cir-
cumference of selected joints is to be examined. The extent
of testing may be re-evaluated based on the results of the
examination. As far as practicable, the performance of all
welders and welding procedures are to be covered.
104 NDT operators are to be certified in accordance with
requirements in Pt.4 Ch.l Sec.7 AS03. Acceptance criteria
are to be as defined in Pt.4 Ch.l Sec.7 A504.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
:)
,J

'J
!
'1
"
!
\
t
:J
:)
:)
iJ
105 Defect acceptance criteria for other materials are to
be as defined in ASME B3!.3, chapter VI, Normal Flnid
Service, or other acceptable standard.
Sec.S Page 19
Sub-paragraph B600 "Internal Communication and Aumn
system" and items B601 through B604 are deleted.
A new sub-paragraph B600 "Emergency Alarms" and new
items B601 to B607 has been added as follows:
B 600 Emergency alarms
601 Emergency alarm systems are to be provided to warn
personnel onboard the unit in case of danger. The following
systems are to be provided:
- general emergency alarm
- fire alarm
- gas detection alarm
- toxic gas alarm (e.g. hydrogen sulphide)
- fire extinguishing medium release alarm (C0
2
or other
gases with lethal concentrations)
- power-<>perated sliding watertight door closing alarm.
The alarms are to be easily distinguishable.
Guidance note:
Reference is made to IMO Resolution A.830(19) "Code on
Alarms and Indicators, 1995" for details on priorities, grouping,
locations and types. including colours, symbols etc.
National Authorities may have specific requirements deviating
from the IMO Resolution. These will nonnally be acceptable for
Classification purposes. .
A new sub-section has been added as follows:
B 700 Internal communication
701 A two-way communication system is to be provided,
making it possible at any time (also during blackout) to call
all regularly manned areas from the control station, naviga-
tion liridge and engine rooms.
App.A Page 22
dix:
nificant amendments in the 1998 edition of "Acts,regu-
the relevant NPD Regulations and Guidelines. The technir:al
drawn.
basis for the Society'S extent of involvement for IN)-nota-
tion.
602 The emergency warning systems are to be so installed Pt.S Ch.S
that as to be clearly perceptible in all parts of the unit. :;Se:::c"'.c.:1"'P"'a"'g"e:,:27--:-__ --:----,:-___ :--:-:= __ :-:--
603 The warning signals given over the general emer- !n item A502 the second reference to the NPD regulntions
gency alarm system are to be capable of being supplemented IS amended to:
by instructions over a public address system. _ Regnlations conceming load bearing structures in the pe-
604 The system is to be connected to an Uninterrupted troleum activities stipulated 7 September 1992.
Power Supply with capacity of 18 hours supply or to the Sec 1 Page 4
main and emergency source of power with automatic change .
- -uveL'- '" --,-.,,-,--- -- .... -.. ,------'.- '.'
. 102 For documentation of instrumentation and automation,
605 FIre and gas alarms throughout the vessel are nor- including computer based control and monitoring see Pt 4
mally to be initiated manually from the control station. Ch.5 Sec.!. ' .
606 In areas where, due to high noise lev.els, the A new paragraph E20J and Table EI have been added:
alarm may not be fully effechve the acoushc alarm IS to be .. . .
supplemented with an optical signal. 203 For the mstrumentallon systems listed, documentahon
IS to be subIDItted accordmg to Table El. The upper row of
607 Requirements for manual fire alarm call points are Table El rE\fers to the documentation types defined in Pt.4
given in Pt.4 Ch.6 Sec.9. Ch.5 Sec. 1 C200.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
Table El Requirements for documentation of instrumentation systems
020 1030 040 1050 060 I 070 080 I 090 100 I 110 115 I 120 130 I 140 I 150 I 160 170 I 180 I 190 I 200
For class notation Offshore Loading Buoy:
CVA X X X
ODE X X X X X
LOA X X X X X X
CVA Cargo valves and pumps control and monitoring system
ODE Flammable gas detection system (permanent system
only)
LOA Offshore loading and offloading control and monitoring
system
Sec.S Page 11
The Guidance note in item B20i shouid read:
Guidance note:
The anchoring system may he designed according to Operation
Condition I, intact, provided the consequence of failure is neg-
ligible for the environment and the people that operate the buoy.
App.A Page 21
Existing items BlOO to B300 is replaced by:
B 100 General
For requirements concerning -structural strength, reference
is made to Pt.3 Ch.2 Appendix A.
X
X X X
X X X
050 System"diagrams (P&IDs, D&IDs, etc.) (T)
140 Test program for application software at manufacturer (T)
190 Cause and effect diagram (T) .
PI.6 Ch.1
Sec.3 Page 6
A new item A303 is added as follows:
puter based control and monitoring, see Pt.4 Ch.5 Sec.I.
Sec.4 Page 7
New paragraphs A303 and A304 and Table Ai have been
addeii:
Ch.5 Sec.I.
is to be submitted according to Table A2. The upper row
of Table A2 refers to the documentation types defined in
Pt.4 Ch.5 Sec. I C200.
Table A2 Requirements for documentation of instrumentation systems
I
.oHiOll1O' 1lS"1120 I 130l140UOll&l 170l180oI1901200 I
For all class notations dermed in 100:
I
BOS X X X X
!
CLB X X X X .
DBD X X
DVC X X X X X
ENC X X X X X X X X X
LAU X X X X
021 X X X
1RA X
BOS Breathing gas control and monitoring system 030 Functional description
CLB Closed circuit breathing control and monitoring system 040 System block diagrams (T)
DBD Diving bell depth measurement system 050 System diagrams (P&IDs, D&IDs, etc.) (T)
DVC Diving bell communication system 060 User interface description
ENC Environmental control and monitoring system 070 Power supply arrangement (T)
LAU Diving bell commQnication system 080 Arrangement and layout (T)
021 Oxygen indication system 100 Instrument and equipment list (T)
1RA Trace coD.taminant analysing system 110 Data sheets with environmental specifications
DEr NORSKE VERITAS
.j.
,J
!)

()
."J
()
OJ
,)
;
Sec.2 Page 2
In paragraph A30i the line reading: = 9,80665 m/s2
should be deleted.
Paragraph A402 has been omended to read:
402 The following calculations are to be submitted for
approval for column-stabilised units:
- calculation proving satisfactory strength and stability after
damage, or flooding, as specified in E, including re-
quirements for reserve buoyancy and watertight integrity.
Paragraph BJ02 has been deleted.
B20 i has been amended to read:
201 The local and overall strength of the unit is to be
checked for the heeled condition corresponding to damage,
or flooding as'specified in E, including requirements for re-
serve buoyancy. Environmental loads need not be taken
into account in the strength calculations. An ultimate
strength analysis will be accepted.
Sec.2 Page 3
The three last sentences of the Guidance note in paragraph
B203 have been rewritten as follows:
The unit is in any way controlled for the heel angle corre-
sponding to the damage stability requirement in Pt. 3 Ch.2
Sec.6 B400, usually being assumed as 17 for the strength
control. The corresponding acceptable usage factor is 0,75.
With a usage factor of 0,95 for the "extreme damage con-
ditions", the global strength need not be controlled if the
deck is submerged at heel angles of less than about 20 .
PI.S Ch.3
Sec.2 Page 3
In Table Ai, the entries for documentation types 120 and
ISO and the corresponding explanations are deleted.
PI.S Ch.4
Sec.1 Page 1
Paragraphs AJ04 to AJ06 have been rewritten as follows:
104 The following aspects are covered by this chapter:
- arrangement
- structural strength and materials
- hazardous areas and ventilation
Pt.O Ch.l Sec.3 - Page 11
- machinery and marine piping arrangement
- fire protection and extinction
- electrical installations
- instrumentation and control system for marine and safety
related systems.
Explosion and fire hazards due to the production plant are
accounted for as basis for evaluation of the aspects above
where relevant.
lOS Production plant is to be in accordance with Pt.6
Ch.6. Alternatively, the class notations in 201 may be given
to units with production systems, based on the assumption
that hydrocarbon processing facilities installed have been
subjected to verification in accordance with relevant national
authority regulations or recoguised codes and standards.
Evidence Qf such verification is to be made available to the
106 The position keeping system is to be in accordance
with Pt.6 Ch.2 and Pt.6 Ch.7.
Alternatively, the class notations in 201 may be given to
units with production systems, based on the assumption that
the position keeping system has been subjected to verifica-
tion in accordance with relevant national authority regu-
lations or recognised codes and standards.
Evidence of such verification is to be made available to the
Sec.1 Page 2
Ch.5 Sec. I.
- remote control of crude oil and ballast piping system if
installed.
hr!l!i!l 9?IJ.'U!yJ.
- all instrumentation systems and devices for liquid level
indication
should be deleted. Paragraph C206 has been replaced by
the following:
is to be, submitted according to Table CI. The upper row
of Table Cl refers to the documentation types defined in
Pt.4 Ch.5 Sec. 1 C200.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
In paragraph B203 the last part has been amended as fol-
lows:
For wheels without a bore, the overspeed test may be omit-
ted.
Sec.10 Page 43
Sec.ll Page 46
In paragraph A301 the items:
PI.4 Ch.4
Sec.1 Page 1
Item A201 has been amended as follows:
201 Publications by International Electrotechnical Com-
mission (lEC) or other internationally I nationally recog-
nized standards, are to represent the latest edition that was
put into force at least 6 months prior to date of agreement
for unit classification.
Guidance note:
Where references are made to lEe standards in these rules, it is
to be understood that also other standards may be considered.
However, if equipment is offered to non-lEe standards, the
manufacturer must provide evidence that the chosen standard is
equivalent to lEe or comparable in such a way that it provides
an equipment design suitable for the intended installation and
use. E.g . documentation of an established track record for the
equipment may fonn part of the documentary evidence for de-

Guidance note:
It should be noted that the various national authorities have
different acceptance criteria with respect to standards than DNV.
Sec.1 Page 3
A new paragraph CJOI has been added:
101 The data listed in 102 to 108 is to be submitted for
approval.
Guidance note:
The data for electrical installations should preferably be submit-
ted in separate documents, but will also be accepted as part of
other documents when being specially noted in the submittal
letter.
Paragraphs CJOI to CI07 have been renumbered CJ02 to
CJOB, respectively.
In paragraph CI06 the items:
- Steering gear's control and alarm system
- Control and position indication of watertight doors
- Power management system description.
are deleted. A new paragraph CI09 has been added:
Sec.2 Page S
In the Guidance note to A301 the second reference should
be corrected to: Pt.4 Ch.5 Sec.S B204.
PI.4 Ch.S
Sec.1 Page 3
In item CJ03 the term "description of functions covered by
software" should be replaced by "documentation related to
software".
Sec.1 Page 4
software II.
software".
Sec.1 Page S
In Table CI the Documentation type 120 should read "Do-
Sec.1 Page 6
Sec.1 Page 7
Sec.2 Page 9
In item ASOI the first sentence should read: Redundancy,
e.g. manual operating facilities, is to be built in to the extent
necessary for maintaining the safe operation of the vessel.
PI.4 Ch.6
..
In paragraph CJ02 the item:
spaces, if required. Specification and location of detec-
tors, equipment alarms and call points. Wiring diagram
for the system.
is replaced by:
spaces, if required:
Specification and location of detectors, alarm devices,
call points and cable routing layout drawings.
PI.S Ch.2
Sec.1 Page 1
puter based control and monitoring, see Pt.4 Ch.S Sec.l.
DEr NORSKE VERITAS
')
:J
)

. /)
) ')
PI.6 Ch.2
Sec.1 Page 3
A new paragraph BlOB has been added:
Ch.S Sec.1.
In paragraph B202 the items:
- system schematics for remote thrust control system
- system schematics for automatic thrust control system
- power distribution schematics for thrust control systems
Rules tor Mobile uttsnore units. ,JUlY LUUU
should be deleted, and in paragraph B203 the item:
- layout of remote thrust control operator panels
should be deleted. Paragraph B206 and Table BI have been
added as follows:
is to be submitted according to Table Bl. The upper row of
Table Bl refers to the documentation types defined in Pt.4
Ch.5 Sec. 1 C200, except documentation type 13S, which
refers to the Failure Mode and Effect Analysis or the re-
dundancy test procedure described in 20S.
Table BI Requirements for documentation of instrumentation systems
1020 030 040 I 050 I 060 070 I 080 I 090 100 I 110 115 I 120 I 135 I 140 I 150 160 1170 180 1190 200
For class notations POSMOOR TA and ATA (Mobile Offshore Units);
ATA X X X X X X X X X
COA X X
POR X X X X
SIM X X
YEO X X X X X
JOy
X X X X X
TCM X X X X
In addition for ships:
WWS
I I I
X I X I X I X I
I I I I I
ATA Automatic thruster control system
COA Consequence analysis facility
JOY Joystick
POR Position reference system
SIM Simulation facility
TCM Thruster control mode selection
YEO Vesse1 orientation system
WWS Winch and windlass control and monitoring
T fQ!, _
One copy is to be submitted for information only
Sec.3 Page 6
Item A103 2) should read:
2) 1 hour average wind speed in combination with a
gust spectrum corresponding to a 10 year return pe-
riod, combined with a 100 year return period seas-
tate and current.
Sec.3 Page 9
In item A602 the word vessels should be corrected to units.
The second sentence of the Guidance note should read:
If no data is available, the following is to be used:
In Table A2 in item A603 the fifth line should be amended
to read:
[Bottom 3) c=. 0,4 1 - 0,3 -I
App.A Page 20
dix:
POSMOOR (N)
040 System block diagrams (1')
- -
POSMOOR V (N)
lations and provisions tor the petroleum activities n. The
supplementary technical requIrements found in pt.6 Ch.2
Appendix A wilJ not be updated accordingly as completely
new rules covering NPD verification are underdevelopment.
ing additional class notations with (N) will be based directly
drawn.
lated to assigning class notations with (N) as described in
basis for the Society's extent of involvement for (N)-nota-
tion.
A detailed scope of work related to NPD verification will !Ie
Pt.6 Ch.3
Sec.1 Page 1
Subsections B and C have been replaced by the following:
DEf NORSKE VERITAS
B. Documentation
B 100 Plans and particulars
Ch.S Sec. I.
102 For requirements related to fire protection, detection
and extinction, see PtA Ch.6 Sec.I.
is to be submitted according to Table BI. The upper row of
Table B 1 refers to the documentation types defIned in PtA
Ch.5 Sec.1 C200.
Table Bl Requirements for documentation of instrumentation systems
I 020 1
030 040 050 1060 070 080 I 090 100 I 110 I 115 1120 130 I 140 I 150 I 160 170 1180 190 I 200
For class notation EO:
EPC X X X X
EWC X X X X
Fua X X
FWC X X
HYD X X
Lua X X
PNE X X
SCM X X
SWC X X
EPC Generator and electrical power system control and
monitoring
EWC Engineer and watch call alarm system
Fua Fuel oil system control and monitoring
FWC Feed water and condensate system control and moni-
toring
HYD Hydraulic power system control and monitoring
Lua Lubricating oil system control and monitoring
PNE Pneumatic control and monitoring system
SCM Steam system control and monitoring
SWC Sea and fresh water system control and monitoring
C. Operation and maintenance manuals
C 100 General
Jill _ lln
board. For the required content of the manuals, see PtA
Ch.5 Sec. I C200.
Guidance note:
It may be convenient that the operation and maintenance material
is arranged as a master manual covering the complete instru-
mentation and automation installation in the engine room, with
reference to particular manuals for the subsystems.
102 On the bridge and at the control stand in the engine
room, instructions are to be fitted, stating routines to be
followed in connection with transfer of control to/from en-
gine room, and precautions to be taken at alarm condition.
Sec.S Page 9
Item D101 should read:
101 Recording of the following parameters may be re-
quired:
X
X
050 System diagrams (P&lDs, D&lDs, etc.) (T)
- steam pressure,
- water level in boiler,
- automatic actions such as start andlor stop of burners,
alanns, etc.
Pt.6 ChA
Sec.1 Page 1
The reference to Pt.4 Ch.1 Sec.8 in A101 and C101 is cor-
rected to: PtA Ch.6.
The Guidance note to item A102 is deleted.
Sec.1 Page 2
New paragraphs C105 and C106 and Table C1 have been
added:
lOS For documentation of instrumentation and automation,
Ch.5 Sec. I.
is to be submitted according to Table CI. The upper row
of Table C 1 refers to the documentation types defined in
PtA Ch.5 Sec. I C200.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
J J
--)
-.
C)
-J
C)
rJ )
Sec.6 Page 33
- details of any remote control and signals.
Paragraphs A304 to A306 have been renumbered A305 to
A307, respectively.
Sec.7 Page 39
- schematic diagrams of local and remote control of wa-
tertight doors and hatches.
puter based control and monitoring, see Pt.4 Ch.5 Sec. I.
Sec.7 Page 41
The last sentence of B502 should read:
The capacity is to be sufficient for 3 movements (closed-
open-closed).
Sec.7 Page 46
In Table 11, at the end after NA means "not applicable" the
following is added:
Non-frequently used doors and hatches are those which are
assumed not to be in use for the day to day operation of the
entire unit.
Note 3) in Table 11 should read:
3) Mechanical locking:
by means of wedges, bars, cleats or similar devices which are self-
locking (in the case of powered hatches).
App.A Page 49
Sec.S Page 17
puter based control and monitoring, see Ch.S Sec. I.
Sec.6 Page 22
Sec.6 Page 34
Item F300 has been rewritten as follows:
normal operating range including misfiring (see C301) of
one cylinder (per engine), and during impacts due to en-
gaging clutches etc. (see C401).
Guidance note:
continuous rating.
--e-n-d--o-f-G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e--n-o-t-e-
302 Measurements of vibrations on power take-off gener-
ators driven from the main engine's reduction gear are to
be carried out at 90 %, 100 % and (at least) lOS % of rated
(generator) speed with unloaded generator and service ship
speed under steady state operation. The measurements are
to be made near both bearings in vertical, horizontal and
axial directions.
Frequency analyses are to be made in the range 2 to 100
Hz.
The vibrations velocities are not to exceed the following:
A new item A 2.3.3 has been added as follows: - 4,6 mmls per frequency component for vibrations
caused by mternal sources

is to be paid to ensure good electrical contact.
Guidance note:
Good electrical contact may be verified by measuring the resist-
ance through bolted connections R (max) = 0.10 ohm. If the
measured resistance exceeds R (max), serrated washers are to
be used between bolt head and steel, and between nut and steel.
The extent of verification shall be agreed upon between the
owner and the yard.
PtA Ch.2
Sec.1 Page 1
---c-n-d--o-f--G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e--n-o-t-e--
A new paragraph B102 has been added:
Paragraphs B102 to B104 have been renumbered B103 to
B105, respectively.
Sec.2 Page 5
In Table AI, under "Plans", the item:
- schematic diagram of engine control and safety system
on the engine 5)
Vibrations caused by internal sources are defined as those
caused by the generator rotor and the shaft couplings be-
tween the generator and gearbox. This means the first and
second order of the generator speed as well as any coupling
response to torsional and axial vibrations.
Sec.7 Page 35
puter based control and monitoring, see Ch.5 Sec. I. .
Sec.S Page 3S
- functional description of control system and monitoring
Sec.9 Page 41
DET NORSKE VERITAS
HUles TOr MOOlle UTTsnore UnitS, .JUly LUUU
SECTION 3
AMENDMENTS AND CORRECTIONS
A. Introduction
A 100 General
Contents
B 100 General
A. Introduction
A 100 General
101 This section includes amendments and corrections de-
cided by the Board, but not yet incorporated in the current
rule chapters. Information on the coming into force date of
new amendments is given on the cover inside of this chapter.
Previous amendments are referred to in earlier issues.
In addition corrections of misprints and clarifications of the
text may be included.
B 100 General
101 Current amendments and corrections are as follows:
Pt.1 Ch.1
Sec.9 Page 30
Paragraph A309 has been rewritten as follows:
puter based control and monitoring, see PtA Ch.5 Sec.l.
Pt.3 Ch.2
Under "Changes in the Rules n, Sec.2 Column-Stabilised
Units, the reference in the second bullet point should read
nCh.l SecA DlOO".
Sec.1 Page 1
A new paragraph C102 has been added:
Sec.4 Page 11
- remote control diagram according to PtA Ch.5
should be deleted, and in paragraph A303 the item:
- rudder angle indicator
Sec. 1 Page 3 Sec.4 Page 12
Items B601 and B602 have been amended to read:
601 The Society will not disclose any information received 302 Synthetic bearing materials are to be of an approved
or reports made in connection with classification to any type.
other than those entitled thereto or those having been given
the right to receive information by legislation, court decision Sec.4 Page 16
supplYiJr m-'Item G302 has been amended to read:
formation may take place electronically and on a continual
basis e.g. by on-line access to the Society'S databases. 302 The maximum surface pressure Pm for the various
, bearing combinations is to be taken as:
Guidance note:
Table B1 indicates which parties will be entitled to various kinds Pm = 7000 kN/m
2
for steel against stainless steel or bronze
of information. Pm = 4500 kN/m
2
for steel against white metal, oillubri-
. cated
--e-n-d-o-f--G-u+d-a-n-c-e--n-o-t-e--- Pm 5500 kN/m2 1) for steel against synthetic materials,
602 The Society will not disclose information that can be
considered as the property of another party except when this
party's permission is given in writing.
-Pt.2 Ch.1, Pt.2 Ch.2 and Pt.2 Ch.3
For amendments and corrections related to Pt.2, see Rules
for Classification of Ships; Pt.O Ch.l Sec.3 BlOO.
Pt.3 Ch.1
Sec.1 Page 2
The last reference in C101 should read: see 300.
A new paragraph CI04 has been added:
'puter based control and monitoring, see Pt.4 Ch.5 Sec. I.
water or oil lubricated.
1) Surface pressure exceeding the specified limit may be accepted for rub-
ber bearing applications in accordance with bearing manufacrurer's spe-
cification and when verified by tests andlor service experience.
Sec.S Page 23
In the first column of Table CI, the second equipment num-
ber on each line should be reduced with 1 -one- to avoid the
ranges ,to be overl'apping.
Sec.S Page 24
In Table D2, the sub-headings of the column called "single"
should read "Weld" and "Base", and not the other way
round as it is printed.
Sec.S Page 30
The wt reference in item H202 should read:
see Ch.l Sec.2 Table B2.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

J
)

'J
,)
)
,
.
nUII::.s lur IVIUUIlt:: urUUi, .JUlY LUUU
Pt.O Ch.1 Sec.3' - Page 17
1020' r 030 I 040 I 050 I 060 I 070 I 080 I 090 I 100
For class notation F-AM:
FDO 1 I X I X I
I IXIXI I
LDE I I X I X I
I I X I I I
FDa Fire doors control and monitoring system
--
Sec.2 Page 3
The reference to saLAS 1974 Ch.II-2, Part A, Reg.3 in
AIOI, A102 and B201 is corrected to:
Pt.4 Ch.6 Sec.1 B200.
Sec.3 Page 7
The reference to Pt.4 Ch.I Sec.8 in E101 is corrected to:
PtA Ch.6 Sec.2 C.
110 1115 I 120 I 130 I 140 I 150 1160 I 170 1180 1190 I 200
xl
I I I I I I I
XIXI I I I I I I
Pt.6 Ch.S
Sec.l Page S
In paragraph F201 the item:
- control and monitoring system
I I
I I
should be deleted. Parajvaphs F204 and F20S and Table
Fl have been added as follows:
Ch.5 Sec. I.
20S For the instrumentation systems listed, documentation
is to be submitted according to Table Fl. The upper row of
Table Fl refers to the documentation types defilled in PtA
Ch.5 Sec.1 C200.
Table Fl Requirements for documentation of instrumentation systems
1020 030 I 040 050 1060 070 I 080 I 090 I 100 I 110 I 115 I 120 I 130 I 140 150 160 I 170 180 1190 200
For class notations DRILL and DRILL(N)
BOP X X X X X X
DRI X X X
HET X X X X
HOP X X X X X
R!R X
WfF X X X
",,0,
, - -- -
BOP Blow-out prevention control and monitoring
DR! Drilling fluid circulation, bulk storage and cementing
system control and monitoring
HET Heave compensation and tension control and monitoring
HOP Hoisting, rotating and pipe handling control and moni-
toring
R!R Riser system control and monitoring
WfF Well test and flare system control and monitoring
Sec.2 Page 6
104 Impact test specimens are to be sampled from a lo-
cation not less than 2 mm below the surface for thickness,
up to 50 mm, while at 114 mm for greater thicknesses.
X
X X
"", .. -" .. , '" -......
070 supply arrangement (1')
200 Schematic diagrams of input and output circuits ('n
- --
DET NORSKE VERITAS
Hules tor Mobile uttsnore units I .JUly 4!UUU
App.A Page 20
The following text to be insened at beginning of the Appen-
dix:
DRILL IN)
requirements given in Appendix A of these rules ,are with-
drawn.
tion.
Pt.6 Ch.6
Sec.1 Page 5
A new paragraph E102 has been added:
Ch.5 Sec. I.
In paragraph E201 the items:
- Control systems
- Process shutdown systems (cause and effect charts)
- Injection shutdown system
have been deleted, and in E202 the items:
- Process shutdown system philosophy
____ __
have been deleted. Paragraph E205 has been rewritten:
205 For specific requirements related to documentation
of instrumentation and automation, including computer
based control and monitoring, see Pt.5 Ch.4 Sec. I.
In paragraph E301 the item:
- Control and monitoring systemslinstrument list.
Sec.2 Page 8
106 Impact test specimens are to be sampled from a 10-
. cation not less than 2 mm below the surface for thickness,
up to 50 mm, while at t/4 mm for greater thicknesses.
Sec.7 Page 21
- Drawings and description of control and safety systems.
has been deleted, and a new A402 added:
including computer based control and monitoring, see Sec.!.
Sec.10 Page 25 .
Item A300 "Documentation" has been deleted.
App.A Page 30
The follnwing text to be insened at beginning of the Appen-
dix:
Class notations with IN)
lations and provisions for the petroleum activities ". The
supplementary technical requirements found in Pt. 6 Ch.6
drawn.
tion.
Pt.6 Ch.7
Sec.1 Page 5
In paragraph D402 the follnwing is to be added at the end:
Pt.4 Ch.5 Instrumentation and Automation.
Subsection E has been rewritten as follnws:
E. Documentation
E 100 General
101 The submitted documentation is to describe the oper-
ating conditions for the vessel.
E 200 General documentation
... a01- Caloulation-of the environm.ntnl fegularity--number--
evaluation, em, is to be submitted for approval. The position
holding performance is to be quantified according to the
concept for em, see Sec.6.
E 300 Instrumentation and automation
Ch.5 Sec. I.
is to be submitted according to Table E!. The upper row of
Table E! refers to the documentation types defined in Pt.4
Ch.5 Sec.! C200, except documentation type 135, which
refers to the Failure Mode and Effect Analysis described in
600 or the Redundancy Test Procedure described in 700.
E 400 Thruster documentation
401 Documenta'tion to be submitted according to main
class.
402 Descriptions and calculations for thruster character-
istics. This is to include descri'ption of thrust output and
power input CUIVes, response time for thrust changes,
rection changes for azimuth thrusters, and anticipated thrust
reductions due to interaction effects.
E 500 Electric power system documentation
501 Documentation to be submitted according to main
class.
DEr NORSKE VERITAS
,)
1/)
,------."
1
.oj
)
."J
()
) )
405 SESAM is developed by DNV in cooperation with
leading organisations in the maritime and offshore indus-
tries. The SESAM system is available from DNV Software,
N-1322 H0Vik, Norway, tel: +47675776 50 or fax +47
67 57 72 72, e-mail: software.sesam@dnv.com.
501 The DNV Electronic Rule Book contains the present
Rules for Classification of Ships and is issued at each revi-
son of the Rules. It comprises the complete and updated
edition:
- all chapters are consolidated and up-to-date
- amendments and corrections in Sec.3 are consistently in-
corporated at their proper place.
502 The Electronic Rule Book has powerful means to ra-
pidly find items of specific interest. Rule extracts may be
printed, or copied to documents.
503 The Electronic Rule Book CD-ROM may be ordered
from your local DNV station or from the DNV distribution
department, N- 1322 H0Vik, Norway or fax: +47 67 57
9320.
D 600 DNV Exchange
601 D NV Exchange is a PC and web-based class infor-
mation service for shipowners. The system provides reli-
able, up-to-date information on class and survey statos,
certificates, conditions of class and a wealth of other infor-
mation for management and technical staff alike. Shipboard
installations are also available.
602 Information included in the. current system comprises:
- Full classification statos of your vessels in the form of
charts, warning lamps and tables. Owner's Page is in-
cluded as a simple means for owners to monitor addi-
tional sUIVeys, audits, certificates, etc. which are not
covered by the class.
HUles Tor Moone uTTsnore units, JUlY LUUU
Pt.O Ct!.1 Sec.2 - Page 7
- An information bank describing DNV's primary class and
statotory services. Access to DNV Rules for Classifica-
tion of Ships may also be obtained - and the first CD-
ROM is supplied free of charge for instalIation with DNV
Exchange.
- Experience-based information from DNV's records in the
form of all updated issues of Casualty Information. Fur-
ther, there are pointers to the latest updates in the DNV
Rules, and IMO Requirements Timescale lookup tool.
- Search for any DNV employee, office or department,
using maps, hierarchical menus and alphabetic searches.
603 A version of DNV Exchange wiI\ also provide access
to the information available from the additional class nota-
tion NAUTlCUS.
604 The current Internet based version of "D NV Exchange
Basic H provides access to class status information, DNV
Directory, Service Suppliers publications and Service Expe-
rience such as Casualty Information. This version is avail-
able free of charge to alI owners.
605 Data is extracted daily from DNV's databases and
made available on DNV's Exchange home page on the In-
ternet, protected by username and password
(http://exchange.dov.com). On request, data may also be
sent bye-mail or on diskette.
606 For more information on DNV Exchange, please
contact DNV Software, N-1322 H0Vik, Norway, tel: +47
67 57 76 50, fax: +47 67 57 99 11, e-mail:
dov .exchange@dov.com
E. Other DNV Rules
E 100 General
101 DNV has developed and publishes Rules for other
objects than Mobile Offshore Units. Please see the current
list of publications.
DEr NORSKE VERITAS
Table C6 Recommended Practices
Corrosion Protection of Ships, 2000.
RP-B401 Cathodic Protection Design, 1993.
RP-C202 Buckling Strength of Shells, 2000.
RP-C203 Fatigue Strength Analysis of Offshore Steel Struc-
tures, 2000.
RP-E301 Design and Installation of Fluke" Anchors in Clay,
2000.
RP-E302 Design and Installation of Drag-in Plate Anchors in
Clay, 2000.
RP-E305 Onbottom Stability Design of Submarine Pipelines,
1988.
RP-F101 Corroded Pipelines, 1999.
RP-F104 Mechanical Pipeline Couplings, 2000.
RP-FI06 Factory Applied External Pipeline Coatings for Cor-
rosion Control, 2000.
RP-0401 Safety and Reliability of Subsea Systems, 1985.
RP-0501 Erosive Wear in Piping Systems, 1996.
D 100 General
101 Computers, networks and information systems play
an increasingly imporlant role in the evaluation of designs,
the following-up of newbuildings and ships in operation, as
well as the continuous learning and knowledge sharing pro-
cess of the classification society. As the shipping industry
shifts from paper-based production to digital production,
also digital exchange of information becomes imporlant,
both within the individual company and between companies.
cated programs for various rule checking and structural
analysis according to the DNV Rules.
206 NAUTICUS HULL may be ordered from the local
DNV office or from DNV Software, N-1322 H0Vik, Nor-
way, tel: +4767577650 or fax: +47675772 72, e-mail:
software.nauticus@dnv.com.
207 NAUTICUS gradually replaces the ship analysis sys-
tem PILOT (see 300), and incorporates the ship related parts
of the general purpose finite element program SESAM (see
400).
D 300 PILOT
301 The PILOT program system comprises DNV's pro-
grams for strength analysis according to DNV Rules. In-
cluded are programs for analysis of hull section scantlings,
deck houses and superstructures, pillars, rudders, propel-
lers, marine gears, etc. Also included are programs for 3-D
beam element model analysis, ship stability and strength
analysis as well as miscellaneous other programs. Informa-
tion about the various PILOT programs can be obtained
from DNV Software, N-1322 H0Vik, Norway (Fax +4767
577272).
302 All PILOT programs will eventually be replaced with
new NAUTICUS programs (see 200).
D 400 SESAM
401 SESAM is a general purpose finite element program
system developed by DNV. The system incorporates ad-
vances made during the last decade in structural and solid
mechanics, numerical analysis and computer technology.
SESAM is designed to handle static and dynamic analysis
of:
- 2- and 3-dimensional truss/frame structures
- 2- and 3-dimensional membrane structures
D 200 NAUTICUS - Ihi!' and thick shell structures
- ax.-symmetnc solids
201 NAUTICUS is the information and analysis system - 3-dimensional solids
for the DNV classification activity. With its life cycle prod- - layered structures (plating with stiffeners).
uct model approach the system accumulates and makes
available information about a ship from design to scrapping. Geometrical as well as material non-linearities may be taken
Object orientation enables intelligent linking and efficient into account. Particular emphasis is placed upon the devel-
-
faces with task oriented views make the. information easily 402 SESAM includes integrated program packages for
access.ble for the end-user. W.th a Wide area computer . I' f . d f h
network the information is available throughout the DNV extensive ana YS1S 0 manne an 0 s ore structures, as:
organisation, and Internet links accommodate external users. _ ships
202 With NAUTICUS, DNV aims at improved knowledge - mobile offshore units (column stabilised and self-elevat-
sharing and decision support, which means enhanced, faster mg).
and consistent high level services to DNV's customers - tenslOn leg platforms
throughout the world. - fixed steel and concrete platforms.
203 Ship modelling, analysis and rule checking applica- For these structures the analysis may include integrated cal-
tions will be made available to external users as the software culation of loads, response, capacity imd checking against
is released. Normally, new versions will be released twice codes, etc.
a year, following the cycles of the rule editions. 403 Several alternative methods are available. The multi-
204 NAUTICUS HULL provides an efficient analysis tool level superelement technique may be used for static as well
for the naval architect who may work with familiar hull el- as dynamic analysis. For dynamic analysis several methods
ements in a user-friendly graphical environment, having for free vibration and forced response analysis are available.
access to a wide range of analysis options that are re-using Programs for calculation of hydrodynamic load distributions
the same digital model of the ship. In addition to the tradi- are integrated in SESAM. The same geometry input is used
tional rule checking there are direct calculation options for for both the hydrodynamic analysis and the structural anal-
fatigue life, ultimate hull girder capacity, oil spill after ysis. The loads are automatically transferred to the structural
structural damage, life cycle costs for different hull designs model. Fluid-structure and soil-structure interaction may be
and maintenance schemes, as well as the broad range of taken into account.
features offered by the SESAM system (see 4(JQ). 404 ADVANCE is SESAM's advanced structoral analysis
205 Rule Check, which is one of the NAUTICUS HULL tool offering solutions to highly non-linear response prob-
packages, covers inter alia rule checking of section scan- lems. It has additional features geared towards solving
tlings, such as hull girder strength, local strength, and problems that are specific to the maritime and offshore in-
buckling of plates and stiffeners. In addition there are dedi-
DET NORSKE VERITAS
:)

J

/)
502 Electrical load calculation during dynamic positioning
operation is to be submitted for approval.
503 For AUTRO the following is to be submitted for ap-
proval:
- cable routing layout drawing
- fire and flooding separation arrangement.
E 600 Failure Mode and Effect Analysis (FMEA)
601 For AUTR and AUTRO, documentation of the reli-
ability of the dynamic positioning system is required in the
form off a failure mode and effect analysis (FMEA). Alter-
natively, redundancy tests according to 700 are to be carried
out.
602 The purpose of an FMEA is to give a description of
the different failure modes of the equipment referred to its
functional task. Special attention is to be paid to the analysis
of systems where an item may enter a number of failure
modes and thus induce a number of different effects on the
dynamic positioning system performance. The FMEA is to
include at least the information specified in 603 to 605.
603 A functional breakdown of the dynamic positioning
system, or SUb-system into functional blocks is to be made.
The functions of each block is to be described. The break-
down is to be performed to such a level of detail that the
functional interfaces between the sub-functions within the
respective functions are shown.
604 A description of each l'hysically and functionally in-
dependent item and the assocmted failure modes with their
failure causes related to normal operational modes of the
item is to be furnished.
605 A description of the effects of each failure mode alone
on other items within the system and on the overall dynamic
positioning system is to be made.
E 700 Redundancy tests
701 Altemate to an FMEA, the redundancy may be doc-
umented in a test procedure covering all relevant failure
modes, and which is subsequently verified during sea trials.
702 The test procedure for redundancy is to be based on
simulation of failures, and is to be performed under as real-
istic conditions as feasible.
703 The redundancy test procedure is to be submitted for
approval.
E 800 Instruction manuals
801 The following documentation related to the dynamic
positioning system is to be kept onboard:
- operation manual
- maintenance manual.
E 900 Program for tests and trials
901 Program for tests and trials is to be submitted for ap-
proval. Requirements for the program are described in sub-
section H.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
Table EI Requirements for documentation of instrumentation systems
020 030 040 050 060 070 080 090 100 110 115 120 135 140 150 160 170 180 190 200
JOy
X X X X X
TCM X X X X
For class notation DYNPOS T:
DYN
I Ix xl Ix X I X I I X I I I X I Ix
I I
YEO
I I I
XIXI I X I I I I I I I
For class notation DYNPOS AUTS,
DYN X X X X X X X X
PORI X X X X X X
YEO X X X
For class notation DYNPOS AUT,
DYN X X X X X X X X
PORI X X X X X
POR2 X X X X X X
YEO X X X
For class notation DYNPOS AUTR,
DYN X X X X X X X X
COA X X
PORI X X X X
POR2 X X X X
POR3 X X X X
YEO X X X
For class notation DYNPOS AUTRO,
DYN X X X X X X X X X X
COA X X
PORI X X X X X X
POR2 X X X X X X
POR3 X X X X X X
YEO X X X X
DYN Dynamic positioning control and monitoring system 030 Functional description
COA Consequence analysis facility 040 System block diagrams (1')
PORI Position reference system no. 1 060 User interface description
P-oBition-rofoz:onoo -- -070 FO\Jolof.- Dupply -1lr-filIlgomont (+) -
--
POR3 Position reference system no. 3
YEO Vessel orientation system
JOy
Joystick
TMC Thruster control mode selection

One copy is to be submitted for
Pt.6Ch.S
Sec.1 Page 2
In Table Dl fourth row down. Delete "TIN" and insert
"ICS".
090 Cable routing layout drawing (1')
135 Failure mode and effect analysis (FMEA) I redundancy
test procedure (1')
In Table Dl seventh row down. Delete "TIN" and insert
"ICS".
In Table D 1 the Documentation type 120 should read "Do-
DEr NORSKE VERITAS

1
'-_/
-"
I

/J
)
. _-/
J
i)
-
()
)
Table C2 Classification Notes
No. 4.1 Guidance Manual for Inspection and Repair of
Bronze Propellers, October 1992.
No. 4.2 Guidance Manual for Inspection and Repair of Steel
Propellers, October 1992.
No. 4.3 Repair of SurfacelDimension by means of Metal
Coating, January 2000.
No.6. Fire Test of Components Intended for Use in Piping
Systems on Board Ships, May 1980. (Reprint of
1975.)
No. 6.1 Fire Test Methods for Plastic Pipes, Joints and
Fittings, January 1987.
No.7. Ultrasonic Inspection of Weld Connections, May
1980. (Reprint of November 1978.)
No. 10.1 Ships and Mobile Offshore Units. Alternative Sur-
vey Arrangements for Machinery and Automation
Systems, January 1999.
No. 13. Erosion and Corrosion in Piping Systems for Sea
Water, May 1980. (Reprint of January 1979.)
No. 14. Instrumentation and Automation. Programmable
Electronic Systems, May 1991.
No. 20.1 Stability Documentation - Ships Newbuildings,
February 1990.
No. 20.2 Lightweight Determination - Ships (Inclining Test
and Lightweight Survey), February 1990.
No. 20.3 Systems for Stability Control of Mobile Offshore
Units in Operation. Tentative Guidance for Ac-
ceptance, December 1995
No. 21.1 Approval and Certification of the Software of
Loading Computer Systems, June 1998.
No. 30.1 Buckling Strength Analysis, July 1995.
No. 30.3 Buckling Criteria of LNG Spherical Cargo Tank
Containment Systems - Skirt and Sphere, December
1997.
No. 30.4 Foundations, February 1992.
No. 30.5 Environmental Conditions and Environmental
Loads, March 2000.
No. 30.6 Structural Reliability Analysis of Marine Struc-
tures, July 1992.
No. 30.7 Fatigue Assessment of Ship Structures, September
.- = '1998:--- . --_ .. ".- _. ,--._._-
No. 30.8 Strength Analysis of Hull Structures in High Speed
and Light Craft, August 1996.
No. 31.1 Strength Analysis of Hull Structures in Bulk Carri-
ers, June 1999.
No. 31.2 Strength Analysis of Hull Structures in Roll on/Roll
off Ships, May 1980.
No. 31.3 Strength Analysis of Hull Structures in Tankers,
February 1999 .
No. 31.4 Strength Analysis of Main Structures of Column
Stabilized Units (Semisubmersible Platforms), Sep-
tember 1987.
No. 31.5 Strength Analysis of Main Structures of Self-Ele-
vating Units, February 1992.
No. 32.1 Strength Analysis of Rudder Arrangements, Janu-
ary 1984.
No. 32.2 Strength Analysis of Container Securing Arrange-
ments, July 1983.
No. 33.1 Corrosion Prevention of Tanks and Holds, July
1999.
No. 41.2 Calculation of Gear Rating for Marine Trans-
mission, July 1993.
No. 41.3 Calculation of Crankshafts for Diesel Engines, July
1988.
No. 42.1 Dual Fuel Arrangement for Diesel Engines with
High Pressure Gas Injection, January 1999.
I
I No. 45.1 I Compatibility, December 1995.
Table C3 Standards for Certification
Series No.1 Certification Services
No. 1.2 Type Approval (December 1996).
No. 1.3 Quality System Certification (December 1996).
Series No.2 Approval Schemes
No. 2.4 Environmental Test Specification for Instrumenta-
tion and Automation Equipment (May 1995)
No. 2.5 Certification of Offshore Mooring Steel Wrre Ropes
(May 1995)
No. 2.6 Certification of Offshore Mooring Chain (August
1995).
No. 2.7-1 Offshore Containers. (May 1995).
No. 2.7-1 Type Approval of Lifting Sets for Offshore Con-
Annex 1 lainers (November 1996).
No. 2.7-2 Offshore Service Containers. (December 1995).
No. 2.9 Approval Programmes - Components, Manufactur- :
ers, Service Suppliers (November 1991 to July
2000).
No. 2.10 Diesel Engine Driven Power Plants- Certification,
Testing and Inspections (July 1991).
No. 2.11 Certification of Gas Burning Internal Combustion
Engine Installations (January 1999).
No. 2.12 Type Approval of Marine Equipment on Behalf of
Marine Safety Agency (MSA), UK (December
1996)
No. 2.13 Standard for Certification of Offshore Mooring Fi-
bre Ropes (January 1999)
No. 2.14 Standard for Certification of Maritime Simulator
Systems (January 2000).
Table C4 Register of Approved Manufacturers
101 Metallic Materials and Welded Boilers, Pressure Vessels
and Seamless Gas Bottles Class I-II.
102 Service Suppliers.
Table C5 Register of Type Approved Products
L- .. _
___ __ __ ____ 0_=
2 Welding Consumables.
3 Containers, Cargo Handling, Lifting Appliances and Mis-
cellaneous Equipment.
4 Machinery Components.
5 Mechanical Equipment and Piping.
6 Electrical Equipment and Systems.
c
7 Instrumentation and Automation.
8 Fire Safety.
9 Drilling and Well Control Equipment.
DEr NORSKE VERITAS
I
!
Rules for Mobile Offshore Units, JUly :WOO
B 600 Amendments
601 Technical amendments to the rules are the results of
formal proposals from the technical staff at the Society and
are based on practical experience from units in service as
well as comprehensive theoretical studies, research and de-
velopment. These proposals are always discussed with re-
gional technical committees consisting of representatives of
builders, marine engine builders, steel manufacturers, own-
ers, maritime governmental bodies, insurance company as-
sociations and technical universities before being submitted
to the Board for a decision.
602 Amendments to the rules may be undertaken at any
time, but will normally be published twice a year, in January
and July, and will be forwarded to subscribers of the rules
as revised chapters or in Pt.O Ch.l Sec.3.
603 The superseded chapters may be filed in a separate
binder for future reference.
701 Reprints from the rules are available from the Society
on request. There is currently no subscription scheme for
reprints. While the Society will publish details of amend-
ments to the rules in the press and in its own magazines, no
special notification of amendments to buyers of reprints will
be undertaken.
c. Guidelines and Notes
C 100 General
101 In an effort to aid the various parties involved in the
classification of ships, the Society has issued Guidelines and
Classification Notes giving practical information regarding
classification and other relevant regulations as well as guid-
ance in new fields of technology. These publications are
available. as a complementary volume to the rules, on a
purchase or subscription basis, and contains Guidelines and
.... ..
Guidelines and Classification Notes may also be purchased
individually.
102 Products which are to be approved for installation
onboard a vessel classed with the Society may be granted
type approval. The Society has issued Registers of Ap-
proved Manufacturers and Type Approved Products con-
taining the names of manufacturers and types of products
which have been granted approval. The approval is time
limited and updated lists are normally published annually.
C 200 Guidelines
201 Guidelines are publications which give information
and advice on technical and formal matters related to the
design, building, operating, maintenance and repair of ves-
sels and other objects, as .well as the services rendered by
the Society in this connection. Aspects conceming classi-
fication may be included in the publication.
A list of current Guidelines is given in Table Cl.
301 Classification Notes are publications which give prac-
tical information on classification of ships and other objects.
Examples of desigu solutions, calculation methods, specifi-
cations of test procedures, as well as acceptable repair
methods for some components are given as interpretations
of the more general rule requirements.
A list of current Classification Notes is given in Table C2.
401 Standards for Certification (previously Certification
Notes) are pUblications which contain principles, accept cri-
teria and practical information related to the Society's con-
sideration of objects, personnel, organizations, services and
operations, in connection with issuance of certificates or
declarations, which are not necessarily related to classifica-
tion.
A list of current Standards for Certification is given in Table
C3.
C 500 Registers of Approved Manufacturers and Type
Approved Products
501 Register of Approved Manufacturers, see Table C4.
502 Register of Type Approved Products, see Table C5.
503 The Registers are normally updated annually.
601 Recommended Practices (RP) are issued as a supple-
ment to DNV Rules for Classification or DNV Offshore
Standards and other recognised codes used by the industry.
RPs form a part of the technical basis for DNV classification
and verification services as well as offering DNV's inter-
pretation of good engineering practice for general use by the
industry. A list of Recommended Practices is given in Table
C6.
Table Cl Guidelines
(1) Design and Classification of Roll on/Roll off Ships, May
1980.
(2) Prevention of Hannful Vibration in Ships, July 1983.
(3) Internal Control. Mobile Offshore Units. (Owners' Control
System), September 1983.
5 Recommended Content of Information on Damage Control
in Dry Cargo Ships, November 1997.
(6) Condition Assessment Program, September 1991.
(7) Safety and Quality Management, May 1992.
9 Advisory Service Condition Survey Programme, July 1993
10 DNV Recommended Reporting Principles for Ultrasonic
Thickness Measurement of Hull Structures, September 1993
11 Renewal Survey, Survey Planning, September 1993
12 Crew Manning Offices, System Development, September
1996
"
13 Interference Between Trawl Gear and Pipelines, September
1997. .
14 Free spanning Pipelines, June 1998.
DET NORSKR VERITAS
.:)

)

'")
) )
MUles TOr Moone UTTsnore UnilS I .JUly LUUU
SECTION 4
SYSTEMATIC INDEX
A. Introduction
A 100 General
B. Systematic index
B 100 General
Contents
A. Introduction
A 100 General
101 This master index has been prepared for the complete
Rules for Mobile Offshore Units in the form of a systematic
index. The systematic index gives reference to sections and
subsections within each part/chapter.
B. Systematic index
B 100 General
101 The current systematic index is as follows:
PART 1 CHAPfER 1
GENERAL REGULATIONS
Sec.l Classification Principles
A. Defmitions
Sec.2 Scope of Rules and Class Notations
A. Scope of Rules
B. Class Notations
Retention of Class B .
C.
D.
E.
V aJidlfy and 'lSsuance 01 ihe C"rlmCit1t,
Suspension and Withdrawal of Class
Appeals
Sec.4 Legal Provisions
PART 2 CHAPfER 1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MATERIALS
A. Classification
PART 2 CHAPfER 2
METALLIC MATERIALS
A. Classification
PART 2 CHAPfER 3
WELDING
A. Classification
PART 3 CHAPfER 1
STRUCTURAL. DESIGN GENERAL
A. Classification
B. Defmitions
C. Documentation
Sec.2 Materials
A. General
B. Structural Steel
A. General
Sec.4 Design Loads
A. General
C. Flow Induce4 Forces
Sec.5 Overall Strength
A. General
D. Usage Factors and Pennissible Stresses
Sec.6 Plating and Stiffeners
A. General
B. Bending
C. Buckling
Sec.7 Girders and Girder Systems
A. General
C. Buckling
E. Girder Brackets
Sec.8 Weld Connections
A. General
A. General
D. Coating
Sec.l0 Fabrication
A. General
B. "Fabrication Planning
C. Material Identification, Cutting and Fonning
E. Repairs
PART 3 CHAPTER 2
SPECIAL DESIGNS, EQUIPMENT AND STABILITY
A. Classification
DET NORSKE VERITAS
Rules for Mobile Uffshore Units, July 2000
B. Defmitions
C. Documentation
Sec.2 Column-StabiIized Units
A. General
B. Air Gap
C. Design Loads
D. Overall Strength
E. Local Strength
F. Resistance Against Collision, Dropped Objects, Fire and
Explosion
Sec.3 Self-elevating Units
A. General
B. Air Gap
C. Design Loads
D. Overall Strength
E. Local Strength
F. Overturning Stability on the Sea Bed
G. Resistance Against Collision, Dropped Objects, Fire and
Explosion
Sec.4 Steering Arrangements
A. General
B. Materials
C. Arrangement and Details
D. Design Loads and Stress Analysis
E. Sternframes
F. Rudder Nozzles
G. Rudder Stocks and Pintles
H. Steering Gears
I. Testing
Sec.S Mooring and Towing Equipment
A. General
B. Structural Arrangement for Mooring Equipment
C. Equipment Specification
D. Anchors
E. Mooring Chain and Accessories
F. Steel Wire Ropes
G. Windlass and Chain Stoppers
H. Fairleads
I. Wire Bod Attachments
AffiiiigemenliifioDeV!ees for T6Wllig .
Sec.6 Stability
A. General
B. Assumptions and Criteria
Sec.7 Watertight Integrity, Freeboard and Weathertight Closing
Appliances
A. General
B. Watertight Integrity
C. Freeboard
D. Weathertight Closing Appliances
E. Ventilators and Air Pipes
F. Inlets, Discharges and Scuppers
G. Side Scuttles and Windows
H. Testing of Doors and Hatches
I. Closing Arrangements for Doors and Hatches
App.A: Supp!ementory Requirements of the Norwegian
Petroleum Directorate
B. Main Part
PART 4 CHAPTER I
MACHINERY AND SYSTEMS DESIGN, GENERAL
See.1 General Requirements
A. Classifica.tion
B. Definitions
C. Documentation
D. Signboards
Sec.2 Materials
A. General
B. Machinery Parts
C. Piping Systems
A. Arrangement
Sec.4 Platform Piping Systems
A. General
C. Ballast and Bilge Systems for Column Stabilized Units
D. Ballast and Bilge System for Self-elevating Units
below 60C (e.g. Helicopter Fuel)
A. General
B. Cooling Systems
C. Lubricating Oil Systems
D. Fuel Oil"Systems
F. Steam Systems
Sec.6 Pipes, Pumps, Valves, F!exib!eHoses and Detachable Pipe
Connections etc.
A. Pipes
B. Pumps
C. Valves
D. F!exib!e Hoses
Sec.7 Manufacture, Workmanship Inspection and Testing
JI.: .. _. . .... .. -
C. Pipe Bending
Sec.S Recommended Spare Parts
A. General
PART 4 CHAPTER 2
PROPULSION AND AUXILIARY MACHINERY
A. Classification
B. Documentation
C. Certification
D. Design and
F. Testing
G. Signboards
A. General
C. Arrangement
DET NORSKE VERITAS
,)
\'-_/
i)
.. .......,

)

...J
()
J
)
107 Each subsequent section in the chapter will begin at
the top of the page and will commence with a table of con-
tents for the section.
201 A combination of digits and letters is used for easy
reference. It is felt that this combination provides better vi-
sibility with regard to levels, and is easier to handle than a
five digit string, e.g. Pt.3 Ch.! Sec.! AIOO,
Tab!e B2 Numbering
Level Reference example Principle
Part Pt.3
Chapter Ch.1 always a number
Section Sec. I
Subsection A always a letter
Item 100 always a nwnber
202 Figures are numbered in increasing order within each
section, e.g. Fig.!, Fig.2 etc. The figure number and title
are given immediately under the figure.
203 Tables are numbered in increasing order within each
subsection, e.g. Table A!, Table A2 etc. The table number
and title are placed in the top left hand comer of the table.
204 Each chapter is written as self-contained as possible.
Cross references are generally given at the highest level
consistent with feasibility to find the subject matter:
a) From part to part, e.g. see Pt.2 Ch.1 (i.e. down to
chapter).
b) From chapter to chapter within the same part, e.g. see
Ch.! Sec.3 (i.e. down to section). Reference to sub-
section, e.g. Ch.! Sec.3 A may be used where necessary
for clarity.
c) Within a chapter,
e.g. section to section, see Sec.4 A!OO (i.e. down to
item)
e.g. within a section, see AI03
e.g. within a subsection, see 103.
B 300 Defmitions
301 Symbols and terms are in general defined at. one of
three levels in the rules. A definition given at higher level
is normally not repeated at a lower level, and references are
not made to the definitions at higher level. When a symbol
or term is defined elsewhere than in either of the three gen-
eral levels, proper reference is made.
302 The first (higher) level of definitions is given in a se-
parate subsection in Sec.! of the chapter in which the sym-
bol or term is used. This level defines symbols and terms
which are generally applied in the chapter or booklet.
303 The second (intermediate) level of definitions is given
in subsection A of the section in which the symbol or term
is used. This level normally defines symbols and terms oc-
curring in various connections within the section.
304 The third (lower) level of definitions is given in con-
nection with the formula or expression in which the symbol
or term is used. The definition is normally given imme-
diately following the formula and in any case within the
same item as the formula.
B 400 Units
401 The units generally used in the rules are the SI-units
(International System of Units). Commonly used base and
multiple units are given in Table B3. Some derived units and
Pt.O Cn.1 Sec.2 - Page 3
their conversion relation to the TS-units (Technical Metric
System of Units) are given in Tables B4 and B5, respec-
tively. When other units are used these are particularly
stated.
Table B3 Base or mu!tiple SI-units
Quantity Symbol Nam(!
Length m metre
cm centimetre
mm millimetre
Mass kg kilogram
t tonne
Time s second
Electric current A ampere
Table B4 Derived SI-units
Quantity Symbol Name/definition
Frequency Hz hertz - lis
Force N newton = kgm/s2
kN kilonewton
Pressure kN/m" kilopascal
bar =1 Pa
Stress N/mm' - MPa, megapascal
Bending moment Nm -J, joule
Torsional moment kNm
Work, energy J joule=Nm
Heat kJ kilojoule
Power kW kilowatt
Heat flow xate W watt
Temperature C centigrade
Tab!e BS SIlTS Conversion relation
Sf-unit TS-conversion relation
IN 0,1020 kp
I kN/m 0,0102 kp/cm
I N/mm 10,20 kp/cm
INm 0,1020 kpm
- IJ .. _" ....-.- ... 0, 1020.kpm. .. _-_.-

IkJ 0,2388 kcal
IkW 1,36 Hp
IW 0,860 kcallh
B 500 Index and tahles of contents
501 A master index has been prepared for the complete
rules in the form of a systematic index. This index is pre-
sented in Sec.4.
The systematic index gives reference to sections and sub-
sections within each part/chapter.
Th; master index will be updated as required when
are amended.
502 Two levels of table of contents are given at the be-
ginning of each chapter. A table of sections only is given
on the front page of the chapter, providing the starting page
number for each section within the chapter. A complete ta-
ble of sections, subsections and main items is also included
giving page number references at subsection level.
503 A table of subsections and main items is also included
at the beginning of each section. In these tables page num-
bering is not given.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
SECTION 2
INSTRUCTIONS TO USERS
Contents
A. Introduction
A 300 Ring binders
B. The Rules
B 100 Fonnat
B 300 Defmitions
B 400 Units
B 500 Index and tables of contents
B 600 Amendments
C. Guidelines and Notes
C 100 General
C 200 Guidelines
proved Products
D 100 General
D 200 NAUTICUS
D 300 PILOT
D 400 SESAM
D 600 DNV Exchange
E. Other DNV Rules
E 100 General
A. Introduction
101 The Introduction Part a is included as guidance for the
users and is not to be considered as a part of the rule re-
quirements.
201 This booklet gives brief instructions to the users and
include a systematic index as well as a list of corrections to
the rules.
202 Format and editorial details of the rules are described
in the following to facilitate easy use of the present edition
of the rules.
203 Guidelines and notes as defined and listed in C have
been worked out to aid the users of the rules. Guidelines and
Classification Notes are published as a companion volume
to the rules, while Standards for Certification and Registers
of Approved Manufacturers as well as Registers of Type
Approved Products are obtained separately upon request.
204 Computers play an ever increasing partin the evalu-
ation of technical feasibility, determination of scantlings and
plan approval. A summary of the NAUTICUS, PILOT and
SESAM computer systems is given in D to inform users
looking for computer power.
A 300 Ring binders
301 The introduction booklets and the rules are published
in one single ring binder.
302 The mechanism in the binder provides for two stages
of opening. The half open position is recommended for
general reading and use of the rules. The full open position
should only be used for insertion of new chapters or removal
of old chapters. Every effort has been made to deliver a high
quality binder. Defective binders may be retomed to the
Society for a free replacement. Additional binders for
working files, historical files, etc., may be supplied at a
nominal charge.
B. The Rules
B 100 Fonnat
101 The Rules for Classification of Mobile Offshore Units
are published as a ring binder with seven parts (Pt.), each
consisting of chapters (Ch.) appearing as separate booklets.
The seven parts are listed in Table B1.
Table Bl Format of the Rules
Pt. I Regulations
Pt.2 Materials and Welding
Pt.3 Structures and Equipment - Main Class
Pt.4 Machinery and Systems - Main Class
Pt.5 Special Service and Type - Additional Class
Pt.6 Special Equipment and Systems - Additional Class
Pt.7 Units in Operation
Parts I and 2 contain general regulations, parts 3 to 6 cover
newbuilding requirements and part 7 deals with units in op-
eration.
A list of updated rule chapters is printed in Sec. I of this
booklet.
102 Relevant reqnirements in Pt.l to 4 are to be satisfied
for the assignment of main class. The requirements stated in
Pt.5 to 6 are applicable to additional class and are in general
complete for the relevant notation. This implies that re-
quirements regarding e.g. electrical installations may be
found in Pt.4, 5 or 6 depending on the class notation in
question.
103 The introduction booklet giving current status of the
rules in the form of dates relevant to each chapter will be
issued with each set of amendments. It is important that the
users check that the date on the front page of the relevant
rule chapter corresponds with that given in Section I of the
latest introduction booklet. Amendments to the rules will
normally be published twice yeady, in January and in July.
104 The front page of each chapter or booklet has a stan-
dard format which should be self-explanatory.
105 The chauges introduced in the latest edition of each
chapter will be stated on the page immediately after the front
page.
106 The first section in each chapter will normally be
termed General Requirements and will contain subsections
covering such aspects as application of the rules, definitions
of symbols and terms, list of documentation etc.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
\')
:)
:J

)
'J
F. Testing Onboard
Sec.3 Steam Turbines
A. General
Sec.4 Gas Turbines
A. General
A. General
E. Monitoring
Sec.6 Shaft.ing and Vibrations
A. General
E. Monitoring
Sec.7 Propellers
A. General
D. Scantlings
F. Testing Onboard
Sec.8 Thrusters
A. General
C. Thruster and General Layout
Sec.9 Turbochargers
A. General
C. Arrangement
D. Design
It conii'oliind"Monitonng
Sec.l0 Compressors
A. General
Sec.ll Jacking Machinery
A. General
E. Testing Onboard
PART 4 CHAPTER 3
BOILERS, PRESSURE VESSELS, THERMAL-OIL
INSTALLATIONS AND INCINERATORS
A. Classification
B. Defmitions
C. Documentation
D. Seamless Gas Cylinders
E. Signboards
Sec.2 Materials
A. Material Requirements
Sec.3 Arrangement
A. Boilers and Pressure Vessels
B. Thennal-Oil Insta1lations
C. Incinerators
D. Exhaust Gas Boiler/Economisers
Sec.4 General Design Requirements
A. General
B. Design Criteria
C. Scantlings of Shells and Flat and Dished Ends
D. Openings and Compensations
E. Covers for Inspection Openings and Manholes
F. Heat Exchanger Tubes
Sec.S Particular Design Requirements for Boilers
A. Shells and Headers of Cylindrical Sections
B. Headers of Rectangular or Irregular Sections
C. Dished Ends
D. Flat Plates Supported by Stays
E. Furnaces and Fireboxes of Cylindrical Fonn, Uptakes,
Cross-tubes and 0 gee Rings
F. Stays
G. Tubes
H. Access and Inspection Openings
Sec.6 Mountings and Fittings
A. General
B. Safety Valves
C. Stop Valves and Check Valves
D. Blow Down Valves and Test Valves for Boiler Water
E. Gauges
Sec.7 Instrumentation and Automation
A. General
B. Boilers
C. Exhaust Gas Boilers/Economisers
D. Water Heaters
E. Thennal-oil Heaters
F. Incinerators
A. Manufacture
B.
C. Heat treatment
D. Testing
E. Marking
App.A: Types and Minimum Dimensions of the Inspection
Openings in Boilers and Pressure Vessels
A. Defmitions and Dimensions
PART 4 CHAPTER 4
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS
A. Classification
B. Definitions
C. Documentation
D. Signboards
A. Maximum Voltages, Voltage and Frequency Variations
B. Capacity and Arrangement of Generators and Power Convertors
C. Emergency Source of Power and Emergency Installation
D. Environmental Conditions
E. Electrical Equipment in Gas-dangerous Areas
F. Equipment
G. Earthing of Non-Current-Carrying Parts
H. Electromagnetic Noise and Interference
Sec.3 System Design
A. Supply Systems
DET NORSKE VERITAS
Rules for Mobile Offshore Units, 'July 2000
B. Stationary Accumulator Batteries. Electric Starting
Arrangements for Auxiliary Engines. Charging stations for
Battery Trucks
C. Distribution
D. Circuit Protection
E. Control Gear for Motors and other Consumers
F. Choice of Cable Types
G. Earthing
H. Equipment and Enclosures
I. Insulating Materials
J. Marking
Sec.4 Switchgear and Control Gear Assemblies
A. Main and Emergency Switchboards
B. Distribution Switchboard
C. Enclosures for Motor Control Gear
D. Testing and Certification
Sec.5 Rotating Machines
A. Requirements Common to Generators and Motors
B. Additional Requirements to Generators
Sec.6 Static Convertors
A. Transfonners
B. Static Convertors with Semiconductors
Sec.7 Cables
A. Construction
B. Approval
Sec.8 Miscellaneous Equipment
A. Enclosures
B. Switchgear. Control Gear
C. Fuse-gear
D. Socket-outlets
E. Lampholders
F. Luminaires
G. Heating Equipment
H. Explosion-Protected Equipment
I. Marking
Sec.9 Installation and Testing
A. Principles
B. Essential and Important Equipment

D. Testing
Sec.l0 A.C. Supply Systems above 1 kV to and including 11
kV
. C. System Design
D. Switchgear and Controlgear Assemblies
E. Rotating Machines
F. Static Convertors
G. Cables, Construction and Testing
H. Miscellaneous Equipment
I. Installation and Testing
Sec.11 Electric Propulsion
C. Electrical System Design
D. Control System Design
E. Tests
PART 4 CHAPI'ER 5
INSTRUMENTATION AND AUTOMATION
A. Classification
B. Documentation
C. Design Principles
D. Pneumatic and Hydraulic Equipment
PART 4 CHAPTER 6
F1RE PROTECTION, DETECTION AND EXTINCTION
A. Classification
B. Defmitions
C. Documentation
Sec.2 Flre Detection and Fire Fighting
A. General
B. Fire Water System
D. Fire Detection Systems
E. Firemen's Outfit and Breathing Apparatus
F. Arrangements in Machinery and Working Spaces
G. Provisions for Helicopter Facilities
H. Storage of Gas Cylinders
I. Miscellaneous
Sec.3 Structural Fire Protection
A. General
B. Fire Integrity
PART 5 CHAPTER 1
UNITS FOR TRANSFER AND/OR OPERATION IN ICE
Sec.l Units for Occasional Transit and/or Operation in First
Year Ice Conditions. Tentative Rules
A. Classification
B. Defmitions
C. Documentation
D. Ice Strengthening
PART 5 CHAPTER 2
ACCOMMODATION UNITS AND OTHER OFFSHORE
SUPPORT UNITS
A. Classification
B. Defmitions
C. Documentation
Sec.2 Accommodation Units
A, Gonoral
D. Machinery and Systems
Sec.3 Fire Fighters
A. General
C. Self-Protection of the Unit. (Class Notation I)
D. Water Monitor System
E. Foam Monitor System. (Class Notation' III)
F. Pumps and Piping
G. Mobile Fire Fighting Equipment
H. Fireman's Outfit
Sec.4 Crane Units
A. General
D. Testing
PART 5 CHAPTER 3
DRILLING UNITS AND OTHER UNITS FOR OFFSHORE
OPERATIONS
A. Classification
B. Defmitions
DEI" NORSKE VERITAS
\)
, rJ
'I

J
(J
)
Contents
SECTION 1
CURRENT RULE BOOKLETS
101 The following list covers the current rule booklets:
PART 0
Chapter 1
PART 1
Chapter I
PART 2
Chapter I
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
PART 3
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
PART 4
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
PARTS
Chapter I
{;hanl!<r Z .
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
PART 6
Chapter I
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
Chapter 7
Chapter 8
PART 7
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
INTRODUCTION
User Infonnation. Amendments and Index ........................................... .. . ......................... July 2000
REGULATIONS
General Regulations ........... . ................................................................ July 1999
General Requirements for Materials (See Rules for Classification of Ships, Pt.2 Ch.1, January 1993) ......... ..
Metallic Materials (See Rules for Classification of Ships, Pt.2 Ch.2, January 1996) ..................... .
Welding (See Rules for Classification of Ships, Pt.2 Ch.3, January 1996) ................. .
STRUCTURES AND EQUIPMENT - MAIN CLASS
January 1996
January 1996
January 1996
Structural Design, General ...................................................................................................... January 1998
Special Designs, Equipment and Stability ..................................................................................... January 1998
MACHINERY AND SYSTEMS MAIN CLASS
Machinery and Systems Design, General ......................................................................................... July 1998
Propulsion and Auxiliary Machinery .......................................................................................... January 1996
Boilers, Pressure Vessels, Thermal-Oil Installations and Incinerators ....................................................... July 1998
Electrical Installations ............................................................................................................ January 1994
Instrumentation and Automation ................................................................................................ January 1999
Fire Protection, Detection and Extinction ......................................................................................... July 1992
SPECIAL SERVICE AND TYPE ADDITIONAL CLASS
Units for Transit and/or Operation in Ice ......................................................................................... July 1985
, """", ,;" ,., It I. t ", r"., rl " ,.; I ".f f'_
Drilling Units and other Units for Offshore Operations ........................................................................ July 1998
Oil Production and Storage Units ............................................................................................... January 1996
Offshore Loading Buoys ............................................................................................................. July 1990
SPECIAL EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS ADDITIONAL CLASS
Miscellaneous Notations ..................................................................................................... ... January 1998
Position Mooring (POSMOOR) ................................................................................................ January 1996
Periodically Unattended Machinery Space (EO) .......................................................................... September 1982
Additional Fire Protection (F-AM) ............................................................................................. January 1985
Drilling Plant (DRILL) ........................................................................................................... January 1993
Oil Production Plant .............................................................................................................. January 1994
Dynamic Positioning Systems ....................................................................................................... July 1989
Integrated Computer Systems (leS) ...................................................................................... : .... January 1999
UNITS IN OPERATION
General Requirements ................................................................................................................ July 1994
Periodical Survey Requirements .................................................................................................... July 1999
(pending)
(pending)
Management of Safety and Environmental Protection (SEP) .............................................................. January 1998
DEI" NORSKE VERITAS
,
\') .')
,"J
"

')

)

C. Documentation
Sec.2 Drilling Units
A. General
B. Struciural Arrangement and Strength
D. Mooring and Towing Equipment
E. Drilling Plant, Equipment, Structures and Systems (Additional
Class Notation: DRILL or DRILL (Nil
F. Pumping and Piping Arrangement
G. Protection against Fire and Explosion
H. Electrical Installations in Hazardous Areas
I. Machinery Installations in Hazardous Areas
J. Safety Features
Sec.3 Pipe Laying Units
A. General
B, Structural Arrangement and Strength
D. Pipe Laying Equipment and Installation
Sec.4 Dredgers
A. General
PART 5 CHAPTER 4
OIL PRODUCTION AND STORAGE UNITS
A. Classification
B. Defmitions
C. Documentation
D. Accessibility and Facilities for SUIVeys on Location
E. Commissioning Testing
Sec.2 Oil Production Facilities and Arrangement of Unit
A. General
B. .Basic Requirements
A. General
"A: ____ __ _
Sec.5 Machinery and Piping Arrangement
A. General
B. Combustion Equipment and Combustion Engines
C. Use of Gas and Crude Oil for Auxiliary Boilers and Turbines
D. Piping Arrangement
Sec.6 Fire Protection and Extinction
A. General
B. Structural Fire Protection
C. Fire Fighting
A. General
Sec.8 Instrumentation and Control Systems
A. General
Sec.9 Materials
,A. General
Sec.l0 Stability and Floatability
A. General
Petroleum Dir"!'lOrate
B. Supplementary Requirementa
Rules for Mobile Offshore Units" July 2000
PART 5 CHAPTER 5
OFFSHORE LOADING BUOYS
A. Application
B. Defmitions
C, Recognized Codes and Standards
E. Documentation
F, Spare Parta
G. Accessibility and Facilities for Surveys on Location
Sec.2 Loading/Unloading Facilities and Arrangements
A, General
B. Environment
C. Arnmgements
D. Marking and Warning Signboards
E. Fluid Transfer Systems
F. Equipment Design
A. General
A. Classification
B. Materia1s and Structural Categorization
C. Design Loads
D. Loading Conditions
E. Local Strength
Sec.5 Anchoring and Mooring
A. General
B. Anchoring
C. Mooring
Sec.6 Stability and Watertight Integrity
A. Classification
B. Intact Stability
C. Damage Stability
Sec.7 Piping, Equipm"'lt and Loading Hoses
A. General
B. Piping
C. Mechanical Equipment
D: -
A. General
A. General
Sec.l0 Fire Safety
A. General
B. Fire Control and Extinction
Sec.11 Control Systems
A. General
C. -,Gas Detection System
D. Alarm System
Sec.12 Manufacture, Sea Transport and Commissioning
A, General
B. Manufacture of Equipment and Piping
C. Installation and Commissioning
App.A: Supplementary R"'l,!irements of the Norwegian
Petroleum Directorate (NPD)
A. General
-B. Structural Strength
C. Anchoring and Riser System
PART 6 CHAPTER 1
DEf NORSKE VERITAS
MISCELLANEOUS NOTATIONS
A. Classification
B. Definitions
C. Documentation
Sec.2 Helicopter Decks
A. General
B. Design Loads
C. Strength Requirements
Sec.3 Cranes
A. General
B. Design Loads
C. Overturning and Sliding
D. Testing
E. Stsbility
Sec.4 Diving Systems
A. General
B. Position Keeping
C. Arrangement
D. Electrical Systems
E. Fire Prevention, Detection and Extinction
F. Sanitsry Systems for Class II SF and III SF Diving Systems
G. Testing
H. Stability and Floatability
PART 6 CHAPTER 2
POSITION MOORING (POSMOOR)
A. Classification
B. Documentation
C. Structural Arrangement for Mooring Equipment
Sec.2 Environmental Conditions and Loads
A. Environmental Conditions
B. Environmental Loads
Sec.3 MOOring System Analysis
A. Method
B. Operation Conditions
C. Safety Factors and Premises
8";':4 Thruster AssiSted Mooring System
A. Classification
B. System Requirements
Sec.S Mooring Equipment
A. Anchors
B. Anchor Lines
C. Fairleads
D. Windlasses, Winches and Stoppers
E. Tension Measuring Equipment
Sec.6 TeSts
A. Test of Windlass/Winch
. B. Test of TA and ATA Systems
App.A: Supplementary R"'Iuirements of the Norwegian
Maritime Directorate (NMD) and the Norwegian Petroleum
Directorate (NPD)
A. General
B, Main Part
PART 6 CHAPTER 3
PERIODICALLY UNATTENDED MACIDNERY SPACE
(EO)
Sec. 1 General R"'Iuirements
A. Classification
B. Defmitions
C. Documentation
D. Sigoboards
Sec.2 System Arrangement
A. General
B. Automatic Control System
C. A1arm System
D. Safety System
E. Bridge Control of Propulsion Machinery
F. Communication System
G. Computer Based Systems
Sec.3 Extent of Monitoring and General R"'Iuirements
A. Monitoring
B. Arrangeme!lt on the Bridge
C. Arrangement in the Engine Room
D. Electric Power Supply
Sec.4 Precautions Against Fire
A. Shielding
B. Fire Detection
C. Fire Alann System
D. Remote Control
Sec.5 Testing
A. General
B. Testing of Remote Control System
C. Blackoui Test
D. Testing of Boiler Plant
PART 6 CHAPTER 4
ADDITIONAL FIRE PROTECTION (F-AM)
A. Classification
B. Defmitions
C. Documentation
D. Sigoboards
Sec.2 Acrommodation
A. General
B. Fire Protection
D. Fire Instruction
Sec.3 Machinery Spaces
A,o Goo.ra1
B. Oil Systems
C. Ventilation
D. Fire Pumps
E. Main Extinguishing System
F. Halon Total Flooding Extinguishing System
G. High-Expansion Foam Extinguishing System
H. Local Extinguishing Systems
1. Hose Stations
J. Dry Powder Extinguishers
K. Fireman' s Outfit
PART 6 CHAPTER S
DRILLING PLANT (DRILL)
Sec.l General
A. Application
B. Deftnitions
C. Recognized COdes
D. System Design Review
E. Equipment Certiftcation
F. Documentation
Sec.2 Materials
A. General
C. Corrosion
D. Material Certificates
DET NORSKE VERITAS
CONTENTS
SEC. 1 CURRENT RULE BOOKLETS .................... 1 proved Products ........ .
4
............ 4
A. Current Rule Booklets .......................................... 1
A 100 Current rule booklets..................................... I
D. Computer Programs ............................................ 6
D 100 General..................................... ................ 6
SEC. 2 INSTRUCTIONS TO USERS .............. 2
D 200 NAUTlCUS............................. .................. 6
D 300 PILOT ................................. : .................... 6
A. Introduction ....................................................... 2
A 100 Introduction booklet ...................................... 2
A 200 Present booklet ............................................ 2
D 400 SESAM................................... .................. 6
D 500 DNV Electronic Rule Book ......... .................... 7
D 600 DNV Exchange ............................... ............ 7
A 300 Ring binders ............................................... 2
E. Other DNv Rules . ............... ......... ......... ..... 7
E 100 General....................... .. ............... .. ........... 7
B. The Rules .......................................................... 2
B 100 Format ...................................................... 2 SEC. 3 AMENDMENTS AND CORRECTIONS ... 8
B 200 Numbering and cross references ....................... 3
B 300 Definitions............ ........................ ............. 3
B 400 Units........................................................ 3
A. Introduction ... ............ ........... ... ........ 8
A 100 General..................... .... .... ....................... . 8
,')
,---_/
~
B 500 Index and tables of contents ............................ 3
B 600 Amendments.. .. .... ...... ........................ ....... .. 4
B 700 Reprints from the rules .................................. 4
C. Guidelines and Notes ............................................ 4
B. Amendments and Corrections ................ '" .. .. 8
B 100 General......... ............................................ 8
SEC. 4 SYSTEMATIC INDEX ............................... 21
C 100 General...................................... ............... 4
A. Introduction .... ........... ............... 21
C 200 Guidelines..... .. .. ........ ...... ........................... 4
A 100 General.................................................... 21
C 300 Classiftcation Notes .. .............. ...................... 4
J
{ ~ )
C 400 Standards for Certification .............................. 4
B. Systematic index ................................................ 21
B 100 General..................................... ............... 21
.)
J
(,)
,-,
0 )
. ~
()
The following rule chapter has been revised aod updated as of. .
1 July 2000:
Pt.O Ch.l User lnfonnation, Amendments and Index

Conunents to the Rules may be sent bye-mail tomi203@dnv.com.
some corrections and clarifications are given
in Sec.3 C?f this chapter.
For subscription orders or information about sUbscription terms, please use distribution@tinv.com.
C> Det Norske Veritas
Computer Typesetting by Division Technology and Products, Det Norske Veritas
Printed in Norway by Det Norske Veritas July 2000 .
7.00.2500

tha muimum cOfTlponution shan novcr exceed USD 2 million. .
ahlll meln the Foundation Oet Norake Veritas IS well as In its subsidilries, directors, officers, employees, agents snd sny other acting on behalf

',;'
,

':J

A. Principal Requirements
Sec.4 Systems
A. General
B. Blowout Prevention System
C. Marine Riser System
D. Heave Compensation and Tensioning System
E. Hoisting, Rotating and Pipe Handling System
F. Bulk Storage, Drilling Fluid Ciroulation and Cementing System
G. Well Test and Flare System
Sec.S Structural and Mechaoical Components
A. General
B. Specific Component Requirements
Sec.6 Piping
A. General
B. Piping Design
C. Supporting Elements
Sec.7 Manufacture, Workmaoship aod Testing
A. General
B. Manufacture
C. Nondestructive Examination (NDE)
D. Testing
petroleum Directorate (NPD) and the Norwegiao Maritime
Directorate (NMD)
A. General
C. Systems
App.B: Supplementary Requirements of the U.K. Health and
Safety Executive (HSE)
A. General
B. Materials
C. Systems
D. Piping
PART 6 CHAPTER 6
OIL PRODUCTION PLANT
Sec.l General
A. Aroli!ll!lilln
B. Defmitions
C. Recognised Codes and Standards
E. Documentation
A. General
C. Material Certificates
D. Corrosion Protection
E. Erosion
A. General
B. Systems
Sec.4 Production, Injection and Utility Systems
A. General
B. Safety Systems
C. Relief, Depressurising and Disposal Systems
Sec.S Piping
A. General
Sec.6 Equipment
A. General
Sec.7 Riser Systems
A. General
Sec.8 Structures
A. General
A. General
Sec.IO Instrumentation and Control Systems
A. General
s.c.ll FIre Protection aod Extinction
A. General
Sec.U Maoufacture, Workmanship and Testing
A. General
B. Manufacture
C. Non-destructive Examination (NDE)
D. Testing
petroleum Directorate (NPD)
A. Requirements of Appendix A
App.B: Supplementary Requirements of Health and Safety
Executive (HSE)
A. Requirements of Appendix B
PART 6 CHAPTER 7
DYNAMIC POSITIONING SYSTEMS
A. The Rules
B. Defmitions
C. Grouping of Dynamic Positioning Systems
D. Classification
E. Documentation
F. DP-Systems not built under the Survey of the Society
G. Pian Approval and Survey during Construction
H. Survey and -Test upon Completion
I. Surveys for Maintenance of Class
Sec.2 General Design
A. Rule Application
B. Defmitions
Ci - FODition -Hoiding-Far.fonnnno.
D. Redundancy and Independence
E. System Arrangement
Sec.3 Controller and Measuring System
A. System Arrangement
B. Measuring System
C. Sensors
D. Display Units
E. Monitoring
F. Internal Communication
Sec.4 Thrusters
A. General
Sec.S Power Systems
A. Scope of Classification
B. Electric Power System
Sec.6 Environmental Regularity"Numbers, ERN
A. Concept Description
Sec.7 Spare Parts
A. Spare Parts
PART 6 CHAPTER 8
INTEGRATED COMPUTER SYSTEMS (leS)
A. Classification
B. Defmitions
DEI" NORSKE VERITAS
Rules for Mobile Offshore Units. -.July 2000
C. The integration Process
D. Documentation
E. Testing at Manufacturer
F. Testing Onboard
Sec.2 System Design
A. Design Principles
B. Data Communication Network
C. Work Stations
D. Data Communication Protocol
Sec.3 Qualifications and Operational Procedures
A. General
B. Qualifications
PART 7 CHAPTER 1
Sec.l Application of Rules
A. General
B. Application of the Rules
Sec.2 Scope of Rules for Units in Operation
A. Scope of Mandatory Rules
PART 7 CHAPTER 2
PERIODICAL SURVEY REQUIREMENTS
A. Survey Intervals and Conditions
B. Alternative SUlVey Arrangements
C. Provisions for Hull Surveys
D. Proeedures for Class Related Services
Sec.2 Survey Extent - Main Class
A. Definitions
B. Annual Survey
C. Intermediate Survey
D. Renewal Survey
E. Renewal Survey - Machinery and Safety Systems
F. Tailshaft Survey
G. Thrusters for PropUlsion
H. Boiler and Steam Generator Survey
I. Thennal. Oil Heater Survey
Survey EJrtn&t. ,Allllitinnal C,lass. S[lI'l'jal Srrvir .. amI
Type Notations
A. Accommodation Unit
B. Drilling Units
C. Fire Fighters
D. Offshore Loading Buoy
E. Oil Production Units
F. Support Unit and Support Unit (N)
Sec.4 Survey Extent - Additional Class. Special Equipment and
Systems Notations
A. Crane
B. Drilling Plant
C. Drilling Derrick
D. Diving Systems
E. Dynamic Postioning System
F. Periodically Unattended Machinery Space and Machinery
Centralized Operated
G. Additional Fire Protection
H. Helicopter Deck
I. Integrated Computer Systems
J. Position Mooring Equipment
K. Production Plant
PART 7 CHAPTER 5
MANAGEMENT OF SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENTAL
PROTECTION (SEP)
Sec. 1 Safety and Environmental Protection (SEP)
Classification
A. General
B. Scope and Application
C. Classification and Notation
D. Classification
Sec. 2 Safety and Environmental Protection (SEP) Management
System
A. Leadership and Administration
B. Leadership Training
C. Planned Inspection and Maintenance
D. Critical Operation and Condition Analysis and Controls
E. Incidents
F. Emergency Preparedness
G. Safety Rules and Work Pennits
H. Knowledge and Skill Training
I. Personal Protective Equipment
J. Occupational Health and Hygiene
K. SEP Management System Review and Evaluation
LI
N!<W-gyik!i!!g. M!\i9[ RaJ;ljn .J!m!
Acquisitions
M. Personal Communication
N. Safety Meetings
O. Personnel Recruitment and Orientation
P. Purchasing and Sub-Contractor Management
DET NORSKE VERITAS
'j

.,.j
I

.",
)
- \

,---,
',)
i

C-j
-..../
1
Li6rary 2 1 AUG 2002
10/ o/ung cr au
RULES FOR
CLASSIFICATION OF
iQ)NV
PART 0 CHAPTER 1
-", "'". n; K:'ft:- .
': c', u; ,
.. '

AMENDMENTS AND INDEX
JULY 2000
SECTIONS
INTRODUCTION
PAGE
1 Current Rule Booklets ......................................................................................... 1
2 Instructions to Users ........................................................................................... 2
3 Amendments and Corrections ................................................................................ 8
4 Systematic Index ............................................................................................... 21
DET NORSKE VERITAS
Veritasveien I. N-1322 Hovik. Norway Tel.: +4767579900 Fax: +47675799 11
i) I)

PART 1 CHAPTER 1
Lwrary z 1 AUll 2U02
W 0/ o/ung CJ au
RULES FOR
CLASSIFICATION OF

"IE
' n r' .
'".:':'_ '1.\). ' .. .'::_!._
,.' ' ........... '" . ..' -",' ' .. 3 ,
-.,., ---'.
REGULATIONS
GENERAL REGULATIONS
J ") JULY 1999
SECTIONS PAGE
1 Classification Principles ....................................................................................... 1
2 Scope of Rules and Class Notations ........................................................................ 4
3 Classification Procedure ...................................................................................... 7
4 Legal Provisions ............................................................................................... 13
")")
.) ')' . -
.
I
I
DET NORSKE VERITAS
Veritasveien 1, N-1322 HIiOVik, Norway TeL: +4767579900 Fax: +47675799 11
General
The present edition of the Rules includes amendments and additions
decided by the Board in June 1999 and supersedes the JanuarY 1999
edition of the same chapter. The rule changes come into force on 1
JanuarY 2000.
This chapter is valid until superseded by a revised chapter. Sup-
plements will not be issued except for an updated list of corrections
presented in Pt.O Ch.l Sec.3. Pt.O Ch.l is nonnally revised in
JsnuarY snd July each year.. ,
Revised chapters will be forwarded to all .subscribers to the Rules.
Buyers of reprints are advised to check the updated list of Rule
chapters printed in Pt.O Ch.l Sec.! to ensure that the chapter is
current.
Main changes
Sec. 1 Classification Principles
- Inthe Rules for the Classification of Ships, a Table Bl was in-
cluded in the JanuarY 1996 issue, based on lACS Procedural
Requirement No.3, 1996 Rev.!. It specifies that the yard shsll
automatically receive approved "as carried out" drawings for
"Newbuildings". This is fonnally correct, but only for yard-
related drawings (e.g. structure and system drawings). Fabri-
cation drawings for components (e.g. boilers or engines),
however, are the property of the component manufacturer. Ac-
Comments to the Rules may be sent bye-mail todtp203@dnv.com.
, .:, :.
cOIdingly "as carried out" drawings for these (components)
should not be distributed to the yard or other third party without
the knowledge and acceptance of the manufacturer (or the holder
of the copyright). In order to avoid future misunderstandings
Table B1 and the revised wording from the Rules for Classi-
fication of Ships is included in B600 of the Rules for Classi-
fication of MOU, also.
- To limit potential problems related to the Y2K issue, an addi-
tional disclaimer has been included in item B702.
- lACS has issued new procedural requirements for service sup-
pliers in Unified Requirement Z17. To implement the changes,
items A203 and A204 are added and item A401 is expanded.
- A new Internet sexvice, DNV Exchange Basic, will be launched
and implemented into the market during 1999. This sexvice will
replace the 4-monthly and the annual suxvey and certificate sta-
tus, currently sent to the owner. This means that the Society will
no longer provide the survey and certificate status. on a
4-monthly basis and it will be the responsibility of the owners
to obtain the infonnation from the DNV Internet website. The
amended text appears in item B902.
Corrections and Clarifications
Besides the above stated rule changes, some corrections and clar-
ifications have been made in the rule wording in compliance with
current interpretations and the updating of other chapters of the
Rules.
For subscription orders or infonnation about subscription tenns, please use distribution@dnv.com.
Comprehensive infonnation about DNV and the Society'S services is found at the Web site http://www.dnv.com
Det Norske Veritas AS
Computer Typesetting by Division Technology and Products, Det Norske Veritas AS
Printed in Norway by Det Norske Veritas AS July 1999
7.99.2500
If any person auffera loss or damage which is proved to have been caused by any negligent act or omission of Det Norske Veritas, then Det Norske Verit81!l shall pay compensation to
such person for his proved direct loss or damage. However, the compensation shall not exceed an amount equal to ten times the fee charged for the service in question, provided that
the maximum compensation shall never exceed USD 2 million. "
In this provision -Det Norske Veritas- shall mean the Foundation Det Norske Verit81!l IS well as all ita slbsldi.ries, directors, officers, employees, agents and any other acting on behalf
of Det Norske Veritas. .
\ ~
,:)
")
=J
iJ
.':)
J
~
I,J
~
-,
~
,J
- - - - -- - - - - -- - -- - - - - - - - - - --------- - - - - - - -- - - -- --- - -- - -
8 ')
'J ()
2
CONTENTS
SEC. 1 CLASSIFICATION PRINCIPLES . 1
A. Def"mitions .......... .... .. 1
A 100 Rules........................................................ 1
A 200 Terminology. ....................................... ....... 1
B. The Classification Concept ...... ... ....... 1
B 100 Geneml...... ...... .. ....................................... 1
B 200 Entering into force and application of rules .......... 2
B 300 Basis for assignment of class ........................... 2
B 400 Basis for maintenance of class .......................... 2
B 500 Documentation........... ...... .................. .. ....... 2
B 600 Disclosure of information ............................... 3
B 700 Limitation of the Society's responsibility............. 3
SEC.2 SCOPE OF RULES AND CLASS NOTATIONS 4
A. Scope of Rules ......... .... . .......... ............. 4
A 100 General..................................................... 4
A 200 Rule parts .................................................. 4
A 300 Rule particulars ........................................... 4
B. Class Notations ...................................... ............. 5
B 100 General...... ........................ ...... ... .............. 5
B 200 Construction symbols .................................... 5
B 300 Main character of class .................................. 5
B 400 Basic design notations .................... :............... 5
B 500 Service restrictions ....................................... 5
B 600 Additional class: Service and type notations ......... 5
B 700 Additional class: Equipment and systems notations 6
B 800 Additional Class: Special features notations.......... 6
SEC. 3 CLASSIFICATION PROCEDURE ................ 7
A. Assignment of Class ...................................... ....... 7
A 100 Request for classification ................... ............. 7
A 200 Requirements for workshops and yards .............. 7
A 300 Requirements for manufacturers ....................... 7
A 400 Requirements for suppliers of services . .............. 7
A 500 Plan approval .............................................. 7
A 600 Survey............................. ........ ... .. ............ 8
A 700 Functional teSting ......................................... 8
A 800 Certification of materials, components and equipment 8
A 900 Acceptance of control by National Authorities ...... 9,
A 1000 Manufacturing Survey Arrangement................... 9
A llOO Type approval ............................................. 9
A 1200 Certificate of interim class .............................. 9
A 1300 Classification certificate..... ............................. 9
A 1400 Appendix.to the classification certificate .............. 9
A 1500 Entry in the Register of vessels classed with DNVlI- 9
B. Retention of Class .............................................. 10
B 100 General ................. ................................... 10
B 200 Periodical and renewal surveys ........................ 10
B 300 Survey of damage........................................ 10
B 400 Survey of repairs ........................................ 10
B 500 Procedures for maintenance............................ 10
B 600 Conversions and alterations ............................ 10
B 700 Change of ownership .................................... 10
B 800 Conditions of Class and Memoranda .......... ....... 10
B 900 Survey reports and survey status ...................... II
C. Validity and Issuance of the Classification Certificate 11
C 100 Validity of the certificate. ... .............. .......... ... II
C 200 Issuance of certificate ................................... 11
D. Suspension and Withdrawal of Class ...................... 11
D 100 General............. .............. .. ............. .. ........ II
D 200 Suspension of class ...................................... 11
D 300 Withdrawal of class .... ............ ...... ........ ....... II
D 400 Reclassification ........................................... 12
E. Appeals ............................................................ 12
E 100 Decisions taken by the Society ........................ 12
SEC. 4 LEGAL PROVISIONS ........................ ....... 13
A 100 Limited liability
A 200 Governing law
A 300 Venue
..................................... 13
13
13
13
.. ")
..
~ ~
f) ..
) /)
Pt.1 Ch.1 Sec.4 - Page 13
SECTION 4
LEGAL PROVISIONS
Contents
A 200 Governing law
A 300 Venue
101 If any person suffers loss or damage which is proved
to have been caused by any negligent act or omission of Det
Norske Veritas, then Det Norske Veritas shall pay compen-
sation to such person for his proved direct loss or damage.
However, the compensation shall not exceed an amount
equal to ten times the fee charged for the service io question,
provided that the maximum compensation shall never exceed
USD 2 million.
In this provision "Det Norske Veritas" shall mean the
Foundation Det Norske Veritas as well as all its subsidiaries,
directors, officers, employees, agents and any other actiog
on behalf of Det Norske Veritas.
A 200 Governing law
201 These Rules, the classification of the unit and the re-
lationship between the Society and other parties shall be
governed by Norwegian law.
A 300 Venue
301 Any dispute arisiog io relation to or as a consequence
of these Rules shall only be resolved by the courts of Nor-
way, the Municipal Court of Oslo beiog the proper venue.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
Page 12 - Pt.1 Ch.1 Sec.3
unit's previous owners. In special cases a shorter notice may
be given.
30S Where a withdrawal of class has come into effect the
Society will:
- notify the owner in writing
- notify the proper authorities in the country where the unit
is registered
- make an entry to this effect in the first issue of the
<Register of vessels classed with DNV. or its supple-
ment.
- make the information available to underwriters.
D 400 Reclassification
401 If the outstanding surveys leading to class suspension
as given in 201 and 202 or required repairs as given in 203
are carried out within a specified time, the class will be
reinstated ""d the existing classification certificate retains its
validity.
402 In all other cases than that given in 40 I, and if the
circumstances leading to withdrawal of class no longer ex-
ists' a unit's class may only be reinstated based upon a
written request from the owner. The survey extent will in
such instances be dependent upon the unit's classification
status at the time of suspension or withdrawal.
403 When the surveyor is satisfied that the applicable re-
quirements given in 402 have been met, he will issue a cer-
tificate of interim class which will remain valid until the
administration of the Society has confirmed the class and
issued the classification certificate.
404 When the class is reinstated, the Society will confirm
the reinstatement in writing to the owners and to the Au-
thorities in the country where the unit is registered and make
the information available to any third party upon request.
E. Appeals
E 100 Decisions taken by the Society
101 The client may request that a decision by the Society
is to be taken up for reconsideration by one or more sur-
veyors specially appointed by the Society. The expenses
incurred are to be paid by the party making the appeal,
however, if the earlier decision is revoked, the expenses will
be covered by the Society
DET NORSKE VERITAS
,"J ()
.,
,J :J
."J
("J
J
(J
SECTIONl
CLASSIFICATION PRINCIPLES
A. Def"mitions
A 100 Rules
A 200 Terminology
Contents
B 100 General
B 200 Entering into force and application of rules
B 300 Basis for assignment of class
B 400 Basis for maintenance of class
B 500 Documentation
B 600 Disclosure of information
B 700 Limitation of the Society's responsibility
A. DefInitions
A 100 Rnles
101 The Rules are to be understood as all those rule re-
quirements accepted by the Board as basis for classification,
which are developed by the Society.
102 Tentative Rules are rules applying to new fields to
which the Society reserves the right to make adjustments
duriog a period in order to obtain the intention reflected in
the rules.
103 A Guidance note given in the rules is advice which is
not mandatory for assignment of class, but with which the
Society, in light of general experience, advises compliance,
hence, it is for the client to decide whether to apply the note
or not.
A 200 Terminology
201 Det Norske Veritas (DNV) is an autonomous and in-
dependent Foundation with the object of safeguarding life,
property and the environment at sea aud ashore.
DNV undertakes classification and certification and ensures
"O'f shlps;'mobil;;'offshOre'UilliS; flied offshor" .
structures, facilities and systems, and carries out research in
connection with these functions.
DNV operates a world-wide network of survey stations and
is authorised by more than 120 national administrations to
carry out surveys and, in most cases, issue certificates on
their behalf.
202 The Society signifies D NV.
203 The Board signifies the Executive Board of DNV
through its Chairman who is the President and CEO of
DNV.
204 National Authorities denotes the Administration of any
country of registry.
20S Client means the party having requested classification
or having assumed ownership of a classed unit. In cases
where owners have authorised another party to operate the
unit on their behalf, such party is regarded as the client.
206 IMO is the International Maritime Organization.
lACS is the International Association of Classification Soci-
eties.
207 A Recognised Classification Society means a classi-
fication society which is a full or associate member of lACS.
208 Classification comprises those services rendered by
the Society in accordance with the rules. Classification of
units is conducted in accordance with the requirements of
the rules and any other standards to which reference therein
may be made.
209 Assigning Class originally signified designation of a
ship according to its standard in one of several classes,
ranging from good to bad. Today only the highest class is
assigned, comprising the main class, 1 A 1 or 1 A2, and an
obligatory additional class notation, e.g. Column Stabi-
lized Drilling Unit, where applicable. Voluntary additional
class notations may also be assigned coveriog special ser-
vice, equipment or systems, e.g. EO denoting periodically
unattended machinery space.
210 The Classification Cenificate is issued upon assign-
ment or renewal of class. Its validity is five years subject to
successful completion of annual and intermediate surveys.
211 Statutory Certificates means !MO Convention Certif-
icates issued on behalf of, or by, National Authorities.
212 Approval, or Approved, denotes acceptance by the
Society of plans/descriptions showing design solutions, ar-
rangements and/or equipment to comply with the rules. The
approval is manifested by the Society's approval stamp.
213 Type Approval is a procedure for assessment of a de-
sign against the rule requirements or a standard within the
framework of the rules.
The design is to be representative for continuous production.
Guidance note:
The terms design assessment and production assessment are
used to harmonise tenninology with the EU terminology.
Guidance note:
The tenn Type Examination is used when the confonnity as-
sessment of the design is according to EU Directives or against
other standards where fitness for use onboard ships, MOUs or
HSLC has not been evaluated.
__ " "-';""'-'0-"-' ___
214 A Quality Audit is a systematic and independent ex-
amination to determine whether established work processes
and quality systems are adhered to.
21S A Supplier or a Mamifacturer, supplies materials,
components, equipment and systems to newbuildings to be
classed, or to classed units in operation, whose production
is subject to design approval, surveys and testing in accord-
ance with the rules.
B 100 General
101 The Classification concept comprises the development
of independent technical standards for mobile offshore units,
and the verification of compliance with these standards
throughout the units' life.
102 The rules are aimed at ensuring safety against hazards
to the unit, personnel, and against hazards to the environ-
ment.
103 The classification of units is performed in accordance
with the requirements of the rules and any other standards
to which reference is made.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
104 Having assigned class, the society will issue a classi-
fication certificate and enter the main particulars and details
of class for the unit in the .Register of vessels classed with
DNV .
105 The design parameters' for the unit, which are to be
specified by the builder, will be stated in an "Appendix to
the classification certificate". Specific geographical. areas
found acceptable for operations may be stated if requested
and provided reliable data for these areas are submitted as
basis for approval.
Guidance note:
Environmental data considered applicable to world wide opera-
tion are given in Pt.3 Ch.l Sec.4.
survey, exempt it from rule requirements for the main class.
See also 20S.
304 When assigning class to a unit of a series under con-
struction to the classification of, or a design previously ac-
cepted by, a recognised classification society, the Society
may on the basis of an overall safety consideration, in con-
nection with the design review, exempt it from the rule re-
quirements for the main class, and base the survey on design
review done by the recognised society. See also 20S.
305 When assigning class to a unit for which National
Authorities undertake approval and surveys of items covered
by the rules, the Society may accept their decisions as basis
of assigning class.
306 The classification of bottom supported units is based
on the assumption that adequate precautions are taken to
B 200 Entering into force and application of rules ensure sufficient bearing capacity and resistance to sliding
. of footings or mats on the sea bed. This will be stated in the
201 Rules and amendments accepted by the Board will .Appendix to the classification certificate. for such units.
come mta force when decIded by the Board, normally SIX
(6) months after acceptance. The Society may accept decisions by the National Authority
. . . with jurisdiction over the waters in which the unit is to op-
202 The rules which are m force at the date of the wntten erate (shelf state) as basis for assigning class
request for classification, are the basis for the assignment .' .. . '.
and maintenance of class. 307 The claSSIfication IS assumrng that safety eqUIpment
. requirements, outside the scope of classification as defined
Subsequent amendments not made mandatory accordmg. to in Sec.2 A301, e.g. requirements for life-saving equipment
203 may be applicable to uruts under and radioco=unication installations, are enforced by the
prOVIded both buIlder and owner agree to such application. National Authority in question. In cases when such equip-
203 If an amendment is made mandatory to uuits under ment is not certified by the National Authorities, the .certif-
construction or which have already been assigned class, this !Cahon of such eqUIpment WIll be enforced by the SocIety m
will be specially stated. accordance WIth the IMO MODU Code.
204 In exceptional cases, where unacceptable service ex- 308. The classification is assuming that speci-
perience and/or theoretical findings clearly show that safety fied. m Sec.2 A301 related to dlvmg, prodUction, and
hazards may arise in connection with items covered by the poslti?n keepmg are certified by the NatIOnal Authonhes m
existing rules, the Society may lay down supplementary re- question.
quirements concerning the assignment and retention of class In cases where such certification is not carried out by the
to maintain the overall safety standard reflected by the rules. National Authorities, relevant requirements in accordance
205 The Society will consider alternatives found to repre- with recognised codes and standards will be enforced by the
sent an overall safety standard equivalent to that of the rules. SocIety.
Approval may be revoked if subsequent infonnation indi- 309 In cases where items mentioned under A307 and A308
cates that the chosen alternative is not satisfactory. are considered by the Society, a written statement will be
...
the rules, specIfic soluhons or declSlons approved by the . d' I
Society and its surveyors are to be based on the principles peno Ica surveys.
of the rules, and are to give a safety standard eqivalent to B 400 B . . te f I
that of the rules. aslS lor mam nance 0 c ass
. . . 401 The requirements for retention of class are found in
207 In a.cc,?rdance WIth 20S the SocIety may con.slder the Sec.3 B. In addition, classification is based on the following
us.e of rehabIllty methods as a means of documentmg com- assumptions:
phance to class requrrements. For apphcahons to hull struc-
tures, see Pt.3 Ch.l Sec.3 C700. Maintenance of the unit and its equipment
The unit, machinery installations and equipment are to be
B 300 Basis for assignment of class maintained at a standard complying with the requirements
301
. . d 'fi I . li th th of the rules.
Havmg asslgne a spec! Ie c ass lIDp es at e So-
ciety: Installed systems or equipment carried on board in excess
of the rule requirements, but otherwise covered by the rules,
- has been satisfied that the unit meets the rule require- are either to be maintained in accordance with the rules or
ments for the particular class, be removed or be disconnected in such a way as to ensure
- will, through a system of surveys, verify that the re- that the equipment cannot be used.
quirements stipulated for retention of class are complied Handling of the unit
WIth. The unit, machinery installations and equipment are to be
302 Prior to assigning class to an eligible, existing unit, it
is in general to undergo all periodical surveys pertaining to
the age and type of the unit. See Sec.3 A60S.
303 When assigning class to a uuit which has not been
built under supervision of the Society, provided the unit has
been built under supervision of another recognised classi-
fication society, the Society may on the basis of an overall
safety consideration, in connection with a design review and
adequately manned and competently handled. This includes
also distribution of ballast and bunkers, and speed and nav-
igation in heavy weather. Class conditions regarding the use
of the uuit are to be observed.
B 500 Documentation
501 All information which may influence the judgement,
decisions and requirements of the Society for the purpose
of classification, is to be made available to the Society. It is
DET NORSKE VERITAS
\)
'.
,')
.
')
)

.j
'J
805 The Society may at any time alter a CC or MO if this
is considered necessary.
806 A written CC or MO will be deleted when by survey
or other means the Society has established that the require-
ments have been fulfilled. A verbal CC is revoked when a
subsequent survey proves that the repair is satisfactory.
B 900 Survey reports and survey status
901 The surveyor will prepare and submit to the owner
reports on all surveys which have been carried out and issue
Conditions of Class and Memoranda, when relevant.
902 The Society will make available survey and certificate
status reports, to owners, via the DNV Internet website. It
is the owners responsibility to obtain'this information from
the DNV Internet website. Survey and certificate status re-
ports, on paper, will be distributed by special request, only.
C. Validity and Issuance of the Classification
Certificate
C 100 Validity of the certificate
101 When the renewal surveys for hull, machinery instal-
lations and equipment have been completed to the surveyor's
satisfaction, he will extend the validity of the classification
certificate.
102 When the administration of the Society has examined
the surveyor's report and is satisfied that the requirements
corresponding to the main class assigned have been met, the
retention of class will be confirmed by the issuance of a new
classification certificate.
D. Suspension and Withdrawal of Class
D 100 General
101 The Society may suspend or withdraw a unit's class
in cases where the assumptions as the basis for classification,
or the provisions for retention of class, have been violated.
102 The decision to suspend or withdraw a unit's class is
made by the administration of the Society. However, in
cases of automatic suspension, see 201 and 202, no indi-
vidual decision is made. Suspension or withdrawal of class
may take effect immediately or after a specified period of
time.
103 If the owner's default only affects conditions related
to special notations, the suspension or withdrawal may be
limited to these class notations only.
D 200 Suspension of class
201 If the renewal surveys for hull, machinery installations
and equipment related to main character of class as defined
in Sec.2 B are not carried out before the expiry date of the
classification certificate, and if no postponement has been
granted as stipulated in Pt.7 Ch.2 Sec. 1 A700, the class will
be automatically suspended with immediate effect (see also
302) unless the surveys are under completion.
202 If the annual or intennediate surveys required in C 1 03
are not carried out within 3 months from the anniversary
date of the classification certificate the class is automatically
suspended with immediate effect.
203 In addition to the conditions laid down in 201 and
202, a unit's class or additional class notations may also be
suspended with immediate effect by the administration of the
Society in cases where repair of deficiencies are not carried
out to the surveyor's satisfaction or otherwise dealt with in
an appropriate manner within the time limits given by the
103 The validity of the classification certificate given in
102 will be S years for units with main character of class surveyor.
1A 1, provided that the annual and intennediate surveys 204 The Society may further decide to suspend a uuit's
given in Pt.7 Ch.2 Sec.2 are carried out at intervals and class if the unit cannot be submitted to the required surveys;
within the time windows required in Pt.7 Ch.2 Sec.l A103. for instance due to a major casualty, or other force majeure
. .... -_ .... ..... .... , __ .. -.,. -,- _. -- - _, .. - - - _ - - - '.- - . _ .. , .
')

C 200 Issuance of certificate
201 For renewal surveys completed within 3 months be-
fore the expiry date of the existing certificate, the new cer-
tificate will be valid to a date not exceeding'S years from the
expiry date of the existing certificate.
202 For renewal surveys completed after the expiry date
of the existing certificate, the new certificate will be valid to
a date not exceeding 5 years from the expiry date of the
existing certificate.
203 For renewal surveys completed more than 3 months
before the expiry date of the existing certificate, the new
certificate will be valid to a date not exceeding S years from
the completion date of the renewal survey.
204 In cases where postponement has been granted as sti-
pulated in Pt. 7 Ch.2 Sec. 1 A600, the new certificate will be
valid to a date not exceeding S years from the expiry date
of the existing certificate before postponement was granted.
205 In cases where the renewal surveys are carried out
concurrently with major conversions andlor alterations re-
quiring a long conversion time, the validity of the new cer-
tificate will normally be S years from the date of the
completion and/or alteration.
205 Where a suspension of class has come into effect the
Society will:
- notify the proper authorities in the country where the uuit
is registered
.Register of vessels classed with DNV. or its supple-
ment.
D 300 Withdrawal of class
301 The class will be withdrawn at the owner's request.
302 If the outstanding surveys specified in 201 and 202
or required repairs as given in 203 are not carried out within
a specified time after the class suspension, the Society may
decide to withdraw the unit's class.
303 When any unit proceeds to sea without having recti-
fied a condition of class which was required to be dealt with
before leaving port, the class will be withdrawn with imme-
diate effect.
304 If the outstanding debt owed to the Society is not paid
within a fixed date, the Society may withdraw the uuit's
class with one month's written notice. This also applies
when the obligation to pay rests with a yard or with the
DET NORSKE VERITAS
B. Retention of Class
B 100 General
101 In order to retain a unit's class with the Society, the
owner is to:
- submit complete and correct information on the unit and
its use, which would be of significance to the Society for
its assessment of the condition of the unit in relation to
the rules
- submit complete and correct information on the owner-
ship and management of the unit, addresses and corre-
sponding administrative information pertinent to the
relations with the Society
- subject the unit to prescribed periodical and renewal sur-
veys, surveys of damage, repairs, conversions and alter-
ations
- subject the unit to unscheduled surveys when deemed
necessary by the Society
- carry out Conditions of Class (see 800) specified by the
Society in accordance with the rules within the given time
limit
- pay all due fees and expenses.
102 It is the duty of the owner to request surveys from the
Society and to provide the assistance and safe access re-
quired to the extent necessary for completion of the surveys
in accordance with the rules.
B 200 Periodical and renewal surveys
201 A unit is to be subjected to surveys with frequency
and extent stipulated in Pt. 7 Ch.2.
Surveys covered by the rules which are carried out by Na-
tional Authorities of the flag state may be accepted as basis
for the retention of the class, subject to the provisions of
A900.
202 Survey during lay-up, see Pt. 7 Ch.2 Sec. I B500.
SW'vey uhlamage'---
301 If the hull, machinery installations or equipment cov-
ered by classification sustain damage of such extent that it
may be presumed to lead to a Condition of Class (see 800),
the Society is to be informed without delay. The unit is to
be surveyed at the first oportonity according to further in-
structions from the Society. The survey is to be of the ex-
tent which the surveyor considers necessary for ascertaining
the amount of damage.
B 400 Survey of repairs
401 When hull, machinery installations or equipment
which are covered by classification are to be subjected to
repairs of any significance, the work is to be carried out
under supervision of the surveyor, according to the applica-
ble rules.
B 500 Procedures for maintenance
501 When referring to procedures for maintenance in the
rules, these are normally meant to be procedures recom-
mended by the supplier of the relevant equipment or systems
or to other applicable recognised standards for the equip-
ment or system in question.
B 600 Conversions and alterations
601 If hull, machinery installations, eqnipment or systems
covered by classification are to be converted or altered, the
changes are to be documented and are to be approved by the
Society in advance.
602 Alterations to hull, machinery and equipment made
possible by amendments of the applicable rules may be un-
dertaken provided the general safety and performance stan-
dard required for retention of class will be maintained.
603 The conversion or the alteration is to take place under
the surveyor's supervision in the same manner as for new
constructions.
B 700 Change of ownership
701 A unit retains class when transferred to another
owner, with the exception of class notations based on cer-
tification of management of operations, which will be de-
leted automatically. In the case of such transfer the previous
owner is to give the Society a written notice immediately.
Until this has been done communication with binding effect
will be sent to the previous owner.
B 800 Conditions of Class and Memoranda
801 If it is found that rule requirements implied by classi-
fication are not satisfied, the Society will issue a Condition
of Class on any improvements, new surveys or other meas-
ures found necessary in order to retain the class with the
Society, regardless of whether the matter referred to has
previously been approved.
Conditions of Class constitute requests by the Society in or-
der to ensure compliance with the rules. They are not to be
considered as advice.
802 If the Society deems it necessary to have technical
measurements or other examinations carried out to ascertain
whether damage has been sustained or is imminent, a Con-
dition of Class hereon will be issued.
803 C"ndit;6ns "f-Clagg -and--Mem"ranw.-areodefined-
follows:
- Conditions of Class to be carried out, abbreviated CC,
are reqnirements to the effect that specified operations
(e.g. repairs, adjustments, reinforcements or surveys)
are to be carried out within a specified time limit (if ne-
cessary immediately).
- Memoranda for owners, abbreviated MO, are informa-
tion to the owners, and may be additional to the class
related information contained in the Operating Manual,
exemptions from rule requirements, minor damage cpn-
sidered of no importance to the unit's safety, etc .. Mem-
oranda for owners will not require repairs or surveys to
be carried out.
Guidance note:
Conditions covering requirements outside the scope of classi-
fication issued by, or on behalf of, National Authorities, will be
abbreviated CA.
-e-n-d--o-f--G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e-n-o-t-e-
804 CC and MO are sent in writing to the owners. CC for
immediate fulfillment of given conditions can be made ver-
bally, provided the representative of the owners accepts the
CC and the surveyor ensures that the CC has been carried
out before the unit leaves port.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
(j
(J
\
-.J -J
J
tJ
J
iJ
the client's responsibility to ensure that such information is
brought to the attention of the Society in a timely manner.
Information may be made available by submitting documents
to the Society or by surveys performed at the clients prem-
ises, the unit or the premises of the client's sub-contractors.
502 Documents for information or approval required in
each chapter of the Rules are to be submitted to the Society.
503 The documentation forming the basis for classification
is, at all times, to reflect the true conditions. Revisions of
documents are therefore to be submitted to the Society to the
extent such revisions may influence decisions and require-
ments of the Society.
601 The Society will not disclose any information received
or reports made in connection with classification to any
other than those entitled thereto according to Table B I or
those having been given the right to receive information by
Table HI Disclosure of information
Information in question Owner
Newbuildings:
a) Approved "as carried out" structure
2) related drawings
b) Approved "as carried out" system and
component drawings 2)
Ships in Operation:
a) Class and statutory certificates
issued by the Society.
dates of surveys,
dates and text of Conditions
of Class or Recommendations given
4)
b) Survey Reports 4) + 1)
Other infonnation:
Correspondence with yard or owner 2)
1) Upon request
2) When accepted by owner or ship yard or copyright holder as applicable
3) When accepted by owner or through special clause in insurance contract
-4) --Automaiicaiiy
legislation, court decision or by written permission by the
owner.
The supply of information may take place electronically and
on a continual basis, e.g. by on-line access to the Society's
databases.
602 The Society will not disclose information which can
be considered as the property of another party except when
this party's permission is given in writing.
603 Internal communication, notes, calculations etc. pro-
duced within the Society in connection with classification
will not be disclosed to other parties.
604 Notwithstanding 601 to 603, authorised represen-
tatives of the National Maritime Authorities or of the audit
team of lACS performing Quality Audits, will upon request
have access to such information. These representatives are
to confirm in writing that they are not in any manner allowed
to reproduce or communicate such information to other
parties.
I
Flag state Port state Insurance Yard or
I
autlwrity authority Company * suppliers
1) 4)
2) 2)
1) 1)
1) **
1) 2) 3)
2) 2) 2)

Insurance Company means P&I Clubs and Hull & Machinery Underwriters

Overdue Conditions of Class, Recommendations only
701 The classification service is performed on the basic
assumption that other parties involved (building yard, de-
signers. manufacturers, sub contractors, rig owners, etc.)
fulfil their individual obligations. The classification service
is not performed in substitution of other parties' role or ob-
ligations. Nothing contained herein or in any certificate, re-
port or document issued in connection with or pursuant to
these rules, shall relieve any designer, engineer, builder,
manufacturer, shipyard, seller, supplier, owner, operator or
other parties from any obligations or consequences of de-
fault whatsoever. In particnlar, compliance with the rules
does not imply acceptance or commissioning of a unit. This
is the exclusive responsibility of the owner.
Any document issued by the Society in relation to surveys
performed reflects the condition of the unit at the time of
survey. It is the responsibility of the owner to maintain the
condition of the unit as required by the rules between sur-
veys.
702 No certificate, report, approval, opinion or other
statement issued or otherwise communicated, whether
orally, in writing or otherwise, by the Det Norske Veritas
shall be construed or otherwise taken in any way as verifi-
cation, representation, warranty. confirmation or acknowl-
edgement of Year 2000 Conformity, as that expression is
defined in "A defmition of Year 2000 Conformity Require-
ments" issued by the British Standard Institution (BSI DISC
PD2000- 1:1998) or as otherwise howsoever defined. See
also Sec.4 A101.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
SECTION 2
SCOPE OF RULES AND CLASS NOTATIONS
A. Scope of Rules
A 100 General
A 200 Rule parts
A 300 Rule particulars
B. Class Notations
B 100 General
Contents
B 200 Construction symbols
B 300 Main character of class
B 400 Basic design notations
B 500 Service restrictions
B 600 Additional class: Service and type notations
B 700 Additional class: Equipment and systems notations
B 800 Additional Class: Special features notations
A. SCOpe of Rules
A 100 General
101 The rules define acceptance criteria for design, con-
struction, survey and testing of units, their machinery in-
stallation, systems and equipment, applicable to the
newbuilding and operational phase.
A 200 Rule parts
201 The present part of the rules, Pt.1, covers all units,
newbuildings as well as units in operation.
202 The rules for main class which apply to all newbuild-
ings are given in Pt.2, 3 and 4.
203 The rules for additional classes applicable to new-
buildings, are given in Pt.5 and 6. Additional classes apply
to:
- units which have been designed to perform a special ser-
vice.
-----=-special equipment andsys"temsno! covere<iby li"i-main
class.
204 The rules for units in operation are given in Pt. 7.
301 The rules stipulate requirements for the following ar-
eas:
Hull
- strength
- constructional fIre protection
- weathertight and watertight integrity
- stability and floatability
- tank arrangement.
Machinery installations, systems and equipment
Machinery installations, systems and equipment, including their
related auxiliary functions, with respect to strength and perform-
ance as applicable to the following main functions:
- power ,generation
- propulsIOn
- steering
- fire protection, detection and extinction
- drainage and bilge pumping
- ballastmg
- towing
- anchoring and mooring
- jacking self-elevating units
- preloading self-elevating units
- safety systems.
Certain machinery installations, regardless of their contribution
to the main functions stated above:
- electric power plant
- gravity tanks or pressure vessels and associated piping systems
for:
- toxid fluids
- fluids with flash point below 100C
- fluids with temperatures above 220C
- boilers and steam piping systems
- pressure vessels and assocIated piping systems for com-
pressed where '" 152 kNm
p = desIgn pressure m leN 1m
V = pressure vessel volume in m
3
- firing and combustion installations
- other installations stated in the rules.
302 Generally, all installations as listed in 301, whether
temporarily or permanently mounted, will be covered by the
classification. Excemptions from this reqnirement are
installations/eqnipment frequently taken onboard for stor-
age, provided possible inherent hazards are controlled by
National Authorities having relevant regnlations recognised
by the Society.
- -----
All weights taken onboard or ashore are however to be re-
corded, see Sec. 1 B306.
303 Inherent in the rules are requirements for reducing the
probability for accidental events to occure and for the pre-
vention of possible accidental events/loads to become critical
accidents. Examples of safety principles in the rules are
given in Table AI.
Table At Safety Principles
Accidental -eventslloads Rule requirements
Loss of stability (collision, Reserve stability and floata-
leakage, malfunction of bal- bility
last system)
Failure of main structural
member (collision, fatigue,
Structural reserve strength
etc.)
Fire Protection, detection and ex-
tinction
Incorrect operation of ma-
chinery systems
sincfle maloperation is not to
lea to a cntical situation
Failure of machinery compo-
nent
Imb0rtant active components
to e redundant
DEf NORSKE VERITAS
"
...
..
.J :J

)
iJ
804 For identification and traceability, certified products
are to be stamped in accordance with the marking given in
the product certificate and as specified by the applicable
chapters of the rules.
805 To ensure an efficient, cost effective and correct cer-
tification process, a General Certification Agreement is nor-
mally to be established with manufacturers delivering NV
certified products.
The General Certification Agreement may be part of a Ma-
nufacturing Survey Arrangement.
The General Certification Agreement is to include informa-
tion on the procedures for design and production assessment
and on transfer of information and experience between the
Manufacturer and the Society.
A 900 Acceptance of control by National Authorities
901 In cases where the Administration of a flag state re-
views plans, carries out type approval, and surveys the unit
and/or its components and equipment in accordance with the
rule requirements, consideration will be given to the ac-
ceptance of this control as basis for the assignment of class.
For this consideration, and as proof of compliance, copies
of approved plans, reports and other particulars which
would otherwise be required to be approved by the Society,
have to be submitted.
A 1000 Manufacturing Survey Arrangement
1001 When the procedures and processes of a bnilding
yard's or a manufacturer's quality system meet the quality,
safety and environmental standard of the rules, a Manufac-
turing Survey Arrangement (MSA) may be established with
the yard or the manufacturer as an alternative to the verifi-
cation and production assessment described in the applicable
rule chapters.
1002 The agreed MSA is to be described in a document
stating the requirements, scope, acceptance criteria, doc-
umentation and the roles of the Society and the yard or the
manufacturer in connection with the production assessment.
A 1100 Type approval
lll1rType iippi'Oval' IS'IqirIlUeliure" rUi"
Type approval can be applied to a:
- product
- group of products
- system.
This procedure should normally be used for design assess-
ment of standard designs.
1102 The type approval procedure will normally consist of
the following elements:
- design approval
- type testing
- issuance of type approval certificate.
The type approval procedure used by the Society is de-
scribed in Certification Note No. 1.2.
1103 For certain products, equipment and systems as de-
fined in applicable chapters of the rules, type approval is
sufficient as the assessment needed for conforming product
quality, i.e. production assessment is not reqnired.
fined in the applicable chapters of the rules, type approval
is a mandatory procedure for design assessment.
1105 For products, equipment and systems manufactured
for stock, type approval is to be the normal procedure for
assessment of design.
A 1200 Certificate of interim class
1201 When the surveyor is of the opinion that the require-
ments corresponding to the class in question have been met,
he will document the completion of the bnilding supervision
by issuing the certificate of interim class, which is valid until
the Administration of the Society has confirmed the class
and issued the classification certificate.
1202 At the. discretion of the surveyor the building super-
vision niay be considered to be completed with some minor
items unverified, provided Conditions of Class (see B800)
are issued to the effect that the remaining work, surveys or
other measures are to be completed within a specified time.
At the same time the surveyor will document the completion
of the newbnilding supervision by issuing the certificate of
interim class as indicated in 1201.
1203 In case of classification of an existing unit not built
under the supervision of the Society, or classification of an
existing unit previously classed by the Society, the surveyor
will issue the certificate of interim class when he is satisfied
that the applicable requirements have been met.
A 1300 Classification certificate
1301 When the Administration of the Society has examined
corresponding to the class in question have been met, the
class will be assigned and a classification certificate will be
issued.
Provided the requirements for maintenance of class will be
complied with, and unless the class has been withdrawn or
suspended in writing at an earlier stage, the classification
certificate will be valid for 5 years for units with main
character of class 1 A 1 .
1302 Declarations confirming compliance with the rules
may upon request be issued for propulsion machinery and
specific additional class notations, provided the Society's
main class has been assigned.
A 1400 Appendix to the classification certificate
1401 Conditions regarding the use of the unit which were
Ilie
to be presented in the "Appendix to the classification certif-
icate",
A 1500 Entry in the Register of vessels classed with
DNV,)
1501 When a unit has been assigned class, its main partic-
ulars and details of class will be entered in the Register of
vessels classed with DNV.. In addition to the class and re-
gister information, an appropriate type descriptive note may
be entered in the register, indicating the type of the unit in
greater detail than given in the class and register informa-
tion, and/or providing additional information on the unit's
functions, design and construction. This descriptive note is
provided for information only and is not to be regarded as
part of the unit's class notations.
1502 For units built under the supervision of the Society,
the class is entered with a statement of the year and month
from which the periodical surveys will be dated. For other
units a notation is made of the year and month of completion
of the survey mentioned in 605. . .
1503 If the unit is not immediately commissioned upon
completion of the building supervision, the unit is subjectto
a condition survey at the time when she enters service.
Provided the result of this survey is in all respects satisfac-
tory, subsequent periodical surveys will date from the time
of the condition survey.
DEf NORSKE VERITAS
documents are submitted, and for distributing any approval
comments that may have been given.
502 When a unit, which is not built under supervision of
the Society, is to be classified, the information required in
501 is in general to be submitted for approval. The extent
of documentation approval for a unit which is classed, or
previously has been classed with another recognised classi-
fication society, will be decided in each case.
503 Plans which have been found to comply with Rule
requirements will be provided with an .approved. stamp.
Conditions and limitations of the approval may be stated on
the plans, or in the accompanying return letter of approval.
504 The approval may be revoked at any time if subse-
quent information indicates that the design solution was
contrary to the rule requirements or intentions.
505 For type approved products, where the basis for ap-
proval is the rules of the Society, plans and technical de-
scriptions of the product need not be submitted for approval
for each unit unless otherwise stated as a condition on the
type approval certificate.
In such cases only the arrangement or system plans, inter-
face plans and those plans mentioned on the type approval
certificate shall be submitted for approval.
A 600 Survey
601 When a unit is built under the supervision of the So-
ciety, the Society will verify:
- that the construction and scantlings comply with the rule
requirements and the approved plans, and that the re-
qnired materials are used
- that the materials, components and equipment have been
certified in accordance with the rules
- that the work is carried out in compliance with the rules
and with normal good practice
- that satisfactory tests are carried out to the extent and in
the manner prescribed by the rules.
Supervision is to be carried out at the building yard andlor
the sub-suppliers at the discretion of the Society, which also
decides the extent and method of control.
veflflcii!l51rffielli51l applle11"ily lliil iti" !ife
building yard or at the manufacturers' will normally be
based on visual inspections and tests.
The Society may base its verification on audits of an ac-
cepted quality system implemented at the yard or at the ma-
nufacturer in combination with an agreed manufacturing
survey arrangement.
603 When a unit which has not been built under the su-
pervision of the Society is to be classified, the Society will
carry out surveys to confirm:
- that the design and scantlings comply with the approved
plans
- that the material, components and equipment are in ac-
cordance with the rules
- that the workmanship is in compliance with the rules and
with normal good practice.
Functional tests are to be carried ont as deemed necessary.
604 For units built under the supervision of another re-
cognised society the requirements of 603 will normally be
considered as complied with for the main class.
605 When an existing unit is to be classified it is in general
to undergo all periodical surveys pertaining to the age and
type of the unit. Units previously classed by a recognised
society will, as a minimum, be subjeCt to annual survey, in
accordance with Pt. 7 Ch.2, with special emphasis on the
unit's general condition and including thickness measure-
ments for units of age exceeding 10 years. In addition, any
periodical surveys due with the previous society are to be
carried out.
If the age of the unit exceeds 20 years it is to undergo a re-
newal survey irrespective of when this is due with the pre-
vious society.
A 700 Functional testing
701 A test programme is to be worked out by the builder
to the satisfaction of the surveyor. The programme is to
specify systems, components and equipment to be tested and
testing procedure. The programme is to include sea trials of
the unit with machinery and equipment installed.
702 The tests are to give evidence as to satisfactory oper-
ation in accordance with the rules. When testing the control
and safety equipment, failure modes are to be simulated as
realistically as possible.
703 Unless ot4erwise agreed, the testing required by the
rules is to be carried out in the presence of the sllIveyor.
Data are to be recorded to the extent considered necessary
by the surveyor.
A 800 Ce.rtification of materials, components and
equipment
801 In order to ensure that materials, components, equip-
ment and systems used in units to be classed by the Society
conform to the rules and other standards within the frame-
work of the rules, product certification is required in. ac-
cordance with applicable chapters of the rules.
The product certification is a conformity assessment nor-
mally including both design and production assessment.
The production assessment includes inspection and testing
during productiou andlor of the final product.
802 Product cenification is to be documented by the fol-
lowing types of documents:
I) Det Norske Veritas Product Certificate (NV):
A document signed by a surveyor of the Society stating:
- conformity with rule requirements
.. c.:: . ilia! "On 0 llieceftified pi"odllciilseW
- that tests are made on samples taken from the certified
product itself
- that tests are performed in presence of the surveyor
or in accordance with special agreements.
2) Works Certificate C'N):
A document signed by the manufacturer stating:
- that tests are carried out on the certified product itself
product itself
- that tests are wituessed and signed by a qualified de-
partment of the manufacturer.
3) Test Report (TR):
- that tests are carried out on samples from the current
production.
The applicable chapters and sections of the rules will specify
which of the above mentioned documentation will be re-
quired.
803 Where the rules require Works Certificate C'N) or Test
Report (TR), the surveyor may at any time require tests to
be carried out in his presence andlor check elements of the
quality control in operation.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

C)

j
,)
/)
r)
)
r)
B. Class Notations
B 100 .General
101 All units found to satisfy the requirements in Parts I,
2, 3 and 4, will be given a main class consisting of a con-
struction symbol,. a main character of class and a notation
for the basic design concept of the unit, e.g.:
8j 1A 1 Column Stabilised Unit
or
8j 1A 1 Self-Elevating Unit
102 Units also found to satisfy reqnirements in Pt.5 or Pt.6
may be given additional class related to special service and
type of unit or special systems and eqnipment respectively.
The complete class will thus consist of:
Main class:
r
--;:========== Construction Symbol
r r Main Character of Class
.. f Basic Design Notation
+1A1 Column Stabilised Unit
Drilling Unit HELDK SUB
Additional Class:
L-___ -;. __ -;._ Service and Type Notation
L-_-I_ Equipment and Systems
Notation
Special Feature Notation
103 Alternatively, an additional class notatiOli which is
mandatory as per 602, 603, 604 or 605 may be included as
part of the main class notation.
Example:
8j 1A 1 Column Stabilised Drilling Unit.
104 Other concepts than those mentioned in 101 will be
given the basic design notation:
8j 1A 1 Mobile Offshore Unit.
105 Units, which, in addition to the requirements in these
rules, comply with the applicable requirements of the
..
be awarded the symbol (N) after the main class notation,
e.g.8j 1A1 Self-Elevating Production Unit (N).
In such cases the symbol (N) denotes that the unit is con-
sidered to comply with the Society's interpretation of the
applicable reqnirements of the NPD for the subject items
covered by these rules.
The design parameters upon which the (N) class notation has
been based will be stated in the "Appendix to the Classi-
ficatiou Certificate" for the unit (see Sec. I B105).
106 In addition to the class notations, the Society will
provide information related to the unit through the
.Register of vessels classed with DNV., see Sec.3 A1500.
201 The symbol 8j will be given to units built under the
supervision of Det Norske Veritas.
202 The symbol li! will be given to units built under the
supervision of another recognised classification Society and
later assigned class with Det Norske Veritas.
203 Construction symbols will also be used to denote su-
pervision during construction of:
- specialised when individual certificates are
requested, e.g. 8j DSV (diving system).
301 The notation 1 A 1 will be given to units with ma-
chinery and equipment found to be in compliance with the
rule requirements stated in Parts I, 2, 3 and 4.
B 400 Basic design notations .
401 Notations currently in use are:
Self-Elevating Unit
Column Stabilised Unit.
402 A self-elevating unit is defined as a unit with hull of
sufficient buoyancy for safe transport of the unit to the de-
sired location. On location the hull is raised to a predeter-
mined elevation above the sea surface on legs supported by
the sea bed.
403 A column stabilised unit is defined as a unit dependent
upon the buoyancy of widely spaced columns for floatation
and stability for all afloat modes of operation or in the rais-
ing or lowering of the unit, as may be applicable.
404 The unit may be designed to carry all its equipment
and supplies in. transit. Alternatively part of the equipment
and supplies may be added to the unit on location and in the
operatIOn mode.
501 Service restrictions or operational limits included in
the design assumptions of a unit will be stated in the "Ap-
pendix to the Classification Certificate", andlor on special
signboards.
502 Modified rule requirements are in addition given re-
lated to the size of the unit and its general arrangement.
601 Units arranged andlor strengthened for a special ser-
vice and found to be in accordance with relevant require-
ments in Pt.5 may be given a corresponding additional class.
Service and type notations currently in use are shown in
Tables BI to B8.
Table Bl Units for transit andlor location in ice (see Pt.S
Ch.l):
ICE'T"
ICE-L
Table B2 Accommodation and other offshore support units
(see Pt.S Ch.2):
Accommodation Unit
Fire Fighter I lor II or III)
Crane Unit
Table B3 Drillinc\ units and other units for offshore oper-
ations (see Pt.S .3):
Drilling Unit or Drilling Unit IN)
DRILL or DRILL IN)
Pipe Laying Unit
Dredger
INI
- vessel also complying with the Society's interpretations
of the requirements of the Norwegian Petroleum Directorate
within areas covered by the rules.
Table B4 Oil and storage units intended for
i production an stora e of crude oil (see Pt.S Ch.4):
Oil Production Unit
Oil Production and Storage Unit
INI vessel also complying with the Society's interpretations
within c_overed by the rules.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
Table BS Offshore loadine buoy (see Pt.S Ch.5l:
Offshore Loading Buoy
Offshore Loading Buoy (N)
Table B6 Non-selfpropelled unit (see 606):
Non-selfpropelled Unit
Table B7 Units for offshore supoort (see 607):
Support Unit
Support Unit (N)
INI vessel also complying with the Society'S interpretations
Table B8 Structural strength (see 608)
Structure (N)
INI - vessel also complying with the Society'S interpretations
602 For units primarily to be used for accommodation of
personnel the additional class notation Accommodation
Unit is mandatory.
603 For units to be used for drilling the additional class
notation Drilling Unit is mandatory.
604 For units to be used for oil production the additional
class notation Oil Production Unot or Oil Production and
Storage Unit is mandatory.
Reqnirements for the production plant are given in Pt.6
Ch.6.
605 For catenary anchored buoys the additional class no-
tation Offshore loading Buoy is mandatory.
606 A unit for which towing assistance will be required
during transit may be assigned the additional notation
selfpropelled unit.
607 The Support Unit class notation covers units intended
for offshore support functions. These units may be fitted
with only 'part of the equipment necessary to perform ac-

Pt.6 Ch.5 and 6 may be relevant to be complied with.
Relevant rule requirements complied with will be listed in
the "Appendix to the Classification Certificate".
608 Units, which comply with the Society's interpretations
of the applicable Norwegian Petroleum Directorate (NPD)
requirements pertaining to structural strength will, if re-
quested, be awarded the additional class notation: Struc-
ture (N).
fication Certificate" for the unit (see Sec. I BI05).
B 700 Additional class: Equipment and systems
notations
701 Units having special equipment or systems found to
satisfy relevant reqUIrements in Pt.6, will be given corre-
sponding additional class. Equipment and systems notations
currently in use are shown in Tables B9 to B15.
Table B9 Miscellaneous notations (see Pt.6 Ch.l):
HELDK
CRANE
DSV
TA,ATA
Table Bll
Ch.3):
EO
helicopter deck
crane
diving system (see separate publication Rules for
Certification of Diving Systems.)
mooring
assisted
ysu:m Jur posi-
vicinity
structures
designed for thruster
Periodically unattended machinery space (see Pt.6
Table Bl2 Additional fIre protection (see Pt.6 Ch.4):
F-A for accommodation space
F-M for machinery space
F-AM faT accommodation and machinery spaces
Table B13 DrilIings\'lant. Equipment, structures and sys-
tems. (see Pt.6 Ch. :
DRILL I Coyering the safety of drilling rig/installation and
DRILL IN) I those onboard.
INI - vessel also complying with the Society's interpretations
Table Bl4 Dynamic positioning systems (Pt.6 Ch.7):
DYNPOS-T semi-automatic position keeping system '
without redundancy
DYNPOS-AUTS automatic position keeping system without
redundancy
DYNPOS-AUT automatic position system, with a
remote thrust control ac -up and a posi-
tion reference back-up
DYNPOS-AUTR automatic position keeping system with re-
dundancy in technical design
DYNPOS-AUTRO automatic position keeping system with re-
__ _____ __ o
techuical-_d twign -
arrangement
I
Table BlS Management of safe unit operation and pollution
prevention (see Pt.7 Ch.S):
SBM 1Ma.nageme'!t of safety and environment protection in
umt o-peratlon
801 Special features notations provide information regard-
ing special design assumptions, arrangements or equipment
which are not covered by the main class requirements or the
other additional class notations.
Special features notations currently in use are shown in Ta-
ble B16.
Table B16 Column stabilised units strengthened for opera-
tion when resting on the sea bed (see Pt.3 Ch.2):
SUB
DET NORSKE VERITAS

J
/J
)
l

.. ...J

')
J
SECTION 3
CLASSIFICATION PROCEDURE
Contents
A 100 Request for classification
A 200 Requirements for workshops and yards
A 300 Requirements for manufacturers
A 400 Requirements for suppliers of services
A 500 Plan approval
A 600 Survey
A 800 Certification of materials, components and equipment
A 1500 Entry in the Register of vessels classed with DNV,.
B 100 General
B 300 Survey of damage
C. Validity and Issuance of the Classification Certificate
D 100 General
E. Appeals
E 100.
A 100 Request for classifIcation
101 A request for classification of a unit is to be submitted
in writing by the client.
201 Prior to commencement of work the builder and sub-
contractors have to develop and implement a relevant quality
system, which will be evaluated by the Society.
The evaluation will be performed in the initiation phase of
the project and will be a combination of:
- quality programme review
- audit to verify the implementation of and adherence to the
procedures.
202 The quality is to be documented in a quality system
program which as a minimum is to contain descriptions of
procedures and job instructions covering the most important
quality affecting activities for:
- structural design, procurement and fabrication (see Pt.3
Ch.1 Sec. 10)
- machinery, equipment and piping installation and testing
- electrical/instrumental installation and testing.
Guidance note:
A builder of a mobile offshore unit is expected to have a quality
system corresponding to the ISO 9000 series or equivalent.
203 During fabrication and construction work, the Socie-
ty's surveyors are to have safe access to the works at all
reasonable times, insofar as the work affects classification.
The client is to ensure, through contracts with the parties
concerned or otherwise, that such access is possible, and
that the Society is notified as to when and where the sur-
veyor's attendance is needed.
204 The following general documentation from the builder
(workshop and yard) and from subcontractors (as specified
in 30 I) is to be submitted when requested by the Society:
- outline specification for the unit
- list of subcontractors to the bnilding yard
- list of subcontractors to the manufacturer of products to
be delivered, if applicable.
301 Manufacturers of materials, components and eqnip-
ment of categories not covered by 200 are to be considered
for approval according to criteria established by the Society,
as applicable.
302 Any required quality control of materials, components
and equipment, is to be traceable and documented in writ-
ing. Furthermore, it is to be carried out by qualified per-
sonnel at facilities and with equipment suitable for that
control.
401 Suppliers providing services on behalf of the owner,
.. sueb asmeasurements,-tests-IIDclmaintenanee "rsatetysys
tems and eqnipment, the result of which may form the basis
for the surveyor's decisions, are to be approved by the So-
ciety, according criteria established by the Society.
Where surveyors use such services in making decisions af-
fecting statutory certifications, the suppliers are subject to
approval by the Socjety, where the Society is so authorised
by the relevant flag Admihistration. For such services the
Society may accept approvals done by the flag Adminis-
tration, or duly authorised organisations acting on behalf of
the flag Administration.
A 500 Plan approval
501 The builder or manufacturer is to submit before the
production commences:
- plans and specifications required for approval in tripli-
cate, and one copy for each of possible sister units
- corresponding technical descriptions, calculations and
data, including material specifications,
as specified in the applicable chapters of the rules, and ac-
cording to documentation lists supplied by the Society upon
receipt of class request.
Any documents submitted for re-approval are to be specially
marked to identify the revised parts.
The builder, with which the Society has the classification
contract, is responsible for co-ordinating that plans and other
DET NORSKE VERITAS
Table BS Offshore loadine buoy (see Pt.S Ch.5l:
Offshore Loading Buoy
Offshore Loading Buoy (N)
Table B6 Non-selfpropelled unit (see 606):
Non-selfpropelled Unit
Table B7 Units for offshore supoort (see 607):
Support Unit
Support Unit (N)
INI vessel also complying with the Society'S interpretations
Table B8 Structural strength (see 608)
Structure (N)
INI - vessel also complying with the Society'S interpretations
602 For units primarily to be used for accommodation of
personnel the additional class notation Accommodation
Unit is mandatory.
603 For units to be used for drilling the additional class
notation Drilling Unit is mandatory.
604 For units to be used for oil production the additional
class notation Oil Production Unot or Oil Production and
Storage Unit is mandatory.
Reqnirements for the production plant are given in Pt.6
Ch.6.
605 For catenary anchored buoys the additional class no-
tation Offshore loading Buoy is mandatory.
606 A unit for which towing assistance will be required
during transit may be assigned the additional notation
selfpropelled unit.
607 The Support Unit class notation covers units intended
for offshore support functions. These units may be fitted
with only 'part of the equipment necessary to perform ac-

Pt.6 Ch.5 and 6 may be relevant to be complied with.
Relevant rule requirements complied with will be listed in
the "Appendix to the Classification Certificate".
608 Units, which comply with the Society's interpretations
of the applicable Norwegian Petroleum Directorate (NPD)
requirements pertaining to structural strength will, if re-
quested, be awarded the additional class notation: Struc-
ture (N).
fication Certificate" for the unit (see Sec. I BI05).
B 700 Additional class: Equipment and systems
notations
701 Units having special equipment or systems found to
satisfy relevant reqUIrements in Pt.6, will be given corre-
sponding additional class. Equipment and systems notations
currently in use are shown in Tables B9 to B15.
Table B9 Miscellaneous notations (see Pt.6 Ch.l):
HELDK
CRANE
DSV
TA,ATA
Table Bll
Ch.3):
EO
helicopter deck
crane
diving system (see separate publication Rules for
Certification of Diving Systems.)
mooring
assisted
ysu:m Jur posi-
vicinity
structures
designed for thruster
Periodically unattended machinery space (see Pt.6
Table Bl2 Additional fIre protection (see Pt.6 Ch.4):
F-A for accommodation space
F-M for machinery space
F-AM faT accommodation and machinery spaces
Table B13 DrilIings\'lant. Equipment, structures and sys-
tems. (see Pt.6 Ch. :
DRILL I Coyering the safety of drilling rig/installation and
DRILL IN) I those onboard.
INI - vessel also complying with the Society's interpretations
Table Bl4 Dynamic positioning systems (Pt.6 Ch.7):
DYNPOS-T semi-automatic position keeping system '
without redundancy
DYNPOS-AUTS automatic position keeping system without
redundancy
DYNPOS-AUT automatic position system, with a
remote thrust control ac -up and a posi-
tion reference back-up
DYNPOS-AUTR automatic position keeping system with re-
dundancy in technical design
DYNPOS-AUTRO automatic position keeping system with re-
__ _____ __ o
techuical-_d twign -
arrangement
I
Table BlS Management of safe unit operation and pollution
prevention (see Pt.7 Ch.S):
SBM 1Ma.nageme'!t of safety and environment protection in
umt o-peratlon
801 Special features notations provide information regard-
ing special design assumptions, arrangements or equipment
which are not covered by the main class requirements or the
other additional class notations.
Special features notations currently in use are shown in Ta-
ble B16.
Table B16 Column stabilised units strengthened for opera-
tion when resting on the sea bed (see Pt.3 Ch.2):
SUB
DET NORSKE VERITAS

J
/J
)
l

.. ...J

')
J
SECTION 3
CLASSIFICATION PROCEDURE
Contents
A 100 Request for classification
A 500 Plan approval
A 600 Survey
A 800 Certification of materials, components and equipment
A 1500 Entry in the Register of vessels classed with DNV,.
B 100 General
B 300 Survey of damage
C. Validity and Issuance of the Classification Certificate
D 100 General
E. Appeals
E 100.
A 100 Request for classifIcation
101 A request for classification of a unit is to be submitted
in writing by the client.
201 Prior to commencement of work the builder and sub-
contractors have to develop and implement a relevant quality
system, which will be evaluated by the Society.
The evaluation will be performed in the initiation phase of
the project and will be a combination of:
- quality programme review
- audit to verify the implementation of and adherence to the
procedures.
202 The quality is to be documented in a quality system
program which as a minimum is to contain descriptions of
procedures and job instructions covering the most important
quality affecting activities for:
- structural design, procurement and fabrication (see Pt.3
Ch.1 Sec. 10)
- machinery, equipment and piping installation and testing
- electrical/instrumental installation and testing.
Guidance note:
A builder of a mobile offshore unit is expected to have a quality
system corresponding to the ISO 9000 series or equivalent.
203 During fabrication and construction work, the Socie-
ty's surveyors are to have safe access to the works at all
reasonable times, insofar as the work affects classification.
The client is to ensure, through contracts with the parties
concerned or otherwise, that such access is possible, and
that the Society is notified as to when and where the sur-
veyor's attendance is needed.
204 The following general documentation from the builder
(workshop and yard) and from subcontractors (as specified
in 30 I) is to be submitted when requested by the Society:
- outline specification for the unit
- list of subcontractors to the bnilding yard
- list of subcontractors to the manufacturer of products to
be delivered, if applicable.
301 Manufacturers of materials, components and eqnip-
ment of categories not covered by 200 are to be considered
for approval according to criteria established by the Society,
as applicable.
302 Any required quality control of materials, components
and equipment, is to be traceable and documented in writ-
ing. Furthermore, it is to be carried out by qualified per-
sonnel at facilities and with equipment suitable for that
control.
401 Suppliers providing services on behalf of the owner,
.. sueb asmeasurements,-tests-IIDclmaintenanee "rsatetysys
tems and eqnipment, the result of which may form the basis
for the surveyor's decisions, are to be approved by the So-
ciety, according criteria established by the Society.
Where surveyors use such services in making decisions af-
fecting statutory certifications, the suppliers are subject to
approval by the Socjety, where the Society is so authorised
by the relevant flag Admihistration. For such services the
Society may accept approvals done by the flag Adminis-
tration, or duly authorised organisations acting on behalf of
the flag Administration.
A 500 Plan approval
501 The builder or manufacturer is to submit before the
production commences:
- plans and specifications required for approval in tripli-
cate, and one copy for each of possible sister units
- corresponding technical descriptions, calculations and
data, including material specifications,
as specified in the applicable chapters of the rules, and ac-
cording to documentation lists supplied by the Society upon
receipt of class request.
Any documents submitted for re-approval are to be specially
marked to identify the revised parts.
The builder, with which the Society has the classification
contract, is responsible for co-ordinating that plans and other
DET NORSKE VERITAS
documents are submitted, and for distributing any approval
comments that may have been given.
502 When a unit, which is not built under supervision of
the Society, is to be classified, the information required in
501 is in general to be submitted for approval. The extent
of documentation approval for a unit which is classed, or
previously has been classed with another recognised classi-
fication society, will be decided in each case.
503 Plans which have been found to comply with Rule
requirements will be provided with an .approved. stamp.
Conditions and limitations of the approval may be stated on
the plans, or in the accompanying return letter of approval.
504 The approval may be revoked at any time if subse-
quent information indicates that the design solution was
contrary to the rule requirements or intentions.
505 For type approved products, where the basis for ap-
proval is the rules of the Society, plans and technical de-
scriptions of the product need not be submitted for approval
for each unit unless otherwise stated as a condition on the
type approval certificate.
In such cases only the arrangement or system plans, inter-
face plans and those plans mentioned on the type approval
certificate shall be submitted for approval.
A 600 Survey
601 When a unit is built under the supervision of the So-
ciety, the Society will verify:
- that the construction and scantlings comply with the rule
requirements and the approved plans, and that the re-
qnired materials are used
- that the materials, components and equipment have been
certified in accordance with the rules
- that the work is carried out in compliance with the rules
and with normal good practice
- that satisfactory tests are carried out to the extent and in
the manner prescribed by the rules.
Supervision is to be carried out at the building yard andlor
the sub-suppliers at the discretion of the Society, which also
decides the extent and method of control.
veflflcii!l51rffielli51l applle11"ily lliil iti" !ife
building yard or at the manufacturers' will normally be
based on visual inspections and tests.
The Society may base its verification on audits of an ac-
cepted quality system implemented at the yard or at the ma-
nufacturer in combination with an agreed manufacturing
survey arrangement.
603 When a unit which has not been built under the su-
pervision of the Society is to be classified, the Society will
carry out surveys to confirm:
- that the design and scantlings comply with the approved
plans
- that the material, components and equipment are in ac-
cordance with the rules
- that the workmanship is in compliance with the rules and
with normal good practice.
Functional tests are to be carried ont as deemed necessary.
604 For units built under the supervision of another re-
cognised society the requirements of 603 will normally be
considered as complied with for the main class.
605 When an existing unit is to be classified it is in general
to undergo all periodical surveys pertaining to the age and
type of the unit. Units previously classed by a recognised
society will, as a minimum, be subjeCt to annual survey, in
accordance with Pt. 7 Ch.2, with special emphasis on the
unit's general condition and including thickness measure-
ments for units of age exceeding 10 years. In addition, any
periodical surveys due with the previous society are to be
carried out.
If the age of the unit exceeds 20 years it is to undergo a re-
newal survey irrespective of when this is due with the pre-
vious society.
701 A test programme is to be worked out by the builder
to the satisfaction of the surveyor. The programme is to
specify systems, components and equipment to be tested and
testing procedure. The programme is to include sea trials of
the unit with machinery and equipment installed.
702 The tests are to give evidence as to satisfactory oper-
ation in accordance with the rules. When testing the control
and safety equipment, failure modes are to be simulated as
realistically as possible.
703 Unless ot4erwise agreed, the testing required by the
rules is to be carried out in the presence of the sllIveyor.
Data are to be recorded to the extent considered necessary
by the surveyor.
A 800 Ce.rtification of materials, components and
equipment
801 In order to ensure that materials, components, equip-
ment and systems used in units to be classed by the Society
conform to the rules and other standards within the frame-
work of the rules, product certification is required in. ac-
cordance with applicable chapters of the rules.
The product certification is a conformity assessment nor-
mally including both design and production assessment.
The production assessment includes inspection and testing
during productiou andlor of the final product.
802 Product cenification is to be documented by the fol-
lowing types of documents:
I) Det Norske Veritas Product Certificate (NV):
A document signed by a surveyor of the Society stating:
.. c.:: . ilia! "On 0 llieceftified pi"odllciilseW
product itself
- that tests are performed in presence of the surveyor
or in accordance with special agreements.
2) Works Certificate C'N):
product itself
- that tests are wituessed and signed by a qualified de-
partment of the manufacturer.
3) Test Report (TR):
- that tests are carried out on samples from the current
production.
The applicable chapters and sections of the rules will specify
which of the above mentioned documentation will be re-
quired.
803 Where the rules require Works Certificate C'N) or Test
Report (TR), the surveyor may at any time require tests to
be carried out in his presence andlor check elements of the
quality control in operation.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

C)

j
,)
/)
r)
)
r)
B. Class Notations
B 100 .General
101 All units found to satisfy the requirements in Parts I,
2, 3 and 4, will be given a main class consisting of a con-
struction symbol,. a main character of class and a notation
for the basic design concept of the unit, e.g.:
8j 1A 1 Column Stabilised Unit
or
8j 1A 1 Self-Elevating Unit
102 Units also found to satisfy reqnirements in Pt.5 or Pt.6
may be given additional class related to special service and
type of unit or special systems and eqnipment respectively.
The complete class will thus consist of:
Main class:
r
--;:========== Construction Symbol
r r Main Character of Class
.. f Basic Design Notation
+1A1 Column Stabilised Unit
Drilling Unit HELDK SUB
Additional Class:
L-___ -;. __ -;._ Service and Type Notation
L-_-I_ Equipment and Systems
Notation
Special Feature Notation
103 Alternatively, an additional class notatiOli which is
mandatory as per 602, 603, 604 or 605 may be included as
part of the main class notation.
Example:
8j 1A 1 Column Stabilised Drilling Unit.
104 Other concepts than those mentioned in 101 will be
given the basic design notation:
8j 1A 1 Mobile Offshore Unit.
105 Units, which, in addition to the requirements in these
rules, comply with the applicable requirements of the
..
be awarded the symbol (N) after the main class notation,
e.g.8j 1A1 Self-Elevating Production Unit (N).
In such cases the symbol (N) denotes that the unit is con-
sidered to comply with the Society's interpretation of the
applicable reqnirements of the NPD for the subject items
covered by these rules.
ficatiou Certificate" for the unit (see Sec. I B105).
106 In addition to the class notations, the Society will
provide information related to the unit through the
.Register of vessels classed with DNV., see Sec.3 A1500.
201 The symbol 8j will be given to units built under the
supervision of Det Norske Veritas.
202 The symbol li! will be given to units built under the
supervision of another recognised classification Society and
later assigned class with Det Norske Veritas.
203 Construction symbols will also be used to denote su-
pervision during construction of:
- specialised when individual certificates are
requested, e.g. 8j DSV (diving system).
301 The notation 1 A 1 will be given to units with ma-
chinery and equipment found to be in compliance with the
rule requirements stated in Parts I, 2, 3 and 4.
B 400 Basic design notations .
401 Notations currently in use are:
Self-Elevating Unit
Column Stabilised Unit.
402 A self-elevating unit is defined as a unit with hull of
sufficient buoyancy for safe transport of the unit to the de-
sired location. On location the hull is raised to a predeter-
mined elevation above the sea surface on legs supported by
the sea bed.
403 A column stabilised unit is defined as a unit dependent
upon the buoyancy of widely spaced columns for floatation
and stability for all afloat modes of operation or in the rais-
ing or lowering of the unit, as may be applicable.
404 The unit may be designed to carry all its equipment
and supplies in. transit. Alternatively part of the equipment
and supplies may be added to the unit on location and in the
operatIOn mode.
501 Service restrictions or operational limits included in
the design assumptions of a unit will be stated in the "Ap-
pendix to the Classification Certificate", andlor on special
signboards.
502 Modified rule requirements are in addition given re-
lated to the size of the unit and its general arrangement.
601 Units arranged andlor strengthened for a special ser-
vice and found to be in accordance with relevant require-
ments in Pt.5 may be given a corresponding additional class.
Service and type notations currently in use are shown in
Tables BI to B8.
Table Bl Units for transit andlor location in ice (see Pt.S
Ch.l):
ICE'T"
ICE-L
Table B2 Accommodation and other offshore support units
(see Pt.S Ch.2):
Accommodation Unit
Fire Fighter I lor II or III)
Crane Unit
Table B3 Drillinc\ units and other units for offshore oper-
ations (see Pt.S .3):
Drilling Unit or Drilling Unit IN)
DRILL or DRILL IN)
Pipe Laying Unit
Dredger
INI
- vessel also complying with the Society's interpretations
Table B4 Oil and storage units intended for
i production an stora e of crude oil (see Pt.S Ch.4):
Oil Production Unit
Oil Production and Storage Unit
within c_overed by the rules.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
SECTION 2
SCOPE OF RULES AND CLASS NOTATIONS
A. Scope of Rules
A 100 General
A 200 Rule parts
B. Class Notations
B 100 General
Contents
B 400 Basic design notations
B 700 Additional class: Equipment and systems notations
A. SCOpe of Rules
A 100 General
101 The rules define acceptance criteria for design, con-
struction, survey and testing of units, their machinery in-
stallation, systems and equipment, applicable to the
newbuilding and operational phase.
A 200 Rule parts
201 The present part of the rules, Pt.1, covers all units,
newbuildings as well as units in operation.
202 The rules for main class which apply to all newbuild-
ings are given in Pt.2, 3 and 4.
203 The rules for additional classes applicable to new-
buildings, are given in Pt.5 and 6. Additional classes apply
to:
- units which have been designed to perform a special ser-
vice.
-----=-special equipment andsys"temsno! covere<iby li"i-main
class.
204 The rules for units in operation are given in Pt. 7.
301 The rules stipulate requirements for the following ar-
eas:
Hull
- strength
- constructional fIre protection
- weathertight and watertight integrity
- stability and floatability
- tank arrangement.
Machinery installations, systems and equipment
Machinery installations, systems and equipment, including their
related auxiliary functions, with respect to strength and perform-
ance as applicable to the following main functions:
- power ,generation
- propulsIOn
- steering
- fire protection, detection and extinction
- ballastmg
- towing
- jacking self-elevating units
- preloading self-elevating units
- safety systems.
Certain machinery installations, regardless of their contribution
to the main functions stated above:
- electric power plant
- gravity tanks or pressure vessels and associated piping systems
for:
- toxid fluids
- fluids with flash point below 100C
- fluids with temperatures above 220C
- boilers and steam piping systems
- pressure vessels and assocIated piping systems for com-
pressed where '" 152 kNm
p = desIgn pressure m leN 1m
V = pressure vessel volume in m
3
- firing and combustion installations
- other installations stated in the rules.
302 Generally, all installations as listed in 301, whether
temporarily or permanently mounted, will be covered by the
classification. Excemptions from this reqnirement are
installations/eqnipment frequently taken onboard for stor-
age, provided possible inherent hazards are controlled by
National Authorities having relevant regnlations recognised
by the Society.
- -----
All weights taken onboard or ashore are however to be re-
corded, see Sec. 1 B306.
303 Inherent in the rules are requirements for reducing the
probability for accidental events to occure and for the pre-
vention of possible accidental events/loads to become critical
accidents. Examples of safety principles in the rules are
given in Table AI.
Table At Safety Principles
Accidental -eventslloads Rule requirements
Loss of stability (collision, Reserve stability and floata-
leakage, malfunction of bal- bility
last system)
Failure of main structural
member (collision, fatigue,
Structural reserve strength
etc.)
Fire Protection, detection and ex-
tinction
Incorrect operation of ma-
chinery systems
sincfle maloperation is not to
lea to a cntical situation
Failure of machinery compo-
nent
Imb0rtant active components
to e redundant
DEf NORSKE VERITAS
"
...
..
.J :J

)
iJ
804 For identification and traceability, certified products
are to be stamped in accordance with the marking given in
the product certificate and as specified by the applicable
chapters of the rules.
805 To ensure an efficient, cost effective and correct cer-
tification process, a General Certification Agreement is nor-
mally to be established with manufacturers delivering NV
certified products.
The General Certification Agreement may be part of a Ma-
nufacturing Survey Arrangement.
The General Certification Agreement is to include informa-
tion on the procedures for design and production assessment
and on transfer of information and experience between the
Manufacturer and the Society.
901 In cases where the Administration of a flag state re-
views plans, carries out type approval, and surveys the unit
and/or its components and equipment in accordance with the
rule requirements, consideration will be given to the ac-
ceptance of this control as basis for the assignment of class.
For this consideration, and as proof of compliance, copies
of approved plans, reports and other particulars which
would otherwise be required to be approved by the Society,
have to be submitted.
1001 When the procedures and processes of a bnilding
yard's or a manufacturer's quality system meet the quality,
safety and environmental standard of the rules, a Manufac-
turing Survey Arrangement (MSA) may be established with
the yard or the manufacturer as an alternative to the verifi-
cation and production assessment described in the applicable
rule chapters.
1002 The agreed MSA is to be described in a document
stating the requirements, scope, acceptance criteria, doc-
umentation and the roles of the Society and the yard or the
manufacturer in connection with the production assessment.
lll1rType iippi'Oval' IS'IqirIlUeliure" rUi"
Type approval can be applied to a:
- product
- group of products
- system.
This procedure should normally be used for design assess-
ment of standard designs.
1102 The type approval procedure will normally consist of
the following elements:
- design approval
- type testing
- issuance of type approval certificate.
The type approval procedure used by the Society is de-
scribed in Certification Note No. 1.2.
fined in applicable chapters of the rules, type approval is
sufficient as the assessment needed for conforming product
quality, i.e. production assessment is not reqnired.
fined in the applicable chapters of the rules, type approval
is a mandatory procedure for design assessment.
1105 For products, equipment and systems manufactured
for stock, type approval is to be the normal procedure for
assessment of design.
1201 When the surveyor is of the opinion that the require-
ments corresponding to the class in question have been met,
he will document the completion of the bnilding supervision
by issuing the certificate of interim class, which is valid until
the Administration of the Society has confirmed the class
and issued the classification certificate.
1202 At the. discretion of the surveyor the building super-
vision niay be considered to be completed with some minor
items unverified, provided Conditions of Class (see B800)
are issued to the effect that the remaining work, surveys or
other measures are to be completed within a specified time.
At the same time the surveyor will document the completion
of the newbnilding supervision by issuing the certificate of
interim class as indicated in 1201.
1203 In case of classification of an existing unit not built
under the supervision of the Society, or classification of an
existing unit previously classed by the Society, the surveyor
will issue the certificate of interim class when he is satisfied
that the applicable requirements have been met.
1301 When the Administration of the Society has examined
corresponding to the class in question have been met, the
class will be assigned and a classification certificate will be
issued.
Provided the requirements for maintenance of class will be
complied with, and unless the class has been withdrawn or
suspended in writing at an earlier stage, the classification
certificate will be valid for 5 years for units with main
character of class 1 A 1 .
1302 Declarations confirming compliance with the rules
may upon request be issued for propulsion machinery and
specific additional class notations, provided the Society's
main class has been assigned.
1401 Conditions regarding the use of the unit which were
Ilie
to be presented in the "Appendix to the classification certif-
icate",
A 1500 Entry in the Register of vessels classed with
DNV,)
1501 When a unit has been assigned class, its main partic-
ulars and details of class will be entered in the Register of
vessels classed with DNV.. In addition to the class and re-
gister information, an appropriate type descriptive note may
be entered in the register, indicating the type of the unit in
greater detail than given in the class and register informa-
tion, and/or providing additional information on the unit's
functions, design and construction. This descriptive note is
provided for information only and is not to be regarded as
part of the unit's class notations.
1502 For units built under the supervision of the Society,
the class is entered with a statement of the year and month
from which the periodical surveys will be dated. For other
units a notation is made of the year and month of completion
of the survey mentioned in 605. . .
1503 If the unit is not immediately commissioned upon
completion of the building supervision, the unit is subjectto
a condition survey at the time when she enters service.
Provided the result of this survey is in all respects satisfac-
tory, subsequent periodical surveys will date from the time
of the condition survey.
DEf NORSKE VERITAS
B 100 General
101 In order to retain a unit's class with the Society, the
owner is to:
- submit complete and correct information on the unit and
its use, which would be of significance to the Society for
its assessment of the condition of the unit in relation to
the rules
- submit complete and correct information on the owner-
ship and management of the unit, addresses and corre-
sponding administrative information pertinent to the
relations with the Society
- subject the unit to prescribed periodical and renewal sur-
veys, surveys of damage, repairs, conversions and alter-
ations
- subject the unit to unscheduled surveys when deemed
necessary by the Society
- carry out Conditions of Class (see 800) specified by the
Society in accordance with the rules within the given time
limit
- pay all due fees and expenses.
102 It is the duty of the owner to request surveys from the
Society and to provide the assistance and safe access re-
quired to the extent necessary for completion of the surveys
in accordance with the rules.
201 A unit is to be subjected to surveys with frequency
and extent stipulated in Pt. 7 Ch.2.
Surveys covered by the rules which are carried out by Na-
tional Authorities of the flag state may be accepted as basis
for the retention of the class, subject to the provisions of
A900.
202 Survey during lay-up, see Pt. 7 Ch.2 Sec. I B500.
SW'vey uhlamage'---
301 If the hull, machinery installations or equipment cov-
ered by classification sustain damage of such extent that it
may be presumed to lead to a Condition of Class (see 800),
the Society is to be informed without delay. The unit is to
be surveyed at the first oportonity according to further in-
structions from the Society. The survey is to be of the ex-
tent which the surveyor considers necessary for ascertaining
the amount of damage.
401 When hull, machinery installations or equipment
which are covered by classification are to be subjected to
repairs of any significance, the work is to be carried out
under supervision of the surveyor, according to the applica-
ble rules.
501 When referring to procedures for maintenance in the
rules, these are normally meant to be procedures recom-
mended by the supplier of the relevant equipment or systems
or to other applicable recognised standards for the equip-
ment or system in question.
601 If hull, machinery installations, eqnipment or systems
covered by classification are to be converted or altered, the
changes are to be documented and are to be approved by the
Society in advance.
602 Alterations to hull, machinery and equipment made
possible by amendments of the applicable rules may be un-
dertaken provided the general safety and performance stan-
dard required for retention of class will be maintained.
603 The conversion or the alteration is to take place under
the surveyor's supervision in the same manner as for new
constructions.
701 A unit retains class when transferred to another
owner, with the exception of class notations based on cer-
tification of management of operations, which will be de-
leted automatically. In the case of such transfer the previous
owner is to give the Society a written notice immediately.
Until this has been done communication with binding effect
will be sent to the previous owner.
801 If it is found that rule requirements implied by classi-
fication are not satisfied, the Society will issue a Condition
of Class on any improvements, new surveys or other meas-
ures found necessary in order to retain the class with the
Society, regardless of whether the matter referred to has
previously been approved.
Conditions of Class constitute requests by the Society in or-
der to ensure compliance with the rules. They are not to be
considered as advice.
802 If the Society deems it necessary to have technical
measurements or other examinations carried out to ascertain
whether damage has been sustained or is imminent, a Con-
dition of Class hereon will be issued.
803 C"ndit;6ns "f-Clagg -and--Mem"ranw.-areodefined-
follows:
- Conditions of Class to be carried out, abbreviated CC,
are reqnirements to the effect that specified operations
(e.g. repairs, adjustments, reinforcements or surveys)
are to be carried out within a specified time limit (if ne-
cessary immediately).
- Memoranda for owners, abbreviated MO, are informa-
tion to the owners, and may be additional to the class
related information contained in the Operating Manual,
exemptions from rule requirements, minor damage cpn-
sidered of no importance to the unit's safety, etc .. Mem-
oranda for owners will not require repairs or surveys to
be carried out.
Guidance note:
Conditions covering requirements outside the scope of classi-
fication issued by, or on behalf of, National Authorities, will be
abbreviated CA.
804 CC and MO are sent in writing to the owners. CC for
immediate fulfillment of given conditions can be made ver-
bally, provided the representative of the owners accepts the
CC and the surveyor ensures that the CC has been carried
out before the unit leaves port.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
(j
(J
\
-.J -J
J
tJ
J
iJ
the client's responsibility to ensure that such information is
brought to the attention of the Society in a timely manner.
Information may be made available by submitting documents
to the Society or by surveys performed at the clients prem-
ises, the unit or the premises of the client's sub-contractors.
502 Documents for information or approval required in
each chapter of the Rules are to be submitted to the Society.
503 The documentation forming the basis for classification
is, at all times, to reflect the true conditions. Revisions of
documents are therefore to be submitted to the Society to the
extent such revisions may influence decisions and require-
ments of the Society.
601 The Society will not disclose any information received
or reports made in connection with classification to any
other than those entitled thereto according to Table B I or
those having been given the right to receive information by
Table HI Disclosure of information
Information in question Owner
Newbuildings:
a) Approved "as carried out" structure
2) related drawings
b) Approved "as carried out" system and
component drawings 2)
Ships in Operation:
a) Class and statutory certificates
issued by the Society.
dates of surveys,
dates and text of Conditions
of Class or Recommendations given
4)
b) Survey Reports 4) + 1)
Other infonnation:
Correspondence with yard or owner 2)
1) Upon request
2) When accepted by owner or ship yard or copyright holder as applicable
3) When accepted by owner or through special clause in insurance contract
-4) --Automaiicaiiy
legislation, court decision or by written permission by the
owner.
The supply of information may take place electronically and
on a continual basis, e.g. by on-line access to the Society's
databases.
602 The Society will not disclose information which can
be considered as the property of another party except when
this party's permission is given in writing.
603 Internal communication, notes, calculations etc. pro-
duced within the Society in connection with classification
will not be disclosed to other parties.
604 Notwithstanding 601 to 603, authorised represen-
tatives of the National Maritime Authorities or of the audit
team of lACS performing Quality Audits, will upon request
have access to such information. These representatives are
to confirm in writing that they are not in any manner allowed
to reproduce or communicate such information to other
parties.
I
Flag state Port state Insurance Yard or
I
autlwrity authority Company * suppliers
1) 4)
2) 2)
1) 1)
1) **
1) 2) 3)
2) 2) 2)

Insurance Company means P&I Clubs and Hull & Machinery Underwriters

Overdue Conditions of Class, Recommendations only
701 The classification service is performed on the basic
assumption that other parties involved (building yard, de-
signers. manufacturers, sub contractors, rig owners, etc.)
fulfil their individual obligations. The classification service
is not performed in substitution of other parties' role or ob-
ligations. Nothing contained herein or in any certificate, re-
port or document issued in connection with or pursuant to
these rules, shall relieve any designer, engineer, builder,
manufacturer, shipyard, seller, supplier, owner, operator or
other parties from any obligations or consequences of de-
fault whatsoever. In particnlar, compliance with the rules
does not imply acceptance or commissioning of a unit. This
is the exclusive responsibility of the owner.
Any document issued by the Society in relation to surveys
performed reflects the condition of the unit at the time of
survey. It is the responsibility of the owner to maintain the
condition of the unit as required by the rules between sur-
veys.
702 No certificate, report, approval, opinion or other
statement issued or otherwise communicated, whether
orally, in writing or otherwise, by the Det Norske Veritas
shall be construed or otherwise taken in any way as verifi-
cation, representation, warranty. confirmation or acknowl-
edgement of Year 2000 Conformity, as that expression is
defined in "A defmition of Year 2000 Conformity Require-
ments" issued by the British Standard Institution (BSI DISC
PD2000- 1:1998) or as otherwise howsoever defined. See
also Sec.4 A101.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
104 Having assigned class, the society will issue a classi-
fication certificate and enter the main particulars and details
of class for the unit in the .Register of vessels classed with
DNV .
105 The design parameters' for the unit, which are to be
specified by the builder, will be stated in an "Appendix to
the classification certificate". Specific geographical. areas
found acceptable for operations may be stated if requested
and provided reliable data for these areas are submitted as
basis for approval.
Guidance note:
Environmental data considered applicable to world wide opera-
tion are given in Pt.3 Ch.l Sec.4.
survey, exempt it from rule requirements for the main class.
See also 20S.
304 When assigning class to a unit of a series under con-
struction to the classification of, or a design previously ac-
cepted by, a recognised classification society, the Society
may on the basis of an overall safety consideration, in con-
nection with the design review, exempt it from the rule re-
quirements for the main class, and base the survey on design
review done by the recognised society. See also 20S.
305 When assigning class to a unit for which National
Authorities undertake approval and surveys of items covered
by the rules, the Society may accept their decisions as basis
of assigning class.
306 The classification of bottom supported units is based
on the assumption that adequate precautions are taken to
B 200 Entering into force and application of rules ensure sufficient bearing capacity and resistance to sliding
. of footings or mats on the sea bed. This will be stated in the
201 Rules and amendments accepted by the Board will .Appendix to the classification certificate. for such units.
come mta force when decIded by the Board, normally SIX
(6) months after acceptance. The Society may accept decisions by the National Authority
. . . with jurisdiction over the waters in which the unit is to op-
202 The rules which are m force at the date of the wntten erate (shelf state) as basis for assigning class
request for classification, are the basis for the assignment .' .. . '.
and maintenance of class. 307 The claSSIfication IS assumrng that safety eqUIpment
. requirements, outside the scope of classification as defined
Subsequent amendments not made mandatory accordmg. to in Sec.2 A301, e.g. requirements for life-saving equipment
203 may be applicable to uruts under and radioco=unication installations, are enforced by the
prOVIded both buIlder and owner agree to such application. National Authority in question. In cases when such equip-
203 If an amendment is made mandatory to uuits under ment is not certified by the National Authorities, the .certif-
construction or which have already been assigned class, this !Cahon of such eqUIpment WIll be enforced by the SocIety m
will be specially stated. accordance WIth the IMO MODU Code.
204 In exceptional cases, where unacceptable service ex- 308. The classification is assuming that speci-
perience and/or theoretical findings clearly show that safety fied. m Sec.2 A301 related to dlvmg, prodUction, and
hazards may arise in connection with items covered by the poslti?n keepmg are certified by the NatIOnal Authonhes m
existing rules, the Society may lay down supplementary re- question.
quirements concerning the assignment and retention of class In cases where such certification is not carried out by the
to maintain the overall safety standard reflected by the rules. National Authorities, relevant requirements in accordance
205 The Society will consider alternatives found to repre- with recognised codes and standards will be enforced by the
sent an overall safety standard equivalent to that of the rules. SocIety.
Approval may be revoked if subsequent infonnation indi- 309 In cases where items mentioned under A307 and A308
cates that the chosen alternative is not satisfactory. are considered by the Society, a written statement will be
...
the rules, specIfic soluhons or declSlons approved by the . d' I
Society and its surveyors are to be based on the principles peno Ica surveys.
of the rules, and are to give a safety standard eqivalent to B 400 B . . te f I
that of the rules. aslS lor mam nance 0 c ass
. . . 401 The requirements for retention of class are found in
207 In a.cc,?rdance WIth 20S the SocIety may con.slder the Sec.3 B. In addition, classification is based on the following
us.e of rehabIllty methods as a means of documentmg com- assumptions:
phance to class requrrements. For apphcahons to hull struc-
tures, see Pt.3 Ch.l Sec.3 C700. Maintenance of the unit and its equipment
The unit, machinery installations and equipment are to be
B 300 Basis for assignment of class maintained at a standard complying with the requirements
301
. . d 'fi I . li th th of the rules.
Havmg asslgne a spec! Ie c ass lIDp es at e So-
ciety: Installed systems or equipment carried on board in excess
of the rule requirements, but otherwise covered by the rules,
- has been satisfied that the unit meets the rule require- are either to be maintained in accordance with the rules or
ments for the particular class, be removed or be disconnected in such a way as to ensure
- will, through a system of surveys, verify that the re- that the equipment cannot be used.
quirements stipulated for retention of class are complied Handling of the unit
WIth. The unit, machinery installations and equipment are to be
302 Prior to assigning class to an eligible, existing unit, it
is in general to undergo all periodical surveys pertaining to
the age and type of the unit. See Sec.3 A60S.
303 When assigning class to a uuit which has not been
built under supervision of the Society, provided the unit has
been built under supervision of another recognised classi-
fication society, the Society may on the basis of an overall
safety consideration, in connection with a design review and
adequately manned and competently handled. This includes
also distribution of ballast and bunkers, and speed and nav-
igation in heavy weather. Class conditions regarding the use
of the uuit are to be observed.
B 500 Documentation
501 All information which may influence the judgement,
decisions and requirements of the Society for the purpose
of classification, is to be made available to the Society. It is
DET NORSKE VERITAS
\)
'.
,')
.
')
)

.j
'J
805 The Society may at any time alter a CC or MO if this
is considered necessary.
806 A written CC or MO will be deleted when by survey
or other means the Society has established that the require-
ments have been fulfilled. A verbal CC is revoked when a
subsequent survey proves that the repair is satisfactory.
901 The surveyor will prepare and submit to the owner
reports on all surveys which have been carried out and issue
Conditions of Class and Memoranda, when relevant.
902 The Society will make available survey and certificate
status reports, to owners, via the DNV Internet website. It
is the owners responsibility to obtain'this information from
the DNV Internet website. Survey and certificate status re-
ports, on paper, will be distributed by special request, only.
C. Validity and Issuance of the Classification
Certificate
101 When the renewal surveys for hull, machinery instal-
lations and equipment have been completed to the surveyor's
satisfaction, he will extend the validity of the classification
certificate.
102 When the administration of the Society has examined
corresponding to the main class assigned have been met, the
retention of class will be confirmed by the issuance of a new
classification certificate.
D 100 General
101 The Society may suspend or withdraw a unit's class
in cases where the assumptions as the basis for classification,
or the provisions for retention of class, have been violated.
102 The decision to suspend or withdraw a unit's class is
made by the administration of the Society. However, in
cases of automatic suspension, see 201 and 202, no indi-
vidual decision is made. Suspension or withdrawal of class
may take effect immediately or after a specified period of
time.
103 If the owner's default only affects conditions related
to special notations, the suspension or withdrawal may be
limited to these class notations only.
201 If the renewal surveys for hull, machinery installations
and equipment related to main character of class as defined
in Sec.2 B are not carried out before the expiry date of the
classification certificate, and if no postponement has been
granted as stipulated in Pt.7 Ch.2 Sec. 1 A700, the class will
be automatically suspended with immediate effect (see also
302) unless the surveys are under completion.
202 If the annual or intennediate surveys required in C 1 03
are not carried out within 3 months from the anniversary
date of the classification certificate the class is automatically
suspended with immediate effect.
203 In addition to the conditions laid down in 201 and
202, a unit's class or additional class notations may also be
suspended with immediate effect by the administration of the
Society in cases where repair of deficiencies are not carried
out to the surveyor's satisfaction or otherwise dealt with in
an appropriate manner within the time limits given by the
103 The validity of the classification certificate given in
102 will be S years for units with main character of class surveyor.
1A 1, provided that the annual and intennediate surveys 204 The Society may further decide to suspend a uuit's
given in Pt.7 Ch.2 Sec.2 are carried out at intervals and class if the unit cannot be submitted to the required surveys;
within the time windows required in Pt.7 Ch.2 Sec.l A103. for instance due to a major casualty, or other force majeure
. .... -_ .... ..... .... , __ .. -.,. -,- _. -- - _, .. - - - _ - - - '.- - . _ .. , .
')

201 For renewal surveys completed within 3 months be-
fore the expiry date of the existing certificate, the new cer-
tificate will be valid to a date not exceeding'S years from the
expiry date of the existing certificate.
202 For renewal surveys completed after the expiry date
of the existing certificate, the new certificate will be valid to
a date not exceeding 5 years from the expiry date of the
existing certificate.
203 For renewal surveys completed more than 3 months
before the expiry date of the existing certificate, the new
certificate will be valid to a date not exceeding S years from
the completion date of the renewal survey.
204 In cases where postponement has been granted as sti-
pulated in Pt. 7 Ch.2 Sec. 1 A600, the new certificate will be
valid to a date not exceeding S years from the expiry date
of the existing certificate before postponement was granted.
205 In cases where the renewal surveys are carried out
concurrently with major conversions andlor alterations re-
quiring a long conversion time, the validity of the new cer-
tificate will normally be S years from the date of the
completion and/or alteration.
205 Where a suspension of class has come into effect the
Society will:
- notify the proper authorities in the country where the uuit
is registered
.Register of vessels classed with DNV. or its supple-
ment.
301 The class will be withdrawn at the owner's request.
302 If the outstanding surveys specified in 201 and 202
or required repairs as given in 203 are not carried out within
a specified time after the class suspension, the Society may
decide to withdraw the unit's class.
303 When any unit proceeds to sea without having recti-
fied a condition of class which was required to be dealt with
before leaving port, the class will be withdrawn with imme-
diate effect.
304 If the outstanding debt owed to the Society is not paid
within a fixed date, the Society may withdraw the uuit's
class with one month's written notice. This also applies
when the obligation to pay rests with a yard or with the
DET NORSKE VERITAS
unit's previous owners. In special cases a shorter notice may
be given.
30S Where a withdrawal of class has come into effect the
Society will:
- notify the proper authorities in the country where the unit
is registered
<Register of vessels classed with DNV. or its supple-
ment.
- make the information available to underwriters.
401 If the outstanding surveys leading to class suspension
as given in 201 and 202 or required repairs as given in 203
are carried out within a specified time, the class will be
reinstated ""d the existing classification certificate retains its
validity.
402 In all other cases than that given in 40 I, and if the
circumstances leading to withdrawal of class no longer ex-
ists' a unit's class may only be reinstated based upon a
written request from the owner. The survey extent will in
such instances be dependent upon the unit's classification
status at the time of suspension or withdrawal.
403 When the surveyor is satisfied that the applicable re-
quirements given in 402 have been met, he will issue a cer-
tificate of interim class which will remain valid until the
administration of the Society has confirmed the class and
issued the classification certificate.
404 When the class is reinstated, the Society will confirm
the reinstatement in writing to the owners and to the Au-
thorities in the country where the unit is registered and make
the information available to any third party upon request.
E. Appeals
E 100 Decisions taken by the Society
101 The client may request that a decision by the Society
is to be taken up for reconsideration by one or more sur-
veyors specially appointed by the Society. The expenses
incurred are to be paid by the party making the appeal,
however, if the earlier decision is revoked, the expenses will
be covered by the Society
DET NORSKE VERITAS
,"J ()
.,
,J :J
."J
("J
J
(J
SECTIONl
CLASSIFICATION PRINCIPLES
A. Def"mitions
A 100 Rules
A 200 Terminology
Contents
B 100 General
B 200 Entering into force and application of rules
B 300 Basis for assignment of class
B 400 Basis for maintenance of class
B 500 Documentation
A. DefInitions
A 100 Rnles
101 The Rules are to be understood as all those rule re-
quirements accepted by the Board as basis for classification,
which are developed by the Society.
102 Tentative Rules are rules applying to new fields to
which the Society reserves the right to make adjustments
duriog a period in order to obtain the intention reflected in
the rules.
103 A Guidance note given in the rules is advice which is
not mandatory for assignment of class, but with which the
Society, in light of general experience, advises compliance,
hence, it is for the client to decide whether to apply the note
or not.
A 200 Terminology
201 Det Norske Veritas (DNV) is an autonomous and in-
dependent Foundation with the object of safeguarding life,
property and the environment at sea aud ashore.
DNV undertakes classification and certification and ensures
"O'f shlps;'mobil;;'offshOre'UilliS; flied offshor" .
structures, facilities and systems, and carries out research in
connection with these functions.
DNV operates a world-wide network of survey stations and
is authorised by more than 120 national administrations to
carry out surveys and, in most cases, issue certificates on
their behalf.
202 The Society signifies D NV.
203 The Board signifies the Executive Board of DNV
through its Chairman who is the President and CEO of
DNV.
204 National Authorities denotes the Administration of any
country of registry.
20S Client means the party having requested classification
or having assumed ownership of a classed unit. In cases
where owners have authorised another party to operate the
unit on their behalf, such party is regarded as the client.
206 IMO is the International Maritime Organization.
lACS is the International Association of Classification Soci-
eties.
207 A Recognised Classification Society means a classi-
fication society which is a full or associate member of lACS.
208 Classification comprises those services rendered by
the Society in accordance with the rules. Classification of
units is conducted in accordance with the requirements of
the rules and any other standards to which reference therein
may be made.
209 Assigning Class originally signified designation of a
ship according to its standard in one of several classes,
ranging from good to bad. Today only the highest class is
assigned, comprising the main class, 1 A 1 or 1 A2, and an
obligatory additional class notation, e.g. Column Stabi-
lized Drilling Unit, where applicable. Voluntary additional
class notations may also be assigned coveriog special ser-
vice, equipment or systems, e.g. EO denoting periodically
unattended machinery space.
210 The Classification Cenificate is issued upon assign-
ment or renewal of class. Its validity is five years subject to
successful completion of annual and intermediate surveys.
211 Statutory Certificates means !MO Convention Certif-
icates issued on behalf of, or by, National Authorities.
212 Approval, or Approved, denotes acceptance by the
Society of plans/descriptions showing design solutions, ar-
rangements and/or equipment to comply with the rules. The
approval is manifested by the Society's approval stamp.
213 Type Approval is a procedure for assessment of a de-
sign against the rule requirements or a standard within the
framework of the rules.
The design is to be representative for continuous production.
Guidance note:
The terms design assessment and production assessment are
used to harmonise tenninology with the EU terminology.
Guidance note:
The tenn Type Examination is used when the confonnity as-
sessment of the design is according to EU Directives or against
other standards where fitness for use onboard ships, MOUs or
HSLC has not been evaluated.
__ " "-';""'-'0-"-' ___
214 A Quality Audit is a systematic and independent ex-
amination to determine whether established work processes
and quality systems are adhered to.
21S A Supplier or a Mamifacturer, supplies materials,
components, equipment and systems to newbuildings to be
classed, or to classed units in operation, whose production
is subject to design approval, surveys and testing in accord-
ance with the rules.
B 100 General
101 The Classification concept comprises the development
of independent technical standards for mobile offshore units,
and the verification of compliance with these standards
throughout the units' life.
102 The rules are aimed at ensuring safety against hazards
to the unit, personnel, and against hazards to the environ-
ment.
103 The classification of units is performed in accordance
with the requirements of the rules and any other standards
to which reference is made.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
.. ")
..
~ ~
f) ..
) /)
SECTION 4
LEGAL PROVISIONS
Contents
A 200 Governing law
A 300 Venue
101 If any person suffers loss or damage which is proved
to have been caused by any negligent act or omission of Det
Norske Veritas, then Det Norske Veritas shall pay compen-
sation to such person for his proved direct loss or damage.
However, the compensation shall not exceed an amount
equal to ten times the fee charged for the service io question,
provided that the maximum compensation shall never exceed
USD 2 million.
In this provision "Det Norske Veritas" shall mean the
Foundation Det Norske Veritas as well as all its subsidiaries,
directors, officers, employees, agents and any other actiog
on behalf of Det Norske Veritas.
A 200 Governing law
201 These Rules, the classification of the unit and the re-
lationship between the Society and other parties shall be
governed by Norwegian law.
A 300 Venue
301 Any dispute arisiog io relation to or as a consequence
of these Rules shall only be resolved by the courts of Nor-
way, the Municipal Court of Oslo beiog the proper venue.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
I,J
~
-,
~
,J
- - - - -- - - - - -- - -- - - - - - - - - - --------- - - - - - - -- - - -- --- - -- - -
8 ')
'J ()
2
CONTENTS
SEC. 1 CLASSIFICATION PRINCIPLES . 1
A. Def"mitions .......... .... .. 1
A 100 Rules........................................................ 1
A 200 Terminology. ....................................... ....... 1
B. The Classification Concept ...... ... ....... 1
B 100 Geneml...... ...... .. ....................................... 1
B 200 Entering into force and application of rules .......... 2
B 300 Basis for assignment of class ........................... 2
B 400 Basis for maintenance of class .......................... 2
B 500 Documentation........... ...... .................. .. ....... 2
B 600 Disclosure of information ............................... 3
B 700 Limitation of the Society's responsibility............. 3
SEC.2 SCOPE OF RULES AND CLASS NOTATIONS 4
A. Scope of Rules ......... .... . .......... ............. 4
A 100 General..................................................... 4
A 200 Rule parts .................................................. 4
A 300 Rule particulars ........................................... 4
B. Class Notations ...................................... ............. 5
B 100 General...... ........................ ...... ... .............. 5
B 200 Construction symbols .................................... 5
B 300 Main character of class .................................. 5
B 400 Basic design notations .................... :............... 5
B 500 Service restrictions ....................................... 5
B 600 Additional class: Service and type notations ......... 5
B 700 Additional class: Equipment and systems notations 6
B 800 Additional Class: Special features notations.......... 6
SEC. 3 CLASSIFICATION PROCEDURE ................ 7
A. Assignment of Class ...................................... ....... 7
A 100 Request for classification ................... ............. 7
A 200 Requirements for workshops and yards .............. 7
A 300 Requirements for manufacturers ....................... 7
A 400 Requirements for suppliers of services . .............. 7
A 500 Plan approval .............................................. 7
A 600 Survey............................. ........ ... .. ............ 8
A 700 Functional teSting ......................................... 8
A 800 Certification of materials, components and equipment 8
A 900 Acceptance of control by National Authorities ...... 9,
A 1000 Manufacturing Survey Arrangement................... 9
A llOO Type approval ............................................. 9
A 1200 Certificate of interim class .............................. 9
A 1300 Classification certificate..... ............................. 9
A 1400 Appendix.to the classification certificate .............. 9
A 1500 Entry in the Register of vessels classed with DNVlI- 9
B. Retention of Class .............................................. 10
B 100 General ................. ................................... 10
B 200 Periodical and renewal surveys ........................ 10
B 300 Survey of damage........................................ 10
B 400 Survey of repairs ........................................ 10
B 500 Procedures for maintenance............................ 10
B 600 Conversions and alterations ............................ 10
B 700 Change of ownership .................................... 10
B 800 Conditions of Class and Memoranda .......... ....... 10
B 900 Survey reports and survey status ...................... II
C. Validity and Issuance of the Classification Certificate 11
C 100 Validity of the certificate. ... .............. .......... ... II
C 200 Issuance of certificate ................................... 11
D. Suspension and Withdrawal of Class ...................... 11
D 100 General............. .............. .. ............. .. ........ II
D 200 Suspension of class ...................................... 11
D 300 Withdrawal of class .... ............ ...... ........ ....... II
D 400 Reclassification ........................................... 12
E. Appeals ............................................................ 12
E 100 Decisions taken by the Society ........................ 12
SEC. 4 LEGAL PROVISIONS ........................ ....... 13
A 200 Governing law
A 300 Venue
..................................... 13
13
13
13
General
The present edition of the Rules includes amendments and additions
decided by the Board in June 1999 and supersedes the JanuarY 1999
edition of the same chapter. The rule changes come into force on 1
JanuarY 2000.
plements will not be issued except for an updated list of corrections
presented in Pt.O Ch.l Sec.3. Pt.O Ch.l is nonnally revised in
JsnuarY snd July each year.. ,
Revised chapters will be forwarded to all .subscribers to the Rules.
current.
Main changes
Sec. 1 Classification Principles
- Inthe Rules for the Classification of Ships, a Table Bl was in-
cluded in the JanuarY 1996 issue, based on lACS Procedural
Requirement No.3, 1996 Rev.!. It specifies that the yard shsll
automatically receive approved "as carried out" drawings for
"Newbuildings". This is fonnally correct, but only for yard-
related drawings (e.g. structure and system drawings). Fabri-
cation drawings for components (e.g. boilers or engines),
however, are the property of the component manufacturer. Ac-
, .:, :.
cOIdingly "as carried out" drawings for these (components)
should not be distributed to the yard or other third party without
the knowledge and acceptance of the manufacturer (or the holder
of the copyright). In order to avoid future misunderstandings
Table B1 and the revised wording from the Rules for Classi-
fication of Ships is included in B600 of the Rules for Classi-
fication of MOU, also.
- To limit potential problems related to the Y2K issue, an addi-
tional disclaimer has been included in item B702.
- lACS has issued new procedural requirements for service sup-
pliers in Unified Requirement Z17. To implement the changes,
items A203 and A204 are added and item A401 is expanded.
- A new Internet sexvice, DNV Exchange Basic, will be launched
and implemented into the market during 1999. This sexvice will
replace the 4-monthly and the annual suxvey and certificate sta-
tus, currently sent to the owner. This means that the Society will
no longer provide the survey and certificate status. on a
4-monthly basis and it will be the responsibility of the owners
to obtain the infonnation from the DNV Internet website. The
amended text appears in item B902.
Besides the above stated rule changes, some corrections and clar-
ifications have been made in the rule wording in compliance with
current interpretations and the updating of other chapters of the
Rules.
For subscription orders or infonnation about subscription tenns, please use distribution@dnv.com.
Comprehensive infonnation about DNV and the Society'S services is found at the Web site http://www.dnv.com
7.99.2500
If any person auffera loss or damage which is proved to have been caused by any negligent act or omission of Det Norske Veritas, then Det Norske Verit81!l shall pay compensation to
such person for his proved direct loss or damage. However, the compensation shall not exceed an amount equal to ten times the fee charged for the service in question, provided that
the maximum compensation shall never exceed USD 2 million. "
In this provision -Det Norske Veritas- shall mean the Foundation Det Norske Verit81!l IS well as all ita slbsldi.ries, directors, officers, employees, agents and any other acting on behalf
of Det Norske Veritas. .
\ ~
,:)
")
=J
iJ
.':)
J
~
i) I)

PART 1 CHAPTER 1
Lwrary z 1 AUll 2U02
W 0/ o/ung CJ au
RULES FOR
CLASSIFICATION OF

"IE
' n r' .
'".:':'_ '1.\). ' .. .'::_!._
,.' ' ........... '" . ..' -",' ' .. 3 ,
-.,., ---'.
REGULATIONS
GENERAL REGULATIONS
J ") JULY 1999
SECTIONS PAGE
1 Classification Principles ....................................................................................... 1
2 Scope of Rules and Class Notations ........................................................................ 4
3 Classification Procedure ...................................................................................... 7
4 Legal Provisions ............................................................................................... 13
")")
.) ')' . -
.
I
I
DET NORSKE VERITAS
Veritasveien 1, N-1322 HIiOVik, Norway TeL: +4767579900 Fax: +47675799 11
'{ ..
,;.

"
. r '.
C) . 0

0
') ()
--" ',j
:1
. '.
Li6rary Z 1 AUG 2002
. 10/ o/ung r[ au . '.,
RULES FOR
CLASSIFICATION OF

PART 2 CHAPTER 1
. .' '. .;)'-.l.y:' :
.. '.
.
FOR MATERIALS
JANUARY 1996
SECTIONS ..
PAGE
. 1 General Requirements .......... :.:............................................................................ 1
-, ,---,---.- - -- - --- - - - -- ---- --
DET NORSKE VERIT AS
Veritasveien I, N1322 Hevik, Norway Tel.: +4767579900 Fax: +4767579911
General
The present edition of the Rules includes amendments decided by
the Board as of December 1995
1
and supersedes the January 1993
edition of the same chapter.
The Rule changes come into force on 1 July 1996.
As this chapter contains reference to the Rules for Classification of
Ships Pt.2 Ch.l, see the latest version of the Ship Rules for infor-
mation on changes in the Rules and coming into force dates.
plements will not be issued except for an updated list of minor
amendments and corrections presented in the mtroduction booklet.
The introduction booklet is normally revised in January and July
each year.
Whenever uPdated. Pt.2 Ch.! of the Ship Rules will be forwarded
to all subscribers to the Rules for Mobile Offshore Units.
Revised chapters will be forwarded to all subscribers to the Rules.
chapters printed in Pt.O Ch.! Sec.! to ensure that the chapter is
current.
Main changes
Sec.1 General Requicements
All existing text of the old Pt.2 Ch.! has been replaced by a
reference to the Rules for Classification of Ships.
Printed in NOIWay by Det Norske Veritas AS January 1996
1.96.2000
It is agreed that save as provided below Det Norske Veritas. its subsidiaries, bodies, officers, directors, employees and agents shall have no liability for any loss, damage or expense

whether the I09S, damage or expense has affected anyone with whom Det Norske Veritas has a contract or a third party who has acted or relied on decisions made or information given
by or on behalf of Det Norske Veritas. * However, jf any person uses the services of Det Norske Veritas or its subsidiaries or relies on any decision made or information given by or
on behalf of them and in consequence suffers a loss, damage or expense proved to be due to their negligence, omission or defauit. then Det Norske Veritas will pay by way of com
pensation to such person a sum representing his proved loss. * In the event Det Norske Veritas or its subsidiaries may be held liable in accordance with the sections above, the amount
of compensation shall under no circumstances exceed the amount of the fee, if any, charged for that particular service, decision, advice or information. * Under no circumstances
whatsoever shall the individual or individuals who have personally caused the loss. damage or expense be held liable. * In the event that any provision in this section shal! be invalid
under the law of any jurisdiction, the validity of the remaining provisions shall not in any way be affected.

o o
.::J
o
o o
J
.'
I
u

U

u

(

..
u

~

-
J
i
i
j
o

o

0

u

0

\
.
l

0

.
.
.
.

~

?
>

t
r
j

-
(
"
l

~

0
_

o
~

0
0

~

o
S

o
n

~

~

0

e
.
=

Rules for Mobile Offshore Units, January 1996
SECTION 1
A. Classification
A 100 Geneml
Contents
A. Classification
Ij A 100 General
101 The requirements specified in the Rules for Classi-
J! fication of Ships Part 2 Chapter 1 .General Requirements
'f for Materials. are to be complied with to the extent appli-
cable.
o ()
8 ..::J
C) 0
::J C)
~
I
,
102 Any reference to Pt.2 within the Rules for Classifica-
tion of Mobile Offshore Units should be read as a reference
to Pt.2 of the Rules for Classification of Ships.
103 When applying the Rules for Classification of Ships
to Mobile Offshore Units, the term .ship. should be substi-
tuted with the term .uni!.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
SECTION 1
A. Classification
A 100 Geneml
Contents
A. Classification
Ij A 100 General
J! fication of Ships Part 2 Chapter 1 .General Requirements
'f for Materials. are to be complied with to the extent appli-
cable.
o ()
8 ..::J
C) 0
::J C)
~
I
,
tuted with the term .uni!.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
u

U

u

(

..
u

~

-
J
i
i
j
o

o

0

u

0

\
.
l

0

.
.
.
.

~

?
>

t
r
j

-
(
"
l

~

0
_

o
~

0
0

~

o
S

o
n

~

~

0

e
.
=

General
the Board as of December 1995
1
and supersedes the January 1993
Ships Pt.2 Ch.l, see the latest version of the Ship Rules for infor-
each year.
Whenever uPdated. Pt.2 Ch.! of the Ship Rules will be forwarded
current.
Main changes
Sec.1 General Requicements
All existing text of the old Pt.2 Ch.! has been replaced by a
Printed in NOIWay by Det Norske Veritas AS January 1996
1.96.2000
It is agreed that save as provided below Det Norske Veritas. its subsidiaries, bodies, officers, directors, employees and agents shall have no liability for any loss, damage or expense

whether the I09S, damage or expense has affected anyone with whom Det Norske Veritas has a contract or a third party who has acted or relied on decisions made or information given
by or on behalf of Det Norske Veritas. * However, jf any person uses the services of Det Norske Veritas or its subsidiaries or relies on any decision made or information given by or
on behalf of them and in consequence suffers a loss, damage or expense proved to be due to their negligence, omission or defauit. then Det Norske Veritas will pay by way of com
whatsoever shall the individual or individuals who have personally caused the loss. damage or expense be held liable. * In the event that any provision in this section shal! be invalid

o o
.::J
o
o o
J
.'
I
'{ ..
,;.

"
. r '.
C) . 0

0
') ()
--" ',j
:1
. '.
. 10/ o/ung r[ au . '.,
RULES FOR
CLASSIFICATION OF

PART 2 CHAPTER 1
. .' '. .;)'-.l.y:' :
.. '.
.
FOR MATERIALS
JANUARY 1996
SECTIONS ..
PAGE
. 1 General Requirements .......... :.:............................................................................ 1
-, ,---,---.- - -- - --- - - - -- ---- --
DET NORSKE VERIT AS
Veritasveien I, N1322 Hevik, Norway Tel.: +4767579900 Fax: +4767579911
:1
I
i:) ()
DNV
PART 2 CHAPTER 1
10/ o/ung r[ au
.....
O
l";\ .""" I I!TE
.
I '''''
: :<,,'., .. ,
-,:''''
RULES FOR
CLASSIFICATION OF
SIDPS
NEWBUILDINGS
') -) FOR MATERIALS
JANUARY 1993
SECTIONS
PAGE
1 Manufacture, Survey and Certification .................................................................... 1
2 Testing Procedures ............................................................................................. 4
f)
) ()
r
DET NORSKE VERITAS CLASSIFICATION AS
Veritasveien I, N-1322 H""ik,NOlway Tel.: +47675799 ()() Fax: +47675799 11
General.
The present edition of the Rules includes additions and amendments
decided by the Board as of December 1992, and supersedes th'e
January 1990 edition of the same chapter.
The Rule changes come into force on 1st of July 1993.
plements will not he issued except for an updated list of minor
amendments and corrections presented in the introduction booklet.
The introduction booklet is nonnally revised in January and July
each year.
chapters printed on the front page of the introduction booklet to
ensure that the chapter is current.
Det Norske Veritas
Main cillinges;" . \.
TIle' wnole Chapter" has been rearranged and rewritten.
Sec.1 Manufacture, Survey and Certification.
- Contains the general requirements of the previous Sec.! with
additions on the general requirements for testing and inspection.
Sec.2 Testing Procedures.
Contains general requirements and the test methods of the pre-
vious Sec. I.
Previous sections on requirements for Steel and Iron have been
moved to Chapter 2.
Corrections and Clarifications.
In addition to the above stated rule amendments, some detected er-
rors have been corrected, and some clarifications have been made
in the existing rule wording.
Computer Typesetting by Division Ship and Offshore, Det Norske Veritas Classification AS
Printed in Norway by Det Norske Veritas January 1993
1.93.4500
It is agreed that save as provided below Oet Norske Veritas, its subsidiaries, bodies, officers, directors, employees and agents shall have no liability for any loss, damage or expense

whether the loss, damage or expense has affected anyone with whom Oet Norske Veritas has a contract or a third party who has acted or relied on decisions made or information given
by or on behalf of Oet Norskc Veritas. * However, if any person uses the services of oet Norske Veritas or its subsidlaries or relies on any decision made or information given by or
on behalf of them and in consequence auffers a Joss, damage or expense proved to be due to their negligence, omission or default, then Oet Norske Veritas will pay by way of com
pensation to such person a sum representing his proved loss. * In the event Oet Norske Veritas or its subsidiaries may be held liable in accordance with the sections above, the amount
of compensation shall under no circumstances exceed the amount of the fee, if any, charged for that particular serVlce, decision, advice or information. * Under no circumstances
whatsoever shall the individual or individuals who have personally caused the loss, damage or expense be held liable. * In the event that any provision in this section shall be invalid
i:J
.J
:J
)

i
f
,;
,

,
i

:J
':J
':)
402 The test pieces may be cut with their axes either tran-
sverse or longitudinal to the final rolling direction of the
material, but the orientation is to be the same for all test
pieces.
403 The sides of the test pieces are to be saw-cut or ma-
chined. The distance from a flame-<:ut surface is to be min.
25=.
The machining of the test piece to prescribed thickness is to
be on the compression side only.
404 Two test pieces are to be tested at the prescribed test
temperature. Both test pieces are to exhibit a non-break
performance, i.e. the NDT temperature is to be below the
test temperature.
405 The drop-weight test is to be carried out and evaluated
according to ASTM E 208.
;;:::..P
ilE

u'-'
E I
'"
I
R3
""'-.
J
I
Rules for Ships, January 1993
3/8 "PIPE
THREADS ..
J
r
:

E
J
I E
0
I
..
hi
I
II>
II>
W
Z

I
u
:r
>--
1!l10rrrn
w
>--
J <l
-'
!
I
n.
I
I ,
Fig. 6
Example of test piece for Z-direction tensile testing for plate
thickness mm.
For rolled pieces with mass more than 20 tonnes, one test
sample is to be taken from each end.
Three pieces from each test sample are to be prepared for
testing while the rest of the pieces remains for possible re-
tests.
506 If it is not possible to trace individual single plates to
the original mother plate, each single plate is to be tested
taking 3 pieces of each.
507 The reduction of areas, Z" is defined by the relation:
Fig, 5 Z.
So-S 100%
S
thickness t<40 mm. So
original cross-sectional area of test piece
B 500 Z-direction ductility testing
501 The test is applicable to materials exceeding 10 mm
thickness.
502 For plate thickness up to 40 = the full plate thick-
ness is to be tested by making welded extensions on the plate
to be tested. Welding is to be carried out by suitable methods
giving a sufficiently strong bond without excessive pene-
tration in the plate. Friction welding, manual metal arc
welding, using properly handled low hydrogen electrodes,
and stud welding are preferred methods, see Fig. 5.
503 For plate thicknesses exceeding 40 =, the test pieces
may be made without welded extensions provided that min-
imum 6 mm on either side is used for heads or other means
of fastening the test piece in the tensile machines (see Fig.
6).
504 The relation between material thickness, t, and test
piece diameter, D, is as follows:
t ,;; 16 =: D 6 =
t > 16 =: D 10 =.
505 A test sample sufficient for the preparation of six
pieces is to be taken from one end of each rolled piece. The
sample is to be cut from the midend position of the product.
s . = cross-sectional area at fracture, due to the anisotropy
of the plate material, the fracture surface is often
approximately elliptical rather than circular. When
this is the case, the area is to be calculated as
S
where a and b are the long and the short axis of the
ellipse, respectively.
B 600 Determination of grain size
601 Where the austenitic grain size is specified, it is to be
determined according to methods described in recognized
standards. At least one sample is to be taken from finished
material from each ladle. For rolled products the sample is
preferably to be taken from the thickest piece rolled. The
grain size numbers refer to the ASTM scale described in
ASTM E 112.
B 700 Other testing
701 Testing not described in item 100-600 may be re-
quired for certain products. In such cases testing is to be
carried out in accordance with procedures approved by the
Society.
DEf NORSKE VERITAS
Page 6 - Pt.2 Ch.l Sec.2

!
" b "'
all
. 11!l
'" ( .... 9a+0) --,
Fig. 3
Bend test piece.
202 For plates, structural sections and sheets, test piece
with the following dimensions is to be used:
a = as rolled thickness t of material
b = 30 mm
If the as rolled thickness t is greater than 25 mm, it may be
reduced to 25 mm by machining on the compression side
of the bend test piece.
203 For forgings, castings and semi-finished products, test
piece with the following dimensions is to be used:
a = 20 mm
b = 25 mm
B 300 bnpact testing
301 Impact testing is to be carried out as Charpy V -notch
test according to the specification in question. Each value for
305 Dimensions and tolerances for Charpy V -notch test
pieces are to be as in Table Bl.
Table Bl Cbarpy V-notch test pieces.
Dimensions Nominal Tolerances
Length 55 mm 0,60 mm
Width
- standard test piece lOmm
O,ll mm
- subsize test piece 7,5 mm
O,ll mm
- subsize test piece 5mm O,06mm
- subsize test piece 2,5mm +0,06mm
Thickness 10 mm +0,06mm
Angle of notch 45 +2
Depth below notch 8mm +0,05 mm
Root radius O,25mm +0,025mm
Distance of notch from ends
of test piece 27,5 mm +0,42 mm
Angle between plane of symmetry
of notch and longitudinal
axis of test piece 90 +2
width

thickness
Fig. 4
Charpy V-notch test piece.
absorbed energy is to be determined as the average of one 306 Standard Charpy V -notch test pieces with width 10
set of 3 impact test pieces. mm are to be used, except when the thickness of the material
. . does not permit this size. In such cases the largest obtainable
302 The Charpy V -notch unpact toughness I.S the absorbed of the subsize test pieces with width 7,5 mm or 5 mm is to
energy, expressed m Joule (J), the symbol bemg KV. be used. For tubes and pipes also a subsize test piece with
303 The Charpy impact test machine is to be of a type 2,5 mm is to be used if necessitated by the dimen-
acceptable to the Society having a gap of 40 mm, a striking SlOns.

'''-_//
velocity between 4,5 and 7 mlsec. and a striking energy of 307 The temperature of the test piece at the moment of
29(.l-.10I-fo ... . .h"tw""nJhl\-slt1king.-.-bfcak""ing-is-t",-J,e-the-speeified-temperature-within-ll.eG.--_--
edges of the pendulum IS to be 30 with the edge rounded
to a radius 2 to 2,5 mm. (Pendulum according to ASTM E
23 will also be accepted.)
The point of impact of the hammer is to be in the centreline
of the notch. The.scale of the machine is to be calibrated to
an accuracy of +0,5% of the machine's maximum striking
energy. Impact test machines with a striking energy of less
than 290J are acceptable. In such cases, KV is to be sup-
plemented with an index giving the striking energy.
For example, KV 145 indicates that a striking energy of
145J has been used.
pieces are to comply with the specifications given in 305.
The test samples may be flame-cut but the notch is not to
be nearer to a flame-cut edge than 25 mm. The prescribed
dimensions are to be accurately and systematically checked.
The notch is to be made in a single cut by a special milling
cutter. The cutter is always to be kept sharp so that the shape
of the notch is correct and cold working at the base is
avoided as far as possible. The cutter is not to be used for
more than 100 test pieces between each checking.
There are to be no indications, scratches or marks left in the
base of the notch after machining. The plane of symmetry
of the notch is to be at right angle to the longitudinal axis
of the test piece.
Test temperature is to be stated in the certificate.
Guidance note:
The required temperature tolerance is usually obtainable by im-
mersing the test piece for at least 2 minutes in an agitated liquid
bath having the specified test temperature, and have the test piece
broken within 5 seconds after withdrawal from the bath.
-e-n-d--o-f-G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e--n-o-t-e---
B 400 Drop-weight testing
401 For material with thickness t equal to or greater than
16 mm, drop-weight test pieces for the determination of
NDT (nil ductility transition) temperature are to comply with
specifications given in ASTM E208, and have one of the
following sizes:
No.1: 25 by 90 by 360 mm
No.2: 19 by 50 by 130 mm
No.3: 16 by 50 by 130 mm.
For material thicknesses below 16 mm down to and includ-
ing 12 mm, a test piece machined down to 12 mm thickness
is to be used. For material thicknesses below 12 = down
to and including 10 mm, the thickness of the test piece is to
be that of the material. Other dimensions and requirements
for test piece with thickness below 16 mm are to be as for
test piece no.3 above, except that a stop distance of 2,3 mm
is to be used.
DEf NORSKE VERITAS
()
)

()
C)
(j

Cj
CONTENTS
SEC. 1 MANUFACTURE, SURVEY AND CERTIF-
ICATION ........................... 1
A. General .......................................... 1
A 100 Scope .................................. :..................... 1
A 200 Information to be supplied by the purchaser ......... 1
A 300 Approval of manufacturers .............................. 1
B. Testing and inspection ............ .............................. 1
B 100 Survey during manufacture ............................. 1
B 200 Chemical composition .................................... 1
B 300 Heat treatment ............................................. 1
B 400 Selection of test material................................. 1
B 500 Definitions relevant to testing........................... 1
B 600 Testing.. ...... .. ...... ........ .... .. .. .. ...... .. ...... .... .. 1
B 700 Retesting.. ...... .. ...... ...... ........ .. .... .... ...... ...... 2
B 800 Visual and non-destructive examination .............. 2
B 900 Correction of defects ..................................... 2
C. Identification and certification ................................ 2
C 100 Identification of materials ...... ......................... 2
C 200 Certification of materials ................................ 2
SEC. 2 TESTING PROCEDURES .. .... ......... 4
A. Groeral ............................................................. 4
A 100 Scope ......... ........ ........ ............ ...... ........ ..... 4
A 200 Testing machines .......................................... 4
A 300 Preparation of test pieces ................................ 4
B. Test Methods ....... ........ .......................... ........ ..... 4
B 100 Tensile testing at ambient temperature ................ 4
B 200 Bend testing ................................................ 5
B 300 Impact testing .............. ,............................... 6
B 400 Drop-weight testing ...................................... 6
B 500 Z-direction ductility testing .............................. 7
B 600 Detennination of grain size ............................. 7
B 700 Other testing ............................................... 7

t
,

o
iJ
" :J
'J J
)

'.'

R
d
-_._+--
pe2 Ch,1 Sec.2 - Page 5
110 For forgings, bars, cast steel and nodular cast iron
round test pieces normally with dimensions as specified be-
low, are to be used:
d = 14 mm
L, = 70 mm
L, "'85 mm
R = 10 mm, except generally for materials with a speci-
fied minimum elongation As:$; 10%, where R is to be
20mm.
. . . If for special reasons, other dimensions are to be used, they
I
I' Lo 11 Flat will to conform with the following geometrical re-
1b3 ..
. . R
= 5d
"'L+d
= 1 0 mm, except for materials with a specified mini-
mum elongation As:$; 10 %, where R is to be 1,5d.
I. L c .1 Full cross-section
- .
Fig. 1
Tensile test pieces.
107 The gauge length L, may be rounded off to the nearest
5 mm, provided that the difference between this length and
L, is less than 10 % of L,.
The parallel test length is to be parallel within acceptable
tolerances. Tolerances according to ISO 82-1974 will be
accepted.
108 For plates with thickness t= 3 mm or more, test pieces
according to alternative A, B or C below are to be used.
Alternative A, flat test piece:
a = t
b = 25 mm
L, = 200 mm
L, '" 225 mm
R = 25 m
Alternative B, flat test piece:
a
b
t:
R
= t
= 25mm
= 5,
65
.JS?;;--
'" L, + 2 "S,
= 25mm
Alternative C, round test piece:
d = 14 mm
L, = 70 mm
L, '" 85 mm
R = 10mm
The round test piece is to be located with its centre t/4 from
the plate surface or as close to this position as possible.
109 For sheet and strips with thickness t less than 3 mm,
flat test piece with the following dimensions is to be used:
a = t
b = 12,5 mm
L, = 50 mm
L, '" 75 mm
R =25mm
111 For propeller casting the diameter is not to be less
than 14 mm.
112 For bars of small dimensions a full cross-section test
piece may be used.
113 For grey cast iron the test piece is to have dimensions
as stipulated in Fig. 2.
R= 25
I
I
_.
12120
_.
12125
80
-
-
ii'Uri n
114 For tubes, test piece according to alternative A or B
below are to be used.
Alternative A:
Full cross-section test pieces with plugged ends.
L, = 5,65.JS:
L, '" L, + D
L, is the distance between the grips or the plugs, whi-
chever is the smallest.
Alternative B:
Strip
a = wall thickness of the tube
b = 12 mm
L, = 5,65.JS:
L, '" L, + 2b
B 200 Bend testing
201 Flat bend test piece as given in Fig. 3 is to be used.
Edges on tension side to be rounded to a radius of 1 to 2
mm.
DEf NORSKE VERITAS
Rules for Ships. January 1993
SECTION 2
TESTING PROCEDURES
Contents.
A. General
A 100 Scope
A 200 Testing machines
A 300 Preparation of test pieces
B. Test Methods
S 100 Tensile testing at ambient temperature
B 200 Bend testing
B 300 Impact testing
B 400 Dropweight testing
B 700 Other testing
A. General
A 100 Scope
101 This section specifies the requirements for testing
machines, test pieces and testing procedures when testing
ferrous and nonferrous metals.
102 Alternative test pieces, such as those complying with
recognized national and international standards, may be ac-
cepted subject to approval by the Society. The same applies
to the given testing procedures.
201 All tests are to be carried out by competent personnel
on machines of approved type. The machines are to be
maintained in satisfactory and accurate condition and are to
be recalibrated at approximately annual intervals by a qual-
ified organisation. A record of such calibrations is to be
Z . = percentage reduction of area.
102 Upper yield stress (R.
H
) is the highest value of stress
measured at the commencement of plastic deformation at
yield; often this value is represented by a pronounced peak
stress. The test is to be carried out with an elastic stress rate
not exceeding 30 N Imm' per sec.
103 When no well-defined yield phenomena exists, either
the yield strength at 0,2 % non-proportional elongation (
Rpo,,) or the yield strength at 0,5% total elongation (R<o,s) is
to be determined according to the applicable specification.
The test is to be carried out with an elastic stress rate not
exceeding 30 Nlmm' per sec.
104 For determination of tensile strength (R,,) of ductile
materials, the speed of the testing machine during the tensile
test is not to exceed that corresponding to a strain-rate at
maximum load of 40%/min. For brittle materials, like cast
iron the elastic stress rate is not to exceed 2,5 N Imm
2
per
sec.
105 The elongation generally means elongation determined
on a proportional gauge length 5 ,6S..js;, or 5d and has the
designation As'
If the material is a ferritic steel of low or medium strength
aod not cold worked, the elongation may also be measured
on a non-proportional gauge length Lo after agreement with
the Society. In that case the required elongation Ao is cal-
culated from the following formula:
Ao = 2 As ( '![f )0,40
"J
)
_ .. _. th!WllL!l!]1QrJl!Qry,, ___
As = the required elongation in % for test piece with gauge
"-lellgtl..-5;6SVS;=. ----
301 The preparation of test pieces is to be done in such a
manner that test pieces are not subjected to any significant
cold straining or heating.
302 If samples are cut from material by flame cutting or
shearing, a reasonable margin is required to enable sufficient
material to be removed from the cut edges during final ma-
chining.
303 Where possible, test pieces from rolled materials are
to retain their rolled surface on both sides.
B. Test Methods
B 100 Tensile testing at amhient temperature
101 Symbols related to tensile testing.
Rm = tensile strength.
R. = yield stress (yield point).
Rp = yield strength (proof stress).
R, = yield strength (proof stress), total elongation.
A = percentage elongation after fracture.
So = the cross-sectional area of the test piece in question.
Lo = the gauge length in question.
The elongation value is valid if the fracture occurs at least
the following distance from the end marks of the gauge
length:
Round test piece:
Flat test piece:
l,25d
b + a
106 For the purpose of determining the different desig-
nations related to tensile testing, three different types of test
pieces may be used: Round, flat and full cross-section test
pieces, see Fig. 1.
The following symbols are nsed:
d = diameter.
a = thickness.
b = width.
Lo = gauge length.
L. = parallel test length.
So = cross-section.
R = transition radius.
D = external tube diameter.
t = plate thickness.
DEY NORSKE VERITAS

/)

t,
,
'.
,
()

SECTION 1
MANUFACTURE, SURVEY AND CERTIFICATION
Contents.
A. General
A 100 Scope
A 200 Information to be supplied by the purchaser
A 300 Approval of manufacturers
B. Testing and inspection
B 100 Survey during manufacture
B 200 Chemical composition
B 300 Heat treatment
B 400 Selection of test material
B 500 Defmitions relevant to testing
B 600 Testing
B 700 Retesting
B 800 Visual and non-destructive examination
B 900 Correction of defects
C. Identification and certification
C 100 Identification of materials
C 200 Certification of materials
A. General
A 100 Scope
101 This Section specifies general requirements for manu-
facture, survey aod certification of materials used for the
constrnction or repair of hulls, equipment, boilers and pres-
sure vessels and machinery of vessels classed or intended for
classification by the Society.
Appropriate specific requirements are given in Ch.2.
102 Materials which are to comply with these requirements
are defined in the relevant design and construction parts of
the rules.
101 The surveyor is to be given the opportunity to inspect
and check at any time all plants and equipment used in the
manufacture and testing.
The manufacturer is to assist the surveyor to enable him to
verify that approved processes are adhered to aod to witness
the selection and testing as required by the rules.
102 Prior to the testing and inspection, the manufacturer
is to provide the surveyor with the technical specifications
of the order and aoy conditions additional to the rule re-
quirements.
201 The chemical composition of samples taken from each
ladle of each cast is to be determined by the manufacturer
in an adequately equipped and competently staffed labora-
tory aod is to comply with the appropriate requirements of
Ch.2.
202 The manufacturer's declared analysis will be accepted
subject to occasional checks if required by the surveyor.
301 All materials are to be supplied in a condition com-
plying with the appropriate requirements of Ch.2.
302 Heat treatment is to be carried out in properly con-
structed furnaces which are efficiently maintained and have
adequate meaos for control and recording of temperature.
The furnace dimensions are to be such as to allow the ma-
terial to be uniformly heated to the specified temperature.
303 In the case of very large castings or forgings alterna-
103 Materials which comply with national or proprietary tive methods for heat treatment will be specially considered.
--- ""--- .-.-
1\.. give reasonable equivalence to the requirements of Ch.2 or B 400 Selection of test material
'-_./ are otherwise specially approved. ...
- 401 Test matenal suffiCIent for the reqUITed tests aod pre-
(J
201 The purchaser is to supply the manufacturer with all
information necessary to ensure that survey and certification
can he carried out in accordance with these rules. This ap-
plies particularly where optional or additional conditions are
specified in the relevant construction rules.
301 Materials are to be manufactured at works which have
been approved by the Society. List of approved manufac-
turers is published separately.
302 In order to be approved, the manufacturer is required
to demonstrate and submit documentation to the effect that
the necessary manufacturing, testing and inspection fascili-
ties are available and are supervised by qualified personae!.
The manufacturer is also to carry out a test programme and
submit the results.
303 Detailed programmes for approval testing are given in
Certification Notes No.2.!,
304 When a manufacturer has more than one works, the
approval is only valid for the works which carried out the
test programme.
ferably also for possible retest purposes is to be provided.
The test material is to be representative of the test unit or
sample product and is not to be separated until all the spec-
ified heat treatment has been completed, unless otherwise
stated in Ch.2.
402 Where the Society' s certification is required, all the
test material is to be selected and marked by the surveyor,
unless otherwise agreed.
B 500 Definitions relevant to testing
The following definitions apply:
501 Test Unit: The nnmber of pieces or the tonnage of
products to be accepted or rejected together, on the basis of
the tests to be carried out on sample prodncts.
502 Sample Product: A single forging, casting, plate, tube
or other wrought product selected from a test unit.
503 Sample: A sufficient quantity of material taken from
the sample product for the purpose of producing' one or
more test pieces.
504 Test Piece: Part of the sample, with specified dimen-
sions, machined or unmachined, brought to a required con-
dition for submission to a given test.
DEY NORSKE VERITAS
B 600 Testing
601 The appropriate tests specified in Ch.2 and 3 are to
be carried out at the place of manufacture before materials
are dispatched. If the necessary facilities are not available
at the manufacturer's works, the testing is to be carried out
at a recognized testing laboratory.
Where the Society's certification is required, all the testing
is to be witnessed by the surveyor, unless otherwise agreed.
602 In the event of any material proving unsatisfactory
during subsequent processing or fabrication, such material
is to be rejected, notwithstanding any previous certification.
The surveyor may require further tests of materials from
affected test units.
B 700 Retesting
701 When the result of any test, other than impact test, fail
to meet the requirements, two further tests may be made
from the same sample. If both of these additional tests are
satisfactory, the test unit may be accepted.
702 When the results from a set of three impact test pieces
fail to meet the requirements, three additional test pieces
from the same sample may be tested and the results added
to those previously obtained to form a new average. If this
new average complies with the requirements and if not more
than two individual results are lower than the required av-
erage and, of these, not more than one result is below 70 %
of the specified average value, the test unit may be accepted.
703 If unsatisfactory results are obtained from retests rep-
resentative of a test unit, the sample product from which the
tests were made is to be rejected. The remaining material in
the test unit may be accepted provided that two further
sample products are tested with satisfactory result.
704 When a test unit is rejected, the remaining sample
products in the test unit may be resubnritted individually for
test, and those which give satisfactory results may be ac-
cepted.
705 At the option of the manufacturer, rejected material
may be resubmitted after heat treatment or re-heat treatment,
or may be resubmitted as another grade and may then be
--UCCejll!J([-pr1lVIll!J([-!lie-reqUlrM-1MlSarnalisl'lie!OfY .
706 If any test piece fails because of faulty preparation,
visible defects or (in the case of tensile test) because of
fracturing outside the range permitted for the appropriate
gauge length, the defective test piece may be disregarded
and replaced by an additional test piece of the same type.
801 All finished material is to have a workmanlike finish
and is to be free from internal and surface defects prejudical
to the use of the material for the intended application. Oth-
erwise the material is to comply with the appropriate specific
requirements of the subsequent rule chapters.
901 When unacceptable defects are found, these are to be
removed by appropriate methods and rectified in accordance
with the applicable requirements of Ch.2. Shallow grooves
or depression resulting from the removal of defects may, at
the discretion of the surveyor, be accepted provided that
they will cause no appreciable reduction in the strength of
the material and that they are suitably smoothed and con-
toured.
902 Repair of defects by welding is only to be carried out
when permitted by the appropriate specific requirements.
Proposals to repair a defective material by welding are to
be submitted to the surveyor for approval before this work
is commenced. Such proposals are to include appropriate
details of the extent and position of defects.
The manufacturer may be required to carry out welding
procedure qualification tests to demonstrate that satisfactory
mechanical properties can be obtained.
c. Identification and certification
101 The manufacturer is to adopt a system of identification
which enable all fmished material to be traced to the original
cast. The surveyor is to be given full facilities for so tracing
the materials when required.
102 Before acceptance, all materials which have been
tested and inspected with satisfactory results are to be clearly
marked by the manufacturer in at least one place with the
Society's brand, as furnished by the surveyor, and the fol-
lowing particulars:
a) Manufacturer's name or trade mark.
b) Material grade.
c) Identification number, cast number or other marking
which will enable the full history of the product to be
traced.
d) If required by the purchaser, his order number or other
identification mark.
103 Where a number of light materials are securely fas-
tened together in bundles the manufacturer may brand only
the top piece of each bundle, or alternatively, a firmly fas-
tened durable lable containing the brand may be attached to
each bundle.
104 The marking is normally made by hard stamping,
however, other methods may be accepted.
105 In the event of any material bearing the Society's
brand failing to comply with the test requirements, the brand
is to be unmistakably defaced by the manufacturer.

201 Certification of materials will be based on compliance
with all specified tests and inspection. Unless otherwise
specially approved, certification is to take place at the man-
ufacturer's works and the surveyor is to attend and witness
testing and inspection in accordance with the appropriate
requirements of Ch.2.
202 As an alternative to 201, certification may be based
on a Manufacturing Survey Arrangement (MSA), subject to
approval by the Society.
203 Normally, separate inspection certificates are issued
for each grade of material and each product form. The in-
spection certificate is to include the following particulars:
a) Purchaser's name and order number and if known the
vessel identification for which the material is intended.
b) Manufacturer's name.
c) Description of the product, dimensions, weight etc.
d) Identification of specification or grade of material.
e) Identification of the cast and product.
f) Ladle analysis for specified elements.
g) Results of all specified inspections and mechanical tests.
h) Condition of supply and where appropriate, details of
heat treatment.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
1 *
-t
1,

J
..
/J

(J
204 Where applicable, the manufacturer is to provide the
surveyor with inspection certificates or shipping statements
for all accepted materials giving at least the particulars de-
tailed in 203. Before the inspection certificates or shipping
statements are signed by the surveyor, the manufacturer is
required to furnish him with a written declaration stating that
the material has been made by an approved process and that
it has been subjected to and has withstood satisfactorily the
required tests. The following form of declaration will be
accepted if stamped or printed on each inspection certificate
____ _
or shipping statement with the name of the works and signed
by an authorized representative of the manufacturer:
.. We hereby certify that the material has been made by an
approved process and has been satisfactorily tested in ac-
cordance with D NV Rules for Classification ...
205 When a material is not produced at the works at which
it is rolled or forged, a certificate is to be supplied by the
maker stating the process of manufacture, the cast number
and the chemical composition of ladle samples. The works
at which the material was produced must be approved.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
B 600 Testing
601 The appropriate tests specified in Ch.2 and 3 are to
be carried out at the place of manufacture before materials
are dispatched. If the necessary facilities are not available
at the manufacturer's works, the testing is to be carried out
at a recognized testing laboratory.
Where the Society's certification is required, all the testing
is to be witnessed by the surveyor, unless otherwise agreed.
602 In the event of any material proving unsatisfactory
during subsequent processing or fabrication, such material
is to be rejected, notwithstanding any previous certification.
The surveyor may require further tests of materials from
affected test units.
B 700 Retesting
701 When the result of any test, other than impact test, fail
to meet the requirements, two further tests may be made
from the same sample. If both of these additional tests are
satisfactory, the test unit may be accepted.
702 When the results from a set of three impact test pieces
fail to meet the requirements, three additional test pieces
from the same sample may be tested and the results added
to those previously obtained to form a new average. If this
new average complies with the requirements and if not more
than two individual results are lower than the required av-
erage and, of these, not more than one result is below 70 %
of the specified average value, the test unit may be accepted.
703 If unsatisfactory results are obtained from retests rep-
resentative of a test unit, the sample product from which the
tests were made is to be rejected. The remaining material in
the test unit may be accepted provided that two further
sample products are tested with satisfactory result.
704 When a test unit is rejected, the remaining sample
products in the test unit may be resubnritted individually for
test, and those which give satisfactory results may be ac-
cepted.
705 At the option of the manufacturer, rejected material
may be resubmitted after heat treatment or re-heat treatment,
or may be resubmitted as another grade and may then be
--UCCejll!J([-pr1lVIll!J([-!lie-reqUlrM-1MlSarnalisl'lie!OfY .
706 If any test piece fails because of faulty preparation,
visible defects or (in the case of tensile test) because of
fracturing outside the range permitted for the appropriate
gauge length, the defective test piece may be disregarded
and replaced by an additional test piece of the same type.
801 All finished material is to have a workmanlike finish
and is to be free from internal and surface defects prejudical
to the use of the material for the intended application. Oth-
erwise the material is to comply with the appropriate specific
requirements of the subsequent rule chapters.
901 When unacceptable defects are found, these are to be
removed by appropriate methods and rectified in accordance
with the applicable requirements of Ch.2. Shallow grooves
or depression resulting from the removal of defects may, at
the discretion of the surveyor, be accepted provided that
they will cause no appreciable reduction in the strength of
the material and that they are suitably smoothed and con-
toured.
902 Repair of defects by welding is only to be carried out
when permitted by the appropriate specific requirements.
Proposals to repair a defective material by welding are to
be submitted to the surveyor for approval before this work
is commenced. Such proposals are to include appropriate
details of the extent and position of defects.
The manufacturer may be required to carry out welding
procedure qualification tests to demonstrate that satisfactory
mechanical properties can be obtained.
c. Identification and certification
101 The manufacturer is to adopt a system of identification
which enable all fmished material to be traced to the original
cast. The surveyor is to be given full facilities for so tracing
the materials when required.
102 Before acceptance, all materials which have been
tested and inspected with satisfactory results are to be clearly
marked by the manufacturer in at least one place with the
Society's brand, as furnished by the surveyor, and the fol-
lowing particulars:
a) Manufacturer's name or trade mark.
b) Material grade.
c) Identification number, cast number or other marking
which will enable the full history of the product to be
traced.
d) If required by the purchaser, his order number or other
identification mark.
103 Where a number of light materials are securely fas-
tened together in bundles the manufacturer may brand only
the top piece of each bundle, or alternatively, a firmly fas-
tened durable lable containing the brand may be attached to
each bundle.
104 The marking is normally made by hard stamping,
however, other methods may be accepted.
105 In the event of any material bearing the Society's
brand failing to comply with the test requirements, the brand
is to be unmistakably defaced by the manufacturer.

201 Certification of materials will be based on compliance
with all specified tests and inspection. Unless otherwise
specially approved, certification is to take place at the man-
ufacturer's works and the surveyor is to attend and witness
testing and inspection in accordance with the appropriate
requirements of Ch.2.
202 As an alternative to 201, certification may be based
on a Manufacturing Survey Arrangement (MSA), subject to
approval by the Society.
203 Normally, separate inspection certificates are issued
for each grade of material and each product form. The in-
spection certificate is to include the following particulars:
a) Purchaser's name and order number and if known the
vessel identification for which the material is intended.
b) Manufacturer's name.
c) Description of the product, dimensions, weight etc.
d) Identification of specification or grade of material.
e) Identification of the cast and product.
f) Ladle analysis for specified elements.
g) Results of all specified inspections and mechanical tests.
h) Condition of supply and where appropriate, details of
heat treatment.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
1 *
-t
1,

J
..
/J

(J
204 Where applicable, the manufacturer is to provide the
surveyor with inspection certificates or shipping statements
for all accepted materials giving at least the particulars de-
tailed in 203. Before the inspection certificates or shipping
statements are signed by the surveyor, the manufacturer is
required to furnish him with a written declaration stating that
the material has been made by an approved process and that
it has been subjected to and has withstood satisfactorily the
required tests. The following form of declaration will be
accepted if stamped or printed on each inspection certificate
____ _
or shipping statement with the name of the works and signed
by an authorized representative of the manufacturer:
.. We hereby certify that the material has been made by an
approved process and has been satisfactorily tested in ac-
cordance with D NV Rules for Classification ...
205 When a material is not produced at the works at which
it is rolled or forged, a certificate is to be supplied by the
maker stating the process of manufacture, the cast number
and the chemical composition of ladle samples. The works
at which the material was produced must be approved.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
SECTION 2
TESTING PROCEDURES
Contents.
A. General
A 100 Scope
B. Test Methods
S 100 Tensile testing at ambient temperature
B 200 Bend testing
B 400 Dropweight testing
B 700 Other testing
A. General
A 100 Scope
101 This section specifies the requirements for testing
machines, test pieces and testing procedures when testing
ferrous and nonferrous metals.
102 Alternative test pieces, such as those complying with
recognized national and international standards, may be ac-
cepted subject to approval by the Society. The same applies
to the given testing procedures.
201 All tests are to be carried out by competent personnel
on machines of approved type. The machines are to be
maintained in satisfactory and accurate condition and are to
be recalibrated at approximately annual intervals by a qual-
ified organisation. A record of such calibrations is to be
Z . = percentage reduction of area.
102 Upper yield stress (R.
H
) is the highest value of stress
measured at the commencement of plastic deformation at
yield; often this value is represented by a pronounced peak
stress. The test is to be carried out with an elastic stress rate
not exceeding 30 N Imm' per sec.
103 When no well-defined yield phenomena exists, either
the yield strength at 0,2 % non-proportional elongation (
Rpo,,) or the yield strength at 0,5% total elongation (R<o,s) is
to be determined according to the applicable specification.
The test is to be carried out with an elastic stress rate not
exceeding 30 Nlmm' per sec.
104 For determination of tensile strength (R,,) of ductile
materials, the speed of the testing machine during the tensile
test is not to exceed that corresponding to a strain-rate at
maximum load of 40%/min. For brittle materials, like cast
iron the elastic stress rate is not to exceed 2,5 N Imm
2
per
sec.
105 The elongation generally means elongation determined
on a proportional gauge length 5 ,6S..js;, or 5d and has the
designation As'
If the material is a ferritic steel of low or medium strength
aod not cold worked, the elongation may also be measured
on a non-proportional gauge length Lo after agreement with
the Society. In that case the required elongation Ao is cal-
culated from the following formula:
Ao = 2 As ( '![f )0,40
"J
)
_ .. _. th!WllL!l!]1QrJl!Qry,, ___
As = the required elongation in % for test piece with gauge
"-lellgtl..-5;6SVS;=. ----
301 The preparation of test pieces is to be done in such a
manner that test pieces are not subjected to any significant
cold straining or heating.
302 If samples are cut from material by flame cutting or
shearing, a reasonable margin is required to enable sufficient
material to be removed from the cut edges during final ma-
chining.
303 Where possible, test pieces from rolled materials are
to retain their rolled surface on both sides.
B. Test Methods
B 100 Tensile testing at amhient temperature
101 Symbols related to tensile testing.
Rm = tensile strength.
R. = yield stress (yield point).
Rp = yield strength (proof stress).
R, = yield strength (proof stress), total elongation.
A = percentage elongation after fracture.
So = the cross-sectional area of the test piece in question.
Lo = the gauge length in question.
The elongation value is valid if the fracture occurs at least
the following distance from the end marks of the gauge
length:
Round test piece:
Flat test piece:
l,25d
b + a
106 For the purpose of determining the different desig-
nations related to tensile testing, three different types of test
pieces may be used: Round, flat and full cross-section test
pieces, see Fig. 1.
The following symbols are nsed:
d = diameter.
a = thickness.
b = width.
Lo = gauge length.
L. = parallel test length.
So = cross-section.
R = transition radius.
D = external tube diameter.
t = plate thickness.
DEY NORSKE VERITAS

/)

t,
,
'.
,
()

SECTION 1
MANUFACTURE, SURVEY AND CERTIFICATION
Contents.
A. General
A 100 Scope
B 400 Selection of test material
B 500 Defmitions relevant to testing
B 600 Testing
B 700 Retesting
C. Identification and certification
C 200 Certification of materials
A. General
A 100 Scope
101 This Section specifies general requirements for manu-
facture, survey aod certification of materials used for the
constrnction or repair of hulls, equipment, boilers and pres-
sure vessels and machinery of vessels classed or intended for
classification by the Society.
Appropriate specific requirements are given in Ch.2.
102 Materials which are to comply with these requirements
are defined in the relevant design and construction parts of
the rules.
101 The surveyor is to be given the opportunity to inspect
and check at any time all plants and equipment used in the
manufacture and testing.
The manufacturer is to assist the surveyor to enable him to
verify that approved processes are adhered to aod to witness
the selection and testing as required by the rules.
102 Prior to the testing and inspection, the manufacturer
is to provide the surveyor with the technical specifications
of the order and aoy conditions additional to the rule re-
quirements.
201 The chemical composition of samples taken from each
ladle of each cast is to be determined by the manufacturer
in an adequately equipped and competently staffed labora-
tory aod is to comply with the appropriate requirements of
Ch.2.
202 The manufacturer's declared analysis will be accepted
subject to occasional checks if required by the surveyor.
301 All materials are to be supplied in a condition com-
plying with the appropriate requirements of Ch.2.
302 Heat treatment is to be carried out in properly con-
structed furnaces which are efficiently maintained and have
adequate meaos for control and recording of temperature.
The furnace dimensions are to be such as to allow the ma-
terial to be uniformly heated to the specified temperature.
303 In the case of very large castings or forgings alterna-
103 Materials which comply with national or proprietary tive methods for heat treatment will be specially considered.
--- ""--- .-.-
1\.. give reasonable equivalence to the requirements of Ch.2 or B 400 Selection of test material
'-_./ are otherwise specially approved. ...
- 401 Test matenal suffiCIent for the reqUITed tests aod pre-
(J
201 The purchaser is to supply the manufacturer with all
information necessary to ensure that survey and certification
can he carried out in accordance with these rules. This ap-
plies particularly where optional or additional conditions are
specified in the relevant construction rules.
been approved by the Society. List of approved manufac-
turers is published separately.
302 In order to be approved, the manufacturer is required
to demonstrate and submit documentation to the effect that
the necessary manufacturing, testing and inspection fascili-
ties are available and are supervised by qualified personae!.
The manufacturer is also to carry out a test programme and
submit the results.
303 Detailed programmes for approval testing are given in
Certification Notes No.2.!,
304 When a manufacturer has more than one works, the
approval is only valid for the works which carried out the
test programme.
ferably also for possible retest purposes is to be provided.
The test material is to be representative of the test unit or
sample product and is not to be separated until all the spec-
ified heat treatment has been completed, unless otherwise
stated in Ch.2.
402 Where the Society' s certification is required, all the
test material is to be selected and marked by the surveyor,
B 500 Definitions relevant to testing
The following definitions apply:
501 Test Unit: The nnmber of pieces or the tonnage of
products to be accepted or rejected together, on the basis of
the tests to be carried out on sample prodncts.
502 Sample Product: A single forging, casting, plate, tube
or other wrought product selected from a test unit.
503 Sample: A sufficient quantity of material taken from
the sample product for the purpose of producing' one or
more test pieces.
504 Test Piece: Part of the sample, with specified dimen-
sions, machined or unmachined, brought to a required con-
dition for submission to a given test.
DEY NORSKE VERITAS

t
,

o
iJ
" :J
'J J
)

'.'

R
d
-_._+--
pe2 Ch,1 Sec.2 - Page 5
110 For forgings, bars, cast steel and nodular cast iron
round test pieces normally with dimensions as specified be-
low, are to be used:
d = 14 mm
L, = 70 mm
L, "'85 mm
R = 10 mm, except generally for materials with a speci-
fied minimum elongation As:$; 10%, where R is to be
20mm.
. . . If for special reasons, other dimensions are to be used, they
I
I' Lo 11 Flat will to conform with the following geometrical re-
1b3 ..
. . R
= 5d
"'L+d
= 1 0 mm, except for materials with a specified mini-
mum elongation As:$; 10 %, where R is to be 1,5d.
I. L c .1 Full cross-section
- .
Fig. 1
Tensile test pieces.
107 The gauge length L, may be rounded off to the nearest
5 mm, provided that the difference between this length and
L, is less than 10 % of L,.
The parallel test length is to be parallel within acceptable
tolerances. Tolerances according to ISO 82-1974 will be
accepted.
108 For plates with thickness t= 3 mm or more, test pieces
according to alternative A, B or C below are to be used.
Alternative A, flat test piece:
a = t
b = 25 mm
L, = 200 mm
L, '" 225 mm
R = 25 m
Alternative B, flat test piece:
a
b
t:
R
= t
= 25mm
= 5,
65
.JS?;;--
'" L, + 2 "S,
= 25mm
Alternative C, round test piece:
d = 14 mm
L, = 70 mm
L, '" 85 mm
R = 10mm
The round test piece is to be located with its centre t/4 from
the plate surface or as close to this position as possible.
109 For sheet and strips with thickness t less than 3 mm,
flat test piece with the following dimensions is to be used:
a = t
b = 12,5 mm
L, = 50 mm
L, '" 75 mm
R =25mm
111 For propeller casting the diameter is not to be less
than 14 mm.
112 For bars of small dimensions a full cross-section test
piece may be used.
113 For grey cast iron the test piece is to have dimensions
as stipulated in Fig. 2.
R= 25
I
I
_.
12120
_.
12125
80
-
-
ii'Uri n
114 For tubes, test piece according to alternative A or B
below are to be used.
Alternative A:
Full cross-section test pieces with plugged ends.
L, = 5,65.JS:
L, '" L, + D
L, is the distance between the grips or the plugs, whi-
chever is the smallest.
Alternative B:
Strip
a = wall thickness of the tube
b = 12 mm
L, = 5,65.JS:
L, '" L, + 2b
B 200 Bend testing
201 Flat bend test piece as given in Fig. 3 is to be used.
Edges on tension side to be rounded to a radius of 1 to 2
mm.
DEf NORSKE VERITAS

!
" b "'
all
. 11!l
'" ( .... 9a+0) --,
Fig. 3
Bend test piece.
202 For plates, structural sections and sheets, test piece
with the following dimensions is to be used:
a = as rolled thickness t of material
b = 30 mm
of the bend test piece.
203 For forgings, castings and semi-finished products, test
piece with the following dimensions is to be used:
a = 20 mm
b = 25 mm
B 300 bnpact testing
test according to the specification in question. Each value for
pieces are to be as in Table Bl.
Table Bl Cbarpy V-notch test pieces.
Dimensions Nominal Tolerances
Length 55 mm 0,60 mm
Width
- standard test piece lOmm
O,ll mm
- subsize test piece 7,5 mm
O,ll mm
- subsize test piece 5mm O,06mm
- subsize test piece 2,5mm +0,06mm
Thickness 10 mm +0,06mm
Angle of notch 45 +2
Depth below notch 8mm +0,05 mm
Root radius O,25mm +0,025mm
Distance of notch from ends
of test piece 27,5 mm +0,42 mm
Angle between plane of symmetry
of notch and longitudinal
axis of test piece 90 +2
width

thickness
Fig. 4
Charpy V-notch test piece.
absorbed energy is to be determined as the average of one 306 Standard Charpy V -notch test pieces with width 10
set of 3 impact test pieces. mm are to be used, except when the thickness of the material
. . does not permit this size. In such cases the largest obtainable
302 The Charpy V -notch unpact toughness I.S the absorbed of the subsize test pieces with width 7,5 mm or 5 mm is to
energy, expressed m Joule (J), the symbol bemg KV. be used. For tubes and pipes also a subsize test piece with
303 The Charpy impact test machine is to be of a type 2,5 mm is to be used if necessitated by the dimen-
acceptable to the Society having a gap of 40 mm, a striking SlOns.

'''-_//
velocity between 4,5 and 7 mlsec. and a striking energy of 307 The temperature of the test piece at the moment of
29(.l-.10I-fo ... . .h"tw""nJhl\-slt1king.-.-bfcak""ing-is-t",-J,e-the-speeified-temperature-within-ll.eG.--_--
edges of the pendulum IS to be 30 with the edge rounded
to a radius 2 to 2,5 mm. (Pendulum according to ASTM E
23 will also be accepted.)
The point of impact of the hammer is to be in the centreline
of the notch. The.scale of the machine is to be calibrated to
an accuracy of +0,5% of the machine's maximum striking
energy. Impact test machines with a striking energy of less
than 290J are acceptable. In such cases, KV is to be sup-
plemented with an index giving the striking energy.
For example, KV 145 indicates that a striking energy of
145J has been used.
pieces are to comply with the specifications given in 305.
The test samples may be flame-cut but the notch is not to
be nearer to a flame-cut edge than 25 mm. The prescribed
dimensions are to be accurately and systematically checked.
The notch is to be made in a single cut by a special milling
cutter. The cutter is always to be kept sharp so that the shape
of the notch is correct and cold working at the base is
avoided as far as possible. The cutter is not to be used for
more than 100 test pieces between each checking.
There are to be no indications, scratches or marks left in the
base of the notch after machining. The plane of symmetry
of the notch is to be at right angle to the longitudinal axis
of the test piece.
Test temperature is to be stated in the certificate.
Guidance note:
The required temperature tolerance is usually obtainable by im-
mersing the test piece for at least 2 minutes in an agitated liquid
bath having the specified test temperature, and have the test piece
broken within 5 seconds after withdrawal from the bath.
-e-n-d--o-f-G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e--n-o-t-e---
B 400 Drop-weight testing
401 For material with thickness t equal to or greater than
16 mm, drop-weight test pieces for the determination of
NDT (nil ductility transition) temperature are to comply with
specifications given in ASTM E208, and have one of the
following sizes:
No.1: 25 by 90 by 360 mm
No.2: 19 by 50 by 130 mm
No.3: 16 by 50 by 130 mm.
For material thicknesses below 16 mm down to and includ-
ing 12 mm, a test piece machined down to 12 mm thickness
is to be used. For material thicknesses below 12 = down
to and including 10 mm, the thickness of the test piece is to
be that of the material. Other dimensions and requirements
for test piece with thickness below 16 mm are to be as for
test piece no.3 above, except that a stop distance of 2,3 mm
is to be used.
DEf NORSKE VERITAS
()
)

()
C)
(j

Cj
CONTENTS
SEC. 1 MANUFACTURE, SURVEY AND CERTIF-
ICATION ........................... 1
A. General .......................................... 1
A 100 Scope .................................. :..................... 1
A 200 Information to be supplied by the purchaser ......... 1
A 300 Approval of manufacturers .............................. 1
B. Testing and inspection ............ .............................. 1
B 100 Survey during manufacture ............................. 1
B 300 Heat treatment ............................................. 1
B 400 Selection of test material................................. 1
B 500 Definitions relevant to testing........................... 1
B 600 Testing.. ...... .. ...... ........ .... .. .. .. ...... .. ...... .... .. 1
B 700 Retesting.. ...... .. ...... ...... ........ .. .... .... ...... ...... 2
B 800 Visual and non-destructive examination .............. 2
B 900 Correction of defects ..................................... 2
C. Identification and certification ................................ 2
C 100 Identification of materials ...... ......................... 2
C 200 Certification of materials ................................ 2
SEC. 2 TESTING PROCEDURES .. .... ......... 4
A. Groeral ............................................................. 4
A 100 Scope ......... ........ ........ ............ ...... ........ ..... 4
A 200 Testing machines .......................................... 4
A 300 Preparation of test pieces ................................ 4
B. Test Methods ....... ........ .......................... ........ ..... 4
B 200 Bend testing ................................................ 5
B 300 Impact testing .............. ,............................... 6
B 400 Drop-weight testing ...................................... 6
B 500 Z-direction ductility testing .............................. 7
B 600 Detennination of grain size ............................. 7
B 700 Other testing ............................................... 7
General.
decided by the Board as of December 1992, and supersedes th'e
each year.
chapters printed on the front page of the introduction booklet to
ensure that the chapter is current.
Det Norske Veritas
Main cillinges;" . \.
TIle' wnole Chapter" has been rearranged and rewritten.
Sec.1 Manufacture, Survey and Certification.
- Contains the general requirements of the previous Sec.! with
additions on the general requirements for testing and inspection.
Sec.2 Testing Procedures.
Contains general requirements and the test methods of the pre-
vious Sec. I.
Previous sections on requirements for Steel and Iron have been
moved to Chapter 2.
Corrections and Clarifications.
Computer Typesetting by Division Ship and Offshore, Det Norske Veritas Classification AS
Printed in Norway by Det Norske Veritas January 1993
1.93.4500
It is agreed that save as provided below Oet Norske Veritas, its subsidiaries, bodies, officers, directors, employees and agents shall have no liability for any loss, damage or expense

whether the loss, damage or expense has affected anyone with whom Oet Norske Veritas has a contract or a third party who has acted or relied on decisions made or information given
by or on behalf of Oet Norskc Veritas. * However, if any person uses the services of oet Norske Veritas or its subsidlaries or relies on any decision made or information given by or
on behalf of them and in consequence auffers a Joss, damage or expense proved to be due to their negligence, omission or default, then Oet Norske Veritas will pay by way of com
pensation to such person a sum representing his proved loss. * In the event Oet Norske Veritas or its subsidiaries may be held liable in accordance with the sections above, the amount
of compensation shall under no circumstances exceed the amount of the fee, if any, charged for that particular serVlce, decision, advice or information. * Under no circumstances
i:J
.J
:J
)

i
f
,;
,

,
i

:J
':J
':)
402 The test pieces may be cut with their axes either tran-
sverse or longitudinal to the final rolling direction of the
material, but the orientation is to be the same for all test
pieces.
403 The sides of the test pieces are to be saw-cut or ma-
chined. The distance from a flame-<:ut surface is to be min.
25=.
The machining of the test piece to prescribed thickness is to
be on the compression side only.
404 Two test pieces are to be tested at the prescribed test
temperature. Both test pieces are to exhibit a non-break
performance, i.e. the NDT temperature is to be below the
test temperature.
405 The drop-weight test is to be carried out and evaluated
according to ASTM E 208.
;;:::..P
ilE

u'-'
E I
'"
I
R3
""'-.
J
I
3/8 "PIPE
THREADS ..
J
r
:

E
J
I E
0
I
..
hi
I
II>
II>
W
Z

I
u
:r
>--
1!l10rrrn
w
>--
J <l
-'
!
I
n.
I
I ,
Fig. 6
thickness mm.
For rolled pieces with mass more than 20 tonnes, one test
sample is to be taken from each end.
Three pieces from each test sample are to be prepared for
testing while the rest of the pieces remains for possible re-
tests.
506 If it is not possible to trace individual single plates to
the original mother plate, each single plate is to be tested
taking 3 pieces of each.
507 The reduction of areas, Z" is defined by the relation:
Fig, 5 Z.
So-S 100%
S
thickness t<40 mm. So
original cross-sectional area of test piece
501 The test is applicable to materials exceeding 10 mm
thickness.
502 For plate thickness up to 40 = the full plate thick-
ness is to be tested by making welded extensions on the plate
to be tested. Welding is to be carried out by suitable methods
giving a sufficiently strong bond without excessive pene-
tration in the plate. Friction welding, manual metal arc
welding, using properly handled low hydrogen electrodes,
and stud welding are preferred methods, see Fig. 5.
503 For plate thicknesses exceeding 40 =, the test pieces
may be made without welded extensions provided that min-
imum 6 mm on either side is used for heads or other means
of fastening the test piece in the tensile machines (see Fig.
6).
504 The relation between material thickness, t, and test
piece diameter, D, is as follows:
t ,;; 16 =: D 6 =
t > 16 =: D 10 =.
505 A test sample sufficient for the preparation of six
pieces is to be taken from one end of each rolled piece. The
sample is to be cut from the midend position of the product.
s . = cross-sectional area at fracture, due to the anisotropy
of the plate material, the fracture surface is often
approximately elliptical rather than circular. When
this is the case, the area is to be calculated as
S
where a and b are the long and the short axis of the
ellipse, respectively.
601 Where the austenitic grain size is specified, it is to be
determined according to methods described in recognized
standards. At least one sample is to be taken from finished
material from each ladle. For rolled products the sample is
preferably to be taken from the thickest piece rolled. The
grain size numbers refer to the ASTM scale described in
ASTM E 112.
B 700 Other testing
701 Testing not described in item 100-600 may be re-
quired for certain products. In such cases testing is to be
carried out in accordance with procedures approved by the
Society.
DEf NORSKE VERITAS
:1
I
i:) ()
DNV
PART 2 CHAPTER 1
10/ o/ung r[ au
.....
O
l";\ .""" I I!TE
.
I '''''
: :<,,'., .. ,
-,:''''
RULES FOR
CLASSIFICATION OF
SIDPS
NEWBUILDINGS
') -) FOR MATERIALS
JANUARY 1993
SECTIONS
PAGE
1 Manufacture, Survey and Certification .................................................................... 1
2 Testing Procedures ............................................................................................. 4
f)
) ()
r
DET NORSKE VERITAS CLASSIFICATION AS
Veritasveien I, N-1322 H""ik,NOlway Tel.: +47675799 ()() Fax: +47675799 11
1
l
,j \::)
i\
/

()
8
J
')
'.
,
L
'!
-------

PART 2 CHAPTER 2
-- .
RULES FOR
CLASSIFICATION OF
- - ;''K'l n [c;
e,';:, ft ft.:.
.- - ..... -
METALLIC MATERIALS
JANUARY 1996
SECTIONS
PAGE
1 General Requirements _........................................................................................ 1
DET NORSKE VERITAS
Veritasveien I, N-1322 H0Vik, Norway Tel.: +4767579900 Fax: +4767579911
General
the Board as of December 1995, and supersedes the January 1993
Ships Pt.2 Ch.2, see the latest version of the Ship Rules for infor-
mation on changes in the Rules and co.ming into force dates.
each year.
Whenever updated, Pt.2 Ch.2 of the Ship Rules will be forwarded
Buyers of reprints are advised to check. the updated list of Rule
chapters printed in FLO Ch.1 Sec.1 to ensure that the chapter is
current.
Main changes
All existing text of the old Pt.2 Ch.2 has been replaced by a
Printed in Norway by Det Norske Veritas AS January 1996
1.96.2000
It is agreed that save as provided below Det Norske Ventas, its subsidiaries, bodies, officers, directors, employees and agents shall have no liability for any loss, damage or expense

h;'
on behalf of them and in consequence suffers a loss, damage or expense proved to be due to their negligence, omission or default, then Det Norske Veritas will pay by way of com-
pensation to such person a sum representing his proved loss, *]n the event Det Norske Ventas or its subsidiaries may be held liable in accordance with the sections above, the amount
whatsoever shall the irdividual or individuals who have personally caused the loss, damage or expense be held liable. * In the event that any provision in this section shall be invalid
under the ]aw of any jurisdiction, the validity of the remaining provisions shall not in any way be affected.
,
() C)
.:)

o
/:)
,-"
J
,
u

0

L

,
.

"

u

u

(
j

(
)

-
(
"
'
l

0

-
~

>
-
?
>

~

0
0

~

O
~

0
0

~

C
l
a
i

0
"

~
~

0
-
'

~
O

i
.
~

,; I

I ~
~
~ ::J
o ::J
-)
~

~
\
, .
SECTION 1
A. Classification
A 100 General
A 100 General
Contents
A. Classification
fication of Ships Part 2 Chapter 2 .Metallic Materials. are
to be complied with to the extent applicable.
tuted with the tenn unit.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
,; I

I ~
~
~ ::J
o ::J
-)
~

~
\
, .
SECTION 1
A. Classification
A 100 General
A 100 General
Contents
A. Classification
fication of Ships Part 2 Chapter 2 .Metallic Materials. are
to be complied with to the extent applicable.
tuted with the tenn unit.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
u

0

L

,
.

"

u

u

(
j

(
)

-
(
"
'
l

0

-
~

>
-
?
>

~

0
0

~

O
~

0
0

~

C
l
a
i

0
"

~
~

0
-
'

~
O

i
.
~

General
mation on changes in the Rules and co.ming into force dates.
each year.
Buyers of reprints are advised to check. the updated list of Rule
chapters printed in FLO Ch.1 Sec.1 to ensure that the chapter is
current.
Main changes
1.96.2000
It is agreed that save as provided below Det Norske Ventas, its subsidiaries, bodies, officers, directors, employees and agents shall have no liability for any loss, damage or expense

h;'
pensation to such person a sum representing his proved loss, *]n the event Det Norske Ventas or its subsidiaries may be held liable in accordance with the sections above, the amount
whatsoever shall the irdividual or individuals who have personally caused the loss, damage or expense be held liable. * In the event that any provision in this section shall be invalid
under the ]aw of any jurisdiction, the validity of the remaining provisions shall not in any way be affected.
,
() C)
.:)

o
/:)
,-"
J
,
1
l
,j \::)
i\
/

()
8
J
')
'.
,
L
'!
-------

PART 2 CHAPTER 2
-- .
RULES FOR
CLASSIFICATION OF
- - ;''K'l n [c;
e,';:, ft ft.:.
.- - ..... -
METALLIC MATERIALS
JANUARY 1996
SECTIONS
PAGE
1 General Requirements _........................................................................................ 1
DET NORSKE VERITAS
Veritasveien I, N-1322 H0Vik, Norway Tel.: +4767579900 Fax: +4767579911
SECTION 11
HEAT RESISTING NON-FERROUS ALLOYS
Contents
A. General
A 100 Scope
A 200 Approval
A 300 Heat treatment
B. T<sting
B 100 Samples for testing
B 200 Tensile testing
B 400 Creep and rupture testing
B 500 Non-destructive testing
B 600 Other tests
. .....
A. General .:"
.'
A 100 Scope . f
-,. .
-
101 The requirements in this Section specify heat itlii;sting
non-ferrous alloys.
A 200 Approval
201 All materials used are to be in accordance with an
approved specification.
301 All materials supplied are to be in the condition as
regards heat treatment that is appropriate to their composi-
tion and application. Particulars are to be given in the cer-
tificate.
B. Testing
101 Number and type of test pieces, either machined from
separarely,rcasi i6 for cteep:'rupmfe
and impact tests, are to be in accordance with the approved
specification.
102 The system of recording is to be such that a batch of
material can be traced back to its cast batch and, if appro-
priate, to its heat-treatment batch.
103 Test samples are to be marked so as to be easily
identifiable with the material they represent.
201 Room temperature tensile tests are to be carried out
in accordance with Sec.!.
202 Elevated temperature tensile tests are to be carried out
in accordance with the relevant international or national
standards, e.g. ISO R 783 .
301 Impact tests are to be carried out in accordance with
Sec. 1.
401 Creep and rupture tests are to be carried out in ac-
cordance with the relevant international or national stand-
. ards, e.g. ISO R 206.
501 Areas to be subjected to non-destructive testing are to
be prepared in such a manner that the inspection can be
carried out properly.
502 All materials are to be free from harmful defects.
Where non-destructive tests are applied, a maker's certif-
icate stating that such tests have been carried out with satis-
factory results, is to be issued.
B 600 Other tests
601 Tests other than those mentioned above, which are to
be carried out in accordance with the approved
"speciiicaii6ii(s);" iire 160e peffoffiietl iisagree<!' UjS6ii Willillie"
Society. International or national standards, if existing, are
preferably to be used as a basis for the agreement.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

'J
,.--'(
,J
)
'..../

,J'
'"'
;i

PART 2 CHAPTER 2
LiUrary Z 1 AUG 2002
fJYJ. 0/ o/ung q' au

t. ..
n "'" "'l (1' H &l::f'-llllE
? .... f .- ., It_ J
.. t , !
0 ..,.-
.... '_.,_
METALLIC MATERIALS
RULES FOR
CLASSIFICATION OF
SIDPS
NEWBUILDINGS
CJ JANUARY 1996
SECTIONS
PAGE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
l:Jll

Rolled Steel for Structural Application .,."",., ... " ............................ ".,,.................... 1
Rolled Steel for Boilers, Pressure Vessels and Special Applications ............................... 12
Clad Steel Plates ....... : ....................................................................................... 22
Steel Tubes, Pipes and Fittings ............................................................................. 24
Steel Forgings .................................................................................................. 42
Bars for Chain Cables ........................................................................................ 52
Steel Castings .................................................................................................. 54
Iron Castings ................................................................................................... 61
Wrought Aluminium Alloys ................................................................... ".'''' " .. , ..... 63
Copper Alloys ..... : ........ ....... : ....... : ...... ; ..... :: ... :.: .. ; : .. :;.: .. :; .. ;:.;; ... ; .... ;: .... : .. ' ... :.:. ;"67
Heat Resisting Non-Ferrous Alloys ....................................................................... 70
DET NORSKE VERITAS
Veritasveien I, N-1322 H0Vik, Norway Tel., +4767579900 Pax: +4767579911
General
decided by the Board as of December 1995, and supersedes the
This chapter is valid until superseded by. a revised chapter. Sup-
amendments and corrections presented in the introduction booklet.,
each year.
Revised chapters will be fonvarded to all subscribers to the Rules.
Buyers of reprints a:re advised to check the updated list of Rule
chapters printed in Pt.O Ch.l Sec.l to ensure that the chapter is
current.
Main changes
Sec. 1 Rolled Steel for Structural Application
Items B and C have been amended with respect to lACS UR WI!.
Item D has been amended with respect to lACS UR W16.
- Item A101 amended. Application length increased to 150 mm.
- New item A303 on applicable rolling methods.
- Tables Bl, 82 and B3 have been revised.
- New item C102 on fatigue strength.
- Item C203 has been amended.
- Tables Cl-C3 have been revised. New table C4 has been added.
- New item DI02 on fatigue strength.
- Tables Dl and D2 have been revised. New table D3 has been
added.
- Item E205 has been amended.
- Table El has been revised.
- New item E405 on marking of through thickness properties steel.
Sec.2 Rolled Steel for Boilers, Pressure Vessels and Special
Applications
- Item D on stainless steel has been revised.
- Tables C3, C4, Dl and D2 have been revised.
Det Norske Verilas AS
Sec.S Steel Forgings
- Item A201 has been amended on vacuum treatment.
- Items B502-503 have been amended. .
- Table 81 has been revised.
- ItemB402 has been amended.
- Tables C2 and C3 have been amended.
Sec.S Iron Castings
-.
.. Section 8 has been amended with respect to lACS UR W9/10.
- Item AlOI extended to include bainitic type cast iron.
- New and AI04 have been added.
- Item A300 on manufacture has been extended.
- Item A400 on chemical composition has been added.
- Item A500 on heat treatment has been added.
- Item A600 on testing has been added.
- Item A700 on visual and non-destructive examination has been
added.
- Item A800 on repair of defects has been added.
- Items BIOO and 200 have been amended.
- Item 8400 on metallographic examination has been added.
- Table Bl has been revised.
- Item C on Grey Cast Iron has been amended.
- Previous ite.ms D on Testing and E on Repair of Defects have
been amended and moved to A.
Sec.9 Wrought Aluminium Alloys
- Item A203 has been amended.
- New item A400 on temper designations has been added.
- Item A500 on mechanical properties has been amended.
- Tables Al to A4 on branding has been amended.
- New tables A5 to A7 on mechanical properties have been added.
- Item B201 has been amended.
- New item 8402 on under thickness tolerances has been added.
- Item DlOl on branding has been amended.
Computer Typesetting by Division for Technology and Products, Det Norske Veritas AS
1.96.4500
It is agreed that save as provided below Det Norske Veritas, its subsidiaries, bodies, officers, directors, employees and agents shaH have no liability for any loss, damage or' expense

Whether the loss, damage or expense has affected anyone with whom Det Norske Veritas has a contract or a third party who has acted or relied on decisions made or information given
by or on behalf of Oet Norske Veritas. * However, if any person uses the services of Det Norske Veritn or its slilsidlaries or relies on any decision made or information given by or
on behalf of them and in consequence sulfers a loss, damage or expense proved to be due to their negligence, omission or default, then Oet Norske Veritas will pay by way of com-
pensation to such person a sum representing his proved loss. * In the event Det Norske Veritn or its subsidiaries may be held liable in accordance with the sections above, the amount
of compensation shall lXIder no circumstances exceed the amount of the fee, if any, charged for that particular SerViCe, decision, advice or information. * Under no circumstances
Whatsoever shall the individull or individuals who have flersonilly caused the loss, damage or expense be held liable. * In the event that any provision in this section shall be invalid

-C)
o

C) C)

404 The grain size is to be determined according to ISO
2624. The requirement given in Table D2 is to be complied
with, but testing of each delivery will normally not be re-
quired.
Table Dl Chemical composition of tubes
Quality Cu Fe Ni
Copper Minimum 99,85 1)
- -
AI-brass 76,0-79,0 - -
Copper-nickel 90/10 rest 1,0-1,8 9,0-11,0
1) Cu + Ag
Table D2 Mechanical properties and delivery conditions of tubes
Tensile strength
Quality Delivery condition
Rm
Nlmm2
.
minimum
Copper
Annealed 220
half-hard 250
AI-brass annealed 330
Copper-nickel 90/10 annealed 290
1) To be completely recrystallized.
Zn
-
rest
-
-
Yield stress

.
Nlmm2
minim,EOn
65
155
155
100
120
DET NORSKE VERITAS
. i5t:2 Chj'Sec:' 69
As Al Mn
- - -
0,02-0,035 1,8-2,3
-
- -
0,5-1,0
- - 0,5-1,5
Elongation Grain size
. %
I'm
,
mrnzmum maximum
, .
40 -
20 -
35
45 1)
30
-
30
-
HUles TOr ;::,nJPS, January -I
Page 68 - Pt.2 Ch.2 Sec. 1 0
Integrally cast test samples, attached either to the propeller
blades or propeller hub, may in special cases be accepted
by the Society on request.
Procedure for preparation and identification of test samples
is to be agreed with the surveyor.
Table Cl Chemical composition of propeller materials
402 At least one tensile test is to be made for each I'ro-
peller. Where the propeller is cast from two or more ladles,
one tensile test is to be made for each ladle.
403 After heat treatment and final grinding, the whole
surface of propellers and propeller blades is to be examined
by dye penetrant. Detailed information on inspection, non-
destructIve examination and acceptance critena is outlined
in Classification Note No. 4.1.
Mn-bronze (brass) Ni-Mn-bronze (brass) Ni-Al-bronze Mn-Al-bronze
Cu % 55-62 53,S-57 78 minimum 71 minimum
Al% 0,5-2,0 2,0 maximum 8,0-11,0 6,5-9,0
Fe % 0,4-2,2 1,0-2,5 3,0-6,5
1
) 2,0-6,0
Ni% 1,5 maximum 2,5-4,0 3,0-6,5
1
) 1,5-3,0
I
Mn % 2,0 maximum 2,5-4,0 3,0 maximum 8,0-14,0
Si % 0,10 maximum
Sn % 1,0 maximum 1,0 maximum
Zn % Remainder Remainder
Total others %
0,50 maximum L) 0,50 maximum
1) It is advisable to -keep the Ni-content higher than the Fe-content to prevent formation of iron corrosion products.
2) Lead is not to exceed 0,02%, otherwise cracking may occur adjacent to welds.
Table C2 Mechanical properties of propeller material
Tensile strenfth Elongation
Material
Rm. Jl!lmm AS%
mmrmum mlmmum
Mn-bronze (brass) 440 20
Ni-Mn-bronze (brass) 520 18
Ni-Al-bronze 590 15
Mn-Al-bronze 620 20
C 500 Repair of defects
501 Removal of surface defects by grinding and repair of
defective castings by welding are subject to the surveyor's
consent.
Thepr()cedure for ..veid repalfS of propellers is t() be ap-
proved by the Society. Procedure test may be required car-
ried out before repair work commences.
502 Acceptable procedures for repair welding and
straightening of bronze propellers are outlined in Classifica-
tion Note No 4.1.
D. Tubes
D 100 Chemical composition
101 The materials for copper tubes are to be free from
oxygen. Requirements for the alloying elements are given
in Table D I. Residual elements are not to be present in
amounts greater than specified in international or national
slandards.
D 200 Mechanical properties
201 The mechanical properties of the material at room
temperature are to comply with the requirements in Table
D2.
D 300 Heat treatment
301 All copper and copper alloy tubes are to be delivered
in the annealed or half-hard condition according to 200.
D 400 Testing
401 Tensile testing is to be conducted on pieces from the
tube in question. If the capacity of the testing machine does
not allow testing of the whole tube, longitudinal strips may
be used.
The tubes are to be presented for testing in lots of 600 tubes
or 900 kg, whichever is the greater. Each lot is only to
contain tubes of equal dimensions, quality and heat treat-
ment. From each lot 2 tubes are to be selected for testing.
402 If one or more of the sample method tests proves un-
satisfactory, the tube or pipe in question is rejected, and
tmic;e--3s. ,many -new -pipes -gr- tubeil in ,que.stion, ..
are to be selected for testing. All these tests are to show sa-
tisfactory results - if not, the whole batch is rejected. A
renewed heat treatment of the batch and subsequent retesting
of the material will be accepted. The tests are to be executed
in the same way as the first time. All results are to be satis-
factory, if not, the whole batch will be rejected.
403 All tubes are to be hydraulically tested by the makers
to the following pressure:
P
P = test pressure in bar

D
t = nominal wall thickness, in mm
D = nominal outside diameter. in mm
Rm = tensile strength according to Table D2, in N/mm
2
.
Unless otherwise stated, the test pressure need not be higher
than 70 bar.
A manufacturer's declaration for the hydraulic pressure test
may be accepted. The surveyor may demand that 10% of the
tubes are retested in his presence. If one of the tubes in a
batch does not pass the test, it will be rejected, and all other
tubes in the batch are to be retested.
Special automatic non-destructive testing may be substituted
for the pressure test, provided the manufacturer has obtained
special approval from the Society.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

,
\._---/
r=)
o

/"""".
, J'

C)
2
CONTENTS
SEC. 1 ROLLED STEEL FOR STRUCTlJRAL APPLI-
CATION .................................................. 1
A. General ...................................... ....................... 1
A 100 Scope....... ...... .. ...... ...... .. .... .. ....... .... .... ...... 1
A 200 Designation of steel grades.............................. 1
A 300 Method of manufacture .................................. 1
B. Normal Strength Steel ............... ....................... .... 2
B 100 Scope ............................................... , ........ 2
B 300 Heat treatment, condition of supply ................... 2
B 400 Mechanical properties .................................... 2
C. High Strength Steel..... .............. ....................... .... 3
C 100 Scope ..... ........ ...... ........ ........ ..... .......... ...... 3
C 200 Chemical composition .................................... 3
C 300 Heat treatment, condition of supply ................... 3
C 400 Mechanical properties ..................... : .............. 3
D. Extra High Strength Steel .. .................... .......... ..... 6
D 100 Scope ............................................... , ........ 6
D 200 Chemical composition .................................... 6
D 300 Heat treatment, condition of supply ................... 6
D 400 Mechanical properties .................................... 6
E. Testing .............................................................. 8
E 100 Test material ........................................ ....... 8
E 200 Tensile Testing ..................................... ....... 9
E 300 Impact testing ............................................. 10
E 400 Testing of through thickness properties. ..... ........ 10
E 500 Inspection - tolerances .................................. 11
F. Repairs ............................................................ 11
F 100 Surface defects ... ...... ........ ........ ...... ..... ....... 11
SEC. 2 ROLLED STEEL FOR BOILERS, PRESSURE
VESSELS AND SPECIAL APPLICATIONS ... 12
A. General........ .............................. ...................... 12
A 100 Scope....................................................... 12
A 200 Method of manufacture ................................. 12
B. Steel for Boilers and Pressure VesseIs .................... . 12
B 100
B 200
B 300

Steel gmdes ............................................... 12
Chemical composition ................................... 12
Mechanical properties ................................... 12
!2-
C. Steel for Low Temperature Service ...... ...... ............ 16
C 100 Steel grades ............................................... 16
C 200 Chemical composition .... ... ........ .... ...... ...... .... 16
C 300 Mechanical properties ................................... 16
C 400 Heat treatment ............................................ 17
D. Stainless Steel .......... ........ ........ ........ ............. ..... 19
D 100 Steel gmdes ... ........ ........ ........ ...... .... ... .... ... 19
D 200 Chemical composition ................................... 19
D 300 Mechanical properties ................................... 19
D 400 Heat treatment ............................................ 19
D 500 Intercrystalline corrosion tests ......................... 19
E. Testing ... ...... .......... ........ ........ ......... ................. 20
E 100 Geneml.... .. ...... .. .. ...... .. .... .. .. .... ... .... .. .... ... 20
E 200 Tensile testing at ambient temperature .. ............. 20
E 300 Tensile testing at elevated temperature............... 20
E 400 Impact testing ............................................. 21
E 500 Drop weight testing ..................................... 21
E 600 Testing of through thickness properties . ............. 21
E 700 Intercrystalline corrosion testing ...................... 21
F. Inspection, Dimensional Tolerances and Surface Con-
dition ............................................................... 21
F 100 Inspection ................................................. 21
F 200 Tolerances................................................. 21
F 300 Surface condition and rectification of defects ....... 21
SEC. 3 CLAD STEEL PLATES .... ......... ...... .......... 22
A. General ............................................................ 22
A 100 Scope ....................................................... 22
A 200 Heat treatment .".......................................... 22
B. Base Material....................... .............. ............... 22
B 100 General... .. ........ .. .... ........ ...... ......... .. .. ...... 22
C. Cladding Metal......... .......................... ............... 22
C 100 Geneml... .. ........ .. .... ........ .. .... ......... .. .. .... .. 22
C 200 Chemical composition ................................... 22
D. Testing ........ .......... ............ ........ ......... .............. 22
D 100 Geneml. .. .. ...... .. .................. ......... .. .. .. .. .. .. 22
D 200 Tensile testing ............................................ 22
D 300 Impact testing ............................................. 23
D 400 Bend testing ............................................... 23
D 500 Shear testing .............................................. 23
D 600 Ultrasonic testing ........................................ 23
D 700 Corrosion testing ......................................... 23
D 800 Inspection - tolerances ................................. 23
E. Repair and Rejection ........... ........ ...... ................. 23
E 100 Surface defects ........................................... 23
E 200 Rejection... ...... .. ............ ...... ...... .. ..... .. .. .. .. 23
F. Identification of Materials .................................... 23
F 100 Branding.. ........ .. .... ........ ...... ...... .. ..... .. .. .. .. 23
SEC. 4 STEEL TUBES, PIPES AND FITTINGS ....... 24
A. General ............................................................ 24
A 100 ....................................................... 24
A 200 Manufacture ... c. .. .... ..... ........ .. . .. 24
A 300 Quality..................................................... 24
A 400 Dimensional tolerances ................................. 24
A 500 Chemical composition ................................... 24
A 600 Heat treatment ............................................ 24
A 700 Mechanical properties ................................... 24
A 800 Test material.............................................. 25
A 900 Visual and non-destructive testing .................... 26
A 1000 Hydraulic test ............................................. 26
A 11 00 Re-testing......... .. .............. ...... ........ ... ........ 26
A 1200 Identification..... .. .............. ...... ........ .. .. ....... 26
A 1300 Certification...... .. ............ .. .. .... .. ...... .. .... ..... 26
B. Tubes and Pipes for Ordinary Pressure Systems ....... 26
B 100 Scope.... .. .. ...... .. .............. .. ....... .. .... ..... ..... 26
B 200 Manufacture.............................................. 26
B 300 Chemical composition ................................... 26
B 400 Heat treatment ............................................ 26
B 500 ..... ...... -".: .. .. ;.,.:,:.,-",.,26
C. Stainless Steel Pressure Tubes and Pipes ........ .... ..... 29
C 100 Scope ....................................................... 29
C 200 Manufacture. ...... .. .... .. ...... .. .. ...... .. ....... .. .. .. 29
C 400 Heat treatment ............ :............................... 29
C 600 Corrosion testing ......................................... 29
D. Tubes and Pipes for Low Temperature Services ........ 32
D 100 Scope ....................................................... 32
D 200 Manufacture.............................................. 32
D 300 Chemical composition................................... 32
D 400 Heat treatment ............................................ 32
E. Tubes and Pipes for Boilers, Heat Exchangers and
Superheaters ...... .......... ...... .......... ............. ........ 36
E 100 Scope ....................................................... 36
E 200 Manufacture.............................................. 36
E 300 Chemical composition ................................... 36
E 400 Heat treatment ............................................ 36
E 500 Mechanical properties ................................... 36
F. Fittings ............................................................ 41
F 100 Scope ....................................................... 41
F 200 Materials ............................................... ->.. 41
F 300 Manufacture .............................................. 41
F 400 Heat treatment ............................................ 41
F 500 Mechanical testing ....................................... 41
F 600 Hardness testing .......................................... 41
F 700 Corrosion testing ......................................... 41
F 800 Surface finish and dimensions ......................... 41
F 900 Marking and certification ............................... 41
SEC. 5 STEEL FORGINGS ................................... 42
A. General ............................................ .......... ...... 42
A 100 Scope................. ...... ..................... ........ ... 42
A 200 Manufacture.. ............ ............ ........ ............ 42
A 300 Quality .......................... : ...... .. .. ................ 43
A 500 fleat treatment ............................................ 43
A 600 Test material .............................................. 43
A 700 Mechanical testing at ambient temperature .......... 43
A 800 Tensile testing at elevated temperature ............... 44
A 900 Retest procedures ........................................ 44
A 1000 Visual and non-destructive examination ............. 44
A 1100 Rectification of defect forgings ........................ 44
A 1200 Certification............................................... 44
B. Forgings for General Application ........................... 44
B 100 Scope ....................................................... 44
B 200 Types of steel ............................................ 44
B 400 Heat treatment ............................................ 45
B 500 Test material and mechanical properties ............. 45
C. Forgings for Shafting and Machinery .... .......... ....... 45
C 100. Scope ....................................................... 45
C 200 Types of steel ............................................ 45
C 300 Chemical gomposition ................................... 45
C 400 Heat treatment ............................................ 46
C 500 Test matetial .............................................. 46

D. Forgings for Gearing ........................................... 48
D 100 Scope .............. .................. ....................... 48
D 200 Manufacture .................................. :........... 48
D 300 Chemical composition ........ :.......................... 48
D 400 Heat treatment ............................................ 48
D 500 Test material for normalized and tempered, and
quenched and tempered forgings ...................... 48
D 600 Test material for forgings intended for carburising
and hardening ............................................ 49
D 700 Mechanical properties ............ ............ ........... 49
Forgings for Boilers, Unfired Pressure Vessels and
.. .... .................. ..
F. Forgings for Cargo Tanks, Pressure Vessels and Piping
....
F 100 Scope ....................................................... 50
F 200 Type of steel...................................... ........ 50
F 300 Chemical composition ................................... 50
F 400 Heat treatment ............................................ 50
F 500. Test material .............................................. 50
F 600 Mechanical properties ................................... 50
SEC. 6 BARS FOR CHAIN CABLES .... .................. 52
A. General ...................................... ........ .............. 52
A 100 Scopes............................................ .... ..... 52
A 200 Steel gmdes ............................................... 52
A 400 Mechanical properties .... ........ .......... ............. 52
A 500 Heat treatment ............................................ 52
B. Testing ............................................................. 52
B 100 Number of tests ............ :............................. 52
B 200 Impact testing ............................................. 52
C. Identification of Materials .................................... 52
C 100 Marking.... ................ ........ ....................... 52
SEC. 7 STEEL CASTINGS ................................... 54
A. General .......................................... .......... ........ 54
A 100 Scope........................................ ............... 54
A 200 Manufacture .............. ................................ 54
A 300 Quality of castings ................ .......... ............. 54
A 400 Chemical composition .......... :........................ 54
B. Castings for General Applications .......................... 54
B 100 Types of steel ............................................ 54
B 300 Mechanical properties ................................... 55
C. Castings for Boilers, Unfired Pressure Vessels and
Piping Systems ................................................... 55
C 100 Types of steel .. .......... .............. .................. 55
C 200 Chemical composition .............. ..................... 55
D. Propeller Steel Castings ....................................... 56
D 100 Types of steel............................................ 56
E. Castings for Chain Cable Links, Accessories and An-
chor Shackles .......... .......... .......... ...... ................ 56
E 100 Chain cable links ......................................... 56
E 200 Chain cable accessories and anchor shackles ....... 57
F. Castings for Structural Members with Higher
Toughness Requirements ..................................... 57
F 100 Types of steel........ ................ .................... 57
P 300 Mechanical properties ................................... 57
G. Steel Castings for Liquefied Gas Systems ................ 58
G 100 Types of steel ............................................ 58
G 200 Chemical composition ................................... 58
G 300 Mechanical properties ................................... 58 ()
H. Heat Treatment .. .......... ........ .......... .................... 58
H 100 General .................................................... 58
H 200 Heat treatment of carbon and carbon-manganese
steel ......................................................... 58
H 300 Heat treatment aflow aIioy steel...................... 58
H 400 Heat treatment of stainless steel ..... .................. 58

I. Testing.. ........................................................... 59
I 100 Test samples .............................................. 59
I 200 Mechanical testing at room temperature ............. 59
I 300 Tensile testing at elevated temperature ............... 59
I 400 Hydraulic pressure testing............ .................. 59
I 500 Visual and non-destructive examination ............. 59
J. Rectification of Defective Castings ......................... 60
J 100 Repair welding ........................................... 60
K. Welding of Structural Members ............................ 60
K 100 General .................... ................................ 60
SEC. 8 IRON CASTINGS ................................ ..... 61
A. General ........................................................... . 61
A'1[;O-- Scope .... ... : ..... ; .. ;'.::; .. ... : ... ,' ... :: ... .... 61
A 200 Quality of castings ...................................... . 61
A 300 Manufacture ............................................. .
A 400 Chemical composition ........... .
A 500 Heat treatment .......................................... ..
61 C)
61 '
61
A 600 Testing ..................................................... . 61
A 700 Visual and non-destructive examination ............ . 61
A 800 Repair of defects .................... , .................. .. 62
62 C)
62
B. Nodular Cast Iron ............................................. .
B 100 Scope ...................................... .
B 200 Test material ............ . 62
B 300 Mechanical properties .. 62
B 400 Metallographic examination 62
C. Grey Cast Iron ................................................ .. 62
C 100 Scope ...................................................... . 62
C 200 Test material ............................................ .. 62
C 300 Mechanical properties .................................. . 62
SEC. 9 WROUGHT ALUMINIUM ALLOYS ............ 63
A. General...... ............ ............ .............................. 63
A 100 Scope ....................................................... 63
A 200 Aluminium grades ....................................... 63
A 400 Temper designations .................................... 63
B. Testing .............. ; ............................................ .. 65
65
65
B 100 Samples for testing ..................................... .
B 200 Tensile testing ........................ .
B 300 Other testing ............................ . .. 66
B 400 Inspection, tolerances ..... . .. ........... 66
<J

C)
<J
Pt.2 Ch.2 Sec:lO Page 67
SECTION 10
COPPER ALLOYS
Contents
A. General
A 100 Scope
B. Castings for Valves, Fittings and General Application
B 100 Types of copper aIioys
B 300 Mechanical properties
B 400 Testing
C. Propeller Castings
C 100 Chemical composition
C 200 Mechanical properties
C 300 Heat treatment
C 400 Testing and inspection
D. Tubes
D 400 Testing
A. General
A 100 Scope
101 This Section gives the requirements for copper alloys
used in castings for valves, fittings and general applications.
This Section also specifies the requirements for copper al-
loys used in propeller castings and tubes. The relevant parts
of Ch.l are also applicable.
B. Castings for Valves, Fittings and General
Application
. B' 100 TyPes ()f copper itii()ys '.
101 The requirements given in B apply to castings for
valves, fittings and other castings intended for use in vessel
construction, machinery and piping systems. All copper al-
loy castings used are to be in accordance with a recognized
national or international standard approved by the Society
for the application in
The copper alloys to be used in marine environments are to
have a satisfactory resistance to sea water corrosion.
201 Nominal chemical composition is to be in accordance
with the specification given in the approved standard.
202 When castings are made from ingots for which an
analysis already is available, and provided no alloy additions
are made, the certified analysis made by the maker of the
ingots can be accepted. Spot checks of the analysis are to
be carried out by the manufacturer.
301 Mechanical properties are to comply with the re-
quirements given in the approved standard. Any additional
requirements given for specific components by the relevant
rules for design and construction are also to be complied
with.
B 400 Testing
401 Test samples are to be cast separately in a mould and
are to be of the same material as used for the casting. The
test samples are to be according to an appropriate national
standard or specially approved by the Society. The test
samples are to undergo the same heat treatment as the cast-
ings.
402 Castings which are intended to carry fluids or steam
under pressure are to be hydraulically tested.
.....-----
-=f; \-=;
L
-....-
I
"
,
j
j
j
H I
j
1 .. I '
j
I
H fjf lOOmm
B SOmm
L 150mm
T "
15mm
o
25mm
Fig. 1
Tensile test specimen.
. io1 Por all propelleranrlj,ropeiier blade castillgs"l'artlc'"
ulars of chemical composition are to be submitted to the
Society for approval. Table Cl shows typical compositions
of propeller materials.
201 Requirements for mechanical properties are given in
Table C2.
C 300 Heat treabnent
301 For all propeller and propeller blade materials, par-
ticulars of heat treatment are to be submitted to the Society
for approval.
302 All propeller materials given in Table CI may be de-
livered in the as cast condition.
401 The test samples for the preparation of the tensile test
specimen are to be of the keel block type dimensioned as
specified in Fig.l (test coupon according to the broken line
may also be accepted).
The samples are generally to be separately cast, and they are
to be cast from the same melting charges as used for the
manufacture of the propeller or the propeller blades.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
Page 66 - Pt.2 Ch.2 Sec.S
direction is permitted. In both cases the mechanical pro-
perty limits in Table A6 are to be applied.
- For closed extrusions one additional tensile test is to be
taken transverse to the extrusion direction and across at
least one extrusion seam. See Table A7
The pieces are to be of full section of the material where
practicable. Otherwise, the pieces are to be taken in the
range one third to half the distance from the edge to the
centre of the predominant or thickest part of the section.
202 Unless otherwise agreed upon, the number of tensile
test pieces are to comply with the following:
Rolled products: ,
One tensile test piece is to be taken from each lot of material
produced. If the weight of one lot exceeds 1000 kg one extra
piece is to be taken from every 1000 kg of material, or
fraction thereof, in each lot. If one single piece exceeds
1000 kg, one piece is sufficient.
Extruded products:
For material with a nominal weight of less than I kg/m, one
tensile test piece is to be taken from each 500 kg, or fraction
thereof, in each lot. For nominal weights between 1 and 2
kg/m, one tensile test piece is to be taken from each 500
m, or fraction thereof, in each lot. If the nominal weight
exceeds 2 kg/m, one piece is to be taken for each 1000 kg
of material, or fraction thereof, in each lot.
B 300 Other testing
301 Other tests such as dump testing, formability testing
or bend testing may be required in case of special grades
and/or applications.
B 400 Inspection, tolerances
401 The surveyor does not inspect dimensions or surface
condition of each single plate, section, etc. It is the alumi-
nium producer's responsibility that the requirements for di-
mensional tolerances are satisfied.
402 The under thickness tolerance acceptable for the soci-
ety is to be considered as the lower limit of a IIpIus-minus"
range of thickness tolerance which could be found in the
normal production of a plant producing rolled or extruded
products, on average, to the nominal thickness.
Perinissible tinaer thickness tolerance ror 'rolledptoducts
(sheet, plate and bar):
Tolerances of thickness are given in Table Bl. For thick-
nesses below 2 mm and for widths exceeding 2500 mm,
wider tolerances rna y be accepted after consideration in each
particular case. More restricted tolerances may he required
for thicknesses above 40 mm.
Table B1 Under thickness tolerance in mm
Nominal Width o/plate, mm
thickness
mm
up to 1500 1501-2000 above 2000
above 2 to 4 0,10, 0,15 0,15
above 4 to 8 0,20 0,20 0,25
above 8 to 12 0,25 0,25 0,25
above 12 to 20 0,35 0,40 0,50
above 20 to 40 __ 0,50 0,65
For extruded products:
Minus tolerances of thickness:
- All thicknesses: 5 % of material thickness, limited to 0,5
mm.
Wider tolerances may be accepted for tubes, complex sec,,:,
tions and thicknesses below 2 mm.
c. Repair of Defects
C 100 General
101 Local surface defects may be removed by machining
or grinding, provided that the thickness is in no place re-
duced to less than 95 % of the actual plate thickness and in
no place reduced to more than 2 mm below the minus tol-
erances. The extent of such repair is to he agreed upon with
the surveyor, and all repairs are to he carried out under the
surveyor's supervision. unless otherwise arranged.
102 Surface defects which canoot be dealt with as in 101,
are not allowed to be repaired, unless it can be stated that
repair by welding does not affect the strength and suitability
of the piece for the intended application. Any case of repair
by welding is to be specified in detail for consideration and
approval by the surveyor.
Prior to any such repair welding, the defect is to be com-
pletely removed by machining or grinding.
After complete removal of the defect and before welding,
the thickness of the piece is in no place to be reduced by
more than 20 %. The welding is to be carried out by ap-
proved welders. The weld is to be ground flush with the
surrounding piece surface.
Before repair welding is commenced and after grinding the
weld bead, ,nondestructive testing with dye-penetrant may
be required at the discretion of the surveyor.
D. !<leIltifjc!itio
ll
of
D 100 Branding
101 In addition to the requirements given in Ch.1 Sec.1
C, the following apply:
The alphanumeric designation of the aluminium alloy is
NV-yz
NV = designation of an aluminium alloy according to the
Society'S rules
y = AA designation
z = Temper.
The NV designations given are not to be used for grades
which do not fully comply with the specifications given in
Tables Al to A2 and A5 to A7.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
." , /
.. )
) ,J
)
J
) )
C. Repair of Defects ................... ............................ 66
C 100 Geneml.......... .. ............................. .... ....... 66
D. Identification of Materials .... ...................... .......... 66
D 100 Branding............................................ ....... 66
SEC. 10 COPPER ALLOYS .................................... 67
A. General .......................................... ............ ...... 67
A 100 Scope................. .... .. .......... ...................... 67
B. Castings for Valves, Fittings and General Application 67
B 100 Types of copper alloys.................................. 67
B 300 Mechanical properties ............................ ....... 67
B 400 Testing......... .. ...... ...... ...... .......... .............. 67
C. Propeller Castings ...... .............................. .......... 67
C 300 Heat treatment ............................................ 67
C 400
C 500
Testing and inspection
Repair of defects ..
.................................. 67
68
D.Tubes .............................................................. 68
D 200 Mechanical proPerties ................................... 68
D 300 Heat treatment ............................................ 68
D 400 Testing..................................................... 68
SEC. 11 HEAT RESISTING NON-FERROUS ALLOYS 70
A. General.... .......... ........ ...... ................................ 70
A 100 Scope.. .. .......... ............ ........ ..................... 70
A 200 Approval............................................ .. .... 70
A 300 Heat treatment ............................................ 70
B. Testing .......... .......... ...... ........ ........................... 70
B 100 Samples for testing ...................................... 70
B 200 Tensile testing ............................................ 70
B 300 Impact testing ............................................. 70
B 400 Creep and rupture testing ............................... 70
B 500 Non-destructive testing.................................. 70
B 600 Other tests ................................................. 70
-) .::J
) . ~
. ~ ..
~ ~
I.U''''''''' IVI ....... 1-' .... , ........ ' ........ 1 .............
. Table AS Mechanical properties for wrought aluminium alloy sheets, strips and plates minimum values, t: 2 mm < t < 40 mm
Tensile Strength Yield Strength Elongation
DNV
Temper Rm
~ 0 2
L
o
=5,65.j%
Designation
(Nlmm
2
)
(Nlmm
2
) AS%
NV-5052 O-H111 170 65 16
H32 210 160 10
H34 235 180 9
NV-5154A O-H111 215 85 16
NV-5754 O-Hl11 190 80 17
H24 240 165 10
NV-5454 O-H111 215 85 16
H32 250 180 10
H34 270 200 9
. NV-5086 O-H111 240 95 14
H116 275 195 9
H32 275 195 10
H34 300 235 9
NV-5083 0-H111 t<6mm 275 125 15
O-Hl11 t>6mm 270 115 14
H116 305 215 10
H321 305 215 10
NV-5383 O-H111 290 145 17
H116-H321
-'----
305 220 10
- -- ._--
--- - - -- -
Table A6 Mechanical properties for extruded aluminium alloy pronIes, rods and tubes, minimum values, t: 2 mm S t S 2S
mm
Tensile Strength
Yield Strength Elongation
DNV Temper
Rm
~ 0 2
L
o
=S,6S.j%
Designation (thickness t in mm)
-
(Nlmm2)
(Nlmm
2
) AS%
NV-6060 T5 or T6 190 150 12
NV-6061 T4 180 110 14
T5 or T6 260 240 8
NV-6063 T5 150 110 7
T6 205 170 9
NV-6005A T5 or T6 260 215 8
NV-6082 T4 205 110 14
T5 or T6 310 260 10
I
._. -- ._. --,-.,'"'' "-._--- ,_ .. _- .. ~ _. ,., ~ , ..
... ," -. - .. -.-'.-.. ',-_.
Table A7 Mechanical properties for closed extruded aluminium alloy profiles, rods and tubes minimum values, t: 2 mm :S t S
2S mm, testing transverse to extruding direction
Tensile Strength
I
DNV Temper
Rm
~ 0 2
L
o
=5,65.j%
(Nlmm
2
) (Nlmm
2
) AS%
NV-6069 T5 175 135 5
NV-6061 T4 165 110 5
T5 or T6 245 205 4
NV-6005A T5 or T6
6<t<1O 260 215 5
lO<t<25 230 195 4
NV-6082 T5 or T6 290 240 5
---
B. Testing
201 The tensile test pieces are to be taken according to the
following:
101 All materials in a lot forwarded for sampling are to
be of the same alloy, production batch (charge) and product
form (plates, sections etc.). The materials in one lot are
further to be of the same dimensions and in the same deliv-
ery condition. Artificially aged grades are to be from the
same furnace batch.
- for rolled products the pieces are to be cut with their
longitudinal axes transverse to the fmal rolling direction.
See Table A5.
- For extruded products the specimens are normally to be
taken in the transverse direction. If the width of the pro-
duct is less than 300 mm, then test in the longitudinal
DET NORSKE VERITAS
TableA2 Chemical Composition. Wrought alloys in the 6000 Series
DNV AA
Limit Si Fe Mn Mg
designation designation
NV6060 6060 minimum 0,30 0,10
.
0,35
maximum 0,6 0,30 0,10 0,6
NV-6061 6061 minimum 0,4 - - 0,8
maximum 0,8 0,7 0,15 1,2
NV6063 6063 minimum 0,20 - - 0,45
maximum 0,6 0,35 0,10 0,9
NV6005A 6005A minimum 0,50
- -
0,40
maximum 0,9 0,35 0,50 0,7
NV6082 6082 minimum 0,7 -
0,40 0,6
maximum 1,3 0,50 1,0 1,2
Cr Zn
.

0,05 0,05
0,04 -
0,35 0,25
- -
0,10 0,10
-
0,30 0,20
-
0,25 0,20
1) The use of alloys containing more than 0,15% Cu in direct contact with seawater may be restricted
2) Cr + Mn 0,12 to 0,50
Other
Cu 1)
Ti Al
elements
maximwn-
values
- - Rest each: 0,05
0,10 0,10 total: 0,15
0,15 - Rest each: 0,05
0,40 0,15 total: 0,15
- - Rest each: 0,05
0,10 0,10 total: 0,15
- - Rest each: 0,05
0,30 0,10 total: 0,15
- - Rest each: 0,05
0,10 0,10 total: 0,15
Table A3 Tempers achieved by fabricating, annealing cold working, or cold working plus partial annealing or stabilising
Temper description Temper
As fabricated, cold worked without specified strength (drawn products) -F
Annealed, soft -0
Strain hardened to specified strength 118 hard -Hll
1/4 hard -H12
1/2 hard -H14
Strain hardened and partly annealed (p.a.) to specified strength 1/8 hard, p.a. -H21
1/4 hard, p.a. H22
112 hard, p.a. -H24
Strain hardened and stabilised to specified strength 1/4 hard, stabilised -H32
112 hard. stabilised -H34
Special tempers
- Less strain hardened than -Hll. e.g. by straightening or stretching -Hlll
- No controlled strain hardening, but there are mechanical property limits -H112
- Treatment against exfoilation corrosion -H116
- Strain hardened less than required for a controlled H32 temper -H321
Table A4 Tempers achieved by heat treatment or thermomechanical treatment
Unstable condition after solution heat treatment (HT) -w
Solution heat treated, naturally aged T4
Cooled from an elevated temperature shaping process, artificially aged T5
Solution heat treated, artificially aged -T6
Solution heat treated, artificially overaged -T7
DET NORSKE VERITAS
I
I
')

()

o
8 8
C)
Q
Rules tor January 1 ::t::to
SECTION 1
ROLLED STEEL FOR STRUCTURAL APPLICATION
Contents
A. General
A 100 Scope
A 200 Designation of steel grades
A 300 Method of manufacture
B. Normal Strength Steel
B 100 Scope
B 300 Heat treatment, condition of supply
C. High Strength Steel
C 100 Scope
C 300 Heat treatment, condition of supply
D. Extra High Strength Steel
D 100 Scope
D 300 Heat treatment, condition of supply
E. Testing
E 100 Test material
E 200 Tensile Testing
E 300 Impact testing
E 400 Testing of through thickness properties
E 500 Inspection - tolerances
F. Repairs
F 100 Surface defects
A. General
A 100 Scope
101 This section specifies the requirements for weldable
-lliJnnal strength, high strength and high strength het
rolled structural steel plates and sections. These require-
ments are also applicable to seamless steel tubes and pipes
intended for structural application. The requirements are
applicable to steel products with a thickness not exceeding
150 rom. For greater thicknesses certain deviations from
these requirements may be accepted or required after con-
sideration in each case.
This section covers lACS UR Wll and W16.
For rolled slabs, billets or bars used as substitute for forg-
ings, see Sec.S.
102 Steels differing from the Rule requirements in chemi-
cal composition, deoxidation practice, condition of supply
and mechanical properties may be accepted, subject to spe-
cial approval by the Society. Such steels are to be given a
special designation, see 200.
201 The steel grades of this Section are divided into
strength groups of three ranges:
- Normal Strength steels (NS)
- High Strength steels (HS)
- Extra High strength Steels (EHS)
202 The alphanumeric designation of the steel grade is
NVx y,
where
NV = designation of a steel grade according to the Society's
Rules.
x = a capital letter corresponding to a specified impact
toughness test temperature, see Table AI.
y = a figure designating the strength group according to
the specified minimum yield stress, see Table AI. The
figure y is omitted for NS steels.
203 Additional symbols following the alphanumeric des-
ignation given in 202 may be:
Z = steel grade of improved through-thickness properties.
S = specially approved steel, see 100.
301 The steel is to bemanufactured by an electric or one
of the basic oxygen processes. The use of other processes
may be specially approved by the Society.
302 The reduction ratio of thickness from continuously
cast slab to plate is to be minimum 5 to I unless otherwise
approved by the Society.
Table Al Definitions of steel grades
Strength Impact testing Tensile properties
range
Symbol Test tem- Symbol Minimum
x perature y yield
C stress
(N/mm
2
)
NS A -
B a
Omitted 235
D -20
E '40
..
HS A a 27 265
D -20 32 315
E -40 36 355
F -60 40 390
EHS D -20 420 420
E -40 460 460
F -60 500 500
550 550
620 620
690 690
303 The applicable rolling methods are defined as follows:
Controlled Rolling, CR (Normalised Rolling, NR): A rolling
procedure in which the fmal deformation is carried out in
the normalising temperature range, resulting in a material
condition generally equivalent to that obtained by normalis-
mg.
Thermo-Mechanical Rolling, TM (Thermo-Mechanical Con-
trolled Processing, TMCP): This is a procedure which in-
volves the strict control of both the steel temperature and the
rolling reduction. Generally a high proportion of the rolling
reduction is carried out close to the Ar3 temperature and
may involve the rolling in the dual phase temperature re-
gion. Unlike controlled rolling (normalised rolling) the pro-
perties conferred by TM cannot be reproduced by
subsequent normalising or other heat treatment.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
Rules for ShipS, January 1996
Page 2 - Pl.2 Ch.2 Sec.1
B 100 Scope
201 Requirements for chemical composition and deoxida-
tion pracb.ce for normal strength steel are given in Table Bl.
101 This subsection specifies the requirements for normal
strength steel, which is defined as steel with minimum yield
stress of 235 N/mm
2
.
301 Normal strength steel is to be delivered in a condition
complying with the requirements given in Table B2.
401 Normal strength steel is to comply with the mechan-
ical properties specified in Table B3. .
402 Additional requirements to thmullh thickness proper-
ties (Z-ductility), wlien specified, are given in E400.
Table Bl . Chemical composition and deoxidation practice for Normal Strength steel
Grade
NVA NVB NVD NVE
For t ::;5Omm: For t :SSOmm:
For t :525mm:
Aoy method Any method
Killed Killed and
Deoxidation
except rimmed except
For t>25mm: fme grain
steel 1)
rimmed steel
For t >SOmm: For t >SOmm:
Killed and fme treated
Killed Killed
grain treated
C
max. (%) 5) 0,21 4)
0,21 0,21 0,18
Si min. (%) -
- 0,10 0,10
Chemical Si max. (%) 0,50 0,35 0,35 0,35
composition Mn
min. (%)5)
2,5 xC 0,80
6
)
0,60 0,70
(ladle analysis) 2) 3)
P max. (%) 0,035 0,035 0,035 0,035
S max. (%) 0,035 0,035 0,035 0,035
Al min. ac.sol. (%) 7)
-
- 0,015 8)
0,015
1) For sections up to 12.5mm thickness, rimmed steel may be accepted subject to special approval by the Society.
2) When any grade of steel is supplied in the thermo-mechanically control1ed processed conditions, deviations in the specified chemical composition may
be allowed or required by the Society.
3) The Society may limit the amount of residual-Itrace elements which may have an adverse effect on the working and use of the steel, e.g. copper and
tin.
4) Maximum 0,23% for sections.
I 5) Carbon plus 1/6 of the manganese content is not to exceed 0,40%.
6) For NVB, when the silicon content is 0,10 or above (killed steel), the minimum manganese content may be reduced to 0,60%.
7) The total content may be detennined instead of the acid soluble content. In such cases the total A1 content is not to be less than 0,020%. An upper
limit may be speeified. Other grain refiners may be used upon special approval by the Society.
8) AI is required for thicknesses above 25mm.
... - .. _--
Table B2 Condition of supply for Normal Strength (NS) steel
Grade Thickness J t Condition of supply I)
mm
NVA
t$50 Any
50<t<150 AR
2
), CR, N, TM
NVB
t$50 Any
50<t<150 AR2), CR, N, TM
I
NVD
t$35 Aoy
50<t<150 AR
3
), CR, N, TM
NVE t<I50 AR3), CR3), N, TM
1) Condition of supply:
AR, As rolled.
N, Normalized.
CR, Controlled rolled.
TM, Thenno-mechanically controlled (fMCP)
2) Grades NV A and NVB may be supplied as rolled (AR) subject to
special approval by the Society.
3) Subject to special approval by the Society, sections in grade NVD
may be supplied as rolled (AR) provided satisfactory results are con-
sistently obtained from Charpy V-notch impact tests. Similarely sec-
tions in grade NVE may be supplied as rolled (AR) or controlled
rolled (CR).
DEr NORSKE VERITAS
<)
()
:J
C)
.
C)

...... ' .......................... , ................. r ---
Pl.2 Ch.2 Sec.S - Page 63
SECTION 9
WROUGHT ALUMINIUM ALLOYS
Contents
A. General
A 100 Scope
A 200 Aluminium grades
A 300 Chemical composition
A 400 Temper designations
A 500 MeChanical properties
B. Testing
B 300 Other testing
C. Repair of Defects
C 100 General
D. Identification of Materials
D 100 Branding
A. General
A 100 Scope
101 This Section specifies the requirements for wrought
aluminium alloys for structural application including plates,
sections, tubes, bars and rivet bars and rivets.
This Section is not applicable to aluminium alloys for forg-
ings and castings. For these products suitable alloys ac-
cording to recognized standards may be used.
201 The alloy grades are listed in Tables Al and A2.
202 Aluminium alloys are to have a satisfactory resistance
to corrosion in 'marine environments. Grades for welded
structures are to be weldable, applying one of the welding
methods approved by the Society.
203 The use of 6000 series aluminium alloys in direct
contact with sea water may be restricted depending on ap-
plication and corrosion protection system. The use of these
alloys is to be agreed with the Society.
301 The chemical composition is to satisfy the require-
ments in Table Al and A2. Other alloys or alloys which
do not fully comply with Table Al and A2, may be accepted
by the Society after consideration in each particular case.
Special tests andlor other relevant information, e.g. which
confirm a satisfactory corrosion resistance and weldability,
may be required.
A 400 Temper desigl)lltions
401 Temper designations according to the Aluminium As-
sociation (AA) designation system are given in Table A3 and
A4.
A 500 Mechanical properties
501 Requirements to mechanical properties for different
delivery conditions are given in Tables A5, A6 and A 7.
Other delivery conditions with related mechanical properties
may be accepted by the Society after consideration in each
particular case.
Table Al Chemical composition - Wrought Alloys in the 5000 Series
AA
Other
DNV
designation Limit Si Fe Mn Mg Cr Zn Ti Cu Al
elements
designation
1)
maximwn-
values
. NV-SOS:C 5052
...
, minimum
,.
-
. 7,7 .. .0,15. ,
"' .0, .
-
.. .lrlIoh;Q,Q5..,
maxlmum 0,25 0,40 0,10 2,8 0,35 0,10 0,10 total: 0,15
NV-5154A 5154A
minimum -
- - 3,1 -
-
-
- Rest each: 0,05
maximum 0,50 0,50 0,50 3,9 0,25 0,20 0,20 0,10 total: 0,15
NV-5754
2
) 5754
minimum -
- - 2,6 -
-
-
- Rest each: 0,05 I
maximum 0,40 0,40 0,50 3,6 0,30 0,20 0,15 0,10 total: 0,15
NV-5454 5454
minimum - - 0,50 2,4 0,05 -
-
- Rest each: 0,05
maximum 0,25 0,40 1,0 3,0 0,20 0,25 0,20 0,10 total: 0,15
NV-5086 5086
minimum -
-
0,20 3,5 0,05
-
-
- Rest each: 0,05
maximum 0,40 0,50 0,7 4,5 0,25 0,25 0,15 0,10 total: 0,15
NV-5083 5083
minimum - - 0,40 4,0 0,05
-
-
- Rest each: 0,05
maximum 0,40 0,40 1,0 4,9 0,25 0,25 0,15 0,10 total: 0,15
NV-5383
3
) 5383
minimum -
- 0,7 4,0 -
-
-
- Rest each, 0,05
maximum 0,25 0,25 1,0 5,2 0,25 0,40 0,15 0,20 total: 0,15
1) AA - Aluminium Association
2) Cr+Mn: 0,10 to 0,6
3) Zr Maximum 0,20
DEr NORSKE VERITAS
A 800 Repair of defects
801 At the discretion of the surveyor, small surface blem-
ishes may be removed by local grinding.
802 . Subject to the prior approval of the surveyor, castings
'containing local porosity may be rectified by impregnation
with a suitable plastic filler, provided that the extent of the
porosity is such that it does not adversely affect the strength
of the casting.
803 Repairs by welding are generally not permitted, nnless
specially considered and accepted.
B. Nodular Cast Iron
B 100 Scope
This subsection gives the specific requirements to nodular
cast iron
B 200 Test material
201 The test samples are generally to be one of the stand-
ard types detailed in recognised standards with a thickness
of 25 mm.
202 Separately cast test samples are, where possible, to
be taken towards the end of pouring of the casting.
301 Ferritic nodular cast iron with special requirements is
to meet the values for grade NVI and NV2, given in Table
B1.
302 Nodular cast iron for ordinary use is to be in accord-
ance with the requirements for grade 370 to 800, given in
Table B 1. Hardness values are given for information only.
Values for elongation which correspond to the tensile
strengths between the values specified, are to be calculated
by linear interpolation.
B 400 MetaIlographic examination
401 For nodular cast iron samples for metallographic ex-
amination are to be prepared for every ladle of metal, treated
to produce nodular graphite. At least 90 % of the graphite
is to be in spheroidal form
Guidance note:
Graphite types I II according to Plate I of ASTM A247 are
considered to have a spheroidal fonn.
-e-n-d---o-f--G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---
Table Bl Nodular cast iron - mechanical properties of separately cast test samples
Tensile

Average impact energy
strength 1)
stress )
Elongation
KV
Grade Rm

AS
Hardness Predominant
test
HB structure
minimum
minimum
%
J minimum 3) temperature
Nlmm2
Nlmm
2
C
NV 1 350 220 22 12 (9) -40 110-170 Ferrite
NV2 400 250 18 12 (9) -20 140-200 Ferrite
370 370 230 17 120-180 Ferrite
400 400 250 12 140-200 Ferrite
500 500 320 7 170-240
Ferrite!
pearlite
600 600 370 3 190-270
Pearlite!
ferrite
700 700 420 2 230-300 Pearlite
. ---.
-- .. - ..
-- -- - -
..
Pearlite or
800 800 480 2 250-350 tempered
structure
1) For intermediate values of specified minimum tensile strength, the minimum values for 0,2% proof and elongation may be obtained
by interpolation.
2) The 0,2% proof stress values are given for information purposes and unless othelWise agreed do not require to be verified by test.
3) The average value measured on 3 Charpy V-notch specimens one result may be below the average value but not less than the minimum
shown in brackets. If the impact testing is carried out at +20C the impact energy is not to be less than 17 (14) and 14 (11) J, re-
spectively, for NV1 and NV2.
C. Grey Cast Iron
C 100 Scope
101 This subsection gives the specific requirements to grey
cast iron.
C 200 Test material
201 Separately cast test samples are to be used unless
otherwise agreed and generally are to be in the form of bars
30 mm in diameter and of suitable length.
301 Only the tensile strength is to be determined and the
results obtained from tests are to comply with the minimum
value specified for the casting being supplied. The specified
minimum tensile strength is not to be less than 200 N/mm
2

302 The fractured surfaces of all tensile test specimens are
to be granular and grey in appearance.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
-'l
/
I)
)

\J
'\
J
)
J
Table B3 Mechanical properties for Normal Strength (NS) steel
Grade Yield Tensile Elongation Test
stress strength
AS
temp.
minimum
1 :5,50
A verage impact energy
J minimwn
50<1 :5,70 70<1 :5,150
R oH Rm
mlmmum (Nlmm2)
(%)
(OC) Longitudinal Transverse Longitudinal Transverse Longitudinal Transverse
(Nlmm2)
NVA +20 - 34
2
) 24
2
) 41
2
) 27
2
)
NVB
235 400-520
22
3
)
0
27
1
) 20
1
)
34 24 41 27
NVD -20 27 20 34 24 41 27
NVE -40 27 20 34 24 41 27
1) Charpy V-notch impact tests are generally not required for grade B steel with thickness of 25 mm or less.'
2) Impact tests for Grade A over 50 mm thick are not required when the material is produced using fine grain practice and furnished nonnalized or
thermo-mechanically controlled processed.
3) For full thickness flat test specimens with a width of 25 mm and a gauge length of 200 mm the elongation is to comply with the following minimum
values:
Thickness, mm
Tt<51
5<t<10 1 lO<t<15 I 15<1<20 I 20<t<25 I 25<t<30 I 30<t<40 140<t<150
Elongation
1141
16
I
17
I
18
C 100 Scope
101 This subsection specifies the requirements for high
strength steel, which is defmed as steel with minimum yield
stress of 265 N/mm
2
and up to and including 390 N/mm
2
.
102 It should be noted that the fatigue strength of welded
joints of high strength steels may not be higher than that of
a welded joint in normal strength steel.
C 200 . Chemical composition
201 The chemical composition, deoxidation practice and
fme grain treatment are in general to satisfy the requirements
in Table C1. Where additions of any other elements have
been made as part of the steelmaking practice, the content
is to be indicated.
202 Grades which according to Table CI are to be fme
grain treated, are to contain one or more of the .elements
AI, Nb, Ti and V. Other grain-refming elements (micro-al-
loying) elements may be used after agreement with the So-
ciety. The combination of grain-refining elements of the
vadous'sieel grades IssiibJeciio approviil by me SocJety.
A smaller content of Al than given in the table may be ac-
cepted, subj ect to special approval.
I
19
I
20
I
21
I
22
203 The content of all elements specified is to be deter-
mined for each cast, by ladle analysis, and is to be stated
on the certificate. The determination of AI, Nb, Ti and V
may be omitted for grades that are not fine-grain treated.
204 When required, the carbon equivalent value is to be
calculated from the ladle analysis using the following for-
mula:
C
- C Mn Cr + Mo + V Ni + Cu
eq - + 6 + 5 + 15
%
For TM (TMCP) steels the carbon equivalent calculat.ed
from above formula is to comply with the- requirements
given in Table C2.
The formula given in D200 (P m) may also be used for
evaluating weldability instead of tile carbon equivalent at the
discretion of the Society.
301 High strength steel is to be delivered in a condition
complying with the requirements given in Table C3.
401 High strength steel is to comply with the mechanical
-propertIes'specliied IiI Tabie c4. . - '" --- . -- - -'-. ,-- --- --- --- -
402 Additional requirements for through thickness prop-
erties (Z- ductility), when specified, are given in E400.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
Table Cl Chemical composition and deoxidation practice for High Strength (HS) steel
NV A27S NY D27S NY E27S
Grade
NY A32 NYD32 NYE32
NY F32 NY F36 NY F40
NY A36 NYD36 NYE36
NY A40 NV D40 NVE40
'Deoxidation Killed and fme grain treated I)
Chemical composition (ladle analysis)
C maximum (%) 0,18 0,16
Si (%) 0,10 - 0,50 0,10 - 0,50
Mn (%) 0,9 - 1,6
2
) 0,9 - 1,6
2
)
P maximum (%) 0,035 0,025
S maximum (%) 0,035 0,025
Cu maximum (%) 0,35 0,35
Cr maximum (%) 0,20 0,20
Ni maximum (%) 0,40 0,80
Mo maximum (%) 0,08 . 008
Al ac.sol. (%) 0,Q15 - 0,08 3) 0,015 : 0,08 3)
AI total (%) 0,020 - 0,085 3) 0,020 - 0,085 3)
Nb (%) 002-005
3
) 002-005
3
)
V (%) 0:05 - 0:10 3) 0:05 - 0: 10 3)
Ti maximum (%) 0,02 0,02
N maximum (%) -
0,009 (0,012 if Al is present)
1) NV A 275 is accepted semi-killed or killed without fine grain treatment for thicknesses up to and including 25 mm.
2) For thicknesses up to and including 12,5 mm the minimum Mn-content may be reduced 10.0,70%. For NVA 275, NVD 275 and NVE 275 it may
be reduced to 0,70% regardless of thickness.
3) The steel is to contain AI, Nb, V or other suitable grain refining elements, either singly or in any combination. When used singly the steel is to contain
the specified minimum content of the grain refining element. When used in combination, the specified minimum content of at least one grain refining
element is applicable.
Table C2 Carhon equivalent for High Strength steels up to lSOmm in thickness produced by TMCP
Sleel Grade
Carbon equivalent, maximum (%)
1<50mm 50<1<100mm 100</<150 mm
NY A27S, D27S, E27S - - -
NY A32, D32, E32, F32 0,36 0,38 0,40
NY A36, D36, E36, F36 0,38 0,40 0,42
NV A40, D40, E40, F40 0,40 -
-
DET NORSKE VERITAS
0)
,,)
')
)
':J
':J
.:J
. 61
SECTION 8
IRON CASTINGS
A. General
A 100 Scope
A 200 Quality of castings
A 300 Manufacture
Contents
A 600 Testing
A 700 Visual and non-destructive examination
B 100 Scope
B 200 Test material
B 400 Metallographic examination
C. Grey Cast Iron
C 100 Scope
C 200 Test material
A. General
A 100 Scope
101 This Section gives the requirements for both ferritic
and pearlitic nodular cast iron and for grey cast iron. This
section covers lACS UR W9 and WIO.
The use of bainitic or other type of cast iron may be ac-
cepted after special consideration.
102 Castings which comply with national or proprietary
specifications may be accepted provided such specifications
give reasonable equivalence to these requirements or other-
wi ar".ppmved fOLa .spe.cifir,appiir.aliOll, ..
103 Where small castings are produced in large quantities,
the manufacturer may adopt alternative procedures for test-
ing and inspection subject to approval by the Society.
104 Requirements with respect to retesting, identification
and certification are outlined in Ch.l.
ued efficiency of the manufacturing technique. The surveyor
is to be given the opportunity to witness tests.
A 400 . Chemical composition
401 Unless specially required, the chemical composition
is left to the discretion of the manufacturer, who is to ensure
that it is snitable to obtain the mechanical properties speci-
fied for the casting
A 500 Heat treabnent
501 Except as given in 502, the castings may be supplied
in either the as cast or heat treated condition.
502 For some applications, such as high temperature ser-
vice or where dimensional stability is important, castings
may require to be given a suitable tempering or stress re-
lieving heat treatment.
A 600 Testing
601 Test material sufficient for the required tests and for
possible re-tests is to be provided for each casting or batch
of castings. Separately cast test samples are normally to be
used.
602 Separately cast test samples are to be cast in moulds
made from the same type of material as used for the cast-
ings. The test samples are not to be stripped from the moulds
until the temperature is below 500C.
603 Where castings are supplied in the heat treated condi-
tion, the test samples are to be heat treated together with the
castings which they represent. For cast-on samples the
sample shall not be cut off from the casting until after the
heat treatment.
604 A batch testing procedure may be adopted for castings
with a fettled mass of 1 tonne or less. All castings in a batch
are to be of similar type and dimensions, and cast from the
"sajlie'ladle'--uf ii'6atOO" 1nBUil. 'GllS is'- tT"be pro ..
vided for each multiple of 2,0 tonnes of fettled castings in
each batch.
605 For large castings where more than one ladle of
treated metal is used, additional test samples are to be pro-
vided so as to be representative of each ladle used.
. J A 200 Quality of castings
201 Castings are to be free from surface or internal defects
which would be prejudicial to their proper application in
service. The surface finish is to be in accordance with good
practice and any specific requirements of the approved plan.
A 300 Manufacture
been approved by the Society.
302 Suitable mechanical methods are to be employed for
the removal of surplus material from castings. Thermal cut-
ting processes are not acceptable, except as a preliminary
operation to mechanical methods.
303 Where castings of the same type are regularly pro-
duced in quantity, the manufacturer is to make any tests
necessary to prove the quality of the prototype castings and
is also to make periodical examinations to verify the contin-
701 All castings are to be cleaned and adequately prepared
for examination. The surfaces are not to be hammered,
peened or treated in any way which may obscure defects.
702 Before acceptance, all castings are to be visually ex-
amined including, where applicable, the examination of in-
ternal surfaces. Unless otherwise agreed, the verification of
dimensions is the responsibility of the manufacturer.
703 Supplementary examination of castings by suitable
nondestructive testing procedu"res is generally not required
except in circumstances where there is reason to suspect the
soundness of the casting.
704 When required by the relevant construction rules,
castings are to be pressure tested before final acceptance.
705 In the event of any casting proving defective during
subsequent machining or testing it is to be rejected notwith-
standing any previous certification.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
Non-destructive testing is to be carried out in compliance
with complete plans approved by the Society for the casting
in question.
Equipment, procedures, operators qUalifica-tions, extent of
testing and acceptance criteria are to comply with relevant
'parts of the Rules, Classification Notes and Programmes.
509 In the event 'of any casting proving defective during
subsequent machining or testing it is to be repaired where
possible or rejected notwithstanding any previous certif-
ication, see Classification Note No. 4.2.
J. Rectification of Defective Castings
J 100 Repair welding
101 When unacceptable defects are found in a casting
these are to be removed by machining or chipping. Flame-
scarfing or arc-air gouging may also be used provided that
pre-heating is employed when necessary and that the sur-
faces of the resulting depression are subsequently ground
smooth to unaffected material. Complete elimination of the
defective material is to be proved by adequate non-destruc-
tive testing. Shallow grooves or depressions resulting from
the removal of defects may, at the discretion of the sur-
veyor, be accepted provided that they will cause no appre-
ciable reduction in the strength of the castings and that they
are suitably smoothed and contoured by grinding.
102 Proposals to repair a defective casting by welding are
to be submitted to the surveyor for approval before this work
is commenced. Such proposals are to include details of ihe
extent and position of all defects. Procedure qualification
test as well as operator qualification test are normally re-
quired.
103 When it has been agreed that the casting can be re-
paired this is to be carried out in accordance with an ap-
proved welding procedure which includes the following
features:
a) Important components of carbon-manganese steel and all
alloy steel castings are to be given a suitable preliminary
-- hant -treatment -prior, to- COmminCIitIDent. Of-Wild- repairs,
A similar heat treatment may also be required for other
types of castings where the repair of a major defect is
proposed.
b) The excavations are to be suitably shaped to allow good
access for welding and after final preparation for welding
are to be re-examined by suitable non-destructive testing
methods to ensure that all defective material has been
eliminated.
c) All castings in alloy steels and all castings for cranks
hafts are to be suitably pre-heated and welded at elevated
temperature. Castings in carbon or carhon- manganese
steel may also require to be pre-heated and welded at el-
evated temperature depending on their chemical compo-
sition and the dimensions and position of the weld
repairs. When the carbon content is higher than 0, 18 %,
pre-heating and elevated working temperature is always
required.
d) Welding is to be done under cover in positions free from"
draughts and adverse weather conditions by approved
welders with adequate supervision. As far as possible,
all welding is to be carried out in the downhand (flat)
position.
e) The welding consumables used are to be of a type giving
a weld deposit with mechanical properties similar to those
of the parent castings. Only approved low hydrogen
consumables are to be used. Consideration is to be given
to the effect of post-weld heat treatment on the mechan-
ical properties of the weld metal.
f) After welding has been completed the castings are to be
given a suitable heat treatment in accordance with the
requirements of H. A stress relieving heat treatment may
be carried Qut instead, provided the surveyor gives his
consent. The type of heat treatment employed will be
dependent on the chemical composition of the casting and
the dimensions, positions and nature of the defects.
g) Special consideration may be given to the omission of
postweld heat treatment or to the acceptance of a local
stress relieving heat treatment where the repaired area is
smaller and machining of the casting has reached an ad-
vanced stage.
h) On completion of heat treatment the weld repairs and
adjacent material are to be ground smooth and examined
by magnetic particle or liquid penetrant testing. Supple-
mentary examination by ultrasonics or radiography may
also be required depending on the dimensions and nature
of the original defect. Satisfactory results are to be ob-
tained from all forms of non-destructive testing used.
K. Welding of Structural Members
K 100 General
101 For carbon and carbon-manganese steel castings, the
following apply:
When the carbon content according to the ladle analysis is
higher than 0,18%, the casting is to be preheated and kept
at a temperature of about 200C during welding.
'When' the -carbbif 'content is" 0,24 %. or-more; 'the "material" is
to be normalized after welding. If normalizing cannot be
effected, a stress-relief heat treatment can be carried out in-
stead, provided the surveyor gives his consent. After heat
treatment, the weld and the heat-affected zone are to be ex-
amined for cracks by a non-destructive method. "
When a casting is welded to members for which the rules
prescribe heat treatment after welding, the heat treatment is
to be carried out regardless of carbon content of the cast
part.
Cast steel with a carbon content above 0,30 % is only to be
welded after approval by the Society in each separate case
according to approved procedure specification.
Alloy steel castings are to be welded in compliance with
approved procedure specifications.
The welding is to be done by approved welders and with
approved electrodes.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
'J
-/
I)
J
""J -.
)
J
) )
TableC3 Condition of supply for High Strength (HS) steel
Grade
Grain
refining elements
Nb and/or V
NY A27S
NY A32
NY A36
Al only or with Ti
-
NY A40 Any
Nb or V
NY 027S
NY 032
NY 036
AI only
or with Ti
NY 040 Any
NY E27S
NYE32 Any
NY E36
NY E40 Any
NY F32
Any
NY F36
NY F40 Any
AR: As rolled condition.
N: Normalized.
QT: Quenched and tempered
CR: Controlled rolled.
TM: Thermo-mechanically controlled processed (TMCp)
2) As rolled (AR) subject to special approval of the Society.
Thickness. t
mm
IS12,5
12,5 <t:S150
IS20
20 <tS35
35 <1<150
IS12,5
12,5 <1<150
IS12,5
12,5 <1<150
IS20
20<IS35
25 <1<150
1<150
IS150
1<150
IS150
1<150
Condition of supply 1)
Any
AR 3), CR, N, QT, TM
Any'
Any 2)
Any
CR,N,QT,TM
Any
,
Any'
Any 2)
CR, N,QT, TM
CR 3), N, QT, TM
N, QT, TM
CR 4), N, QT, TM
N, QT,TM
3) Subject to special approval by the Society, sections in grades A27S, A32. A36, 027S, 032 and 036 may be supplied as rolled (AR) provided satis-
factory results are consistently obtained from Charpy V-notch impact tests. Similarely sections in grades E27S, E32 and E36 may be supplied as rolled
(AR) or controlled rolled (CR).
4) Subject to special approval by the Society. sections in grades F32 and F36 may be supplied controlled rolled (CR).
DEI NORsKE VERITAS
Table C4 Mechanical properties for High Strength (HS) steel
Grade Yield Tensile Elonga- Tes! lem-
stress strength lion perature
Average impact energy, J minimum
1 <50 50<1 <70 70<1 <150
ReS Rm
AS
Longitudi- Transverse Longitudi- Transverse Longitudi- Transverse
(N/mm
2
) mznl- minimum
(OC) nal nal nal
mum
(N/mm
2
)
(%)
NV A27S 0
NV D27S 265 400-530
22
1
)
-20
27
2
)
20 34 24 41 27
NV E27S -40
NV A32 0
NVD32
315 440-590
22
1
)
-20
31
2
)
22 38 26 46 31
NVE32 -40
NV F32 -60
NV A36 0
NVD36
355 490-620
21 1)
-20
34
2
)
24 41 27 50 34
NVE36 -40
NV F36 -60
NV A40 0
NVD40
390 510-650 20
1
)
-20
41 27 45 30 55 37
NVE40 -40
NVF40 -60
1) For full thickness flat test specimens with a width of 25 mm and a gauge length of 200 mm the elongation is to comply with the follOWing minimum
values:
2) For grades A27S, A32 and A36 steels a relaxation in the number of impact tests for acceptance purposes may be permitted by special agreement with
the Society provided that satisfactory results arc from occasional check tests.
Thickness, mm t <5 5 <t <10 10<t <IS 15<t<20 20<t <25 25 <t <30 30<t <40 40<t <ISO
Elongation (%)
A27S, D27S & E27S IS 16
A32, D32, E32 & F32 14 16
A36, D36, E36 & F36 13 IS
A40, D40, E40 & F40 12 14
----
D 100 Scope
17
17
16
IS
-
101 This subsection specifies the requirements for extra
high strength steel, which is defined as steel with minimum
yield stress of 420 N/mm
2
and up to and including 690
N/mm
2
.
joint:,' Uf-eAlra high strength-steels lUay not be greater than
that of a welded joint in lower strength ,teels.
D 200 Chenlical composition
fine grain treatment are in general to satisfy the requirements
in Table Dl.
Where additions of any other elements have been made as
part of the steelmaking practice, the content is to be indi-
cated.
202 All extra high strength steel grades are to be fme grain
treated, and are therefore to contain one or more of the ele-
ments AI, Nb, Ti and V. Other grain-refining elements (mi-
cro-alloying) elements may be used after agreement with the
Society. The combination of grain-refming elements of the
various steel grades is subject to approval by the Society.
18 19 20 21 22
18 19 20 21 22
17 18 19 20 21
16 17 18 19 20
-
A smaller content of AI than given in the table may be ac-
cepted, subject to special approval. When used in combina-
tion, the specified minimum content of at least one element
is applicable.
on the certificate.
204 When the weldability is to be evaluated from the
chemical composition, the following formula is to he used
. if not otherwise agreed:' '. .. ',. -'" .-. """" .
Si Mn+Cu+Cr Ni Mo V
P,m=C+3(f+ 20 +6O+15+IO+
SB
(%)
D 300 Heat treabnent, condition of supply
301 Extra high strength steel is to be delivered in a con-
dition complying with the requirements given in Table D2.
401 Extra high strength steel is to comply with the me-
chanical properties specified in Table D3.
erties (Z-ductility), when specified, are given in E400.
403 Drop weight testing andlor fracture mechanics testing
may be required where found appropriate by the Society.
DB NORSKE VERITAS

:J
::J

J
I. Testing
I 100 Test samples
101 Test material, sufficient for the required tests and for
possible re-test purposes is to be provided for each casting
or batch of castings.
102 At least one test sample is to be provided for each
casting. Unless otherwise agreed the test samples are to be
either cast on or gated to the castings and are to have a
thickness representative for the part in question, but not less
than 30 mm.
For propeller castings the requirement according to D20 I
applies.
103 Where the casting is of complex shape, Or where the
finished mass exceeds 10 tonnes, two test samples are to be
provided. Where large castings are made from two or more
casts, which are not mixed in a ladle prior to pouring, at
least four sets of pieces are to be taken from each casting.
These are to be cast on at locations as widely separated as
possible.
104 For castings where the method of manufacture has
been specially approved by the Society, the number, posi-
tion and size of test samples are to be agreed with the Soci-
ety having regard to the method of manufacture employed.
105 As an alternative to 101 where a number of small
castings of about the same size is made from one cast and
heat treated in the same furnace charge, a batch testing
procedure may be adopted using separately cast test samples
of suitable dimensions. At least one test sample is to be
provided for each batch of castings. If the weight of the
batch is more than two tonnes, two sets of tests are to be
taken.
106 All test samples are to be suitably marked to identify
them with the castings which they represent.
107 The test samples are to be heat treated together with
the castings which they represent.
I 200 Mechanical testing at room temperature
201 .. One tensile test piece, and when required one set of
thrcidmp-acftesfpieces' and pieces fof'adaitiorial ';iie-
to be taken from each test sample.
202 For castings with a complex shape or heavy wall
thicknesses; or with specially stressed working conditions,
the Society may in each case stipulate special requirements
to strength and relevant tests.
I 300 . Tensile testing at elevated temperature
301 When determination of 0,2 % proof stress at elevated
. temperature is required according to C300, the testing is to
be carried out in compliance with ISO 783. The straining
rate when approaching the stress values is to be controlled
within 0,1 to 0,3 % strain per minute.
The intervals used for estimation of strain rate from meas-
urements of strain is not to exceed 6 seconds.
I 400 Hydraulic pressure testing
401 Where hydraulic pressure testing is required, the test
is to be carried out before fmal acceptance and in the pres-
ence of the surveyor and to his satisfaction, if not otherwise
specified in other parts of the Rules.
I 500 Visual and non-destructive examination
for examination. Suitable methods include pickling, caustic
cleaning, wire brushing, local grinding, shot or sand blast-
nULl::::' IVI 01111J:,) , .... OIIUCIly I.;;J .... U
ing. The surfaces are not to be hammered, peened or treated
in any way which may obscure defects. .
502 Before acceptance all castings are to be presented to
the surveyor for visual examination. Where applicable, this
is to include the examination of internal surfaces. Unless
otherwise agreed, the verification of dimensions is the re-
sponsibility of the manufacturer.
503 Appropriate non-destructive testing is to be carried out
before acceptance. The testing procedures used are to be
agreed with the surveyor. The NDE-operators are to docu-
ment formal training and experience, preferably by being
certified in .accordance with a recognized certification
scheme accepted by the Society.
Important components for structures and machinery are to
be subjected to ultrasonic testing according to a recognized
standard or recommendation and a maker's certificate is to
be issued, stating that such examination has been carried out
and that no indications of internal defects have been found
which may be detrimental in service.
The surveyor may also require magnetic-particle testing
where surfiICe defects may be expected. The testing is to be
carried out using reliable and efficiently maintained equip-
ment. Permanent magnets are not permitted. A.C.- equip-
ment is preferably to be used. The equipment used for MPE
must be able to produce a magnetic rms tangential field
strength of at least 2 leA/m. Testing with the magnetic field
shifted in at least two directions (90
0
turned) on each area
is recommended. When using prods care is to be taken to
avoid bums and hard spots. Prods are to be tipped with lead
or aluminium alloy.
504 Radiographic examination of castings is to be carried
out by the manufacturer at positions as indicated on ap-
proved plans or as otherwise agreed with the surveyor. All
radiographs are to be submitted to the surveyor for exam-
ination and acceptance.
505 Acceptance standards are tobe to the satisfaction of
the Society and in accordance with any requirements of ap-
proved
The surveyor may request to be present during the non- de-
sbnctive examination in order to verify that the agreed pro-
cedure is adhered to.
506 Special requirements concerning non-destructive in-
spection methods, procedures. extent of examination and
accept criteria may be prescribed by the Society where
found necessary in the respective parts of the rules.
507 For propellers and propeller blades the following ap-
ply:
After heat treatment and fmal grinding, the whole surface
of propellers and propeller blades is to be examined by dye
penetrant. At the discretion of the surveyor magnetic parti-
cle examination may be used where appropriate.
Detailed information on inspection, non-destructive exam-
ination and acceptance criteria is outlined in Classification
Note No. 4.2 .Guidance manual for inspection and repair
of steel propellers.
The hub and the blade roots within 0,4r are to be subjected
to ultrasonic inspection. A maker's certificate is to be issued.
stating that such inspection has been carried out with satis-
factory results.
508 For structural members with higher toughness re-
quirements, the following apply:
DB NORSKE VERITAS
Kules tor January HHH;
305 Additional toughness tests such as drop-weight test for
the determination of NDT (Nil Ductility Temperature) and
COD (Crack Openiug Displacement) test may be required
where found appropriate by the Society.
G. Steel Castings for Liquefied Gas Systems
G 100 Types of steel
101 Castings iutended for use iu liquefied gas systems may
be produced from carbon-manganese steel, ferritic Ni-alloy
steels or austenitic, staiuless steel. Other steel types may
be accepted upon consideration iu each case. Lowest per-
missible design temperatures for carbon- manganese steel
and 3,5 % Ni-steel as well as austenitic stainless steel are
given iu Table G 1.
G 200 Chemical composition
201 Carbon-manganese steel castings iutended for weldiug
are to meet the following requirements:
C 0,18% maximum
Si 0,10-0,50 %
Mn 0,70-1,60%
S 0,035% maximum
P 0,035 % maximum
Ni 0,30% maximum
Cr 0,25% maximum
Mo 0,08% maximum
Cu 0,35% maximum
Ni-content up to 0,80% may be approved.
202 The steel is to be fiue graiu treated. The requirements
given iu F204 apply. For carbon-manganese steel not iu-
tended for welding, the carbon content is to be maximum
0,25%.
For alloy steels specification of the chemical composition is
to be submitted for approval.
G 300 Mechanical properties
301 For carbon-manganese steels the values for yield
stress, elongation and reduction of area are to meet the re-
quirements given in Table HI, .Special Quality., corre-
sponding to the specified minimum tensile strength iu
question.
For alloy steels the values for tensile strength, yield stress,
elongation and reduction of area are to comply with ap-
proved specifications.
302 Charpy V -notch impact test (KV) is to be carried out
for all castings. For carbon-manganese steel the average
energy value from three tests is not to be lower than 27 J.
One siugle test may be accepted with a value below the re-
quired average, but not lower than 18 J. For 3,5% Ni-steel
the correspondiug values are 34 J and 23 J and for austenitic
staiuless steel 41 J and 27 J, respectively.
Impact tests are to be carried out at the temperatures speci-
fied iu Table G 1.
Table Gl Steel castings for liquefied gas systems
Type of steel Lowest per- Impact test
missible design temperature
temperature C
C
SoC below design
C-Mn steel -55
temperature, but
not higher than
-20.C 2)
lOoe below design
3,5% Ni-sleel -90
temperature or
-95e, whichever
is the lower ,
Austenitic
-196 -196 1)
stainless steel
1) Impact testing is only required for design temperatures below
-105C.
2) For design temperature ooe and above the following apply:
- Material thickness:
t:520 mJ;l1, test temperature ooe.
t>20 mm, test temperature -2o
o
e.
H. Heat Treatment
H 100 General
101 Heat treatment is to be iu accordance with 200 to 400
and is to comply with the procedure approved for the type
of casting in question.
102 Heat treatment is to be carried out iu properly con-
structed fumaces which are efficiently maiutaiued and have
adequate means for control and recording of temperatures.
The furnace dimensions are to be such as to allow the whole
castiug to be uniformly heated to the necessary temperature
and uniformly cooled. For very large castiugs alternative
methods for heat treatment may be specially considered by
the Society.
103 If a castiug is locally reheated or any straighteniug
.. .. a.J'!.Ib,
sequent stress relieving heat treatment may be required in
order to avoid the possibility of harrnful residual stresses.
H 200 Heat treatment of carbon and
carbon-manganese steel
201 Castiugs are to be supplied in one of the followiug
conditions:
- annealed
- normalized
- normalized and tempered
- quenched and tempered
The tempering temperature is to be not less than 550C.
H 300 Heat treatment of low alloy steel
301 Low alloy steel castiugs are normally to be supplied
iu the quenched and tempered condition.
H 400 Heat treatment of stainless steel
401 Martensitic/ferritic and martensitic/austenitic stainless
steel castings are to be supplied iu the quenched and tem-
pered condition.
402 Austenitic/ferritic and austenitic stainless steel castings
are to be supplied iu the solution annealed and quenched
condition.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
/)
n
)

'\
. ..../

.J

Table Dl Chemical composition and deoxidation practice for Extra High Strength (EHS) steel
Grade
NY A420 NY A460 NY ASOO NY ASSO NY A620 NY A690
NY D420 NV D460 NY DSOO NY DSSO NY D620 NV D690
NV E420 NY E460 NY ESOO NY ESSO NV E620 NV E690
NY F420 NY F460 NY FSOO NV FSSO NY F620 NY F690
Deoxidation Killed and fine grain treated
A grades: D and E grades: F grades:
C maximum (%) 0,21 0,20 0,18
Si (%) 0,10 - 0,55 0,10 - 0,55 0,10 - 0,55
Mn maximum (%) 1,7 1,7 1,6
P maximum (%) 0,035 0,030 0,025
Chemical S maximum (%) 0,035 0;030 0,025
composition B maximum (%) 0,005 0,005 0,005
(ladle analysis) 1) N maximum (%) 0,020 0,020 0,020
Al ac.sol. (%) 0,015 - 0,08 2) 0,015 - 0,08 2) 0,015 - 0,08 2)
AI lotal(%) 0020-0085
2
) 0,020 - 0,085 2) 0,020 - 0,085 2)
Nb (%) 0,02 - 0:05 2) 002-005
2
) 0,02 - 0,05 2)
V (%) 0,04 - 0,10 2)
2)
0,04 - 0,10 2) 0,04.- 0,10
Ti maximum (%) 0,02 0,02 0,02
1) The limits given in the table are regarded as over-all limits. The chemical composition is to comply with the approved specification of the steel grade
in question.
Table D2 Condition of supply for Extra High Strength (EHS) steel
Grade Grain Thickness, t Condition of supply 1) 2)
refining elements mm
NY A420, NY A460,
NY ASOO, NY ASSO, Any 1';150 N, QT, TM
NY A620, NY A690
NY D420, NY D460,
NY DSOO, NY DSSO, Any 1';150 N, QT, TM
NY D620, NY D690
NY E420, NY E460,
NY E500, NV ESSO, Any 1';150 N, QT, TM
NY E620, NY E690
NY F420, NY F460,
NY FSOO, NY FSSO, Any 1';150 N, QT, TM
NY F620, NY F690
1) Condition of supply: N, Normalized.
-" .. , ..
... .. , .. , .. ..
TM: Therm0:Fechanically controlled processed (fMCP)
2) For specified yield stress above 550 N/mm only quenching and tempering is applicable.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
Table'D3 Mechanical properties for Extra High Strength (EHS) steel
Steel grad Yield stress Tensile strength Elongation Test temperature Average impact energy
R 1)
Rm . AS
(OC)
J minimwn
.ef!
(Nlmm
2
) mlnlmton mlmmum
1:5.150
(Nlmm2)
(%)
Longitudinal Transverse
NY A420 0
NYD420
420 530 - 680 18
-20
42 28
NY E420 -40
NY F420 -60
NY A460 0
NY D460
460 570 - 720 17
-20
46 31
NV E460 -40
NV F460 -60
NV ASOO 0
NV D500
500 610 - 770. 16
-20
50 33
NV E500 -40
NY F500 -60
NY AS50 0
NY D550
550 670 - 830 16
-20
55 37
NY E550 -40
NV F550 -60
NY A620 0
NV D620
620 720 - 890 15
-20
62 41
NV E620 -40
,
NV F620 -60
NV A690 0
NV D690
690 770 - 940 14
-20
69 46
NV E690 -40
NV F690 -60 I
1) Where the yield stress does not mark in the tensile test the 0,2% proof stress RpO.2 is applicable.
values:
Thickness. mm 1 <10 10<1<15 15 <I <20
Elongation
A420, D420, E420 & F420 11 13 14
A460, D460, E460 & F460 11 12 13
ASOO, D599, E500 & F500 10 11 12
AS50, D550, E550 & F550 10 11. 12
A620, D620, E620 & F620 9 11 12
A690, D690, E690 & F690 9 10 11
E. Testing
E 100 Test material
101 All material in a test unit presented for acceptance
tests is to be of the same product form e.g. plates, flats,
sections, etc. from the same cast and in the same condition
of supply.
The test samples are to be fully representative of the material
and, where appropriate, are not to be cut from the material
until heat treatment has been completed.
The test pieces are not to be separately heat treated in any
way.
102 Unless otherwise agreed, the test samples for tensile
and impact test pieces are to be taken from the following
positions:
- Plates and flats with a width <! 600 mm:
The test samples are to be taken from one end at a posi-
tion approximately midway between the axis in the di-
rection of rolling and the edge of the rolled product (see
Fig.la). Unless otherwise agreed the tensile test pieces
are to be prepared with their longitudinal axes transverse
to the fmal direction of rolling.
- Flats with a width < 600 mm, bulb flats and other sec-
tions:
20<1 <25 25 <I <40 40<1 <50 50<1 <150
15 16 17 18
14 15 16 17
13 14 15 16
I
13 14 15 16
12 13 14 15
11 12 13 14
tion approximately one third. from the outer edge (see
ie) or in 'the ease of small sections;
as near as possible to this position. In the case of chan-
nels, beams or bulb angles, the test samples may alter-
natively be taken from a position approximately one
quarter of the width from the web centre line or axis (see
Fig. Id). The tensile test pieces may be prepared with
their longitudinal axes either parallel or transverse to the
fmal direction of rolling.
For small sizes, the tensile test pieces may consist of a
suitable length of the full cross-section of the product.
- Bars and other similar products:
The test samples are to be taken so that the longitudinal
axes of the test pieces are parallel to the direction of
rolling and are as near as possible to the following:
- for non-cylindrical sections, at one third of the half
. diagonal from the outside (see Fig. Ie),
- for cylindrical sections, at one third of the radius from
the outside (see Fig. It).
103 Samples for testing of through thickness properties are
to be agreed upon by the Society.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
)
:J
J
'-
:)
J

E 200 Chain cable accessories and anchor shackles
201 The chemical composition of steel for cast accessories
and anchor shackle bodies are to comply with relevant parts
ofB.
202 Mechanical properties including impact toughness
properties for cast chain cable accessories are to comply
with the requirements given for the chain cable for which
they are intended.
203 Mechanical properties for cast anchor shackles are to
comply with the relevant requirements given in B, .Special
Quality., except that impact toughness properties are to
comply with the requirements given for chain cable materi-
als of corresponding strength level.
204 Chain cable accessories are to be subjected to break-
ing test according to Pt.3 Ch.3 Sec.3.
F. Castings for Structural Members with
Higher Toughness Requirements
F 100 Types of steel
101 Structural members for which higher toughness prop-
erties are required may be produced from carbon-manganese
steel or alloy steel.
F 200 Chemical composition
201 Chemical composition of the material is to be in ac-
cordance with the specification approved for the type of
components in question.
202 For carbon-manganese steel the chemical composition
is to comply with the following overall limits:
Carbon 0,24% maximum
Silicon 0,60% maximum
Manganese 1,60% maximum
Sulphur 0,035% maximum
Phosphorus 0,035% maximum
Residual elements:
Copper 0,30% maximum
Chromium 0,25% maximum
Nickel 0,40% maximum
Molybdenum 0,15% maximum'
The total content of the residual elements mentioned above
is not to exceed O,SO%.
For castings intended for welding the carbon content is
normally not to exceed O,IS%.
A maximum carbon equivalent may be required using the
following formula:
C =C+ Mn + Cr+Mo+V + Ni+Cu (%)
eq 6 5 15'
203 For alloy steel the composition is to be appropriate for
the type of steel, dimensions and the requirements on me-
chanical and toughness properties of the castings.
204 Carbon-manganese steel and normally also low alloy
steel is to be fine grain treated with aluminium, niobium,
vanadium or other suitable grain rerming elements, either
singly or in any combination. When used singly the content
of AI, Nb or V is normally to be within the following limits:
AI, acid soluble
Nb
0,015-0,OS %
0,02-0,05%

Page 57
V 0,05-0,10%
When used in combination, the specified mmlmum and
maximum content of each element is not applicable.
When aluminium is' used singly as grain refining element,
the product of aluminium and nitrogen is to be in compliance
with the following formula:
5
(% Al
acid
soluble' % N) 10 :-; 60
The content of grain refming elements and N is to be stated
in the certificate.
F 300 Mechanical properties
301 Mechanical properties are to comply with the specifi-
cation approved for the material and are to meet the re-
quirements given for the component in question.
302 For carbon-manganese steel with minimum specified
yield stress not exceeding 320 N/mm2, elongation and re-
duction of area are to comply with the requirements given
in Table Fl.
Table Fl Requirements to mechanical properties
Specified minimum 1) Elongation Reduction of
yield stress
AS
area Z
2
% minimum % minimum
Reh or N/mm
220 26 45
240 24 40
260 22 40
300 20 35
320 18 35
1) For intermediate values of specified minimum yield stress the
values for elongation and reduction of area are found by in-
terpolation.
303 For alloy steel the minimum specified yield stress is
not to exceed 690 N/mm
2
.
tYll.lll.mulfi'-ilnpaet-energy is"te--be in aocordanoo .with-
Table F2 for the specified minimum yield stress in question.
Requirements on test temperature will be given in each sep-
arate case dependent all design temperature, application ca-
tegory and yield stress and thickness of the materials.
Generally the impact toughness is to be the same as required
for rolled materials for similar application.
For structural members not intended for welding and mem-
bers subjected to compressive andlor low tensile stresses,
modified requirements may be considered.
Table F2 Requirements to minimum impact energy
Minimum yield stress A verage Impact -energy
Reh
KV minimum 1)
J
Nlmm
2
<270 27
>270
31
<310
>310
34
<350
>350 40
1) One individual value may be less than the required average
value but not less than 70% of this average value.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
203 Types of alloy steel acceptable for castings intended
for use in boilers, pressure vessels and piping systems are
listed in Table C 1.
The chemical compositions stated in the table are typical for
.cast steel of these types.
When it is proposed to use steel grades of the types listed in
Table Cl the complete chemical composition is to comply
with a relevant, recognized standard.
Table Cl Types of alloy steel.
Typical chemical composition
Type of steel
Typical composition, %
C Cr Mo V
0,5 Me 0,1510,23 <0,30 0,35/0,65
lCr 0,5 Me 0,1510,20 1,0/1,5 0,45/0,65
2,5Cr 1 Me 0,1510,20 2,012,75 0,9/1,2
CrMeV 0,15/0,20 1,2/1,5 0,9/1,1 0,20/0,30
301 Carbon and carbon-manganese steel castings are to be
supplied to specified minimum tensile strength not lower
than 400 N/mm
2
and not exceeding 520 N/mm
2
Mechanical properties at room temperature are to comply
with the requirements given in Table B 1 for .Special
Quality>.
302 Alloy steel castings are to be supplied to mechanical
properties at room temperature in compliance with specifi-
cations given in the standard referred to.
303 When the casting is intended for use at elevated tem-
perature, the mechanical properties for design purposes are
to be submitted for consideration.
Where the 0,2 % proof stress at elevated temperature is the
limiting design criterion, the design value is to be verified
by a tensile test at design temperature according to 1300.
D. Propeller Steel Castings
D 100 Types of steel
101 Propeller and propeller blade castings may be pro-
duced from carbon or carbon-manganese steel, low alloy
steel or stainless steel.
102 For carbon and carbon-manganese steel the carbon
content is to be maximum 0,23 %. In other respects the re-
quirements given in B200 for .castings for general
applications> apply.
103 For low alloy steels and stainless steels particulars of
chemical composition are to be submitted to the Society for
approval.
Guidance note:
Examples of typical chemical compositions of low alloy steel and
stainless steels are given in .Classification Notes No. 4.2.
--e-n-d---o-f--G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e-n-o-t-e-
201 Test coupons for mechanical tests are to be cast on the
hub or the flange of the propeller or the blade casting, re-
spectively.
202 Mechanical properties of carbon and carbon- manga-
nese steel are to comply with the requirements given in Ta-
ble Bl for .Special Quality>. Castings for ships with ICE
class notation, except ICE C, are to be impact tested as fol-
lows:
A set of three Charpy V-notch tests are to be made on ma-
terial from each casting. The testing is to be performed at
_10C and the average energy value is to be not less than
20 J.
203 Low alloy and stainless steel castings are to meet the
requirements for mechanical properties given in Table D 1.
Table Dl Low alloy steel and stainless steel for propellers. Mechanical properties
Type of steel Tensile strength Yield stress Elongation Reduction of Impact energy
Rm

areaZ KV
Nlmm2 %
..
minimum
Jlii';'m
2
minimulli minimum' J miuimulll -
minimum
Low alloy steel 540 345 20 45
20 1)
Martensitic/ferritic
590 390 18 40
20
2
)
stainless steel 13/1
735 590 15 45
20 1)
stainless steel 13/4-6
786 590 15 45
20 1)
I
Austenitic/ferritic
590 370 18 35
20 1)
Austenitic stainless
440 175 35 50 -
steel 18/8
1) Castings for ships for general service and ships with additional class notations ICE C are to be impact tested at room temperature
(18C to 25C).
Castings for ships with other ICE class notations are to be impact tested at -10C.
2) Castings for ships for general service and ships with additional class notations ICE C are to be impact tested at OC.
E. Castings for Chain Cable Links, Accessories
and Anchor Shackles
E 100 Chain cable links
101 Types of steel and manufacturing methods for cast
chain cable links are subject to special approval by the So-
ciety.
Tests to demonstrate the soundness and the properties of the
castings will be required.
102 Mechanical properties including impact toughness are
to comply with the requirements given for rolled bars of
corresponding steel grades according to Sec.6.
DEY NORSKE VERITAS
(a) Plates and flats
C)
/J
'-
'::J
(b) Angles

(e) UneqUl11 angles

8
I !
\ I%!fW
... I t
1
"4
'J
'8
-IJi
,
(d) Channels and beaDlll
1
"3
(e) Bulb flats
radius-l-I
(I) Bars
Fig. 1
Position of test specimen
201 The dimensions of the tensile test pieces are to be in
accordance with Ch.l Sec.2. Generally for plates, wide flats
and sections flat test pieces of full product thickness are to
be used. Round test pieces may be used for bars and other
similar products. Alternatively for small sizes of bars, etc.
test pieces may consist of a suitable length of the full cross
section of the product.
202 For each test unit presented one tensile test is to be
made from one sample product unless the weight of fmished
material is greater than 50 tonnes in which case one extra
test is to be made from a different sample product from each
50 tonnes or fraction thereof. Additional tests are to be
made for every variation of 10 mm in the thickness or di-
ameter of products from the same test unit. For sections, the
thickness to be considered is the thickness of the product at
the point at which samples are taken for mechanical tests.
203 For extra high strength steels each tensile test is only
to represent material from the same heat treatment batch.
204 When no distinct yield is observed during tensile test-
ing, the stress at 0,2 % non-proportional elongation is to be
determined .
205 For thermo-mechanically controlled processed steel,
accelerated cooled, additional testing in the simulated stress
relieved condition may be required.
DEY NORSKE VERITAS
Page 10 - Pt.2 Ch.2 Sec. 1
206 The procedures used for all tensile tests are to be in
accordance with the requirements of Ch.1.
301 The impact test pieces are to be of the Charpy V -notch
type cut with their longitudinal axes either parallel or trans-
verse to the final direction of rolling of the material. Gen-
erally only longitudinal test pieces need be prepared and
tested, except for extra high strength steel plates and wide
flats over 600 mm where the pieces are to be taken with their
axes transverse to the main rolling direction. The steel works
is, however, to guarantee that the impact values in both di-
rections satisfy the requirements of this section.
The notch is to be cut in a face of the test pieces which was
originally perpendicular to ,the rolled surface. The position
of the notch is not to be nearer than 25 mm to a flame cut
or sheared edge.
302 Except where otherwise specified or specially agreed
by the Society, the maximum size of a test unit is to be as
specified in Table El. One set of three test pieces is to be
taken from one of the thickest products of each specified test
unit or part thereof.
303 For thicknesses equal to or below 50mm, the impact
test pieces are to be taken not less than 2mm below the sur-
. face. For plate thicknesses exceeding 50 mm, impact test
pieces are to be situated so that the distance between the
centre-line of the test piece and the plate surface is not less
than 1/4 of the plate thickness.
Table EI Extent of impact testing at delivery
304 Where it is impossible to use a standard impact test
piece of 10xi0 mm, the larger of the following pieces is to
be used: IOx7,5 mm or IOx5 mm. The impact values are
then reduced to respectively 5/6 and 2/3 of the required va-
lues of the standard test piece.
305 The average energy value from each set of three im-
pact tests and the single values are to comply with the ap-
propriate requirements of tables B3, C4 and D3
respectively. Further, only one individual value within each
set may be below the specified minimum average value, but
not lower than 70% of this value.
306 The procedures used for all impact tests are to be in
accordance with the requirements of Ch.l.
401 Steel specified with improved through thickness pro-
perties (Z-steel) is to be tested by tensile pieces taken in the
thickness direction of the product. The test sampling is to
be performed as follows:
Plates: One set of three pieces is to be taken from one
end of each rolled length.
Wide flats: Products of the same cast, thickness and heat
treatment are to be divided into test units of 10
t, or. where their thickness exceeds 25mm, of
20 t. From one sample product of each test unit
at least one set of test pieces is to be taken.
Thickness I t
Test unit
Strength range Grades
maximum
mm
Plate Sectionr
1:550 Not required
A
50<1<150 501
Not required
1:525 Not required
NS-steel
B
50<1<150
Not
501 2) 50(
2
)
D 1:5150
50 1 I) 2) 50(
2
)
E 1:5150 Each piece
25(
3
)
A 1:5150
Max. 50 I) 2) 50(
2
)
-
. D ... .. .... . . 1.o:15Q ..... ' .. M" 'ill t I) '-I 5QI
Z
)
.
HS-steel
Each piece
25(
3
)
E 1<150
F 1:5150 Each piece
25(
3
)
D 1<150 Each piece Each piece
EHS-steel E 1:5150 Each piece Each piece
F 1:5150 Each piece Each piece
1) When steel plates over 50 mm in thickness is supplied in the controlled rolled (CR) condition, the frequency of impact test is to be made for each
batch of 25 tonnes or fraction thereof. .
2) When, subject to special approval of the Society, material is supplied in the as rolled CAR) condition, the frequency of impact tests is to be increased
to one set from each batch of 25 toones or fraction thereof. Similarly grade A steel over 50 mm in thickness may be supplied in the as rolled condi-
tion. In such case one set of three Charpy V -notch test specimens is to be taken from each batch of 50 tonnes or fraction thereof.
3) When subject to special approval by the Society, sections other than grades E40 and F40 are supplied in the as rolled condition, one set of impact tests
is to be taken from each batch of 15 tonnes or fraction thereof.
402 When not otherwise agreed, the minimum average
reduction of area of each set of three specimens is to be at
least 25 %. Only one individual value within each set may
be below 25 % but not less than 20 %.
403 When a set of tests fails to meet the requirements in
402 three additional test pieces may be taken from the same
test sample for retesting and evaluated together with the
previous test results as one set of six test pieces. The average
reduction of area is not to be less than 25 %. Totally, two
individual values may be less than 25 % but only one value
may be less than 20 %.
404 Z-steel is to be subjected to ultrasonic examination
according to an appropriate standard, with established crite-
ria accepted by the Society ..
405 Steel processed to obtain improved through thickness
properties and complying with the requirements given in
402, 403 and 404 are to be marked with the suffIx Z in ad-
dition to the material grade designation, e.g. NVD Z, NVE
36 Z.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
:J o
:J :J

o
201 For carbon and carbon-manganese steel castings
which are intended for parts of a welded structure or fabri-
cation, the carbon content is normally not to exceed 0,23 %.
For carbon and carbon-manganese steel castings intended
for use in machinery construction without any welding the
carbon content is normally not to exceed 0,40%. In other
respects the chemical composition is to comply with the
following overall limits:
Silicon
Manganese.
Sulphur
Phosphorus
0,60% maximum
0,50-1,60%
0,040% maximum
0,040% maximum
202 Carbon and carbon-manganese steel may be fme grain
treated with aluminium.
In that case the content of AI (acid soluble) is not to exceed
0,08 % and the product of aluminium and nitrogen content
is to be in compliance with the following formula:
5
(% Alacidsoluble'% N) 10 ,.; 60
Other grain refining elements than aluminium may be agreed
upon.
203 The content of grain refining elements is to be re-
ported in the ladle analysis.
Pt.2 Ch.2 Sei:. 7 Page 55
Determination of the N-content may be required.
301 Table B I gives the requirements for mechanical pro-
perties of carbon and carbon-manganese steel for general
application. Specifications are given for two quality levels,
normal quality and special quality, and the castings are to
be supplied to the quality level required in the relevant rules
for design and construction or otherwise specified.
302 Table B I gives the minimum requirements for yield
stress, elongation. reduction of area and impact test energy
values corresponding to different strength levels. It is not
intended that these should necessarily be regarded as specific
grades. The strength levels have' been given in multiples of
40 N/mm
2
to facilitate interpolation for intermediate values
of specified minimum tensile strength.
303 Castings which are intended for parts of a welded
structure or fabrications are to be supplied to specified min-
imum tensile strength not exceeding 520 N/mm
2
.
Castings not intended for welding'may normally be supplied
to any specified minimum tensile strength selected within the
general limits in Table Bl.
In any case however, the specified minimum tensile strength
for the casting is subject to additional requirements of the
relevant rules for design and construction and other relevant
requirements, if any.
Table HI Carbon and carbon-manganese steel castings for general application.
Mechanical at room temperature
Quality Specified 1) minimum Yield stress Elongation Reduction of Charpy V-notch
level tensile strength Rm
Reh
16
area Z average energy
% KV
Nlmm2
Nlmm
2
minimwn minimum J minimum 2)
minimum
400 200 25 40
440 220 22 30
Normal 480 240 20 27
quality 520 260 18 25
560 300 15 20
600 320 13 20
400 200 28 45 32
440 220 26 45 28
.
'specIal 4HIi
240 .
.
<\0' 26
, .. , .
quality 520 260 22 40 20
560 300 20 35 18
600 320 18 35 15
1) For intermediate values of specified minimum tensile strength, the minimum values for yield stress, elongation, reduction of area and
impact energy may be obtained by interpolation.
2) For cast sternframes, rudder horns and rudder members the impact test temperature is to be OC.
C. Castings for Boilers, Unfired Pressure Ves-
sels and Piping Systems
C 100 Types of steel
101 The requirements given in C apply to carbon and
carbon-manganese steel as well as alloy steel intended for
use in boilers, unfired pressure vessels and piping systems.
Any additional requirements given for specific components
by the relevant rules for design and construction are also to
be complied with.
201 For carbon and carbon-manganese steel castings the
chemical composition of ladle samples is to comply with the
following specifications:
C 0,24% maximum
Si 0,30-0,60%
Mn 1,60% maximum
P 0,040% maximum
S 0,040% maximum
202 Carbon and carbon -manganese steel may be fine grain
In that case the content of Al (acid soluble) is not to exceed
5
(% Al
acid
soluble' % N) 10 ,.; 60
Other grain refming elements than aluminium may be agreed
upon.
The content of grain refming elements is to be stated in the
certificate. Determination of N-content may be required.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
SECTION 7
STEEL CASTINGS
Contents
A. General
A 100 Scope
A 200 Manufacture
B. Castings for General Applications
B 100 Types of steel
C. Castings for Boilers, Unfired Pressure Vessels and Piping
Systems
E. Castings for Chain Cable Links, Accessories and Anchor
Shackles
F. Castings for Structural Members with Higher Toughness
Requirements
H. Heat Treatment
H 100 General
-11:- 200 IItAt litalmcnl tlf-carbmr'iiml CD.Jbvll'-'miiligancsc-st;:.d-
H 300 Heat treatment of low alloy steel.
I. Testing
I 100 Test samples
I 300 Tensile testing at elevated temperature
K 100 General
A. General
A 100 Scope
101 This Section specifies the requirements for steel cast-
ings. The relevant parts of Section 1 are also applicable.
A 200 Manufacture
201 Castings are to be made at foundries approved by the
Society. The steel used is to be manufactured in accordance
with the requirements of Sec.l A300.
202 All flame cutting, scarfmg or arc-air gouging to re-
move surplus metal is to be undertaken in accordance with
recognized good practice and is to be carried out before the
final heat treatment. Preheating is to be employed where
necessitated by the chemical composition andlor thickness
of the casting. The affected areas are to be either machined
or ground smooth.
203 Where castings of the same type are produced in reg-
ular quantities, the manufacturer is to make any tests neces-
sary to prove the quality of the prototype castings, and is
also to make periodical examinations to verify the continued
efficiency of the manufacturing technique. The surveyor is
to be given the opportunity to wituess these tests.
204 Where two or more castings are joined by welding to
form a composite item, details of the proposed welding
procedure are to be submitted for approval. Welding ap-
proval procedure tests may be required.
301 All castings are to be free from surface or internal
defects which would be prejudicial to their proper applica-
tion in service. The surface fmish is to be in accordance with
good practice and any specific requirements of the approved
plan.
302 The surfaces are not to be hammered, peened nor
treated in any way which may obscure defects.
401 All castings are to be made from killed steel. The
chemical composition of the ladle sample is to be within the
limits given in the relevant Section of this Chapter. Where
general overall limits are specified, the chemical composi-
tion is to be appropriate for the type of steel, dimensions and
required ffiecliiini6iiproperties "fiJi" castings: .. .
402 Except where otherwise specified, suitable grain re-
fining elements may be used at the discretion of the man-
ufacturer. The content of such elements is to be reported in
the ladle analysis.
101 The requirements given in B apply to carbon and
carbon-manganese steel for castings intended for use in
vessel structures and machinery construction where design
and acceptance tests are related to mechanical properties at
ambient temperature and which are not covered by require-
ments given elsewhere in this Section.
be complied with.
102 The use of alloy steel castings in vessel structures and
machinery construction will be subject to consideration in
each case. Where the use of alloy steel is proposed, detailed
specifications are to be submitted for examination and ap-
proval.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
)
(-)
/""""'
) ,J
)
/.J
)
i)
501 Surface inspection and checking of dimensions are the
responsibility of the manufacturer who has to verify that the
requirements to quality and dimensional tolerances are ful-
filled prior to despatch. The manufacturer is also responsible
for compliance with the general requirements concerning
freedom from harmful internal defects.
Acceptance by the Society of material which later is found
to be defective is not to absolve the manufacturer from this
responsibility.
502 Plates and other products of extra high strength steel
are to be subjected to a thorougi), visual inspection of both
sides by the manufacturer to ensure freedom from defects
and harmful imperfections. Examination by means of suit-
able non-destructive methods such as magnetic particle
andlor ultrasonic examination may be required.
503 The maximum permissible under thickness tolerance
for hull structural plates, wide flats and welded profiles is
-0.3mm.
The permissible under thickness tolerance for hull structural
rolled profiles is to be in accordance with the requirements
of a recognized international or national standard.
The under thickness tolerance acceptable for classification
is to be considered as the lower limit of a plus-minus range
of thickness tolerance which could be found in the normal
production of a conventional rolling mill manufacturing
material, on average, to the nominal-thickness.
The shipbuilder and shipowner may mutually agree in indi-
vidual cases whether, for commercial reasons, they wish to
s"ecify a more stringent under thickness tolerance than
gIven.
The thickness is to be measured at random locations whose
distance from a longitudinal edge is to be at least 10 mm.
Local surface depressions resulting from imperfections and
ground areas resulting from the eliminations of defects may
be disregarded provided the imperfections or grinding are
in accordance with accepted national or international stand-
ards. .
Hules tor ::snips, .January I f ~ O
Pt.2 Ch.2 Sec.1 . - Page 11
504 For seamless structural tubes the tolerances for outer
diameter, wall thickness and out-of roundness are to be de-
fined and agreed upon prior to starting the production.
F. Repairs
F 100 . Surface defects
101 Surface defects in structural steel may be removed by
local grinding, provided that:
- the thickness is in no place reduced to less than 93 % of
the nominal thickness, but in no case by more than 3 mm
- each single ground area does not exceed 0,25m and
- all ground areas do not exceed 2 % of the total surface in
question.
Ground areas lying in a distance less than their average
breadth to each other are to be regarded as one single area.
The repairs are to be agreed with the surveyor in each case,
andare to be carried out under the surveyor's supervision
102 Surface defects which cannot be dealt with as above
may, subject to the surveyor's consent, be repaired by
chipping or grinding followed by welding under his super-
vision, provided the requirements given below are complied
with.
- after removal of the defect, and before welding, the
thickness of the piece is in no place to be reduced by
more than 20 %. The welding is to be carried out ac-
cording to an approved procedure with approved elec-
trodes. The weld is to be ground smooth to the correct
nominal thickness
- the weld repair is to be subjected to adequate non-des-
tructive examination
- the piece is normally to be subjected to adequate heat
treatment subsequent to the fmal grinding. In general the
heat treatment is to be the same as prescribed for the steel
grade in question.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
Hules tor :snips, January -I ::t::tb
SECTION 2
ROLLED STEEL FOR BOILERS, PR,ESSURE VESSELS AND SPECIAL APPLI-
CATIONS
Contents
A. General
A 100 Scope
B. Steel for Boilers and Pressure Vessels
B 100 Steel grades
C. Steel for Low Temperature Service
C 100 Steel grades
D. Stainless Steel
D 100 Steel grades
D 500 Intercrystalline corrosion tests
E. Testing
E 100 General
E 200 Tensile testing at ambient temperature
E 300 Tensile testing at elevated temperature
E 500 Drop weight testing
E 700 Intercrystalline corrosion testing
F. Inspection, Dimensional Tolerances and Surface Condition
F 100 Inspection
F 200 Tolerances
F 300 Surface condition and rectification of defects
A. General
A 100 Scope
101 This section specifies the requirements for rolled steel
intended for use in the construction of boilers and pressure
vessels and of tanks and process equipment for low temper-
ature service. Mechanical properties at elevated temper-
atures for design purposes are stated. The rules also apply
to rolled austenitic and ferritic-austenitic (duplex) stainless
steel.
201 The steel is to be manufactured by an electric or one
cast shib to plate is to be minimum 5 to 1 unless otherwise
B 100 Steel grades
101 Requirements regarding carbon and carbon- manga-
nese steels are specified for the as rolled condition in thick-
nesses up to 25 mm and for the normalized condition in
thicknesses up to 100 mm. Requirements are also given for
alloy steels in thicknesses up to 100 mm.
As alternatives to the steel grades specified below, materials
complying with relevant standards may be accepted, subject
to approval in each case.
102 The designations for carbon and carbon-manganese
steel grades are built up as follows:
The letters NV are followed by three figures which stand for
the specified minimum tensile strength in N/mm
2
.
Further, there is a single figure referring to the impact test
temperature:
The figures 0,1 and 2 mean impact testing at + 20, O and
-20C respectively.
The suffix letters are symbolizing the heat treatment and
deoxidation practice. The suffix A means as rolled, N means ')
normalized, QT means quenched and tempered and F means .
fine grain treated steels.
Where controlled rolling is used as a substitute for normal-
izing, the suffix CR is to be used instead of N.
Example: J
NV 360-lFN means a steel grade with specified minimum
tensile strength 360 N/mm
2
impact tested at OC, fine grain
treated and normalized.
201 The chemical composition is to' satisfy the require-
ments specified in Table B 1 for carbon and carbon- manga-
nese steels and in Table B2 for alloy steels.
202 The content of all elements given in the specification
including grain refining elements are to be determined and
entered on the certificate. The content of residual elements
is to be checked by random tests as agreed upon with the
surveyor.
203 Where Al is replaced by other grain refining elements,
the minimum contents of such elements are to be:
'- Nb;miriu,u2 %
- V, min 0,05 %.
204 For carbon and carbon-manganese steels, the carbon
equivalent is to be calculated from the ladle analysis using
the following formula when applicable:
C
=C+ Mn Cr+Mo+V + Ni+Cu ("')
eq 6 + 5 15 70
301 The mechanical properties of the material are to com-
ply with the requirements specified in the following tables:
Table B3: Carbon and carbon-manganese steels, as rolled
Table B4: Carbon and carbon-manganese steels, normalized
or controlled rolled
Table B5: Alloy steels
The values for tensile strength, yield stress and elongation
specified in the tables refer to testing at room temperature.
302 Values for lower yield stress or 0,2 % proof stress at
elevated temperatures are given in Table B6. The values are
intended for design purposes and verification is not required.
If the material is produced in compliance with a recognized
standard where !lie lower yield stress or 0,2 % proof stress
at elevated temperatures is higher than stated in Table B6,
these higher values will be accepted provided tensile test at
:)
.J
DEI NORSKE VERITAS
11U' ... .,IUl . . ; J 1 1 l ~ . uOIlUClly I"'.;.IV
Pt.2 Ch.2 Sec.6. - Page 53
Bars having diameter of up to and including 40 mm com- APPROX 1/3
bined into bundles, may be marked on permanently affixed r
NOTCH
labels.
Fig. 1
Position of impact test piece
.'.:]
:]
'.J
.J
DEI NORSKE VERITAS
SECTION 6
BARS FOR CHAIN CABLES
Contents
A. General
A 100 Scopes
A 200 Steel grades
A 300 Chemical
A. 500 Heat treatment
B. Testing
B 100 Number of tests
C. Identification of Materials
C 100 Marking
A. General
A 100 Scopes
101 This Section specifies the requirements for steel in-
tended for chain cable links and accessories (shackles,
swivels etc.).
Table Al Material requirements for bars for chain cables
Grade NVK1
Deoxidation and fme-grain treatment Killed
Heat treatment Nonnalized 3)
Chemical Silicon % 0,15-0,35
composition
Phosphorus % Maximum 0,040
Sulphur % Maximum 0,040
Nitrogen
% 1)
Maximum 0,009
Mechanical Yield stress ReH or proof
properties stress RpO.2 N/mm2
stn:.ugth, Rm .
N/mm
2
Elongation (La = 5d) As % Minimum 25
Reduction of area, Z %
A 200 Steel grades
201 Three steel grades are specified:
NV Kl, NV K2, NV K3.
301 The chemical composition of ladle samples is to com-
ply with the approved specification. For the steel grades
NVK 1, NVK 2 and NVK 3 the overall limits given in Table
Al apply.
401 The mechanical properties are to comply with the re-
quirements given in Table Ai.
501 The requirements for heat treatment given in Table
Al apply to fmished chain cable and accessories. Material
intended for such application may be delivered without the
heat treatment stipulated.
NVK2 NVK3
Killed, fine-grain treated Killed, fme-grain treated
with Al
Normalized Quenched and tempered,
normalized or normalized
and tempered 2)
0,15-0,55 0,15-0,55
Maximum 0,035 Maximum 0,035
Minimum 295 Minimum 410
Minimum 690
Minimum 40
Impact values (KV), as an Minimum 27; 20C Minimum 27; OC Minimum 60; OC
average of 3 tests, J
1) If Ai. or another strong nitride fonner is in sufficient quantity, a N-content of maximum 0,015% is accepted.
2) When chain cables are delivered as normalized, or normalized and tempered, the steel is to be fine-grain treated with AI. For such
material a maximum content of 0,015% N- is accepted.
3) Chain cables with diameters up to 50 mm may be supplied without heat treatment after welding, provided that the links are produced
by hot forming and that a test is carried out on one piece from each 27,5 m length.
B. Testing
101 One set of tests (1 tensile and 3 impact test pieces) is
to be taken for every 50 ton or fraction thereof of bar ma-
terial from the Same cast. The tests are to be taken from the
bar of the largest diameter.
Test material from bars is to be heat-treated in full diameter
and in a manner simulating the treatment applied to the fm-
ished cable.
201 The impact test pieces are to be cut as shown in Fig .1.
The tests are to satisfy the requirements stated in Table Ai.
C 100 Marking
101 The minimum markings required for the bars are the
manufacturer's brand mark, the steel grade and an abbrevi-
ated symbol of the cast.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
)
)
)
-\
j
()
J
]
)
elevated temperature in compliance with E300 is carried out
with satisfactory results.
The tensile test at elevated temperature may be dispensed
with if the steelmaker can demonstrate to the satisfaction of
the Society that the specified minimum mechanical proper-
ties at elevated temperature can be consistently obtained in
the running production.
303 Estimated average values for stress to rupture in 100
000 and 200 000 hours are given in Table B7 for design
purposes.
HUles TOr ;:,mps, .January 1:;':;'0
401 The materials are to be supplied in the heat treatment
conditions stated in Table B8, except that materials which
are to be heat treated after hot or cold forming may be sup-
plied in the as rolled condition, subject to the customer's
consent. In such cases heat treatment and subsequent me-
chanical testing is to be carried out after forming.
402 The designation of controlled rolled- and thermo-me-
chanically treated steel grades are to be given the suffix CR
and TM respectively instead of N.
Table Bl Carbon and carbon-manganese steels for boilers and pressure vessels. Chemical composition
Chemical composition, %
I
Grade
C
p
S N Residual
Deoxidation
maxi- Si Mn maxi- maxi-
Alae.soL
maxi- elements,
mwn mwn mwn mum maximum
NY 360-0A, -ON 0,17
0,40- Z)
0,035 0,030.
0,009 1)
6)
Semikilled
1,00 or killed I
NY 360-1 FN 0,17
0,40- Z)
0,035 0,030
0,Q15-
0,015
6)
Killed
1,00 0,080 fine grained
NY 410-0A, -ON 0,20
0,50-
0,035 0,030
0,009 1)
6)
Semikilled
1,30 or killed
NY 410-1 FN 0,20
0,50-
0,035 0,030
0,015- s)
0,015
6)
Killed
NY 460-0A, -ON 0,20
0,60- JJ
0,035 0,030
0,009 1)
6)
Semikilled
1,40 or killed
NY 460-1 FN 0,20
4
)
0,60- J)
0,035 0,030
0,015- 0)
0,Q15
6)
Killed
1,40 0,080 fme grained
NY 49O-ON 0,20
4
)
0,10- 0,90-
0,035 0,030
0,009 1)
6)
Killed
0,50 1,60
NY 490-I FN 0,20
4
)
0,10- 0,90-
0,035 0,030
0,015-
0,015
6)
Killed
0,50 1,60 0,080 fine grained
NY 510-1 FN 0,22
0,10- 1,00-
0,035 0,030
0,015-
0,015
6)
Killed
0,60 1,60 0,080 fine grained
I) For electric furnace steel, maximum 0,012.
2) For thicknesses exceeding 40 mm, Mn = 0,40--1,20%.
3) Jfelevated temperature properties of Table B7 are specified, Mn content is to be 0,80-1,40%.
4) For thicknesses >30 mm and :::;100 mm, emu 0,22%.
5) Aluminium may be replaced by other grain refining elements.
6) Cr 0,20
Cu 0,35
Ni 0,40
. Mu 0;00 -
Total 0,70
Table B2 Alloy steels for boilers and pressure vessels. Chemical composition
Grade p
S Altot
Residual
C Si Mn Cr Mo elements,
maximum maximum maximwn
maximum
NV 0,3 Mo
0,12- 0,15- 0,50-
0,035 0,030 0,012 <0,30
0,25-
0,20 0,35 0,80 0,35
NY 1 Cr 0,5 Mo
0,10- 0,15- 0,40-
0,Q35 0,030 0,020
0,70- 0,40- Cu 0,25
0,18 0,35 0,80 1,30 0,60 Ni 0,30
NY 2,25 Cr 1 Mo
0,08- 0,15- 0,40-
0,035 0,030 0,020
.2,00- 0,90-
0,18 0,50 0,80 2,50 1,10
Table B3 Carbon and carbon-manganese steels for boilers and pressure vessels, as rolled condition. Mechanical properties
Yield stress, ReH or RpO.2
Tensile
Nlmm2 minimum/or thickness,
Elongation
KV, average
Grade
strength Rm
mm
A5.
Nlmm
2
>16
% mmunum Test
Transverse Longitudinal
temperature

"C
J minimwn J minimwn
NY 360-0A 360-480 205 195 26 20 20 27
NY 41O-0A 410-530 235 225 24 20 20 27
NY 460-0A 460-580 285 255 22 20 20 27
DET NORSKE VERIT AS
Kules tor January 1
Table B4 Carbon and carbon-manganese steels for boilers and pressure vessels, normalized or controlled roUed condition.
Mechanical properties
Yield stress, ReH or R
p
O,2,
Tensile
Nlmm2, minimum for thickness,
Ekmga-
KV, average
Grade
strength Rm
mm
lion AS'
Nlmm
2
>16 >40 >63
% minimwn Test
:516
:540 :563 :5100
temperature
J minimum J minimum
'c
NV 360-0N 360-480 205 195 185 175 26 'J 20 20 27
NV 360-1 FN 360-480 235 215 195
')
26 ')
0 20 27
NV 41O-0N 410-530 235 225 215 205 24 'J 20 20 27
NV 410-1 FN 410-530 265 245 235
') 24 I)
0 20 27
NV 460-0N 460-580 285 255 245 235
22 I)
20 20 27
NV 460-1 FN 460-580 295 285 275
2)
22 'J 0 20 27
NV 490-0N 490-610 305 275 265 255
21 1)
20 22 31
NY 490-1 FN 490-610 315 315 305
<J
21 0 22 31
NY 510-1 FN
510-650 j)
355 345 335 315 20 0 22 31
1) For thicknesses 40-63 mm, the minimum-value is 1 unit lower and for thicknesses 63-100 mm 2 units lower.
2) For thickness >63 mm but :5100 mm, the values specified for the thickness range >40 mm but :563 mm are lowered by i % for each 5 mm of
thickness over 63 mm.
3) For thicknesses 63-100 mm: Rm 490-630.
Table B5 Alloy steels for boilers and pressure vessels. Mechanical properties
Tensile
Yield strength R,H or RpO.2 N I %m2
KV, average
strength
minimum for thickness, mm
Elongation
Grade
Rm
>16 >40
AS' Test
:51.6
% minimwn
Nlmm2 :540 :563
temperature
1 minimum I minimum
'c
NV 0,3 Mo 440-59 260 250 250
24
'
)
20 20 27
NV 1 Cr 0,5 Mo 470-62( 305 305 305 20 'J 20 22 31
NV 2,25 Cr 1 Mo 480-63( 275 265 265
18 1)
20 20 27
1) For thicknesses 40--63 mm, the minimum value is 1 unit lower and for thicknesses 63 100 mm, 2 units lower.
2) For thickness >63 mm but :5100 mm, the values specified for the thickness range >40 mm but :563 mm are lowered by I % for each 5 mm of
-- -- - ---- --
OET NORSKE VERITAS
-)
'J
.J
)

)

strength. It is not intended that these levels should neces-
sarily be regarded as specific grades. For intermediate v.al-
ues of specified minimum tensile strength, values fo{
minimum yield stress, elongation and reduction of area may
be found by interpolation. The minimum average value for
impact energy specified in the Table Fl is to be met for all
values of specified minimum tensile strength.
. 51
602 The requirements for tensile strength, yield stress, re-
duction of area, elongation and average impact energy for
Ni-alloy steel forgings and austenitic stainless steel forgings
are to comply with the specifications given for rolled steel
in Sec.2, Table C4 and 02.
603 For material thicknesses above 50 mm, the mechan-
ical properties are to be agreed.
Table Fl Carbon-manganese steel forgings for cargo tanks, pressure vessels and piping systems exposed to low temperatures.
Specified tensile strength, Yield stress, Elongation, Reduction of area, Average impact energy,
Rm ReB or RpO.2 As% Z% KV,]
minimwn
Nlmm2
minimum
Nlmm2
minimum minimum
minimum 1)
1
2
) t2)
410 240 24 50 41 27
460 270 22 45 41 27
490 300 20 45 41 27
1) Test temperature, see Table F2.
2) _I. denotes longitudinal test pieces.
_t. denotes transverse test pieces.
----
Table F2 Heat treatment, permissible design temperatures and impact test temperatures
Lowest permissible
Impact test temperature
Type of material Heat treatment
design temperature
'c
'C
Carbon-manganese
Normalized or normalized and tempered I) -55
5C below design temperature, or -20C
steel
whichever is the lower 2) -
1,5% Ni-steel -60
lOoC below design temperature, or -65C
whichever is the lower
3,5 % Ni-steel
Normalized, normalized and tempered or
-90
and tempered whichever is the lower
5% Ni-steel -105
lOoC below design temperature, or
--
-110C whichever is the lower
9% Ni-steel
Double normalized and tempered or
-165 -196
quenched and tempered
Solution heat treated -165 -196
3
)
steel
1) Quenched and tempered steel may be accepted.
fOIl- uDo-in tanlcD;.-proDDuro .:V08Illli and -for .liquefied gas wilh,sif",sign .n..r:,.OT:-.higi1e:r.
the following apply: .
- Material thickness t = 20 mm, test temperature OC.
- Material thickness 20 < t :5 40 mm, test temperature -20C.
3) Impact testing required only for design temperatures below -105C.
_.-
OET NORSKE VERITAS
nUies TOr ;:,nlps, .January I ::1!:10
The values given for transverse tests are applicable also for
circumferential and tangential tests.
503 When the forging is intended for use at elevated tem-
peratures, the mechanical properties for design purposes are
to be submitted for consideration. Where the 0,2 per cent
proof stress at elevated temperature is the limiting design
criterion, the design value is to be verified by a tensile test
at design temperature according to A800.
Tensile testing at elevated temperature may be waived pro-
vided it is verified by statishcal means that the reqUIred
properties are consistently achieved.
504 For design purposes the stress to rupture values given
in Sec.2 or in recogmzed standards are to be applied.
Table E1 Carbon and steels for boilers and pressure vessels. Chemical composition
Tensile C Si Mn P S Al Residual
strength
maximum maximum maximum
acid soluble elements
Nlmm
2
maximum
410 0,20 0,15-0,35 0,50-1,30 0,035 0,035 0,015-0,050 Cr 0,30
460 0,23 0,15-0,40 0,60-1,40 0,035 0,035 maximum 0,050
Cll 0,30
Ni 0,30
490 0,23 0,15-0,60 0,90-1,60 0,035 0,035 maximum 0,050
Mo 0,10
Total 0,70
Table E2 Alloy steels for boilers and pressure vessels. Chemical composition
Type of C Si Mn P
steel
maximum
0,3 Mo 0,12-0,22 0,10-0,35 0,50-0,80 0,035
1 Cr
0,10-0,18 0,10-0,35 0,40-0,80 0,035
0,5 Mo
2,25 Cr
0,08-0,15 0,10-0,50 0,40-0,80 0,035
1 Mo
F. Forgings for Cargo Tanks, Pressure Vessels
and Piping Systems Exposed to Low Temper-
atures
F 100 Scope
101 The requirements given in this subsection apply to
forgings with material thicknesses up to and including 50
mm for cargo tanks, pressure vessels and piping systems
where design and testing are related to sub-zero temper-
atures.
'c'argo tanks, presslire 'ves'se}s' 'ana
quefied gas, these rules apply also when the design temper-
ature is 0
0
C and higher.
F 200 Type of steel
201 Forgings for the applications mentioned in 101 may
be produced from killed and fme grain treated carbon-man-
ganese steels, ferritic Ni-alloy steels or austenitic stainless
steels in compliance with the specifications given in the fol-
lowing paragraphs. Lowest permissible design temperatures
are stated in Table F2.
Other steel types may be accepted upon consideration in
each case.
301 Carbon-manganese steel forgings intended for welding
C
Si
Mn
p
S
Ni
Cr
Mo
0,18% maximum
0,10-0,45%
0,30-1,50%
0,035% maximum
0,015% maximum
0,30% maximum
0,25%
0,08% maximum"
S Al Cr Mo Residual
maximum
acid SOill- elements
hie
maximum
maximum
0,030 0,020
- 0,25-0,35
0,030 0,020 0,70-1,30 0,40-0,60 Cll 0,25
Ni 0,30
0,030 0,020 2,00-2,50 0,90-1,10
For forgings not intended for welding, a C-content of max-
imum 0,30% and Ni-content up to 0,80% may be accepted.
302 Carbon-manganese steel is to be fme grain treated
with aluminium. niobium, vanadium or titanium. either sin-
gly or in any combination. When used singly the content of
AI, Nb or V is normally to be within the following limits:
AI, acid soluble
AI, total
Nb
V
Ti
0,015-0,08 %
0,020-0,085%
0,02-0,05%
0,05-0,10%
. O,O? .%.ll1l!"illllllll.
maximum contents of each element is not applicable.
303 The chemical composition of Ni-alloy steels and aus-
tenitic stainless steels is to comply with the requirements
given for rolled steel in Sec.2, Table C2 and DI. Where
other steel grades are proposed, the chemical composition
is to be submitted to the Society for approval.
F 400 Heat treatment
401 Forgings for cargo tanks, pressure vessels and piping
systems exposed to low temperature are to be supplied in the
heat treatment condition specified in Table F2.
F 500 Test material
501 Unless otherwise specified in the approved plans, the
test pieces are to be taken in the direction of the principal
grain flow, provided the shape and dimension make it pos-
sible.
601 Requirements for mechanical properties for carbon-
manganese steels are given in Table FI.
The Table gives minimum requirements for yield stress, el-
ongation, reduction of area and average impact energy value
corresponding to three levels of specified minimum tensile
DEf NORSKE VERITAS
,"] 0
:J .:)
8
(:]8
Table B6 Steels for boilers and pressure vessels. Minimum lower yield stress (RoL) or 0,2% proof stress (RpO 2) values at elevated
temperatures for design purposes
Grade Thickness mm 1)
Minimwn ReL or RpO,2 N/mm
2
Temperature, c
100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500
<16
NY 36O-0N
>16 ';:;40
175 172 168 150 124 117 115 113
>40 ';:;63
171 169 162 144 124 117 115 113
162 158 152 141 124 117 115 113
NY 360-1 FN
<16
204 185 165 145 127 116 110 106
>16 ';:;40
196 183 164 145 127 116 110 106
>40 ';:;63
179 172 459 145 127 116 110 106
NV 41O-0N
<16
211 208 201 180 150 142 138 136
>16 ';:;40
201 198 191 171 150 142 138 136
"ll >40 ';:;63
192 188 181 168 150 142 138 136

E
NY 410-1 FN
<16
235 216 194 171 152 141 134 130
0 >16 ';:;40 228 213 192 171 152 141 134 130
c
>40 ';:;63 215 204 188 171 152 141 134 130
,;;
1
NV 46O-0N <16 248 243 235 210 176 168 162 158
,
>16 ';:;40 230 227 220 198 176 168 162 158
c
::E >40 ';:;63
222 218 210 194 176 168 162 158
U
"0 NV 460-1 FN
<16
266 247 223 198 177 167 158 153
iii
>16 ';:;40
260 242 220 198 177 167 158 153
,
251 236 217 198 177 167 158 153
u >40 ';:;63
NV 490-0N
<16
270 264 255 228 192 183 177 172
>16 ';:;40
248 245 237 214 192 183 177 172
>40 ';:;63
240 236 227 210 192 183 177 172
NV 490-1 FN
<16
284 265 240 213 192 182 173 168
279 260 237 213 192 182 173 168
>16 ';:;40
272 256 234 213 192 182 173 168
>40 ';:;63
NV 510-1 FN - - 265 245 225 205 175 155
';:;63

NY 36O-0A ';:;25 150 150 145 125 110 105
"0_-
NY 41O-0A ';:;25 180 180 170 150 130 125
c 0

NY 46O-0A ';:;25 210 210 200 180 160 150
u

1
NV 0,3 Mo <63 237 232 218 200 167 153 148 143 139

NY 1 Cr 0,5 Mo <63 270 259 248 237 216 203 199 194 188

NY 2,25 Cr 1 Mo
<63 249 241 233 224 219 212 207 194 180
1) For thicknesses> 63 but < 100 nun the values specified for thickness range> 40:5 63 mm are lowered by 1 % for each 5 mm of thickness over
63 mm.
DEf NORSKE VERITAS
Table B7 Estimated average stress to rupture values in 100 000 and 200 000 hours for desi2n purposes
Stress to rupture, NlmmJ. for steel grades
NV360-0N
NV460-0N
NV360-1FN
NV460-1 FN
Temperature
NV410-0N
NV490-0N NVO,3Mo NV 1 Cr 0,5 Mo NV 2,25 Cr 1 Mo
'c
NV41O-1 FN
NV490-1 FN
NV 510-1 FN
100000 200 000 100000 200 000 100 000 200000 100 000 200 000 100 000 200 000
h h h h h h h h h h
380 165 145 227 206
390 148 129 203 181
400 132 115 179 157
410 118 101 157 135
420 103 89 136 115
430 91 78 117 97
440 79 67 100 82
450 69 57 85 70 239 217 - - 221 203
460 59 48 73 60 208 188 - - 204 186
470 50 40 63 52 178 159 -
- 186 169
480 42 33 55 44 148 130 210 180 170 152
490 47 37 123 105 177 148 153 135
500 41 30 101 84 . 146 122 137 119
510 81 69 121 99 122 103
520 66 55 99 79 107 89
530 53 45 81 64 93 77
540 67 52 79 68
550 54 42 69 58
560 43 34 59 50
570 35 - 51 43
580 44 -
Table B8 Heat treatment of steel for boilers and pressure vessels
Grade Heat treatmentlcondition of supply
NV 360 OA
.
NY 410 OA As rolled
NY 460 OA
NV 36O-0N, -1 FN
NY 410-0N, -1 FN
Normalized/controlled rolled 1)
NV 46O-0N, -1 FN
Thermo-mechanically treated
NY 490-0N, -1 FN
NV 510-1 FN
NY 0,3 Mo Normalized
NY 1 Cr 0,5 Mo
Normalized and tempered
NY 2,25 Cr 1 Mo
rys.e '402;'" """"""""'" .. ......... , . " ..... 0 """ '.' .... ...... ,' .
.' " . ' . . " ...........
C 100 Steel grades
101 Requirements are specified for fine grained carbon-
manganese steels and nickel alloy steels with tougbness
properties at low temperatures.
ments specified in Table Cl for carbon manganese steels and
in Table C2 for nickel alloy steels.
202 The content of all elements given in the specifications
including grain refming elements is to be determined and
surveyor.
- Nb, minimum 0,02 %
- V, minimum 0,05 %.
C
= C Mn Cr + Mo + V + Ni + Cu
eq + 6 + 5 15
(%).
Table C3: Carbon-manganese steels
Table C4: Nickel alloy steels
specified in the tables refer to testiog at room temperature.
302 Pellini' s drop weight test is to be carried out for plates
and sections of nickel alloy steels with thickness 13 mm and
more in the following cases:
- NV 1.5 Ni when intended for design temperature below
_60C
-80C
- NV 5 Ni when intended for design temperature below
-90C
The test specimens are to display a no break performance
when tested 5C below the design temperature.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

:J
':J
/"\
J
o
:J
:J
':J
Fig. 6
Gear wheel
Ten pOlition A
Itangen11all
Test PO&11ion
long
/
Ii' i
r.
-\-l- I I I .--l.--+.-\-
Fig. 7
1
1
,

.,
..----._----
\
Test po&itlan A
(equivalent to longitudinel)
Gear rim (made by expanding)
I
505 For hollow pinion forgings, one set of tests is to be
taken in the tangential direction (test position A in Fig.8).
where the finished length of the toothed portion exceeds
1,25 m, one set of tests is to be taken from each end.
Test positi()f1 A Test !)Osition A
Fig. 8
Hollow pinion
D 600 Test material for forgings intended for
carburising and hardening
601 When forgings are to be carburised after machining,
sufficient test material is to be provided for fmal tests after
completion of carburising and hardening. For this purpose
duplicate sets of test material are to taken from positions as
detailed in 500, except that irrespective of the dimensions
or mass of the forging, tests are required from one position
only.
Alternative procedures for the testiog of forgings which are
to be carburised may be specially agreed. .
701 The mechanical properties for carbon and carbon'
manganese steels tested at room temperature are to comply
with the appropriate requirements given in Table Cl.
702 The mechanical properties for alloy steel forgings are
to comply with the appropriate requirements given in Table
C2.
Pt.2 Ch.2 Sec.5 Page 49
703 For components designed for service at low temper-
atures, the test temperature is to be stipulated in each sepa
rate case dependent on design temperature, application
category and material dimensions. Required minimum im-
pact energy is specified in Table C3, related to the required
minimum yield stress of the material.
704 For components designed for service at high temper-
atures, tensile test at elevated temperature maybe required.
705 Detailed requirements with respect to surface harden-
ing' and testiog and inspection of the toothed parts of pin-
ions and wheels is outlined in PtA Ch.2 Sec.s.
E. Forgings for Boilers, Unfired Pressure Ves-
sels and Machinery Piping Systems
E 100 Scope
101 The rules in this subsection apply to carbon, carbon-
manganese and low alloy steel forgings intended for use in
the construction of boilers, unfIred pressure vessels and ship
and machinery piping systems.
These rules may also be used for other areas of application;
subject to special agreement.
E 200 Chemical composition
201 The chemical composition is to comply with the ap-
propriate requirements specified in Table El for carbon and
carbon-manganese steels and in Table E2 for !illoy steel, or
to comply with other recognized approved standards.
including grain refining elements is to be determined and
surveyor.
E 300 Heat treatment
301 Carbon and carbon-manganese steel forgings are to
be normalized, normalized and tempered or quenched and
tempered. Alloy steel forgings are to be normalized and
tempered or quenched and tempered .
E 400 Test material
401 For seamless hollow forgings, e.g. drums and 'head-
ers, which are initially forged with open ends, one set of test
pieces is to be taken from each end of each forging. Where
the ends are to be subsequently closed by forging, test ma-
. terial is to be cut off prior to the closing operation and is to
be heat treated together with the forging. Where forged with
one solid end, test material is to be provided at the open end
only. For hollow forgings the test pieces are to be cut in the
circumferential direction.
For other forgings at least one set of test pieces is to be taken
from each forging and, where the dimension and shape al-
low, the test piece is to be taken in the longitudinal direction.
Small forgings may be batch tested in accordance with A700
provided that hardness tests are carried out on each forging.
E 500 Mechanical properti!!S
501 The mechanical properties at room temperature are to
comply with the requirements in Sec.2 when applicable or
with a relevant standard.
502 The requirements to impact energy in Sec.2 as given
for pieces cut with their longitudinal axes transverse and
parallel to the principal direction of deformation and, are
stated in the tables as transverse and longitudinal, re-
spectively.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
Table C4 Required minimum average impact energy for
shafting and general machine construction for low temper-
ature applications
Minimum specified yield stress Minimum impact energy
ReB or R
o
O.2, Nlmm
2
KV, I, average 1)
I") t ")
< 270 27 20
> 270
31 22
:s 310
> 310
34 24
< 350
> 350 40 27
value, but not less than 70% of the average value.
2) land t mean test pieces mainly parallel to, respectively per-
pendicular to the principal direction of grain flow.
D. Forgings for. Gearing
D 100 Scope
forgings, in carbon, carbon-manganese and alloy steel, in-
tended for use in the construction of gearing, including
forgings intended for surface hardening, i.e. induction har-
dening, flame hardening, nitriding and carburising.
102 Relevant parts of this subsection may be applied also
for surface hardened steel castings.
D 200 Manufacture
201 Forgings are to be manufactured in accordance with
the requirements of A.
301 The chemical composition is to be appropriate for the
,-the, requirimaDtE, concerning mechanioal
properties of the core and for the required surface hardoess
of the items and is to be in compliance with the approved
specification.
302 For carbon and carbon-manganese steel forgings not
intended for welding the chemical composition is to comply
with the following overall limits:
Composition 1)
Permitted residual elements
% maximum, %
C, maximum 0,65 L)
CU 0,30
Si, maximum 0,45
Mn 0,30-1,50
Cr 0,30
P, maximum 0,040
Ni 0,40
S, maximum 0,040
Mo 0,15
1) Suitable grain refining elements may be added. The content
of such elements is to be reported in the ladle analysis.
2) For forgings which are intended for parts of a welded struc-
ture the carbon content is not to exceed 0,23 %, and the total
residual content is not to exceed 0,8%.
Any restrictions given for specific components by the rele-
vant rules for the design and construction or by approved
plans are to be complied with.
303 For alloy steel forgings the chemical composition of
ladle samples is to include the content of all alloying ele-
ments and is to comply with the following overall limits and
the requirements of the approved specification:
Carbon
Silicon
Sulphur
Phosphorus
maximum 0,45%
maximum 0,45 %
maximum 0,035%
maximum 0,035 %
401 Forgings for gearing which are not to be surface har-
dened are to be either normalized and tempered or quenched
and tempered in accordance with the approved specification.
For all types of steel the tempering temperature is not to be
less than 550C.
402 Forgings for gears which are to be carbU'rised after
final machining are to be supplied in either the fully ann-
ealed or the normalized and tempered condition, suitable for
subsequent machining and carburising.
403 Where induction hardening or nitriding is to be carried
out the forgings are to be quenched and tempered at an ap-
propriate stage.
quenched and tempered forgings
501 For pinion forgings where the finished diameter of the
toothed portion exceeds 200 mm, one set of tests is to be
taken in a tangential direction and adjacent to the toothed
portion (test position B in Fig.5). If, however, the journal
diameter is 200 mm or less, tests are to be taken in the lon-
gitudinal direction (test position A in Fig.5). Where the
finished length of the toothed portion exceeds 1,25 m, one
set of tests is to be taken from each end.
502 For pinion forgings where the fmished diameter of the
toothed portion is 200 mm or less, one set of tests is to be
bi
kenin
_the .!\.in,
503 For gear wheel forgings, one set of tests is to be taken
in a tangential direction (test position A in Fig.6).
504 For gear wheel rim forgings, one set of tests is to be
taken in the .longitudinal. direction (test position A in
Fig.7). Where the finished diameter exceeds 2,5 m or the
mass (as heat treated but excluding test IlJaterial) exceeds 3
tonnes, two sets of tests are to be taken from diametrically
opposite positions (test position A in Fig.7).
Test posilion B Test pOSition B
(tangential]
"-...-. r---
L
-- I /'
/"-" i =1
11--.. -
L = length of toothed portion
D =diameter of toothed portion
d = journal diameter
Fig. 5
Pinion
Test pO:!lition A
!longitudinal)
DEr NORSKE VERITAS
.J
:]
-)
-:J
J
J
7
C 400 Heat treatment Guidance note:
conditions stated in Table C5.
402 The designation of quenched and teml'ered, controlled
rolled and thermo-mechamcally treated steel grades is to be
given the suffix QT, CR, and TMCP respectively instead
ofN
Hot forming or normalizing of thermo-mechanically treated
steels may result in considerable reduction of tensile strength and
yield stress. Thermo-mechanically treated steels are not to be
used where hot forming or normalizing will be carried out.
--e-n-d--o-f--G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e--n-o-t-e---
Table Cl Carbon-manganese steels for low temperature service. Chemical composition
Grade
C S P
Al q)
N
maximum
Si Mn
maximum maximum total maximum
Residual elements
NV 360-2FN 0,17 0,10 -
O,4i
0,025 0,030 ;::0,018 0,Q15
0,35
1,00 )
NV2-2 0,16 0,10 - 0,40 - 0,025 0,030 ;::0,018 0,015
0,40 1,60
NV2-3 0,14 0,10 - 0,70 - 0,025 0,030
;::0,Q18
0,015
0,40 - 1,60
NV2-4 0,14 0,10 - 070 - 0,025 0,030
;::0,018
0,015
0,40
1,60 3)
Cr 0,20 maximum
NV 2-4L 0,14 0,10 - 0,70
3
0,025 0,030
;::0,018
0,015
Cu 0,35 maximum
0,40
1,60 )
Ni 0,40 maximum I)
NV4-2 0,16 0,10 -
<1,60 0,025 0,030
;::0,018
0,015
Mo 0,08 maximum
0,40
Cr+Mo+Cu 0,45 maximum
NV4-3 0,10 0,10 -
0,70 - 0,025 0,030
;::0,Q18
0,Q15
0,40 1,60
NV4-4 0,10 0,10 - 070 - 0,025 0,030
;::0,018
0,015
0,40 1:60 3)
I
NV 4-4L 0,10 0,10 - 070 - 0,025 0,030
;::0,018
0,015
0,40 1:60 3)
I) For the steel grades NV 2 3, NV 2 4, NV 2 4L, NV 4-3, NV 4-4 and NV 4-4L a Ni-content up to 1,25% may be approved.
2) For thicknesses exceeding 40 mm, Mn = 0,40-1,20%.
3) A maximum Mn-content of 1,65% is accepted provided the carbon-content does not exceed 0,13% for NV 2-4/NV 2-4L and 0,14% for
NV4-4/NV 4-4L. .
4) Aluminium may be either partly or totaUy replaced by other grain refining elements.
'-
Table C2 Nickel alloy steels for low temperature service. Chemical composition
Grade
C
Si Mn
S
p
Ni
Al
tot
NV 1,5 Ni 0,14 0,10-0,35 0,30-1,50 0,025 0,025 1,30-1,70 >0,018
NV 3,5 Ni 0,12 0,10-0,35 0,30"':'0,70 0,025 0,025 3,25-3,75 >0,018
NV 5 Ni 0,12 0,10-0,35 0,30-0,80 0,025 0,025 4,70-5,30 >0,018
NV 9 Ni 0,10 0,10-0,35 0,30-0,90 0,025 0,025 8,50-10,0 ;::0,018
DEr NORSKE VERITAS
Table C3 Carbon-manganese steels for low temuerature service. Mechanical properties. j)
Yield striss
Impact enertq Nlmm
Tensile
minimum
Elongation
KV, average )
Grade strengt,f
for thickness J mm
AS%
Nlmm .
>16
mzmmum
Thickness
Test
Transverse

mm
"C )
J minimum
NV 360-2FN 360-480 235 215 26

-20 27.

-25

-30
>35<40
-35
NV2-2 400-490 265 255 24

-20 27

-25

-30
>35<40
-35
NV2-3 400/490 265 255 24

-40 27

-45

-50
>35<40
-55
NV 2-4. 400/490 265 _
255 24
-55 27
,

-60

-65
>35<40
-70
NV2-4L 400/490 265 255 24

-60 27

-65

-70
>35<40
-75
NV4-2 490-610 335 325 21 -20 27

-25

-30
>35<40
-35
NV4-3 490-610 335 325 21 -40 27

-45

-50
>35<40
-55
NV4-4 490-610 335 325 21 -55 27

-60

-65
>35<40
-70
NV 4-4L 490-610 335 325 21

-60 27

-65

-70
-
1
'"'
. :>33'-'QO
I .. -7, ........ ... .....
Min
design
Longitudinai
J minimwn
temperature
41 -15"C
41 -15"C
-
41 -35"C
41 -50"C
41 -55"C
41 -15"C
41 -35"C
41 -sooe "
41 -55"C
.... .... .... ....
1) These requirements are applicable to products up to maximum 40 mm thickness. For thicknesses exceeding 40 mm the requirements are to be agreed.
2) The specified impact toughness requirements also apply in the heat affected zone of welded connections and it is recommended that the steel is or-
dered with suffiCient margin. . .
3) Materials for tanks or parts of tanks completely thermally stress relieved after welding may for aU thicknesses up to t 40 mm be tested at a tem-
perature 5C below the minimum design temperature.
4) Materials for liquefied gas carriers see Pt.5 Ch.5 Sec.2 Table D2.
5) For thicknesses 25 < t < 40 mm the impact test temperature is to be stampe:d on the and stated in the
DEI NORSKE VERITAS
l
,

J
.. J
,

)
J
C 600 . Mechanical properties
601 Requirements to mechanical properties for carbon and
carbon-manganese steel tested at room temperature are given
in Table C2.
The tables cover values corresponding to the 'fecified min-
imum tensile strength from 360 to 760 N/mm . The values
for elongation, reduction of area and impact energy are
given for testing in longitudinal (A), tangential (B) and
transverse (C) direction. It is not intended that the strength
levels should necessarily be regarded as specific grades.
The strength levels have been given in mUltiples of 40
N/mm
2
to facilitate interpolation for intermediate values of
specified minimum tensile strength. Forgings may normally
be supplied to any specified minimum tensile strength se-
. 47
lected within the upper and lower limits stated in the relevant
rules for design and construction or in the approved plan for
the component.
to comply with the requirements given in Table C3.
603 Components designed for service at low temperatures
are to be subjected to additional impact toughness tests. The
test temperature is to be stipulated in each separate case de-
pendent on design temperature, application category and
material dimensions. Required minimum impact energy is
specified in Table C4, related to the required minimum yield
stress of the material.
atures, tensile test at elevated temperature may be required.
Table C2 Mechanical properties of carbon and carbon-manganese steel forgings
Tensile Yield Elongation, Reduction of area, A verage impact energy,
strength, stress, As% Z% KY, J (+20"C)
Rm ReB or
minimum 1) minimum 1) minimum 1) 2)
Nlmm2
RpO,2
minimum
Nlmm
2
A B C A B C A B C
360-480 180 28 24 20 50 43 35 32 26 18
400-520 200 26 22 19 50 43 35 32 26 18
440-560 220 24 20 18 50 43
-
35 32 26 18
480-600 240 22 19 16 45 38 30 32 26 18
520-640 260 21 18 15 45 38 30 25 20 15
560-680 280 20 17 14 40 34 27 25 14 15
600-750 300 18 15 13 40 34 27 18 14 12
640-790 320 17 14 12 40 34 27 18 14 12
680-830 340 16 14 12 35 30 24 18 14 12
720-870 360 15 13 11 35 30 24 18 14 12
760-910 380 14 12 10 35 30 24 18 14 12
1) A denotes longitudinal test pieces. B denotes tangential test pieces. C denotes transverse test
Charpy V-notch testing may be omitted for normalized steels not intended for arctic and ice breaking service.
Table C3 Mechanical properties of alloy steel forgings
,
Tensile Yield Elongation, Reduction of area, Average impact energy,
strength, stress, As% Z% KY, J (+ 20"C) !
Rrfl " 2
.. RaJ or
minimum' 1) . minimum--
J
)-
-- minimum- H _____ - _
Nlmm
RpO,2
minimum
Nlmm2
A B C A B C A B C
600-750 420 18 16 14 50 43 35 41 31 24
650-800 450 17 15 13 50 43 35 32 24 22
700-850 480 16 14 12 45 38 30 32 24 22
750-900 530 15 13 11 45 38 30 32 24 20
800-950 590 14 12 10 40 34 27 32 24 20
850-1000 640 13 11 9 40 34 27 27 22 18
900-1100 690 13 11 9 40 34 27 27 22 18
950-1150 750 12 10 8 35 30 24 25 19 16
1000-1200 810 12 10 8 35 30 24 25 19 16
1050-1250 870 11 9 7 35 30 24 21 15 13
1100-1300 930 11 9 7 35 30 24 21 15 13
1) A denotes longitudinal test pieces. B denotes tangential test pieces. _ C denotes transverse test
._- -- -
DEI NORSKE VERITAS
Hules tor :ShipS, January 1
Sulphur
Phosphorus
maximum 0,035%
maximum 0,035%
401 Except as provided in subsection D for surface hard-
ened components, the requirements given in 402 apply.
402 All forgings are to be properly heat treated. The fol-
lowing heat treatment may be applied:
a) For carbon and carbon-manganese -steels:
normalizing
normalizing and tempering
quenching and tempering.
For rolled bars used as substitute for forgings with di-
ameter less than 65 mm normalizing is not required.
b) For alloy steels:
Alternatively, alloy steel forgings may be supplied in the
normalised and tempered condition, in which case the
specified mechanical properties are to be agreed with the
Society.
For all types of steel the temperiog temperature is not to be
less than 550C.
C 500 Test material
501 Number of tests and position of test material for some
components are specified in 502 to 504. Further, the re-
quirements specified in A apply.
502 For plain shafts, flanged shafts and flanged shafts with
collar, one set of test pieces is to be taken for each forging,
except where the forging exceeds both 4 tonnes in mass and
3 m in length, in which case one set is to be taken from each
end. A set of test pieces normally includes one tensile test
picce ami' fiil 00 ,- impact le.!)l -These '-limits - tV' "a5
forged mass and length but exclude the test material.
Normally the tests are to be taken in the longitudinal direc-
tion, but at the discretion of the manufacturer and if agreed
by the surveyor alternative positions as shown in Figs. I,
2, and 3 may be used. For shafts with keyways, splines,
radial holes, slots etc. the tests are to be taken in the tan-
gential direction.
Plain shafts made from hot rolled bars not exceeding 250
mm diameter may be batch tested according to A700.

I
Test position B
(tangential)
Fig. 1
Plain shaft
Test position 8

ough bolt hole)

1- ::_n __
/-'1 .
T", P""oo C . .
(transversel
Fig. 2
Flanged shaft
Fig. 3
Test positipn B
ttange:nttal)

(tangentIal) , '
........ .
-' ,
r-
,
,
-'--1--
/
/
Test position D
{transversel
---{.i
-"-

I-
f--
L.J
,
,
,
i
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
L ,-----j
, /
,-,
Flanged shaft with collar
Test position A
{longitudi0811
. _-...
r-
.. \--,
,
,
f
---t-
I
---
L.J
503 For solid forged crank shafts one set of tests is to be
taken in the longitudinal direction from the end of each
forging. Where the mass, as heat treated but excluding test
material, exceeds 3 tonnes tests are to be taken from each
end (test position A and B in Fig. 4). Where the crankthrows
are formed by machining or flame cutting, the second set
of tests (mass exceeding 3 tonnes) is to be taken in a trans-
verse direction from material removed from the crankthrow
at the end opposite the coupling (test position C in Fig. 4).
Test position A
(Iongituc;liotll)
I
I
:.
Tast !1osftion B
jlongitutlinall
r .. -
,
,
,
,
,
11 I "P.I "liL
\"i'X"Ir--: \

-+ ,

Coupling entl
Fig. 4
Solid forged crankshaft
Ii \
---\
Test position C
(traf\S\l8tse)
I
---
For small solid crankshafts of the same shape and dimen-
sions, a batch testing procedure may be adopted, provided
that additional hardness tests are carried out on each forging.
The regulations given in A700 apply.
504 For separate crank throw forgings and other forgings
where the method of manufacture has been specially ap-
proved in accordance with A205 the number and position
of the test pieces are to be agreed with the Society having
regard to the method of manufacture employed (see PtA
Ch.2 Sec. I).
DET NORSKE VERITAS
J
(J
J
,J
J

J J
nUl!:::::> lUI ;::UllJJ::>, ,JdlIUdIY 1i3i3U
Table C4 Nickel alloy steels for low temperature service. Mechanical properties I)
Yield slrfss
Impact Nlmm
Tensile
minimum
Elongation
KV, average )
Min
Grade
for thickness, mm
A5%
design strengt,p
Nlmm
>30
mrmmum
Thickness
Test
Longitudinal
temperature
Transverse
5,30
5,40 mm
temperature
0C 3)4)
J minimum J minimum
5,25 -65
NV 1,5 Ni 5) 470-640 275 265 22
>255,30 -70
27 41 -60C
>30S35 -75
>35<40
-80
5,25 -95
NV 3,5 Ni 5) 540-690 345 335 22
>255,30 -100
27 41 -90C
>305,35 -105
>35<40
-110
5,25 -110
NY 5 Ni 5)
5701710 390 380 21
>255,30 -115
27 41 -105C
>305,35 -120
>35<40
-125
NV 9 Ni 640/840 490 480 19 <40 -196 27 41 -165C
dered with margin .
3) Materials for liquefied gas carriers see Pt.S Ch.S Sec.2 Table D3.
4) For thicknesses 25 < t :5 40 mm the impact test temperature is to be stamped on the products and stated in the
5) In certain cases the materials are to be subjected to Pellini's drop weight test according to 302.
Table C5 Heat treatmeot of steels for low temperature service
NV 360-2FN
NV2-2
NV2-3
NV2-4
Plates: Nonnalized 1)
NV 2-4L
Sections: Nonnalized. thenno-mechanically treated or controlled rolled 2)
NV4-2
NY 4-3
NV4-4
NV 4-4L
NV 1,5 Ni
NV 3,5 Ni Nonnalized, normalized and tempered or quenched and tempered
NV 5 Ni
NY. 9 Ni . .l1ntlhlr, nnrmRlimlannJ,JTljll<rr;:! nr llILCJlhm!!mll<mJl'<ml'J,

-
cc
1) Other heat treating processes, e.g. quenching and tempering or thenno-mechanical controlled processing may be approved. See 402.
2) See 402.
3) Quenching and tempering will normally be required for thicknesses above 30 mm.
D. Stainless Steel
D 100 Steel grades
101 Requirements are specified for seven grades of aus-
tenitic and two grades of duplex (ferritic/austenitic) stainless
steels.
Steel grades with chemical composition and mechanical
properties deviating from these specifications may be ac-
cepted for the purpose in question after consideration in each
separate case.
The austenitic steels may be used for applications where the
design temperature is not lower than - 165C.
201 The chemical composition is to comply with the re-
quirements given in Table DI, or the approved specifica-
tion.
ply with the requirements specified in Table D2. For aus-
tenitic steels both the 0,2 and 1,0 per cent yield stress are
to be reported. .
refer to testing at room temperature.
For austenitic steels impact tests are only required for design
temperatures below -105C.
For duplex steels impact tests at design temperature or
-20C, whichever is the lower, are required.
401 All materials are to be supplied in the solution treated
condition.
501 Unless otherwise agreed by the Society for the order
in question, the materials are to be subjected to intercrystal-
line corrosion test, in order to demonstrate that the material
DET NORSKE VERITAS
MUles TOr .January 1::1::10
is not susceptible to intergranular corrosion resulting from
grain boundary precipitation of chromium-rich carbides.
One test is to be carried out for each tensile test. The testing
is to be carried out according to ASTM A262, Practice E,
Copper - Copper Sulphate - Sulphuric Acid Test or another
recognized standard.
The bent specimens are to be free from cracks indicating the
presence of intergranular attack.
Table DI Austenitic and duplex stainless steels. Chemical composition
Grade
C Si Mn P S
maximum maximum maximum maximum maximum
Cr Ni Mo Other
Austenitic
NY 304 L 0,03 1,0 2,0 0,045 0,030 18,0-20,0 8,0-12,0 -
NY 316 L 0,03 1,0 2,0 0,045 0,030 16,5-18,5 11,0-15,0 2,5-3,0
NY 316 L N 0,03 1,0 2,0 0,045 0,030 16,5-18,5 11,0-14,5 2,5-3,0
N
0,14-0,22
NY 317 L 0,03 1,0 2,0 0,045 0,030 18,0-20,0 11,0-15,0 3,0-4,0
NY 317 L N 0,03 1;0 2,0 0,045 0,030 18,0-20,0 12,5-15,0 3,0-4,0
N
0,14-0,22
NY 321 0,08 1,0 2,0 0,045 0,030 17,0-19,0 9,0-12,0
Ti
-
5xC<Ti<0,70
NY 347 0,08 1,0 2,0 0,045 0,030 17,0-19,0 9,0-13,0 - 10xC<Nb<I,0
Duplex
UNS S31803 0,03 1,0 2,0 0,030 0,020 21,0-23,0 4,5-6,5 2,5-3,5
N
0,14-0,20
UNS S32750 0,03 0,80 1,2 0,035 0,020 24,0-26,0 6,0-8,0 3,0-5,0
N
0,24-0,32
Table D2 Austenitic stainless steel. Mechanical properties
Tensile str"ngth
Yie:1 stress 1)
Elongation
Impact energy
. Nlmm , minimum Chorpy V-notch 2)
Grade Nlmm %
Test temperature J, minimum
Rm
AS
C average
Austenitic
NY 304 L 450-700 175 215 40
NY 316 L 450-700 195 235 40
NY 316 L N 600-800 300 340 40
NY 317 L 500-700 195 235 40 -196
transverse: 27
longitudinal: 41
NY 317 L N 600-800 300 340 40
NY 321 500-750 205 245 40
NY 347 500-750 205 245 40
Duplex
UNS S31803
I
minimum 620 450
I
25 -20
I
longitudinal: 41
UNS S32750 I minimum 690 550
I
25 -20
I
transverse: 27
1) The specified yield stress at both 0,2% and 1,0%, RpO,2 and Rpl.O respectively, are to be documented for austenitic stainless steels.
2) Verification of impact values for austenitic stainless steels is required only for materials intended for design temperatures below _105C.
E. Testing
E 100 General
101 The procedures used for all tests are to be in accord-
ance with the appropriate requirements of Ch.l.
102 Test samples are to be taken from positions as re-
quired according to Sec.! ElOO.
201 Test pieces for tensile testing of plates at ambient
temperatore are to be cut with their principal axes transverse
to the final direction of rolling.
For testing of sections the test pieces are to be taken trans-
verse or parallel to the final direction of rolling at the option
of the steebnaker.
202 For plates, one tensile test piece is to be taken from
each rolled plate provided the weight of the piece does not
exceed 2500 kg.
Where ingot casting is used, the test piece is to represent the
top of the ingot.
When the weight exceeds .2500 kg, tensile test pieces are to
be taken from both ends of the rolled plate.
203 When test pieces are required from each end of a
rolled plate, the difference between the values obtained for
the tensile strength is not to exceed 60 N/mm
2
.
204 For sections, one tensile test piece is to be taken from
test units of not more than 10 tonnes. The material in each
test unit is to be from the same heat and of the same sbape
with a thickness variation of not more than 5 mm.
301 When determination of lower yield stress or proof
. stress at elevated temperature is required according to B302,
the testing is to be carried out in compliance with ISO 783.
DET NORSKE YERITAS
)

J J
J J
301 All forgings are to be made from killed steels.
ply with the overall limits given in Table Bl.
Table Bl Chemical composition
Composition 1) Permitted residual elements
%
maximum, %
C, maximum
0,60
2
)
Cu 0,30
Si, maximum 0,45
Cr 0,30
Mn 0,30-1,50
Ni 0,40
P, maximum 0,040
Mo 0,15
S, maximum 0,040
1) Suitable grain refming elements may be added. The content
residual content is no to exceed 0,8%.
. 2 45
401 Steel forgings are to be normalized or normalized and
tempered. Alternatively the forgings may be quenched and
tempered, subject to approval oy the Society m each sepa-
rate case. .
Tempering temperature is to be not less than 550C.
B 500 Test material and mechanical properties
SOl At least one set of tests is to be taken from each
forging or batch of forgings. Unless otherwise specified in
the approved plans, the test pieces are to be oriented in the
longitudinal direction provided the shape and dimensions
make it possible.
Where a forging exceeds both 4 tonnes in mass and 3 m in
length one set of tests is to be taken from each end.
502 For carbon-manganese steels Table B2 gives the min-
imum requirements for yield stress, elongation and
energy corresponding to different strength levels.
strength levels have been given in multiples of 40 N/mm
to facilitate interpolation for intermediate values of specified
minimum tensile strength.
503 For specific components, e.g. rudder stocks, rudder
shafts and pintles, a limitation in sl'ecified. tensile strength
may be given in the relevant parts of the rules.
Table B2 Mechanical properties of forgings for general application
Tensile Yield stress I Elongation, Reduction of area, Average impact energy,
strength, ReI! or RpO.2
As%
Z%
KV, J (OC)
Rm
Nlmm2 minimum 1) minimum I) minimum 1)
Nlmm
2
I t I t I t
360-480 180 28 20 50 35 32 18
400-520 200 26 19 50 35 32 18
440-560 220 24 18 50 35 32 18
480-600 240 22 16 45 30 32 18
520-640 260 21 15 45 30 25 15
560-680 280 20 14 40 27 25 15
600-750 300 18 13 40 27 18 12
640-790 320 17 12 40 27 18 12
680-830 340 16 12 35 24 18 12
720-870 360 15 11 35 24 18 12
760-910 380 14 10 35 24 18 12
1) 1 and t mean test specimens mainly parallel to, respectively transverse to the principle direction of the grain flow.
tor Shafting anil Machinery
C 100 scope
101 The rules of this subsection apply to forgings for
shafting and machinery.
102 This subsection also applies to rolled bars with diam-
eter up to 250 min used for the manufacture of shafts, bolts
and other components of similar form by machining oper-
ations.
201 Provision is made in this subsectiou for shafts and
machine components produced from killed carbon and car-
bon-manganese steels and alloy steels.
dimensions and requirements on mechanical and toughness
properties of the component and in compliance with ap"
with the overall limits given in Table C!:
.- -,--,-
Table CI Chemical composition
%
maximum, %
C, maximum
0,60 2) 3)
Cu 0,30
Si, maximum 0,45
Cr 0,30
Mn 0,30-1,50
Ni 0,40
P, maximum 0,040
S, maximum 0,040
Mo 0,15
ture the carbon content is not to exceed 0,23%, and the total
3) C-content up to 0,65% may be accepted after special consid-
eration.
303 For aIloy steel forgings the chemical composition of
ladle samples is to include the content of all aIloying ele-
ments and is to comply with the following overaIl limits and
Carbon
Silicon
maximum 0,45%
maximum 0,45 %
DET NORSKE YERITAS
of straight shafting, bolts, studs and other components of
similar shape. A batch is to consist of either:
- Material from the same piece or rolled length provided
that where thifi is cut into individual lengths, these are all
heat treated in the same furnace charge, or
- Bars of the same diameter and cast, heat treated in the
same furnace charge and with a total mass not exceeding
2,5 tons.
707 Where batch testing combined with hardness testing
is required, the variation in hardness on an individual forg-
ing or in a batch of forgings is to comply with the following:
Specified minimwn
Difference in hardness
tensile strength
Nlmm
2
(Brinell number)
< 600 not more than 25
2: 600
not more than 35
< 900
2: 900 not more than 42
708 For forgings where the method of manufacture is
specially approved according to 205, details' concerning
mechanical testing are to be agreed on.
A 800 Tensile testing at elevated temperature
stress at elevated temperature is required according to E503,
The straining rate when approaching the stress values is to
be controlled within 0,1 to 0,3 strain per minute.
802 The test pieces are to be cut with their principal axes
parallel to the principal direction of deformation. At least
one tensile test is to be made on material from each cast.
A 900 Retest procedures
901 Procedures to be used for retesting are to be in ac-
thoroquiromontoof Ch.lSood , ..
1001 Before acceptance, all forgings are to be presented to
the Surveyors for visual examination. Where applicable, this
is to include the examination of internal surfaces and bores.
Unless otherwise agreed the verification of dimensions is the
responsibility of the manufacturer.
1002 When specified in the subsequent subsections or in
other relevant part of the rules for design and construction
or otherwise required, appropriate non-destructive examina-
tion is also to be carried out. The testing procedures, extent
and acceptance criteria are to be to the satisfaction of the
Society and in accordance with any specific requirements
of the approved plan.
1003 The manufacturer is to provide a statement that non
destructive examination has been carried out with satisfac-
tory results. This statement is to include a -brief reference to
the techniques and to the operators's qualification.
1004 The NDE-operators are to document formal training
and experience, preferably by being certified in accordance
with a certification scheme accepted by the Society.
1005 Magnetic particle and liquid penetrant examination is
to be carried out when the forgings are in the finished ma-
chined condition. Magnetic particle examination is to be
ment. Permanent magnets are not permitted.
A.C.-equipment is preferably to be used. The equipment
used for MPE must be able to produce a magnetic rms tan-
gential field strength of at least 2 kA!m. Examination with
the magnetic field shifted in at least two directions (90
turned) on each area is to be carried out. When using prods,
care is to be taken to avoid bums and hard spots. Prods are
to be tipped with lead or aluminium alloy.
1006 Ultrasonic examination is to be carried out following
the fmal heat treatment and at a stage when the forging has
been machined to a condition suitable for this type of ex-
amination. Both radial and axial scanning is to be carried
out when appropriate for the shape and dimensions of the
forging being examined. Unless otherwise agreed this ex-
amination is to be carried out and reported by the manufac-
turer although the surveyor may request to be present.
1007 When magnetic particle examination of certain com-
ponents is required, detailed specification with respect to
extent of examination and acceptance criteria will be speci-
fied in the relevant rules for design or in a Manufacturing
Survey Arrangement.
A 1100 Rectification of defect forgings
1101 Small surface imperfections may be removed by
grinding or by chipping and grinding. Complete elimination
of these imperfections is to be proven by magnetic particle
or dye penetrant examination. At the discretion of the sur-
veyor, the resulting shallow grooves or depressions can be
accepted, provided that they are blended by grinding.
1102 Repairs by welding are not generally permitted, but
special consideration may be given to such repairs where
they are of minor nature and in areas of low working
stresses.
In such cases, full details of the proposed repair and subse-
quent inspection procedures are to be submitted for the ap-
proval by the surveyor prior to commencing the proposed
rectification. A statement and!or sketch detailing the extent
and location of all repairs, together with details of the post
weld treatment and non-destructive examination is to be
provided for record purposes.
-, ,,', ,----. , ,--- -'
A 1200 Certification
1201 For forgings which have been accepted, a material
certificate is to be' issued. The level of documentation re-
quired, i.e. NV -certificate, works certificate, etc., is given
under the relevant part of the rules. The certificate is at least
to contain the particulars stated in Ch.l Sec.!.
B. Forgings for General Application
B 100 Scope
forgings intended for use in ship structures, rudder members
and equipment, e.g. sternframes and rudder horns, rudder
stocks and pintles, anchors and anchor shackles.
201 Forgings for general structure may be produced from
carbon, carbon.,.manganese, low-alloy or alloy steels. The
requirements given in 300 to 500 apply to carbon and car-
bon-manganese steels only.
The use of low alloy and alloy steels is subject to consider-
ation in each separate case. Where the use of alloy steel is
proposed, the specifications are to be submitted to the Soci-
ety for approval.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
)

J
J

C)

"
8
be controlled within 0, I to 0,3 % strain per minute.
The intenrals used for estimation of strain rate from meas-
urements of strain are not to exceed 6 seconds.
transverse to the final direction of rolling.
At least one tensile test is to be made on material from each
cast. The pieces are to be taken from the thickest plate of the
cast.
303 When no special test temperature is specified in the
order, the tests are to be carried out at 300C.
401 For material thickness 6 mm and above, impact testing
is to be carried out at the prescribed temperatures.
The average value from each set of three impact test pieces
are to comply with the appropriate requirements in tables
B3, B4, B5, C3, C4, and D2. Further, only one individual
value within each set may be below the specified minimum
average value, but not lower than 70 % of this value.
402 The required minimum values specified in B, C and
D refer to standard test pieces 10 x 10 mm. Where it is
impossible to use a standard test piece, the larger of the
following pieces is to be used: 10 x 7,5 mm, 10 x 5 mm.
The impact values required are then reduced to respectively
5!6 and 2!3 of the required values for standard test pieces.
403 The impact test pieces are to be situated so that the
distance between the centre line of the test piece and the
plate surface is not less than 114 of the plate thickness,
where practicable.
404 For plates and flats having a width of 600 mm or more
the test pieces are to be cut with their longitudinal axes
transverse to the final direction of rolling. For other pro-
ducts the test pieces may be taken transverse or parallel to
the fmal direction of rolling.
Requirements for test pieces cut with their longitudinal axes
transverse and parallel to the final direction of rolling are
stated in the tables as .f(transverse and .f(longitudinal re-
spectively.
.. ,- -- .. -. - - .-- . ,----- . -- ,,- - ---, -,-
405 The notch is to be cut in a face of the test pieces which
was originally perpendicular to the rolled surface.
406 For plates at least one set (3 pieces) of tests is to be
made for each tensile test. When the test temperature is
-50C or lower, one set of tests is to be taken from each
end of the rolled plate regardless of the plate weight. .
For sections at least one set of tests is to be made for each
tensile test. When the test temperature is -50C or lower,
one set of tests is to be made for every 2 tonnes or part
thereof of each type from the same heat and with thickness
variation less than 5 mm. .
501 When drop weight test is required according to C302,
one set of tests (2 test pieces) is to be taken from the thickest
plate alternatively section of each cast. The extent of testing
may be reduced subject to a thorough statistical documenta-
tion.
E 600 Testing of throngh thickness properties
601 When steel with improved through thickness proper-
ties (Z-steel) is required or specified in the order, the mate-
rials are to be tested as detailed in Sec.! E400.
701 When intercrystalline corrosion testing is required, the
test is to be carried out according to ASTM, A 262, Practice
E, Copper-Copper Sulfate-Sulfuric Acid Test or another
F. Inspection, Dimensional Tolerances and Sur-
face Condition
F 100 Inspection
responsibility of the steelmaker who has to verify that the
filled prior to despatch. The steelmaker is also responsible
Acceptance by the surveyors of material which later is found
to be defective is not to absolve the steelmaker from this
responsibility .
102 Plates and other' products are to be subjected to a
thorough, visual inspection on both sides by the manufac-
turer to ensure freedom from defects and harmful imperfec-
tions. Examination by means of suitable non- destructive
methods such as magnetic particle, dye penetrant and!or ul-
trasonic inspection may be required.
All plates are to be accessible to the surveyor for fmal in-
spection and checking.
F 200 Tolerances
201 No minus tolerance is permitted in the thickness of
plates intended for boilers, pressure vessels and low tem-
perature service. For stainless steels intended for chemical
tankers without pressure rating no plate is to vary more than
0,30 mm or 6% under the thickness specified, whichever is
the lesser. '
JhJ'l minJ!sJQIJ'lr!!IKe. isJlt iltllkC_oSJt<!!Ke,wi!!L
a recognized national or international standard.
301 All products are to display a workmanlike fmish free
from defects and imperfections which may impair their
proper workability and use.
302 Surface defects may be removed by local grinding.
Normally the thickness beneath the ground area is not to be
less than the nominal thickness of the material. Repair of
deeper defects by grinding or welding will be subject to
special consideration in each separate case, and is not to be
carried out unless a detailed repair procedure is submitted
and approved.
303 When defects are removed by grinding, complete
elimination of the defects is to be proven by suitable non-
destructive examination of the affected area.
304 Depressions caused by grinding are to show a smooth
transition to the surface.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
SECTION 3
CLAD STEEL PLATES
A. General
A 100 Scope
B. Base Material
B 100 Genem!
C. Cladding Metal
C 1 ()() General
Contents
D. Testing
D 100 Genem!
D 200 Tensi!e testing
D 300 Impact testing
D 400 Bend testing
D 500 Shear testing
D 600 Ultrasonic testing
D 700 Corrosion testing
D 800 Inspection - tolerances
E. Repair and Rejection
E 100 Surface defects
E 200 Rejection
F. IdentiflC3tion of Materials
F 100 Branding
A. General
A 100 Scope
101 This section specifies the requirements for clad steel
plates consisting of a base material and a thinner layer
(cladding metal) on one or both sides, continuously and in-
tegiiHYI,iiildeiC--- .... - -----
201 The plates are to be supplied in that condition of heat
treatment which is most appropriate for both types of mate-
riaL The material is not to be subjected to any kind of heat
treatment by the user, beyond what is recommended by the
manufacturer and approved by the Society _ The heat treat-
ment is to be checked by the surveyor.
B. Base Material
B 100 General
101 Any steel which is suitable for joining with the clad-
ding metal may be accepted as base material, provided that
the process has no adverse effects on the finished plate. If
the plate is intended for participation in the vessel's strength,
the base material is at least to satisfy the requirements for
corresponding hull materials. If the plates are intended for
boilers or pressure vessels, the base material is to at least to
satisfy the requiremenis for materials for such components.
Work's certificate stating chemical composition is to be
supplied by the manufacturer.
C. Cladding Metal
C 100 General
101 The thickness of the cladding metal is subject to ap-
proval in each case.
201 Cladding metal of austenitic stainless steel is to be
delivered either with a low carbon content, i.e.
0,03%, or it is to be stabilized as stated in Sec.2 Table D!
for steel NV 32! and NV 347. Other stainless steels, nickel
and nickel-base alloys will be accepted, when they are suited
for the intended service.
202 Works' certificate is to be supplied by the manufac-
turer. The manufacturer is to guarantee that the analysis
complies with the requirements of the specification. Check
analysis is to be made ifrequired by the Societr.
D. Testing
D 100 General
101 Tensile and bend test pieces are to be of the flat type.
The test pieces are normally to have the full thickness of the
plate. Where the thickness of the plate is more than 50 mm,
or if necessary for the capacity of the testing machine, the
thickness of the test piece may be reduced by machining.
On single clad plates, both sides of the test piece are to be
machined to maintain the same ratio of cladding metal to
base steel as in the plate, but the cladding metal need not
be reduced to less than 3 mm. Test pieces of double clad
plates may be reduced by dividing. In this case, both halves
are to be tested. Impact test pieces, if any, are to be taken
. from .the .base.male-rial
D 200 Tensile testing
201 One set of tensile tests consists of two tests:
One test from the full clad plate which is to have a tensile
strength Rm not less than derived from the following for-
mula:
SI Rml + S2
R
m2 N/mm2
Rm
where:
Rml = minimum tensile strength of base metal
Rm2 = minimum tensile strength of the cladding metal
S = nominal thickness of the clad plate = SI + S2
S 1 = nominal thickness of the base metal
S2 = nominal thickness of the cladding metal
One test of the base metal after removal of the cladding
metal. The test is to satisfy the requirements for the base
material.
202 From hull steel, one set of tensile tests is to be taken
from every fifth plate, and at least one set from each cast
and each thickness interval (see Sec.! E200). From steel for
pressure vessels, one set of tensile tests is to be taken from
each plate.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
)

J J
:) )
)
J
ing or further forging. Alternatively, pieces from hollow
cast ingots may be used. The wall thickness of the forging
is to be not more than one half of the thickness of the pre-
pared hollow piece from which it was formed. Where this
is not practicable the forging procedure is to be such as to
ensure that adequate work is given to the piece prior to
punching, etc. This may be either longitudinal or upset
working of not less than 2: 1.
205 For certain components, where grain flow is specified
in the most favourable direction with regard to the mode of
stressing in service, the proposed method of manufacture
requires special approval by the Society. In such cases, tests
will be required to demonstrate that satisfactory mechanical
properties and grain flow are obtained.
206 The shaping of forgings or rolled slabs and billets by
flame cutting, scarfing or arc-air gouging is to be undertaken
in accordance with recognized good practice and, unless
otherwise approved, is to be carried out before the final heat
treatment. Preheating is to be employed when necessitated
by the composition andlor thickness of the steel. For certain
components, subsequent machining of all flame cut surfaces
may be required.
207 When two Or more forgings are joined by welding to
form a composite component, details of the proposed weld-
ing procedure are to be submitted to the Society for ap-
proval. Welding procedure tests may be required.
A 300 Quality
301 All forgings are to be free from surface or internal
defects, such as flakes, cracks, shrinkage cavities, segre-
gation, peripheral blow holes and major non-metallic inclu-
sions, which would be detrimental to their proper application
in service.
40 1 All forgings are to be made from killed steel and the
requirements of the subsequent subsections. Where general
.. o\lurall.limitg ,. are" J" the _f.'-hf',micaLcnmpnsjtinn, .is... tn. __ -
be appropriate for the type of steel, dimensions and required
mechanical properties of the forgings being manufactured.
402 At the option of the manufacturer, suitable grain re-
fining elements such as aluminium, niobium or vanadium
may be added, if not otherwise specified. The content of
such elements is to be reported in the ladle analysis.
501 All forgings are to be properly heat treated to refme
the grain structure and to obtain the required mechanical
properties.
502 Where forgings are to be quenched and tempered and
cannot be hot worked close to shape, they are to be suitably
rough machined or flame cut prior to being subjected to this
treatment.
503 All hot forming operations are to be conducted prior
to the fmal heat treatment. If for some reason a forging is
subsequently heated for further hot forming, the forging is
to be re-heat treated.
504 If any straightening operation is performed after the
fmal heat treatment, a subsequent stress relieving heat treat-
ment to avoid harmful residual stresses is to be carried out,
43
A 600 Test material
601 The relevant paragraphs of Ch.! apply.
602 Test material sufficient for the required tests and pre-
ferably also for possible re-test purposes, is to be provided
with a cross-sectional area of not less than that part of the
forging which it represents. The test material is to be integral
with each forging except in the case of small forgings which
may be batch tested according to 705.
(e.g surface hardened parts), the test material is not to be
cut from a forging until all heat treatment has been com-
pleted.
604 The result of the tensile test is to meet the relevant
requirements given in the subsections B, C, D, E, and F,
alternatively in the approved specification.
A 700 Mechanical testing at ambient temperature
701 Number and orientation of test pieces are to comply
with the relevant requirements given in the subsections B,
C, D, E, and F.
Where no special requirements are stated in the subsection
or otherwise specified, at least one set of test pieces con-
sisting of one tensile and three impact test pieces is to be
taken from each forging or batch of forgings. The test pieces
are to be cut with their axis mainly parallel to the principal
direction of deformation (longitudinal tests) provided the
shape and dimensions make it possible. Where a forging
exceeds both 4 tons in mass and 3 m in length, one set of
test pieces is to be taken from each end.
702 Where more than one tensile test is taken from a
forging, the variation in tensile strength is not to exceed the
values given below:
Specified minimum Difference in
tensile strength tensile strength
Nlmm
2
Nlmm2
< 600 70
;:: 600
100
< 900
., - --" -
2: '90"6
... -- --120 . - .0. __ -
703 When a forging is subsequently divided into a number
of components, all of which are heat treated together in the
Same furnace charge, for test purposes this may be regarded
as one forging and the number of tests required is to be re-
lated to the total length and mass of the original multiple
forging.
704 Where possible, the distance from the surface of the
forging to the nearest surface of the specimen is to be at least
10 % of the diameter or the thickness of the forging, see 202
and 502.
705 Where a number of small forgings of about the same
size is made from one cast and heat treated in the same fur-
nace charge, batch testing procedures may be adopted using
one of the forgings for test purposes or alternatively using
separately forged test samples. These test samples are to
have thickness and a reduction ratio similar to that used for
the forgings which they represent. They are to be properly
identified and heat treated along with the forgings. At least
one set of tests is to be taken from each batch. Hardness
tests may additionally be required under the different sub-
sections B, C, D, E and F.
706 A batch testing procedure may also be used for hot
rolled bars not exceeding 250 mm diameter, which are in-
tended for the manufacture by machining operations only
DET NORSKE VERITAS
SECTION 5
STEEL FORGINGS
A. General
A 100 Scope
A 200 Manufacture
A 300 Quality
Contents
A 600 Test material
B 100 Scope
B j 300 Chemical composition
C. Forgings for Shafting and Machinery
C 100 Scope
C 500 Test material
D. Forgings for Gearing
D 100 Scope
D 200 Manufacture
D 30d Chemical composition
D 500 Test material for nonnalized and tempered, and quenched
and tempered forgings
D 600 Test material for forgings intended for carburising and
hardening
and--l\bt:hine
ery Piping Systems
E 100 Scope
E 400 Test material
E 500 Mechanical properties
Systems Exposed to Low Temperatures
F 100 Scope
F 200 Type of steel
F 500 Test material
A. General
A 100
101 This section specifies the requirements for steel forg-
ings for structural applications, machinery, boilers and
pressure vessels and piping systems for high, ambient and
low temperature service.
The requirements in this section are also applicable to rolled
slabs and billets used as a substitute for forgings and to
rolled bars used for the manufacture (by machining oper-
ations only) of shafts, bolts, studs and other components of
similar shape, as well as forgings from which blanks for
various may be cut out.
102 Any additional requirements given for specific com-
ponents by the relevant rules for.design and construction are
to be complied with.
A 200 Manufacture
201 Forgings are to be made by works which have been
approved by the Society. The forgings are to be manufac-
tured from killed steel made by an approved process.
For forgings with specified minimum ultimate tensile
strength SOO N/mm
2
or above, the molten steel is to be
vacuum treated prior to or during pouring of the ingot in
order to remove objectionable gases, particularly hydrogen
and oxygen, and improve steel cleanness.
The forgings are to be made from ingots, or from blooms
or billets forged from ingots. The ingots are to be cast in
chill moulds with the larger cross-section up, and with effi-
cient feeder heads. From the top and bottom of the ingot
adequate discards are to be made to ensure freedom from
piping and harmful segregations in the fmished forgings. In
addition to the t9P and bottom discards, surface and skin
defects, which may be detrimental during the subsequent
working and forming operations, are also to be removed.
202 The forgings are to be gradually and uniformly hot
worked by hammer or press forging, and are to be formed
as closely as possible to the finished shape and size. The
plastic deformation is to be such as to assure soundness,
uniformity of structure and satisfactory mechanical proper-
ties after heat treatment. For components where the defor-
mation is mainly longitudinal, the total reduction ratio is
minimum to be in accordance with Table AI. For highly
loaded components higher reduction ratios may be required.
Table Al Reduction ratio
Method-of manufacture
"- - - "Totii(reauction
ralio 1)2)3)
.
Made directly from ingots or from forged 3: 1 where L>D
blooms or billets 1,5:1 where L<D
Made from rolled products 4: 1 where L>D
2:1 where L<D
1) Land D are the length and diameter respectively of the part
of the forging under consideration.
2) The reduction ratio is to be calculated with reference to the
average cross-sectional area of the ingot. Where an ingot is
initially upset, this reference area may be taken as the average
cross-sectional are after this operation.
3) For rolled bars used as a substitute for forgings the reduction
ratio is not to be less than 6: I, unless otherwise approved.
203 Where disc type forgings such as gear wheels are
made by upsetting, the thickness of any part of the disc is
not to be more than one half of the length of the billet from
which it was formed provided that this billet has received
an initial forging reduction of at least 1,5: 1. Where the piece
used for upsetting has been cut directly from an ingot or
where the billet has received an initial reduction of less than
1,5: I, the thickness of any part of the disc is not to be more
than one third of the length of the original piece.
204 Rings and other types of hollow forgings are to be
made from pieces cut from ingots or billets and which have
been suitably punched, bored or trepanned prior to expand-
DET NORSKE VERITAS
,
/

J

J
:J
J J
301 If impact tests are required, they are to comply with
the requirements specified for the base material in each case.
D 400 Bend testing
401 The bend test pieces are to be bent lS0'C around a
former without showing signs of cracking or loosening of
the cladding metal from the base material. The diameter of
the former is to be twice the plate thickness when the tensile
strength of the plate is less than 490 N/mm
2
, and three times
the thickness of the plate when the tensile strength is more
than 490 N/mm
2
. Two bend tests are to be taken from each
plate. On single clad plates, one test piece is to be bent with
the cladding in tension and the other with the cladding in
compression. On double clad plates, the test pieces are to
be bent, so that both cladding metals are tested both ways.
D 500 Shear testing
501 If a shear test is required to decide the shear strength
between the base and the cladding metal, one shear test is
to be made from each plate in accordance with ASTM A
264. The shear strength is to be at least 140 N/mm
2
.
601 To check the bonding, ultrasonic testing is to be
made. If bonding defects are found, their extent is to be
clearly marked and reported to the surveyor. Rules for re-
pairs are given in EIOO and E203. The area adjacent to the
edges of each plate is to be checked 100 % for a width of at
least 50 mm. Further tests are to be made at points equally
distributed on the surface with maximum intervals of 150
mm.
701 If it is required to determine the resistance of the
cladding metal against intergranular corrosion, testing is to
be carried out according to ASTM A 262, Practice E (Cop-
per - Copper Sulphate - Sulfuric Acid Test) or another
Guidance note:
By- aadi"rig -grarrl""deCti6iytlc' co'i:ipeY to 100U
millilitres solution, the boiling time can be reduced to 15 hours.
The base material is to be removed before the testing.
---e-n-d-o-f--G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---
Hules tor January 1
801 Each plate is to be surveyed before delivery. The
plates are to satisfy the requirements for minus tolerances
on thickness as stipulated in Sec.2 F200. The thickness
control is to be carried out by the manufacturer and the re-
sults submitted to the surveyor.
101 Minor surface defects and bonding defects which do
not exceed the limits specified in 203, may be repaired by
means of welding. Bonding defects along the edges are to
be repaired.
Before welding, the defects are to be reported to the sur-
veyor for approval of the repair.
Approved filler metal and welding processes are to be used.
E 200 Rejection
201 If one of the mechanical tests does not satisfy the
specified requirements, two new tests may be taken, both
of which have to satisfy the requirements.
202 If the results of the chemical analysis deviate from the
specifications, the results are to be submitted to the Society
for decision whether the plates will be accepted.
203 The plate will be rejected if:
- a repair will cause a weakening of the plate.
- a bonding defect exceeds 4 dm
2
for plates up to 15 mm
in thickness and S dm
2
for plates over 15 mm or several
bonding defects amounting to more than 2 % of the sur-
face of the plate revealed.
F. Identification of Materials
F 100 Branding
101 The plates are to be marked according to the di-

stamped on the .surface of the base plate. On double clad
plates, all marking is done with a colour seal rather than by
stamping.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
tor :ShiPS, January 1
SECTION 4
STEEL TUBES, PIPES AND FITTINGS
A. General
A 100 Scope
A 200 Manufacture
A 300 Quality
Contents
A 400 Dimensional tolerances
A 800 Test material
A 900 Visual and non-destructive testing
A 1000 Hydraulic test
A 11 00 Re-testing
A 1200 Identification
B. Tubes and Pipes for Ordinary Pressure Systems
B 100 Scope
B 200 Manufacture
C. Stainless Steel Pressure Tubes and Pipes
C 100 Scope
C 200 Manufacture
C 600 Corrosion testing
D. Tubes and Pipes for Low Temperature Services
D 100 Scope
D 200 Manufacture
E. Tubes and Pipes for Boilers, Heat Exchangers and Super-
heaters
E 100 Scope
--1100
F. Fittings
F 100 Scope
F 200 Materials
F 300 Manufacture
F 500 Mechanical testing
F 600 Hardness testing
F 700 Corrosion testing
F 800 Surface fmish and dimensions
F 900 Marking and certification
A. General
A 100 Scope
101 This Section specifies the requirements for seamless
and welded steel pipes, tubes and fittings intended for pres-
sure, boiler, heat exchanger, superheater, chemicals and low
temperature services.
102 The products are to be in accordance with relevant
ISO Standards or recognized regional or national standards
provided that these standards give reasonable equivalence to
the ISO requirements included in this section. The given
standard must also comply with the additional requirements
given in the following subsections.
A 200 Manufacture
201 Pipes, tubes and fittings are to be manufactured by
works approved by the Society. Pipes, tubes and fittings
may be manufactured by any of the following methods:
- hot finished seamless
- cold finished seamless
- electric resistance or induction welded
- cold fmished electric resistance or induction welded
- electric fusion welded.
202 Welded tubes, pipes and fittings are normally not to
be used for working pressure above 32 bar or design tem-
perature above 300C. Further, they are not accepted for
liquefied gasl?S with temperature below -10 C. These limits
may be exceeded provided that an automatic non-destructive
testing of the weld is carried out. The whole length of the
weld is to be tested. Such tubes and pipes are considered
equivalent to seamless types.
203 'Tubes and pipes intended as strength members of
structures are to satisfy the requirements for material for the
structure in question, e.g. for hull and engine material.
A 300 Quality
301 The pipes and tubes are to have smooth internal and
external surfaces consistent with the method of manufacture.
302 The pipes and tubes are to have a workmanlike fmish
but small imperfections are permissible, provided that the
thickness remains within the tolerance limits. Small laps,
cracks, slivers, scratches or other surface defects may be
removed by grinding within the minimum permissible wall
thickness.
.RePJl,ir ,
The pipes and tubes are to be reasonably straight. Tubes and
pipes are to be delivered with nominally square-cut ends,
free from excessive burrs.
The tolerances on the outside diameter and the wall thick-
nesses of tubes and pipes are to be in accordance with the
relevant ISO-standard or an acceptable national standard.
501 The requirements for the chemical composition of la-
dle samples are to be in accordance with the ISO-require-
ments detailed in subsequent subsections or an acceptable
national or international standard.
If a product analysis is taken, the analysis is to be within the
permissible deviations from the specified ladle composition.
601 Tubes and pipes are to be supplied in the heat treat-
ment conditions indicated in Table Al if not otherwise spe-
cified in the following subsections.
The number of tests to be performed and the mechanical
properties of the tubes and pipes covered by this section are
DET NORSKE VERITAS

:)
J .J
J J
J
)
F. Fittings
F 100 Scope
101 These rules are applicable to seamless and welded,
carbon, carbon-manganese, low alloy and alloy steel fittings
for the applications covered by subsections B, C, D and E.
F 200 Materials
201 The materials to be used as basis for the manufacture
of fittings are to meet the requirements of the relevant sub-
section, with respect to chemical composition, mechanical
properties and manufacture.
202 The materials used for the manufacture of fittings are
at least to be delivered with an inspection documentation
corresponding to a works certificate.
F 300 Manufacture
301 Fittings may be hot or cold formed from tubes and
pipes or may be welded from plate material. The Society is
to be informed about the method of manufacture.
302 Where fittings are made by a welding process, details
o( the process are to be forwarded to the Society for ap-
proval. A procedure test may be requested by the surveyor.
401 After the forming process all fittings are to be supplied
in, the heat treated condition specified for the material in
question (see Table AI).
402 For fittings in carbon and carbon-manganese steels
manufactured by hot forming where normalizing is speci-
fied, subsequent heat treatment may be dispensed with if the
manufacturer can give evidence of satisfactory properties
and structure after hot forming.
403 Fittings manufactured by cold forming are generally
to undergo renewed heat treatment. If fittings are to be de-
livered in the cold formed condition the manufacturer must
prove that the materials possess the required properties.
5ul -'The'-fitlirtg!i" ate' ib'oe' presEiiilia-rO'f-msling- iii
as defmed in A800. Two fittings from each batch are to be
selected for testing.
The test samples are to be from the same heat and are to
undergo, the same forming process and heat treatment as the
fitting itself.
. 4- i
502 For each fitting the following tests are to be carried
out:
Seamless fittings:
- one tensile test
- one flattening test or bend test or ring tensile test
- one drift or one ring expanding test where appropriate.
Welded fittings:
- one tensile test on the base material
--.:. one tensile test on the weld for pipes with D mm
- two flattening tests or bend tests or one ring tensile test
(ERWand IW)
- one drift or ring expanding test (ERW and IW)
- two bend tests (SAW).
503 If fittings are to be used in low temperature systems
where impact testing is required, impact testing is to be
carried out in accordance with the appropriate requirements
of subsection C500 and D500.
504 The results of all mechanical tests are to comply with
the requirements of the relevant part of this section, or sat-
isfy the required characteristics specified for the starting
material used (e.g. plates).
505 For fittings where tensile testing is not possible, this
test is to be carried out on material from the tube before
forming.
601 Hardness testing is to be carried out on 10 % of the test
unit, and on at least 3 fittings where the numbers are less
than 30. The difference in hardness value within the unit
tested may not be greater than 30 Brinell units.
701 Where fittings of austenitic stainless steels are to be
used in systems where corrosion testing of the pipes are re-
quired, testing is to be carried out in accordance with C600.
F 800 Surface finish and dimensions
801 The quality and dimensions of the fittings are subject
to the same requirements as pipes of the same dimensions,
ref:A300lititj-'A'lOO;' " , ,- --- "
901 The fitting is to be marked in accordance with A1200
and the level of documentation is to be be in accordance
with A1300.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
H.wes Tor ::'n1PS, January J ::t::to

.s.
"" ;
]
B
....
'i'

l I .... '" '"" '"" '"" '"" . 'ii '"" '""
NNNN
-<
Irl Irl Irl Irl
('\"l('\"l('\"l('\"l
G' Irllrl
"'''''''
'"
Vi

51
1i'
';;

l

Q
'<;>

.-

""
'"
C
A
(() (() (() (()
on
C
\0 \0 \0 .c:
-8
0
., '"
c$ ci' (()(()(()
A VI .!j
'0 .,
ci'
A VI
'0
ci' ci'
A VI
Irl Irl Irl Irl
........................

000 -i
.......................

t

000
NNN 1

0 0 0 0 0 0 -i
('\"l ('\"l ('\"l ('\"l ('\"l ('\"l ('\"l -0
I I
I I
C 0\ r-- Irl Irl Irl Irl Irl
'"
51

51
!
'<;>

.-

._Q
""
-

---- ...... -- ......
A U
<l'i
'0 g
ci IrlNOO 000 E
"VI ............ _- --- 4)

'0
C
VI
NO(()(()
--

-5
c

.n
RRR '5
1-1-1- E
3
f-o Eo-< Eo-<
vvv

I I
NN- !
('\"l0'l-r--
N_N_
1-

;,
"
8'
E
:1

oS

i
-

51

"-
ts

:ll

"

::0
l
"0

3
i
c

"0
.s
DET NORSKE VERITAS
\
')
]

N!j
Z
o
-
)

)
,:]
.v ...... """ ... ', ...... , J ..........
to be in accordance with the tables contained in this section
or, where applicable, in the relevant standard.
ance with the appropriate requirements of Ch.1..
A 800 Test material
803 Ring tests may be carried out in conformity with the
following ISO standards:
801 Pipes, tubes and fittings are to be presented for test in
batches. A batch is formed by tubes of the same size, the
same steel grade, the same manufacturing process and the
same heat treatment conditions. The size of a batch is to
be in accordance with Table A2 or the relevant standard if
not otherwise stated in the following subsections.
Table Al Heat treatment conditions
Bend test 8491
Flattering test 8492
Drift expanding test 8493
Flanging test 8494
Ring expanding test 8495
Ring tensile test 8495
or other equivalent standards.
Steel Reference Austenitizing Tempering Subcritical
grade heat temperature temperature Annealing
Quenching and tempering
Hardening Tempering
treatment 1) temperature
temperature temperature
c c
C
C C
Unalloyed steel
--------------
lW320
NorSA
2
) 870 to 940 -
640 to 700 - -
TS 360/TW 360
NorSA
2
) 870 to 940 - 640 to 700 - -
TS 410/lW 410
NorSA
2
) 870 to 940 - 640 to 700 - -
TS 410-1 N. 870 to 900
- - - -
TS 430/lW 430
NorSA2) 870 to 940 - 640 to 700 - -
TS 460-l/lW 460 N 880 to 910 - -
- -
TS 500/lW 500
NorSA
2
) 870 to 940 -
640 to 700 - -
TS 510/lW 510 N 880 to 910 - - - -
TS 6/lW6 (N) N 900 to 940 - - - -
TS 6/lW 6(QT) QT - - - 890 to 930 600 to 680
TS IO/lW 10 N 890 to 930 -
- - -
TS 15/lW IS N 890 to 930
- - - -
Alloy steel
-----------
TS 380 N 910 to 960
- - - -
FA 3)
860 to 960 - - - -
.TS 410-3 N&T 920 to 960 660 to 750 -
- -
FA 3)
860 to 960 -
- - -
TS 4104 N&T 920 to 960 660 to 750 - - -
FA 3)
860 to 960 - -
- -
TS 430
FA 3)
850 to 950 - - - -
. TSA4Q .. . _. .
660 to 720 - -
.
-
.. __ .... ,- ....
- . ---- -- - ----_.-
TS 450'1 N 910 to 940 -
-
TS 450-2 TC
FA 3)
860 to 960 - -
- -
TE N&T 900 to 960 650 to 750 - - -
TS 460-2 N&T 930 to 980 650 to 720 - -
-
TS 500 TC
FA 3)
850 to 950 - - - -
TE N&T 900 to 1000 700 to 800 - - -
TS 590 7) N&T 1050 to 1125 760 to 820 - - -
TS 610 N 880 to 980 580 to 680
'-
-
-
TS 690 N&T 1020 to 1170 680 to 780 - - -
26 CrMo 4
(il)
- -
- 830 to 860 600 to 680
11 MnNi 5 3
890 to 940 (580 to 640) - - -
13 MnNi 6 3
N 4)
890 to 940 (580 to 640) - - -
TS 43/lW 43
QT5)
830 to 880 580 to 640 - 820 to 880 580 to 660
12 Ni 19
QT
5
)
800 to 850 580 to 640 - 800 to 850 580 to 660
TS 45/lW 45 QT 880 to 930 - - 770 to 820 540 to 600
1) N - Normalizing; SA - Subcritical annealing; QT - Quenching and tempering; FA - Full annealing; N & T - Normalizing and tempering
2) Tubes and pipes for ordinary pressure systems may be delivered in the subcritical aIUlcaled condition.
3) This heat treatment may replaced by isothermal annealing at the discretion of the manufacturer.
4) Tempering may be necessary after normalizing.
5) If the product dimensions so permit, normalizing (with subsequent tempering if necess_aey) may be carried out.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
nun:;::> lUI ..:JIIII-'::>, ..... Olluoly I.;,I.;.IV
Table A2 Number of tubes or fittings per batcb
Outside diameter Number of
range tubes or fittings per batch 1 )
mm
D:5 114,3 400
114,3 < D :5 323,9 200
323,9 < D
100
1) Any residual fraction the batch is as a batch.
-
901 All pipes for class I and II pressure systems (for which
a NV -certificate is requested) are to be presented for visual
examinatiC?n and verification of dimensions. In particular,
their conformity with the requirements of 300 is to be con-
firmed.
1001 Each tnbe and pipe is to be subjected to a hydraulic
test at the maoufactnrer's work.
1002 The hydraulic test pressure is to be determined by the
following equation:
where
P=20 g
D
P = test pressure, in bars
D = nominal outside diameter, in mm
S 80 % of the specified minimum yield stress
(ReH or RpO,2) in N/mm
2
for ferritic steels and 70
% of the specified minimum proof stress (Rpl,O) in
N/mm
2
for austenitic steels.
1003 The test pressure is to be maintained for sufficient
time to permit proof and inspection, and for at least 5 s.
The tnbe is to withstand the test without showing leaks or
visible deformation.
Unless otherwise agreed, the manufactnrer's certificate of
slilisfliCllli'Y hylimulic 'le,1 will\J".ttcpleu.
1004 Other pressure tests, such as p,eumatic test under
water, may in special cases subject to agreement be substi-
tnted for. the hydraulic pressure tests.
1005 Subject to special approval, either an automatic ultra-
sonic or eddy current test can be accepted in lieu of the hy-
draulic test.
A 1100 Re-testing
1101 If one or more of the sample method tests prove un-
satisfactory, the tnbe or pipe in question is rejected, and
twice as many new pipes or tnbes of the batch in question
tisfactory results. If not, the whole batch is rejected. A re-
newed heat treatment of the batch and subsequent retestiog
in the same way as for the first time. All results are to be
satisfactory, if not, the whole batch will berejected.
1201 Pipes and tnbes are to be clearly marked by the man-
ufactnrer in accordance with the requirements of Ch.l
Sec.!.
1301 For tnbes and pipes which have been accepted, a ma-
terial certificate is to be issued. The level of documentation,
i.e. NV-certificate, works certificate, etc., is given under
the relevant part of the rules.
B. Tubes and Pipes for Ordinary Pressure Sys-
tems
B 100 Scope
101 These rules are applicable to seamless and welded
carbon and carbon-manganese steel tnbes and pipes for or-
dinary pressure systems. Tubes and pipes conforming to
this subsection are intended for use at ambient temperature.
B 200 Manufaclnre
201 Tubes and pipes are to be manufactnred seamless or
by a welding process, and may be hot or cold finished.
When welded, an automatic electric welding process, with
or without filler metal is to be applied.
ply with the requirements given in Table B 1. Steels for the
production of tobes and pipes covered by this subsection are
to be killed, except for steel TW 320 which may be semi-
killed.
B 400 Heat treabnent
401 Seamless tnbes and pipes are to be supplied in the
hot-fmished condition or one of the following heat treatment
conditions (see Table AI):
- annealed
- normalized
- normalized and tempered.
Welded tnbes and pipes are to be supplied in the normalized
condition.
' .. SOL ... TubJ>.s .. ano., pill".'l"an:JQtte Pfl:lie_nW_d. JRLksMg .i!L
batches as defmed in A800. The number of tnbes or pipes
per batch is to comply with the conditions given in Table
A2.
502 Two pipes are selected from each of at least two
batches. From the remaining batches one pipe from each
batch is selected for testing.
503 For each tnbe or pipe selected for testing the following
tests are to be carried out:
Seamless tnbes and pipes:
- one tensile test
- one flattening test or bend test or ring tensile test.
Welded tnbes and pipes:
- one tensile test on the weld for pipes with D 508 mm
- two flattening tests or two drift expanding tests or two
bend tests (ERW and lW)
the appropriate requirements given in Table B2, or an
equivalent national or international standard.
DEI NORSKE VERITAS
'J
J
J
J
'J
J
J
J
1ft
:C
.s:
]
]
i

................ _;,r
MC'lM,......,
'"
o .c
-5 g
..... i)
........ _- I 13'0 .-
M N N OD"C..... .,g
.S 4> 5 .....
.9
I I I ;g "'8 ... g.
I r---

E
c ...
222 Eaf 0 3

ooo.g5jo 8:1
coo
A
'i< 5-5 a
I I I 8-lj'o a
I
0]
o ...
InOO g -0
"E 5.g <I);
00-""01-<- --I-<
g
C'lA O\A 4>.0 II,) t;i jg

o 0 0 .D oA-5 > e
I I I 5-
I E 0<0=. C I)
o ::E oS
Vi -3 s:: 0 + C
(""lAA_CU ..... a3

VI".O. 'i!
o..c:::-;::::! C..c::.D
G
" a......... 0 ...
C til ..... ""s:<:
I I) ........ <o-c:s:tS
O.Dt-.
o OJ)
E E
rn
5
:::t 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 '<=0 :s e .9 C'l 4)
E C"1 M C"'"l ('f"I C"'"l M C"1 I) 0A
'- 0000 000 I-< 0
'"
...
!:l
<5
t:j ciOAOAO
A
OOOA x 'etoj 8..:>.. I)
I E 0.0-5
ts e:-9 c as 0 -0

0..

I.I"'IV'lV'lI.l"'l
C"""IC"""IC"""I("""l
0000
0-0-00-

CUO!:! :s CIl
.c.c C' _.
Irlll"lll"'l8 ......... 0 Q tl t::<I)
C"1C"1M:so ""c::lc: o
000 .g .... AO c::
OA 0-ci I) 0 :s til a E
.r:o.o 0 .......... 0.0
I .,
I .- 0""0
E
---0 __ ... a..c:: o...:s 11)
000\0 08 0 ... .::! c c::..e ....
MvV"i- 0\ 0 ..... ocu ..... C
_-.....;_-- 0""; Et!::- .s i:l 5'0 2
a 8 ]-0 8
- - -0 - - - 4,) T: -0 c:: ..... >
000........ 000 a 0'""' 0 ..... .,g s::
'-'--............. '-'-0 4> """ 0 0
000(""10 OOM c:: c::..8 -e
00_ N_ V-VI 00_ ........ ;:... .;: 0 .9'" 3
9'7'7"': 99 g 0-0 e 0
001.1"'10 00 ... o ... ..c
C"""I'<t\Oo 0 ou ..c ..... <n CIl ...
0 :.0 0 '0

- ...
o'1ii .. "'" 8''''''''.'
'"C ........ "00 OU ...... out::
""'!"! ................................ o"Oour:: ..c .............. ...
q,o V'l1.l"'l1.l"'lV'l I-< ro .-
if; ;:... ... ;:...
'"" 0000 V'lV'l.n (0 .0 0.. B'n 0..
VIVIVIVI r:: C ""2::l.-S g. ri
........._ '-''-''-''-' 000 sa ou:.:=: ... ou t: 0 0 0..
1\0 t.o::i V'lV'l0V'l "'-' .... 1-<:.0 lCi-5ou ... ..c ...
........ C"""IC"""I'<tV'l V'lV'l0 r:: ::s .... 0..
.... B.9 8' 5 0 S
:; ooo.n 00
9
.... r::o.. I-< 5 ;.8 s -
CIl ____ V'lII,)OUo...ou ... "0
;:... - - - - _ (0"0 .0 0 5 II,) 0 r::
-; 0000 _ "'13"00 M::lCll C"""I
g
4,)
- - a ... ...
'"C _ out::Ol.l"'lou 01-<
SS 9.!:! ; 8."0 "! 11 -g..s 11 .E
= NN tn'8.
o 0-6"""" _V'l ,gcl=:.o ..... tI.() a,.$ c..o ....
;:; r--- o:""l 00- 0- 0 ......
:--= u -- VI VI N N_ '-'0- :E';:: B ... i3 .3... 5
0 9:n 00 ... 5 ..Q CIl r:: e
"'s VI S! r--- 0_ .5 3 -;) co';:: 13 -ti
- - __ 0 "OJ:::..c: .... 0:.a -;:...:.a CIl
8 00 0_ ou-3
C1lO
... s
O
..... a:s
VI VI 2 "O.!:!a..!:;> 1-<:::::: ::s;:;;
- 0 ::S.o ou co:! ..... 1 ro 0
5 - -
.... r:: r::..c: - 00'"
eo .... ... .!:! 8 -5 'E r:: -5 .0
"0 5 CiI --g 5 '0 8 .5
U 8 CI-<-5C::l <,;;,
&l
.
..0
.:
t
'ii
.;;
"iii .... ' .5 "3 .a
1_ N u<:-95 8 ::s .;::.;: ::l
1 0000
o \0-\0_
;::::::l C"""I'<t'<t1.l"'l

... I, 1 E .;> a .... ... ...
CIl 1000 uCilo" S I-<::gc l-o u
;:...'V'l'<tV'l ...... UI-< .... o ..... oo..c:
o '1 '<t '<t '<t Ul..c 0..-0 < u.. < 0.. u.. E-<
:::::: ClHI) tf.l
< ! E-< E-<E-< 1- c::; M' .:n \0
DEI NORSKE VERITAS
tJt. en.L ::aeC.4 - t"age,jtl
T
a
b
l
e

E
2

M
e
c
h
a
n
i
c
a
l

p
r
o
p
e
r
t
i
e
s

a
t

r
o
o
m

t
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

f
o
r

s
e
a
m
l
"
,
s

t
u
b
e
s

a
n
d

p
i
p
e
s

T
e
n
s
i
l
e

t
e
s
t

B
e
n
d

t
e
s
t

F
l
a
t
t
e
n
i
n
g

D
r
i
f
t

R
i
n
g

e
x
p
a
n
d
i
n
g

t
e
s
t

5
)

t
e
s
t

e
x
p
a
n
d
i
n
g

t
e
s
t

U
p
p
e
r

y
i
e
l
d

s
t
r
e
s
s

o
r

p
r
o
o
f
s
t
r
e
s
s

!
p
l
o
n
g
a
/
i
o
n

2
)

S
l
e
e
l

T
e
n
s
i
l
e

R
e
H

o
r

m
i
n
i
m
u
m

,
,
D
i
a
m
e
t
e
r

%

i
n
c
r
e
a
s
e

o
f

%

i
n
c
r
e
a
s
e

o
f
D

f
o
r

g
r
a
d
e

s
t
r
e
n
g
t
h

A
,

o
f

C
o
n
s
t
a
n
t

D
f
o
r
D
/
D

D
/
D

f
o
r

t
h
i
c
k
n
e
s
s
e
s

i
n

m
m

1
)

?
n
i
n
i
m
u
m
,

%

m
a
n
/
r
e
l

1
:
5
1
6

1
6
<

1
:
5
4
0

4
0
<

1
:
5
6
5

I
,

K

N
l
m
m
2

I

I

m
m

:
5

0
,
6

>

0
,
6

>

0
,
8

:
5

0
,
5

>

0
,
5

>

0
,
6

>

0
,
8

>

0
,
9

N
l
m
m
2

N
l
m
m
2

N
l
m
m
2

:
5

0
,
8

:
5

0
,
6

:
5

0
,
8

:
5

0
,
9

U
n
a
l
l
o
y
e
d

s
t
e
e
l

'
"
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
2
5

T
S

3
6
0

3
6
0
-
4
8
0

2
3
5

2
2
5

2
1
5

2
3

3
T

0
,
0
9

1
2

1
5

1
9

3
0

2
5

1
5

1
0

8

T
S

4
1
0
-
1

4
1
0
-
5
3
0

2
5
5

2
4
5

2
3
5

,

.'
2
1

1
9

4
T

0
,
0
7

1
0

1
2

1
7

3
0

2
5

1
5

1
0

8

T
S

4
6
0
-
1

4
6
0
-
5
8
0

2
7
0

2
7
0

2
6
0

,
2
3

2
1

4
T

0
,
0
7

8

1
0

1
5

3
0

2
5

1
5

1
0

8

T
S

5
1
0

5
1
0
-
6
4
0

3
1
0

3
1
0

3
0
0

1
9

1
7

4
T

0
,
0
7

8

1
0

1
5

3
0

2
5

1
5

1
0

8

A
l
l
o
y

s
t
e
e
l
s

i
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
T
S

3
8
0

3
8
0
-
5
3
0

2
0
5

2
0
5

2
0
5

I

2
0

4
T

0
,
0
8

8

1
0

1
5

-
-
-
-
-
T
S

4
1
0
-
3

4
1
0
-
5
6
0

2
0
5

2
0
5

2
0
5

2
0

4
T

0
,
0
8

8

1
0

1
5

-
-
-
-
-
T
S

4
1
0
-
4

4
1
0
-
5
6
0

2
0
5

2
0
5

2
0
5

2
2

2
0

4
T

0
,
0
8

8

1
0

1
5

-
-
-
-
-
T
S

4
3
0

4
3
0
-
5
8
0

2
0
5

2
0
5

2
0
5

I
;

2
0

1
8

4
T

0
,
0
7

8

1
0

1
5

3
0

2
0

1
0

8

6

T
S

4
4
0

4
4
0
-
5
9
0

2
9
0
5
)

2
9
0

2
8
0

,

2
2

2
0

4
T

0
,
Q
7

8

1
0

1
5

3
0

2
0

1
0

8

6

T
S

4
5
0
-
1

4
5
0
-
6
0
0

2
7
0
5
)

2
7
0

2
6
0

'

2
2

2
0

4
T

0
,
0
7

8

1
0

1
5

3
0

2
0

1
0

8

6

T
S

4
5
0
-
2
,

T
C

7
)

4
1
0
-
5
6
0

2
0
5

2
0
5

2
0
5

'

2
2

2
0

4
T

0
,
0
8

8

1
0

1
5

-
-
-
-
-
T
E
7
)

4
5
0
-
6
0
0

2
8
0

2
8
0

2
7
0

!,
2
0

1
8

4
T

0
,
0
7

8

1
0

1
5

3
0

2
0

1
0

8

6

T
S

4
6
0
-
2

4
6
0
-
6
1
0

3
2
0

3
2
0

3
1
0

2
0

1
8

4
T

0
,
0
5

8

1
0

1
5

3
0

2
0

1
0

8

6

T
S

5
0
0
,

T
C

7
)

4
4
0
-
6
2
0

2
0
5

2
0
5

2
0
5

,
2
0

1
8

4
T

0
,
0
7

8

1
0

1
5

3
0

2
0

1
0

8

6

T
E

7
)

5
9
0
-
7
4
0

3
9
0

3
9
0

3
9
0

1
8

1
6

4
T

0
,
Q
7

8

1
0

1
5

3
0

2
0

1
0

8

6

T
S

5
9
0

5
9
0
-
7
4
0

3
9
0

3
9
0

3
9
0

1
8

1
6

4
T

0
,
0
7

8

1
0

1
5

3
0

2
0

1
0

8

6

T
S

6
1
0

6
1
0
-
7
8
0

4
4
0

4
4
0

4
4
0

1
9

1
7

A
T

0
,
0
5

8

1
0

1
5

3
0

2
0

1
0

8

6

T
S

6
9
0

6
9
0
-
8
4
0

4
9
0

4
9
0

4
9
0

1
7

1
4

4
T

0
,
0
5

6

8

1
2

3
0

2
0

1
0

8

6

1
)

F
o
r

w
a
l
l

t
h
i
c
k
n
e
s
s
e
s

g
r
e
a
t
e
r

t
h
a
n

6
5

m
m
,

t
h
e

v
a
l
u
e

t
o

b
e

o
b
t
a
i
n
e
a

i
s

t
o

b
e

t
h
e

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

o
f

a
g
r
e
e
m
e
n
t

b
e
t
w
e
e
n

t
h
e

m
a
n
u
f
a
c
t
u
r
e
r

a
n
d

t
h
e

p
u
r
c
h
a
s
e
r

a
t

t
h
e

t
i
m
e

o
f

o
r
d
e
r
i
n
g
.

2
)

1

=

l
o
n
g
i
t
u
d
i
n
a
l
;

t

=

t
r
a
n
s
v
e
r
s
e
.

3
)

A
p
p
l
i
c
a
b
l
e

f
o
r

w
a
l
l

t
h
i
c
k
n
e
s
s
e
s

>

3
0

m
m
,

u
n
l
e
s
s

o
t
h
e
r
w
i
s
e

i
n
d
i
"
.
a
t
e
d
.

4
)

A
p
p
l
i
c
a
b
l
e

o
n
l
y

i
n

c
a
s
e
s

w
h
e
r
e

t
r
a
n
s
v
e
r
s
e

t
e
s
t

p
i
e
c
e
s

c
a
n
n
o
t

b
e

5
)

F
o
r

w
a
l
l

t
h
i
c
k
n
e
s
s
e
s

b
e
l
o
w

o
r

e
q
u
a
l

t
o

1
0

m
m

t
h
e

m
i
n
i
m
u
m

v
a
l
u
e

o
f

y
i
e
l
d

s
t
r
e
s
s

i
s

i
n
c
r
e
a
s
e
d

b
y

1
0

N
/
m
m
2

.
6
)

A
p
p
l
i
c
a
b
l
e

f
o
r

w
a
l
l

t
h
i
c
k
n
e
s
s
e
s

>

2
0

m
m
.

7
)

T
C

=

f
u
l
l

o
r

i
s
o
t
h
e
n
n
a
l

a
n
n
e
a
l
i
n
g
;

T
E

=

n
o
n
n
a
l
i
z
i
n
g

a
n
d

8
)

A
p
p
l
i
c
a
b
l
e

f
o
r

w
a
l
l

t
h
i
c
k
n
e
s
s
e
s
>

1
0

m
m
.

u

u

u

u

U

U

U

(
J

J
;
!

C
il
C
i
n
A

v
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

0

.
.
,

{
)
Q
.
S

0

0
0

-

!
"

I

g
.

;
;

_
.
:
:
r
'

Q
.
:
:
I
8
::1

i
l
.

.

S
o

p
o

t
n

;
:
>
0

>
(
l
I

'
<

:
:
I
V
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

0

.
.
,

!
l

2
.

0

0
0

:
-

J
;
!

0
0

'
O
j
l

9

....
Q
.

(
lI

S
'

=

5
0
=

"
0

:
;
r
:
:
"
l
5
o

.
.
.

S
'
g
.
1

0

0

8
.

0
-
N

N

e
:
:
l

0

.
1

.
.
.
.
,
Q
.
!
Q
.
:
:
I

....
Q
.

C

0

c
;

-
.

0
1
'

....
Q
.
S

S
'I

(
;
"

.
.
.
.

0
'"

.
,
.
,

(
lI

=

3

(
lI

g

.
.
.

0
"
0

I

=

'"

a

'
<
!
A
0
g

0
'
"
9

g
.
c
.

o
:
=
.
_
0

0

0

a
.
Q
.
,
g

U
.

1
..>

tl>

s
a
.
.
.
.

(
lI

.
.
.

{
)

I

V
.

V
.

t
;
'
(
l
I

C
.
O

=

!
i
i
'
'
<

F
;l
:IE

e
n

g

5
o
P
-
'"

_
.

_
.

.
,

0

$
8

+
>
-
0

-
'
O
'
"
g
.

0
0
.
.
.
.
,

0

.
!
.
.

g
.

r
;:
0
.
.

S
'
I

(
lI
g

I
A

$
'
8
5
.
.
.

=
(
l
I

S

g
.
g

0

S
o
8
8

0
,

_
.
c

.
,

"
0

g

0

'"

S
'

f
t
-
s

....
N

:
e

0

,
,
0

o
;
i
a
S
o

S
o
,,"

S
'

a
.

g
.

(
l
I
c
,
:
g
(
l
l
'
g

-
a
..
_
.
.
.
.
.

'"

.
,

i
i
'

a

0

"
,
"
0

:
:
l
g
.

.
g
.
=
:
-

0

0

(
;

,
g

;
:
'
x

"
0

"
0

p
o

C

1
_
0

.
.
.

I
>

0

:
!
r
;

.
g
,
g
g
O
"

o

(
lI

(
;I
"
0

;
;
:
;
.
,

s
a
.

....
0
'"

C
'
I

0

3

(
l
I
(
l
I
g
s
:
s
o

S
o
.

0
0
0
'
<
.
,
,
,
,

o
-
g

;
:
f
!
i
,
g

O
O
o
n

3
:
:
1
"
:
:
r
'

E
.."
d

s
g
.

0

r;:
0

0

g
.
!
:
i

o
n

<
.
,
c

0

0

s

e
.

'
g

'
<

;
.
3

P
o

.
.

I
m
p
a
c
t

t
e
s
t

2
)

J

J

r
3
)

L

4
)

2
7

3
5

2
7

3
5

2
7

3
5

2
7

3
5

2
7

3
5

2
7

3
5

2
7

3
5

2
7

3
5

2
7

2
7

6
)

3
5

3
5
6
)

2
7

3
5

2
7

3
5

2
7
8
)

3
5
8
)

2
7

3
5

2
7

3
5

2
7

3
5

2
7

3
5

2
7
8
)

3
5
8
)

>
:>

.
.
,

"

"
'
.
.
,

1
>

"
'
N

.
.

0
:=

-
t
i
-
.
.
,

r
.

'
"

=
-
0

9

;
;
'

e
:
.

S

9

'
8

1
1

g
:

.
.

o

!
;

.

C
)

=

l
?

1
1

0
.

1
>

"

=

.
g

1
1

.

0

.

'
"

1
.
.
>
'
;
j
l

1
1

-
.

V
.

1
1

0
0

W
W

0
0

s
s

0
0

0
0

1
1

0
0

.
.
.
.
,

c
o
.

b
e
!
:
;

1
1

0
0

'
"

0
0

,

C

:
\
,
0

.

"

N
-
O
'

"
-
0

N
=

(
J
)
-
t
:

r
o
"

0
-
,
,
"

'
.

I

=

c

-
c
-
0
>
-
<

<
0
_

r
o
u

N
U

"
"
0

T
a
b
l
e

H
2

M
e
c
h
a
n
i
c
a
l

p
r
o
p
e
r
t
i
e
s

a
t

r
o
o
m

t
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

T
e
n
s
i
l
e

l
e
s
t

F
l
a
t
t
e
n
i
n
g

t
e
s
t

B
e
n
d

t
e
s
t

D
r
i
f
t

e
x
p
a
n
d
i
n
g

t
e
s
t

0
)

P
e
r
c
e
n
t
a
g
e

i
n
c
r
e
a
s
e

o
f
D

y
i
e
l
d

s
t
r
e
s
s

o
r

s
t
r
e
s
s

T
e
n
s
i
l
e

R
e
H

o
r

E
l
o
n
g
a
t
i
o
n

3
)

C
o
n
s
t
a
n
t

C

D
i
a
m
e
t
e
r

S
t
e
e
l

f
o
r

o
f

F
o
r

d
i
D

r
a
t
i
o

5
)

g
r
a
d
e

1
)

s
t
r
e
n
g
t
h

m
i
n
i
m
u
m
!

A
,

m
i
n
i
m
w
n

t
I
D

r
a
t
i
o

m
a
n
t
r
e
l

f
o
r

t
h
i
c
k
n
e
s
s
e
s

i
i
-
t

m
m

N
l
m
m
2

t

$

1
6

1
6



0
,
1
5

$

0
,
8

>

0
,
8

N
l
m
m
2

N
l
m
m
2

N
l
m
m
2

%

%

m
m

T
W
3
2
0

3
2
0

t
o

4
6
0

1
9
5

-
-
2
5

2
3

3
t

1
0

1
2

T
S

3
6
0
/
T
W

3
6
0

3
6
0

t
o

5
0
0

2
3
5

2
2
5

2
1
5

2
5

2
3

0
,
0
9

0
,
0
8

3
t

1
0

1
2

T
S

4
1
0
/
T
W

4
1
0

4
1
0

t
o

5
5
0

2
5
5

2
4
5

2
3
5

2
2

3
0

0
,
0
7

0
,
0
6

4
t

8

1
0

T
S

4
3
0
/
T
W

4
3
0

4
3
0

t
o

5
7
0

2
7
5

2
6
5

,

2
5
5

2
1

1
9

0
,
0
7

0
,
0
6

4
t

'
8

1
0

T
S

5
0
0
/
T
W

5
0
0

5
0
0

t
o

6
5
0

3
5
5

3
4
5

,

q
)

2
1

q
)

1
9
4
)

0
,
0
7

0
,
0
6

4
t

6

8

1
)

T
S

s
e
a
m
l
e
s
s

s
t
e
e
l

t
u
b
e
s
;

T
W

w
e
l
d
e
d

s
t
e
e
l

t
u
b
e
s

2
)

F
o
r

t
h
i
c
k
n
e
s
s
e
s

g
r
e
a
t
e
r

t
h
a
n

6
5

m
m

f
o
r

s
e
a
m
l
e
s
s

t
u
b
e
s

a
n
d

4
0

m
m

f
o
r

w
e
l
d
e
d

t
u
b
e
s
,

t
h
e

v
a
l
u
e

t
o

b
e

o
b
t
a
i
n
e
d

i
s

t
o

b
e

t
h
e

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

o
f
a
g
r
e
e
m
e
n
t

b
e
t
w
e
e
n

t
h
e

m
a
n
u
f
a
c
t
u
r
e
r

a
n
d

t
h
e

p
u
r
c
h
a
s
e
r

a
t

t
h
e

t
i
m
e

o
f

o
r
d
e
r
i
n
g
.

.

3
)

I

=

l
o
n
g
i
t
u
d
i
n
a
l
;

t

=

t
r
a
n
s
v
e
r
s
e
.

4
)

F
o
r

t
h
i
c
k
n
e
s
s
e
s

g
r
e
a
t
e
r

t
h
a
n

4
0

m
m

f
o
r

s
e
a
m
l
e
s
s

t
u
b
e
s
,

t
h
e

f
o
r

R
e
H

a
n
d

A

a
r
e

t
o

b
e

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

o
f

a
g
r
e
e
m
e
n
t

b
e
t
w
e
e
n

t
h
e

m
a
n
u
f
a
c
t
u
r
e
r

a
n
d

t
h
e

p
u
r
c
h
a
s
e
r

a
t

t
h
e

t
i
m
e

o
f

o
r
d
e
r
i
n
g
.

5
)

d

=

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

d
i
a
m
e
t
e
r
;

D

=

e
x
t
e
r
n
a
l

d
i
a
m
e
t
e
r

6
)

O
n
l
y

a
p
p
l
i
c
a
b
l
e

f
o
r

w
e
l
d
e
d

t
u
b
e
s

a
n
d

p
i
p
e
s
.

.
u

u

u

!
"

,

U

u

u

u

T
a
b
l
e

E
l

C
h
e
m
i
c
a
l

c
o
m
p
o
s
i
t
i
o
n

(
l
a
d
l
e

a
n
a
l
y
s
i
s
)

I
)

f
o
r

s
e
a
m
l
e
s
s

a
n
d

p
i
p
e
s
,

%

S
t
e
e
l

g
r
a
d
e

C

S
i

M
n

p

,

S

C
r

M
o

N
i

V

N
b

A
l

O
t
h
e
r
s

m
a
x
i
m
u
m
.

m
a
x
i
m
w
n

m
a
x
i
m
u
m

U
n
a
l
l
o
y
e
d

s
t
e
e
l

,

-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
,
T
S

3
6
0

$
0
,
1
7

0
,
1
0
-
0
,
3
5

0
,
3
0
-
0
,
8
0

0
,
Q
3
5

0
,
0
3
5

-
-
-
-
-
-
2
)

T
S

4
1
0
-
1

$
0
,
2
1

0
,
1
0
-
0
,
3
5

0
,
4
0
-
1
,
2
0

O
,
0
3
5
!

0
,
0
3
5

-
-
-
-
-
-
2
)

T
S

4
6
0
-
1

$
0
,
2
2

0
,
1
0
-
0
,
4
0

0
,
6
5
-
1
,
4
0

0
,
0
3
5
:

0
,
0
3
5

-
-
-
-
2
)

T
S

5
1
0

<
0
,
2
2
3
)

0
,
1
5
-
0
,
5
5

1
,
0
0
-
1
,
5
0
3
)

0
,
0
3
5
:

0
,
0
3
5

-
-
-
5
)

5
)

-
2
)

4
)

A
l
l
o
y

s
t
e
e
l

!
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
T
S

3
8
0

0
,
1
0
-
0
,
2
0

0
,
1
0
-
0
,
5
0

0
,
3
0
-
0
,
8
0

0
,
0
3
5
:

0
,
Q
3
5

-
0
,
4
5
-
0
,
6
5

-
-
-
0
,
0
2
0

2
)

T
S

4
1
0
-
3

$
0
,
1
5

$
0
,
5
0

0
,
3
0
-
0
,
6
0

O
,
0
3
5
!

0
,
0
3
5

0
,
8
0
-
1
,
2
5

0
,
4
5
-
0
,
6
5

-
-
-
0
,
0
2
0

2
)

T
S

4
1
0
-
4

$
0
,
1
5

0
,
5
0
-
1
,
0
0

0
,
3
0
-
0
,
6
0

0
,
0
3
0
'

0
,
0
3
0

1
,
0
0
-
1
,
5
0

0
,
4
5
-
0
,
6
5

-
-
-
0
,
0
2
0

2
)

T
S

4
3
0

0
,
0
8
-
0
,
1
5

0
,
1
5
-
0
,
5
0

0
,
3
0
-
0
,
6
0

o
,
0
3
0
i

0
,
0
3
0

4
,
0
0
-
6
,
0
0

0
,
4
5
-
0
,
6
5

-
-
-
0
,
0
2
0

2
)

T
S

4
4
0

0
,
1
0
-
0
,
1
7
5
)

0
,
1
5
-
0
,
3
5

0
,
4
0
-
0
,
7
0

0
,
0
3
5
'
:

0
,
0
3
5

0
,
7
0
-
1
,
1
0

0
,
4
5
-
0
,
6
5

-
-
-
0
,
0
2
0

2
)

T
S

4
5
0
-
1

0
,
1
2
-
0
,
2
0

5
)

0
,
1
5
-
0
,
3
5

0
,
4
0
-
0
,
8
0

0
,
0
3
5
,

0
,
0
3
5

-
0
,
2
5
-
0
,
3
5

-
-
-
0
,
0
2
0

2
)

T
S

4
5
0
-
2

0
,
0
8
-
0
,
1
5

0
,
1
5
-
0
,
4
0

0
,
3
0
-
0
,
8
0

0
,
0
3
5
:

0
,
0
3
5

2
,
0
0
-
2
,
5
0

0
,
9
0
-
1
,
2
0

-
-
-
0
,
0
2
0

2
)

T
S

4
6
0
-
2

0
,
1
0
-
0
,
1
5

0
,
1
5
-
0
,
3
5

0
,
4
0
-
0
,
7
0

0
,
0
3
5
'

0
,
0
3
5

0
,
3
0
-
0
,
6
0

0
,
5
0
-
0
,
7
0

-
0
,
2
2
-
0
,
2
8

-
0
,
0
2
0

2
)

T
S

5
0
0

0
,
0
8
-
0
,
1
5

0
,
2
5
-
1
,
0
0

0
,
3
0
-
0
,
6
0

0
,
0
3
0
,
.

0
,
0
3
0

8
,
0
0
-
1
0
,
0
0

0
,
9
0
-
1
,
1
0

-
-
-
0
,
0
2
0

.

2
)

T
S

5
9
0

6
)

$
0
,
1
5

0
,
2
0
-
0
,
6
5

0
,
8
0
-
1
,
3
0

0
,
0
3
0
.

0
,
0
3
0

8
,
5
0
-
1
0
,
5
0

1
,
7
0
-
2
,
3
0

$
0
,
3
0

0
,
2
0
-
0
,
4
0

0
,
3
0
-
0
,
5
5

0
,
0
2
0

2
)

T
S

6
1
0

$
0
,
1
7

0
,
2
5
-
0
,
5
0

0
,
8
0
-
1
,
2
0

0
,
0
3
0
;

0
,
0
3
0

$
0
,
3
0

0
,
2
5
-
0
,
4
0

1
,
0
0
-
1
,
3
0

-
0
,
0
1
5
-
0
,
0
4
5

0
,
0
2
0

C
u

T
S

6
9
0

0
,
1
7
-
0
,
2
3

0
,
1
5
-
0
,
5
0

<
1
,
0
0

0
,
0
3
0
'

0
,
0
3
0

1
0
,
0
0
-
1
2
,
5
0

0
,
8
0
-
1
,
2
0

0
,
3
0
-
0
,
8
0

0
,
2
5
-
0
,
3
5

-
0
,
0
2
0

1
)

E
l
e
m
e
n
t
s

n
o
t

i
n
c
l
u
d
e
d

i
n

t
h
i
s

t
a
b
l
e

m
a
y

n
o
t

b
e

i
n
t
e
n
t
i
o
n
a
l
l
y

a
d
d
e
d

w
i
t
h
o
!
l
t

t
h
e

a
g
r
e
e
m
e
n
t

o
f

t
h
e

p
u
r
c
h
a
s
e
r

e
x
c
e
p
t

f
o
r

e
l
e
m
e
n
t
s

w
h
i
c
h

m
a
y

b
e

a
d
d
e
d

f
o
r

d
e
o
x
i
d
a
t
i
o
n

a
n
d

f
m
i
s
h
i
n
g

o
f

t
h
e

h
e
a
t
.

A
l
l

r
e
a
s
o
n
a
b
l
e

p
r
e
c
a
u
t
i
o
n
s

a
r
e

t
o

b
e

t
a
k
e
n

t
o

p
r
e
v
e
n
t

t
h
e

o
f

e
l
e
m
e
n
t
s

f
r
o
m

s
c
r
a
p

o
r

o
t
h
e
r

m
a
t
e
r
i
a
l
s

u
s
e
d

i
n

t
h
e

m
a
n
u
f
a
c
t
u
r
e
,

b
u
t

r
e
s
i
d
u
a
l

e
l
e
m
e
n
.
t
s

m
a
y

b
e

p
r
e
s
e
n
t
e
d
,

p
r
o
v
i
d
e
d

t
h
a
t

t
h
e

m
e
c
h
a
n
i
c
a
l

p
r
o
p
e
r
t
i
e
s

a
n
d

a
p
p
l
i
c
a
b
i
l
i
t
y

a
r
e

a
f
f
e
c
t
e
d
.

I
f
t
h
e

a
m
o
u
n
t

o
f

r
e
s
i
d
u
a
l

e
l
e
m
e
n
t
s

i
s

l
i
k
e
l
y

t
o

a
f
f
e
c
t

t
h
e

w
e
l
d
a
b
i
l
i
t
y

o
f

t
h
e

s
t
e
e
l
,

t
h
e

c
o
n
t
e
n
t

o
f

s
u
c
h

e
l
e
m
e
n
t
s

(
l
a
d
l
e

a
n
a
l
y
s
i
s
)

i
s

t
o

b
e

d
o
c
u
m
e
n
t
e
d
.

2
)

A

m
a
x
i
m
u
m

c
o
p
p
e
r

c
o
n
t
e
n
t

o
f

0
,
2
5
%

m
a
y

b
e

r
e
q
u
e
s
t
e
d

b
y

t
h
e

;
p
u
r
c
h
a
s
e
r

i
n

o
r
d
e
r

t
o

f
a
c
i
l
i
t
a
t
e

s
u
b
s
e
q
u
e
n
t

o
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
s

o
f

f
a
n
n
i
n
g
.

3
)

F
o
r

t
u
b
e
s

w
i
t
h

w
a
l
l

t
h
i
c
k
n
e
s
s

g
r
e
a
t
e
r

t
h
a
n

3
0

m
m
,

t
h
e

u
p
p
e
r

l
i
r
f
t
i
t

o
f

t
h
e

c
a
r
b
o
n

c
o
n
t
e
n
t

m
a
y

b
e

i
n
c
r
e
a
s
e
d

b
y

0
,
0
2
%

b
u
t

t
h
e

(
C

+

M
n
/
6
)

v
a
l
u
e

i
s

n
e
v
e
r

t
o

e
x
c
e
e
d

0
,
4
7
%
.

4
)

A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
s

o
f

n
i
o
b
i
u
m
,

t
i
t
a
n
i
u
m

a
n
d

v
a
n
a
d
i
u
m

a
r
e

p
e
n
n
i
t
t
e
d

a
t

d
i
s
c
r
e
t
i
o
n

o
f

t
h
e

m
a
n
u
f
a
c
t
u
r
e
r
,

u
n
l
e
s
s

o
t
h
e
r
w
i
s
e

a
g
r
e
e
d

b
e
l
:
w
e
e
n

t
h
e

p
u
r
c
h
a
s
e
r

a
n
d

t
h
e

m
a
n
u
f
a
c
t
u
r
e
r
,

u
p

t
o

t
h
e

l
e
v
e
l
s

p
e
n
n
i
t
t
e
d

f
o
r

n
o
n
-
a
l
l
o
y
e
d

s
t
e
e
l
s
.

I
n

t
h
a
t

c
a
s
e

t
h
e

t
e
s
t

c
e
r
t
i
f
i
c
a
t
e

f
S

t
o

s
t
a
t
e

t
h
e

l
e
v
e
l

o
f

t
h
e
s
e

e
l
e
m
e
n
t
s
.

5
)

F
o
r

t
u
b
e
s

w
i
t
h

w
a
l
l

t
h
i
c
k
n
e
s
s

g
r
e
a
t
e
r

t
h
a
n

3
0

m
m

t
h
e

u
p
p
e
r

o
f

t
h
e

c
a
r
b
o
n

c
o
n
t
e
n
t

m
a
y

b
e

i
n
c
r
e
a
s
e
d

b
y

0
,
0
2
%
.

6
)

A
p
p
l
i
c
a
b
l
e

f
q
r

t
u
b
e
s

w
i
t
h

w
a
l
l

t
h
i
c
k
n
e
s
s

n
o
t

e
x
c
e
e
d
i
n
g

1
5

m
m
.
]

;
:
'I

N

r
.

:
:
r

N

'
"

(
1
)

o

:
,
.

L ____ _
MUles TOr .January I :J:Jb
E. Tubes and Pipes for Boilers, Heat Exchan-
gers and Superheaters
E 100 Scope
carbon, carbon-manganese and low alloy steel tubes and
pipes for boilers, superheaters and heat exchangers.
102 Austenitic stainless steels may also be used for ele-
vated temperature service. Where such applications are
proposed, details of the chemical composition, heat treat-
ment and mechanical properties are to be submitted for ap-
proval.
E 200 Manufacture
201 The tubes and pipes are to be manufactured seamless
or by a welding process, and may be hot or cold fmished.
ply with the requirements given in the Tables EI and E3.
Steels for the production of tubes and pipes covered by this
subsection are to be killed.
401 Tubes and pipes are to be suitably heat treated over
their full length. The following heat treatment is to be used
depending of the type of steel (see Table AI):
- normalizing
- normalizing and tempering, or isothermal annealing
- full annealing or isothermal annealing.
501 Tubes and pipes are to be presented for testing in
batches as defmed in A800. Each batch is to comprise lOa
tubes.
502 Two tubes or pipes are to be selected from each of at
least two batches. From the remaining batches one pipe from
each batch is selected for testing.
503 For each tube or pipe selected for test the following
Seamless tubes and pipes:
- one tensile test
Welded tubes and pipes:
- one tensile test on the weld for pipes with
(ERWand 1W)
- one drift or ring expanding test (ERW and 1W)
the appropriate values given in the Tables E2 and E4.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
)
)
J
J

,
C)
:J
:J
:J
c. Stainless Steel PressureTubes and Pipes
C 100 Scope
stainless steel tubes and pipes for use in the construction of
the piping systems for chemicals, liquefied gases and bulk
chemical tankers.
C 200 Manufacture
or by a welding process. When welded, an automatic electric
welding process, with or without filler metal is to be applied.
The chemical composition of ladle samples is to comply with
appropriate requirements of Table CI or an equivalent na-
tional or international standard.
The tubes and pipes are normally to be supplied in the sol-
ution treated condition. Welded pipes may be delivered in
the welded condition without subsequent heat treatment
provided that approval testing has demonstrated satisfactory
characteristics of the material. Where the pipes are supplied
in the welded condition, the strips or plates used must be in
the solution treated condition.
501 The pipes are to be presented for testing in batches as
defined in A800. Each batch is to comprise 100 pipes.
503 Each pipe selected for test is to be subjected to the
following tests:
For seamless tubes and pipes:
- one tensile test
For welded tubes and pipes:
- one tensile test on the weld for tubes with outside diam-
eter > 219,lmm.
- two flattening tests or bend tests or one ring tensile test.
504 Impact testing of austenitic stainless steels is required
only for design temperatures below -105C. Test temper-
ature is to be -196C. .
505 The result of all mechanical tests is to comply with
appropriate requirements given in Table C2 or an equiv-
alent national or international standard.
601 For austenitic stainless steel pipes intended used for
piping systems for chemicals, intercrystalline corrosion tests
are to be carried out. The test is to be carried out in ac-
cordance with ASTM A 262 Practice E .Copper-Copper
Sulphate-Sulphuric Acid Test>, or an equivalent standard.
602 When a test with regard to safety against selective
corrosion in weld metal is required, testing according to
ASTM A 262 Practice C .Nitric Acid Test> is to be carried
out with modifications according to the following:
1) the test is to be carried out on test pieces with weld me-
tal.
2) the surface of the weld metal is to cover at least 2S % of
.the total surface of the test piece.
3) the total surface of the test piece is to be at least 600
mm
2
.
4) grinding of the test piece is permitted on cut surfaces
only.
The corrosion testing is to consist of at least three test peri-
ods of 48 hours each. The results, which express the corro-
sion rate, are to be indicated as g/m2 h for each period. The
corrosion rate for each test period is not to exceed 1,0
g/m2 h.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
T
a
b
l
e

C
l

C
h
e
m
i
c
a
l

c
o
m
p
o
s
i
t
i
o
n

(
l
a
d
l
e

a
n
a
l
y
s
i
s
)
,

o
f

a
u
s
t
e
n
i
t
i
c

s
t
e
e
I
s

f
o
r

s
e
a
m
l
e
s
s

a
n
d

w
e
l
d
e
d

t
u
b
e
s

,

C
h
e
m
i
c
a
l

c
o
m
p
o
s
i
t
i
o
n
,

%

1
)

A
l
S
I

S
t
e
e
l

t
y
p
e

S
i

M
n

P

S

d
e
s
i
g
n
a
t
i
o
n

I
S
O

d
e
s
i
g
n
a
t
i
o
n

C

C
r

M
o

N
i

O
t
h
e
r
s

m
a
x
i
m
w
n

m
a
x
i
m
u
m

m
a
x
i
m
u
m

m
a
x
i
m
u
m

3
0
4
L

X

2

C
r
N
i

1
8

1
0

<

0
,
0
3
0

1
,
0
0

2
,
0
0

0
,
0
4
5

0
,
0
3
0

1
7
,
0
0

t
o

1
9
,
0
0

-
9
,
0
0

t
o

1
2
,
0
0

3
0
4

X

5

C
r
N
i

1
8

9

<

0
,
0
7

1
,
0
0

2
,
0
0

:

0
,
0
4
5

0
,
0
3
0

1
7
,
0
0

t
o

1
9
,
0
0

-
8
,
0
0

t
o

1
1
,
0
0

3
4
7

X

6

C
r
N
i
N
b

1
8

1
0

<

0
,
0
8

1
,
0
0

2
,
0
0

0
,
0
4
5

0
,
0
3
0

1
7
,
0
0

t
o

1
9
,
0
0

-
9
,
0
0

t
o

1
2
,
0
0

I
O
x
%
C

<

N
b

<

1
,
0
0

2
)

3
2
1

X

6

C
r
N
i
T
i

1
8

1
0

<

0
,
0
8

1
,
0
0

2
,
0
0

,

0
,
0
4
5

0
,
0
3
0

1
7
,
0
0

t
o

1
9
,
0
0

-
9
,
0
0

t
o

1
2
,
0
0

5
x
%
C

<

T
i

<

0
,
8
0

3
1
6
L

X

2

C
r
N
i
M
o

1
7

1
3

<

0
,
0
3
0

1
,
0
0

2
,
0
0

0
,
0
4
5

0
,
0
3
0

1
6
,
5
0

t
o

1
8
,
5
0

2
,
5

t
o

3
,
0

1
1

,
5
0

t
o

1
4
,
0
0

3
1
6

X

5

C
r
N
i
M
o

1
7

1
3

<

0
,
0
7

1
,
0
0

2
,
0
0

0
,
0
4
5

0
,
0
3
0

1
6
,
5
0

t
o

1
8
,
5
0

2
,
5

t
o

3
,
0

1
1
,
0
0

t
o

1
4
,
0
0

1
)

E
l
e
m
e
n
t
s

n
o
t

q
u
o
t
e
d

i
n

t
h
i
s

t
a
b
l
e

a
r
e

n
o
t

t
o

b
e

i
n
t
e
n
t
i
o
n
a
l
l
y

a
d
d
e
d

w
i
t
h
o
u
t

t
h
e

a
g
r
e
e
m
e
n
t

o
f

t
h
e

p
u
r
c
h
a
s
e
r
,

o
t
h
e
r

t
h
a
n

f
o
r

t
h
e

p
u
r
p
o
s
e

o
f

f
i
n
i
s
h
i
n
g

t
h
e

h
e
a
t
.

I
f
i
n

s
p
e
c
i
a
l

c
a
s
e
s
,

t
h
e

p
u
r
c
h
a
s
e
r

c
o
n
s
i
d
e
r
s

t
h
a
t

t
h
e

l
e
v
e
l

o
f

r
e
s
i
d
u
a
l

e
l
e
m
e
n
t
s

i
s

i
m
p
o
r
t
a
n
t

i
n

r
e
l
a
t
i
o
n

t
o

t
h
e

m
e
c
h
a
n
i
c
a
l

a
n
d

t
e
c
h
n
o
l
o
g
i
c
a
l

p
r
o
p
e
r
t
i
e
s

o
f

t
h
e

s
t
e
e
l

i
n

t
h
e

i
n
t
e
n
d
e
d

a
p
p
l
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
,

t
h
e

c
a
s
t

(
l
a
d
l
e
)

a
n
a
l
y
s
i
s

l
i
m
i
t
s

f
o
r

s
u
c
h

e
l
e
m
e
n
t
s

a
r
e

t
o

b
e

..

t
h
e

t
i
m
e

o
f

e
n
q
u
i
r
y

o
r

T
h
e

a
g
r
e
e
d

e
l
e
m
e
n
t
s

a
r
e

t
h
e
n

t
o

b
e

a
n
a
l
y
s
e
d

a
n
d

t
h
e

v
a
l
u
e
s

r
e
p
o
r
t
e
d
.

2
)

N
i
o
b
i
u
m

c
o
n
t
e
n
t

i
n
c
l
u
d
e
s

t
a
n
t
a
l
u
m

a
n
a
l
y
s
e
d

a
s

n
i
o
b
i
u
m
.

u

u

u

u

u

u

T
a
b
l
e

D
3

-
I
m
p
a
c
t

p
r
o
p
e
r
t
i
e
s

a
t

l
o
w

t
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

,
W
a
l
l

o
f

M
i
n
i
m
u
m

i
m
p
a
c
t

v
a
l
u
e

i
n

J
,

t
h
i
c
k
n
e
s
s

1
)

a
v
e
r
a
g
e

o
f
t
h
r
e
e

t
e
s
t

p
i
e
c
e
s

S
t
e
e
l

g
r
a
d
e

t
e
s
t

P
f
.
e
c
e
s

w
i
t
h

T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

C

T

r
e
s
p
e
c
t

t
o

t
u
b
e

I a
x
i
s

-
1
9
6

-
1
2
0

-
1
1
0

-
1
0
0

-
9
0

-
6
0

-
5
0

-
4
0

-
2
0

+
2
0

m
m

T
S

6
/
T
W

6

(
N
)

<
1
0

4
0

4
5

5
5

T
S

6
1
T
W

6

(
Q
T
)

5
2
5

L
o
I
i
g
i
t
u
d
i
n
a
l

4
0

4
5

5
0

6
0

U
n
a
l
l
o
y
e
d

T
r
a
r
j
s
v
e
r
s
e

4
)

2
7

3
0

3
5

4
0

2
5
<
T
5
4
0

4
0

4
5

5
5

s
t
e
e
l
:

T
r
a
.
r
:
l
s
v
e
r
s
e

4
)

2
7

3
0

3
5

T
S

1
0
/
T
W

1
0

5
2
5

L
o
n
g
i
t
u
d
i
n
a
l

2
7

4
0

4
5

5
0

T
S

1
5
/
T
W

1
5

T
r
a
n
s
v
e
r
s
e

4
)

2
7

3
0

3
5

2
6

C
r
M
o

4

5
2
5

L
o
q
g
i
t
u
d
i
n
a
l

4
0

4
0

4
5

5
0

6
0

T
r
a
n
s
v
e
r
s
e

4
)

2
7

2
7

3
0

3
5

4
0

1
1

M
n
N
i
5
3

5
4
0

4
0

4
5

5
0

5
5

7
0

1
3

M
n
N
i

6

3

T
r
a
n
s
v
e
r
s
e

4
)

2
7

3
0

3
5

4
0

4
5

T
S

4
3
/
T
W

4
3

5
2
5

L
0
r
,
g
i
t
u
d
i
n
a
l

4
0

4
5

5
0

5
5

5
5

6
0

6
5

T
r
a
J
l
l
s
v
e
r
s
e

4
)

2
7

3
0

3
5

3
5

4
0

4
5

4
5

A
l
l
o
y

2
5
<
T
5
4
0

L
o
r
,
g
i
t
u
d
i
n
a
l

4
0

4
5

5
0

5
0

5
5

6
5

s
t
e
e
l
:

T
r
a
n
s
v
e
r
s
e

4
)

2
7

3
0

3
0

3
5

4
0

4
5

1
2

N
i

1
9

5
2
5

L
o
q
g
i
t
u
d
i
n
a
l

4
0

4
5

5
0

5
5

6
5

6
5

6
5

7
0

7
0

T
r
a
a
s
v
e
r
s
e

4
)

2
7

3
0

3
0

3
5

4
5

4
5

4
5

5
0

5
0

2
5
<
T
5
4
0

L
o
q
g
i
t
u
d
i
n
a
l

4
0

4
5

5
0

6
0

6
5

6
5

6
5

7
0

4
)

2
7

3
0

3
0

4
0

4
5

4
5

4
5

5
0

T
S

4
5
/
T
W

4
5

5
4
0

L
o
q
g
i
t
u
d
i
n
a
l

4
0

5
0

5
0

6
0

6
0

7
0

7
0

7
0

7
0

7
0

T
r
a
l
.
s
v
e
r
s
e

4
)

2
7

3
5

3
5

4
0

4
0

5
0

5
0

5
0

5
0

5
0

1
)

T
h
e

v
a
l
u
e
s

f
o
r

t
u
b
e
s

w
i
t
h

w
a
l
l

t
h
i
c
k
n
e
s
s

e
x
c
e
e
d
i
n
g

4
0

m
r
n
,

w
i
t
t
:
.

t
h
e

e
x
c
e
p
t
i
o
n

o
f

s
t
e
e
l
s

T
S

6
(
N
)

a
n
d

T
S

6
(
Q
1
)
.

a
r
e

t
o

b
e

a
g
r
e
e
d

a
t

t
h
e

t
i
m
e

o
f

o
r
d
e
r
i
n
g
.

2
)

S
i
n
g
l
e

v
a
l
u
e
s

n
o
t

l
e
s
s

t
h
a
n

7
0
%

o
f
t
h
e

a
v
e
r
a
g
e
.

3
)

T
h
e

v
a
l
u
e
s

a
p
p
l
y

t
o

s
t
a
n
d
a
r
d

l
O
x
l
O
m
m

t
e
s
t

p
i
e
c
e
s
.

F
o
r

s
i
z
e
s

o
f

t
e
s
t

p
i
e
c
e
s
,

s
e
e

5
0
4
.

4
)

T
r
a
n
s
v
e
r
s
e

t
e
s
t

p
i
e
c
e
s
.
a
r
e

t
o

b
e

u
s
e
d

o
n
l
y

b
y

a
g
r
e
e
m
e
n
t
.

:

'
"

n

;
0
-
,

"
'
:

e
n
'

r
o

'

,
,
-
-
I
'
,

,

I

:

,

,

,
,
'

"
,
'

<
c
,

r
o

,

w
,

e
n

,

T
a
b
l
e

D
2

p
r
o
p
e
r
t
i
e
s

a
t

r
o
o
m

t
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

" "
T
e
n
s
i
l
e

t
e
s
t

B
e
n
d

t
e
s
t

F
l
a
t
t
e
n
i
n
g

t
e
s
t

D
r
i
f
t

e
x
p
a
n
d
i
n
g

t
e
s
t

4
)

R
i
n
g

e
x
p
a
n
d
i
n
g

t
e
s
t

4
)

U
p
p
e
r

y
i
e
l
d

s
t
r
e
s
s

o
r

p
r
o
o
f

S
t
e
e
l

T
e
n
s
i
l
e

R
.
H

o
r

E
l
o
n
g
a
t
i
o
n

1
)

D
i
a
m
e
t
e
r

%

i
n
c
r
e
a
s
e

o
f

%

i
n
c
r
e
a
s
e

o
f
D

f
o
r

g
r
a
d
e

s
t
r
e
n
g
t
h

m
i
n
i
m
u
m

o
f

C
o
n
s
t
a
n
t

D
f
o
r
D
;
f
D

D
;
f
D

f
o
r

t
h
i
c
k
n
e
s
s
e
s

i
n

m
m

A
,

m
i
n
i
m
u
m

m
a
n
t
r
e
l

K

N
l
m
m
2

t
:
5

1
3

1
3

<
t
:
5
2
5

2
5

%

m
m

>

0
,
6

>

0
,
5

>

0
,
6

>

0
,
8

N
l
m
m
2

N
l
m
m
2

:
5

0
,
6

:
5

0
,
8

>

0
,
8

:
5

0
,
5

:
5

0
,
6

:
5

0
,
8

:
5

0
,
9

>

0
,
9

U
n
a
l
l
o
y
e
d

s
t
e
e
l

,

-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
T
S

6
/
T
W

6

(
N
)

2
)

3
6
0
-
4
8
0

2
1
5

2
1
5

3
)

2
4

4
T

0
,
1
0

1
2

I
S

1
9

3
0

2
5

I
S

1
0

8

T
S

6
/
T
W

6

(
Q
T
)

2
)

3
6
0
-
4
9
0

2
5
5

2
5
5

2
3
;
;

2
1

-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
T
S

1
0
/
T
W

1
0

4
1
0
-
5
3
0

2
3
5

2
3
5

,
3
)

"

2
2

4
T

0
,
0
8

1
0

1
2

1
7

3
0

2
5

I
S

1
0

8

T
S

1
5
/
T
W

I
S

4
6
0
-
5
8
0

2
6
5

2
7
5

3
)

2
1

4
T

0
,
0
7

8

1
0

I
S

3
0

2
5

I
S

1
0

8

A
l
l
o
y

s
t
e
e
l
s

-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
2
6

C
r
M
o

4

5
6
0
-
7
4
0

4
4
0

4
4
0

4
2
a

1
6

-
0
,
0
6

-
-
-
1
1

M
n
N
i

5

3

4
1
0
-
5
3
0

2
8
5

2
7
5

2
6
5
1

2
2

-
0
,
0
7

-
-
-
1
3

M
n
N
i

6

3

4
9
0
-
6
1
0

3
5
5

3
4
5

3
3
5
1

2
0

-
0
,
0
7

-
-
-
T
S

4
3
/
T
W

4
3

4
4
0
-
5
9
0

2
4
5

2
4
5

2
4
5
:

1
6

-
0
,
0
8

6

8

1
2

1
2

N
i

1
9

5
1
0
-
7
1
0

3
9
0

3
9
0

3
8
0
<

1
7

-
0
,
0
6

-
-
-
T
S

4
5
/
T
W

4
5

6
9
0
-
8
4
0

5
1
0

5
1
0

5
1
0
1

1
5

-
0
,
0
8

6

8

1
2

I
)

F
o
r

w
a
l
l

t
h
i
c
k
n
e
s
s
e
s

g
r
e
a
t
e
r

t
h
a
n

4
0

m
m
,

t
h
e

v
a
l
u
e

t
o

b
e

o
b
t
a
i
n
e
C
:
I

i
s

t
o

b
e

t
h
e

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

o
f

a
g
r
e
e
m
e
n
t

b
e
t
w
e
e
n

t
h
e

m
a
n
u
f
a
c
t
u
r
e
r

a
n
d

t
h
e

p
u
r
c
h
a
s
e
r

a
t

t
h
e

t
i
m
e

o
f

o
r
d
e
r
i
n
g
.

2
)

N

=

N
o
r
m
a
l
i
z
i
n
g
;

Q
T

=

Q
u
e
n
c
h
i
n
g

a
n
d

t
e
m
p
e
r
i
n
g

3
)

T
o

b
e

a
g
r
e
e
d

a
t

t
h
e

t
i
m
e

o
f

o
r
d
e
r
i
n
g
.

,

4
)

N
o
t

a
p
p
l
i
c
a
b
l
e

f
o
r

s
u
b
m
e
r
g
e
d

a
r
c

w
e
l
d
e
d

(
S
A
W
)

t
u
b
e
s
.

i
u

u

(
J

u

o

o

u

o

T
a
b
l
e

C
2

M
e
c
h
a
n
i
c
a
l

p
r
o
p
e
r
t
i
e
s

a
t

r
o
o
m

t
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

o
f

a
u
s
t
e
n
i
t
i
c

s
t
a
i
n
l
e
s
s

s
t
e
e
l
s

I
)

T
e
n
s
i
l
e

t
e
s
t

I
m
p
a
c
t

t
e
s
t

F
l
a
t
t
e
n
i
n
g

D
r
i
f
t

e
x
p
a
n
d
i
n
g

t
e
s
t

t
e
s
t

A
1
S
[

S
t
e
e
l

t
y
p
e

R
p
t
,
Q

R
m

E
l
o
n
g
a
t
i
o
n
,

A

L
.
)

K
V
,

m
i
n
i
m
u
m
,

J

2
)

C
o
n
s
t
a
n
t

P
e
r
c
e
n
t
a
g
e

i
n
c
r
e
a
s
e

o
f
D
.

d
e
s
i
g
n
a
t
i
o
n

I
S
O

d
e
s
i
g
n
a
t
i
o
n

%

f
o
r

D
I
D

m
i
n
i
m
u
m

m
i
n
i
m
w
n
,

>

0
,
6

N
l
m
2

N
l
m
m
2

N
l
m
m
2

I

t

I

3
)

t

4
)

K

:
5

0
,
6

:
5

0
,
8

>

0
,
8

3
0
4
L

X

2

C
r
N
i

1
8

1
0

1
8
0

2
1
5

4
8
0

t
o

6
8
0

4
0

3
5

8
5

5
5

0
,
0
9

9

I
S

1
7

3
0
4

X

5

C
r
N
i

1
8

9

1
9
5

2
3
0

5
0
0

t
o

7
0
0

4
0

3
5

8
5

5
5

0
,
0
9

9

1
5

1
7

3
4
7

X

6

C
r
N
i
N
b

1
8

1
0

2
0
5

2
4
0

5
1
0

t
o

7
4
0

3
5

3
0

8
5

5
5

0
,
0
9

9

1
5

1
7

3
2
1

X

6

C
r
N
i
T
i

1
8

1
0

2
0
0

2
3
5

5
1
0

t
o

7
1
0

3
5

3
0

8
5

5
5

0
,
0
9

9

1
5

1
7

3
1
6
L

X

2

C
r
N
i
M
o

1
7

1
3

1
9
0

2
2
5

4
9
0

t
o

6
9
0

4
0

3
5

8
5

5
5

0
,
0
9

9

1
5

1
7

3
1
6

X

5

C
r
N
i
M
o

1
7

1
3

2
0
5

2
4
0

5
1
0

t
o

7
1
0

4
0

3
0

8
5

5
5

0
,
0
9

9

1
5

1
7

I
)

F
o
r

t
h
i
c
k
n
e
s
s
e
s

g
r
e
a
t
e
r

t
h
a
n

5
0

m
m
l
t
h
e

v
a
l
u
e

t
o

b
e

o
b
t
a
i
n
e
d

i
s

t
o

p
e

t
h
e

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

o
f

a
g
r
e
e
m
e
n
t

b
e
t
w
e
e
n

t
h
e

m
a
n
u
f
a
c
t
u
r
e
r

a
n
d

t
h
e

p
u
r
c
h
a
s
e
r

a
t

t
h
e

t
i
m
e

o
f

o
r
d
e
r
i
n
g
.

2
)

I

=

l
o
n
g
i
t
u
d
i
n
a
l
;

t

=

t
r
a
n
s
v
e
r
s
e
.

-
3
)

A
p
p
l
i
c
a
b
l
e

o
n
l
y

i
n

c
a
s
e
s

w
h
e
r
e

t
r
a
n
s
v
e
r
s
e

t
e
s
t

p
i
e
c
e
s

c
a
n
n
o
t

b
e

4
)

A
p
p
l
i
c
a
b
l
e

f
o
r

w
a
l
l

t
h
i
c
k
n
e
s
s
e
s

>

2
0
m
m
.

D. Tubes and Pipes for Low Temperature Ser-
vices
D 100 Scope
carbon, carbon-manganese, low alloy and nickel steel tubes
and pipes intended for use in piping systems for liquefied
gases. These rules are also applicable to other types of
pressure piping systems where guaranteed impact properties
at low temperature are required.
D 200 Manufacture
201 The tubes and pipes are to be manufactured seaniless
or by a welding process, and may be hot or cold finished.
ply with the requirements given in Table D 1.
401 Seamless and welded tubes and pipes are to be deliv-
ered in the following heat treated conditions (see Table AI):
Unalloyed steels are to be normalized, except for TS 6/TW
6 which may also be delivered in the quenched and tempered
condition.
Alloy steels are to be quenched and tempered, except for
11 MnNi 5 3 and 13 MnNi 6 3 which are to be delivered in
the normalized or normalized and tempered condition. TS
43ITW 43 and 12 Ni 19 may also be normalized or nor-
malized and tempered if the dimensions of the product so
permit.
batches as defined in A800. Each batch is to comprise 100
tubes or pipes.
502 Each tube or pipe selected for test is to be subjected
to the following tests:
- one tensile test
- one set of impact tests
- one tensile test on the weld for pipes with D ;;:: 508 mm
(ERW and lW) .
- one drift or one ring expanding test (ERW and lW)
503 The impact tests are to be carried out as Charpy V-
notch tests, and are to consist of a set of three test pieces.
The pieces are to be cut in the longitudinal direction with the
notch perpendicular to the original surface of the pipe. The
dimensions of the test pieces are to be in accordance with the
requirements of Ch.l Sec.2. Standard pieces are to be used
except where the wall thickness of the pipe or pipe does not
permit this size.
The impact values are to be determined at the lowest test
temperature specified for the steel grade and the wall thick-
ness in question, given in Table D3. Impact testing is not
required for wall thicknesses below 6mm.
504 The results of all mechanical tests, except impact
testing, are to comply with the appropriate values given in
Table D2.
The results from impact testing are to comply with the val-
ues in Table D3. Subsize impact test pieces of dimension
IOx7,5mm and IOx5mm are to meet a requirement of 516
and 2/3 respectively of the values specified for standard test
pieces.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
,
:J o
.:J
o
:J :J
:J

0'
k
013 c s
.g:-s B.a
'r"" , ...... ;;. C:.S
qq I I 08. 8 e
00 gpo.. e.a
, 0
.... ::s ro
I -;] Q) 'r; rn
'S'

.

E
:::r: VHI") \t1 '''''\In a p.. "'0
;::... I , I c:]
000 00 ,S >. S
E 't;:;mS ]tl
I
" -- 2l ".S
0'" Sc:: {,I 0
00 to_V"! 0 0 "'0 :'9.:5
o-91"_t""l_lI1.. I-ori
..21> a
H
...
:;;:
I
C""I_C"'l_M :g "CI "B 5.0
L I 0 0 c: 5 c:
0eo
...... 5 ..... 5
o 0 >.::1 ::I g.o
'" S cd.o 0 oQ)
::I5e-.gl-obh 1-0
t.A ' , I , 5 ..c::l cd
]
'\l

_ ..... 0 ...... .o..c>. .... S
_ l;j .- 0 - '" s
I I
lOS : il' s
<:nC: ..... 5"'R .cd 0
...... cd :l:S 01)-
o 5 5 .S
"l 5,g .!!;- "CI Q) .....
- ,!! ...... cd 0.0 ..c]
"'III<UC: c:5
Ii( 8 c 2l
G
.B"B
I I I P-';g ] & (:)
<:S <:n ........ " - c:

;: .5
.5
E
c::i'c::i'c::i'
'r"" '"
000
ciOAO
A
_ >(Cd J1.s"" 0 <n
<U'I:! c: <:nO t3
I-oB 0 ... 00 ..c c:
<U cd 5 ...... - ...... ..!:4
I I I g} 5 ,!! a oS 0.
2
-5 t3 <U e'5! oS
I-o..c..c'" ::::l
M'M'

00
, 5.15 g..@ 8 "8
f----f-----------r----------------1. <U 1-0 <:n...... c: cd'"
oS 0 '0..0 .@ "a oS

mm
000
oA60
A
__ Q., 01-0 e ....
.:: <U
000000 c: <n c.2 cd .D
o6660
A
6 e g 8 8.,S "3
.
......... 0 ..... ]-5 e A Cd.o
II.J
1-0 cd OA
"'0 "CI 1;0;':: .a 0 Q.,
000 oOo.nooo "'0 cd"" "B.s
A C'!.. "!. \OA IX)A IX)A IX)A t3::E '3 '0 't;l"8 ___ 0 __ 000"'-'"",,;:, . .;:j .......... 8 cd
'1"1.1 ::s o.n o.n o.n o.n 0 0 (f1Ao.n (f1A .D <U::=:.s <:n 5
.?:;> .... E (f1 (f1 (f1 (f11O o.n '9 (f1 '9 ...... .!:4..... . ... 0 cd ......
co= tI') ... A A A Ao.n Ao.n o!'l.o >. ...... 01) u c::
= 000 000 _ 0 _ c: I!) c: c: .D B
A >..o:.::l .s cd';> ...... c:
40l 10;: 0 0 cd 0 Q.,- U cd 8
- S ...... Q.,<:n '0 C..c S
"CI Ocd .....
O
cd
......
,g
- 0\.0 a C I!) 1-0 0
= t' Q\ 0 N .5 C u S
o __ N OAV IX) o.n 11"1 (f1 <:n 0 5 ';:j u A A , ____ ............ ;:j .... u . cd- >'..c
.- 0 0 0 N A A A ..c ::I 1:: c: 8 <U CQ ....
a VI VI VI NAOOOOO ";; 0_ .B I!) t3 ....i 1-0
C. 0'''' 8' c: .=: ..c C ..e
g
_ .a:o] e "B 8
5 og .... -- ... c:"CI5
.... So a 0 C'S 0 ::I .'::l
5 _ i '15 g}..c 5 's
o :.!: E ";i:g @"' t3

... "B 10 ......... 0\ 0 . .so _.D.o .:9
Q t.. >. I -. <n I ::Ezz-. ...... __ E ........ oJ:: 0 >. .5 I!)
40l tIo .9: -.011"1 11-0 C c::(f1 .... V) .!! 5 cd .... 'U .... cd 0 oJ::
::c 1 \0_ ...... 1 u::E::Evzv P-l..c-5!::: E E-o E-o
t;; ::> i < i :::;- R

DET NORSKE VERITAS
nUll::;:' IVI ,,",OII\,,'U' Y , .... ""u
D. Tubes and Pipes for Low Temperature Ser-
vices
D 100 Scope
carbon, carbon-manganese, low alloy and nickel steel tubes
and pipes intended for use in piping systems for liquefied
gases. These rules are also applicable to other types of
pressure piping systems where guaranteed impact properties
at low temperature are required.
D 200 Manufacture
201 The tubes and pipes are to be manufactured seaniless
or by a welding process, and may be hot or cold finished.
ply with the requirements given in Table D 1.
401 Seamless and welded tubes and pipes are to be deliv-
ered in the following heat treated conditions (see Table AI):
Unalloyed steels are to be normalized, except for TS 6/TW
6 which may also be delivered in the quenched and tempered
condition.
Alloy steels are to be quenched and tempered, except for
11 MnNi 5 3 and 13 MnNi 6 3 which are to be delivered in
the normalized or normalized and tempered condition. TS
43ITW 43 and 12 Ni 19 may also be normalized or nor-
malized and tempered if the dimensions of the product so
permit.
batches as defined in A800. Each batch is to comprise 100
tubes or pipes.
502 Each tube or pipe selected for test is to be subjected
to the following tests:
- one tensile test
- one tensile test on the weld for pipes with D ;;:: 508 mm
(ERW and lW) .
- one drift or one ring expanding test (ERW and lW)
503 The impact tests are to be carried out as Charpy V-
notch tests, and are to consist of a set of three test pieces.
The pieces are to be cut in the longitudinal direction with the
notch perpendicular to the original surface of the pipe. The
dimensions of the test pieces are to be in accordance with the
requirements of Ch.l Sec.2. Standard pieces are to be used
except where the wall thickness of the pipe or pipe does not
permit this size.
The impact values are to be determined at the lowest test
temperature specified for the steel grade and the wall thick-
ness in question, given in Table D3. Impact testing is not
required for wall thicknesses below 6mm.
504 The results of all mechanical tests, except impact
testing, are to comply with the appropriate values given in
Table D2.
The results from impact testing are to comply with the val-
ues in Table D3. Subsize impact test pieces of dimension
IOx7,5mm and IOx5mm are to meet a requirement of 516
and 2/3 respectively of the values specified for standard test
pieces.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
,
:J o
.:J
o
:J :J
:J

0'
k
013 c s
.g:-s B.a
'r"" , ...... ;;. C:.S
qq I I 08. 8 e
00 gpo.. e.a
, 0
.... ::s ro
I -;] Q) 'r; rn
'S'

.

E
:::r: VHI") \t1 '''''\In a p.. "'0
;::... I , I c:]
000 00 ,S >. S
E 't;:;mS ]tl
I
" -- 2l ".S
0'" Sc:: {,I 0
00 to_V"! 0 0 "'0 :'9.:5
o-91"_t""l_lI1.. I-ori
..21> a
H
...
:;;:
I
C""I_C"'l_M :g "CI "B 5.0
L I 0 0 c: 5 c:
0eo
...... 5 ..... 5
o 0 >.::1 ::I g.o
'" S cd.o 0 oQ)
::I5e-.gl-obh 1-0
t.A ' , I , 5 ..c::l cd
]
'\l

_ ..... 0 ...... .o..c>. .... S
_ l;j .- 0 - '" s
I I
lOS : il' s
<:nC: ..... 5"'R .cd 0
...... cd :l:S 01)-
o 5 5 .S
"l 5,g .!!;- "CI Q) .....
- ,!! ...... cd 0.0 ..c]
"'III<UC: c:5
Ii( 8 c 2l
G
.B"B
I I I P-';g ] & (:)
<:S <:n ........ " - c:

;: .5
.5
E
c::i'c::i'c::i'
'r"" '"
000
ciOAO
A
_ >(Cd J1.s"" 0 <n
<U'I:! c: <:nO t3
I-oB 0 ... 00 ..c c:
<U cd 5 ...... - ...... ..!:4
I I I g} 5 ,!! a oS 0.
2
-5 t3 <U e'5! oS
I-o..c..c'" ::::l
M'M'

00
, 5.15 g..@ 8 "8
f----f-----------r----------------1. <U 1-0 <:n...... c: cd'"
oS 0 '0..0 .@ "a oS

mm
000
oA60
A
__ Q., 01-0 e ....
.:: <U
000000 c: <n c.2 cd .D
o6660
A
6 e g 8 8.,S "3
.
......... 0 ..... ]-5 e A Cd.o
II.J
1-0 cd OA
"'0 "CI 1;0;':: .a 0 Q.,
000 oOo.nooo "'0 cd"" "B.s
A C'!.. "!. \OA IX)A IX)A IX)A t3::E '3 '0 't;l"8 ___ 0 __ 000"'-'"",,;:, . .;:j .......... 8 cd
'1"1.1 ::s o.n o.n o.n o.n 0 0 (f1Ao.n (f1A .D <U::=:.s <:n 5
.?:;> .... E (f1 (f1 (f1 (f11O o.n '9 (f1 '9 ...... .!:4..... . ... 0 cd ......
co= tI') ... A A A Ao.n Ao.n o!'l.o >. ...... 01) u c::
= 000 000 _ 0 _ c: I!) c: c: .D B
A >..o:.::l .s cd';> ...... c:
40l 10;: 0 0 cd 0 Q.,- U cd 8
- S ...... Q.,<:n '0 C..c S
"CI Ocd .....
O
cd
......
,g
- 0\.0 a C I!) 1-0 0
= t' Q\ 0 N .5 C u S
o __ N OAV IX) o.n 11"1 (f1 <:n 0 5 ';:j u A A , ____ ............ ;:j .... u . cd- >'..c
.- 0 0 0 N A A A ..c ::I 1:: c: 8 <U CQ ....
a VI VI VI NAOOOOO ";; 0_ .B I!) t3 ....i 1-0
C. 0'''' 8' c: .=: ..c C ..e
g
_ .a:o] e "B 8
5 og .... -- ... c:"CI5
.... So a 0 C'S 0 ::I .'::l
5 _ i '15 g}..c 5 's
o :.!: E ";i:g @"' t3

... "B 10 ......... 0\ 0 . .so _.D.o .:9
Q t.. >. I -. <n I ::Ezz-. ...... __ E ........ oJ:: 0 >. .5 I!)
40l tIo .9: -.011"1 11-0 C c::(f1 .... V) .!! 5 cd .... 'U .... cd 0 oJ::
::c 1 \0_ ...... 1 u::E::Evzv P-l..c-5!::: E E-o E-o
t;; ::> i < i :::;- R

DET NORSKE VERITAS
nUll::;:' IVI ,,",OII\,,'U' Y , .... ""u
T
a
b
l
e

D
2

p
r
o
p
e
r
t
i
e
s

a
t

r
o
o
m

t
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

" "
T
e
n
s
i
l
e

t
e
s
t

B
e
n
d

t
e
s
t

F
l
a
t
t
e
n
i
n
g

t
e
s
t

D
r
i
f
t

e
x
p
a
n
d
i
n
g

t
e
s
t

4
)

R
i
n
g

e
x
p
a
n
d
i
n
g

t
e
s
t

4
)

U
p
p
e
r

y
i
e
l
d

s
t
r
e
s
s

o
r

p
r
o
o
f

S
t
e
e
l

T
e
n
s
i
l
e

R
.
H

o
r

E
l
o
n
g
a
t
i
o
n

1
)

D
i
a
m
e
t
e
r

%

i
n
c
r
e
a
s
e

o
f

%

i
n
c
r
e
a
s
e

o
f
D

f
o
r

g
r
a
d
e

s
t
r
e
n
g
t
h

m
i
n
i
m
u
m

o
f

C
o
n
s
t
a
n
t

D
f
o
r
D
;
f
D

D
;
f
D

f
o
r

t
h
i
c
k
n
e
s
s
e
s

i
n

m
m

A
,

m
i
n
i
m
u
m

m
a
n
t
r
e
l

K

N
l
m
m
2

t
:
5

1
3

1
3

<
t
:
5
2
5

2
5

%

m
m

>

0
,
6

>

0
,
5

>

0
,
6

>

0
,
8

N
l
m
m
2

N
l
m
m
2

:
5

0
,
6

:
5

0
,
8

>

0
,
8

:
5

0
,
5

:
5

0
,
6

:
5

0
,
8

:
5

0
,
9

>

0
,
9

U
n
a
l
l
o
y
e
d

s
t
e
e
l

,

-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
T
S

6
/
T
W

6

(
N
)

2
)

3
6
0
-
4
8
0

2
1
5

2
1
5

3
)

2
4

4
T

0
,
1
0

1
2

I
S

1
9

3
0

2
5

I
S

1
0

8

T
S

6
/
T
W

6

(
Q
T
)

2
)

3
6
0
-
4
9
0

2
5
5

2
5
5

2
3
;
;

2
1

-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
T
S

1
0
/
T
W

1
0

4
1
0
-
5
3
0

2
3
5

2
3
5

,
3
)

"

2
2

4
T

0
,
0
8

1
0

1
2

1
7

3
0

2
5

I
S

1
0

8

T
S

1
5
/
T
W

I
S

4
6
0
-
5
8
0

2
6
5

2
7
5

3
)

2
1

4
T

0
,
0
7

8

1
0

I
S

3
0

2
5

I
S

1
0

8

A
l
l
o
y

s
t
e
e
l
s

-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
2
6

C
r
M
o

4

5
6
0
-
7
4
0

4
4
0

4
4
0

4
2
a

1
6

-
0
,
0
6

-
-
-
1
1

M
n
N
i

5

3

4
1
0
-
5
3
0

2
8
5

2
7
5

2
6
5
1

2
2

-
0
,
0
7

-
-
-
1
3

M
n
N
i

6

3

4
9
0
-
6
1
0

3
5
5

3
4
5

3
3
5
1

2
0

-
0
,
0
7

-
-
-
T
S

4
3
/
T
W

4
3

4
4
0
-
5
9
0

2
4
5

2
4
5

2
4
5
:

1
6

-
0
,
0
8

6

8

1
2

1
2

N
i

1
9

5
1
0
-
7
1
0

3
9
0

3
9
0

3
8
0
<

1
7

-
0
,
0
6

-
-
-
T
S

4
5
/
T
W

4
5

6
9
0
-
8
4
0

5
1
0

5
1
0

5
1
0
1

1
5

-
0
,
0
8

6

8

1
2

I
)

F
o
r

w
a
l
l

t
h
i
c
k
n
e
s
s
e
s

g
r
e
a
t
e
r

t
h
a
n

4
0

m
m
,

t
h
e

v
a
l
u
e

t
o

b
e

o
b
t
a
i
n
e
C
:
I

i
s

t
o

b
e

t
h
e

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

o
f

a
g
r
e
e
m
e
n
t

b
e
t
w
e
e
n

t
h
e

m
a
n
u
f
a
c
t
u
r
e
r

a
n
d

t
h
e

p
u
r
c
h
a
s
e
r

a
t

t
h
e

t
i
m
e

o
f

o
r
d
e
r
i
n
g
.

2
)

N

=

N
o
r
m
a
l
i
z
i
n
g
;

Q
T

=

Q
u
e
n
c
h
i
n
g

a
n
d

t
e
m
p
e
r
i
n
g

3
)

T
o

b
e

a
g
r
e
e
d

a
t

t
h
e

t
i
m
e

o
f

o
r
d
e
r
i
n
g
.

,

4
)

N
o
t

a
p
p
l
i
c
a
b
l
e

f
o
r

s
u
b
m
e
r
g
e
d

a
r
c

w
e
l
d
e
d

(
S
A
W
)

t
u
b
e
s
.

i
u

u

(
J

u

o

o

u

o

T
a
b
l
e

C
2

M
e
c
h
a
n
i
c
a
l

p
r
o
p
e
r
t
i
e
s

a
t

r
o
o
m

t
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

o
f

a
u
s
t
e
n
i
t
i
c

s
t
a
i
n
l
e
s
s

s
t
e
e
l
s

I
)

T
e
n
s
i
l
e

t
e
s
t

I
m
p
a
c
t

t
e
s
t

F
l
a
t
t
e
n
i
n
g

D
r
i
f
t

e
x
p
a
n
d
i
n
g

t
e
s
t

t
e
s
t

A
1
S
[

S
t
e
e
l

t
y
p
e

R
p
t
,
Q

R
m

E
l
o
n
g
a
t
i
o
n
,

A

L
.
)

K
V
,

m
i
n
i
m
u
m
,

J

2
)

C
o
n
s
t
a
n
t

P
e
r
c
e
n
t
a
g
e

i
n
c
r
e
a
s
e

o
f
D
.

d
e
s
i
g
n
a
t
i
o
n

I
S
O

d
e
s
i
g
n
a
t
i
o
n

%

f
o
r

D
I
D

m
i
n
i
m
u
m

m
i
n
i
m
w
n
,

>

0
,
6

N
l
m
2

N
l
m
m
2

N
l
m
m
2

I

t

I

3
)

t

4
)

K

:
5

0
,
6

:
5

0
,
8

>

0
,
8

3
0
4
L

X

2

C
r
N
i

1
8

1
0

1
8
0

2
1
5

4
8
0

t
o

6
8
0

4
0

3
5

8
5

5
5

0
,
0
9

9

I
S

1
7

3
0
4

X

5

C
r
N
i

1
8

9

1
9
5

2
3
0

5
0
0

t
o

7
0
0

4
0

3
5

8
5

5
5

0
,
0
9

9

1
5

1
7

3
4
7

X

6

C
r
N
i
N
b

1
8

1
0

2
0
5

2
4
0

5
1
0

t
o

7
4
0

3
5

3
0

8
5

5
5

0
,
0
9

9

1
5

1
7

3
2
1

X

6

C
r
N
i
T
i

1
8

1
0

2
0
0

2
3
5

5
1
0

t
o

7
1
0

3
5

3
0

8
5

5
5

0
,
0
9

9

1
5

1
7

3
1
6
L

X

2

C
r
N
i
M
o

1
7

1
3

1
9
0

2
2
5

4
9
0

t
o

6
9
0

4
0

3
5

8
5

5
5

0
,
0
9

9

1
5

1
7

3
1
6

X

5

C
r
N
i
M
o

1
7

1
3

2
0
5

2
4
0

5
1
0

t
o

7
1
0

4
0

3
0

8
5

5
5

0
,
0
9

9

1
5

1
7

I
)

F
o
r

t
h
i
c
k
n
e
s
s
e
s

g
r
e
a
t
e
r

t
h
a
n

5
0

m
m
l
t
h
e

v
a
l
u
e

t
o

b
e

o
b
t
a
i
n
e
d

i
s

t
o

p
e

t
h
e

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

o
f

a
g
r
e
e
m
e
n
t

b
e
t
w
e
e
n

t
h
e

m
a
n
u
f
a
c
t
u
r
e
r

a
n
d

t
h
e

p
u
r
c
h
a
s
e
r

a
t

t
h
e

t
i
m
e

o
f

o
r
d
e
r
i
n
g
.

2
)

I

=

l
o
n
g
i
t
u
d
i
n
a
l
;

t

=

t
r
a
n
s
v
e
r
s
e
.

-
3
)

A
p
p
l
i
c
a
b
l
e

o
n
l
y

i
n

c
a
s
e
s

w
h
e
r
e

t
r
a
n
s
v
e
r
s
e

t
e
s
t

p
i
e
c
e
s

c
a
n
n
o
t

b
e

4
)

A
p
p
l
i
c
a
b
l
e

f
o
r

w
a
l
l

t
h
i
c
k
n
e
s
s
e
s

>

2
0
m
m
.

T
a
b
l
e

C
l

C
h
e
m
i
c
a
l

c
o
m
p
o
s
i
t
i
o
n

(
l
a
d
l
e

a
n
a
l
y
s
i
s
)
,

o
f

a
u
s
t
e
n
i
t
i
c

s
t
e
e
I
s

f
o
r

s
e
a
m
l
e
s
s

a
n
d

w
e
l
d
e
d

t
u
b
e
s

,

C
h
e
m
i
c
a
l

c
o
m
p
o
s
i
t
i
o
n
,

%

1
)

A
l
S
I

S
t
e
e
l

t
y
p
e

S
i

M
n

P

S

d
e
s
i
g
n
a
t
i
o
n

I
S
O

d
e
s
i
g
n
a
t
i
o
n

C

C
r

M
o

N
i

O
t
h
e
r
s

m
a
x
i
m
w
n

m
a
x
i
m
u
m

m
a
x
i
m
u
m

m
a
x
i
m
u
m

3
0
4
L

X

2

C
r
N
i

1
8

1
0

<

0
,
0
3
0

1
,
0
0

2
,
0
0

0
,
0
4
5

0
,
0
3
0

1
7
,
0
0

t
o

1
9
,
0
0

-
9
,
0
0

t
o

1
2
,
0
0

3
0
4

X

5

C
r
N
i

1
8

9

<

0
,
0
7

1
,
0
0

2
,
0
0

:

0
,
0
4
5

0
,
0
3
0

1
7
,
0
0

t
o

1
9
,
0
0

-
8
,
0
0

t
o

1
1
,
0
0

3
4
7

X

6

C
r
N
i
N
b

1
8

1
0

<

0
,
0
8

1
,
0
0

2
,
0
0

0
,
0
4
5

0
,
0
3
0

1
7
,
0
0

t
o

1
9
,
0
0

-
9
,
0
0

t
o

1
2
,
0
0

I
O
x
%
C

<

N
b

<

1
,
0
0

2
)

3
2
1

X

6

C
r
N
i
T
i

1
8

1
0

<

0
,
0
8

1
,
0
0

2
,
0
0

,

0
,
0
4
5

0
,
0
3
0

1
7
,
0
0

t
o

1
9
,
0
0

-
9
,
0
0

t
o

1
2
,
0
0

5
x
%
C

<

T
i

<

0
,
8
0

3
1
6
L

X

2

C
r
N
i
M
o

1
7

1
3

<

0
,
0
3
0

1
,
0
0

2
,
0
0

0
,
0
4
5

0
,
0
3
0

1
6
,
5
0

t
o

1
8
,
5
0

2
,
5

t
o

3
,
0

1
1

,
5
0

t
o

1
4
,
0
0

3
1
6

X

5

C
r
N
i
M
o

1
7

1
3

<

0
,
0
7

1
,
0
0

2
,
0
0

0
,
0
4
5

0
,
0
3
0

1
6
,
5
0

t
o

1
8
,
5
0

2
,
5

t
o

3
,
0

1
1
,
0
0

t
o

1
4
,
0
0

1
)

E
l
e
m
e
n
t
s

n
o
t

q
u
o
t
e
d

i
n

t
h
i
s

t
a
b
l
e

a
r
e

n
o
t

t
o

b
e

i
n
t
e
n
t
i
o
n
a
l
l
y

a
d
d
e
d

w
i
t
h
o
u
t

t
h
e

a
g
r
e
e
m
e
n
t

o
f

t
h
e

p
u
r
c
h
a
s
e
r
,

o
t
h
e
r

t
h
a
n

f
o
r

t
h
e

p
u
r
p
o
s
e

o
f

f
i
n
i
s
h
i
n
g

t
h
e

h
e
a
t
.

I
f
i
n

s
p
e
c
i
a
l

c
a
s
e
s
,

t
h
e

p
u
r
c
h
a
s
e
r

c
o
n
s
i
d
e
r
s

t
h
a
t

t
h
e

l
e
v
e
l

o
f

r
e
s
i
d
u
a
l

e
l
e
m
e
n
t
s

i
s

i
m
p
o
r
t
a
n
t

i
n

r
e
l
a
t
i
o
n

t
o

t
h
e

m
e
c
h
a
n
i
c
a
l

a
n
d

t
e
c
h
n
o
l
o
g
i
c
a
l

p
r
o
p
e
r
t
i
e
s

o
f

t
h
e

s
t
e
e
l

i
n

t
h
e

i
n
t
e
n
d
e
d

a
p
p
l
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
,

t
h
e

c
a
s
t

(
l
a
d
l
e
)

a
n
a
l
y
s
i
s

l
i
m
i
t
s

f
o
r

s
u
c
h

e
l
e
m
e
n
t
s

a
r
e

t
o

b
e

..

t
h
e

t
i
m
e

o
f

e
n
q
u
i
r
y

o
r

T
h
e

a
g
r
e
e
d

e
l
e
m
e
n
t
s

a
r
e

t
h
e
n

t
o

b
e

a
n
a
l
y
s
e
d

a
n
d

t
h
e

v
a
l
u
e
s

r
e
p
o
r
t
e
d
.

2
)

N
i
o
b
i
u
m

c
o
n
t
e
n
t

i
n
c
l
u
d
e
s

t
a
n
t
a
l
u
m

a
n
a
l
y
s
e
d

a
s

n
i
o
b
i
u
m
.

u

u

u

u

u

u

T
a
b
l
e

D
3

-
I
m
p
a
c
t

p
r
o
p
e
r
t
i
e
s

a
t

l
o
w

t
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

,
W
a
l
l

o
f

M
i
n
i
m
u
m

i
m
p
a
c
t

v
a
l
u
e

i
n

J
,

t
h
i
c
k
n
e
s
s

1
)

a
v
e
r
a
g
e

o
f
t
h
r
e
e

t
e
s
t

p
i
e
c
e
s

S
t
e
e
l

g
r
a
d
e

t
e
s
t

P
f
.
e
c
e
s

w
i
t
h

T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

C

T

r
e
s
p
e
c
t

t
o

t
u
b
e

I a
x
i
s

-
1
9
6

-
1
2
0

-
1
1
0

-
1
0
0

-
9
0

-
6
0

-
5
0

-
4
0

-
2
0

+
2
0

m
m

T
S

6
/
T
W

6

(
N
)

<
1
0

4
0

4
5

5
5

T
S

6
1
T
W

6

(
Q
T
)

5
2
5

L
o
I
i
g
i
t
u
d
i
n
a
l

4
0

4
5

5
0

6
0

U
n
a
l
l
o
y
e
d

T
r
a
r
j
s
v
e
r
s
e

4
)

2
7

3
0

3
5

4
0

2
5
<
T
5
4
0

4
0

4
5

5
5

s
t
e
e
l
:

T
r
a
.
r
:
l
s
v
e
r
s
e

4
)

2
7

3
0

3
5

T
S

1
0
/
T
W

1
0

5
2
5

L
o
n
g
i
t
u
d
i
n
a
l

2
7

4
0

4
5

5
0

T
S

1
5
/
T
W

1
5

T
r
a
n
s
v
e
r
s
e

4
)

2
7

3
0

3
5

2
6

C
r
M
o

4

5
2
5

L
o
q
g
i
t
u
d
i
n
a
l

4
0

4
0

4
5

5
0

6
0

T
r
a
n
s
v
e
r
s
e

4
)

2
7

2
7

3
0

3
5

4
0

1
1

M
n
N
i
5
3

5
4
0

4
0

4
5

5
0

5
5

7
0

1
3

M
n
N
i

6

3

T
r
a
n
s
v
e
r
s
e

4
)

2
7

3
0

3
5

4
0

4
5

T
S

4
3
/
T
W

4
3

5
2
5

L
0
r
,
g
i
t
u
d
i
n
a
l

4
0

4
5

5
0

5
5

5
5

6
0

6
5

T
r
a
J
l
l
s
v
e
r
s
e

4
)

2
7

3
0

3
5

3
5

4
0

4
5

4
5

A
l
l
o
y

2
5
<
T
5
4
0

L
o
r
,
g
i
t
u
d
i
n
a
l

4
0

4
5

5
0

5
0

5
5

6
5

s
t
e
e
l
:

T
r
a
n
s
v
e
r
s
e

4
)

2
7

3
0

3
0

3
5

4
0

4
5

1
2

N
i

1
9

5
2
5

L
o
q
g
i
t
u
d
i
n
a
l

4
0

4
5

5
0

5
5

6
5

6
5

6
5

7
0

7
0

T
r
a
a
s
v
e
r
s
e

4
)

2
7

3
0

3
0

3
5

4
5

4
5

4
5

5
0

5
0

2
5
<
T
5
4
0

L
o
q
g
i
t
u
d
i
n
a
l

4
0

4
5

5
0

6
0

6
5

6
5

6
5

7
0

4
)

2
7

3
0

3
0

4
0

4
5

4
5

4
5

5
0

T
S

4
5
/
T
W

4
5

5
4
0

L
o
q
g
i
t
u
d
i
n
a
l

4
0

5
0

5
0

6
0

6
0

7
0

7
0

7
0

7
0

7
0

T
r
a
l
.
s
v
e
r
s
e

4
)

2
7

3
5

3
5

4
0

4
0

5
0

5
0

5
0

5
0

5
0

1
)

T
h
e

v
a
l
u
e
s

f
o
r

t
u
b
e
s

w
i
t
h

w
a
l
l

t
h
i
c
k
n
e
s
s

e
x
c
e
e
d
i
n
g

4
0

m
r
n
,

w
i
t
t
:
.

t
h
e

e
x
c
e
p
t
i
o
n

o
f

s
t
e
e
l
s

T
S

6
(
N
)

a
n
d

T
S

6
(
Q
1
)
.

a
r
e

t
o

b
e

a
g
r
e
e
d

a
t

t
h
e

t
i
m
e

o
f

o
r
d
e
r
i
n
g
.

2
)

S
i
n
g
l
e

v
a
l
u
e
s

n
o
t

l
e
s
s

t
h
a
n

7
0
%

o
f
t
h
e

a
v
e
r
a
g
e
.

3
)

T
h
e

v
a
l
u
e
s

a
p
p
l
y

t
o

s
t
a
n
d
a
r
d

l
O
x
l
O
m
m

t
e
s
t

p
i
e
c
e
s
.

F
o
r

s
i
z
e
s

o
f

t
e
s
t

p
i
e
c
e
s
,

s
e
e

5
0
4
.

4
)

T
r
a
n
s
v
e
r
s
e

t
e
s
t

p
i
e
c
e
s
.
a
r
e

t
o

b
e

u
s
e
d

o
n
l
y

b
y

a
g
r
e
e
m
e
n
t
.

:

'
"

n

;
0
-
,

"
'
:

e
n
'

r
o

'

,
,
-
-
I
'
,

,

I

:

,

,

,
,
'

"
,
'

<
c
,

r
o

,

w
,

e
n

,

L ____ _
MUles TOr .January I :J:Jb
E. Tubes and Pipes for Boilers, Heat Exchan-
gers and Superheaters
E 100 Scope
carbon, carbon-manganese and low alloy steel tubes and
pipes for boilers, superheaters and heat exchangers.
102 Austenitic stainless steels may also be used for ele-
vated temperature service. Where such applications are
proposed, details of the chemical composition, heat treat-
ment and mechanical properties are to be submitted for ap-
proval.
E 200 Manufacture
or by a welding process, and may be hot or cold fmished.
ply with the requirements given in the Tables EI and E3.
401 Tubes and pipes are to be suitably heat treated over
their full length. The following heat treatment is to be used
depending of the type of steel (see Table AI):
- normalizing
- normalizing and tempering, or isothermal annealing
- full annealing or isothermal annealing.
batches as defmed in A800. Each batch is to comprise lOa
tubes.
503 For each tube or pipe selected for test the following
- one tensile test
- one tensile test on the weld for pipes with
(ERWand 1W)
- one drift or ring expanding test (ERW and 1W)
the appropriate values given in the Tables E2 and E4.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
)
)
J
J

,
C)
:J
:J
:J
c. Stainless Steel PressureTubes and Pipes
C 100 Scope
stainless steel tubes and pipes for use in the construction of
the piping systems for chemicals, liquefied gases and bulk
chemical tankers.
C 200 Manufacture
or by a welding process. When welded, an automatic electric
welding process, with or without filler metal is to be applied.
The chemical composition of ladle samples is to comply with
appropriate requirements of Table CI or an equivalent na-
tional or international standard.
The tubes and pipes are normally to be supplied in the sol-
ution treated condition. Welded pipes may be delivered in
the welded condition without subsequent heat treatment
provided that approval testing has demonstrated satisfactory
characteristics of the material. Where the pipes are supplied
in the welded condition, the strips or plates used must be in
the solution treated condition.
501 The pipes are to be presented for testing in batches as
defined in A800. Each batch is to comprise 100 pipes.
503 Each pipe selected for test is to be subjected to the
following tests:
For seamless tubes and pipes:
- one tensile test
For welded tubes and pipes:
- one tensile test on the weld for tubes with outside diam-
eter > 219,lmm.
- two flattening tests or bend tests or one ring tensile test.
504 Impact testing of austenitic stainless steels is required
only for design temperatures below -105C. Test temper-
ature is to be -196C. .
505 The result of all mechanical tests is to comply with
appropriate requirements given in Table C2 or an equiv-
alent national or international standard.
601 For austenitic stainless steel pipes intended used for
piping systems for chemicals, intercrystalline corrosion tests
are to be carried out. The test is to be carried out in ac-
cordance with ASTM A 262 Practice E .Copper-Copper
Sulphate-Sulphuric Acid Test>, or an equivalent standard.
602 When a test with regard to safety against selective
corrosion in weld metal is required, testing according to
ASTM A 262 Practice C .Nitric Acid Test> is to be carried
out with modifications according to the following:
1) the test is to be carried out on test pieces with weld me-
tal.
2) the surface of the weld metal is to cover at least 2S % of
.the total surface of the test piece.
3) the total surface of the test piece is to be at least 600
mm
2
.
4) grinding of the test piece is permitted on cut surfaces
only.
The corrosion testing is to consist of at least three test peri-
ods of 48 hours each. The results, which express the corro-
sion rate, are to be indicated as g/m2 h for each period. The
corrosion rate for each test period is not to exceed 1,0
g/m2 h.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
T
a
b
l
e

H
2

M
e
c
h
a
n
i
c
a
l

p
r
o
p
e
r
t
i
e
s

a
t

r
o
o
m

t
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

T
e
n
s
i
l
e

l
e
s
t

F
l
a
t
t
e
n
i
n
g

t
e
s
t

B
e
n
d

t
e
s
t

D
r
i
f
t

e
x
p
a
n
d
i
n
g

t
e
s
t

0
)

P
e
r
c
e
n
t
a
g
e

i
n
c
r
e
a
s
e

o
f
D

y
i
e
l
d

s
t
r
e
s
s

o
r

s
t
r
e
s
s

T
e
n
s
i
l
e

R
e
H

o
r

E
l
o
n
g
a
t
i
o
n

3
)

C
o
n
s
t
a
n
t

C

D
i
a
m
e
t
e
r

S
t
e
e
l

f
o
r

o
f

F
o
r

d
i
D

r
a
t
i
o

5
)

g
r
a
d
e

1
)

s
t
r
e
n
g
t
h

m
i
n
i
m
u
m
!

A
,

m
i
n
i
m
w
n

t
I
D

r
a
t
i
o

m
a
n
t
r
e
l

f
o
r

t
h
i
c
k
n
e
s
s
e
s

i
i
-
t

m
m

N
l
m
m
2

t

$

1
6

1
6



0
,
1
5

$

0
,
8

>

0
,
8

N
l
m
m
2

N
l
m
m
2

N
l
m
m
2

%

%

m
m

T
W
3
2
0

3
2
0

t
o

4
6
0

1
9
5

-
-
2
5

2
3

3
t

1
0

1
2

T
S

3
6
0
/
T
W

3
6
0

3
6
0

t
o

5
0
0

2
3
5

2
2
5

2
1
5

2
5

2
3

0
,
0
9

0
,
0
8

3
t

1
0

1
2

T
S

4
1
0
/
T
W

4
1
0

4
1
0

t
o

5
5
0

2
5
5

2
4
5

2
3
5

2
2

3
0

0
,
0
7

0
,
0
6

4
t

8

1
0

T
S

4
3
0
/
T
W

4
3
0

4
3
0

t
o

5
7
0

2
7
5

2
6
5

,

2
5
5

2
1

1
9

0
,
0
7

0
,
0
6

4
t

'
8

1
0

T
S

5
0
0
/
T
W

5
0
0

5
0
0

t
o

6
5
0

3
5
5

3
4
5

,

q
)

2
1

q
)

1
9
4
)

0
,
0
7

0
,
0
6

4
t

6

8

1
)

T
S

s
e
a
m
l
e
s
s

s
t
e
e
l

t
u
b
e
s
;

T
W

w
e
l
d
e
d

s
t
e
e
l

t
u
b
e
s

2
)

F
o
r

t
h
i
c
k
n
e
s
s
e
s

g
r
e
a
t
e
r

t
h
a
n

6
5

m
m

f
o
r

s
e
a
m
l
e
s
s

t
u
b
e
s

a
n
d

4
0

m
m

f
o
r

w
e
l
d
e
d

t
u
b
e
s
,

t
h
e

v
a
l
u
e

t
o

b
e

o
b
t
a
i
n
e
d

i
s

t
o

b
e

t
h
e

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

o
f
a
g
r
e
e
m
e
n
t

b
e
t
w
e
e
n

t
h
e

m
a
n
u
f
a
c
t
u
r
e
r

a
n
d

t
h
e

p
u
r
c
h
a
s
e
r

a
t

t
h
e

t
i
m
e

o
f

o
r
d
e
r
i
n
g
.

.

3
)

I

=

l
o
n
g
i
t
u
d
i
n
a
l
;

t

=

t
r
a
n
s
v
e
r
s
e
.

4
)

F
o
r

t
h
i
c
k
n
e
s
s
e
s

g
r
e
a
t
e
r

t
h
a
n

4
0

m
m

f
o
r

s
e
a
m
l
e
s
s

t
u
b
e
s
,

t
h
e

f
o
r

R
e
H

a
n
d

A

a
r
e

t
o

b
e

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

o
f

a
g
r
e
e
m
e
n
t

b
e
t
w
e
e
n

t
h
e

m
a
n
u
f
a
c
t
u
r
e
r

a
n
d

t
h
e

p
u
r
c
h
a
s
e
r

a
t

t
h
e

t
i
m
e

o
f

o
r
d
e
r
i
n
g
.

5
)

d

=

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

d
i
a
m
e
t
e
r
;

D

=

e
x
t
e
r
n
a
l

d
i
a
m
e
t
e
r

6
)

O
n
l
y

a
p
p
l
i
c
a
b
l
e

f
o
r

w
e
l
d
e
d

t
u
b
e
s

a
n
d

p
i
p
e
s
.

.
u

u

u

!
"

,

U

u

u

u

T
a
b
l
e

E
l

C
h
e
m
i
c
a
l

c
o
m
p
o
s
i
t
i
o
n

(
l
a
d
l
e

a
n
a
l
y
s
i
s
)

I
)

f
o
r

s
e
a
m
l
e
s
s

a
n
d

p
i
p
e
s
,

%

S
t
e
e
l

g
r
a
d
e

C

S
i

M
n

p

,

S

C
r

M
o

N
i

V

N
b

A
l

O
t
h
e
r
s

m
a
x
i
m
u
m
.

m
a
x
i
m
w
n

m
a
x
i
m
u
m

U
n
a
l
l
o
y
e
d

s
t
e
e
l

,

-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
,
T
S

3
6
0

$
0
,
1
7

0
,
1
0
-
0
,
3
5

0
,
3
0
-
0
,
8
0

0
,
Q
3
5

0
,
0
3
5

-
-
-
-
-
-
2
)

T
S

4
1
0
-
1

$
0
,
2
1

0
,
1
0
-
0
,
3
5

0
,
4
0
-
1
,
2
0

O
,
0
3
5
!

0
,
0
3
5

-
-
-
-
-
-
2
)

T
S

4
6
0
-
1

$
0
,
2
2

0
,
1
0
-
0
,
4
0

0
,
6
5
-
1
,
4
0

0
,
0
3
5
:

0
,
0
3
5

-
-
-
-
2
)

T
S

5
1
0

<
0
,
2
2
3
)

0
,
1
5
-
0
,
5
5

1
,
0
0
-
1
,
5
0
3
)

0
,
0
3
5
:

0
,
0
3
5

-
-
-
5
)

5
)

-
2
)

4
)

A
l
l
o
y

s
t
e
e
l

!
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
T
S

3
8
0

0
,
1
0
-
0
,
2
0

0
,
1
0
-
0
,
5
0

0
,
3
0
-
0
,
8
0

0
,
0
3
5
:

0
,
Q
3
5

-
0
,
4
5
-
0
,
6
5

-
-
-
0
,
0
2
0

2
)

T
S

4
1
0
-
3

$
0
,
1
5

$
0
,
5
0

0
,
3
0
-
0
,
6
0

O
,
0
3
5
!

0
,
0
3
5

0
,
8
0
-
1
,
2
5

0
,
4
5
-
0
,
6
5

-
-
-
0
,
0
2
0

2
)

T
S

4
1
0
-
4

$
0
,
1
5

0
,
5
0
-
1
,
0
0

0
,
3
0
-
0
,
6
0

0
,
0
3
0
'

0
,
0
3
0

1
,
0
0
-
1
,
5
0

0
,
4
5
-
0
,
6
5

-
-
-
0
,
0
2
0

2
)

T
S

4
3
0

0
,
0
8
-
0
,
1
5

0
,
1
5
-
0
,
5
0

0
,
3
0
-
0
,
6
0

o
,
0
3
0
i

0
,
0
3
0

4
,
0
0
-
6
,
0
0

0
,
4
5
-
0
,
6
5

-
-
-
0
,
0
2
0

2
)

T
S

4
4
0

0
,
1
0
-
0
,
1
7
5
)

0
,
1
5
-
0
,
3
5

0
,
4
0
-
0
,
7
0

0
,
0
3
5
'
:

0
,
0
3
5

0
,
7
0
-
1
,
1
0

0
,
4
5
-
0
,
6
5

-
-
-
0
,
0
2
0

2
)

T
S

4
5
0
-
1

0
,
1
2
-
0
,
2
0

5
)

0
,
1
5
-
0
,
3
5

0
,
4
0
-
0
,
8
0

0
,
0
3
5
,

0
,
0
3
5

-
0
,
2
5
-
0
,
3
5

-
-
-
0
,
0
2
0

2
)

T
S

4
5
0
-
2

0
,
0
8
-
0
,
1
5

0
,
1
5
-
0
,
4
0

0
,
3
0
-
0
,
8
0

0
,
0
3
5
:

0
,
0
3
5

2
,
0
0
-
2
,
5
0

0
,
9
0
-
1
,
2
0

-
-
-
0
,
0
2
0

2
)

T
S

4
6
0
-
2

0
,
1
0
-
0
,
1
5

0
,
1
5
-
0
,
3
5

0
,
4
0
-
0
,
7
0

0
,
0
3
5
'

0
,
0
3
5

0
,
3
0
-
0
,
6
0

0
,
5
0
-
0
,
7
0

-
0
,
2
2
-
0
,
2
8

-
0
,
0
2
0

2
)

T
S

5
0
0

0
,
0
8
-
0
,
1
5

0
,
2
5
-
1
,
0
0

0
,
3
0
-
0
,
6
0

0
,
0
3
0
,
.

0
,
0
3
0

8
,
0
0
-
1
0
,
0
0

0
,
9
0
-
1
,
1
0

-
-
-
0
,
0
2
0

.

2
)

T
S

5
9
0

6
)

$
0
,
1
5

0
,
2
0
-
0
,
6
5

0
,
8
0
-
1
,
3
0

0
,
0
3
0
.

0
,
0
3
0

8
,
5
0
-
1
0
,
5
0

1
,
7
0
-
2
,
3
0

$
0
,
3
0

0
,
2
0
-
0
,
4
0

0
,
3
0
-
0
,
5
5

0
,
0
2
0

2
)

T
S

6
1
0

$
0
,
1
7

0
,
2
5
-
0
,
5
0

0
,
8
0
-
1
,
2
0

0
,
0
3
0
;

0
,
0
3
0

$
0
,
3
0

0
,
2
5
-
0
,
4
0

1
,
0
0
-
1
,
3
0

-
0
,
0
1
5
-
0
,
0
4
5

0
,
0
2
0

C
u

T
S

6
9
0

0
,
1
7
-
0
,
2
3

0
,
1
5
-
0
,
5
0

<
1
,
0
0

0
,
0
3
0
'

0
,
0
3
0

1
0
,
0
0
-
1
2
,
5
0

0
,
8
0
-
1
,
2
0

0
,
3
0
-
0
,
8
0

0
,
2
5
-
0
,
3
5

-
0
,
0
2
0

1
)

E
l
e
m
e
n
t
s

n
o
t

i
n
c
l
u
d
e
d

i
n

t
h
i
s

t
a
b
l
e

m
a
y

n
o
t

b
e

i
n
t
e
n
t
i
o
n
a
l
l
y

a
d
d
e
d

w
i
t
h
o
!
l
t

t
h
e

a
g
r
e
e
m
e
n
t

o
f

t
h
e

p
u
r
c
h
a
s
e
r

e
x
c
e
p
t

f
o
r

e
l
e
m
e
n
t
s

w
h
i
c
h

m
a
y

b
e

a
d
d
e
d

f
o
r

d
e
o
x
i
d
a
t
i
o
n

a
n
d

f
m
i
s
h
i
n
g

o
f

t
h
e

h
e
a
t
.

A
l
l

r
e
a
s
o
n
a
b
l
e

p
r
e
c
a
u
t
i
o
n
s

a
r
e

t
o

b
e

t
a
k
e
n

t
o

p
r
e
v
e
n
t

t
h
e

o
f

e
l
e
m
e
n
t
s

f
r
o
m

s
c
r
a
p

o
r

o
t
h
e
r

m
a
t
e
r
i
a
l
s

u
s
e
d

i
n

t
h
e

m
a
n
u
f
a
c
t
u
r
e
,

b
u
t

r
e
s
i
d
u
a
l

e
l
e
m
e
n
.
t
s

m
a
y

b
e

p
r
e
s
e
n
t
e
d
,

p
r
o
v
i
d
e
d

t
h
a
t

t
h
e

m
e
c
h
a
n
i
c
a
l

p
r
o
p
e
r
t
i
e
s

a
n
d

a
p
p
l
i
c
a
b
i
l
i
t
y

a
r
e

a
f
f
e
c
t
e
d
.

I
f
t
h
e

a
m
o
u
n
t

o
f

r
e
s
i
d
u
a
l

e
l
e
m
e
n
t
s

i
s

l
i
k
e
l
y

t
o

a
f
f
e
c
t

t
h
e

w
e
l
d
a
b
i
l
i
t
y

o
f

t
h
e

s
t
e
e
l
,

t
h
e

c
o
n
t
e
n
t

o
f

s
u
c
h

e
l
e
m
e
n
t
s

(
l
a
d
l
e

a
n
a
l
y
s
i
s
)

i
s

t
o

b
e

d
o
c
u
m
e
n
t
e
d
.

2
)

A

m
a
x
i
m
u
m

c
o
p
p
e
r

c
o
n
t
e
n
t

o
f

0
,
2
5
%

m
a
y

b
e

r
e
q
u
e
s
t
e
d

b
y

t
h
e

;
p
u
r
c
h
a
s
e
r

i
n

o
r
d
e
r

t
o

f
a
c
i
l
i
t
a
t
e

s
u
b
s
e
q
u
e
n
t

o
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
s

o
f

f
a
n
n
i
n
g
.

3
)

F
o
r

t
u
b
e
s

w
i
t
h

w
a
l
l

t
h
i
c
k
n
e
s
s

g
r
e
a
t
e
r

t
h
a
n

3
0

m
m
,

t
h
e

u
p
p
e
r

l
i
r
f
t
i
t

o
f

t
h
e

c
a
r
b
o
n

c
o
n
t
e
n
t

m
a
y

b
e

i
n
c
r
e
a
s
e
d

b
y

0
,
0
2
%

b
u
t

t
h
e

(
C

+

M
n
/
6
)

v
a
l
u
e

i
s

n
e
v
e
r

t
o

e
x
c
e
e
d

0
,
4
7
%
.

4
)

A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
s

o
f

n
i
o
b
i
u
m
,

t
i
t
a
n
i
u
m

a
n
d

v
a
n
a
d
i
u
m

a
r
e

p
e
n
n
i
t
t
e
d

a
t

d
i
s
c
r
e
t
i
o
n

o
f

t
h
e

m
a
n
u
f
a
c
t
u
r
e
r
,

u
n
l
e
s
s

o
t
h
e
r
w
i
s
e

a
g
r
e
e
d

b
e
l
:
w
e
e
n

t
h
e

p
u
r
c
h
a
s
e
r

a
n
d

t
h
e

m
a
n
u
f
a
c
t
u
r
e
r
,

u
p

t
o

t
h
e

l
e
v
e
l
s

p
e
n
n
i
t
t
e
d

f
o
r

n
o
n
-
a
l
l
o
y
e
d

s
t
e
e
l
s
.

I
n

t
h
a
t

c
a
s
e

t
h
e

t
e
s
t

c
e
r
t
i
f
i
c
a
t
e

f
S

t
o

s
t
a
t
e

t
h
e

l
e
v
e
l

o
f

t
h
e
s
e

e
l
e
m
e
n
t
s
.

5
)

F
o
r

t
u
b
e
s

w
i
t
h

w
a
l
l

t
h
i
c
k
n
e
s
s

g
r
e
a
t
e
r

t
h
a
n

3
0

m
m

t
h
e

u
p
p
e
r

o
f

t
h
e

c
a
r
b
o
n

c
o
n
t
e
n
t

m
a
y

b
e

i
n
c
r
e
a
s
e
d

b
y

0
,
0
2
%
.

6
)

A
p
p
l
i
c
a
b
l
e

f
q
r

t
u
b
e
s

w
i
t
h

w
a
l
l

t
h
i
c
k
n
e
s
s

n
o
t

e
x
c
e
e
d
i
n
g

1
5

m
m
.
]

;
:
'I

N

r
.

:
:
r

N

'
"

(
1
)

o

:
,
.

T
a
b
l
e

E
2

M
e
c
h
a
n
i
c
a
l

p
r
o
p
e
r
t
i
e
s

a
t

r
o
o
m

t
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

f
o
r

s
e
a
m
l
"
,
s

t
u
b
e
s

a
n
d

p
i
p
e
s

T
e
n
s
i
l
e

t
e
s
t

B
e
n
d

t
e
s
t

F
l
a
t
t
e
n
i
n
g

D
r
i
f
t

R
i
n
g

e
x
p
a
n
d
i
n
g

t
e
s
t

5
)

t
e
s
t

e
x
p
a
n
d
i
n
g

t
e
s
t

U
p
p
e
r

y
i
e
l
d

s
t
r
e
s
s

o
r

p
r
o
o
f
s
t
r
e
s
s

!
p
l
o
n
g
a
/
i
o
n

2
)

S
l
e
e
l

T
e
n
s
i
l
e

R
e
H

o
r

m
i
n
i
m
u
m

,
,
D
i
a
m
e
t
e
r

%

i
n
c
r
e
a
s
e

o
f

%

i
n
c
r
e
a
s
e

o
f
D

f
o
r

g
r
a
d
e

s
t
r
e
n
g
t
h

A
,

o
f

C
o
n
s
t
a
n
t

D
f
o
r
D
/
D

D
/
D

f
o
r

t
h
i
c
k
n
e
s
s
e
s

i
n

m
m

1
)

?
n
i
n
i
m
u
m
,

%

m
a
n
/
r
e
l

1
:
5
1
6

1
6
<

1
:
5
4
0

4
0
<

1
:
5
6
5

I
,

K

N
l
m
m
2

I

I

m
m

:
5

0
,
6

>

0
,
6

>

0
,
8

:
5

0
,
5

>

0
,
5

>

0
,
6

>

0
,
8

>

0
,
9

N
l
m
m
2

N
l
m
m
2

N
l
m
m
2

:
5

0
,
8

:
5

0
,
6

:
5

0
,
8

:
5

0
,
9

U
n
a
l
l
o
y
e
d

s
t
e
e
l

'
"
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
2
5

T
S

3
6
0

3
6
0
-
4
8
0

2
3
5

2
2
5

2
1
5

2
3

3
T

0
,
0
9

1
2

1
5

1
9

3
0

2
5

1
5

1
0

8

T
S

4
1
0
-
1

4
1
0
-
5
3
0

2
5
5

2
4
5

2
3
5

,

.'
2
1

1
9

4
T

0
,
0
7

1
0

1
2

1
7

3
0

2
5

1
5

1
0

8

T
S

4
6
0
-
1

4
6
0
-
5
8
0

2
7
0

2
7
0

2
6
0

,
2
3

2
1

4
T

0
,
0
7

8

1
0

1
5

3
0

2
5

1
5

1
0

8

T
S

5
1
0

5
1
0
-
6
4
0

3
1
0

3
1
0

3
0
0

1
9

1
7

4
T

0
,
0
7

8

1
0

1
5

3
0

2
5

1
5

1
0

8

A
l
l
o
y

s
t
e
e
l
s

i
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
T
S

3
8
0

3
8
0
-
5
3
0

2
0
5

2
0
5

2
0
5

I

2
0

4
T

0
,
0
8

8

1
0

1
5

-
-
-
-
-
T
S

4
1
0
-
3

4
1
0
-
5
6
0

2
0
5

2
0
5

2
0
5

2
0

4
T

0
,
0
8

8

1
0

1
5

-
-
-
-
-
T
S

4
1
0
-
4

4
1
0
-
5
6
0

2
0
5

2
0
5

2
0
5

2
2

2
0

4
T

0
,
0
8

8

1
0

1
5

-
-
-
-
-
T
S

4
3
0

4
3
0
-
5
8
0

2
0
5

2
0
5

2
0
5

I
;

2
0

1
8

4
T

0
,
0
7

8

1
0

1
5

3
0

2
0

1
0

8

6

T
S

4
4
0

4
4
0
-
5
9
0

2
9
0
5
)

2
9
0

2
8
0

,

2
2

2
0

4
T

0
,
Q
7

8

1
0

1
5

3
0

2
0

1
0

8

6

T
S

4
5
0
-
1

4
5
0
-
6
0
0

2
7
0
5
)

2
7
0

2
6
0

'

2
2

2
0

4
T

0
,
0
7

8

1
0

1
5

3
0

2
0

1
0

8

6

T
S

4
5
0
-
2
,

T
C

7
)

4
1
0
-
5
6
0

2
0
5

2
0
5

2
0
5

'

2
2

2
0

4
T

0
,
0
8

8

1
0

1
5

-
-
-
-
-
T
E
7
)

4
5
0
-
6
0
0

2
8
0

2
8
0

2
7
0

!,
2
0

1
8

4
T

0
,
0
7

8

1
0

1
5

3
0

2
0

1
0

8

6

T
S

4
6
0
-
2

4
6
0
-
6
1
0

3
2
0

3
2
0

3
1
0

2
0

1
8

4
T

0
,
0
5

8

1
0

1
5

3
0

2
0

1
0

8

6

T
S

5
0
0
,

T
C

7
)

4
4
0
-
6
2
0

2
0
5

2
0
5

2
0
5

,
2
0

1
8

4
T

0
,
0
7

8

1
0

1
5

3
0

2
0

1
0

8

6

T
E

7
)

5
9
0
-
7
4
0

3
9
0

3
9
0

3
9
0

1
8

1
6

4
T

0
,
Q
7

8

1
0

1
5

3
0

2
0

1
0

8

6

T
S

5
9
0

5
9
0
-
7
4
0

3
9
0

3
9
0

3
9
0

1
8

1
6

4
T

0
,
0
7

8

1
0

1
5

3
0

2
0

1
0

8

6

T
S

6
1
0

6
1
0
-
7
8
0

4
4
0

4
4
0

4
4
0

1
9

1
7

A
T

0
,
0
5

8

1
0

1
5

3
0

2
0

1
0

8

6

T
S

6
9
0

6
9
0
-
8
4
0

4
9
0

4
9
0

4
9
0

1
7

1
4

4
T

0
,
0
5

6

8

1
2

3
0

2
0

1
0

8

6

1
)

F
o
r

w
a
l
l

t
h
i
c
k
n
e
s
s
e
s

g
r
e
a
t
e
r

t
h
a
n

6
5

m
m
,

t
h
e

v
a
l
u
e

t
o

b
e

o
b
t
a
i
n
e
a

i
s

t
o

b
e

t
h
e

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

o
f

a
g
r
e
e
m
e
n
t

b
e
t
w
e
e
n

t
h
e

m
a
n
u
f
a
c
t
u
r
e
r

a
n
d

t
h
e

p
u
r
c
h
a
s
e
r

a
t

t
h
e

t
i
m
e

o
f

o
r
d
e
r
i
n
g
.

2
)

1

=

l
o
n
g
i
t
u
d
i
n
a
l
;

t

=

t
r
a
n
s
v
e
r
s
e
.

3
)

A
p
p
l
i
c
a
b
l
e

f
o
r

w
a
l
l

t
h
i
c
k
n
e
s
s
e
s

>

3
0

m
m
,

u
n
l
e
s
s

o
t
h
e
r
w
i
s
e

i
n
d
i
"
.
a
t
e
d
.

4
)

A
p
p
l
i
c
a
b
l
e

o
n
l
y

i
n

c
a
s
e
s

w
h
e
r
e

t
r
a
n
s
v
e
r
s
e

t
e
s
t

p
i
e
c
e
s

c
a
n
n
o
t

b
e

5
)

F
o
r

w
a
l
l

t
h
i
c
k
n
e
s
s
e
s

b
e
l
o
w

o
r

e
q
u
a
l

t
o

1
0

m
m

t
h
e

m
i
n
i
m
u
m

v
a
l
u
e

o
f

y
i
e
l
d

s
t
r
e
s
s

i
s

i
n
c
r
e
a
s
e
d

b
y

1
0

N
/
m
m
2

.
6
)

A
p
p
l
i
c
a
b
l
e

f
o
r

w
a
l
l

t
h
i
c
k
n
e
s
s
e
s

>

2
0

m
m
.

7
)

T
C

=

f
u
l
l

o
r

i
s
o
t
h
e
n
n
a
l

a
n
n
e
a
l
i
n
g
;

T
E

=

n
o
n
n
a
l
i
z
i
n
g

a
n
d

8
)

A
p
p
l
i
c
a
b
l
e

f
o
r

w
a
l
l

t
h
i
c
k
n
e
s
s
e
s
>

1
0

m
m
.

u

u

u

u

U

U

U

(
J

J
;
!

C
il
C
i
n
A

v
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

0

.
.
,

{
)
Q
.
S

0

0
0

-

!
"

I

g
.

;
;

_
.
:
:
r
'

Q
.
:
:
I
8
::1

i
l
.

.

S
o

p
o

t
n

;
:
>
0

>
(
l
I

'
<

:
:
I
V
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

0

.
.
,

!
l

2
.

0

0
0

:
-

J
;
!

0
0

'
O
j
l

9

....
Q
.

(
lI

S
'

=

5
0
=

"
0

:
;
r
:
:
"
l
5
o

.
.
.

S
'
g
.
1

0

0

8
.

0
-
N

N

e
:
:
l

0

.
1

.
.
.
.
,
Q
.
!
Q
.
:
:
I

....
Q
.

C

0

c
;

-
.

0
1
'

....
Q
.
S

S
'I

(
;
"

.
.
.
.

0
'"

.
,
.
,

(
lI

=

3

(
lI

g

.
.
.

0
"
0

I

=

'"

a

'
<
!
A
0
g

0
'
"
9

g
.
c
.

o
:
=
.
_
0

0

0

a
.
Q
.
,
g

U
.

1
..>

tl>

s
a
.
.
.
.

(
lI

.
.
.

{
)

I

V
.

V
.

t
;
'
(
l
I

C
.
O

=

!
i
i
'
'
<

F
;l
:IE

e
n

g

5
o
P
-
'"

_
.

_
.

.
,

0

$
8

+
>
-
0

-
'
O
'
"
g
.

0
0
.
.
.
.
,

0

.
!
.
.

g
.

r
;:
0
.
.

S
'
I

(
lI
g

I
A

$
'
8
5
.
.
.

=
(
l
I

S

g
.
g

0

S
o
8
8

0
,

_
.
c

.
,

"
0

g

0

'"

S
'

f
t
-
s

....
N

:
e

0

,
,
0

o
;
i
a
S
o

S
o
,,"

S
'

a
.

g
.

(
l
I
c
,
:
g
(
l
l
'
g

-
a
..
_
.
.
.
.
.

'"

.
,

i
i
'

a

0

"
,
"
0

:
:
l
g
.

.
g
.
=
:
-

0

0

(
;

,
g

;
:
'
x

"
0

"
0

p
o

C

1
_
0

.
.
.

I
>

0

:
!
r
;

.
g
,
g
g
O
"

o

(
lI

(
;I
"
0

;
;
:
;
.
,

s
a
.

....
0
'"

C
'
I

0

3

(
l
I
(
l
I
g
s
:
s
o

S
o
.

0
0
0
'
<
.
,
,
,
,

o
-
g

;
:
f
!
i
,
g

O
O
o
n

3
:
:
1
"
:
:
r
'

E
.."
d

s
g
.

0

r;:
0

0

g
.
!
:
i

o
n

<
.
,
c

0

0

s

e
.

'
g

'
<

;
.
3

P
o

.
.

I
m
p
a
c
t

t
e
s
t

2
)

J

J

r
3
)

L

4
)

2
7

3
5

2
7

3
5

2
7

3
5

2
7

3
5

2
7

3
5

2
7

3
5

2
7

3
5

2
7

3
5

2
7

2
7

6
)

3
5

3
5
6
)

2
7

3
5

2
7

3
5

2
7
8
)

3
5
8
)

2
7

3
5

2
7

3
5

2
7

3
5

2
7

3
5

2
7
8
)

3
5
8
)

>
:>

.
.
,

"

"
'
.
.
,

1
>

"
'
N

.
.

0
:=

-
t
i
-
.
.
,

r
.

'
"

=
-
0

9

;
;
'

e
:
.

S

9

'
8

1
1

g
:

.
.

o

!
;

.

C
)

=

l
?

1
1

0
.

1
>

"

=

.
g

1
1

.

0

.

'
"

1
.
.
>
'
;
j
l

1
1

-
.

V
.

1
1

0
0

W
W

0
0

s
s

0
0

0
0

1
1

0
0

.
.
.
.
,

c
o
.

b
e
!
:
;

1
1

0
0

'
"

0
0

,

C

:
\
,
0

.

"

N
-
O
'

"
-
0

N
=

(
J
)
-
t
:

r
o
"

0
-
,
,
"

'
.

I

=

c

-
c
-
0
>
-
<

<
0
_

r
o
u

N
U

"
"
0

nun:;::> lUI ..:JIIII-'::>, ..... Olluoly I.;,I.;.IV
Table A2 Number of tubes or fittings per batcb
Outside diameter Number of
range tubes or fittings per batch 1 )
mm
D:5 114,3 400
114,3 < D :5 323,9 200
323,9 < D
100
1) Any residual fraction the batch is as a batch.
-
901 All pipes for class I and II pressure systems (for which
a NV -certificate is requested) are to be presented for visual
examinatiC?n and verification of dimensions. In particular,
their conformity with the requirements of 300 is to be con-
firmed.
1001 Each tnbe and pipe is to be subjected to a hydraulic
test at the maoufactnrer's work.
1002 The hydraulic test pressure is to be determined by the
following equation:
where
P=20 g
D
P = test pressure, in bars
D = nominal outside diameter, in mm
S 80 % of the specified minimum yield stress
(ReH or RpO,2) in N/mm
2
for ferritic steels and 70
% of the specified minimum proof stress (Rpl,O) in
N/mm
2
for austenitic steels.
1003 The test pressure is to be maintained for sufficient
time to permit proof and inspection, and for at least 5 s.
The tnbe is to withstand the test without showing leaks or
visible deformation.
Unless otherwise agreed, the manufactnrer's certificate of
slilisfliCllli'Y hylimulic 'le,1 will\J".ttcpleu.
1004 Other pressure tests, such as p,eumatic test under
water, may in special cases subject to agreement be substi-
tnted for. the hydraulic pressure tests.
1005 Subject to special approval, either an automatic ultra-
sonic or eddy current test can be accepted in lieu of the hy-
draulic test.
A 1100 Re-testing
1101 If one or more of the sample method tests prove un-
satisfactory, the tnbe or pipe in question is rejected, and
twice as many new pipes or tnbes of the batch in question
tisfactory results. If not, the whole batch is rejected. A re-
newed heat treatment of the batch and subsequent retestiog
in the same way as for the first time. All results are to be
satisfactory, if not, the whole batch will berejected.
1201 Pipes and tnbes are to be clearly marked by the man-
ufactnrer in accordance with the requirements of Ch.l
Sec.!.
1301 For tnbes and pipes which have been accepted, a ma-
terial certificate is to be issued. The level of documentation,
i.e. NV-certificate, works certificate, etc., is given under
the relevant part of the rules.
B. Tubes and Pipes for Ordinary Pressure Sys-
tems
B 100 Scope
carbon and carbon-manganese steel tnbes and pipes for or-
dinary pressure systems. Tubes and pipes conforming to
this subsection are intended for use at ambient temperature.
B 200 Manufaclnre
201 Tubes and pipes are to be manufactnred seamless or
by a welding process, and may be hot or cold finished.
When welded, an automatic electric welding process, with
or without filler metal is to be applied.
ply with the requirements given in Table B 1. Steels for the
production of tobes and pipes covered by this subsection are
to be killed, except for steel TW 320 which may be semi-
killed.
B 400 Heat treabnent
401 Seamless tnbes and pipes are to be supplied in the
hot-fmished condition or one of the following heat treatment
conditions (see Table AI):
- annealed
- normalized
- normalized and tempered.
Welded tnbes and pipes are to be supplied in the normalized
condition.
' .. SOL ... TubJ>.s .. ano., pill".'l"an:JQtte Pfl:lie_nW_d. JRLksMg .i!L
batches as defmed in A800. The number of tnbes or pipes
per batch is to comply with the conditions given in Table
A2.
502 Two pipes are selected from each of at least two
batches. From the remaining batches one pipe from each
batch is selected for testing.
503 For each tnbe or pipe selected for testing the following
Seamless tnbes and pipes:
- one tensile test
- one flattening test or bend test or ring tensile test.
Welded tnbes and pipes:
- one tensile test on the weld for pipes with D 508 mm
- two flattening tests or two drift expanding tests or two
bend tests (ERW and lW)
the appropriate requirements given in Table B2, or an
equivalent national or international standard.
DEI NORSKE VERITAS
'J
J
J
J
'J
J
J
J
1ft
:C
.s:
]
]
i

................ _;,r
MC'lM,......,
'"
o .c
-5 g
..... i)
........ _- I 13'0 .-
M N N OD"C..... .,g
.S 4> 5 .....
.9
I I I ;g "'8 ... g.
I r---

E
c ...
222 Eaf 0 3

ooo.g5jo 8:1
coo
A
'i< 5-5 a
I I I 8-lj'o a
I
0]
o ...
InOO g -0
"E 5.g <I);
00-""01-<- --I-<
g
C'lA O\A 4>.0 II,) t;i jg

o 0 0 .D oA-5 > e
I I I 5-
I E 0<0=. C I)
o ::E oS
Vi -3 s:: 0 + C
(""lAA_CU ..... a3

VI".O. 'i!
o..c:::-;::::! C..c::.D
G
" a......... 0 ...
C til ..... ""s:<:
I I) ........ <o-c:s:tS
O.Dt-.
o OJ)
E E
rn
5
:::t 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 '<=0 :s e .9 C'l 4)
E C"1 M C"'"l ('f"I C"'"l M C"1 I) 0A
'- 0000 000 I-< 0
'"
...
!:l
<5
t:j ciOAOAO
A
OOOA x 'etoj 8..:>.. I)
I E 0.0-5
ts e:-9 c as 0 -0

0..

I.I"'IV'lV'lI.l"'l
C"""IC"""IC"""I("""l
0000
0-0-00-

CUO!:! :s CIl
.c.c C' _.
Irlll"lll"'l8 ......... 0 Q tl t::<I)
C"1C"1M:so ""c::lc: o
000 .g .... AO c::
OA 0-ci I) 0 :s til a E
.r:o.o 0 .......... 0.0
I .,
I .- 0""0
E
---0 __ ... a..c:: o...:s 11)
000\0 08 0 ... .::! c c::..e ....
MvV"i- 0\ 0 ..... ocu ..... C
_-.....;_-- 0""; Et!::- .s i:l 5'0 2
a 8 ]-0 8
- - -0 - - - 4,) T: -0 c:: ..... >
000........ 000 a 0'""' 0 ..... .,g s::
'-'--............. '-'-0 4> """ 0 0
000(""10 OOM c:: c::..8 -e
00_ N_ V-VI 00_ ........ ;:... .;: 0 .9'" 3
9'7'7"': 99 g 0-0 e 0
001.1"'10 00 ... o ... ..c
C"""I'<t\Oo 0 ou ..c ..... <n CIl ...
0 :.0 0 '0

- ...
o'1ii .. "'" 8''''''''.'
'"C ........ "00 OU ...... out::
""'!"! ................................ o"Oour:: ..c .............. ...
q,o V'l1.l"'l1.l"'lV'l I-< ro .-
if; ;:... ... ;:...
'"" 0000 V'lV'l.n (0 .0 0.. B'n 0..
VIVIVIVI r:: C ""2::l.-S g. ri
........._ '-''-''-''-' 000 sa ou:.:=: ... ou t: 0 0 0..
1\0 t.o::i V'lV'l0V'l "'-' .... 1-<:.0 lCi-5ou ... ..c ...
........ C"""IC"""I'<tV'l V'lV'l0 r:: ::s .... 0..
.... B.9 8' 5 0 S
:; ooo.n 00
9
.... r::o.. I-< 5 ;.8 s -
CIl ____ V'lII,)OUo...ou ... "0
;:... - - - - _ (0"0 .0 0 5 II,) 0 r::
-; 0000 _ "'13"00 M::lCll C"""I
g
4,)
- - a ... ...
'"C _ out::Ol.l"'lou 01-<
SS 9.!:! ; 8."0 "! 11 -g..s 11 .E
= NN tn'8.
o 0-6"""" _V'l ,gcl=:.o ..... tI.() a,.$ c..o ....
;:; r--- o:""l 00- 0- 0 ......
:--= u -- VI VI N N_ '-'0- :E';:: B ... i3 .3... 5
0 9:n 00 ... 5 ..Q CIl r:: e
"'s VI S! r--- 0_ .5 3 -;) co';:: 13 -ti
- - __ 0 "OJ:::..c: .... 0:.a -;:...:.a CIl
8 00 0_ ou-3
C1lO
... s
O
..... a:s
VI VI 2 "O.!:!a..!:;> 1-<:::::: ::s;:;;
- 0 ::S.o ou co:! ..... 1 ro 0
5 - -
.... r:: r::..c: - 00'"
eo .... ... .!:! 8 -5 'E r:: -5 .0
"0 5 CiI --g 5 '0 8 .5
U 8 CI-<-5C::l <,;;,
&l
.
..0
.:
t
'ii
.;;
"iii .... ' .5 "3 .a
1_ N u<:-95 8 ::s .;::.;: ::l
1 0000
o \0-\0_
;::::::l C"""I'<t'<t1.l"'l

... I, 1 E .;> a .... ... ...
CIl 1000 uCilo" S I-<::gc l-o u
;:...'V'l'<tV'l ...... UI-< .... o ..... oo..c:
o '1 '<t '<t '<t Ul..c 0..-0 < u.. < 0.. u.. E-<
:::::: ClHI) tf.l
< ! E-< E-<E-< 1- c::; M' .:n \0
DEI NORSKE VERITAS
tJt. en.L ::aeC.4 - t"age,jtl
H.wes Tor ::'n1PS, January J ::t::to

.s.
"" ;
]
B
....
'i'

l I .... '" '"" '"" '"" '"" . 'ii '"" '""
NNNN
-<
Irl Irl Irl Irl
('\"l('\"l('\"l('\"l
G' Irllrl
"'''''''
'"
Vi

51
1i'
';;

l

Q
'<;>

.-

""
'"
C
A
(() (() (() (()
on
C
\0 \0 \0 .c:
-8
0
., '"
c$ ci' (()(()(()
A VI .!j
'0 .,
ci'
A VI
'0
ci' ci'
A VI
Irl Irl Irl Irl
........................

000 -i
.......................

t

000
NNN 1

0 0 0 0 0 0 -i
('\"l ('\"l ('\"l ('\"l ('\"l ('\"l ('\"l -0
I I
I I
C 0\ r-- Irl Irl Irl Irl Irl
'"
51

51
!
'<;>

.-

._Q
""
-

---- ...... -- ......
A U
<l'i
'0 g
ci IrlNOO 000 E
"VI ............ _- --- 4)

'0
C
VI
NO(()(()
--

-5
c

.n
RRR '5
1-1-1- E
3
f-o Eo-< Eo-<
vvv

I I
NN- !
('\"l0'l-r--
N_N_
1-

;,
"
8'
E
:1

oS

i
-

51

"-
ts

:ll

"

::0
l
"0

3
i
c

"0
.s
DET NORSKE VERITAS
\
')
]

N!j
Z
o
-
)

)
,:]
.v ...... """ ... ', ...... , J ..........
to be in accordance with the tables contained in this section
or, where applicable, in the relevant standard.
ance with the appropriate requirements of Ch.1..
A 800 Test material
803 Ring tests may be carried out in conformity with the
following ISO standards:
801 Pipes, tubes and fittings are to be presented for test in
batches. A batch is formed by tubes of the same size, the
same steel grade, the same manufacturing process and the
same heat treatment conditions. The size of a batch is to
be in accordance with Table A2 or the relevant standard if
not otherwise stated in the following subsections.
Table Al Heat treatment conditions
Bend test 8491
Flattering test 8492
Drift expanding test 8493
Flanging test 8494
Ring expanding test 8495
Ring tensile test 8495
or other equivalent standards.
Steel Reference Austenitizing Tempering Subcritical
grade heat temperature temperature Annealing
Quenching and tempering
Hardening Tempering
treatment 1) temperature
temperature temperature
c c
C
C C
Unalloyed steel
--------------
lW320
NorSA
2
) 870 to 940 -
640 to 700 - -
TS 360/TW 360
NorSA
2
) 870 to 940 - 640 to 700 - -
TS 410/lW 410
NorSA
2
) 870 to 940 - 640 to 700 - -
TS 410-1 N. 870 to 900
- - - -
TS 430/lW 430
NorSA2) 870 to 940 - 640 to 700 - -
TS 460-l/lW 460 N 880 to 910 - -
- -
TS 500/lW 500
NorSA
2
) 870 to 940 -
640 to 700 - -
TS 510/lW 510 N 880 to 910 - - - -
TS 6/lW6 (N) N 900 to 940 - - - -
TS 6/lW 6(QT) QT - - - 890 to 930 600 to 680
TS IO/lW 10 N 890 to 930 -
- - -
TS 15/lW IS N 890 to 930
- - - -
Alloy steel
-----------
TS 380 N 910 to 960
- - - -
FA 3)
860 to 960 - - - -
.TS 410-3 N&T 920 to 960 660 to 750 -
- -
FA 3)
860 to 960 -
- - -
TS 4104 N&T 920 to 960 660 to 750 - - -
FA 3)
860 to 960 - -
- -
TS 430
FA 3)
850 to 950 - - - -
. TSA4Q .. . _. .
660 to 720 - -
.
-
.. __ .... ,- ....
- . ---- -- - ----_.-
TS 450'1 N 910 to 940 -
-
TS 450-2 TC
FA 3)
860 to 960 - -
- -
TE N&T 900 to 960 650 to 750 - - -
TS 460-2 N&T 930 to 980 650 to 720 - -
-
TS 500 TC
FA 3)
850 to 950 - - - -
TE N&T 900 to 1000 700 to 800 - - -
TS 590 7) N&T 1050 to 1125 760 to 820 - - -
TS 610 N 880 to 980 580 to 680
'-
-
-
TS 690 N&T 1020 to 1170 680 to 780 - - -
26 CrMo 4
(il)
- -
- 830 to 860 600 to 680
11 MnNi 5 3
890 to 940 (580 to 640) - - -
13 MnNi 6 3
N 4)
890 to 940 (580 to 640) - - -
TS 43/lW 43
QT5)
830 to 880 580 to 640 - 820 to 880 580 to 660
12 Ni 19
QT
5
)
800 to 850 580 to 640 - 800 to 850 580 to 660
TS 45/lW 45 QT 880 to 930 - - 770 to 820 540 to 600
1) N - Normalizing; SA - Subcritical annealing; QT - Quenching and tempering; FA - Full annealing; N & T - Normalizing and tempering
2) Tubes and pipes for ordinary pressure systems may be delivered in the subcritical aIUlcaled condition.
3) This heat treatment may replaced by isothermal annealing at the discretion of the manufacturer.
4) Tempering may be necessary after normalizing.
5) If the product dimensions so permit, normalizing (with subsequent tempering if necess_aey) may be carried out.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
tor :ShiPS, January 1
SECTION 4
STEEL TUBES, PIPES AND FITTINGS
A. General
A 100 Scope
A 200 Manufacture
A 300 Quality
Contents
A 800 Test material
A 11 00 Re-testing
B. Tubes and Pipes for Ordinary Pressure Systems
B 100 Scope
B 200 Manufacture
C. Stainless Steel Pressure Tubes and Pipes
C 100 Scope
C 200 Manufacture
D. Tubes and Pipes for Low Temperature Services
D 100 Scope
D 200 Manufacture
E. Tubes and Pipes for Boilers, Heat Exchangers and Super-
heaters
E 100 Scope
--1100
F. Fittings
F 100 Scope
F 200 Materials
F 300 Manufacture
F 800 Surface fmish and dimensions
A. General
A 100 Scope
101 This Section specifies the requirements for seamless
and welded steel pipes, tubes and fittings intended for pres-
sure, boiler, heat exchanger, superheater, chemicals and low
temperature services.
102 The products are to be in accordance with relevant
ISO Standards or recognized regional or national standards
provided that these standards give reasonable equivalence to
the ISO requirements included in this section. The given
standard must also comply with the additional requirements
given in the following subsections.
A 200 Manufacture
201 Pipes, tubes and fittings are to be manufactured by
works approved by the Society. Pipes, tubes and fittings
may be manufactured by any of the following methods:
- hot finished seamless
- cold finished seamless
- electric resistance or induction welded
- cold fmished electric resistance or induction welded
- electric fusion welded.
202 Welded tubes, pipes and fittings are normally not to
be used for working pressure above 32 bar or design tem-
perature above 300C. Further, they are not accepted for
liquefied gasl?S with temperature below -10 C. These limits
may be exceeded provided that an automatic non-destructive
testing of the weld is carried out. The whole length of the
weld is to be tested. Such tubes and pipes are considered
equivalent to seamless types.
203 'Tubes and pipes intended as strength members of
structures are to satisfy the requirements for material for the
structure in question, e.g. for hull and engine material.
A 300 Quality
301 The pipes and tubes are to have smooth internal and
external surfaces consistent with the method of manufacture.
302 The pipes and tubes are to have a workmanlike fmish
but small imperfections are permissible, provided that the
thickness remains within the tolerance limits. Small laps,
cracks, slivers, scratches or other surface defects may be
removed by grinding within the minimum permissible wall
thickness.
.RePJl,ir ,
The pipes and tubes are to be reasonably straight. Tubes and
pipes are to be delivered with nominally square-cut ends,
free from excessive burrs.
The tolerances on the outside diameter and the wall thick-
nesses of tubes and pipes are to be in accordance with the
relevant ISO-standard or an acceptable national standard.
501 The requirements for the chemical composition of la-
dle samples are to be in accordance with the ISO-require-
ments detailed in subsequent subsections or an acceptable
national or international standard.
If a product analysis is taken, the analysis is to be within the
permissible deviations from the specified ladle composition.
601 Tubes and pipes are to be supplied in the heat treat-
ment conditions indicated in Table Al if not otherwise spe-
cified in the following subsections.
The number of tests to be performed and the mechanical
properties of the tubes and pipes covered by this section are
DET NORSKE VERITAS

:)
J .J
J J
J
)
F. Fittings
F 100 Scope
101 These rules are applicable to seamless and welded,
carbon, carbon-manganese, low alloy and alloy steel fittings
for the applications covered by subsections B, C, D and E.
F 200 Materials
201 The materials to be used as basis for the manufacture
of fittings are to meet the requirements of the relevant sub-
section, with respect to chemical composition, mechanical
properties and manufacture.
202 The materials used for the manufacture of fittings are
at least to be delivered with an inspection documentation
corresponding to a works certificate.
F 300 Manufacture
301 Fittings may be hot or cold formed from tubes and
pipes or may be welded from plate material. The Society is
to be informed about the method of manufacture.
302 Where fittings are made by a welding process, details
o( the process are to be forwarded to the Society for ap-
proval. A procedure test may be requested by the surveyor.
401 After the forming process all fittings are to be supplied
in, the heat treated condition specified for the material in
question (see Table AI).
402 For fittings in carbon and carbon-manganese steels
manufactured by hot forming where normalizing is speci-
fied, subsequent heat treatment may be dispensed with if the
manufacturer can give evidence of satisfactory properties
and structure after hot forming.
403 Fittings manufactured by cold forming are generally
to undergo renewed heat treatment. If fittings are to be de-
livered in the cold formed condition the manufacturer must
prove that the materials possess the required properties.
5ul -'The'-fitlirtg!i" ate' ib'oe' presEiiilia-rO'f-msling- iii
as defmed in A800. Two fittings from each batch are to be
selected for testing.
The test samples are to be from the same heat and are to
undergo, the same forming process and heat treatment as the
fitting itself.
. 4- i
502 For each fitting the following tests are to be carried
out:
Seamless fittings:
- one tensile test
Welded fittings:
--.:. one tensile test on the weld for pipes with D mm
(ERWand IW)
- one drift or ring expanding test (ERW and IW)
503 If fittings are to be used in low temperature systems
where impact testing is required, impact testing is to be
carried out in accordance with the appropriate requirements
of subsection C500 and D500.
the requirements of the relevant part of this section, or sat-
isfy the required characteristics specified for the starting
material used (e.g. plates).
505 For fittings where tensile testing is not possible, this
test is to be carried out on material from the tube before
forming.
601 Hardness testing is to be carried out on 10 % of the test
unit, and on at least 3 fittings where the numbers are less
than 30. The difference in hardness value within the unit
tested may not be greater than 30 Brinell units.
701 Where fittings of austenitic stainless steels are to be
used in systems where corrosion testing of the pipes are re-
quired, testing is to be carried out in accordance with C600.
F 800 Surface finish and dimensions
801 The quality and dimensions of the fittings are subject
to the same requirements as pipes of the same dimensions,
ref:A300lititj-'A'lOO;' " , ,- --- "
901 The fitting is to be marked in accordance with A1200
and the level of documentation is to be be in accordance
with A1300.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
SECTION 5
STEEL FORGINGS
A. General
A 100 Scope
A 200 Manufacture
A 300 Quality
Contents
A 600 Test material
B 100 Scope
B j 300 Chemical composition
C. Forgings for Shafting and Machinery
C 100 Scope
C 500 Test material
D. Forgings for Gearing
D 100 Scope
D 200 Manufacture
D 30d Chemical composition
D 500 Test material for nonnalized and tempered, and quenched
and tempered forgings
D 600 Test material for forgings intended for carburising and
hardening
and--l\bt:hine
ery Piping Systems
E 100 Scope
E 400 Test material
Systems Exposed to Low Temperatures
F 100 Scope
F 200 Type of steel
F 500 Test material
A. General
A 100
101 This section specifies the requirements for steel forg-
ings for structural applications, machinery, boilers and
pressure vessels and piping systems for high, ambient and
low temperature service.
The requirements in this section are also applicable to rolled
slabs and billets used as a substitute for forgings and to
rolled bars used for the manufacture (by machining oper-
ations only) of shafts, bolts, studs and other components of
similar shape, as well as forgings from which blanks for
various may be cut out.
102 Any additional requirements given for specific com-
ponents by the relevant rules for.design and construction are
to be complied with.
A 200 Manufacture
201 Forgings are to be made by works which have been
approved by the Society. The forgings are to be manufac-
tured from killed steel made by an approved process.
For forgings with specified minimum ultimate tensile
strength SOO N/mm
2
or above, the molten steel is to be
vacuum treated prior to or during pouring of the ingot in
order to remove objectionable gases, particularly hydrogen
and oxygen, and improve steel cleanness.
The forgings are to be made from ingots, or from blooms
or billets forged from ingots. The ingots are to be cast in
chill moulds with the larger cross-section up, and with effi-
cient feeder heads. From the top and bottom of the ingot
adequate discards are to be made to ensure freedom from
piping and harmful segregations in the fmished forgings. In
addition to the t9P and bottom discards, surface and skin
defects, which may be detrimental during the subsequent
working and forming operations, are also to be removed.
202 The forgings are to be gradually and uniformly hot
worked by hammer or press forging, and are to be formed
as closely as possible to the finished shape and size. The
plastic deformation is to be such as to assure soundness,
uniformity of structure and satisfactory mechanical proper-
ties after heat treatment. For components where the defor-
mation is mainly longitudinal, the total reduction ratio is
minimum to be in accordance with Table AI. For highly
loaded components higher reduction ratios may be required.
Table Al Reduction ratio
Method-of manufacture
"- - - "Totii(reauction
ralio 1)2)3)
.
Made directly from ingots or from forged 3: 1 where L>D
blooms or billets 1,5:1 where L<D
Made from rolled products 4: 1 where L>D
2:1 where L<D
1) Land D are the length and diameter respectively of the part
of the forging under consideration.
2) The reduction ratio is to be calculated with reference to the
average cross-sectional area of the ingot. Where an ingot is
initially upset, this reference area may be taken as the average
cross-sectional are after this operation.
3) For rolled bars used as a substitute for forgings the reduction
ratio is not to be less than 6: I, unless otherwise approved.
203 Where disc type forgings such as gear wheels are
made by upsetting, the thickness of any part of the disc is
not to be more than one half of the length of the billet from
which it was formed provided that this billet has received
an initial forging reduction of at least 1,5: 1. Where the piece
used for upsetting has been cut directly from an ingot or
where the billet has received an initial reduction of less than
1,5: I, the thickness of any part of the disc is not to be more
than one third of the length of the original piece.
204 Rings and other types of hollow forgings are to be
made from pieces cut from ingots or billets and which have
been suitably punched, bored or trepanned prior to expand-
DET NORSKE VERITAS
,
/

J

J
:J
J J
301 If impact tests are required, they are to comply with
the requirements specified for the base material in each case.
D 400 Bend testing
401 The bend test pieces are to be bent lS0'C around a
former without showing signs of cracking or loosening of
the cladding metal from the base material. The diameter of
the former is to be twice the plate thickness when the tensile
strength of the plate is less than 490 N/mm
2
, and three times
the thickness of the plate when the tensile strength is more
than 490 N/mm
2
. Two bend tests are to be taken from each
plate. On single clad plates, one test piece is to be bent with
the cladding in tension and the other with the cladding in
compression. On double clad plates, the test pieces are to
be bent, so that both cladding metals are tested both ways.
D 500 Shear testing
501 If a shear test is required to decide the shear strength
between the base and the cladding metal, one shear test is
to be made from each plate in accordance with ASTM A
264. The shear strength is to be at least 140 N/mm
2
.
601 To check the bonding, ultrasonic testing is to be
made. If bonding defects are found, their extent is to be
clearly marked and reported to the surveyor. Rules for re-
pairs are given in EIOO and E203. The area adjacent to the
edges of each plate is to be checked 100 % for a width of at
least 50 mm. Further tests are to be made at points equally
distributed on the surface with maximum intervals of 150
mm.
701 If it is required to determine the resistance of the
cladding metal against intergranular corrosion, testing is to
be carried out according to ASTM A 262, Practice E (Cop-
per - Copper Sulphate - Sulfuric Acid Test) or another
Guidance note:
By- aadi"rig -grarrl""deCti6iytlc' co'i:ipeY to 100U
millilitres solution, the boiling time can be reduced to 15 hours.
The base material is to be removed before the testing.
---e-n-d-o-f--G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---
Hules tor January 1
801 Each plate is to be surveyed before delivery. The
plates are to satisfy the requirements for minus tolerances
on thickness as stipulated in Sec.2 F200. The thickness
control is to be carried out by the manufacturer and the re-
sults submitted to the surveyor.
101 Minor surface defects and bonding defects which do
not exceed the limits specified in 203, may be repaired by
means of welding. Bonding defects along the edges are to
be repaired.
Before welding, the defects are to be reported to the sur-
veyor for approval of the repair.
Approved filler metal and welding processes are to be used.
E 200 Rejection
201 If one of the mechanical tests does not satisfy the
specified requirements, two new tests may be taken, both
of which have to satisfy the requirements.
202 If the results of the chemical analysis deviate from the
specifications, the results are to be submitted to the Society
for decision whether the plates will be accepted.
203 The plate will be rejected if:
- a repair will cause a weakening of the plate.
- a bonding defect exceeds 4 dm
2
for plates up to 15 mm
in thickness and S dm
2
for plates over 15 mm or several
bonding defects amounting to more than 2 % of the sur-
face of the plate revealed.
F. Identification of Materials
F 100 Branding
101 The plates are to be marked according to the di-

stamped on the .surface of the base plate. On double clad
plates, all marking is done with a colour seal rather than by
stamping.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
SECTION 3
CLAD STEEL PLATES
A. General
A 100 Scope
B. Base Material
B 100 Genem!
C. Cladding Metal
C 1 ()() General
Contents
D. Testing
D 100 Genem!
D 200 Tensi!e testing
D 400 Bend testing
D 500 Shear testing
E 200 Rejection
F. IdentiflC3tion of Materials
F 100 Branding
A. General
A 100 Scope
101 This section specifies the requirements for clad steel
plates consisting of a base material and a thinner layer
(cladding metal) on one or both sides, continuously and in-
tegiiHYI,iiildeiC--- .... - -----
201 The plates are to be supplied in that condition of heat
treatment which is most appropriate for both types of mate-
riaL The material is not to be subjected to any kind of heat
treatment by the user, beyond what is recommended by the
manufacturer and approved by the Society _ The heat treat-
ment is to be checked by the surveyor.
B. Base Material
B 100 General
101 Any steel which is suitable for joining with the clad-
ding metal may be accepted as base material, provided that
the process has no adverse effects on the finished plate. If
the plate is intended for participation in the vessel's strength,
the base material is at least to satisfy the requirements for
corresponding hull materials. If the plates are intended for
boilers or pressure vessels, the base material is to at least to
satisfy the requiremenis for materials for such components.
Work's certificate stating chemical composition is to be
supplied by the manufacturer.
C. Cladding Metal
C 100 General
101 The thickness of the cladding metal is subject to ap-
proval in each case.
201 Cladding metal of austenitic stainless steel is to be
delivered either with a low carbon content, i.e.
0,03%, or it is to be stabilized as stated in Sec.2 Table D!
for steel NV 32! and NV 347. Other stainless steels, nickel
and nickel-base alloys will be accepted, when they are suited
for the intended service.
202 Works' certificate is to be supplied by the manufac-
turer. The manufacturer is to guarantee that the analysis
complies with the requirements of the specification. Check
analysis is to be made ifrequired by the Societr.
D. Testing
D 100 General
101 Tensile and bend test pieces are to be of the flat type.
The test pieces are normally to have the full thickness of the
plate. Where the thickness of the plate is more than 50 mm,
or if necessary for the capacity of the testing machine, the
thickness of the test piece may be reduced by machining.
On single clad plates, both sides of the test piece are to be
machined to maintain the same ratio of cladding metal to
base steel as in the plate, but the cladding metal need not
be reduced to less than 3 mm. Test pieces of double clad
plates may be reduced by dividing. In this case, both halves
are to be tested. Impact test pieces, if any, are to be taken
. from .the .base.male-rial
D 200 Tensile testing
201 One set of tensile tests consists of two tests:
One test from the full clad plate which is to have a tensile
strength Rm not less than derived from the following for-
mula:
SI Rml + S2
R
m2 N/mm2
Rm
where:
Rml = minimum tensile strength of base metal
Rm2 = minimum tensile strength of the cladding metal
S = nominal thickness of the clad plate = SI + S2
S 1 = nominal thickness of the base metal
S2 = nominal thickness of the cladding metal
One test of the base metal after removal of the cladding
metal. The test is to satisfy the requirements for the base
material.
202 From hull steel, one set of tensile tests is to be taken
from every fifth plate, and at least one set from each cast
and each thickness interval (see Sec.! E200). From steel for
pressure vessels, one set of tensile tests is to be taken from
each plate.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
)

J J
:) )
)
J
ing or further forging. Alternatively, pieces from hollow
cast ingots may be used. The wall thickness of the forging
is to be not more than one half of the thickness of the pre-
pared hollow piece from which it was formed. Where this
is not practicable the forging procedure is to be such as to
ensure that adequate work is given to the piece prior to
punching, etc. This may be either longitudinal or upset
working of not less than 2: 1.
205 For certain components, where grain flow is specified
in the most favourable direction with regard to the mode of
stressing in service, the proposed method of manufacture
requires special approval by the Society. In such cases, tests
will be required to demonstrate that satisfactory mechanical
properties and grain flow are obtained.
206 The shaping of forgings or rolled slabs and billets by
flame cutting, scarfing or arc-air gouging is to be undertaken
in accordance with recognized good practice and, unless
otherwise approved, is to be carried out before the final heat
treatment. Preheating is to be employed when necessitated
by the composition andlor thickness of the steel. For certain
components, subsequent machining of all flame cut surfaces
may be required.
207 When two Or more forgings are joined by welding to
form a composite component, details of the proposed weld-
ing procedure are to be submitted to the Society for ap-
proval. Welding procedure tests may be required.
A 300 Quality
301 All forgings are to be free from surface or internal
defects, such as flakes, cracks, shrinkage cavities, segre-
gation, peripheral blow holes and major non-metallic inclu-
sions, which would be detrimental to their proper application
in service.
40 1 All forgings are to be made from killed steel and the
requirements of the subsequent subsections. Where general
.. o\lurall.limitg ,. are" J" the _f.'-hf',micaLcnmpnsjtinn, .is... tn. __ -
be appropriate for the type of steel, dimensions and required
mechanical properties of the forgings being manufactured.
402 At the option of the manufacturer, suitable grain re-
fining elements such as aluminium, niobium or vanadium
may be added, if not otherwise specified. The content of
such elements is to be reported in the ladle analysis.
501 All forgings are to be properly heat treated to refme
the grain structure and to obtain the required mechanical
properties.
502 Where forgings are to be quenched and tempered and
cannot be hot worked close to shape, they are to be suitably
rough machined or flame cut prior to being subjected to this
treatment.
503 All hot forming operations are to be conducted prior
to the fmal heat treatment. If for some reason a forging is
subsequently heated for further hot forming, the forging is
to be re-heat treated.
504 If any straightening operation is performed after the
fmal heat treatment, a subsequent stress relieving heat treat-
ment to avoid harmful residual stresses is to be carried out,
43
A 600 Test material
601 The relevant paragraphs of Ch.! apply.
602 Test material sufficient for the required tests and pre-
ferably also for possible re-test purposes, is to be provided
with a cross-sectional area of not less than that part of the
forging which it represents. The test material is to be integral
with each forging except in the case of small forgings which
may be batch tested according to 705.
(e.g surface hardened parts), the test material is not to be
cut from a forging until all heat treatment has been com-
pleted.
604 The result of the tensile test is to meet the relevant
requirements given in the subsections B, C, D, E, and F,
alternatively in the approved specification.
701 Number and orientation of test pieces are to comply
with the relevant requirements given in the subsections B,
C, D, E, and F.
Where no special requirements are stated in the subsection
or otherwise specified, at least one set of test pieces con-
sisting of one tensile and three impact test pieces is to be
taken from each forging or batch of forgings. The test pieces
are to be cut with their axis mainly parallel to the principal
direction of deformation (longitudinal tests) provided the
shape and dimensions make it possible. Where a forging
exceeds both 4 tons in mass and 3 m in length, one set of
test pieces is to be taken from each end.
702 Where more than one tensile test is taken from a
forging, the variation in tensile strength is not to exceed the
values given below:
Specified minimum Difference in
tensile strength tensile strength
Nlmm
2
Nlmm2
< 600 70
;:: 600
100
< 900
., - --" -
2: '90"6
... -- --120 . - .0. __ -
703 When a forging is subsequently divided into a number
of components, all of which are heat treated together in the
Same furnace charge, for test purposes this may be regarded
as one forging and the number of tests required is to be re-
lated to the total length and mass of the original multiple
forging.
704 Where possible, the distance from the surface of the
forging to the nearest surface of the specimen is to be at least
10 % of the diameter or the thickness of the forging, see 202
and 502.
705 Where a number of small forgings of about the same
size is made from one cast and heat treated in the same fur-
nace charge, batch testing procedures may be adopted using
one of the forgings for test purposes or alternatively using
separately forged test samples. These test samples are to
have thickness and a reduction ratio similar to that used for
the forgings which they represent. They are to be properly
identified and heat treated along with the forgings. At least
one set of tests is to be taken from each batch. Hardness
tests may additionally be required under the different sub-
sections B, C, D, E and F.
706 A batch testing procedure may also be used for hot
rolled bars not exceeding 250 mm diameter, which are in-
tended for the manufacture by machining operations only
DET NORSKE VERITAS
of straight shafting, bolts, studs and other components of
similar shape. A batch is to consist of either:
- Material from the same piece or rolled length provided
that where thifi is cut into individual lengths, these are all
heat treated in the same furnace charge, or
- Bars of the same diameter and cast, heat treated in the
same furnace charge and with a total mass not exceeding
2,5 tons.
707 Where batch testing combined with hardness testing
is required, the variation in hardness on an individual forg-
ing or in a batch of forgings is to comply with the following:
Specified minimwn
Difference in hardness
tensile strength
Nlmm
2
(Brinell number)
< 600 not more than 25
2: 600
not more than 35
< 900
2: 900 not more than 42
708 For forgings where the method of manufacture is
specially approved according to 205, details' concerning
mechanical testing are to be agreed on.
stress at elevated temperature is required according to E503,
be controlled within 0,1 to 0,3 strain per minute.
parallel to the principal direction of deformation. At least
one tensile test is to be made on material from each cast.
901 Procedures to be used for retesting are to be in ac-
thoroquiromontoof Ch.lSood , ..
1001 Before acceptance, all forgings are to be presented to
the Surveyors for visual examination. Where applicable, this
is to include the examination of internal surfaces and bores.
Unless otherwise agreed the verification of dimensions is the
responsibility of the manufacturer.
1002 When specified in the subsequent subsections or in
other relevant part of the rules for design and construction
or otherwise required, appropriate non-destructive examina-
tion is also to be carried out. The testing procedures, extent
and acceptance criteria are to be to the satisfaction of the
Society and in accordance with any specific requirements
of the approved plan.
1003 The manufacturer is to provide a statement that non
destructive examination has been carried out with satisfac-
tory results. This statement is to include a -brief reference to
the techniques and to the operators's qualification.
1004 The NDE-operators are to document formal training
and experience, preferably by being certified in accordance
with a certification scheme accepted by the Society.
1005 Magnetic particle and liquid penetrant examination is
to be carried out when the forgings are in the finished ma-
chined condition. Magnetic particle examination is to be
ment. Permanent magnets are not permitted.
A.C.-equipment is preferably to be used. The equipment
used for MPE must be able to produce a magnetic rms tan-
gential field strength of at least 2 kA!m. Examination with
the magnetic field shifted in at least two directions (90
turned) on each area is to be carried out. When using prods,
care is to be taken to avoid bums and hard spots. Prods are
to be tipped with lead or aluminium alloy.
1006 Ultrasonic examination is to be carried out following
the fmal heat treatment and at a stage when the forging has
been machined to a condition suitable for this type of ex-
amination. Both radial and axial scanning is to be carried
out when appropriate for the shape and dimensions of the
forging being examined. Unless otherwise agreed this ex-
amination is to be carried out and reported by the manufac-
turer although the surveyor may request to be present.
1007 When magnetic particle examination of certain com-
ponents is required, detailed specification with respect to
extent of examination and acceptance criteria will be speci-
fied in the relevant rules for design or in a Manufacturing
Survey Arrangement.
1101 Small surface imperfections may be removed by
grinding or by chipping and grinding. Complete elimination
of these imperfections is to be proven by magnetic particle
or dye penetrant examination. At the discretion of the sur-
veyor, the resulting shallow grooves or depressions can be
accepted, provided that they are blended by grinding.
1102 Repairs by welding are not generally permitted, but
special consideration may be given to such repairs where
they are of minor nature and in areas of low working
stresses.
In such cases, full details of the proposed repair and subse-
quent inspection procedures are to be submitted for the ap-
proval by the surveyor prior to commencing the proposed
rectification. A statement and!or sketch detailing the extent
and location of all repairs, together with details of the post
weld treatment and non-destructive examination is to be
provided for record purposes.
-, ,,', ,----. , ,--- -'
1201 For forgings which have been accepted, a material
certificate is to be' issued. The level of documentation re-
quired, i.e. NV -certificate, works certificate, etc., is given
under the relevant part of the rules. The certificate is at least
to contain the particulars stated in Ch.l Sec.!.
B 100 Scope
forgings intended for use in ship structures, rudder members
and equipment, e.g. sternframes and rudder horns, rudder
stocks and pintles, anchors and anchor shackles.
201 Forgings for general structure may be produced from
carbon, carbon.,.manganese, low-alloy or alloy steels. The
requirements given in 300 to 500 apply to carbon and car-
bon-manganese steels only.
The use of low alloy and alloy steels is subject to consider-
ation in each separate case. Where the use of alloy steel is
proposed, the specifications are to be submitted to the Soci-
ety for approval.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
)

J
J

C)

"
8
be controlled within 0, I to 0,3 % strain per minute.
The intenrals used for estimation of strain rate from meas-
urements of strain are not to exceed 6 seconds.
transverse to the final direction of rolling.
At least one tensile test is to be made on material from each
cast. The pieces are to be taken from the thickest plate of the
cast.
303 When no special test temperature is specified in the
order, the tests are to be carried out at 300C.
401 For material thickness 6 mm and above, impact testing
is to be carried out at the prescribed temperatures.
The average value from each set of three impact test pieces
are to comply with the appropriate requirements in tables
B3, B4, B5, C3, C4, and D2. Further, only one individual
value within each set may be below the specified minimum
average value, but not lower than 70 % of this value.
402 The required minimum values specified in B, C and
D refer to standard test pieces 10 x 10 mm. Where it is
impossible to use a standard test piece, the larger of the
following pieces is to be used: 10 x 7,5 mm, 10 x 5 mm.
The impact values required are then reduced to respectively
5!6 and 2!3 of the required values for standard test pieces.
403 The impact test pieces are to be situated so that the
distance between the centre line of the test piece and the
plate surface is not less than 114 of the plate thickness,
where practicable.
404 For plates and flats having a width of 600 mm or more
the test pieces are to be cut with their longitudinal axes
transverse to the final direction of rolling. For other pro-
ducts the test pieces may be taken transverse or parallel to
the fmal direction of rolling.
Requirements for test pieces cut with their longitudinal axes
transverse and parallel to the final direction of rolling are
stated in the tables as .f(transverse and .f(longitudinal re-
spectively.
.. ,- -- .. -. - - .-- . ,----- . -- ,,- - ---, -,-
405 The notch is to be cut in a face of the test pieces which
was originally perpendicular to the rolled surface.
406 For plates at least one set (3 pieces) of tests is to be
made for each tensile test. When the test temperature is
-50C or lower, one set of tests is to be taken from each
end of the rolled plate regardless of the plate weight. .
For sections at least one set of tests is to be made for each
tensile test. When the test temperature is -50C or lower,
one set of tests is to be made for every 2 tonnes or part
thereof of each type from the same heat and with thickness
variation less than 5 mm. .
501 When drop weight test is required according to C302,
one set of tests (2 test pieces) is to be taken from the thickest
plate alternatively section of each cast. The extent of testing
may be reduced subject to a thorough statistical documenta-
tion.
E 600 Testing of throngh thickness properties
601 When steel with improved through thickness proper-
ties (Z-steel) is required or specified in the order, the mate-
rials are to be tested as detailed in Sec.! E400.
701 When intercrystalline corrosion testing is required, the
test is to be carried out according to ASTM, A 262, Practice
E, Copper-Copper Sulfate-Sulfuric Acid Test or another
F. Inspection, Dimensional Tolerances and Sur-
face Condition
F 100 Inspection
responsibility of the steelmaker who has to verify that the
filled prior to despatch. The steelmaker is also responsible
Acceptance by the surveyors of material which later is found
to be defective is not to absolve the steelmaker from this
responsibility .
102 Plates and other' products are to be subjected to a
thorough, visual inspection on both sides by the manufac-
turer to ensure freedom from defects and harmful imperfec-
tions. Examination by means of suitable non- destructive
methods such as magnetic particle, dye penetrant and!or ul-
trasonic inspection may be required.
All plates are to be accessible to the surveyor for fmal in-
spection and checking.
F 200 Tolerances
201 No minus tolerance is permitted in the thickness of
plates intended for boilers, pressure vessels and low tem-
perature service. For stainless steels intended for chemical
tankers without pressure rating no plate is to vary more than
0,30 mm or 6% under the thickness specified, whichever is
the lesser. '
JhJ'l minJ!sJQIJ'lr!!IKe. isJlt iltllkC_oSJt<!!Ke,wi!!L
a recognized national or international standard.
301 All products are to display a workmanlike fmish free
from defects and imperfections which may impair their
proper workability and use.
302 Surface defects may be removed by local grinding.
Normally the thickness beneath the ground area is not to be
less than the nominal thickness of the material. Repair of
deeper defects by grinding or welding will be subject to
special consideration in each separate case, and is not to be
carried out unless a detailed repair procedure is submitted
and approved.
303 When defects are removed by grinding, complete
elimination of the defects is to be proven by suitable non-
destructive examination of the affected area.
304 Depressions caused by grinding are to show a smooth
transition to the surface.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
MUles TOr .January 1::1::10
is not susceptible to intergranular corrosion resulting from
grain boundary precipitation of chromium-rich carbides.
One test is to be carried out for each tensile test. The testing
is to be carried out according to ASTM A262, Practice E,
Copper - Copper Sulphate - Sulphuric Acid Test or another
The bent specimens are to be free from cracks indicating the
presence of intergranular attack.
Table DI Austenitic and duplex stainless steels. Chemical composition
Grade
C Si Mn P S
maximum maximum maximum maximum maximum
Cr Ni Mo Other
Austenitic
NY 304 L 0,03 1,0 2,0 0,045 0,030 18,0-20,0 8,0-12,0 -
NY 316 L 0,03 1,0 2,0 0,045 0,030 16,5-18,5 11,0-15,0 2,5-3,0
NY 316 L N 0,03 1,0 2,0 0,045 0,030 16,5-18,5 11,0-14,5 2,5-3,0
N
0,14-0,22
NY 317 L 0,03 1,0 2,0 0,045 0,030 18,0-20,0 11,0-15,0 3,0-4,0
NY 317 L N 0,03 1;0 2,0 0,045 0,030 18,0-20,0 12,5-15,0 3,0-4,0
N
0,14-0,22
NY 321 0,08 1,0 2,0 0,045 0,030 17,0-19,0 9,0-12,0
Ti
-
5xC<Ti<0,70
NY 347 0,08 1,0 2,0 0,045 0,030 17,0-19,0 9,0-13,0 - 10xC<Nb<I,0
Duplex
UNS S31803 0,03 1,0 2,0 0,030 0,020 21,0-23,0 4,5-6,5 2,5-3,5
N
0,14-0,20
UNS S32750 0,03 0,80 1,2 0,035 0,020 24,0-26,0 6,0-8,0 3,0-5,0
N
0,24-0,32
Table D2 Austenitic stainless steel. Mechanical properties
Tensile str"ngth
Yie:1 stress 1)
Elongation
Impact energy
. Nlmm , minimum Chorpy V-notch 2)
Grade Nlmm %
Test temperature J, minimum
Rm
AS
C average
Austenitic
NY 304 L 450-700 175 215 40
NY 316 L 450-700 195 235 40
NY 316 L N 600-800 300 340 40
NY 317 L 500-700 195 235 40 -196
transverse: 27
longitudinal: 41
NY 317 L N 600-800 300 340 40
NY 321 500-750 205 245 40
NY 347 500-750 205 245 40
Duplex
UNS S31803
I
minimum 620 450
I
25 -20
I
longitudinal: 41
UNS S32750 I minimum 690 550
I
25 -20
I
transverse: 27
1) The specified yield stress at both 0,2% and 1,0%, RpO,2 and Rpl.O respectively, are to be documented for austenitic stainless steels.
2) Verification of impact values for austenitic stainless steels is required only for materials intended for design temperatures below _105C.
E. Testing
E 100 General
ance with the appropriate requirements of Ch.l.
102 Test samples are to be taken from positions as re-
quired according to Sec.! ElOO.
201 Test pieces for tensile testing of plates at ambient
temperatore are to be cut with their principal axes transverse
to the final direction of rolling.
For testing of sections the test pieces are to be taken trans-
verse or parallel to the final direction of rolling at the option
of the steebnaker.
202 For plates, one tensile test piece is to be taken from
each rolled plate provided the weight of the piece does not
exceed 2500 kg.
Where ingot casting is used, the test piece is to represent the
top of the ingot.
When the weight exceeds .2500 kg, tensile test pieces are to
be taken from both ends of the rolled plate.
203 When test pieces are required from each end of a
rolled plate, the difference between the values obtained for
the tensile strength is not to exceed 60 N/mm
2
.
204 For sections, one tensile test piece is to be taken from
test units of not more than 10 tonnes. The material in each
test unit is to be from the same heat and of the same sbape
with a thickness variation of not more than 5 mm.
. stress at elevated temperature is required according to B302,
DET NORSKE YERITAS
)

J J
J J
301 All forgings are to be made from killed steels.
ply with the overall limits given in Table Bl.
Table Bl Chemical composition
%
maximum, %
C, maximum
0,60
2
)
Cu 0,30
Si, maximum 0,45
Cr 0,30
Mn 0,30-1,50
Ni 0,40
P, maximum 0,040
Mo 0,15
S, maximum 0,040
1) Suitable grain refming elements may be added. The content
. 2 45
401 Steel forgings are to be normalized or normalized and
tempered. Alternatively the forgings may be quenched and
tempered, subject to approval oy the Society m each sepa-
rate case. .
Tempering temperature is to be not less than 550C.
SOl At least one set of tests is to be taken from each
forging or batch of forgings. Unless otherwise specified in
the approved plans, the test pieces are to be oriented in the
longitudinal direction provided the shape and dimensions
make it possible.
Where a forging exceeds both 4 tonnes in mass and 3 m in
length one set of tests is to be taken from each end.
502 For carbon-manganese steels Table B2 gives the min-
imum requirements for yield stress, elongation and
energy corresponding to different strength levels.
strength levels have been given in multiples of 40 N/mm
to facilitate interpolation for intermediate values of specified
minimum tensile strength.
503 For specific components, e.g. rudder stocks, rudder
shafts and pintles, a limitation in sl'ecified. tensile strength
may be given in the relevant parts of the rules.
Table B2 Mechanical properties of forgings for general application
Tensile Yield stress I Elongation, Reduction of area, Average impact energy,
strength, ReI! or RpO.2
As%
Z%
KV, J (OC)
Rm
Nlmm2 minimum 1) minimum I) minimum 1)
Nlmm
2
I t I t I t
360-480 180 28 20 50 35 32 18
400-520 200 26 19 50 35 32 18
440-560 220 24 18 50 35 32 18
480-600 240 22 16 45 30 32 18
520-640 260 21 15 45 30 25 15
560-680 280 20 14 40 27 25 15
600-750 300 18 13 40 27 18 12
640-790 320 17 12 40 27 18 12
680-830 340 16 12 35 24 18 12
720-870 360 15 11 35 24 18 12
760-910 380 14 10 35 24 18 12
1) 1 and t mean test specimens mainly parallel to, respectively transverse to the principle direction of the grain flow.
tor Shafting anil Machinery
C 100 scope
101 The rules of this subsection apply to forgings for
shafting and machinery.
102 This subsection also applies to rolled bars with diam-
eter up to 250 min used for the manufacture of shafts, bolts
and other components of similar form by machining oper-
ations.
201 Provision is made in this subsectiou for shafts and
machine components produced from killed carbon and car-
bon-manganese steels and alloy steels.
dimensions and requirements on mechanical and toughness
properties of the component and in compliance with ap"
with the overall limits given in Table C!:
.- -,--,-
Table CI Chemical composition
%
maximum, %
C, maximum
0,60 2) 3)
Cu 0,30
Si, maximum 0,45
Cr 0,30
Mn 0,30-1,50
Ni 0,40
P, maximum 0,040
S, maximum 0,040
Mo 0,15
ture the carbon content is not to exceed 0,23%, and the total
3) C-content up to 0,65% may be accepted after special consid-
eration.
303 For aIloy steel forgings the chemical composition of
ladle samples is to include the content of all aIloying ele-
ments and is to comply with the following overaIl limits and
Carbon
Silicon
maximum 0,45%
maximum 0,45 %
DET NORSKE YERITAS
Hules tor :ShipS, January 1
Sulphur
Phosphorus
maximum 0,035%
maximum 0,035%
401 Except as provided in subsection D for surface hard-
ened components, the requirements given in 402 apply.
402 All forgings are to be properly heat treated. The fol-
lowing heat treatment may be applied:
a) For carbon and carbon-manganese -steels:
normalizing
normalizing and tempering
For rolled bars used as substitute for forgings with di-
ameter less than 65 mm normalizing is not required.
b) For alloy steels:
Alternatively, alloy steel forgings may be supplied in the
normalised and tempered condition, in which case the
specified mechanical properties are to be agreed with the
Society.
For all types of steel the temperiog temperature is not to be
less than 550C.
C 500 Test material
501 Number of tests and position of test material for some
components are specified in 502 to 504. Further, the re-
quirements specified in A apply.
502 For plain shafts, flanged shafts and flanged shafts with
collar, one set of test pieces is to be taken for each forging,
except where the forging exceeds both 4 tonnes in mass and
3 m in length, in which case one set is to be taken from each
end. A set of test pieces normally includes one tensile test
picce ami' fiil 00 ,- impact le.!)l -These '-limits - tV' "a5
forged mass and length but exclude the test material.
Normally the tests are to be taken in the longitudinal direc-
tion, but at the discretion of the manufacturer and if agreed
by the surveyor alternative positions as shown in Figs. I,
2, and 3 may be used. For shafts with keyways, splines,
radial holes, slots etc. the tests are to be taken in the tan-
gential direction.
Plain shafts made from hot rolled bars not exceeding 250
mm diameter may be batch tested according to A700.

I
Test position B
(tangential)
Fig. 1
Plain shaft
Test position 8

ough bolt hole)

1- ::_n __
/-'1 .
T", P""oo C . .
(transversel
Fig. 2
Flanged shaft
Fig. 3
Test positipn B
ttange:nttal)

(tangentIal) , '
........ .
-' ,
r-
,
,
-'--1--
/
/
Test position D
{transversel
---{.i
-"-

I-
f--
L.J
,
,
,
i
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
L ,-----j
, /
,-,
Flanged shaft with collar
Test position A
{longitudi0811
. _-...
r-
.. \--,
,
,
f
---t-
I
---
L.J
503 For solid forged crank shafts one set of tests is to be
taken in the longitudinal direction from the end of each
forging. Where the mass, as heat treated but excluding test
material, exceeds 3 tonnes tests are to be taken from each
end (test position A and B in Fig. 4). Where the crankthrows
are formed by machining or flame cutting, the second set
of tests (mass exceeding 3 tonnes) is to be taken in a trans-
verse direction from material removed from the crankthrow
at the end opposite the coupling (test position C in Fig. 4).
Test position A
(Iongituc;liotll)
I
I
:.
Tast !1osftion B
jlongitutlinall
r .. -
,
,
,
,
,
11 I "P.I "liL
\"i'X"Ir--: \

-+ ,

Coupling entl
Fig. 4
Solid forged crankshaft
Ii \
---\
Test position C
(traf\S\l8tse)
I
---
For small solid crankshafts of the same shape and dimen-
sions, a batch testing procedure may be adopted, provided
that additional hardness tests are carried out on each forging.
The regulations given in A700 apply.
504 For separate crank throw forgings and other forgings
where the method of manufacture has been specially ap-
proved in accordance with A205 the number and position
of the test pieces are to be agreed with the Society having
regard to the method of manufacture employed (see PtA
Ch.2 Sec. I).
DET NORSKE VERITAS
J
(J
J
,J
J

J J
nUl!:::::> lUI ;::UllJJ::>, ,JdlIUdIY 1i3i3U
Table C4 Nickel alloy steels for low temperature service. Mechanical properties I)
Yield slrfss
Impact Nlmm
Tensile
minimum
Elongation
KV, average )
Min
Grade
for thickness, mm
A5%
design strengt,p
Nlmm
>30
mrmmum
Thickness
Test
Longitudinal
temperature
Transverse
5,30
5,40 mm
temperature
0C 3)4)
J minimum J minimum
5,25 -65
NV 1,5 Ni 5) 470-640 275 265 22
>255,30 -70
27 41 -60C
>30S35 -75
>35<40
-80
5,25 -95
NV 3,5 Ni 5) 540-690 345 335 22
>255,30 -100
27 41 -90C
>305,35 -105
>35<40
-110
5,25 -110
NY 5 Ni 5)
5701710 390 380 21
>255,30 -115
27 41 -105C
>305,35 -120
>35<40
-125
NV 9 Ni 640/840 490 480 19 <40 -196 27 41 -165C
dered with margin .
3) Materials for liquefied gas carriers see Pt.S Ch.S Sec.2 Table D3.
4) For thicknesses 25 < t :5 40 mm the impact test temperature is to be stamped on the products and stated in the
5) In certain cases the materials are to be subjected to Pellini's drop weight test according to 302.
Table C5 Heat treatmeot of steels for low temperature service
NV 360-2FN
NV2-2
NV2-3
NV2-4
Plates: Nonnalized 1)
NV 2-4L
Sections: Nonnalized. thenno-mechanically treated or controlled rolled 2)
NV4-2
NY 4-3
NV4-4
NV 4-4L
NV 1,5 Ni
NV 3,5 Ni Nonnalized, normalized and tempered or quenched and tempered
NV 5 Ni
NY. 9 Ni . .l1ntlhlr, nnrmRlimlannJ,JTljll<rr;:! nr llILCJlhm!!mll<mJl'<ml'J,

-
cc
1) Other heat treating processes, e.g. quenching and tempering or thenno-mechanical controlled processing may be approved. See 402.
2) See 402.
3) Quenching and tempering will normally be required for thicknesses above 30 mm.
D. Stainless Steel
D 100 Steel grades
101 Requirements are specified for seven grades of aus-
tenitic and two grades of duplex (ferritic/austenitic) stainless
steels.
Steel grades with chemical composition and mechanical
properties deviating from these specifications may be ac-
cepted for the purpose in question after consideration in each
separate case.
The austenitic steels may be used for applications where the
design temperature is not lower than - 165C.
201 The chemical composition is to comply with the re-
quirements given in Table DI, or the approved specifica-
tion.
ply with the requirements specified in Table D2. For aus-
tenitic steels both the 0,2 and 1,0 per cent yield stress are
to be reported. .
refer to testing at room temperature.
For austenitic steels impact tests are only required for design
temperatures below -105C.
For duplex steels impact tests at design temperature or
-20C, whichever is the lower, are required.
401 All materials are to be supplied in the solution treated
condition.
501 Unless otherwise agreed by the Society for the order
in question, the materials are to be subjected to intercrystal-
line corrosion test, in order to demonstrate that the material
DET NORSKE VERITAS
Table C3 Carbon-manganese steels for low temuerature service. Mechanical properties. j)
Yield striss
Impact enertq Nlmm
Tensile
minimum
Elongation
KV, average )
Grade strengt,f
for thickness J mm
AS%
Nlmm .
>16
mzmmum
Thickness
Test
Transverse

mm
"C )
J minimum
NV 360-2FN 360-480 235 215 26

-20 27.

-25

-30
>35<40
-35
NV2-2 400-490 265 255 24

-20 27

-25

-30
>35<40
-35
NV2-3 400/490 265 255 24

-40 27

-45

-50
>35<40
-55
NV 2-4. 400/490 265 _
255 24
-55 27
,

-60

-65
>35<40
-70
NV2-4L 400/490 265 255 24

-60 27

-65

-70
>35<40
-75
NV4-2 490-610 335 325 21 -20 27

-25

-30
>35<40
-35
NV4-3 490-610 335 325 21 -40 27

-45

-50
>35<40
-55
NV4-4 490-610 335 325 21 -55 27

-60

-65
>35<40
-70
NV 4-4L 490-610 335 325 21

-60 27

-65

-70
-
1
'"'
. :>33'-'QO
I .. -7, ........ ... .....
Min
design
Longitudinai
J minimwn
temperature
41 -15"C
41 -15"C
-
41 -35"C
41 -50"C
41 -55"C
41 -15"C
41 -35"C
41 -sooe "
41 -55"C
.... .... .... ....
dered with suffiCient margin. . .
3) Materials for tanks or parts of tanks completely thermally stress relieved after welding may for aU thicknesses up to t 40 mm be tested at a tem-
perature 5C below the minimum design temperature.
4) Materials for liquefied gas carriers see Pt.5 Ch.5 Sec.2 Table D2.
5) For thicknesses 25 < t < 40 mm the impact test temperature is to be stampe:d on the and stated in the
DEI NORSKE VERITAS
l
,

J
.. J
,

)
J
C 600 . Mechanical properties
601 Requirements to mechanical properties for carbon and
carbon-manganese steel tested at room temperature are given
in Table C2.
The tables cover values corresponding to the 'fecified min-
imum tensile strength from 360 to 760 N/mm . The values
for elongation, reduction of area and impact energy are
given for testing in longitudinal (A), tangential (B) and
transverse (C) direction. It is not intended that the strength
levels should necessarily be regarded as specific grades.
The strength levels have been given in mUltiples of 40
N/mm
2
to facilitate interpolation for intermediate values of
specified minimum tensile strength. Forgings may normally
be supplied to any specified minimum tensile strength se-
. 47
lected within the upper and lower limits stated in the relevant
rules for design and construction or in the approved plan for
the component.
to comply with the requirements given in Table C3.
603 Components designed for service at low temperatures
are to be subjected to additional impact toughness tests. The
test temperature is to be stipulated in each separate case de-
pendent on design temperature, application category and
material dimensions. Required minimum impact energy is
specified in Table C4, related to the required minimum yield
stress of the material.
atures, tensile test at elevated temperature may be required.
Table C2 Mechanical properties of carbon and carbon-manganese steel forgings
Tensile Yield Elongation, Reduction of area, A verage impact energy,
strength, stress, As% Z% KY, J (+20"C)
Rm ReB or
minimum 1) minimum 1) minimum 1) 2)
Nlmm2
RpO,2
minimum
Nlmm
2
A B C A B C A B C
360-480 180 28 24 20 50 43 35 32 26 18
400-520 200 26 22 19 50 43 35 32 26 18
440-560 220 24 20 18 50 43
-
35 32 26 18
480-600 240 22 19 16 45 38 30 32 26 18
520-640 260 21 18 15 45 38 30 25 20 15
560-680 280 20 17 14 40 34 27 25 14 15
600-750 300 18 15 13 40 34 27 18 14 12
640-790 320 17 14 12 40 34 27 18 14 12
680-830 340 16 14 12 35 30 24 18 14 12
720-870 360 15 13 11 35 30 24 18 14 12
760-910 380 14 12 10 35 30 24 18 14 12
1) A denotes longitudinal test pieces. B denotes tangential test pieces. C denotes transverse test
Charpy V-notch testing may be omitted for normalized steels not intended for arctic and ice breaking service.
Table C3 Mechanical properties of alloy steel forgings
,
Tensile Yield Elongation, Reduction of area, Average impact energy,
strength, stress, As% Z% KY, J (+ 20"C) !
Rrfl " 2
.. RaJ or
minimum' 1) . minimum--
J
)-
-- minimum- H _____ - _
Nlmm
RpO,2
minimum
Nlmm2
A B C A B C A B C
600-750 420 18 16 14 50 43 35 41 31 24
650-800 450 17 15 13 50 43 35 32 24 22
700-850 480 16 14 12 45 38 30 32 24 22
750-900 530 15 13 11 45 38 30 32 24 20
800-950 590 14 12 10 40 34 27 32 24 20
850-1000 640 13 11 9 40 34 27 27 22 18
900-1100 690 13 11 9 40 34 27 27 22 18
950-1150 750 12 10 8 35 30 24 25 19 16
1000-1200 810 12 10 8 35 30 24 25 19 16
1050-1250 870 11 9 7 35 30 24 21 15 13
1100-1300 930 11 9 7 35 30 24 21 15 13
1) A denotes longitudinal test pieces. B denotes tangential test pieces. _ C denotes transverse test
._- -- -
DEI NORSKE VERITAS
Table C4 Required minimum average impact energy for
shafting and general machine construction for low temper-
ature applications
Minimum specified yield stress Minimum impact energy
ReB or R
o
O.2, Nlmm
2
KV, I, average 1)
I") t ")
< 270 27 20
> 270
31 22
:s 310
> 310
34 24
< 350
> 350 40 27
value, but not less than 70% of the average value.
2) land t mean test pieces mainly parallel to, respectively per-
pendicular to the principal direction of grain flow.
D. Forgings for. Gearing
D 100 Scope
forgings, in carbon, carbon-manganese and alloy steel, in-
tended for use in the construction of gearing, including
forgings intended for surface hardening, i.e. induction har-
dening, flame hardening, nitriding and carburising.
102 Relevant parts of this subsection may be applied also
for surface hardened steel castings.
D 200 Manufacture
201 Forgings are to be manufactured in accordance with
the requirements of A.
,-the, requirimaDtE, concerning mechanioal
properties of the core and for the required surface hardoess
of the items and is to be in compliance with the approved
specification.
with the following overall limits:
Composition 1)
Permitted residual elements
% maximum, %
C, maximum 0,65 L)
CU 0,30
Si, maximum 0,45
Mn 0,30-1,50
Cr 0,30
P, maximum 0,040
Ni 0,40
S, maximum 0,040
Mo 0,15
residual content is not to exceed 0,8%.
303 For alloy steel forgings the chemical composition of
ladle samples is to include the content of all alloying ele-
ments and is to comply with the following overall limits and
Carbon
Silicon
Sulphur
Phosphorus
maximum 0,45%
maximum 0,45 %
maximum 0,035%
maximum 0,035 %
401 Forgings for gearing which are not to be surface har-
dened are to be either normalized and tempered or quenched
and tempered in accordance with the approved specification.
For all types of steel the tempering temperature is not to be
less than 550C.
402 Forgings for gears which are to be carbU'rised after
final machining are to be supplied in either the fully ann-
ealed or the normalized and tempered condition, suitable for
subsequent machining and carburising.
403 Where induction hardening or nitriding is to be carried
out the forgings are to be quenched and tempered at an ap-
propriate stage.
quenched and tempered forgings
501 For pinion forgings where the finished diameter of the
toothed portion exceeds 200 mm, one set of tests is to be
taken in a tangential direction and adjacent to the toothed
portion (test position B in Fig.5). If, however, the journal
diameter is 200 mm or less, tests are to be taken in the lon-
gitudinal direction (test position A in Fig.5). Where the
finished length of the toothed portion exceeds 1,25 m, one
set of tests is to be taken from each end.
502 For pinion forgings where the fmished diameter of the
toothed portion is 200 mm or less, one set of tests is to be
bi
kenin
_the .!\.in,
503 For gear wheel forgings, one set of tests is to be taken
in a tangential direction (test position A in Fig.6).
504 For gear wheel rim forgings, one set of tests is to be
taken in the .longitudinal. direction (test position A in
Fig.7). Where the finished diameter exceeds 2,5 m or the
mass (as heat treated but excluding test IlJaterial) exceeds 3
tonnes, two sets of tests are to be taken from diametrically
opposite positions (test position A in Fig.7).
Test posilion B Test pOSition B
(tangential]
"-...-. r---
L
-- I /'
/"-" i =1
11--.. -
L = length of toothed portion
D =diameter of toothed portion
d = journal diameter
Fig. 5
Pinion
Test pO:!lition A
!longitudinal)
DEr NORSKE VERITAS
.J
:]
-)
-:J
J
J
7
C 400 Heat treatment Guidance note:
conditions stated in Table C5.
402 The designation of quenched and teml'ered, controlled
rolled and thermo-mechamcally treated steel grades is to be
given the suffix QT, CR, and TMCP respectively instead
ofN
Hot forming or normalizing of thermo-mechanically treated
steels may result in considerable reduction of tensile strength and
yield stress. Thermo-mechanically treated steels are not to be
used where hot forming or normalizing will be carried out.
--e-n-d--o-f--G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e--n-o-t-e---
Table Cl Carbon-manganese steels for low temperature service. Chemical composition
Grade
C S P
Al q)
N
maximum
Si Mn
maximum maximum total maximum
Residual elements
NV 360-2FN 0,17 0,10 -
O,4i
0,025 0,030 ;::0,018 0,Q15
0,35
1,00 )
NV2-2 0,16 0,10 - 0,40 - 0,025 0,030 ;::0,018 0,015
0,40 1,60
NV2-3 0,14 0,10 - 0,70 - 0,025 0,030
;::0,Q18
0,015
0,40 - 1,60
NV2-4 0,14 0,10 - 070 - 0,025 0,030
;::0,018
0,015
0,40
1,60 3)
Cr 0,20 maximum
NV 2-4L 0,14 0,10 - 0,70
3
0,025 0,030
;::0,018
0,015
Cu 0,35 maximum
0,40
1,60 )
Ni 0,40 maximum I)
NV4-2 0,16 0,10 -
<1,60 0,025 0,030
;::0,018
0,015
Mo 0,08 maximum
0,40
Cr+Mo+Cu 0,45 maximum
NV4-3 0,10 0,10 -
0,70 - 0,025 0,030
;::0,Q18
0,Q15
0,40 1,60
NV4-4 0,10 0,10 - 070 - 0,025 0,030
;::0,018
0,015
0,40 1:60 3)
I
NV 4-4L 0,10 0,10 - 070 - 0,025 0,030
;::0,018
0,015
0,40 1:60 3)
I) For the steel grades NV 2 3, NV 2 4, NV 2 4L, NV 4-3, NV 4-4 and NV 4-4L a Ni-content up to 1,25% may be approved.
2) For thicknesses exceeding 40 mm, Mn = 0,40-1,20%.
3) A maximum Mn-content of 1,65% is accepted provided the carbon-content does not exceed 0,13% for NV 2-4/NV 2-4L and 0,14% for
NV4-4/NV 4-4L. .
4) Aluminium may be either partly or totaUy replaced by other grain refining elements.
'-
Table C2 Nickel alloy steels for low temperature service. Chemical composition
Grade
C
Si Mn
S
p
Ni
Al
tot
NV 1,5 Ni 0,14 0,10-0,35 0,30-1,50 0,025 0,025 1,30-1,70 >0,018
NV 3,5 Ni 0,12 0,10-0,35 0,30"':'0,70 0,025 0,025 3,25-3,75 >0,018
NV 5 Ni 0,12 0,10-0,35 0,30-0,80 0,025 0,025 4,70-5,30 >0,018
NV 9 Ni 0,10 0,10-0,35 0,30-0,90 0,025 0,025 8,50-10,0 ;::0,018
DEr NORSKE VERITAS
Table B7 Estimated average stress to rupture values in 100 000 and 200 000 hours for desi2n purposes
Stress to rupture, NlmmJ. for steel grades
NV360-0N
NV460-0N
NV360-1FN
NV460-1 FN
Temperature
NV410-0N
NV490-0N NVO,3Mo NV 1 Cr 0,5 Mo NV 2,25 Cr 1 Mo
'c
NV41O-1 FN
NV490-1 FN
NV 510-1 FN
100000 200 000 100000 200 000 100 000 200000 100 000 200 000 100 000 200 000
h h h h h h h h h h
380 165 145 227 206
390 148 129 203 181
400 132 115 179 157
410 118 101 157 135
420 103 89 136 115
430 91 78 117 97
440 79 67 100 82
450 69 57 85 70 239 217 - - 221 203
460 59 48 73 60 208 188 - - 204 186
470 50 40 63 52 178 159 -
- 186 169
480 42 33 55 44 148 130 210 180 170 152
490 47 37 123 105 177 148 153 135
500 41 30 101 84 . 146 122 137 119
510 81 69 121 99 122 103
520 66 55 99 79 107 89
530 53 45 81 64 93 77
540 67 52 79 68
550 54 42 69 58
560 43 34 59 50
570 35 - 51 43
580 44 -
Table B8 Heat treatment of steel for boilers and pressure vessels
NV 360 OA
.
NY 410 OA As rolled
NY 460 OA
NV 36O-0N, -1 FN
NY 410-0N, -1 FN
Normalized/controlled rolled 1)
NV 46O-0N, -1 FN
Thermo-mechanically treated
NY 490-0N, -1 FN
NV 510-1 FN
NY 0,3 Mo Normalized
NY 1 Cr 0,5 Mo
Normalized and tempered
NY 2,25 Cr 1 Mo
rys.e '402;'" """"""""'" .. ......... , . " ..... 0 """ '.' .... ...... ,' .
.' " . ' . . " ...........
C 100 Steel grades
101 Requirements are specified for fine grained carbon-
manganese steels and nickel alloy steels with tougbness
properties at low temperatures.
ments specified in Table Cl for carbon manganese steels and
in Table C2 for nickel alloy steels.
202 The content of all elements given in the specifications
including grain refming elements is to be determined and
surveyor.
- Nb, minimum 0,02 %
- V, minimum 0,05 %.
C
= C Mn Cr + Mo + V + Ni + Cu
eq + 6 + 5 15
(%).
Table C3: Carbon-manganese steels
Table C4: Nickel alloy steels
specified in the tables refer to testiog at room temperature.
302 Pellini' s drop weight test is to be carried out for plates
and sections of nickel alloy steels with thickness 13 mm and
more in the following cases:
_60C
-80C
- NV 5 Ni when intended for design temperature below
-90C
The test specimens are to display a no break performance
when tested 5C below the design temperature.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

:J
':J
/"\
J
o
:J
:J
':J
Fig. 6
Gear wheel
Ten pOlition A
Itangen11all
Test PO&11ion
long
/
Ii' i
r.
-\-l- I I I .--l.--+.-\-
Fig. 7
1
1
,

.,
..----._----
\
Test po&itlan A
(equivalent to longitudinel)
Gear rim (made by expanding)
I
505 For hollow pinion forgings, one set of tests is to be
taken in the tangential direction (test position A in Fig.8).
where the finished length of the toothed portion exceeds
1,25 m, one set of tests is to be taken from each end.
Test positi()f1 A Test !)Osition A
Fig. 8
Hollow pinion
D 600 Test material for forgings intended for
carburising and hardening
601 When forgings are to be carburised after machining,
sufficient test material is to be provided for fmal tests after
completion of carburising and hardening. For this purpose
duplicate sets of test material are to taken from positions as
detailed in 500, except that irrespective of the dimensions
or mass of the forging, tests are required from one position
only.
Alternative procedures for the testiog of forgings which are
to be carburised may be specially agreed. .
701 The mechanical properties for carbon and carbon'
manganese steels tested at room temperature are to comply
with the appropriate requirements given in Table Cl.
to comply with the appropriate requirements given in Table
C2.
Pt.2 Ch.2 Sec.5 Page 49
703 For components designed for service at low temper-
atures, the test temperature is to be stipulated in each sepa
rate case dependent on design temperature, application
category and material dimensions. Required minimum im-
pact energy is specified in Table C3, related to the required
minimum yield stress of the material.
atures, tensile test at elevated temperature maybe required.
705 Detailed requirements with respect to surface harden-
ing' and testiog and inspection of the toothed parts of pin-
ions and wheels is outlined in PtA Ch.2 Sec.s.
E. Forgings for Boilers, Unfired Pressure Ves-
sels and Machinery Piping Systems
E 100 Scope
101 The rules in this subsection apply to carbon, carbon-
manganese and low alloy steel forgings intended for use in
the construction of boilers, unfIred pressure vessels and ship
and machinery piping systems.
These rules may also be used for other areas of application;
subject to special agreement.
201 The chemical composition is to comply with the ap-
propriate requirements specified in Table El for carbon and
carbon-manganese steels and in Table E2 for !illoy steel, or
to comply with other recognized approved standards.
including grain refining elements is to be determined and
surveyor.
301 Carbon and carbon-manganese steel forgings are to
be normalized, normalized and tempered or quenched and
tempered. Alloy steel forgings are to be normalized and
tempered or quenched and tempered .
E 400 Test material
401 For seamless hollow forgings, e.g. drums and 'head-
ers, which are initially forged with open ends, one set of test
pieces is to be taken from each end of each forging. Where
the ends are to be subsequently closed by forging, test ma-
. terial is to be cut off prior to the closing operation and is to
be heat treated together with the forging. Where forged with
one solid end, test material is to be provided at the open end
only. For hollow forgings the test pieces are to be cut in the
circumferential direction.
For other forgings at least one set of test pieces is to be taken
from each forging and, where the dimension and shape al-
low, the test piece is to be taken in the longitudinal direction.
E 500 Mechanical properti!!S
501 The mechanical properties at room temperature are to
comply with the requirements in Sec.2 when applicable or
with a relevant standard.
502 The requirements to impact energy in Sec.2 as given
for pieces cut with their longitudinal axes transverse and
parallel to the principal direction of deformation and, are
stated in the tables as transverse and longitudinal, re-
spectively.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
nUies TOr ;:,nlps, .January I ::1!:10
The values given for transverse tests are applicable also for
circumferential and tangential tests.
503 When the forging is intended for use at elevated tem-
peratures, the mechanical properties for design purposes are
to be submitted for consideration. Where the 0,2 per cent
proof stress at elevated temperature is the limiting design
criterion, the design value is to be verified by a tensile test
at design temperature according to A800.
Tensile testing at elevated temperature may be waived pro-
vided it is verified by statishcal means that the reqUIred
properties are consistently achieved.
504 For design purposes the stress to rupture values given
in Sec.2 or in recogmzed standards are to be applied.
Table E1 Carbon and steels for boilers and pressure vessels. Chemical composition
Tensile C Si Mn P S Al Residual
strength
acid soluble elements
Nlmm
2
maximum
410 0,20 0,15-0,35 0,50-1,30 0,035 0,035 0,015-0,050 Cr 0,30
460 0,23 0,15-0,40 0,60-1,40 0,035 0,035 maximum 0,050
Cll 0,30
Ni 0,30
490 0,23 0,15-0,60 0,90-1,60 0,035 0,035 maximum 0,050
Mo 0,10
Total 0,70
Table E2 Alloy steels for boilers and pressure vessels. Chemical composition
Type of C Si Mn P
steel
maximum
0,3 Mo 0,12-0,22 0,10-0,35 0,50-0,80 0,035
1 Cr
0,10-0,18 0,10-0,35 0,40-0,80 0,035
0,5 Mo
2,25 Cr
0,08-0,15 0,10-0,50 0,40-0,80 0,035
1 Mo
F. Forgings for Cargo Tanks, Pressure Vessels
and Piping Systems Exposed to Low Temper-
atures
F 100 Scope
forgings with material thicknesses up to and including 50
mm for cargo tanks, pressure vessels and piping systems
where design and testing are related to sub-zero temper-
atures.
'c'argo tanks, presslire 'ves'se}s' 'ana
quefied gas, these rules apply also when the design temper-
ature is 0
0
C and higher.
F 200 Type of steel
201 Forgings for the applications mentioned in 101 may
be produced from killed and fme grain treated carbon-man-
ganese steels, ferritic Ni-alloy steels or austenitic stainless
steels in compliance with the specifications given in the fol-
lowing paragraphs. Lowest permissible design temperatures
are stated in Table F2.
Other steel types may be accepted upon consideration in
each case.
301 Carbon-manganese steel forgings intended for welding
C
Si
Mn
p
S
Ni
Cr
Mo
0,18% maximum
0,10-0,45%
0,30-1,50%
0,035% maximum
0,015% maximum
0,30% maximum
0,25%
0,08% maximum"
S Al Cr Mo Residual
maximum
acid SOill- elements
hie
maximum
maximum
0,030 0,020
- 0,25-0,35
0,030 0,020 0,70-1,30 0,40-0,60 Cll 0,25
Ni 0,30
0,030 0,020 2,00-2,50 0,90-1,10
For forgings not intended for welding, a C-content of max-
imum 0,30% and Ni-content up to 0,80% may be accepted.
302 Carbon-manganese steel is to be fme grain treated
with aluminium. niobium, vanadium or titanium. either sin-
gly or in any combination. When used singly the content of
AI, Nb or V is normally to be within the following limits:
AI, acid soluble
AI, total
Nb
V
Ti
0,015-0,08 %
0,020-0,085%
0,02-0,05%
0,05-0,10%
. O,O? .%.ll1l!"illllllll.
maximum contents of each element is not applicable.
303 The chemical composition of Ni-alloy steels and aus-
tenitic stainless steels is to comply with the requirements
given for rolled steel in Sec.2, Table C2 and DI. Where
other steel grades are proposed, the chemical composition
is to be submitted to the Society for approval.
401 Forgings for cargo tanks, pressure vessels and piping
systems exposed to low temperature are to be supplied in the
heat treatment condition specified in Table F2.
F 500 Test material
501 Unless otherwise specified in the approved plans, the
test pieces are to be taken in the direction of the principal
grain flow, provided the shape and dimension make it pos-
sible.
601 Requirements for mechanical properties for carbon-
manganese steels are given in Table FI.
The Table gives minimum requirements for yield stress, el-
ongation, reduction of area and average impact energy value
corresponding to three levels of specified minimum tensile
DEf NORSKE VERITAS
,"] 0
:J .:)
8
(:]8
Table B6 Steels for boilers and pressure vessels. Minimum lower yield stress (RoL) or 0,2% proof stress (RpO 2) values at elevated
temperatures for design purposes
Grade Thickness mm 1)
Minimwn ReL or RpO,2 N/mm
2
Temperature, c
100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500
<16
NY 36O-0N
>16 ';:;40
175 172 168 150 124 117 115 113
>40 ';:;63
171 169 162 144 124 117 115 113
162 158 152 141 124 117 115 113
NY 360-1 FN
<16
204 185 165 145 127 116 110 106
>16 ';:;40
196 183 164 145 127 116 110 106
>40 ';:;63
179 172 459 145 127 116 110 106
NV 41O-0N
<16
211 208 201 180 150 142 138 136
>16 ';:;40
201 198 191 171 150 142 138 136
"ll >40 ';:;63
192 188 181 168 150 142 138 136

E
NY 410-1 FN
<16
235 216 194 171 152 141 134 130
0 >16 ';:;40 228 213 192 171 152 141 134 130
c
>40 ';:;63 215 204 188 171 152 141 134 130
,;;
1
NV 46O-0N <16 248 243 235 210 176 168 162 158
,
>16 ';:;40 230 227 220 198 176 168 162 158
c
::E >40 ';:;63
222 218 210 194 176 168 162 158
U
"0 NV 460-1 FN
<16
266 247 223 198 177 167 158 153
iii
>16 ';:;40
260 242 220 198 177 167 158 153
,
251 236 217 198 177 167 158 153
u >40 ';:;63
NV 490-0N
<16
270 264 255 228 192 183 177 172
>16 ';:;40
248 245 237 214 192 183 177 172
>40 ';:;63
240 236 227 210 192 183 177 172
NV 490-1 FN
<16
284 265 240 213 192 182 173 168
279 260 237 213 192 182 173 168
>16 ';:;40
272 256 234 213 192 182 173 168
>40 ';:;63
NV 510-1 FN - - 265 245 225 205 175 155
';:;63

NY 36O-0A ';:;25 150 150 145 125 110 105
"0_-
NY 41O-0A ';:;25 180 180 170 150 130 125
c 0

NY 46O-0A ';:;25 210 210 200 180 160 150
u

1
NV 0,3 Mo <63 237 232 218 200 167 153 148 143 139

NY 1 Cr 0,5 Mo <63 270 259 248 237 216 203 199 194 188

NY 2,25 Cr 1 Mo
<63 249 241 233 224 219 212 207 194 180
1) For thicknesses> 63 but < 100 nun the values specified for thickness range> 40:5 63 mm are lowered by 1 % for each 5 mm of thickness over
63 mm.
DEf NORSKE VERITAS
Kules tor January 1
Table B4 Carbon and carbon-manganese steels for boilers and pressure vessels, normalized or controlled roUed condition.
Yield stress, ReH or R
p
O,2,
Tensile
Nlmm2, minimum for thickness,
Ekmga-
KV, average
Grade
strength Rm
mm
lion AS'
Nlmm
2
>16 >40 >63
% minimwn Test
:516
:540 :563 :5100
temperature
J minimum J minimum
'c
NV 360-0N 360-480 205 195 185 175 26 'J 20 20 27
NV 360-1 FN 360-480 235 215 195
')
26 ')
0 20 27
NV 41O-0N 410-530 235 225 215 205 24 'J 20 20 27
NV 410-1 FN 410-530 265 245 235
') 24 I)
0 20 27
NV 460-0N 460-580 285 255 245 235
22 I)
20 20 27
NV 460-1 FN 460-580 295 285 275
2)
22 'J 0 20 27
NV 490-0N 490-610 305 275 265 255
21 1)
20 22 31
NY 490-1 FN 490-610 315 315 305
<J
21 0 22 31
NY 510-1 FN
510-650 j)
355 345 335 315 20 0 22 31
1) For thicknesses 40-63 mm, the minimum-value is 1 unit lower and for thicknesses 63-100 mm 2 units lower.
2) For thickness >63 mm but :5100 mm, the values specified for the thickness range >40 mm but :563 mm are lowered by i % for each 5 mm of
3) For thicknesses 63-100 mm: Rm 490-630.
Table B5 Alloy steels for boilers and pressure vessels. Mechanical properties
Tensile
Yield strength R,H or RpO.2 N I %m2
KV, average
strength
minimum for thickness, mm
Elongation
Grade
Rm
>16 >40
AS' Test
:51.6
% minimwn
Nlmm2 :540 :563
temperature
1 minimum I minimum
'c
NV 0,3 Mo 440-59 260 250 250
24
'
)
20 20 27
NV 1 Cr 0,5 Mo 470-62( 305 305 305 20 'J 20 22 31
NV 2,25 Cr 1 Mo 480-63( 275 265 265
18 1)
20 20 27
1) For thicknesses 40--63 mm, the minimum value is 1 unit lower and for thicknesses 63 100 mm, 2 units lower.
2) For thickness >63 mm but :5100 mm, the values specified for the thickness range >40 mm but :563 mm are lowered by I % for each 5 mm of
-- -- - ---- --
OET NORSKE VERITAS
-)
'J
.J
)

)

strength. It is not intended that these levels should neces-
sarily be regarded as specific grades. For intermediate v.al-
ues of specified minimum tensile strength, values fo{
minimum yield stress, elongation and reduction of area may
be found by interpolation. The minimum average value for
impact energy specified in the Table Fl is to be met for all
values of specified minimum tensile strength.
. 51
602 The requirements for tensile strength, yield stress, re-
duction of area, elongation and average impact energy for
Ni-alloy steel forgings and austenitic stainless steel forgings
are to comply with the specifications given for rolled steel
in Sec.2, Table C4 and 02.
603 For material thicknesses above 50 mm, the mechan-
ical properties are to be agreed.
Table Fl Carbon-manganese steel forgings for cargo tanks, pressure vessels and piping systems exposed to low temperatures.
Specified tensile strength, Yield stress, Elongation, Reduction of area, Average impact energy,
Rm ReB or RpO.2 As% Z% KV,]
minimwn
Nlmm2
minimum
Nlmm2
minimum minimum
minimum 1)
1
2
) t2)
410 240 24 50 41 27
460 270 22 45 41 27
490 300 20 45 41 27
1) Test temperature, see Table F2.
2) _I. denotes longitudinal test pieces.
_t. denotes transverse test pieces.
----
Table F2 Heat treatment, permissible design temperatures and impact test temperatures
Lowest permissible
Impact test temperature
Type of material Heat treatment
design temperature
'c
'C
Carbon-manganese
Normalized or normalized and tempered I) -55
5C below design temperature, or -20C
steel
whichever is the lower 2) -
1,5% Ni-steel -60
whichever is the lower
3,5 % Ni-steel
Normalized, normalized and tempered or
-90
and tempered whichever is the lower
5% Ni-steel -105
lOoC below design temperature, or
--
-110C whichever is the lower
9% Ni-steel
Double normalized and tempered or
-165 -196
quenched and tempered
Solution heat treated -165 -196
3
)
steel
1) Quenched and tempered steel may be accepted.
fOIl- uDo-in tanlcD;.-proDDuro .:V08Illli and -for .liquefied gas wilh,sif",sign .n..r:,.OT:-.higi1e:r.
the following apply: .
- Material thickness t = 20 mm, test temperature OC.
- Material thickness 20 < t :5 40 mm, test temperature -20C.
3) Impact testing required only for design temperatures below -105C.
_.-
OET NORSKE VERITAS
SECTION 6
BARS FOR CHAIN CABLES
Contents
A. General
A 100 Scopes
A 200 Steel grades
A 300 Chemical
A. 500 Heat treatment
B. Testing
C 100 Marking
A. General
A 100 Scopes
101 This Section specifies the requirements for steel in-
tended for chain cable links and accessories (shackles,
swivels etc.).
Table Al Material requirements for bars for chain cables
Grade NVK1
Deoxidation and fme-grain treatment Killed
Heat treatment Nonnalized 3)
Chemical Silicon % 0,15-0,35
composition
Phosphorus % Maximum 0,040
Sulphur % Maximum 0,040
Nitrogen
% 1)
Maximum 0,009
Mechanical Yield stress ReH or proof
properties stress RpO.2 N/mm2
stn:.ugth, Rm .
N/mm
2
Elongation (La = 5d) As % Minimum 25
Reduction of area, Z %
A 200 Steel grades
201 Three steel grades are specified:
NV Kl, NV K2, NV K3.
ply with the approved specification. For the steel grades
NVK 1, NVK 2 and NVK 3 the overall limits given in Table
Al apply.
401 The mechanical properties are to comply with the re-
quirements given in Table Ai.
501 The requirements for heat treatment given in Table
Al apply to fmished chain cable and accessories. Material
intended for such application may be delivered without the
heat treatment stipulated.
NVK2 NVK3
Killed, fine-grain treated Killed, fme-grain treated
with Al
Normalized Quenched and tempered,
normalized or normalized
and tempered 2)
0,15-0,55 0,15-0,55
Minimum 690
Minimum 40
Impact values (KV), as an Minimum 27; 20C Minimum 27; OC Minimum 60; OC
average of 3 tests, J
1) If Ai. or another strong nitride fonner is in sufficient quantity, a N-content of maximum 0,015% is accepted.
2) When chain cables are delivered as normalized, or normalized and tempered, the steel is to be fine-grain treated with AI. For such
material a maximum content of 0,015% N- is accepted.
3) Chain cables with diameters up to 50 mm may be supplied without heat treatment after welding, provided that the links are produced
by hot forming and that a test is carried out on one piece from each 27,5 m length.
B. Testing
101 One set of tests (1 tensile and 3 impact test pieces) is
to be taken for every 50 ton or fraction thereof of bar ma-
terial from the Same cast. The tests are to be taken from the
bar of the largest diameter.
Test material from bars is to be heat-treated in full diameter
and in a manner simulating the treatment applied to the fm-
ished cable.
201 The impact test pieces are to be cut as shown in Fig .1.
The tests are to satisfy the requirements stated in Table Ai.
C 100 Marking
101 The minimum markings required for the bars are the
manufacturer's brand mark, the steel grade and an abbrevi-
ated symbol of the cast.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
)
)
)
-\
j
()
J
]
)
elevated temperature in compliance with E300 is carried out
with satisfactory results.
The tensile test at elevated temperature may be dispensed
with if the steelmaker can demonstrate to the satisfaction of
the Society that the specified minimum mechanical proper-
ties at elevated temperature can be consistently obtained in
the running production.
303 Estimated average values for stress to rupture in 100
000 and 200 000 hours are given in Table B7 for design
purposes.
HUles TOr ;:,mps, .January 1:;':;'0
conditions stated in Table B8, except that materials which
are to be heat treated after hot or cold forming may be sup-
plied in the as rolled condition, subject to the customer's
consent. In such cases heat treatment and subsequent me-
chanical testing is to be carried out after forming.
402 The designation of controlled rolled- and thermo-me-
chanically treated steel grades are to be given the suffix CR
and TM respectively instead of N.
Table Bl Carbon and carbon-manganese steels for boilers and pressure vessels. Chemical composition
I
Grade
C
p
S N Residual
Deoxidation
maxi- Si Mn maxi- maxi-
Alae.soL
maxi- elements,
mwn mwn mwn mum maximum
NY 360-0A, -ON 0,17
0,40- Z)
0,035 0,030.
0,009 1)
6)
Semikilled
1,00 or killed I
NY 360-1 FN 0,17
0,40- Z)
0,035 0,030
0,Q15-
0,015
6)
Killed
NY 410-0A, -ON 0,20
0,50-
0,035 0,030
0,009 1)
6)
Semikilled
1,30 or killed
NY 410-1 FN 0,20
0,50-
0,035 0,030
0,015- s)
0,015
6)
Killed
NY 460-0A, -ON 0,20
0,60- JJ
0,035 0,030
0,009 1)
6)
Semikilled
1,40 or killed
NY 460-1 FN 0,20
4
)
0,60- J)
0,035 0,030
0,015- 0)
0,Q15
6)
Killed
1,40 0,080 fme grained
NY 49O-ON 0,20
4
)
0,10- 0,90-
0,035 0,030
0,009 1)
6)
Killed
0,50 1,60
NY 490-I FN 0,20
4
)
0,10- 0,90-
0,035 0,030
0,015-
0,015
6)
Killed
0,50 1,60 0,080 fine grained
NY 510-1 FN 0,22
0,10- 1,00-
0,035 0,030
0,015-
0,015
6)
Killed
0,60 1,60 0,080 fine grained
I) For electric furnace steel, maximum 0,012.
2) For thicknesses exceeding 40 mm, Mn = 0,40--1,20%.
3) Jfelevated temperature properties of Table B7 are specified, Mn content is to be 0,80-1,40%.
4) For thicknesses >30 mm and :::;100 mm, emu 0,22%.
5) Aluminium may be replaced by other grain refining elements.
6) Cr 0,20
Cu 0,35
Ni 0,40
. Mu 0;00 -
Total 0,70
Table B2 Alloy steels for boilers and pressure vessels. Chemical composition
Grade p
S Altot
Residual
C Si Mn Cr Mo elements,
maximum maximum maximwn
maximum
NV 0,3 Mo
0,12- 0,15- 0,50-
0,035 0,030 0,012 <0,30
0,25-
0,20 0,35 0,80 0,35
NY 1 Cr 0,5 Mo
0,10- 0,15- 0,40-
0,Q35 0,030 0,020
0,70- 0,40- Cu 0,25
0,18 0,35 0,80 1,30 0,60 Ni 0,30
NY 2,25 Cr 1 Mo
0,08- 0,15- 0,40-
0,035 0,030 0,020
.2,00- 0,90-
0,18 0,50 0,80 2,50 1,10
Table B3 Carbon and carbon-manganese steels for boilers and pressure vessels, as rolled condition. Mechanical properties
Yield stress, ReH or RpO.2
Tensile
Nlmm2 minimum/or thickness,
Elongation
KV, average
Grade
strength Rm
mm
A5.
Nlmm
2
>16
% mmunum Test
temperature

"C
J minimwn J minimwn
NY 360-0A 360-480 205 195 26 20 20 27
NY 41O-0A 410-530 235 225 24 20 20 27
NY 460-0A 460-580 285 255 22 20 20 27
DET NORSKE VERIT AS
Hules tor :snips, January -I ::t::tb
SECTION 2
ROLLED STEEL FOR BOILERS, PR,ESSURE VESSELS AND SPECIAL APPLI-
CATIONS
Contents
A. General
A 100 Scope
B 100 Steel grades
C 100 Steel grades
D. Stainless Steel
D 100 Steel grades
E. Testing
E 100 General
F. Inspection, Dimensional Tolerances and Surface Condition
F 100 Inspection
F 200 Tolerances
A. General
A 100 Scope
101 This section specifies the requirements for rolled steel
intended for use in the construction of boilers and pressure
vessels and of tanks and process equipment for low temper-
ature service. Mechanical properties at elevated temper-
atures for design purposes are stated. The rules also apply
to rolled austenitic and ferritic-austenitic (duplex) stainless
steel.
201 The steel is to be manufactured by an electric or one
cast shib to plate is to be minimum 5 to 1 unless otherwise
B 100 Steel grades
101 Requirements regarding carbon and carbon- manga-
nese steels are specified for the as rolled condition in thick-
nesses up to 25 mm and for the normalized condition in
thicknesses up to 100 mm. Requirements are also given for
alloy steels in thicknesses up to 100 mm.
As alternatives to the steel grades specified below, materials
complying with relevant standards may be accepted, subject
to approval in each case.
102 The designations for carbon and carbon-manganese
steel grades are built up as follows:
The letters NV are followed by three figures which stand for
the specified minimum tensile strength in N/mm
2
.
Further, there is a single figure referring to the impact test
temperature:
The figures 0,1 and 2 mean impact testing at + 20, O and
-20C respectively.
The suffix letters are symbolizing the heat treatment and
deoxidation practice. The suffix A means as rolled, N means ')
normalized, QT means quenched and tempered and F means .
fine grain treated steels.
Where controlled rolling is used as a substitute for normal-
izing, the suffix CR is to be used instead of N.
Example: J
NV 360-lFN means a steel grade with specified minimum
tensile strength 360 N/mm
2
impact tested at OC, fine grain
treated and normalized.
201 The chemical composition is to' satisfy the require-
ments specified in Table B 1 for carbon and carbon- manga-
nese steels and in Table B2 for alloy steels.
including grain refining elements are to be determined and
surveyor.
'- Nb;miriu,u2 %
- V, min 0,05 %.
C
=C+ Mn Cr+Mo+V + Ni+Cu ("')
eq 6 + 5 15 70
Table B3: Carbon and carbon-manganese steels, as rolled
Table B4: Carbon and carbon-manganese steels, normalized
or controlled rolled
Table B5: Alloy steels
specified in the tables refer to testing at room temperature.
302 Values for lower yield stress or 0,2 % proof stress at
elevated temperatures are given in Table B6. The values are
intended for design purposes and verification is not required.
If the material is produced in compliance with a recognized
standard where !lie lower yield stress or 0,2 % proof stress
at elevated temperatures is higher than stated in Table B6,
these higher values will be accepted provided tensile test at
:)
.J
DEI NORSKE VERITAS
11U' ... .,IUl . . ; J 1 1 l ~ . uOIlUClly I"'.;.IV
Pt.2 Ch.2 Sec.6. - Page 53
Bars having diameter of up to and including 40 mm com- APPROX 1/3
bined into bundles, may be marked on permanently affixed r
NOTCH
labels.
Fig. 1
Position of impact test piece
.'.:]
:]
'.J
.J
DEI NORSKE VERITAS
SECTION 7
STEEL CASTINGS
Contents
A. General
A 100 Scope
A 200 Manufacture
C. Castings for Boilers, Unfired Pressure Vessels and Piping
Systems
E. Castings for Chain Cable Links, Accessories and Anchor
Shackles
F. Castings for Structural Members with Higher Toughness
Requirements
H. Heat Treatment
H 100 General
-11:- 200 IItAt litalmcnl tlf-carbmr'iiml CD.Jbvll'-'miiligancsc-st;:.d-
H 300 Heat treatment of low alloy steel.
I. Testing
I 100 Test samples
I 300 Tensile testing at elevated temperature
K 100 General
A. General
A 100 Scope
101 This Section specifies the requirements for steel cast-
ings. The relevant parts of Section 1 are also applicable.
A 200 Manufacture
201 Castings are to be made at foundries approved by the
Society. The steel used is to be manufactured in accordance
with the requirements of Sec.l A300.
202 All flame cutting, scarfmg or arc-air gouging to re-
move surplus metal is to be undertaken in accordance with
recognized good practice and is to be carried out before the
final heat treatment. Preheating is to be employed where
necessitated by the chemical composition andlor thickness
of the casting. The affected areas are to be either machined
or ground smooth.
203 Where castings of the same type are produced in reg-
ular quantities, the manufacturer is to make any tests neces-
sary to prove the quality of the prototype castings, and is
also to make periodical examinations to verify the continued
efficiency of the manufacturing technique. The surveyor is
to be given the opportunity to wituess these tests.
204 Where two or more castings are joined by welding to
form a composite item, details of the proposed welding
procedure are to be submitted for approval. Welding ap-
proval procedure tests may be required.
301 All castings are to be free from surface or internal
defects which would be prejudicial to their proper applica-
tion in service. The surface fmish is to be in accordance with
good practice and any specific requirements of the approved
plan.
302 The surfaces are not to be hammered, peened nor
treated in any way which may obscure defects.
401 All castings are to be made from killed steel. The
chemical composition of the ladle sample is to be within the
limits given in the relevant Section of this Chapter. Where
general overall limits are specified, the chemical composi-
tion is to be appropriate for the type of steel, dimensions and
required ffiecliiini6iiproperties "fiJi" castings: .. .
402 Except where otherwise specified, suitable grain re-
fining elements may be used at the discretion of the man-
ufacturer. The content of such elements is to be reported in
the ladle analysis.
101 The requirements given in B apply to carbon and
carbon-manganese steel for castings intended for use in
vessel structures and machinery construction where design
and acceptance tests are related to mechanical properties at
ambient temperature and which are not covered by require-
ments given elsewhere in this Section.
be complied with.
102 The use of alloy steel castings in vessel structures and
machinery construction will be subject to consideration in
each case. Where the use of alloy steel is proposed, detailed
specifications are to be submitted for examination and ap-
proval.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
)
(-)
/""""'
) ,J
)
/.J
)
i)
responsibility of the manufacturer who has to verify that the
filled prior to despatch. The manufacturer is also responsible
Acceptance by the Society of material which later is found
to be defective is not to absolve the manufacturer from this
responsibility.
502 Plates and other products of extra high strength steel
are to be subjected to a thorougi), visual inspection of both
sides by the manufacturer to ensure freedom from defects
and harmful imperfections. Examination by means of suit-
able non-destructive methods such as magnetic particle
andlor ultrasonic examination may be required.
503 The maximum permissible under thickness tolerance
for hull structural plates, wide flats and welded profiles is
-0.3mm.
The permissible under thickness tolerance for hull structural
rolled profiles is to be in accordance with the requirements
of a recognized international or national standard.
The under thickness tolerance acceptable for classification
is to be considered as the lower limit of a plus-minus range
of thickness tolerance which could be found in the normal
production of a conventional rolling mill manufacturing
material, on average, to the nominal-thickness.
The shipbuilder and shipowner may mutually agree in indi-
vidual cases whether, for commercial reasons, they wish to
s"ecify a more stringent under thickness tolerance than
gIven.
The thickness is to be measured at random locations whose
distance from a longitudinal edge is to be at least 10 mm.
Local surface depressions resulting from imperfections and
ground areas resulting from the eliminations of defects may
be disregarded provided the imperfections or grinding are
in accordance with accepted national or international stand-
ards. .
Hules tor ::snips, .January I f ~ O
504 For seamless structural tubes the tolerances for outer
diameter, wall thickness and out-of roundness are to be de-
fined and agreed upon prior to starting the production.
F. Repairs
F 100 . Surface defects
101 Surface defects in structural steel may be removed by
local grinding, provided that:
- the thickness is in no place reduced to less than 93 % of
the nominal thickness, but in no case by more than 3 mm
- each single ground area does not exceed 0,25m and
- all ground areas do not exceed 2 % of the total surface in
question.
Ground areas lying in a distance less than their average
breadth to each other are to be regarded as one single area.
The repairs are to be agreed with the surveyor in each case,
andare to be carried out under the surveyor's supervision
102 Surface defects which cannot be dealt with as above
may, subject to the surveyor's consent, be repaired by
chipping or grinding followed by welding under his super-
vision, provided the requirements given below are complied
with.
- after removal of the defect, and before welding, the
thickness of the piece is in no place to be reduced by
more than 20 %. The welding is to be carried out ac-
cording to an approved procedure with approved elec-
trodes. The weld is to be ground smooth to the correct
nominal thickness
- the weld repair is to be subjected to adequate non-des-
tructive examination
- the piece is normally to be subjected to adequate heat
treatment subsequent to the fmal grinding. In general the
heat treatment is to be the same as prescribed for the steel
grade in question.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
Page 10 - Pt.2 Ch.2 Sec. 1
206 The procedures used for all tensile tests are to be in
accordance with the requirements of Ch.1.
301 The impact test pieces are to be of the Charpy V -notch
type cut with their longitudinal axes either parallel or trans-
verse to the final direction of rolling of the material. Gen-
erally only longitudinal test pieces need be prepared and
tested, except for extra high strength steel plates and wide
flats over 600 mm where the pieces are to be taken with their
axes transverse to the main rolling direction. The steel works
is, however, to guarantee that the impact values in both di-
rections satisfy the requirements of this section.
The notch is to be cut in a face of the test pieces which was
originally perpendicular to ,the rolled surface. The position
of the notch is not to be nearer than 25 mm to a flame cut
or sheared edge.
by the Society, the maximum size of a test unit is to be as
specified in Table El. One set of three test pieces is to be
taken from one of the thickest products of each specified test
unit or part thereof.
303 For thicknesses equal to or below 50mm, the impact
test pieces are to be taken not less than 2mm below the sur-
. face. For plate thicknesses exceeding 50 mm, impact test
pieces are to be situated so that the distance between the
centre-line of the test piece and the plate surface is not less
than 1/4 of the plate thickness.
Table EI Extent of impact testing at delivery
304 Where it is impossible to use a standard impact test
piece of 10xi0 mm, the larger of the following pieces is to
be used: IOx7,5 mm or IOx5 mm. The impact values are
then reduced to respectively 5/6 and 2/3 of the required va-
lues of the standard test piece.
305 The average energy value from each set of three im-
pact tests and the single values are to comply with the ap-
propriate requirements of tables B3, C4 and D3
respectively. Further, only one individual value within each
set may be below the specified minimum average value, but
not lower than 70% of this value.
306 The procedures used for all impact tests are to be in
accordance with the requirements of Ch.l.
401 Steel specified with improved through thickness pro-
perties (Z-steel) is to be tested by tensile pieces taken in the
thickness direction of the product. The test sampling is to
be performed as follows:
Plates: One set of three pieces is to be taken from one
end of each rolled length.
Wide flats: Products of the same cast, thickness and heat
treatment are to be divided into test units of 10
t, or. where their thickness exceeds 25mm, of
20 t. From one sample product of each test unit
at least one set of test pieces is to be taken.
Thickness I t
Test unit
Strength range Grades
maximum
mm
Plate Sectionr
1:550 Not required
A
50<1<150 501
Not required
1:525 Not required
NS-steel
B
50<1<150
Not
501 2) 50(
2
)
D 1:5150
50 1 I) 2) 50(
2
)
E 1:5150 Each piece
25(
3
)
A 1:5150
Max. 50 I) 2) 50(
2
)
-
. D ... .. .... . . 1.o:15Q ..... ' .. M" 'ill t I) '-I 5QI
Z
)
.
HS-steel
Each piece
25(
3
)
E 1<150
F 1:5150 Each piece
25(
3
)
D 1<150 Each piece Each piece
EHS-steel E 1:5150 Each piece Each piece
F 1:5150 Each piece Each piece
1) When steel plates over 50 mm in thickness is supplied in the controlled rolled (CR) condition, the frequency of impact test is to be made for each
batch of 25 tonnes or fraction thereof. .
2) When, subject to special approval of the Society, material is supplied in the as rolled CAR) condition, the frequency of impact tests is to be increased
to one set from each batch of 25 toones or fraction thereof. Similarly grade A steel over 50 mm in thickness may be supplied in the as rolled condi-
tion. In such case one set of three Charpy V -notch test specimens is to be taken from each batch of 50 tonnes or fraction thereof.
3) When subject to special approval by the Society, sections other than grades E40 and F40 are supplied in the as rolled condition, one set of impact tests
is to be taken from each batch of 15 tonnes or fraction thereof.
402 When not otherwise agreed, the minimum average
reduction of area of each set of three specimens is to be at
least 25 %. Only one individual value within each set may
be below 25 % but not less than 20 %.
403 When a set of tests fails to meet the requirements in
402 three additional test pieces may be taken from the same
test sample for retesting and evaluated together with the
previous test results as one set of six test pieces. The average
reduction of area is not to be less than 25 %. Totally, two
individual values may be less than 25 % but only one value
may be less than 20 %.
404 Z-steel is to be subjected to ultrasonic examination
according to an appropriate standard, with established crite-
ria accepted by the Society ..
405 Steel processed to obtain improved through thickness
properties and complying with the requirements given in
402, 403 and 404 are to be marked with the suffIx Z in ad-
dition to the material grade designation, e.g. NVD Z, NVE
36 Z.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
:J o
:J :J

o
201 For carbon and carbon-manganese steel castings
which are intended for parts of a welded structure or fabri-
cation, the carbon content is normally not to exceed 0,23 %.
For carbon and carbon-manganese steel castings intended
for use in machinery construction without any welding the
carbon content is normally not to exceed 0,40%. In other
respects the chemical composition is to comply with the
following overall limits:
Silicon
Manganese.
Sulphur
Phosphorus
0,60% maximum
0,50-1,60%
0,040% maximum
0,040% maximum
202 Carbon and carbon-manganese steel may be fme grain
In that case the content of AI (acid soluble) is not to exceed
5
(% Alacidsoluble'% N) 10 ,.; 60
Other grain refining elements than aluminium may be agreed
upon.
203 The content of grain refining elements is to be re-
ported in the ladle analysis.
Pt.2 Ch.2 Sei:. 7 Page 55
Determination of the N-content may be required.
301 Table B I gives the requirements for mechanical pro-
perties of carbon and carbon-manganese steel for general
application. Specifications are given for two quality levels,
normal quality and special quality, and the castings are to
be supplied to the quality level required in the relevant rules
for design and construction or otherwise specified.
302 Table B I gives the minimum requirements for yield
stress, elongation. reduction of area and impact test energy
values corresponding to different strength levels. It is not
intended that these should necessarily be regarded as specific
grades. The strength levels have' been given in multiples of
40 N/mm
2
to facilitate interpolation for intermediate values
of specified minimum tensile strength.
303 Castings which are intended for parts of a welded
structure or fabrications are to be supplied to specified min-
imum tensile strength not exceeding 520 N/mm
2
.
Castings not intended for welding'may normally be supplied
to any specified minimum tensile strength selected within the
general limits in Table Bl.
In any case however, the specified minimum tensile strength
for the casting is subject to additional requirements of the
relevant rules for design and construction and other relevant
requirements, if any.
Table HI Carbon and carbon-manganese steel castings for general application.
Mechanical at room temperature
Quality Specified 1) minimum Yield stress Elongation Reduction of Charpy V-notch
level tensile strength Rm
Reh
16
area Z average energy
% KV
Nlmm2
Nlmm
2
minimwn minimum J minimum 2)
minimum
400 200 25 40
440 220 22 30
Normal 480 240 20 27
quality 520 260 18 25
560 300 15 20
600 320 13 20
400 200 28 45 32
440 220 26 45 28
.
'specIal 4HIi
240 .
.
<\0' 26
, .. , .
quality 520 260 22 40 20
560 300 20 35 18
600 320 18 35 15
1) For intermediate values of specified minimum tensile strength, the minimum values for yield stress, elongation, reduction of area and
impact energy may be obtained by interpolation.
2) For cast sternframes, rudder horns and rudder members the impact test temperature is to be OC.
C. Castings for Boilers, Unfired Pressure Ves-
sels and Piping Systems
101 The requirements given in C apply to carbon and
carbon-manganese steel as well as alloy steel intended for
use in boilers, unfired pressure vessels and piping systems.
be complied with.
201 For carbon and carbon-manganese steel castings the
following specifications:
C 0,24% maximum
Si 0,30-0,60%
Mn 1,60% maximum
P 0,040% maximum
S 0,040% maximum
202 Carbon and carbon -manganese steel may be fine grain
In that case the content of Al (acid soluble) is not to exceed
5
(% Al
acid
soluble' % N) 10 ,.; 60
Other grain refming elements than aluminium may be agreed
upon.
The content of grain refming elements is to be stated in the
certificate. Determination of N-content may be required.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
203 Types of alloy steel acceptable for castings intended
for use in boilers, pressure vessels and piping systems are
listed in Table C 1.
The chemical compositions stated in the table are typical for
.cast steel of these types.
When it is proposed to use steel grades of the types listed in
Table Cl the complete chemical composition is to comply
with a relevant, recognized standard.
Table Cl Types of alloy steel.
Typical chemical composition
Type of steel
Typical composition, %
C Cr Mo V
0,5 Me 0,1510,23 <0,30 0,35/0,65
lCr 0,5 Me 0,1510,20 1,0/1,5 0,45/0,65
2,5Cr 1 Me 0,1510,20 2,012,75 0,9/1,2
CrMeV 0,15/0,20 1,2/1,5 0,9/1,1 0,20/0,30
301 Carbon and carbon-manganese steel castings are to be
supplied to specified minimum tensile strength not lower
than 400 N/mm
2
and not exceeding 520 N/mm
2
Mechanical properties at room temperature are to comply
with the requirements given in Table B 1 for .Special
Quality>.
302 Alloy steel castings are to be supplied to mechanical
properties at room temperature in compliance with specifi-
cations given in the standard referred to.
303 When the casting is intended for use at elevated tem-
perature, the mechanical properties for design purposes are
to be submitted for consideration.
Where the 0,2 % proof stress at elevated temperature is the
limiting design criterion, the design value is to be verified
by a tensile test at design temperature according to 1300.
101 Propeller and propeller blade castings may be pro-
duced from carbon or carbon-manganese steel, low alloy
steel or stainless steel.
102 For carbon and carbon-manganese steel the carbon
content is to be maximum 0,23 %. In other respects the re-
quirements given in B200 for .castings for general
applications> apply.
103 For low alloy steels and stainless steels particulars of
chemical composition are to be submitted to the Society for
approval.
Guidance note:
Examples of typical chemical compositions of low alloy steel and
stainless steels are given in .Classification Notes No. 4.2.
--e-n-d---o-f--G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e-n-o-t-e-
201 Test coupons for mechanical tests are to be cast on the
hub or the flange of the propeller or the blade casting, re-
spectively.
202 Mechanical properties of carbon and carbon- manga-
nese steel are to comply with the requirements given in Ta-
ble Bl for .Special Quality>. Castings for ships with ICE
class notation, except ICE C, are to be impact tested as fol-
lows:
A set of three Charpy V-notch tests are to be made on ma-
terial from each casting. The testing is to be performed at
_10C and the average energy value is to be not less than
20 J.
203 Low alloy and stainless steel castings are to meet the
requirements for mechanical properties given in Table D 1.
Table Dl Low alloy steel and stainless steel for propellers. Mechanical properties
Type of steel Tensile strength Yield stress Elongation Reduction of Impact energy
Rm

areaZ KV
Nlmm2 %
..
minimum
Jlii';'m
2
minimulli minimum' J miuimulll -
minimum
Low alloy steel 540 345 20 45
20 1)
590 390 18 40
20
2
)
735 590 15 45
20 1)
stainless steel 13/4-6
786 590 15 45
20 1)
I
Austenitic/ferritic
590 370 18 35
20 1)
440 175 35 50 -
steel 18/8
1) Castings for ships for general service and ships with additional class notations ICE C are to be impact tested at room temperature
(18C to 25C).
2) Castings for ships for general service and ships with additional class notations ICE C are to be impact tested at OC.
E. Castings for Chain Cable Links, Accessories
and Anchor Shackles
101 Types of steel and manufacturing methods for cast
chain cable links are subject to special approval by the So-
ciety.
Tests to demonstrate the soundness and the properties of the
castings will be required.
102 Mechanical properties including impact toughness are
to comply with the requirements given for rolled bars of
corresponding steel grades according to Sec.6.
DEY NORSKE VERITAS
(a) Plates and flats
C)
/J
'-
'::J
(b) Angles

(e) UneqUl11 angles

8
I !
\ I%!fW
... I t
1
"4
'J
'8
-IJi
,
(d) Channels and beaDlll
1
"3
(e) Bulb flats
radius-l-I
(I) Bars
Fig. 1
Position of test specimen
201 The dimensions of the tensile test pieces are to be in
accordance with Ch.l Sec.2. Generally for plates, wide flats
and sections flat test pieces of full product thickness are to
be used. Round test pieces may be used for bars and other
similar products. Alternatively for small sizes of bars, etc.
test pieces may consist of a suitable length of the full cross
section of the product.
202 For each test unit presented one tensile test is to be
made from one sample product unless the weight of fmished
material is greater than 50 tonnes in which case one extra
test is to be made from a different sample product from each
50 tonnes or fraction thereof. Additional tests are to be
made for every variation of 10 mm in the thickness or di-
ameter of products from the same test unit. For sections, the
thickness to be considered is the thickness of the product at
the point at which samples are taken for mechanical tests.
203 For extra high strength steels each tensile test is only
to represent material from the same heat treatment batch.
204 When no distinct yield is observed during tensile test-
ing, the stress at 0,2 % non-proportional elongation is to be
determined .
DEY NORSKE VERITAS
Table'D3 Mechanical properties for Extra High Strength (EHS) steel
Steel grad Yield stress Tensile strength Elongation Test temperature Average impact energy
R 1)
Rm . AS
(OC)
J minimwn
.ef!
(Nlmm
2
) mlnlmton mlmmum
1:5.150
(Nlmm2)
(%)
Longitudinal Transverse
NY A420 0
NYD420
420 530 - 680 18
-20
42 28
NY E420 -40
NY F420 -60
NY A460 0
NY D460
460 570 - 720 17
-20
46 31
NV E460 -40
NV F460 -60
NV ASOO 0
NV D500
500 610 - 770. 16
-20
50 33
NV E500 -40
NY F500 -60
NY AS50 0
NY D550
550 670 - 830 16
-20
55 37
NY E550 -40
NV F550 -60
NY A620 0
NV D620
620 720 - 890 15
-20
62 41
NV E620 -40
,
NV F620 -60
NV A690 0
NV D690
690 770 - 940 14
-20
69 46
NV E690 -40
NV F690 -60 I
1) Where the yield stress does not mark in the tensile test the 0,2% proof stress RpO.2 is applicable.
values:
Thickness. mm 1 <10 10<1<15 15 <I <20
Elongation
A420, D420, E420 & F420 11 13 14
A460, D460, E460 & F460 11 12 13
ASOO, D599, E500 & F500 10 11 12
AS50, D550, E550 & F550 10 11. 12
A620, D620, E620 & F620 9 11 12
A690, D690, E690 & F690 9 10 11
E. Testing
E 100 Test material
101 All material in a test unit presented for acceptance
tests is to be of the same product form e.g. plates, flats,
sections, etc. from the same cast and in the same condition
of supply.
The test samples are to be fully representative of the material
and, where appropriate, are not to be cut from the material
until heat treatment has been completed.
The test pieces are not to be separately heat treated in any
way.
102 Unless otherwise agreed, the test samples for tensile
and impact test pieces are to be taken from the following
positions:
- Plates and flats with a width <! 600 mm:
tion approximately midway between the axis in the di-
rection of rolling and the edge of the rolled product (see
Fig.la). Unless otherwise agreed the tensile test pieces
are to be prepared with their longitudinal axes transverse
to the fmal direction of rolling.
- Flats with a width < 600 mm, bulb flats and other sec-
tions:
20<1 <25 25 <I <40 40<1 <50 50<1 <150
15 16 17 18
14 15 16 17
13 14 15 16
I
13 14 15 16
12 13 14 15
11 12 13 14
tion approximately one third. from the outer edge (see
ie) or in 'the ease of small sections;
as near as possible to this position. In the case of chan-
nels, beams or bulb angles, the test samples may alter-
natively be taken from a position approximately one
quarter of the width from the web centre line or axis (see
Fig. Id). The tensile test pieces may be prepared with
their longitudinal axes either parallel or transverse to the
fmal direction of rolling.
For small sizes, the tensile test pieces may consist of a
suitable length of the full cross-section of the product.
- Bars and other similar products:
The test samples are to be taken so that the longitudinal
axes of the test pieces are parallel to the direction of
rolling and are as near as possible to the following:
- for non-cylindrical sections, at one third of the half
. diagonal from the outside (see Fig. Ie),
- for cylindrical sections, at one third of the radius from
the outside (see Fig. It).
103 Samples for testing of through thickness properties are
to be agreed upon by the Society.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
)
:J
J
'-
:)
J

201 The chemical composition of steel for cast accessories
and anchor shackle bodies are to comply with relevant parts
ofB.
202 Mechanical properties including impact toughness
properties for cast chain cable accessories are to comply
with the requirements given for the chain cable for which
they are intended.
203 Mechanical properties for cast anchor shackles are to
comply with the relevant requirements given in B, .Special
Quality., except that impact toughness properties are to
comply with the requirements given for chain cable materi-
als of corresponding strength level.
204 Chain cable accessories are to be subjected to break-
ing test according to Pt.3 Ch.3 Sec.3.
F. Castings for Structural Members with
Higher Toughness Requirements
101 Structural members for which higher toughness prop-
erties are required may be produced from carbon-manganese
steel or alloy steel.
201 Chemical composition of the material is to be in ac-
cordance with the specification approved for the type of
components in question.
202 For carbon-manganese steel the chemical composition
is to comply with the following overall limits:
Carbon 0,24% maximum
Silicon 0,60% maximum
Manganese 1,60% maximum
Sulphur 0,035% maximum
Phosphorus 0,035% maximum
Residual elements:
Copper 0,30% maximum
Chromium 0,25% maximum
Nickel 0,40% maximum
Molybdenum 0,15% maximum'
The total content of the residual elements mentioned above
is not to exceed O,SO%.
For castings intended for welding the carbon content is
normally not to exceed O,IS%.
A maximum carbon equivalent may be required using the
following formula:
C =C+ Mn + Cr+Mo+V + Ni+Cu (%)
eq 6 5 15'
203 For alloy steel the composition is to be appropriate for
the type of steel, dimensions and the requirements on me-
chanical and toughness properties of the castings.
204 Carbon-manganese steel and normally also low alloy
steel is to be fine grain treated with aluminium, niobium,
vanadium or other suitable grain rerming elements, either
singly or in any combination. When used singly the content
of AI, Nb or V is normally to be within the following limits:
AI, acid soluble
Nb
0,015-0,OS %
0,02-0,05%

Page 57
V 0,05-0,10%
maximum content of each element is not applicable.
When aluminium is' used singly as grain refining element,
the product of aluminium and nitrogen is to be in compliance
with the following formula:
5
(% Al
acid
soluble' % N) 10 :-; 60
The content of grain refming elements and N is to be stated
in the certificate.
301 Mechanical properties are to comply with the specifi-
cation approved for the material and are to meet the re-
quirements given for the component in question.
302 For carbon-manganese steel with minimum specified
yield stress not exceeding 320 N/mm2, elongation and re-
duction of area are to comply with the requirements given
in Table Fl.
Table Fl Requirements to mechanical properties
Specified minimum 1) Elongation Reduction of
yield stress
AS
area Z
2
% minimum % minimum
Reh or N/mm
220 26 45
240 24 40
260 22 40
300 20 35
320 18 35
1) For intermediate values of specified minimum yield stress the
values for elongation and reduction of area are found by in-
terpolation.
303 For alloy steel the minimum specified yield stress is
not to exceed 690 N/mm
2
.
tYll.lll.mulfi'-ilnpaet-energy is"te--be in aocordanoo .with-
Table F2 for the specified minimum yield stress in question.
Requirements on test temperature will be given in each sep-
arate case dependent all design temperature, application ca-
tegory and yield stress and thickness of the materials.
Generally the impact toughness is to be the same as required
for rolled materials for similar application.
For structural members not intended for welding and mem-
bers subjected to compressive andlor low tensile stresses,
modified requirements may be considered.
Table F2 Requirements to minimum impact energy
Minimum yield stress A verage Impact -energy
Reh
KV minimum 1)
J
Nlmm
2
<270 27
>270
31
<310
>310
34
<350
>350 40
value but not less than 70% of this average value.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
Kules tor January HHH;
305 Additional toughness tests such as drop-weight test for
the determination of NDT (Nil Ductility Temperature) and
COD (Crack Openiug Displacement) test may be required
where found appropriate by the Society.
101 Castings iutended for use iu liquefied gas systems may
be produced from carbon-manganese steel, ferritic Ni-alloy
steels or austenitic, staiuless steel. Other steel types may
be accepted upon consideration iu each case. Lowest per-
missible design temperatures for carbon- manganese steel
and 3,5 % Ni-steel as well as austenitic stainless steel are
given iu Table G 1.
201 Carbon-manganese steel castings iutended for weldiug
C 0,18% maximum
Si 0,10-0,50 %
Mn 0,70-1,60%
S 0,035% maximum
P 0,035 % maximum
Ni 0,30% maximum
Cr 0,25% maximum
Mo 0,08% maximum
Cu 0,35% maximum
Ni-content up to 0,80% may be approved.
202 The steel is to be fiue graiu treated. The requirements
given iu F204 apply. For carbon-manganese steel not iu-
tended for welding, the carbon content is to be maximum
0,25%.
For alloy steels specification of the chemical composition is
to be submitted for approval.
301 For carbon-manganese steels the values for yield
stress, elongation and reduction of area are to meet the re-
quirements given in Table HI, .Special Quality., corre-
sponding to the specified minimum tensile strength iu
question.
For alloy steels the values for tensile strength, yield stress,
elongation and reduction of area are to comply with ap-
302 Charpy V -notch impact test (KV) is to be carried out
for all castings. For carbon-manganese steel the average
energy value from three tests is not to be lower than 27 J.
One siugle test may be accepted with a value below the re-
quired average, but not lower than 18 J. For 3,5% Ni-steel
the correspondiug values are 34 J and 23 J and for austenitic
staiuless steel 41 J and 27 J, respectively.
Impact tests are to be carried out at the temperatures speci-
fied iu Table G 1.
Table Gl Steel castings for liquefied gas systems
Type of steel Lowest per- Impact test
missible design temperature
temperature C
C
SoC below design
C-Mn steel -55
temperature, but
not higher than
-20.C 2)
lOoe below design
3,5% Ni-sleel -90
temperature or
-95e, whichever
is the lower ,
Austenitic
-196 -196 1)
stainless steel
1) Impact testing is only required for design temperatures below
-105C.
2) For design temperature ooe and above the following apply:
- Material thickness:
t:520 mJ;l1, test temperature ooe.
t>20 mm, test temperature -2o
o
e.
H. Heat Treatment
H 100 General
101 Heat treatment is to be iu accordance with 200 to 400
and is to comply with the procedure approved for the type
of casting in question.
102 Heat treatment is to be carried out iu properly con-
structed fumaces which are efficiently maiutaiued and have
adequate means for control and recording of temperatures.
The furnace dimensions are to be such as to allow the whole
castiug to be uniformly heated to the necessary temperature
and uniformly cooled. For very large castiugs alternative
methods for heat treatment may be specially considered by
the Society.
103 If a castiug is locally reheated or any straighteniug
.. .. a.J'!.Ib,
sequent stress relieving heat treatment may be required in
order to avoid the possibility of harrnful residual stresses.
H 200 Heat treatment of carbon and
carbon-manganese steel
201 Castiugs are to be supplied in one of the followiug
conditions:
- annealed
- normalized
- normalized and tempered
- quenched and tempered
The tempering temperature is to be not less than 550C.
H 300 Heat treatment of low alloy steel
301 Low alloy steel castiugs are normally to be supplied
iu the quenched and tempered condition.
401 Martensitic/ferritic and martensitic/austenitic stainless
steel castings are to be supplied iu the quenched and tem-
pered condition.
402 Austenitic/ferritic and austenitic stainless steel castings
are to be supplied iu the solution annealed and quenched
condition.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
/)
n
)

'\
. ..../

.J

Table Dl Chemical composition and deoxidation practice for Extra High Strength (EHS) steel
Grade
NY A420 NY A460 NY ASOO NY ASSO NY A620 NY A690
NY D420 NV D460 NY DSOO NY DSSO NY D620 NV D690
NV E420 NY E460 NY ESOO NY ESSO NV E620 NV E690
NY F420 NY F460 NY FSOO NV FSSO NY F620 NY F690
Deoxidation Killed and fine grain treated
A grades: D and E grades: F grades:
C maximum (%) 0,21 0,20 0,18
Si (%) 0,10 - 0,55 0,10 - 0,55 0,10 - 0,55
Mn maximum (%) 1,7 1,7 1,6
P maximum (%) 0,035 0,030 0,025
Chemical S maximum (%) 0,035 0;030 0,025
composition B maximum (%) 0,005 0,005 0,005
(ladle analysis) 1) N maximum (%) 0,020 0,020 0,020
Al ac.sol. (%) 0,015 - 0,08 2) 0,015 - 0,08 2) 0,015 - 0,08 2)
AI lotal(%) 0020-0085
2
) 0,020 - 0,085 2) 0,020 - 0,085 2)
Nb (%) 0,02 - 0:05 2) 002-005
2
) 0,02 - 0,05 2)
V (%) 0,04 - 0,10 2)
2)
0,04 - 0,10 2) 0,04.- 0,10
Ti maximum (%) 0,02 0,02 0,02
1) The limits given in the table are regarded as over-all limits. The chemical composition is to comply with the approved specification of the steel grade
in question.
Table D2 Condition of supply for Extra High Strength (EHS) steel
Grade Grain Thickness, t Condition of supply 1) 2)
refining elements mm
NY A420, NY A460,
NY ASOO, NY ASSO, Any 1';150 N, QT, TM
NY A620, NY A690
NY D420, NY D460,
NY DSOO, NY DSSO, Any 1';150 N, QT, TM
NY D620, NY D690
NY E420, NY E460,
NY E500, NV ESSO, Any 1';150 N, QT, TM
NY E620, NY E690
NY F420, NY F460,
NY FSOO, NY FSSO, Any 1';150 N, QT, TM
NY F620, NY F690
1) Condition of supply: N, Normalized.
-" .. , ..
... .. , .. , .. ..
TM: Therm0:Fechanically controlled processed (fMCP)
2) For specified yield stress above 550 N/mm only quenching and tempering is applicable.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
Table C4 Mechanical properties for High Strength (HS) steel
Grade Yield Tensile Elonga- Tes! lem-
stress strength lion perature
Average impact energy, J minimum
1 <50 50<1 <70 70<1 <150
ReS Rm
AS
Longitudi- Transverse Longitudi- Transverse Longitudi- Transverse
(N/mm
2
) mznl- minimum
(OC) nal nal nal
mum
(N/mm
2
)
(%)
NV A27S 0
NV D27S 265 400-530
22
1
)
-20
27
2
)
20 34 24 41 27
NV E27S -40
NV A32 0
NVD32
315 440-590
22
1
)
-20
31
2
)
22 38 26 46 31
NVE32 -40
NV F32 -60
NV A36 0
NVD36
355 490-620
21 1)
-20
34
2
)
24 41 27 50 34
NVE36 -40
NV F36 -60
NV A40 0
NVD40
390 510-650 20
1
)
-20
41 27 45 30 55 37
NVE40 -40
NVF40 -60
1) For full thickness flat test specimens with a width of 25 mm and a gauge length of 200 mm the elongation is to comply with the follOWing minimum
values:
2) For grades A27S, A32 and A36 steels a relaxation in the number of impact tests for acceptance purposes may be permitted by special agreement with
the Society provided that satisfactory results arc from occasional check tests.
Thickness, mm t <5 5 <t <10 10<t <IS 15<t<20 20<t <25 25 <t <30 30<t <40 40<t <ISO
Elongation (%)
A27S, D27S & E27S IS 16
A32, D32, E32 & F32 14 16
A36, D36, E36 & F36 13 IS
A40, D40, E40 & F40 12 14
----
D 100 Scope
17
17
16
IS
-
101 This subsection specifies the requirements for extra
high strength steel, which is defined as steel with minimum
yield stress of 420 N/mm
2
and up to and including 690
N/mm
2
.
joint:,' Uf-eAlra high strength-steels lUay not be greater than
that of a welded joint in lower strength ,teels.
D 200 Chenlical composition
fine grain treatment are in general to satisfy the requirements
in Table Dl.
Where additions of any other elements have been made as
part of the steelmaking practice, the content is to be indi-
cated.
202 All extra high strength steel grades are to be fme grain
treated, and are therefore to contain one or more of the ele-
ments AI, Nb, Ti and V. Other grain-refining elements (mi-
cro-alloying) elements may be used after agreement with the
Society. The combination of grain-refming elements of the
various steel grades is subject to approval by the Society.
18 19 20 21 22
18 19 20 21 22
17 18 19 20 21
16 17 18 19 20
-
A smaller content of AI than given in the table may be ac-
cepted, subject to special approval. When used in combina-
tion, the specified minimum content of at least one element
is applicable.
on the certificate.
204 When the weldability is to be evaluated from the
chemical composition, the following formula is to he used
. if not otherwise agreed:' '. .. ',. -'" .-. """" .
Si Mn+Cu+Cr Ni Mo V
P,m=C+3(f+ 20 +6O+15+IO+
SB
(%)
D 300 Heat treabnent, condition of supply
301 Extra high strength steel is to be delivered in a con-
dition complying with the requirements given in Table D2.
401 Extra high strength steel is to comply with the me-
chanical properties specified in Table D3.
erties (Z-ductility), when specified, are given in E400.
403 Drop weight testing andlor fracture mechanics testing
may be required where found appropriate by the Society.
DB NORSKE VERITAS

:J
::J

J
I. Testing
I 100 Test samples
101 Test material, sufficient for the required tests and for
possible re-test purposes is to be provided for each casting
or batch of castings.
102 At least one test sample is to be provided for each
casting. Unless otherwise agreed the test samples are to be
either cast on or gated to the castings and are to have a
thickness representative for the part in question, but not less
than 30 mm.
For propeller castings the requirement according to D20 I
applies.
103 Where the casting is of complex shape, Or where the
finished mass exceeds 10 tonnes, two test samples are to be
provided. Where large castings are made from two or more
casts, which are not mixed in a ladle prior to pouring, at
least four sets of pieces are to be taken from each casting.
These are to be cast on at locations as widely separated as
possible.
104 For castings where the method of manufacture has
been specially approved by the Society, the number, posi-
tion and size of test samples are to be agreed with the Soci-
ety having regard to the method of manufacture employed.
105 As an alternative to 101 where a number of small
castings of about the same size is made from one cast and
heat treated in the same furnace charge, a batch testing
procedure may be adopted using separately cast test samples
of suitable dimensions. At least one test sample is to be
provided for each batch of castings. If the weight of the
batch is more than two tonnes, two sets of tests are to be
taken.
106 All test samples are to be suitably marked to identify
them with the castings which they represent.
107 The test samples are to be heat treated together with
the castings which they represent.
201 .. One tensile test piece, and when required one set of
thrcidmp-acftesfpieces' and pieces fof'adaitiorial ';iie-
to be taken from each test sample.
202 For castings with a complex shape or heavy wall
thicknesses; or with specially stressed working conditions,
the Society may in each case stipulate special requirements
to strength and relevant tests.
I 300 . Tensile testing at elevated temperature
301 When determination of 0,2 % proof stress at elevated
. temperature is required according to C300, the testing is to
be carried out in compliance with ISO 783. The straining
rate when approaching the stress values is to be controlled
within 0,1 to 0,3 % strain per minute.
The intervals used for estimation of strain rate from meas-
urements of strain is not to exceed 6 seconds.
401 Where hydraulic pressure testing is required, the test
is to be carried out before fmal acceptance and in the pres-
ence of the surveyor and to his satisfaction, if not otherwise
specified in other parts of the Rules.
for examination. Suitable methods include pickling, caustic
cleaning, wire brushing, local grinding, shot or sand blast-
nULl::::' IVI 01111J:,) , .... OIIUCIly I.;;J .... U
ing. The surfaces are not to be hammered, peened or treated
in any way which may obscure defects. .
502 Before acceptance all castings are to be presented to
the surveyor for visual examination. Where applicable, this
is to include the examination of internal surfaces. Unless
otherwise agreed, the verification of dimensions is the re-
sponsibility of the manufacturer.
503 Appropriate non-destructive testing is to be carried out
before acceptance. The testing procedures used are to be
agreed with the surveyor. The NDE-operators are to docu-
ment formal training and experience, preferably by being
certified in .accordance with a recognized certification
scheme accepted by the Society.
Important components for structures and machinery are to
be subjected to ultrasonic testing according to a recognized
standard or recommendation and a maker's certificate is to
be issued, stating that such examination has been carried out
and that no indications of internal defects have been found
which may be detrimental in service.
The surveyor may also require magnetic-particle testing
where surfiICe defects may be expected. The testing is to be
ment. Permanent magnets are not permitted. A.C.- equip-
ment is preferably to be used. The equipment used for MPE
must be able to produce a magnetic rms tangential field
strength of at least 2 leA/m. Testing with the magnetic field
shifted in at least two directions (90
0
turned) on each area
is recommended. When using prods care is to be taken to
avoid bums and hard spots. Prods are to be tipped with lead
or aluminium alloy.
504 Radiographic examination of castings is to be carried
out by the manufacturer at positions as indicated on ap-
proved plans or as otherwise agreed with the surveyor. All
radiographs are to be submitted to the surveyor for exam-
ination and acceptance.
505 Acceptance standards are tobe to the satisfaction of
the Society and in accordance with any requirements of ap-
proved
The surveyor may request to be present during the non- de-
sbnctive examination in order to verify that the agreed pro-
cedure is adhered to.
506 Special requirements concerning non-destructive in-
spection methods, procedures. extent of examination and
accept criteria may be prescribed by the Society where
found necessary in the respective parts of the rules.
507 For propellers and propeller blades the following ap-
ply:
After heat treatment and fmal grinding, the whole surface
of propellers and propeller blades is to be examined by dye
penetrant. At the discretion of the surveyor magnetic parti-
cle examination may be used where appropriate.
Detailed information on inspection, non-destructive exam-
ination and acceptance criteria is outlined in Classification
Note No. 4.2 .Guidance manual for inspection and repair
of steel propellers.
The hub and the blade roots within 0,4r are to be subjected
to ultrasonic inspection. A maker's certificate is to be issued.
stating that such inspection has been carried out with satis-
factory results.
508 For structural members with higher toughness re-
quirements, the following apply:
DB NORSKE VERITAS
Non-destructive testing is to be carried out in compliance
with complete plans approved by the Society for the casting
in question.
Equipment, procedures, operators qUalifica-tions, extent of
testing and acceptance criteria are to comply with relevant
'parts of the Rules, Classification Notes and Programmes.
509 In the event 'of any casting proving defective during
subsequent machining or testing it is to be repaired where
possible or rejected notwithstanding any previous certif-
ication, see Classification Note No. 4.2.
101 When unacceptable defects are found in a casting
these are to be removed by machining or chipping. Flame-
scarfing or arc-air gouging may also be used provided that
pre-heating is employed when necessary and that the sur-
faces of the resulting depression are subsequently ground
smooth to unaffected material. Complete elimination of the
defective material is to be proved by adequate non-destruc-
tive testing. Shallow grooves or depressions resulting from
the removal of defects may, at the discretion of the sur-
veyor, be accepted provided that they will cause no appre-
ciable reduction in the strength of the castings and that they
are suitably smoothed and contoured by grinding.
102 Proposals to repair a defective casting by welding are
to be submitted to the surveyor for approval before this work
is commenced. Such proposals are to include details of ihe
extent and position of all defects. Procedure qualification
test as well as operator qualification test are normally re-
quired.
103 When it has been agreed that the casting can be re-
paired this is to be carried out in accordance with an ap-
proved welding procedure which includes the following
features:
a) Important components of carbon-manganese steel and all
alloy steel castings are to be given a suitable preliminary
-- hant -treatment -prior, to- COmminCIitIDent. Of-Wild- repairs,
A similar heat treatment may also be required for other
types of castings where the repair of a major defect is
proposed.
b) The excavations are to be suitably shaped to allow good
access for welding and after final preparation for welding
are to be re-examined by suitable non-destructive testing
methods to ensure that all defective material has been
eliminated.
c) All castings in alloy steels and all castings for cranks
hafts are to be suitably pre-heated and welded at elevated
temperature. Castings in carbon or carhon- manganese
steel may also require to be pre-heated and welded at el-
evated temperature depending on their chemical compo-
sition and the dimensions and position of the weld
repairs. When the carbon content is higher than 0, 18 %,
pre-heating and elevated working temperature is always
required.
d) Welding is to be done under cover in positions free from"
draughts and adverse weather conditions by approved
welders with adequate supervision. As far as possible,
all welding is to be carried out in the downhand (flat)
position.
e) The welding consumables used are to be of a type giving
a weld deposit with mechanical properties similar to those
of the parent castings. Only approved low hydrogen
consumables are to be used. Consideration is to be given
to the effect of post-weld heat treatment on the mechan-
ical properties of the weld metal.
f) After welding has been completed the castings are to be
given a suitable heat treatment in accordance with the
requirements of H. A stress relieving heat treatment may
be carried Qut instead, provided the surveyor gives his
consent. The type of heat treatment employed will be
dependent on the chemical composition of the casting and
the dimensions, positions and nature of the defects.
g) Special consideration may be given to the omission of
postweld heat treatment or to the acceptance of a local
stress relieving heat treatment where the repaired area is
smaller and machining of the casting has reached an ad-
vanced stage.
h) On completion of heat treatment the weld repairs and
adjacent material are to be ground smooth and examined
by magnetic particle or liquid penetrant testing. Supple-
mentary examination by ultrasonics or radiography may
also be required depending on the dimensions and nature
of the original defect. Satisfactory results are to be ob-
tained from all forms of non-destructive testing used.
K 100 General
101 For carbon and carbon-manganese steel castings, the
following apply:
When the carbon content according to the ladle analysis is
higher than 0,18%, the casting is to be preheated and kept
at a temperature of about 200C during welding.
'When' the -carbbif 'content is" 0,24 %. or-more; 'the "material" is
to be normalized after welding. If normalizing cannot be
effected, a stress-relief heat treatment can be carried out in-
stead, provided the surveyor gives his consent. After heat
treatment, the weld and the heat-affected zone are to be ex-
amined for cracks by a non-destructive method. "
When a casting is welded to members for which the rules
prescribe heat treatment after welding, the heat treatment is
to be carried out regardless of carbon content of the cast
part.
Cast steel with a carbon content above 0,30 % is only to be
welded after approval by the Society in each separate case
according to approved procedure specification.
Alloy steel castings are to be welded in compliance with
approved procedure specifications.
The welding is to be done by approved welders and with
approved electrodes.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
'J
-/
I)
J
""J -.
)
J
) )
TableC3 Condition of supply for High Strength (HS) steel
Grade
Grain
refining elements
Nb and/or V
NY A27S
NY A32
NY A36
Al only or with Ti
-
NY A40 Any
Nb or V
NY 027S
NY 032
NY 036
AI only
or with Ti
NY 040 Any
NY E27S
NYE32 Any
NY E36
NY E40 Any
NY F32
Any
NY F36
NY F40 Any
AR: As rolled condition.
N: Normalized.
QT: Quenched and tempered
CR: Controlled rolled.
TM: Thermo-mechanically controlled processed (TMCp)
2) As rolled (AR) subject to special approval of the Society.
Thickness. t
mm
IS12,5
12,5 <t:S150
IS20
20 <tS35
35 <1<150
IS12,5
12,5 <1<150
IS12,5
12,5 <1<150
IS20
20<IS35
25 <1<150
1<150
IS150
1<150
IS150
1<150
Condition of supply 1)
Any
Any'
Any 2)
Any
CR,N,QT,TM
Any
,
Any'
Any 2)
CR, N,QT, TM
CR 3), N, QT, TM
N, QT, TM
CR 4), N, QT, TM
N, QT,TM
3) Subject to special approval by the Society, sections in grades A27S, A32. A36, 027S, 032 and 036 may be supplied as rolled (AR) provided satis-
factory results are consistently obtained from Charpy V-notch impact tests. Similarely sections in grades E27S, E32 and E36 may be supplied as rolled
(AR) or controlled rolled (CR).
4) Subject to special approval by the Society. sections in grades F32 and F36 may be supplied controlled rolled (CR).
DEI NORsKE VERITAS
Table Cl Chemical composition and deoxidation practice for High Strength (HS) steel
NV A27S NY D27S NY E27S
Grade
NY A32 NYD32 NYE32
NY F32 NY F36 NY F40
NY A36 NYD36 NYE36
NY A40 NV D40 NVE40
'Deoxidation Killed and fme grain treated I)
Chemical composition (ladle analysis)
C maximum (%) 0,18 0,16
Si (%) 0,10 - 0,50 0,10 - 0,50
Mn (%) 0,9 - 1,6
2
) 0,9 - 1,6
2
)
P maximum (%) 0,035 0,025
S maximum (%) 0,035 0,025
Cu maximum (%) 0,35 0,35
Cr maximum (%) 0,20 0,20
Ni maximum (%) 0,40 0,80
Mo maximum (%) 0,08 . 008
Al ac.sol. (%) 0,Q15 - 0,08 3) 0,015 : 0,08 3)
AI total (%) 0,020 - 0,085 3) 0,020 - 0,085 3)
Nb (%) 002-005
3
) 002-005
3
)
V (%) 0:05 - 0:10 3) 0:05 - 0: 10 3)
Ti maximum (%) 0,02 0,02
N maximum (%) -
0,009 (0,012 if Al is present)
1) NV A 275 is accepted semi-killed or killed without fine grain treatment for thicknesses up to and including 25 mm.
2) For thicknesses up to and including 12,5 mm the minimum Mn-content may be reduced 10.0,70%. For NVA 275, NVD 275 and NVE 275 it may
be reduced to 0,70% regardless of thickness.
Table C2 Carhon equivalent for High Strength steels up to lSOmm in thickness produced by TMCP
Sleel Grade
Carbon equivalent, maximum (%)
1<50mm 50<1<100mm 100</<150 mm
NY A27S, D27S, E27S - - -
NY A32, D32, E32, F32 0,36 0,38 0,40
NY A36, D36, E36, F36 0,38 0,40 0,42
NV A40, D40, E40, F40 0,40 -
-
DET NORSKE VERITAS
0)
,,)
')
)
':J
':J
.:J
. 61
SECTION 8
IRON CASTINGS
A. General
A 100 Scope
A 300 Manufacture
Contents
A 600 Testing
B 100 Scope
B 200 Test material
B 400 Metallographic examination
C. Grey Cast Iron
C 100 Scope
C 200 Test material
A. General
A 100 Scope
101 This Section gives the requirements for both ferritic
and pearlitic nodular cast iron and for grey cast iron. This
section covers lACS UR W9 and WIO.
The use of bainitic or other type of cast iron may be ac-
cepted after special consideration.
102 Castings which comply with national or proprietary
specifications may be accepted provided such specifications
give reasonable equivalence to these requirements or other-
wi ar".ppmved fOLa .spe.cifir,appiir.aliOll, ..
103 Where small castings are produced in large quantities,
the manufacturer may adopt alternative procedures for test-
ing and inspection subject to approval by the Society.
104 Requirements with respect to retesting, identification
and certification are outlined in Ch.l.
ued efficiency of the manufacturing technique. The surveyor
is to be given the opportunity to witness tests.
A 400 . Chemical composition
401 Unless specially required, the chemical composition
is left to the discretion of the manufacturer, who is to ensure
that it is snitable to obtain the mechanical properties speci-
fied for the casting
A 500 Heat treabnent
501 Except as given in 502, the castings may be supplied
in either the as cast or heat treated condition.
502 For some applications, such as high temperature ser-
vice or where dimensional stability is important, castings
may require to be given a suitable tempering or stress re-
lieving heat treatment.
A 600 Testing
601 Test material sufficient for the required tests and for
possible re-tests is to be provided for each casting or batch
of castings. Separately cast test samples are normally to be
used.
602 Separately cast test samples are to be cast in moulds
made from the same type of material as used for the cast-
ings. The test samples are not to be stripped from the moulds
until the temperature is below 500C.
603 Where castings are supplied in the heat treated condi-
tion, the test samples are to be heat treated together with the
castings which they represent. For cast-on samples the
sample shall not be cut off from the casting until after the
heat treatment.
604 A batch testing procedure may be adopted for castings
with a fettled mass of 1 tonne or less. All castings in a batch
are to be of similar type and dimensions, and cast from the
"sajlie'ladle'--uf ii'6atOO" 1nBUil. 'GllS is'- tT"be pro ..
vided for each multiple of 2,0 tonnes of fettled castings in
each batch.
605 For large castings where more than one ladle of
treated metal is used, additional test samples are to be pro-
vided so as to be representative of each ladle used.
. J A 200 Quality of castings
201 Castings are to be free from surface or internal defects
which would be prejudicial to their proper application in
service. The surface finish is to be in accordance with good
practice and any specific requirements of the approved plan.
A 300 Manufacture
been approved by the Society.
302 Suitable mechanical methods are to be employed for
the removal of surplus material from castings. Thermal cut-
ting processes are not acceptable, except as a preliminary
operation to mechanical methods.
303 Where castings of the same type are regularly pro-
duced in quantity, the manufacturer is to make any tests
necessary to prove the quality of the prototype castings and
is also to make periodical examinations to verify the contin-
for examination. The surfaces are not to be hammered,
peened or treated in any way which may obscure defects.
702 Before acceptance, all castings are to be visually ex-
amined including, where applicable, the examination of in-
ternal surfaces. Unless otherwise agreed, the verification of
dimensions is the responsibility of the manufacturer.
703 Supplementary examination of castings by suitable
nondestructive testing procedu"res is generally not required
except in circumstances where there is reason to suspect the
soundness of the casting.
704 When required by the relevant construction rules,
castings are to be pressure tested before final acceptance.
705 In the event of any casting proving defective during
subsequent machining or testing it is to be rejected notwith-
standing any previous certification.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
801 At the discretion of the surveyor, small surface blem-
ishes may be removed by local grinding.
802 . Subject to the prior approval of the surveyor, castings
'containing local porosity may be rectified by impregnation
with a suitable plastic filler, provided that the extent of the
porosity is such that it does not adversely affect the strength
of the casting.
803 Repairs by welding are generally not permitted, nnless
specially considered and accepted.
B 100 Scope
This subsection gives the specific requirements to nodular
cast iron
B 200 Test material
201 The test samples are generally to be one of the stand-
ard types detailed in recognised standards with a thickness
of 25 mm.
202 Separately cast test samples are, where possible, to
be taken towards the end of pouring of the casting.
301 Ferritic nodular cast iron with special requirements is
to meet the values for grade NVI and NV2, given in Table
B1.
302 Nodular cast iron for ordinary use is to be in accord-
ance with the requirements for grade 370 to 800, given in
Table B 1. Hardness values are given for information only.
Values for elongation which correspond to the tensile
strengths between the values specified, are to be calculated
by linear interpolation.
B 400 MetaIlographic examination
401 For nodular cast iron samples for metallographic ex-
amination are to be prepared for every ladle of metal, treated
to produce nodular graphite. At least 90 % of the graphite
is to be in spheroidal form
Guidance note:
Graphite types I II according to Plate I of ASTM A247 are
considered to have a spheroidal fonn.
-e-n-d---o-f--G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---
Table Bl Nodular cast iron - mechanical properties of separately cast test samples
Tensile

Average impact energy
strength 1)
stress )
Elongation
KV
Grade Rm

AS
Hardness Predominant
test
HB structure
minimum
minimum
%
J minimum 3) temperature
Nlmm2
Nlmm
2
C
NV 1 350 220 22 12 (9) -40 110-170 Ferrite
NV2 400 250 18 12 (9) -20 140-200 Ferrite
370 370 230 17 120-180 Ferrite
400 400 250 12 140-200 Ferrite
500 500 320 7 170-240
Ferrite!
pearlite
600 600 370 3 190-270
Pearlite!
ferrite
700 700 420 2 230-300 Pearlite
. ---.
-- .. - ..
-- -- - -
..
Pearlite or
800 800 480 2 250-350 tempered
structure
1) For intermediate values of specified minimum tensile strength, the minimum values for 0,2% proof and elongation may be obtained
by interpolation.
2) The 0,2% proof stress values are given for information purposes and unless othelWise agreed do not require to be verified by test.
3) The average value measured on 3 Charpy V-notch specimens one result may be below the average value but not less than the minimum
shown in brackets. If the impact testing is carried out at +20C the impact energy is not to be less than 17 (14) and 14 (11) J, re-
spectively, for NV1 and NV2.
C. Grey Cast Iron
C 100 Scope
101 This subsection gives the specific requirements to grey
cast iron.
C 200 Test material
201 Separately cast test samples are to be used unless
otherwise agreed and generally are to be in the form of bars
30 mm in diameter and of suitable length.
301 Only the tensile strength is to be determined and the
results obtained from tests are to comply with the minimum
value specified for the casting being supplied. The specified
minimum tensile strength is not to be less than 200 N/mm
2

302 The fractured surfaces of all tensile test specimens are
to be granular and grey in appearance.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
-'l
/
I)
)

\J
'\
J
)
J
Table B3 Mechanical properties for Normal Strength (NS) steel
Grade Yield Tensile Elongation Test
stress strength
AS
temp.
minimum
1 :5,50
A verage impact energy
J minimwn
50<1 :5,70 70<1 :5,150
R oH Rm
mlmmum (Nlmm2)
(%)
(OC) Longitudinal Transverse Longitudinal Transverse Longitudinal Transverse
(Nlmm2)
NVA +20 - 34
2
) 24
2
) 41
2
) 27
2
)
NVB
235 400-520
22
3
)
0
27
1
) 20
1
)
34 24 41 27
NVD -20 27 20 34 24 41 27
NVE -40 27 20 34 24 41 27
1) Charpy V-notch impact tests are generally not required for grade B steel with thickness of 25 mm or less.'
2) Impact tests for Grade A over 50 mm thick are not required when the material is produced using fine grain practice and furnished nonnalized or
thermo-mechanically controlled processed.
values:
Thickness, mm
Tt<51
5<t<10 1 lO<t<15 I 15<1<20 I 20<t<25 I 25<t<30 I 30<t<40 140<t<150
Elongation
1141
16
I
17
I
18
C 100 Scope
101 This subsection specifies the requirements for high
strength steel, which is defmed as steel with minimum yield
stress of 265 N/mm
2
and up to and including 390 N/mm
2
.
joints of high strength steels may not be higher than that of
a welded joint in normal strength steel.
C 200 . Chemical composition
fme grain treatment are in general to satisfy the requirements
in Table C1. Where additions of any other elements have
been made as part of the steelmaking practice, the content
is to be indicated.
202 Grades which according to Table CI are to be fme
grain treated, are to contain one or more of the .elements
AI, Nb, Ti and V. Other grain-refming elements (micro-al-
loying) elements may be used after agreement with the So-
ciety. The combination of grain-refining elements of the
vadous'sieel grades IssiibJeciio approviil by me SocJety.
A smaller content of Al than given in the table may be ac-
cepted, subj ect to special approval.
I
19
I
20
I
21
I
22
on the certificate. The determination of AI, Nb, Ti and V
may be omitted for grades that are not fine-grain treated.
204 When required, the carbon equivalent value is to be
calculated from the ladle analysis using the following for-
mula:
C
- C Mn Cr + Mo + V Ni + Cu
eq - + 6 + 5 + 15
%
For TM (TMCP) steels the carbon equivalent calculat.ed
from above formula is to comply with the- requirements
given in Table C2.
The formula given in D200 (P m) may also be used for
evaluating weldability instead of tile carbon equivalent at the
discretion of the Society.
301 High strength steel is to be delivered in a condition
complying with the requirements given in Table C3.
401 High strength steel is to comply with the mechanical
-propertIes'specliied IiI Tabie c4. . - '" --- . -- - -'-. ,-- --- --- --- -
erties (Z- ductility), when specified, are given in E400.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
Rules for ShipS, January 1996
Page 2 - Pl.2 Ch.2 Sec.1
B 100 Scope
201 Requirements for chemical composition and deoxida-
tion pracb.ce for normal strength steel are given in Table Bl.
101 This subsection specifies the requirements for normal
strength steel, which is defined as steel with minimum yield
stress of 235 N/mm
2
.
301 Normal strength steel is to be delivered in a condition
complying with the requirements given in Table B2.
401 Normal strength steel is to comply with the mechan-
ical properties specified in Table B3. .
402 Additional requirements to thmullh thickness proper-
ties (Z-ductility), wlien specified, are given in E400.
Table Bl . Chemical composition and deoxidation practice for Normal Strength steel
Grade
NVA NVB NVD NVE
For t ::;5Omm: For t :SSOmm:
For t :525mm:
Aoy method Any method
Killed Killed and
Deoxidation
except rimmed except
For t>25mm: fme grain
steel 1)
rimmed steel
For t >SOmm: For t >SOmm:
Killed and fme treated
Killed Killed
grain treated
C
max. (%) 5) 0,21 4)
0,21 0,21 0,18
Si min. (%) -
- 0,10 0,10
Chemical Si max. (%) 0,50 0,35 0,35 0,35
composition Mn
min. (%)5)
2,5 xC 0,80
6
)
0,60 0,70
(ladle analysis) 2) 3)
P max. (%) 0,035 0,035 0,035 0,035
S max. (%) 0,035 0,035 0,035 0,035
Al min. ac.sol. (%) 7)
-
- 0,015 8)
0,015
1) For sections up to 12.5mm thickness, rimmed steel may be accepted subject to special approval by the Society.
2) When any grade of steel is supplied in the thermo-mechanically control1ed processed conditions, deviations in the specified chemical composition may
be allowed or required by the Society.
3) The Society may limit the amount of residual-Itrace elements which may have an adverse effect on the working and use of the steel, e.g. copper and
tin.
4) Maximum 0,23% for sections.
I 5) Carbon plus 1/6 of the manganese content is not to exceed 0,40%.
6) For NVB, when the silicon content is 0,10 or above (killed steel), the minimum manganese content may be reduced to 0,60%.
7) The total content may be detennined instead of the acid soluble content. In such cases the total A1 content is not to be less than 0,020%. An upper
limit may be speeified. Other grain refiners may be used upon special approval by the Society.
8) AI is required for thicknesses above 25mm.
... - .. _--
Table B2 Condition of supply for Normal Strength (NS) steel
Grade Thickness J t Condition of supply I)
mm
NVA
t$50 Any
50<t<150 AR
2
), CR, N, TM
NVB
t$50 Any
50<t<150 AR2), CR, N, TM
I
NVD
t$35 Aoy
50<t<150 AR
3
), CR, N, TM
NVE t<I50 AR3), CR3), N, TM
AR, As rolled.
N, Normalized.
CR, Controlled rolled.
TM, Thenno-mechanically controlled (fMCP)
2) Grades NV A and NVB may be supplied as rolled (AR) subject to
special approval by the Society.
3) Subject to special approval by the Society, sections in grade NVD
may be supplied as rolled (AR) provided satisfactory results are con-
sistently obtained from Charpy V-notch impact tests. Similarely sec-
tions in grade NVE may be supplied as rolled (AR) or controlled
rolled (CR).
DEr NORSKE VERITAS
<)
()
:J
C)
.
C)

...... ' .......................... , ................. r ---
Pl.2 Ch.2 Sec.S - Page 63
SECTION 9
WROUGHT ALUMINIUM ALLOYS
Contents
A. General
A 100 Scope
A 400 Temper designations
A 500 MeChanical properties
B. Testing
B 300 Other testing
C. Repair of Defects
C 100 General
D. Identification of Materials
D 100 Branding
A. General
A 100 Scope
101 This Section specifies the requirements for wrought
aluminium alloys for structural application including plates,
sections, tubes, bars and rivet bars and rivets.
This Section is not applicable to aluminium alloys for forg-
ings and castings. For these products suitable alloys ac-
cording to recognized standards may be used.
201 The alloy grades are listed in Tables Al and A2.
202 Aluminium alloys are to have a satisfactory resistance
to corrosion in 'marine environments. Grades for welded
structures are to be weldable, applying one of the welding
methods approved by the Society.
203 The use of 6000 series aluminium alloys in direct
contact with sea water may be restricted depending on ap-
plication and corrosion protection system. The use of these
alloys is to be agreed with the Society.
ments in Table Al and A2. Other alloys or alloys which
do not fully comply with Table Al and A2, may be accepted
by the Society after consideration in each particular case.
Special tests andlor other relevant information, e.g. which
confirm a satisfactory corrosion resistance and weldability,
may be required.
A 400 Temper desigl)lltions
401 Temper designations according to the Aluminium As-
sociation (AA) designation system are given in Table A3 and
A4.
501 Requirements to mechanical properties for different
delivery conditions are given in Tables A5, A6 and A 7.
Other delivery conditions with related mechanical properties
may be accepted by the Society after consideration in each
particular case.
Table Al Chemical composition - Wrought Alloys in the 5000 Series
AA
Other
DNV
designation Limit Si Fe Mn Mg Cr Zn Ti Cu Al
elements
designation
1)
maximwn-
values
. NV-SOS:C 5052
...
, minimum
,.
-
. 7,7 .. .0,15. ,
"' .0, .
-
.. .lrlIoh;Q,Q5..,
maxlmum 0,25 0,40 0,10 2,8 0,35 0,10 0,10 total: 0,15
NV-5154A 5154A
minimum -
- - 3,1 -
-
-
- Rest each: 0,05
maximum 0,50 0,50 0,50 3,9 0,25 0,20 0,20 0,10 total: 0,15
NV-5754
2
) 5754
minimum -
- - 2,6 -
-
-
- Rest each: 0,05 I
maximum 0,40 0,40 0,50 3,6 0,30 0,20 0,15 0,10 total: 0,15
NV-5454 5454
minimum - - 0,50 2,4 0,05 -
-
- Rest each: 0,05
maximum 0,25 0,40 1,0 3,0 0,20 0,25 0,20 0,10 total: 0,15
NV-5086 5086
minimum -
-
0,20 3,5 0,05
-
-
- Rest each: 0,05
maximum 0,40 0,50 0,7 4,5 0,25 0,25 0,15 0,10 total: 0,15
NV-5083 5083
minimum - - 0,40 4,0 0,05
-
-
- Rest each: 0,05
maximum 0,40 0,40 1,0 4,9 0,25 0,25 0,15 0,10 total: 0,15
NV-5383
3
) 5383
minimum -
- 0,7 4,0 -
-
-
- Rest each, 0,05
maximum 0,25 0,25 1,0 5,2 0,25 0,40 0,15 0,20 total: 0,15
1) AA - Aluminium Association
2) Cr+Mn: 0,10 to 0,6
3) Zr Maximum 0,20
DEr NORSKE VERITAS
TableA2 Chemical Composition. Wrought alloys in the 6000 Series
DNV AA
Limit Si Fe Mn Mg
designation designation
NV6060 6060 minimum 0,30 0,10
.
0,35
maximum 0,6 0,30 0,10 0,6
NV-6061 6061 minimum 0,4 - - 0,8
maximum 0,8 0,7 0,15 1,2
NV6063 6063 minimum 0,20 - - 0,45
maximum 0,6 0,35 0,10 0,9
NV6005A 6005A minimum 0,50
- -
0,40
maximum 0,9 0,35 0,50 0,7
NV6082 6082 minimum 0,7 -
0,40 0,6
maximum 1,3 0,50 1,0 1,2
Cr Zn
.

0,05 0,05
0,04 -
0,35 0,25
- -
0,10 0,10
-
0,30 0,20
-
0,25 0,20
1) The use of alloys containing more than 0,15% Cu in direct contact with seawater may be restricted
2) Cr + Mn 0,12 to 0,50
Other
Cu 1)
Ti Al
elements
maximwn-
values
- - Rest each: 0,05
0,10 0,10 total: 0,15
0,15 - Rest each: 0,05
0,40 0,15 total: 0,15
- - Rest each: 0,05
0,10 0,10 total: 0,15
- - Rest each: 0,05
0,30 0,10 total: 0,15
- - Rest each: 0,05
0,10 0,10 total: 0,15
Table A3 Tempers achieved by fabricating, annealing cold working, or cold working plus partial annealing or stabilising
As fabricated, cold worked without specified strength (drawn products) -F
Annealed, soft -0
Strain hardened to specified strength 118 hard -Hll
1/4 hard -H12
1/2 hard -H14
Strain hardened and partly annealed (p.a.) to specified strength 1/8 hard, p.a. -H21
1/4 hard, p.a. H22
112 hard, p.a. -H24
Strain hardened and stabilised to specified strength 1/4 hard, stabilised -H32
112 hard. stabilised -H34
Special tempers
- Less strain hardened than -Hll. e.g. by straightening or stretching -Hlll
- No controlled strain hardening, but there are mechanical property limits -H112
- Treatment against exfoilation corrosion -H116
- Strain hardened less than required for a controlled H32 temper -H321
Table A4 Tempers achieved by heat treatment or thermomechanical treatment
Unstable condition after solution heat treatment (HT) -w
Solution heat treated, naturally aged T4
Cooled from an elevated temperature shaping process, artificially aged T5
Solution heat treated, artificially aged -T6
Solution heat treated, artificially overaged -T7
DET NORSKE VERITAS
I
I
')

()

o
8 8
C)
Q
Rules tor January 1 ::t::to
SECTION 1
ROLLED STEEL FOR STRUCTURAL APPLICATION
Contents
A. General
A 100 Scope
B 100 Scope
C 100 Scope
D 100 Scope
D 300 Heat treatment, condition of supply
E. Testing
E 100 Test material
F. Repairs
F 100 Surface defects
A. General
A 100 Scope
101 This section specifies the requirements for weldable
-lliJnnal strength, high strength and high strength het
rolled structural steel plates and sections. These require-
ments are also applicable to seamless steel tubes and pipes
intended for structural application. The requirements are
applicable to steel products with a thickness not exceeding
150 rom. For greater thicknesses certain deviations from
these requirements may be accepted or required after con-
sideration in each case.
This section covers lACS UR Wll and W16.
For rolled slabs, billets or bars used as substitute for forg-
ings, see Sec.S.
102 Steels differing from the Rule requirements in chemi-
cal composition, deoxidation practice, condition of supply
and mechanical properties may be accepted, subject to spe-
cial approval by the Society. Such steels are to be given a
special designation, see 200.
201 The steel grades of this Section are divided into
strength groups of three ranges:
- Normal Strength steels (NS)
- High Strength steels (HS)
- Extra High strength Steels (EHS)
202 The alphanumeric designation of the steel grade is
NVx y,
where
NV = designation of a steel grade according to the Society's
Rules.
x = a capital letter corresponding to a specified impact
toughness test temperature, see Table AI.
y = a figure designating the strength group according to
the specified minimum yield stress, see Table AI. The
figure y is omitted for NS steels.
203 Additional symbols following the alphanumeric des-
ignation given in 202 may be:
Z = steel grade of improved through-thickness properties.
S = specially approved steel, see 100.
301 The steel is to bemanufactured by an electric or one
cast slab to plate is to be minimum 5 to I unless otherwise
Table Al Definitions of steel grades
Strength Impact testing Tensile properties
range
Symbol Test tem- Symbol Minimum
x perature y yield
C stress
(N/mm
2
)
NS A -
B a
Omitted 235
D -20
E '40
..
HS A a 27 265
D -20 32 315
E -40 36 355
F -60 40 390
EHS D -20 420 420
E -40 460 460
F -60 500 500
550 550
620 620
690 690
303 The applicable rolling methods are defined as follows:
Controlled Rolling, CR (Normalised Rolling, NR): A rolling
procedure in which the fmal deformation is carried out in
the normalising temperature range, resulting in a material
condition generally equivalent to that obtained by normalis-
mg.
Thermo-Mechanical Rolling, TM (Thermo-Mechanical Con-
trolled Processing, TMCP): This is a procedure which in-
volves the strict control of both the steel temperature and the
rolling reduction. Generally a high proportion of the rolling
reduction is carried out close to the Ar3 temperature and
may involve the rolling in the dual phase temperature re-
gion. Unlike controlled rolling (normalised rolling) the pro-
perties conferred by TM cannot be reproduced by
subsequent normalising or other heat treatment.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
-) .::J
) . ~
. ~ ..
~ ~
I.U''''''''' IVI ....... 1-' .... , ........ ' ........ 1 .............
. Table AS Mechanical properties for wrought aluminium alloy sheets, strips and plates minimum values, t: 2 mm < t < 40 mm
Tensile Strength Yield Strength Elongation
DNV
Temper Rm
~ 0 2
L
o
=5,65.j%
Designation
(Nlmm
2
)
(Nlmm
2
) AS%
NV-5052 O-H111 170 65 16
H32 210 160 10
H34 235 180 9
NV-5154A O-H111 215 85 16
NV-5754 O-Hl11 190 80 17
H24 240 165 10
NV-5454 O-H111 215 85 16
H32 250 180 10
H34 270 200 9
. NV-5086 O-H111 240 95 14
H116 275 195 9
H32 275 195 10
H34 300 235 9
NV-5083 0-H111 t<6mm 275 125 15
O-Hl11 t>6mm 270 115 14
H116 305 215 10
H321 305 215 10
NV-5383 O-H111 290 145 17
H116-H321
-'----
305 220 10
- -- ._--
--- - - -- -
Table A6 Mechanical properties for extruded aluminium alloy pronIes, rods and tubes, minimum values, t: 2 mm S t S 2S
mm
Tensile Strength
DNV Temper
Rm
~ 0 2
L
o
=S,6S.j%
-
(Nlmm2)
(Nlmm
2
) AS%
NV-6060 T5 or T6 190 150 12
NV-6061 T4 180 110 14
T5 or T6 260 240 8
NV-6063 T5 150 110 7
T6 205 170 9
NV-6005A T5 or T6 260 215 8
NV-6082 T4 205 110 14
T5 or T6 310 260 10
I
._. -- ._. --,-.,'"'' "-._--- ,_ .. _- .. ~ _. ,., ~ , ..
... ," -. - .. -.-'.-.. ',-_.
Table A7 Mechanical properties for closed extruded aluminium alloy profiles, rods and tubes minimum values, t: 2 mm :S t S
2S mm, testing transverse to extruding direction
Tensile Strength
I
DNV Temper
Rm
~ 0 2
L
o
=5,65.j%
(Nlmm
2
) (Nlmm
2
) AS%
NV-6069 T5 175 135 5
NV-6061 T4 165 110 5
T5 or T6 245 205 4
NV-6005A T5 or T6
6<t<1O 260 215 5
lO<t<25 230 195 4
NV-6082 T5 or T6 290 240 5
---
B. Testing
201 The tensile test pieces are to be taken according to the
following:
101 All materials in a lot forwarded for sampling are to
be of the same alloy, production batch (charge) and product
form (plates, sections etc.). The materials in one lot are
further to be of the same dimensions and in the same deliv-
ery condition. Artificially aged grades are to be from the
same furnace batch.
- for rolled products the pieces are to be cut with their
longitudinal axes transverse to the fmal rolling direction.
See Table A5.
- For extruded products the specimens are normally to be
taken in the transverse direction. If the width of the pro-
duct is less than 300 mm, then test in the longitudinal
DET NORSKE VERITAS
direction is permitted. In both cases the mechanical pro-
perty limits in Table A6 are to be applied.
- For closed extrusions one additional tensile test is to be
taken transverse to the extrusion direction and across at
least one extrusion seam. See Table A7
The pieces are to be of full section of the material where
practicable. Otherwise, the pieces are to be taken in the
range one third to half the distance from the edge to the
centre of the predominant or thickest part of the section.
202 Unless otherwise agreed upon, the number of tensile
test pieces are to comply with the following:
Rolled products: ,
One tensile test piece is to be taken from each lot of material
produced. If the weight of one lot exceeds 1000 kg one extra
piece is to be taken from every 1000 kg of material, or
fraction thereof, in each lot. If one single piece exceeds
1000 kg, one piece is sufficient.
Extruded products:
For material with a nominal weight of less than I kg/m, one
tensile test piece is to be taken from each 500 kg, or fraction
thereof, in each lot. For nominal weights between 1 and 2
kg/m, one tensile test piece is to be taken from each 500
m, or fraction thereof, in each lot. If the nominal weight
exceeds 2 kg/m, one piece is to be taken for each 1000 kg
of material, or fraction thereof, in each lot.
B 300 Other testing
301 Other tests such as dump testing, formability testing
or bend testing may be required in case of special grades
and/or applications.
401 The surveyor does not inspect dimensions or surface
condition of each single plate, section, etc. It is the alumi-
nium producer's responsibility that the requirements for di-
mensional tolerances are satisfied.
402 The under thickness tolerance acceptable for the soci-
ety is to be considered as the lower limit of a IIpIus-minus"
range of thickness tolerance which could be found in the
normal production of a plant producing rolled or extruded
products, on average, to the nominal thickness.
Perinissible tinaer thickness tolerance ror 'rolledptoducts
(sheet, plate and bar):
Tolerances of thickness are given in Table Bl. For thick-
nesses below 2 mm and for widths exceeding 2500 mm,
wider tolerances rna y be accepted after consideration in each
particular case. More restricted tolerances may he required
for thicknesses above 40 mm.
Table B1 Under thickness tolerance in mm
Nominal Width o/plate, mm
thickness
mm
up to 1500 1501-2000 above 2000
above 2 to 4 0,10, 0,15 0,15
above 4 to 8 0,20 0,20 0,25
above 8 to 12 0,25 0,25 0,25
above 12 to 20 0,35 0,40 0,50
above 20 to 40 __ 0,50 0,65
For extruded products:
Minus tolerances of thickness:
- All thicknesses: 5 % of material thickness, limited to 0,5
mm.
Wider tolerances may be accepted for tubes, complex sec,,:,
tions and thicknesses below 2 mm.
c. Repair of Defects
C 100 General
101 Local surface defects may be removed by machining
or grinding, provided that the thickness is in no place re-
duced to less than 95 % of the actual plate thickness and in
no place reduced to more than 2 mm below the minus tol-
erances. The extent of such repair is to he agreed upon with
the surveyor, and all repairs are to he carried out under the
surveyor's supervision. unless otherwise arranged.
102 Surface defects which canoot be dealt with as in 101,
are not allowed to be repaired, unless it can be stated that
repair by welding does not affect the strength and suitability
of the piece for the intended application. Any case of repair
by welding is to be specified in detail for consideration and
approval by the surveyor.
Prior to any such repair welding, the defect is to be com-
pletely removed by machining or grinding.
After complete removal of the defect and before welding,
the thickness of the piece is in no place to be reduced by
more than 20 %. The welding is to be carried out by ap-
proved welders. The weld is to be ground flush with the
surrounding piece surface.
Before repair welding is commenced and after grinding the
weld bead, ,nondestructive testing with dye-penetrant may
be required at the discretion of the surveyor.
D. !<leIltifjc!itio
ll
of
D 100 Branding
101 In addition to the requirements given in Ch.1 Sec.1
C, the following apply:
The alphanumeric designation of the aluminium alloy is
NV-yz
NV = designation of an aluminium alloy according to the
Society'S rules
y = AA designation
z = Temper.
The NV designations given are not to be used for grades
which do not fully comply with the specifications given in
Tables Al to A2 and A5 to A7.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
." , /
.. )
) ,J
)
J
) )
C. Repair of Defects ................... ............................ 66
C 100 Geneml.......... .. ............................. .... ....... 66
D. Identification of Materials .... ...................... .......... 66
D 100 Branding............................................ ....... 66
SEC. 10 COPPER ALLOYS .................................... 67
A. General .......................................... ............ ...... 67
A 100 Scope................. .... .. .......... ...................... 67
B. Castings for Valves, Fittings and General Application 67
B 100 Types of copper alloys.................................. 67
B 300 Mechanical properties ............................ ....... 67
B 400 Testing......... .. ...... ...... ...... .......... .............. 67
C. Propeller Castings ...... .............................. .......... 67
C 300 Heat treatment ............................................ 67
C 400
C 500
Testing and inspection
Repair of defects ..
.................................. 67
68
D.Tubes .............................................................. 68
D 200 Mechanical proPerties ................................... 68
D 300 Heat treatment ............................................ 68
D 400 Testing..................................................... 68
SEC. 11 HEAT RESISTING NON-FERROUS ALLOYS 70
A. General.... .......... ........ ...... ................................ 70
A 100 Scope.. .. .......... ............ ........ ..................... 70
A 200 Approval............................................ .. .... 70
A 300 Heat treatment ............................................ 70
B. Testing .......... .......... ...... ........ ........................... 70
B 100 Samples for testing ...................................... 70
B 200 Tensile testing ............................................ 70
B 300 Impact testing ............................................. 70
B 400 Creep and rupture testing ............................... 70
B 500 Non-destructive testing.................................. 70
B 600 Other tests ................................................. 70
SEC. 5 STEEL FORGINGS ................................... 42
A. General ............................................ .......... ...... 42
A 100 Scope................. ...... ..................... ........ ... 42
A 200 Manufacture.. ............ ............ ........ ............ 42
A 300 Quality .......................... : ...... .. .. ................ 43
A 500 fleat treatment ............................................ 43
A 600 Test material .............................................. 43
A 700 Mechanical testing at ambient temperature .......... 43
A 800 Tensile testing at elevated temperature ............... 44
A 900 Retest procedures ........................................ 44
A 1000 Visual and non-destructive examination ............. 44
A 1100 Rectification of defect forgings ........................ 44
A 1200 Certification............................................... 44
B. Forgings for General Application ........................... 44
B 100 Scope ....................................................... 44
B 200 Types of steel ............................................ 44
B 400 Heat treatment ............................................ 45
B 500 Test material and mechanical properties ............. 45
C. Forgings for Shafting and Machinery .... .......... ....... 45
C 100. Scope ....................................................... 45
C 200 Types of steel ............................................ 45
C 300 Chemical gomposition ................................... 45
C 400 Heat treatment ............................................ 46
C 500 Test matetial .............................................. 46

D. Forgings for Gearing ........................................... 48
D 100 Scope .............. .................. ....................... 48
D 200 Manufacture .................................. :........... 48
D 300 Chemical composition ........ :.......................... 48
D 400 Heat treatment ............................................ 48
quenched and tempered forgings ...................... 48
D 600 Test material for forgings intended for carburising
and hardening ............................................ 49
D 700 Mechanical properties ............ ............ ........... 49
Forgings for Boilers, Unfired Pressure Vessels and
.. .... .................. ..
....
F 100 Scope ....................................................... 50
F 200 Type of steel...................................... ........ 50
F 400 Heat treatment ............................................ 50
F 500. Test material .............................................. 50
F 600 Mechanical properties ................................... 50
SEC. 6 BARS FOR CHAIN CABLES .... .................. 52
A. General ...................................... ........ .............. 52
A 100 Scopes............................................ .... ..... 52
A 200 Steel gmdes ............................................... 52
A 400 Mechanical properties .... ........ .......... ............. 52
A 500 Heat treatment ............................................ 52
B. Testing ............................................................. 52
B 100 Number of tests ............ :............................. 52
B 200 Impact testing ............................................. 52
C. Identification of Materials .................................... 52
C 100 Marking.... ................ ........ ....................... 52
SEC. 7 STEEL CASTINGS ................................... 54
A. General .......................................... .......... ........ 54
A 100 Scope........................................ ............... 54
A 200 Manufacture .............. ................................ 54
A 300 Quality of castings ................ .......... ............. 54
A 400 Chemical composition .......... :........................ 54
B. Castings for General Applications .......................... 54
B 100 Types of steel ............................................ 54
B 300 Mechanical properties ................................... 55
C. Castings for Boilers, Unfired Pressure Vessels and
Piping Systems ................................................... 55
C 100 Types of steel .. .......... .............. .................. 55
C 200 Chemical composition .............. ..................... 55
D. Propeller Steel Castings ....................................... 56
D 100 Types of steel............................................ 56
E. Castings for Chain Cable Links, Accessories and An-
chor Shackles .......... .......... .......... ...... ................ 56
E 100 Chain cable links ......................................... 56
E 200 Chain cable accessories and anchor shackles ....... 57
F. Castings for Structural Members with Higher
Toughness Requirements ..................................... 57
F 100 Types of steel........ ................ .................... 57
P 300 Mechanical properties ................................... 57
G. Steel Castings for Liquefied Gas Systems ................ 58
G 100 Types of steel ............................................ 58
G 200 Chemical composition ................................... 58
G 300 Mechanical properties ................................... 58 ()
H. Heat Treatment .. .......... ........ .......... .................... 58
H 100 General .................................................... 58
H 200 Heat treatment of carbon and carbon-manganese
steel ......................................................... 58
H 300 Heat treatment aflow aIioy steel...................... 58
H 400 Heat treatment of stainless steel ..... .................. 58

I. Testing.. ........................................................... 59
I 100 Test samples .............................................. 59
I 200 Mechanical testing at room temperature ............. 59
I 300 Tensile testing at elevated temperature ............... 59
I 400 Hydraulic pressure testing............ .................. 59
I 500 Visual and non-destructive examination ............. 59
J. Rectification of Defective Castings ......................... 60
J 100 Repair welding ........................................... 60
K. Welding of Structural Members ............................ 60
K 100 General .................... ................................ 60
SEC. 8 IRON CASTINGS ................................ ..... 61
A. General ........................................................... . 61
A'1[;O-- Scope .... ... : ..... ; .. ;'.::; .. ... : ... ,' ... :: ... .... 61
A 200 Quality of castings ...................................... . 61
A 300 Manufacture ............................................. .
A 400 Chemical composition ........... .
A 500 Heat treatment .......................................... ..
61 C)
61 '
61
A 600 Testing ..................................................... . 61
A 700 Visual and non-destructive examination ............ . 61
A 800 Repair of defects .................... , .................. .. 62
62 C)
62
B. Nodular Cast Iron ............................................. .
B 100 Scope ...................................... .
B 200 Test material ............ . 62
B 300 Mechanical properties .. 62
B 400 Metallographic examination 62
C. Grey Cast Iron ................................................ .. 62
C 100 Scope ...................................................... . 62
C 200 Test material ............................................ .. 62
C 300 Mechanical properties .................................. . 62
SEC. 9 WROUGHT ALUMINIUM ALLOYS ............ 63
A. General...... ............ ............ .............................. 63
A 100 Scope ....................................................... 63
A 200 Aluminium grades ....................................... 63
A 400 Temper designations .................................... 63
B. Testing .............. ; ............................................ .. 65
65
65
B 100 Samples for testing ..................................... .
B 200 Tensile testing ........................ .
B 300 Other testing ............................ . .. 66
B 400 Inspection, tolerances ..... . .. ........... 66
<J

C)
<J
Pt.2 Ch.2 Sec:lO Page 67
SECTION 10
COPPER ALLOYS
Contents
A. General
A 100 Scope
B. Castings for Valves, Fittings and General Application
B 100 Types of copper aIioys
B 400 Testing
D. Tubes
D 400 Testing
A. General
A 100 Scope
101 This Section gives the requirements for copper alloys
used in castings for valves, fittings and general applications.
This Section also specifies the requirements for copper al-
loys used in propeller castings and tubes. The relevant parts
of Ch.l are also applicable.
B. Castings for Valves, Fittings and General
Application
. B' 100 TyPes ()f copper itii()ys '.
101 The requirements given in B apply to castings for
valves, fittings and other castings intended for use in vessel
construction, machinery and piping systems. All copper al-
loy castings used are to be in accordance with a recognized
national or international standard approved by the Society
for the application in
The copper alloys to be used in marine environments are to
have a satisfactory resistance to sea water corrosion.
201 Nominal chemical composition is to be in accordance
with the specification given in the approved standard.
202 When castings are made from ingots for which an
analysis already is available, and provided no alloy additions
are made, the certified analysis made by the maker of the
ingots can be accepted. Spot checks of the analysis are to
be carried out by the manufacturer.
301 Mechanical properties are to comply with the re-
quirements given in the approved standard. Any additional
requirements given for specific components by the relevant
rules for design and construction are also to be complied
with.
B 400 Testing
401 Test samples are to be cast separately in a mould and
are to be of the same material as used for the casting. The
test samples are to be according to an appropriate national
standard or specially approved by the Society. The test
samples are to undergo the same heat treatment as the cast-
ings.
402 Castings which are intended to carry fluids or steam
under pressure are to be hydraulically tested.
.....-----
-=f; \-=;
L
-....-
I
"
,
j
j
j
H I
j
1 .. I '
j
I
H fjf lOOmm
B SOmm
L 150mm
T "
15mm
o
25mm
Fig. 1
Tensile test specimen.
. io1 Por all propelleranrlj,ropeiier blade castillgs"l'artlc'"
ulars of chemical composition are to be submitted to the
Society for approval. Table Cl shows typical compositions
of propeller materials.
201 Requirements for mechanical properties are given in
Table C2.
C 300 Heat treabnent
301 For all propeller and propeller blade materials, par-
ticulars of heat treatment are to be submitted to the Society
for approval.
302 All propeller materials given in Table CI may be de-
livered in the as cast condition.
401 The test samples for the preparation of the tensile test
specimen are to be of the keel block type dimensioned as
specified in Fig.l (test coupon according to the broken line
may also be accepted).
The samples are generally to be separately cast, and they are
to be cast from the same melting charges as used for the
manufacture of the propeller or the propeller blades.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
HUles TOr ;::,nJPS, January -I
Page 68 - Pt.2 Ch.2 Sec. 1 0
Integrally cast test samples, attached either to the propeller
blades or propeller hub, may in special cases be accepted
by the Society on request.
Procedure for preparation and identification of test samples
is to be agreed with the surveyor.
Table Cl Chemical composition of propeller materials
402 At least one tensile test is to be made for each I'ro-
peller. Where the propeller is cast from two or more ladles,
one tensile test is to be made for each ladle.
403 After heat treatment and final grinding, the whole
surface of propellers and propeller blades is to be examined
by dye penetrant. Detailed information on inspection, non-
destructIve examination and acceptance critena is outlined
in Classification Note No. 4.1.
Mn-bronze (brass) Ni-Mn-bronze (brass) Ni-Al-bronze Mn-Al-bronze
Cu % 55-62 53,S-57 78 minimum 71 minimum
Al% 0,5-2,0 2,0 maximum 8,0-11,0 6,5-9,0
Fe % 0,4-2,2 1,0-2,5 3,0-6,5
1
) 2,0-6,0
Ni% 1,5 maximum 2,5-4,0 3,0-6,5
1
) 1,5-3,0
I
Mn % 2,0 maximum 2,5-4,0 3,0 maximum 8,0-14,0
Si % 0,10 maximum
Sn % 1,0 maximum 1,0 maximum
Zn % Remainder Remainder
Total others %
0,50 maximum L) 0,50 maximum
1) It is advisable to -keep the Ni-content higher than the Fe-content to prevent formation of iron corrosion products.
2) Lead is not to exceed 0,02%, otherwise cracking may occur adjacent to welds.
Table C2 Mechanical properties of propeller material
Tensile strenfth Elongation
Material
Rm. Jl!lmm AS%
mmrmum mlmmum
Mn-bronze (brass) 440 20
Ni-Mn-bronze (brass) 520 18
Ni-Al-bronze 590 15
Mn-Al-bronze 620 20
501 Removal of surface defects by grinding and repair of
defective castings by welding are subject to the surveyor's
consent.
Thepr()cedure for ..veid repalfS of propellers is t() be ap-
proved by the Society. Procedure test may be required car-
ried out before repair work commences.
502 Acceptable procedures for repair welding and
straightening of bronze propellers are outlined in Classifica-
tion Note No 4.1.
D. Tubes
101 The materials for copper tubes are to be free from
oxygen. Requirements for the alloying elements are given
in Table D I. Residual elements are not to be present in
amounts greater than specified in international or national
slandards.
201 The mechanical properties of the material at room
temperature are to comply with the requirements in Table
D2.
301 All copper and copper alloy tubes are to be delivered
in the annealed or half-hard condition according to 200.
D 400 Testing
401 Tensile testing is to be conducted on pieces from the
tube in question. If the capacity of the testing machine does
not allow testing of the whole tube, longitudinal strips may
be used.
The tubes are to be presented for testing in lots of 600 tubes
or 900 kg, whichever is the greater. Each lot is only to
contain tubes of equal dimensions, quality and heat treat-
ment. From each lot 2 tubes are to be selected for testing.
402 If one or more of the sample method tests proves un-
satisfactory, the tube or pipe in question is rejected, and
tmic;e--3s. ,many -new -pipes -gr- tubeil in ,que.stion, ..
tisfactory results - if not, the whole batch is rejected. A
renewed heat treatment of the batch and subsequent retesting
in the same way as the first time. All results are to be satis-
factory, if not, the whole batch will be rejected.
403 All tubes are to be hydraulically tested by the makers
to the following pressure:
P
P = test pressure in bar

D
D = nominal outside diameter. in mm
Rm = tensile strength according to Table D2, in N/mm
2
.
Unless otherwise stated, the test pressure need not be higher
than 70 bar.
A manufacturer's declaration for the hydraulic pressure test
may be accepted. The surveyor may demand that 10% of the
tubes are retested in his presence. If one of the tubes in a
batch does not pass the test, it will be rejected, and all other
tubes in the batch are to be retested.
Special automatic non-destructive testing may be substituted
for the pressure test, provided the manufacturer has obtained
special approval from the Society.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

,
\._---/
r=)
o

/"""".
, J'

C)
2
CONTENTS
SEC. 1 ROLLED STEEL FOR STRUCTlJRAL APPLI-
CATION .................................................. 1
A. General ...................................... ....................... 1
A 100 Scope....... ...... .. ...... ...... .. .... .. ....... .... .... ...... 1
A 200 Designation of steel grades.............................. 1
A 300 Method of manufacture .................................. 1
B. Normal Strength Steel ............... ....................... .... 2
B 100 Scope ............................................... , ........ 2
B 300 Heat treatment, condition of supply ................... 2
B 400 Mechanical properties .................................... 2
C. High Strength Steel..... .............. ....................... .... 3
C 100 Scope ..... ........ ...... ........ ........ ..... .......... ...... 3
C 200 Chemical composition .................................... 3
C 300 Heat treatment, condition of supply ................... 3
C 400 Mechanical properties ..................... : .............. 3
D. Extra High Strength Steel .. .................... .......... ..... 6
D 100 Scope ............................................... , ........ 6
D 200 Chemical composition .................................... 6
D 300 Heat treatment, condition of supply ................... 6
D 400 Mechanical properties .................................... 6
E. Testing .............................................................. 8
E 100 Test material ........................................ ....... 8
E 200 Tensile Testing ..................................... ....... 9
E 300 Impact testing ............................................. 10
E 400 Testing of through thickness properties. ..... ........ 10
E 500 Inspection - tolerances .................................. 11
F. Repairs ............................................................ 11
F 100 Surface defects ... ...... ........ ........ ...... ..... ....... 11
SEC. 2 ROLLED STEEL FOR BOILERS, PRESSURE
VESSELS AND SPECIAL APPLICATIONS ... 12
A. General........ .............................. ...................... 12
A 100 Scope....................................................... 12
A 200 Method of manufacture ................................. 12
B. Steel for Boilers and Pressure VesseIs .................... . 12
B 100
B 200
B 300

Steel gmdes ............................................... 12
Chemical composition ................................... 12
Mechanical properties ................................... 12
!2-
C. Steel for Low Temperature Service ...... ...... ............ 16
C 100 Steel grades ............................................... 16
C 200 Chemical composition .... ... ........ .... ...... ...... .... 16
C 400 Heat treatment ............................................ 17
D. Stainless Steel .......... ........ ........ ........ ............. ..... 19
D 100 Steel gmdes ... ........ ........ ........ ...... .... ... .... ... 19
D 400 Heat treatment ............................................ 19
D 500 Intercrystalline corrosion tests ......................... 19
E. Testing ... ...... .......... ........ ........ ......... ................. 20
E 100 Geneml.... .. ...... .. .. ...... .. .... .. .. .... ... .... .. .... ... 20
E 200 Tensile testing at ambient temperature .. ............. 20
E 300 Tensile testing at elevated temperature............... 20
E 400 Impact testing ............................................. 21
E 500 Drop weight testing ..................................... 21
E 600 Testing of through thickness properties . ............. 21
E 700 Intercrystalline corrosion testing ...................... 21
F. Inspection, Dimensional Tolerances and Surface Con-
dition ............................................................... 21
F 100 Inspection ................................................. 21
F 200 Tolerances................................................. 21
F 300 Surface condition and rectification of defects ....... 21
SEC. 3 CLAD STEEL PLATES .... ......... ...... .......... 22
A. General ............................................................ 22
A 100 Scope ....................................................... 22
A 200 Heat treatment .".......................................... 22
B. Base Material....................... .............. ............... 22
B 100 General... .. ........ .. .... ........ ...... ......... .. .. ...... 22
C. Cladding Metal......... .......................... ............... 22
C 100 Geneml... .. ........ .. .... ........ .. .... ......... .. .. .... .. 22
D. Testing ........ .......... ............ ........ ......... .............. 22
D 100 Geneml. .. .. ...... .. .................. ......... .. .. .. .. .. .. 22
D 200 Tensile testing ............................................ 22
D 300 Impact testing ............................................. 23
D 400 Bend testing ............................................... 23
D 500 Shear testing .............................................. 23
D 600 Ultrasonic testing ........................................ 23
D 700 Corrosion testing ......................................... 23
D 800 Inspection - tolerances ................................. 23
E. Repair and Rejection ........... ........ ...... ................. 23
E 100 Surface defects ........................................... 23
E 200 Rejection... ...... .. ............ ...... ...... .. ..... .. .. .. .. 23
F. Identification of Materials .................................... 23
F 100 Branding.. ........ .. .... ........ ...... ...... .. ..... .. .. .. .. 23
SEC. 4 STEEL TUBES, PIPES AND FITTINGS ....... 24
A. General ............................................................ 24
A 100 ....................................................... 24
A 200 Manufacture ... c. .. .... ..... ........ .. . .. 24
A 300 Quality..................................................... 24
A 400 Dimensional tolerances ................................. 24
A 600 Heat treatment ............................................ 24
A 800 Test material.............................................. 25
A 900 Visual and non-destructive testing .................... 26
A 1000 Hydraulic test ............................................. 26
A 11 00 Re-testing......... .. .............. ...... ........ ... ........ 26
A 1200 Identification..... .. .............. ...... ........ .. .. ....... 26
A 1300 Certification...... .. ............ .. .. .... .. ...... .. .... ..... 26
B. Tubes and Pipes for Ordinary Pressure Systems ....... 26
B 100 Scope.... .. .. ...... .. .............. .. ....... .. .... ..... ..... 26
B 200 Manufacture.............................................. 26
B 400 Heat treatment ............................................ 26
B 500 ..... ...... -".: .. .. ;.,.:,:.,-",.,26
C. Stainless Steel Pressure Tubes and Pipes ........ .... ..... 29
C 100 Scope ....................................................... 29
C 200 Manufacture. ...... .. .... .. ...... .. .. ...... .. ....... .. .. .. 29
C 400 Heat treatment ............ :............................... 29
C 600 Corrosion testing ......................................... 29
D. Tubes and Pipes for Low Temperature Services ........ 32
D 100 Scope ....................................................... 32
D 200 Manufacture.............................................. 32
D 300 Chemical composition................................... 32
D 400 Heat treatment ............................................ 32
E. Tubes and Pipes for Boilers, Heat Exchangers and
Superheaters ...... .......... ...... .......... ............. ........ 36
E 100 Scope ....................................................... 36
E 200 Manufacture.............................................. 36
E 300 Chemical composition ................................... 36
E 400 Heat treatment ............................................ 36
F. Fittings ............................................................ 41
F 100 Scope ....................................................... 41
F 200 Materials ............................................... ->.. 41
F 300 Manufacture .............................................. 41
F 400 Heat treatment ............................................ 41
F 500 Mechanical testing ....................................... 41
F 600 Hardness testing .......................................... 41
F 700 Corrosion testing ......................................... 41
F 800 Surface finish and dimensions ......................... 41
F 900 Marking and certification ............................... 41
General
This chapter is valid until superseded by. a revised chapter. Sup-
amendments and corrections presented in the introduction booklet.,
each year.
Revised chapters will be fonvarded to all subscribers to the Rules.
Buyers of reprints a:re advised to check the updated list of Rule
chapters printed in Pt.O Ch.l Sec.l to ensure that the chapter is
current.
Main changes
Sec. 1 Rolled Steel for Structural Application
Items B and C have been amended with respect to lACS UR WI!.
Item D has been amended with respect to lACS UR W16.
- Item A101 amended. Application length increased to 150 mm.
- New item A303 on applicable rolling methods.
- Tables Bl, 82 and B3 have been revised.
- New item C102 on fatigue strength.
- Tables Cl-C3 have been revised. New table C4 has been added.
- New item DI02 on fatigue strength.
- Tables Dl and D2 have been revised. New table D3 has been
added.
- Table El has been revised.
- New item E405 on marking of through thickness properties steel.
Sec.2 Rolled Steel for Boilers, Pressure Vessels and Special
Applications
- Item D on stainless steel has been revised.
- Tables C3, C4, Dl and D2 have been revised.
Det Norske Verilas AS
Sec.S Steel Forgings
- Item A201 has been amended on vacuum treatment.
- Items B502-503 have been amended. .
- ItemB402 has been amended.
- Tables C2 and C3 have been amended.
Sec.S Iron Castings
-.
.. Section 8 has been amended with respect to lACS UR W9/10.
- Item AlOI extended to include bainitic type cast iron.
- New and AI04 have been added.
- Item A300 on manufacture has been extended.
- Item A400 on chemical composition has been added.
- Item A500 on heat treatment has been added.
- Item A600 on testing has been added.
- Item A700 on visual and non-destructive examination has been
added.
- Item A800 on repair of defects has been added.
- Items BIOO and 200 have been amended.
- Item 8400 on metallographic examination has been added.
- Table Bl has been revised.
- Item C on Grey Cast Iron has been amended.
- Previous ite.ms D on Testing and E on Repair of Defects have
been amended and moved to A.
Sec.9 Wrought Aluminium Alloys
- Item A203 has been amended.
- New item A400 on temper designations has been added.
- Item A500 on mechanical properties has been amended.
- Tables Al to A4 on branding has been amended.
- New tables A5 to A7 on mechanical properties have been added.
- New item 8402 on under thickness tolerances has been added.
- Item DlOl on branding has been amended.
1.96.4500
It is agreed that save as provided below Det Norske Veritas, its subsidiaries, bodies, officers, directors, employees and agents shaH have no liability for any loss, damage or' expense

Whether the loss, damage or expense has affected anyone with whom Det Norske Veritas has a contract or a third party who has acted or relied on decisions made or information given
by or on behalf of Oet Norske Veritas. * However, if any person uses the services of Det Norske Veritn or its slilsidlaries or relies on any decision made or information given by or
on behalf of them and in consequence sulfers a loss, damage or expense proved to be due to their negligence, omission or default, then Oet Norske Veritas will pay by way of com-
pensation to such person a sum representing his proved loss. * In the event Det Norske Veritn or its subsidiaries may be held liable in accordance with the sections above, the amount
of compensation shall lXIder no circumstances exceed the amount of the fee, if any, charged for that particular SerViCe, decision, advice or information. * Under no circumstances
Whatsoever shall the individull or individuals who have flersonilly caused the loss, damage or expense be held liable. * In the event that any provision in this section shall be invalid

-C)
o

C) C)

404 The grain size is to be determined according to ISO
2624. The requirement given in Table D2 is to be complied
with, but testing of each delivery will normally not be re-
quired.
Table Dl Chemical composition of tubes
Quality Cu Fe Ni
Copper Minimum 99,85 1)
- -
AI-brass 76,0-79,0 - -
1) Cu + Ag
Table D2 Mechanical properties and delivery conditions of tubes
Tensile strength
Quality Delivery condition
Rm
Nlmm2
.
minimum
Copper
Annealed 220
half-hard 250
AI-brass annealed 330
1) To be completely recrystallized.
Zn
-
rest
-
-
Yield stress

.
Nlmm2
minim,EOn
65
155
155
100
120
DET NORSKE VERITAS
. i5t:2 Chj'Sec:' 69
As Al Mn
- - -
0,02-0,035 1,8-2,3
-
- -
0,5-1,0
- - 0,5-1,5
Elongation Grain size
. %
I'm
,
mrnzmum maximum
, .
40 -
20 -
35
45 1)
30
-
30
-
SECTION 11
HEAT RESISTING NON-FERROUS ALLOYS
Contents
A. General
A 100 Scope
A 200 Approval
B. T<sting
B 600 Other tests
. .....
A. General .:"
.'
A 100 Scope . f
-,. .
-
101 The requirements in this Section specify heat itlii;sting
non-ferrous alloys.
A 200 Approval
201 All materials used are to be in accordance with an
approved specification.
301 All materials supplied are to be in the condition as
regards heat treatment that is appropriate to their composi-
tion and application. Particulars are to be given in the cer-
tificate.
B. Testing
101 Number and type of test pieces, either machined from
separarely,rcasi i6 for cteep:'rupmfe
and impact tests, are to be in accordance with the approved
specification.
102 The system of recording is to be such that a batch of
material can be traced back to its cast batch and, if appro-
priate, to its heat-treatment batch.
103 Test samples are to be marked so as to be easily
identifiable with the material they represent.
201 Room temperature tensile tests are to be carried out
in accordance with Sec.!.
202 Elevated temperature tensile tests are to be carried out
in accordance with the relevant international or national
standards, e.g. ISO R 783 .
301 Impact tests are to be carried out in accordance with
Sec. 1.
401 Creep and rupture tests are to be carried out in ac-
cordance with the relevant international or national stand-
. ards, e.g. ISO R 206.
501 Areas to be subjected to non-destructive testing are to
be prepared in such a manner that the inspection can be
carried out properly.
502 All materials are to be free from harmful defects.
Where non-destructive tests are applied, a maker's certif-
icate stating that such tests have been carried out with satis-
factory results, is to be issued.
B 600 Other tests
601 Tests other than those mentioned above, which are to
be carried out in accordance with the approved
"speciiicaii6ii(s);" iire 160e peffoffiietl iisagree<!' UjS6ii Willillie"
Society. International or national standards, if existing, are
preferably to be used as a basis for the agreement.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

'J
,.--'(
,J
)
'..../

,J'
'"'
;i

PART 2 CHAPTER 2
LiUrary Z 1 AUG 2002
fJYJ. 0/ o/ung q' au

t. ..
n "'" "'l (1' H &l::f'-llllE
? .... f .- ., It_ J
.. t , !
0 ..,.-
.... '_.,_
METALLIC MATERIALS
RULES FOR
CLASSIFICATION OF
SIDPS
NEWBUILDINGS
CJ JANUARY 1996
SECTIONS
PAGE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
l:Jll

Rolled Steel for Structural Application .,."",., ... " ............................ ".,,.................... 1
Rolled Steel for Boilers, Pressure Vessels and Special Applications ............................... 12
Clad Steel Plates ....... : ....................................................................................... 22
Steel Tubes, Pipes and Fittings ............................................................................. 24
Steel Forgings .................................................................................................. 42
Bars for Chain Cables ........................................................................................ 52
Steel Castings .................................................................................................. 54
Iron Castings ................................................................................................... 61
Wrought Aluminium Alloys ................................................................... ".'''' " .. , ..... 63
Copper Alloys ..... : ........ ....... : ....... : ...... ; ..... :: ... :.: .. ; : .. :;.: .. :; .. ;:.;; ... ; .... ;: .... : .. ' ... :.:. ;"67
Heat Resisting Non-Ferrous Alloys ....................................................................... 70
DET NORSKE VERITAS
Veritasveien I, N-1322 H0Vik, Norway Tel., +4767579900 Pax: +4767579911

_ .. _. --- --- ---- -- ------------- -- -- -------- ---- ---------
,)

'\
I
(
iQ)N'v
PART 2 CHAPTER 3
)
WELDING
RULES FOR
CLASSIFICATION OF
Li6ra.ry 2 1 11lUl
f})JI[ CJl CJl u11l l' au
... I'\R, ;0-' E r-"'-'E
i.J l3 .'
........ _---- -.
C).) JANUARY 1996
SECTIONS
PAGE
1 General Requirements ......................................................................................... I
--- ----------- ---------- ----- -- ---- ---------------------
(J iJ
'J)
DET NORSKE VERITAS
Veritasveien I, N-1322 H""ik, Norway Tel.: +4767579900 Fax: +4767579911
General
each year.
current.
Main changes
Sec.1 General Reqnirell!ents
1.96.2000
It is agreed that save 19 provided below Det Norske Veritas, its subsidiaries, bodies, officers, directors, employees and agents shall have no liability for any loss, damage or expense

whether the loss, damage Of expense has affected anyone with whom Det Norske Veritl9 has a contract or a third party who has acted or relied on decisions made Of information given
by or on behalf of Det Norske Veritas. * However, if any person uses the services of Det Norske Veritas or its subsidiaries or relies on any decision made or information given by or
on behalf of them and in consequence suffers a lon, damage or expense proved to be due to their negligence, omission or default, then Det Norske Veritas will pay by way of com
of compensation shall U1der no circumstances exceed the amount of the fee, if any, charged for that particular serVice, decision, advice or information. * Under no circumstances
.'
<J
i::)
J
o
::)
(J ')
.
/
-
'
,

0

u

o

u

u

U

(
)

U

-
n

0

-
~

>
?
'
"

~

0
0

O
i
l
<

r
L
J

~

a
:
:
;

o

"

~
l
.

0
-
'

~

0

e
.
=

.:.
-
-
~ J ~
(J
:)
C) .:)
(:J ~
Rules for Mobile Offshore Units. January 1996
SECTION 1
A. Classification
A 100 General
A 100 General
Contents
A. Classification
101 The re'luirements specified in the Rules for Classi-
fication of Sliips Part 2 Chapter 3 .Welding. are to be
complied with to the extent applicable.
to Mobile Offshore Units, the term <ship. should be substi-
tuted with the term <unit>.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
~ J ~
(J
:)
C) .:)
(:J ~
SECTION 1
A. Classification
A 100 General
A 100 General
Contents
A. Classification
101 The re'luirements specified in the Rules for Classi-
fication of Sliips Part 2 Chapter 3 .Welding. are to be
complied with to the extent applicable.
to Mobile Offshore Units, the term <ship. should be substi-
tuted with the term <unit>.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
/
-
'
,

0

u

o

u

u

U

(
)

U

-
n

0

-
~

>
?
'
"

~

0
0

O
i
l
<

r
L
J

~

a
:
:
;

o

"

~
l
.

0
-
'

~

0

e
.
=

.:.
-
-
General
each year.
current.
Main changes
Sec.1 General Reqnirell!ents
1.96.2000
It is agreed that save 19 provided below Det Norske Veritas, its subsidiaries, bodies, officers, directors, employees and agents shall have no liability for any loss, damage or expense

whether the loss, damage Of expense has affected anyone with whom Det Norske Veritl9 has a contract or a third party who has acted or relied on decisions made Of information given
by or on behalf of Det Norske Veritas. * However, if any person uses the services of Det Norske Veritas or its subsidiaries or relies on any decision made or information given by or
on behalf of them and in consequence suffers a lon, damage or expense proved to be due to their negligence, omission or default, then Det Norske Veritas will pay by way of com
of compensation shall U1der no circumstances exceed the amount of the fee, if any, charged for that particular serVice, decision, advice or information. * Under no circumstances
.'
<J
i::)
J
o
::)
(J ')
.

_ .. _. --- --- ---- -- ------------- -- -- -------- ---- ---------
,)

'\
I
(
iQ)N'v
PART 2 CHAPTER 3
)
WELDING
RULES FOR
CLASSIFICATION OF
Li6ra.ry 2 1 11lUl
f})JI[ CJl CJl u11l l' au
... I'\R, ;0-' E r-"'-'E
i.J l3 .'
........ _---- -.
C).) JANUARY 1996
SECTIONS
PAGE
--- ----------- ---------- ----- -- ---- ---------------------
(J iJ
'J)
DET NORSKE VERITAS
Veritasveien I, N-1322 H""ik, Norway Tel.: +4767579900 Fax: +4767579911
\ I
iQ)NWI
t
Library Z 1 AUG ZU02 .
.1YJ{ 0/ o/ung r[ au
. l ,(",_ ',,-;IJ
!l t;'::\,.:
.' ,.-, -, -f.,.::.-',,".!.::
RULES FOR
CLASSIFICATION OF
SIDPS
NEWBUILDINGS
)J PART 2 CHAPTER 3
WELDING
... ,)

JANUARY 1996
SECTIONS PAGE
2 Welding Procedures and Approval of Welders .......................................................... 3
3 Type Approval of Welding Consumables ................................................................ 16
4 Welding of Clad Steel Plates ................................................................................ 40
C) i:J

'.j
'.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
Veritasveien 1. N1322 H0Vik. Norway Tel.: +4767579900 Fax: +47675799 11
General
The Rule changes ceme into force on 1st of July 1996.
The introduction booklet is nonnally in January and July
each year.
current.
- Table C2 has been amended.
- A new item CSOO on HAZ softening has been added.
- A new table C4 has been added. .
- A new item D on welding procedures, Ferritic Austenitic Stain-
less Steel (Duplex) has been added.
- Item E on approval of welders has been amended and extended.
Sec.3 Welding Consumables
- Item JIOI has been amended and extended to include grade A
(From lACS UR W23).
- Item JI03 has been amended.
- Item J202 has been amended.
- Table J1 has been amended.
- A new table J2 on butt weld test requirements has been added.
- Item L20I on alI-weldmeta! tests has been amended.
- A new item L202 on butt weld tests for duplex stainless steel
Main changes
wires has been added.
- Item L401 has been supplemented with range of ferrite content. I"
- Item LSO! on pitting and crevice corrosion resistance has been "-
Sec.2 Welding Procedures and ApprovaJ of Welders
- Item B308 has been amended and extended to include extra high
strength steel.
strength steel. New Figs. 10.12 have been added.
- Table B2 and B4 have been amended.
- A new table B5 on range of approval for type of joint has been
added.
amended.
1.96.4500
It is agreed that sive IS provided below oet Norske VeritlS. its subsidieries. bodies, officers. directors. employees and agents shall have no liebility for eny loss. damage or expense

whether the less, demage or expense hes effected enyone with whom Det Norske Veritls hes e contract or a third party who hes ected or relied on decisions mede or informetion given
by Of on behalf of Det Norske Veritas. * However, if any pcrson UIIes the services of Oct Norske Veritas or its subsidiaries or relies on any decision made or information given by or
on behalf of them and in consequence suffers e loss. demege or expense proved to be due to their negligence. omission or default. then oet Nerskc Veritas will pay by way of com-
pensetion to such person e sum representing his proved loss. "* In the event Oct Norske VeritlS or its subsidieries mey be held liable in eccordance with the sections ebove. the emount
of compensation shall under no circumstances exceed the amoU1t of the fee, if any. charged fer that particuler service. decision. advice or informetion. "* Under no circumstances
whatsoever shall the individuel or individuals who have personally caused the loss. damage or expense be held liable. * In the event that any provision in this section shell be invalid
under the Jaw of any jurisdiction. the Validity of the remeining provisions shall not in any way be affected.
... 'J
()
C)

,
J
i
o
8
8

~
)
C)
C)
()
.C)
) !J
CONTENTS
SEC. 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ........ 1
A. General .. ....... ......... ..... .... 1
A 100 Scope........................................................ 1
A 200 Basic requirements ........................................ 1
A 300 Welding shops and -contractors ... "................... 1
A 400 Welding consurnables .................................... 1
B. Testing .............................................................. 1
B 100 General..................................................... 1
B 300 Bend testing ................................................ 2
SEC.2 WELDING PROCEDURES AND APPROVAL
OF WELDERS .......................................... 3
A. General............................................................. 3
A 100 Scope ........................................................ 3
A 200 Defmitions.. ........ .......... .............. .. ............. 3
B. Welding Procedures, Steel ..................................... 3
B 100 Welding procedure specification, WPS ............... 3
B 200 Welding procedure qualification test, WPQT ........ 3
B 300 WPQT for butt welds on plates ........................ 3
B 400 WPQT for butt welds on tubes .... """ .... ,, ......... 5
B 500 WPQT for full penetration T-, Y-, and K- joints ... 6
B 600 WPQT for tubular joints ................................ 6
B 700 WPQT for fillet welds ........ "......................... 7
B 800 Retesting ........................ ".......................... 7
B 900 Validity of qualified welding procedures ............. 7
B 1000 . Welding procedure qualification record, WPQR " .. 9
B 1100 WPQT for liquefied gas systems...................... 10
C. Welding Procedures, Aluminium ........................... 11
C 100 General .................................................... 11
C 200 WPQT for butt welds ................ " ...... " ......... 11
C 300 WPQT for fillet welds ...... ".......................... 13
C 400 Retesting """"""""""""""",,,,"""""""'" 13
C 500 HAZ softening adjacent to welds .. " ................. 13
D. Welding procedures, Ferritic-Austenitic Stainless Steel
(Duplex) ........................................................... 14
D 100 General .................................................... 14
D 200 Additional testing ........................................ 14
D 300 Validity of a qualified welding procedure ........... 14
E, Approvol ofW.ld .... ,,,,m,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, H
E 100 General.................................................... 14
E 200 Standards for approval testing ......................... 14
E 300 Certification ............................................... 15
SEC. 3 TYPE APPROVAL OF WELDING CONSUM-
ABLES ................................................... 16
A. General............................................................ 16
A 100 Scope ....................................................... 16
A 200 Approval procedure ..................................... 16
A 300 Approval testing ......................................... 17
A 400 Changes.. .......... ................ ....................... 17
A 500 Basic groups and grades ................................ 17
A 600 Testing procedure........................................ 17
A 700 Test specimens ............ ,.............................. 17
A 800 Hydrogen test .......................... " ................. 18
A 900 Re-testing .................................................. 18
B. Covered Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc Welding of
Normal and High Strength Steels ................ ...... 18
B 100 General .............................................. ...... 18
B 200 All-weld-meta! test ....................................... 18
B 300 Butt-weld test .......................... " ...... "" ....... 19
B 400 Hydrogen test .. " ......................................... 20
B 500 Covered electrodes for fillet welding ................. 20
B 600 Covered electrodes for gravity or contact welding 21
B 700 Deep penetration electrodes ............................ 21
B 800 Annual tests ............................ "................. 22
B 900 Upgrading............................................ ..... 22
C. Wire/Flux Combinations for Submerged Arc Welding 22
C 100 General.......... ................ ........ .................. 22
C 200 Multi-run technique.,. , ..... , .. ,......................... 22
C 300 Two-run technique....................................... 24
C 400 Annual tests ...... .. .. ............... 24
C 500 Upgrading ........ .. 24
D. Combinations for Use in One-side Automatic Welding
Processes .......................................................... 25
D 100 General.................................................... 25
D 200 One-run welding ......................................... 25
D 300 Multi-run welding ....................................... 26
D 400 One-and multi-run welding ............................. 26
D 500 Testing.................................... ................. 26
D 600 Requirements .............. " ............................. 26
D 700 Annual tests ........................................ ,...... 26
D 800 Upgrading.. .............. .......... ....................... 27
E. Wires and Wire/Gas Combinations for Metal Arc
Welding ........................................................... 27
E 100 Genera! ............................... ,'........ ............ 27
E 200 Semi-automatic multi-run welding ",................. 27
E 300 Automatic multi-run welding ................ .......... 28
E 400 Two-run welding ........................................ 29
E 500 Annual tests ............................................... 30
E 600 Upgrading.......................... .. .. .. ...... ........... 30
F. Combinations for Use in Electro-slag and Electro-gas
Welding Processes .............................................. 30
F 100 Genera! .................................... ".. ............ 30
F 200 Initial tests ................................ ".............. 30
F 300 Annual tests ............................................... 31
G. Welding Consumables for Welding of Steel Grades NV
2-4, NV 2-4L, NV 4-4 and NV 4-4L for Low-
Temperature Applications .................................... 31
G 100 General.......................................... .......... 31
G 200 Additional requirements .................... ,........... 31
G 300 Annual tests ............................................... 31
H. Welding Consumables for Low-Alloy, Heat-Resisting
Steels (NY 0,3Mo, NV lCr 0,5Mo and NV 2,25Cr
IMo) ............................................................... 32
H 100 Genera! .................................... ".......... .... 32
H 200 Additional requirements ................................ 32
H 300 Chemical composition ................................... 32
H 400 Annual tests ............................................... 33
I. Welding Consumables for Welding of Steel Grades NV
1,5Ni, NV 3,5Ni, NV 5Ni and NV 9Ni .................... 33
I 100 Genera!.......................................... .......... 33
I 200 KdliiliOtihl reqUirtments ................................ ~ ~
I 300 Annual test ................................................ 34
1 400 Other welding consumables ............................ 34
J. Welding Consumables for Welding of Extra High
Strength Steels ................................................... 34
J 100 General........................................ .... .. ...... 34
J 200 Additional requirements ................................. 34
J 300 Annual tests ............................................... 35
K. Welding Consumables for Welding of Austenitic
Stainless Steels ................................................... 35
K 100 General ...... " ............................................ 35
K 200 All-weld-metal test ....................................... 36
K 300 Chemical composition ................................... 36
K 400 Possible additional tests ................................. 36
K 500 Annual tests .. ""......................................... 36
L. Welding Consumables for Welding of Ferritic-
Austenitic Stainless Steels (Duplex Steels) ................ 38
L 100 General.... .......... ...................................... 38
L 200 Test assemblies ..................................... : ..... 38
L 300 Chemical composition .. :................................ 38
L 400 Microstructural examination ..................... ...... 38
L 500 Corrosion test .. ......................... ................. 38
L 600 Annual tests ... :........................................... 38
M. Welding Consumables for Welding of Aluminium Al-
loys for General and Low-Temperature Service ........ 38
M 100 General .................................... " .............. 38
M 200 Test assemblies ........................................... 38
M 300 Testing .................................................... , 38
M 400 Annual tests ............................................... 39
SEC. 4 WELDING OF CLAD STEEL PLATES ........ 40
A. General .............................. .............................. 40 B. Welding ...... ...... .......... .................... ................. 40
A 100 Scope.......................................... ............. 40 B 100 Welding methods - deposited meta! ................. 40
B 200 Groove preparation ...................................... 40
B 300 Welding procedure .. ...... ............ .......... ......... 40

'0
.J
.:)
o

8

,.-.....1-----
Qpt22 222
1-3
Weld grove face to be ground smooth.
/////////
Root bead (1) of mild steel is not to penetrate the cladding.

77277/ ..
The root bead is back-gauged or ground.

First bead on the clad side to be welded with an over-alloyed
consumable (309-type), top layer to match the composition
of the cladding (3O!s-type).
RECOMMENDED TYPES OF JOINTS

. _:
,
, '
/'<D :1\
to be welded with an over-alloyed consumable.
@ to be welded with a consumable matching the
composition of the cladding.

,'0
Backing to be ground back enough to give room for at least
two high-alloyed layers.
Fig. 2
Examples on welding sequence
clad plate ,
stainless steel plate

Butt weld between clad plate and stainless steel plate:
The groove edge on the clad plate is buttered with an over-
alloyed consumable, the joint may then be welded with a
consumable matching the stainless steel.
clad plate
""p
p' mild steel plate
clad plate mild steel plate
Butt weld between clad plate and mild steel plate; the clad-
ding is welded with an over-alloyed type of consumable.

clad plate
Only to be used in assemblies subjected to low stresses;
consumable to match the cladding:
clad plate
To be used in assemblies subject to high stresses: consum-
able to be of over-alloyed type to compensate for the mixing
with mild steel backing.
clad
plate
clad plate
Assembly subjected to high stresses; root beads can be
welded with over-alloyed consumables and the top layer
with ordinary stainless steel consumable, or root bead is
welded with a mild steel consumable and the top layer with
over-alloyed consumable.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
SECTION 4
WELDING OF CLAD STEEL PLATES
Contents
A. General
A 100 Scope
B. Welding
B 100 Welding methods - deposited meta!
B 200 Groove preparation
B 300 Welding procedure
A. General
A 100 Scope
101 The requirements in this Section specify welding of
steel plates with austenitic stainless steel cladding.
B. Welding
B 100 Welding methods - deposited metal
101 For welding of steel plates with austenitic stainless
steel cladding, only electrodes approved by the Society are
to be used, and welding is to be carried out only by certified
welders.
102 The welding may be carried out by means of shielded
metal-arc welding, automatic or semi-automatic arc welding
under inert gas and/or flux or a combination of these meth-
ods.
103 The weld joint is to have the same resistance to cor-
rosion as the cladding metal, and the corrosion-resistant de-
posited metal is to have at least the same thickness as the
cladding metal.
104 The chemical composition of the weld metal in the top
-Mlie
to have at least the same thickness as the cladding on the
original plate.
201 Proper groove shape in connection with correct wel-
ding sequence is to be employed. The edges are to be pre-
pared with a cutting tool or by grinding.
202 Clad steel may be flame-<:ut provided this is done
from the base plated side. It is reco=ended that the cutting
face is removed in a depth of about 2 =. When shearing
is used, the cladding side must face upwards.
203 If there are alignment difficulties or if the welded
connection is highly stressed, an edge preparation involving
the removal of the cladding, adjacent to the weld is recom-
mended.
301 When welding clad materials, mixihg of base metal
and weld deposit, as well as mixing of the two types of high
alloyed weld deposit is to be held at a minimum. Low wel-
ding current and small welding consumable dimensions are
to be used. The degree of dilution is preferably to be kept
below 30%. The degree of dilution is defined as the amount
of base metal in the weld metal.
302 The use of low-alloyed or non-alloyed consumables
on the cladding is not allowed.
303 At least two layers of the alloyed weld metal are to
be deposited when welding the backing from the clad steel
side, even if it is necessary to chip or grind off part of the
first stainless bead to make room for the second pass. At
least, the first bead is to be made with an over-alloyed con-
sumable (e.g. NV 309).
304 The mild steel backing is as far as possible to be
welded before the stainless cladding and is to be welded with
suitable mild steel consumable. Care must be taken to pre-
vent the root bead from penetrating into the cladding. Tack
welds are to be of sufficient size, have full penetration and
an even surface, so that they may be covered by the first
weld bead without removal.
Guidance note:
For the top layer on the backing only extensively dried, extra-
low hydrogen type of electrodes with grade-suffIx HH are to be
used.

305 When welding pipes where there is access only from
the outside, the entire cross-section is to be built up by al-
loyed weld metal corresponding to the cladding. The sides
of the groove are preferably to be covered with an over-al-
loyed consumable (buttering) before joining.
B 60-70"
! -=-SZIJ
A 80-90"
:3 0'.
i\llJ II ntz-l
60'

I . " I
I '" 1
i
N
_,... I. A L---.J '-----J
1[: G'I I,M i
0-2.0
60-90'
H

ij>30
A

A .
-,
60-90"
Fig. 1
Examples on most commonly used grooves
DET NORSKE VERITAS

'-_/
CJ
<J
)
:J
C)

C)
2
SECTION 1
Contents
A. General
A 100 Scope
A 200 Basic requirements
A 300 Welding shops and -contractors
A 400 Welding consumables
B. Testing
B 100 General
B 200 Tensile testing at ambient temperature
B 300 Bend testing
A. General
A 100 Scope
101 This Chapter specifies the requirements for welding
shops and -contractors, welders, welding consumables and
welding procedures in general as well as procedures and
methods for welding of clad steel plates and liquefied gas
systems.
A 200. Basic requirements
201 Welding of important structures: hull, superstructure
and deckhouse, machinery installations: boilers, pressure
vessels and pipe systems and equipments: stemframes, rud-
ders, rudder stocks and rudder hom are to be carried out by
approved welders, with approved welding consumables and
at welding shops and -<:ontractors recognized by the Society.
Manufacturers of boilers and pressure vessels Class I-II are
to obtain the approval according to a detailed progra=e,
available by the local surveyor.
301 Welding shops and -<:ontractors will have to prove
their qualifications for the welding operations in question.
302 It that weidingshops and -contractors
make use of the necessary equipment for carrying out in-
spection of the welding operations in a satisfactory manner.
303 Important welding operations are to be carried out
under daily supervision of an inspector, who has the expe-
rience and qualifications which enable him to judge this type
of work. The work of each welder is to be regularly ex-
amined.
304 The welding shops and -<:ontractors are to keep a card
index or register of all approved welders. The register is to
give information on training of the welders and date and
results of qualification tests. Information about the base
metal, type of welding consumable, joint design and welding
positions is to be stated in the event of re-qualification tests.
The surveyor is to be allowed to examine the register at any
time.
401 Consumables for welding of ships, mobile offshore
units, fixed offshore installations and other structures in-
tended for classification are to be approved by the Society_
402 Type approval of welding consumables will be con-
sidered subject to compliance with the requirements given
in Sec.3.
403 All brand names under which a tested and approved
ufacturer is to certify that the welding consumables marketed
under alternative brand names are identical with the con-
sumables tested for approval.
B. Testing
B 100 General
101 Testing of welds is to be carried out as specified in
200 to 300. Reference is also made to relevant paragraphs
in Ch.1 Sec.2.
201 For tensile testing of all-weld-metal and butt welds
two different types of test specimens may be used, round test
specimens or flat test specimens (see Fig.l) as described
below:
A - Deposited metal tensile test
Normally, round test specimens with the following dimen-
sions are to be used:
d = 10 mm
Lo = 50 mm
Lc = 60=

B - Butt weld tensile test for testing of the weld as a whole
Flat test specimens with the weld machined flush with the
surface of the plate, are to be used. The dimensions are to
be as follows:
a = thickness of plate, t
b =25=
La = Lc = 3t or 2t + width of weld, whichever is the
greatest
R
C - Butt weld tensile test
be as follows:
b = 30=
Lo = 6 = + width of weld + 6 =
R =50=
II_ Lo I I
Le j
Flat
welding consumable is marketed, are to be registered by the Fig. 1
Society. In order to avoid duplication of tests, the man- Tensile test specimen
DET NORsKE VERITAS
B 300 Bend testing
301 Flat bend test specimens, as given in Fig.2 are to be
used. Edges on tension side to be rounded to a radius of I
to2 mm.
I' 'I
all
lla
(- 9a+O)
Fig_ 2
test specimen
Fig. 3
Wrap around bend test
302 When the wrap around bend test, exemplified in Fig.3
is used, e.g. for the side bend test of a weld, the length of
the test specimen has to be greater than the length Ila shown
in Fig.2.
303 For butt weld bend test specimens, the weld is to be
machined flush with the surface of the plate.
304 For transverse face-bend and root-bend test specimens
for butt weld test the dimensions are to be as follows:
a = as rolled thickness t of the plate
b = 30 mm
of the test specimen.
305 For transverse side-bend test specimens for butt weld
test the dimensions are to be as follows:
a =lOmm
b = as rolled thickness t of the plate
If t ;;:: 40 mm, the side-bend test specimen may be subdi-
vided, each part being at least 20 mm wide.
306 When a longitudinal face-bend or root-bend weld test
is required, a test specimen according to an appropriate
standard will be accepted.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

I,:]
."J
'.
':J
:]
:J
"J
':J
Rules for Ships , January 1996
-m
requirements in ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
Sec. VIII, Div. 2, AI-511 are satisfied.
Mechanical testing:
One longitudinal and one transverse tensile test specimen
and two side bend test specimen (<<Wrap around.. bending)
are to be taken as shown in Fig_18.
50mm APPROXJ.: .. __ L
E
E

'"
III : DISCARD
f-----------
SIDE BEND TEST SPECIMEN
--- -jHr------
rTRANSVERSE TENSILE SPECIMEN
---TIr-----
,,!--! I
I JJ: ... L
I i TEST SPECI MEN
II

____ -.l.W ______
_____
II I r
II II DISCARD
iii j
L
3QOmm APPROX.
Fig. 18
Test assembly and location of specimens .
;
I
.--1

x
&1
a.
a.
..
E
E
0
0
"'
j
-.J
The test specimens are to be prepared according to A700.
Mechanical test requirements:
The tensile strength, yield point and elongation are to be
reported for the Society's consideration. The tensile- and
yield strength for both weld metal and welded joint are not
to be less than that specified for .the parent material (in soft
condition), for which the consumable is intended. For ma-
terials in deformation hardened or aged condition, the choice
of consumable and requirements to mechanical properties
are to be evaluated in each particular case.
The bend test specimens can be considered as complying
with the requirements if, after bending through an angle of
180
0
over a former with diameter four times the thickness
of the specimen, no crack or defect having any dimensions
exceeding 3 mm can be seen on the outer surface of the test
specimen.
M 400 Annual tests
401 One test assembly is to be welded in the flat position.
Testing of this assembly is to be carried out as prescribed
above for the initial testing.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
L. Welding Consumables for Welding of Ferri-
tic-Austenitic Stainless Steels (Duplex Steels)
L 100 General
101 Approval of welding consumables for ferritic austeni-
tic stainless steels (duplex steels) will be considered subject
to compliance with the specified tests and requirements be-
low.
102 Parent plate material should preferably have a com-
position matching that of the electrode to be tested.
L 200 Test assemblies
201 All-weld-metal tests
Two all-weld-metal test assemblies are to be prepared as
shown in Fig.17, one using a 2,4-3,5 mm 0 electrode and
the other using the largest size manufactured.
For wire/gas combinations the wire size is to be 1,2mm and
the largest size manufactured.
For flux cored wire/gas combination the wire size is to be
1,2 or 1,6 mm and the largest size manufactured.
For wirelflux combinations the smallest and largest size
manufactured are to be tested.
The weld metal is to be deposited in accordance with normal
welding practice. The direction of deposition is to be re-
versed between subsequent layers, each bead being not
wider than 4 times the core wire diameter and not exceeding
4 mm in thickness. Between each run, the assembly is to be
left in still air. until it has cooled below lS0'C, the temper-
ature being checked in the middle of the weld bead surface.
Test specimens:
Two longitudinal tensile and three impact test specimens are
to be taken from each test assembly as shown in Fig.17.
Test requirements:
reported. For information, the value for reduction of .area is
also to be reported. The results of the tensile tests are not
to be less than that specified for the base material, for which
__
The impact test specimens are to be tested at -20'C and
minimum average impact energy is to 'be 27 J for full size
test specimens.
202 Butt weld tests
Butt-weld test assemblies as shown in Fig.2 are to be pre-
pared for each welding position for which the wire is re-
commended.
The test assemblies are to be prepared using wire or elec-
trode of one of the smaller sizes manufactured and for the
remaining runs wires or electrodes of the largest size for the
position concerned.
Test specimens:
One transverse tensile, two bend and three impact test spe-
cimens are to be taken from each test assembly as shown in
Fig.2
Test requirements:
The result of the transverse tensile test is not to be less than
that specified for the base metal, for which the consumable
is intended.
minimum average impact energy is to be 27 J for full size
test specimens.
with the requirements if, after bending, no crack or defect
having any dimension exceeding 3 mm can be seen on the
outer surface of the test specimen.
L 300 Chemical composition
301 Chemical analysis is to be carried mit for all dimen-
sions of welding consumables manufactured. The analysis
is to be carried out as stipulated in H300' and is to be re-
ported for approval.
302 The chemical composition of the core wire is also to
be reported.
L 400 Microstructural examination
401 The ferrite/austenite-ratio of the weld is to be deter-
mined. The' ferrite content in average is to be in the range
of2S to 70%.
L 500 Corrosion test
501 For the determination of pitting and crevice corrosion
resistance, one test according to ASTM G48, Method A is
required. The test specimen is to be exposed to the solution
ata temperature of 20'C for 24 hours. No pitting attack
shall be visible on the test faces, and the general weight loss
is to be less than 20 mg.
L 600 Annual tests
601 Annual test for welding consumables comprises
chemical analysis only. 'Welding consumables of two differ-
ent dimensions are to be tested.
M. Welding Consumables for Welding of Alu-
minium Alloys for General and Low-Tempera-
ture Service
M 100 General
101 Approval of welding consumables for aluminium al-
loys will be considered Subject to compliance with the spe-
cified tests and requirements in 200 to 400.
M Zijij 'i'estassembiies .
201 The welding consumables are to have a suitable. hard-
ness and smooth - surface slivers, depressions,
scratches or foreign matters that would adversely affect the
welding properties when operating the welding equipment.
202 Tolerances for dimensions are to be kept within the
limits guaranteed in the manufacturers specifications.
203 The recommended and used composition for the
shielding gases is to be reported.
Preparation of test assemblies:
Two test assemblies with dimensions as shown in Fig.1S are
to be welded in the flat position, one using the smallest wire
size manufactured and the other using the largest size man-
ufactured. .
Application of backing strips is optional, i.e. the joint may
be welded without backing strip with the root of weld
chipped out to sound metal and re-welded from the second
side. The metal for the backing strip is to be the same as that
for the test plates. The test assemblies are neither to be pre-
heated nor postheat treated. The welding is to be carried out
at ambient temperature.
M 300 Testing
301 Non-destructive examination:
Prior to testing the backing strip is to be chipped off. The
radiographic test will be considered as passed, provided the
DEI NORSKE VERITAS
,) ,J
.-J
".
C)
-:J
()
i)
()
SECTION 2
WELDING PROCEDURES AND APPROVAL OF WELDERS
Contents
A. General
A 100 Scope
A 200 Defmitions
B. Welding Procedures, Steel
B 100 Welding procedure specification, WPS
B 200 Welding procedure qualification test, WPQT
B 300 WPQT for butt welds on plates
B 400 WPQT for butt welds on tubes
B 500 WPQT for full penetrationT-, Y-, and K- joints
B 600 WPQT for tubular joints
B 700 WPQT for fillet welds
B 800 Retesting
B 900 Validity of qualified welding procedures
B 1000 Welding procedure qualification record, WPQR
B 11 00 WPQT for liquefied gas systems
C. Welding Procedures, Aluminium
e 100 General
e 200' WPQT for butt welds
e 300 WPQT for fillet welds
e 400 . Retesting
C 500 HAZ softening adjacent to welds
D. Welding procedures, Ferritic-Austenitic Stainless Steel (Du-
General
Additional testing
plex)
D 100
D 200
D 300 Validity of a qualified welding procedure
E. Approval of Welders
E 100 General
E 200 Standards for approval testing
E 300 Certification'
. - -
A. General
A 100 Scope
101 This Section specifies the requirements for welding
procedures and welding procedure qualification tests as well
as approval of welders.
A 200 Def"mitions
201 Welding procedure specification (WPS): A specifica-
tion of materials, detailed methods, practices and parameters
employed in the welding of a particular joint.
202 Welding procedure qualification test (WPQT): A test
carried out in order to demonstrate that a weld made ac-
cording to a specific procedure specification meets the given
requirements.
203 Welding procedure qualification record (WPQR): The
record of the actual parameters employed during welding
of the qualification test piece, and results from the non-des-
tructive testing and mechanical testing.
204 Non-destructive testing (NDT): Visual inspection, ra-
diographic testing, ultrasonic testing, magnetic particle test-
ing, penetrant testing and other non-destructive methods for
revealing defects and irregularities.
101 WPS subjected to approval is to contain as a minimum
the following information as relevant for the welding opera-
tion:
- material: standard, grade and modification
- nominal thickness/diameter range (dimensions)
- welding process
- joint! groove design
- welding position and direction
- welding consumables: trade name, electrode/wire diam-
eter, shielding gas, flux and recognized classification
- welding sequence (number and order of passes/layers)
- welding parameters: voltage, current, polarity and wel-
ding speed
- preheat and interpass temperature
- post weld heat treatment.
201 When WPQT is required, the tests must be performed
in the environment applicable to the actual production and
meet the specified minimum requirements prior to com-
mencing the production welding.
202 The qualification test is to be witnessed by the sur-
veyor.
301 The test assembly consists of two plates welded to-
gether. As far as possible the plates are to have a size which
can simulate the heat transfer during the production welding.
For manual or semiautomatic welding, a test assembly ac-
cording to Fig. 1 is to be carried out with:
lmin == 300 mm
Lmin= 350 mm
For automatic welding, the dimensions are to be:
lmin = 400 mm
Lmin= 1000 mm
Edge preparation and fit-up are to be as detailed in the WPS.
The plates are to be joined and held by tack welds to provide
the correct gap for the edge preparation used.
SO mm of each end of the test piece is to be discarded.
302 NDT is to be carried out in accordance with the spe-
cification given for the production welding in question. The
extent of the testing is to be as follows:
- 100 % visual inspection
- 100 % radiographic or ultrasonic testing
- 100 % surface crack detection (dye penetrant or magnetic
particle testing)
The soundness of the weld is to comply with requirements
given in the relevant parts of the Rules.
303 The following mechanical tests are required from each
assembly (see Fig.2):
- 1 tensile test (flat specimen transverse to the weld)
DEI NORSKE VERITAS
50 I
50 I
. r Plate rolling
.direction
(Steel plates
KVT-tested)
112 112
Fig. 1
Test assembly for butt welds on plates
l

- I root and 1 face bend tests when t :S 20 rom and 2 side
bend tests when t > 20 rom
- when the welding consumable is not approved, I extra
tensile test (round specimen from the weld metal)
- 12 Charpy V-notch tests whith the notch location as given
in 308
- I macrosection test (metallographic examination + hard-
ness measurements).
3U4!;peci!iiens tor transverse tensile testing areio be In
accordance with Sec.1 B201, type B.
The tensile strength is not to be below the specified mini-
mum tensile strength for the steel grade in question.
305 The round tensile specimen is to be machined to the
dimensions shown in Sec.1 B201, type A, care being taken
that the longitudinal axis coincides with the intersection be-
tween the midplane of the weld, and the midplane of the
plates. If the section area of the weld metal is too small to
allow sampling of the round specimen, an all-weld-metal
tensile test is to be carried out according to the requirements
given in Sec.3.
306 Transverse side bend, root bend and face bend speci-
mens are to be machined to the dimensions shown in Sec. I
B300.
For a mixed or heterogeneous butt joint one longitudinal
bend test specimen may be used instead of root and face or
side bend tests.
The test specimens are to be bent on a mandrel with diam-
eter 4xt, where t is the thickness of the specimen, except for
extra high strength steels grades 550, 620, and 690 where
the diameter is to be 5xt.
The bending angle is to be at least 120
0
After bending, the
test specimens are not to reveal any open defects in any di-
rection greater than 3 mm. Defects appearing at the corners
Weld metal
Fusion lin.
HAZ -:- 2mm
HAZ.;. 5mm
.11 W
Fig. 2
Sampling of test specimens on plates
0,2
side bend
te'"
1
50mm
of a test specimen during testing are to be ignored in the
evaluation.
307 The macro section is to include about 10 mm of unaf-
fected base material and is to be prepared and etched on one
side to clearly reveal the fusion line and the HAZ. Cracks
and lack of fusion are not accepted.
The welded joints are to have a regular profile with smooth
trnmition. to the bAse materials-and witiloutsignificalll Of
excessive reinforcement.
308 The Charpy V -notch specimens are to be machined in
accordance with the requirements given in Ch.1 Sec.2 (ISO
148). The specimens are to be sampled 2 mm below the
surface of the parent material and transverse to the weld.
12 Charpy V -notch specimens are to be localized in the
welded joint as follows:
- 3 specimens with the notch along the weld metal centre-
line
- 3 specimens with the notch in the fusion line
- 3 specimens with the notch in the HAZ, 2 mm from the
fusion line (Note I)
fusion line (Note 1).
Guidance note:
HAZ impact test specimens are normally not required for grade
NV A steels. If tested the average value for absorbed energy in
weld metal, fusion line and HAZ is not to be less than 27 J at
20C.

The V -notch is to be perpendicular to the plate surface.
For plate thicknesses >50 mm' and fot one side welded as-
semblies with plate thickness > 20 mm, one additional set
of specimens is to be taken in the weld metal root area.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
)
,"]
:J
':J

")
/J
Table Kl I)
Yield stress, RpO.2 Tensile strength, Rm
Electrode grade
minimum, minimum,
Nlmm2 Nlmm2
NY 308 Mo 290 550
NY 308 290 550
NY 308 L 270 520
NY 309 290 550
NY 309 L 270 520
NY 309 Nb 290 550
NY 309 Mo 290 550
NY 309 MoL 270 520
NY 310 290 550
NY 310 Nb 290 550
NY 310 Mo 290 550
NY 312 350 660
.NY 316 290 550
NY 316 L 270 520
NY 317 290 550
NY 317 L 270 520
NY 318 290 550
NY 330 270 520
NY 347 290 550
NY 349 360 690
1) The values for reduction of area to be reported for information.
Table K2 I)
C Mn Si
Electrode maxi- Cr Ni Mo Nb-To maxi- maxi-
grade mwn % % % % mum mum
% % %
NY 308
0,08 18,0-21,0 9,0-11,0 2,0-3,0 2,5 0,90
Mo
-
NY 308 0,08 18,0-21,0 9,0-11,0
-
- 2,5 0,90
NV 308 L 0,03 18,0-21,0 9,0-11,0
-
- 2,5 0,90
NY 309 0,15 22,0-25,0 12,0-14,0 -
- 2,5 0,90
NY 309 L 0,03 22,0-25,0 12,0-14,0 -
- 2,5 0,90
NY 309 Nb 0,12 22,0-25,0 12,0-14,0
-
0,7-1,0 2,5 0,90
NY 309
0,12 22,0-25,0 12,0-14,0 2,0-3,0 2,5 0,90
Mo
-
NV 309
0,03 22,0-25,0 12,0-14,0 2,0-3,0 2,5 0,90
MoL
-
NY 310 0,20 25,0-28,0 20,0-22,5 -
- 2,5 0,75
NV 310 Nb 0,12 25,0-28,0 20,0-22,0 -
0,7-1,0 2,5 0,75
NY 310
0,12 25,0-28,0 20,0-22,0 2,0-3,0 2,5 0,75
Mo
-
NY 312 0,15 28,0-32,0 8,0-10,5 -
- 2,5 0,90
NY 316 0,08 17,0-20,0 11,0-14,0 2,0-3,0 - 2,5 0,90
NY 316 L 0,03 17,0-20,0 11,0-14,0 2,0-3,0
- 2,5 0,90
NY 317 0,08 18,0-21,0 12,0-14,0 3,0-4,0 - 2,5 0,90
NV 317 L 0,03 18,0-21,0 12,0-14,0 3-,0-4,0 - 2,5 0,90
NY 318 0,08 17,0-20,0 11,0-14,0 2,0-3,0 6xC-l,0 2,5 0,90
NY 330 0,25 14,0-17,0 33,0-37,0
- - 2,5 0,90
NY 347 0,08 18,0-21,0 9,0-11,0 . 8xC-l,0 2,5 0,90
NY 349 0,13 18,0-21,0 8,0-10,5 0,35-0,65 0,75-1,2 2,5 0,90
1) Chromium % minimum 1,9 x % Ni. Tantalum % maximum 0,10%. Titanium % maximum 0,15%.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
Elongation, As
minimwn, %
25
25
25
25
25
22
25
25
22
18
22
16
22
22
22
22
18
18
22
18
P S
maxi- maxi- W
mum mwn %
% %
0,04 0,03 -
0,04 0,03 -
0,04 0,03
___ ............... I
0,04 0,03 -
0,04 . 0,03 -
0,04 0,03
-
0,04 0,03
-
0,04 0,03 -
0,04 0,03 -
0,04 0,03
-
0,04 0,03
I
-
0,04 0,03
-
0,04 0,03
-
0,04 0,03 -
0,04 0,03 -
0,04 0,03 -
0,04 0,03 -
0,04 0,03 -
0,04 0,03 -
0,04 0,03 1,25-1,75
102 Parent plate material should preferably have a. com-
position matching that of the electrode to be tested. Mild
steel plates may, however, be applied provided that the
groove faces are clad with at least two runs by the welding
consumable which is to be tested.
K 200 All-weld-metal test
201 Preparation of test assemblies:
shown in Fig. 17, one using a 2,4-3,25 rom 0 electrode and
For wire/gas combinations the size is to be 1,2 rom 0
and the largest size manufactured.
For flux cored wire combinations the wire size is to be 1,2
or 1,6 rom 0 and the largest size manufactured.
For wire/flux combinations the smallest and largest size
versed between subsequent layers, each bead not being
4 rom in thickness. Between each run, the assembly is to be
left in still air until it has cooled below 100C, the temper-
Test specimens:
Depending on the service temperature, the number of test
specimens taken according to Fig.17 are as follows:
- service temperature below -103C; two longitudinal
tensile and three irupact test speciruens are to be taken'.
- service temperature above -103C; two longitudinal
tensile test speciruens only are to be taken.
The test specimens .are to be prepared according to A700.
Test requirements:
The test results are all to comply with the requirements given
in Table Kl. Welding consumables intended for low tem-
perature service are to be irupact tested at -196 C (or other
temperatures below -103 C). The average impact value for
the three speciruens is not to be less than 34J.
K 300 Chemical composition
301 Chemical analysis is to be carried out for all dimen-
is to be' carried out as stipulated in H300 and is to be re-
be reported.
Test requirements:
The chemical composition of the weld metal is to be in the
range given in K2.

=4

. ,
. ,
"
: ' , ,
f1
L'
c,
H
8

!'
, .
, :
"
0
fl

x
LJ
---c-
-0>
:---
0
-i+
-
C
rv
-,
<
. -,
"
"\
' {
: S"''' /fEW
u17 '
i ri
f- I: ' '
- - - -" - ' .,..j.

10-1S
, __ '13_,,- NO '"
-h-hi,.,
l[ "
L ,,' '" I
ff
-..
Fig. 17
Test assemblies (all measures in mm)
K 400 Possible additional tests
TEST PLATE ASSEMBLY
WHEN IMPACT TESTING
IS NOT REOUIRED
EST PLATE ASSEMBLY
WHEN IM.PACT TESTING
:5 REQUIRED
MILO STEEL SASE
MA.TERIAL WITH
CLAD GROOVE FACES
STA1NlESS
BAse MATERIAL
401 Normally, butt weld tests are not required. Butt weld
tests may, however, be required if a welding consumable is
to be approved for welding positions or materials for which
it is not mainly intended.
402 The manufacturer is to inform about the welding po-
sition and materials for which the welding consumable is to
be
K 500 Annual tests
501 Annual testing for welding consumables which are not
intended for low temperature service, comprises chemical
analysis only. Welding consumables of two different di-
mensions are to be tested.
502 Annual testing for welding consumables which are
intended for low temperature service at - 103C or lower,
comprises impact testing at the respective temperature, in
addition to chemical analysis. Welding consumables of two
different dimensions are to be tested.
DEI' NORSKE VERITAS
,
)
()
/J
C)
(J
o
',J (J
3
Hull construction
The test temperature and absorbed energy are to be in ac-
cordance with the following requirements:
Impact test temperatures:
+20C
DOC
_20C
_40C
for grades B, A27S, A32, A36 and A40
for grades D, D27S, D32, D36 and D40
for grades E, E27S, E32, E36 and E40
for grades F32, F36 and F40
The average value for absorbed energy in weld metal, fusion
line and HAZ is not to be less than:
- for manual and semi-automatic welding in all welding
positions except vertical:
;:;, 47 J
- for automatic welding:
;:;, 34 J (NV 40 grades;:;' 41 J)
- for manual and semi-automatic welding in vertical posi-
tion:
;:;, 34 J (NV 40 grades;:;' 41 J).
For extra high strength structural steels the Charpy V -notch
test temperature and the average value for absorbed energy
in weld metal, fusion line and HAZ are to be the same as
required for the base material.
Pressure vessels and production/drilling plants related
equipment, structures and systems
The Charpy V-notch test temperature and the average value
for absorbed energy in weld metal, fusion line and HAZ are
to be the same as required for the base material. .
309 1n the case of reduced Charpy V-notch test speciruens
(10 x 7,5 rom and 10 x 5 rom), the impact energy values to
be obtained are to satisfy the following table:
Table Bl Impact energy requirement for subsize specimens
Dimensions of Charpy V-notch lest specimen Impact energy
- -
10 x 10 mm KV
10 x 7,5 mm 5/6 KV
10 x 5 mm 2/3 KV
310 The average irupact requirements are to be satisfied
Indentations are to be made along traverses in the weld,
HAZ and the parent metal approximately I mm below the
surface. For each traverse a miniruum of 3 indentations are
to be made in the weld, HAZ (both sides) and parent metal
(both sides). For HAZ the first indentation is to be placed
as close to the fusion line as possible. .
The values are to be reported for consideration.
313 When a butt weld is made between two plates of dif-
ferent grades, the test temperature and achieved irupact en-
ergy are to comply with the miniruum specified requirements
for the lower steel grade (see 308).
In the same way, the tensile strength to be obtained on the
welded assembly is to be in agreement with the requirements
relating to the plate steel having the lower strength.
As an example the test temperature, impact energy and ten-
sile strength for the butt welded joints given in Fig.3 are
those required for the plate of grade D in the left assembly
and for the plate of grade E in the right assembly.
grade D grade E
grade E grade EH
FIg. 3
Butt ",cldcdplnte joinb of differentgrnd""
401 The test assembly is to be in accordance with Fig.4.
for each notch location, but one single value of three values Edge preparation and fit-up as detailed in the WPS
from specimens from the same notch location may be below
the average requirements, but not below 70 % of minimum I
average.
311 Where the results from a set of three irupact test spe-
cimens do not comply with the requirements, an additional
set of three irupact test specimens. may be taken.
The results obtained are to be combined with the original
results to form a new average which, for acceptance, is to
be not less than the required value. Additionally, for these
combined results not more than two individual values are to
be less than the required average value, and of these, not
more than one is to be less than 70 % of the average value.
Further re-tests may be made at the surveyor's discretion,
but these are to be made on a new welded assembly (revised
WPS) and are to include all tests required for the original
assembly, even those which were previously satisfactory.
312 The hardness testing is to be in accordance with ISO
6507/1 or equivalent, and is only required for grades
NV27S and higher. Normally, the Vickers method (HV5 or
HV 10) is used.
-------
L
I. a_II. a I
Fig. 4
a = minimum value 150mm
o :::z outside diameter
Test assembly for butt welds on tubes
DET NORSKE VERITAS
Cl
:--
particle testing)
a = 3t: mimum value 150mm
b "" 6t; mnnum value 350mm
assembly (see Fig.5): '"
- I root and 1 face bend tests when t :s; 20 mm and 2 side
bend tests when t > 20 mm
- 12 Charpy V -notch tests whith the notch location as given
in 308
- 1 macrosection test (metaIlographic examination + hard-
ness measurements).
I
,t--'}
+
C>lARPY
- F,USION L1NE
V-NOTCH
TESTS
I
HAl- 2mm
HAZ- Eirnm
I BEND TEST
TENSILE TEST
---r:=.-- HARDNESSIMACRO TEST
Fig. 5
Sampling of test specimeos on tubes
404 The results of mechanical testing are to comply with
-the. relevant mqnirementi -gillen in 300.
B 500 WPQT for full penetration T-, Y-, and K- joints
501 WPQT's for full penetration groove welds between
plates at right angles or inclined. i.e. T- or Y- and K-
configurations. are to cover a weld length of minimum 350
mm (see Fig.6).
- 100 % ultrasonic testing
particle testing).
Edge preparation and fit-up as detailed in the WPS
FIg. 6
Test assembly for full peoetration T-joints
- 12 Charpy V -notch tests with the notch location as given
in 308
- 1 macrosection test (metallographic examination + hard-
ness measurements).
the relevant requirements given in 300.
1//.1-1------
HAZ- :m'" V-NOTCH

TESTS
KIIZ - 5rm>
HARONESS MACRO tESTS
FIg. 7
Sampling of test specimens on full peoetration T-joints
DEl" NORSKE VERITAS
:)

o

::J
.:)
::J

required thickness is obtained. The edges of the specimens
may be rounded to a radius not exceeding 2 mm.
203 The following requirements are to be met:
in Table J2. The position of fracture in the transverse tensile
Table J1 All-weld-metal test requiremeots
Tensile test
Grade Rm.
R.H.
Nlmm2
minimum,
Nlmm2
3/111 Y42
41IV Y42 530-680 420
5NY42
3/111 Y46
4/N Y46 570-720 460
5NY46
3/111 Y50
41IV Y50 610-770 500
5NY50
3/111 Y55
4/N Y55 670-830 550
5NY55
3/111 Y62
4/lV Y62 720-890 620
5NY62
3/111 Y69
4/N Y69 770-940 690
5NY69
test specimen is to be reported. The bend test specimens are
to be bent through an angle of 120 over a former having a
diameter which relates to the thickness of the test specimen
as given in Table J2. The bend test specimens can be con-
sidered as complying with the requirements if. after bend-
ing. no crack or other open defect exceeding 3 mm in
dimensions can be seen on the outer surface.
Impact test
AS.
Temperature
KV,J,
minimwn, %
c
minimwn
average 1)
-20 47
20 -40 47
-60 47
-20 47
20 -40 47
-60 47
-20 47
18 -40 47
-60 47
-20 55
18 -40 55
-60 55
-20 62
18 -40 62
-60 62
-20 69
17 -40 69
-60 69
1) For requirements regarding minimum individual values and retests, see A700 and A900, respectively.
Table J2 Butt weld test requiremeots
Tensile test Impact test Bend ratio
Grade
Rm.
KV,],
Dlr 1)
Nlmm
2
Temperature C.
minimum average
3/IlI Y42 -20
4/N Y42 530-680 -40
5N Y42 -60
3/lii Y.j6-
-20
4/lV Y46 570-720 -40
5N Y46 -60
3/I11 Y50 -20
41IV Y50 610-770 -40
5N Y50 -60
3/I11 Y55 -20
4/N Y55 670-830 -40
5N Y55 -60
3/IlI Y62 -20
4/N Y62 720-890 -40
5N Y62 -60
3I11 Y69 -20
4/N Y69 770-940 -40
5N Y69 -60
1) D - mandrel diameter, t - specimen thickness_
The chemical analysis of the deposited weld metal in each
test assembly is to be supplied by the manufacturer and is
to include the content of all significant alloying elements.
J 300 Annual tests
301 Depending on whether it concerns electrodes.
wire/flux combination or wire/gas combinations, the testing
is to be carried out according to that prescribed in B900.
C400 or E600. respectively. The test results are. however.
to comply with the requirements given in Table JI.
47
47 4
47

47
47 4
47
50
50 4
50
55
55 5
55
62
62 5
62
69
69 5
69
K. Welding Consumables for Welding of AuS-
tenitic Stainless Steels
K 100 General
101 Approval of welding consurnables for austenitic stain-
less steels will be considered subject to compliance with the
specified tests and requirements in 200 to 500.
DEl" NORSKE VERITAS
Table Jl
Consumables for
welding steel
R
m
,
grade
Tensile test
All-weld-metal
ReH, 1)
Impact test
Butt weld
KV,J,
AS,
R
m
, Temperature
C
minimum
minimum, minimum,
minimum, %
minim'!!f'
average
Nlmm2 Nlmm2
Nlmm
NY 1,5 Ni 420 275 420 -95
NY 3,5 Ni 440 345
25
440 -115
34
NY 5 Ni 570 390 570 -140
NV 9 Ni 640 490 660
1) In case of no marked yield point, the proof stress at 0,2 % elongation (RPJ.:z) is to be reported.
I 300 Annual test
301 Depending on whether it concerns electrodes,
wirelflux combination of wire/gas combinations, the testing
is to be carried out according to that prescribed in B900,
C400 or E600, respectively. The test results are, however,
to comply with the requirements given in Table 11.
I 400 Other welding consumables
401 Welding consumables with yield stress and/or tensile
strength less than that specified under 300, may be approved
for welding of steel grade NV 9 Ni. Approval testing is to
be carried out according to the progra=e specified above.
The maximum permissible stress in welded vessels is, how-
ever, in such cases to be based on the mechanical properties
obtained from the approval tests.
J. Welding Consumables for Welding of Extra
High Strength Steels
J 100 General
101 Depending on the impact test temperature, welding
consumables for extra high strength steels are divided into
the following grades:
- Grade 3/llI, test temperature - 20'C
- Grade 41IV, test temperature - 40C
-"- tostrempar-,itm" 60
n
e.
The following symbols are added to the grade mark to indi-
cate yield strength of the base metal for which the welding
consumable is intended:
Symbols added to grade mark Base material designation
Y42 NY 420
Y46 NY 460
Y50 NV 500
Y55 NY 550
Y62 NY 620
Y69 NY 690
Each higher quality grade includes the one (or those) below.
Grade A.. and D .. steels according to Pt;2 Ch.2 Sec. 1 are
to' be welded using welding consumables of at least quality
grade 3/llI, grade E .. steels using at least quality grade 4/IV
and grade F.. steels using at least quality grade 51Y as
shown in the following table:
Consumable grade Steel grades covered
3/111Y .. 4/1VY .. 5NY.. D .. and A .. E .. , D .. and A ..
F .. , E .. , D .. and A ..
Welding consumables approved with grades .. Y42, .. Y46
and .. Y50 are also considered snitable for welding steels in
the two strength levels below that for which they have been
approved. Welding consumables approved with grades
.. Y55, .. Y62 and .. Y69 are also considered suitable for
welding steels in the strength level below that for which they
have been approved.
The Society may, in individual cases, restrict the range of
application in (up to) such a way, that approval for anyone
strength level does not justify approval for any other
strength level.
102 The all-weld-metal and butt-weld tests are all to be
carried out as specified in B (covered electrodes), C
(wirelflux combinations) or E (wire/gas combination) with
the additional requirements specified in 200.
103 Covered electrodes in yield strength group Y50 and
below are to satisfy the hydrogen test requirements for at
least the suffIx HIO. Electrodes in yield strength group
ranging from Y55 up to and including Y69 are to satisfy the
hydrogen test requirements for the suffix H5.
Flux cored or flux coated wires may also, at manufacturer's
option, be hydrogen tested, and have the suffix (RIO) or
(R5) added to the grade mark.
104 The plate thickness for the butt-weld tests is normally
to be between 11 mm and 20 =. If plates with thickness
less than 11 = are used, the requirement regarding ab-
sorbed energy is to be agreed upon with the Society in each
case.
J 200 Additional requirements
201 The all-weld-metal tests are to be per-formed as fol-
luws!'
Test specimens:
One longitudinal and at least three impact test specimens are
to be machined from each test assembly.
Test requirements:
The longitudinal tensile and impact test results are to satisfy
the requirements given in Table JI.
202 The butt-weld tests are to be performed as follows:
Test specimens:
One transverse tensile, two transverse bend tests (face and
root bend) and at least three impact test specimens are to be
machined from each assembly.
If the composition and mechanical proper-ties of the depos-
ited metal differ markedly from the composition and prop-
erties of the base metal, the two transverse bend tests may
be replaced by longitudinal bend tests. If this is done, one
face bend and one root bend test are to be carried out.
The dimensions of the longitudinal bend specimens are to
be as follows:
Length, minimum 150 =
Width 38 mm
Thickness IOmm
The weld reinforcements are to be removed, and the
root/face side of the specimens is to be machined so that the
DEI' NORSKE VERITAS
) ;J
,J C)
,J
C)
'J
C)

par-ticle testing).
a _ miMlimum va!u& 150mm
D1 :: cytside diamat1lr of thl greater tubular (can)
t1 '" WilD thicknan of thl Cln
D2 = outIidI dilmlt1lrofthl .. smallert\ll!e (braetl)
t2 = wall1hickneu. of thl bl'1lOt
Edge prlplration Ind fit-up 8a !SIuiled In the WPS
a
/
/
.
10
:::
Fig. 8
Test assembly for tubular joints
- 12 Charpy V-notch tests sampled at 9 o'clock and with
. the notch location as given in 308
- two macrosection tests (metallographic examination +
hardness measurements) at 12 and 6 o'clock.
B 700 WPQT fiii' fillet weldS
701 The two plates are assembled and positioned edgewise
so as to constitute a tee-assembly with no clearance. As far
as possible the plates are to be of a suffIcient size to ensure
a reasonable heat distribution.
For fillet welds the test assembly is to be as defined in Fig.9.

15.
Fig. 9
Test assembly for fillet welds
For manual and semi-automatic welding the length of the
test piece is to be:
L . =350=
mm.
For automatic welding the length is to be:
L =1000=
mm.
Weld and fit-up are to be as detailed in the WPS.
The test assembly is to be welded on one side only. For
manual and semi-automatic welding, the stop/restart position
is normally to be included in the test length and is to be
clearly marked for subsequent examination.
The ends of the specimen are exempted from examination
over a length of 50 =.
particle testing).
The soundness of the weld is to comply with the specified
requirements given in the relevant parts of the Rules.
If the stop/restart spot is included in the test length, special
attention is to be paid to this position with respect to profile,
proper fusion and absence of crater defects.
703 The following tests are to be performed:
- two macrosection tests (metallographic examination,
hardness measurements). .
One of the macrosections is to be taken at the marked posi-
tion of the stop/restart (for more details see 307).
For hardness testing, see 312.
B 800 Retesting
801 If the WPQT fails to comply with any of the require-
ments for NDT one extra WPQT is to be welded and sub-
jected to the same testing. If this additional test does not
meet the relevant requirements, the actual WPS is to be
considered as not qualified and a respecification of the WPS
is to be made prior to a new qualification test.
!! Y!!!i!!ity!!f !l!.\alified welding
901 The validity of a qualified welding procedure is to be
restricted to the workshop performing the qualification.
Workshops or workshop branches under the same technical
management and working in accordance with the same
QA-program and -procedures are considered as one work-
shop.
902 . Qualification of a welding procedure remains valid
provided the parameters are kept within the qualified ranges
during production welding. The qualified ranges are given
in 903. When one or more variations outside the qualifica-
tion ranges occur, the welding procedure qualification is to
be considered invalid, and the welding procedure is there-
fore to be respecified and requalified.
903 A qualified welding procedure is to be used within the
ranges of the parameters below.
Base material
The following changes are to lead to a new qualification:
a) In general, significant change of material proper-ties
which will obviously affect the weldability and mechan-
ical proper-ties.
b) More specifically, structural steels are grouped in three
categories:
i) Normal strength steel, grades A, B, D and E or
equivalent structural steels with tensile strength
400-490 N/=2.
DEI' NORSKE VERITAS
ii) High strength steel, grades A27S, D27S, E27S, A32,
D32, E32, F32, A36, D36, E36, F36, A40, D40,
E40, F40 or equivalent structural steels with minimum
specified yield strength 265-390 N/mm
2
.
iii) Extra high strength steels, grades A-F 420, A-F 460,
A-F 500, A-F 550, A-F 620, A-F 690 or equivalent
structural steels with minimum specified yield strength
420-690 N/mm
2
.
The qualification on steel grades of higher toughness re-
quirements will qualify the grades of lower toughness but
not vice versa.
Thickness
Thickness, t, is defined as follows:
a) For a butt weld:
The base metal thickness, which for welds between dis-
similar thicknesse s is that of the thinner material.
b) For a fillet weld:
similar thicknesses is that of the thicker material. How-
ever, for each thickness range qualified, as in Table B2
there is an associated range of qualified throat thickness
as given below.
c) For a set-on tubular joint:
The thickness of the brace
d) For a set-in or set-through tubular joint:
The thickness of the can
e) For a T-buttjoint in plate:
The thickness of the prepared plate
The requirements to qualified thickness range for butt welds
are to be as given in Table B2.
Table B2 Qualified thickness range
Quciiijicaiion rangi'l,
.. ...
Thickness
for single run jor multi-run
tin mm
of lest piece
or single run welding
from both sides and all filler welds
1<12 0,81101,11 upl021
12:5 1:5 100 0,8 I 10 1,1 I
0,5 I 10 2 I
(max. 150)
I> 100 0,81101,1 I 0,51101,51
1) The qualification range for vertical downward position
isO,Slto!,!t
The requirements to qualified thickness range for fillet welds
are in addition to the requirements of Table B2, that the
throat thickness, a, is to be in the range 0,75 a to 1,5 a.
However, a throat thickness of JO mm or more is to give
qualification for all throat thicknesses above or equal to 10
mm.
Diameter of tubes and tubular joints
The qualification of a welding procedure test on diameter
D is to include qualification for diameters in the following
ranges as given in Table B3.
Table B3 Qualified range for tube and tubular joint.
Diameter of the test piece
D (mm) I) 2)
Qualification range
D < 168,3 0,5 D 10 2 D
D> 168,3 > 0,5 D and plales
I) D is the outside diameter of the lube or outside diameter of the brace. I
2) Qualification given for plates also covers rubes when the outside di-
ameter is greater than 500 mm.
Angle of tubular joints
A WPQT carried out on a tubular joint with angle IX is to
qualify all tubular joint angles in the range of IX :5 IXI :5 90
Welding consumables
- any change in consumable grading
- change of consumable name when impact testing is re-
quired at temperatures below -20C
- any significant change of mixture/composition (e.g.
change from argon/mixed gas to CO
2
gas), flow rate,
filling time and filling volume for shielding and backing
gases.
Welding positions
The following changes are to lead to a new qualification.
Change from one principal welding position (see Figs.
10, 11, 12) to another, unless complying with Table B4.
-;::-
K-::S
1G FLAT
-
3GVERnCAL
2G HORIZONTAL'VERTICAL
4G OVERHEAD
Fig. 10
Plate test positions
DET NORSKE VERITAS
")
'-
()
. ~
~
~ ~
/ ~ ~

Preparation of test assembly:
One such test specimen is to be made for each dimension
of welding consumable to be approved. Chips for chemical
analysis are to be machined, so that the distance between the
final cut and the plate corresponds to at least 4 layers of
weld.
Fig. 16
Test specimen for chemical analysis
TableH4
Consumables C Si Mn
for we14ing mro:imum maximum
sleel grade % % %
NY 0,3Mo 0,6-1,6
NV ler
0,4-1,0
0,5Mo 0,12 0,8
NV 2,25Cr
0,4-1,0
IMo
I. Welding Consumables for Welding of Steel
Grades NV 1,SNi, NV 3,SNi, NV SNi and NV
9Ni
I 100 General
carried out ",specified in D(covered eleotrodes),' G
(wire/flux combinations) or E (wire/gas combinations) with
102 Covered electrodes are to satisfy the requirements for
low hydrogen electrodes, and will have the suffix HIS, HIO
or H5 added to the grade mark.
option, be hydrogen tested, and have the suffix (HIS),
(HIO) or (H5) added to the grade mark.
to be between II mm and 20 mm. If plates with thickness
less than II mm are used, the requirement regarding ab-
case.
104 Welding consumables approved for welding of a
higher grade within this group may also be used for the
lower grades.
I 200 Additional requirements
201 The all-weld-metal tests are to be performed as fol-
lows:
Test specimens:
One longitudinal tensile and at least three impact test speci-
mens are to be machined from each test assembly.
Test requirements:
302 Each test specimen is to be analysed separately.
Test requirements:
The test results are to comply with the requirements given
in Table H4.
H 400 Annual tests
401 Consumables approved are to be subjected to at least
the following tests:
Chemical analysis of the deposited metal of two different
dimensions of the approved combinations are to be carried
out.
402 The preparation of the test assemblies and the test re-
quirements are to be in accordance with the requirements for
the initial approval tests specified in 300.
Cr Mo P S
maximum maximum
% % % %
- 0,3-0,7
0,7-1,4 0,4-0,7
0,04 0,03
2,0-2,6 0,9-1,2
the requirements given in Table II.
Bend tests:
If the composition and mechanical properties of the depos-
erties of the base metal; the two transverse bend rests may
be as follows:
Length, minimum 150 mm
Width 38 mm
Thickness 10 mm
Charpy V -notch impact tests:
Atleast three impact test specimens are to be machined from
each test assembly.
Test requirements:
in Table II. The position of fracture in the transverse tensile
test specimen is to be reported. The bend test specimens can
be considered as complying with the requirements if, after
bending through an angle of 180 over a former with a di-
ameter of 40 mm, no cracks or defects can be seen on the
outer surface of the test specimen. The reduction of area is
to be reported for information.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
H. Welding Consumables for Low-Alloy, Heat-
Resisting Steels (NV O,3Mo, NY lCr O,SMo and
NY 2,25Cr IMo)
H 100 General
101 The ail-weld-metal and butt-weld tests are all to be
(wirelflux combinations) or E (wire/gas combinations) with
102 Covered electrodes are to satisfy our requirements for
low hydrogen electrodes, and will have the suffix HI5, HIO
option, be'submitted for hydrogen testing, and will have the
suffix (HI5), (HIO) or (H5) added to the grade mark.
H 200 Additional requirements
201 The base metal to be used for the butt-weld tests is to
be the same as that for which the welding consumable is
intended.
Steel grades A, B or D may, however, be used for the all-
weld-metal tests when this is found to be convenient.
202 The all-weld-metal test is to be performed as follows:
Two longitudinal tensile test specimens are to be taken from
each test assembly as shown in Fig.I5.
Pre- and post-heating:
The temperature ranges to be used for pre-heating, inter-pas
temperature and annealing is shoW1i in Table HI.
Table HI
Consumables for
Pre-heat and inier- Annealing
welding steel grade
pass temperature temperature
C C
NYO,3Mo 100-200 660-700
NV lCr O,5Mo 200-300 680-720
.
NY 2,25Cr lMo 200-300 720-770
,
The finished test plates are to be uniformly heated to the
annealing temperature, kept at this temperature for approxi-
mately 30 minutes and cooled in still air.
Tensile tests:
One specimen from each assembly is to be tested at room
temperature (approximately 20C), while the other is to be
tested at 400 5C. The elevated test temperature is to be
properly controlled (e.g. by thermocouples).
Test requirements:
in Table H2.
UNE OF ClIT""'"
romm, J
-MIN. I
I
,..,.

I
IMIN. 100 mm. .30 mm
Fig. IS
All-weld-metal test
I
I

5!1 MIN. 100 IM'I
SMAU.EST POSSSL.E
BEAI) REINFORCEMENT
E;
E
il

"0
____ 0 ______________________ -_ - - -- ______ '_'_ -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --- -, - -- ----- ------
Consumables fOT 'Test temperature R",
welding steel grade C
minimum,
Nlmm2
NY O,3Mo
20 440
400
1)
NY lCr 0,5Mo
20 470
400
1)
NY 2,25Cr lMo
20 480
400
1)
1) These values are to be reported for information.
203 Butt-weld tests are to be performed as follows:
The transverse tensile and bend tests are to be tested at room
temperature.
Test requirements:
The tensile test results are to comply with the requirements
given in Table H3.
Tensile "test
R /RPO.2
eH
AS Z
minimum,
Nlmm
2
minimwn. %
%
305 18
1)
Table H3
Consumables for welding steel R
m
,
grade minimum, Nlmm
2
NY O,3Mo 440
NY lCr O,SMo 470
NY 2,2SCr lMo 480
H 300 Chemical composition
301 The test specimen for chemical analysis of the depos-
ited metal is to be made on a steel plate as shown in Fig.I6.
DEl" NORSKE VERIT AS
J
CJ

". ---"/
C)
/J
o
rJ
()

4
(O))-J
1G ROTATING PIPE.
HOFUZONT AL AXIS
2G FIXEO PIPE.
VERTICAL AXIS
Fig. 11
Pipe test positions
Type ofjoint
] )
5G FIXED PIPE.
HORIZONTAL AXIS.
6G FJXED INCLINED PIPE
The range of approval for type of joint is given in Table B5.
In addition the following changes are to lead to a new qual-
ification:
- change from fillet weld to butt weld
- change of specified type of groove, root face and gap
which may significantly affect penetration, fusion and
delution of the weld.
Welding condition
- any change of welding process
- change from spray arc to short arc or pulsed arc or vice
versa
- change beyond 15 % for voltage and current, and
change of more than 10 % for travel speed
- change of preheating/interpass temperature beyond
25C
- change of post weld heat treatment parameters.
1001 The parameters used during qualification welding,
NDT -records and mechanical testing reports are to be pre-
sented in a WPQR for each qualification test. The WPQR
is to contain sufficient references to establish where, when,
how and by whom the test welding, NDT - and mechanical
testing were performed.
TI-1RQb.T OF IM:iO AXIS OF "M3..D

--
R.ATPOSmON 1F
AXlS a= WELD VERTlCAL
I

"Ill
I.'"

VEFrnGA1..?OSmON 3F
FIg. 12
Note: One piate must be ho:izontaJ
HOR!ZO'ITAL F'OSil1CX'J 2F
--
Note: Ole tiata must be hOdzcntaJ
0VERHE4D POSITION 4F
Positions of test plate for nUet welds
Table B4 Qualified principal positions for butt welds and nllet welds
------ -- .. - ---
Qualified positions j)
Type ofjoint 1) 2)
--- -PrlncipaTp-ositiOn:s-----
Butt.welds
Fillet welds
Plates Tubes
Pla!esltubes
2G+3G All All All
lG lG lG IF
Butt welds on plates 2G lG, 2G, 4G !G,2G IF,2F,4F
3G 3G Not applicable 3F
4G lG,4G lG IF,4F
2G+5G=6G All All All
Butt welds on tubes
lG lG lG IF
2G lG, 2G, 4G !G,2G IF,2F,4F
SG All lG,SG All
2F+3F All
IF IF
Fillet welds
2F IF,2F,4F
3F 3F
4F IF,4F
5F All
1) Tubes with OD > 500 mm are considered equivalent to plates (apply only to the can in tubular joints)
2) Tubular joints are to be qilalified separately.
3) The vertical downwards position is to be qualified separately.
Table B5 Range of approval for type of joint
Range of approval
Butt welds on plate T butt welds on plate Buttwelds on pipe
Type of joint in approval test piece
Welded from one side
Welded from both
Welded Welded
Welded from-one side
sides
With No With No
from one from both
With No
side sides
backing backing gouging gouging backing backing
Welded
With
*
-
from one
backing
side
No
x
*
Butt weld
backing
on plate
Welded
With
- -
gouging
from both
sides
No
- -
gouging
Welded
With
x -
Butt weld
from one
backing
on pipe
side
No
x x
backing
T butt
- -
weld on
Welded from both
plate
sides
- -
Key:
indicates the WPS which is approved in the approval test
X indicates those welds for which the WPS is also approved
- indicates those welds for which the WPS is not approved
B 1100 WPQT for liquefied gas systems
1101 Welding shops which intend to build welded cargo
tanks, process pressure vessels and/or piping systems for "li-
quefied gases are to carry out WPQT for all types of butt
welds in the construction. .
1102 For butt welds in tanks and pressure vessels, the test
assemblies consist of two plates, each having a width of at
least ISO = and a length sufficient for making all neces-
sary test specimens described in 110S. The test assemblies
are to be so prepared that the principal direction of rolling
is parallel to the direction of welding.
Guidance note:
~ ~ ~ ~ T h e -test' piates -must be of such--dimenslons ibaf'the cooling
condition as far as possible will be the same as for the production
welding.
1103 For butt welds in piping systems the test assemblies
are made by welding together two approximately ISO =
long pipes with the same diameter as the pipes used in the
system to be represented.
1104 The test assemblies are to be subjected to radiographic
testing after welding. X-rays, fine-grained film and lead
screens are to be used for this tesling. The radiographs are
at least to meet the requirements in Pt.5 Ch.S Sec.S and Pt.S
Ch.5 Sec.6. Concerning magnetic particle, dye penetrant
and ultrasonic testing reference is made to Pt.S Ch.5 Sec.5.
Hardness testing is to be performed on weld metal, heat af-
fected zone a!ld parent material. The values are to be re-
ported for consideration.
The weld is to be etched through the whole cross-section and
is to show normal structure and penetration. The etching is
to be done in such a way that the fusion line is clearly seen.
1105 From each test assembly for plates the following spe-
cimens are to be taken:
- one transverse weld tensile test specimen
- two side bend test specimens.

x
x
*
-
x
x
-
-
x - x - -
x x x
-
-
x x x - -
*
- x -
-
x - x
*
-
x x x x
*
-
*
x -
-
-
-
*
-
-
The test specimens are to be cut transverse to the longi-
tudinal axis of the weld. The thickness of the test speci-
men is to be 10 = and width equal to the plate
thickness. If the plate thickness exceeds 40 = the test
sample may be divided into two, each having a width of
at least 20 mm
- five sets of Charpy V test specimens (each set consists
of 3 specimens)
- macrosection, microsection and hardness survey may also
be required.
The Charpy V test specimens are to be cut with their longi-
tudinal axis transverse to the longitudinal axis of the weld.
When practicable, the test specimen is to be taken at a place
half the di.t.noe from the "entre to the iurfaG" "fth. plate,
The notch is to be cut in a face of the test specimen ori-
ginally perpendiCUlar to the rolled surface. The specimens
are to be taken at the following locations:
- 3 specimens with the notch in the centre line of the welds
- 3 specimens with the notch I = from the fusion line
- 3 specimens with the notch 3 = from .the fusion line
- 3 specimens with the notch S = from the fusion line.
For austenitic chromium-nickel steels, only 3 tests with the
notch in the centre of the welds are required for design
temperature below -IOS0C.
1106 From each test assembly for tubes, the following test
specimens are to be taken:
mens is to be 10 = and the wi\lth equal to the wall
thickness. If the wall thickness is less than 10 mm the
side bend test is to be replaced by root bend test
of 3 specimens). The test specimens are to be cut as.
stipulated in 110S
be required.
DEY NORSKE VERITAS
)
I:]
~
:]
~
:]
/J /J

Table Fl
Tensile test
Grade Rm.
R.H.
Nlmm
2
minimum,
Nlmm
2
I
400-560 305
II
IY
490-660 375
IIY
II Y40 510-690 400
Chemical analysis:
Chemical analysis of the deposited weld metal is to be sup-
plied by the manufacturer and is to include the content of
all significant alloying elements.
Photomacrographs:
Two photomacrographs, approximately 2X magnification,
one transverse and one longitudinal with respect to the weld
are to be taken. The latter section is to be parallel to the plate
surface.
F 300 Annual tests
301 Combinations approved are to be subjected to at least
One test assembly, using 20 = plate thickness is to be
prepared.
Two longitudinal, two bend and three impact test specimens
are to be taken. The notch of the impact specimens is to be
located in the centre of the weld.
One transverse photomacrograph is also to be taken from the
test assembly.
302 The preparation of the test assemblies and the me-
chanical properties are to be in accordance with the re-
quirements for the initial approval tests.
G. Welding Consumables for Welding of Steel
Grades NV J'l
o
4, NV 24b,NV 44 and NV 44b
for Low-Temperature Applications
G 100 General
101 These welding consumables will be granted the fol-
lowing grades:
- for NV 2-4 and NV 2-4L: S (manual welding) and V
(semi-automatic and automatic welding)
- for NV 4-4 and NV 4-4L: S Y (manual welding) and V
Y (semi-automatic and automatic welding)
Approval will be considered subject to compliance with the
specified tests and requirements in 200.
Table G1
Tensile lest
Impact test
As,
Temperature
KY,J,
minimum, %
C
minimum
average
20
0
22 20
34
0
0 41
option, be submitted for hydrogen testing, and will have the
suffix (HIS), (HIO) or (HS) added to the grade mark.
103 Testing is to be carried out as specified in B (covered
electrodes), C (wirelflux combinations) or E (wire/gas
combinations) with the additional requirements specified in
200.
G 200 Additional requirements
201 The base metal to be used for the butt weld tests is to
be the same as that fo< which the welding consumable is
intended.
Impact tests:
The specimens are to be broken at -60C. Both single va-
lues and average values are to be reported.
Welding consumables intended for NV 2-4 and NV 4-4
only, may be impact tested at -SsoC.
Test requirements:
The butt-weld test results are all to comply with the re-
quirements given in Table G 1.
202 One additional butt-weld test is to be performed as
follows:
One butt-weld test is to be made in the downhand position.
This test assembly .is to be subjected to stress-relieving at
550 tn liOOoC prinr tn me.chanioal testing
Test specimens:
One transverse tensile and three impact test specimens are
to be taken from each test assembly.
Test requirements:
in Table GI.
G 300 Annual tests
C400 or E600, respectively. Impact testing, however, is to
be carried out according to 200.
i
Impact test - KY, J
Grade
Rm.
Temperature C
KV,J, KV. J,
minimum, Nlmm
2
average minimum single value
5fV 400
-55 41 27
-60 34 23
5YfVY 490
-55 41 27
-60 34 23
DEY NORSKE VERITAS
The impact test specimens are to be machined from each
welded"assembly from the positions and with the orientations
shown in Fig. I I.
Test requirements:
in Table E3 for the longitudinal tensile test specimens and
Table E4 for the transverse tensile .and impact test speci-
mens. The bend test specimens can be considered as com-
plying with the requirements if, after bending, no crack or
"defect having any dimensions exceeding 3 mm can be seen
on the outer surface of the test specimen.
E -500 Annual tests
501 Wires approved are to be subjected to at least the fol-
lowing tests:
Semi-automatic welding only:
One all-weld-metal test - one longitudinal tensile and three
impact tests.
Automatic multi-run welding only:
impact tests.
Automatic two-run welding only:
One butt-weld test with 20 mm minimum plate thickness -
one transverse tensile, two bend and three impact tests. One
longitudinal tensile test is also to be prepared for wirel gas
combinations approved solely for the two-run technique.
Wires approved for both semi-automatic and automatic
multi-run welding: One all-weld-metal test in semi-automatic
technique - one tensile and three impact tests.
502 The test assemblies and specimens are to be prepared
and tested in accordance with the same procedures as those
for the initial approval tests using wire which is of about the
medium size manufactured, except in the case of the two-run
technique where the size of wire is to be according to the
initial testing procedure.
503 The test results are to comply with the requirements
for the initial approval tests.
E _600 Upgrading
601 An approved wire may be granted a higher grade than
that initially granted, provided that impact testing is carried
out with satisfactory results at the temperature specified for
the higher grade. However, for upgrading from grade
I(T/M) to grade III(T/M) or from any grade to grade II
Y(T/M) to V Y(T/M) and II Y40(T/M) to IV Y40(T/M),
impact tests are to be carried out on specimens taken from
butt weld test assemblies in addition to the normal require-
ments for annual testing.
F. Combinations for Use in Electro-slag and
Electro-gas Welding Processes
F 100 General
101 Consumables intended for these welding processes
will be divided into the following grades:
- for normal strength steels: I and II
- for high strenf.th steels with minimum yield strength up
to 355 N/mm : I Y, II Y
. to 390 N/mm : II Y40.
F 200 Initial tests
201 The following information is to be reported for the
Society's consideration:
- joint designation, wire diameter, type of consumable
nozzle, shielding gas if used, welding parameters, weld
direction relative to final rolling direction of plates, ten-
sile strength and chemical composition including applied
grain refining elements for the base material.
Two test assemblies, one assembly with 20 mm plate thick-
ness and one with 35 mm thickness, are to be made as
shown in Fig. 14.
Test specimens:
Two longitudinal and two transverse tensile test specimens,
two side bend (alternatively one root bend and one face
bend) and six impact (three with the notch located in the
centre of the weld and three with the notch located at the
fusion boundaty) test specimens are to be taken from each
test assembly as shown in Fig.14.
E CIt I I I
1
-"-t
i i
TL-:'=':::- .
ImP.Cf .peCirMru WittI me notch
allusion boutIckry.
Min. 0&00
..." ........... "'u ..
IrnpM:t trom th. cenler 01
In._kl
TENSILE 11:.$1
SOECIMEN
BCNOTEST
SPECIMEN
ONGITUDlNAl.

SPECIMENS
CHARPVY
I
I I
I I lOOGtnJDlNAL TENSILE
I
TEST SPECIMEN
II
BEND TEST.
SPECIMEN
TENSILE TEST
SPECIMEN
Fig. 14
Electro-slag and electro-gas welding test assembly and location
of specimens
Test requirements:
in Table FI.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

\:)
1
_/ o

CJ
(,)
()

.For austenitic chromium-nickel steels, only 3 tests with the
notch in the centre of the welds are required if the design
temperature is below -105C.
1107 The butt weld tensile test is to comply with the fol-
lowing requirements:
Generally, the tensile strength is not to be less than the spe-
cified minimum tensile strength for the parent material. In
cases where the Society has approved the use of welding
consumables which give lower tensile strength in the weld
metal than that required for the parent material, the ap-
proved value for the welding consumable in question ap-
plies. The position of fracture is to be reported.
1108 The bend test specimens are to be capable of with-
standing bending through an angle of 180 over a fonner
with diameter four times the thickness of the specimen. The
tests can be considered as complying with the requirements
if, after bending, no crack or other open defects exceeding
3 rom in dimension can be seen on the outer surface.
1109 Charpy V testing is to be conducted at the temperature
prescribed for the base material. See Pt.5 Ch.5 Sec.2.
When specimens of lOx 10 mm cross-section are used,' the
average value from 3 tests is not to be less than 27 J for weld
metal. One single test may give a value below the required
average but not lower than 19 J.
For fusion line and heat affected zone the requirement for
minimum average value is the same as for the base material.
Only one individual value may be below the specified aver-
age value provided it is not less than 70 % of that value.
Pt.2 Ch.3 Sec.2" - Page 11
For testing of thin materials where it is impossible to use a
standard test specimen 10 x 10 mm, the larger of the fol-
lowing specimens is to be used:
10 x 7,5 mm, 10 x 5 mm, 10 x 2,5 mm.
The impact values are then reduced to respectively 516, 2/3
and 112 of the required values of the standard test specimen.
C 100 General
101 Requirements for liquefied gas systems are stated in
special Programmes in Certification Notes No. 2.1.
102 Qualified welding procedures are required for all im-
portant joints in hulls and structures which are to be classed
with Det Norske Veritas. The procedure tests are to be re-
presentative of the following:
- each base material/alloy and temper used in production
- the thickness and diameter range in question (see Tables
B2 and B3
- each type of consumable and welding process
- welding position (see Table CI)
- number of passes
- preheat (if any)
- volt-ampere characteristics
- shielding gas.
Table Cl Qualified principal positions for butt welds and fillet welds
Test weld
Qualified positions 1)
Joint configuration
Principal positions
Butt welds, plates Butt welds. rubes Fillet welds
Butt welds on plates !G IG IG IF
2G IG, 2G, 3G IF,2F,3F
3G IG, 2G, 3G IF, 2F, 3F
4G All All
Butt welds on tubes IG IG IG IF
2G !G, 2G, 3G 2G IF,2F,3F
5G
Fillet welds IF

3F
4F
5F
C 200 WPQT for butt welds
201 Each test assembly consists of 2 plates with dimen-
sions 300 x ISO mm. The plates are to be joined with a
longitudinal butt weld. For extruded sections and pipes the
assembly is to consist of 2 sections each ISO mm long (see
Figs.13 and 14).
202 The welding is to be carried out in accordance with
the procedure to be used during production. Welding con-
sumables are those recommended in Table C2.
All IG,5G All
IF

IF, 2F, 3F
All
All
203 The joint configurations are to comEly with those in-
tended to be applied for the production welding:
204 If back-sealing run is to be laid, this run is to be laid
in the same position as for the respective weld.
205 The welds are to be subjected to visual inspection, dye
penetrant testing and ultrasomc- or X-ray testing.
The requirements to quality level for imperfections are to
be as gIven in ISO 10042.2 level B.
206 Side-bend tests are to be carried out for thickness
equal to and above 10 mm. Two bend specimens are to be
taken from each of the welded assemblies.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
Table C2 Selection of suitable ronsumables for rombinations of aluminium alloys
Base Metal Alloy NV-5052, NV-5754 NV-5083 NV-6060, NV-6061
NV-5154, NV-5454 NV-5383 NV-6063, NV-6005A
NV-5086 NV-6082
NV-5052, NV-5754 5356,5556,5183 5356, 5556, 5183 5356,5556, 5183
NV-5154, NV-5454
NV-5086
NV-5083, NV-5383 . 5356, 5556, 5183
5183 I) 5356, 5556, 5183
NV-6060, NV-6061 5356, 5556, 5183 5356, 5556, 5183 5356, 5556, 5183
NV-6063, NV-6005A
NV-6082
Note:
All consumables here are covered by the A WS specification. The prefix .. ER,. is omitted.
1) Other consumables may be used if allowable stresses are reduced. see Table C4.
D'ICl!d2S mm
c--r'
..
: .. :
, ,
l
' ,
: -t
f ' ,
J
' ,
, ,
L__ _ __ J
0_25,,,,,,
..... 1 for;
-
- , .0/11 Ina I Q'
2 li"e b ... d ,_',...no
AtN 2 fa.; "
- Addip.,nallUl
IIP''''''''''" if
_3,."
- 1 11\31:10 lUI ,,,,,elmo"
Fig. 13
Location of test specimens for a butt weld on plate
207 For thickness below 10 mm one face bend and one
root bend test specimens are to be taken. The width is to be
30 mm and the thickness equal to the plate thickness. The
diameter of the bending m",!drel is to be as given in Table
G3:
Table C3 Former diameter for bend tests
I
Condition
I
Base metal alloy
0, Hill
H1l6, H32,
T4 T5, T6
H321, H34
NV-5052, NV-5754
4t 4t - -
NV-5154, NV-5454
I
NV-5086, NV-5083,
6t 6t
NV-5383
- -
I
NV-6060, NV-6061
NV -6063, NV -6005A -
-
6t 71
NV-6082
208 Requirement:
No cracks or open defects exceeding 3 mm measured on the
convex surface after bending are accepted. Smaller cracks
developing from the edges of the specimens are not normally
considered as significant, unless there is definite evidence
that they result from inclusions or other defects .
Wrap around. bending as shown in Fig. 15 is the preferred
bending method.
Top 1o, ,,_
j
FIg. 14
1U 1 '0':
- A/loSitional te$1
1pt<:;",.n.if ... ",y;,.cI
....... 2"'''
- I IIfts;ie
- , .CIO'''''''' ',c,o'
21ic1. D .....
"""ll,":
_ , m,,'otUI 'lI'!cimt"
Location of test specimens for a butt weld in pipe

Fig. 15
,.Wrap around bending
209 One tensile specimen is to be taken from each of the
welded assemblies. The test specimen, 25 mm wide and with
full plate thickness and orientated transverse to the weld, is
shown in Fig.16.
Fig. 16
Tensile test specimen
DET NORSKE VERITAS

.:)

:)

:)

Table E3
Tensile test
Grade
Rm, Rur,
As, Z
Impact test
I
KV,J,
I
Temperature
minimum,
Nlmm
2
minimum,
Nlmm
2
minimum, % %
C
minimum
I
I
II 400-560 305
III
IY
IIY
lilY 490-660 375
NY
VY
II Y40
III Y40 510-690 400
IV Y40
1) Reduction of area to be reported for information .
Chemical analysis:
The chemical analysis of the deposited weld metal is to be
supplied by the manufaturer and is to include all significant
alloying elements.
One butt-weld test assembly is to be welded in the downhand
position as shown in Fig.8.
The test assembly is to be prepared in accordance with that
prescribed in C202.
Test specimens:
Two transverse tensile; four bend (two face and two root
bend) and three impact test specimens are to be taken from
the test assembly as shown in Fig.8.
Test requirements:
in Table E4. The position of fracture in the transverse tensile
ru:mlinJ,l, any dimensinns exceed.
ing 3 mm can be seen on the outer surface of the test spec-
imen.
TableE4
Tensile test Impact test
Grade
Rm,
Temperature
KV,J,
minimum,
minimum
Nlmm2
C
average
I 20
II 400 0
III -20
IY 20
34
IIY 0
IllY 490 -20
IV Y -40
VY -60
II Y40 0
III Y40 510 -20 41
IV Y40 -40
E 400 Two-run welding
40 1 When approval for use with two-run technique is re-
quested, two butt-weld test assemblies are to be prepared.
For wires to be approved for use with the two-run technique
only, no deposited metal test is required. In this case ap-
22
average
20
0
-20
20
34
0
I)
-20
-40
-60
0
-20 41
-40
proval tests are limited to the butt weld tests described her-
eafter. .
Two butt-weld test assemblies are to be prepared as specified
in C300, except that one test assembly is to be 12-15 mm
thick and the other is to be 20 mm thick.
If approval is required for welding of plates thicker than 20
mm, one assembly is to be prepared using a plate of 20 mm
in thickness and the other using a plate of the greatest
thickness for which approval is required.
The diameter of wire to be used for the test assemblies is to
be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation
and is to be reported for information.
The edge preparation of the test assemblies is to be as shown
in Fig.13. Small deviations in the edge preparation may be
allowed, if requested by the manufacturer. For assemblies
using plate over 20 mm in thickness, the edge preparation
used is to be reported for information.

9 \!
III 2
60'
FIg,13
Typical edge preparation of two-run tEChnique for wires
Test specimens:
Two transverse tensile, two bend (one from each side
welded) and three impact test specimens are to be taken from
each test assembly as shown in Fig.9.
When approval is required for two-run technique only, one
longitudinal tensile test specimen is also to be machined
from the thicker plate tested as shown in Fig.9.
This tensile specimen is to be cut with the longitudinal axis
coinciding with the centre of the weld about 7 mm below the
plate surface on the side from which the second run is made.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
T3bIeEl
Grade Rm.
ReB.
Tensile test Impact lest
As. Z
Temperature
KV,J,
Nlmm
2
minimum,
minimum, % %
C
minimum
Nlmm
2
average
I
II 400-560 305
III
IY
IIY
lllY 490-660 375
IV Y
VY
II Y40
1Il Y40 510-690 400
IV Y40
1) Reduction of area to be reported for information.
Chemical analysis:
pared for each welding position (downhand, horizontal-ver-
tical, vertical and overhead) for which the wire is
recommended.
One test assembly is to be prepared in the downhand posi-
tion, using a 1,2 mm diameter wire for the first run or a wire
of the smallest size manufactured and using a 2,4 mm di-
ameter, or of the largest size manufactured for the remaining
runs.
In the case where the wire is intended for downhand position
only, an additional test assembly is to be prepared by the
same welding procedure using wires of different diameter.
TabIeE2
Tensile lest
-- ,--
22
20
0
-20
20
0
I)
-20 47
-40
-60
,
0
-20
-40
The other test assemblies are tobe prepared in the vertical,
horizontal-vertical and overhead positions using for the first
run a wire of 1,2 mm diameter or of the smallest size man-
ufactured and using for the remaining runs the largest size
of wire recommended by the manufacturer for the position
concerned.
Test specimens:
One transverse tensile, two bend (one face and one root
Test requirements:
bending, no crack or defect having any dimensions exceed-
imen.
Impact lest - KV, 1, minimum average
, -rJi'iillE
-]{m. Downhand; Izorfzonta{:"'
. _. Veriical (upward and
minimum, Nlmm2
Ter.nl'erature 0(;
vertical and overhead downward)
I 20
II 400 0
1Il -20
IY 20
34
IIY 0
lIlY 490 -20 47
NY -40
VY -60
II Y40 0
1Il Y40 510 -20 41
NY40 -40
E 300 Automatic multi-run welding
Where approval for use with automatic multi-run welding is
requested, all-weld-metal and butt-weld tests are to be car-
ried out as specified in 301 and 302.
The preparation of the assembly is to be as described in
C201, except that the thickness of each layer is not to be less
than 3 mm.
Test specimens:
Two longitudinal tensile and three impact test sl'ecimens are
to be taken from the.test assembly as shown in Fig.7.
301 All-weld-metal tests are to be performed as follows:
One all-weld-metal test assembly is to be welded in the
downhand position as shown in Fig. 7.
Test requirements:
in Table E3.
DEr NORSKE VERITAS

-)
,
<J
/j
'---_/ o
0
(J 0
,
5
210 The tensile strength of the test specimens is not to be
less than specified for the parent alloy in Table C4.
211 One macrosection is to be prepared from the test as-
sembly to reveal the weldment macro structure. The macro-
section is to be visually inspected using a magnification of
5 to lOX. The macrosection is to show a regular weld profile
with a smooth transition to the base material without signif-
icant undercut or excessive reinforcement and show thor-
ough fusion between adjacent layers of weld metal and base
metal. There are to be no cracks, lack of fusion and in-
complete penetration.
C 300 WPQT for fmet welds
as possible the plates are to be of a sufficient size to ensure
For fillet welds the test assembly is to be as defmed in Fig.9.
L . = 350mm
mm.
T . = 1000mm
-mm.
The test assembly is to be welded on one side ouly. For
over a length of 50 mm.
- 100 % nudaoe oraok deteotion (dyo penetront)
The soundness of the weld is to comply with ISO 10042.2
level B.
2 macrosection tests (metallographic examination).
tion of the stop/restart (for more details see B307).
C 400 Retesting
401 If any of the testsdo not satisfy the specified require-
ments, new procedure tests in duplicate may be carried out.
The results of both retests are to meet the specified require-
ments, otherwise the test is to be rejected.
501 The strength of a weldment is a function of the wel-
ding process, filler metal and the aluminium alloy in ques-
tion. For design purposes it is assumed that around each
weld there is a zone, the HAZ, in which the strength is re-
duced. The extent of the HAZ is assumed to have the same
width as the weldment plus tbe plate thickness in each di-
rection of the weld as shown in Fig.17.
If the yield strength is to be measured for information this
is to be carried out on a gauge length 2 t + W of the weld
(approximately 3 t).
r-
t
I W 1
11
Fig. 17
Extent of HAZ
t = plate thickness
W = width of weld
DEr NORSKE VERITAS
Table C4 Mechanical properties in the welded condition
Alloy Temper Filler Tensile strength Yield strength
Rm. minimum in HAZ, RpO,2 minimum
(Nlmm
2
) (Nlmm
2
)
NV-5052 a,F, HIll, 5356 170 65
H32, H34
NV-5754 O,F, H111, H24 5356-5183 190 80
NV-5154A 0, HIll 5356-5183 215 85
NV-5454 O,F, HIll, H34, 5356-5183 215 85
NV-5086 O,F, HIll, 5356-5183 240 100
H116, H32, H34
NV-5083 O,F t< 6mm 5183 270 125
0, F t> 6mm 5356-5183 270 115
H116, H321 5356 270 115
H116, H321 5183 270 125
NV-5383 0, H111, H116, 5183 290 140
H321
NV-6060 T5 5356-5183 95 65
NV-6061 T4 53565183 165 115
i
T5 or T6 165 115
NV-6063 T5 5356-5183 100 65
I
T6 100 65
NV-6005A T5 or T6 5356-5183 165 115
NV-6082 T4 5356-5183 170 110
I ________
T5 or T6
----
D. Welding procedures, Ferritic-Austenitic
Stainless Steel (Duplex)
D 100 General
101 Welding shops which intend 'to build welded cargo
tanks, parts of hull structure, process pressure vessels or
piping systems in Ferritic-Austenitic stainless steels are to
carry out WPQT for all types of butt welds and essential
fillet welds in the construction. See Ch.3 Sec. I.
102 The WPQT's are to cover all relevant dimensions,
positions and material combinations. Details regarding es-
sential variables, validity of the procedure and mechanical
ilfelD Be lis descftliedlii B Willi iiddill5ii.iilfeqllli'e'
ments as listed in 200.
D 200 Additional testing
201 Butt welds and fillet welds are to be corrosion tested
according to ASTM G48-76 Method A. The test specimen
is to be in the as welded state after normal weld cleaning
operation. The test specimens are to be exposed to the sol-
ution at a constant temperature of 20C for 24 hours.
Test requirements :
- no pitting attack is to be visible on the test face(s)
- general weight loss is not to exceed 20 mg.
Guidance note:
Welds between Ferrhie-Austenitic steels and other grades of
stainless or e/Mn steels may not need to be corrosion tested.
--e-n-d--o-f--G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e--n:o-t-e--
202 Impact testing as described in B300.
Impact test temperature -20C. The average value for ab-
sorbed energy is not to be less than 27 J.
203 Microstructural examination
The test samples are to comprise the weld metal, heat af-
fected zone and base metal. The microstructure is to be
170 115
suitably etched and examined at 400X magnification and is
to be free from grain boundary carbides and precipitates.
The ferrite content in the weld metal root and unreheated
weld cap is to be determined in accordance with ASTM E
562 and be in the range of 25-70 %.
301 Reference is made to B900 and any change in the
following additional essential variables which are to lead to
a new qualification :
- variation in the heat input greater than 15 %.
E 100 General
101 These requirements apply to the Society's approval
of welders for fusion welding of steel and non-ferrous me-
tals. The welding processes for which qualifications are re-
quired include those which are designated as manual or
partly mechanized welding. Welders are to pass an approval
testing in accordance with 200. Yards and workshops are
required to keep records of the welders' qualifications and,
when required, furnish copies of valid welders' certificates.
102 Welding operators using fully mechanized or fully
automatic processes need generally not pass an approval
testing. However, operators are to receive adequate training
in setting or programming and operating the equipment.
Appropriate records of training are to be maintained. Yards
and workshops may be required to furnish valid approval
test certificates.
201 Welders are to be tested to a standard recognised by
the Society, e.g. EN 287, ISO 9606, ASME Section IX,
ANSI/AWS D1.1.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
..

I::]
::]

::] ::]
:J ':J

When a combination is approved for both one- and multi-run
welding, the the test assembly is to be welded with the one-
run technique.
702 One longitudinal and one transverse tensile test speci-
men, to bend (one face and one root bend) and six impact
test specimens (three root and three face) are to be taken
from the test assembly as shown in Fig. 12. .
chanical requirements are to be in accordance with the re-
D 800 Upgrading
801 An approved combination may be granted a higher
grade than that initially granted, provided that impact testing
is carried out with satisfactory results at the temperature
specified for the higher grade. However, for upgrading
from grade I(T 1M) to grade III(T 1M) or from any grade to
grade II Y(TIM) to V Y(T/M) and II Y40(TIM) to IV Y40
(TIM), impact tests are to be carried out on specimens taken
from butt weld test assemblies in addition to the normal re-
quirements for annual testing.
E. Wires and Wire/Gas Combinations for Metal
Arc Welding
E 100 General
101 Wire/gas combinations, flux cored or flux coated
wires with or without shielding gas will be divided into the
following grades:
- for normal strength steels: I, II and III
- for high strenfth steels with minimum yield strength up
to 355 N/mm : I Y, II Y, III Y, IV Y and V Y
to 390 N/mm : II Y40, III Y40 and IV Y40.
specified tests and requirements in 200 and 300.
102 The wires are divided into the following categories:
- for use in semi-automatic multi-run welding
for- u.e inautDl11lltio'multi,run",olding
- for use in automatic two-run welding.
For wires intended for automatic welding, the suffixes T,
M and TM will be added to indicate two-run, multi-run or
both welding techniques, respectively.
For wires intended for semi-automatic welding, the suffix S
will be added to the grade mark.
For wires intended for both welding processes, the suffixes
will be added in combination.
103 The test assemblies are to be prepared by the relevant
welding technique for which approval is reqUested, how-
ever, where approval is requested for both semi-automatic
and automatic techniques, test assemblies need only be pre-
pared by the semi-automatic technique. If approval of auto-
matic two-run welding technique is requested, test
assemblies. are also to .be prepared by this technique.
104 Where applicable, the composition of the shielding gas
is to be reported. Unless otherwise agreed by the Society,
additional approval tests are required when the shielding gas
used is different from that used for the original approval
tests.
105 Flux cored or flux coated wires may, at manufactur-
er's option, be submitted to a hydrogen test as detailed in
A800, using the manufacturer's recommended welding con-
ditions and adjusting the deposition rate to give a weight of
weld deposit per sample similar to that deposited when using
manual electrodes.
Wires complying with our requirements stipulated in B400
will have the suffix (HIS), (HI0) or (H5) added to the grade
mark.
E 200 Semi-automatic multi-run welding
201 The term semi-automatic is used to describe processes
in which the weld is made manually by a welder holding a
gun through which the wire is continuously fed.
Where approval for use with semi-automatic welding is re-
quested, all-weld-metal and butt-weld tests are to be carried
out as specified in 202 and 203.
Two all-weld-metal test assemblies are to be welded in the
downhand position as shown in Fig. I.
One test assembly is to be welded using a wire of 2,4 mm
diameter or of the largest size manufactured and the other
using a wire of 1,2 mm diameter of of the smallest size
manufactured. Where wires are available in one diameter
only, one test assembly is sufficient.
The weld metal is to be deposited according to the practice
rooommendodb}'theIIlllIlufaoturar and tho thiolm.DDof onoh
layer of weld metal is to be in the range of 2 mm to 6 mm.
Test specimens:
One longitudinal tensile and three impact test specimens are
Test requirements:
in Table EI.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
Rules for Sh,ps, January 1996
t
C \ :U' AND g SHOUlD Sf IN
E '\-- -u.-.. l ACCORDANCE WITH
I THE MANUfACTuRER'S
RECOMI.4ENOATlON
t
Fig. 12
,..----l-!-I-----,
I
,
'---
)
CHARPY IMPACT
TESTS fflC!qTJ.
i..
r--- ..,. ----, BEND TEST:
L _____ L ____ J (ROOT)
r---- -r -- .... -,-
ITENSllE
__ J
l,QNGITUDINAt.
TENSILE
TEST.
One-side automatic welding, test assembly and location of spe-
cimens
D 300 Multi-run welding
301
Two test assemblies, one assembly with 15-25 = plate
thickness and one with 35 = thickness, are to be made as
shown in Fig.12.
TableD!
Tensile lest
Test specimens:
The number of test specimens are to be as stipulated in 500
and as shown in Fig. 12.
Test requirements:
in Table Dl.
D 400 One-and multi-run welding
One test assembly with 15 to 25 = plate thickness is to be
welded by one-run welding technique and one is to be
welded with 35 = thickness by multi-run technique.
Test specimens:
Test requirements:
in Table Dl.
D 500 Testing
501 Mechanical test specimens:
One longitudinal tensile, two transverse tensile, four trans-
verse bend test (two face and two root bend) and six impact
(three from the face side and three from the root side) test
specimens are to be taken from each welded test assembly
as shown in Fig.12.
The test specimens are to be prepared according to A 700.
Macro- and microstructure:
One photomicrograph from the fusion zone of the thickest
test assembly (one- or multi-run) is also to be forwarded for
consideration.
Chemical analysis:
supplied by the manufacturer and is to include all significant
alloying elements.
D 600 Reqnirements
601 The test results are all to comply with the require-
ments given in Table Dl. The position of fracture in the
tranwerie-tensile tWEt &picimen&-iv to be :r:apoFtad: The-bond
test specimens can be considered as complying with the re-
quirements if, after bending, no crack or defect having any
dimensions exceeding 3 mm can be seen on the outer surface
Impact test
Longitudinal
KV,J,
Grade
R
m
, ReH,
Temperature
Transverse
minimum, minimwn,
AS,
c
minimum
Nlmm2 Nlmm2
minimum, % average
I 20
II 400 400-560 305 0
III -20
IY 20
34
IIY 0
IllY 490 490-660 375 22 -20
IV Y -40
VY
-60
II Y40 0
III Y40 510 510-690 400 -20 41
NY40 -40
D 700 Annual tests
701 Combinations approved for one- or multi-run welding
are to be tested as folIows:
One test assembly with 12-25 mm plate thickness as shown
in Fig. 12 is to be welded.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

:)
<J
J o
/J
C)
'J 0
.202 Recognition of other standards is subject to submittal
to the Society for evaluation.
E 300 Certification
301 Welding and testing of weld assemblies are to be per-
formed in the presence of the surveyor. Upon successful
completion, the Society will certifY that the welder has
passed the approval testing.
3i12 Where certification is performed by other lACS
members or independent organisations. e.g. accredited or
nationally approved certification bodies, recognition of such
certification will be evaluated on a case by case basis. The
Society reserves the right, however, to require verification
of welders' qualifications when deemed necessary. Such
verification may include testing prior to production, extra
NDT and/or welding production tests.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
.:
SECTION 3
TYPE APPROVAL OF WELDING CONSUMABLES
Contents
A. General
A 100 Scope
A 200 Approval procedure
A 300 Approval testing
A 400 Changes
A 500 Basic groups and grades
A 600 Testing procedure
A 700 Test specimens
A 800 Hydrogen test
A 900 Re-testing
B, Covered Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc Welding of Nor-
mal and High Strength Steels
B 100 General
B 200 All-weld-metal test
B 300 Butt-weld test
B 400 Hydrogen test
B 500 Covered electrodes for fillet welding
B 600 Covered electrodes for gravity or contact welding
B 700 Deep penetration electrodes
B 800 Annual tests
B 900 Upgrading
C. Wire/Flux Combinations for Submerged Arc Welding
C 100 General
C 200 Multi-run technique
C 300 Two-run technique
C 400 Annual tests
C 500 Upgrading
D. Combinations for Use in One-side Automatic Welding Proc-
General
One-run welding
Multi-run welding
One-and multi-run welding
Testing
Requirements
Annual tests
300 Annual test
400 Oth(?r welding consumables
J, Welding Consumables for Welding of Extra High Strength
Steels
J 100 General
J 300 Annual tests
K. Welding Consumables for Welding of Austenitic Stainless
Steels
K 100 General
K 500 Annual tests
L, Welding Consumables for Welding of Ferritic-Austenitic
Stainless Steels (Duplex Steels)
L 100 General
L 600 Annual tests
M. Welding Consumables for Welding of Aluminium Alloys for
General and Low-Temperature Service
M 100 General
M 200 Test assemblies
M 300 Testing
M 400 Annual tests
A 100 Scope
A. General
101 This Section specifies the requirements to be complied
with for obtaining the Society's type approval of welding
WireiGasCombin"ilons ArcW cldiD
g
....
E 100 General . low temperature service, austenitic stainless steels, duplex
esses
D 100
D 200
D 300
D 400
D 500
D 600
D 700
D 800 Upgrading
E 200 Semi-automatic multi-run welding steels and aluminium alloys. This section covers lACS UR
E 300 Automatic multi-run welding W23.
E 500 Annual tests
E 600 Upgrading
F. Combinations for Use in Electro-slag and Electro-gas Wel-
ding Processes
F 100 General
F 200 Initial tests
F 300 Annual tests
G. Welding Consumables for Welding of Steel Grades NV 2-4,
NV 2-4L, NV 4-4 and NV 4-4L for Low-Temperature Ap-
plications
G 100 General
G 300 Annual tests
H. Welding Consumables for Low-Alloy, Heat-Resisting Steels
(NV 0,3Mo, NV 1Cr 0,5Mo and NV 2,25Cr 1Mo)
H 100 General
H 400 Annual tests
I, Welding Consumables for Welding of Steel Grades NV
1,5Ni, NV 3,5Ni, NV SNi and NV 9Ni
I 100 General
201 The surveyor is to be satisfied that the manufacturer's
plant, methods of production and quality control of welding
consumables are to be such as to ensure a reasonable uni-
fonnity in manufacture.
202 All test assemblies are to be prepared under the su-
pervision of the surveyor, and all tests are to be carried out
in his presence.
203 When welding consumables are manufactured in se-
veral factories of the same company, the complete series of
approval tests are to be carried out in one of the works only.
In the other factories, a reduced test programme, at least
equivalent to annual tests included hydrogen testing for low
hydrogen type consumables is pennitted if the manufacturer
can verify that the materials used and the fabrication process
are identical with those used in the main works. This re-
quirement is applicable to all manufacturers of filler pro-
ducts under licence (sister firms). However, should there be
any doubt, complete test-series may be required.
204 All welding consumables approved are to be subjected
to an annual re-testing. On these occasions, samples of the
approved consumables are to be selected by the surveyor
DET NORSKE VERITAS

r.:]

::)

':)
/J
:]

Plate Typical edge Maximwn
thick- preparation diameter
ness of wire
(mm) (mm)
12-15
(
I I !
5
60'

20-25
\

6
.W

30-35
I

I:
{
'7
70
0
Grade of
wireljlux
combination
I
IY
. I
II
III
IY
I!Y
IllY
IVY
I!
III
I!Y
IllY
IVY
Grade of steel
A
A-32,A-36 1)
A
A
B, D or E
A-32, A-36, A-40 1)
A-32, A-36, A-40 1)
D-32, D-36, 0-40 1)
Any grade of
HT steel 1)
B, D or E
B, D or E
A-32, A-36, A-40 1)
D-32, 0-36, D-40 1)
Any grade of
HT steel 1)
1) For testing of grade IY, IIY, IllY and IVY combinations, the tensile strength of parent plate material is not to be less than 490
N/mm2, and the chemical composition, including the refming element, should be reported for infonnation.
Fig. 10
Two-run weld, butt weld test, root gap - 0,7 mm
D. Combinations for Use in One-side Automatic
Welding Processes
D 100 General
101 This welding process will be divided into the follow-
ing grades:
tion for one-side, one-run welding on thicker plates, special
procedure tests are to be carried. out on the thickest plate
intended welded with this technique.
Test specimens:
Test requirements:
- for norma! strength steels: I, II and III The test results are all to comply with the requirements given
- for high strength steels with minimum yield stre;ngtl1.ul' ... T hI .m __ .
i035S-N7iiiiii2,TY;-iIY;IITY,TVYaIldYV . - . In a e .
- for high strength steels with minimum yield strength up
to 390 N/mm
2
: II Y40, III Y40 and IV Y40.
102 Separate tests are specified for:
- one-run welding
- multi-run welding (including two-run welding).
Information regarding joint design, wire diameter, number
of runs, tandem or multi-arc welding etc. is to be reported.
103 The welding conditions are to be the same as those
indicated for wirelflux combinations in C, with the amend-
ments and additions made in 200 to 800.
D 200 One-run welding
Two test assemblies with 12-15 rom plate thickness are to
be made. If a shipyard intends to apply the tested
Fig, 11
[ - I
I 55
'NO RUN N
I I
2ND RUN
1.._'-
Two-run weld, Impact tests
DET NORSKE VERITAS
TableC2
Grade
R
m
,
Temperature
KV,J,
minimum,
minimum
Nlmm
2
C
average
I 20
11 400 0
1lI -20
IY 20
34
11Y 0
llIY 490 -20
IVY -40
VY
-60
11 Y40 0
III Y40 510 -20 41
IV Y40 -40
301 Where approval for use with two-run technique is re-
quested, two butt weld test assemblies are to be prepared.
When a wirelflux combination is submitted for approval for
use with the two-run technique only, no deposited metal test
is required. in this case approval tests are limited to the butt
weld tests described hereafter.
Two butt-weld test assemblies are to be prepared, using the
following thicknesses:
-for grades I and IY
- for grades II to VY
-for grades II Y40 to IV Y40
12-15 mm and 20-25
mm
20-25 mm and 30-35
mm
20-25 mm and 30-35
mm
The maximum diameter of wire, grades of steel plate and
edge preparation to be used are to be in accordance with that
shown in Fig.IO. Minor deviations from the stipulated edge
preparation may be accepted, if requested by the manufac-
turer. The root gap is not to exceed I mm. Each butt weld
is to be welded in two runs, one from each side, using am-
-amIUavclsp6cllil.i:;ecurlillficc willi Um fc
O
commendations of the manufactur er and normal good
welding practice. After completion of the first run, the flux
and welding slag are to be removed and the assembly is to
be left in still air until it has cooled to 100C, the temper-
ature taken in the centre of the weld, on the surface of the
seam.
Test specimens:
This tensile test specimen is to be cut with the longitudinal
axis coinciding with the centre of the weld about 7 mm be-
low the plate surface on the side from which the second run
is made.
welded assembly from the positions and with the orientations
shown in Fig. I I. The test specimens are to be prepared ac-
cording to A700.
IN. 150
... ',JY """ UIN.1SO ........ ,,,,,,,,mm
I
!
I
r
TENS1LE
-
T
===N
I TEST '.
t.. ___
i BENO -
r=-,:-

L TE.s!. _
t
---
-E[
f
::::::I"
CHARPY
TI"
I--
1MPACT TEST

T iBENO-
--.n

-f
--
i
rENSllE
===:9:
. TEST
L ____
-'-
lONGITUDINAt..
ih
TENSILE TEST 3Q mrn FOR PLATES
lWHEN APPROVAl.
-rtf
UP TO 20mm
-
REOUIRED FOR THICKNESS.
1'WO-RUN
, ,
52 mm FOR 35 """ PLATE
TECHNIQUE ONl. Yj

, ,
,
r
,.,
'-r
Fig. 9
Two-run weld. Butt weld test
Test requirements:
in Table CI for the longitudinal tensile test specimens and
Table C2 for the transverse tensile and impact test speci-
defect having any dimensions exceeding 3 mm can be seen
C 400 Annual tests
401 Wirelflux combinations approved are to be subjected
tn at lB"! the f"n,mling test ..
Multi-run technique:
One all-weld"metal test - one tensile and three impact tests.
Two-run technique:
One butt-weld test, plate thickness 20 mm minimum - one
transverse tensile, two bend and three impact tests. One
longitudinal tensile test is also to be prepared for wirelflux
C 500 Upgrading
501 An approved wirelflux combination may be granted a
higher grade than that initially granted, provided that impact
testing is carried out with satisfactory results at the temper-
ature specified for the higher grade. However, for upgrading
grade II Y(T/M) to V Y(T/M) and II Y40(T1M) to IV
Y 40(T 1M), impact tests are to be carried out on specimens
taken from butt weld test assemblies in addition to the nor-
mal requirements for annual testing.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

:) \)
)
C)
J 8
J
()
6
\ I
and subjected to the tests detailed in subsequent sections of
these Rules.
Use of a manufacturer's quality assurance system as an al-
ternative to annual testing procedure may be accepted after
agreement with the Society.
301 All weld tests ma), be performed by the manufacturer
or anyone appointed by him.
302 The welding conditions used such as amperage, volt-
age, travel speed, etc. are to be within the range recom-
mended by the manufacturer for normal good welding
practice. When a filler metal is stated to be swtable for both
alternating current (A.C.) and direct current (D.C.), A.C.
is to be used for the preparation of the test assemblies.
303 The tests prescribed are to be carried out for each type
of welding consumable for which approval is required.
304 The Society may request, in a particular case, addi-
tional tests or requirements as may be considered necessary.
A 400 Changes
401 Any alteration proposed by the maker to the approved
consumaole which may result in a change in the cnemical
composition and the mechanical properties of the deposited
Table Al Grades of welding consumables
metal, must be immediately notified to the Society. Addi-
tional tests may be necessary.
402 Upgrading of welding consumables will be considered
only at the manufacturer's request, preferably at the time of
annual testing. Generally, for this purpose, tests from butt
weld assemblies will be required in addition to the normal
annual approval tests.
501 Welding consumables are divided into groups, de-
pending on the strength of the filler metal and further di-
vided into grades depending on the impact test temperature
and the chemical composition of the filler metal.
The grades of welding consumables given in Table AI are
specified in this Section .
502 Welding consumables which have satisfied the re-
quirements for a higher toughness grade, are also considered
as complying with the requirements for a lower toughness
grade of the same group. .
Normal strength steels High strength steels Extra high strength steels Austenitic stainless steels
I 2Y 3/4/5 Y42 308/308Mo/308L
2 3Y 309/309U309Nbl
3 4Y 314/5 Y46 309Mo/309MoL
5 5Y 310/310Nb/310Mo
3/4/5 Y50 312
I 2/3/4 Y40 316/316L
Grade of welding II 3/4/5 Y55 3 17/3 17L
consumables III IY 318
V IIY 3/4/5 Y62 330
IllY 347
IV Y 3/4/5 Y69 349
VY
II/III/IV Y 40
601 Thete.t ",'dd. are mmnally tobeIIlZide on the Il1llte
o
rial for which approval of the welding consumable is de-
sired. Any grade of structural steel may, however, be used
for the preparation of the all-weld-metal test assemblies.
602 The test specimens are to be made under controlled
conditions, on metal deposited from the filler metal in
question.
603 After being welded, the test assemblies are not to be
subjected to any heat treatment.
604 It is recommended that the welded assembly is sub-
jected to radiographic examination to ascertain whether there
are any defects in the weld prior to testing.
A .700 Test specimens
701 The test specimens referred to in this Section is de-
scribed in Ch.1 Sec.2 and Ch.3 Sec.!.
Tensile tests:
Round tensile test specimens are to be machined to the di-
mensions shown in Sec.l B201, type A, care being taken
plates.
Flat specimens of the form given in Sec. I B201, type Care
to be prepared. The upper and lower surfaces of the weld
are to be machined flush with the surface of the plate.
Prior to testing, the tensile test specimens may be subjected
to a tem\,erature not exceedinll 250 C for a period not ex-
ceeding6 hours, J'Jrhydrogen removal. .- . . . ..
Charpy V-notch impact tests:
Standard Charpy V -notch test specimens are to be prepared
as shown in Ch.1 Sec.2
The test temperature for specimens tested at 0, -20, -40
and -60C are to be controlled and kept within 2C of
the prescribed temperature.
The test specimens are to be cut with their longitudinal axis
transverse to the weld length, with the notch perpendicular
to the surface of the plate and positioned as follows:
- for deposited metal and butt weld test assemblies with
multi-run technique, the test specimens are to be cut at
mid thickness of the weld
- for two-run welded test assemblies the specimens are to
be cut on the 2nd run side, 2 mm below the surface
- for electroslag or electrogas welded test assemblies all
specimens are to be cut 2 mm below the surface
- for one-side automatic welding processes, the test speci-
mens are to be cut 2 mm below the face side and 2 mm
below the root side of the test assembly.
The average absorbed energy value is to comply with the
requirements of subsequent sections. One individual value
may be less than the required average value provided that it
is not less than 70 % of this value.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
Bend test:
Flat bend test specimens, as shown in Sec. I Fig.2 and 3 are
to be used. The upper and lower surfaces of the weld are to
be filed, ground or machined flush with the surface of the
specimens and the edges of the specimens are to be rounded
--to-a-radius-not-exceeding-2-mm.
The test specimens are to be capable of withstanding bend-
ing through an angle of 120 over a former having a diam-
eter three times the thickness of the specimen.
A 800 Hydrogen test
801 Low hydrogen consumables are to be SUbjected to a
. hydrogen test. The test is to be carried out in accordance
with the mercury method specified in ISO 3690-1977, or
any method such as the gas chromatic which correlates with
that method. The glycerine method may be admitted at the
discretion of the Society. This method is described below.
Prior to welding, the consumables may undergo a normal
drying process recommended by the manufacturer.
802 Four test specimens are to be prepared measuring 12
x 25 mm in cross-section by about 125 mm in length. The
parent metal may be any grade of structural steel. Before
welding, the specimens are to be weighed to the nearest 0,1
gram. On the 25 mm surface of each test specimen, a single
weld bead about 100 mm in length is to be deposited by a
4 mm diameter electrode, using about ISO mm of the elec-
trode. The welding is to be carried out with an arc as short
as possible and with a current of approximately ISO A. All
four test specimens are to be welded within a period of 30
minutes. For iron powder electrodes, an electrode with. a
. dimension giving approximately the same quantity of de-
posited metal as an ordinary 4 mm diameter electrode is to
be used. For each test specimen, a new electrode is to be
used.
Within 30 seconds of the completion of the welding of each
specimen, the slag is to be removed and the specimen
quenched in water at approximately 20C.
After_3D seconds in the water, the specimen is to be cleaned
and dried and then placed in an apparatus suitable for the
collection of hydrogen by displacement of glycerine. The
I':nmI11ct?.d within 2 minntes aft"r hreaking
the arc. The glycerine is to be kept at a temperature of 45C
during the test. All specimens are to be welded and treated
identically.
The specimens are to be kept immersed in the glycerine for
a period of 48 hours and, after removal, are to be cleaned
in water and alcohol, dried and weighed to the nearest 0, I
gram to determine the amount of weld deposit.
803 The amount of gas given off is to be measured to the
nearest 0,05 cm
3
and corrected for temperatore and pressure
to 20C and 760 mm Hg.
A 900 Re-testing
901 Tensile and bend tests:
Where the result of a tensile or bend test does not comply
with the requirements, duplicate test specimens of the same
type are to be prepared and satisfactorily tested. Where in-
sufficient original welded assembly is available, a new as-
sembly is to be prepared using welding consumables from
the same batch. If the new assembly is made with the same
procedure as the original assembly, only the duplicate re-test
specimens needs to be prepared and tested. Otherwise, all
test specimens should be prepared as for re-testing.
902 Charpy V-notch impact tests:
When the average value of a set of three impact test speci-
mens fails to meet the stated requirements, or the value of
,
more than one specimen is below the required average va-
lue, or when the value of only one specimen is below 70 %
of the specified average value, three additional specimens
from the same piece may be tested and the results added to
those previously obtained to form a new average. If this new
ayerage_complies_with...-the_requirements_and_if_no_inore-than __ _
two individual results are lower than the required average
and no more than one result is below 70 % of the specified
average value, the tests may be accepted.
B. Covered Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc
Welding of Normal and High Strength Steels
B 100. General
101 Electrodes will be divided into the following grades:
- for normal strength steels: I, 2 and 3
to 355 N/mm : 2 Y, 3 Y, 4 Y and 5 Y
to 390 N/mm : 2 Y40, 3 Y40 and 4 Y40
102 Electrodes complying with the requirements stipulated
in 400 will be given the suffix HIS, HIO or H5 added to the
grade mark. Electrodes for high strength steels are to be
hydrogen tested and are to satisfy the requirements for at
least the suffIx HIS.
downhand position as shown in Fig.l, one using 4 mm di-
ameter electrodes and the other using the largest size manu-
factured. If an electrode is available in one diameter only,
one test assembly is sufficient.
UNE. OF CUT I
FOR TENSILE I
SPECIMEN""7
20 mrfl I
MIN.
,'"
REINFORCEMENT TO BE MACE
AS SMALL AS POSSIBLE
16m." I
IJIN.100mm .3Omm. MIN.100mm
E
E

Fig. 1
All-weld-metal test
The weld metal is to be deposited in single or multi-run
layers according to normal practice, the direction of deposi-
tion being reversed between subsequent layers, each bead
being no less than 2 mm and not more that 4 mm thick ..
Between each run, the assembly is to be left in still air until
it has cooled below 250C, the temperature being checked
in the middle of the. weld bead.

:)
:)

:)
:)
.:)
,

DET NORSKE VERITAS
TableCl
Tensile test
Grade R
m
,
Rea,
As Z
Impact test
KV,],
Nlmm
2
minimum,
minimum, % %
Temperature C
minimum
Nlmm
2
average
I
II 400-560 305
1II
IY
IIY
lilY 490-660 375
IV Y
VY
II Y40
1II Y40 510-690 400
IV Y40
1) Reduction of area to be reported for infonnation.
TACK WELD
mm
I
,j,
11
TENSlLE.TEST-.

ffi
tr
'-
, 30
B
$
::::: ,0
CHARPY' ::::: ,0
,0
l"iPACT TES;
f
f:::: 10
'01
I I
I I
,
i
I

OF C1

I
C,
ril:
TEST -
I
I
I
"
I
ill
I
, ,

I
I
i
,
I
Fig. 7
Multi-run weld. All-weld-metal test
Chemical analysis:
supplied by the manufacturer and is to include the content
of all significant alloying elements.
203 Butt weld tests are to be performed as follows:
One butt weld test assembly is to be welded in the downhand
The welding is to be carried out by the multi-run technique
and the welding conditions are to be the same as those
adopted for the deposited metal test assembly.
22
20
0
-20
20
0
34
1)
-20
-40
-60
0
-20 41
-40
,
I
The back sealing run is to be applied in the downhand po-
sition after cutting out the root run to clean metal.
Test specimens:
Two transverse tensile, four bend (two face and two root
rnm
UIN 150 mm
01
I
I
r---
-C
j TENSILE
I TEST
.... ---
i.eEND -

,-T!.S!- _
-
_
f

CHARPY r
I
JW>ACT TEST
"
rBEND -
T
_
feENO -
!--
I..,1!S.!. _
J r---
I TENSILE
i
I TEST
L ___
Fig. 8
Multi-run weld. Butt weld test
Test requirements:
MIN. 150 mm
OISC",RQ

---3

r
noo
r
n
"
TI10
---21:

OISCARD

2
%

in Table C2. The position of fracture in the transverse tensile
test is to be reported. The bend test specimens can be con-
sidered as complying with the requirements if, after bend-
ing, no crack or defect having any dimensions exceeding 3
mm can be seen on the outer surface of the test specimen.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
12.5mm
I-o;--I..E-ENETRATION TO BE REPO!,TED
MAX. SIZE OF ELECTRODE
MANUFACTURED
6\ I.OVI'''' ... HIm e::! a \.- A
Fig. 6
Deep penetration fIllet weld test
B 800 Annual tests
801 Covered electrodes for normal and fillet welcting are
to be tested as follows:
Two all-weld metal test assemblies are to be prepared in
accordance with 200. The extent of testing and mechanical
requirements are to be as given in 200.
These requirements also applies to electrodes which are ap-
proved for fillet welding only.
802 Covered electrodes for gravity or contact welding are
One deposited metal test assembly using the gravity or other
contact device as recommended by the manufacturer is to
be prepared. If this electrode is approved also for normal
manual arc welding, the annual test is to be performed ac-
cording to 801.
803 Covered electrodes for deep penetration are to be
tested as follows:
Two plates are to be prepared as given in 700. One trans-
verse tensile test specimen, two bend (one face and one root)
test and three impact test specimens are to be prepared. At
each cut in the test assembly, the joints are to be examined
to ensure that complete fusion has taken place.
804 For those electrodes which are approved for both
normal penetration welding and for deep penetration wel-
ding in the downhand position, deep penetration weld tests
are to be carried out in addition to the deposited metal tests
for nonnal penetration.
Annual test requirements:
--The-tenEile itrength,yiold strosB,alongation and impaottoot
results are all to comply with the requirements for initial
approval tests.
Additional tests:
If any of the above tests fails, re-testing is to be carried out
in accordance with A900.
B 900 Upgracting
901 An approved electrode may be granted a higher grade
than that initially granted, provided that impact testing is
carried out with satisfactory results at the temperature spec-
ified for the higher grade. However, for upgrading from
grade I to grade 3, or from any grade to grade 2, 3, 4, 5
Y HI5/Y HIO/Y H5 and 2, 3, 4 Y40 HI5/Y HIO/Y H5,
impact are to be carried out on specimens taken from
butt weld test assemblies (downhand, horizontal-vertical,
vertical or overhead as applicable), in addition to the normal
requirements for annual testing. Upgrading of electrodes
from grade HI5 to grade HIO or H5 may also be consid-

ered, provided that hydrogen tests are carried out in ac-
cordance with 400. Welding consumables which have not
previously been subjected to a hydrogen test, are to be tested
according to 400 when upgrading to the grades 2, 3, 4, 5
Y HI51Y HIO/Y H5 and 2, 3, 4 Y40 HI5/HlO/H5 is ap-
plied for.
C. Wire/Flux Combinations for Submerged Arc
Weldiug
C 100 General
101 Wirelflux combinations will be divided into the fol-
lowing grades:
- for high stren:f.th steels with minimum yield strength_ up
to 390 N/mm : II Y40, III Y40 and IV Y40
102 The tests are intended for automatic single or multiple
electrode submerged arc welding and the combinations are
divided into the following categories:
- for use with the multi-run technique
- for use with the two-run technique.
The suffixes T, M or TM will be added to the grade mark
to indicate two-run technique, multi-run technique or both
techniques, respectively.
When a manufacturer states that a particular wire/flux com-
bination is suitable for welding with both techniques, both
series of tests are to be carried out.
e 200 Multi-run technique
201 Where approval for use with multi-run technique is
as follows'
One all-weld,metal test assembly is to be welded in the
downhand position as shown in Fig.7.
The direction of deposition of each run is to alternate from
each end of the plate. After completion of each run, the flux
and welding slag is to be removed. Between each run, the
assembly is to be left in still air until it has cooled to 250C,
the temperature taken in the centre of the weld on the sur-
face of the seam. The thickness of each layer is not to be less
than the diameter of the wire, nor less than 4 mm.
Test specimens:
to be taken from the test assembly as shown in Fig. 7.
Test requirements:
in Table CI.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

-11
;
-;
()
)
0
/J
.::J
'J

?
,
202 Test specimens:
to be taken from each test assembly as shown in Fig. I.
Table BI
Tensile test
Grade R
m
,
ReH,
As
203 Test requirements:
in Table BI.
204 Chemical analysis:
test assembly is to be supplied oy the manufacturer and is
to include t1ie content of all significant alloying elements.
Impact test
Z
KV,]
Nlmm
2
minimum,
Nlmm2
minimum, % %
Temperature C
minimum
average
1
2 400-560 305
3
2Y
3Y
490-660 375
4Y
5Y
2 Y40
3 Y40 510-690 400
4 Y40
Butt-weld test assemblies as shown in Fig.2 are. to be pre-
tical, vertical and overhead) for which the electrode is
recommended, except that electrodes satisfying the require-
ments for downhand and vertical position will be considered
as also complying with the requirements for the horizontal-
vertical position.
When an electrode is intended for downhand position only,
one additional test assembly is te be prepared in this posi-
tion.
302 Welding procedure for test assemblies:
The following welding procedure is to be applied when
making
Downhand welding:
First run with 4 mm diameter electrode. Remaining runs
(except last two layers) with 5 mm diameter electrode or
greater according to the normal welding practice with the
electrode. The runs with the last two layers with the largest
diameter of electrode manufactured.
Where a second downhand test is required, the following
procedure is to be adapted:
First run with 4 mm diameter electrode. Next run with an
electrode of intermediate diameter of 5 mm or 6 mm, and
the remaining runs with the largest diameter of electrode
manufactured.
Horizontal-vertical welding:
First run with 4 mm or 5 mm diameter electrode. Subse-
quent runs with 5 mm diameter electrodes.
Vertical and overhead welding:
with 4 rnm diameter electrodes, alternatively 5 mm diameter
electrodes, if recommended by the manufacturer for the po-
sitions concerned.
Vertical downwards welding:
Vertical downwards technique should be adopted for the
preparation of the test assembly, using electrode diameters
as recommended by the manufacturer.
22
20
0
-20
0
1)
-20
47
-40
-60
0
--20
-40
ate to each test sample, after back chipping. For electrodes
suitable for downhand welding only, the test assemblies may
be turned over to carry out the back sealing run.
Test specimens:
One transverse tensile, two bend tests (face and root bend)
and three impact test specimens are to be taken from each
-?IV "'U"
\
III
2-3mm
MIN. 100 mm . MIN.100mm
REINfORCEMENT TO BE MADE
J.. :.s __ J
E-
E
.:
I
on

- , CHARPY V-NOTCH TEST SPE<;IMENS
. .J}
.1.. FROM DOWNHAND, OVERHEAD
.:! AND VERTICAL TEST ASSEMBLIES
- -- --
*J TRANSVERSE
TENSILE 0
'"
-- - - - - -" -11-+ - - - - -
*J FACE BEND
I-------H-I------ "
'J ROOT BEND
a
---- --1-11-1------
DISCARD
THESE TESTS ARE ONLY REQUIRED fOR
GRADES 2 Y. 3 Y. 4 Y, 2 Y40. 3 Y40 AND 4 Y4Q
ELECTRODES AND FOR elECTRODES FOR WELDING
OF SPECIAL QUALITIES WHEN REQUIRED
BY THE INSTITUTION
Fig. 2
Butt weld test assembly
For all assemblies the back sealing runs are to be made with .
4 mm diameter electrodes in the welding position appropri- Test requIrements:
DET NORSKE VERITAS
in Table B2. The position of fracture in the transverse tensile
Table B2
Tensile test
Grade
\
bending, no crack or defect having any dimensions
imen.
Impact test - KV, J, minimum average
R
m
,
Downhand, horizontal- Verzical (upward and
minimum, Nlmm2
Temperature c
1 20
2 400 0
3 -20
2Y 0
34
3Y
490
-20
47
4Y -40
5Y -60
2 Y40 0
3 Y40 510 -20 41
4 Y40 -40
B 400 Hydrogen test
401 Hydrogen test requirements
Electrodes passing the hydrogen test as stipulated in A SOO
are to satisfy the requirements given in Table B3. Both the
individual and the average diffusible hydrogen contents of
the specimens are to be reported and the average value in
cm
3
per 100 grams is not to exceed the following:
Table B3
Mark
Mercury method
(ISO 3690-1977)
H15
15 I)
HlO
10 ")
H5
50)
1) 10 when Glycerine method is used.
3) Glycerine method is not allowed.
Covered electrodes for fillet-welding
501 Where an electrode is submitted- for approval for fillet
welding only, and to which the butt-weld test required in
300 is not considered applicable, the initial approval tests
are to consist of the fillet weld tests given below and all-
weld-metal tests similar to those indicated in 200. Where
an electrode is submitted for approval for both butt and fillet
welding, the initial approval tests may, at the discretion of
the Society, include one fillet weld test as detailed below and
welded in the horizontal-vertical position.
Preparation of fillet weld test assemblies:
Test assemblies as shown in Fig.3 are to be prepared for
each welding position (horizontal-vertical, vertical upwards,
vertical downwards or overhead) for which the electrode is
recommended by the manufacturer.
The first side is to be welded using the maximum size of
electrode manufactured and the second side is to be welded
using the minimum size of electrode manufactured and re-
commended for fillet welding. The length of the test assem-
blies L is to be sufficient to allow at least the deposition of
the entire length of the electrode being tested.
The fillet size will in general be determined by the electrode
size and the welding current employed during testing.
Hardness testing/requirements:
Each test assembly is to be sectioned to form three macro-
sections, each about 25 mm thick, as shown in Fig.3.
1
25 _25
00 0 00
0 0
00
bout
About 1/2 L About 1/2 L '
Fig. 3
Fillet weld test assembly
Hardness readings are to be made in each section as indi-
cated in FigA. The hardness of the weld is to be determined
and is to meet the requirements in Table B4.
The hardness of both heat affected zone (HAZ) and base
metal is also to be determined and is to be reported for in-
formation.
Table B4
Gl'Iufl!.J
Grades
Metiiod :z y. 3.Y,fY, 5 Y
1,2,3
2 Y40, 3 Y40, 4 Y40
Vickers
To be re-
150 minimum
(50 or 100 N load)
ported for
Rockwell B
(1000 N load)
infonna-
tion
80 minimum
LHAADNESS READING
E
E
1<1
Fig. 4
Hardness readings
BASE METAL
Breaking test/requirements:
.one of the remaining sections of the fillet weld is to have the
weld on l\1e first side gouged or machined to facilitate
breaking the fillet weld on the second side by closing the two
plates together, subjecting the root of the weld to tension.
DEY NORSKE VERITAS
-:]

f
t

-:J
:J
1
'f

On the other remaining section, the weld on the second side
is to be gouged or machined and the section fractured using
the same procedure. The fractured surfaces are to be exam-
ined. and there is to be no evidence of incomplete penetration
or internal cracking and they are to be reasonably free from
porosity.
B 600 Covered electrodes for gravity or contact
welding
601 Where an electrode is submitted solely for approval
for use in contact welding using automatic gravity or similar
welding devices, deposited metal tests, fillet weld tests (see
500) and, where appropriate, butt weld tests similar to those
for normal manual electrodes are to be carried out using the
process for which the electrode is recommended by the ma-
nufacturer.
Where an electrode is submitted for approval for use in
contact welding using automatic gravity or similar welding
devices in addition to normal manual welding, fillet weld
and, where appropriate, butt weld tests, using the grayity
or other contact device as recommended by the manufac-
turer, are to be carried out in addition to the normal approval
tests.
The fillet. welding is to be carried out using the welding
process recommended by the manufacturer, with the longest
size of the electrode manufactured. The manufacturer's re-
commended current range is to be reported for each elec-
trode size.
701 Deep penetration electrodes will be approved as grade
1 electrode only. The suffix DP will be added.
702 If an electrode approved as a normal penetration
electrode is also desired approved as a deep penetration
electrode for downhand butt welding and horizontal-vertical
fillet welding, the additional tests given below are to be
carried out.
703 When a manufacturer states that an electrode having
deep penetrating properties, also can be used for downhand
butt welding of thicker plates with bevelled edges, the elec-
trode will be tested as a normal penetration electrode and the
full series of tests_in the downhand position are to he carried
out, together with the deep penetration tests given below.
704 When an electrode is recommended for deep pene-
tration welding of butt joint and horizontal"vertical fillets
only, the tests given below are required.
Preparation of butt weld test assemblies:
Two plates of thickness equal to twice the diameter of the
core of the electrode plus 2 mm are to be butt welded, with
one downhand run of welding from each side, see Fig.5.
The joint edges are to be prepared square and smooth. The
gap is not to exceed 0,25 mm after the tack welding.
The test assembly is to be welded with and S mni diameter
electrode or the largest size manufactured if this is less than
Smm.
Butt weld test specimens:
Two transverse tensile, two bend (one face and one root
1k I-t
t = 2xCOAc UIJ\MCIt:M
OF ELECTRODE + 2 mm
Fig. 5
y.<::!> mm
MIN.10Dmm MIN. 100 mm
35 mm DISCARD
-----1- -"T-----
;:,:=.":
;::::
L __

-------
0 _____ -
BEND TEST
------- 1--------
BEND TEST
------- -------
TRANSVERSE
TENSILE TEST
1-------- r-------
TRANSVERSE
TENSILE TEST
1-------- -------
35 mm DISCARD
CHARPY V-NOTCH TEST SPECIMENS
FROM DOWN HAND AND VERTICAL
- TEST ASSEMBLIES, THE TEST SPEC1-
. MEN ARE TO BE CUT AS SHOWN IN
FIG. 2.
Deep penetration butt weld tests
Butt weld test requirements:
E
E
E'
E
,
EO
E'
Ol
I-
E
E
g
I-
The transverse tensile strength is not to be less than 400
N/mm
2
.
having any dimensions exceeding 3 mm can be seen on the
outer surface
The average impact value for the three specimens taken
from the centre of the weld is not to be less than 47 J at
+20C.
Preparation of fillet weld_test assemblies:
A fillet weld test assembly is to be prepared as shown in
Fig.6. The welding is to be carried out in one run for each
fillet weld, with plate A in the horizontal plane during wel-
ding. The length of the fillet weld is to be 160 mm and the
gap between the plates is not to exceed 0,25mm.
.one side is to be welded with 4 mm diameter electrode and
the second side is to be welded with the maximum size of
electrode manufactured. The welding current used is to be
within the range recommended by the manufacturer and the
welding is to be carried out using normal welding practice.
The welded assembly is to be cut by sawing or machining
about 35 mm from the ends of the fillet welds and the joints
are to be ground, polished and -etched.
Fillet weld test requirements:
The welding of the fIllet made with a 4 mm diameter elec-
trode is to show a penetration of 4 mm, see Fig.6, and the
corresponding penetration of the fillet made with the maxi-
mum size electrode is to be reported.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
in Table B2. The position of fracture in the transverse tensile
Table B2
Tensile test
Grade
\
bending, no crack or defect having any dimensions
imen.
Impact test - KV, J, minimum average
R
m
,
Downhand, horizontal- Verzical (upward and
minimum, Nlmm2
Temperature c
1 20
2 400 0
3 -20
2Y 0
34
3Y
490
-20
47
4Y -40
5Y -60
2 Y40 0
3 Y40 510 -20 41
4 Y40 -40
B 400 Hydrogen test
401 Hydrogen test requirements
Electrodes passing the hydrogen test as stipulated in A SOO
are to satisfy the requirements given in Table B3. Both the
individual and the average diffusible hydrogen contents of
the specimens are to be reported and the average value in
cm
3
per 100 grams is not to exceed the following:
Table B3
Mark
Mercury method
(ISO 3690-1977)
H15
15 I)
HlO
10 ")
H5
50)
3) Glycerine method is not allowed.
Covered electrodes for fillet-welding
501 Where an electrode is submitted- for approval for fillet
welding only, and to which the butt-weld test required in
300 is not considered applicable, the initial approval tests
are to consist of the fillet weld tests given below and all-
weld-metal tests similar to those indicated in 200. Where
an electrode is submitted for approval for both butt and fillet
welding, the initial approval tests may, at the discretion of
the Society, include one fillet weld test as detailed below and
welded in the horizontal-vertical position.
Preparation of fillet weld test assemblies:
Test assemblies as shown in Fig.3 are to be prepared for
each welding position (horizontal-vertical, vertical upwards,
vertical downwards or overhead) for which the electrode is
recommended by the manufacturer.
The first side is to be welded using the maximum size of
electrode manufactured and the second side is to be welded
using the minimum size of electrode manufactured and re-
commended for fillet welding. The length of the test assem-
blies L is to be sufficient to allow at least the deposition of
the entire length of the electrode being tested.
The fillet size will in general be determined by the electrode
size and the welding current employed during testing.
Hardness testing/requirements:
Each test assembly is to be sectioned to form three macro-
sections, each about 25 mm thick, as shown in Fig.3.
1
25 _25
00 0 00
0 0
00
bout
About 1/2 L About 1/2 L '
Fig. 3
Fillet weld test assembly
Hardness readings are to be made in each section as indi-
cated in FigA. The hardness of the weld is to be determined
and is to meet the requirements in Table B4.
The hardness of both heat affected zone (HAZ) and base
metal is also to be determined and is to be reported for in-
formation.
Table B4
Gl'Iufl!.J
Grades
Metiiod :z y. 3.Y,fY, 5 Y
1,2,3
2 Y40, 3 Y40, 4 Y40
Vickers
To be re-
150 minimum
(50 or 100 N load)
ported for
Rockwell B
(1000 N load)
infonna-
tion
80 minimum
LHAADNESS READING
E
E
1<1
Fig. 4
Hardness readings
BASE METAL
Breaking test/requirements:
.one of the remaining sections of the fillet weld is to have the
weld on l\1e first side gouged or machined to facilitate
breaking the fillet weld on the second side by closing the two
plates together, subjecting the root of the weld to tension.
DEY NORSKE VERITAS
-:]

f
t

-:J
:J
1
'f

On the other remaining section, the weld on the second side
is to be gouged or machined and the section fractured using
the same procedure. The fractured surfaces are to be exam-
ined. and there is to be no evidence of incomplete penetration
or internal cracking and they are to be reasonably free from
porosity.
B 600 Covered electrodes for gravity or contact
welding
601 Where an electrode is submitted solely for approval
for use in contact welding using automatic gravity or similar
welding devices, deposited metal tests, fillet weld tests (see
500) and, where appropriate, butt weld tests similar to those
for normal manual electrodes are to be carried out using the
process for which the electrode is recommended by the ma-
nufacturer.
Where an electrode is submitted for approval for use in
contact welding using automatic gravity or similar welding
devices in addition to normal manual welding, fillet weld
and, where appropriate, butt weld tests, using the grayity
or other contact device as recommended by the manufac-
turer, are to be carried out in addition to the normal approval
tests.
The fillet. welding is to be carried out using the welding
process recommended by the manufacturer, with the longest
size of the electrode manufactured. The manufacturer's re-
commended current range is to be reported for each elec-
trode size.
701 Deep penetration electrodes will be approved as grade
1 electrode only. The suffix DP will be added.
702 If an electrode approved as a normal penetration
electrode is also desired approved as a deep penetration
electrode for downhand butt welding and horizontal-vertical
fillet welding, the additional tests given below are to be
carried out.
703 When a manufacturer states that an electrode having
deep penetrating properties, also can be used for downhand
butt welding of thicker plates with bevelled edges, the elec-
trode will be tested as a normal penetration electrode and the
full series of tests_in the downhand position are to he carried
out, together with the deep penetration tests given below.
704 When an electrode is recommended for deep pene-
tration welding of butt joint and horizontal"vertical fillets
only, the tests given below are required.
Preparation of butt weld test assemblies:
Two plates of thickness equal to twice the diameter of the
core of the electrode plus 2 mm are to be butt welded, with
one downhand run of welding from each side, see Fig.5.
The joint edges are to be prepared square and smooth. The
gap is not to exceed 0,25 mm after the tack welding.
The test assembly is to be welded with and S mni diameter
electrode or the largest size manufactured if this is less than
Smm.
Butt weld test specimens:
Two transverse tensile, two bend (one face and one root
1k I-t
t = 2xCOAc UIJ\MCIt:M
OF ELECTRODE + 2 mm
Fig. 5
y.<::!> mm
MIN.10Dmm MIN. 100 mm
35 mm DISCARD
-----1- -"T-----
;:,:=.":
;::::
L __

-------
0 _____ -
BEND TEST
------- 1--------
BEND TEST
------- -------
TRANSVERSE
TENSILE TEST
1-------- r-------
TRANSVERSE
TENSILE TEST
1-------- -------
35 mm DISCARD
CHARPY V-NOTCH TEST SPECIMENS
FROM DOWN HAND AND VERTICAL
- TEST ASSEMBLIES, THE TEST SPEC1-
. MEN ARE TO BE CUT AS SHOWN IN
FIG. 2.
Deep penetration butt weld tests
Butt weld test requirements:
E
E
E'
E
,
EO
E'
Ol
I-
E
E
g
I-
The transverse tensile strength is not to be less than 400
N/mm
2
.
having any dimensions exceeding 3 mm can be seen on the
outer surface
The average impact value for the three specimens taken
from the centre of the weld is not to be less than 47 J at
+20C.
Preparation of fillet weld_test assemblies:
A fillet weld test assembly is to be prepared as shown in
Fig.6. The welding is to be carried out in one run for each
fillet weld, with plate A in the horizontal plane during wel-
ding. The length of the fillet weld is to be 160 mm and the
gap between the plates is not to exceed 0,25mm.
.one side is to be welded with 4 mm diameter electrode and
the second side is to be welded with the maximum size of
electrode manufactured. The welding current used is to be
within the range recommended by the manufacturer and the
welding is to be carried out using normal welding practice.
The welded assembly is to be cut by sawing or machining
about 35 mm from the ends of the fillet welds and the joints
are to be ground, polished and -etched.
Fillet weld test requirements:
The welding of the fIllet made with a 4 mm diameter elec-
trode is to show a penetration of 4 mm, see Fig.6, and the
corresponding penetration of the fillet made with the maxi-
mum size electrode is to be reported.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
12.5mm
I-o;--I..E-ENETRATION TO BE REPO!,TED
MAX. SIZE OF ELECTRODE
MANUFACTURED
6\ I.OVI'''' ... HIm e::! a \.- A
Fig. 6
Deep penetration fIllet weld test
B 800 Annual tests
801 Covered electrodes for normal and fillet welcting are
Two all-weld metal test assemblies are to be prepared in
accordance with 200. The extent of testing and mechanical
requirements are to be as given in 200.
These requirements also applies to electrodes which are ap-
proved for fillet welding only.
802 Covered electrodes for gravity or contact welding are
One deposited metal test assembly using the gravity or other
contact device as recommended by the manufacturer is to
be prepared. If this electrode is approved also for normal
manual arc welding, the annual test is to be performed ac-
cording to 801.
803 Covered electrodes for deep penetration are to be
tested as follows:
Two plates are to be prepared as given in 700. One trans-
verse tensile test specimen, two bend (one face and one root)
test and three impact test specimens are to be prepared. At
each cut in the test assembly, the joints are to be examined
to ensure that complete fusion has taken place.
804 For those electrodes which are approved for both
normal penetration welding and for deep penetration wel-
ding in the downhand position, deep penetration weld tests
are to be carried out in addition to the deposited metal tests
for nonnal penetration.
Annual test requirements:
--The-tenEile itrength,yiold strosB,alongation and impaottoot
results are all to comply with the requirements for initial
approval tests.
Additional tests:
If any of the above tests fails, re-testing is to be carried out
in accordance with A900.
B 900 Upgracting
901 An approved electrode may be granted a higher grade
than that initially granted, provided that impact testing is
carried out with satisfactory results at the temperature spec-
ified for the higher grade. However, for upgrading from
grade I to grade 3, or from any grade to grade 2, 3, 4, 5
Y HI5/Y HIO/Y H5 and 2, 3, 4 Y40 HI5/Y HIO/Y H5,
impact are to be carried out on specimens taken from
butt weld test assemblies (downhand, horizontal-vertical,
vertical or overhead as applicable), in addition to the normal
requirements for annual testing. Upgrading of electrodes
from grade HI5 to grade HIO or H5 may also be consid-

ered, provided that hydrogen tests are carried out in ac-
cordance with 400. Welding consumables which have not
previously been subjected to a hydrogen test, are to be tested
according to 400 when upgrading to the grades 2, 3, 4, 5
Y HI51Y HIO/Y H5 and 2, 3, 4 Y40 HI5/HlO/H5 is ap-
plied for.
C. Wire/Flux Combinations for Submerged Arc
Weldiug
C 100 General
101 Wirelflux combinations will be divided into the fol-
lowing grades:
- for high stren:f.th steels with minimum yield strength_ up
to 390 N/mm : II Y40, III Y40 and IV Y40
102 The tests are intended for automatic single or multiple
electrode submerged arc welding and the combinations are
divided into the following categories:
- for use with the multi-run technique
- for use with the two-run technique.
The suffixes T, M or TM will be added to the grade mark
to indicate two-run technique, multi-run technique or both
techniques, respectively.
When a manufacturer states that a particular wire/flux com-
bination is suitable for welding with both techniques, both
series of tests are to be carried out.
e 200 Multi-run technique
201 Where approval for use with multi-run technique is
as follows'
One all-weld,metal test assembly is to be welded in the
downhand position as shown in Fig.7.
The direction of deposition of each run is to alternate from
each end of the plate. After completion of each run, the flux
and welding slag is to be removed. Between each run, the
assembly is to be left in still air until it has cooled to 250C,
the temperature taken in the centre of the weld on the sur-
face of the seam. The thickness of each layer is not to be less
than the diameter of the wire, nor less than 4 mm.
Test specimens:
to be taken from the test assembly as shown in Fig. 7.
Test requirements:
in Table CI.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

-11
;
-;
()
)
0
/J
.::J
'J

?
,
202 Test specimens:
to be taken from each test assembly as shown in Fig. I.
Table BI
Tensile test
Grade R
m
,
ReH,
As
203 Test requirements:
in Table BI.
204 Chemical analysis:
test assembly is to be supplied oy the manufacturer and is
to include t1ie content of all significant alloying elements.
Impact test
Z
KV,]
Nlmm
2
minimum,
Nlmm2
minimum, % %
Temperature C
minimum
average
1
2 400-560 305
3
2Y
3Y
490-660 375
4Y
5Y
2 Y40
3 Y40 510-690 400
4 Y40
Butt-weld test assemblies as shown in Fig.2 are. to be pre-
tical, vertical and overhead) for which the electrode is
recommended, except that electrodes satisfying the require-
ments for downhand and vertical position will be considered
as also complying with the requirements for the horizontal-
vertical position.
When an electrode is intended for downhand position only,
one additional test assembly is te be prepared in this posi-
tion.
302 Welding procedure for test assemblies:
The following welding procedure is to be applied when
making
Downhand welding:
(except last two layers) with 5 mm diameter electrode or
greater according to the normal welding practice with the
electrode. The runs with the last two layers with the largest
diameter of electrode manufactured.
Where a second downhand test is required, the following
procedure is to be adapted:
First run with 4 mm diameter electrode. Next run with an
electrode of intermediate diameter of 5 mm or 6 mm, and
the remaining runs with the largest diameter of electrode
manufactured.
Horizontal-vertical welding:
First run with 4 mm or 5 mm diameter electrode. Subse-
quent runs with 5 mm diameter electrodes.
Vertical and overhead welding:
with 4 rnm diameter electrodes, alternatively 5 mm diameter
electrodes, if recommended by the manufacturer for the po-
sitions concerned.
Vertical downwards welding:
Vertical downwards technique should be adopted for the
preparation of the test assembly, using electrode diameters
as recommended by the manufacturer.
22
20
0
-20
0
1)
-20
47
-40
-60
0
--20
-40
ate to each test sample, after back chipping. For electrodes
suitable for downhand welding only, the test assemblies may
be turned over to carry out the back sealing run.
Test specimens:
One transverse tensile, two bend tests (face and root bend)
and three impact test specimens are to be taken from each
-?IV "'U"
\
III
2-3mm
MIN. 100 mm . MIN.100mm
REINfORCEMENT TO BE MADE
J.. :.s __ J
E-
E
.:
I
on

- , CHARPY V-NOTCH TEST SPE<;IMENS
. .J}
.1.. FROM DOWNHAND, OVERHEAD
.:! AND VERTICAL TEST ASSEMBLIES
- -- --
*J TRANSVERSE
TENSILE 0
'"
-- - - - - -" -11-+ - - - - -
*J FACE BEND
I-------H-I------ "
'J ROOT BEND
a
---- --1-11-1------
DISCARD
THESE TESTS ARE ONLY REQUIRED fOR
GRADES 2 Y. 3 Y. 4 Y, 2 Y40. 3 Y40 AND 4 Y4Q
ELECTRODES AND FOR elECTRODES FOR WELDING
OF SPECIAL QUALITIES WHEN REQUIRED
BY THE INSTITUTION
Fig. 2
Butt weld test assembly
For all assemblies the back sealing runs are to be made with .
4 mm diameter electrodes in the welding position appropri- Test requIrements:
DET NORSKE VERITAS
Bend test:
Flat bend test specimens, as shown in Sec. I Fig.2 and 3 are
to be used. The upper and lower surfaces of the weld are to
be filed, ground or machined flush with the surface of the
specimens and the edges of the specimens are to be rounded
--to-a-radius-not-exceeding-2-mm.
The test specimens are to be capable of withstanding bend-
ing through an angle of 120 over a former having a diam-
eter three times the thickness of the specimen.
A 800 Hydrogen test
801 Low hydrogen consumables are to be SUbjected to a
. hydrogen test. The test is to be carried out in accordance
with the mercury method specified in ISO 3690-1977, or
any method such as the gas chromatic which correlates with
that method. The glycerine method may be admitted at the
discretion of the Society. This method is described below.
Prior to welding, the consumables may undergo a normal
drying process recommended by the manufacturer.
802 Four test specimens are to be prepared measuring 12
x 25 mm in cross-section by about 125 mm in length. The
parent metal may be any grade of structural steel. Before
welding, the specimens are to be weighed to the nearest 0,1
gram. On the 25 mm surface of each test specimen, a single
weld bead about 100 mm in length is to be deposited by a
4 mm diameter electrode, using about ISO mm of the elec-
trode. The welding is to be carried out with an arc as short
as possible and with a current of approximately ISO A. All
four test specimens are to be welded within a period of 30
minutes. For iron powder electrodes, an electrode with. a
. dimension giving approximately the same quantity of de-
posited metal as an ordinary 4 mm diameter electrode is to
be used. For each test specimen, a new electrode is to be
used.
Within 30 seconds of the completion of the welding of each
specimen, the slag is to be removed and the specimen
quenched in water at approximately 20C.
After_3D seconds in the water, the specimen is to be cleaned
and dried and then placed in an apparatus suitable for the
collection of hydrogen by displacement of glycerine. The
I':nmI11ct?.d within 2 minntes aft"r hreaking
the arc. The glycerine is to be kept at a temperature of 45C
during the test. All specimens are to be welded and treated
identically.
The specimens are to be kept immersed in the glycerine for
a period of 48 hours and, after removal, are to be cleaned
in water and alcohol, dried and weighed to the nearest 0, I
gram to determine the amount of weld deposit.
803 The amount of gas given off is to be measured to the
nearest 0,05 cm
3
and corrected for temperatore and pressure
to 20C and 760 mm Hg.
A 900 Re-testing
901 Tensile and bend tests:
Where the result of a tensile or bend test does not comply
with the requirements, duplicate test specimens of the same
type are to be prepared and satisfactorily tested. Where in-
sufficient original welded assembly is available, a new as-
sembly is to be prepared using welding consumables from
the same batch. If the new assembly is made with the same
procedure as the original assembly, only the duplicate re-test
specimens needs to be prepared and tested. Otherwise, all
test specimens should be prepared as for re-testing.
902 Charpy V-notch impact tests:
When the average value of a set of three impact test speci-
mens fails to meet the stated requirements, or the value of
,
more than one specimen is below the required average va-
lue, or when the value of only one specimen is below 70 %
of the specified average value, three additional specimens
from the same piece may be tested and the results added to
those previously obtained to form a new average. If this new
ayerage_complies_with...-the_requirements_and_if_no_inore-than __ _
two individual results are lower than the required average
and no more than one result is below 70 % of the specified
average value, the tests may be accepted.
B. Covered Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc
Welding of Normal and High Strength Steels
B 100. General
101 Electrodes will be divided into the following grades:
- for normal strength steels: I, 2 and 3
to 355 N/mm : 2 Y, 3 Y, 4 Y and 5 Y
to 390 N/mm : 2 Y40, 3 Y40 and 4 Y40
102 Electrodes complying with the requirements stipulated
in 400 will be given the suffix HIS, HIO or H5 added to the
grade mark. Electrodes for high strength steels are to be
hydrogen tested and are to satisfy the requirements for at
least the suffIx HIS.
downhand position as shown in Fig.l, one using 4 mm di-
ameter electrodes and the other using the largest size manu-
factured. If an electrode is available in one diameter only,
one test assembly is sufficient.
UNE. OF CUT I
FOR TENSILE I
SPECIMEN""7
20 mrfl I
MIN.
,'"
REINFORCEMENT TO BE MACE
16m." I
IJIN.100mm .3Omm. MIN.100mm
E
E

Fig. 1
All-weld-metal test
The weld metal is to be deposited in single or multi-run
layers according to normal practice, the direction of deposi-
tion being reversed between subsequent layers, each bead
being no less than 2 mm and not more that 4 mm thick ..
Between each run, the assembly is to be left in still air until
it has cooled below 250C, the temperature being checked
in the middle of the. weld bead.

:)
:)

:)
:)
.:)
,

DET NORSKE VERITAS
TableCl
Tensile test
Grade R
m
,
Rea,
As Z
Impact test
KV,],
Nlmm
2
minimum,
minimum, % %
Temperature C
minimum
Nlmm
2
average
I
II 400-560 305
1II
IY
IIY
lilY 490-660 375
IV Y
VY
II Y40
1II Y40 510-690 400
IV Y40
TACK WELD
mm
I
,j,
11
TENSlLE.TEST-.

ffi
tr
'-
, 30
B
$
::::: ,0
CHARPY' ::::: ,0
,0
l"iPACT TES;
f
f:::: 10
'01
I I
I I
,
i
I

OF C1

I
C,
ril:
TEST -
I
I
I
"
I
ill
I
, ,

I
I
i
,
I
Fig. 7
Multi-run weld. All-weld-metal test
Chemical analysis:
supplied by the manufacturer and is to include the content
of all significant alloying elements.
203 Butt weld tests are to be performed as follows:
One butt weld test assembly is to be welded in the downhand
The welding is to be carried out by the multi-run technique
and the welding conditions are to be the same as those
adopted for the deposited metal test assembly.
22
20
0
-20
20
0
34
1)
-20
-40
-60
0
-20 41
-40
,
I
The back sealing run is to be applied in the downhand po-
sition after cutting out the root run to clean metal.
Test specimens:
Two transverse tensile, four bend (two face and two root
rnm
UIN 150 mm
01
I
I
r---
-C
j TENSILE
I TEST
.... ---
i.eEND -

,-T!.S!- _
-
_
f

CHARPY r
I
JW>ACT TEST
"
rBEND -
T
_
feENO -
!--
I..,1!S.!. _
J r---
I TENSILE
i
I TEST
L ___
Fig. 8
Multi-run weld. Butt weld test
Test requirements:
MIN. 150 mm
OISC",RQ

---3

r
noo
r
n
"
TI10
---21:

OISCARD

2
%

in Table C2. The position of fracture in the transverse tensile
test is to be reported. The bend test specimens can be con-
sidered as complying with the requirements if, after bend-
ing, no crack or defect having any dimensions exceeding 3
mm can be seen on the outer surface of the test specimen.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
TableC2
Grade
R
m
,
Temperature
KV,J,
minimum,
minimum
Nlmm
2
C
average
I 20
11 400 0
1lI -20
IY 20
34
11Y 0
llIY 490 -20
IVY -40
VY
-60
11 Y40 0
III Y40 510 -20 41
IV Y40 -40
301 Where approval for use with two-run technique is re-
quested, two butt weld test assemblies are to be prepared.
When a wirelflux combination is submitted for approval for
use with the two-run technique only, no deposited metal test
is required. in this case approval tests are limited to the butt
weld tests described hereafter.
Two butt-weld test assemblies are to be prepared, using the
following thicknesses:
-for grades I and IY
- for grades II to VY
-for grades II Y40 to IV Y40
12-15 mm and 20-25
mm
20-25 mm and 30-35
mm
20-25 mm and 30-35
mm
The maximum diameter of wire, grades of steel plate and
edge preparation to be used are to be in accordance with that
shown in Fig.IO. Minor deviations from the stipulated edge
preparation may be accepted, if requested by the manufac-
turer. The root gap is not to exceed I mm. Each butt weld
is to be welded in two runs, one from each side, using am-
-amIUavclsp6cllil.i:;ecurlillficc willi Um fc
O
commendations of the manufactur er and normal good
welding practice. After completion of the first run, the flux
and welding slag are to be removed and the assembly is to
be left in still air until it has cooled to 100C, the temper-
ature taken in the centre of the weld, on the surface of the
seam.
Test specimens:
This tensile test specimen is to be cut with the longitudinal
axis coinciding with the centre of the weld about 7 mm be-
low the plate surface on the side from which the second run
is made.
welded assembly from the positions and with the orientations
shown in Fig. I I. The test specimens are to be prepared ac-
cording to A700.
IN. 150
... ',JY """ UIN.1SO ........ ,,,,,,,,mm
I
!
I
r
TENS1LE
-
T
===N
I TEST '.
t.. ___
i BENO -
r=-,:-

L TE.s!. _
t
---
-E[
f
::::::I"
CHARPY
TI"
I--
1MPACT TEST

T iBENO-
--.n

-f
--
i
rENSllE
===:9:
. TEST
L ____
-'-
lONGITUDINAt..
ih
TENSILE TEST 3Q mrn FOR PLATES
lWHEN APPROVAl.
-rtf
UP TO 20mm
-
REOUIRED FOR THICKNESS.
1'WO-RUN
, ,
52 mm FOR 35 """ PLATE
TECHNIQUE ONl. Yj

, ,
,
r
,.,
'-r
Fig. 9
Two-run weld. Butt weld test
Test requirements:
in Table CI for the longitudinal tensile test specimens and
Table C2 for the transverse tensile and impact test speci-
defect having any dimensions exceeding 3 mm can be seen
C 400 Annual tests
401 Wirelflux combinations approved are to be subjected
tn at lB"! the f"n,mling test ..
Multi-run technique:
One all-weld"metal test - one tensile and three impact tests.
Two-run technique:
One butt-weld test, plate thickness 20 mm minimum - one
transverse tensile, two bend and three impact tests. One
longitudinal tensile test is also to be prepared for wirelflux
C 500 Upgrading
501 An approved wirelflux combination may be granted a
higher grade than that initially granted, provided that impact
testing is carried out with satisfactory results at the temper-
ature specified for the higher grade. However, for upgrading
grade II Y(T/M) to V Y(T/M) and II Y40(T1M) to IV
Y 40(T 1M), impact tests are to be carried out on specimens
taken from butt weld test assemblies in addition to the nor-
mal requirements for annual testing.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

:) \)
)
C)
J 8
J
()
6
\ I
and subjected to the tests detailed in subsequent sections of
these Rules.
Use of a manufacturer's quality assurance system as an al-
ternative to annual testing procedure may be accepted after
agreement with the Society.
301 All weld tests ma), be performed by the manufacturer
or anyone appointed by him.
302 The welding conditions used such as amperage, volt-
age, travel speed, etc. are to be within the range recom-
mended by the manufacturer for normal good welding
practice. When a filler metal is stated to be swtable for both
alternating current (A.C.) and direct current (D.C.), A.C.
is to be used for the preparation of the test assemblies.
303 The tests prescribed are to be carried out for each type
of welding consumable for which approval is required.
304 The Society may request, in a particular case, addi-
tional tests or requirements as may be considered necessary.
A 400 Changes
401 Any alteration proposed by the maker to the approved
consumaole which may result in a change in the cnemical
composition and the mechanical properties of the deposited
Table Al Grades of welding consumables
metal, must be immediately notified to the Society. Addi-
tional tests may be necessary.
402 Upgrading of welding consumables will be considered
only at the manufacturer's request, preferably at the time of
annual testing. Generally, for this purpose, tests from butt
weld assemblies will be required in addition to the normal
annual approval tests.
501 Welding consumables are divided into groups, de-
pending on the strength of the filler metal and further di-
vided into grades depending on the impact test temperature
and the chemical composition of the filler metal.
The grades of welding consumables given in Table AI are
specified in this Section .
502 Welding consumables which have satisfied the re-
quirements for a higher toughness grade, are also considered
as complying with the requirements for a lower toughness
grade of the same group. .
Normal strength steels High strength steels Extra high strength steels Austenitic stainless steels
I 2Y 3/4/5 Y42 308/308Mo/308L
2 3Y 309/309U309Nbl
3 4Y 314/5 Y46 309Mo/309MoL
5 5Y 310/310Nb/310Mo
3/4/5 Y50 312
I 2/3/4 Y40 316/316L
Grade of welding II 3/4/5 Y55 3 17/3 17L
consumables III IY 318
V IIY 3/4/5 Y62 330
IllY 347
IV Y 3/4/5 Y69 349
VY
II/III/IV Y 40
601 Thete.t ",'dd. are mmnally tobeIIlZide on the Il1llte
o
rial for which approval of the welding consumable is de-
sired. Any grade of structural steel may, however, be used
for the preparation of the all-weld-metal test assemblies.
602 The test specimens are to be made under controlled
conditions, on metal deposited from the filler metal in
question.
603 After being welded, the test assemblies are not to be
subjected to any heat treatment.
604 It is recommended that the welded assembly is sub-
jected to radiographic examination to ascertain whether there
are any defects in the weld prior to testing.
A .700 Test specimens
701 The test specimens referred to in this Section is de-
scribed in Ch.1 Sec.2 and Ch.3 Sec.!.
Tensile tests:
Round tensile test specimens are to be machined to the di-
mensions shown in Sec.l B201, type A, care being taken
plates.
Flat specimens of the form given in Sec. I B201, type Care
to be prepared. The upper and lower surfaces of the weld
are to be machined flush with the surface of the plate.
Prior to testing, the tensile test specimens may be subjected
to a tem\,erature not exceedinll 250 C for a period not ex-
ceeding6 hours, J'Jrhydrogen removal. .- . . . ..
Charpy V-notch impact tests:
Standard Charpy V -notch test specimens are to be prepared
as shown in Ch.1 Sec.2
The test temperature for specimens tested at 0, -20, -40
and -60C are to be controlled and kept within 2C of
the prescribed temperature.
The test specimens are to be cut with their longitudinal axis
transverse to the weld length, with the notch perpendicular
to the surface of the plate and positioned as follows:
- for deposited metal and butt weld test assemblies with
multi-run technique, the test specimens are to be cut at
mid thickness of the weld
- for two-run welded test assemblies the specimens are to
be cut on the 2nd run side, 2 mm below the surface
- for electroslag or electrogas welded test assemblies all
specimens are to be cut 2 mm below the surface
- for one-side automatic welding processes, the test speci-
mens are to be cut 2 mm below the face side and 2 mm
below the root side of the test assembly.
The average absorbed energy value is to comply with the
requirements of subsequent sections. One individual value
may be less than the required average value provided that it
is not less than 70 % of this value.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
.:
SECTION 3
TYPE APPROVAL OF WELDING CONSUMABLES
Contents
A. General
A 100 Scope
A 400 Changes
A 700 Test specimens
A 800 Hydrogen test
A 900 Re-testing
B, Covered Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc Welding of Nor-
mal and High Strength Steels
B 100 General
B 400 Hydrogen test
B 500 Covered electrodes for fillet welding
B 600 Covered electrodes for gravity or contact welding
B 800 Annual tests
B 900 Upgrading
C. Wire/Flux Combinations for Submerged Arc Welding
C 100 General
C 200 Multi-run technique
C 400 Annual tests
C 500 Upgrading
D. Combinations for Use in One-side Automatic Welding Proc-
General
One-run welding
Multi-run welding
One-and multi-run welding
Testing
Requirements
Annual tests
300 Annual test
400 Oth(?r welding consumables
J, Welding Consumables for Welding of Extra High Strength
Steels
J 100 General
J 300 Annual tests
K. Welding Consumables for Welding of Austenitic Stainless
Steels
K 100 General
K 500 Annual tests
L, Welding Consumables for Welding of Ferritic-Austenitic
Stainless Steels (Duplex Steels)
L 100 General
L 600 Annual tests
M. Welding Consumables for Welding of Aluminium Alloys for
General and Low-Temperature Service
M 100 General
M 200 Test assemblies
M 300 Testing
M 400 Annual tests
A 100 Scope
A. General
101 This Section specifies the requirements to be complied
with for obtaining the Society's type approval of welding
WireiGasCombin"ilons ArcW cldiD
g
....
E 100 General . low temperature service, austenitic stainless steels, duplex
esses
D 100
D 200
D 300
D 400
D 500
D 600
D 700
D 800 Upgrading
E 200 Semi-automatic multi-run welding steels and aluminium alloys. This section covers lACS UR
E 300 Automatic multi-run welding W23.
E 500 Annual tests
E 600 Upgrading
F. Combinations for Use in Electro-slag and Electro-gas Wel-
ding Processes
F 100 General
F 200 Initial tests
F 300 Annual tests
G. Welding Consumables for Welding of Steel Grades NV 2-4,
NV 2-4L, NV 4-4 and NV 4-4L for Low-Temperature Ap-
plications
G 100 General
G 300 Annual tests
H. Welding Consumables for Low-Alloy, Heat-Resisting Steels
(NV 0,3Mo, NV 1Cr 0,5Mo and NV 2,25Cr 1Mo)
H 100 General
H 400 Annual tests
I, Welding Consumables for Welding of Steel Grades NV
1,5Ni, NV 3,5Ni, NV SNi and NV 9Ni
I 100 General
201 The surveyor is to be satisfied that the manufacturer's
plant, methods of production and quality control of welding
consumables are to be such as to ensure a reasonable uni-
fonnity in manufacture.
202 All test assemblies are to be prepared under the su-
pervision of the surveyor, and all tests are to be carried out
in his presence.
203 When welding consumables are manufactured in se-
veral factories of the same company, the complete series of
approval tests are to be carried out in one of the works only.
In the other factories, a reduced test programme, at least
equivalent to annual tests included hydrogen testing for low
hydrogen type consumables is pennitted if the manufacturer
can verify that the materials used and the fabrication process
are identical with those used in the main works. This re-
quirement is applicable to all manufacturers of filler pro-
ducts under licence (sister firms). However, should there be
any doubt, complete test-series may be required.
204 All welding consumables approved are to be subjected
to an annual re-testing. On these occasions, samples of the
approved consumables are to be selected by the surveyor
DET NORSKE VERITAS

r.:]

::)

':)
/J
:]

Plate Typical edge Maximwn
thick- preparation diameter
ness of wire
(mm) (mm)
12-15
(
I I !
5
60'

20-25
\

6
.W

30-35
I

I:
{
'7
70
0
Grade of
wireljlux
combination
I
IY
. I
II
III
IY
I!Y
IllY
IVY
I!
III
I!Y
IllY
IVY
Grade of steel
A
A-32,A-36 1)
A
A
B, D or E
A-32, A-36, A-40 1)
A-32, A-36, A-40 1)
D-32, D-36, 0-40 1)
Any grade of
HT steel 1)
B, D or E
B, D or E
A-32, A-36, A-40 1)
D-32, 0-36, D-40 1)
Any grade of
HT steel 1)
1) For testing of grade IY, IIY, IllY and IVY combinations, the tensile strength of parent plate material is not to be less than 490
N/mm2, and the chemical composition, including the refming element, should be reported for infonnation.
Fig. 10
Two-run weld, butt weld test, root gap - 0,7 mm
D. Combinations for Use in One-side Automatic
Welding Processes
D 100 General
101 This welding process will be divided into the follow-
ing grades:
tion for one-side, one-run welding on thicker plates, special
procedure tests are to be carried. out on the thickest plate
intended welded with this technique.
Test specimens:
Test requirements:
- for norma! strength steels: I, II and III The test results are all to comply with the requirements given
- for high strength steels with minimum yield stre;ngtl1.ul' ... T hI .m __ .
i035S-N7iiiiii2,TY;-iIY;IITY,TVYaIldYV . - . In a e .
- for high strength steels with minimum yield strength up
to 390 N/mm
2
: II Y40, III Y40 and IV Y40.
102 Separate tests are specified for:
- one-run welding
- multi-run welding (including two-run welding).
Information regarding joint design, wire diameter, number
of runs, tandem or multi-arc welding etc. is to be reported.
103 The welding conditions are to be the same as those
indicated for wirelflux combinations in C, with the amend-
ments and additions made in 200 to 800.
D 200 One-run welding
Two test assemblies with 12-15 rom plate thickness are to
be made. If a shipyard intends to apply the tested
Fig, 11
[ - I
I 55
'NO RUN N
I I
2ND RUN
1.._'-
Two-run weld, Impact tests
DET NORSKE VERITAS
Rules for Sh,ps, January 1996
t
C \ :U' AND g SHOUlD Sf IN
E '\-- -u.-.. l ACCORDANCE WITH
I THE MANUfACTuRER'S
RECOMI.4ENOATlON
t
Fig. 12
,..----l-!-I-----,
I
,
'---
)
CHARPY IMPACT
TESTS fflC!qTJ.
i..
r--- ..,. ----, BEND TEST:
L _____ L ____ J (ROOT)
r---- -r -- .... -,-
ITENSllE
__ J
l,QNGITUDINAt.
TENSILE
TEST.
One-side automatic welding, test assembly and location of spe-
cimens
D 300 Multi-run welding
301
Two test assemblies, one assembly with 15-25 = plate
thickness and one with 35 = thickness, are to be made as
shown in Fig.12.
TableD!
Tensile lest
Test specimens:
Test requirements:
in Table Dl.
D 400 One-and multi-run welding
One test assembly with 15 to 25 = plate thickness is to be
welded by one-run welding technique and one is to be
welded with 35 = thickness by multi-run technique.
Test specimens:
Test requirements:
in Table Dl.
D 500 Testing
501 Mechanical test specimens:
One longitudinal tensile, two transverse tensile, four trans-
verse bend test (two face and two root bend) and six impact
(three from the face side and three from the root side) test
specimens are to be taken from each welded test assembly
as shown in Fig.12.
Macro- and microstructure:
One photomicrograph from the fusion zone of the thickest
test assembly (one- or multi-run) is also to be forwarded for
consideration.
Chemical analysis:
supplied by the manufacturer and is to include all significant
alloying elements.
D 600 Reqnirements
601 The test results are all to comply with the require-
ments given in Table Dl. The position of fracture in the
tranwerie-tensile tWEt &picimen&-iv to be :r:apoFtad: The-bond
test specimens can be considered as complying with the re-
quirements if, after bending, no crack or defect having any
dimensions exceeding 3 mm can be seen on the outer surface
Impact test
Longitudinal
KV,J,
Grade
R
m
, ReH,
Temperature
Transverse
minimum, minimwn,
AS,
c
minimum
Nlmm2 Nlmm2
minimum, % average
I 20
II 400 400-560 305 0
III -20
IY 20
34
IIY 0
IllY 490 490-660 375 22 -20
IV Y -40
VY
-60
II Y40 0
III Y40 510 510-690 400 -20 41
NY40 -40
D 700 Annual tests
701 Combinations approved for one- or multi-run welding
are to be tested as folIows:
One test assembly with 12-25 mm plate thickness as shown
in Fig. 12 is to be welded.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

:)
<J
J o
/J
C)
'J 0
.202 Recognition of other standards is subject to submittal
to the Society for evaluation.
E 300 Certification
301 Welding and testing of weld assemblies are to be per-
formed in the presence of the surveyor. Upon successful
completion, the Society will certifY that the welder has
passed the approval testing.
3i12 Where certification is performed by other lACS
members or independent organisations. e.g. accredited or
nationally approved certification bodies, recognition of such
certification will be evaluated on a case by case basis. The
Society reserves the right, however, to require verification
of welders' qualifications when deemed necessary. Such
verification may include testing prior to production, extra
NDT and/or welding production tests.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
Table C4 Mechanical properties in the welded condition
Alloy Temper Filler Tensile strength Yield strength
Rm. minimum in HAZ, RpO,2 minimum
(Nlmm
2
) (Nlmm
2
)
NV-5052 a,F, HIll, 5356 170 65
H32, H34
NV-5754 O,F, H111, H24 5356-5183 190 80
NV-5154A 0, HIll 5356-5183 215 85
NV-5454 O,F, HIll, H34, 5356-5183 215 85
NV-5086 O,F, HIll, 5356-5183 240 100
H116, H32, H34
NV-5083 O,F t< 6mm 5183 270 125
0, F t> 6mm 5356-5183 270 115
H116, H321 5356 270 115
H116, H321 5183 270 125
NV-5383 0, H111, H116, 5183 290 140
H321
NV-6060 T5 5356-5183 95 65
NV-6061 T4 53565183 165 115
i
T5 or T6 165 115
NV-6063 T5 5356-5183 100 65
I
T6 100 65
NV-6005A T5 or T6 5356-5183 165 115
NV-6082 T4 5356-5183 170 110
I ________
T5 or T6
----
D. Welding procedures, Ferritic-Austenitic
Stainless Steel (Duplex)
D 100 General
101 Welding shops which intend 'to build welded cargo
tanks, parts of hull structure, process pressure vessels or
piping systems in Ferritic-Austenitic stainless steels are to
carry out WPQT for all types of butt welds and essential
fillet welds in the construction. See Ch.3 Sec. I.
102 The WPQT's are to cover all relevant dimensions,
positions and material combinations. Details regarding es-
sential variables, validity of the procedure and mechanical
ilfelD Be lis descftliedlii B Willi iiddill5ii.iilfeqllli'e'
ments as listed in 200.
D 200 Additional testing
201 Butt welds and fillet welds are to be corrosion tested
according to ASTM G48-76 Method A. The test specimen
is to be in the as welded state after normal weld cleaning
operation. The test specimens are to be exposed to the sol-
ution at a constant temperature of 20C for 24 hours.
Test requirements :
- no pitting attack is to be visible on the test face(s)
- general weight loss is not to exceed 20 mg.
Guidance note:
Welds between Ferrhie-Austenitic steels and other grades of
stainless or e/Mn steels may not need to be corrosion tested.
--e-n-d--o-f--G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e--n:o-t-e--
202 Impact testing as described in B300.
Impact test temperature -20C. The average value for ab-
sorbed energy is not to be less than 27 J.
203 Microstructural examination
The test samples are to comprise the weld metal, heat af-
fected zone and base metal. The microstructure is to be
170 115
suitably etched and examined at 400X magnification and is
to be free from grain boundary carbides and precipitates.
The ferrite content in the weld metal root and unreheated
weld cap is to be determined in accordance with ASTM E
562 and be in the range of 25-70 %.
301 Reference is made to B900 and any change in the
following additional essential variables which are to lead to
a new qualification :
- variation in the heat input greater than 15 %.
E 100 General
101 These requirements apply to the Society's approval
of welders for fusion welding of steel and non-ferrous me-
tals. The welding processes for which qualifications are re-
quired include those which are designated as manual or
partly mechanized welding. Welders are to pass an approval
testing in accordance with 200. Yards and workshops are
required to keep records of the welders' qualifications and,
when required, furnish copies of valid welders' certificates.
102 Welding operators using fully mechanized or fully
automatic processes need generally not pass an approval
testing. However, operators are to receive adequate training
in setting or programming and operating the equipment.
Appropriate records of training are to be maintained. Yards
and workshops may be required to furnish valid approval
test certificates.
201 Welders are to be tested to a standard recognised by
the Society, e.g. EN 287, ISO 9606, ASME Section IX,
ANSI/AWS D1.1.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
..

I::]
::]

::] ::]
:J ':J

When a combination is approved for both one- and multi-run
welding, the the test assembly is to be welded with the one-
run technique.
702 One longitudinal and one transverse tensile test speci-
men, to bend (one face and one root bend) and six impact
test specimens (three root and three face) are to be taken
from the test assembly as shown in Fig. 12. .
D 800 Upgrading
801 An approved combination may be granted a higher
grade than that initially granted, provided that impact testing
is carried out with satisfactory results at the temperature
specified for the higher grade. However, for upgrading
grade II Y(TIM) to V Y(T/M) and II Y40(TIM) to IV Y40
(TIM), impact tests are to be carried out on specimens taken
from butt weld test assemblies in addition to the normal re-
quirements for annual testing.
E. Wires and Wire/Gas Combinations for Metal
Arc Welding
E 100 General
101 Wire/gas combinations, flux cored or flux coated
wires with or without shielding gas will be divided into the
following grades:
to 390 N/mm : II Y40, III Y40 and IV Y40.
102 The wires are divided into the following categories:
- for use in semi-automatic multi-run welding
for- u.e inautDl11lltio'multi,run",olding
- for use in automatic two-run welding.
For wires intended for automatic welding, the suffixes T,
M and TM will be added to indicate two-run, multi-run or
both welding techniques, respectively.
For wires intended for semi-automatic welding, the suffix S
will be added to the grade mark.
For wires intended for both welding processes, the suffixes
will be added in combination.
103 The test assemblies are to be prepared by the relevant
welding technique for which approval is reqUested, how-
ever, where approval is requested for both semi-automatic
and automatic techniques, test assemblies need only be pre-
pared by the semi-automatic technique. If approval of auto-
matic two-run welding technique is requested, test
assemblies. are also to .be prepared by this technique.
104 Where applicable, the composition of the shielding gas
is to be reported. Unless otherwise agreed by the Society,
additional approval tests are required when the shielding gas
used is different from that used for the original approval
tests.
105 Flux cored or flux coated wires may, at manufactur-
er's option, be submitted to a hydrogen test as detailed in
A800, using the manufacturer's recommended welding con-
ditions and adjusting the deposition rate to give a weight of
weld deposit per sample similar to that deposited when using
manual electrodes.
Wires complying with our requirements stipulated in B400
will have the suffix (HIS), (HI0) or (H5) added to the grade
mark.
E 200 Semi-automatic multi-run welding
201 The term semi-automatic is used to describe processes
in which the weld is made manually by a welder holding a
gun through which the wire is continuously fed.
Where approval for use with semi-automatic welding is re-
quested, all-weld-metal and butt-weld tests are to be carried
out as specified in 202 and 203.
downhand position as shown in Fig. I.
One test assembly is to be welded using a wire of 2,4 mm
diameter or of the largest size manufactured and the other
using a wire of 1,2 mm diameter of of the smallest size
manufactured. Where wires are available in one diameter
only, one test assembly is sufficient.
The weld metal is to be deposited according to the practice
rooommendodb}'theIIlllIlufaoturar and tho thiolm.DDof onoh
layer of weld metal is to be in the range of 2 mm to 6 mm.
Test specimens:
Test requirements:
in Table EI.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
T3bIeEl
Grade Rm.
ReB.
Tensile test Impact lest
As. Z
Temperature
KV,J,
Nlmm
2
minimum,
minimum, % %
C
minimum
Nlmm
2
average
I
II 400-560 305
III
IY
IIY
lllY 490-660 375
IV Y
VY
II Y40
1Il Y40 510-690 400
IV Y40
1) Reduction of area to be reported for information.
Chemical analysis:
tical, vertical and overhead) for which the wire is
recommended.
One test assembly is to be prepared in the downhand posi-
tion, using a 1,2 mm diameter wire for the first run or a wire
of the smallest size manufactured and using a 2,4 mm di-
ameter, or of the largest size manufactured for the remaining
runs.
In the case where the wire is intended for downhand position
only, an additional test assembly is to be prepared by the
same welding procedure using wires of different diameter.
TabIeE2
Tensile lest
-- ,--
22
20
0
-20
20
0
I)
-20 47
-40
-60
,
0
-20
-40
The other test assemblies are tobe prepared in the vertical,
horizontal-vertical and overhead positions using for the first
run a wire of 1,2 mm diameter or of the smallest size man-
ufactured and using for the remaining runs the largest size
of wire recommended by the manufacturer for the position
concerned.
Test specimens:
One transverse tensile, two bend (one face and one root
Test requirements:
bending, no crack or defect having any dimensions exceed-
imen.
Impact lest - KV, 1, minimum average
, -rJi'iillE
-]{m. Downhand; Izorfzonta{:"'
. _. Veriical (upward and
minimum, Nlmm2
Ter.nl'erature 0(;
I 20
II 400 0
1Il -20
IY 20
34
IIY 0
lIlY 490 -20 47
NY -40
VY -60
II Y40 0
1Il Y40 510 -20 41
NY40 -40
E 300 Automatic multi-run welding
Where approval for use with automatic multi-run welding is
The preparation of the assembly is to be as described in
C201, except that the thickness of each layer is not to be less
than 3 mm.
Test specimens:
Two longitudinal tensile and three impact test sl'ecimens are
to be taken from the.test assembly as shown in Fig.7.
One all-weld-metal test assembly is to be welded in the
downhand position as shown in Fig. 7.
Test requirements:
in Table E3.
DEr NORSKE VERITAS

-)
,
<J
/j
'---_/ o
0
(J 0
,
5
210 The tensile strength of the test specimens is not to be
less than specified for the parent alloy in Table C4.
211 One macrosection is to be prepared from the test as-
sembly to reveal the weldment macro structure. The macro-
section is to be visually inspected using a magnification of
5 to lOX. The macrosection is to show a regular weld profile
with a smooth transition to the base material without signif-
icant undercut or excessive reinforcement and show thor-
ough fusion between adjacent layers of weld metal and base
metal. There are to be no cracks, lack of fusion and in-
complete penetration.
C 300 WPQT for fmet welds
as possible the plates are to be of a sufficient size to ensure
For fillet welds the test assembly is to be as defmed in Fig.9.
L . = 350mm
mm.
T . = 1000mm
-mm.
The test assembly is to be welded on one side ouly. For
over a length of 50 mm.
- 100 % nudaoe oraok deteotion (dyo penetront)
The soundness of the weld is to comply with ISO 10042.2
level B.
2 macrosection tests (metallographic examination).
tion of the stop/restart (for more details see B307).
C 400 Retesting
401 If any of the testsdo not satisfy the specified require-
ments, new procedure tests in duplicate may be carried out.
The results of both retests are to meet the specified require-
ments, otherwise the test is to be rejected.
501 The strength of a weldment is a function of the wel-
ding process, filler metal and the aluminium alloy in ques-
tion. For design purposes it is assumed that around each
weld there is a zone, the HAZ, in which the strength is re-
duced. The extent of the HAZ is assumed to have the same
width as the weldment plus tbe plate thickness in each di-
rection of the weld as shown in Fig.17.
If the yield strength is to be measured for information this
is to be carried out on a gauge length 2 t + W of the weld
(approximately 3 t).
r-
t
I W 1
11
Fig. 17
Extent of HAZ
t = plate thickness
W = width of weld
DEr NORSKE VERITAS
Table C2 Selection of suitable ronsumables for rombinations of aluminium alloys
Base Metal Alloy NV-5052, NV-5754 NV-5083 NV-6060, NV-6061
NV-5154, NV-5454 NV-5383 NV-6063, NV-6005A
NV-5086 NV-6082
NV-5052, NV-5754 5356,5556,5183 5356, 5556, 5183 5356,5556, 5183
NV-5154, NV-5454
NV-5086
NV-5083, NV-5383 . 5356, 5556, 5183
5183 I) 5356, 5556, 5183
NV-6060, NV-6061 5356, 5556, 5183 5356, 5556, 5183 5356, 5556, 5183
NV-6063, NV-6005A
NV-6082
Note:
All consumables here are covered by the A WS specification. The prefix .. ER,. is omitted.
1) Other consumables may be used if allowable stresses are reduced. see Table C4.
D'ICl!d2S mm
c--r'
..
: .. :
, ,
l
' ,
: -t
f ' ,
J
' ,
, ,
L__ _ __ J
0_25,,,,,,
..... 1 for;
-
- , .0/11 Ina I Q'
2 li"e b ... d ,_',...no
AtN 2 fa.; "
- Addip.,nallUl
IIP''''''''''" if
_3,."
- 1 11\31:10 lUI ,,,,,elmo"
Fig. 13
Location of test specimens for a butt weld on plate
207 For thickness below 10 mm one face bend and one
root bend test specimens are to be taken. The width is to be
30 mm and the thickness equal to the plate thickness. The
diameter of the bending m",!drel is to be as given in Table
G3:
Table C3 Former diameter for bend tests
I
Condition
I
Base metal alloy
0, Hill
H1l6, H32,
T4 T5, T6
H321, H34
NV-5052, NV-5754
4t 4t - -
NV-5154, NV-5454
I
NV-5086, NV-5083,
6t 6t
NV-5383
- -
I
NV-6060, NV-6061
NV -6063, NV -6005A -
-
6t 71
NV-6082
208 Requirement:
No cracks or open defects exceeding 3 mm measured on the
convex surface after bending are accepted. Smaller cracks
developing from the edges of the specimens are not normally
considered as significant, unless there is definite evidence
that they result from inclusions or other defects .
Wrap around. bending as shown in Fig. 15 is the preferred
bending method.
Top 1o, ,,_
j
FIg. 14
1U 1 '0':
- A/loSitional te$1
1pt<:;",.n.if ... ",y;,.cI
....... 2"'''
- I IIfts;ie
- , .CIO'''''''' ',c,o'
21ic1. D .....
"""ll,":
_ , m,,'otUI 'lI'!cimt"
Location of test specimens for a butt weld in pipe

Fig. 15
,.Wrap around bending
209 One tensile specimen is to be taken from each of the
welded assemblies. The test specimen, 25 mm wide and with
full plate thickness and orientated transverse to the weld, is
shown in Fig.16.
Fig. 16
Tensile test specimen
DET NORSKE VERITAS

.:)

:)

:)

Table E3
Tensile test
Grade
Rm, Rur,
As, Z
Impact test
I
KV,J,
I
Temperature
minimum,
Nlmm
2
minimum,
Nlmm
2
minimum, % %
C
minimum
I
I
II 400-560 305
III
IY
IIY
lilY 490-660 375
NY
VY
II Y40
III Y40 510-690 400
IV Y40
1) Reduction of area to be reported for information .
Chemical analysis:
supplied by the manufaturer and is to include all significant
alloying elements.
One butt-weld test assembly is to be welded in the downhand
The test assembly is to be prepared in accordance with that
prescribed in C202.
Test specimens:
Two transverse tensile; four bend (two face and two root
Test requirements:
ru:mlinJ,l, any dimensinns exceed.
imen.
TableE4
Grade
Rm,
Temperature
KV,J,
minimum,
minimum
Nlmm2
C
average
I 20
II 400 0
III -20
IY 20
34
IIY 0
IllY 490 -20
IV Y -40
VY -60
II Y40 0
III Y40 510 -20 41
IV Y40 -40
40 1 When approval for use with two-run technique is re-
quested, two butt-weld test assemblies are to be prepared.
For wires to be approved for use with the two-run technique
only, no deposited metal test is required. In this case ap-
22
average
20
0
-20
20
34
0
I)
-20
-40
-60
0
-20 41
-40
proval tests are limited to the butt weld tests described her-
eafter. .
Two butt-weld test assemblies are to be prepared as specified
in C300, except that one test assembly is to be 12-15 mm
thick and the other is to be 20 mm thick.
If approval is required for welding of plates thicker than 20
mm, one assembly is to be prepared using a plate of 20 mm
in thickness and the other using a plate of the greatest
thickness for which approval is required.
The diameter of wire to be used for the test assemblies is to
be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation
and is to be reported for information.
The edge preparation of the test assemblies is to be as shown
in Fig.13. Small deviations in the edge preparation may be
allowed, if requested by the manufacturer. For assemblies
using plate over 20 mm in thickness, the edge preparation
used is to be reported for information.

9 \!
III 2
60'
FIg,13
Typical edge preparation of two-run tEChnique for wires
Test specimens:
This tensile specimen is to be cut with the longitudinal axis
coinciding with the centre of the weld about 7 mm below the
plate surface on the side from which the second run is made.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
welded"assembly from the positions and with the orientations
shown in Fig. I I.
Test requirements:
in Table E3 for the longitudinal tensile test specimens and
Table E4 for the transverse tensile .and impact test speci-
"defect having any dimensions exceeding 3 mm can be seen
E -500 Annual tests
501 Wires approved are to be subjected to at least the fol-
lowing tests:
Semi-automatic welding only:
impact tests.
Automatic multi-run welding only:
impact tests.
Automatic two-run welding only:
One butt-weld test with 20 mm minimum plate thickness -
one transverse tensile, two bend and three impact tests. One
longitudinal tensile test is also to be prepared for wirel gas
Wires approved for both semi-automatic and automatic
multi-run welding: One all-weld-metal test in semi-automatic
technique - one tensile and three impact tests.
502 The test assemblies and specimens are to be prepared
and tested in accordance with the same procedures as those
for the initial approval tests using wire which is of about the
medium size manufactured, except in the case of the two-run
technique where the size of wire is to be according to the
initial testing procedure.
503 The test results are to comply with the requirements
for the initial approval tests.
E _600 Upgrading
601 An approved wire may be granted a higher grade than
that initially granted, provided that impact testing is carried
out with satisfactory results at the temperature specified for
the higher grade. However, for upgrading from grade
I(T/M) to grade III(T/M) or from any grade to grade II
Y(T/M) to V Y(T/M) and II Y40(T/M) to IV Y40(T/M),
impact tests are to be carried out on specimens taken from
butt weld test assemblies in addition to the normal require-
ments for annual testing.
F. Combinations for Use in Electro-slag and
Electro-gas Welding Processes
F 100 General
101 Consumables intended for these welding processes
will be divided into the following grades:
- for normal strength steels: I and II
to 355 N/mm : I Y, II Y
. to 390 N/mm : II Y40.
F 200 Initial tests
201 The following information is to be reported for the
Society's consideration:
- joint designation, wire diameter, type of consumable
nozzle, shielding gas if used, welding parameters, weld
direction relative to final rolling direction of plates, ten-
sile strength and chemical composition including applied
grain refining elements for the base material.
Two test assemblies, one assembly with 20 mm plate thick-
ness and one with 35 mm thickness, are to be made as
shown in Fig. 14.
Test specimens:
Two longitudinal and two transverse tensile test specimens,
two side bend (alternatively one root bend and one face
bend) and six impact (three with the notch located in the
centre of the weld and three with the notch located at the
fusion boundaty) test specimens are to be taken from each
E CIt I I I
1
-"-t
i i
TL-:'=':::- .
ImP.Cf .peCirMru WittI me notch
allusion boutIckry.
Min. 0&00
..." ........... "'u ..
IrnpM:t trom th. cenler 01
In._kl
TENSILE 11:.$1
SOECIMEN
BCNOTEST
SPECIMEN
ONGITUDlNAl.

SPECIMENS
CHARPVY
I
I I
I I lOOGtnJDlNAL TENSILE
I
TEST SPECIMEN
II
BEND TEST.
SPECIMEN
TENSILE TEST
SPECIMEN
Fig. 14
Electro-slag and electro-gas welding test assembly and location
of specimens
Test requirements:
in Table FI.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

\:)
1
_/ o

CJ
(,)
()

.For austenitic chromium-nickel steels, only 3 tests with the
notch in the centre of the welds are required if the design
temperature is below -105C.
1107 The butt weld tensile test is to comply with the fol-
Generally, the tensile strength is not to be less than the spe-
cified minimum tensile strength for the parent material. In
cases where the Society has approved the use of welding
consumables which give lower tensile strength in the weld
metal than that required for the parent material, the ap-
proved value for the welding consumable in question ap-
plies. The position of fracture is to be reported.
1108 The bend test specimens are to be capable of with-
standing bending through an angle of 180 over a fonner
with diameter four times the thickness of the specimen. The
tests can be considered as complying with the requirements
if, after bending, no crack or other open defects exceeding
3 rom in dimension can be seen on the outer surface.
1109 Charpy V testing is to be conducted at the temperature
prescribed for the base material. See Pt.5 Ch.5 Sec.2.
When specimens of lOx 10 mm cross-section are used,' the
average value from 3 tests is not to be less than 27 J for weld
metal. One single test may give a value below the required
average but not lower than 19 J.
For fusion line and heat affected zone the requirement for
minimum average value is the same as for the base material.
Only one individual value may be below the specified aver-
age value provided it is not less than 70 % of that value.
Pt.2 Ch.3 Sec.2" - Page 11
For testing of thin materials where it is impossible to use a
standard test specimen 10 x 10 mm, the larger of the fol-
lowing specimens is to be used:
10 x 7,5 mm, 10 x 5 mm, 10 x 2,5 mm.
The impact values are then reduced to respectively 516, 2/3
and 112 of the required values of the standard test specimen.
C 100 General
101 Requirements for liquefied gas systems are stated in
special Programmes in Certification Notes No. 2.1.
102 Qualified welding procedures are required for all im-
portant joints in hulls and structures which are to be classed
with Det Norske Veritas. The procedure tests are to be re-
presentative of the following:
- each base material/alloy and temper used in production
- the thickness and diameter range in question (see Tables
B2 and B3
- each type of consumable and welding process
- welding position (see Table CI)
- number of passes
- preheat (if any)
- volt-ampere characteristics
- shielding gas.
Table Cl Qualified principal positions for butt welds and fillet welds
Test weld
Qualified positions 1)
Joint configuration
Principal positions
Butt welds, plates Butt welds. rubes Fillet welds
Butt welds on plates !G IG IG IF
2G IG, 2G, 3G IF,2F,3F
3G IG, 2G, 3G IF, 2F, 3F
4G All All
Butt welds on tubes IG IG IG IF
2G !G, 2G, 3G 2G IF,2F,3F
5G
Fillet welds IF

3F
4F
5F
C 200 WPQT for butt welds
201 Each test assembly consists of 2 plates with dimen-
sions 300 x ISO mm. The plates are to be joined with a
longitudinal butt weld. For extruded sections and pipes the
assembly is to consist of 2 sections each ISO mm long (see
Figs.13 and 14).
202 The welding is to be carried out in accordance with
the procedure to be used during production. Welding con-
sumables are those recommended in Table C2.
All IG,5G All
IF

IF, 2F, 3F
All
All
203 The joint configurations are to comEly with those in-
tended to be applied for the production welding:
204 If back-sealing run is to be laid, this run is to be laid
in the same position as for the respective weld.
205 The welds are to be subjected to visual inspection, dye
penetrant testing and ultrasomc- or X-ray testing.
The requirements to quality level for imperfections are to
be as gIven in ISO 10042.2 level B.
206 Side-bend tests are to be carried out for thickness
equal to and above 10 mm. Two bend specimens are to be
taken from each of the welded assemblies.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
Table B5 Range of approval for type of joint
Range of approval
Butt welds on plate T butt welds on plate Buttwelds on pipe
Type of joint in approval test piece
Welded from both
Welded Welded
Welded from-one side
sides
With No With No
from one from both
With No
side sides
backing backing gouging gouging backing backing
Welded
With
*
-
from one
backing
side
No
x
*
Butt weld
backing
on plate
Welded
With
- -
gouging
from both
sides
No
- -
gouging
Welded
With
x -
Butt weld
from one
backing
on pipe
side
No
x x
backing
T butt
- -
weld on
Welded from both
plate
sides
- -
Key:
indicates the WPS which is approved in the approval test
X indicates those welds for which the WPS is also approved
- indicates those welds for which the WPS is not approved
B 1100 WPQT for liquefied gas systems
1101 Welding shops which intend to build welded cargo
tanks, process pressure vessels and/or piping systems for "li-
quefied gases are to carry out WPQT for all types of butt
welds in the construction. .
1102 For butt welds in tanks and pressure vessels, the test
assemblies consist of two plates, each having a width of at
least ISO = and a length sufficient for making all neces-
sary test specimens described in 110S. The test assemblies
are to be so prepared that the principal direction of rolling
is parallel to the direction of welding.
Guidance note:
~ ~ ~ ~ T h e -test' piates -must be of such--dimenslons ibaf'the cooling
condition as far as possible will be the same as for the production
welding.
1103 For butt welds in piping systems the test assemblies
are made by welding together two approximately ISO =
long pipes with the same diameter as the pipes used in the
system to be represented.
1104 The test assemblies are to be subjected to radiographic
testing after welding. X-rays, fine-grained film and lead
screens are to be used for this tesling. The radiographs are
at least to meet the requirements in Pt.5 Ch.S Sec.S and Pt.S
Ch.5 Sec.6. Concerning magnetic particle, dye penetrant
and ultrasonic testing reference is made to Pt.S Ch.5 Sec.5.
Hardness testing is to be performed on weld metal, heat af-
fected zone a!ld parent material. The values are to be re-
ported for consideration.
The weld is to be etched through the whole cross-section and
is to show normal structure and penetration. The etching is
to be done in such a way that the fusion line is clearly seen.
1105 From each test assembly for plates the following spe-
cimens are to be taken:

x
x
*
-
x
x
-
-
x - x - -
x x x
-
-
x x x - -
*
- x -
-
x - x
*
-
x x x x
*
-
*
x -
-
-
-
*
-
-
men is to be 10 = and width equal to the plate
thickness. If the plate thickness exceeds 40 = the test
sample may be divided into two, each having a width of
at least 20 mm
of 3 specimens)
be required.
The Charpy V test specimens are to be cut with their longi-
tudinal axis transverse to the longitudinal axis of the weld.
When practicable, the test specimen is to be taken at a place
half the di.t.noe from the "entre to the iurfaG" "fth. plate,
The notch is to be cut in a face of the test specimen ori-
ginally perpendiCUlar to the rolled surface. The specimens
are to be taken at the following locations:
- 3 specimens with the notch in the centre line of the welds
- 3 specimens with the notch I = from the fusion line
- 3 specimens with the notch 3 = from .the fusion line
- 3 specimens with the notch S = from the fusion line.
For austenitic chromium-nickel steels, only 3 tests with the
notch in the centre of the welds are required for design
temperature below -IOS0C.
1106 From each test assembly for tubes, the following test
specimens are to be taken:
mens is to be 10 = and the wi\lth equal to the wall
thickness. If the wall thickness is less than 10 mm the
side bend test is to be replaced by root bend test
of 3 specimens). The test specimens are to be cut as.
stipulated in 110S
be required.
DEY NORSKE VERITAS
)
I:]
~
:]
~
:]
/J /J

Table Fl
Tensile test
Grade Rm.
R.H.
Nlmm
2
minimum,
Nlmm
2
I
400-560 305
II
IY
490-660 375
IIY
II Y40 510-690 400
Chemical analysis:
Chemical analysis of the deposited weld metal is to be sup-
plied by the manufacturer and is to include the content of
all significant alloying elements.
Photomacrographs:
Two photomacrographs, approximately 2X magnification,
one transverse and one longitudinal with respect to the weld
are to be taken. The latter section is to be parallel to the plate
surface.
F 300 Annual tests
301 Combinations approved are to be subjected to at least
One test assembly, using 20 = plate thickness is to be
prepared.
Two longitudinal, two bend and three impact test specimens
are to be taken. The notch of the impact specimens is to be
located in the centre of the weld.
One transverse photomacrograph is also to be taken from the
test assembly.
chanical properties are to be in accordance with the re-
G. Welding Consumables for Welding of Steel
Grades NV J'l
o
4, NV 24b,NV 44 and NV 44b
for Low-Temperature Applications
G 100 General
101 These welding consumables will be granted the fol-
lowing grades:
- for NV 2-4 and NV 2-4L: S (manual welding) and V
(semi-automatic and automatic welding)
- for NV 4-4 and NV 4-4L: S Y (manual welding) and V
Y (semi-automatic and automatic welding)
Table G1
Tensile lest
Impact test
As,
Temperature
KY,J,
minimum, %
C
minimum
average
20
0
22 20
34
0
0 41
option, be submitted for hydrogen testing, and will have the
suffix (HIS), (HIO) or (HS) added to the grade mark.
103 Testing is to be carried out as specified in B (covered
electrodes), C (wirelflux combinations) or E (wire/gas
combinations) with the additional requirements specified in
200.
201 The base metal to be used for the butt weld tests is to
be the same as that fo< which the welding consumable is
intended.
Impact tests:
The specimens are to be broken at -60C. Both single va-
lues and average values are to be reported.
Welding consumables intended for NV 2-4 and NV 4-4
only, may be impact tested at -SsoC.
Test requirements:
The butt-weld test results are all to comply with the re-
quirements given in Table G 1.
202 One additional butt-weld test is to be performed as
follows:
One butt-weld test is to be made in the downhand position.
This test assembly .is to be subjected to stress-relieving at
550 tn liOOoC prinr tn me.chanioal testing
Test specimens:
One transverse tensile and three impact test specimens are
to be taken from each test assembly.
Test requirements:
in Table GI.
G 300 Annual tests
C400 or E600, respectively. Impact testing, however, is to
be carried out according to 200.
i
Impact test - KY, J
Grade
Rm.
Temperature C
KV,J, KV. J,
minimum, Nlmm
2
average minimum single value
5fV 400
-55 41 27
-60 34 23
5YfVY 490
-55 41 27
-60 34 23
DEY NORSKE VERITAS
H. Welding Consumables for Low-Alloy, Heat-
Resisting Steels (NV O,3Mo, NY lCr O,SMo and
NY 2,25Cr IMo)
H 100 General
101 The ail-weld-metal and butt-weld tests are all to be
(wirelflux combinations) or E (wire/gas combinations) with
102 Covered electrodes are to satisfy our requirements for
low hydrogen electrodes, and will have the suffix HI5, HIO
option, be'submitted for hydrogen testing, and will have the
suffix (HI5), (HIO) or (H5) added to the grade mark.
201 The base metal to be used for the butt-weld tests is to
be the same as that for which the welding consumable is
intended.
Steel grades A, B or D may, however, be used for the all-
weld-metal tests when this is found to be convenient.
202 The all-weld-metal test is to be performed as follows:
Two longitudinal tensile test specimens are to be taken from
each test assembly as shown in Fig.I5.
Pre- and post-heating:
The temperature ranges to be used for pre-heating, inter-pas
temperature and annealing is shoW1i in Table HI.
Table HI
Consumables for
Pre-heat and inier- Annealing
welding steel grade
pass temperature temperature
C C
NYO,3Mo 100-200 660-700
NV lCr O,5Mo 200-300 680-720
.
NY 2,25Cr lMo 200-300 720-770
,
The finished test plates are to be uniformly heated to the
annealing temperature, kept at this temperature for approxi-
mately 30 minutes and cooled in still air.
Tensile tests:
One specimen from each assembly is to be tested at room
temperature (approximately 20C), while the other is to be
tested at 400 5C. The elevated test temperature is to be
properly controlled (e.g. by thermocouples).
Test requirements:
in Table H2.
UNE OF ClIT""'"
romm, J
-MIN. I
I
,..,.

I
IMIN. 100 mm. .30 mm
Fig. IS
All-weld-metal test
I
I

5!1 MIN. 100 IM'I
SMAU.EST POSSSL.E
BEAI) REINFORCEMENT
E;
E
il

"0
____ 0 ______________________ -_ - - -- ______ '_'_ -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --- -, - -- ----- ------
Consumables fOT 'Test temperature R",
welding steel grade C
minimum,
Nlmm2
NY O,3Mo
20 440
400
1)
NY lCr 0,5Mo
20 470
400
1)
NY 2,25Cr lMo
20 480
400
1)
1) These values are to be reported for information.
The transverse tensile and bend tests are to be tested at room
temperature.
Test requirements:
The tensile test results are to comply with the requirements
given in Table H3.
Tensile "test
R /RPO.2
eH
AS Z
minimum,
Nlmm
2
minimwn. %
%
305 18
1)
Table H3
Consumables for welding steel R
m
,
grade minimum, Nlmm
2
NY O,3Mo 440
NY lCr O,SMo 470
NY 2,2SCr lMo 480
301 The test specimen for chemical analysis of the depos-
ited metal is to be made on a steel plate as shown in Fig.I6.
J
CJ

". ---"/
C)
/J
o
rJ
()

4
(O))-J
1G ROTATING PIPE.
HOFUZONT AL AXIS
2G FIXEO PIPE.
VERTICAL AXIS
Fig. 11
Pipe test positions
Type ofjoint
] )
5G FIXED PIPE.
HORIZONTAL AXIS.
6G FJXED INCLINED PIPE
The range of approval for type of joint is given in Table B5.
In addition the following changes are to lead to a new qual-
ification:
- change from fillet weld to butt weld
- change of specified type of groove, root face and gap
which may significantly affect penetration, fusion and
delution of the weld.
Welding condition
- any change of welding process
- change from spray arc to short arc or pulsed arc or vice
versa
- change beyond 15 % for voltage and current, and
change of more than 10 % for travel speed
- change of preheating/interpass temperature beyond
25C
- change of post weld heat treatment parameters.
1001 The parameters used during qualification welding,
NDT -records and mechanical testing reports are to be pre-
sented in a WPQR for each qualification test. The WPQR
is to contain sufficient references to establish where, when,
how and by whom the test welding, NDT - and mechanical
testing were performed.
TI-1RQb.T OF IM:iO AXIS OF "M3..D

--
R.ATPOSmON 1F
AXlS a= WELD VERTlCAL
I

"Ill
I.'"

VEFrnGA1..?OSmON 3F
FIg. 12
Note: One piate must be ho:izontaJ
HOR!ZO'ITAL F'OSil1CX'J 2F
--
Note: Ole tiata must be hOdzcntaJ
0VERHE4D POSITION 4F
Positions of test plate for nUet welds
Table B4 Qualified principal positions for butt welds and nllet welds
------ -- .. - ---
Qualified positions j)
Type ofjoint 1) 2)
--- -PrlncipaTp-ositiOn:s-----
Butt.welds
Fillet welds
Plates Tubes
Pla!esltubes
2G+3G All All All
lG lG lG IF
Butt welds on plates 2G lG, 2G, 4G !G,2G IF,2F,4F
3G 3G Not applicable 3F
4G lG,4G lG IF,4F
2G+5G=6G All All All
Butt welds on tubes
lG lG lG IF
2G lG, 2G, 4G !G,2G IF,2F,4F
SG All lG,SG All
2F+3F All
IF IF
Fillet welds
2F IF,2F,4F
3F 3F
4F IF,4F
5F All
1) Tubes with OD > 500 mm are considered equivalent to plates (apply only to the can in tubular joints)
2) Tubular joints are to be qilalified separately.
ii) High strength steel, grades A27S, D27S, E27S, A32,
D32, E32, F32, A36, D36, E36, F36, A40, D40,
E40, F40 or equivalent structural steels with minimum
specified yield strength 265-390 N/mm
2
.
iii) Extra high strength steels, grades A-F 420, A-F 460,
A-F 500, A-F 550, A-F 620, A-F 690 or equivalent
structural steels with minimum specified yield strength
420-690 N/mm
2
.
The qualification on steel grades of higher toughness re-
quirements will qualify the grades of lower toughness but
not vice versa.
Thickness
Thickness, t, is defined as follows:
a) For a butt weld:
similar thicknesse s is that of the thinner material.
b) For a fillet weld:
similar thicknesses is that of the thicker material. How-
ever, for each thickness range qualified, as in Table B2
there is an associated range of qualified throat thickness
as given below.
c) For a set-on tubular joint:
The thickness of the brace
d) For a set-in or set-through tubular joint:
The thickness of the can
e) For a T-buttjoint in plate:
The thickness of the prepared plate
The requirements to qualified thickness range for butt welds
are to be as given in Table B2.
Table B2 Qualified thickness range
Quciiijicaiion rangi'l,
.. ...
Thickness
for single run jor multi-run
tin mm
of lest piece
or single run welding
from both sides and all filler welds
1<12 0,81101,11 upl021
12:5 1:5 100 0,8 I 10 1,1 I
0,5 I 10 2 I
(max. 150)
I> 100 0,81101,1 I 0,51101,51
1) The qualification range for vertical downward position
isO,Slto!,!t
The requirements to qualified thickness range for fillet welds
are in addition to the requirements of Table B2, that the
throat thickness, a, is to be in the range 0,75 a to 1,5 a.
However, a throat thickness of JO mm or more is to give
qualification for all throat thicknesses above or equal to 10
mm.
Diameter of tubes and tubular joints
The qualification of a welding procedure test on diameter
D is to include qualification for diameters in the following
ranges as given in Table B3.
Table B3 Qualified range for tube and tubular joint.
Diameter of the test piece
D (mm) I) 2)
Qualification range
D < 168,3 0,5 D 10 2 D
D> 168,3 > 0,5 D and plales
I) D is the outside diameter of the lube or outside diameter of the brace. I
2) Qualification given for plates also covers rubes when the outside di-
ameter is greater than 500 mm.
Angle of tubular joints
A WPQT carried out on a tubular joint with angle IX is to
qualify all tubular joint angles in the range of IX :5 IXI :5 90
Welding consumables
- any change in consumable grading
- change of consumable name when impact testing is re-
quired at temperatures below -20C
- any significant change of mixture/composition (e.g.
change from argon/mixed gas to CO
2
gas), flow rate,
filling time and filling volume for shielding and backing
gases.
Welding positions
The following changes are to lead to a new qualification.
Change from one principal welding position (see Figs.
10, 11, 12) to another, unless complying with Table B4.
-;::-
K-::S
1G FLAT
-
3GVERnCAL
2G HORIZONTAL'VERTICAL
4G OVERHEAD
Fig. 10
Plate test positions
DET NORSKE VERITAS
")
'-
()
. ~
~
~ ~
/ ~ ~

One such test specimen is to be made for each dimension
of welding consumable to be approved. Chips for chemical
analysis are to be machined, so that the distance between the
final cut and the plate corresponds to at least 4 layers of
weld.
Fig. 16
Test specimen for chemical analysis
TableH4
Consumables C Si Mn
for we14ing mro:imum maximum
sleel grade % % %
NY 0,3Mo 0,6-1,6
NV ler
0,4-1,0
0,5Mo 0,12 0,8
NV 2,25Cr
0,4-1,0
IMo
I. Welding Consumables for Welding of Steel
Grades NV 1,SNi, NV 3,SNi, NV SNi and NV
9Ni
I 100 General
carried out ",specified in D(covered eleotrodes),' G
(wire/flux combinations) or E (wire/gas combinations) with
option, be hydrogen tested, and have the suffix (HIS),
(HIO) or (H5) added to the grade mark.
to be between II mm and 20 mm. If plates with thickness
less than II mm are used, the requirement regarding ab-
case.
104 Welding consumables approved for welding of a
higher grade within this group may also be used for the
lower grades.
201 The all-weld-metal tests are to be performed as fol-
lows:
Test specimens:
One longitudinal tensile and at least three impact test speci-
mens are to be machined from each test assembly.
Test requirements:
302 Each test specimen is to be analysed separately.
Test requirements:
in Table H4.
H 400 Annual tests
401 Consumables approved are to be subjected to at least
Chemical analysis of the deposited metal of two different
dimensions of the approved combinations are to be carried
out.
402 The preparation of the test assemblies and the test re-
quirements are to be in accordance with the requirements for
the initial approval tests specified in 300.
Cr Mo P S
maximum maximum
% % % %
- 0,3-0,7
0,7-1,4 0,4-0,7
0,04 0,03
2,0-2,6 0,9-1,2
the requirements given in Table II.
Bend tests:
If the composition and mechanical properties of the depos-
erties of the base metal; the two transverse bend rests may
be as follows:
Length, minimum 150 mm
Width 38 mm
Thickness 10 mm
Charpy V -notch impact tests:
Atleast three impact test specimens are to be machined from
each test assembly.
Test requirements:
in Table II. The position of fracture in the transverse tensile
bending through an angle of 180 over a former with a di-
ameter of 40 mm, no cracks or defects can be seen on the
outer surface of the test specimen. The reduction of area is
to be reported for information.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
Table Jl
Consumables for
welding steel
R
m
,
grade
Tensile test
All-weld-metal
ReH, 1)
Impact test
Butt weld
KV,J,
AS,
R
m
, Temperature
C
minimum
minimum, minimum,
minimum, %
minim'!!f'
average
Nlmm2 Nlmm2
Nlmm
NY 1,5 Ni 420 275 420 -95
NY 3,5 Ni 440 345
25
440 -115
34
NY 5 Ni 570 390 570 -140
NV 9 Ni 640 490 660
1) In case of no marked yield point, the proof stress at 0,2 % elongation (RPJ.:z) is to be reported.
I 300 Annual test
wirelflux combination of wire/gas combinations, the testing
C400 or E600, respectively. The test results are, however,
to comply with the requirements given in Table 11.
I 400 Other welding consumables
401 Welding consumables with yield stress and/or tensile
strength less than that specified under 300, may be approved
for welding of steel grade NV 9 Ni. Approval testing is to
be carried out according to the progra=e specified above.
The maximum permissible stress in welded vessels is, how-
ever, in such cases to be based on the mechanical properties
obtained from the approval tests.
J. Welding Consumables for Welding of Extra
High Strength Steels
J 100 General
101 Depending on the impact test temperature, welding
consumables for extra high strength steels are divided into
the following grades:
- Grade 3/llI, test temperature - 20'C
- Grade 41IV, test temperature - 40C
-"- tostrempar-,itm" 60
n
e.
The following symbols are added to the grade mark to indi-
cate yield strength of the base metal for which the welding
consumable is intended:
Symbols added to grade mark Base material designation
Y42 NY 420
Y46 NY 460
Y50 NV 500
Y55 NY 550
Y62 NY 620
Y69 NY 690
Each higher quality grade includes the one (or those) below.
Grade A.. and D .. steels according to Pt;2 Ch.2 Sec. 1 are
to' be welded using welding consumables of at least quality
grade 3/llI, grade E .. steels using at least quality grade 4/IV
and grade F.. steels using at least quality grade 51Y as
shown in the following table:
Consumable grade Steel grades covered
3/111Y .. 4/1VY .. 5NY.. D .. and A .. E .. , D .. and A ..
F .. , E .. , D .. and A ..
Welding consumables approved with grades .. Y42, .. Y46
and .. Y50 are also considered snitable for welding steels in
the two strength levels below that for which they have been
approved. Welding consumables approved with grades
.. Y55, .. Y62 and .. Y69 are also considered suitable for
welding steels in the strength level below that for which they
have been approved.
The Society may, in individual cases, restrict the range of
application in (up to) such a way, that approval for anyone
strength level does not justify approval for any other
strength level.
(wirelflux combinations) or E (wire/gas combination) with
103 Covered electrodes in yield strength group Y50 and
below are to satisfy the hydrogen test requirements for at
least the suffIx HIO. Electrodes in yield strength group
ranging from Y55 up to and including Y69 are to satisfy the
hydrogen test requirements for the suffix H5.
option, be hydrogen tested, and have the suffix (RIO) or
(R5) added to the grade mark.
to be between 11 mm and 20 =. If plates with thickness
less than 11 = are used, the requirement regarding ab-
case.
201 The all-weld-metal tests are to be per-formed as fol-
luws!'
Test specimens:
One longitudinal and at least three impact test specimens are
to be machined from each test assembly.
Test requirements:
the requirements given in Table JI.
Test specimens:
One transverse tensile, two transverse bend tests (face and
root bend) and at least three impact test specimens are to be
machined from each assembly.
If the composition and mechanical proper-ties of the depos-
erties of the base metal, the two transverse bend tests may
be as follows:
Length, minimum 150 =
Width 38 mm
Thickness IOmm
DEI' NORSKE VERITAS
) ;J
,J C)
,J
C)
'J
C)

par-ticle testing).
a _ miMlimum va!u& 150mm
D1 :: cytside diamat1lr of thl greater tubular (can)
t1 '" WilD thicknan of thl Cln
D2 = outIidI dilmlt1lrofthl .. smallert\ll!e (braetl)
t2 = wall1hickneu. of thl bl'1lOt
Edge prlplration Ind fit-up 8a !SIuiled In the WPS
a
/
/
.
10
:::
Fig. 8
Test assembly for tubular joints
- 12 Charpy V-notch tests sampled at 9 o'clock and with
. the notch location as given in 308
- two macrosection tests (metallographic examination +
hardness measurements) at 12 and 6 o'clock.
B 700 WPQT fiii' fillet weldS
as possible the plates are to be of a suffIcient size to ensure
For fillet welds the test assembly is to be as defined in Fig.9.

15.
Fig. 9
Test assembly for fillet welds
L . =350=
mm.
L =1000=
mm.
The test assembly is to be welded on one side only. For
over a length of 50 =.
particle testing).
The soundness of the weld is to comply with the specified
requirements given in the relevant parts of the Rules.
- two macrosection tests (metallographic examination,
hardness measurements). .
tion of the stop/restart (for more details see 307).
For hardness testing, see 312.
B 800 Retesting
801 If the WPQT fails to comply with any of the require-
ments for NDT one extra WPQT is to be welded and sub-
jected to the same testing. If this additional test does not
meet the relevant requirements, the actual WPS is to be
considered as not qualified and a respecification of the WPS
is to be made prior to a new qualification test.
!! Y!!!i!!ity!!f !l!.\alified welding
901 The validity of a qualified welding procedure is to be
restricted to the workshop performing the qualification.
Workshops or workshop branches under the same technical
management and working in accordance with the same
QA-program and -procedures are considered as one work-
shop.
902 . Qualification of a welding procedure remains valid
provided the parameters are kept within the qualified ranges
during production welding. The qualified ranges are given
in 903. When one or more variations outside the qualifica-
tion ranges occur, the welding procedure qualification is to
be considered invalid, and the welding procedure is there-
fore to be respecified and requalified.
903 A qualified welding procedure is to be used within the
ranges of the parameters below.
Base material
a) In general, significant change of material proper-ties
which will obviously affect the weldability and mechan-
ical proper-ties.
b) More specifically, structural steels are grouped in three
categories:
i) Normal strength steel, grades A, B, D and E or
equivalent structural steels with tensile strength
400-490 N/=2.
DEI' NORSKE VERITAS
particle testing)
a = 3t: mimum value 150mm
b "" 6t; mnnum value 350mm
assembly (see Fig.5): '"
- I root and 1 face bend tests when t :s; 20 mm and 2 side
bend tests when t > 20 mm
- 12 Charpy V -notch tests whith the notch location as given
in 308
- 1 macrosection test (metaIlographic examination + hard-
ness measurements).
I
,t--'}
+
C>lARPY
- F,USION L1NE
V-NOTCH
TESTS
I
HAl- 2mm
HAZ- Eirnm
I BEND TEST
TENSILE TEST
---r:=.-- HARDNESSIMACRO TEST
Fig. 5
Sampling of test specimeos on tubes
-the. relevant mqnirementi -gillen in 300.
B 500 WPQT for full penetration T-, Y-, and K- joints
501 WPQT's for full penetration groove welds between
plates at right angles or inclined. i.e. T- or Y- and K-
configurations. are to cover a weld length of minimum 350
mm (see Fig.6).
particle testing).
Edge preparation and fit-up as detailed in the WPS
FIg. 6
Test assembly for full peoetration T-joints
- 12 Charpy V -notch tests with the notch location as given
in 308
- 1 macrosection test (metallographic examination + hard-
ness measurements).
1//.1-1------
HAZ- :m'" V-NOTCH

TESTS
KIIZ - 5rm>
HARONESS MACRO tESTS
FIg. 7
Sampling of test specimens on full peoetration T-joints
DEl" NORSKE VERITAS
:)

o

::J
.:)
::J

203 The following requirements are to be met:
in Table J2. The position of fracture in the transverse tensile
Table J1 All-weld-metal test requiremeots
Tensile test
Grade Rm.
R.H.
Nlmm2
minimum,
Nlmm2
3/111 Y42
41IV Y42 530-680 420
5NY42
3/111 Y46
4/N Y46 570-720 460
5NY46
3/111 Y50
41IV Y50 610-770 500
5NY50
3/111 Y55
4/N Y55 670-830 550
5NY55
3/111 Y62
4/lV Y62 720-890 620
5NY62
3/111 Y69
4/N Y69 770-940 690
5NY69
test specimen is to be reported. The bend test specimens are
to be bent through an angle of 120 over a former having a
diameter which relates to the thickness of the test specimen
as given in Table J2. The bend test specimens can be con-
sidered as complying with the requirements if. after bend-
ing. no crack or other open defect exceeding 3 mm in
dimensions can be seen on the outer surface.
Impact test
AS.
Temperature
KV,J,
minimwn, %
c
minimwn
average 1)
-20 47
20 -40 47
-60 47
-20 47
20 -40 47
-60 47
-20 47
18 -40 47
-60 47
-20 55
18 -40 55
-60 55
-20 62
18 -40 62
-60 62
-20 69
17 -40 69
-60 69
1) For requirements regarding minimum individual values and retests, see A700 and A900, respectively.
Table J2 Butt weld test requiremeots
Tensile test Impact test Bend ratio
Grade
Rm.
KV,],
Dlr 1)
Nlmm
2
Temperature C.
minimum average
3/IlI Y42 -20
4/N Y42 530-680 -40
5N Y42 -60
3/lii Y.j6-
-20
4/lV Y46 570-720 -40
5N Y46 -60
3/I11 Y50 -20
41IV Y50 610-770 -40
5N Y50 -60
3/I11 Y55 -20
4/N Y55 670-830 -40
5N Y55 -60
3/IlI Y62 -20
4/N Y62 720-890 -40
5N Y62 -60
3I11 Y69 -20
4/N Y69 770-940 -40
5N Y69 -60
1) D - mandrel diameter, t - specimen thickness_
J 300 Annual tests
301 Depending on whether it concerns electrodes.
is to be carried out according to that prescribed in B900.
C400 or E600. respectively. The test results are. however.
to comply with the requirements given in Table JI.
47
47 4
47

47
47 4
47
50
50 4
50
55
55 5
55
62
62 5
62
69
69 5
69
K. Welding Consumables for Welding of AuS-
tenitic Stainless Steels
K 100 General
101 Approval of welding consurnables for austenitic stain-
less steels will be considered subject to compliance with the
specified tests and requirements in 200 to 500.
DEl" NORSKE VERITAS
102 Parent plate material should preferably have a. com-
position matching that of the electrode to be tested. Mild
steel plates may, however, be applied provided that the
groove faces are clad with at least two runs by the welding
consumable which is to be tested.
shown in Fig. 17, one using a 2,4-3,25 rom 0 electrode and
For wire/gas combinations the size is to be 1,2 rom 0
and the largest size manufactured.
For flux cored wire combinations the wire size is to be 1,2
or 1,6 rom 0 and the largest size manufactured.
For wire/flux combinations the smallest and largest size
versed between subsequent layers, each bead not being
4 rom in thickness. Between each run, the assembly is to be
left in still air until it has cooled below 100C, the temper-
Test specimens:
Depending on the service temperature, the number of test
specimens taken according to Fig.17 are as follows:
- service temperature below -103C; two longitudinal
tensile and three irupact test speciruens are to be taken'.
- service temperature above -103C; two longitudinal
tensile test speciruens only are to be taken.
The test specimens .are to be prepared according to A700.
Test requirements:
in Table Kl. Welding consumables intended for low tem-
perature service are to be irupact tested at -196 C (or other
temperatures below -103 C). The average impact value for
the three speciruens is not to be less than 34J.
301 Chemical analysis is to be carried out for all dimen-
is to be' carried out as stipulated in H300 and is to be re-
be reported.
Test requirements:
The chemical composition of the weld metal is to be in the
range given in K2.

=4

. ,
. ,
"
: ' , ,
f1
L'
c,
H
8

!'
, .
, :
"
0
fl

x
LJ
---c-
-0>
:---
0
-i+
-
C
rv
-,
<
. -,
"
"\
' {
: S"''' /fEW
u17 '
i ri
f- I: ' '
- - - -" - ' .,..j.

10-1S
, __ '13_,,- NO '"
-h-hi,.,
l[ "
L ,,' '" I
ff
-..
Fig. 17
Test assemblies (all measures in mm)
TEST PLATE ASSEMBLY
WHEN IMPACT TESTING
IS NOT REOUIRED
EST PLATE ASSEMBLY
WHEN IM.PACT TESTING
:5 REQUIRED
MILO STEEL SASE
MA.TERIAL WITH
CLAD GROOVE FACES
STA1NlESS
BAse MATERIAL
401 Normally, butt weld tests are not required. Butt weld
tests may, however, be required if a welding consumable is
to be approved for welding positions or materials for which
it is not mainly intended.
402 The manufacturer is to inform about the welding po-
sition and materials for which the welding consumable is to
be
K 500 Annual tests
501 Annual testing for welding consumables which are not
intended for low temperature service, comprises chemical
analysis only. Welding consumables of two different di-
mensions are to be tested.
502 Annual testing for welding consumables which are
intended for low temperature service at - 103C or lower,
comprises impact testing at the respective temperature, in
addition to chemical analysis. Welding consumables of two
different dimensions are to be tested.
DEI' NORSKE VERITAS
,
)
()
/J
C)
(J
o
',J (J
3
Hull construction
The test temperature and absorbed energy are to be in ac-
cordance with the following requirements:
Impact test temperatures:
+20C
DOC
_20C
_40C
for grades B, A27S, A32, A36 and A40
for grades D, D27S, D32, D36 and D40
for grades E, E27S, E32, E36 and E40
for grades F32, F36 and F40
The average value for absorbed energy in weld metal, fusion
line and HAZ is not to be less than:
- for manual and semi-automatic welding in all welding
positions except vertical:
;:;, 47 J
- for automatic welding:
;:;, 34 J (NV 40 grades;:;' 41 J)
- for manual and semi-automatic welding in vertical posi-
tion:
;:;, 34 J (NV 40 grades;:;' 41 J).
For extra high strength structural steels the Charpy V -notch
test temperature and the average value for absorbed energy
in weld metal, fusion line and HAZ are to be the same as
required for the base material.
Pressure vessels and production/drilling plants related
equipment, structures and systems
The Charpy V-notch test temperature and the average value
for absorbed energy in weld metal, fusion line and HAZ are
to be the same as required for the base material. .
309 1n the case of reduced Charpy V-notch test speciruens
(10 x 7,5 rom and 10 x 5 rom), the impact energy values to
be obtained are to satisfy the following table:
Table Bl Impact energy requirement for subsize specimens
Dimensions of Charpy V-notch lest specimen Impact energy
- -
10 x 10 mm KV
10 x 7,5 mm 5/6 KV
10 x 5 mm 2/3 KV
310 The average irupact requirements are to be satisfied
Indentations are to be made along traverses in the weld,
HAZ and the parent metal approximately I mm below the
surface. For each traverse a miniruum of 3 indentations are
to be made in the weld, HAZ (both sides) and parent metal
(both sides). For HAZ the first indentation is to be placed
as close to the fusion line as possible. .
The values are to be reported for consideration.
313 When a butt weld is made between two plates of dif-
ferent grades, the test temperature and achieved irupact en-
ergy are to comply with the miniruum specified requirements
for the lower steel grade (see 308).
In the same way, the tensile strength to be obtained on the
welded assembly is to be in agreement with the requirements
relating to the plate steel having the lower strength.
As an example the test temperature, impact energy and ten-
sile strength for the butt welded joints given in Fig.3 are
those required for the plate of grade D in the left assembly
and for the plate of grade E in the right assembly.
grade D grade E
grade E grade EH
FIg. 3
Butt ",cldcdplnte joinb of differentgrnd""
for each notch location, but one single value of three values Edge preparation and fit-up as detailed in the WPS
from specimens from the same notch location may be below
the average requirements, but not below 70 % of minimum I
average.
311 Where the results from a set of three irupact test spe-
cimens do not comply with the requirements, an additional
set of three irupact test specimens. may be taken.
The results obtained are to be combined with the original
results to form a new average which, for acceptance, is to
be not less than the required value. Additionally, for these
combined results not more than two individual values are to
be less than the required average value, and of these, not
more than one is to be less than 70 % of the average value.
Further re-tests may be made at the surveyor's discretion,
but these are to be made on a new welded assembly (revised
WPS) and are to include all tests required for the original
assembly, even those which were previously satisfactory.
312 The hardness testing is to be in accordance with ISO
6507/1 or equivalent, and is only required for grades
NV27S and higher. Normally, the Vickers method (HV5 or
HV 10) is used.
-------
L
I. a_II. a I
Fig. 4
a = minimum value 150mm
o :::z outside diameter
Test assembly for butt welds on tubes
DET NORSKE VERITAS
Cl
:--
50 I
50 I
. r Plate rolling
.direction
(Steel plates
KVT-tested)
112 112
Fig. 1
Test assembly for butt welds on plates
l

- I root and 1 face bend tests when t :S 20 rom and 2 side
bend tests when t > 20 rom
- when the welding consumable is not approved, I extra
tensile test (round specimen from the weld metal)
- 12 Charpy V-notch tests whith the notch location as given
in 308
- I macrosection test (metallographic examination + hard-
ness measurements).
3U4!;peci!iiens tor transverse tensile testing areio be In
accordance with Sec.1 B201, type B.
The tensile strength is not to be below the specified mini-
mum tensile strength for the steel grade in question.
305 The round tensile specimen is to be machined to the
dimensions shown in Sec.1 B201, type A, care being taken
plates. If the section area of the weld metal is too small to
allow sampling of the round specimen, an all-weld-metal
tensile test is to be carried out according to the requirements
given in Sec.3.
306 Transverse side bend, root bend and face bend speci-
mens are to be machined to the dimensions shown in Sec. I
B300.
For a mixed or heterogeneous butt joint one longitudinal
bend test specimen may be used instead of root and face or
side bend tests.
The test specimens are to be bent on a mandrel with diam-
eter 4xt, where t is the thickness of the specimen, except for
extra high strength steels grades 550, 620, and 690 where
the diameter is to be 5xt.
The bending angle is to be at least 120
0
After bending, the
test specimens are not to reveal any open defects in any di-
rection greater than 3 mm. Defects appearing at the corners
Weld metal
Fusion lin.
HAZ -:- 2mm
HAZ.;. 5mm
.11 W
Fig. 2
Sampling of test specimens on plates
0,2
side bend
te'"
1
50mm
of a test specimen during testing are to be ignored in the
evaluation.
307 The macro section is to include about 10 mm of unaf-
fected base material and is to be prepared and etched on one
side to clearly reveal the fusion line and the HAZ. Cracks
and lack of fusion are not accepted.
The welded joints are to have a regular profile with smooth
trnmition. to the bAse materials-and witiloutsignificalll Of
excessive reinforcement.
308 The Charpy V -notch specimens are to be machined in
accordance with the requirements given in Ch.1 Sec.2 (ISO
148). The specimens are to be sampled 2 mm below the
surface of the parent material and transverse to the weld.
12 Charpy V -notch specimens are to be localized in the
welded joint as follows:
- 3 specimens with the notch along the weld metal centre-
line
fusion line (Note I)
fusion line (Note 1).
Guidance note:
HAZ impact test specimens are normally not required for grade
NV A steels. If tested the average value for absorbed energy in
weld metal, fusion line and HAZ is not to be less than 27 J at
20C.

The V -notch is to be perpendicular to the plate surface.
For plate thicknesses >50 mm' and fot one side welded as-
semblies with plate thickness > 20 mm, one additional set
of specimens is to be taken in the weld metal root area.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
)
,"]
:J
':J

")
/J
Table Kl I)
Yield stress, RpO.2 Tensile strength, Rm
Electrode grade
minimum, minimum,
Nlmm2 Nlmm2
NY 308 Mo 290 550
NY 308 290 550
NY 308 L 270 520
NY 309 290 550
NY 309 L 270 520
NY 309 Nb 290 550
NY 309 Mo 290 550
NY 309 MoL 270 520
NY 310 290 550
NY 310 Nb 290 550
NY 310 Mo 290 550
NY 312 350 660
.NY 316 290 550
NY 316 L 270 520
NY 317 290 550
NY 317 L 270 520
NY 318 290 550
NY 330 270 520
NY 347 290 550
NY 349 360 690
1) The values for reduction of area to be reported for information.
Table K2 I)
C Mn Si
Electrode maxi- Cr Ni Mo Nb-To maxi- maxi-
grade mwn % % % % mum mum
% % %
NY 308
0,08 18,0-21,0 9,0-11,0 2,0-3,0 2,5 0,90
Mo
-
NY 308 0,08 18,0-21,0 9,0-11,0
-
- 2,5 0,90
NV 308 L 0,03 18,0-21,0 9,0-11,0
-
- 2,5 0,90
NY 309 0,15 22,0-25,0 12,0-14,0 -
- 2,5 0,90
NY 309 L 0,03 22,0-25,0 12,0-14,0 -
- 2,5 0,90
NY 309 Nb 0,12 22,0-25,0 12,0-14,0
-
0,7-1,0 2,5 0,90
NY 309
0,12 22,0-25,0 12,0-14,0 2,0-3,0 2,5 0,90
Mo
-
NV 309
0,03 22,0-25,0 12,0-14,0 2,0-3,0 2,5 0,90
MoL
-
NY 310 0,20 25,0-28,0 20,0-22,5 -
- 2,5 0,75
NV 310 Nb 0,12 25,0-28,0 20,0-22,0 -
0,7-1,0 2,5 0,75
NY 310
0,12 25,0-28,0 20,0-22,0 2,0-3,0 2,5 0,75
Mo
-
NY 312 0,15 28,0-32,0 8,0-10,5 -
- 2,5 0,90
NY 316 0,08 17,0-20,0 11,0-14,0 2,0-3,0 - 2,5 0,90
NY 316 L 0,03 17,0-20,0 11,0-14,0 2,0-3,0
- 2,5 0,90
NY 317 0,08 18,0-21,0 12,0-14,0 3,0-4,0 - 2,5 0,90
NV 317 L 0,03 18,0-21,0 12,0-14,0 3-,0-4,0 - 2,5 0,90
NY 318 0,08 17,0-20,0 11,0-14,0 2,0-3,0 6xC-l,0 2,5 0,90
NY 330 0,25 14,0-17,0 33,0-37,0
- - 2,5 0,90
NY 347 0,08 18,0-21,0 9,0-11,0 . 8xC-l,0 2,5 0,90
NY 349 0,13 18,0-21,0 8,0-10,5 0,35-0,65 0,75-1,2 2,5 0,90
1) Chromium % minimum 1,9 x % Ni. Tantalum % maximum 0,10%. Titanium % maximum 0,15%.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
Elongation, As
minimwn, %
25
25
25
25
25
22
25
25
22
18
22
16
22
22
22
22
18
18
22
18
P S
maxi- maxi- W
mum mwn %
% %
0,04 0,03 -
0,04 0,03 -
0,04 0,03
___ ............... I
0,04 0,03 -
0,04 . 0,03 -
0,04 0,03
-
0,04 0,03
-
0,04 0,03 -
0,04 0,03 -
0,04 0,03
-
0,04 0,03
I
-
0,04 0,03
-
0,04 0,03
-
0,04 0,03 -
0,04 0,03 -
0,04 0,03 -
0,04 0,03 -
0,04 0,03 -
0,04 0,03 -
0,04 0,03 1,25-1,75
L. Welding Consumables for Welding of Ferri-
tic-Austenitic Stainless Steels (Duplex Steels)
L 100 General
101 Approval of welding consumables for ferritic austeni-
tic stainless steels (duplex steels) will be considered subject
to compliance with the specified tests and requirements be-
low.
102 Parent plate material should preferably have a com-
position matching that of the electrode to be tested.
201 All-weld-metal tests
shown in Fig.17, one using a 2,4-3,5 mm 0 electrode and
For wire/gas combinations the wire size is to be 1,2mm and
the largest size manufactured.
For flux cored wire/gas combination the wire size is to be
1,2 or 1,6 mm and the largest size manufactured.
For wirelflux combinations the smallest and largest size
versed between subsequent layers, each bead being not
4 mm in thickness. Between each run, the assembly is to be
left in still air. until it has cooled below lS0'C, the temper-
Test specimens:
Test requirements:
reported. For information, the value for reduction of .area is
also to be reported. The results of the tensile tests are not
to be less than that specified for the base material, for which
__
minimum average impact energy is to 'be 27 J for full size
test specimens.
202 Butt weld tests
pared for each welding position for which the wire is re-
commended.
The test assemblies are to be prepared using wire or elec-
trode of one of the smaller sizes manufactured and for the
remaining runs wires or electrodes of the largest size for the
position concerned.
Test specimens:
One transverse tensile, two bend and three impact test spe-
cimens are to be taken from each test assembly as shown in
Fig.2
Test requirements:
The result of the transverse tensile test is not to be less than
that specified for the base metal, for which the consumable
is intended.
minimum average impact energy is to be 27 J for full size
test specimens.
having any dimension exceeding 3 mm can be seen on the
outer surface of the test specimen.
301 Chemical analysis is to be carried mit for all dimen-
is to be carried out as stipulated in H300' and is to be re-
be reported.
401 The ferrite/austenite-ratio of the weld is to be deter-
mined. The' ferrite content in average is to be in the range
of2S to 70%.
501 For the determination of pitting and crevice corrosion
resistance, one test according to ASTM G48, Method A is
required. The test specimen is to be exposed to the solution
ata temperature of 20'C for 24 hours. No pitting attack
shall be visible on the test faces, and the general weight loss
is to be less than 20 mg.
L 600 Annual tests
601 Annual test for welding consumables comprises
chemical analysis only. 'Welding consumables of two differ-
ent dimensions are to be tested.
M. Welding Consumables for Welding of Alu-
minium Alloys for General and Low-Tempera-
ture Service
M 100 General
101 Approval of welding consumables for aluminium al-
loys will be considered Subject to compliance with the spe-
cified tests and requirements in 200 to 400.
M Zijij 'i'estassembiies .
201 The welding consumables are to have a suitable. hard-
ness and smooth - surface slivers, depressions,
scratches or foreign matters that would adversely affect the
welding properties when operating the welding equipment.
202 Tolerances for dimensions are to be kept within the
limits guaranteed in the manufacturers specifications.
203 The recommended and used composition for the
shielding gases is to be reported.
Two test assemblies with dimensions as shown in Fig.1S are
to be welded in the flat position, one using the smallest wire
size manufactured and the other using the largest size man-
ufactured. .
Application of backing strips is optional, i.e. the joint may
be welded without backing strip with the root of weld
chipped out to sound metal and re-welded from the second
side. The metal for the backing strip is to be the same as that
for the test plates. The test assemblies are neither to be pre-
heated nor postheat treated. The welding is to be carried out
at ambient temperature.
M 300 Testing
301 Non-destructive examination:
Prior to testing the backing strip is to be chipped off. The
radiographic test will be considered as passed, provided the
DEI NORSKE VERITAS
,) ,J
.-J
".
C)
-:J
()
i)
()
SECTION 2
WELDING PROCEDURES AND APPROVAL OF WELDERS
Contents
A. General
A 100 Scope
A 200 Defmitions
B 500 WPQT for full penetrationT-, Y-, and K- joints
B 700 WPQT for fillet welds
B 800 Retesting
B 900 Validity of qualified welding procedures
B 11 00 WPQT for liquefied gas systems
e 100 General
e 200' WPQT for butt welds
e 300 WPQT for fillet welds
e 400 . Retesting
D. Welding procedures, Ferritic-Austenitic Stainless Steel (Du-
General
Additional testing
plex)
D 100
D 200
E 100 General
E 300 Certification'
. - -
A. General
A 100 Scope
101 This Section specifies the requirements for welding
procedures and welding procedure qualification tests as well
as approval of welders.
A 200 Def"mitions
202 Welding procedure qualification test (WPQT): A test
requirements.
203 Welding procedure qualification record (WPQR): The
record of the actual parameters employed during welding
of the qualification test piece, and results from the non-des-
tructive testing and mechanical testing.
204 Non-destructive testing (NDT): Visual inspection, ra-
revealing defects and irregularities.
101 WPS subjected to approval is to contain as a minimum
the following information as relevant for the welding opera-
tion:
- material: standard, grade and modification
- nominal thickness/diameter range (dimensions)
- welding process
- welding position and direction
- welding consumables: trade name, electrode/wire diam-
eter, shielding gas, flux and recognized classification
- welding sequence (number and order of passes/layers)
- welding parameters: voltage, current, polarity and wel-
ding speed
- preheat and interpass temperature
- post weld heat treatment.
201 When WPQT is required, the tests must be performed
in the environment applicable to the actual production and
meet the specified minimum requirements prior to com-
mencing the production welding.
202 The qualification test is to be witnessed by the sur-
veyor.
301 The test assembly consists of two plates welded to-
gether. As far as possible the plates are to have a size which
can simulate the heat transfer during the production welding.
For manual or semiautomatic welding, a test assembly ac-
cording to Fig. 1 is to be carried out with:
lmin == 300 mm
Lmin= 350 mm
For automatic welding, the dimensions are to be:
lmin = 400 mm
Lmin= 1000 mm
Edge preparation and fit-up are to be as detailed in the WPS.
The plates are to be joined and held by tack welds to provide
the correct gap for the edge preparation used.
SO mm of each end of the test piece is to be discarded.
particle testing)
DEI NORSKE VERITAS
B 300 Bend testing
301 Flat bend test specimens, as given in Fig.2 are to be
used. Edges on tension side to be rounded to a radius of I
to2 mm.
I' 'I
all
lla
(- 9a+O)
Fig_ 2
test specimen
Fig. 3
Wrap around bend test
302 When the wrap around bend test, exemplified in Fig.3
is used, e.g. for the side bend test of a weld, the length of
the test specimen has to be greater than the length Ila shown
in Fig.2.
303 For butt weld bend test specimens, the weld is to be
machined flush with the surface of the plate.
304 For transverse face-bend and root-bend test specimens
for butt weld test the dimensions are to be as follows:
a = as rolled thickness t of the plate
b = 30 mm
305 For transverse side-bend test specimens for butt weld
test the dimensions are to be as follows:
a =lOmm
b = as rolled thickness t of the plate
If t ;;:: 40 mm, the side-bend test specimen may be subdi-
vided, each part being at least 20 mm wide.
306 When a longitudinal face-bend or root-bend weld test
is required, a test specimen according to an appropriate
standard will be accepted.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

I,:]
."J
'.
':J
:]
:J
"J
':J
Rules for Ships , January 1996
-m
requirements in ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
Sec. VIII, Div. 2, AI-511 are satisfied.
Mechanical testing:
One longitudinal and one transverse tensile test specimen
and two side bend test specimen (<<Wrap around.. bending)
are to be taken as shown in Fig_18.
50mm APPROXJ.: .. __ L
E
E

'"
III : DISCARD
f-----------
SIDE BEND TEST SPECIMEN
--- -jHr------
rTRANSVERSE TENSILE SPECIMEN
---TIr-----
,,!--! I
I JJ: ... L
I i TEST SPECI MEN
II

____ -.l.W ______
_____
II I r
II II DISCARD
iii j
L
3QOmm APPROX.
Fig. 18
Test assembly and location of specimens .
;
I
.--1

x
&1
a.
a.
..
E
E
0
0
"'
j
-.J
Mechanical test requirements:
reported for the Society's consideration. The tensile- and
yield strength for both weld metal and welded joint are not
to be less than that specified for .the parent material (in soft
condition), for which the consumable is intended. For ma-
terials in deformation hardened or aged condition, the choice
of consumable and requirements to mechanical properties
are to be evaluated in each particular case.
with the requirements if, after bending through an angle of
180
0
over a former with diameter four times the thickness
of the specimen, no crack or defect having any dimensions
exceeding 3 mm can be seen on the outer surface of the test
specimen.
M 400 Annual tests
401 One test assembly is to be welded in the flat position.
Testing of this assembly is to be carried out as prescribed
above for the initial testing.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
SECTION 4
WELDING OF CLAD STEEL PLATES
Contents
A. General
A 100 Scope
B. Welding
B 100 Welding methods - deposited meta!
A. General
A 100 Scope
101 The requirements in this Section specify welding of
steel plates with austenitic stainless steel cladding.
B. Welding
B 100 Welding methods - deposited metal
101 For welding of steel plates with austenitic stainless
steel cladding, only electrodes approved by the Society are
to be used, and welding is to be carried out only by certified
welders.
102 The welding may be carried out by means of shielded
metal-arc welding, automatic or semi-automatic arc welding
under inert gas and/or flux or a combination of these meth-
ods.
103 The weld joint is to have the same resistance to cor-
rosion as the cladding metal, and the corrosion-resistant de-
posited metal is to have at least the same thickness as the
cladding metal.
104 The chemical composition of the weld metal in the top
-Mlie
to have at least the same thickness as the cladding on the
original plate.
201 Proper groove shape in connection with correct wel-
ding sequence is to be employed. The edges are to be pre-
pared with a cutting tool or by grinding.
202 Clad steel may be flame-<:ut provided this is done
from the base plated side. It is reco=ended that the cutting
face is removed in a depth of about 2 =. When shearing
is used, the cladding side must face upwards.
203 If there are alignment difficulties or if the welded
connection is highly stressed, an edge preparation involving
the removal of the cladding, adjacent to the weld is recom-
mended.
301 When welding clad materials, mixihg of base metal
and weld deposit, as well as mixing of the two types of high
alloyed weld deposit is to be held at a minimum. Low wel-
ding current and small welding consumable dimensions are
to be used. The degree of dilution is preferably to be kept
below 30%. The degree of dilution is defined as the amount
of base metal in the weld metal.
302 The use of low-alloyed or non-alloyed consumables
on the cladding is not allowed.
303 At least two layers of the alloyed weld metal are to
be deposited when welding the backing from the clad steel
side, even if it is necessary to chip or grind off part of the
first stainless bead to make room for the second pass. At
least, the first bead is to be made with an over-alloyed con-
sumable (e.g. NV 309).
304 The mild steel backing is as far as possible to be
welded before the stainless cladding and is to be welded with
suitable mild steel consumable. Care must be taken to pre-
vent the root bead from penetrating into the cladding. Tack
welds are to be of sufficient size, have full penetration and
an even surface, so that they may be covered by the first
weld bead without removal.
Guidance note:
For the top layer on the backing only extensively dried, extra-
low hydrogen type of electrodes with grade-suffIx HH are to be
used.

305 When welding pipes where there is access only from
the outside, the entire cross-section is to be built up by al-
loyed weld metal corresponding to the cladding. The sides
of the groove are preferably to be covered with an over-al-
loyed consumable (buttering) before joining.
B 60-70"
! -=-SZIJ
A 80-90"
:3 0'.
i\llJ II ntz-l
60'

I . " I
I '" 1
i
N
_,... I. A L---.J '-----J
1[: G'I I,M i
0-2.0
60-90'
H

ij>30
A

A .
-,
60-90"
Fig. 1
Examples on most commonly used grooves
DET NORSKE VERITAS

'-_/
CJ
<J
)
:J
C)

C)
2
SECTION 1
Contents
A. General
A 100 Scope
A 200 Basic requirements
B. Testing
B 100 General
B 300 Bend testing
A. General
A 100 Scope
101 This Chapter specifies the requirements for welding
shops and -contractors, welders, welding consumables and
welding procedures in general as well as procedures and
methods for welding of clad steel plates and liquefied gas
systems.
A 200. Basic requirements
201 Welding of important structures: hull, superstructure
and deckhouse, machinery installations: boilers, pressure
vessels and pipe systems and equipments: stemframes, rud-
ders, rudder stocks and rudder hom are to be carried out by
approved welders, with approved welding consumables and
at welding shops and -<:ontractors recognized by the Society.
Manufacturers of boilers and pressure vessels Class I-II are
to obtain the approval according to a detailed progra=e,
available by the local surveyor.
301 Welding shops and -<:ontractors will have to prove
their qualifications for the welding operations in question.
302 It that weidingshops and -contractors
make use of the necessary equipment for carrying out in-
spection of the welding operations in a satisfactory manner.
303 Important welding operations are to be carried out
under daily supervision of an inspector, who has the expe-
rience and qualifications which enable him to judge this type
of work. The work of each welder is to be regularly ex-
amined.
304 The welding shops and -<:ontractors are to keep a card
index or register of all approved welders. The register is to
give information on training of the welders and date and
results of qualification tests. Information about the base
metal, type of welding consumable, joint design and welding
positions is to be stated in the event of re-qualification tests.
The surveyor is to be allowed to examine the register at any
time.
401 Consumables for welding of ships, mobile offshore
units, fixed offshore installations and other structures in-
tended for classification are to be approved by the Society_
402 Type approval of welding consumables will be con-
sidered subject to compliance with the requirements given
in Sec.3.
403 All brand names under which a tested and approved
ufacturer is to certify that the welding consumables marketed
under alternative brand names are identical with the con-
sumables tested for approval.
B. Testing
B 100 General
101 Testing of welds is to be carried out as specified in
200 to 300. Reference is also made to relevant paragraphs
in Ch.1 Sec.2.
201 For tensile testing of all-weld-metal and butt welds
two different types of test specimens may be used, round test
specimens or flat test specimens (see Fig.l) as described
below:
A - Deposited metal tensile test
Normally, round test specimens with the following dimen-
sions are to be used:
d = 10 mm
Lo = 50 mm
Lc = 60=

B - Butt weld tensile test for testing of the weld as a whole
be as follows:
b =25=
La = Lc = 3t or 2t + width of weld, whichever is the
greatest
R
C - Butt weld tensile test
be as follows:
b = 30=
Lo = 6 = + width of weld + 6 =
R =50=
II_ Lo I I
Le j
Flat
welding consumable is marketed, are to be registered by the Fig. 1
Society. In order to avoid duplication of tests, the man- Tensile test specimen
DET NORsKE VERITAS
A. General .............................. .............................. 40 B. Welding ...... ...... .......... .................... ................. 40
A 100 Scope.......................................... ............. 40 B 100 Welding methods - deposited meta! ................. 40
B 200 Groove preparation ...................................... 40
B 300 Welding procedure .. ...... ............ .......... ......... 40

'0
.J
.:)
o

8

,.-.....1-----
Qpt22 222
1-3
Weld grove face to be ground smooth.
/////////
Root bead (1) of mild steel is not to penetrate the cladding.

77277/ ..
The root bead is back-gauged or ground.

First bead on the clad side to be welded with an over-alloyed
consumable (309-type), top layer to match the composition
of the cladding (3O!s-type).
RECOMMENDED TYPES OF JOINTS

. _:
,
, '
/'<D :1\
to be welded with an over-alloyed consumable.
@ to be welded with a consumable matching the
composition of the cladding.

,'0
Backing to be ground back enough to give room for at least
two high-alloyed layers.
Fig. 2
Examples on welding sequence
clad plate ,
stainless steel plate

Butt weld between clad plate and stainless steel plate:
The groove edge on the clad plate is buttered with an over-
alloyed consumable, the joint may then be welded with a
consumable matching the stainless steel.
clad plate
""p
p' mild steel plate
clad plate mild steel plate
Butt weld between clad plate and mild steel plate; the clad-
ding is welded with an over-alloyed type of consumable.

clad plate
Only to be used in assemblies subjected to low stresses;
consumable to match the cladding:
clad plate
To be used in assemblies subject to high stresses: consum-
able to be of over-alloyed type to compensate for the mixing
with mild steel backing.
clad
plate
clad plate
Assembly subjected to high stresses; root beads can be
welded with over-alloyed consumables and the top layer
with ordinary stainless steel consumable, or root bead is
welded with a mild steel consumable and the top layer with
over-alloyed consumable.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
~
)
C)
C)
()
.C)
) !J
CONTENTS
SEC. 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ........ 1
A. General .. ....... ......... ..... .... 1
A 100 Scope........................................................ 1
A 200 Basic requirements ........................................ 1
A 300 Welding shops and -contractors ... "................... 1
A 400 Welding consurnables .................................... 1
B. Testing .............................................................. 1
B 100 General..................................................... 1
B 300 Bend testing ................................................ 2
SEC.2 WELDING PROCEDURES AND APPROVAL
OF WELDERS .......................................... 3
A. General............................................................. 3
A 100 Scope ........................................................ 3
A 200 Defmitions.. ........ .......... .............. .. ............. 3
B. Welding Procedures, Steel ..................................... 3
B 100 Welding procedure specification, WPS ............... 3
B 200 Welding procedure qualification test, WPQT ........ 3
B 300 WPQT for butt welds on plates ........................ 3
B 400 WPQT for butt welds on tubes .... """ .... ,, ......... 5
B 500 WPQT for full penetration T-, Y-, and K- joints ... 6
B 600 WPQT for tubular joints ................................ 6
B 700 WPQT for fillet welds ........ "......................... 7
B 800 Retesting ........................ ".......................... 7
B 900 Validity of qualified welding procedures ............. 7
B 1000 . Welding procedure qualification record, WPQR " .. 9
B 1100 WPQT for liquefied gas systems...................... 10
C. Welding Procedures, Aluminium ........................... 11
C 100 General .................................................... 11
C 200 WPQT for butt welds ................ " ...... " ......... 11
C 300 WPQT for fillet welds ...... ".......................... 13
C 400 Retesting """"""""""""""",,,,"""""""'" 13
C 500 HAZ softening adjacent to welds .. " ................. 13
D. Welding procedures, Ferritic-Austenitic Stainless Steel
(Duplex) ........................................................... 14
D 100 General .................................................... 14
D 200 Additional testing ........................................ 14
D 300 Validity of a qualified welding procedure ........... 14
E, Approvol ofW.ld .... ,,,,m,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, H
E 100 General.................................................... 14
E 200 Standards for approval testing ......................... 14
E 300 Certification ............................................... 15
SEC. 3 TYPE APPROVAL OF WELDING CONSUM-
ABLES ................................................... 16
A. General............................................................ 16
A 100 Scope ....................................................... 16
A 200 Approval procedure ..................................... 16
A 300 Approval testing ......................................... 17
A 400 Changes.. .......... ................ ....................... 17
A 500 Basic groups and grades ................................ 17
A 600 Testing procedure........................................ 17
A 700 Test specimens ............ ,.............................. 17
A 800 Hydrogen test .......................... " ................. 18
A 900 Re-testing .................................................. 18
B. Covered Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc Welding of
Normal and High Strength Steels ................ ...... 18
B 100 General .............................................. ...... 18
B 200 All-weld-meta! test ....................................... 18
B 300 Butt-weld test .......................... " ...... "" ....... 19
B 400 Hydrogen test .. " ......................................... 20
B 500 Covered electrodes for fillet welding ................. 20
B 600 Covered electrodes for gravity or contact welding 21
B 700 Deep penetration electrodes ............................ 21
B 800 Annual tests ............................ "................. 22
B 900 Upgrading............................................ ..... 22
C. Wire/Flux Combinations for Submerged Arc Welding 22
C 100 General.......... ................ ........ .................. 22
C 200 Multi-run technique.,. , ..... , .. ,......................... 22
C 300 Two-run technique....................................... 24
C 400 Annual tests ...... .. .. ............... 24
C 500 Upgrading ........ .. 24
D. Combinations for Use in One-side Automatic Welding
Processes .......................................................... 25
D 100 General.................................................... 25
D 200 One-run welding ......................................... 25
D 300 Multi-run welding ....................................... 26
D 400 One-and multi-run welding ............................. 26
D 500 Testing.................................... ................. 26
D 600 Requirements .............. " ............................. 26
D 700 Annual tests ........................................ ,...... 26
D 800 Upgrading.. .............. .......... ....................... 27
E. Wires and Wire/Gas Combinations for Metal Arc
Welding ........................................................... 27
E 100 Genera! ............................... ,'........ ............ 27
E 200 Semi-automatic multi-run welding ",................. 27
E 300 Automatic multi-run welding ................ .......... 28
E 400 Two-run welding ........................................ 29
E 500 Annual tests ............................................... 30
E 600 Upgrading.......................... .. .. .. ...... ........... 30
F. Combinations for Use in Electro-slag and Electro-gas
Welding Processes .............................................. 30
F 100 Genera! .................................... ".. ............ 30
F 200 Initial tests ................................ ".............. 30
F 300 Annual tests ............................................... 31
G. Welding Consumables for Welding of Steel Grades NV
2-4, NV 2-4L, NV 4-4 and NV 4-4L for Low-
Temperature Applications .................................... 31
G 100 General.......................................... .......... 31
G 200 Additional requirements .................... ,........... 31
G 300 Annual tests ............................................... 31
H. Welding Consumables for Low-Alloy, Heat-Resisting
Steels (NY 0,3Mo, NV lCr 0,5Mo and NV 2,25Cr
IMo) ............................................................... 32
H 100 Genera! .................................... ".......... .... 32
H 200 Additional requirements ................................ 32
H 300 Chemical composition ................................... 32
H 400 Annual tests ............................................... 33
I. Welding Consumables for Welding of Steel Grades NV
1,5Ni, NV 3,5Ni, NV 5Ni and NV 9Ni .................... 33
I 100 Genera!.......................................... .......... 33
I 200 KdliiliOtihl reqUirtments ................................ ~ ~
I 300 Annual test ................................................ 34
1 400 Other welding consumables ............................ 34
J. Welding Consumables for Welding of Extra High
Strength Steels ................................................... 34
J 100 General........................................ .... .. ...... 34
J 200 Additional requirements ................................. 34
J 300 Annual tests ............................................... 35
K. Welding Consumables for Welding of Austenitic
Stainless Steels ................................................... 35
K 100 General ...... " ............................................ 35
K 200 All-weld-metal test ....................................... 36
K 300 Chemical composition ................................... 36
K 400 Possible additional tests ................................. 36
K 500 Annual tests .. ""......................................... 36
L. Welding Consumables for Welding of Ferritic-
Austenitic Stainless Steels (Duplex Steels) ................ 38
L 100 General.... .......... ...................................... 38
L 200 Test assemblies ..................................... : ..... 38
L 300 Chemical composition .. :................................ 38
L 400 Microstructural examination ..................... ...... 38
L 500 Corrosion test .. ......................... ................. 38
L 600 Annual tests ... :........................................... 38
M. Welding Consumables for Welding of Aluminium Al-
loys for General and Low-Temperature Service ........ 38
M 100 General .................................... " .............. 38
M 200 Test assemblies ........................................... 38
M 300 Testing .................................................... , 38
M 400 Annual tests ............................................... 39
SEC. 4 WELDING OF CLAD STEEL PLATES ........ 40
General
The Rule changes ceme into force on 1st of July 1996.
The introduction booklet is nonnally in January and July
each year.
current.
- A new item CSOO on HAZ softening has been added.
- A new table C4 has been added. .
- A new item D on welding procedures, Ferritic Austenitic Stain-
less Steel (Duplex) has been added.
- Item E on approval of welders has been amended and extended.
Sec.3 Welding Consumables
- Item JIOI has been amended and extended to include grade A
(From lACS UR W23).
- Item JI03 has been amended.
- Item J202 has been amended.
- Table J1 has been amended.
- A new table J2 on butt weld test requirements has been added.
- Item L20I on alI-weldmeta! tests has been amended.
- A new item L202 on butt weld tests for duplex stainless steel
Main changes
wires has been added.
- Item L401 has been supplemented with range of ferrite content. I"
- Item LSO! on pitting and crevice corrosion resistance has been "-
Sec.2 Welding Procedures and ApprovaJ of Welders
strength steel.
strength steel. New Figs. 10.12 have been added.
- Table B2 and B4 have been amended.
- A new table B5 on range of approval for type of joint has been
added.
amended.
1.96.4500
It is agreed that sive IS provided below oet Norske VeritlS. its subsidieries. bodies, officers. directors. employees and agents shall have no liebility for eny loss. damage or expense

whether the less, demage or expense hes effected enyone with whom Det Norske Veritls hes e contract or a third party who hes ected or relied on decisions mede or informetion given
by Of on behalf of Det Norske Veritas. * However, if any pcrson UIIes the services of Oct Norske Veritas or its subsidiaries or relies on any decision made or information given by or
on behalf of them and in consequence suffers e loss. demege or expense proved to be due to their negligence. omission or default. then oet Nerskc Veritas will pay by way of com-
pensetion to such person e sum representing his proved loss. "* In the event Oct Norske VeritlS or its subsidieries mey be held liable in eccordance with the sections ebove. the emount
of compensation shall under no circumstances exceed the amoU1t of the fee, if any. charged fer that particuler service. decision. advice or informetion. "* Under no circumstances
whatsoever shall the individuel or individuals who have personally caused the loss. damage or expense be held liable. * In the event that any provision in this section shell be invalid
under the Jaw of any jurisdiction. the Validity of the remeining provisions shall not in any way be affected.
... 'J
()
C)

,
J
i
o
8
8

\ I
iQ)NWI
t
Library Z 1 AUG ZU02 .
.1YJ{ 0/ o/ung r[ au
. l ,(",_ ',,-;IJ
!l t;'::\,.:
.' ,.-, -, -f.,.::.-',,".!.::
RULES FOR
CLASSIFICATION OF
SIDPS
NEWBUILDINGS
)J PART 2 CHAPTER 3
WELDING
... ,)

JANUARY 1996
SECTIONS PAGE
2 Welding Procedures and Approval of Welders .......................................................... 3
3 Type Approval of Welding Consumables ................................................................ 16
4 Welding of Clad Steel Plates ................................................................................ 40
C) i:J

'.j
'.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
Veritasveien 1. N1322 H0Vik. Norway Tel.: +4767579900 Fax: +47675799 11
=
.. .-
"
iQ)NV
RULES FOR
Li6rary CLASSIFICATION OF
fJYJ..L 0/ o/ung rr au
0
', P d 17)\ 'i 'e'i?':':'
. ,':":: '.
f
.......... " ...... . ..;;.'
STRUCTURES AND EQUIPMENT
MAIN CLASS
)
,) PART 3 CHAPTER I
STRUCTURAL DESIGN
)J GENERAL
JANUARY 1998
SECTIONS
PAGE
I General Requirements ......................................................................................... I
2 Materials.. .... ........ .... .... .... .... ............ .... ................ .... .... .... .... ........ ........ . ... .... ... 4
3 Design Principles ............................................................................................... 7
4 Design Loads ................................................................................................... 11
5 Overall Strength ............................................................................................... 17
6 Plating and Stiffeners ......................................................................................... 19
7 !!m;! Qin:!!lf
-) ()
8 Weld Connections ............................................................................................. 25
9 Corrosion Protection ................................................................................. '.' . . . . . .. 30
10 Fabrication ...................................................................................................... 33
i")
J '"
DET NORSKE VERITAS
Veritasveien 1, N-1322 H0Vik, Norway Tel.: +4767579900 Fax: +47675799 11
General
decided by the Board as of January 1998, and supersedes the July
1996 edition of the same chapter.
The introduction booklet is nOIlTIally revised in January and July
each year.
chapters printed in Pt.O Ch.l Sec.1 to ensure that the chapter is
current.
Main changes
- Paragraph B302 has been rewritten. The defmition of wave
spectra is deleted and a Guidance note giving reference to Clas-
sification Note No. 30.5 has been added.
- Paragraph B307 has been deleted, the text being covered else-
where.
Sec.4 Design Loads
- Paragraph BIOI on wind velocity has been updated and a Guid-
ance note giving reference to Classification Note No. 30.5 has
been added.
,.-,'
"""',_ -B201 have been amended with respect to
.,. wave particle veloqitY' and wave height, respectively. The Guid-
ance note in B202 has been rewritten, now giving reference to
Classification Note No. 30.5.
- Item B300 'Current' has been rewritten.
- Paragraphs C402 to C40S have been deleted (the requirements
are covered by Classification Note No. 31.4 and also the
POSMOOR Rules).
- The requirements for local pressures in subsection D have been
rewritten. For semi-submersible units the Rules include explicit
criteria for tanks where filling to the top of the air pipe is not a
relevant design load condition, and explicit criteria as to how to
considered tank pressure, head loadings and environ-
m.entally induced 19ad components.
The defmition of Splash l.one in paragraph A2Cf2 has been
amended in order to hannonise with NPD Codes.
Sec.10 Fabrication
- The Guidance note a3) in paragraph H102 has been amended to
ensure compatibility between Classification Note No. 31.4 and
the Rules.
- Paragraph H3Cf2 concerning tank test pressures has been rewrit-
ten in accordance with amendments in Sec.4 D.
For SUbscription orders or information about SUbscription tenns, please use distribution@dnv.com.
1.98.2500
.
the mlximum compensltion shill never exceed USD 2 million.
VentlS" shill meln the Foundation Det Norske Veritas IS well IS all its slilsidianes, directors, officers, employee.s, agents and any other ICting on behalf

:]

:]
/J
:]
') :]
,
)
\J
J
C)
')
.. o
.'\
J
C)
CONTENTS
SEC. 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ...................... 1
A. Classification ........ .......... .............. ...................... 1
A 100 Application........... .............. ........................ 1
A 200 Class notations ............................................ 1
B. Def'mitions ......................................................... 1
B 100 Symbols.................................................... 1
B 200 Terms............................ ........................... 1
B 300 Structural categories ...................................... 2
C. Documentation ............ ........ ................................ 2
C 100 Plans and particulars ..................................... 2
C 200 Specifications and calculations .......................... 2
C 300 Limiting operating conditions ........................... 3
D. Appendix to the Classification Certificate ................. 3
D 100 Geneml................................ ..................... 3
SEC. 2 MATERIALS ............................................ 4
A. General ........ ..... .................. .......................... .... 4
A 100 Scope........................................................ 4
A 200 Material certificates ....................................... 4
B. Structural Steel .................................... ............... 4
B 100 Geneml..................................................... 4
B 200 Material designations ..................................... 4
B 300 Design temperatures ...................................... 4
B 400 Application categories .................................... 5
B 500 Selection of structural steel .............................. 5
C 100 Geneml
C 200 Aluminium
............................. 6
6
6
SEC. 3 DESIGN PRINCIPLES ............................... 7
A. General............................. ............................ .... 7
A 100 Basic conditions ........................ ................... 7
A 200 Modelling.................................................. 7
A 300 Methnds of analysis ...................................... 7
A 400 Overall design ............................................. 7
A 500 Details design ~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
A 600 Protection against accidental damage .................. 8
.!!, i ; y , ~ (;Q!!!!!!!l!!!'! """'" """ """"""""""" ~
B 100 Geneml...................................... .......... ..... 8
B 200 Wind ........................................................ 8
B 300 Waves.................................... ................... 8
B 400 Current................................................. .... 9
C. Strength Analysis ................................................ , 9
C 100 Geneml..................................................... 9
C 200 Practical simplifications .................................. 9
C 300 yielding............... ..................................... 9
C 400 Buckling... ................................................. 9
C 500 Fatigue....... .......... ............................... ...... 9
C 600 Ultimate strength ......................................... 10
C 700 Reliability,based analysis of structures .... ........... 10
D. Deflections and Vibrations ................................... 10
D 100 Deflections................ .............. .................. 10
D 200 Vibrations..... ......................................... ... 10
SEC. 4 DESIGN LOADS ...................................... 11
A. General........ ............. .......... .............. ............... 11
A 100 Scope/................................... .................... 11
A 200 Definitions............ .. ............................. ..... 11
A 300 Loading conditions ...................................... 11
B. Environmental Data ............................................ 12
B 100 Wind....................................... ................ 12
B 200 Waves............... ....................................... 12
B 300 Current............. ....................................... 12
C. Flow Induced Forces ........................................... 12
C 100 Geneml.............. ...................................... 12
C 200 Dmg forces ............................................... 12
C 300 Inertia forces ...... .
C 400 Mooring forces ..................... .
14
14
D. Local Pressures and Forces ................................... 15
D 100 General.......................................... .... .... .. 15
D 200 Sea pressures .................................... ......... 15
D 300 Tank pressures .................................... ....... 15
D 400 Local functional loads ................................... 15
D 500 Local environmental loads ............................. 15
D 600 Heavy units ...................................... ......... 15
E. Acddental Impact Energy .. .............. .................... 15
E 100 Collision ........ .................. ......................... 15
E 200 Dropped objects .......................................... 16
SEC. 5 OVERALL STRENGTH ............................. 17
A. General .......... ...... ..................... ....... ................ 17
A 100 Scope ....................................................... 17
A 200 References......... .. .. .. ............ ................... .. 17
B. Design Load Conditions ....................................... 17
B 100 General .................................................... 17
C. Calculation Methods ........................ ................... 17
C 100 General......................... ............ ............... 17
D. Usage Factors and Permissible Stresses ................... 17
D 100 General .................................................... 17
D 200 Basic usage factors ...................................... 17
D 300 Yield strength analysis .................................. 17
D 400 Buckling strength analysis ..... ........... .............. 18
D 500 Fatigue strength analysis . ..... ......................... 18
D 600 Ultimate strength analysis .. ............................ 18
D 700 Accidental load analysis ................................ 18
D 800 Damaged structure analysis ............................ 18
E. Structures Other than Steel ........ .......................... 18
E 100 Aluminium alloys ........................................ 18
E 200 Other materials ........................................... 18
SEC. 6 PLATING AND STIFFENERS .................... 19
A. General............................. ........ ........ ............... 19
A 100 Scope ...... ........................ ......................... 19
A 200 DefInitions.............................................. .. 19
A 300 Minimum thickness ...................................... 19
B. Bending ............................................................ 19
B 100 Plating .................. ................................... 19
B 200 Stiffeners............... ................................... 20
C. Buckling ........................................................... 20
C 100 General............. ............ ....................... .... 20
SEC. 7 GIRDERS AND GIRDER SYSTEMS ............ 21
A. General........ ............................. ....................... 21
A 100 Scope ....................................................... 21
A 200 DefInitions............. .............. ..................... 21
B. Bending and Shear ............................................. 21
B 100 General ...... .............................................. 21
B 200 Effective flange ................. ......................... 21
B 300 Effective web ........................... .................. 21
B 400 Strength requirements for simple girders ............ 22
C. Buckling ................................. ...................... .... 23
C 100 General........... .. .... .. ............................... .. 23
D. Compl"" Girder Systems ...................................... 23
D 100 General................................... ................. 23
D 200 Calculation methods ..................................... 23
D 300 Design load conditions .................................. 23
D 400 Permissible stresses ..................................... 23
E. Girder Brackets .......... ............................ ........... 23
E 100 Scantlings...................................... ........... 23
SEC. 8 WELD CONNECTIONS ...... ....................... 25
A. General... ............... .................... ...................... 25
A 100 Scope................................... .................... 25
.A 200 Defmitions................................................ 25
B. Types of Welded Steel Joints .................. .............. 25
B 100 Butt joints ................................................. 25
B 200 Tee or cross joints ....................................... 25
B 300 Lap joints and slot welds ............................... 26
C. Size of Connections ............................................. 26
C 100 General.. .. .. .. .. ........ ................ ....... ...... ..... 26
C 200 Ordinary fillet welds .................................... 27
C 300 Partly penetration welds and fillet welds in cross
connections subject to high stresses ........... ,...... 27
C 400 Connections of stiffeners to girders etc, ... " ..... :.. 27
C 500 End connections of girders, pillars and bracings ... 28
D. Welding of Aluminium Structures .......................... 29
D 100 General.................................................... 29
SEC. 9 CORROSION PROTECTION ...................... 30
A. General.. .......................... .......... ...................... 30
A 100 Scope......... .............. ............ ....... ...... ....... 30
A 200 Defmitions.. .. .. .......... .................. ...... ........ 30
A 300 Documentation. .......... .................. .............. 30
B. Acceptable Corrosion Protection ............................ 31
B 100 Atmospheric zone........................................ 31
B 200 Splash zone ............................................... 31
B 300 Submerged zone .......................................... 31
B 400 Internal zone .............................................. 31
B 500 Corrosion additions ...................................... 31
C. Cathodic Protection ............................................ 31
C 100 General .................................................... 31
C 200 Protection by sacrificial anodes ....................... 32
C 300 Protection by impressed current ....................... 32
C 400 Cathodic protection monitoring system .............. 32
C 500 Testing of effectiveness of corrosion protection
system ..................................................... 32
D. Coating ............................................................ 32
D 100 Specification.............................................. 32
D 200 Coating application ...................................... 32
SEC. 10 FABRICATION ........................................ 33
A. General ...... ... ................................ ................... 33
igg
B. Fabrication Planning ........................................... 33
B 100 General....... .. .......... .. ........ .. ...... ..... .......... 33
B 200 Workmanship, quality system and non-destructive
testing (NDT) ............................................. 33
C. Material Identification, Cutting and Forming .... ....... 34
C 100 Material identification ................................... 34
C 200 Cutting and forming ..................................... 34
D. Tolerances, Assembly, Welding and Heat Treatment .. 34
D 100 Tolerances........ .. .......... .......... ........... ........ 34
D 200 Assembly and welding .................................. 34
D 300 Post weld heat treatment (PWHT) .................... 35
E. Repairs .... ........................................ ................ 36
E 100 General............... .......... .. ........ ........... ...... 36
F. Welding of Aluminium Structures .......................... 37
F 100 General .................................................... 37
G. Corrosion Protection Systems ............. ................... 37
G 100 General..................................... ............... 37
G 200 Application of coating................................... 37
G 300 Fabrication and installation of sacrificial anodes ... 37
G 400 Fabrication and installation of impressed current
systems .................................................... 37
H 100 Welds ........ .
H 200 Watertightness
H 300 Structural tests
................................... 38
38
39
39
I. Records and Documentation ................................. 41
I 100 General .................................................... 41
.:)

8
8
/) 8
Table H4 Ultrasonic testing
Indication
Special
Echo height above (reference level) 50%
Structural category
Primary Secondary
100% 100%
Maximum length 1). mm tl3, maximum 10 tl2, maximum 10 t, maximum 20
Cracks in transverse weld direction not acceptable regardless of echo height above 20% of reference level.
1) Length defined as distance where indication reach or pass the slated percentage of reference level.
I. Records and DocIIIl1entation
I 100 General
101 Adequate records related to the fabrication of the
structure are to be prepared to document that the structure
meets the specified requirements. Such records are to be
compiled in parallel with the fabrication process. Compiled
records are to be systematic and fully traceable. Such re-
cords are to reflect all relevant testing, alterations, additions,
corrections and revisions made during the fabrication period
in order to provide information required during the in- ser-
vice life of the structure.
102 As a minimum, the fabrication records are to contain:
- quality assurance/quality control manual
- qualification records for NDT operators
- welding procedure specifications and qualification re-
cords, including repair procedure
- welders' and welding operators' qualification records
- relevant material certification
- post-weld heat treatment records including drawings with
location reference
- NDT records including drawings with location references
for special areas and primary structural elements includ-
ing survey records for all repairs
- NDT records for secondary structural elements with lo-
cation references
- dimensional control records of section interfaces and final
global dimensions
- inspection summary report
- as-built drawings
- records with regard to any non-conformances and cor-
rective actions
- information with regard to storage, handling, installation,
testing and operation of items shipped with the structure.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
Page 40 - Pt.3 Ch.1 Sec. 1 0
The pressure is to be maintained for at least 20 minutes. The
filling rate is to be restricted to avoid excessive dynamic
design pressure. See PtA Ch.1 SecA E200.
303 The structural test is considered successful if no sig-
nificant deformations or other damages have developed
during the test.
Table HI Extent of testing
Structural
Type of connection
category
Special Butt weld
Cross- and T-joints, full penetration welds
Cross- and T-joints, partly penetration and fillet welds
Primary Butt weld
Secondary Butt weld
Cross- and T-joints. full penetration welds
1) Liquid penetrant testing to be adopted for non ferro-magnetic materials.
2) May be partly or wholly replaced by ultrasonic testing upon agreement.
304 Closing appliances for access openings etc. in decks,
bulkheads etc. which are to be watertight, are to be sepa-
rately tested before installation. Structural testing of other
parts outside tanks may be required.
305 If structural tests reveal weaknesses in the structure,
the surveyor may reqnire further testing.
Test method
Vzsual Magnetic Radio-
inspection particle 1) graphy 2)
Ultrasonic
100% 100% 100%
100% 100% - 100%
100% 100% -
-
100%
20% j) 10% 4)
100% 20% - 20%
100% 20% -
-
100%
spot 5) spot ,)
100%
spot 5)
-
spot 5)
100%
spot 5) -
-
3) For weld connections on pontoon, column and upper hull shell not subjected to high residual stress, spot check will be accepted as sufficient.
4) Additionally. all manual welds in bracing 100%.
5) Approximately 2-5%.
Table H2 Visual, magnetic particle and liquid penetrant testing
Type of defect
Structural category
Special
I
Primary Secondary
On the root side of welds
Incomplete penetration or
Not accepted
for which back welding
lack of fusion is not required:
Length <toI2, maximum 10 mm.
Cracks Not accepted
Undercut, maximum depth, mm Not accepted
I
0,3 1) 1,0 1)
1) Provided round shape and insignificant notch effect (regardless of length).
Table H3 Radiographic testing
Type of defect
Structural category
Special Primary Secondary
Porosity 1) 2)
Isolated: Largest pore diameter, mm tiS, maximum 4 tl4, maximum 6 t/3, maximum 6
Cluster: Largest pore diameter, mm 2 3 4
Maximum length along the weld of
projected pore area, mm 20 25 30
Slag inclusion 1) 3) 4)
Maximum width, mm tiS, maximum 4 tl4, maximum 6 tl3, maximum 6
Maximum length, mm t 2t 4t
Incomplete penetration Lengtb3fO), nnn Not accepted in
connections where full
:5 t, maximum 25 :5 2t, maximum 50
penetration is required
Lack of fusion
Length 5) 6), nnn
Not accepted
< 2t, maximum 50
Cracks Not accepted
1) If the distance between the similar defects (pore or slag) is less than the largest extent of one of the defects, they are to be considered as one contin-
uous defect. If the amount of pores or slag may mask other defects, the examination is to be supplemented with radiographic or ultrasonic testing.
2) If the distance between pores is less than 3 times the diameter, the pores are said to form a line or a cluster. Pores on a line must not be located in
the weld surface.
3) Defects of lengths in the direction of the weld exceeding 3 times their widths form a line. If the distance between slag lines is less than 3 times the
largest extent of the cross section of the defect, the lines are considered as one defect. See Fig.3.
4) If parallel slag lines are found the examination is to be supplemented with ultrasonic tests.
5) Defects on a line where the distance between the defects is shorter than the longest defect, are to be regarded as one continuous defect.
6) Not surface open. For incomplete penetration or lack affusion on root side of welds for which back welding is not required, see Table H2.
DEY NORSKE VERITAS
)
]
)
~ 'I
j
2
\ ~
(J
C)
(\
~
Pt.3 Ch.1 Sec. 1 - Page 1
SECTION 1
A. Classification
A 100 Application
A 200 Class notations
B. Def'mitions
B 100 Symbols
B 200 Tenns
Contents
B 300 Structural categories
C. Documentation
C 100 Plans and particulars
C 200 Specifications and calculations
C 300 Limiting operating conditions
D 100 General
A. Classification
A 100 Application
101 The rules in this chapter apply in general to all welded
steel structures as required for the assignment of main class.
102 Structural requirements applicable to specific types of
units (column stabilized units and self-elevating units) are
also given in Ch.2.
201 The class notations applicable for the assignment of
the main class are described in Pt.! Ch.1.
B. DefInitions
B 100 Symbols
101 The following symbols are used:
L = length of the vessel, defined as the greatest fore and
aft dimension in m, measured along the centreline
or a projection on the centreline
B breadth of. the vessel, defined as the greatest hori-
zontal dimension in m, measured perpendicular to
the longitudinal centreline
D moulded depth, defined as the vertical distance at
side in m, measured from the moulded baseline to
the moulded line of the uppermost continuous deck
at the middle of L
TE extreme operational draught in m, measured verti-
cally from the moulded baseline to the assigned load
waterline
TTL = light transit draught in m, measured vertically from
the moulded baseline to the lowermost possible
transit waterline
TTH = heavy transit draught in m, measured vertically from
the moulded baseline to the uppermost possible
transit waterline
AE = displacement in t in salt water (density 1,025 t/m
3
)
when draught is T E
gO = standard acceleration of gravity (= 9,80665 m1s
2
)
fl = material factor. See Sec.2
x = axis in the vessel's longitudinal direction
y = axis in the vessel's athwartships direction
z = axis in the vessel's vertical direction
Gb = minimum tensile strength of the material in N/mm2
Gf = yield stress of the material in N/mm
2
. See Sec.2.
B 200 Terms
201 Translational and rotational motions of the vessel are
defined as follows:
- surge is the linear motion along the x-axis
- sway is the linear motion along the y-axis
- heave is the linear motion along the z-axis
- roll is the angnlar motion about the x-axis
- pitch is the angnlar motion about the y-axis
- yaw is the angular motion about the z-axis.
202 Moulded baseline is a horizontal line extending
through the upper surface of bottom shell, lower hull shell
or caisson bottom plating.
203 Light weight is defined as the weight of the complete
unit with all its permanently installed machinery, equipment
and outfit, including permanent ballast, spare parts normally
retained on board, and liquids in machinery and piping to
their normal working levels, but does not include liquids in
storage or reserve supply tanks, items of consumable or
variable loads, stores, or crew and their effects.
204 Installation condition - A condition which is nor-
mally applicable for self-elevating units only. Forces acting
on the unit when lowering legs and elevating the hull are to
be taken into account.
205 Operating conditions - Conditions wherein a unit is
on location for purposes of drilling or other similar oper-
ations, and combined environmental and operational load-
ings are within the appropriate design limits established for
sucliopera!ioiis: Tlie iiilifriiaybe'eiilieraIloaf or supported
on the sea bed, as applicable.
206 Retrieval condition - A condition which is normally
applicable for self.elevating units only. Forces acting on the
unit when lowering hull and elevating legs are to be taken
into account.
207 Survival condition - A condition during which a unit
may be subjected to the most severe environmental loadings
for which the unit is designed. Drilling or similar operations
may have been discontinued due to the severity of the envi-
ronmental loadings. The unit may be either afloat or sup-
ported on the sea bed, as applicable.
208 Transit conditions - All unit movements from one
geographical location to another.
209 Bulkhead structure is defined as transverse or longi-
tudinal bulkhead plating with stiffeners and girders. Water-
tight bulkhead is a collective term for bulkheads required for
retention of reserve buoyancy in case of damages.
Tank bulkhead is a boundary bulkhead in tank for liqnid
cargo, ballast or bunker.
Wash bulkhead is a perforated or partial bulkhead in tank.
210 Girder is a collective term for laterally loaded sup-
porting members. Other terms used are:
- floor (a bottom transverse girder)
- stringer (a horizontal girder on a vertical panel).
DEY NORSKE VERITAS
Rules for Mobile Offshore Units, .January 1998
211 Stiffener is a collective term for a secondary support-
ing member. Other terms used are:
- frame
- longitudinal.
212 Most probable lnrgest - The value of an environ-
mental parameter corresponding with the peak probability
density in the extreme value distribution for a given return
period.
213 Return period - The average time period between
two consecutive exceedances of a given value of an envi-
ronmental parameter.
214 Short-term - A period of time during which the en-
vironmental conditions are stationary in a statistical sense.
215 Long-term - A period of time during which the en-
vironmental conditions are non-stationary.
216 Stochastic wave loads - Short- or long-term wave
loads in irregular seas.
217 Detenninistic wave loads - Wave loads in regular
waves with predefined wave height and steepness.
218 Sustained wind velocity is defined as the average wind
velocity during a time interval (sampling time) of one min-
ute.
219 Gust wind velocity is defined as the average wind ve-
locity during a time interval of 3 seconds.
301 Structural components are grouped into categories ac-
cording to:
- level and type of applied stress
- loading rate
- presence of stress concentrations and critical load transfer
points
- consequences of failure.
Three categories are defined with the following features:
- Special
pertiens of primary ntruetural elementn ""hioh are
in way of critical load transfer points, stress concen-
trations, etc.
- Primary
Structural elements essential to the overall integrity of the
unit.
- Secondary
Structural elements of minor importance, failure of which
is unlikely to affect the overall integrity of the unit.
C. Documentation
101 The following plans and particulars are normally to
be submitted for approval:
- transverse sections
- longitudinal sections
- deck
- shell plating and framing
- pillars, girders
- legs, diagonals and strnts
- strncture in way of jacking or other elevating arrange-
ments
- stability columns and intermediate columns
- hulls, pontoons, footings, pads or mats
- superstrnctures and deckhouses
- lifeboat platforms
- support of major strnctural equipment, e.g.: fairleads,
cranes, anchor winches, helicopter deck, deck modules,
diesel engines, thrusters, towing brackets, supply boat
mooring eyes, anchor bolsters, flare booms, davits, blow
out preventers, riser tensioners, guideline tensioners,
mud and cement tanks, etc.
- welding procedure specifications. For particulars, see
Sec.IO
- methods and locations for non-destrnctive testing
- watertightlstrnctural bulkhead and flats
- arrangement and details of watertight doors and hatches
- corrosion protection/control plans. For particulars, see
Sec.9
- temporary and emergency mooring arrangement. For
particulars, see Ch.2 Sec.5
- towing arrangement. For particulars, see Ch.2 Sec.s
- steering arrangement. For particulars, see Ch.2 SecA
- details of items for which additional class notations have
been requested (e.g. see HELDK)
- plans for facilities for in-service inspection. See 400.
102 The following plans, descriptions and calulations,
where applicable, are normally to be submitted for infur-
mation:
- general arrangement. In the early design stage a prelimi-
nary plan may' be accepted. However, at completion of
the vessel a final plan is to be submitted. For the review
of the damage stability this plan is to indicate the water-
tight compartmentation, watertight bulkheads and flats
and all openings therein. Doors, hatches, ventilators etc.,
and their means of closure are to be indicated. Piping and
ventilation systems should be shown in sufficient detail
to evaluate their effects on the watertight integrity of the
vessel after incurring damage
- capacity plan. Volumes, maximum density of contents,
centres of gravity of load spacesltanks
- plan indicating design loadings for all decks
- summary of distributions of fixed and variable weights
- global strnctural analysis for relevant loading conditions
- local structural analysis, showing the transmission of
forces in joints
- calculations substantiating adequacy of strncture to trans-
rilil forces between legs -aadhull through ihe jaelting--ot
other elevating system
- evaluation of the unit's ability to resist overturning while
bearing on the sea bed
- corrosion protection/control plans. for particulars, see
Sec.9
- clearance between the deck strncture and the wave crest,
see Ch.2 Sec.2 and Sec.3
- stability calculations, both intact and damaged, over ap-
propriate range of draughts, including the transit condi-
tions, see Ch.2 Sec.6
- lines or offsets
- curves of form or equivalent data
- cross curves of stability or equivalent data
- wind heeling moment curves or equivalent data
- tank sounding tables
- quality control procedures. For particulars see Sec. 10.
103 The strnctural plans to be submitted are to indicate
clearly the scantlings, corrosion addition, types and grades
of material, joint details, welding or other methods of con-
nection, types of weld, weld deposit if required according
to Sec.S CI02, design temperatures, and if any, tank boun-
daries with the location of overflowslheight of air pipes.
201 The calculations to be submitted in conjunction with
the scantling plans are, in so far applicable, to contain:
DEY NORSKE VERITAS
J :J
.J :J
-.J
:J
.... J
'J
is to extend at least 1,0 m distance from the stress concen-
tration in way of critical load transfer points. For relatively
small connections the extent may however be reduced to 0,5
m distance from the stress concentration.
--e-n-d--o-f--G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e--
103 The NDT tests are normally to be carried out to an
extent not less than required in Table HI.
104 If the weld quality level is below the normal, the ex-
tent of examination is to be increased. If the weld quality
level is satisfactory, the extent of examination may be re-
duced to the discretion of the surveyor.
105 Repeated findings of cracks or lack of fusion require
an increased extent of non-destructive testing as well as re-
vision of the welding procedure.
106 Normally the welds are at least to meet the require-
ments stated in Tables H2, H3 and H4.
As the test methods differ in their limitations andlor possi-
bilities of recording and documentation, special acceptance
criteria are given for each method where necessary.
Alternative evaluations ensuring an equivalent level of
quality may in special cases be considered.
107 Plates which are subjected to siguifIcant tensile
stresses in the thickness direction in way of cross joints, etc.
are to be ultrasouically tested after welding into the strnc-
ture, to make sure that lamellar tearing has not taken place.
If steel with improved through thickness properties has been
adopted, this test may be reduced to spot-checks only.
Guidance note:
To obtain reliable test results, full penetration welds should be
used for such connections.
108 Calibration procedures and construction of reference
curves for ultrasonic tests are to be as specified in Classi-
fication Note No.7 or equivalent standards.
109 Fig.2 and Table H4 specify defects which are to be
reported, repaired etc. when detected during an ultrasouic
test.
110 NDT is to be reported and all essential control pa-
lMlliclelsal6 -
Regarding ultrasonic testing, see also Fig.2.
201 All tanks are to be tested for watertightness by an ac-
ceptable method in presence of the surveyor. The test may
be performed as a hydraulic test using water. Alternatively
compressed air and soap-water may be used.
If water is applied, the pressure is not to be less than 25
kN 1m
2
at the top of the tank. The outside of the tank must
be dry and clean.
If compressed air and soap solution are used, the air pres-
sure is not to exceed 20 kN/m
2
, and is to be reduced to a
smaller value, but not less than IS kN/m
2
before inspection.
The soap solution is to give clear indications even of small
leakages.
Guidance note:
Care should be taken so that the pressure in the tank does not
exceed 20 kN/m
2
above atmospheric pressure because of unex-
pected increase in ambient temperature, falling atmospheric
pressure or otheIWise. The pressure is to be measured by an
accurate method such as a V-shaped tube with water. Means
should be provided to release the pressure in an emergency case.
--e-n-d--o-f--G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e--n-o-t-e--
202 Bulkheads between tanks arranged to carry different
liquid contents are to be hydraulically tested from at least
one side.
Pt.3 Ch.1 Sec.10 :.... Page 39
DISTANCE AMPLITUDE
1
{ECHO HEIGHTI
11,1". -I_ I ... t; .... VI'lU .... rtl r:a ..
, j
PRIMARY ELEMENTS
I INCLUDING SPECIAL
AREAS I
}
TO BE
REPORTED
TO BE REPAIRED
ACCEPTABLE
PATH OFSOUND
I DEPENDANT OF PROBE LOCATION I
Fig. 2
Ultrasonic tests, reference curve etc.
203 If water is used, the test may be combined with the
structural test described in 300.
SECTION NORMAL TO WELD LENGTH
a = largest extent of cross sec-
lion
b = distance between the lines
b .. 3a, i.e. to be considered
as one slag line
b;>o 3a, i.e. to be considered
as two parallel slag lines
Fig. 3

SLAG
b
301 At least one of several identical tanks is to undergo a
structural test. Unless otherwise decided by the Society, the
test is to be carried out by applying water.
302 The test pressure height hT is to be taken as the design
pressure height described in Ch.2 Sec.2 C300 for load case
a). This implies that the following test pressure heights will
normally apply:
- for tanks with an approved maximum filling height to the
top of the air pipe:
hT = hopl or hT = (hs3 + hpol
whichever is greater
- for tanks with an approved maximum fItling height less
than to the top of the air pipe:
hT = (hop2 + hD2l or hT = (hs3 + hpol
whichever is greater.
hpo = 2,5 m in general
= height corresponding to valve opening pressure when
exceeding the general value.
For other definitions, see Ch.2 Sec.2 C300.
DEY NORSKE VERITAS
402 The installation of the system is to be carried out ac-
cording to an approved specification.
403 All equipment, cables etc. are to be approved for use
in the respective hazardous zones, if applicable.
404 Testing of the proper functioning of the systems is to
be carried out. The test method and results are to be re-
ported.
405 Final testing and approval of the system is to be per-
formed after installation.
H 100 Welds
101 Welds are to be subjected NDT as the fabrication
work proceeds. Testing is to be carried out applying suitable
methods.
Final inspection and NDT of structural steel welds are not
to be carried out before 48 hours after completion, except
where PWHT is required. When PWHT is performed, the
final NDT is to be carried out when all heat treatment has
been completed.
The time delay may upon agreement be reduced for NV 36
grades or lower and for NV 420 grades or lower for plate
thicknesses less than 40 mm, if consistent low failure rate
of delayed cracking has been documented for the materials
and welding consumables in question.
102 The non-destructive tests are to be carried out within
the different structural categories according to Sec. 1 B300.
Guidance note:
A. Column stabilised units
1) Secondary structural elements
All structures not defmed as primary or special, in partiCUlar
internal structures like stiffeners, girders, etc., including
their attachments to primary or special clements, if not oth-
erwise stated, as these are considered to have a high degree
of redundancy so that single element failures do not affect the
overall integrity.
2) Primary structural elements
'which -arC--CS5tllti-al to -tlie', ovcra.l1' integrity -of the
unit, e.g.:
a) Shell plating of pontoons, columns and bracings.
b) Internal structures in slender bracings:
- longitudinal stiffeners or gusset plates
Extent: transverse buttwelds, brackets
- transverse stiffeners
Extent: welds on bracing shell
c) Structures in way of intersections between:
- bracings and column/pontoon/deck
- column and pontoon deck
Extent: welds in way of main load transfer paths trans-
mitting nonnal stresses, including welds attaching sec-
ondary structure.
d) Main girders in deck and their support at columns.
Extent: welds transmitting nonnal stresses, transverse
buttwelds in the web, deck and flange.
e) Structures in way of main support structures for heavy
substructures and equipment, e.g.:
Cranes, drillfloor substructure, flare boom, helicopter
deck, davits, fairleads, windlass, towing arrangement,
boat tie lugs, anchor bolster, etc.
f) Attachments welded to bracing shell, using doubling
plates, e.g.:
Ladder/platform supports, guard rail stanchions, anodes,
pipe supports etc.
3) Special areas
Areas of the primary structural elements in way of critical
stress concentrations, e.g. with reference to a-d above:
i) Shell plating:
- penetrations in bracing shell
- attachment on bracing shell not welded on doubling
plates.
ii) Internal structures in slender bracings:
- end of stiffeners and gusset plates
- notches (shallops) in longitudinal stiffeners or gusset
plates
- external brackets and internal structures in way of the
brackets.
iii) Intersections:
- stress concentrations in way of main load transfer
paths
- notches (scallops) and penetrations.
iv) Main support structures
- fairlead support
- stress concentrations at intersection with crane pedestal
supporting structure.
The extent of the area that is to be considered as being
1 Special' is dependent upon the structural detailing in way
of the connection. Typically special structural categorisation
. is to extend at least I,D m distance from the stress concen-
small coIUlections the extent may however be reduced to 0,5
B. Self-elevating units
All structures not defmed as primary or special. See also A.
Elements which are essential to the overall integrity of the
unit, e.g.:
a) Shell plating of barge, parts submerged in transit.
b) Legs
- shell plating of cylindrical legs
- all components of lattice type legs.
- jackhouse and barge
- leg and footings
mitting normal stresses, including welds attaching sec-
ondary structures.
d) Main girders in the barge, footings, and jackhouse
Extent: welds transmitting normal stresses, i.e. transverse
buttwelds in the web and flanges.
cranes, dri1lfloor substructure, cantilever beams, flare
boom, helicopter deck, davits, fairleads, windlass, tow-
ing arrangement, etc.
3) Special areas
Areas of primary structural elements in way of critical stress
concentrations, e.g.:
- intersection of lattice type leg structures which incorporate
novel construction, including the use of steel castings.
Extent and methods of control are subject to special con-
sideration
- jackhouse supporting structure
- intersections between legs and bottom footing structure
- circumferential manual buttwelds on cantilever part of
crane pedestal shells
- stress concentrations at intersection with shell supporting
structure of crane pedestal.
'Special' is dependent upon the structural detailing in way
of the coIUlection. Typically special structural categorisation
DET NORSKE VERITAS
)
\)
-)
C)
)
I)
')
j
)
- specification of background and design data used in the
analysis, such as area in which the structural is to oper-
ate, relevant wave conditions, drag and added mass co-
efficients, wind and current velocities, hydrostatic loads
and other functional loads
- significant operational loads, e.g. from drilling
- resultant overall and local forces, moments and stresses
due to relevant loading conditions
- verification of compliance with the rules
- results from model tests, which may be submitted as al-
ternatives or as substantiation for the required calcu-
lations.
301 Documents containing limiting operating conditions
are to be submitted for approval, containing essentials re-
lated to classification.
These documents should include the following information,
as applicable to the particular unit, so as to provide suitable
guidance to the operating personnel with regard to safe op-
eration of the unit:
- operation limitations. Pertinent data for each approved
mode of operation, including functional and variable
loads, environmental conditions, foundation character-
istics (for sea bed support units only), draft, etc.
- stability. Information to be included as given in Ch.2
Sec.6
- instructions for operation, including precautions to be
taken in adverse weather, changing mode of operations,
any inherent limitations of operations, etc.
- ballasting system. Plans and descriptions of the ballast
system and instructions for ballasting/deballasting in in-
tact and damaged conditions
- position mooring. Limiting operating conditions and
corresponding procedures as basis for POSMOOR (if
applicable)
- dynamic positioning. Limiting operating conditions and
corresponding procedures as basis for DYNPOS (if ap-
plicable)
- .facility plan. for in-service inspection, . The plan is to
show the types of facilities which are or will be provided
to make important structural parts accessible for survey
in accordance with the in-service inspection programme.
- limitations. Any limitations on the operation of the unit
or the equipment, e.g. cranes, drilling equipment, etc.
D 100 General
101 Design parameters or geographical areas for operation
and limitations regarding operation of the unit will be stated
in the .Appendix to the Classification Certificate .
DET NORSKE VERITAS
SECTION 2
MATERIALS
Contents
A. General
A 100 Scope
A 200 Material certificates
B. Structural Steel
B 100 General
B 200 Material designations
B 300 Design temperatures
B 400 Application categories
B 500 Selection of structural steel
C 100 General
C 200 Aluminium
A. General
A 100 Scope
101 The requirements in this section deal with the selection
of various structural materials in compliance with the re-
quirements given in Pt.2.
102 The steel grades selected for structural components
are to be related to calculated stresses and requirements to
toughness properties. Requirements for toughness proper-
ties are in general based on the Charpy V -notch test and are
dependent on design temperature, application category of
the component and thickness of the component in question.
The material toughness may also be evaluated by fracture
mechanics testing in special cases.
201 Rolled, forged or cast elements of steel and aluminium
for structural application are to be certified by the Society
grade and strength group. in that case the letters EH are
substituted by one of the numbers indicated in Table B 1,
e.g. D 550-steel.
Table Bl Material designations
Desig-
Strength group
Minimum yield
11
nation stress Nlmm
2
NV-NS Normal (NS) - 1,00
NV-27 265 1,10
NV-32
High strength (HS)
315 1,31
NV-36 355 1,48
NV-40 390 1,63
NV-420 420 1,75
NV-460 460 1,92
NV-500
Extra high strength (EHS)
500 2,08
NV-550 550 2,29
NV-620 620 2,58
NV-690 690 2,88
203 Structural steel with improved through thickness pro-
perties is to have the letter Z added to the reference given
in Table BI and 202, e.g. NVDZ, NVE36Z, NVF500Z.
204 The material factor fl included in the various formulae
for scantlings and in expressions giving permissible stresses,
is a non dimensional yield stress expression defined as fol-
lows:
af
fl = 240
af = yield stress in N/=2 specified as the smaller of:
-minimum upper yield stress
-yield stress .at 0,2 % offset.
Values of fl may also be obtained from Table Bl.
in accordance with Pt.2 Ch.l.
... Jl 3()() I:ligIltelllpc!r!}tlJl"eJ;
202 Requirements for certificates for 301 The design temperature is a reference temperature
castings and other matenals f<;lf speclal parts are. stated m used as a criterion for the selection of the grade of steel to
connection with the rule requITements for each mdlvldual be used. The design temperature is not to exceed the lo,:"est
part. service temperature of the steel as defined for vanous
B. Structural Steel
B 100 General
101 Where the subsequent rules for material grade are de-
pendent on plate thickness, the requirements are based on
the thickness as built.
201 Structural steel of various strength groups will be re-
ferred to as given in Table Bl.
202 Structural steel of various grades will be referred to
as follows:
- A, B, D and E denotes NS-steel grades
- AH, D H, EH and FH denotes HS-steel grades. HS-steel
may also be referred to by a combination of grade and
strength group. in that case the letter H is substituted by
one of the numbers indicated in Table BI, e.g. A 36-steel
- AEH, DEH, EEH and FEH denotes EHS-steel grades.
EHS-steel may also be referred to by a combination of
structural parts in 302 to 305.
302 External structures above the light transit waterline are
to be designed for service temperatures down to the lowest
daily mean temperature for the area(s) where the unit is to
operate. However, for column stabilised units of c0t;Iven-
tional type, the pontoon deck need normally not be deslgned
for service temperatures lower than OC.
Guidance note:
If data giving the lowest daily mean temperature are not avail-
able, other criteria may be accepted after special consideration.
303 External structures below the light transit waterline
need normally not be designed for service temperatures
lower than O'C.
304 internal structures of colunms, pontoons and decks are
assumed to have the same service temperature as the adja-
cent external structure if not otherwise documented.
305 Internal structures in way of permanently heated
rooms need normally not be designed for service temper-
atures lower than O'C.
DEY NORSKE VERITAS
:J
)
:J
:J
)
J
108 Repair welding is to be performed using extra low
hydrogen welding consumables (suffix H5), applying an
appropriate preheating and working/interpass temperature.
The preheating and working temperature when making
shallow and local repairs in special areas and primary
structural elements is to be raised 50'C above the level used
for production welding, and be at least 100'C. The working
temperature is to be maintained until the repair has been
completed. To ensure sound repair welds, the single repair
length is not to be shorter than approximately 100 =.
109 Repair of welded joints is to be carried out by re-
moving the unacceptable portion of the weld without sub-
stantial removal of base material. For planar defects the
repair length on either side of the defect is to be 50 =
longer than the size of the defect as confirmed by NDT.
Long defects may be required repaired in several steps to
avoid overloading or cracking. Each repair step is to be
controlled so as not to cause plastic deformation of the re-
maining material when removing the defect.
110 Repair welding of post-weld heat-treated joints is
normally to initiate a new heat treatment.
111 Minor discontinuities (maximum 3 = in depth) may
be removed by grinding or machining, making a smooth
transition into the surrounding material. The extent of such
repair is to be approved by the Society.
112 Steel castings and forgings are normally to be post-
weld heat treated after repair welding.
F 100 General
101 Concerning qualification of welding procedures, ap-
proval of welders and type approval of welding consum-
ables, reference is made to Pt.2 Ch.3.
G 100 General
101 Installation or application of corrosion protection sys-
tems is to be carried out in conformance with recognised
standards of workmanship and approved specifications.
G 200 Application of coating
201 The area to be coated is to be defined and if necessary
limited by masking. Substances and areas which may be
damaged by the pre-treabnent andlor by the coating, such
as anodes, are to be shielded.
202 The surface is to be clean and dry. Oil or grease is to
be removed by washing with a suitable solvent. Salt de-
posits are to be removed by washing with fresh water.
203 The surface is to be blast-cleaned to the degree of
cleanliness and profile as required in the specification. N or-
mally, the minimum requirements to steel surface quality for
primer application is ISO 8501-1 Sa 2112 or equivalent for
external surfaces and internal zones exposed to sea-water.
Surface roughness is to be as reco=ended by the primer
and coating manufacturer.
204 Final blast-cleaning and coating application are only
to be carried out when the steel temperature is sufficiently
above the dew point to prevent condensation of moisture on
the surface.
Hules tor Mobile uttsnore Units, ..January 1
205 The coatings are to be applied as stated in the ap-
proved specification and according to the supplier's recom-
mendations.
206 Survey, inspection, repair and touch-up are to be
performed according to approved specifications.
207 Primer-coated surfaces which have been exposed for
a period exceeding the reco=ended time for overcoating
are to be surveyed and, if necessary, be adequately treated
before applying the next coating layer.
208 Adequate curing times in relation to temperature and
humidity conditions, overcoating intervals, the dry-film
thicknesses of the individual coats and the total dry-film
thickness, are to be within tolerances stated in the coating
specification.
G 300 Fabrication and installation of sacrificial anodes
301 Fabrication and installation of the anodes are to be
carried out according to approved drawings and specifica-
tions.
302 Approval of anode shapes and their fastening devices
(studs, clamps etc.) is normally given as a type approval.
For anodes fastened by other means than welding, careful
attention is to be paid to ensure good electrical contact.
303 Welding of connections is to be carried out by certif-
icated welders.
Welding consumables approved for the steel grade in ques-
tion are to be used.
Fillet welds are as far as practicable to be continuous (all
around the studs).
Anodes are normally to be connected to the structure in way
of local stiffening.
Any doubling plates to which anodes are welded, are to have
a thickness normally not less than 10 =, well rounded
comers, and are to be continuously welded. Material grades
of the doubling plates and anode studs or pads welded di-
rectly to main plating, are to be in accordance with the re-
be. of
304 For anodes connected to bulkhead plating, girder web
plates etc. having a thickness equal to or less than IS =,
at least one of the studs is to be welded in way of or close
to a local stiffener. Anodes connected to shell plating of
trusses etc., where no internal stiffening is provided, are to
be fastened to doubling plates permanently welded to the
shell.
305 Submerged zone: anodes located in way of internal
stiffening, except on columns close to truss connections,
may be welded directly to the shell plating without doubling
plates. Below light water line, such direct welding will be
accepted only for anode studs or pads not intended to be
removed by renewal of anodes. A corresponding notation
will be given in the "Appendix to Classification Certif-
icates". In any case, anodes located on slim trusses without
internal stiffening and on columns close to truss connections,
are to be fastened to doubling plates permanently welded to
the shell.
systems
401 The anodes, the cables and the signal receivers are to
be furnished with manufacturer's material certificates and
be properly marked for identification.
DEY NORSKE VERITAS
I,
'y I 112
I,
t,
, ,>,,"),,"'" 1 '
I,
I,
Fig. 1
Guidance on material thickness for PWHT
302 Heat treatment is to be performed in accordance with
a procedure specification including:
- heating and cooJing rates
- temperature gradients
- soaking temperature range and time
- heating facilities
- insulation
- control devices
- recording equipment
- configuration of structure to be post-weld heat treated or
details if local PWHT is to be carried oul.
Heat treatment records are to be kept throughout the heat
treatment process.
303 Heat treatment is to be performed at a soaking tem-
perature in the range 580-{;20C, for a time of 2 minutes
per mm thickness. Soaking temperature for quenched and
tempered steels is to be decided in each case.
The temperature gradient between the outside and the inside
surface during soaking is not to exceed 30C within the
heated area. Double-sided heating is to be applied as far as
possible.
304 Heating, soaking and cooJing are to be carried out in
a controlled manner which prevents cracking or distortions
outside the dimensional tolerances. The temperature gradient
along Jines or planes of symmetry is normally not to exceed
30C when the material temperature is above 300C.
305 The heat-treatment cycle and the actual metal temper-
ature is to be recorded using thermocouples equally spaced
externally, and whenever possible internally, throughout the
heated region.
306 Heat treatment is, wherever possible, to be carried out
in an enclosing furnace. Where it is impractical to heat-treat
the whole item in a closed furnace, local heat treatment may
be adopted. The temperature distribution throughout heating
furnaces is to be controlled within 15C.
Base material WeldJHAZ PWHT
A: t,
C: to C: to
B: t,
A: t, C: I, C: t,
B: t2 E: t, E: t,
D: I,
A: t,
E: to E: to
B: t2
307 When local heat treatment is selected, a region ex-
tending minimum 3 times the material thickness on either
side of the area to be heat treated is to be kept at the speci-
fied temperature. The temperature difference at the transi-
tion between the insulated and uninsulated areas should not
exceed 300C.
E. Repairs
E. 11m
101 Repairs are to be carried out in accordance with repair
procedures accepted by the Society.
102 Members distorted by welding may be straightened
by mechanical means or by carefully supervised application
of a limited amount of localised heat. The application of heat
or mechanical force is to be in accordance with a written
procedure.
103 Defects in welds and base material may be rectified
by grinding, machining or welding. Welds of insufficient
strength, ductility or notch toughness are to be completely
removed prior to repair. The mechanical properties of repair
weld are to satisfy the minimum specified properties of the
steel in question.
104 Repair welding in the same area may be carried out
twice. Further repairs are to be evaluated in each individual
case.
105 Repair welding procedure specifications are to be
prepared according to Pt.2 Ch.3 Sec.2.
106 The use of arc-air gouging is to be followed by
grinding, removing the affected material.
107 Whenever a defect is removed, the gouged and
ground area is to be examined by magnetic particle testing
or other suitable methods to verify complete removal.
DET. NORSKE VERITAS
"
) \)
-'I
j
/)
-i
../

I.J
401 Application categories for structural components are
defined in Sec. I.
402 Structural members of column stabilised units are
grouped as follows:
- Special structure
a) Portions of deck plating, heavy flanges, and bulk-
heads within the upper hull or platform which form
.Box. or .1. type supporting structure which receive
major concentrated loads.
b) External shell structure in way of intersections of ver-
tical columns, decks and lower hulls.
c) Major intersections of bracing members.
d) .Through. material used at connections of vertical
columns, upper platform decks and upper or lower
hulls which are designed to provide proper aligument
and adequate load transfer.
e) External brackets, portions of bulkheads, flats, and
frames which are designed to receive concentrated
loads at intersections of major structural members.
I) Highly stressed elements of anchor Jine fairleads,
crane pedestals etc. and their supporting structure.
- Primary structure
a) Deck plating, heavy flanges, and bulkheads within the
upper hull or platform which form .Box. or .1. type
supporting structure which do not receive major con-
centrated loads.
b) External shell structure of vertical columns, lower and
upper hulls, and diagonal and horizontal braces.
c) Bulkheads, flats or decks, stiffeners and girders which
provide local reinforcement or continuity of structure
in way of intersections, except areas where the struc-
ture is considered special application.
d) Main support structure of heavy substructures and
equipment, e.g. anchor Jine fairleads, cranes, drillfl-
and
- Secondary structure
a) Upper platform decks, or decks of upper hulls except
areas where the structure is considered primary or
special application.
b) Bulkheads, stiffeners, flats or decks and girders in
vertical colunms, decks, lower hulls, diagonal and
horizontal bracing, which are not considered as pri-
mary or special application.
c) Certain large diameter vertical columns with low
length to diameter ratios, except at intersections.
403 Structural members of self-elevating units are grouped
as follows:
- Special structure
a) Vertical columns in way of intersection with the mat
structure.
b) Intersections of lattice type leg structure which incor-
porate novel construction, includiog the use of steel
castings.
c) Highly stressed elements of crane pedestals, etc. and
their supporting structure.
- Primary structure
a) Combination of bulkhead, deck, side and bottom
plating within the upper hull which form .Box. or
.1. type main supporting structure.
b) External plating of cylindricallegs.
c) Plating of all components of lattice type legs.
d) Jack-house supporting structure and bottom footing
structure which receives initial transfer of load from
legs.
e) Internal bulkheads, shell and deck of bottom mat
supporting structure which are desigued to distribute
major loads, either uniform or concentrated, into the
mat structure.
I) Main support structure of heavy substructures and
equipment, e.g. cranes, drillfloor substructure, and
helicopter deck.
a) Deck, side and bottom platiog of upper hull except
where the structure is considered primary application.
b) Internal bulkheads, decks, stiffeners and girders of
upper hull structure.
c) Internal bulkheads and girders in cyJindricallegs.
d) Internal bulkheads, stiffeners and girders of bottom
mat supporting structure except where the structure is
considered primary or special application.
404 The joint between two components is to be assigued
an application category equal to the highest of the joined
components.
501 The grade of steel to be used is in general to be related
to the design temperature and thickness as shown in Table
B2 for the application categories, special, primary and sec-
ondary respectively.
Guidance note:
Each application category region includes the upper limit.
--Oof----G-u-i n-o-t-!)--
502 A lower service temperature than stipulated in the ta-
ble for the relevant steel grade may be considered when a
stress relieving heat treatment is carried out after welding.
503 For regions subjected to compressive andlor low ten-
sile stresses, consideration will be given to the use of lower
steel grades than stated in the table.
504 The toughness requirements for steel plates, sections'
and weldments exceeding the thickness limits in the table are
to be evaluated in each separate case.
505 Grade of steel to be used for thicknesses less than 10
mm andlor design temperature above OC will be specially
considered in each case.
506 The use of steels with specified minimum yield stress
> 550 N/mm
2
(NV 550) is subject to special consideration
for applications where anaerobic environmental conditions
such as staguant water, organically active mud (bacteria) and
hydrogen sulphide may predominate (see Sec.9 C105).
Predominantly anaerobic conditions can for this purpose be
characterised by a concentration of sulphate reducing bacte-
ria SRB in the order of maguitude > 10
3
SRB/mI (method
accordiog to NACE TPC Publication No.3).
The steels' susceptibility to hydrogen induced stress crack-
ing (H1SC) are to be specially considered when used for
critical applications (such as jack-up legs and spud cans).
See also Sec.9 CI05.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
Rules for Mobile Offshore Units, ,January 1998
C. ,Alternative Structural Materials
C 100 General
101 Materials other than steel may be used in offshore
structures when such materials are suitable for the purpose,
taking all the safety aspects, such as strength, chemical re-
sistance, fire resistance etc. into consideration. In any case
the material is to be approved by the Society for the intended
use.
102 The relevant material properties, and the specification
and verification of these, are to be in accordance with a re-
cognised code if such one exists. Particular attention is to
be paid to possible special requirements related to the use
of the material in sea-water or ocean environments in gen-
eral.
103 If no recognised code exists, the requirements will be
specially considered in each case.
Table B2 Thickness limitations (mm) of structural steels for various application categories and design temperatures
Category
Minimum design temperature (0C)
Grade OC -looe -20C -30
o
e -40C -sooe
A 30
B 40
D 50
E 50
AH 40
Secondary
DH 50
EH 50
FH 50
AEH 40
DEH 50
EEH 50
FEH 50
A 20
B 25
D 45
E 50
AH 25
Primary
DH 45
EH 50
FH 50
AEH 20
DEH 45
EEH 50
FEH 50
A X
B 15
D 30
E 50
AH 15
Special
DH 30
EH 50
FH 50
--
" AEH
;\I;
DEH 25
EEH 50
FEH 50
X indic!tes no application.
--
C 200 Aluminium
201 Aluminium alloy for marine use may be applied in
superstructures, deckhouses, hatch covers, hatch beams and
sundry items, provided the strength of the aluminium struc-
ture is equivalent to that required for a steel structure.
202 For rolled products taking part in the overall strength,
alloys marked A, see Pt.2 Ch.2, are to be used.
The alloy is to be chosen considering the stress level con-
cerned.
203 In weld zones of rolled or extruded products (includ-
ing heat affected zones) the mechanical properties given for
aluminium welding consumables may in general be used for
the scantling requirements.
20
30
50
50
30
50
50
50
25
45
50
50
10
20
40
50
20
40
50
50
X
35
50
50
X
X
20
45
X
20
45
50
l\;
15
40
50
10 X X X
I
20 10 X X
45 35 25 15
50 50 45 35
20 10 X X
45 35 25 15
50 50 45 35
50 50 50 50
10 X X X
35 25 15 X
50 45 35 25
50 50 50 45
X X X X
10 X X X
30 20 10 X
50 40 30 20
10 X X X
30 20 10 X
50 40 30 20
50 50 50 40 ,
X X X X
25 15 X X
45 35 25 15
50 50 45 35
X X X X
X X X X
10 X X X
35 25 15 X
X X X X
10 X X X
35 25 15 X
50 50 40 30
X " , J(, ' ,X ... ". ,X
X X X X
30 20 10 X
50 40 30 20
204 The various formulae and expressions involving the
factor f1 may normally also be applied for aluminium alloys
when:
"fa
f1 = 240
"fa = yield stress in N/mm
2
at 0,2 % offset. "fa is not to
be taken greater than 80 % of the ultimate tensile
strength.
For minimum thickness requirements not involving the fac-
tor f 1 the equivalent minimum value for aluminium alloys
may ,l)Qrmally be obtained when the requirement is divided
bY'l/f[ .
DET NORSKE VERITAS
J
)
J
/)
:J

211 Approved welding procedure qualification (see 210)
is required for all production welding of:
- special areas
- primary structural elements involving extra high strength
steels.
Tack welding incorporated in the production welding is to
be qualified. Independent of structural classification welding
procedures are to be qualified for:
- new welding methods
- high heat input welding methods (e.g. electrogas, e1ec-
troslag, triple landem submerged arc) on steels with im-
pact toughness requirements
- large thicknesseslhigh structural restraint.
Definitions of structural categories are given in Sec.1 B300.
212 For mobile offshore units to be used in one location
over a long period of time, e.g. for production, CTOD
testing is to be included in the qualification of welding pro-
cedures for joints with thickness above 50 mm in special
areas and in primary structural elements involving extra high
strength steels.
It is to be executed on weld assemblies covering the fol-
lowing combined conditions:
- full penetration buttweld with K-, single V or X- groove
as deemed most'representative for the actual fabrication
- a welding procedure representing the maximum heat in-
put to be used in fabrication
- maximum joint thickness.
One such assembly is to be made and tested for each steel
grade, each welding process and each welding consumable
(brand) used except when used for root passes only.
The CTOD-technique with through-thickness notched type
specimen according to BS 7448 should be used. Three (3)
valid test specimens are to be obtained for each test position.
CTOD-testing of welds is to be carried out with the fatigue
notch tip positioned in the coarse grained region of the HAZ
and in the weld metal. For HAZ, positioning and determi-
nation of the actual location of the fatigue crack tip are to
be performed after testing. HAZ testing can be omitted if
relevant CTOD properties in HAZ have been documented
'-' -' -- the
base material (i.e. on the same grade of material from the
, . .-1 same manufacturer).
J
CTOD-testing of weld metal can be omitted if relevant
CTOD properties in accordance with requirements above
have been documented by the consumable manufacturer.
The test temperature is to be:
_lOoC for splash zone and above
OC for submerged parts.
However, for design temperatures below -15C the test
temperature is subject to approval by the Society.
The required CTOD value is to be decided in each case,
based on a fracture mechanics evaluation for the particular
structural part.
213 All fabrication welding is to be performed within the
limits of essential variables of the approved welding proce-
dure. This also includes tack welding, seal welding, welding
of lifting lugs and attachment welds as well as repair weld-
ing.
214 When resuming welding on partially filled joints in
special areas, preheating is to be performed and the tem-
perature is, within the specified tolerances, to be equal to the
interpass temperature for the welding pass in question.
Pt.3 Ch.1 8ec.10 '- Page 35
215 Grooves produced by gouging are to be in accordance
with the groove profile dimensions given in the welding
procedure specification.
216 Welding consumable requirements are to be in ac-
cordance with Pt.2 Ch.3 Sec.3.
217 Welding consumables are to be supplied in sealed
moisture-proof containers. Consumables which have been
contaminated by moisture, rust, oil, grease, dirt or other
deleterious matter, are to be discarded unless properly re-
conditioned.
218 Storage and handling of welding consumables are to
be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations,
and in accordance with procedures giving details regarding
conditions in storage rooms, temperature in storage ovens
and quivers, length of exposure and conditions, as applica-
ble, for cycling of fluxes and rebaking of coated electrodes.
Recycling of fluxes for submerged-arc welding is to be per-
formed in a manner which ensures a mixture of new and
used flux with continually homogenous properties.
219 Welds are to be terminated in a manner which will
ensure sound welds without end-craters. Extensions bars and
run-off plates are to be removed upon completion and cool-
ing of the weld. The end of the weld is to be made smooth
and flush with the edges of abutting parts.
220 Grinding of welds with the intention of increasing the
fatigue life andlor reducing the probability of brittle fracture
is to be carried out according to approved specifications(s).
221 Welding production tests my be required by the sur-
veyor during fabrication of welds in special areas and in
primary structural elements to verify that the produced welds
are of acceptable quality.
The welding parameters for the WPT are to be as for the
actual weld and the environmental conditions are to be kept
as realistic as possible. The WPT is to be welded and me-
chanically tested in presence of the surveyor. The require-
ments for a WPT are in general the same as for the relevant
WPQT.
222 If one or more production tests fail to give satisfactory
results, two or more are to be made, both of which are to
give'seeepmble tesull3.
Should one or both of the additional tests fail, the total pro-
duction welding performed with the welding procedure in
question is to be evaluated based on testing of welds and
base material cut-out from the actual structore fabricated.
223 In all cases the failure of a production test is to lead
to a review of the welding performed to establish the reason
for the failure, and appropriate corrective action is to be
carried out.
224 Shop primers applied over areas which will subse-
quently be welded, are to be of a quality accepted by the
Society as having no detrimental effect on the finished weld.
See "Register of Type Approved Products No.1 - Non-Me-
tallic Materials".
D 300 Post weld heat treatment (PWHT)
301 PWHT is to be applied for joints in C-Mn steels in
special areas when the material thickness at the welds ex-
ceeds 50 mm (see Fig. 1 for guidance on material thickness).
If, however, satisfactory performance in the as-welded con-
dition can be demonstrated by a fitness-for-purpose assess-
ment applying, for example, fracture mechanics testing and
analysis, PWHT may be omitted.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
Page 34 - Pt.3 Ch.1 Sec.1 0
206 The NDT -operators are to be certificated in accord-
ance with a recognised certification scheme accepted by the
Society.
C. Material Identification, Cutting and Forming
C 100 Material identification
101 A traceability system that ensures correct installation
of the material grades/strength classes is to be established
by the builder. .
Proper care is to be exercised during handling and storage
to preserve identification of such material.
102 Requirements to the selection of materials, together
with material certification requirements, are given in Sec.2.
C 200 Cutting and forming
201 The effect of work hardening is to be considered if
shearing is used for cutting of material. Special attention is
to be paid to the risk of cracked edges.
202 Attention is to be paid to excessive local hardening
and carbon contaminations by thermal cutting. This may
be reduced by suitable heat treatment or removed by me-
chanical means.
203 Forming and straightening of materials are to be per-
formed according to procedures outlining the successive and
controlled steps. Such procedures are to be controlled by
survey.
204 The degree of cold deformation of special and primary
structural elements is to be less than 5 %. If the deformation
exceeds 5 %, either heat treatment or strain ageing tests are
to be carried out according to an approved procedure.
D. Tolerances, Assembly, Welding and Heat
Treatment
jJ lUU . TOleranCes
101 Deviations from:
- planeness of unstiffened plating
- straightness of plate stiffeners
- roundness of circular columns and bracings.
are not to exceed the design assumptions regarding buckling
strength. Unless otherwise stated in connection with the
design approval acceptable tolerances are as given in the
Classification Note No. 30.1 .Buckling Strength Analysis .
102 Special consideration is to be given in providing
alignment between welded structural members. Allowable
misalignment depends on extent of misalignment, stress
level and type of loading as well as type and importance of
the joint (special, primary or secondary structure as defined
in Hl02). Unless otherwise documented to be satisfactory
the maximum misalignments are not to exceed the values
given in 103 and 104.
103 Misalignment of plate edges in butt welds is not to
exceed the following values with a maximum of 4 =:
Special areas: 0,10 tl
Primary structural elements: 0,15 tl
Secondary structural elements: 0,30 tl
t, - thickness of the thinnest plate.
104 Misalignment of the non-continuous plates in CruCI-
form joints is not to exceed the following values:
Secondary structural elements: 0,501
1
tt - thickness of the thinnest of the two non-continuous plates.
D 200 Assembly and welding
201 A fabrication sequence is to be established ensuring
that the structnre can be assembled in a manner which allows
for continuous inspection and control during all stages of the
work.
202 The welding sequence is to be such that the amount
of shrinkage, distortions and residual stresses is minimised.
203 Tubular members framing into joints are to be care-
fully contoured to obtain accurate alignment. The bevel is
to be formed providing a continuous transition from maxi-
mum to minimum bevel angle around the circumference.
The fabrication is to be planned in such a manner that
backwelding of tubular joints can be performed to the largest
extent possible.
204 Members to be welded are to be brought into correct
alignment and held in position by clamps, other suitable de-
vices or by tack welds until welding has been completed or
progressed to a stage where the holding devices or tack
welds can be removed without danger of distortion, shrink-
age or cracking. Suitable allowances are to be made for
distortion and shrinkage where appropriate.
205 The use of permanent steel backing strips is permitted
when properly accounted for in the design analysis and in
In-service Inspection Progra=e. Ceramic and inert back-
ing strips may be used. A test weld for the intended appli-
cation is to be produced and subjected to mechauical testing.
\
--_//
)
',./
J
A. General
A 100 Basic conditions
A 200 Modelling
Contents
A 300 Methods of analysis
A 400 Overall design
A 500 Details design
A 600 Protection against accidental damage
B 100 General
B 200 Wind
B 300 Waves
B 400 Current
C 100 General
C 200 Practical simplifications
C 300 Yielding
C 400 Buckling
C 500 Fatigue
C 600 Ultimale strength
C 700 Reliability-based analysis of structures
D 100 Deflections
D 200 Vibrations
A. General
SECTION 3
DESIGN PRINCIPLES
302 When determining the structural responses due to dy-
namic loads, the dynamic effect is to be taken into account
when this effect is significant.
303 In the case of structnres subjected to rigid-body mo-
tions, such as floating structnres, the following methods are
accepted, provided the assumptions involved are sufficiently
well-founded:
Direct dynamic analysis:
- determination of maximum response in irregular waves.
Methods including linear wave theory may be considered
for approval
- determination of dynamic response in regnlar design
waves.
Indirect dynamic analysis:
- wind forces, wave forces and the change of buoyancy
forces due to waves are calculated for the structure con-
sidered at rest. Inertia forces, damping forces and moor-
ing forces are added in a realistIc manner in order to
obtain equilibrium.
304 Model tests may be used in combination with or in-
stead of any of the methods mentioned in 303.
401 The overall structural safety is to be evaluated on the
A 100 Basic conditions basis of preventive measures against structural failure put
. . .. into design, fabrication and in-service inspection as well as
101 DIfferent modes of operation or dunng the life the unit's residual strength against total collapse in the case
of 1l1ll
Y
be governmg. for the deSIgn. The followmg of structural failure of vital elements.
deSIgn condItions, as defined m Sec. 1 B, are normally to be Thus for slender vital elements, such as bracings, which are
206 Where temporary cut-outs are made, such cut-outs are consIdered: designed according to criteria given for intact structure,
to be made of sufficient size to allow sound replacement. . tall t' d'ti' complete fracture of an element or joint between elements
- ms a IOn con 1 on . 'd ed dibl <'1 In h th 'd I
Comers of cut-outs are to be given appropriate radii min- t' d'ti' () IS consl er as acre e lal ure. suc case e resl ua
-operamgcon Ions th fth .. . fy . . . & da d
imising local stress concentrations. tn' I d'ti' streng 0 e urnt IS to satis cntena given lor mage
-reevaconlon Ifth" d'ed th 'dl
_ _ _ _ _ _ __ -m ..... ';" 1_ ..... diti.... __ . __ . e not eSlgn _ to _
;LUI lhe tIt-up IS to be checKea tor QlmenSlOnal accuracy . : 2. Sd:" srrengm'-'c-tiiena-;-a-SatiSiac[ory IDUli safety IS ill uDtaineu
before welding. Surfaces to be welded are to be free from '\. '\ - tranSIt con ltion. by improved preventive measures for the pertinent vital ele-
mill scale, slag, rust, grease, paint etc. Edges are to have __ .J --J ments, such as:
a smooth and uniform surface. No welding is to be per- 102 Relevant cases are to be established for the vari-
formed when the surfaces are damp. Suitable protection is ous deSIgn condlti,?ns based on the most unfavourable com-
to be arranged when welding is performed during incleI\1ent of functional loads, envrronmental loads and/or
weather conditions. The groove is to be dry at the time of _. accIdental loads.
welding and at a temperatnre of at least +5C. I) 103 Limiting environmental and operational conditions
208 Preheating's eferably to be pe dth I tri./ (design data) for the different design are .to be
. 1 pr r orme WI e ec c specIfied by the builder. The limiting condillons WIll be
heatm!l elements. Gas burners may be used under controlled stated in the .Appendix to Classification Certificate>.
condlllons. Cuttmg torches are normally not to be used.
209 A WPS is generally to be submitted for acceptance for
welds in special areas, primary structural elements and butt
welds in secondary structnral elements. For further details,
see Pt.2 Ch.3 Sec.2.
210 Welding procedures may be accepted for production
if satisfactory compliance with requirements is established
by one of the following methods:
- performing of WPQTs and subsequent review of the
welding procedure qualification records (for further de-
tails, see Pt.2 Ch.3 Sec.2)
- review of previously qualified WPQTs
- review of WPS
- review and verification of documentation showing suc-
cessful application of welding procedures over a pro-
longed period of time.
A 200 Modelling
201 Models for analysis of the structure are to satisfac-
torily simulate the behaviour of the actual structure, includ-
ing its supporting or anchoring system, and the relevant
environmental conditions.
202 Reasonable simplifications may be introduced as a
part of structnral idealisation. For dynamic analyses the real
mass distribution may, when adequate, be represented by
equivalent masses or by lumped masses.
301 The determination of forces, moments, stresses and
deflections, as well as the corresponding permissible values,
is to be based on accepted principles of dynamics, statics,
and strength of materials, and is to be in accordance with the
regnlations given in this chapter and in Ch.2.
- lower permissible stresses
- higher fatigue resistance
- more frequent and comprehensive in-service inspection.
402 When determining the overall structural system, par-
ticular care is to be taken that the solution does not lead to
unnecessarily complicated connections.
501 Stress concentrations are to be avoided as far as pos-
sible. Connections are to be designed with smooth transi-
tions and proper alignment of elements. Large cut-outs are
to be kept away from flanges and webs of primary girders
in regions with high stresses.
502 Transmission of tensile stresses through the thickoess
of plates is to be avoided as far as possible. In cases where
transmission of tensile stresses through the thickness cannot
be avoided, the adoption of structural steel with improved
through thickoess properties may be required.
Regarding testing etc. see Sec. 10.
503 Units intended for operations in cold areas are to be
so arranged that water cannot be trapped in local structnres
or machinery exposed to the ambient temperatnre.
See also Pt.4 Ch.l Sec.3 B204.
DEI NORSKE VERITAS DEI NORSKE VERITAS
601 The structural arrangement is to be planned with due
consideration to the possibility of accidental events.
Accidental event is used as a collective term for exceptional
conditions, such as collision, dropped object, fire and ex-
plosion.
602 Satisfactory protection against accidental damage is to
be obtained by the following two means:
- low damage probability
- acceptable damage consequences.
603 Accel'table damage consequences due to collision and
dropped objects are given in 604 and 605. Analysis as stated
are to satisfy relevant strength criteria given in these rules.
The damage consequences of other accidental events will
have to be specially considered in each case applying an
equivalent standard of safety.
Guidance note:
Energy absorption by impact types of accidental events requires
the structure to behave in a ductile manner. Measures to obtain
adequate ductility are:
- make the strength of connections of primary members in ex-
cess of that of the member
- provide redundancy in the structure, so that alternate load
redistribution paths may be developed
- avoid dependence on energy absorption in slender struts with
a non-ductile postbuckling behaviour
- avoid pronounced weak sections and abrupt change in
strength or stiffness
- use non-brittle materials.
604 The direct loads and consequential damage due to
collisions and dropped objects (see Sec.4 E) are not to cause
coml'lete structural collapse, loss of floatability or cause
capsIZing. Simplified considerations for application of the
cnteria in Sec.4 E, which may normally be used as a basis
for approval, are given in Ch.2 and in Classification Notes
No. 31.4 and 31.5 on .Strength Analysis of Main
Structures. of various mobile offshore units.
An explicit accidental damage analysis may be required de-
pending on type of structure, structural layout, dimensions
--ond intind.d operation. _ - --
60S After damage requiring inunediate repair, the platform
is to resist functional and environmental loads corresponding
to a return period of not less than one year.
Possible residual strength of damaged members may be in-
cluded provided its magnitude may be assessed by rational
analysis or tests. If such residual strength of separate mem-
bers is not proven, damaged members will be considered as
non-effective.
B 100 General
101 All environmental phenomena which may contribute
to structural damages are to be considered. Such phenomena
are wind, waves, currents, ice, earthquake, soil conditions,
temperature, fouling, corrosion, etc.
102 The specified environmental design data used for cal-
culating design loads for intact structure are to correspond
with the most probable largest values for a return period of
100 years.
For damaged structure calculations a return period of one
year is to be used.
103 The environmental design data may be given as max-
imum wave heights with corresponding periods and wind-
and current velocities and design temperatures or as accept-
able geographical areas for operation. In the latter case the
builder is to specify the operational areas and submit doc-
umentation showing that the environmental data for these
areas are within the environmental design data.
104 The statistical data used as a-basis for design must
cover a sufficiently long period of time.
Guidance note:
In many cases environmental data can be supplied by the Soci-
ety.
B 200 Wind
201 Wind velocity statistics are to be used as a basis for a
description of wind conditions, if such data are available.
Three kinds of wind velocities, as described in the follow-
ing, are to be considered.
velocity during a time interval (sampling time) of I minute.
The most probable highest sustained wind velocity in a pe-
riod of N years will be referred to as the .N years sustained
wind>. This is equivalent to a wind velocity with a recur-
rence period of N years.
The .N years gnst wind velocity. is the most probable hi-
ghest gnst velocity in a period of N years.
204 One hour wind velocity is defined as the average wind
velocity during a time interval of one hour.
B 300 Waves
301 Wave conditions which are to be considered for de-
sign purposes, may be described either by deterministic de-
sign wave methods or by stochastic methods applying wave
energy spectra.
302 Short term irregular states of sea are described by
means of wave energy spectra which are characterised by
significant wave height (Hs), and average zero-upcrossing
period (T z).
Analytical spectrum expressions are to reflect the width and
shape of typical spectra for the considered site.
The -HhUilCilJHllitliteHH ufwaviSs-iu a seaway, i,,,, -liIe -diret"
tional dispersion of wave energy, may be taken into account.
The principal direction of wave encounter is defined as the
direction of maximum wave energy density.
Guidance note:
For open sea locations the Pierson-Moskowitz (P-M) type of
spectrum may nonnally be applied. For shallow water, or lo-
cations with a narrow "fetch", a more narrow spectrum should
normally be considered (e.g. Jonswap spectrum).
Practical infonnation in respect to wave conditions is docu-
mented in Classification Note No. 30.5 "Environmental Condi-
tions and Environmental Loads 11
-e-n-d---o-f--G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e-n-o-t-e--
303 The long term behaviour of the sea is described by
means of a family of wave spectra, the probability of oc-
currence for each 'spectrum being taken into account.
For this purpose one needs the joint probability density
function for Hs and Tz, which can be obtained from wave
statistics. A description of the long term state of sea based
on the use of hindcastings can also be accepted. Wave sta-
tistics for individual principal directions of wave encounter
should be used, otherwise conservative assumptions are to
be introduced.
Extreme wave heights are expressed in terms of wave
heights having a low probability of occurrence.
The .N year wave height> is the most probable largest indi-
vidual wave height during N years. This is equivalent to a
wave height with a return period of N years.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
J :J
.)
:J
/)
-"J
J J
SECTION 10
FABRICATION
A. General
A 100 Scope
A 200 Definitions
B. Fabrication Planning
B 100 Geneml
Contents
B 200 Workmanship, quality system and non-destructive testing
(NDT)
D 100 Tolerances
E. Repairs
E 100 Geneml
F 100 Geneml
G 100 Geneml
G 400 Fabrication and installation of impressed current systems
H 100 Welds
H 300 Structuml tests
I 100 Geneml
A. General
A 100 Scope
101 This section specifies the requirements to fabrication
of structures and structural parts or assemblies.
A 200 Defmitions
202 Welding procedure qualification test (WPQ1): A test
requirements.
203 Welding production test (WP1): A test which is carried
out on production weldments to confirm that the WPS used
during production welding produces welded joints that meet
the application and welding specification requirements.
204 Non-destructive testing (ND1): Visual inspection, ra-
revealing defects and irr egularities.
205 HAZ: Heat affected zone.
206 CTOD: Crack Tip Opening Displacement.
B 100 General
101 Prior to fabrication, procedures for execution and
control of all fabrication activities are to be established to
ensure that the required quality is obtained and documented.
102 Relevant procedures, including information of pre-as-
sembled items and the sequence of fabricating the parts into
structure, are to be prepared.
103 Due consideration is to be given to the access and the
time required for adequate survey as fabrication proceeds.
B 200 Workmanship, quality system and
non-destructive testing (NDT)
201 Workmanship is to be of good standard and according
to accepted practice and to the satisfaction of the surveyor.
202 All work is to be skilfully and carefully executed with
adequate control by the builder. All faults and deficiencies
are to be corrected before the material is coated with paints,
cement or similar. Repair work of significant extent is to be
approved by the surveyor.
203 Manufacturers of structures involving special struc-
tural members as defined in Sec.2 B402 and B403 are to
have a documented and implemented quality system as spe-
cified in Pt. 1 Ch.l Sec.3 A200 (ISO 9001).
204 For builders fabricating typical structural members not
specified in 203, a quality system corresponding to ISO
9002 or 9003 will be considered satisfactory. The level ex-
pected will depend on the extent of primary and secondary
members to-be fnbrienrod in thepnrtioulnfoRoo .
Guidance note:
Examples of technical aspects to be covered by written proce-
dures and job instructions in the quality system mentioned in 203
and 204 above are:
- material identification and marking
- dimensional control
- fabrication deviation, reporting and request for approval
- preheating
- welding
- post weld heat treatment
- storing and handling of electrodes/flux
- flame straightening
- visual inspection routines in course of fabrication
- weld marking system
- standard repair routines
- standards for cut-outs
- removal of temporary attachments
- welding sequence standard
- fabrication tolerance standard
- non destructive testing
- pressure testing
- documentation/fabrication reports.
205 Prior to commencement of the work the builder has
to submit a programme for NDT, for approval. The pro-
gramme is to contain information and documents for plan-
ning,. controlling, reporting etc.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
Page 32 - Pt.3 Ch.1 Sec.9 .
Guidance note:
The target potential lange for steels susceptible to RISe in
anaerobic, sulphide containing environment is -770 mV to -830
m V versus the Agl Agel reference electrode.
C 200 Protection by sacrificial anodes
201 A cathodic protection system by anodes is
to be designed to maintain the required potential during the
period between complete reinstallations of the anodes. This
period is not to be less than 5 years.
202 The anodes are to be located so as to give a unifonn
current distribution to the steel structure.
Guidance note:
Installation of a pennanent cathodic protection monitoring sys-
tem based on potential readings from fixed reference electrodes
may be advantageous.
203 The anode core is to be designed to support the anode
and to maintain the anode shape during the later stages of
the anode life.
C 300 Protection by impressed current
301 The impressed current anodes are to be located and
shielded to give a current distribution being as .unifonn as
possible.
302 Due to the risks of detrimental overprotection, im-
pressed current anodes are not to be located close to areas
with high stresses.
303 To compensate for inefficient current distribution, the
impressed current system is to be designed to provide
1,25-1,5 times the calculated current demand, where rele-
vant.
304 Installation of a pennanent cathodic protection moni-
toring system is required.
305 The impressed current system is to be arranged so that
the risk of damages to anodes, cables and reference elec-
trodes is minimised.
306 A procedure for maintenance and replacement of an-
- 66M ilfia tefl.fefiM elecitOdes is t6 be submiiied' for ap-
proval.
C 400 Cathodic protection monitoring system
401 A monitoring system for impressed current cathodic
protection systems is subject to approval by the Society.
402 The monitoring system is to be based on potential
readings from fixed reference electrodes and is to be capable
to ascertain that all submerged parts of the structure are ad-
equately protected. When evaluating the positions of the re-
ference electrodes, special attention is to be paid to areas
where under-/overprotection may be expected.
403 It is to be documented by records of measurements
that the monitoring system is functioning satisfactorily. If
satisfactory functioning can not be documented, potential
measurements by divers or submersibles may be required.
See Pt.! Ch.2 Sec.2 B103.
404 For steels with specified minimum yield stress > 550
N/mm
2
in anaerobic environment, cathodic protection po-
tentials are to be monitored to ensure compliance with the
target range indicated in 105. In case the target range is ex-
ceeded' inspection with respect to possible HISC is to be
carried out.
system
501 After the cathodic protection system is put into oper-
ation, an initial survey is to be performed to establish that
all submerged areas are adequately protected. During this
survey the structure is to be in normal operating condition.
This initial survey is normally to be carried out within:
- 6 months after delivery for sacrificial anode systems
- 3 months after delivery for impressed current systems.
502 Procedure and extent of potential measurements are
subject to approval.
Guidance note:
Lowering of reference electrode in a line is usually sufficient.
Potential readings utilising divers or submersible may he re-
quired in special cases.
--e-n-d---o-f--G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e--n-o-t-e-
503 For approval of a cathodic protection monitoring sys-
tem, the readings from the permanent electrodes are to be
verified by independent measurements.
D. Coating
D 100 Specification
101 A coating specification is to include description of:
- steel surface treatment for coating application, including
shop-primer
- control of temperatures and climatic conditions during
blast cleaning and coating application
- coating systems, including coating types, number of coats
and film thicknesses
- (whil<h
- quality control/inspection requirements.
Guidance note:
The DNV Guidelines for Corrosion Protection of Ships contain
useful information especially for coating of water ballast tanks.
-e-n-d--o--f--G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e-n-o-t-e--
102 The use of aluminium coating is generally not ac-
cepted in tanks for liquids with flash point below 60C, in
adjacent ballast tanks, in cofferdams, in pump rooms or on
decks above the mentioned spaces nor in any other area
where gas may accumulate. Organic coatings (e.g. on
epoxy basis) containing up to 10 % aluminium by weight in
the dry film are, however, acceptable in the mentioned ar-
eas.
D 200 Coating application
201 Regarding coating application, see Sec.lO G200.
DEr NORSKE VERITAS
)

1
,-j

)
()
I)
4
304 In deterministic design procedures, based on simple
regnlar wave considerations, the wave is to be described by
the following parameters:
- period period
- wave height
- wave direction
- still water depth.
The choice of an appropriate design wave fonnulation has
to be based on particular considerations for the problem in
question. Shallow water effects are to be accounted for.
Different wave theories may be accepted by the Society.
However, the limitations of the theories used are to be duly
acknowledged.
305 The design waves are to be those which produce the
most unfavourable loads on the considered structure, taking
into account the shape and size of structure etc.
The wave period is to be specified in each case of applica-
tion. It may be necessary to investigate a representative
number of wave periods, in order to ensure a sufficiently
accurate dennination of the maximum loads.
306 The basic wave load parameters and response calcu-
lation methods in these rules are to be used together with a
detenninistic wave load analysis with the most unfavourable
combinations of height, period and direction of the waves.
If a stochastic wave load analysis is used, a more accurate
assessment of load and strength parameters may be required,
e.g. to account for marine growth. As an alternative the ex-
treme wave loads may be multiplied with an appropriate load
factor.
Guidance note:
Wave load factors which will normally be accepted for stochastic
analysis are:
- column stabilised units: 1,2
- self-elevating units: 1,3.
---e-n-d--o-f---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---
B 400 Current
401 Adequate current velocity data are to be selected from
the statistics available. Different components of current are
to be considered, such as tidal current and wind generated
cUiTt5iii.
402 The variation of current velocity over the water depth
is to be considered when this is relevant.
C 100 General
101 The structure has to be designed against the following
possible modes of failure:
- excessive yielding
- buckling
- fatigue fracture.
102 The strength analysis is generally to be based on the
elastic theory. An ultimate strength (plastic) analysis may,
however, be used where appropriate.
103 All forces which may be governing for the design, are
to be taken into account. For each member or cross section
to be considered, the most unfavourable combination, posi-
tion and direction of the forces are to be used.
201 Simplified assumptions regarding stress distributions
and stress concentrations may be used, provided that the
assumptions are made in accordance with generally accepted
practice, or in accordance with sufficiently comprehensive
experience or tests.
202 In cases of structures or details for which adequate
methods of analysis do not exist, the capability has to be
verified by tests.
C 300 Yielding
301 Structural members for which excessive yielding is a
possible mode of failure, are to be investigated for yielding.
302 The nominal equivalent stress is to be compared with
the permissible stress given in the rules.
Equivalent stress is defined as:
/r-;;:2--;;-2---""2
"e=-Y"I +"2 -"1"2+
3T
"1 and "2 are normal stresses perpendicular to each other.
T is the shear stress in the plane of "1 and "2'
303 In Sec.6 the thickness requirements for plating ex-
posed to lateral pressure is given as a function of nominal
permissible bending stress. The nominal permissible bending
stress has been specified so that the equivalent stress at the
middle of the plate field will not exceed the specified limits
given in Sec.S.
304 In Sec.6 the section modulus requirement for stiffen-
ers exposed to lateral pressure is given as function of boun-
dary conditions and nominal permissible bending stress.
The boundary conditions are included in a bending moment
factor. The bending moment factor corresponds to m in the
following expression:
QI
M=Iil
M = the expected bending moment
Q = the total load force on the member
I = the length of the member.
The values of m nonnally to be applied are given separately
for each of the local structures.
For elastic deflections the value of m is derived directly
from general elastic bending theory.
305 The direct strength formulae for girders given in Sec.7
limil!;g III
the nominal permissible stresses are given in a similar way
as for stiffeners.
For girder systems the stress pattern is assrimed to be de-
rived by direct computerised calculations.
C 400 Buckling
401 Structural members for which buckling is a possible
mode of failure, are to be investigated for buckling.
402 The stability analysis is to be carried out according to
generally accepted theories of buckling. For shells, the ef-
fect of geometrical imperfection on the critical buckling
stress is to be taken into account.
403 The stability analysis is to show compliance with the
requirements given in the rules.
404 Acceptable calculation methods are outlined in Clas-
sification Note No. 30.1 on .Buckling Strength Analysis .
C 500 Fatigue
501 Areas of primary structural members where fatigne
may be a critical mode of failure, are to be investigated for
fatigne.
502 The fatigue analysis is to be based on a period of time
equal to the planned life of the structore. The period is,
however, normally not to be taken less than 20 years.
503 The cumulative effect of the stress history may be es-
timated by the usage factor:
DEr NORSKE VERITAS
s
'1= I
i= 1
~ J
s = number of stress blocks considered
Di = actual number of stress cycles for stress block no. i
Ni = number of stress cycles before failure if stress block
no. i is considered only.
A reasonable number of constant amplitude stress blocks and
corresponding number of stress cycles are to be evaluated
from a long term stress distribution determined for the
planned life of the structures. All directions of wind, waves
and current relative to the unit, are normally to be assumed
equally probable. If, however, statistics show clearly that
wmd, waves and current of the prescribed probability are
different for different directions, this may be taken into ac-
count in the analysis.
504 The resistance against fatigue is normally given as
S-N curves, i.e. stress range versus number of cycles to
failure, based on fatigue tests. The S-N curve is in general
to be based on a 95 % confidence limit. See also Sec.9
B404.
50S In lieu of an analysis aimed to prevent crack initiation,
consideration will be given to a crack propagation approach
to fatigue.
sification Note No. 30.2 on .Fatigue Strength A1ialysis>.
C 600 Ultimate strength
601 For desilln against excessive yielding, an ultimate
strength analYSIS may be used where appropriate.
602 Ultimate load is the load associated with the maximum
resistance to the applied load, i.e. the maximum load the
member can withstand without final collapse.
Examples on final collal'se are plastic collapse, or a ductile
failure where both yieldmg and local buckling may occur in
the cross section.
603 The condition of yielding of a cross section is to be
based on the equivalent stress criterion given in 300. Strain
hardening is not to be considered for carbon steel.
604 Where plastic hinges are used in the analysis, it is to
beshown thatnecessary rotations of the hingesare possible.
"Ifis liis(i"to 'be shoWli that !he chOsen Ilunib-er and posilions
of the plastic hinges give the correct (lowest) ultimate load.
60S The usage factor in the case of ultimate strength anal-
ysis is defined as:
LA = applied load
Lu = ultimate load.
'1 = LA/Lu
The usage factors, determined by rational analysis, are not
to exceed the values given in the rules.
701 This item gives requirements for stuctural reliability
analysis undertaken in order to document rule compliance,
see Pt.1 Ch.1 Sec. 1 C200.
702 The method and procedures for evaluation of reliabil-
ity are subject to the acceptance by the Society in each in-
dividual case. Acceptable procedures for reliability analyses
are documented in the Classification Note No. 30.6
.Structural Reliability A1ialysis of Marine Structures>.
703 Reliability analyses are to be based on level ill reli-
ability methods. These are methods that utilise probability
of failure as a measure, and which therefore require a
knowledge of the distribution of all uncertain parameters.
704 For the purpose of these rules, level ill reliability
methods are mainly considered applicable to:
- unique design solutions
- novel designs where limited (or no) experience exists
- special case design problems
- calibration of level I methods to account for improved
knowledge (level I methods are deterministic analysis
methods that use only one characteristic value to describe
each uncertain variable, i.e. the allowable stress method
normally applied in the rules).
70S Reliability analyses may be updated by utilisation of
new information. Where such updating indicates that the
assumptions upon which the original analysis was based are
not valid, and the result of such non-validation is deemed to
be essential to safety, the subject approval may be revoked.
706 Target reliabilities are to be commensurate with the
consequence of failure. The method of establishing such
target reliabilities, and the values of the target reliabilities
themselves, are to be approved by the Society in each sepa-
rate case. To the extent possible, the minimum target reli-
abilities are to be established based upon calibration against
well established cases that are known to have adequate saf-
ety.
Where well established cases do not exist, for example in the
case of novel and unique design solutions, the minimum
target reliability values are to be based upon one (or a
combination) of the following considerations:
- transferable target reliabilties from .similar>, existing
design solutions
- decision analysis
- internationally recognised codes and standards.
For further details, see Classification Note No. 30.6.
D 100 Deflections
101 Structural deflections which may alter the effect of the
acting forces are to be considered.
102 Considerations are to be given to the effect of de-
flections on the distribution of loads between supported rigid
objects and the supporting structure.
D 200 Vibrations
201 The rigidity of the structure and vital structural com-
ponents is to be sufficient to prevent serious vibrations and
to ensure safe operation of the unit.
202 Structural vibrations which may lead to major struc-
tural failure are to be avoided. When there is reason to be-
lieve that serious vibrations can arise, a vibration analysis
is to be carried out.
DEY NORSKE VERITAS
.J
:J
J
.:]
')
~
)
/)
B 100 Atmospheric zone
101 Steel surfaces in the atmospheric zone are to be pro-
tected by coating.
B 200 Splash zone
201 Steel surfaces in the splash zone are to be protected
by coating.
B 300 Submerged zone
301 Steel surfaces in the submerged zone, including splash
zone areas below normal operating draught, are to be pro-
tected by cathodic protection, preferably in combination
with coating. For coated submerged steel the cathodic pro-
tection current density can be reduced.
B 400 Internal zone
401 Tanks which are exposed to sea water or other corro-
sive liquid, typically water ballast tanks, are to be protected
by coating. Sacrificial anodes are to be used in combination
with coating where relevant, i.e. for water ballast tanks that
will stay empty less than approximately 50 % of the time.
402 Tanks which 'are normally empty or only partly filled
with seawater are to be protected either by coating, corro-
sion addition or a combination of these methods.
403 Fresh water tanks are to be coated. Health authorities
requirements for the coating are to be complied with.
404 Special areas with respect to fatigue are to be pro-
tected by cathodic protection or coating unless the effect of
unprotected steel has been accounted for in the fatigue
evaluation. Regarding the use of aluminium coating, see
DI02. To facilitate in-service inspections in ballast tanks
and in areas where crack detection is important, light col-
oured, hard coatings e.g. on epoxy or similar basis are to
be used.
405 Magnesium anodes and impressed current are not to
be used in tanks.
406 Corrosion proteCtion of Closed spaces Impossibie 10
inspect after final welding are subject to special consider-
ation.
Internal surfaces of structural members that may not stay dry
or will not be sealed off from the atmosphere, are to be
protected by coating. For internal surfaces of compartments
that will remain sealed off and dry for the design life of the
structure, coating is not required.
407 For ballast tanks which may become gas hazardous
areas due to being located adjacent to e.g. fuel tanks or oil
storage tanks for liquids with flash point < 60C, aluminium
anodes are to be so located that a kinetic energy of 5,275 J
is developed in event of their loosening and falling down.
Fillet welds for attachment of anodes are to be continuous
and of adequate cross section. Attachment by clamps fixed
by set-screws will not be accepted in potentially gas haz-
ardous areas. Attachments by properly secured through-
bolts may, however, be accepted.
408 Tanks in which anodes are installed are to have suffi-
cient holes for the circulation of air to prevent gas from ac-
cumulating in pockets.
B 500 Corrosion additions
501 Unprotected steel (plates, stiffeners and girders) in
tanks are generally to be given a corrosion addition tk as
follows:
Pt.3 Ch.1 Sec.9 '-- Page 31
- plates:
one side unprotected: tk = 1,5 mm
two sides unprotected: tk = 2,0 mm
- unprotected stiffeners and girders: tk = 2,0 mm.
502 When a corrosion addition has been added to the
scantlings, this is to be noted on the structural class draw-
ings, or on a separate plan.
C 100 General
101 The cathodic protection system is to deliver sufficient
protective current to maintain the potential at all steel sur-
faces of the structure in the submerged zone between -0,80
V and -1,10 V versus the Ag/ AgCl/sea water reference
electrode, and to maintain the potential within this range
throughout the design life of the installation.
These potentials apply to normal sea water (salinity 32 to
38 gil) and saline mud.
If potential measurements are carried out in brackish water,
either a Ag/ AgCl reference electrode with closed electrolyte
compartment/permeable membrane (not dependent on chlo-
ride concentration) or of other type (Cu/CuS04' Zn or sat-
urated calomel electrode SCE) is to be used.
Guidance note:
The following relationships are nonnally valid between poten-
tials (volts V) measured with Ag/ Agel and other reference cells:
AgIAgCllseawater Zn Cu/CuSO. SCE
- 0,80 + 0,25 - 0.85 - 0,79
- 0,90 + 0,15 - 0,95 - 0,89
- 1,10 - 0,05 - 1,15 - 1,09
._--
---e-n-d---o-f-G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e--n-o-t-e-
102 The current density necessary to achieve the above
potentials ism be seleeted on the b .. i. of the we .. 1 en"i-
ronmental conditions with respect to corrosivity that the unit
is intended for. .
103 If the unit is operating in an environment with worse
conditions than originally intended, additional protection
may be required.
104 The reduction in current density on coated surfaces
compared to bare steel, will be dependent on the coating
system, and is subject to approval by the Society.
105 Cathodic protection systems for steels with specified
minimum yield stress > 550 N/mm
2
are subject to special
consideration for applications where hydrogen induced
stress cracking (IDSC) may be anticipated. See Sec.2 B506.
Qualification testing is to be carried out for critical applica-
tions such as jack-up legs and spud cans. Test conditions:
anaerobic, hydrogen SUlphide containing environment and
cathodic protection potentials of -1,1 V Ag/AgCl or more
negative potentials. The test procedure, slow strain rate
method or similar, is subject to approval.
If not documented by testing as indicated above that cathodic
protection to -1,1 V Ag/AgCl is hannIess (for steel with
specified minimum yield stress> 550 N/mm
2
), the cathodic
protection potential is to be limited by using special anodes
of controlled voltage type (with diodes or similar), or other
method.
DEY NORSKE VERITAS
SECTION 9
CORROSION PROTECTION
Contents
A. General
A 100 Scope
A 200 Definitions
A 300 Documentation
B 200 Splash zone
B 400 Internal zone
C 100 Geneml
C 500 Testing of effectiveness of corrosion protection system
D. Coating
D 100 Specification
A. General
A 100 Scope
101 10 this section the requirements regarding corrosion
protection arrangement and equipment are given.
A 200 Defmitions
201 Atmospheric zone: The external region exposed to at-
mospheric conditions.
~ 2 0 2 Splash ZIJlIe:'The "xternslregion which is most se
o
verely exposed to wave action. The upper limit is 5 m above
water line at normal operating draught, the lower limit is 4
m below water line at normal operating draught.
203 Submerged zone: The external region below the splash
zone.
204 Coating: Metallic, inorganic and organic materials for
prevention of corrosion of steel surfaces.
205 Cathodic protection: A technique to prevent corrosion
of a steel surface by making the surface to be the cathode
of an electrochemical cell.
206 Corrosion addition: Extra steel thickness in excess of
that needed for strength.
207 Reference electrode: Electrode with stable open-circuit
potential used as reference for potential measurements.
208 Potential: The voltage between a submerged metal
surface and a reference electrode.
209 Driving voltage: The difference between closed circuit
anode potential and the protection potential.
210 Utilisation factor: The amount of anode material con-
sumed when the remaining anode material cannot deliver the
current required.
211 Special area: Portions of primary structural elements
which are in way of critical load transfer points, stress con-
centrations, etc. See Sec.2 B.
A 300 Documentation
301 Coatiog specifications for all zones are to be submitted
for information.
302 For cathodic protection systems, design current den-
sities are to be stated (see C 100). To evaluate the current
requirement, the area of bare and coated submerged sur-
faces, including splash zone surfaces below normal operat-
ing draught, is to be specified for each main section of the
unit. Procedures for testiog of the effectiveness of the system
(see C500) are to be specified.
303 For cathodic protection systems utilising sacrificial
anodes (see C200), data on the electrochemical efficiency
of the anode material, the driving voltage and the utilisation
factor of anodes are to be specified.
304 Calculations of the initial and final current output ca-
pacity of sacrificial anodes and the life of the cathodic pro-
tection system are to be submitted for inforroation.
305 Drawings showing sacrificial anode design, fastening
of anodes and location of anodes are to be submitted for
approval.
306 Material certificates for sacrificial anodes are to be
available on request and are to state at least:
- the manufacturer
- the specified chemical composition
- the actual chemical analysis
- the charge number.
307 Po, eathodie protetti"" .y.teIl1ll utilisingimpre .. ed
current (see C300), the following documentation is to be
submitted for information:
- maximum current output capacity
- maximum anode-to-structure voltage
- specifications of anode materials and dielectric shields
- consumption rate of anodes at maximum specified current
output.
308 Drawings of impressed current anodes including die-
lectric shields and general arrangements (location of anodes
and electrical circuiting including rectifiers, cables and cable
connections) are to be submitted for approval.
309 For cathodic protection monitoring systems subject to
approval (see C400), drawings of reference electrodes and
general arrangement (location of electrodes and electrical
circuitiog) are to be submitted for approval.
DEI' NORSKE VERITAS
J o
J
C)
J o
"
_J
()
SECTION 4
DESIGN LOADS
Contents
A. General
A 100 Scope
A 200 Defmitions
A 300 Loading conditions
B 100 Wind
B 200 Waves
B 300 Current
C. Flow Induced Forces
C 100 Geneml
C 200 Dmg forces
C 300 Inertia forces
C 400 Mooring forces
D 100 Geneml
D 200 Sea pressures
D 300 Tank pressures
D 400 Local functional loads
D 500 Local environmenta11oads
D 600 Heavy units
E 100 Collision
E 200 Dropped objects
A. General
A 100 Scope
101 The requirements in this section define and specify
load components and load combinations to be considered in
the overall strength analysis as well as design pressures ap-
plicable in forroulae for local scantlings.
102 Impact pressure caused by the sea (slamming, bow
impact) or by liquid cargoes in partly filled tanks (sloshing)
-are nUl cuveretl"lJy IliiH HecUull. Desigll "valUeS lIIe-giv6U-in
the sections dealing with specific structures.
A 200 Defmitions
201 Symbols:
p
p
= design pressure in kN/m
2
density of liquid or stowage rate of dry cargo in
t/m
3

202 Functional wads are loads which are a necessary
consequence of the structure's existence, use and treatment,
under ideal circumstances for each design condition . Ideal
circumstances means no wind, no waves etc., i.e. no envi-
ronmental loads.
All external forces which are responses to functional loads
are to be regarded as functional loads. Examples are support
reactions and still water buoyancy forces.
203 Environmental wads are loads which are not a neces-
sary consequence of the structure's existence, use and treat-
ment. Such loads are all directly or indirectly due to
environmental actions.
All external forces which are responses to environmental
loads are to be regarded as environmental loads. Examples
are support reactions, mooring forces and inertia forces.
204 Accidental wads are loads which may occur as a result
of accident or exceptional conditions. Examples of acci-
dental loads are:
- collision loads
- explosion and fire
- dropped objects.
205 Overall forces are defined as forces in a member
arising from loads acting on the structure outside the con-
sidered member.
206 Localforces are defined as forces in a member arising
from loads acting on the considered member, e.g. hydros-
tatic pressure, deck loads, etc.
207 The wad point for which the design pressure is to be
calculated is defined for various strength members as fol-
lows:
- for plates:
midpoint of horizontally stiffened plate field. Half of the
stiffener spacing above the lower support of vertically
stiffened plate field, or at lower edge of plate when the
thickness is changed within the plate field
- for stiffeners:
midpoint of span. When the pressure is not varied line-
arly over the span the design pressure is to be taken as
the greater of:
Pa+Pb
Pm and 2
Pm' P, and Pb are calculated pressure at the midpoint and
at eaCh end respectively
- for girders:
midpoint of load area.
301 Each structural member is to be designed for the most
unfavourable of the following loading conditions:
n) functionnl londo
b) maximum environmental loads and associated functional
loads
c) accidental loads and associated functional loads
d) environmental loads corresponding to a return period of
1 year and associated functional loads after credible fail-
ures, or after accidental events
e) environmental loads corresponding to a return period of
1 year and associated functional loads in a heeled condi-
tion corresponding to accidental flooding.
Permissible usage factors and stresses are given in Sec.S
D. Relevant combinations of design and loading conditions
are given in Ch.2 Sec.2 and 3.
302 For each of the above loading conditions and for each
structural member, the most unfavourable combinations,
position, and direction of the forces have to be used in the
analysis.
All directions of wind, waves and current relative to the
platforro are norroaIIy to be assumed equally probable.
If, however, statistics show clearly that wind, waves and
current of the prescribed probability are different for differ-
ent directions, this may be taken into account in the analysis.
It is assumed that orientation of the platforro wiII be under
complete control of the operator. The responsibility for this
control wiII be stated in the .Appendix to the Classification
Certificate .
DEI' NORSKE VERITAS
303 The defined loading conditions are to be considered
for each of the design conditions being relevant to the
structure in question. See Ch.2 Sec.2 and Sec.3.
B 100 Wind
101 Characteristic wind design velocities are to be based
upon appropriate considerations of velocitylheight profiles
for the relevant averaging time.
Guidance note:
Practical information in respect to wind conditions, including
velocity/height profIles, is documented in Classification Note
No. 30.5 "Environmental Conditions and Environmental
Loads".
102 When wind tunnel data obtained from reliable and
adequate tests on a representative model of the platform are
submitted, these data will be considered for the determi-
nation of pressures and resulting forces.
103 In conjunction with maximum wave forces the sus-
tained wind velocity is to be used.
If gust wind alone is more unfavourable than sustained wind
in conjunction with wave forces, the gust wind velocity is
to be used.
For local load calculations gnst wind velocity is to be used.
The one hour wind velocity is normally ouly applicable for
mooring calculations as outlined in Pt.6 Ch.2.
Guidance note:
For unrestricted operation V IminlO need normally not be taken
larger than 55 mi .
104 For structures being sensitive to dynamic loads, for
instance tall structures having long natural period of vi-
bration, the stresses due to the gust wind pressure consid-
ered as static are to be multiplied by an appropriate dynamic
amplification factor.
Guidance note:
---'llhe posiibwiy o-rvibraiions QUe-to msial>iliiiin ihe now pattern
induced by the structure itself should also be considered.
B 200 Waves
201 The liquid particle velocity and acceleration in regular
waves are to be calculated according to recognised wave
theories, taking into account the significance of shallow
water and surface elevation.
Linearised wave theories may be used when appropriate.
In such cases appropriate account is to be taken of the ex-
trapolation of wave kinematics to the free surface.
202 The wave design data are to represent the maximum
wave heights specified for the unit, as well as the maximum
wave steepness.
The wave lengths are to be selected as the most critical ones
for the response of the structure or structural part to be in-
vestigated.
Guidance note:
Practical infonnation in respect to wave conditions, including
wave steepness criteria and wave "stretching" , is documented in
Classification Note No. 30.5 "Environmental Conditions and
Environmental Loads".
For unrestricted operation the maximum wave height, with a
return period of 100 years, need nonnally not be taken greater
than 32 m.
B 300 Current
301 Characteristic current design velocities are to be based
upon appropriate consideration of velocitylheight profIles.
The variation in current profile with variation in water
depth, due to wave action is to be appropriately accounted
for.
Guidance note:
Practical infonnation in respect to current conditions, including
current stretching in the passage of a wave, is documented in
C 100 General
101 The dynamic forces considered to influence the over-
all strength and overturning stability of units in operating
conditions are:
- drag forces caused by resultant velocity of air or water
flow relative to the member in question
- inertia forces caused by acceleration of water flow.
102 The forces are assumed to be applied in the overall
structural analysis of the unit in the most unfavourable
combination with gravity, buoyancy and mooring forces.
Acceptable combinations of loads are outlined in Classifica-
tion Notes on .Strength Analysis of Main Structures> of
various mobile offshore units.
103 The limitations of the formulae for drag forces and
inertia forces (Morison's equation) are to be duly consid-
ered. In particular for bodies having relevant dimensions
which are not negligible compared to the wave length, more
applicable theories must in general be used, e.g. potential
theory.
C 200 Drag forces
201 The steady flow force or force components acting in
the plane or the clUss=seetionof
taken as:
2 2
P
D
= 0,5 p C
s
v b 1 cos P (kN)
Cs shape coefficient. Values of Cs or CSI and CS2, for
IIh;;::5, are given in 202 to 204 for various cross-
sections. Other values of Cs may be used, provided
a justification of the chosen values can be given. In
any case Cs is not to be taken less than 0,5
v = flow velocity in mls in flow direction
b = cross-sectional dimension in m, perpendicular to the
force or force component. Relevant directions of b
or b
l
and b
2
are defined in 202 to 204 for various
cross-sectIons
1 = length of the member in m
P = angle between the flow direction and the cross- sec-
tional plane of the member.
202 The shape coefficient for members with circular
cross-section may be taken in accordance with Fig.1 where
RE = v b 10
6
for sea water (Reynolds number)
= 0,68 v b 10
5
for air
v = flow velocity in mls
b = diameter in m.
Members in air may normally be taken as smooth cylinders.
For members in sea water the values for smooth cylinder
may normally be used in connection with a deterministic
DET NORSKE VERITAS
:J
J

.')

J
:)
Ap 2
a=0,14 -f-+ak (cm)
w
A = load area in m
2
for pillar
p = design pressure in kN/m
2
as _given in Sec.4 D
fw = strengtli ratio for weld as defined in 103.
If the pillar also carries the load of another pillar above, the
connection area must be increased corresponding to the in-
creased load.
504 End connections of bracings are normally to have a
weld area not less than:
2
a= 1,73A
B
+ak (cm)
Pt.3 Ch.l Sec.8 - Page 29
AB = cross sectional area of bracing at connection in cm
2
.
D 100 General
101 The weld types used for steel may normally be
adopted when welding aluminium. Dimensions for fillet
welds etc. may in principle be calculated as indicated for
steel in C, taking into account the strength of the material,
especially the low strength of aluminium in the welded zone.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
II I
CONNECTION ONLY
BETWEEN STIFFENER
WEB AND GIRDER
WEB
LOCAL STIFFENER
OR BRACKET {singel
Or double) ON TOP OF
MAIN STIFFENER
-r

o

AS 51Ul1 AS F'CSSQ.E
b ',>
r

c ",.
I

Fig. 5
Connections of stiffeners to girders
403 Connection lugs are to have a thickness not less than
75 % of the web plate thickness.
404 The total connection area {parent material) at supports
stiffeners is normally not to be less thaa:
17,3c 2
"0 = " s) s p (cm)
p
c = detail shape factor as given in Table C2
"p = permissible stress based on the yield criterion, as
given in Sec.5 D300
= span of stiffener in m
s = spacing between stiffeners in m
2
as given in SecA D.
Corrosion addition as specified in Sec.9 B500 is not in-
cluded in the formula for ao.
Table C2 Detail shape factor c
Type of I II
connection Web to web Stiffenerlbracket on
(see Fig.5) connection only top of stiffener
Single-
sided
a 1,00 1,25
b 0,90 1,15
c 0,80 1,00
405 Weld area is not to be less thaa:
2
a= fraO+ak (cm)
Double-
sided
1,00
0,90
0,80
f, = strength ratio as defined in 103
ao = connection area in cm
2
as given in 404.
The throat thickness is not to exceed the maximum for
scallop welds given in 204.
406 The weld connection between stiffener end aad
bracket is principally to be designed such that the shear
stresses of the connection corresponds to the permissible
stress.
In lieu of a complete calculation, the following formula may
be used for stiffeners in bending:
3
:Ehi ai = 1,5 frZ (em)
hi = height in cm, see Fig.6
ai = shear area of weld, longitudinal part, in cm
2
, see
Fig.6
f, = strength ratio as defined in 103. If bracket and stif-
fener are of different strength, the lowest value of
"fw is to be used
Z = rule section modulus of stiffener in cm
3
.
Fig. 6
Bracketed end connections
407 The weld area of brackets to stiffeners which are car-
rying longitudinal stresses or which are taking part in the
llf .Ill." ifi .nn! In
sectional area of the longitudinal. Brackets are to be con-
nected to bulkhead by a double continuous weld, for heavily
stressed connections by a partly or full penetration weld.
C 500 End connections of girders, pillars and bracings
501 The weld connection area of bracket to adjoining
girders or other structural parts is to be based on the calcu-
lated normal and shear stresses. Double continuous welding
is to be used. Where large tensile stresses are expected,
welding according to 300 is to be applied.
502 The end connections of simple girders are to satisfy
the requirements to section modulus given for the girder in
question.
Where shear stresses in web plate exceed 75 N/mm2, double
continuous boundary ftllet welds are to have throat thickness
not less than:
'"
t = 0,43 ?sf fr 10 + tk (mm)
w
'" = calculated shear stress in N/mm
2
fw = strength ratio for weld as defined in 103
to = net thickness in mm of web plate, corrosion addition
not included.
503 End connections of pillars are to have a weld area not
less thaa:
DET NORSKE VERITAS
)
J
"
)
"
)

:J
:J
:J
1/)
wave load analysis as specified in Sec.3 B306 and provided
the marine growth is kept moderate.

1.2
I
IE 0.8
IJ..
0.6
u
0.4
0 0.2
lOS
10
6
10
7
10
8
REYNOLD'S NUMBER (Rei
Fig. 1
Shape coefficient for circular cylinders
203 The shape coefficients for smooth members with rec-
tangular cross-section (hI ;:: bV may be taken as:
C
S1
= 2 KR sin a
C
S2
= ( 1 + ) KR cos a for b
2
:$; b
1
:$; 2b
2
= 1,5 KR cos a for b
l
> 2b
2
KR = 1,0 for rib :$; 0,10
= r/b)/3 for 0,10 < rib < 0,25
= 0,35 for rib;:: 0,25
bl = longer side of rectangle in m
b2 = shorter side of rectangle in m
r = comer radius of the section in m
a = angle between side b
l
of the rectangle and the flow
component in the cross-sectional plaae.
bj, bi and", are ... lso shown in Fig;2;' -
For wide rectangular cross-sections it may be necessary to
take into account that the resultant drag force Pm is assumed
to be acting at a distance b
l
/3 from the leading edge of the
surface. See Fig.2.
FLOW
=t>
A f:l<tJ (,
If CoST;
'?/J
Fig. 2
Drag forces on rectangular cross-sections
204 The shape coefficients and characteristic dimensions
for various smooth members with irregular cross-sections
may be taken in accordance with Table C1 where dimen-
sions perpendicular to POl and PD2 are to be understood as
b
l
and b
2
respectively.
Pt.3 Ch.1 SecA - Page 13
Table Cl Shape coefficient for irregular cross sections
Profile ex (degrees
C
SI
C
S2

0 1,9 1,0

45 .1,8 0,8
90 2,0 1,7
135 -1,8 -0,1
,o.Stl 180 -2,0 0,1
!:'')t
0 1,8 1,8
45 2,1 1,8
f.
90 -1,9 -1,0
<:( y"
135 -2,0 0,3
180 -1,4 -1,4
V
P
d2
0 1,7 0

45 0,8 0,8
P"
af;z b C.2b ....c;..
90 0 1,7
135 -0,8 0,8
Y.
180 -1,7 0
...

0 2,0 0
45 1,2 0,9
90 -1,6 2,2
135 -1,1 -2,4
180 -1,7 0

0 2,1 0
iz

45 1,9 0,6
90 0 0,6
135 -1,6 0,4

180 -1,8 0

,
iz

0 2,1 0
45 2,0 0,6
90 0,5 0,9
O.5b
-

0 1,6 0
45 1,5 1,5
90 0 1,9

0 1,8 0
180 -1,3 0
Ge
205 For members where both ends abut on adjacent
members, the shape coefficients as given in 202 to 204 ap-
ply.
If both ends are free, the drag coefficient may be reduced
with the following factor:
I . 1
K = cl + c2 b' maxunum ,0
where
I = length of member
b = characteristic linear cross-sectional dimension
CI, C2 = factors depending on Reynolds' number aad mem-
ber cross sectional shape.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
c,
Circular cylinder, subcritica1 flow 0,6
Circular cylinder, supercritica1 flow 0,8
Sharp edged members 0,6
Guidance note:
Supercritical flow may be assumed for RE> 0,5' 10
6
.
--e-n-d-o-f--G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---
""
2
175
1
175
2
175
For members with one end abuting on to another member
or a wall in such a way that free flow around that end of the
member is prevented, the ratio lib is to be doubled for the
purpose of determining K. When both ends are abuted as
mentioned, the drag coefficient is to be taken equal to that
for an infinitely long member.
206 If several members are arranged in a plane perpen-
dicular to the flow direction, the solidification effect may
have to be taken into account.
The steady flow force may be calculated according to 201
assuming applicable shape coefficient according to 202 or
203 is modified as given below.
Thus if
As = sum of projected areas in m
2
for all members in the
plane, and
AT = total projected envelope area in m
2
of the assembly,
the following applies:
a) for assemblies consisting of smooth circular members:
- for As/AT < 0,5:
no solidification effect. The force may be taken as the
sum of forces on each single member. No modification
of shape coefficient
- for As/AT = 1:
complete solidification. The force may be taken as the
force on a single solid. The shape coefficient is to be
-given the vaJue of 2
- For 0,5 < As/AT < I:
partial solidification effect. The force may be taken as the
sum of forces on each single member. The shape coeffi-
cient is to be modified by a lioear interpolation between
the value according to 202 and the value of 2.
b) for assemblies consisting of smooth sharp-edged mem-
bers:
- for As/ AT < 0,2:
- for As/AT> 0,8:
force on a single solid. The As is to be taken as an en-
velope area. No modification of shape coefficient
- for 0,2 < As/AT < 0,8:
cient is to be multiplied by 0,8.
207 If two or more members are arranged in lioe in the
flow direction, the shielding effect may be taken into ac-
count if the centre to centre distance, I, between the mem-
bers is less than 7 b
f
, where
be the characteristic lioear cross-sectional diroension of
the front member.
For shielded members in a lioe the shape coefficients calcu-
lated in accordance with 202 to 204 may be reduced with the
following factor:
(1 __ 1_)
b, 7 b
f
for b,
I
7 b
f
for b
f
:<! b,
b
s
= characteristic linear cross-sectional dimension of the
shielded member.
301 The force or force components acting in the plane of
the cross-section of slender members due to wave particle
acceleration are to be taken as:
PM=pCMaV (kN)
CM = inertia coefficient, values for CM are given in 302.
Other values for CM may be used, provided a justi-
fication of the chosen values can be given
a = mean fluid acceleration in m/s
2
in the cross-sectional
plane of the member
V reference volume in m
3
to which the inertia coeffi-
cient is related. Unless otherwise stated V is equal
to the volume of liquid displaced by the body.
302 The inertia coefficient for members with different
cross-sections may be taken in accordance with Table C2.
Table C2 Inertia coefficients
Shape of member eM
Smooth circular cylinder,
1 + K
Z
diameter d parallel to flow
Smooth elliptic cylinder, axis
1 + K
Z
(d/b)
d and b, b parallel to flow
Rectangular box, sides b and d,
b parallel to flow
dlb a dlb a
_1+
-""-
H,oo- --1---- -'-t,- --"'T \,
10 1,14 0,5 1,70
5 1,21 0,2 1,98
2 1,36 0,1 2,23
Qadratic box, sides d,
1 + 1,1 K
z
one diagonal parallel to flow
Flat plate facing flow, width d
" 2
Reference volume V = 4 d I
K
z
Flat elliptic disk facing flow,
axes d and I (I 2! d)
K
z
'" 2
Reference volume V ="'6 d 1
Sphere 1,6
1
K,
1 + (d/l)2
I = length of member (1) d)
401 Mooring forces must be considered in the following
three aspects:
- the strength of the mooring system
- the overall strength of the structure
- the local strength where the chain cable forces are trans-
mitted to the hull.
DET' NORSKE VERITAS
)
=>
)
=>
J
,
.:J
)
/J
.
0,75

af = yield stress of base material, abutting plate, in
N/rom
2
afw = yield stress of weld deposit in N/rom
2

Table Cl Strengtb ratios, f and f
Base metal Weld deposit
Yield stress
Strength group Designation crfw
(N/mm2)
Normal strength steels NVNS 355
High strength steels NV27
NV32 375
NV36
NV 40 390
C 200 Ordinary fillet welds
201 Where the connection of girder and stiffener webs aod
plate panel/girder flange plate, respectively, are mainly
shear stressed, fillel welds as specified in the following will
normally be adopted.
202 Unless otherwise documented, the throat thickness of
double continuous fillet welds is not to be less than:
t = 0,43 fr to + tk (rom), minimum 3 rom
fr = strength ratio as defined in !O3
to = net thickness in rom of abutting plate, corrosion ad-
dition not included.
For stiffeners and within 60% of the middle of span
of girders, 10 need normally not be taken greater than
11 mm, however, in no case less than 0,5 times the
net thickness of the web.
Ordinary values for fw and fr for normal strength and high
strength steels are given in Table C I.
The table is valid for ordinary fillet welds only, for partly
penetration welds the fw and f, -values are to be specially
considered.
104 When deep penetrating welding processes are applied,
the required thioat thicknesses may be reduced by 15 %
provided sufficient weld penetration IS demonstrated.
Strength ratios
Weld metal Base metal/weld metal
0,75 0,75
)

r crfw
1,34 0,75
0,75
1,40 0,88
0,96
1,44 1,0
connections subject to high stresses
301 In structural parts where dynamic stresses or high
static tensile stresses act through an interroediate plate (see
Fig.2), penetration welds or increased fillet welds are to be
used.
302 When the abutting plate carries dynamic stresses, the
connection is to fulfil the requirements with respect to fa-
tigue, see Sec.3 and Sec.5.
303 When the abutting plate carries tensile stresses higher
than 100 N/rom
2
, the throat thickness of a double continuous
weld is not to be less than:
1,36 [ (a ) r ]
t= T 0,2+ 270 -0,25 to to+tk
(rom)
minimum 3 mm
!llli:.kn.essQf wek!Jl!ay be as fw
required in 202 for double continuous welds provided the v
strength ratio as defined in !O3
;;-alettlare-J
in N/rom
2
welded length is not less than:
- 50 % of total length for connections in tanks
- 35 % of total length for connections elsewhere.
Double continuous welds are to be adopted at stiffener ends
when necessary due to bracketed end connections etc.
204 For intermittent welds, the throat thickness is not to
exceed:
- for chain welds and scallop welds:
0,6 f, 10 + tk (rom)
- for staggered welds:
0,75 f, 10 + tk (rom)
to = net thickness in rom abutting plate, corrosion addition
not included.
If the calculated throat thickness exceeds that given in a) or
b), respectively, the considered weld length is to be in-
creased correspondingly.
r
to
root face in =, see Fig.2b
net thickness in rom of abutting plate, corrosion ad-
C 400 Connections of stiffeners to girders etc.
401 Stiffeners may be connected to the web plate of gird-
ers in the following ways:
- welded directly to the web plate on one or both sides of
the stiffener
- connected by single- or double-sided lugs
- with stiffener or bracket welded on top of frame
- a combination of the above.
In locations with great shear stresses in the web plate, a
double-sided connection or a stiffeuing of the unconnected
web plate edge is normally required. A double-sided con-
nection may be taken into account when calculating the ef-
fective web area.
402 Various standard types of connections are shown in
Fig.5.
Other types of connection will be considered in each case.
DEI" NORSKE VERITAS
205 Intermittent fillet welds may be used in the connection
of girder and stiffener webs to plate and girder flange plate,
respectively, where the connection is moderately stressed.
With reference to Fig.3, the various types of intermittent
welds are as follows:
- chain weld
- staggered weld
- scallop weld (closed).
206 Where intermittent welds are accepted, scallop welds
are to be used in tanks for water ballast or fresh water.
Chain and staggered welds may be used in dry spaces and
tanks arranged for fuel oil only.
B 300 Lap joints and slot welds
301 Two types of overlapped joints are indicated in FigA.
Type .a. (lap joint) may be used in end connections of stif-
feners. Such overlaps will normally not be accepted for
connection of plates to panels.
Type .b . (slot weld) may be used for connection of plating
to internal webs, where access for welding is not practicable.
The length of slots and distance between slots will be con-
sidered in view of the required size of welding.
rJ
0) FULL PENETRATKlN [!] t-
WELDS

bl PARTLY PENETRATION n t.
WELD
f
rJ root face
4..
cl fiLLET WELD

dl THROAT THICKNESS t

Fig. 2
Tee or cross joints
CHAIN WEL6 T T
I -'- I
I T
hI
/ LR"'2Smm
CONTINUOUS
WELD WITH SCALLOPS
DEPTH OF NOTCH 0,25 h BUT
NOT GREATER THAN 7S mm
THE WELD TO BE CARRIED
ROUND THE LEG
Fig. 3
Intermittent welds
.... 1
___ --oJ ...
r:::=---"'" A
.......... ,.
A: LAP JOINT

I fll \
e: SLOT WELD
Fig. 4
Lap joint and slot welds
C 100 General
101 The sizes of weld connections are to be as given in
200 to 500.
If the yield stress of the weld deposit is higher than that of
the base metal, the size of ordinary fillet weld connections
may be reduced as indicated in 103.
The weld dimensions are, however, in no case to be less
than 0,75 of the basic size.
The yield stress of the weld deposit is in no case to be less
than given in Pt.2 Ch.3 Sec.3.
102 Welding consumables used for welding of norrnal
steel and some high strength steels are assumed to give weld
deposits with yield stress C1fw as indicated in Table Cl.
If welding consumables with deposits of lower yield stress
than specified in Table Cl are used, the C1fw-value is to be
stated on the drawings submitted for approval.
103 The size of some weld connections may be reduced:
a) Corresponding to the strength of the weld metal, fw:
0,75
fw=C:) or
b) Corresponding to the strength ratio value fr' base metal
to weld metal:
DE! NORSKE VERITAS
--;
"-/'
)
)
---"\
_J
/)

"J .
()
o
402 For structural details intended to absorb or transmit
the mooring forces, the minimum breaking load of the chain
cable or steel wire rope is to be used in conjunction with the
loading condition b) as defined in A301.
D 100 General
101 Structural strength is to be evaluated considering all
relevant, realistic loading conditions and combinations.
Scantlings are to be determined on the basis of criteria which
combine, in a rational manner, the effects ofrelevant global
Table Dl Local functional loads on decks
Deck area
kNlm.l. 1)
Areas not exposed to functional loads 2,5
Crew spaces, walkways, general traffic
areas, etc.
4,5 !
Work areas 9,0
General storage area 13,0
Storage of cement, wet or dry mud, etc.
p goH
minimum 13,0
H - stowage height in m.
1) Self-weight of deck is included. i
and local responses for each individual structural element. D 500 Local environmental loads
102 Relevant, limiting design criteria upon which scan-
tlings are based are stated in_the 'Appendix to Classification
Certificate I '
103 In the determination of local pressure loadings, con-
sideration is to be given to appropriate load cases described
in SecA A301. Relevant combinations of internal and ex-
ternal pressure loadings for tanks are to be considered.
Guidance note:
In most cases, for external plate fields relevant combinations of
external and internal pressure load cases will result in load con-
ditions where the external and internal pressures are not consid-
ered to be acting simultaneously (except as provided for in Ch.2
Sec.2 C300).
For internal structures the simultaneous action of external and
internal pressures load cases may provide for the designing load
case. For internal structures the internal pressure should nor-
mally not be considered to act simultaneously on both sides of
the same structural element.
104 Design, local deck loadings are to be documented on
a 'load-plan'. This plan is to clearly show the design uni-
form and concentrated loads for all deck areas for each rel-
evant mode of operation.
D 200 Sea pressures
201 For load conditions where environmental load effects
are to be considered the pressures resulting from sea load-
ings are to include consideration of the relative motion of the
unit.
301 Tank filling and venting arrangements are to be ap-
proved. All relevant limiting design criteria is to be estab-
lished and documented.
302 A minimum design density (p) of 1,025 t/m
3
is nor-
mally to be considered in the determination of the appropri-
ate scantlings of tank arrangements.
303 The extent to which it is possible to fill sounding,
venting or loading pipe arrangements is to be fully ac-
counted for in determination of the maximum design pres-
sure to which a tank may be subjected to.
Dynamic pressure heads resulting from the filling of such
pipes are to be included in the design pressure head where
such load components are applicable (see PtA Ch.l Sec.4
E200).
401 The local pressure acting on decks is not to be taken
less than given in Table D 1.
501 The pressure acting on vertical external bulkheads
exposed to wind is in general not to be taken less than 2,5
kN 1m2 unless otherwise documented.
D 600 Heavy units
601 The forces acting on supporting structures and lashing
systems for rigid units of cargo, equipment or other struc-
tural components are normally to be taken as:
- for loading condition a) as defined in A301:
Py=goM (kN)
- for loading condition b):
Py = (go ay) M (kN)
PH=ah M (kN)
For units exposed to wind, a horizontal force due to the
design gust wind is to be added to PH
- for loading condition e):
Py=goM (kN)
PH = 0,25 go M (kN).
For units exposed to wind, a horizontal force due to wind
with velocity = 25 mls is to be added to PH.
PH and l'v is to be regardeil as aciiiJ.g siD:uJliarieousiy UJiless
otherwise documented.
a
v
= most probable largest vertical acceleration in m/s
2
ah = most probable largest horizontal acceleration in m/s2
M = mass of unit in t
Pv = vertical force
PH = horizontal force.
Guidance note:
For units in transit and column stabilised units in
all design ah and 3y need nonnally not be taken lar-
ger than 0,5 !lo ml, .
E 100 Collision
101 The kinetic energy to be considered is normally not
to be less than:
- 14 MJ (Mega Joule) for sideway collision
- 11 MJ for bow or stem collision
corresponding to a supply vessel of 5000 tonnes dis-
placement with impact speed v = 2 mls.
A reduced impact energy may be accepted upon special
consideration taking into account the environmental design
DE! NORSKE VERITAS
criteria. In such cases the size and impact speed of the vessel
to be considered is subject to approval.
The impact energy is given as:
1 2
E = "2 (m + a) v (kJ)
m = displacement of vessel in t
a = added mass of vessel, normally assumed as 0,4 m for
sideway collision and 0,1 m for bow or stem colli-
sion
v = impact speed in m/s.
The impact speed caused by wave induced motion of a sup-
ply vessel may be estimated as
v = 0,5 Hs (m/s)
Hs = maximum significant wave height in m for operation
close to the unit.
102 Collision is to be considered for all elements of the
unit which may be hit either by sideway, bow or stem col-
lision. The vertical extent of the collision zone is to be based
on the depth and draught of visiting supply vessels and the
relative motion between the supply vessels and the unit.
201 The weights of the dropped objects to be considered
for design of the unit according to Sec.3 A600 are taken as
the operational hook loads in cranes.
The lDlpact energy is given as:
E=mgoh (kJ)
m = mass of object in t
h = drop height in air in m.
The impact energy at sea level is normally not to be taken
less than 5 MJ for Cranes with maximum capacity more than
30 tonnes. A reduced impact energy may be accepted by
special consideration for smaller cranes and special purpose
cranes.
The impact energy below sea level is assumed to be equal
to the energy at sea level, unless otherwise documented.
202 Critical areas for dropped objects are to be determined
on the basis of the actual movement of loads assuming a
drop direction within ali angle with the vertical direction:
- 10 in air, for floating units
- 50 in air, for bottom supported units
- 15 in water.
203 Dropped objects are to be considered for vital struc-
tural elements of the unit within the areas given in 202.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
.]

:)

PI.3 Ch.1 Sec.8 - Page 25
SECTION 8
WELD CONNECTIONS
Contents
A. General
A 100 Scope
A 200 Definitions
B 100 Butt joints
B 200 Tee or cross joints
C 100 General
C 200 Ordinary fillet welds ,
C 300 Partly penetration welds and fillet welds in cross con-
nections subject to high stresses
D 100 General
A. General
A 100 Scope
101 The requirements in this section are related to types
and size of welds.
A 200 Defmitions
201 Symbols:
a = sectional area of weld
t = throat thickness of weld
tk = corrosion addition in mm as specified in Sec.9
I I t=t"t " 6mm
MAX Smm
47 1 1'>'-
L-J l MAX. 3mm
MAX.5mm
5mm I p=t.v , __ [It
:> Smm
5mJ [Jt
;lOo 6mm
Fig. 1
Manually welded butt joint edges
201 The connection of a plate abutting on another plate is
to be made as indicated in Fig.2.
The throat thickness of the weld is always to be measured
as the normal to the weld surface, as indicated in Fig.2d.
202 The type of connection is normally to be adopted as
follows:
a) Full penetration weld:
Note that values for one side unprotected is to be
applied for fillet welds
-__ -____ a. = aAAilign tQ\k' ill
important cross connections in structures exposed to high
stress, especially dynamic, e.g. for special areas as de-
fined in Sec.! B .
.
.-.-1
\
,../
B 100 Butt joints
101 For panels with plates of equal thickness, joints for
manual welding are normally to be butt welded with edges
prepared as indicated in Fig.!.
When automatic or semi-automatic welding methods are
adopted, the edge preparation will be specially considered,
taking into account the welding method, number of runs,
heat input etc.
102 For butt welded joints of plates with thickness differ-
ence exceeding 4 mm, the thicker plate is normally to be
tapered. The taper is generally not to exceed 1 : 3.
After tapering, the end preparation may be as indicated in
!01 for plates of equal thickness.
103 All types of butt joints are normally to be welded from
both sides. Before welding is carried out from the second
side, unsound weld metal is to be removed at the root by a
suitable method.
104 Butt welding from one side only may be permitted
after special consideration, taking into account stress level
and fatigue properties.
b) Partly penetration weld:
connections where the static stress level is high. Ac-
ceptable also for dynamically stressed connections, pro-
vided the equivalent stress is acceptable, see C300.
c) Fillet weld:
connections where:
- stresses in the weld are mainly shear, or
- direct stresses are moderate and mainly static, or
- dynamic stresses in the abutting plate are small.
203 Full penetration welds are normally to be welded from
suitable method.
If such a cleaning at the root is not carried out, the weld is
to be considered as a partly penetration weld.
204 Double continuous welds are required in the following
connections, irrespective of the stress level:
- oiltight and watertight connections
- connections at supports and ends of girders, stiffeners and
pillars
- connections in foundations and supporting structures for
machinery
- connections in rudders, except where access difficulties
necessitate slot welds.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
I
I
I
I
---;--
I',
I

I+., "I
I
Fig. 3
Bracket design
Fig. 4
Bradetless connection
I I
I lAs
I I
TYPE 1
TYPE 3
I
:As
I
I

,
t
-
Girder 1
A,
t ..

TYPE 2
a
TYPE 4
Girder 2
I
t
DET NORSKE VERITAS
Flange sniped at an
angle :s 15'
A.
I
I
lAs
I
The toe radius
should be 2: a
I
I
I As
I
I
J
]
]
-)
6

f\
'J
C)
()
SECTION 5
OVERALL STRENGTH
Contents
A. General
A 100 Scope
A 200 References
B 100 General
e 100 General
D. Usage Factors and Permissihle Stresses
D 100 General
D 200 Basic usage factors
D 300 Yield strength analysis
D 400 Buckling strength analysis
D 500 Fatigue strength analysis
D 600 Ultimate strength analysis
D 700 Accidental load analysis
D 800 Damaged structure analysis
E. Stmctures Other than Steel
E 100 Aluminium alloys
E 200 Other materials
A. General
A 100 Scope
101 The requirements in this section are applicable in
connection with overall stmctoral analysis of a unit.
A 200 References
201 Reqnirements applicable to column stabilised units and
self elevating units are also given in Ch.2 Sec.2 and Ch.2
Sec 3, respectively_
B 100 General
101 The design forces and moments considered decisive
for the scantlings are in general to be derived from loads in
accordance with SecA applied to a relevant structoral model
of the platform. More refined methods may be required
when considered necessary for unconventional types of de-
signs. Other methods based on accepted theories on envi-
ronmental conditions and loads may be applied when
properly documented.
C 100 General
101 Calculation methods or computer programmes applied
are to take into aCcoWlt the effects of bending, shear, axial
and torsional deflections of the overall structore.
sification Notes on Strength Analysis of Main Structures",
of various mobile offshore units.
D. Usage Factors and Permissible Stresses
D 100 General
101 The permissible usage factor, '1
p
' is defined as the ra-
tio between permissible stress and a stress representing the
characteristic strength or capability of the stmctoral mem-
ber.
102 The permissible usage factors and stresses are a func-
tion of:
- loading condition
- failure mode
- importance of strength member.
103 Stresses are to be calculated using net scantlings, i.e.
with any corrosion addition deducted.
104 If the residual strength of the unit after collapse of a
vital stmctoral member does not satisfy the criteria in 800,
the permissible stresses and usage factors in 300 and 400 for
the pertinent vital structoral members are to be multiplied
by a factor 0,9 and the fatigne factor in 500 by 0,1 for
analysis of the intact unit.
201 The basic usage factor, '10' is given in Table D 1.
Table Dl Basic usage factor '10
Loading condition (Sec.4)
a)
I
b)
I
c)
I
d)
I
e)

0,60
I
0,80
I
0,80
I
1,00 I 1,00 1)
1) If a basic usage factor of 0,75 is applied, environmental loads may
be disregarded.
301 The nominal equivalent stress determined in accord-
ance with Sec.3 C300 is normally not to exceed the per-
missible stress determined as follows:
Up = '10 uf or
up = '10 240 f1 (N/mm
2
).
302 For laterally loaded plates also exposed to in plane
stresses the nominal equivalent elastic stress calculated in the
middle of the plate field is not to exceed the permissible
stress determined as follows:
up = ('10 + 0,1) 240 fl (N/mm2).
However, the nominal elastic bending stress in the middle
of the plate field is not to exceed the permissible stress given
in 301.
Guidance note:
The nominal elastic bending stress in the middle of the plate field
is given by the followmg formula:
2
,,= 250pk"z ( +) (N/mm2)
ka is given in Sec.6 B100
DET NORSKE VERITAS
Rules for Mobile Offshore Units ,. January 1998
p = lateral pressure in kN/m
2
s = stiffener spacing in m
t = thickness of plating in mm.
303 Simplified requirements for thickness of laterally
loaded plates and to section modulus of laterally loadeo
stiffeners are given in Sec.6.
401 Buckling strength analysis are to be based on the
cbaracteristic buckling strength for the most unfavourable
buckling mode.
402 Tbe characteristic buckling strength is to be based on
the 5th l'ercentile of test results. In heu of more relevant
information or more refined analysis, characteristic buckling
strength values may be obtaineo from Classification Note
No. 30.1 .Buckling Strength Analysis .
403 In general the characteristic buckling strength is de-
termined by use of the reduced slenderness parameter, .I,
which is defined by:
.I = .jar/a
e
a e Elastic buckling stress for the buckling mode under
consideration.
404 For states of stress which can be defined by one single
reference stress, the usage factor with respect to buckling is
defined as:
a
r
11 = (Trer
(lr = reference stress due to design loading
CI
rcr
= reference characteristic buckling stress.
405 For states of stress which cannot be defined by one
single reference stress, the usage factor evaluation is to be
based on recognised interaction formulae. In Classification
Note No. 30.1 .Buckling strength analysis. usage factors are
given for some typical structural members and load combi-
nations.
406 The maximum permissible value of the usage factor,
'1
p
' is given by:
'1[1 = '" 'In
'10 = basic usage factor as given in 200
= coefficient depending on type of structure and re-
duced slenderness, see Table D2.
'"
Table D2 The coefficient"
Type of structure A" 0,2 0,2< A < 1,0 A 2: 1,0
1 Unstiffened nat
1,10 1,10 1,10
plate panels
2 Girders, beams,
stiffeners on 1,00 1,00 1,00
plates and shells
3 Columns,
1,00 1,025-0,I25A 0,90
beamcolumns
4 Shells of single
curvature (cylindrical 1,00 1,050-0,250A 0,80
shells, conical shells)
5 Shells of double
curvature (spherical
0,80 0,840-0,200A 0,64
shells, dished end
closures)
407 Initial imperfections in structural members are to be
accounted for.
If the buckling strength analysis is carried out in accordance
with the Classification Note No. 30.1 .Buckling Strength
Analysis the maximum imperfections as given in this Clas-
sification Note are not to be exceeded.
501 The cumulative usage factor, '1, defined in Sec.3
C500, is not to exceed the value:
'1p = 1,00.
601 The permissible usage factor will be specially consid-
ered in each case.
701 In general, accidental effects are to be limited to local
damage to the unit. Stress control for loading condition c)
applies to stmctural elements away from the damaged area.
702 Exceedance of the permissible stresses and usage fac-
tors given in 300 and 400 may be accepted at local areas,
provided redistribution of forces due to yielding, buckling
or fracture is accounted for.
801 For loading condition d) and e) the permissible
stresses and usage factors given in 300 and 400 may be ex-
ceeded for local areas, provided redistribution of forces due
to yielding, buckling or fracture is accounted for.
E 100 Almninimn nlloys
101 For aluminium alloy structures the permissible stresses
and usage factors are to be determined, as a principle, by the
same procedures as given for steel structures under D.
102 For welded aluminium alloy structures the allowable
stresses in the heat affected zones are to be based on the
0,2 % proof stress in annealed condition.
201 For structures made of materials other than those for
which these rules contain specified requirements, the per-
missible stresses and usage factors are to be in accordance
with a recognised code if such one exists. The safety stand-
ard is in no case to be inferior to that required for steel
structures.
202 If no recognised code exists, the permissible stresses
and usage factors will be specially considered in each case.
DEr NORSKE VERITAS
J
"

J
:J
:J
:J
J
The a-value is in no case to be taken greater than (n + 1)/4.
n = number of supported stiffeners on tbe girder span.
404 For watertight bulkhead and deck/flat structures ex-
posed to sea pressure (compartment flooded) loading condi-
tion e), the formulae in 402 and 403 are applicable, taking:
a
p
= 220 fI N/mm; in 402
Tp = 120 II N/mm ill 403.
405 The m- and k -values referred to in 402 and 403 may
be calculated accoriiing to general beam theory. In Table
B2 m- and k,-values are given for some defined load and
boundary conditions. Note that the smallest m-value is to be
applied to simple girders. For girders where brackets are
fitted or the flange area has been partly increased due to
large bending moment, a larger m-value may be accepted
outside the strengthened region.
C. Buckling
C 100 General
101 Girders, pillars and bulkheads are to fulfil the re-
quirements to buckling strength as given in Sec.5 D400.
102 Calculations methods regarding tripping of ordinary
laterally loaded girders, local torsional buckling of free
flanges and buckling of web plating and brackets are given
in Classification Note No. 30.1 .Buckling Strength
Analysis .
D 100 General
101 For girders which are parts of a complex 2- or 3-di-
mensional structural system, a complete structural analysis
may have to be carried out to demonstrate that the stresses
are acceptable when the structure is loaded as described in
300.
D 200 Calculation methods
201 ealuulaLiull1llelliull; ur pmgra1llS applied
are to take into account the effects of bending, shear, axial
and torsional deformations.
The calculations are to reflect the structural response of the
2- or 3-dimensional structure considered, with due attention
to boundary conditions.
For systems consisting of slender girders, calculations based
on beam theory (frame work analysis) may be applied, with
due attention to:
- shear area variation
- moment of inertia variation
- effective flange.
202 Acceptable calculation methods are indicated in vari-
ous Classification Notes on .Strength Analysis of Main
Structures.
D 300 Design load conditions
301 The most unfavourable of the loading conditions given
in SecA A300 is to be applied.
D 400 Permissible stresses
401 Dependent on the type of loading condition, see SecA
A300, the nominal equivalent stress in tbe girder is not to
exceed the permissible stress, up'
The nominal equivalent stress is defined as:
a
e
=.j(aa+ab)2+ 3T2 (N/mm2)
145 fl N/mm
2
for loading condition a)
190 fl N/mm
2
for loading condition b)
= 240 fl N/mm
2
for loading condition e).
a
p
The stresses given above are valid for net thicknesses or
cross-sections, i.e. corrosion addition not included.
402 For girders taking part in the overall strength of unit,
stresses due to the design pressures given in SecA D are to
be combined with relevant overall stresses.
E. Girder Brackets
E 100 Scantlings
101 The thickness of brackets on girders is not to be less
than that of the girder web plate.
102 In general the girder bracket scantlings are to be de-
termined by direct stress analysis. The stresses are to be
documented and are not to exceed the permissible stresses
given in Sec.5 D. In lieu of a direct stress analysis the fol-
lowing formula will normally give acceptable bracket scan-
tling for the different types of brackets shown in Fig.3.
2
AXX = '" AS + Ii Ap (cm)
Axx is the minimum required sectional area in cm
2
for sec-
tion X-X, including flange and/or stiffener area(s) at edge
of bracket.
As and AF are the sectional areas in cm
2
of web plate and
flange, respectively, of the weakest girder.
'" and Ii are coefficients depending on the type of bracket
and are given in Table EI.
Table El co and fl coefficients
Type of bracket co
Ii
1 0,4 0,5
2 0,45 0,4
3 0,54 0,37
4 0,6 0,35
103 Buckling strength analysis is to be carried out in ac-
cordance with Sec.5 D400.
104 At cross joints ofbracketless connections the required
flange area of free flanges may be gradually tapered beyond
the crossing flange. For flanges in tension attention is to be
given that, in way of flange intersection, lamellar tearing
may occur in Z-direction of the flange.
The Z-direction ductility of flange material is to be taken
into account.
105 The thickness of the web plate at the cross joint of
bracketless connection (between girder 1 and 2, see FigA,
is normally given by:
160A
1
t= h2 t2 (mm)
Al = minimum required flange area in cm
2
of girder 1
h2 = height in mm of girder 2
t2 = minimum required web thickness (outside the cross-
joint) in mm of girder 2.
DEr NORSKE VERITAS
2
Aw = 0,01 h
n
Iw (cm)
h
n
= hnl + hnZ = net girder height in mm after deduction
of cut-outs in the cross-section considered.
The net girder height is not to be taken larger than:
hwd
n
s
(mm)
d
n
net girder plate distance in m, measured in the
cross-section considered, see Fig. I.
If an opening is located at a distance less than hw/3 from the
cross-section considered, h.. is to be taken as the smaller of
the net height and the net distance through the opening. See
Fig.!.
hn!
hw
tw
s
Fig. 1
Effoctive web area in way of openings
h
n
tw
Fig. 2
Effoctive web area in way of brackets
303 Where the girder flange is not perpendicular to the
considered cross section in the girder, the effective web area
is to be taken as:
AW= 0,01 h
n
Iw+ 1,3 A
F
{ sin2 sin (cm
2
)
h
n
= as given in 302
AFl = flange area in cm
2
= angle of slope of continuous flange.
See also Fig.2.
Table B2 Values of m and k
Load and boundary Bending moment and
conditions shear force factors
Positions
1 2 3
1 I 2 I 3
ml m2 m3
Support Field Support
les
l
- kS
3
~ 11111111111 ~
12,0 24,0 12,0
0,50 0,50
JJII I111111 I
14,2 8,0
0,38 0,63
JJIIIIIIIIIl 8,0
0,50 0,50
"/ r.
~ ~
15,0 23,3 10,0
0,30 0,70
~ ~
16,8 7,5
0,20 0,80
---..-r11I11T1l
7,8
4 ~
0,33 0,67
B 400 Strength requirements for simple girders
I
I
I
,
401 Simple girders subjected to lateral pressure and which
are not taking part in the overall strength of the unit, are to
comply with the following:
-" sctl6fi' fiiOdUlUs iiccOfdffig 1O 402
- web area according to 403.
402 Section modulus:
1000S
2
bp 3
_ + ZK (cm)
p
Z
m = bending moment factor. m-values in accordance with
405 may be ''plied
G
p
125 ~ N/mm for loading condition a)
= 170 fl N/mm
2
ZK section modulus corrosion addition in em corre-
sponding to t
k
.
403 Web area:
AW
lO(ksSbp-ar) +AK (cm2)
-p
k, = shear force factor. k, -values in accordance with 405
may be applied
a = number of stiffeners between considered section and
nearest support
r = average point load in kN from stiffeners between
considered section and nearest support
Tp = 70 ~ N/mm2 for loading condition a)
= 95 fl N/mm
2
for loading condition b).
DEf NORSKE VERITAS
)
-_/
1
j
J
~ - - '
)

:J
~ )
~
OJ

Pt.3 Ch.1 Sec.S - Page 19
SECTION 6
PLATING AND STIFFENERS
Contents
A. General
A 100 Scope
A 200 Defmitions
A 300 Minimum thickness
B. Bending
B 100 Plating
B 200 Stiffeners
C. Buckling
C 100 General
A. General
A 100 Scope
101 The requirements in this section specify plate thick-
nesses and local strength of panels.
A 200 Defmitions
201 Symbols:
t
Z
s
I
= rule thickness of plating in mm
= rule section modulus of stiffener in cm
3
= stiffener spacing in m, measured along the plating
stiffener span in m, measured along the top flange
of the member. The depth of stiffener on crossing
panel may be deducted when deciding the span.
When bracket(s) are fitted at the end(s), the stiffener
span I may be reduced by two thirds of the bracket
arm length(s), provided the stiffener end(s) may be
assumed clamped and provided the section modulus
at the bracked end(s) is satisfactory. For curved
stiffeners I may be taken as the chord length
tk = corrosion addition in mm as given in Sec.9
2
as given in Sec.4 D
"p noniiiia1 peimissiblebenaing siressin N Iffini2(iueio
lateral pressure
G
x
nominal in plane stress in stiffener direction in
N/mm
2
. Maximum numeral value to be used.
For longitudinally stiffened strength members G
x
is
to be taken as the maximum longitudinal stress found
from the overall strength calculation.
For transversely stiffened strength members G" is to
be taken as the maximum transverse stress tound
from local strength calculations based on the design
loads given in Sec.4 D
G
y
nominal in plane stress perpendicular to stiffener di-
rection in N Imm
2
. Maximum numeral value to be
used.
Gaf
Ga.
y
is
to be taken as the maximum transverse stress found
loads given in Sec.4 D.
For transversely stiffened strength members G
s
is to
be as the maximum longitudinal stress fauna from
the overall strength calculation
axial stress in N/mm
2
in the member due to func-
tional load, calculated in accordance with Sec.5
(from overall strength calculation). Maximum nu-
meral value is to be used
axial stress in N/mm2 in the member due to envi-
ronmentalload, calculated in accordance with Sec.5
meral value is to be used.
A 300 Minirnmn thickness
301 The thickness of structures are in general not to be
less than:
t= '0
$I + tk (mm)
to = 7,0 for primary structural elements (defined in Sec.2
B)
5,0 for secondary structural elements (defined in
Sec.2 B).
B. Bending
B 100 Plating
101 The thickness of plating subjected to lateral pressure
is not to be less than:
15,8 ka kr s.JP
t= ~ +tk (mm)
G p ~
ka = correction factor for aspect ratio of plate field
= (1,1 -0,25 sll)2
= maximum 1,0 for s/l = 0,4
= minimum 0,72 for sll = 1,0
kr = correction factor for curvature perpendicular to the
stiffeners
= (I - 0,5 sir)
r = radius of curvature in m
G
p
= dependent on the type of loading condition (see Sec.4
A300), the location of the plating and whether the
plating is taking part in the overall strength or not
kp = is dependent on support condition
kp '" 1,OfnrdamJlf'JI pJlgftS
= 0,5 for simply supported edges.
For plating not taking part in the overall strength:
G
p
= 145 fl N/mm
2
= 190 fl N/mm2 for loading condition b).
For plating taking part in the overall strength:
- webs, e.g. side and bulkhead plating (provided the nom-
inal mean shear stress is not exceeding 50 fl N/mm2):
G
p
= 95 fl N/mm
2
= ll5 fl N/mm
2
- flanges, e.g. deck and bottom plating:
G
p
= 170 fl - 0,75 (G
x
+ G
y
) N/mm
2
for loading condi-
tion a), maximum 145 fl N/mm
2
= 215 fl - 0,75 (G
x
+ G
y
) N/mm2 for loading condi-
tion b), maximum 190 fl N/mm
2
.
Guidance note:
For column stabilised units of conventional type, the following
values may be used for the preliminary design of pontoon deck
and bottom plating, and will normally give acceptable results:
G
p
= 105 fl N/mm2 for both loading condition a) and b).
-e-n-d--o-f--G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e-n-o-t-e--
DEf NORSKE VERITAS
102 For watertight bulkhead and decklflat structures ex-
posed to sea pressure (compartment flooded), see Sec.4
A300 loading condition e), the formula in 101 is applicable,
taking:
"p = 220 f[ N/mm
2
.
103 For plating not mentioned in 101, lateral pressures are
normally not decisive for the thickness requirement.
If, however, other platiogs are exposed to significant lateral
pressures, the requirements apply based on values for p and
"p established in accordance with the general rule principles.
B 200 Stiffeners
201 The section modulus for longitudinals, beams, frames
and other stiffeners subjected to lateral pressure is not to be
less than:
Z
2
10001 sp 3 3
k
+ ZK (cm), minimum 15 cm
map s
m = bending moment factor, see Sec.7, Table B2
"p = dependent on the type ofioading condition, see Sec.4
A300
145 f[-"ar N/mm
2
190 f[-("ar+ "ae) N/mm
2
q af and t7 ae = 0 for strength members not taking part
in the overall strength.
k, is dependent on support condition:
k, = 1,0 if at least one end is clamped
= 0,9 if both ends are simply supported
ZK = section modulus corrosion addition in cm
3
corre-
sponding to t
k
. ZK-values in accordance with 206
may be applied.
Guidance note:
For pontoons of column stabilised units of conventional type, the
following values may be used for the preliminary design of
members taking part in the overall strength, and will normally
give acceptable results:
O'af= 50 fl N/mm
2
CTaf+uae=80fl N/mm
2
.

taking:
m = as given in Sec.7, Table B2
"p = 240 f[-("ar + "ae) (N/mm
2
).
203 The stiffener and platiog are generally to be of the
same material strength group. If the stiffener is of a higher
strength group than the plating, "p is to be calculated cor-
responding to the plate material.
If the nominal stress in the platiog is less than the acceptable
limit, the "p -value for the stiffener may be increased by a
factor of maximum f[,/f[p'
fls = material factor for stiffener
f[p = material factor for platiog.
204 The formula given in 201 is to be regarded as the re-
quirement about an axis parallel to the platiog. As an ap-
proximation the requirement to standard section modulus for
stiffeners at an oblique angle with the plating may be ob-
tained if the formula in 201 is multiplied by the factor:
1
cos IX
(J. = angle between the stiffener web plane and the plane
perpendicular to the plating.
For a-values less than 15 corrections are normally not ne-
cessary.
205 Stiffeners may in special cases be snipped at the ends
if the thickness of platiog supported by the stiffener is not
less than:
(1-0,5 s) s p
f + tk (mm)
1
t = 1,25
In such cases the section modulus of the stiffener calculated
as indicated in 201 is normally to be based on the following
parameter values:
m=8
k, = 0,9
The stiffeners are normally to be snipped to an angle of 30
degrees.
206 The section modulus corrosion addition may be taken
as:
Z
- 3
K - zl tk (em)
z[ = as given in Table B 1.
For intermediate values of flange breadth and/or stiffener
height z) may be determined by linear interpolation.
For deSign purposes ZK may be taken equal to zero if the
formula in 201 is multiplied by a corrosion factor Wk'
The following values of w
k
will normally give acceptable
results:
Wk = (1 + 0,06 tIc) for bulb sections
= (1 + 0,10 tkJ for flanged sections.
For flat bars the corrosion addition It may be added directly
to the net thickness.
The. "'l=vallle. maybe. fnr restrioted .range nf omss=
sections.
Table Bl Change in section modulus per mm change in
flange/web thickness
Stiffener Flange breadth in mm
height
0 50 100 120 150 200 250 300
mm
100 4 8 12
200 14 21 30 35
300 28 41 52 60 70
400 46 62 83 92 105 120
500 72 90 130 140 165 180 205
600 100 170 180 210 230 255
700 210 220 260 285 320
800 315 345 380
C. Buckling
C 100 General
101 The plate panels are to fulfill the requirements to
buckling strength as given in Sec.5 D400.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
'.1,
J
J
/)
JJ
,
SECTION 7
GIRDERS AND GIRDER SYSTEMS
Contents
A. General
A 100 Scope
A 200 Defmitions
B 100 General
B 200 Effective flange
B 300 Effective web
C. Buckling
C 100 General
D 100 General
D 400 Pennissible stresses
E. Girder Brackets
E 100 Scantlings
A 100 Scope
A. General
101 The requirements in this section are applicable to
simple girders. Further procedures for the calculations of
complex girder systems are indicated.
A 200 Defmitions
201 Symbols:
S = girder span in m. The web height of in-plane girders
may be deducted. When bracket(s) are fitted at the
(wg
thirds of the bracket arm length(s), provided the
girder end(s) may be assumed clamped and provided
the section modulus at the bracketed end(s) is satis-
factory
b breadth of load area in m (plate flange) b may be
determined as:
b = 0,5 (I[ + IV (m)
I[ and l.z are the spans in m of the supported stiffen-
ers
2
according to Sec.4 D
"p = nominal permissible bending stress in N/mm2 due to
lateral pressure
Tp = nominal permissible shear stress in N/mm
2
"a = "ar in N/mm
2
= "ar+ "ae in N/mm
2
"ar = axial stress in N Imm
2
in the girder due to functional
load, calculated in accordance with Sec.5 (from the
overall strength calculation)
O:ae = axial stress in N/m.m2 in the girder due to environ-
mental load, calculated in accordance with Sec.5
(from the overall strength calculation)
"b = nominal bending stress in N Imm
2
in the girder
T = nominal shear stress in N/mm
2
in the girder adjusted
for cut-outs by multiplying with the factor hwlh..
tk = corrosion addition in mm as specified in Sec.9 IS500
Z = Rule section modulus in cm
3
Aw = Rule effective web area in cm
2
A = Rule cross-sectional area in cm
2
tw = web thickness in mm
hw = web height in mm
br = flange breadth in mm
h
n
= net girder height in mm as specified in B300.
301 The thickness of web and flange platiog is not to be
less than given in Sec.6 A300.
B 100 General
101 The requirements to section modulus and web area
given in 400 are applicable to simple girders supporting
stiffeners or other girders exposed to linearly distributed la-
teral pressure. It is assumed that the girder satisfies the basic
assumptions of simple beam theory and that the supported
members are approximately eveuly spaced and similarly
supported at both ends. Other loads will have to be specially
considered.
102 When boundary conditions for individual girders are
not predictable due to dependance of adjacent structures,
direct calculations according to the procedures given in D
will be required.
103 The section modulus and web area of the girder are
to be taken in accordance with particulars as given in 200
and 300. Structural modelling in connection with direct
stress analysis is to be based on the same particulars when
applicable.
201 The effective plate flange area is defined as the
cross-sectional area of plating within the effective flange
width. The cross section area of continuous stiffeners within
me effeciive n!UigemilylieilielUtletl. Tlieefl\!CilvefIaiige
width be is determined by the following formula:
b
e
= Cb (m)
C = as given in Table B 1 for various numbers of eveuly
spaced point loads (r) on the span
Table Bl Values of C
alb 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 >7
C (r;;':6) 0,00 0,38 0,67 0,84 0,93 0,97 0,99 1,00
C (r=5) 0,00 0,33 0,58 0,73 0,84 0,89 0,92 0,93
C (r=4) 0,00 0,27 0,49 0,63 0,74 0,81 0,85 0,87
C (r$;31 0,00 0,22 0,40 0,54 0,65 0,73 0,78 0,80
a = distance between points of zero bending moments
= S for simply supported girders
= 0,6 S for girders fixed at both ends.
B 300 Effective web
301 Holes in girders will generally be accepted provided
the shear stress level is acceptable and the buckling strength
is sufficient. Holes are to be kept well clear of end of
brackets and locations where shear stresses are high.
302 For ordinary girder cross-sections the effective web
area is to be taken as:
DET NORSKE VERITAS
taking:
"p = 220 f[ N/mm
2
.
103 For plating not mentioned in 101, lateral pressures are
normally not decisive for the thickness requirement.
If, however, other platiogs are exposed to significant lateral
pressures, the requirements apply based on values for p and
"p established in accordance with the general rule principles.
B 200 Stiffeners
201 The section modulus for longitudinals, beams, frames
and other stiffeners subjected to lateral pressure is not to be
less than:
Z
2
10001 sp 3 3
k
+ ZK (cm), minimum 15 cm
map s
m = bending moment factor, see Sec.7, Table B2
"p = dependent on the type ofioading condition, see Sec.4
A300
145 f[-"ar N/mm
2
190 f[-("ar+ "ae) N/mm
2
q af and t7 ae = 0 for strength members not taking part
in the overall strength.
k, is dependent on support condition:
k, = 1,0 if at least one end is clamped
= 0,9 if both ends are simply supported
ZK = section modulus corrosion addition in cm
3
corre-
sponding to t
k
. ZK-values in accordance with 206
may be applied.
Guidance note:
For pontoons of column stabilised units of conventional type, the
following values may be used for the preliminary design of
members taking part in the overall strength, and will normally
give acceptable results:
O'af= 50 fl N/mm
2
CTaf+uae=80fl N/mm
2
.

taking:
m = as given in Sec.7, Table B2
"p = 240 f[-("ar + "ae) (N/mm
2
).
203 The stiffener and platiog are generally to be of the
same material strength group. If the stiffener is of a higher
strength group than the plating, "p is to be calculated cor-
responding to the plate material.
If the nominal stress in the platiog is less than the acceptable
limit, the "p -value for the stiffener may be increased by a
factor of maximum f[,/f[p'
fls = material factor for stiffener
f[p = material factor for platiog.
204 The formula given in 201 is to be regarded as the re-
quirement about an axis parallel to the platiog. As an ap-
proximation the requirement to standard section modulus for
stiffeners at an oblique angle with the plating may be ob-
tained if the formula in 201 is multiplied by the factor:
1
cos IX
(J. = angle between the stiffener web plane and the plane
perpendicular to the plating.
For a-values less than 15 corrections are normally not ne-
cessary.
205 Stiffeners may in special cases be snipped at the ends
if the thickness of platiog supported by the stiffener is not
less than:
(1-0,5 s) s p
f + tk (mm)
1
t = 1,25
In such cases the section modulus of the stiffener calculated
as indicated in 201 is normally to be based on the following
parameter values:
m=8
k, = 0,9
The stiffeners are normally to be snipped to an angle of 30
degrees.
206 The section modulus corrosion addition may be taken
as:
Z
- 3
K - zl tk (em)
z[ = as given in Table B 1.
For intermediate values of flange breadth and/or stiffener
height z) may be determined by linear interpolation.
For deSign purposes ZK may be taken equal to zero if the
formula in 201 is multiplied by a corrosion factor Wk'
The following values of w
k
will normally give acceptable
results:
Wk = (1 + 0,06 tIc) for bulb sections
= (1 + 0,10 tkJ for flanged sections.
For flat bars the corrosion addition It may be added directly
to the net thickness.
The. "'l=vallle. maybe. fnr restrioted .range nf omss=
sections.
Table Bl Change in section modulus per mm change in
flange/web thickness
Stiffener Flange breadth in mm
height
0 50 100 120 150 200 250 300
mm
100 4 8 12
200 14 21 30 35
300 28 41 52 60 70
400 46 62 83 92 105 120
500 72 90 130 140 165 180 205
600 100 170 180 210 230 255
700 210 220 260 285 320
800 315 345 380
C. Buckling
C 100 General
101 The plate panels are to fulfill the requirements to
buckling strength as given in Sec.5 D400.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
'.1,
J
J
/)
JJ
,
SECTION 7
GIRDERS AND GIRDER SYSTEMS
Contents
A. General
A 100 Scope
A 200 Defmitions
B 100 General
B 300 Effective web
C. Buckling
C 100 General
D 100 General
D 400 Pennissible stresses
E. Girder Brackets
E 100 Scantlings
A 100 Scope
A. General
simple girders. Further procedures for the calculations of
complex girder systems are indicated.
A 200 Defmitions
201 Symbols:
S = girder span in m. The web height of in-plane girders
may be deducted. When bracket(s) are fitted at the
(wg
thirds of the bracket arm length(s), provided the
girder end(s) may be assumed clamped and provided
the section modulus at the bracketed end(s) is satis-
factory
b breadth of load area in m (plate flange) b may be
determined as:
b = 0,5 (I[ + IV (m)
I[ and l.z are the spans in m of the supported stiffen-
ers
2
according to Sec.4 D
"p = nominal permissible bending stress in N/mm2 due to
lateral pressure
Tp = nominal permissible shear stress in N/mm
2
"a = "ar in N/mm
2
= "ar+ "ae in N/mm
2
"ar = axial stress in N Imm
2
in the girder due to functional
load, calculated in accordance with Sec.5 (from the
overall strength calculation)
O:ae = axial stress in N/m.m2 in the girder due to environ-
mental load, calculated in accordance with Sec.5
(from the overall strength calculation)
"b = nominal bending stress in N Imm
2
in the girder
T = nominal shear stress in N/mm
2
in the girder adjusted
for cut-outs by multiplying with the factor hwlh..
tk = corrosion addition in mm as specified in Sec.9 IS500
Z = Rule section modulus in cm
3
Aw = Rule effective web area in cm
2
A = Rule cross-sectional area in cm
2
tw = web thickness in mm
hw = web height in mm
br = flange breadth in mm
h
n
= net girder height in mm as specified in B300.
301 The thickness of web and flange platiog is not to be
less than given in Sec.6 A300.
B 100 General
101 The requirements to section modulus and web area
given in 400 are applicable to simple girders supporting
stiffeners or other girders exposed to linearly distributed la-
teral pressure. It is assumed that the girder satisfies the basic
assumptions of simple beam theory and that the supported
members are approximately eveuly spaced and similarly
supported at both ends. Other loads will have to be specially
considered.
102 When boundary conditions for individual girders are
not predictable due to dependance of adjacent structures,
direct calculations according to the procedures given in D
will be required.
103 The section modulus and web area of the girder are
to be taken in accordance with particulars as given in 200
and 300. Structural modelling in connection with direct
stress analysis is to be based on the same particulars when
applicable.
201 The effective plate flange area is defined as the
cross-sectional area of plating within the effective flange
width. The cross section area of continuous stiffeners within
me effeciive n!UigemilylieilielUtletl. Tlieefl\!CilvefIaiige
width be is determined by the following formula:
b
e
= Cb (m)
C = as given in Table B 1 for various numbers of eveuly
spaced point loads (r) on the span
Table Bl Values of C
alb 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 >7
C (r;;':6) 0,00 0,38 0,67 0,84 0,93 0,97 0,99 1,00
C (r=5) 0,00 0,33 0,58 0,73 0,84 0,89 0,92 0,93
C (r=4) 0,00 0,27 0,49 0,63 0,74 0,81 0,85 0,87
C (r$;31 0,00 0,22 0,40 0,54 0,65 0,73 0,78 0,80
a = distance between points of zero bending moments
= S for simply supported girders
= 0,6 S for girders fixed at both ends.
B 300 Effective web
301 Holes in girders will generally be accepted provided
the shear stress level is acceptable and the buckling strength
is sufficient. Holes are to be kept well clear of end of
brackets and locations where shear stresses are high.
302 For ordinary girder cross-sections the effective web
area is to be taken as:
DET NORSKE VERITAS
2
Aw = 0,01 h
n
Iw (cm)
h
n
= hnl + hnZ = net girder height in mm after deduction
of cut-outs in the cross-section considered.
The net girder height is not to be taken larger than:
hwd
n
s
(mm)
d
n
net girder plate distance in m, measured in the
cross-section considered, see Fig. I.
If an opening is located at a distance less than hw/3 from the
cross-section considered, h.. is to be taken as the smaller of
the net height and the net distance through the opening. See
Fig.!.
hn!
hw
tw
s
Fig. 1
Effoctive web area in way of openings
h
n
tw
Fig. 2
Effoctive web area in way of brackets
303 Where the girder flange is not perpendicular to the
considered cross section in the girder, the effective web area
is to be taken as:
AW= 0,01 h
n
Iw+ 1,3 A
F
{ sin2 sin (cm
2
)
h
n
= as given in 302
AFl = flange area in cm
2
= angle of slope of continuous flange.
See also Fig.2.
Table B2 Values of m and k
Load and boundary Bending moment and
conditions shear force factors
Positions
1 2 3
1 I 2 I 3
ml m2 m3
Support Field Support
les
l
- kS
3
~ 11111111111 ~
12,0 24,0 12,0
0,50 0,50
JJII I111111 I
14,2 8,0
0,38 0,63
JJIIIIIIIIIl 8,0
0,50 0,50
"/ r.
~ ~
15,0 23,3 10,0
0,30 0,70
~ ~
16,8 7,5
0,20 0,80
---..-r11I11T1l
7,8
4 ~
0,33 0,67
I
I
I
,
401 Simple girders subjected to lateral pressure and which
are not taking part in the overall strength of the unit, are to
comply with the following:
-" sctl6fi' fiiOdUlUs iiccOfdffig 1O 402
- web area according to 403.
402 Section modulus:
1000S
2
bp 3
_ + ZK (cm)
p
Z
m = bending moment factor. m-values in accordance with
405 may be ''plied
G
p
125 ~ N/mm for loading condition a)
= 170 fl N/mm
2
ZK section modulus corrosion addition in em corre-
sponding to t
k
.
403 Web area:
AW
lO(ksSbp-ar) +AK (cm2)
-p
k, = shear force factor. k, -values in accordance with 405
may be applied
a = number of stiffeners between considered section and
nearest support
r = average point load in kN from stiffeners between
considered section and nearest support
Tp = 70 ~ N/mm2 for loading condition a)
= 95 fl N/mm
2
for loading condition b).
DEf NORSKE VERITAS
)
-_/
1
j
J
~ - - '
)

:J
~ )
~
OJ

SECTION 6
PLATING AND STIFFENERS
Contents
A. General
A 100 Scope
A 200 Defmitions
B. Bending
B 100 Plating
B 200 Stiffeners
C. Buckling
C 100 General
A. General
A 100 Scope
101 The requirements in this section specify plate thick-
nesses and local strength of panels.
A 200 Defmitions
201 Symbols:
t
Z
s
I
= rule thickness of plating in mm
= rule section modulus of stiffener in cm
3
= stiffener spacing in m, measured along the plating
stiffener span in m, measured along the top flange
of the member. The depth of stiffener on crossing
panel may be deducted when deciding the span.
When bracket(s) are fitted at the end(s), the stiffener
span I may be reduced by two thirds of the bracket
arm length(s), provided the stiffener end(s) may be
assumed clamped and provided the section modulus
at the bracked end(s) is satisfactory. For curved
stiffeners I may be taken as the chord length
tk = corrosion addition in mm as given in Sec.9
2
as given in Sec.4 D
"p noniiiia1 peimissiblebenaing siressin N Iffini2(iueio
lateral pressure
G
x
nominal in plane stress in stiffener direction in
N/mm
2
. Maximum numeral value to be used.
x
is
to be taken as the maximum longitudinal stress found
from the overall strength calculation.
For transversely stiffened strength members G" is to
be taken as the maximum transverse stress tound
loads given in Sec.4 D
G
y
nominal in plane stress perpendicular to stiffener di-
rection in N Imm
2
. Maximum numeral value to be
used.
Gaf
Ga.
y
is
to be taken as the maximum transverse stress found
loads given in Sec.4 D.
For transversely stiffened strength members G
s
is to
be as the maximum longitudinal stress fauna from
the overall strength calculation
axial stress in N/mm
2
in the member due to func-
tional load, calculated in accordance with Sec.5
meral value is to be used
axial stress in N/mm2 in the member due to envi-
ronmentalload, calculated in accordance with Sec.5
meral value is to be used.
A 300 Minirnmn thickness
301 The thickness of structures are in general not to be
less than:
t= '0
$I + tk (mm)
to = 7,0 for primary structural elements (defined in Sec.2
B)
5,0 for secondary structural elements (defined in
Sec.2 B).
B. Bending
B 100 Plating
101 The thickness of plating subjected to lateral pressure
is not to be less than:
15,8 ka kr s.JP
t= ~ +tk (mm)
G p ~
ka = correction factor for aspect ratio of plate field
= (1,1 -0,25 sll)2
= maximum 1,0 for s/l = 0,4
= minimum 0,72 for sll = 1,0
kr = correction factor for curvature perpendicular to the
stiffeners
= (I - 0,5 sir)
r = radius of curvature in m
G
p
= dependent on the type of loading condition (see Sec.4
A300), the location of the plating and whether the
plating is taking part in the overall strength or not
kp = is dependent on support condition
kp '" 1,OfnrdamJlf'JI pJlgftS
= 0,5 for simply supported edges.
For plating not taking part in the overall strength:
G
p
= 145 fl N/mm
2
= 190 fl N/mm2 for loading condition b).
For plating taking part in the overall strength:
- webs, e.g. side and bulkhead plating (provided the nom-
inal mean shear stress is not exceeding 50 fl N/mm2):
G
p
= 95 fl N/mm
2
= ll5 fl N/mm
2
- flanges, e.g. deck and bottom plating:
G
p
= 170 fl - 0,75 (G
x
+ G
y
) N/mm
2
for loading condi-
tion a), maximum 145 fl N/mm
2
= 215 fl - 0,75 (G
x
+ G
y
) N/mm2 for loading condi-
tion b), maximum 190 fl N/mm
2
.
Guidance note:
For column stabilised units of conventional type, the following
values may be used for the preliminary design of pontoon deck
and bottom plating, and will normally give acceptable results:
G
p
= 105 fl N/mm2 for both loading condition a) and b).
-e-n-d--o-f--G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e-n-o-t-e--
DEf NORSKE VERITAS
Rules for Mobile Offshore Units ,. January 1998
p = lateral pressure in kN/m
2
s = stiffener spacing in m
t = thickness of plating in mm.
303 Simplified requirements for thickness of laterally
loaded plates and to section modulus of laterally loadeo
stiffeners are given in Sec.6.
401 Buckling strength analysis are to be based on the
cbaracteristic buckling strength for the most unfavourable
buckling mode.
402 Tbe characteristic buckling strength is to be based on
the 5th l'ercentile of test results. In heu of more relevant
information or more refined analysis, characteristic buckling
strength values may be obtaineo from Classification Note
No. 30.1 .Buckling Strength Analysis .
403 In general the characteristic buckling strength is de-
termined by use of the reduced slenderness parameter, .I,
which is defined by:
.I = .jar/a
e
a e Elastic buckling stress for the buckling mode under
consideration.
404 For states of stress which can be defined by one single
reference stress, the usage factor with respect to buckling is
defined as:
a
r
11 = (Trer
(lr = reference stress due to design loading
CI
rcr
= reference characteristic buckling stress.
405 For states of stress which cannot be defined by one
single reference stress, the usage factor evaluation is to be
based on recognised interaction formulae. In Classification
Note No. 30.1 .Buckling strength analysis. usage factors are
given for some typical structural members and load combi-
nations.
406 The maximum permissible value of the usage factor,
'1
p
' is given by:
'1[1 = '" 'In
'10 = basic usage factor as given in 200
= coefficient depending on type of structure and re-
duced slenderness, see Table D2.
'"
Table D2 The coefficient"
Type of structure A" 0,2 0,2< A < 1,0 A 2: 1,0
1 Unstiffened nat
1,10 1,10 1,10
plate panels
2 Girders, beams,
stiffeners on 1,00 1,00 1,00
plates and shells
3 Columns,
1,00 1,025-0,I25A 0,90
beamcolumns
4 Shells of single
curvature (cylindrical 1,00 1,050-0,250A 0,80
shells, conical shells)
5 Shells of double
curvature (spherical
0,80 0,840-0,200A 0,64
shells, dished end
closures)
407 Initial imperfections in structural members are to be
accounted for.
If the buckling strength analysis is carried out in accordance
with the Classification Note No. 30.1 .Buckling Strength
Analysis the maximum imperfections as given in this Clas-
sification Note are not to be exceeded.
501 The cumulative usage factor, '1, defined in Sec.3
C500, is not to exceed the value:
'1p = 1,00.
601 The permissible usage factor will be specially consid-
ered in each case.
701 In general, accidental effects are to be limited to local
damage to the unit. Stress control for loading condition c)
applies to stmctural elements away from the damaged area.
702 Exceedance of the permissible stresses and usage fac-
tors given in 300 and 400 may be accepted at local areas,
provided redistribution of forces due to yielding, buckling
or fracture is accounted for.
801 For loading condition d) and e) the permissible
stresses and usage factors given in 300 and 400 may be ex-
ceeded for local areas, provided redistribution of forces due
to yielding, buckling or fracture is accounted for.
E 100 Almninimn nlloys
101 For aluminium alloy structures the permissible stresses
and usage factors are to be determined, as a principle, by the
same procedures as given for steel structures under D.
102 For welded aluminium alloy structures the allowable
stresses in the heat affected zones are to be based on the
0,2 % proof stress in annealed condition.
201 For structures made of materials other than those for
which these rules contain specified requirements, the per-
missible stresses and usage factors are to be in accordance
with a recognised code if such one exists. The safety stand-
ard is in no case to be inferior to that required for steel
structures.
202 If no recognised code exists, the permissible stresses
and usage factors will be specially considered in each case.
DEr NORSKE VERITAS
J
"

J
:J
:J
:J
J
The a-value is in no case to be taken greater than (n + 1)/4.
n = number of supported stiffeners on tbe girder span.
404 For watertight bulkhead and deck/flat structures ex-
posed to sea pressure (compartment flooded) loading condi-
tion e), the formulae in 402 and 403 are applicable, taking:
a
p
= 220 fI N/mm; in 402
Tp = 120 II N/mm ill 403.
405 The m- and k -values referred to in 402 and 403 may
be calculated accoriiing to general beam theory. In Table
B2 m- and k,-values are given for some defined load and
boundary conditions. Note that the smallest m-value is to be
applied to simple girders. For girders where brackets are
fitted or the flange area has been partly increased due to
large bending moment, a larger m-value may be accepted
outside the strengthened region.
C. Buckling
C 100 General
101 Girders, pillars and bulkheads are to fulfil the re-
quirements to buckling strength as given in Sec.5 D400.
102 Calculations methods regarding tripping of ordinary
laterally loaded girders, local torsional buckling of free
flanges and buckling of web plating and brackets are given
in Classification Note No. 30.1 .Buckling Strength
Analysis .
D 100 General
101 For girders which are parts of a complex 2- or 3-di-
mensional structural system, a complete structural analysis
may have to be carried out to demonstrate that the stresses
are acceptable when the structure is loaded as described in
300.
201 ealuulaLiull1llelliull; ur pmgra1llS applied
are to take into account the effects of bending, shear, axial
and torsional deformations.
The calculations are to reflect the structural response of the
2- or 3-dimensional structure considered, with due attention
to boundary conditions.
For systems consisting of slender girders, calculations based
on beam theory (frame work analysis) may be applied, with
due attention to:
- shear area variation
- moment of inertia variation
- effective flange.
202 Acceptable calculation methods are indicated in vari-
ous Classification Notes on .Strength Analysis of Main
Structures.
301 The most unfavourable of the loading conditions given
in SecA A300 is to be applied.
D 400 Permissible stresses
401 Dependent on the type of loading condition, see SecA
A300, the nominal equivalent stress in tbe girder is not to
exceed the permissible stress, up'
The nominal equivalent stress is defined as:
a
e
=.j(aa+ab)2+ 3T2 (N/mm2)
145 fl N/mm
2
190 fl N/mm
2
= 240 fl N/mm
2
for loading condition e).
a
p
The stresses given above are valid for net thicknesses or
cross-sections, i.e. corrosion addition not included.
402 For girders taking part in the overall strength of unit,
stresses due to the design pressures given in SecA D are to
be combined with relevant overall stresses.
E. Girder Brackets
E 100 Scantlings
101 The thickness of brackets on girders is not to be less
than that of the girder web plate.
102 In general the girder bracket scantlings are to be de-
termined by direct stress analysis. The stresses are to be
documented and are not to exceed the permissible stresses
given in Sec.5 D. In lieu of a direct stress analysis the fol-
lowing formula will normally give acceptable bracket scan-
tling for the different types of brackets shown in Fig.3.
2
AXX = '" AS + Ii Ap (cm)
Axx is the minimum required sectional area in cm
2
for sec-
tion X-X, including flange and/or stiffener area(s) at edge
of bracket.
As and AF are the sectional areas in cm
2
of web plate and
flange, respectively, of the weakest girder.
'" and Ii are coefficients depending on the type of bracket
and are given in Table EI.
Table El co and fl coefficients
Type of bracket co
Ii
1 0,4 0,5
2 0,45 0,4
3 0,54 0,37
4 0,6 0,35
103 Buckling strength analysis is to be carried out in ac-
cordance with Sec.5 D400.
104 At cross joints ofbracketless connections the required
flange area of free flanges may be gradually tapered beyond
the crossing flange. For flanges in tension attention is to be
given that, in way of flange intersection, lamellar tearing
may occur in Z-direction of the flange.
The Z-direction ductility of flange material is to be taken
into account.
105 The thickness of the web plate at the cross joint of
bracketless connection (between girder 1 and 2, see FigA,
is normally given by:
160A
1
t= h2 t2 (mm)
Al = minimum required flange area in cm
2
of girder 1
h2 = height in mm of girder 2
t2 = minimum required web thickness (outside the cross-
joint) in mm of girder 2.
DEr NORSKE VERITAS
I
I
I
I
---;--
I',
I

I+., "I
I
Fig. 3
Bracket design
Fig. 4
Bradetless connection
I I
I lAs
I I
TYPE 1
TYPE 3
I
:As
I
I

,
t
-
Girder 1
A,
t ..

TYPE 2
a
TYPE 4
Girder 2
I
t
DET NORSKE VERITAS
Flange sniped at an
angle :s 15'
A.
I
I
lAs
I
The toe radius
should be 2: a
I
I
I As
I
I
J
]
]
-)
6

f\
'J
C)
()
SECTION 5
OVERALL STRENGTH
Contents
A. General
A 100 Scope
A 200 References
B 100 General
e 100 General
D. Usage Factors and Permissihle Stresses
D 100 General
E. Stmctures Other than Steel
E 100 Aluminium alloys
A. General
A 100 Scope
101 The requirements in this section are applicable in
connection with overall stmctoral analysis of a unit.
A 200 References
201 Reqnirements applicable to column stabilised units and
self elevating units are also given in Ch.2 Sec.2 and Ch.2
Sec 3, respectively_
B 100 General
101 The design forces and moments considered decisive
for the scantlings are in general to be derived from loads in
accordance with SecA applied to a relevant structoral model
of the platform. More refined methods may be required
when considered necessary for unconventional types of de-
signs. Other methods based on accepted theories on envi-
ronmental conditions and loads may be applied when
properly documented.
C 100 General
101 Calculation methods or computer programmes applied
are to take into aCcoWlt the effects of bending, shear, axial
and torsional deflections of the overall structore.
sification Notes on Strength Analysis of Main Structures",
of various mobile offshore units.
D. Usage Factors and Permissible Stresses
D 100 General
101 The permissible usage factor, '1
p
' is defined as the ra-
tio between permissible stress and a stress representing the
characteristic strength or capability of the stmctoral mem-
ber.
102 The permissible usage factors and stresses are a func-
tion of:
- loading condition
- failure mode
- importance of strength member.
103 Stresses are to be calculated using net scantlings, i.e.
with any corrosion addition deducted.
104 If the residual strength of the unit after collapse of a
vital stmctoral member does not satisfy the criteria in 800,
the permissible stresses and usage factors in 300 and 400 for
the pertinent vital structoral members are to be multiplied
by a factor 0,9 and the fatigne factor in 500 by 0,1 for
analysis of the intact unit.
201 The basic usage factor, '10' is given in Table D 1.
Table Dl Basic usage factor '10
Loading condition (Sec.4)
a)
I
b)
I
c)
I
d)
I
e)

0,60
I
0,80
I
0,80
I
1,00 I 1,00 1)
1) If a basic usage factor of 0,75 is applied, environmental loads may
be disregarded.
301 The nominal equivalent stress determined in accord-
ance with Sec.3 C300 is normally not to exceed the per-
missible stress determined as follows:
Up = '10 uf or
up = '10 240 f1 (N/mm
2
).
302 For laterally loaded plates also exposed to in plane
stresses the nominal equivalent elastic stress calculated in the
middle of the plate field is not to exceed the permissible
stress determined as follows:
up = ('10 + 0,1) 240 fl (N/mm2).
However, the nominal elastic bending stress in the middle
of the plate field is not to exceed the permissible stress given
in 301.
Guidance note:
The nominal elastic bending stress in the middle of the plate field
is given by the followmg formula:
2
,,= 250pk"z ( +) (N/mm2)
ka is given in Sec.6 B100
DET NORSKE VERITAS
criteria. In such cases the size and impact speed of the vessel
to be considered is subject to approval.
The impact energy is given as:
1 2
E = "2 (m + a) v (kJ)
m = displacement of vessel in t
a = added mass of vessel, normally assumed as 0,4 m for
sideway collision and 0,1 m for bow or stem colli-
sion
v = impact speed in m/s.
The impact speed caused by wave induced motion of a sup-
ply vessel may be estimated as
v = 0,5 Hs (m/s)
Hs = maximum significant wave height in m for operation
close to the unit.
102 Collision is to be considered for all elements of the
unit which may be hit either by sideway, bow or stem col-
lision. The vertical extent of the collision zone is to be based
on the depth and draught of visiting supply vessels and the
relative motion between the supply vessels and the unit.
201 The weights of the dropped objects to be considered
for design of the unit according to Sec.3 A600 are taken as
the operational hook loads in cranes.
The lDlpact energy is given as:
E=mgoh (kJ)
m = mass of object in t
h = drop height in air in m.
The impact energy at sea level is normally not to be taken
less than 5 MJ for Cranes with maximum capacity more than
30 tonnes. A reduced impact energy may be accepted by
special consideration for smaller cranes and special purpose
cranes.
The impact energy below sea level is assumed to be equal
to the energy at sea level, unless otherwise documented.
202 Critical areas for dropped objects are to be determined
on the basis of the actual movement of loads assuming a
drop direction within ali angle with the vertical direction:
- 10 in air, for floating units
- 50 in air, for bottom supported units
- 15 in water.
203 Dropped objects are to be considered for vital struc-
tural elements of the unit within the areas given in 202.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
.]

:)

PI.3 Ch.1 Sec.8 - Page 25
SECTION 8
WELD CONNECTIONS
Contents
A. General
A 100 Scope
A 200 Definitions
B 100 Butt joints
C 100 General
C 200 Ordinary fillet welds ,
C 300 Partly penetration welds and fillet welds in cross con-
nections subject to high stresses
D 100 General
A. General
A 100 Scope
101 The requirements in this section are related to types
and size of welds.
A 200 Defmitions
201 Symbols:
a = sectional area of weld
t = throat thickness of weld
tk = corrosion addition in mm as specified in Sec.9
I I t=t"t " 6mm
MAX Smm
47 1 1'>'-
L-J l MAX. 3mm
MAX.5mm
5mm I p=t.v , __ [It
:> Smm
5mJ [Jt
;lOo 6mm
Fig. 1
Manually welded butt joint edges
201 The connection of a plate abutting on another plate is
to be made as indicated in Fig.2.
The throat thickness of the weld is always to be measured
as the normal to the weld surface, as indicated in Fig.2d.
202 The type of connection is normally to be adopted as
follows:
a) Full penetration weld:
Note that values for one side unprotected is to be
applied for fillet welds
-__ -____ a. = aAAilign tQ\k' ill
important cross connections in structures exposed to high
stress, especially dynamic, e.g. for special areas as de-
fined in Sec.! B .
.
.-.-1
\
,../
B 100 Butt joints
101 For panels with plates of equal thickness, joints for
manual welding are normally to be butt welded with edges
prepared as indicated in Fig.!.
When automatic or semi-automatic welding methods are
adopted, the edge preparation will be specially considered,
taking into account the welding method, number of runs,
heat input etc.
102 For butt welded joints of plates with thickness differ-
ence exceeding 4 mm, the thicker plate is normally to be
tapered. The taper is generally not to exceed 1 : 3.
After tapering, the end preparation may be as indicated in
!01 for plates of equal thickness.
103 All types of butt joints are normally to be welded from
suitable method.
104 Butt welding from one side only may be permitted
after special consideration, taking into account stress level
and fatigue properties.
b) Partly penetration weld:
connections where the static stress level is high. Ac-
ceptable also for dynamically stressed connections, pro-
vided the equivalent stress is acceptable, see C300.
c) Fillet weld:
connections where:
- stresses in the weld are mainly shear, or
- direct stresses are moderate and mainly static, or
- dynamic stresses in the abutting plate are small.
203 Full penetration welds are normally to be welded from
suitable method.
If such a cleaning at the root is not carried out, the weld is
to be considered as a partly penetration weld.
204 Double continuous welds are required in the following
connections, irrespective of the stress level:
- oiltight and watertight connections
- connections at supports and ends of girders, stiffeners and
pillars
- connections in foundations and supporting structures for
machinery
- connections in rudders, except where access difficulties
necessitate slot welds.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
205 Intermittent fillet welds may be used in the connection
of girder and stiffener webs to plate and girder flange plate,
respectively, where the connection is moderately stressed.
With reference to Fig.3, the various types of intermittent
welds are as follows:
- chain weld
- staggered weld
- scallop weld (closed).
206 Where intermittent welds are accepted, scallop welds
are to be used in tanks for water ballast or fresh water.
Chain and staggered welds may be used in dry spaces and
tanks arranged for fuel oil only.
301 Two types of overlapped joints are indicated in FigA.
Type .a. (lap joint) may be used in end connections of stif-
feners. Such overlaps will normally not be accepted for
connection of plates to panels.
Type .b . (slot weld) may be used for connection of plating
to internal webs, where access for welding is not practicable.
The length of slots and distance between slots will be con-
sidered in view of the required size of welding.
rJ
0) FULL PENETRATKlN [!] t-
WELDS

bl PARTLY PENETRATION n t.
WELD
f
rJ root face
4..
cl fiLLET WELD

dl THROAT THICKNESS t

Fig. 2
Tee or cross joints
CHAIN WEL6 T T
I -'- I
I T
hI
/ LR"'2Smm
CONTINUOUS
WELD WITH SCALLOPS
DEPTH OF NOTCH 0,25 h BUT
NOT GREATER THAN 7S mm
THE WELD TO BE CARRIED
ROUND THE LEG
Fig. 3
Intermittent welds
.... 1
___ --oJ ...
r:::=---"'" A
.......... ,.
A: LAP JOINT

I fll \
e: SLOT WELD
Fig. 4
Lap joint and slot welds
C 100 General
101 The sizes of weld connections are to be as given in
200 to 500.
If the yield stress of the weld deposit is higher than that of
the base metal, the size of ordinary fillet weld connections
may be reduced as indicated in 103.
The weld dimensions are, however, in no case to be less
than 0,75 of the basic size.
The yield stress of the weld deposit is in no case to be less
than given in Pt.2 Ch.3 Sec.3.
102 Welding consumables used for welding of norrnal
steel and some high strength steels are assumed to give weld
deposits with yield stress C1fw as indicated in Table Cl.
If welding consumables with deposits of lower yield stress
than specified in Table Cl are used, the C1fw-value is to be
stated on the drawings submitted for approval.
103 The size of some weld connections may be reduced:
a) Corresponding to the strength of the weld metal, fw:
0,75
fw=C:) or
b) Corresponding to the strength ratio value fr' base metal
to weld metal:
DE! NORSKE VERITAS
--;
"-/'
)
)
---"\
_J
/)

"J .
()
o
402 For structural details intended to absorb or transmit
the mooring forces, the minimum breaking load of the chain
cable or steel wire rope is to be used in conjunction with the
loading condition b) as defined in A301.
D 100 General
101 Structural strength is to be evaluated considering all
relevant, realistic loading conditions and combinations.
Scantlings are to be determined on the basis of criteria which
combine, in a rational manner, the effects ofrelevant global
Table Dl Local functional loads on decks
Deck area
kNlm.l. 1)
Areas not exposed to functional loads 2,5
Crew spaces, walkways, general traffic
areas, etc.
4,5 !
Work areas 9,0
General storage area 13,0
Storage of cement, wet or dry mud, etc.
p goH
minimum 13,0
H - stowage height in m.
1) Self-weight of deck is included. i
and local responses for each individual structural element. D 500 Local environmental loads
102 Relevant, limiting design criteria upon which scan-
tlings are based are stated in_the 'Appendix to Classification
Certificate I '
103 In the determination of local pressure loadings, con-
sideration is to be given to appropriate load cases described
in SecA A301. Relevant combinations of internal and ex-
ternal pressure loadings for tanks are to be considered.
Guidance note:
In most cases, for external plate fields relevant combinations of
external and internal pressure load cases will result in load con-
ditions where the external and internal pressures are not consid-
ered to be acting simultaneously (except as provided for in Ch.2
Sec.2 C300).
For internal structures the simultaneous action of external and
internal pressures load cases may provide for the designing load
case. For internal structures the internal pressure should nor-
mally not be considered to act simultaneously on both sides of
the same structural element.
104 Design, local deck loadings are to be documented on
a 'load-plan'. This plan is to clearly show the design uni-
form and concentrated loads for all deck areas for each rel-
evant mode of operation.
D 200 Sea pressures
201 For load conditions where environmental load effects
are to be considered the pressures resulting from sea load-
ings are to include consideration of the relative motion of the
unit.
301 Tank filling and venting arrangements are to be ap-
proved. All relevant limiting design criteria is to be estab-
lished and documented.
302 A minimum design density (p) of 1,025 t/m
3
is nor-
mally to be considered in the determination of the appropri-
ate scantlings of tank arrangements.
303 The extent to which it is possible to fill sounding,
venting or loading pipe arrangements is to be fully ac-
counted for in determination of the maximum design pres-
sure to which a tank may be subjected to.
Dynamic pressure heads resulting from the filling of such
pipes are to be included in the design pressure head where
such load components are applicable (see PtA Ch.l Sec.4
E200).
401 The local pressure acting on decks is not to be taken
less than given in Table D 1.
501 The pressure acting on vertical external bulkheads
exposed to wind is in general not to be taken less than 2,5
kN 1m2 unless otherwise documented.
D 600 Heavy units
601 The forces acting on supporting structures and lashing
systems for rigid units of cargo, equipment or other struc-
tural components are normally to be taken as:
- for loading condition a) as defined in A301:
Py=goM (kN)
- for loading condition b):
Py = (go ay) M (kN)
PH=ah M (kN)
For units exposed to wind, a horizontal force due to the
design gust wind is to be added to PH
- for loading condition e):
Py=goM (kN)
PH = 0,25 go M (kN).
For units exposed to wind, a horizontal force due to wind
with velocity = 25 mls is to be added to PH.
PH and l'v is to be regardeil as aciiiJ.g siD:uJliarieousiy UJiless
otherwise documented.
a
v
= most probable largest vertical acceleration in m/s
2
ah = most probable largest horizontal acceleration in m/s2
M = mass of unit in t
Pv = vertical force
PH = horizontal force.
Guidance note:
For units in transit and column stabilised units in
all design ah and 3y need nonnally not be taken lar-
ger than 0,5 !lo ml, .
E 100 Collision
101 The kinetic energy to be considered is normally not
to be less than:
- 14 MJ (Mega Joule) for sideway collision
- 11 MJ for bow or stem collision
corresponding to a supply vessel of 5000 tonnes dis-
placement with impact speed v = 2 mls.
A reduced impact energy may be accepted upon special
consideration taking into account the environmental design
DE! NORSKE VERITAS
c,
Circular cylinder, subcritica1 flow 0,6
Circular cylinder, supercritica1 flow 0,8
Sharp edged members 0,6
Guidance note:
Supercritical flow may be assumed for RE> 0,5' 10
6
.
--e-n-d-o-f--G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---
""
2
175
1
175
2
175
For members with one end abuting on to another member
or a wall in such a way that free flow around that end of the
member is prevented, the ratio lib is to be doubled for the
purpose of determining K. When both ends are abuted as
mentioned, the drag coefficient is to be taken equal to that
for an infinitely long member.
206 If several members are arranged in a plane perpen-
dicular to the flow direction, the solidification effect may
have to be taken into account.
The steady flow force may be calculated according to 201
assuming applicable shape coefficient according to 202 or
203 is modified as given below.
Thus if
As = sum of projected areas in m
2
for all members in the
plane, and
AT = total projected envelope area in m
2
of the assembly,
the following applies:
a) for assemblies consisting of smooth circular members:
- for As/AT < 0,5:
- for As/AT = 1:
force on a single solid. The shape coefficient is to be
-given the vaJue of 2
- For 0,5 < As/AT < I:
cient is to be modified by a lioear interpolation between
the value according to 202 and the value of 2.
b) for assemblies consisting of smooth sharp-edged mem-
bers:
- for As/ AT < 0,2:
- for As/AT> 0,8:
force on a single solid. The As is to be taken as an en-
velope area. No modification of shape coefficient
- for 0,2 < As/AT < 0,8:
cient is to be multiplied by 0,8.
207 If two or more members are arranged in lioe in the
flow direction, the shielding effect may be taken into ac-
count if the centre to centre distance, I, between the mem-
bers is less than 7 b
f
, where
be the characteristic lioear cross-sectional diroension of
the front member.
For shielded members in a lioe the shape coefficients calcu-
lated in accordance with 202 to 204 may be reduced with the
following factor:
(1 __ 1_)
b, 7 b
f
for b,
I
7 b
f
for b
f
:<! b,
b
s
= characteristic linear cross-sectional dimension of the
shielded member.
301 The force or force components acting in the plane of
the cross-section of slender members due to wave particle
acceleration are to be taken as:
PM=pCMaV (kN)
CM = inertia coefficient, values for CM are given in 302.
Other values for CM may be used, provided a justi-
fication of the chosen values can be given
a = mean fluid acceleration in m/s
2
in the cross-sectional
plane of the member
V reference volume in m
3
to which the inertia coeffi-
cient is related. Unless otherwise stated V is equal
to the volume of liquid displaced by the body.
302 The inertia coefficient for members with different
cross-sections may be taken in accordance with Table C2.
Table C2 Inertia coefficients
Shape of member eM
Smooth circular cylinder,
1 + K
Z
diameter d parallel to flow
Smooth elliptic cylinder, axis
1 + K
Z
(d/b)
d and b, b parallel to flow
Rectangular box, sides b and d,
b parallel to flow
dlb a dlb a
_1+
-""-
H,oo- --1---- -'-t,- --"'T \,
10 1,14 0,5 1,70
5 1,21 0,2 1,98
2 1,36 0,1 2,23
Qadratic box, sides d,
1 + 1,1 K
z
one diagonal parallel to flow
Flat plate facing flow, width d
" 2
Reference volume V = 4 d I
K
z
Flat elliptic disk facing flow,
axes d and I (I 2! d)
K
z
'" 2
Reference volume V ="'6 d 1
Sphere 1,6
1
K,
1 + (d/l)2
I = length of member (1) d)
401 Mooring forces must be considered in the following
three aspects:
- the strength of the mooring system
- the overall strength of the structure
- the local strength where the chain cable forces are trans-
mitted to the hull.
DET' NORSKE VERITAS
)
=>
)
=>
J
,
.:J
)
/J
.
0,75

af = yield stress of base material, abutting plate, in
N/rom
2
afw = yield stress of weld deposit in N/rom
2

Table Cl Strengtb ratios, f and f
Base metal Weld deposit
Yield stress
Strength group Designation crfw
(N/mm2)
Normal strength steels NVNS 355
High strength steels NV27
NV32 375
NV36
NV 40 390
C 200 Ordinary fillet welds
201 Where the connection of girder and stiffener webs aod
plate panel/girder flange plate, respectively, are mainly
shear stressed, fillel welds as specified in the following will
normally be adopted.
202 Unless otherwise documented, the throat thickness of
double continuous fillet welds is not to be less than:
t = 0,43 fr to + tk (rom), minimum 3 rom
to = net thickness in rom of abutting plate, corrosion ad-
For stiffeners and within 60% of the middle of span
of girders, 10 need normally not be taken greater than
11 mm, however, in no case less than 0,5 times the
net thickness of the web.
Ordinary values for fw and fr for normal strength and high
strength steels are given in Table C I.
The table is valid for ordinary fillet welds only, for partly
penetration welds the fw and f, -values are to be specially
considered.
104 When deep penetrating welding processes are applied,
the required thioat thicknesses may be reduced by 15 %
provided sufficient weld penetration IS demonstrated.
Strength ratios
Weld metal Base metal/weld metal
0,75 0,75
)

r crfw
1,34 0,75
0,75
1,40 0,88
0,96
1,44 1,0
connections subject to high stresses
301 In structural parts where dynamic stresses or high
static tensile stresses act through an interroediate plate (see
Fig.2), penetration welds or increased fillet welds are to be
used.
302 When the abutting plate carries dynamic stresses, the
connection is to fulfil the requirements with respect to fa-
tigue, see Sec.3 and Sec.5.
303 When the abutting plate carries tensile stresses higher
than 100 N/rom
2
, the throat thickness of a double continuous
weld is not to be less than:
1,36 [ (a ) r ]
t= T 0,2+ 270 -0,25 to to+tk
(rom)
minimum 3 mm
!llli:.kn.essQf wek!Jl!ay be as fw
required in 202 for double continuous welds provided the v
strength ratio as defined in !O3
;;-alettlare-J
in N/rom
2
welded length is not less than:
- 50 % of total length for connections in tanks
- 35 % of total length for connections elsewhere.
Double continuous welds are to be adopted at stiffener ends
when necessary due to bracketed end connections etc.
204 For intermittent welds, the throat thickness is not to
exceed:
- for chain welds and scallop welds:
0,6 f, 10 + tk (rom)
- for staggered welds:
0,75 f, 10 + tk (rom)
to = net thickness in rom abutting plate, corrosion addition
not included.
If the calculated throat thickness exceeds that given in a) or
b), respectively, the considered weld length is to be in-
creased correspondingly.
r
to
root face in =, see Fig.2b
net thickness in rom of abutting plate, corrosion ad-
401 Stiffeners may be connected to the web plate of gird-
ers in the following ways:
- welded directly to the web plate on one or both sides of
the stiffener
- connected by single- or double-sided lugs
- with stiffener or bracket welded on top of frame
- a combination of the above.
In locations with great shear stresses in the web plate, a
double-sided connection or a stiffeuing of the unconnected
web plate edge is normally required. A double-sided con-
nection may be taken into account when calculating the ef-
fective web area.
402 Various standard types of connections are shown in
Fig.5.
Other types of connection will be considered in each case.
DEI" NORSKE VERITAS
II I
CONNECTION ONLY
BETWEEN STIFFENER
WEB AND GIRDER
WEB
LOCAL STIFFENER
OR BRACKET {singel
Or double) ON TOP OF
MAIN STIFFENER
-r

o

AS 51Ul1 AS F'CSSQ.E
b ',>
r

c ",.
I

Fig. 5
Connections of stiffeners to girders
403 Connection lugs are to have a thickness not less than
75 % of the web plate thickness.
404 The total connection area {parent material) at supports
stiffeners is normally not to be less thaa:
17,3c 2
"0 = " s) s p (cm)
p
c = detail shape factor as given in Table C2
"p = permissible stress based on the yield criterion, as
given in Sec.5 D300
= span of stiffener in m
s = spacing between stiffeners in m
2
as given in SecA D.
Corrosion addition as specified in Sec.9 B500 is not in-
cluded in the formula for ao.
Table C2 Detail shape factor c
Type of I II
connection Web to web Stiffenerlbracket on
(see Fig.5) connection only top of stiffener
Single-
sided
a 1,00 1,25
b 0,90 1,15
c 0,80 1,00
405 Weld area is not to be less thaa:
2
a= fraO+ak (cm)
Double-
sided
1,00
0,90
0,80
f, = strength ratio as defined in 103
ao = connection area in cm
2
as given in 404.
The throat thickness is not to exceed the maximum for
scallop welds given in 204.
406 The weld connection between stiffener end aad
bracket is principally to be designed such that the shear
stresses of the connection corresponds to the permissible
stress.
In lieu of a complete calculation, the following formula may
be used for stiffeners in bending:
3
:Ehi ai = 1,5 frZ (em)
hi = height in cm, see Fig.6
ai = shear area of weld, longitudinal part, in cm
2
, see
Fig.6
f, = strength ratio as defined in 103. If bracket and stif-
fener are of different strength, the lowest value of
"fw is to be used
Z = rule section modulus of stiffener in cm
3
.
Fig. 6
Bracketed end connections
407 The weld area of brackets to stiffeners which are car-
rying longitudinal stresses or which are taking part in the
llf .Ill." ifi .nn! In
sectional area of the longitudinal. Brackets are to be con-
nected to bulkhead by a double continuous weld, for heavily
stressed connections by a partly or full penetration weld.
501 The weld connection area of bracket to adjoining
girders or other structural parts is to be based on the calcu-
lated normal and shear stresses. Double continuous welding
is to be used. Where large tensile stresses are expected,
welding according to 300 is to be applied.
502 The end connections of simple girders are to satisfy
the requirements to section modulus given for the girder in
question.
Where shear stresses in web plate exceed 75 N/mm2, double
continuous boundary ftllet welds are to have throat thickness
not less than:
'"
t = 0,43 ?sf fr 10 + tk (mm)
w
'" = calculated shear stress in N/mm
2
fw = strength ratio for weld as defined in 103
to = net thickness in mm of web plate, corrosion addition
not included.
503 End connections of pillars are to have a weld area not
less thaa:
DET NORSKE VERITAS
)
J
"
)
"
)

:J
:J
:J
1/)
wave load analysis as specified in Sec.3 B306 and provided
the marine growth is kept moderate.

1.2
I
IE 0.8
IJ..
0.6
u
0.4
0 0.2
lOS
10
6
10
7
10
8
REYNOLD'S NUMBER (Rei
Fig. 1
Shape coefficient for circular cylinders
203 The shape coefficients for smooth members with rec-
tangular cross-section (hI ;:: bV may be taken as:
C
S1
= 2 KR sin a
C
S2
= ( 1 + ) KR cos a for b
2
:$; b
1
:$; 2b
2
= 1,5 KR cos a for b
l
> 2b
2
KR = 1,0 for rib :$; 0,10
= r/b)/3 for 0,10 < rib < 0,25
= 0,35 for rib;:: 0,25
bl = longer side of rectangle in m
b2 = shorter side of rectangle in m
r = comer radius of the section in m
a = angle between side b
l
of the rectangle and the flow
component in the cross-sectional plaae.
bj, bi and", are ... lso shown in Fig;2;' -
For wide rectangular cross-sections it may be necessary to
take into account that the resultant drag force Pm is assumed
to be acting at a distance b
l
/3 from the leading edge of the
surface. See Fig.2.
FLOW
=t>
A f:l<tJ (,
If CoST;
'?/J
Fig. 2
Drag forces on rectangular cross-sections
204 The shape coefficients and characteristic dimensions
for various smooth members with irregular cross-sections
may be taken in accordance with Table C1 where dimen-
sions perpendicular to POl and PD2 are to be understood as
b
l
and b
2
respectively.
Pt.3 Ch.1 SecA - Page 13
Table Cl Shape coefficient for irregular cross sections
Profile ex (degrees
C
SI
C
S2

0 1,9 1,0

45 .1,8 0,8
90 2,0 1,7
135 -1,8 -0,1
,o.Stl 180 -2,0 0,1
!:'')t
0 1,8 1,8
45 2,1 1,8
f.
90 -1,9 -1,0
<:( y"
135 -2,0 0,3
180 -1,4 -1,4
V
P
d2
0 1,7 0

45 0,8 0,8
P"
af;z b C.2b ....c;..
90 0 1,7
135 -0,8 0,8
Y.
180 -1,7 0
...

0 2,0 0
45 1,2 0,9
90 -1,6 2,2
135 -1,1 -2,4
180 -1,7 0

0 2,1 0
iz

45 1,9 0,6
90 0 0,6
135 -1,6 0,4

180 -1,8 0

,
iz

0 2,1 0
45 2,0 0,6
90 0,5 0,9
O.5b
-

0 1,6 0
45 1,5 1,5
90 0 1,9

0 1,8 0
180 -1,3 0
Ge
205 For members where both ends abut on adjacent
members, the shape coefficients as given in 202 to 204 ap-
ply.
If both ends are free, the drag coefficient may be reduced
with the following factor:
I . 1
K = cl + c2 b' maxunum ,0
where
I = length of member
b = characteristic linear cross-sectional dimension
CI, C2 = factors depending on Reynolds' number aad mem-
ber cross sectional shape.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
303 The defined loading conditions are to be considered
for each of the design conditions being relevant to the
structure in question. See Ch.2 Sec.2 and Sec.3.
B 100 Wind
101 Characteristic wind design velocities are to be based
upon appropriate considerations of velocitylheight profiles
for the relevant averaging time.
Guidance note:
Practical information in respect to wind conditions, including
velocity/height profIles, is documented in Classification Note
No. 30.5 "Environmental Conditions and Environmental
Loads".
102 When wind tunnel data obtained from reliable and
adequate tests on a representative model of the platform are
submitted, these data will be considered for the determi-
nation of pressures and resulting forces.
103 In conjunction with maximum wave forces the sus-
tained wind velocity is to be used.
If gust wind alone is more unfavourable than sustained wind
in conjunction with wave forces, the gust wind velocity is
to be used.
For local load calculations gnst wind velocity is to be used.
The one hour wind velocity is normally ouly applicable for
mooring calculations as outlined in Pt.6 Ch.2.
Guidance note:
For unrestricted operation V IminlO need normally not be taken
larger than 55 mi .
104 For structures being sensitive to dynamic loads, for
instance tall structures having long natural period of vi-
bration, the stresses due to the gust wind pressure consid-
ered as static are to be multiplied by an appropriate dynamic
amplification factor.
Guidance note:
---'llhe posiibwiy o-rvibraiions QUe-to msial>iliiiin ihe now pattern
induced by the structure itself should also be considered.
B 200 Waves
201 The liquid particle velocity and acceleration in regular
waves are to be calculated according to recognised wave
theories, taking into account the significance of shallow
water and surface elevation.
Linearised wave theories may be used when appropriate.
In such cases appropriate account is to be taken of the ex-
trapolation of wave kinematics to the free surface.
202 The wave design data are to represent the maximum
wave heights specified for the unit, as well as the maximum
wave steepness.
The wave lengths are to be selected as the most critical ones
for the response of the structure or structural part to be in-
vestigated.
Guidance note:
Practical infonnation in respect to wave conditions, including
wave steepness criteria and wave "stretching" , is documented in
For unrestricted operation the maximum wave height, with a
return period of 100 years, need nonnally not be taken greater
than 32 m.
B 300 Current
301 Characteristic current design velocities are to be based
upon appropriate consideration of velocitylheight profIles.
The variation in current profile with variation in water
depth, due to wave action is to be appropriately accounted
for.
Guidance note:
Practical infonnation in respect to current conditions, including
current stretching in the passage of a wave, is documented in
C 100 General
101 The dynamic forces considered to influence the over-
all strength and overturning stability of units in operating
conditions are:
- drag forces caused by resultant velocity of air or water
flow relative to the member in question
- inertia forces caused by acceleration of water flow.
102 The forces are assumed to be applied in the overall
structural analysis of the unit in the most unfavourable
combination with gravity, buoyancy and mooring forces.
Acceptable combinations of loads are outlined in Classifica-
tion Notes on .Strength Analysis of Main Structures> of
various mobile offshore units.
103 The limitations of the formulae for drag forces and
inertia forces (Morison's equation) are to be duly consid-
ered. In particular for bodies having relevant dimensions
which are not negligible compared to the wave length, more
applicable theories must in general be used, e.g. potential
theory.
C 200 Drag forces
201 The steady flow force or force components acting in
the plane or the clUss=seetionof
taken as:
2 2
P
D
= 0,5 p C
s
v b 1 cos P (kN)
Cs shape coefficient. Values of Cs or CSI and CS2, for
IIh;;::5, are given in 202 to 204 for various cross-
sections. Other values of Cs may be used, provided
a justification of the chosen values can be given. In
any case Cs is not to be taken less than 0,5
v = flow velocity in mls in flow direction
b = cross-sectional dimension in m, perpendicular to the
force or force component. Relevant directions of b
or b
l
and b
2
are defined in 202 to 204 for various
cross-sectIons
1 = length of the member in m
P = angle between the flow direction and the cross- sec-
tional plane of the member.
202 The shape coefficient for members with circular
cross-section may be taken in accordance with Fig.1 where
RE = v b 10
6
for sea water (Reynolds number)
= 0,68 v b 10
5
for air
v = flow velocity in mls
b = diameter in m.
Members in air may normally be taken as smooth cylinders.
For members in sea water the values for smooth cylinder
may normally be used in connection with a deterministic
DET NORSKE VERITAS
:J
J

.')

J
:)
Ap 2
a=0,14 -f-+ak (cm)
w
A = load area in m
2
for pillar
2
as _given in Sec.4 D
fw = strengtli ratio for weld as defined in 103.
If the pillar also carries the load of another pillar above, the
connection area must be increased corresponding to the in-
creased load.
504 End connections of bracings are normally to have a
weld area not less than:
2
a= 1,73A
B
+ak (cm)
AB = cross sectional area of bracing at connection in cm
2
.
D 100 General
101 The weld types used for steel may normally be
adopted when welding aluminium. Dimensions for fillet
welds etc. may in principle be calculated as indicated for
steel in C, taking into account the strength of the material,
especially the low strength of aluminium in the welded zone.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
SECTION 9
CORROSION PROTECTION
Contents
A. General
A 100 Scope
A 200 Definitions
A 300 Documentation
B 200 Splash zone
B 400 Internal zone
C 100 Geneml
C 500 Testing of effectiveness of corrosion protection system
D. Coating
D 100 Specification
A. General
A 100 Scope
101 10 this section the requirements regarding corrosion
protection arrangement and equipment are given.
A 200 Defmitions
201 Atmospheric zone: The external region exposed to at-
mospheric conditions.
~ 2 0 2 Splash ZIJlIe:'The "xternslregion which is most se
o
verely exposed to wave action. The upper limit is 5 m above
water line at normal operating draught, the lower limit is 4
m below water line at normal operating draught.
203 Submerged zone: The external region below the splash
zone.
204 Coating: Metallic, inorganic and organic materials for
prevention of corrosion of steel surfaces.
205 Cathodic protection: A technique to prevent corrosion
of a steel surface by making the surface to be the cathode
of an electrochemical cell.
206 Corrosion addition: Extra steel thickness in excess of
that needed for strength.
207 Reference electrode: Electrode with stable open-circuit
potential used as reference for potential measurements.
208 Potential: The voltage between a submerged metal
surface and a reference electrode.
209 Driving voltage: The difference between closed circuit
anode potential and the protection potential.
210 Utilisation factor: The amount of anode material con-
sumed when the remaining anode material cannot deliver the
current required.
211 Special area: Portions of primary structural elements
which are in way of critical load transfer points, stress con-
centrations, etc. See Sec.2 B.
A 300 Documentation
301 Coatiog specifications for all zones are to be submitted
for information.
302 For cathodic protection systems, design current den-
sities are to be stated (see C 100). To evaluate the current
requirement, the area of bare and coated submerged sur-
faces, including splash zone surfaces below normal operat-
ing draught, is to be specified for each main section of the
unit. Procedures for testiog of the effectiveness of the system
(see C500) are to be specified.
303 For cathodic protection systems utilising sacrificial
anodes (see C200), data on the electrochemical efficiency
of the anode material, the driving voltage and the utilisation
factor of anodes are to be specified.
304 Calculations of the initial and final current output ca-
pacity of sacrificial anodes and the life of the cathodic pro-
tection system are to be submitted for inforroation.
305 Drawings showing sacrificial anode design, fastening
of anodes and location of anodes are to be submitted for
approval.
306 Material certificates for sacrificial anodes are to be
available on request and are to state at least:
- the manufacturer
- the specified chemical composition
- the actual chemical analysis
- the charge number.
307 Po, eathodie protetti"" .y.teIl1ll utilisingimpre .. ed
current (see C300), the following documentation is to be
submitted for information:
- maximum current output capacity
- maximum anode-to-structure voltage
- specifications of anode materials and dielectric shields
- consumption rate of anodes at maximum specified current
output.
308 Drawings of impressed current anodes including die-
lectric shields and general arrangements (location of anodes
and electrical circuiting including rectifiers, cables and cable
connections) are to be submitted for approval.
309 For cathodic protection monitoring systems subject to
approval (see C400), drawings of reference electrodes and
general arrangement (location of electrodes and electrical
circuitiog) are to be submitted for approval.
DEI' NORSKE VERITAS
J o
J
C)
J o
"
_J
()
SECTION 4
DESIGN LOADS
Contents
A. General
A 100 Scope
A 200 Defmitions
B 100 Wind
B 200 Waves
B 300 Current
C 100 Geneml
C 200 Dmg forces
D 100 Geneml
D 200 Sea pressures
D 500 Local environmenta11oads
D 600 Heavy units
E 100 Collision
A. General
A 100 Scope
101 The requirements in this section define and specify
load components and load combinations to be considered in
the overall strength analysis as well as design pressures ap-
plicable in forroulae for local scantlings.
102 Impact pressure caused by the sea (slamming, bow
impact) or by liquid cargoes in partly filled tanks (sloshing)
-are nUl cuveretl"lJy IliiH HecUull. Desigll "valUeS lIIe-giv6U-in
the sections dealing with specific structures.
A 200 Defmitions
201 Symbols:
p
p
= design pressure in kN/m
2
density of liquid or stowage rate of dry cargo in
t/m
3

202 Functional wads are loads which are a necessary
consequence of the structure's existence, use and treatment,
under ideal circumstances for each design condition . Ideal
circumstances means no wind, no waves etc., i.e. no envi-
ronmental loads.
All external forces which are responses to functional loads
are to be regarded as functional loads. Examples are support
reactions and still water buoyancy forces.
203 Environmental wads are loads which are not a neces-
sary consequence of the structure's existence, use and treat-
ment. Such loads are all directly or indirectly due to
environmental actions.
All external forces which are responses to environmental
loads are to be regarded as environmental loads. Examples
are support reactions, mooring forces and inertia forces.
204 Accidental wads are loads which may occur as a result
of accident or exceptional conditions. Examples of acci-
dental loads are:
- collision loads
- explosion and fire
- dropped objects.
205 Overall forces are defined as forces in a member
arising from loads acting on the structure outside the con-
sidered member.
206 Localforces are defined as forces in a member arising
from loads acting on the considered member, e.g. hydros-
tatic pressure, deck loads, etc.
207 The wad point for which the design pressure is to be
calculated is defined for various strength members as fol-
lows:
- for plates:
midpoint of horizontally stiffened plate field. Half of the
stiffener spacing above the lower support of vertically
stiffened plate field, or at lower edge of plate when the
thickness is changed within the plate field
- for stiffeners:
midpoint of span. When the pressure is not varied line-
arly over the span the design pressure is to be taken as
the greater of:
Pa+Pb
Pm and 2
Pm' P, and Pb are calculated pressure at the midpoint and
at eaCh end respectively
- for girders:
midpoint of load area.
301 Each structural member is to be designed for the most
unfavourable of the following loading conditions:
n) functionnl londo
b) maximum environmental loads and associated functional
loads
c) accidental loads and associated functional loads
d) environmental loads corresponding to a return period of
1 year and associated functional loads after credible fail-
ures, or after accidental events
e) environmental loads corresponding to a return period of
1 year and associated functional loads in a heeled condi-
tion corresponding to accidental flooding.
Permissible usage factors and stresses are given in Sec.S
D. Relevant combinations of design and loading conditions
are given in Ch.2 Sec.2 and 3.
302 For each of the above loading conditions and for each
structural member, the most unfavourable combinations,
position, and direction of the forces have to be used in the
analysis.
All directions of wind, waves and current relative to the
platforro are norroaIIy to be assumed equally probable.
If, however, statistics show clearly that wind, waves and
current of the prescribed probability are different for differ-
ent directions, this may be taken into account in the analysis.
It is assumed that orientation of the platforro wiII be under
complete control of the operator. The responsibility for this
control wiII be stated in the .Appendix to the Classification
Certificate .
DEI' NORSKE VERITAS
s
'1= I
i= 1
~ J
s = number of stress blocks considered
Di = actual number of stress cycles for stress block no. i
Ni = number of stress cycles before failure if stress block
no. i is considered only.
A reasonable number of constant amplitude stress blocks and
corresponding number of stress cycles are to be evaluated
from a long term stress distribution determined for the
planned life of the structures. All directions of wind, waves
and current relative to the unit, are normally to be assumed
equally probable. If, however, statistics show clearly that
wmd, waves and current of the prescribed probability are
different for different directions, this may be taken into ac-
count in the analysis.
504 The resistance against fatigue is normally given as
S-N curves, i.e. stress range versus number of cycles to
failure, based on fatigue tests. The S-N curve is in general
to be based on a 95 % confidence limit. See also Sec.9
B404.
50S In lieu of an analysis aimed to prevent crack initiation,
consideration will be given to a crack propagation approach
to fatigue.
sification Note No. 30.2 on .Fatigue Strength A1ialysis>.
C 600 Ultimate strength
601 For desilln against excessive yielding, an ultimate
strength analYSIS may be used where appropriate.
602 Ultimate load is the load associated with the maximum
resistance to the applied load, i.e. the maximum load the
member can withstand without final collapse.
Examples on final collal'se are plastic collapse, or a ductile
failure where both yieldmg and local buckling may occur in
the cross section.
603 The condition of yielding of a cross section is to be
based on the equivalent stress criterion given in 300. Strain
hardening is not to be considered for carbon steel.
604 Where plastic hinges are used in the analysis, it is to
beshown thatnecessary rotations of the hingesare possible.
"Ifis liis(i"to 'be shoWli that !he chOsen Ilunib-er and posilions
of the plastic hinges give the correct (lowest) ultimate load.
60S The usage factor in the case of ultimate strength anal-
ysis is defined as:
LA = applied load
Lu = ultimate load.
'1 = LA/Lu
The usage factors, determined by rational analysis, are not
to exceed the values given in the rules.
701 This item gives requirements for stuctural reliability
analysis undertaken in order to document rule compliance,
see Pt.1 Ch.1 Sec. 1 C200.
702 The method and procedures for evaluation of reliabil-
ity are subject to the acceptance by the Society in each in-
dividual case. Acceptable procedures for reliability analyses
are documented in the Classification Note No. 30.6
.Structural Reliability A1ialysis of Marine Structures>.
703 Reliability analyses are to be based on level ill reli-
ability methods. These are methods that utilise probability
of failure as a measure, and which therefore require a
knowledge of the distribution of all uncertain parameters.
704 For the purpose of these rules, level ill reliability
methods are mainly considered applicable to:
- unique design solutions
- novel designs where limited (or no) experience exists
- special case design problems
- calibration of level I methods to account for improved
knowledge (level I methods are deterministic analysis
methods that use only one characteristic value to describe
each uncertain variable, i.e. the allowable stress method
normally applied in the rules).
70S Reliability analyses may be updated by utilisation of
new information. Where such updating indicates that the
assumptions upon which the original analysis was based are
not valid, and the result of such non-validation is deemed to
be essential to safety, the subject approval may be revoked.
706 Target reliabilities are to be commensurate with the
consequence of failure. The method of establishing such
target reliabilities, and the values of the target reliabilities
themselves, are to be approved by the Society in each sepa-
rate case. To the extent possible, the minimum target reli-
abilities are to be established based upon calibration against
well established cases that are known to have adequate saf-
ety.
Where well established cases do not exist, for example in the
case of novel and unique design solutions, the minimum
target reliability values are to be based upon one (or a
combination) of the following considerations:
- transferable target reliabilties from .similar>, existing
design solutions
- decision analysis
- internationally recognised codes and standards.
For further details, see Classification Note No. 30.6.
D 100 Deflections
101 Structural deflections which may alter the effect of the
acting forces are to be considered.
102 Considerations are to be given to the effect of de-
flections on the distribution of loads between supported rigid
objects and the supporting structure.
D 200 Vibrations
201 The rigidity of the structure and vital structural com-
ponents is to be sufficient to prevent serious vibrations and
to ensure safe operation of the unit.
202 Structural vibrations which may lead to major struc-
tural failure are to be avoided. When there is reason to be-
lieve that serious vibrations can arise, a vibration analysis
is to be carried out.
DEY NORSKE VERITAS
.J
:J
J
.:]
')
~
)
/)
101 Steel surfaces in the atmospheric zone are to be pro-
tected by coating.
B 200 Splash zone
201 Steel surfaces in the splash zone are to be protected
by coating.
301 Steel surfaces in the submerged zone, including splash
zone areas below normal operating draught, are to be pro-
tected by cathodic protection, preferably in combination
with coating. For coated submerged steel the cathodic pro-
tection current density can be reduced.
B 400 Internal zone
401 Tanks which are exposed to sea water or other corro-
sive liquid, typically water ballast tanks, are to be protected
by coating. Sacrificial anodes are to be used in combination
with coating where relevant, i.e. for water ballast tanks that
will stay empty less than approximately 50 % of the time.
402 Tanks which 'are normally empty or only partly filled
with seawater are to be protected either by coating, corro-
sion addition or a combination of these methods.
403 Fresh water tanks are to be coated. Health authorities
requirements for the coating are to be complied with.
404 Special areas with respect to fatigue are to be pro-
tected by cathodic protection or coating unless the effect of
unprotected steel has been accounted for in the fatigue
evaluation. Regarding the use of aluminium coating, see
DI02. To facilitate in-service inspections in ballast tanks
and in areas where crack detection is important, light col-
oured, hard coatings e.g. on epoxy or similar basis are to
be used.
405 Magnesium anodes and impressed current are not to
be used in tanks.
406 Corrosion proteCtion of Closed spaces Impossibie 10
inspect after final welding are subject to special consider-
ation.
Internal surfaces of structural members that may not stay dry
or will not be sealed off from the atmosphere, are to be
protected by coating. For internal surfaces of compartments
that will remain sealed off and dry for the design life of the
structure, coating is not required.
407 For ballast tanks which may become gas hazardous
areas due to being located adjacent to e.g. fuel tanks or oil
storage tanks for liquids with flash point < 60C, aluminium
anodes are to be so located that a kinetic energy of 5,275 J
is developed in event of their loosening and falling down.
Fillet welds for attachment of anodes are to be continuous
and of adequate cross section. Attachment by clamps fixed
by set-screws will not be accepted in potentially gas haz-
ardous areas. Attachments by properly secured through-
bolts may, however, be accepted.
408 Tanks in which anodes are installed are to have suffi-
cient holes for the circulation of air to prevent gas from ac-
cumulating in pockets.
501 Unprotected steel (plates, stiffeners and girders) in
tanks are generally to be given a corrosion addition tk as
follows:
Pt.3 Ch.1 Sec.9 '-- Page 31
- plates:
one side unprotected: tk = 1,5 mm
two sides unprotected: tk = 2,0 mm
- unprotected stiffeners and girders: tk = 2,0 mm.
502 When a corrosion addition has been added to the
scantlings, this is to be noted on the structural class draw-
ings, or on a separate plan.
C 100 General
101 The cathodic protection system is to deliver sufficient
protective current to maintain the potential at all steel sur-
faces of the structure in the submerged zone between -0,80
V and -1,10 V versus the Ag/ AgCl/sea water reference
electrode, and to maintain the potential within this range
throughout the design life of the installation.
These potentials apply to normal sea water (salinity 32 to
38 gil) and saline mud.
If potential measurements are carried out in brackish water,
either a Ag/ AgCl reference electrode with closed electrolyte
compartment/permeable membrane (not dependent on chlo-
ride concentration) or of other type (Cu/CuS04' Zn or sat-
urated calomel electrode SCE) is to be used.
Guidance note:
The following relationships are nonnally valid between poten-
tials (volts V) measured with Ag/ Agel and other reference cells:
AgIAgCllseawater Zn Cu/CuSO. SCE
- 0,80 + 0,25 - 0.85 - 0,79
- 0,90 + 0,15 - 0,95 - 0,89
- 1,10 - 0,05 - 1,15 - 1,09
._--
---e-n-d---o-f-G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e--n-o-t-e-
102 The current density necessary to achieve the above
potentials ism be seleeted on the b .. i. of the we .. 1 en"i-
ronmental conditions with respect to corrosivity that the unit
is intended for. .
103 If the unit is operating in an environment with worse
conditions than originally intended, additional protection
may be required.
104 The reduction in current density on coated surfaces
compared to bare steel, will be dependent on the coating
system, and is subject to approval by the Society.
105 Cathodic protection systems for steels with specified
minimum yield stress > 550 N/mm
2
are subject to special
consideration for applications where hydrogen induced
stress cracking (IDSC) may be anticipated. See Sec.2 B506.
Qualification testing is to be carried out for critical applica-
tions such as jack-up legs and spud cans. Test conditions:
anaerobic, hydrogen SUlphide containing environment and
cathodic protection potentials of -1,1 V Ag/AgCl or more
negative potentials. The test procedure, slow strain rate
method or similar, is subject to approval.
If not documented by testing as indicated above that cathodic
protection to -1,1 V Ag/AgCl is hannIess (for steel with
specified minimum yield stress> 550 N/mm
2
), the cathodic
protection potential is to be limited by using special anodes
of controlled voltage type (with diodes or similar), or other
method.
DEY NORSKE VERITAS
Page 32 - Pt.3 Ch.1 Sec.9 .
Guidance note:
The target potential lange for steels susceptible to RISe in
anaerobic, sulphide containing environment is -770 mV to -830
m V versus the Agl Agel reference electrode.
201 A cathodic protection system by anodes is
to be designed to maintain the required potential during the
period between complete reinstallations of the anodes. This
period is not to be less than 5 years.
202 The anodes are to be located so as to give a unifonn
current distribution to the steel structure.
Guidance note:
Installation of a pennanent cathodic protection monitoring sys-
tem based on potential readings from fixed reference electrodes
may be advantageous.
203 The anode core is to be designed to support the anode
and to maintain the anode shape during the later stages of
the anode life.
301 The impressed current anodes are to be located and
shielded to give a current distribution being as .unifonn as
possible.
302 Due to the risks of detrimental overprotection, im-
pressed current anodes are not to be located close to areas
with high stresses.
303 To compensate for inefficient current distribution, the
impressed current system is to be designed to provide
1,25-1,5 times the calculated current demand, where rele-
vant.
304 Installation of a pennanent cathodic protection moni-
toring system is required.
305 The impressed current system is to be arranged so that
the risk of damages to anodes, cables and reference elec-
trodes is minimised.
306 A procedure for maintenance and replacement of an-
- 66M ilfia tefl.fefiM elecitOdes is t6 be submiiied' for ap-
proval.
401 A monitoring system for impressed current cathodic
protection systems is subject to approval by the Society.
402 The monitoring system is to be based on potential
readings from fixed reference electrodes and is to be capable
to ascertain that all submerged parts of the structure are ad-
equately protected. When evaluating the positions of the re-
ference electrodes, special attention is to be paid to areas
where under-/overprotection may be expected.
403 It is to be documented by records of measurements
that the monitoring system is functioning satisfactorily. If
satisfactory functioning can not be documented, potential
measurements by divers or submersibles may be required.
See Pt.! Ch.2 Sec.2 B103.
404 For steels with specified minimum yield stress > 550
N/mm
2
in anaerobic environment, cathodic protection po-
tentials are to be monitored to ensure compliance with the
target range indicated in 105. In case the target range is ex-
ceeded' inspection with respect to possible HISC is to be
carried out.
system
501 After the cathodic protection system is put into oper-
ation, an initial survey is to be performed to establish that
all submerged areas are adequately protected. During this
survey the structure is to be in normal operating condition.
This initial survey is normally to be carried out within:
- 6 months after delivery for sacrificial anode systems
- 3 months after delivery for impressed current systems.
502 Procedure and extent of potential measurements are
subject to approval.
Guidance note:
Lowering of reference electrode in a line is usually sufficient.
Potential readings utilising divers or submersible may he re-
quired in special cases.
--e-n-d---o-f--G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e--n-o-t-e-
503 For approval of a cathodic protection monitoring sys-
tem, the readings from the permanent electrodes are to be
verified by independent measurements.
D. Coating
D 100 Specification
101 A coating specification is to include description of:
- steel surface treatment for coating application, including
shop-primer
- control of temperatures and climatic conditions during
blast cleaning and coating application
- coating systems, including coating types, number of coats
and film thicknesses
- (whil<h
- quality control/inspection requirements.
Guidance note:
The DNV Guidelines for Corrosion Protection of Ships contain
useful information especially for coating of water ballast tanks.
-e-n-d--o--f--G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e-n-o-t-e--
102 The use of aluminium coating is generally not ac-
cepted in tanks for liquids with flash point below 60C, in
adjacent ballast tanks, in cofferdams, in pump rooms or on
decks above the mentioned spaces nor in any other area
where gas may accumulate. Organic coatings (e.g. on
epoxy basis) containing up to 10 % aluminium by weight in
the dry film are, however, acceptable in the mentioned ar-
eas.
201 Regarding coating application, see Sec.lO G200.
DEr NORSKE VERITAS
)

1
,-j

)
()
I)
4
304 In deterministic design procedures, based on simple
regnlar wave considerations, the wave is to be described by
the following parameters:
- period period
- wave height
- wave direction
- still water depth.
The choice of an appropriate design wave fonnulation has
to be based on particular considerations for the problem in
question. Shallow water effects are to be accounted for.
Different wave theories may be accepted by the Society.
However, the limitations of the theories used are to be duly
acknowledged.
305 The design waves are to be those which produce the
most unfavourable loads on the considered structure, taking
into account the shape and size of structure etc.
The wave period is to be specified in each case of applica-
tion. It may be necessary to investigate a representative
number of wave periods, in order to ensure a sufficiently
accurate dennination of the maximum loads.
306 The basic wave load parameters and response calcu-
lation methods in these rules are to be used together with a
detenninistic wave load analysis with the most unfavourable
combinations of height, period and direction of the waves.
If a stochastic wave load analysis is used, a more accurate
assessment of load and strength parameters may be required,
e.g. to account for marine growth. As an alternative the ex-
treme wave loads may be multiplied with an appropriate load
factor.
Guidance note:
Wave load factors which will normally be accepted for stochastic
analysis are:
- column stabilised units: 1,2
- self-elevating units: 1,3.
---e-n-d--o-f---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---
B 400 Current
401 Adequate current velocity data are to be selected from
the statistics available. Different components of current are
to be considered, such as tidal current and wind generated
cUiTt5iii.
402 The variation of current velocity over the water depth
is to be considered when this is relevant.
C 100 General
101 The structure has to be designed against the following
possible modes of failure:
- excessive yielding
- buckling
- fatigue fracture.
102 The strength analysis is generally to be based on the
elastic theory. An ultimate strength (plastic) analysis may,
however, be used where appropriate.
103 All forces which may be governing for the design, are
to be taken into account. For each member or cross section
to be considered, the most unfavourable combination, posi-
tion and direction of the forces are to be used.
201 Simplified assumptions regarding stress distributions
and stress concentrations may be used, provided that the
assumptions are made in accordance with generally accepted
practice, or in accordance with sufficiently comprehensive
experience or tests.
202 In cases of structures or details for which adequate
methods of analysis do not exist, the capability has to be
verified by tests.
C 300 Yielding
301 Structural members for which excessive yielding is a
possible mode of failure, are to be investigated for yielding.
302 The nominal equivalent stress is to be compared with
the permissible stress given in the rules.
Equivalent stress is defined as:
/r-;;:2--;;-2---""2
"e=-Y"I +"2 -"1"2+
3T
"1 and "2 are normal stresses perpendicular to each other.
T is the shear stress in the plane of "1 and "2'
303 In Sec.6 the thickness requirements for plating ex-
posed to lateral pressure is given as a function of nominal
permissible bending stress. The nominal permissible bending
stress has been specified so that the equivalent stress at the
middle of the plate field will not exceed the specified limits
given in Sec.S.
304 In Sec.6 the section modulus requirement for stiffen-
ers exposed to lateral pressure is given as function of boun-
dary conditions and nominal permissible bending stress.
The boundary conditions are included in a bending moment
factor. The bending moment factor corresponds to m in the
following expression:
QI
M=Iil
M = the expected bending moment
Q = the total load force on the member
I = the length of the member.
The values of m nonnally to be applied are given separately
for each of the local structures.
For elastic deflections the value of m is derived directly
from general elastic bending theory.
305 The direct strength formulae for girders given in Sec.7
limil!;g III
the nominal permissible stresses are given in a similar way
as for stiffeners.
For girder systems the stress pattern is assrimed to be de-
rived by direct computerised calculations.
C 400 Buckling
401 Structural members for which buckling is a possible
mode of failure, are to be investigated for buckling.
402 The stability analysis is to be carried out according to
generally accepted theories of buckling. For shells, the ef-
fect of geometrical imperfection on the critical buckling
stress is to be taken into account.
403 The stability analysis is to show compliance with the
requirements given in the rules.
sification Note No. 30.1 on .Buckling Strength Analysis .
C 500 Fatigue
501 Areas of primary structural members where fatigne
may be a critical mode of failure, are to be investigated for
fatigne.
502 The fatigue analysis is to be based on a period of time
equal to the planned life of the structore. The period is,
however, normally not to be taken less than 20 years.
503 The cumulative effect of the stress history may be es-
timated by the usage factor:
DEr NORSKE VERITAS
601 The structural arrangement is to be planned with due
consideration to the possibility of accidental events.
Accidental event is used as a collective term for exceptional
conditions, such as collision, dropped object, fire and ex-
plosion.
602 Satisfactory protection against accidental damage is to
be obtained by the following two means:
- low damage probability
- acceptable damage consequences.
603 Accel'table damage consequences due to collision and
dropped objects are given in 604 and 605. Analysis as stated
are to satisfy relevant strength criteria given in these rules.
The damage consequences of other accidental events will
have to be specially considered in each case applying an
equivalent standard of safety.
Guidance note:
Energy absorption by impact types of accidental events requires
the structure to behave in a ductile manner. Measures to obtain
adequate ductility are:
- make the strength of connections of primary members in ex-
cess of that of the member
- provide redundancy in the structure, so that alternate load
redistribution paths may be developed
- avoid dependence on energy absorption in slender struts with
a non-ductile postbuckling behaviour
- avoid pronounced weak sections and abrupt change in
strength or stiffness
- use non-brittle materials.
604 The direct loads and consequential damage due to
collisions and dropped objects (see Sec.4 E) are not to cause
coml'lete structural collapse, loss of floatability or cause
capsIZing. Simplified considerations for application of the
cnteria in Sec.4 E, which may normally be used as a basis
for approval, are given in Ch.2 and in Classification Notes
No. 31.4 and 31.5 on .Strength Analysis of Main
Structures. of various mobile offshore units.
An explicit accidental damage analysis may be required de-
pending on type of structure, structural layout, dimensions
--ond intind.d operation. _ - --
60S After damage requiring inunediate repair, the platform
is to resist functional and environmental loads corresponding
to a return period of not less than one year.
Possible residual strength of damaged members may be in-
cluded provided its magnitude may be assessed by rational
analysis or tests. If such residual strength of separate mem-
bers is not proven, damaged members will be considered as
non-effective.
B 100 General
101 All environmental phenomena which may contribute
to structural damages are to be considered. Such phenomena
are wind, waves, currents, ice, earthquake, soil conditions,
temperature, fouling, corrosion, etc.
102 The specified environmental design data used for cal-
culating design loads for intact structure are to correspond
with the most probable largest values for a return period of
100 years.
For damaged structure calculations a return period of one
year is to be used.
103 The environmental design data may be given as max-
imum wave heights with corresponding periods and wind-
and current velocities and design temperatures or as accept-
able geographical areas for operation. In the latter case the
builder is to specify the operational areas and submit doc-
umentation showing that the environmental data for these
areas are within the environmental design data.
104 The statistical data used as a-basis for design must
cover a sufficiently long period of time.
Guidance note:
In many cases environmental data can be supplied by the Soci-
ety.
B 200 Wind
201 Wind velocity statistics are to be used as a basis for a
description of wind conditions, if such data are available.
Three kinds of wind velocities, as described in the follow-
ing, are to be considered.
velocity during a time interval (sampling time) of I minute.
The most probable highest sustained wind velocity in a pe-
riod of N years will be referred to as the .N years sustained
wind>. This is equivalent to a wind velocity with a recur-
rence period of N years.
The .N years gnst wind velocity. is the most probable hi-
ghest gnst velocity in a period of N years.
204 One hour wind velocity is defined as the average wind
velocity during a time interval of one hour.
B 300 Waves
301 Wave conditions which are to be considered for de-
sign purposes, may be described either by deterministic de-
sign wave methods or by stochastic methods applying wave
energy spectra.
302 Short term irregular states of sea are described by
means of wave energy spectra which are characterised by
significant wave height (Hs), and average zero-upcrossing
period (T z).
Analytical spectrum expressions are to reflect the width and
shape of typical spectra for the considered site.
The -HhUilCilJHllitliteHH ufwaviSs-iu a seaway, i,,,, -liIe -diret"
tional dispersion of wave energy, may be taken into account.
The principal direction of wave encounter is defined as the
direction of maximum wave energy density.
Guidance note:
For open sea locations the Pierson-Moskowitz (P-M) type of
spectrum may nonnally be applied. For shallow water, or lo-
cations with a narrow "fetch", a more narrow spectrum should
normally be considered (e.g. Jonswap spectrum).
Practical infonnation in respect to wave conditions is docu-
mented in Classification Note No. 30.5 "Environmental Condi-
tions and Environmental Loads 11
-e-n-d---o-f--G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e-n-o-t-e--
303 The long term behaviour of the sea is described by
means of a family of wave spectra, the probability of oc-
currence for each 'spectrum being taken into account.
For this purpose one needs the joint probability density
function for Hs and Tz, which can be obtained from wave
statistics. A description of the long term state of sea based
on the use of hindcastings can also be accepted. Wave sta-
tistics for individual principal directions of wave encounter
should be used, otherwise conservative assumptions are to
be introduced.
Extreme wave heights are expressed in terms of wave
heights having a low probability of occurrence.
The .N year wave height> is the most probable largest indi-
vidual wave height during N years. This is equivalent to a
wave height with a return period of N years.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
J :J
.)
:J
/)
-"J
J J
SECTION 10
FABRICATION
A. General
A 100 Scope
A 200 Definitions
B 100 Geneml
Contents
B 200 Workmanship, quality system and non-destructive testing
(NDT)
D 100 Tolerances
E. Repairs
E 100 Geneml
F 100 Geneml
G 100 Geneml
G 400 Fabrication and installation of impressed current systems
H 100 Welds
H 300 Structuml tests
I 100 Geneml
A. General
A 100 Scope
101 This section specifies the requirements to fabrication
of structures and structural parts or assemblies.
A 200 Defmitions
202 Welding procedure qualification test (WPQ1): A test
requirements.
203 Welding production test (WP1): A test which is carried
out on production weldments to confirm that the WPS used
during production welding produces welded joints that meet
the application and welding specification requirements.
204 Non-destructive testing (ND1): Visual inspection, ra-
revealing defects and irr egularities.
205 HAZ: Heat affected zone.
206 CTOD: Crack Tip Opening Displacement.
B 100 General
101 Prior to fabrication, procedures for execution and
control of all fabrication activities are to be established to
ensure that the required quality is obtained and documented.
102 Relevant procedures, including information of pre-as-
sembled items and the sequence of fabricating the parts into
structure, are to be prepared.
103 Due consideration is to be given to the access and the
time required for adequate survey as fabrication proceeds.
B 200 Workmanship, quality system and
non-destructive testing (NDT)
201 Workmanship is to be of good standard and according
to accepted practice and to the satisfaction of the surveyor.
202 All work is to be skilfully and carefully executed with
adequate control by the builder. All faults and deficiencies
are to be corrected before the material is coated with paints,
cement or similar. Repair work of significant extent is to be
approved by the surveyor.
203 Manufacturers of structures involving special struc-
tural members as defined in Sec.2 B402 and B403 are to
have a documented and implemented quality system as spe-
cified in Pt. 1 Ch.l Sec.3 A200 (ISO 9001).
204 For builders fabricating typical structural members not
specified in 203, a quality system corresponding to ISO
9002 or 9003 will be considered satisfactory. The level ex-
pected will depend on the extent of primary and secondary
members to-be fnbrienrod in thepnrtioulnfoRoo .
Guidance note:
Examples of technical aspects to be covered by written proce-
dures and job instructions in the quality system mentioned in 203
and 204 above are:
- material identification and marking
- dimensional control
- fabrication deviation, reporting and request for approval
- preheating
- welding
- post weld heat treatment
- storing and handling of electrodes/flux
- flame straightening
- visual inspection routines in course of fabrication
- weld marking system
- standard repair routines
- standards for cut-outs
- removal of temporary attachments
- welding sequence standard
- fabrication tolerance standard
- non destructive testing
- pressure testing
- documentation/fabrication reports.
205 Prior to commencement of the work the builder has
to submit a programme for NDT, for approval. The pro-
gramme is to contain information and documents for plan-
ning,. controlling, reporting etc.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
Page 34 - Pt.3 Ch.1 Sec.1 0
206 The NDT -operators are to be certificated in accord-
ance with a recognised certification scheme accepted by the
Society.
101 A traceability system that ensures correct installation
of the material grades/strength classes is to be established
by the builder. .
Proper care is to be exercised during handling and storage
to preserve identification of such material.
102 Requirements to the selection of materials, together
with material certification requirements, are given in Sec.2.
201 The effect of work hardening is to be considered if
shearing is used for cutting of material. Special attention is
to be paid to the risk of cracked edges.
202 Attention is to be paid to excessive local hardening
and carbon contaminations by thermal cutting. This may
be reduced by suitable heat treatment or removed by me-
chanical means.
203 Forming and straightening of materials are to be per-
formed according to procedures outlining the successive and
controlled steps. Such procedures are to be controlled by
survey.
204 The degree of cold deformation of special and primary
structural elements is to be less than 5 %. If the deformation
exceeds 5 %, either heat treatment or strain ageing tests are
to be carried out according to an approved procedure.
D. Tolerances, Assembly, Welding and Heat
Treatment
jJ lUU . TOleranCes
101 Deviations from:
- planeness of unstiffened plating
- straightness of plate stiffeners
- roundness of circular columns and bracings.
are not to exceed the design assumptions regarding buckling
strength. Unless otherwise stated in connection with the
design approval acceptable tolerances are as given in the
Classification Note No. 30.1 .Buckling Strength Analysis .
102 Special consideration is to be given in providing
alignment between welded structural members. Allowable
misalignment depends on extent of misalignment, stress
level and type of loading as well as type and importance of
the joint (special, primary or secondary structure as defined
in Hl02). Unless otherwise documented to be satisfactory
the maximum misalignments are not to exceed the values
given in 103 and 104.
103 Misalignment of plate edges in butt welds is not to
exceed the following values with a maximum of 4 =:
Secondary structural elements: 0,30 tl
t, - thickness of the thinnest plate.
104 Misalignment of the non-continuous plates in CruCI-
form joints is not to exceed the following values:
Secondary structural elements: 0,501
1
tt - thickness of the thinnest of the two non-continuous plates.
201 A fabrication sequence is to be established ensuring
that the structnre can be assembled in a manner which allows
for continuous inspection and control during all stages of the
work.
202 The welding sequence is to be such that the amount
of shrinkage, distortions and residual stresses is minimised.
203 Tubular members framing into joints are to be care-
fully contoured to obtain accurate alignment. The bevel is
to be formed providing a continuous transition from maxi-
mum to minimum bevel angle around the circumference.
The fabrication is to be planned in such a manner that
backwelding of tubular joints can be performed to the largest
extent possible.
204 Members to be welded are to be brought into correct
alignment and held in position by clamps, other suitable de-
vices or by tack welds until welding has been completed or
progressed to a stage where the holding devices or tack
welds can be removed without danger of distortion, shrink-
age or cracking. Suitable allowances are to be made for
distortion and shrinkage where appropriate.
205 The use of permanent steel backing strips is permitted
when properly accounted for in the design analysis and in
In-service Inspection Progra=e. Ceramic and inert back-
ing strips may be used. A test weld for the intended appli-
cation is to be produced and subjected to mechauical testing.
\
--_//
)
',./
J
A. General
A 100 Basic conditions
A 200 Modelling
Contents
B 100 General
B 200 Wind
B 300 Waves
B 400 Current
C 100 General
C 300 Yielding
C 400 Buckling
C 500 Fatigue
C 600 Ultimale strength
D 100 Deflections
D 200 Vibrations
A. General
SECTION 3
DESIGN PRINCIPLES
302 When determining the structural responses due to dy-
namic loads, the dynamic effect is to be taken into account
when this effect is significant.
303 In the case of structnres subjected to rigid-body mo-
tions, such as floating structnres, the following methods are
accepted, provided the assumptions involved are sufficiently
well-founded:
Direct dynamic analysis:
- determination of maximum response in irregular waves.
Methods including linear wave theory may be considered
for approval
- determination of dynamic response in regnlar design
waves.
Indirect dynamic analysis:
- wind forces, wave forces and the change of buoyancy
forces due to waves are calculated for the structure con-
sidered at rest. Inertia forces, damping forces and moor-
ing forces are added in a realistIc manner in order to
obtain equilibrium.
304 Model tests may be used in combination with or in-
stead of any of the methods mentioned in 303.
401 The overall structural safety is to be evaluated on the
A 100 Basic conditions basis of preventive measures against structural failure put
. . .. into design, fabrication and in-service inspection as well as
101 DIfferent modes of operation or dunng the life the unit's residual strength against total collapse in the case
of 1l1ll
Y
be governmg. for the deSIgn. The followmg of structural failure of vital elements.
deSIgn condItions, as defined m Sec. 1 B, are normally to be Thus for slender vital elements, such as bracings, which are
206 Where temporary cut-outs are made, such cut-outs are consIdered: designed according to criteria given for intact structure,
to be made of sufficient size to allow sound replacement. . tall t' d'ti' complete fracture of an element or joint between elements
- ms a IOn con 1 on . 'd ed dibl <'1 In h th 'd I
Comers of cut-outs are to be given appropriate radii min- t' d'ti' () IS consl er as acre e lal ure. suc case e resl ua
-operamgcon Ions th fth .. . fy . . . & da d
imising local stress concentrations. tn' I d'ti' streng 0 e urnt IS to satis cntena given lor mage
-reevaconlon Ifth" d'ed th 'dl
_ _ _ _ _ _ __ -m ..... ';" 1_ ..... diti.... __ . __ . e not eSlgn _ to _
;LUI lhe tIt-up IS to be checKea tor QlmenSlOnal accuracy . : 2. Sd:" srrengm'-'c-tiiena-;-a-SatiSiac[ory IDUli safety IS ill uDtaineu
before welding. Surfaces to be welded are to be free from '\. '\ - tranSIt con ltion. by improved preventive measures for the pertinent vital ele-
mill scale, slag, rust, grease, paint etc. Edges are to have __ .J --J ments, such as:
a smooth and uniform surface. No welding is to be per- 102 Relevant cases are to be established for the vari-
formed when the surfaces are damp. Suitable protection is ous deSIgn condlti,?ns based on the most unfavourable com-
to be arranged when welding is performed during incleI\1ent of functional loads, envrronmental loads and/or
weather conditions. The groove is to be dry at the time of _. accIdental loads.
welding and at a temperatnre of at least +5C. I) 103 Limiting environmental and operational conditions
208 Preheating's eferably to be pe dth I tri./ (design data) for the different design are .to be
. 1 pr r orme WI e ec c specIfied by the builder. The limiting condillons WIll be
heatm!l elements. Gas burners may be used under controlled stated in the .Appendix to Classification Certificate>.
condlllons. Cuttmg torches are normally not to be used.
209 A WPS is generally to be submitted for acceptance for
welds in special areas, primary structural elements and butt
welds in secondary structnral elements. For further details,
see Pt.2 Ch.3 Sec.2.
210 Welding procedures may be accepted for production
if satisfactory compliance with requirements is established
by one of the following methods:
- performing of WPQTs and subsequent review of the
welding procedure qualification records (for further de-
tails, see Pt.2 Ch.3 Sec.2)
- review of previously qualified WPQTs
- review of WPS
- review and verification of documentation showing suc-
cessful application of welding procedures over a pro-
longed period of time.
A 200 Modelling
201 Models for analysis of the structure are to satisfac-
torily simulate the behaviour of the actual structure, includ-
ing its supporting or anchoring system, and the relevant
environmental conditions.
202 Reasonable simplifications may be introduced as a
part of structnral idealisation. For dynamic analyses the real
mass distribution may, when adequate, be represented by
equivalent masses or by lumped masses.
301 The determination of forces, moments, stresses and
deflections, as well as the corresponding permissible values,
is to be based on accepted principles of dynamics, statics,
and strength of materials, and is to be in accordance with the
regnlations given in this chapter and in Ch.2.
- lower permissible stresses
- higher fatigue resistance
- more frequent and comprehensive in-service inspection.
402 When determining the overall structural system, par-
ticular care is to be taken that the solution does not lead to
unnecessarily complicated connections.
501 Stress concentrations are to be avoided as far as pos-
sible. Connections are to be designed with smooth transi-
tions and proper alignment of elements. Large cut-outs are
to be kept away from flanges and webs of primary girders
in regions with high stresses.
502 Transmission of tensile stresses through the thickoess
of plates is to be avoided as far as possible. In cases where
transmission of tensile stresses through the thickness cannot
be avoided, the adoption of structural steel with improved
through thickoess properties may be required.
Regarding testing etc. see Sec. 10.
so arranged that water cannot be trapped in local structnres
or machinery exposed to the ambient temperatnre.
See also Pt.4 Ch.l Sec.3 B204.
DEI NORSKE VERITAS DEI NORSKE VERITAS
Rules for Mobile Offshore Units, ,January 1998
C. ,Alternative Structural Materials
C 100 General
101 Materials other than steel may be used in offshore
structures when such materials are suitable for the purpose,
taking all the safety aspects, such as strength, chemical re-
sistance, fire resistance etc. into consideration. In any case
the material is to be approved by the Society for the intended
use.
102 The relevant material properties, and the specification
and verification of these, are to be in accordance with a re-
cognised code if such one exists. Particular attention is to
be paid to possible special requirements related to the use
of the material in sea-water or ocean environments in gen-
eral.
103 If no recognised code exists, the requirements will be
specially considered in each case.
Table B2 Thickness limitations (mm) of structural steels for various application categories and design temperatures
Category
Minimum design temperature (0C)
Grade OC -looe -20C -30
o
e -40C -sooe
A 30
B 40
D 50
E 50
AH 40
Secondary
DH 50
EH 50
FH 50
AEH 40
DEH 50
EEH 50
FEH 50
A 20
B 25
D 45
E 50
AH 25
Primary
DH 45
EH 50
FH 50
AEH 20
DEH 45
EEH 50
FEH 50
A X
B 15
D 30
E 50
AH 15
Special
DH 30
EH 50
FH 50
--
" AEH
;\I;
DEH 25
EEH 50
FEH 50
X indic!tes no application.
--
C 200 Aluminium
201 Aluminium alloy for marine use may be applied in
superstructures, deckhouses, hatch covers, hatch beams and
sundry items, provided the strength of the aluminium struc-
ture is equivalent to that required for a steel structure.
202 For rolled products taking part in the overall strength,
alloys marked A, see Pt.2 Ch.2, are to be used.
The alloy is to be chosen considering the stress level con-
cerned.
203 In weld zones of rolled or extruded products (includ-
ing heat affected zones) the mechanical properties given for
aluminium welding consumables may in general be used for
the scantling requirements.
20
30
50
50
30
50
50
50
25
45
50
50
10
20
40
50
20
40
50
50
X
35
50
50
X
X
20
45
X
20
45
50
l\;
15
40
50
10 X X X
I
20 10 X X
45 35 25 15
50 50 45 35
20 10 X X
45 35 25 15
50 50 45 35
50 50 50 50
10 X X X
35 25 15 X
50 45 35 25
50 50 50 45
X X X X
10 X X X
30 20 10 X
50 40 30 20
10 X X X
30 20 10 X
50 40 30 20
50 50 50 40 ,
X X X X
25 15 X X
45 35 25 15
50 50 45 35
X X X X
X X X X
10 X X X
35 25 15 X
X X X X
10 X X X
35 25 15 X
50 50 40 30
X " , J(, ' ,X ... ". ,X
X X X X
30 20 10 X
50 40 30 20
204 The various formulae and expressions involving the
factor f1 may normally also be applied for aluminium alloys
when:
"fa
f1 = 240
"fa = yield stress in N/mm
2
at 0,2 % offset. "fa is not to
be taken greater than 80 % of the ultimate tensile
strength.
For minimum thickness requirements not involving the fac-
tor f 1 the equivalent minimum value for aluminium alloys
may ,l)Qrmally be obtained when the requirement is divided
bY'l/f[ .
DET NORSKE VERITAS
J
)
J
/)
:J

211 Approved welding procedure qualification (see 210)
is required for all production welding of:
- special areas
- primary structural elements involving extra high strength
steels.
Tack welding incorporated in the production welding is to
be qualified. Independent of structural classification welding
procedures are to be qualified for:
- new welding methods
- high heat input welding methods (e.g. electrogas, e1ec-
troslag, triple landem submerged arc) on steels with im-
pact toughness requirements
- large thicknesseslhigh structural restraint.
Definitions of structural categories are given in Sec.1 B300.
212 For mobile offshore units to be used in one location
over a long period of time, e.g. for production, CTOD
testing is to be included in the qualification of welding pro-
cedures for joints with thickness above 50 mm in special
areas and in primary structural elements involving extra high
strength steels.
It is to be executed on weld assemblies covering the fol-
lowing combined conditions:
- full penetration buttweld with K-, single V or X- groove
as deemed most'representative for the actual fabrication
- a welding procedure representing the maximum heat in-
put to be used in fabrication
- maximum joint thickness.
One such assembly is to be made and tested for each steel
grade, each welding process and each welding consumable
(brand) used except when used for root passes only.
The CTOD-technique with through-thickness notched type
specimen according to BS 7448 should be used. Three (3)
valid test specimens are to be obtained for each test position.
CTOD-testing of welds is to be carried out with the fatigue
notch tip positioned in the coarse grained region of the HAZ
and in the weld metal. For HAZ, positioning and determi-
nation of the actual location of the fatigue crack tip are to
be performed after testing. HAZ testing can be omitted if
relevant CTOD properties in HAZ have been documented
'-' -' -- the
base material (i.e. on the same grade of material from the
, . .-1 same manufacturer).
J
CTOD-testing of weld metal can be omitted if relevant
CTOD properties in accordance with requirements above
have been documented by the consumable manufacturer.
The test temperature is to be:
_lOoC for splash zone and above
OC for submerged parts.
However, for design temperatures below -15C the test
temperature is subject to approval by the Society.
The required CTOD value is to be decided in each case,
based on a fracture mechanics evaluation for the particular
structural part.
213 All fabrication welding is to be performed within the
limits of essential variables of the approved welding proce-
dure. This also includes tack welding, seal welding, welding
of lifting lugs and attachment welds as well as repair weld-
ing.
214 When resuming welding on partially filled joints in
special areas, preheating is to be performed and the tem-
perature is, within the specified tolerances, to be equal to the
interpass temperature for the welding pass in question.
Pt.3 Ch.1 8ec.10 '- Page 35
215 Grooves produced by gouging are to be in accordance
with the groove profile dimensions given in the welding
procedure specification.
216 Welding consumable requirements are to be in ac-
cordance with Pt.2 Ch.3 Sec.3.
217 Welding consumables are to be supplied in sealed
moisture-proof containers. Consumables which have been
contaminated by moisture, rust, oil, grease, dirt or other
deleterious matter, are to be discarded unless properly re-
conditioned.
218 Storage and handling of welding consumables are to
be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations,
and in accordance with procedures giving details regarding
conditions in storage rooms, temperature in storage ovens
and quivers, length of exposure and conditions, as applica-
ble, for cycling of fluxes and rebaking of coated electrodes.
Recycling of fluxes for submerged-arc welding is to be per-
formed in a manner which ensures a mixture of new and
used flux with continually homogenous properties.
219 Welds are to be terminated in a manner which will
ensure sound welds without end-craters. Extensions bars and
run-off plates are to be removed upon completion and cool-
ing of the weld. The end of the weld is to be made smooth
and flush with the edges of abutting parts.
220 Grinding of welds with the intention of increasing the
fatigue life andlor reducing the probability of brittle fracture
is to be carried out according to approved specifications(s).
221 Welding production tests my be required by the sur-
veyor during fabrication of welds in special areas and in
primary structural elements to verify that the produced welds
are of acceptable quality.
The welding parameters for the WPT are to be as for the
actual weld and the environmental conditions are to be kept
as realistic as possible. The WPT is to be welded and me-
chanically tested in presence of the surveyor. The require-
ments for a WPT are in general the same as for the relevant
WPQT.
222 If one or more production tests fail to give satisfactory
results, two or more are to be made, both of which are to
give'seeepmble tesull3.
Should one or both of the additional tests fail, the total pro-
duction welding performed with the welding procedure in
question is to be evaluated based on testing of welds and
base material cut-out from the actual structore fabricated.
223 In all cases the failure of a production test is to lead
to a review of the welding performed to establish the reason
for the failure, and appropriate corrective action is to be
carried out.
224 Shop primers applied over areas which will subse-
quently be welded, are to be of a quality accepted by the
Society as having no detrimental effect on the finished weld.
See "Register of Type Approved Products No.1 - Non-Me-
tallic Materials".
301 PWHT is to be applied for joints in C-Mn steels in
special areas when the material thickness at the welds ex-
ceeds 50 mm (see Fig. 1 for guidance on material thickness).
If, however, satisfactory performance in the as-welded con-
dition can be demonstrated by a fitness-for-purpose assess-
ment applying, for example, fracture mechanics testing and
analysis, PWHT may be omitted.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
I,
'y I 112
I,
t,
, ,>,,"),,"'" 1 '
I,
I,
Fig. 1
Guidance on material thickness for PWHT
302 Heat treatment is to be performed in accordance with
a procedure specification including:
- heating and cooJing rates
- temperature gradients
- soaking temperature range and time
- heating facilities
- insulation
- control devices
- recording equipment
- configuration of structure to be post-weld heat treated or
details if local PWHT is to be carried oul.
Heat treatment records are to be kept throughout the heat
treatment process.
303 Heat treatment is to be performed at a soaking tem-
perature in the range 580-{;20C, for a time of 2 minutes
per mm thickness. Soaking temperature for quenched and
tempered steels is to be decided in each case.
The temperature gradient between the outside and the inside
surface during soaking is not to exceed 30C within the
heated area. Double-sided heating is to be applied as far as
possible.
304 Heating, soaking and cooJing are to be carried out in
a controlled manner which prevents cracking or distortions
outside the dimensional tolerances. The temperature gradient
along Jines or planes of symmetry is normally not to exceed
30C when the material temperature is above 300C.
305 The heat-treatment cycle and the actual metal temper-
ature is to be recorded using thermocouples equally spaced
externally, and whenever possible internally, throughout the
heated region.
306 Heat treatment is, wherever possible, to be carried out
in an enclosing furnace. Where it is impractical to heat-treat
the whole item in a closed furnace, local heat treatment may
be adopted. The temperature distribution throughout heating
furnaces is to be controlled within 15C.
A: t,
C: to C: to
B: t,
A: t, C: I, C: t,
B: t2 E: t, E: t,
D: I,
A: t,
E: to E: to
B: t2
307 When local heat treatment is selected, a region ex-
tending minimum 3 times the material thickness on either
side of the area to be heat treated is to be kept at the speci-
fied temperature. The temperature difference at the transi-
tion between the insulated and uninsulated areas should not
exceed 300C.
E. Repairs
E. 11m
101 Repairs are to be carried out in accordance with repair
procedures accepted by the Society.
102 Members distorted by welding may be straightened
by mechanical means or by carefully supervised application
of a limited amount of localised heat. The application of heat
or mechanical force is to be in accordance with a written
procedure.
103 Defects in welds and base material may be rectified
by grinding, machining or welding. Welds of insufficient
strength, ductility or notch toughness are to be completely
removed prior to repair. The mechanical properties of repair
weld are to satisfy the minimum specified properties of the
steel in question.
104 Repair welding in the same area may be carried out
twice. Further repairs are to be evaluated in each individual
case.
105 Repair welding procedure specifications are to be
prepared according to Pt.2 Ch.3 Sec.2.
106 The use of arc-air gouging is to be followed by
grinding, removing the affected material.
107 Whenever a defect is removed, the gouged and
ground area is to be examined by magnetic particle testing
or other suitable methods to verify complete removal.
DET. NORSKE VERITAS
"
) \)
-'I
j
/)
-i
../

I.J
401 Application categories for structural components are
defined in Sec. I.
402 Structural members of column stabilised units are
grouped as follows:
- Special structure
a) Portions of deck plating, heavy flanges, and bulk-
heads within the upper hull or platform which form
.Box. or .1. type supporting structure which receive
major concentrated loads.
b) External shell structure in way of intersections of ver-
tical columns, decks and lower hulls.
c) Major intersections of bracing members.
d) .Through. material used at connections of vertical
columns, upper platform decks and upper or lower
hulls which are designed to provide proper aligument
and adequate load transfer.
e) External brackets, portions of bulkheads, flats, and
frames which are designed to receive concentrated
loads at intersections of major structural members.
I) Highly stressed elements of anchor Jine fairleads,
crane pedestals etc. and their supporting structure.
- Primary structure
a) Deck plating, heavy flanges, and bulkheads within the
upper hull or platform which form .Box. or .1. type
supporting structure which do not receive major con-
centrated loads.
b) External shell structure of vertical columns, lower and
upper hulls, and diagonal and horizontal braces.
c) Bulkheads, flats or decks, stiffeners and girders which
provide local reinforcement or continuity of structure
in way of intersections, except areas where the struc-
ture is considered special application.
d) Main support structure of heavy substructures and
equipment, e.g. anchor Jine fairleads, cranes, drillfl-
and
a) Upper platform decks, or decks of upper hulls except
areas where the structure is considered primary or
special application.
b) Bulkheads, stiffeners, flats or decks and girders in
vertical colunms, decks, lower hulls, diagonal and
horizontal bracing, which are not considered as pri-
mary or special application.
c) Certain large diameter vertical columns with low
length to diameter ratios, except at intersections.
403 Structural members of self-elevating units are grouped
as follows:
- Special structure
a) Vertical columns in way of intersection with the mat
structure.
b) Intersections of lattice type leg structure which incor-
porate novel construction, includiog the use of steel
castings.
c) Highly stressed elements of crane pedestals, etc. and
their supporting structure.
- Primary structure
a) Combination of bulkhead, deck, side and bottom
plating within the upper hull which form .Box. or
.1. type main supporting structure.
b) External plating of cylindricallegs.
c) Plating of all components of lattice type legs.
d) Jack-house supporting structure and bottom footing
structure which receives initial transfer of load from
legs.
e) Internal bulkheads, shell and deck of bottom mat
supporting structure which are desigued to distribute
major loads, either uniform or concentrated, into the
mat structure.
I) Main support structure of heavy substructures and
equipment, e.g. cranes, drillfloor substructure, and
helicopter deck.
a) Deck, side and bottom platiog of upper hull except
where the structure is considered primary application.
b) Internal bulkheads, decks, stiffeners and girders of
upper hull structure.
c) Internal bulkheads and girders in cyJindricallegs.
d) Internal bulkheads, stiffeners and girders of bottom
mat supporting structure except where the structure is
considered primary or special application.
404 The joint between two components is to be assigued
an application category equal to the highest of the joined
components.
501 The grade of steel to be used is in general to be related
to the design temperature and thickness as shown in Table
B2 for the application categories, special, primary and sec-
ondary respectively.
Guidance note:
Each application category region includes the upper limit.
--Oof----G-u-i n-o-t-!)--
502 A lower service temperature than stipulated in the ta-
ble for the relevant steel grade may be considered when a
stress relieving heat treatment is carried out after welding.
503 For regions subjected to compressive andlor low ten-
sile stresses, consideration will be given to the use of lower
steel grades than stated in the table.
504 The toughness requirements for steel plates, sections'
and weldments exceeding the thickness limits in the table are
to be evaluated in each separate case.
505 Grade of steel to be used for thicknesses less than 10
mm andlor design temperature above OC will be specially
506 The use of steels with specified minimum yield stress
> 550 N/mm
2
(NV 550) is subject to special consideration
for applications where anaerobic environmental conditions
such as staguant water, organically active mud (bacteria) and
hydrogen sulphide may predominate (see Sec.9 C105).
Predominantly anaerobic conditions can for this purpose be
characterised by a concentration of sulphate reducing bacte-
ria SRB in the order of maguitude > 10
3
SRB/mI (method
accordiog to NACE TPC Publication No.3).
The steels' susceptibility to hydrogen induced stress crack-
ing (H1SC) are to be specially considered when used for
critical applications (such as jack-up legs and spud cans).
See also Sec.9 CI05.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
SECTION 2
MATERIALS
Contents
A. General
A 100 Scope
B. Structural Steel
B 100 General
B 300 Design temperatures
C 100 General
C 200 Aluminium
A. General
A 100 Scope
101 The requirements in this section deal with the selection
of various structural materials in compliance with the re-
quirements given in Pt.2.
102 The steel grades selected for structural components
are to be related to calculated stresses and requirements to
toughness properties. Requirements for toughness proper-
ties are in general based on the Charpy V -notch test and are
dependent on design temperature, application category of
the component and thickness of the component in question.
The material toughness may also be evaluated by fracture
mechanics testing in special cases.
201 Rolled, forged or cast elements of steel and aluminium
for structural application are to be certified by the Society
grade and strength group. in that case the letters EH are
substituted by one of the numbers indicated in Table B 1,
e.g. D 550-steel.
Table Bl Material designations
Desig-
Strength group
Minimum yield
11
nation stress Nlmm
2
NV-NS Normal (NS) - 1,00
NV-27 265 1,10
NV-32
High strength (HS)
315 1,31
NV-36 355 1,48
NV-40 390 1,63
NV-420 420 1,75
NV-460 460 1,92
NV-500
Extra high strength (EHS)
500 2,08
NV-550 550 2,29
NV-620 620 2,58
NV-690 690 2,88
203 Structural steel with improved through thickness pro-
perties is to have the letter Z added to the reference given
in Table BI and 202, e.g. NVDZ, NVE36Z, NVF500Z.
204 The material factor fl included in the various formulae
for scantlings and in expressions giving permissible stresses,
is a non dimensional yield stress expression defined as fol-
lows:
af
fl = 240
af = yield stress in N/=2 specified as the smaller of:
-minimum upper yield stress
-yield stress .at 0,2 % offset.
Values of fl may also be obtained from Table Bl.
in accordance with Pt.2 Ch.l.
... Jl 3()() I:ligIltelllpc!r!}tlJl"eJ;
202 Requirements for certificates for 301 The design temperature is a reference temperature
castings and other matenals f<;lf speclal parts are. stated m used as a criterion for the selection of the grade of steel to
connection with the rule requITements for each mdlvldual be used. The design temperature is not to exceed the lo,:"est
part. service temperature of the steel as defined for vanous
B. Structural Steel
B 100 General
101 Where the subsequent rules for material grade are de-
pendent on plate thickness, the requirements are based on
the thickness as built.
201 Structural steel of various strength groups will be re-
ferred to as given in Table Bl.
202 Structural steel of various grades will be referred to
as follows:
- A, B, D and E denotes NS-steel grades
- AH, D H, EH and FH denotes HS-steel grades. HS-steel
may also be referred to by a combination of grade and
strength group. in that case the letter H is substituted by
one of the numbers indicated in Table BI, e.g. A 36-steel
- AEH, DEH, EEH and FEH denotes EHS-steel grades.
EHS-steel may also be referred to by a combination of
structural parts in 302 to 305.
302 External structures above the light transit waterline are
to be designed for service temperatures down to the lowest
daily mean temperature for the area(s) where the unit is to
operate. However, for column stabilised units of c0t;Iven-
tional type, the pontoon deck need normally not be deslgned
for service temperatures lower than OC.
Guidance note:
If data giving the lowest daily mean temperature are not avail-
able, other criteria may be accepted after special consideration.
303 External structures below the light transit waterline
need normally not be designed for service temperatures
lower than O'C.
304 internal structures of colunms, pontoons and decks are
assumed to have the same service temperature as the adja-
cent external structure if not otherwise documented.
305 Internal structures in way of permanently heated
rooms need normally not be designed for service temper-
atures lower than O'C.
DEY NORSKE VERITAS
:J
)
:J
:J
)
J
108 Repair welding is to be performed using extra low
hydrogen welding consumables (suffix H5), applying an
appropriate preheating and working/interpass temperature.
The preheating and working temperature when making
shallow and local repairs in special areas and primary
structural elements is to be raised 50'C above the level used
for production welding, and be at least 100'C. The working
temperature is to be maintained until the repair has been
completed. To ensure sound repair welds, the single repair
length is not to be shorter than approximately 100 =.
109 Repair of welded joints is to be carried out by re-
moving the unacceptable portion of the weld without sub-
stantial removal of base material. For planar defects the
repair length on either side of the defect is to be 50 =
longer than the size of the defect as confirmed by NDT.
Long defects may be required repaired in several steps to
avoid overloading or cracking. Each repair step is to be
controlled so as not to cause plastic deformation of the re-
maining material when removing the defect.
110 Repair welding of post-weld heat-treated joints is
normally to initiate a new heat treatment.
111 Minor discontinuities (maximum 3 = in depth) may
be removed by grinding or machining, making a smooth
transition into the surrounding material. The extent of such
repair is to be approved by the Society.
112 Steel castings and forgings are normally to be post-
weld heat treated after repair welding.
F 100 General
101 Concerning qualification of welding procedures, ap-
proval of welders and type approval of welding consum-
ables, reference is made to Pt.2 Ch.3.
G 100 General
101 Installation or application of corrosion protection sys-
tems is to be carried out in conformance with recognised
standards of workmanship and approved specifications.
201 The area to be coated is to be defined and if necessary
limited by masking. Substances and areas which may be
damaged by the pre-treabnent andlor by the coating, such
as anodes, are to be shielded.
202 The surface is to be clean and dry. Oil or grease is to
be removed by washing with a suitable solvent. Salt de-
posits are to be removed by washing with fresh water.
203 The surface is to be blast-cleaned to the degree of
cleanliness and profile as required in the specification. N or-
mally, the minimum requirements to steel surface quality for
primer application is ISO 8501-1 Sa 2112 or equivalent for
external surfaces and internal zones exposed to sea-water.
Surface roughness is to be as reco=ended by the primer
and coating manufacturer.
204 Final blast-cleaning and coating application are only
to be carried out when the steel temperature is sufficiently
above the dew point to prevent condensation of moisture on
the surface.
Hules tor Mobile uttsnore Units, ..January 1
205 The coatings are to be applied as stated in the ap-
proved specification and according to the supplier's recom-
mendations.
206 Survey, inspection, repair and touch-up are to be
performed according to approved specifications.
207 Primer-coated surfaces which have been exposed for
a period exceeding the reco=ended time for overcoating
are to be surveyed and, if necessary, be adequately treated
before applying the next coating layer.
208 Adequate curing times in relation to temperature and
humidity conditions, overcoating intervals, the dry-film
thicknesses of the individual coats and the total dry-film
thickness, are to be within tolerances stated in the coating
specification.
301 Fabrication and installation of the anodes are to be
carried out according to approved drawings and specifica-
tions.
302 Approval of anode shapes and their fastening devices
(studs, clamps etc.) is normally given as a type approval.
For anodes fastened by other means than welding, careful
attention is to be paid to ensure good electrical contact.
303 Welding of connections is to be carried out by certif-
icated welders.
Welding consumables approved for the steel grade in ques-
tion are to be used.
Fillet welds are as far as practicable to be continuous (all
around the studs).
Anodes are normally to be connected to the structure in way
of local stiffening.
Any doubling plates to which anodes are welded, are to have
a thickness normally not less than 10 =, well rounded
comers, and are to be continuously welded. Material grades
of the doubling plates and anode studs or pads welded di-
rectly to main plating, are to be in accordance with the re-
be. of
304 For anodes connected to bulkhead plating, girder web
plates etc. having a thickness equal to or less than IS =,
at least one of the studs is to be welded in way of or close
to a local stiffener. Anodes connected to shell plating of
trusses etc., where no internal stiffening is provided, are to
be fastened to doubling plates permanently welded to the
shell.
305 Submerged zone: anodes located in way of internal
stiffening, except on columns close to truss connections,
may be welded directly to the shell plating without doubling
plates. Below light water line, such direct welding will be
accepted only for anode studs or pads not intended to be
removed by renewal of anodes. A corresponding notation
will be given in the "Appendix to Classification Certif-
icates". In any case, anodes located on slim trusses without
internal stiffening and on columns close to truss connections,
are to be fastened to doubling plates permanently welded to
the shell.
systems
401 The anodes, the cables and the signal receivers are to
be furnished with manufacturer's material certificates and
be properly marked for identification.
DEY NORSKE VERITAS
402 The installation of the system is to be carried out ac-
cording to an approved specification.
403 All equipment, cables etc. are to be approved for use
in the respective hazardous zones, if applicable.
404 Testing of the proper functioning of the systems is to
be carried out. The test method and results are to be re-
ported.
405 Final testing and approval of the system is to be per-
formed after installation.
H 100 Welds
101 Welds are to be subjected NDT as the fabrication
work proceeds. Testing is to be carried out applying suitable
methods.
Final inspection and NDT of structural steel welds are not
to be carried out before 48 hours after completion, except
where PWHT is required. When PWHT is performed, the
final NDT is to be carried out when all heat treatment has
been completed.
The time delay may upon agreement be reduced for NV 36
grades or lower and for NV 420 grades or lower for plate
thicknesses less than 40 mm, if consistent low failure rate
of delayed cracking has been documented for the materials
and welding consumables in question.
102 The non-destructive tests are to be carried out within
the different structural categories according to Sec. 1 B300.
Guidance note:
A. Column stabilised units
All structures not defmed as primary or special, in partiCUlar
internal structures like stiffeners, girders, etc., including
their attachments to primary or special clements, if not oth-
erwise stated, as these are considered to have a high degree
of redundancy so that single element failures do not affect the
overall integrity.
'which -arC--CS5tllti-al to -tlie', ovcra.l1' integrity -of the
unit, e.g.:
a) Shell plating of pontoons, columns and bracings.
b) Internal structures in slender bracings:
- longitudinal stiffeners or gusset plates
Extent: transverse buttwelds, brackets
- transverse stiffeners
Extent: welds on bracing shell
- bracings and column/pontoon/deck
- column and pontoon deck
mitting nonnal stresses, including welds attaching sec-
ondary structure.
d) Main girders in deck and their support at columns.
Extent: welds transmitting nonnal stresses, transverse
buttwelds in the web, deck and flange.
Cranes, drillfloor substructure, flare boom, helicopter
deck, davits, fairleads, windlass, towing arrangement,
boat tie lugs, anchor bolster, etc.
f) Attachments welded to bracing shell, using doubling
plates, e.g.:
Ladder/platform supports, guard rail stanchions, anodes,
pipe supports etc.
3) Special areas
Areas of the primary structural elements in way of critical
stress concentrations, e.g. with reference to a-d above:
i) Shell plating:
- penetrations in bracing shell
- attachment on bracing shell not welded on doubling
plates.
ii) Internal structures in slender bracings:
- end of stiffeners and gusset plates
- notches (shallops) in longitudinal stiffeners or gusset
plates
- external brackets and internal structures in way of the
brackets.
iii) Intersections:
- stress concentrations in way of main load transfer
paths
- notches (scallops) and penetrations.
iv) Main support structures
- fairlead support
- stress concentrations at intersection with crane pedestal
supporting structure.
1 Special' is dependent upon the structural detailing in way
of the connection. Typically special structural categorisation
. is to extend at least I,D m distance from the stress concen-
small coIUlections the extent may however be reduced to 0,5
B. Self-elevating units
All structures not defmed as primary or special. See also A.
Elements which are essential to the overall integrity of the
unit, e.g.:
a) Shell plating of barge, parts submerged in transit.
b) Legs
- shell plating of cylindrical legs
- all components of lattice type legs.
- jackhouse and barge
- leg and footings
mitting normal stresses, including welds attaching sec-
ondary structures.
d) Main girders in the barge, footings, and jackhouse
Extent: welds transmitting normal stresses, i.e. transverse
buttwelds in the web and flanges.
cranes, dri1lfloor substructure, cantilever beams, flare
boom, helicopter deck, davits, fairleads, windlass, tow-
ing arrangement, etc.
3) Special areas
Areas of primary structural elements in way of critical stress
concentrations, e.g.:
- intersection of lattice type leg structures which incorporate
novel construction, including the use of steel castings.
Extent and methods of control are subject to special con-
sideration
- jackhouse supporting structure
- intersections between legs and bottom footing structure
- circumferential manual buttwelds on cantilever part of
crane pedestal shells
- stress concentrations at intersection with shell supporting
structure of crane pedestal.
'Special' is dependent upon the structural detailing in way
of the coIUlection. Typically special structural categorisation
DET NORSKE VERITAS
)
\)
-)
C)
)
I)
')
j
)
- specification of background and design data used in the
analysis, such as area in which the structural is to oper-
ate, relevant wave conditions, drag and added mass co-
efficients, wind and current velocities, hydrostatic loads
and other functional loads
- significant operational loads, e.g. from drilling
- resultant overall and local forces, moments and stresses
due to relevant loading conditions
- verification of compliance with the rules
- results from model tests, which may be submitted as al-
ternatives or as substantiation for the required calcu-
lations.
301 Documents containing limiting operating conditions
are to be submitted for approval, containing essentials re-
lated to classification.
These documents should include the following information,
as applicable to the particular unit, so as to provide suitable
guidance to the operating personnel with regard to safe op-
eration of the unit:
- operation limitations. Pertinent data for each approved
mode of operation, including functional and variable
loads, environmental conditions, foundation character-
istics (for sea bed support units only), draft, etc.
- stability. Information to be included as given in Ch.2
Sec.6
- instructions for operation, including precautions to be
taken in adverse weather, changing mode of operations,
any inherent limitations of operations, etc.
- ballasting system. Plans and descriptions of the ballast
system and instructions for ballasting/deballasting in in-
tact and damaged conditions
- position mooring. Limiting operating conditions and
corresponding procedures as basis for POSMOOR (if
applicable)
- dynamic positioning. Limiting operating conditions and
corresponding procedures as basis for DYNPOS (if ap-
plicable)
- .facility plan. for in-service inspection, . The plan is to
show the types of facilities which are or will be provided
to make important structural parts accessible for survey
in accordance with the in-service inspection programme.
- limitations. Any limitations on the operation of the unit
or the equipment, e.g. cranes, drilling equipment, etc.
D 100 General
101 Design parameters or geographical areas for operation
and limitations regarding operation of the unit will be stated
in the .Appendix to the Classification Certificate .
DET NORSKE VERITAS
211 Stiffener is a collective term for a secondary support-
ing member. Other terms used are:
- frame
- longitudinal.
212 Most probable lnrgest - The value of an environ-
mental parameter corresponding with the peak probability
density in the extreme value distribution for a given return
period.
213 Return period - The average time period between
two consecutive exceedances of a given value of an envi-
ronmental parameter.
214 Short-term - A period of time during which the en-
vironmental conditions are stationary in a statistical sense.
215 Long-term - A period of time during which the en-
vironmental conditions are non-stationary.
216 Stochastic wave loads - Short- or long-term wave
loads in irregular seas.
217 Detenninistic wave loads - Wave loads in regular
waves with predefined wave height and steepness.
velocity during a time interval (sampling time) of one min-
ute.
301 Structural components are grouped into categories ac-
cording to:
- level and type of applied stress
- loading rate
- presence of stress concentrations and critical load transfer
points
- consequences of failure.
Three categories are defined with the following features:
- Special
pertiens of primary ntruetural elementn ""hioh are
in way of critical load transfer points, stress concen-
trations, etc.
- Primary
Structural elements essential to the overall integrity of the
unit.
- Secondary
Structural elements of minor importance, failure of which
is unlikely to affect the overall integrity of the unit.
C. Documentation
101 The following plans and particulars are normally to
be submitted for approval:
- transverse sections
- longitudinal sections
- deck
- shell plating and framing
- pillars, girders
- legs, diagonals and strnts
- strncture in way of jacking or other elevating arrange-
ments
- stability columns and intermediate columns
- hulls, pontoons, footings, pads or mats
- superstrnctures and deckhouses
- lifeboat platforms
- support of major strnctural equipment, e.g.: fairleads,
cranes, anchor winches, helicopter deck, deck modules,
diesel engines, thrusters, towing brackets, supply boat
mooring eyes, anchor bolsters, flare booms, davits, blow
out preventers, riser tensioners, guideline tensioners,
mud and cement tanks, etc.
- welding procedure specifications. For particulars, see
Sec.IO
- methods and locations for non-destrnctive testing
- watertightlstrnctural bulkhead and flats
- arrangement and details of watertight doors and hatches
- corrosion protection/control plans. For particulars, see
Sec.9
- temporary and emergency mooring arrangement. For
particulars, see Ch.2 Sec.5
- towing arrangement. For particulars, see Ch.2 Sec.s
- steering arrangement. For particulars, see Ch.2 SecA
- details of items for which additional class notations have
been requested (e.g. see HELDK)
- plans for facilities for in-service inspection. See 400.
102 The following plans, descriptions and calulations,
where applicable, are normally to be submitted for infur-
mation:
- general arrangement. In the early design stage a prelimi-
nary plan may' be accepted. However, at completion of
the vessel a final plan is to be submitted. For the review
of the damage stability this plan is to indicate the water-
tight compartmentation, watertight bulkheads and flats
and all openings therein. Doors, hatches, ventilators etc.,
and their means of closure are to be indicated. Piping and
ventilation systems should be shown in sufficient detail
to evaluate their effects on the watertight integrity of the
vessel after incurring damage
- capacity plan. Volumes, maximum density of contents,
centres of gravity of load spacesltanks
- plan indicating design loadings for all decks
- summary of distributions of fixed and variable weights
- global strnctural analysis for relevant loading conditions
- local structural analysis, showing the transmission of
forces in joints
- calculations substantiating adequacy of strncture to trans-
rilil forces between legs -aadhull through ihe jaelting--ot
other elevating system
- evaluation of the unit's ability to resist overturning while
bearing on the sea bed
- corrosion protection/control plans. for particulars, see
Sec.9
- clearance between the deck strncture and the wave crest,
see Ch.2 Sec.2 and Sec.3
- stability calculations, both intact and damaged, over ap-
propriate range of draughts, including the transit condi-
tions, see Ch.2 Sec.6
- lines or offsets
- curves of form or equivalent data
- cross curves of stability or equivalent data
- wind heeling moment curves or equivalent data
- tank sounding tables
- quality control procedures. For particulars see Sec. 10.
103 The strnctural plans to be submitted are to indicate
clearly the scantlings, corrosion addition, types and grades
of material, joint details, welding or other methods of con-
nection, types of weld, weld deposit if required according
to Sec.S CI02, design temperatures, and if any, tank boun-
daries with the location of overflowslheight of air pipes.
201 The calculations to be submitted in conjunction with
the scantling plans are, in so far applicable, to contain:
DEY NORSKE VERITAS
J :J
.J :J
-.J
:J
.... J
'J
is to extend at least 1,0 m distance from the stress concen-
small connections the extent may however be reduced to 0,5
--e-n-d--o-f--G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e--
103 The NDT tests are normally to be carried out to an
extent not less than required in Table HI.
104 If the weld quality level is below the normal, the ex-
tent of examination is to be increased. If the weld quality
level is satisfactory, the extent of examination may be re-
duced to the discretion of the surveyor.
105 Repeated findings of cracks or lack of fusion require
an increased extent of non-destructive testing as well as re-
vision of the welding procedure.
106 Normally the welds are at least to meet the require-
ments stated in Tables H2, H3 and H4.
As the test methods differ in their limitations andlor possi-
bilities of recording and documentation, special acceptance
criteria are given for each method where necessary.
Alternative evaluations ensuring an equivalent level of
quality may in special cases be considered.
107 Plates which are subjected to siguifIcant tensile
stresses in the thickness direction in way of cross joints, etc.
are to be ultrasouically tested after welding into the strnc-
ture, to make sure that lamellar tearing has not taken place.
If steel with improved through thickness properties has been
adopted, this test may be reduced to spot-checks only.
Guidance note:
To obtain reliable test results, full penetration welds should be
used for such connections.
108 Calibration procedures and construction of reference
curves for ultrasonic tests are to be as specified in Classi-
fication Note No.7 or equivalent standards.
109 Fig.2 and Table H4 specify defects which are to be
reported, repaired etc. when detected during an ultrasouic
test.
110 NDT is to be reported and all essential control pa-
lMlliclelsal6 -
Regarding ultrasonic testing, see also Fig.2.
201 All tanks are to be tested for watertightness by an ac-
ceptable method in presence of the surveyor. The test may
be performed as a hydraulic test using water. Alternatively
compressed air and soap-water may be used.
If water is applied, the pressure is not to be less than 25
kN 1m
2
at the top of the tank. The outside of the tank must
be dry and clean.
If compressed air and soap solution are used, the air pres-
sure is not to exceed 20 kN/m
2
, and is to be reduced to a
smaller value, but not less than IS kN/m
2
before inspection.
The soap solution is to give clear indications even of small
leakages.
Guidance note:
Care should be taken so that the pressure in the tank does not
exceed 20 kN/m
2
above atmospheric pressure because of unex-
pected increase in ambient temperature, falling atmospheric
pressure or otheIWise. The pressure is to be measured by an
accurate method such as a V-shaped tube with water. Means
should be provided to release the pressure in an emergency case.
202 Bulkheads between tanks arranged to carry different
liquid contents are to be hydraulically tested from at least
one side.
Pt.3 Ch.1 Sec.10 :.... Page 39
DISTANCE AMPLITUDE
1
{ECHO HEIGHTI
11,1". -I_ I ... t; .... VI'lU .... rtl r:a ..
, j
PRIMARY ELEMENTS
I INCLUDING SPECIAL
AREAS I
}
TO BE
REPORTED
TO BE REPAIRED
ACCEPTABLE
PATH OFSOUND
I DEPENDANT OF PROBE LOCATION I
Fig. 2
Ultrasonic tests, reference curve etc.
203 If water is used, the test may be combined with the
structural test described in 300.
SECTION NORMAL TO WELD LENGTH
a = largest extent of cross sec-
lion
b = distance between the lines
b .. 3a, i.e. to be considered
as one slag line
b;>o 3a, i.e. to be considered
as two parallel slag lines
Fig. 3

SLAG
b
301 At least one of several identical tanks is to undergo a
structural test. Unless otherwise decided by the Society, the
test is to be carried out by applying water.
302 The test pressure height hT is to be taken as the design
pressure height described in Ch.2 Sec.2 C300 for load case
a). This implies that the following test pressure heights will
normally apply:
- for tanks with an approved maximum filling height to the
top of the air pipe:
hT = hopl or hT = (hs3 + hpol
whichever is greater
- for tanks with an approved maximum fItling height less
than to the top of the air pipe:
hT = (hop2 + hD2l or hT = (hs3 + hpol
whichever is greater.
hpo = 2,5 m in general
= height corresponding to valve opening pressure when
exceeding the general value.
For other definitions, see Ch.2 Sec.2 C300.
DEY NORSKE VERITAS
Page 40 - Pt.3 Ch.1 Sec. 1 0
The pressure is to be maintained for at least 20 minutes. The
filling rate is to be restricted to avoid excessive dynamic
design pressure. See PtA Ch.1 SecA E200.
303 The structural test is considered successful if no sig-
nificant deformations or other damages have developed
during the test.
Table HI Extent of testing
Structural
Type of connection
category
Special Butt weld
Primary Butt weld
Secondary Butt weld
Cross- and T-joints. full penetration welds
1) Liquid penetrant testing to be adopted for non ferro-magnetic materials.
2) May be partly or wholly replaced by ultrasonic testing upon agreement.
304 Closing appliances for access openings etc. in decks,
bulkheads etc. which are to be watertight, are to be sepa-
rately tested before installation. Structural testing of other
parts outside tanks may be required.
305 If structural tests reveal weaknesses in the structure,
the surveyor may reqnire further testing.
Test method
Vzsual Magnetic Radio-
inspection particle 1) graphy 2)
Ultrasonic
100% 100% 100%
100% 100% - 100%
100% 100% -
-
100%
20% j) 10% 4)
100% 20% - 20%
100% 20% -
-
100%
spot 5) spot ,)
100%
spot 5)
-
spot 5)
100%
spot 5) -
-
3) For weld connections on pontoon, column and upper hull shell not subjected to high residual stress, spot check will be accepted as sufficient.
4) Additionally. all manual welds in bracing 100%.
5) Approximately 2-5%.
Table H2 Visual, magnetic particle and liquid penetrant testing
Type of defect
Structural category
Special
I
Primary Secondary
On the root side of welds
Incomplete penetration or
Not accepted
for which back welding
lack of fusion is not required:
Length <toI2, maximum 10 mm.
Cracks Not accepted
Undercut, maximum depth, mm Not accepted
I
0,3 1) 1,0 1)
1) Provided round shape and insignificant notch effect (regardless of length).
Table H3 Radiographic testing
Type of defect
Structural category
Special Primary Secondary
Porosity 1) 2)
Isolated: Largest pore diameter, mm tiS, maximum 4 tl4, maximum 6 t/3, maximum 6
Cluster: Largest pore diameter, mm 2 3 4
Maximum length along the weld of
projected pore area, mm 20 25 30
Slag inclusion 1) 3) 4)
Maximum width, mm tiS, maximum 4 tl4, maximum 6 tl3, maximum 6
Maximum length, mm t 2t 4t
Incomplete penetration Lengtb3fO), nnn Not accepted in
connections where full
:5 t, maximum 25 :5 2t, maximum 50
penetration is required
Lack of fusion
Length 5) 6), nnn
Not accepted
< 2t, maximum 50
Cracks Not accepted
1) If the distance between the similar defects (pore or slag) is less than the largest extent of one of the defects, they are to be considered as one contin-
uous defect. If the amount of pores or slag may mask other defects, the examination is to be supplemented with radiographic or ultrasonic testing.
2) If the distance between pores is less than 3 times the diameter, the pores are said to form a line or a cluster. Pores on a line must not be located in
the weld surface.
3) Defects of lengths in the direction of the weld exceeding 3 times their widths form a line. If the distance between slag lines is less than 3 times the
largest extent of the cross section of the defect, the lines are considered as one defect. See Fig.3.
4) If parallel slag lines are found the examination is to be supplemented with ultrasonic tests.
5) Defects on a line where the distance between the defects is shorter than the longest defect, are to be regarded as one continuous defect.
6) Not surface open. For incomplete penetration or lack affusion on root side of welds for which back welding is not required, see Table H2.
DEY NORSKE VERITAS
)
]
)
~ 'I
j
2
\ ~
(J
C)
(\
~
Pt.3 Ch.1 Sec. 1 - Page 1
SECTION 1
A. Classification
A 100 Application
B. Def'mitions
B 100 Symbols
B 200 Tenns
Contents
C. Documentation
D 100 General
A. Classification
A 100 Application
101 The rules in this chapter apply in general to all welded
steel structures as required for the assignment of main class.
102 Structural requirements applicable to specific types of
units (column stabilized units and self-elevating units) are
also given in Ch.2.
B. DefInitions
B 100 Symbols
101 The following symbols are used:
L = length of the vessel, defined as the greatest fore and
aft dimension in m, measured along the centreline
or a projection on the centreline
B breadth of. the vessel, defined as the greatest hori-
zontal dimension in m, measured perpendicular to
the longitudinal centreline
D moulded depth, defined as the vertical distance at
side in m, measured from the moulded baseline to
the moulded line of the uppermost continuous deck
at the middle of L
TE extreme operational draught in m, measured verti-
cally from the moulded baseline to the assigned load
waterline
TTL = light transit draught in m, measured vertically from
the moulded baseline to the lowermost possible
transit waterline
TTH = heavy transit draught in m, measured vertically from
the moulded baseline to the uppermost possible
transit waterline
AE = displacement in t in salt water (density 1,025 t/m
3
)
when draught is T E
gO = standard acceleration of gravity (= 9,80665 m1s
2
)
fl = material factor. See Sec.2
x = axis in the vessel's longitudinal direction
y = axis in the vessel's athwartships direction
z = axis in the vessel's vertical direction
Gb = minimum tensile strength of the material in N/mm2
Gf = yield stress of the material in N/mm
2
. See Sec.2.
B 200 Terms
201 Translational and rotational motions of the vessel are
defined as follows:
- surge is the linear motion along the x-axis
- sway is the linear motion along the y-axis
- heave is the linear motion along the z-axis
- roll is the angnlar motion about the x-axis
- pitch is the angnlar motion about the y-axis
- yaw is the angular motion about the z-axis.
202 Moulded baseline is a horizontal line extending
through the upper surface of bottom shell, lower hull shell
or caisson bottom plating.
203 Light weight is defined as the weight of the complete
unit with all its permanently installed machinery, equipment
and outfit, including permanent ballast, spare parts normally
retained on board, and liquids in machinery and piping to
their normal working levels, but does not include liquids in
storage or reserve supply tanks, items of consumable or
variable loads, stores, or crew and their effects.
204 Installation condition - A condition which is nor-
mally applicable for self-elevating units only. Forces acting
on the unit when lowering legs and elevating the hull are to
be taken into account.
205 Operating conditions - Conditions wherein a unit is
on location for purposes of drilling or other similar oper-
ations, and combined environmental and operational load-
ings are within the appropriate design limits established for
sucliopera!ioiis: Tlie iiilifriiaybe'eiilieraIloaf or supported
on the sea bed, as applicable.
206 Retrieval condition - A condition which is normally
applicable for self.elevating units only. Forces acting on the
unit when lowering hull and elevating legs are to be taken
into account.
207 Survival condition - A condition during which a unit
may be subjected to the most severe environmental loadings
for which the unit is designed. Drilling or similar operations
may have been discontinued due to the severity of the envi-
ronmental loadings. The unit may be either afloat or sup-
ported on the sea bed, as applicable.
208 Transit conditions - All unit movements from one
geographical location to another.
209 Bulkhead structure is defined as transverse or longi-
tudinal bulkhead plating with stiffeners and girders. Water-
tight bulkhead is a collective term for bulkheads required for
retention of reserve buoyancy in case of damages.
Tank bulkhead is a boundary bulkhead in tank for liqnid
cargo, ballast or bunker.
Wash bulkhead is a perforated or partial bulkhead in tank.
210 Girder is a collective term for laterally loaded sup-
porting members. Other terms used are:
- floor (a bottom transverse girder)
- stringer (a horizontal girder on a vertical panel).
DEY NORSKE VERITAS
A. General... ............... .................... ...................... 25
A 100 Scope................................... .................... 25
.A 200 Defmitions................................................ 25
B. Types of Welded Steel Joints .................. .............. 25
B 100 Butt joints ................................................. 25
B 200 Tee or cross joints ....................................... 25
B 300 Lap joints and slot welds ............................... 26
C. Size of Connections ............................................. 26
C 100 General.. .. .. .. .. ........ ................ ....... ...... ..... 26
C 200 Ordinary fillet welds .................................... 27
connections subject to high stresses ........... ,...... 27
C 400 Connections of stiffeners to girders etc, ... " ..... :.. 27
C 500 End connections of girders, pillars and bracings ... 28
D. Welding of Aluminium Structures .......................... 29
D 100 General.................................................... 29
SEC. 9 CORROSION PROTECTION ...................... 30
A. General.. .......................... .......... ...................... 30
A 100 Scope......... .............. ............ ....... ...... ....... 30
A 200 Defmitions.. .. .. .......... .................. ...... ........ 30
A 300 Documentation. .......... .................. .............. 30
B. Acceptable Corrosion Protection ............................ 31
B 100 Atmospheric zone........................................ 31
B 200 Splash zone ............................................... 31
B 300 Submerged zone .......................................... 31
B 400 Internal zone .............................................. 31
B 500 Corrosion additions ...................................... 31
C. Cathodic Protection ............................................ 31
C 100 General .................................................... 31
C 200 Protection by sacrificial anodes ....................... 32
C 300 Protection by impressed current ....................... 32
C 400 Cathodic protection monitoring system .............. 32
system ..................................................... 32
D. Coating ............................................................ 32
D 100 Specification.............................................. 32
D 200 Coating application ...................................... 32
SEC. 10 FABRICATION ........................................ 33
A. General ...... ... ................................ ................... 33
igg
B. Fabrication Planning ........................................... 33
B 100 General....... .. .......... .. ........ .. ...... ..... .......... 33
B 200 Workmanship, quality system and non-destructive
testing (NDT) ............................................. 33
C. Material Identification, Cutting and Forming .... ....... 34
C 100 Material identification ................................... 34
C 200 Cutting and forming ..................................... 34
D. Tolerances, Assembly, Welding and Heat Treatment .. 34
D 100 Tolerances........ .. .......... .......... ........... ........ 34
D 200 Assembly and welding .................................. 34
D 300 Post weld heat treatment (PWHT) .................... 35
E. Repairs .... ........................................ ................ 36
E 100 General............... .......... .. ........ ........... ...... 36
F. Welding of Aluminium Structures .......................... 37
F 100 General .................................................... 37
G. Corrosion Protection Systems ............. ................... 37
G 100 General..................................... ............... 37
G 200 Application of coating................................... 37
G 300 Fabrication and installation of sacrificial anodes ... 37
systems .................................................... 37
H 100 Welds ........ .
................................... 38
38
39
39
I. Records and Documentation ................................. 41
I 100 General .................................................... 41
.:)

8
8
/) 8
Table H4 Ultrasonic testing
Indication
Special
Echo height above (reference level) 50%
Structural category
Primary Secondary
100% 100%
Maximum length 1). mm tl3, maximum 10 tl2, maximum 10 t, maximum 20
Cracks in transverse weld direction not acceptable regardless of echo height above 20% of reference level.
1) Length defined as distance where indication reach or pass the slated percentage of reference level.
I. Records and DocIIIl1entation
I 100 General
101 Adequate records related to the fabrication of the
structure are to be prepared to document that the structure
meets the specified requirements. Such records are to be
compiled in parallel with the fabrication process. Compiled
records are to be systematic and fully traceable. Such re-
cords are to reflect all relevant testing, alterations, additions,
corrections and revisions made during the fabrication period
in order to provide information required during the in- ser-
vice life of the structure.
102 As a minimum, the fabrication records are to contain:
- quality assurance/quality control manual
- qualification records for NDT operators
- welding procedure specifications and qualification re-
cords, including repair procedure
- welders' and welding operators' qualification records
- relevant material certification
- post-weld heat treatment records including drawings with
location reference
- NDT records including drawings with location references
for special areas and primary structural elements includ-
ing survey records for all repairs
- NDT records for secondary structural elements with lo-
cation references
- dimensional control records of section interfaces and final
global dimensions
- inspection summary report
- as-built drawings
- records with regard to any non-conformances and cor-
rective actions
- information with regard to storage, handling, installation,
testing and operation of items shipped with the structure.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
)
\J
J
C)
')
.. o
.'\
J
C)
CONTENTS
SEC. 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ...................... 1
A. Classification ........ .......... .............. ...................... 1
A 100 Application........... .............. ........................ 1
B. Def'mitions ......................................................... 1
B 100 Symbols.................................................... 1
B 200 Terms............................ ........................... 1
B 300 Structural categories ...................................... 2
C. Documentation ............ ........ ................................ 2
C 100 Plans and particulars ..................................... 2
C 200 Specifications and calculations .......................... 2
C 300 Limiting operating conditions ........................... 3
D. Appendix to the Classification Certificate ................. 3
D 100 Geneml................................ ..................... 3
SEC. 2 MATERIALS ............................................ 4
A. General ........ ..... .................. .......................... .... 4
A 100 Scope........................................................ 4
A 200 Material certificates ....................................... 4
B. Structural Steel .................................... ............... 4
B 100 Geneml..................................................... 4
B 200 Material designations ..................................... 4
B 300 Design temperatures ...................................... 4
B 400 Application categories .................................... 5
B 500 Selection of structural steel .............................. 5
C 100 Geneml
C 200 Aluminium
............................. 6
6
6
A. General............................. ............................ .... 7
A 100 Basic conditions ........................ ................... 7
A 200 Modelling.................................................. 7
A 300 Methnds of analysis ...................................... 7
A 400 Overall design ............................................. 7
A 500 Details design ~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
A 600 Protection against accidental damage .................. 8
.!!, i ; y , ~ (;Q!!!!!!!l!!!'! """'" """ """"""""""" ~
B 100 Geneml...................................... .......... ..... 8
B 200 Wind ........................................................ 8
B 300 Waves.................................... ................... 8
B 400 Current................................................. .... 9
C. Strength Analysis ................................................ , 9
C 100 Geneml..................................................... 9
C 200 Practical simplifications .................................. 9
C 300 yielding............... ..................................... 9
C 400 Buckling... ................................................. 9
C 500 Fatigue....... .......... ............................... ...... 9
C 600 Ultimate strength ......................................... 10
C 700 Reliability,based analysis of structures .... ........... 10
D. Deflections and Vibrations ................................... 10
D 100 Deflections................ .............. .................. 10
D 200 Vibrations..... ......................................... ... 10
SEC. 4 DESIGN LOADS ...................................... 11
A. General........ ............. .......... .............. ............... 11
A 100 Scope/................................... .................... 11
A 200 Definitions............ .. ............................. ..... 11
A 300 Loading conditions ...................................... 11
B. Environmental Data ............................................ 12
B 100 Wind....................................... ................ 12
B 200 Waves............... ....................................... 12
B 300 Current............. ....................................... 12
C. Flow Induced Forces ........................................... 12
C 100 Geneml.............. ...................................... 12
C 200 Dmg forces ............................................... 12
C 300 Inertia forces ...... .
C 400 Mooring forces ..................... .
14
14
D. Local Pressures and Forces ................................... 15
D 100 General.......................................... .... .... .. 15
D 200 Sea pressures .................................... ......... 15
D 300 Tank pressures .................................... ....... 15
D 400 Local functional loads ................................... 15
D 500 Local environmental loads ............................. 15
D 600 Heavy units ...................................... ......... 15
E. Acddental Impact Energy .. .............. .................... 15
E 100 Collision ........ .................. ......................... 15
E 200 Dropped objects .......................................... 16
SEC. 5 OVERALL STRENGTH ............................. 17
A. General .......... ...... ..................... ....... ................ 17
A 100 Scope ....................................................... 17
A 200 References......... .. .. .. ............ ................... .. 17
B. Design Load Conditions ....................................... 17
B 100 General .................................................... 17
C. Calculation Methods ........................ ................... 17
C 100 General......................... ............ ............... 17
D. Usage Factors and Permissible Stresses ................... 17
D 100 General .................................................... 17
D 200 Basic usage factors ...................................... 17
D 300 Yield strength analysis .................................. 17
D 400 Buckling strength analysis ..... ........... .............. 18
D 500 Fatigue strength analysis . ..... ......................... 18
D 600 Ultimate strength analysis .. ............................ 18
D 700 Accidental load analysis ................................ 18
D 800 Damaged structure analysis ............................ 18
E. Structures Other than Steel ........ .......................... 18
E 100 Aluminium alloys ........................................ 18
E 200 Other materials ........................................... 18
SEC. 6 PLATING AND STIFFENERS .................... 19
A. General............................. ........ ........ ............... 19
A 100 Scope ...... ........................ ......................... 19
A 200 DefInitions.............................................. .. 19
B. Bending ............................................................ 19
B 100 Plating .................. ................................... 19
B 200 Stiffeners............... ................................... 20
C. Buckling ........................................................... 20
C 100 General............. ............ ....................... .... 20
SEC. 7 GIRDERS AND GIRDER SYSTEMS ............ 21
A. General........ ............................. ....................... 21
A 100 Scope ....................................................... 21
A 200 DefInitions............. .............. ..................... 21
B. Bending and Shear ............................................. 21
B 100 General ...... .............................................. 21
B 200 Effective flange ................. ......................... 21
B 300 Effective web ........................... .................. 21
B 400 Strength requirements for simple girders ............ 22
C. Buckling ................................. ...................... .... 23
C 100 General........... .. .... .. ............................... .. 23
D. Compl"" Girder Systems ...................................... 23
D 100 General................................... ................. 23
D 200 Calculation methods ..................................... 23
D 300 Design load conditions .................................. 23
D 400 Permissible stresses ..................................... 23
E. Girder Brackets .......... ............................ ........... 23
E 100 Scantlings...................................... ........... 23
SEC. 8 WELD CONNECTIONS ...... ....................... 25
General
decided by the Board as of January 1998, and supersedes the July
The introduction booklet is nOIlTIally revised in January and July
each year.
current.
Main changes
- Paragraph B302 has been rewritten. The defmition of wave
spectra is deleted and a Guidance note giving reference to Clas-
sification Note No. 30.5 has been added.
- Paragraph B307 has been deleted, the text being covered else-
where.
Sec.4 Design Loads
- Paragraph BIOI on wind velocity has been updated and a Guid-
ance note giving reference to Classification Note No. 30.5 has
been added.
,.-,'
"""',_ -B201 have been amended with respect to
.,. wave particle veloqitY' and wave height, respectively. The Guid-
ance note in B202 has been rewritten, now giving reference to
Classification Note No. 30.5.
- Item B300 'Current' has been rewritten.
- Paragraphs C402 to C40S have been deleted (the requirements
are covered by Classification Note No. 31.4 and also the
POSMOOR Rules).
- The requirements for local pressures in subsection D have been
rewritten. For semi-submersible units the Rules include explicit
criteria for tanks where filling to the top of the air pipe is not a
relevant design load condition, and explicit criteria as to how to
considered tank pressure, head loadings and environ-
m.entally induced 19ad components.
The defmition of Splash l.one in paragraph A2Cf2 has been
amended in order to hannonise with NPD Codes.
Sec.10 Fabrication
- The Guidance note a3) in paragraph H102 has been amended to
ensure compatibility between Classification Note No. 31.4 and
the Rules.
- Paragraph H3Cf2 concerning tank test pressures has been rewrit-
ten in accordance with amendments in Sec.4 D.
For SUbscription orders or information about SUbscription tenns, please use distribution@dnv.com.
1.98.2500
.
the mlximum compensltion shill never exceed USD 2 million.
VentlS" shill meln the Foundation Det Norske Veritas IS well IS all its slilsidianes, directors, officers, employee.s, agents and any other ICting on behalf

:]

:]
/J
:]
') :]
,
=
.. .-
"
iQ)NV
RULES FOR
Li6rary CLASSIFICATION OF
fJYJ..L 0/ o/ung rr au
0
', P d 17)\ 'i 'e'i?':':'
. ,':":: '.
f
.......... " ...... . ..;;.'
STRUCTURES AND EQUIPMENT
MAIN CLASS
)
,) PART 3 CHAPTER I
STRUCTURAL DESIGN
)J GENERAL
JANUARY 1998
SECTIONS
PAGE
I General Requirements ......................................................................................... I
2 Materials.. .... ........ .... .... .... .... ............ .... ................ .... .... .... .... ........ ........ . ... .... ... 4
4 Design Loads ................................................................................................... 11
5 Overall Strength ............................................................................................... 17
6 Plating and Stiffeners ......................................................................................... 19
7 !!m;! Qin:!!lf
-) ()
8 Weld Connections ............................................................................................. 25
9 Corrosion Protection ................................................................................. '.' . . . . . .. 30
10 Fabrication ...................................................................................................... 33
i")
J '"
DET NORSKE VERITAS
Veritasveien 1, N-1322 H0Vik, Norway Tel.: +4767579900 Fax: +47675799 11
,..j
I
) '.:J.

]
J
)
.:/J-
'.
I
LiGrary
RULES FOR
CLASSIFICATION OF
'})).fIl o/ung r[ au MOBILE OFFSHORE UNITS
@mW!
'" . '.., .... ""'E
: Til J! Ibj

.. ...... -----.
PART 4 CHAPTER 1
MACHINERY AND
SYSTEMS DESIGN, GENERAL
JULY 1998
SECTIONS
MACHINERY AND SYSTEMS
MAIN CLASS
PAGE
1 General Requirements ......................................................................................... 1
2 Materials .................... " ................. " ........................................... .......... " . . . .. . . . 3
4 Platform Piping Systems ...................................................................................... 10
5 Machinery Piping Systems .................................................................................. 16
6 Pipes, Pumps, Valves, Flexible Hoses and Detachable Pipe Connections etc .................... 20
7 Manufacture, Workmanship, Inspection and Testing .................................................. 27
8 Recommended Spare Parts .................................................................................. 31
DET NORSKE VERITAS
Veritasveien 1, N-1322 H",dk, Norway Tel.: +4767579900 Fax: +47675799 11
General
decided by the Board as of June 1998 and supersedes the January
The Rule change will come into force on 1 January 1999.
each year.
Revised chapters will be forwarded to all subscribers to the rules.
Buyers of reprints are advised to check the updated list of rule
current.
Main changes
- Paragraph CI02 on requirements for documentation of instru-
mentation systems has been amended, and a new paragraph
CI06 has been added.
Sec.2 Materials
- Subsection C containing requirements for materials used in piping
systems has been rewritten.
- In Table C2 giving requirements for certification, the criterion
on diameter for steel valves and fittings has been amended.
- Paragraphs A212 and A2l3 on fIre protection and A50l con-
cerning valves have been amended.
Paragraph B307 concerning "dead ship condition" has been
amended and B308 added. concerning functional capability of
machinery systems.
- A new subsection D on persOimel protection has been added.
Comments to the Rules may be sent bye-mail todJp203@dnv.com.
Sec.4 Platform Piping' Systems
- EI03. on the arrangement .. ofair pipes and ES09 on sounding
systcins have been amended. '.
- D20l and D204 concerning fuel tanks has been added and
amended, respectively.
- E301 and HlOl have been amended, and 1203 has been rewritten.
Sec.6 Pipes, Pumps, Valves, Flexible Hoses and Detachable
Pipe Connections etco
- Paragraph A201 giving reference to tables for minimum wall
thickness has been amended.
- Tables Al,A2 and A4 (former A3) have been amended, a new
Table A3 on minimum thickness of stainless steel pipes has been
introduced and former Tables A4 to AS have been renumbered
AS to A9, respectively.
- In item A400 concerning plastic pipes, paragraphs 402 and 408
have been amended, and a new 405 added.
- Paragraphs C203 to C204 has been replaced by the new item
C300 'Certification of valves' .
- Item E200 has been renamed "Pipe couplings other than flanges"
and paragraphs E20l-E202 has been replaced by a new E201.
A new Table EI showing permitted use of pipe couplings has
been added.
- Paragraphs AIOI and A104 giving general requirements for
welding have been amended, and new paragraphs AIOS and
A20S have been added.
- ASOI and A505 (A504) on non-destructive testing have been
amended and new AS02 and Table A4 have been added.
- Subsection B concerning copper alloy brazing has been rewritten.
- Paragraphs C202 and C203 have been amended.
- Paragraph Dl09 on electrical conductivity has been amended.
- Table EI on hydrostatic testing of piping systems has been
amended.
For subscription orders or information about subscription terms, please use distribution@dnv.com.
~ Det Norske Veritas AS
7.98.2000
If any person suffers loss' or dlmlge which is proved to have been clused by Iny negligent act or omission of Det Norlke Veritls, then Det Norske Veritls shall PlY compensation to
such person for his proved direct loss or dlmlge. However, the compensltion shall not exceed In amount equal to ten times the fee chlrged for the! service in question, provided that
thl! maximum compenll8tion shill never exceed USD 2 million .
In this p.,ovislon Dat Norske Verlt .. - shill meln the Foundstion Det Norske VeritlS IS well IS all its subsidilrles. directors, oHicera. employees, Igents Ind any other acting on behalf
of Det Norske Veritn. ,
.:)
.:>
/)
~
~
..")
J
f:J
fJ
)
<J
)
" -_/
~ J
J
C)
J
..... )
'-
CONTENTS
SEC. 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ..... 1
A. Classification '" ... ..... . 1
A 100 Application.............. ... ....................... ......... 1
B. Defmitions .............. 1
B 100 Terms.............................. ........ ................. 1
C. Documentation ... ........ ... ................. 2
C 100 Plans and particulars ............................ ......... 2
D. Signboards ............... 2
D 100 General........ .................. ..................... ...... 2
D 200 References................ ................................. 2
SEC.2 MATERIALS ............................................ 3
A. General................ ..... ..... .. 3
A 100 Material requirements ........................... ......... 3
B. Machinery Parts ..... . .... .... 3
B 100 General.............. ................................. ...... 3
C. Piping Systems ... . ... .. .. .. 3
C 100 General.................. ..... .............................. 3
C 200 Carbon and low alloy steels ............................. 3
C 300 Copper and copper alloys ............................... 3
C 400 Grey cast iron ............................................. 3
C 500 Nodular cast iron of the ferritic type .................. 3
C 600 Nodular cast iron of theferritic/pearlitic and ........ 3
C 700 Plastic pipes ................................................ 3
C 800 Material eertificates .............................. .......... 4
A. Arrangement ...... .. .... . .. 6
A 100 General.................... .. ........................... .... 6
A 200 Fire protection ............................................. 6
A 300 Piping systems ............................................ 6
A 400 Operation and indication of valves ..................... 7
A 500 Valves on the vessel's sides and bottom ....... " ..... 7
A 600 Fittings on watertight bulkheads ....................... 7
B. Construdion and Function .......... 7
B 100 General .................... :............... ................. 7
B 200 Environmental conditions ............................ .-... 8
B 300 Functional capability ..................................... 8
B 400 Failure effects ............................................. 8
B 500 Component design ........................................ 8
C. Reliability and Availability.................................... 9
C 100 Application.......................................... ....... 9
C 200 Reliability and availability analysis .................... 9
C 300 Redundancy types ......................................... 9
C 400 Machinery not required redundant. Tentative Rules 9
C 500 Machinery required redundant .......................... 9
D. Personnel Protection ........................ 9
D 100 General.... ................................................. 9
SEC. 4 PLATFORM PIPING SYSTEMS ...... 10
A. General ................ 10
A 100 Scope........................... ........... ................. 10
A 200 Location of piping and control systems .............. 10
B. Ballast, Bilge and Drainage Systems General............ 10
B 100 Basic requirements................... .................... 10
B 200 Ballast systems ........................................... 10
B 300 Drainage of dry compartments below main deck .. 10
B 400 Drainage of dry compartments above main deck ... 11
B 500 Pumping and. piping arrangement ..................... 11
B 600 Bilge pipes ................................................ 11
B 700 Bilge pumps .............................................. 11
B 800 Bilge wells, mud boxes, valves etc. .................. 12
C. Ballast and Bilge Systems for Column Stabilised Units 12
C 100 General................... ................... .... .......... 12
C 200 Remote control and monitoring ....................... 12
C 300 Ballast system ............................................ 12
C 400 Bilge system ............ ..... ...... .......... ...... ....... 13
D. BaDast and Bilge Systems for Self-elevating Units 13
D 100 General..... ................................ ........ ....... 13
D 200 Preload system ........................................... 13
D 300 Bilge system ........... ..... .............................. 13
E. Air, Overflow and Sounding Pipes ..... 13
E 100 Air pipes, arrangement ................................. 13
E 200 Air pipes, seCtional area .......................... ...... 13
E 300 Overflow pipes, arrangement .......................... 14
E 400 Overflow pipes, sectional area ........................ 14
E 500 Sounding arrangements ............. ............ ........ 14
E 600 Sounding pipes, sectional area ............ ........ ..... 14
F. Storage and Transfer Systems for Liquids with
Flashpoint Below 60C (e.g. He1icopter Fuel) .... 14
F 100 General.................. .............. .................... 14
F 200 Arrangement........... .. ................................. 15
SEC. 5 MACHINERY PIPING SYSTEMS ........ 16
A. General ............................................................ 16
A 100 Redundancy and capacity ............................... 16
B. Cooling Systems ........... 16
B 100 General.. .................................................. 16
B 200 Sea inlets for cooling water pumps ...... ............. 16
C. Lubricating Oil System : ..... : ... 16
C 100 General.. .................................................. 16
C 200 Filtering of lubricating oil ........... ..... .............. 17
C 300 Lubricating oil supply ................................... 17
D. Fuel Oil Systems ................................................ 17
D 100 General.................................................... 17
D 200 Fuel oil tanks ............................................. 17
D 300 Fuel oil piping ............................................ 17
D 400 Arrangement of valves, cocks and fittings .......... 17
D 500 Remotely controlled shut-off arrangement for fuel
D 600
D 700
D 800
D 900
D 1000
oil tanks. .................................................. 17
Fuel oil preheaters ....................................... 17
Filtering of fuel oil .... .................................. 17
Drip trays ...... _.......................................... 18
Remote stop of fuel oil pumps and fans ............. 18
Various requirements .......................... ......... 18
E. Feed Water and Condensate Systems ..... .... 18
E 100 Feed water pumps ....................... ...... .......... 18
E 200 Feed water piping ............... ......................... 18
E 300 Feed water heating ...................................... 18
E 400 Feed water tanks ......................................... 18
E 500 Condensate from steam heating of tanks ............. 18
F. Steam Systems ......... 18
F 100 General ................................... ................. 18
G. Hydraulic Power Supply.... .. ....... 18
G 100 General.................................................... 18
G 200 Steering gear ........ ...................................... 19
G 300 Anchor windlass ......................................... 19
G 400 Aocumulators.............. ........ ....................... 19
H. Pneumatic Power Supply ... ... .................. 19
H 100 General ................. ................................... 19
I. Pneumatic Starting Arrangements . . ... 19
I 100 General .................................................... 19
I 200 Capacity.......................................... ......... 19
I 300 Redundancy.......................................... ..... 19
I 400 Emergency generators .................................. 19
J. Thermal Oil Systems ......... 19
J 100 System arrangements ....... ................ ............. 19
SEC. 6 PIPES, PUMPS, VALVES, FLEXIBLE HOSES
AND DETACHABLE PIPE CONNECTIONS
ETC ................. 20
A. Pipes
A 100
A 200
A 300
.................. 20
General ...................... .
Minimum wall thicknesses
Calculation of wall thickness of pipes being subject
20
20
to internal pressure
A 400 Plastic pipes
.............. 20
23

B 200 Relief valves ........................... .".................. 25
B 300 Hydrostatic tests ......................................... 25
B 400 Capacity tests ............................................. 25
C. Valves .................. ............. 25
25 C 100 Valve design ...
C 200 Hydrostatic tests
C 300 Certification of valves
............ 25
.. 25
D. Flexible Hoses .................................................... 25
D 100 General .................................................... 25
D 200 Installation.......... ................................... ... 25
E. Detachable Pipe Connections ........ ........................ 26
E 100 Flange connections ............... '....................... 26
E 200 Pipe couplings other than flanges ..................... 26
E 300 Expansion joints and bellows .......................... 26
F. Seawater Strainers ........ ...... ... . . 26
F 100 General.. .................................. ......... ....... 26
F 200 Hydrostatic tests ......................................... 26
G. Socket Welded Joints ........ , ........... 26
G 100 General.................................... ................ 26
SEC. 7 MANUFACTURE, WORKMANSIDP, IN
SPECTION AND TESTING ............ 27
A. Welding .. ................ ..... ................... 27
A 100 General............................................ ........ 27
A 200 Welded connections .......... :., ........................ 27
A 300 Preheating of steel pipes .......................... , ..... 27
A 400 Heat treatment after welding of steel pipes .......... 27
A 500 Non-destructive testing ............................ ...... 28
B. Brazing of Copper and Copper Alloys ..... 29
B 100 General ...................... . 29
C. Pipe Bending .................. 29
C 100 General....................................... ............. 29
C 200 Heat treatment after bending ........................... 29
D. Joining of Plastic Pipes ................. 29
D 100 General.................................................... 29
E. Hydrostatic Tests of Piping , ................ 30
E 100 Hydrostatic testing before installation on board .... 30
E 200 Hydrostatic testing after assembly on board ........ 30
F. Functional Testing .................. 30
F 100 General..................... ......................... ...... 30
SEC. 8 RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS ...... 31
A. General ......................... , ...... 31
A 100 Machinery and electrical installations ................ 31
A 200 Tables of recommended spare parts .................. 31
..
:)
""

,)
':J

Table A4 Spare parts for electrical installations
Item Specification
The spare parts are generally to be supplied for
each size and type of generator required
according to Ch.4, except that spare parts may
be omitted, if the number of generators of
adequate capacity exceeds the required number.
Generators
For generators having excitation and voltage
regulation equipment with semiconductors, the
following will generally be required as a
minimum.
For each repairable circuit-breaker on each pole:
Switchboards
For each type of non-repairable circuit-breaker
(e.g . miniaturl> circuit-breakers):
For each type of fuses:
Cables
For each essential and important D.C. and A.C.
motor with commutator or slipring:
Motors
In addition to the spares stated above for
essential and important D.C. and A.C. motors
are required for each size of steering gear motor
and motorgenerator, if no standby electrical
machine is installed:
For each repairable control gear of motors and
other consumers, intended for essential and
important sexvices:
Control gear
For each type of non-repairable control gear of
motors and other consumers intended for
essential and important sexvices (e.g. some types
of small motor starters):
Portable
insulation-
resistance
measuring
instrument
For navigation lights with their pilot lamps:
Miscellaneous
Where the emergency lighting voltage is different
from the main lighling voltage:
Quantity
1 complete brush holder,
1 set of brushes,
1 set of any special tools required,
1 set of necessary spare parts for excitation and
automatic voltage regulation equipment, an
agreement to be made for each make.
113 of the number of main diodes for excitation,
1 complete set of all other semiconductor
components, or alternatively
1 complete specimen of each assembled unit of
such components, if the units are such that it is
impracticable to carry out repairs on board.
1 set of contacts, subject to wear,
1 set of other parts, subject to wear,
1 set of springs,
1 coil of each type used,
1 resistance element of each type used.
For 6 or less circuits-breakers of same type, 1 set
of such spare parts is accepted.
5% of each size with a minimum of 2 of each size
used.
10% of each size with a minimum of 12 of each
size used,
3 fuse-bases of each size used.
1 set of any special tools and equipment for
repairing mineral-insulated cables, where such
cables are installed.
1 set of brushes,
1 set of any special tools required.
For 6 or less motors of the same size and type, 1
set of such spare parts is accepted.
D. C. machinery:
1 annature of each size fitted, complete with
shaft and halt coupling,
1 field coil of each type fitted,
A. C. machinery:
1 stator complete of each size fitted.
1 set of the contacts which are subject to wear.
1 set of springs.
10% of each different resistance element, with at
least 1 of each,
1 of each type coil used.
When 6 or less motors or other consumers are
fitted with control gear having interchangeable
parts, it is accepted to provide one set of spares
for the control gear which is provided with the
greatest number of parts.
5 % of each size with a minimum of 2 of each size
used.
Vessels with electrical installation of 100 kW and
above are to carry insulation-resistance
measuring instrument, having aD. C. test voltage
of not less than the installation's voltage.
1 complete set of lamps.
10% of the emergency lamps, with
a minimum of 10.
.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
Rules for Mobile Offshore Units. July 1998
Table A3 Spare parts for various machinery equipment
Item Specification
Pumps 1)
Piston pumps:
Valve with seats and springs each size fitted
- fuel oil transfer
Piston rings each type and size for one piston
-"feed water
Centrifugal pumps:
- cooling water
- bilge water
Bearings of each ty'p'e and size
- lubricating oil
Rotor sea1ings of each type and size
Gear Iype pumps:
Bearings of each type and size
Air compressors for Suction and delivery valves complete for each size fitted in one unit
essential service Piston rings for each type and size fitted for one piston .
Flexible hoses and Each type of flexible hoses and rubber bellows that are installed
rubber bellows
1) When sufficiently rated standby pump is available, the spare parts may be dispensed with, see also Sec.S AlOO.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
Quantity
1 set
1 set
1
1
1
1
112 sel
1 set
1 of esch Iype
ready for mounting
) ()
--)
'-
(J
J CJ
)
/)
2
SECTION 1
A. Classification
A 100 Application
B. DeI"mitions
B 100 Terms
C. Documentation
Contents
D. Signboards
D 100 General
D 200 References
A. Classification
A 100 Application
101 The rules in this chapter apply in general to machinery
and systems as required for the assignment of main class.
102 The rules give system requirements and prescribe mi-
nimum requirements for materials, design, manufacture, in-
spection and testing.
B. DerInitions
B 100 Terms
101 Failure in the rule context is an event to a component
or a system causing one or both of the following effects:
- loss of component or system function,
- deterioration of functional capability to such an extent
that the safety of the ship, personnel or environment is
siguificantly reduced.
102 Repairable failure in the machinery is a failure which
is planned to be repaired on board aod for which the fol-
lowing conditions are fulfilled:
- the machinery is arranged and designed to allow for re-
pair work at sea,
- spare parts or complete spare units necessary for perma-
nent or provisional repair are kept on board also to the
extent that these spare parts exceed specific Rule re-
quirements for the actoal components,
- tools, instruction material aod other necessary facilities
to perform the repair work are found on board.
103 Critical failure is a failure which involves loss or sig-
uificant deterioration of required function, aod which cannot
be considered repairable on board.
104 Mean time to failure (MTIF) is the mean value of
service time until failure occurs.
In the rule context, MTTF is considered to be equal to meao
time hetween failures (MTBF).
105 Mean time necessary to repair (MTTR) is the mean
value of time from occurrence of failure to reestablishment
of lost function.
106 Reliability is the ability of a component or a system to
perform its required function without failure during a speci-
fied time interval.
107 Critical reliability of a component or a system is the
probability that a critical failure as defined in 103, will not
occur to the component or system during a specified time
interval.
108 Availability is the ratio of actual service time to ex-
pected service time at sea.
Availability may be calculated from the following formula:
MTTF
A = MTTF + MTTR
109 Redundancy is the ability of a component or system
to maintain or restore its function when one failure has oc-
curred ..
Redundancy can be achieved for instance by installation of
more units or alternative means for performing a function.
110 Independent operation of a component is when the
function of the component aod the power supply of the
component is independent of main engine.
111 Mutual independence between components meaos that
the function of the components aod their power supply is not
dependent on some common component or system except
for a central power supply.
112 Confidence level is the probability, in %, that a given
observation is not the result of sampling error. A confidence
level of 75% meaos that there is a probability of 25 % that
sampling error (chance fluctoations of sampling and testing)
could have produced the result.
113 Piping is defined to include the following components:
- pipes
- flaoges and bolting aod other pipe connections
- expansion elements
- valves, including hydraulic aod pneumatic actoators, 'and
fittings .
- haogers and supports
- flexible hoses
- pump housings
114 A piping system is defined to include piping, as well
as components in direct connection to the piping such as
pumps, heat exchangers, independent evaporators, tanks etc.
with the exception of main components such as steam and
gas turbines, diesel engines, reduction gears aod boilers.
For com'ponents which are subject to internal pressure and
are not mcluded in the piping, the design requirements in
Ch.3 apply.
115 Classes of piping systems. For the purpose of testing,
type of joint to be adopted, heat treatment aod welding pro-
cedure , piping is subdivided into three classes as indicated
in Table BI where:
p = design pressure in bar.
lc = design temperature in DC.
Open ended pipes (drains, overflows, vents, boiler escape
pipes etc.) independently of the pressure and temperature,
are pertaining to Class III.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
Table BI Classes of piping systems
Piping system for Ckzss I')
P bar tC
Steam :>16 or >300
Fuel oil >16 or > 150
Other media 2) 3)
>40 or >300
p - Design pressure, as defmed in Sec.6 A303.
t = Design temperature, as defined in Sec.6 A30!1-.
Ckzss II') Ckzss III .)
p bar tC p bar tC
and and
and and
and and
1) For Class II and III piping both specified conditions are to be met, for Class I piping one condition only is sufficient.
2) Air, water, lubricating oil and hydraulic oil.
3) Drains, overflows, vents, pipes etc. independently of the pressure and temperature, are pertaining to Class m.
c. Documentation
101 The following plans are to be submitted for informa-
tion:
- Machinery arrangement of propulsion rooIDS, engine
rooms, pump rooms and other rooms containing essential
equipment or systems.
These are to show layout of machinery components such
as engines, boilers, fans, heat exchangers, generators,
switchboards, pumps, purifiers, filters etc., but excluding
pipes, valves and accessories.
- Tank plan
The plans are to be accompanied by a list of the components
and specification of make and type.
102 The following plans and particulars are to be submit-
ted for approval:
- Bilge and ballast piping system.
- Air, sounding and overflow piping.
- Sea and fresh water cooling system.
- Lubricating oil systems.
- Fuel oil piping and fuel oil tanks.
- Arrangement of fuel oil piping systems in connection with
oil burning installations.
- Steam and condensate piping system.
- Co,mpressed air piping system.
- Arrangement of exhaust pipe systems.
- Hydraulic or pneumatic systems for:
- jacking machinery,
- windlasses,
- steering gear,
- variable pitch propellers,
- thrusters,
- starting of engines,
- remote control of engines, valves and watertight
doors.
- Plans showing scantlings of settling tanks, daily service
tanks and other fuel oil tanks not integrated with the
vessel's structure and tanks for lubricating oil with a ca-
pacity larger than5-m
3
, --- - - --
- Sea inlets, discharges and scupper pipes showing distance
pieces between valves and hull plating.
- Seawater strainers, design, scantlings and materials.
- Storage and transfer system for liquids with flash point
below 60C (closed cup test).
The piping diagrams, and are to include the following par-
ticulars:
- Outside diameters and wall thicknesses of pipes.
- Materials used in pipes, valve bodies and fittings.
- Pump type and capacity.
- Type of -valves and fittings.
- Type of expansion elements.
- Maximum working pressure, if exceeding 7 bar, and
temperature if exceeding IOOC.
Hydrostatic test pressure after installation on board,
where required according to Sec.7 E200.
For plastic pipes shown on system drawings the following
information is to be specified:
- Fire class
- Conductive or non-conductive grade
- Maximum working pressure and working temperature.
103 Analyses of reliability and availability are to be sub-
mitted upon request when considered necessary by the So-
ciety. These analyses are to include information on possible
numerical background material.
104 Documentation may be required to show the suitability
of piping systems when subjected to considerable dynamic
forces in combination with static forces (pressures).
The documentation should include system information, such
as:
- Fluid particulars, velocities and flow rates.
- Operational data for valves, f.inst. closing times.
- Pressure variations and other dynamic forces.
- Resistance data for all parts in the system.
- Piping arrangement with dimensions.
105 Additional plans and specifications necessary to verify
compliance with the rules are listed in the chapters 2 to 4
ofPt.4.
D. Signboards
D 100 General
101 Signboards provide information or-certain conditions
to be complied with for the safe handling of machinery
components and systems ..
Some signboards are required by the rules, others may be
required by the Society in each particular case.
In Sec. I of each chapte, a summary of the signboards re-
quired by the Rules in that chapter is introduced.
D 200 References
201 Signboards are required by the rules in:
- Sec.3 A403 regarding connections to sea.
DEI" NORSKE VERITAS

J
,J
-J
--
'J
-")
/)
/)
Contents
A. General
SECTION 8

A 100 Machinery and electrical installations
A 200 Tables of recommended spare parts
102 For general guidance purposes, machinery and elec-
trical installations in vessels intended for conunon world
wide trading are suggested to be provided with inventory of
spare parts as listed in the Tables Al to A4, including the
necessary tools and instructions for replacement.
A. General
103 For important systems and components, account
should be taken of the reconunendations of the manufac-
turer.
101 Spare parts are not mandatory for retention of class.
It is, however, assumed that an inventory of spare parts
sufficient to meet the needs posed by the ship's plans of
operation is maintained onboard. Its content should be de-
cided taking into consideration:
104 Any applicable statutory requirement of the country
of registration of the vessel is also to be considered.
201 Spare parts for internal combustion engines driving
electric generators, see Table AI.
- the probability of need as a consequence of likely failures
- the likely failures' effect on the main functions, and
- the possibility of the ships's staff to effect the necessary
202 Spare parts for various machinery equipment, see Ta-
ble A3.
repairs.
203 Spare parts for electrical installations, see Table A4.
Table Al Spare Parts for Internal Combustion Engines Driving Electric Generators
Item Specification
Quantity
Main bearings Main bearings or shells for one bearing of each size and type fitted, complete with shims,
bolts and nuts 1
Cylinder valves Exhaust valves, complete with casings, seats, springs and other fittings for one cylinder 2 sets
Air inlet valves, complete with casings, seats, springs and other fittings for. one cylinder I set
Starting air valve, complete with casing, seat, springs and other fittings I
Relief valve, complete I
Fuel valves of each size and type fitted, complete, with all fittings, for one engine 112 set
Connecting Bottom end bearings or shells of each size and type fitted, complete with shims, bolts and
rod nuts, for one cylinder 1 set
bearings Top end bearings or shells of each type fitted, complete with shims, bolts and nuts, for
one cylinder I set
Trunk piston type: Gudgeon pin with bushing for one cylinder I set
Piston rings Piston rings, for one cylinder 1 set
Piston cooling Telescopic cooling pipes and fittings or their equivalent, for one cylinder unit 1 set
Fuel injection
pumps
Fuel pump complete or, when replacement at sea is practicable, a complete set of working
parts for one pump (plunger, sleeve, valve springs, etc.) 1
Fuel injection High pressure fuel pipe of each size and type fitted, complete with couplings
piping I
Gaskets and Special gaskets and packings of each size and type fitted, for cylinder covers and cylinder
packings liners, for one cylinder 1 set
1) Where the number of generators of adequate capacity fitted for essential service exceeds the required number, no spare parts are required for the
auxiliary engines.
Table A2 Spare parts for boilers essential to the functions listed in Pt.l Ch.l
Item Specification Quantity
Safety valves Springs of each size I set
Gauge glasses Gauge glasses with packings for each boiler where gauge glasses of the round
type are used 3 sets
Gauge glasses with packings for every two boilers where gauge glasses of the flat
type are used 1 set
Strainers Strainer basket of each size for fuel oil system 1
Oil fuel burners Oil fuel burners complete for one boiler I set
Nozzles and burner caps Nozzles and burner caps 6
Pressure gauges Pressure gauge for steam drum I
Tube stoppers Tube stoppers or plugs of each size used for boilers, superheater and economiser 20
DET NORSKE VERITAS
- When the largest size to be joined is > 200 mm, the size
of the test assembly shall be either 200 mm or 25 % of
the largest piping size to be joined, whichever is greater.
106 The joiningfbonding procedure is to include:
- materials and suppliers
- tools and equipment
- environmental requirements
- joint preparation including surface treatment and cleanli-
ness
- dimensional requirements and tolerances
- curing time and temperature
- tests and examinations with acceptance criteria.
107 Any change in the joiningfbonding procedure which
may affect the physical or mechanical properties of the
jointfbond will imply requalification of the procedure.
108 The pipe manufacturer should maintain a record of
earlier certifications of procedures and operators.
109 Electrical conductivity
Piping systems in or through gas hazardous areas are to be
electrically conductive according to Sec.6 A408. After in-
stallation, the conductivity of the piping system shall be
measured,. and the resistance to earth from any point in the
piping system is not to exceed 10
6
ohm.
E 100 Hydrostatic testing before installation on board
101 All Class I and II pipes and integral fittings, after
completion of manufacture but before insulation and coat-
ing, if any, are to be subjected to a hydrostatic test in the
presence of the surveyor at the following pressure:
P
H
= 1,5p
where:
PH = test pressure in bar.
p = design pressure in bar as defined in Sec.6 A303.
For steel pipes and integral fittings for design temperatures
above 300C the test pressure is to be determined by the
following formula but need not exceed 2p:
where:
"t100
PH = 1,5 -,,- P
t
"t100 = permissible stress at 100C.
"t = permissible stress at the design temperature.
The value of the test pressure may be reduced with the ap-
proval of the surveyor, to 1,5 p in order to avoid excessive
stress in way of bends, branches etc,
In any case the membrane stress is not to exceed 0,9 the
yield stress at the testing temperature.
102 Pressure testing of small bore pipes (less than about
50 mm) may be waived at the discretion of the surveyor,
depending on the application.
103 Non-integral fittings and pressure containing compo-
nents other than valves, pump housing and pressure vessels
are to be tested as specified in 101. The requirements for
hydrostatic testing of valves and pumps are given in Sec.6
Band C.
E 200 Hydrostatic testing after assembly on board
201 The piping is to be hydrostatically tested in the pres-
ence of the surveyor after installation on board, according
to Table El.
Table El Hydrostatic testing after installation on board
Piping system Test pressure I
Fuel oil piping
Heating coils in tanks
Bilge and fIre pipes
1,5 x maximum working
Class III pipelines for
pressure, minimum 4 bar
steam, compressed air
and feed water.
Hydraulic piping
pressure.
The test pressure need not
I
exceed the working pressure
by more than 70 bar
Piping systems made from
non metallic material
pressure.
!
(plastic)
Minimum 6 bar.
Minimum duration 1 hour.
202 If pipes specified in 101, are being welded together
during assembly on board, they are to be hydraulically
tested as specified in 101 after welding. If a 100% radio-
graphic examination and heat treatment after welding is
carried out, the surveyor may refrain from the hydraulic
test.
203 Separate pipe lengths, which have been hydraulically
tested in the workshop, may be insulated before the hyd-
rostatic test is carried out, except for connections between
the pipe lengths.
F 100 General
101 All piping systems are to be properly flushed, checked
for leakage and functionally tested under working conditions
to the satisfaction of the surveyor.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
J 0
) ()
] 0
) ~
,
SECTION 2
MATERIALS
Contents
A. General
A 100 Material requirements
B. Machinery Parts
B 100 General
c. Piping Systems
C 100 General
C 200 Carbon and low alloy steels
C 300 Copper and copper alloys
C 400 Grey cast iron.
C 500 Nodular cast iron of the ferritic type
C 600 Nodular cast iron of the ferritic/pearlitic and
C 700 Plastic pipes
C 800 Material certificates
A. General
101 Materials to be used in the construction of machinery
and piping systems are to be manufactured and tested in ac-
cordance with the requirements in Pt.2.
102 Materials for which provision is not made in Pt.2 may
be accepted, provided that they comply with an approved
specification and such tests as may be considered necessary.
B. Machinery Parts
B 100 General
101 Requirements for documentation of quality and testing
of materials intended for:
- Propulsion and Auxiliary Machinery
- Boilers and Pressure Vessels
- Electrical Installations
- Instrumentation and Automation
- Fire Protection, Detection and Extinction
are given in the respective chapters of this Pt.4.
C. Piping Systems
C 100 General
101 The materials to be used in piping systems are to be
suitable for the medium and service for wbich the system is
intended.
102 Non-ferrous metallic materials with melting points
higher than 925C may be accepted in piping systems as an
alternative to steel except where specific limitations are
given elsewhere in the rules.
Non-ferrous metallic materials with melting point lower than
925C may be used under the same restrictions as for plastic
pipes. See 701 and 702.
201 Steel pipes for classes I and II are to be seamless
drawn or fabricated by a welding method considered equiv-
alent to seamless pipes. See Pt.2 Ch.2 Sec.4.
202 Steel pipes, valves and fittings may be used within the
temperature limits given in Sec.6.
301 Copper and copper alloy pipes for classes I and II are
to be seamless drawn.
302 Copper and copper alloys are in general not to be used
for media having temperature above the following limits:
- copper and aluminium brass: 200C
- copper nickel: 300C.
Special bronze suitable for high temperature service may be
used for media having temperature up to 260C.
303 Pipes for starting air are not to be of copper or copper
alloys when the outer diameter exceeds 44,5 mm.
C 400 Grey cast iron
401 Grey cast iron is not to be used for class I and II pip-
ing with the following exceptions:
- components in hydraulic piping systems after special
consideration in each case
fuel pump housings for temperatures not exceeding
120C.
402 Grey cast iron may in general be used for class ill
piping, with the following exceptions:
- pipes and valves fitted on ship sides and bottom and on
sea chests
- valves fitted on collision bulkhead
- valves under static head fitted on the external wall of fuel
tanks
- valves for fluids with temperatures in excess of 120C.
501 Nodular cast iron of the ferritic type, with specifIed
minimum elongation of 12 %, may be used in class II and
ill piping and in pipes and valves located on the ship's side
and bottom and valves on the collision bulkhead. The use
of nodular cast iron in class I piping will be subject to con-
sideration for approval in each case.
502 Nodular cast iron is not to be used for media having
a temperature exceeding 350C.
503 The use of nodular cast iron for media having a tem-
perature below OC will be considered in each particular
case.
pearlitic type
601 Nodular cast iron of the ferritic/pearlitic and pearlitic
type is in general subject to the limitation of use as grey cast
iron as specified in 400.
C 700 Plastic pipes
701 Plastic pipes may be used in systems and locations
according to Table C 1 provided the fire endurance require-
ments therein specifIed are met. The permitted use and the
requirements for the piping are in conformance with IMO
Resolution A.753(18) "Guidelines for the Application of
DET NORSKE VERITAS
Plastic Pipes on Ships" except for the requirements to:
flame spread, smoke generation and toxicity.
Alternatively the approach for establishing design perform-
ance requirements given in UKOOA document
.Specification and Recommended Practice for use of GRP
piping offshore. may be employed.
702 In addition to the use permitted by Table Cl, plastic
pipes may be used for the following services:
- pipes for pneumatic and hydraulic instrumentation sys-
tems, see Ch.5 Sec.5 D within control cabinets located
in control rooms or engine rooms with the following
ceptions:
- systems for steering gear
- systems for remote control of:
Table Cl Fire endurance requirements matrix
A
'&

Piping systems

E}
(:>-.:

'- '"

FLAMMABLE LIQUIDS (flash point > 60C)
1 Fuel oil X
2 Lubricating oil X
3 Hydraulic oil X
SEAWATER 1)
4 Bilge main and branches L1
5 Fire main and water spray L1
6 Foam system L1
7 Sprink1er system L1
8 Ballast L3
9 Cooling water, essential services L3
10 Non-essential systems 0
FRESHWATER
12 Condensate return L3
SANITARY/DRAINS/SCUPPERS
B

E}

.5

..
"
OS
Cl
X
X
X
L1
L1
LI
L1
L3
L3
0
L3
L3
0
- seawater valves
- valves on fuel oil service tanks
- valves in bilge and fuel oil systems
- fire extingnishing.
703 Plastic pipes used in piping systems subject to classi-
fication within the limitations of Table Cl shall be of ap-
proved type and tested to an approved specification
observing the requirements in Sec.6 A700.
801 The materials used in piping systems are to be fur-
uished with documentation according to Table C2. For de-
fiuition of types of documentation of material quality and
testing, see Pt.1 Ch.l Sec.3.
Location
C D E F G

gts
..
.t!

-
S

.\!
.g E}
-""
{l"
S

"'I::

{j

.. 9
8

-;;
'"
" e""
.:: "l

-.:5 &
.
0 0 0 L1 L1
NA NA 0 LI L1
0 0 0 LI L1
0 0 0 NA L1
NA 0 0 X L1
NA NA 0 L1 L1
NA 0 0 L3 L3
0 0 0 L2 L2
NA 0 0 NA L2
0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 L3 L3
NA NA 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0
14 Deck drains (internal)
L1 2) L1 2)
0 0 0 0 0
15 Sanitary drains (internal) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
16 Scuppers and discharges (overboard)
0
1
) ') 0
1
) ')
0 0 0
01) 5)
0
SOUNDING/AIR
17 Water tanks/dry spaces 0
I
0 0
I
0
I
0
I
0 0
18 Oil tanks (flash point> 60 C) X
I
X 0
I
0
I
0
I
X X
MISCELLANEOUS
19 Control air
L1 3) L1 3)
0 0 0 Ll L1
20 Service air (non-essential) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
21 Brine 0 0 NA NA 0 0 0
22 Auxiliary low pressure steam (:S 7 bar) L2 L2 0 0 0
0
6
) 0
6
)
DEI NORSKE VERITAS
J
)
..
')
/)
... =:>
:J
506 The repair of defects revealed during non-destructive
testing is to be carried out according to agreement with the
surveyor; All such weld repairs are to be examined using the
relevant testing method.
B 100 General
101 The clearance between surfaces to be brazed is to be
as recommended for the selected type of filler material, to
ensure complete capillary distribution of the filler material.
For lap joints, the lap length is to be 3 to 5 t, where t is the
wall thickness of the pipes to be joined.
102 Filler materials .to be used in contact with sulphur-
containing oil at a operating temperature above 100C and
maximum 200C (such as heating coil systems) is to be of
type BAg in accordance with AWS 5.8, or equivalent. Only
filler materials where sufficient corrosion resistance can be
documented, from either relevant service experience or
testing, are to be used .
103 The brazing is to be carried out by qualified brazers
using approved brazing procedures (e.g. ASME IX). The
filler material is to have a melting point above 450C.
Brazing of copper alloys containing aluminium (AI-bronze
and AI-brass) require use of a flux type FB4-A according to
A WS 5.31 or equivalent.
C. Pipe Bending
C 100 General
101 The bending procedure is to be such that the flatteuing
of the pipe cross-section is as small as possible.
Guidance note:
For Class I and II pipes the out-of-roundness, '1 should prefer-
ably not exceed 7% where '1 is defmed by:
D -D
11 = 2 max mm 100 %
Dmax+Dmin
D = outer pipe diameter.
--e-n-d--o-f---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e--n-o-t-e--
102 Pipe bends in Class I and II pipes are to be free from
wrinkles on the inner side of the bend.
103 Copper alloy pipes in systems are as far as
possible to be free from wrinkles.
104 For tolerances in wall thickness and allowance for
bending, see Sec.6, paragraphs A305 and A310 ..
C 200 Heat treatment after bending
201 Hot forming is generally to be carried out in the tem-
perature range 850C - 1000C for all grades; however,
the temperature may decrease to 750C during the forming
process. When the hot forming is carried out within this
temperature range, the following generally applies:
- For C, C-Mn and C-Mo steel, no subsequent stress re-
lieving heat treatment is required.
- For Cr-Mo and Cr-Mo-V steel, a subsequent stress re-
lieving heat treatment in accordance with Table A2 is
required.
- For other alloy steel heat treatment after bending will be
Pt.4 Ch. 1 Sec.7 - Page 29
When the hot forming is carried out outside the above tem-
perature range, a subsequent new heat treatment in accord-
ance with Table A3 is generally required for all grades.
202 After cold forming, when r ? 4D (where r is the mean
bending radius and D is the outside diameter of pipe) con-
sideration is to be given to a complete heat treatment in ac-
cordance with Table A3; in any case, a stress relieving heat
treatment in accordance with Table A2 is required for all
grades other than carbon -manganese steel with minimum
specified tensile strength, 410 N/mm
2
or less.
203 Aluminium-brass pipes are to be stress-relieved or soft
annealed at a temperature of 350 to 400C or 600 to 650C
respectively, after cold working.
204 Normalising is normally to be performed in a furnace.
Stress-relieving may be performed locally covering the de-
formed zone. Method of heat-treatment and temperature
control are to be to the satisfactiori of the surveyor.
205 Hot forming of austeuitic stainless steel is to be carried
out in the temperature range 850-1150C. Cold forming
may be carried out when r ;:: 2,5D (where r is the mean
bending radius and D is the outside diameter of pipe).
D 100 General
101 Joining or bonding of plastic pipes by welding, glu-
ing, lamination or similar method
- is to be carried out in accordance with the pipe man-
ufacturer's installation guidelines
- is to be carried out by qualified personnel certified by the
manufacturer.
102 Each joininglbonding procedure is to be qualified be-
fore the installation commences.
103 Joininglbonding operator's (installator's) certificate
shall contain:
- the name of the holder
- the type of joining the holder is qualified for
- reference to joining/installation procedure (procedure
date of issue to be stated)
- date of issue and validity period for certificate
- pipe manufacturer's stamp and signature.
In addition to being certified, each joininglbonding operator
shall make a. test assembly consisting of one pipe-to-pipe
joint and one pipe-to-fitting joint in accordance with
joininglbonding procedure qualified according to 104-105.
The test procedure and acceptance criterion shall be as de-
scribed in 104-105.
104 Procedure qualification testing.
Each joininglbonding operator shall make a test assembly
fabricated in accordance with the joininglbonding procedure
to be qualified, consisting of at least
- one pipe-to-pipe joint
- one pipe-to-fitting joint.
After curing, the assembly shall be subjected to a hydrostatic
test pressure at a safety factor of 4 times the nominal pres-
sure rating (pressure class) of the piping system. The test
duration shall be no less than 1 hour. Acceptance criterion:
No leakage or separation of joints.
105 Pipe size for procedure qualification test assembly:
- When the largest size to be joined is S 200 mm nominal
outside diameter, the test assembly shall be the largest
piping size to be joined.
DEI NORSKE VERITAS
Page 28 - Pt.4 Ch. 1 Sec.7
the heated circumferential band is to be at least 75 mm on
both sides of the weld.
402 For austenitic stainless steel heat treatment after
welding is normally not reqnired.
403 For other alloy steel grades the necessary heat treat-
ment after welding will be considered in each case.
404 Stress relieving heat treatment after welding for other
than the oxy-acetylene welding process is reqnired as indi-
cated in Table A2 depending on the type of steel and thick-
ness. Unless otherwise specified, for oxy-acetylene welding,
the heat treatment indicated in Table A3 depending on the
type of steel is required.
The stress relieving heat treatment is to consist of heating the
piping slowly and uniformly to a temperature within the
range indicated in the table, soaking at this temperature for
a suitable period, in general one hour per 25 mm of thick-
ness with minimum half an hour, cooling slowly and uni-
formly in the furnace to a temperature not exceeding 400
0
e
and subsequently cooling in still air.
In any case, the heat treatment temperature is not to be
higher than tr - 20
0
e where tr is the temperature of the final
tempering treatment of the material.
Table A2 Stress relieving heat treatment after forming and
welding
Thickness
Stress relief
Type of sleel of Ihicker
heat treatment
temperature
part (mm)
(OC)
C and C/Mn Steel
>15 I) 3)
550 to 620 ,
0,3Mo >15 I)
580 to 640
1Cr 0,5Mo >8 620 to 680
2,25Cr IMo and
any 2)
650 to 720
0,5Cr 0,5Mo 0,25V
I
1) When steel with specified Charpy V notch impact properties at low
temperature is used, the thickness above which post-weld heat treat-
ment shall be applied may be increased by special agreement.
2) H ~ a t treatment may he omitted for pipes having thickness :58 mm,
diameter :5100 mm and minimum service temperature above 450C. I
3) For C and C-Mn steel, stress relieving heat treatment may he omitted!
up to 30 mm thickness by special agreement.
Table A4 NDT of heating coils
Material in coils Butt welds I)
Table A3 Full heat treatment after forming and welding
Heat treatment
Type of sleel and temperature
(OC)
C and C/Mn Steel Nonnalising 880 to 940
0,3Mo Nonnalising 900 to 940
1Cr 0,5Mo
Nonnalising 900 to 960
Tempering 640 to 720
2,25Cr 1Mo
0,5Cr 0,5Mo 0,25V
A 500 Non-destructive testing
501 In general, the welded joints including the inside
wherever possible shall be visually examined. Non-destruc-
tive tests will be required depending on the class of pipes
and type of joints as hereunder indicated:
Butt welded joints:
- for class I pipes with an outer diameter greater than 76, I
mm, 100 % radiographic testing (RT) is reqnired.
- for class II pipes with an outer diameter greater than
101,6 mm and for class I pipes with an outer diameter
:<;;76,1 mm, at least 10% random radiographic testing is
required. More stringent requirements may be applied at
the surveyors discretion depending On the kind of mate-
rials, welding procedure and controls during the fabri-
cation.
Fillet welds:
- for fillet welds of flange type connections in class I pipes
with an outer diameter greater than 76,1 mm, 100%
magnetic particle testing (MT) is required.
:<;;76,1 mm, random magnetic particle testing at the dis-
cretion of the surveyor is required.
In addition welded joints in pipes for thermal oil are to be
subject to at least 10 % random radiographic testing.
502 Heating coils in cargo tanks are to be subject to NDT
in accordance with Table A4.
Joint types
SleevelLap type welded or brazed joints
Erection welds Shop welds Erection joints Shop welded/brazed joints
Mild steel 10 % 5% 10 % 5%
Stainless steel 10% 5% 10 % 5%
Cu-Ni or Al brass 10% 5% Spot-check NDT. Stearn testing onboard 2)
Notes:
1) If automatic welding is used, the percentage may be reduced at the surveyors discretion.
2) Experience shows that pressure tests do not always revealleaks in joints because a capillary gap can be temporarily sealed by flux residues. A re-
commended part of the procedure for testing a heating coil system should therefore be to apply a steam test, which will dissolve flux residues and
reveal leaks.
503 An approved ultrasonic testing (UT) procedure may
be accepted, at the discretion of the Society, in lieu of radi-
ographic testing when the conditions are such that a compa-
rable level of weld quality is assured.
For non-magnetic materials dye-penetrant testing (PT) is to
be used in lieu of magnetic particle examination.
504 Non-destructive testing is to be performed by opera-
tors certified in accordance with a recognised scheme, using
suitable eqnipment and procedures. The radiographs are to
be marked in such a way that their position on the pipe line
may easily be located.
505 The radiographs are to be judged according to ISO
5817 "Arc-welded joints in steel- Gnidance on quality levels
for imperfections", and. are at least to meet the requirements
for quality level B for welds in class I piping and for quality
level e otherwise.
The results from surface examination (e.g. MT, PT) are to
satisfy the requirements of level B ofISO 5817.
DE'!' NORSKE VERITAS
] 0
J 0
~ ~
o
J:J
PtA Ch.1 Sec.2 - Page 5
ABBREVIATIONS
LI
L2
1.3
o
NA
X
Fire endurance test in dry conditions, 60 min, Appendix 1 of IMO Res. A.753(18)
Fire endurance test in wet conditions, 30 min, Appendix 2 of IMO Res. A.753(18)
No fire endurance test required
Not applicable
Metallic materials having a melting point greater than 925C.
FOOTNOTES TO TABLE C1
1) Where non-metallic piping is used, remotely controlled valves to be provided at hull side (valve is to be controlled from outside space).
2) For drains serving only the space concerned, <4<(h. may replace .. Lh.
3) When controlling functions are not required by statutory requirements or guidelines, <4<(h. may replace .. Lb.
4) For pipe between machinery space and deck water seal, .. (h. may replace Lb.
5) Scuppers serving open decks in positions 1 and 2, as defined in regulation 13 of the International Convention on Load Lines, 1966, should be -0{,.
throughout unless fitted at the upper end with the means of closing capable of being operated from a position above the freeboard deck in order to
prevent downflooding.
6) For essential services, such as fuel oil tank heating, x,. is to replace .. (h..
LOCATION DEFINITIONS USED IN TABLE C1
Location Definition
A - Machinery spaces of category A Machinery spaces of category A as defmed in IMO MODU Code.
B - Other machinery spaces Spaces, other than category A machinery spaces and cargo pump rooms, containing
propUlsion machinery, boilers, steam and internal combustion engines, generators and
major electrical machinery, pumps, oil filling stations, refrigerating, stabilizing, ven-
tilation and air-conditioning machinery, and similar spaces, and trunks to such spaces.
C - Fuel oi/lanks All spaces used for fuel oil (excluding cargo tanks) and trunks to such spaces.
D - Ballast water tanks All spaces used for ballast water and trunks to such spaces.
E - Cofferdams, voids spaces, pipe tunnels and Cofferdams and voids are those empty spaces between two bulkheads separating two
ducts adjacent compartments.
F - Accommodation spaces, service spaces and Accommodation spaces, service spaces and control stations as defmed in IMO Modu
control stations Code.
G - Open decks Open deck spaces as used in IMO Modu Code.
Table e2 Material certificates
Class of
Nominal
Design
Type of docwnentation
Component Material piping
diameter
tempera-
NV Works Test
system ture C
certificate certificate report
I >50 x
Pipes
I)
II, III >50 x
I, II, III :S50 x
>400 x
Flanges and bolts
:S 400 x
Steel I
> 100 >400 x
:S 100 >400 x
Bodies of valves and fittings 1),
Steel!
> 100 :S 400 x
I, II
source materials of steel nodular
:S 100 :S 400 x
expansion bellows, other
cast iron
III
pressure containing components
x
not considered as Cast iron III x
pressure vessels
>50 x
Copper
I, II
:S 50
alloys
x
III x
Pump housings
I x
II, III x
1) Pipes and bodies of valves fitted on vessel's side and bottom are to be _ provided with documentation as required for Class II piping syste!!l_s. __
,
Rules for Mobile Offshore Units, .July 1998
SECTION 3
DESIGN PRINCIPLES
A. Arrangement
A 100 General
A 200 Fire protection
A 300 Piping systems
Contents
A 400 Operation and indication of valves
A 500 Valves on the vessel's sides and bottom
A 600 Fittings on watertight bulkheads
B 100 General
B 200 Environmental conditions
B 300 Functional capability
B 400 Failure effects
B 500 Component design
C 100 Application
C 200 Reliability and availability analysis
C 300 Redundancy types
C 400 Machinery not required redundant. Tentative Rules
C 500 Machinery required redundant
D. Personnel Protection
D 100 General
A. Arrangement
A 100 General
101 All equipment and parts which are to be operated or
subject to inspection and maintenance on board are to be
installed and arranged for easy access.
102 All components in a system are to be satisfactorily
matched with regard to function, capacity and strength.
Relative motions between parts of the machinery are to be
allowed for without inducing detrimental stresses.
103 All machinery is to be equipped with indicating in-
struments considered necessary for safe operation of the
machinery.
104 All spaces, from which machinery is operated and
where flammable or toxic gases or vapours may accuniulate,
are to be provided with adequate ventilation under all con-
ditions.
105 The machinery is to be so arranged that one single
maIoperation of the equipment will not lead to a critical sit-
uation for the vessel.
106 The machinery and piping systems are to be arranged
to prevent sea water from reaching dry spaces of the vessel
or oils or chemicals from being discharged overboard as a
consequence of maloperation.
107 Systems and tanks are to be so arranged that leakage
or operation of valves will not directly lead to increased risk
of damage to machinery, vessel or personnel due to mixing
of different fluids.
201 Facilities for the safe storage and handling of flamm-
able fluids are to be found on board.
202 All spaces where oil-burning installations, settling
tanks or daily service fuel oil tanks are located, are to be
easily accessible and well ventilated.
203 Where small leaks of flammable fluids may occur
during normal service or routine maintenance work, special
arrangements are to be made to prevent these fluids from
reaching other parts of the machinery where danger of ig-
nition may arise.
204 Piping and other installations for the transport of
flammable fluids are to be so located that the fire hazard
resulting from rupture and other failures, is acceptably low.
205 For arrangement of fuel oil piping, see Sec.5 D301
and 302.
206 Exhaust pipes are not to be led in the viciuity of tanks
for fuel oil or other flammable fluids.
207 All surfaces which may reach a temperature of 220C
or more, are to be insulated or equivalently protected so that
flammable fluids cannot be ignited.
208 Where oil absorbing insulating material is used, the
insulation is to be covered by sheet metal.
209 All other possible iguition sources of the machinery
are to be protected in order to prevent iguition of flammable
fluids.
210 Flammable or oil absorbing materials are not to be
used in floors, gratings etc. in boiler and engine rooms,
tunnels or in compartments where settling tanks are in-
stalled.
211 Fire protection, detection and extinction is to comply
with the requirements given in Ch.6.
212 Fuel oil purifiers for heated .fuel oil or hydraulic
power aggregates with pressure higher than 15 bar and
power delivery higher than 5 kW located within the bound-
aries of machinery space of category A, are to be placed in
separate rooms enclosed by steel bulkheads extending from
deck to deck and provided with self-closing doors. The
rooms are to be provided with:
- independent mechanical ventilation
- fire detection system
- fixed fire extingnishing installation.
The extingnishing installation is to be capable of being acti-
vated from outside the room and separately from the fire
extinguishing of the engine room.
From the same position it is also to be possible to stop fuel
pumps, ventilation fans, oil purifiers or hydraulic pumps
located in the room.
213 If it is impracticable to locate the installations ad-
dressed in 212 in separate rooms, special considerations are
to be given with regard to location and shielding against
leakages hitting sources of iguition. The installations are to
be covered by a fire extingnishing system capable of being
activated automatically or activated manually from the ma-
chinery control position or from another suitable location.
If automatic release is provided, additional manual release
is to be arranged.
301 Piping systems are to consist of permanently installed
pipes and fittings supported in such a way that their weight
is not taken by connected machinery or that heavy valves
and fittings do not cause large additional stresses in adjacent
pipes.
DEf NORSKE VERITAS
:)
. ~
,J
J
~
o
J
!J
SECTION 7
MANUFACTURE, WORKMANSIllP, INSPECTION AND TESTING
Contents
A. Welding
A 100 General
A 200 Welded connections
A 300 Preheating of steel pipes
A 400 Heat treatment after welding of steel pipes
B 100 General
C. Pipe Bending
C 100 General
D 100 General
F. Functional TestiIig
F 100 General
A 100 General
A. Welding
101 The welding of joints is to be carried out by qualified
welders using approved welding procedures and welding
consumables, see Pt.2 Ch.3. Sec.! and Sec.2. Welding of
steels having a minimum specified yield strength above 400
MPa require welding procedure qualification testing per-
formed on the actual material and welding consumables to
be used as for production welding.
102 Oxy-acetylene welding is not to be used for steel pipes
in class I and II with outer diameter greater than 101,6 mm
or wall thickness exceeding 10 mm.
103 Welding of pipes of copper and copper-uickel may be
carried out by gas tungsten arc welding (GTA W) and for
greater wall thicknesses by gas metal arc welding (GMA W)
or by other approved welding processes.
104 Welding of pipes of aluminium-brass is subject to
special consideration and requires approval based on weld-
ing procedure qualification testing (WPQT). Testing is to be
performed in accordance with Pt.2 Ch.3 and a recoguised
standard.
105 Welding of a material grade where the welding shops
have limited experience, requires the welding procedures to
be based on welding procedure qualification testing. The
welding shop is to establish a plan for training and quali-
fication of welders and for qualification of the welding pro-
cedures to be applied.
201 Welded butt joints are to be of the full penetration
type. For Class I pipes special provisions are to be taken to
ensure a high quality of the root side.
202 Branches are to be welded to the main pipe by means
of full penetration welds. For Class I and II pipes a welding
procedure test (wpQn may be required. For reinforcement
in way of branches, see Sec.6 A.
203 Joint preparation and alignment are to be in accord-
ance with a recoguised national standard.
204 If the parts to be joined differ in wall thickness, the
thicker wall is to be gradually tapered to that of the thinner
of the butt joint with a slope not steeper than 1 :4.
205 Assembling for welding is to be appropriate and
within prescribed tolerances. Tack welds should be made
with welding consumables suitable for the base material.
Tack welds that form part of the finished weld should be
made using approved procedures. When welding materials
require preheating, the same preheating should be applied
during tack welding.
301 Preheating of the different types of steel will be de-
pendent upon their thickness and chemical composition as
indicated in Table AI. In any case, dryness is to be ensured
using, if necessary, suitable preheating.
302 The values in Table Al are based on use of low hy-
drogen processes; consideration should be given to using
higher preheating temperatures when low hydrogen proc-
esses are not used.
Table Al Preheating prior to welding of steel pipes
Thickness of
Minimum
Type of steel thicker part
preheating
(mm)
temperature
(OC)
C and C/Mn Steel,
<!20 2)
50
C+ ~ n 50,40
C and C/Mn Steel,
<!20 2)
100
C+ ~ >0,40
0,3Mo >13
2
) 100
ICr 0,5Mo
<13 100
<!13
ISO
2,25Cr lMo and <13 ISO

0,5Cr 0,5Mo 0,25V 1) <!13 200
1) For these materials, Freheating may be omitted for thicknesses up to
6 mm if the results 0 hardness tests carried out on welding procedure
qualification are considered acceptable.
2) For .welding in ambient temperature below DOC, the minimum pre-
heating temperature is required independent of the thickness unless
specially approved by the Society.
303 Austenitic stainless steel is not to be preheated.
304 The heating procedure and the temperature control are
to be to the satisfaction of the surveyor.
401 The heat treatments are not to impair the specified
properties of the material; verifications may be required to
this effect as necessary.
The heat treatments are preferably to be carried out in suit-
able furnaces provided with temperature recording equip-
ment. However, also localised heat treatments on a sufficient
portion of the length in way of the welded joint, carried out"
with approved procedures, can be accepted. The width of
DEf NORSKE VERITAS
E 100 Flange connections
101 Flanges with their pressure-temperature ratings in ac-
cordance with a recognised national standard will normally
be accepted.
E 200 Pipe couplings other than flanges
201 Pipe couplings may be permitted as in Table El.
202 The use of these types of couplings/joints outside the
limits stated in Table El will be considered in each partic-
ular case.
Guidance note:
Threaded sIeve joint is defmed as a joint where packed threads
perfonn the sealing.
Table El Permitted use of pipe couplings
Coupling types
I
I
Class I
Compression joints:
- Nipple type, welded or brazed ODmax 61 mm
- Flared type ODmax 31 mm
- Bite type OD
max
61mm
Threaded joints:
- Tapered
I
ODmax 25 mm ,)
- Parallel
I
no
Sleeve Joints:
_ Grip Type 1), 2), 3)
no
OD = outer diameter
I
I
I
1) Not for flammable fluids within machinery spaces of Category A.
2) Not for bilge suction lines.
Not on cooling water systems for essential machinery.
F 100 General
101 Plans and material specifications are to be submitted
for approval.
102 The design pressure of strainers applied in seawater
systems is not to be less than the expected maximum pres-
sure in the piping system (static pressure and dynamic pres-
sure due to water hammer).
103 Strainer housings are not to be of grey cast iron.
104 Strainers are to be protected against intemal corro-
sion.
F 200 Hydrostatic tests
201 For all strainers, the manufacturer is to carry out a
hydrostatic test to a pressure equal to 1,5 times the nominal
pressure (the nominal pressure is the maximum allowable
pressure at room temperature). The test pressure need not
be more than 70 bar in excess of the nominal pressure.
E 300 Expansion joints and bellows
301 The use of expansion joints and bellows is to be re-
stricted as far as practicable.
In any case, the use. of slip type expansion joints is sul?jected
to the same restncl10ns as for gnp type sleeve couplii:tgs m
Table El.
302 Expansion joints and bellows are subject to approval
for their intended use. The joints and bellows are to be so
designed and installed that pulling or blowing out is pre-
vented.
Thel.ipeline in which an expansion joint or bellow is to be
fitte , is to be adequately adjusted, aligned and clamped.
When found necessary, protection against mechanical dam-
age of the expansion Joints may be required.
303 The positions of expansion joints and bellows are to
be clearly shown on the drawing of the piping systems.
304 Expansion joints and bellows are in general only to
be used in readily accessible spaces. Exceptions to the above
are ballast tanks and pipe tunnels.
Classes of piping systems
Class II
I
Class III
ODmax 61mm yes '
OD_61mm yes
OD
max
61mm yes
ODmax 2S 'mm ,)
ODmax 61 mm '
no
I
ODmax 61 mm 1)
Pmax 16 bar
Yes
1m", 12SC
202 The manufacturer's certificate for hydrostatic test will
be accepted.
G 100 General
101 Slip-on sleeve welded joints may be used for class I,
II and III pipes with an outer diameter of 51 mm and less.
102 Slip-on sleeve welded joints may be used for class III
pipes wit):1.an outer diameter greater than 51 mm in the fol-
lowmg plpmg systems:
- bilge and ballast systems
- air, sounding and overflow pipes
- fuel oil systems
- steam, feed water and condensate systems
- cooling water systems.
103 Joint designs and socket dimensions in accordance
with a recognised national standard will normally be ac-
cepted.
104 Socket welded joints and slip-on sleeve welded joints
in stainless steel pipes will be subject to the Society'S con-
sideration in eacn case.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
,,] 0
] C]
\
J
)
o
:]
302 Axial forces due to internal pressure, change in di-
rection or cross-sectional area and movement of the vessel
are to betaken into consideration when mounting the piping
system.
303 The support of the piping system is to be such that
detrimental vibrations will not arise in the system.
304 Pipes are to be connected by welding or brazing in
accordance with Sec.S A and B or by detacbable connections
in accordance with Sec.6 E.
305 Installation of pipes for water, steam or oil behind or
above electric switchboards is to be avoided as far as possi-
ble. If this is impracticable, all detachable pipe joints and
valves are to be at a safe distance from the switchboard or
well shielded from it.
306 Water pipes and air and sounding pipes through
freezing chambers are to be avoided.
307 Piping systems which may contain flammable gases
or liquids with a flash point below 60C, are to be entirely
separate from all other piping systems on board and from
all safe areas.
401 Open or closed position of valves is to be easily visi-
ble at the valves.
402 If a valve's function in the system is not evident, there
is to be adequate information on a name plate attached to the
valve.
403 All connections to sea are to be marked SEA
DIRECT.
404 Jnlets and discbarges below the deep waterline in
normally unattended rooms are to be provided with remote
controlled valves wbich are to be operable from a readily
accessible position above the deep waterline, preferably
from the ballast control room.
405 For remotely controlled valves, failure in power sup-
ply is not to cause:
- opening of closed valves,
- closing of open valves on fuel oil tanks and in cooling
water systems for propulsion and power generating ma-
chinery.
406 Remotely controlled valves are to be provided with
indications for open and. closed valve positions at the control
station. For valves on the vessel's side and bilge the indi-
cation Signals are to be directly produced by the valve
movement.
407 Systems for indication of valve positions are normally
to be independent of the activating system.
means for local emergency operation by e.g. hand pump.
Guidance note:
In lower hulls and pontoons it is advised to install a locally op-
erated shut-off valve in series with the remote controlled valve,
nearest to the shell plating, in order to facilitate maiI.Itenance.
409 Sea inlet imd discharge valves, bilge valves and valves
on the fuel oil and lubricating oil tanks which are subject to
static pressure from the tank fluid are to be arranged for di-
rect manual operation by means of mechanical device or per
manently installed handpump. The cbange-<lver to manual
operation from possible remote control arrangement is to be
simple to execute.
501 All outlets and sea inlets are to bave easily accessible
valves or cocks fitted:
- to the shell plating on steel pads welded to the plating
with spigots passing through the plating
- to integral sea chests of rigid construction with pads
welded on.
Drainage from open deck may be accepted without valves
provided the pipes have substantial wall thickness. See Pt. 3
Ch.2 Sec.7 F.
502 Distance pieces of steel of short, rigid construction
may be fitted between the valves and the shell plating. The
thickness of the distance piece is not to be less than given
in Pt.3 Ch.2 Sec.7 F204.
The distance pieces are to be arranged with spigots passing
through the shell plating. Stud holes are not to penetrate the
shell plating or the sea chest plating.
503 Valves and cocks for blow down of boilers located
below the deep waterline are to have a protection ring fitted
on the outside of the sbell plating through which the spigot
is to be carried. The spigot is to tenninate flush with the
outer side of the ring.
504 Suction and discharge valves of steel and sea chests
and distance pieces are to be protected against corrosion by
an efficient coating or equivalent.
505 All suction and discharge pipes are to be adequately
protected where they are liable to be damaged by cargo etc.
506 Sea inlets are to be so designed and arranged as to
limit turbulence and to avoid entry of air due to the vessel's
movements.
507 Scuppers and sanitary discharges, see Pt.3 Ch.2
Sec.6.
508 All outlets and sea inlet valves are to be such that
piping inboard of the valves may be disconnected without
interferring the watertight integrity of the shell.
601 No drain valve or cock is to be fitted to watertight
bulkheads unless it is accessible at all times and capable of
being closed from above the deep load line. Indication of
open and closed position of the valves and cocks is to be
provided.
602 The fastening of fittings, pipes, etc. to bulkheads or
tunnel plating by using bolts passing through clearing holes
in the plating, will not be accepted.
B 100 General
101 The machinery is to be so designed, installed and
protected that risks of fire, explosions, accidental pollution,
leakages and accidents thereof will be acceptably low.
102 Reliability and availability of the machinery are to be
adapted according to considerations of the consequences
from machinery failures and disturbances.
103 The design arrangement of machinery foundations,
shaft connections, piping and dueting is to take into account
the effects of thermal expansion, vibrations, misalignment
and hull interaction to ensure operation within safe limits.
Bolts and nuts exposed to dynamic forces and vibrations are
to be properly secured.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
201 All components and systems covered by the main
class are to be designed to operate under the following en-
vironmental conditions if not otherwise specified in the detail
requirements for the component or system:
- ambient air temperature in the machinery space between
5C and 55C,
- relative humidity of air in the machinery space up to
96%,
- sea water temperature up to 32C,
- inclination of 15 in any direction.
Test results or other relevant documentation confirming the
components suitability for their intended purpose may be
required.
202 The emergency generator is, in addition to the re-
quirements in 201, to operate satisfactorily when the vessel
has an inclination of 22,5 in any direction.
203 Where the rules have requirements to capacity or ef-
fect of machinery, these are to be determined at the follow-
ing ambient reference conditions:
- Total barometric pressure:
- Ambient air temperature:
- Relative humidity of air:
- Sea water temperature:
1 bar
45C
60%
32C
Engine manufacturers are not expected to provide simulated
ambient reference conditions at a test bed.
so arranged that water cannot be trapped in local structures
or machinery exposed to the ambient temperature.
Unless it is documented that the arrangement of water tanks
and piping is such that freezing cannot occur, precautions
to prevent freezing are to be provided for:
- Water tanks with piping above light transit waterline ex-
posed to ambient air temperature below:
- 5C for fresh water tanks,
- 10C for ballast tanks.
- Fresh water tanks with piping below light transit waterline
when sea water temperature is specified below DoC.
- Fresh water cooling pipes for essential services exposed
to ambient air temperature below _5C.
301 Components and systems are in general to be arranged
with redundancy so that a single failure of any active com-
ponent does not cause loss of any main function specified in
Pt.1 Ch.l Sec.2 for a longer period of time. Active compo-
nents in this context are any components transforming en-
ergy as for instance pumps, fans, electric motors and
generators, combustion engines, turbines and boilers.
Heat exchangers of any design and function are not to be
considered as active components.
302 The following active components are general ex-
ceptions to 301 and are not required redundant unless oth-
erwise specified in the rules:
- propulsion machinery,
=
- machinery for emergency power supply,
- thruster.
303 The machinery is to be so arranged and designed that
all functions specified in Pt.1 Ch.l Sec.2 can be maintained
simultaneously in normal service at sea.
304 Maintenance tasks normally expected to occur at short
intervals, e.g. weekly, are to be carried out without loss of
essential functions.
305 Change from one norroal operational mode to another
normal operational mode of the machinery is to be possible
without interruption in propulsion or steering.
306 Machinery or equipment having normally remote or
automatic control, is in addition to have alternative pro-
visions for attendance and operation.
307 The machinery is to be so arranged that it can be
brought into operation from the .dead ship. condition within
30 minutes using only the facilities available on board.
.Dead ship. condition is understood to mean that the entire
machinery installation, including the power supply, is out
of operation and that auxiliary services such as compressed
air, starting current from batteries etc., for bringing the main
propulsion into operation and for the restoration of the main
power supply are not available.
In order to restore operation from the .dead ship. condition,
an emergency generator may be used provided that it is en-
sured that the emergency power supply from it is available
at all times. It is assumed that means are available to start
the emergency generator at all times.
Guidance note:
In case only electric starting is arranged for all generator en-
gines, starting current may be assumed to be available when two
or more independent battery units are provided each unit having
its own charging equipment.
--e-n-d---o-f-G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e-n-o-t-e-
308 The performance and capacity of auxiliary systems are
to be adopted to the needs of the machinery installations
served.
401 In the event of failure, components and systems are
to enter the least hazardous of the possible failure modes
with regard to machinery, personnel and environment.
402 The probability that failure in a component causes
damage or failure to other components, is to be acceptably
low.
403 Failure of one component in a redundant system is not
to lead to failure or damage to backup or parallell compo-
nents or systems.
501 Components are to be designed with respect to the
loads and ambient conditions which are expected to occur.
Generally accepted safety margins are to be used.
502 Exceptional conditions are to be considered when
justified by the risk of damage or the consequences of dam-
age.
503 Where no specific requirements are given in the Rules
regarding dimensioning and choice of materials, generally
recognized standards and engineering principles may be ap-
plied.
504 If acceptable accuracy cannot be obtained by strength
calculations, special tests for the determination of the
strength of the design may be required.
505 When it is essential for the safety of the vessel that the
function of a component is maintained as long as possible
in the event of fire, materials with high heat resistance are
to be used.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

..")
J
') C)
)

B 200 Relief valves
201 Displacement pumps are to be fitted with relief valves.
For pumps transporting flammable liquids, the discharge
from the relief valve is normally to be led back to suction
side of the pump.
B 300 Hydrostatic tests
301 Pump housings are to be hydrostatically tested at a
pressure of 1,5 times the maximum working pressure.
However, the test pressure need not exceed the maximum
working pressure by more than 70 bar.
For centrifugal pumps the maximum pressure is to be the
maximum pressure head on the head-<:apacity curve. For
displacement pumps the maximum working pressure is not
to be taken less than the relief valve opening pressure.
The steamside of steam-driven pumps is to be hydraulically
tested to 1,5 times the steam pressure.
B 400 Capacity tests
401 Pump capacities are to be checked with the pump
running at design condition (rated speed and pressure head,
viscosity, etc.)
Capacity test may be dispensed with for pumps produced in
series when previous satisfactory tests have been carried out
on similar pumps.
For centrifugal pumps having capacities less than 1000
m
3
/h, the pump characteristic (head-<:apacity curve) is to be
determined for each type of pump. For centrifugal pumps
having capacities equal to or greater than 1000 m
3
/h, the
pump characteristic is to be determined over a suitable range
on each side of the design point, for each pump.
402 Special survey arrangement for testing of pumps may
be agreed upon.
C. Valves
C 100 Valve design
101 Drawings and specifications are to be submitted for
approval for valves of new type or unconventional design
and for valves of welded construction fitted on vessel's side
and bottom.
102 Pressure-temperature ratings for valves are to be in
accordance with a recognised national standard.
103 Screwed-on valve bonnets arenorroally not to be used
for valves with nominal diameter exceeding 40 mm in Class
I piping systems, for valves on vessel's side and bottom and
for valves in systems for flammable fluids.
104 Screwed-on valve bonnets are to be secured against
loosening when the valve is operated.
105 Valves are normally to be closed by turning the
handwheel clockwise.
106 Indicators are to be provided to show the open and
closed position of the valve, unless this can be observed in
some other way, e.g. by a distinctly rising valve stem.
107 Handles on cocks are to be removable ouly when the
cocks are in closed position.
108 Welded necks of valve bodies are to be sufficiently
long to ensure that the valves are not distorted as reuslt of
welding and subsequent heat treatment of the joints.
201 All valve bodies are to be subjected by the manufac-
turer to a hydrostatic test at a pressure equal to 1,5 times the
nominal pressure (The nominal pressure is the maximum
allowable working pressure at room temperature). The test
pressure need not be more than 70 bar in excess of the no-
minal pressure.
For valves fitted on vessel's side and bottom the test pres-
sure is not to be less than 5 bar.
202 Butterfly valves fitted on vessel's side and bottom are
also to be hydrostatically tested at a pressure equal to 5 bar
applied independently on each side of the closed disc.
301 DNV product certificates are required for valves with
DN > 100 nun and PN > 16 bar and for ship side valves
regardless of pressure rating. For other valves manufactur-
ers certificate may be accepted.
302 A DNV material certificate is required for valves
when DN > 100 mm and t > 400C. Other valves will be
accepted with a material test report.
D. Flexible Hoses
D 100 General
101 Short lengths of flexible hoses of approved type may
be used when necessary to admit relative movements be-
tween machinery and fixed piping systems.
102 Hoses of non-metallic materials used in systems con-
taining flammable fluids or sea water are to have at least one
ply internal wire braid.
103 Flexible hoses are to be provided with couplings of
approved type.
104 In cooling water lines for diesel engines and com-
pressors the requirements in 102 and 103 may be dispensed
with and rubber hoses with internal textile reinforcement
fitted by means of hose clamps may be accepted provided
the hose is a short and reasonably stra ight length fitted be-
tween two metallic pipes.
105 New types of non-metallic hoses are to be subjected
to a prototype test. The bursting pressure is to be at least 4
times the maximum working pressure. Fire tests may be re-
quired for hoses intended for systems conveying flammable
liquids or for use in sea water cooling systems.
106 For hoses of non-metallic materials, drawings and
specifications, showing the suitability of the hose for its in-
tended use, are to be submitted for approval.
107 Every hose is to be hydrostatically tested at a hydros-
tatic pressure of 1,5 times the working pressure.
D 200 Installation
201 Flexible hoses are to be accessible for inspection.
202 Flexible hoses are not to be used in bilge- and ballast
systems.
203 Means are to be provided to isolate flexible hoses used
in systems for fuel oil, lubricating oil, sea-water cooling and
compressed air.
204 One spare flexible hose of each type installed are to
be available onboard. The spare hoses are to be ready for
mounting.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
Page 24 - PtA Ch.l Sec.6
404 Temperature limits and pressure reductions are indi-
cated in Table A7 and AS for some material types. The
limits may be extended on basis of acceptable documentation
from the Jlipe manufacturer. The permissible temperatures
are stated for long term service. Sliort periods of marginally
higher. temperatures may be accepted by case to case con-
sIderatIons.
405 Glassfibre reinforced epoxy and polyester pipes are
considerably more eXfosed to damage frpm impact and local
overloading than stee . Wall thickness of piping and fittings
shall be equivalent to nominal pressure 10 bar and piping
> 100 = shall be rigid enough to carry a load of 100 kg
at midspan, where midspan is taken from manufacturers re-
co=endation. The susceptibility to impact damage must
be duly taken into consideration when handling, installing,
and inspecting.
406 The tables are related to water service only. Services
involving other media are to be considered case by case.
407 If thermoplastic pipes are to be installed in external
areas, the pipes are either to be particularly approved for
external use or be protected against ultraviolet radiation.
408 Plastic pipes are normally made of electrically insu-
lating materials and are as such not acceptable for service in
gas hazardous areas. Special conductive qualities can be
permitted if in accordance with the following principles:
- Piping systems in or through gas hazardous areas carry-
ing conductive fluids are to be electrically conductive on
the outside.
- Piping systems in/through gas hazardous areas carrying
non-conductive fluids, e.g. refined oil products and dis-
tillates, are to be electrically conductive on the inside and
outside.
Where conductive piping is required, the resistance per unit
length of pipe, fitting, etc. is not to exceed 10
5
ohm/m, and
the resistance to earth from any point in the piping system
is not to exceed 10
6
ohm.
409 The need for expansion elements must be specially
considered with respect to the large thermal expansion co-
efficient of the plastic materials.
410 In cases where design loads incorporate a significant
cyclic or fluctuating component, fatigue is to be considered
in material selection and installation design.
411 Piping materials' compatibility with the fluid to be
carried or in which it will be immersed, is to be ensured
(e.g. for other liquids/gases than the normal such as water
and co=on hydrocarbons).
Table A7 Thermoplastic pipes. Permissible pressures and temperature limits
Nominal
Permissible working pressure,
Material pressure 1)
bar
bar
-20 to OC 30"e 40C 50"e 60"e 70C 80"e
PVC
10 7,5 6
16 12 9 6
ABS
10 7,5 7,5 7 6
16 12 12 10,5 9 7,5 6
HDPE
10 7,5 6
16 12 9,5 6
1) According to recognised standards for water supply on shore.
Table AS Glassfibre reinforced epoxy I) and polyester pipes (GRP). Permissible pressures and temperature limits
Min. heat Pennissible working pressure,
I
distortion Nominal bar
temp. of resin pressure 2)
ISO 75 PN
-50 to 30"e 40
0
e 50"e 60"e 70"e 80
0
e 90"e
we I
Method A
10 10 9
80 16 16 14
25 16 16
10 10 10
100 16 16 16
25 16 16
10 10 10
135 16 16 16
25 16 16
1) Min. heat distortion temperature 135.
2) According to recognised standards for marine use.
B. Pumps
B 100 General
101 The following pumps are to be delivered with the So-
ciety's certificate if contributing to the functions as required
for the main class:
- sea-water cooling pumps for main engine
- fresh-water cooling pumps for main engine
- feed-water pumps
- circulating pumps for boilers with forced circulation
- fuel oil transfer pumps and booster pumps
- fuel oil service pumps
7,5
12
16
9,5
15
16
10
16
16
6
9,5
15
8,5 7 6
13,5 11 9,5
16 16 15
10 9,5 8,5 7 6
16 15 13,5 11 9,5
16 16 16 16 16
- fuel injection valve cooling pumps
- lubricating oil pumps for main engine and main reduction
gear
- bilge pumps
- ballast pumps
- fire pumps and emergency fire pumps ,
- hydraulic pumps and motors for steering gears, wind-
lasses, variable pitch propellers, and thmsters
- circnlation pumps for thermal-oil
- other pumps considered necessary for performance of the
functions listed in Pt.l Ch.l Sec.2.
Drawings of pumps are normally not required submitted for
approval.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
_) CJ
) (J
J 0
J C)
506 Materials with low heat resistance are not to be used
in components where fire may cause outflow of fla=able
or health hazardous fluids, flooding of any watertight com-
partment or destruction of watertight integrity.
C 100 Application
101 The requirements to reliability and availability apply
to machinery for the functions stated in Pt.l Ch.l Sec.2 in
general and to machinery for which these requirements are
made applicable specifically in the rules.
201 For novel and non-conventional machinery documen-
tation on reliability and availability is to be submitted upon
request.
202 Generally recognised methods and formnlae are to be
used in the calculation of reliability, availability and related
parameters.
203 The documentation is to include a failure mode and
effect analysis (FMEA) of the component concerned.
204 When numerical calculations cannot be performed due
to insufficient data, approval may be granted on the basis
of qualitative failure analyses of the component or system.
205 Documentation of calculation methods and computer
progra=es is to be submitted upon request.
301 Redundancy types are defined by the time lag ac-
cepted upon restoring a lost function due to failure in a re-
dundant system.
Redundancy Time lag in re-establishmenJ o/function
type
RO none (continuously available redundancy)
Rl 0-30 seconds
R2 up to 10 minutes
R3 up to 3 hours
not defmed more than 3 hours
C 400 Machinery not required redundant. Tentative
Rules
401 Critical reliability
When according to the rules a single component can perform
a function without redundancy, this component is to have
an expected critical reliability over a time period of 5 years
according to the following table:
Engine output Minimwn critical reliability
<400kW 2: 0,90
2:400kW 2: 0,95
These criteria are to be demonstrated valid with a confidence
level equal to or not less than 75 %. When several compo-
nents replace the components mentioned above, the total
critical reliability of this group of components is not to be
less than specified in the table above.
402 TIme to critical failure
In addition to the specified requirements of critical reliability
in 401, non-redundant components or groups of components
replacing a non-redundant component are to have an ex-
pected mean time to critical failure of at least 50 years.
This criterion is to be demonstrated valid with a confidence
level equal to or not less than 75 %.
In some non-redundant components wear on certain parts
may cause the probability of critical failures of the compo-
nent to increase.
When these parts which are subject to wear, cannot be con-
sidered to be repairable on board, but still are intended to
be replaced during the life of the non-redundant component,
the expected life time of these parts is to be at least twice the
survey interval of the non-redundant component.
501 Avaiklbility and redundancy
Redundant components or systems are to have a total avail-
ability better than 0,9995 between periodic surveys.
Redundant components and systems are normally to be ar-
ranged as redundancy type RZ.
When interruption of function of some redundant component
involves considerable hazard to other components or to the
vessel, redundancy type Rl is to be arranged.
When a single component or a system in a redundant in-
stallation alone has an availability better than 0,9995 be-
tween periodic surveys, the installation can be arranged as
redundancy type R3 of acceptable when considering the
machinery as a whole.
502 Capacity
Redundant components and systems are to be so dimen-
sioned that in the event of one single failure sufficient ca-
pacity is left to cover demands at maximum continuous load.
503 Independence
When two or more components are performing the same
function, these are to be mutually independent and at least
one is to be independently driven. ,
Redundant components only performing auxiliary functions
to a main unit, can be directly powered by the main unit
through separate power transmissions on the condition that
the redundant components are not necessary for the starting
of the main unit.
D 100 General
101 Machinery, boilers and associated piping systems are
to be so installed and protected as to reduce to a minimum
any danger to persons onboard, due regard being paid to
moving parts, hot surfaces and other hazards.
'DET NORSKE VERITAS
Page 10 - PtA Ch.1 Sec A
SECTION 4
PLATFORM PIPING SYSTEMS
Contents
A. General
A 100 Scope
A 200 Location of piping and control systems
B 100 Basic requirements
B 200 Ballast systems
B 300 Drainage of dry compartments below main deck
B 400 Drainage of dry compartments above main deck
B 500 Pumping and piping arrangement
B 600 Bilge pipes
B 700 Bilge pumps
S 800 Bilge wells, mud boxes, valves etc.
C. Ballast and Bilge Systems for Column Stabilised Units
C 100 General
C 200 Remote control and monitoring
C 300 Ballast system
C 400 Bilge system
D. Ballast and Bilge Systems for Self-elevating Units
D 100 General
D 200 Preload system
D 300 Bilge system
E 100 Air pipes, arrangement
E 200 Air pipes, sectional area
E 300 Overflow pipes, arrangement
E 400 Overflow pipes, sectional area
E 500 Sounding arrangements
E 600 Sounding pipes, sectional area
Below 60'C (e.g. Helicopter Fuel)
F 100 General
F 200 Arrangement
A. General
A 100 Scope
piping systems for tanks and dry compartments.
102 For requirements to sanitary discharges and scuppers,
see Pt.3 Ch.2.
201 All parts of the piping and remote control systems are
normally to be kept outside the damage penetration zones
which are defined under .Damage assumptions> given in
Pt.3 Ch.2. Exemptions may be considered in each case if the
uoit can maintain the necessary ballasting capacity and ac-
ceptable stability conditions with damage to the s!mctures
and the pipes concerned, taking into accouot possible pro-
gressive flooding.
101 An efficient system to empty all tanks and watertight
compartments is to be provided.
102 The system required by 101 is to be so arranged that
tanks and compartments can be effectively emptied through
at least one suction even if the unit has an inclination of 5
degrees in any direction.
103 In the case of dry compartments, the suctions required
by 102 may, except where otherwise stated, be branch bilge
suctions, i.e. suctions connected to a main bilge line.
104 The systems are to be so designed that one single fai-
lure or maloperation of equipment will not lead to uocon-
trolled liquid movement, e.g. a series of tanks or a single
tank shall not be filled unintentionally if that may result in
a critical condition of the unit.
105 Means are to be provided to prevent outlet of oily
water to sea.
201 The unit is to be provided with a ballast system so
arranged that any tank can be de-ballasted or ballasted by
either of at least two independently driven pumps or by
controlled free flow.
202 The capacity of each of the ballast pumps is to be
sufficient to provide safe handling and operation of the unit.
203 Ballast pumps of centrifugal type are to be self-prim-
ing, by means of an automatic vacuum priming system.
301 Dry compartments below main deck on self-elevating
units and below the lowest continuous deck on column sta-
bilised uoits, containing essential equipment for operation
and safety of the vessel, or providing essential buoyancy,
are to have a permanently installed bilge or drainage system.
302 The compartments dealt with in 301 are to be emptied
with at least two independently driven bilge pumps or simi-
lar eqnipment. One of the pumps is to be arranged solely for
bilge pumping.
303 Dry .compartments other than machinery spaces and
pump rooms may be arranged with drain pipes leading to a
bilge well in the main bilge system.
304 Where an open drain pipe is carried through a water-
tight bulkhead or deck, it is to be fitted with an easily ac-
cessible self-closing valve at the bulkhead or deck, or a
valve closeable from above the damage water line.
305 Drainage or bilge lines from chainlockers are not to
be connected to the bilge pumps required in 302.
306 Smaller void spaces, chainiockers on self-elevating
units, etc. may be emptied by portable pumps or perma-
nently installed pumps or ejectors. When emptying by port-
able pumps is intended, two units are to be available
onboard.
Small compartments may be emptied by suitable hand
pumps.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
:J

:J
.)
'.

()
) !J
Table A6 Corrosion allowance c for steel pipes
Piping service c (mm)
Saturated steam 0,8
Stearn coils in oil tanks 2
Feed water and blowdown
pipes (for boilers) 1,5
Compressed air 1
Hydraulic oil 0,3
Lubricating oil 0,3
Fuel oil 1
Refrigerants 0,3
Fresh water 0,8
Sea water in general 3
1) For pipes passing through tanks, an additional allowance for ex-
ternal corrosion is to be considered according to the figures given
in the Table, depending on the external medium. I
2) For pipes efficiently protected against corrosion, the corrosion I
allowance may upon approval be reduced up to 50%.
3) For stainless steels the corrosion allowance may be omitted.
312 For seamless pipes and for welded pipes delivered by
manufacturer approved for making welded pipes which are
considered equivalent to seamless pipes the strength ratio e
=1.
For welded pipes from other approved pipe manufacturers
e = 0,9.
313 The value oft does not accouot for any negative ma-
nufacturing tolerance, therefore the nominal wall thickness,
t
l
, is not to be less than:
t = a
1 1- 100
314 The minimum wall thickness of branch pipe and main
pipe in way of branch connections are to be determined ac-
cording to a recognised standard and using permissible
stresses in accordance with 307. Alternatively, the thick-
nesses may be calculated according to 315. However, the
validity of 315 is limited by a maximum ratio for branch
lines wall thickness/main line wall thickness of 2.
315 The minimum pipe wall thickness of main pipes at a
branch connection is not to be less than:
t=to+c (mm)
pD
to 20 at e + p (mm)
e, the strength ratio, is expressed by the formula:
el
y
d
max
, dmin=
. 1,25
e=el smy d
1
25 + max '"mm
,
basic Its variation with the pa-
rameter DB/-JD It, is shown in Fig. 1
angle between centre lines of main pipe and
branch. y is not to be less than 45
0
maximum and minimum diameter, respec-
tively, of extruded opening in the main pipe,
see Fig. 2.
The wall thickness to of the main pipe is to have an exten-
sion not less than:
.j(D-to) to
from the branch, see Fig. 2.
The branch thickness tb is to have an extension not less than:
1,25 .j(DB-Ij,) Ij,
from the main pipe, see Fig. 2.
1,0
e
1
.0, 9
0,. I
0, 7
0"
;
; 0,5

0,4
0,3
0,2
o
Fig. 1
1\
Hules lor MODlle UTTsnore UniIS I I
\
'\

'"
2 3 4 5

i'-...
.......
'----
6 7

-vo.tb
8
Basic strength ratio
tho
o
MIN"I,2S'/lOb-
1
bltb
I-V MIN . V ID - t.lt.
I
it.
Fig. 2
Details of main pipe and branch pipe
A 400 Plastic pipes
401 The nominal internal pressure for a pipe is to be de-
termined by dividing the short-term hydrostatic test failure
pressure by a safety factor of 4 or the long-term hydrostatic
(> 100 000 h) test failure pressure by a safety factor 2,5
whichever is the lesser. The hydrostatic test failure pressure
is to be verified experimentally or by a combination of test-
ing and calculation methods according to a recognised stan-
dard.
402 The nominal external pressure for a pipe is not to be
less than 1 bar and is to be determined by dividing the col-
lapse test pressure by a safety factor of 3. The collapse test
pressure is to be verified experimentally or by a combination
of testing and calculation methods according to a recognised
standard.
403 High temperature limits and pressure reductions rela-
tive to nominal pressures are to be according to the recog-
nised standard, but in each case the maximum working
temperature is to be at least 20'C lower than the minimum
heat distortion temperature (determined according to ISO 75
method A, or equivalent) of the resin or plastic material.
The minimum heat distortion temperature is not to be less
than SO'C.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
Table A3 Minimum wall thickness for stainless steel pipes
External diameter D (mm) Minimum wall thickness (mmJ
10,2 to 17,2 1,0
21,3 to 48,3 1,6
60,3 to 88,9 2,0
114,3 to 168,3 2,3
219,1 2,6
273,0 2,9
323,9 to 406,4 3,6
over 406,4 4,0
Note:
The external diameters and thickness have been selected from ISO-Stan-
dard 1127:1980. For pipes covered by other standards, thickness slightly
less may be accepted.
307 For steel pipes the permissible stress, a" is iu general
to be based on the lower valne of the followiug criteria:
"b "ft . . "ft
2 7 and 16 for austemnc and 18 for others,
" ,
and ab 100000
1,8
Permissible stresses are given iu Table A4, which refers to
the grades of steel specified iu Pt.2 Ch.2 5ec.4.
308 For pipes made of copper and copper alloys the per-
missible stresses are given iu Table AS which refers to cop-
per and copper alloys specified iu Pt.2 Ch.2 5ec.1O.
Table A4 Permissible stress in steel pipes at elevated temperature
Steel grade 2) Heat Wall Pennissible stress in Nlmm
2
treatment thickness,
Temperature C
t

600
Unalloyed steel
TS/1W 360 N t S 16 131 103 92 81 71 64 61 43
-
-
-
16 < I S 40
125 102 91 81 71 64 61 43 -
-
-
40<1<60
119 96 88 81 71 64 61 43 -
- -
TS/1W 410-1 N IS 16 142 120 108 95 84 78 74 43 -
-
-
16 < t S 40
136 118 107 95 84 78 74 43 - - -
4O<IS60
131 113 104 95 84 78 74 43 -
-
-
TS/1W 510 N IS 60 172 150 142 131 119 111 99 47 23 - -
Alloy steel
TS 440 N+T IS 60 161 128 122 117 102 94 91 89 81 30
-
TS 450-1 N 1<60 150 132 124 114 96 88 86 83 56 -
-
TS 450-2, TE N+T IS 60
156 134 129 124 122 118 115 108 76 38 19
TS 500, TE N+T t S 60 217 - 186 183 181 179 176 156 93 49 19
TS 690 N+T IS 60 272 ,-194 182 176 172

162 132 71 33
-- -- -- --
Table AS Tensile strength and permissible stress in pipes of copper and copper alloys
Minimum Design temperature (0C) 1)
Pipe material
tensile
up to 50 75 L 100 11251150 1 175 200 1 225 250 2751300
strengtf,
(N/mm j Permissible stress (Nlmm2)
Copper, annealed 220 42 42 41 41 35 28 19
Copper, semi-hard:. 250 42 42 41 41 35 28 19
Aluminium-Brass 2) annealed 330 80 80 80. 80 80 52 25
Copper-Nicke190/10 annealed 290 70 70 69 67 65 63 60 57 53 49 45
Copper-Nickel 70/30 annealed 360 83 81 79 77 75 73 71 69 67 65 63
1) For pipes conveying compressed air, the permissible stresses are to be reduced by 50% if the pressure is pulsating.
2t Cu: 76,_,!-79.0; 1,8-2,3; As: 0,02-0,06; Zn:
309 For pipes made of materials other than steel, copper
and copper alloys the permissible stresses will be specially
considered.
310 When the allowance for bendiug b is not determined
by a more accurate procednre, or when the bendiug is not
carried out by a bendiug procedure ensuring a control of the
wall thickness, the allowance is not to be less than:
where
b = D
2,5 If 10
R = mean radius of the bend iu mm.
In case the bendiug ratio
--- --
D
R

is not given, this ratio will be taken eqnal to 1:3.
311 For steel pipes the corrosion allowance c is to be as
specified iu Table A6.
For pipes of copper, brasses, copper-tin alloys and Cu-Ni
alloys with Ni-content < 10% the corrosion allowance is 0,8
mm. For pipes of Cu-Ni alloys with Ni'<:ontent 10 % the
corrosion allowance is 0,5 mm. For media with small cor-
rosive action in respect of the material employed, the cor-
rosion allowance may upon approval be reduced down to
zero.
For pipes where there is a risk of heavy corrosion and/or
erosion, a greater corrosion allowance may be required.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
) C)
JO
)
I)

)
o
307 At least two branch bilge suctions are to be provided
for emptyiug of rooms for essential machinery, e.g. pumps
and propulsion machiuery. In small compartments one bilge
suction may be accepted.
308 An emergency bilge suction is to be arranged iu ad-
dition to the suctions required iu 307 for pump- and engiue
room. The suction is to be connected to the largest available
and suitable pump other than the bilge pumps.
309 Draiuage of hazardous areas should be given special
consideration haviug regard to the risk of explosion (see Pt.5
Ch.3).
B 400 Draiuage of dry compartments above maiu deck
401 Dry watertight compartments below damage water
line may be draiued by one of the followiug methods:
- by permanently installed bilge system,
- by draiuiug directly to sea throngh easily accessible
closeable non-return valves,
- by draiuiug to lower compartments with adequate bilge
pumpiug capacity.
501 All bilge pump connections to the bilge lines are to
be fitted with screw-down non-retum valves.
502 The bilge pumps are to be so arranged one can
be used while the other is beiug overhauled.
503 Centrifugal bilge pumps are to be located as low as
possible iu the unit and be of the self-priming type.
Guidance note:
It is advised that at least one of the bilge pumps be of the reci-
procating type. Large centrifugal pumps should preferably not
be used as bilge pumps.
504 Where pnmps, necessary for propulsion, cooling of
power generating plant or ballasting, are connected to a
common suction or discharge chest or other piping, the ar-
rangement is to be such that the functioniug of any pump is
not affected by other pumps iu operation at the same time.
505 The arrangement is to be so that no sea water can
uniutentionally enter dry compartments or pass from one
compartment to another.
The following requirements are to be complied with:
- Two non-return valves in series are to be installed be-
tween sea or ballast system and. bilge suctions in com-
partments.
- For emergency bilge suctions one non-return valve be-
tween sea or ballast system and the snction will be ac-
ceptable.
- Bilge distribution chest valves are to be screw-down
non-return valves.
- All bilge suctions not leadiug to a bilge distribution chest
are to be fitted with screw-down non-return valves.
- Bilge pipes through deep tanks, see 605.
506 Remotely controlled valves iu bilge suction liues are
to be screw-down non-return valves or shut-off and non-re-
turn valves connected in series.
B 600 Bilge pipes
601 The iuternal diameter of bilge suctions from each
compartment is not to be less than stipulated by the follow-
ing formula, to the nearest 5 mm:
d = 2,15.fA + 25 (mm)
where A is wetted surface iu m
2
of the compartment when
the compartment is half way filled with water. The iuternal
diameter of any bilge liue is not to be less than 50 mm. For
irregnlary shaped compartments A will be specially consid-
ered.
602 The cross-sectional area of the maiu bilge liues is not
to be less than the combiued area of the two largest branch
suctions.
603 Direct bilge suctions are to have aniuternal diameter
of not less than 1,4 d but need not exceed the diameter of
the maiu bilge lines.
604 The diameter of emergency bilge suction is not to be
less than that of the suction side of the pump, bnt need not
exceed 400 mm.
605 Bilge suction pipes are, as far as practicable, not to
be carried through double bottom tanks. Where this cannot
be avoided, the pipe wall thickness is to be as stipulated iu
8ec.6, Table Al, column 4.
606 In deep tanks used for water ballast or fuel oil the
bilge pipes are to be led through pipe tunnels or made of
steel with a wall thickness according to 8ec.6, Table Al,
and if possible consist of a siugle pipe length, or be welded
together. Expansion bends or approved expansion bellows
are to be fitted to the bilge pipes within the tanks. The open
ends of these snction pipes iu the dry compartments are to
be provided with non-return valves.
607 The pipes are to be iustalled iu convenient lengths iu
such a way that they may easily be dismantled for cleaniug
and repair.
B 700 Bilge pumps
701 Each pnmp unit may consist of one or more pumps
connected to the maiu bilge line, provided their combiued
capacity is sufficiently large.
702 One of the bilge pumps may be a bilge ejector, pro-
vided that there is a separate pump delivering sufficient wa-
ter for operating the ejector.
703 The capacity of each of the bilge pumps is to be suf-
ficiently large to give the water, under ordiuary workiug
conditions, a velocity of at least 2 m/s through pipes of di-
mensions as stipulated iu 600.
704 Where the capacity of one pump is somewhat less than
reqnired, the deficiency may be made up for by the other
pump. The capacity of the smaller pump, however, is not
to be less than one third of the combiued pumpiug capacity.
705 Pump capacity as a function ofrequired pipe diameter
is given iu Table B 1.
Table Bl Pipe diameter and corresponding bilge pump
I
capacity
I
Bore of Capacity of Bore of Capacity of I
bilge pipe each pump bilge pipe eacfPump
(mm) (m
3
/hour) (mm) (m /hour)
50 15 90 47
55 18 95 52
60 21 100 58
65 25 105 64
70 29 110 70
75 33 115 76
80 37 120 83
85 42 125 90
-
DET NORSKE VERITAS
The pump capacity Q io m
3
lhour may be determioed from
the formula:
S,7S d
2
Q =.::...:.:..::..,;:-
10
3
d = bore of bilge pipe io mm accordiog to 600.
706 Where large centrifugal pumps are arranged for suc-
tion, the pump characteristics together with calculations of
the pressure losses in the pipe system are to be submitted for
approval in those cases where the water velocity in the main
bilge line will exceed S mls. Arrangement plans of systems
for air evacuation, cooliog of bearings, etc. are to be sub-
mitted for approval.
B 800 Bilge wells, mud boxes, valves etc.
801 Bilge pipes for draioage of machioery spaces, pump
rooms and shaft or pipe tunnels are to be led to mud boxes.
The mud boxes are to have straight tail pipes to the bilges
and are to be arranged for easy iospection and cleaniog.
Strums or rose boxes are not to be fitted to the lower end
of these pipes or to emergency bilge suctions.
802 Strums or rose boxes are to be fitted to the ends of
bilge suction pipes io compartments iotended for storage of
supplies, and arranged for easy iospection and cleaniog. The
open area is to be at least twice the internal sectional area
of the pipe. The diameter of the holes are to be approx. 10
mm.
803 The distance between the open ends of the bilge suc-
tion pipes and the bottom of the bilge or wells is to be ade-
quate to allow a full flow of water and to facilitate cleaniog.
804 Valves, cocks and mud boxes are to be located in
readily accessible positions above or on the same level as the
floor plates. Where this is not practicable, they may be
placed ionnediately below, provided that the floor plates in
question can be easily removed and are fitted with a name
plate which iodicates the presence of these fittiogs.
C. Ballast and Bilge Systems for Column Sta-
bilised Units
C 100 General
101 The general requirements io Sec.3 A and Sec.4 A and
B above are to be complied with, unless otherwise specified
io this subsection.
102 The ballast system is to provide the capability to bring
the unit, while in an intact condition, from the maximum
normal operatiog draught to a severe storm draught, within
3 hours.
201 A central ballast control station is to be provided. It
should be located above the worst damage waterline and in
a space not within the assumed extent of damage referred to
io Pt.3 Ch.2 Sec.6 and adequately protected from weather.
It is to be provided with the following control and indicating
systems where applicable:
1) bilge and ballast pump control system,
2) pump status-iodicating system,
3) valve control system,
4) valve position-iodicating system,
S) tank level iodicating system,
6) draught iodicaling system,
7) heel and trim iodicators,
8) power availability indicating system (maio and emer-
gency),
9) hydraulic/pneumatic pressure-iodicating system,
10) monitoring systems, e.g. machioery alarm, fire and gas
detection system etc.
202 The valves io the ballast system are to be of the self-
closiog type or operated by a system with stored energy for
closiog of the valves during emergency conditions.
203 The remote control system for ballast and bilge valves
is to be arranged with power supply from both maio- and
emergency switchboards.
204 Short circuit of one electrically remote operated valve
shall not iohibit the function of other valves.
Guidance note:
It is advised to arrange separate fusing in each valve control
circuit.
205 Orders given from the remote control panel are to be
clearly iodicated.
206 Propulsion rooms and pump rooms io' lower hulls
which are normally unattended, are to be provided with two
iodependent high level bilge alarms.
301 The ballast system is to be capable of operating after
damage condition (with maximum ioclination 17 io any
direction) as specified io Pt.3 Ch.2 Sec.6 and have capabil-
ity of restoring the unit to a level trim and safe draught
condition without takiog additional ballast and with anyone.
pump iooperable.
Guidance note:
This also applies if flooding of a pump room may occur.
302 The sea water inlets to the ballast system is normally
to be separated from other systems. A common ballast and
sea water cooliog system may be accepted upon special
consideration.
303 The ballast system should be arranged and operated
so as to prevent ioadvertent transfer of ballast water from
one tank or hull to another, which could result io moment
shifts leadiog to excessive angles of heel or trim.
304 For 'free floodiog' ballast systems, (see Pt.3 Ch.2
Sec.2 C301, Case 2, where h002 < hopl), the following
criteria are normally to be applicable io connection with tank
filliog arrangements:
- all pump filliog connections to the tank are physically
disconnected (blanks iostalled)
- filling directly down the venting pipe is not permitted io
normal operational conditions
- the method of hydrostatic testiog of the tanks is to be io
accordance with Pt.3 Ch.l Sec.l0 H300.
305 For 'load-on-top' ballast systems, (see Pt.3 Ch.2
Sec.2 C301, Case 2, where < hopl), the following
criteria is normally to be applicable io connection with tank
- an approved 'load-on-top' system is iostalled as the ouly
means of ballasting the tank. Direct filliog above a given
level (hop) is not to be physically possible
- in order to avoid dynamic load effects (from filliog) the
following are to be installed and approved:
DET NORSKE VERITAS
:) <)
:J
/) ()
)
(:)
For steel pipes and pipes of copper and copper alloys, whose
workiog temperatore is lower than SOC, the design tem-
perature is to be taken equal to SOC.
For saturated steam, the design temperature is to be equal
to the saturation temperature.
For superheated steam with manual steam temperature reg-
ulation, the design temperature is to be taken at least equal
to the steam temperature + ISoC. For iostallations with au-
tomatic temperature control of the superheated steam, the
design temperature may normally be equal to the steam
temperature +SOC. It is assumed that any temperature fluc-
tuations greater than ISOC or SoC, respectively, above the
normal working temperature will be of short duration.
305 The minimum wall thickness of a straight or bent pipe
is not to be less thao:
t=to+
c
If to be bent, the minimum wall thickness before bendiog is
not to be less than:
t+ b
306 The strength thickness, t", is not to be less than cal-
culated by the followiog formura:
pD
to = 20 "I e + p
The formula is valid for pipes having a ratio of wall thick-
ness to outside diameter ofO, 17 or less. For higher ratios the
calculation of wall thickness will be given special consider-
ation.
Table AI Minimum wall thickness for pipes of copper
and copper alloys
External pipe diameter D
Minimum wall
thickness (mm)
(mm)
Copper Copper alloy
D < 10 1 0,8
10 < D $ 20 1,2 1
20 < D < 44,5 1,5 1,2
44,5 < D $ 76,1 2 1,5
76,1 < D $ 108 2,S 2
108<D< 159 3 2,5
159<D$267 3,5 3
267<D$457 4 3,5
470 4 3,5
508 4,5 4
Table A2 Minimum wall thickness for steel pipes (except pipes covered by Load Line Regulations)
External diameter Pipes in Air, overflow and Bilge, ballast and Bilge, air, overflow and sounding pipes through ballast
D (mm) sounding pipes [rr general seawgter and fuel oil tanks, ballast lines throu;\{uel oil tanks and
)5)6)7)
structural tanks ) 2)
pipes I) 3) 4) ) 7) fuel oil lines through ballast tanks 1 3) 4) 5) 1) 8) 9)
8) 3) 5) 8) 8)
10,2-12 1,6
13,5-17,2 1,8
20 2
21,3-25 2 2
26,9-33,7 2 3,2
38-44,5 2 4,5 3,6 6,3
48,3 2,3 4,5 3,6 6,3
51-63,5 2,3 4,5 4 6,3
70 2,6 4,5 4 6,3
76,1-82,5 2,6 4,5 4,5 6,3
88,9-108 2,9 4,5 4,5 7,1
114,3-127 3,2 4,5 4,5 8
133-139,7 3,6 4,5 4,5 8
152,4-168,3 4 4,5 4 8,8
177,8 4,5 5 5 8,8
193,7 4,5 5,4 5,4 8,8
219,1 4,5 5,9 5,9 8,8
244,5-273 5 6,3 6,3 8,8
298,5-368 5,6 6,3 6,3 8,8
406,4-457 6,3 6,3 6,3 8,8
1) For pipes efficiently protected against corrosion, the thickness may be reduced by an amount up to not more than 1 mm.
2) For sounding pipes, the minimum wall thickness is intended to apply to the part outside the tank.
3) For threaded pipes, where allowed, the minimum wall thickness is to be measured at the bottom of the thread.
4) The minimum wall thickness for bilge lines and ballast lines through deep tanks and for cargo lines is subject to special consideration.
5) For larger diameters the minimum wall thickness is subject to special consideration.
6) The wall thickness of hydraulic pipes in oil tanks in systems for remote control of oil valves is 10_ be no less tHan:
Steel pipes: 4 mm. .
Stainless steel pipes: 2 mm.
7) For inlets and sanitary discharges, see Pt.3 Ch.2.
8) For stainless steel pipes, the minimum wall thickness will be specially considered, but it is in general not to be less than given in TabJe A3, however,
0,5 mm will be accepted for D S 10mm.
9) For air pipes on exposed decks, see Pt.3 Ch.2.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
SECTION 6
PIPES, PUMPS, VALVES, FLEXIBLE HOSES AND DETACHABLE PIPE CON-
NECTIONS ETC.
Contents
General
A. Pipes
A 100
A 200
A 300
Calculation of wall thickness of pipes being subject to
internal pressure
A 400 Plastic pipes
B. Pumps
B 100 General
B 200 Relief valves
C. Valves
C 100 Valve design
e 300 Certification of valves
D. Flexible Hoses
D 100 General
D 200 Installation
F 100 General
G 100 General
A.Pipes
A 100 General
101 The wall thicknesses of pipes are to comply with the
requirements in this section.
102 For special applications and in cases where the pipes
may be subject to excessive external loadings or are inac-
cessible during service, greater wall thicknesses than given
in the following may be required.
103 Dismantled portions of multitubes to be mechanically
protected. .
A 200 Minimmn wall thicknesses
201 The rniuiruum wall thickness is generally not to be less
than that given in Tables AI, A2 and A3, respectively.
202 The outer diameters and wall thicknesses given in the
tables are in accordance with ISO-standards. For pipes cov-
ered by other standards thickness slightly less may be ac-
cepted.
203 Bilge pipes, ballast pipes and fittings of nodular cast
iron are to have a minimum wall thickness of not less than:
t = K (0,5 + 0,001 DN) (mm)
where
DN = nominal diameter in mm
K = 9 for pipes
12 for fittings other than tees
= 14 for tees.
A 300 Calculation of wall thickness of pipes being
subject to internal pressure
301 The wall thickness of pipes subjected to internal pres-
sure is to be calculated as specified in this subsection. The
nominal wall thickness is, however, not to be less than spe-
cified in A200.
302 Definition of symbols:
to = strength thickness in mm.
t = minimum required wall thickness in mm.
c = corrosion allowance in mm.
b = bending allowance in mm.
at = permissible stress in N/=2.
ab specified rniuiruum tensile strength of the mate-
rial in N/mm
2
at 20C.
aft specified rniuiruum yield stress or 0,2 % proof
stress of the material in N/mm
2
at design mate-
rial temperature.
D = outer diameter of pipe in =.
ab 100000 = average value for stress to rupture after 100 000
hours at design material temperature.
a = percentage negative manufacturing tolerance.
e = strength ratio.
303 The design pressure p to be used in the formula in
306, is defined as the maximum working pressure, and is
not to be less than the highest set pressure of the safety valve
or relief device. For special cases, the design pressure will
be specially considered.
For pipes which are conoected to pumps, p is to be taken
equal to the maximum pump pressure, i.e. the safety valve
set pressure for displacement pumps, and for centrifugal
pumps the maximum pressure on the head-<:apacity charac-
teristic.
When determiniug the maximum working pressure p, con-
sideration is to be given to possible pressure surges in the
piping. .
For steam pipes between boiler and superheater, and for
steam pipes leading from the superheater, where the super-
heater safety valve is controlled by a pilot valve operated
by the steam pressure in the saturated stearn drum, the de-
sign pressure is to be taken equal to the set pressure of this
safety valve.
For pipes without safety valves and pressure gauges on the
low-pressure side of pressure-reducing valves, p is to be
taken equal to the pressure on the high-pressure side of the
pressure-reducing valve.
For feed pipes, p is to be taken equal to the greater of: 1,25
times the boiler design pressure or the boiler design pressure
+ 7 bar.
304 The design temperature to be considered for deter-
mining the permissible stresses, is normally to be the maxi-
mum temperature of the medium inside the pipe. For
special cases, the design temperature will be specially con-
sidered.
DEY NORSKE VERITAS
)
C)

(J
) C)
)
(J
- high level alarm,
- high, high level alarm, and,
- auto-pump cut-off at high, high level
- filling directly down the venting pipe is not permitted in
- the method of hydrostatic testing of the tanks is to be
approved (see Pt.3 Ch.! Sec.!O H300).
C 400 Bilge system
401 The bilge system is to be so arranged that essential
rooms in lower hulls, e.g. pump rooms, can be emptied
even in flooded condition. The control and position-indica-
tion systems for the bilge valves are to be designed to oper-
ate also if the equipment should become submerged.
D. Ballast and Bilge Systems for Self-elevating
Units
D 100 General
101 The general requirements in Sec.3 A and Sec.4 B
above are to be complied with, uuless otherwise specified in
this subsection.
102 The unit is to be provided with means for emptying
of engine rooms and watertight compartments and tanks
which provide essential buoyancy.
201 Alternative methods for drainage of preload tanks,
e.g. by means of bottom valves, may be accepted upon
special
D 300 Bilge system
301 The uoit is to be equipped with bilge reduodant
pumping systems and means for draining all compartments
and watertight sections.
Compartments containing liquids as cooling water, oil fuel
or liquid cargo are to have their own separate pumping sys-
tem.
302 A graphic panel showing all components and ar-
rangements of bilge and drainage system are to be suitably
positioned at the bilge pumping station.
101 Air pipes are to be fitted to all tanks, cofferdams and
pipe tunoels. For small dry compartments without piping
installations the reqnirement for fitting air pipes may be
dispensed with.
Tank air pipes are to be placed at the highest part of the tank
and as far away as possible from the filling pipes.
Where the tank top is uousual or of irregnlar profile or of
great length, the number and positions of the air pipes will
be decided in each case. Pipe tunnels of great length are to
be fitted with air pipes in the fore and after ends.
102 Air pipes from tanks which can be filled from the sea
and from sea chests are to be carried up to above the free-
board deck.
103 Air pipes from fuel oil and lubricating oil tanks, dou-
ble bottom tanks, cofferdams and all other tanks which can
be pumped up and to pipe tunnels, are to be carried above
the freeboard deck and led to the open air.
Air pipes from fuel oil daily service tanks are to terminate
at positions suffiently high to avoid the possibility of ingress
of seawater.
The height is at least to satisfy the requirements in the Load
Line Convention fur ventilation openings not required to be
fitted with closing arrangements. The air pipes are to be so
arranged that possible ingress of sea water or rainwater
through a broken pipe does not reach the fuel oil service
tanks. If lubrication oil tanks have air pipes extending to the
open deck the same requirements as for fuel oil apply.
104 Air pipes from lubricating oil tanks and fuel oil
draining tanks with a volume less than 2 m
3
and which
canoot be pumped up, may terminate in the engine room.
105 For height of air pipes above deck, see Pt.3 Ch.2.
106 The ends of the air pipes are to be so designed or so
located that ingress of water is prevented. Automatic vent
heads with ball floats or similar devices are to be of ap-
proved design.
107 Air pipes from fuel oil, cargo oil and ballast tanks
where anodes for cathodic protection are installed, are to be
fitted with fine-meshed wire gauze easily removable for
cleaning or renewal. The wire gauze is to be placed near to
the outlet, and the area of the pipe end opening is to be en-
larged to twice the pipe cross section. The open ends are to
be situated in positions where no danger will occur as a
consequence of escaping oil vapour or gas.
108 Where ouly one air pipe is fitted, it is not to be used
as a filling pipe.
109 All air pipes are to be clearly marked at the upper end.
110 Air pipes are to be self draining uoder normal condi-
tions of triro.
111 Air pipes are not to be used as priruary means for
souoding.
201 Air pipes of tanks which can be overfilled by pumping
are to be so dimensioned that the sum of the static and dy-
namic pressure will not exceed the design pressure of the
tank as specified in Pt.3 Ch.! Sec.4 D.
For tanks which can be filled by pumps not installed in the'
vessel, the maximum allowable pump capacity is to be stated
on signboards at the filling pipe conoection. The restrictions
will also be stated in the .Appendix to the Class
Certificate .
202 Short air pipes for tanks which can be filled by
pumping, e.g. tanks in barges and self-elevating units, are
to have a sectional area at least 25 % greater than the effec-
tive sectional area of the filling pipes. The velocity of the
liquid flow in the air pipe is not to exceed 4 mlsec when the
tank is pumped over with the largest pump available.
203 Air pipes from ballast tanks filled by free flooding
only, may have less air pipe area, but in no cases less than
25 % of the sectional area of filling pipe.
204 Air pipes are to have an internal diameter not less than
50=.
205 Where overflow pipes are fitted as specified in 300 the
sectional area of the air pipes is to be at least 20% of that
of the filling pipes.
When an air pipe serves several tanks all having overflow
pipes as specified in 300 the sectional area of the air pipe is
to be 'at least 20 % of the combined area of the two largest
filling pipes for the separate tanks.
DEY NORSKE VERITAS
206 Pipe tunnels are to be fitted with an air pipe with an
internal diameter not less than 75 mID.
E 300 Overflow pipes, r r n g e r n e n ~
301 Fuel oil and lubricating oil tanks which can be
pumped up and which have openings, for example, for a
float sounding system, are to be fitted with overflow pipes
discharging to an overflow tank or bl)nker oil tank with
surplus capacity. The tank openings are to be situated above
the highest point of the overflow piping.
302 The overflow tanks are to have a capacity large
enough to take an overflow of ten minutes at the normal rate
of filling.
303 The overflow system is to be fitted with an alarm de-
vice or a sight glass, easily visible from the place where the
transfer pump can be stopped.
304 Where tanks for the carriage of oil or water ballast are
connected to an overflow system, the pipe arrangement is to
be such that water ballast cannot overflow into tanks con-
taining oil.
305 The overflow system is to be so arranged that water
from the sea cannot enter through the overflow main line
into tanks located in other separate watertight compartments
in the event of any tanks being damaged.
Guidance note:
This requirement applies if any fuel tank or overflow tank con-
nected to a common overflow line or air vent tank is bounded
by bottom or side plating below the waterline.
In such cases the common overflow line or air vent tank must
be located higher than the deepest waterline, alternatively indi-
vidual tank overflow lines must be arranged with loops extend-
ing above the waterline.
306 The overflow pipes are to be self draining under nor-
mal conditions of trim.
401 The sectional area of overflow pipes is to be at least
25 % greater than the area of the filling pipes.
501 Indication of liquid level in the ballast tanks, draught
and inclination of the vessel is to be provided for safe oper-
ation of the ballasting system.
502 For column stabilised units the indications in 50 I are
to be provided in the centralised control room.
503 Remote sounding systems are to be designed to with-
stand possible overload f.i. from overfilling the tanks.
The number and position of measuring points are to be ar-
ranged to correct for the influence of inclination, as far as
possible.
504 All tanks, cofferdams and pipe tunnels are to be pro-
vided with sounding pipes or other approved means for as-
certaining the level of liqnid in the tanks. Spaces which are
not always accessible, are to be provided with sounding
pipes.
505 The sounding pipes are to be readily accessible at any
time and clearly marked.
Sounding pipes are normally to be led to the upper deck.
Sounding pipes from fuel oil tanks, lubricating oil tanks and
other tanks containing flammable liquids, and which can be
pumped up, are to be led to the open air.
Sounding pipes to tanks containing liqnids which have a
flash point below 60C (closed cup), are always to be led
to the open air. Sounding rods of such tanks are to be of
spark proof material and no gauge glasses are to be fitted to
these tanks if located in machinery spaces.
The sounding pipes are to be fitted with efficient closing
appliances.
506 Short sounding pipes may be fitted to double bottom
tanks, in shaft tunnels and machinery spaces proviped the
pipes are readily accessible.
Sounding pipes to fuel oil and lubricating oil tanks are not
to be placed in the vicinity of boilers, or preheaters, heated
pipes, electric generators or motors with commutator or
collector rings, or electric appliances which are not totally
enclosed. The sounding pipes are to be arranged in such a
way that overflow Or oil spray will not reach any machinery
component mentioned above. The sounding pipes are to be
fitted with self-closing cocks having cylindrical plugs with
weight-loaded levers permanently attached and with pedals
for opening or other approved arrangement. Short sounding
pipes to tanks not intended for oil are to be fitted with a
screw cap attached by chain to the pipe or with shut-off
cocks.
507 If oil gauges of glass are used for ascertaining the
level of oil in storage, settling or daily service tanks for fuel
and lubricating oil, the glasses are to be of heat-resisting
material, snitably protected and fitted with self-closing cocks
at the lower ends and also at the top ends, if the connections
to the tanks are below the maximum oil level. The gauges
are to be adequately supported.
508 Striking plates with a minimum thickness of 15 mID
or a similar arrangement are to be fitted under sounding
pipes in order to absorb the impact of the sounding rod.
Where sounding pipes terminate in a bend, the bend is to
be adequately fastened and supported and of sufficient
thickness for taking the wear from the sounding rod. Such
sounding pipes, however, are not to be used for deep tanks,
unless they are sitoated within closed cofferdams or within
tanks containing similar liqnids.
509 Remote sounding system of approved type may re-
place ordinary sounding pipes or gauges as follows:
a) For tanks accessible for checking of level through e.g.
manholes, one remote sounding system may be accepted.
b) For tanks not always accessible for checking oflevel, two
independent remote sounding systems are required. In the
case of remote sounding based on the air-bubble princi-
ple, two air bubble lines per tank may be accepted pro-
vided sufficient redundancy in the central unit is
provided.
510 Means are to be provided for sounding and draining
of water-tight structural members such as bracings of col-
umn stabilised platforms.
601 The internal diameter of sounding pipes is not to be
less than 32 mID. In special cases, the surveyor may reqnire
larger size.
602 Where a sounding pipe exceeds 20 m in length, the
internal diaroeter is not to be less than 50 mID.
F. Storage and Transfer Systems for Liquids
with Flashpoint Below 60C (e.g. Helicopter
Fuel)
F 100 General
101 Tanks and pipe systems for such liqnids are to be in
accordance with relevant reqnirements given elsewhere in
this chapter.
DEI NORSKE VERITAS

:J /J
,) 'J
/J (/)
/) ()

G 200 Steering gear
See Pt.3 Ch.2 Sec.4.
G 300 Anchor windlass
301 Anchor windlasses may be approved with one power
unit.
302 Remotely controlled windlasses are to be arranged for
manual operation.
G 400 Accwnulators
401 Materials, design and testing are to be in accordance
with Ch.3.
402 For hydraulic accumulators of the gaslhydraulic fluid
type the two media are to be suitably separated if their mix-
ture would be dangerous or would result in the contam-
ination of the hydraulic fluid andlor loss of gas through
absorption.
403 Each accumulator is to be protected on both gas and
hydraulic fluid side by a safety device such as relief valve,
fuse plug or rupture disc to prevent excess pressure if over-
heated. When the accumulator is an integral part of a system
with such a safety device, the accumulator itself need not
be supplied with a safety device.
404 The gas bottles for charging accumulators are to be in
accordance with Ch.3. Such bottles are to be clearly marked
to prevent mixing up with other types of gas bottles on
board.
405 Cast accumulators are to have an inside coating.
H 100 General
101 The redundancy requirement in AI02 applies for
compressors, filters and pressure reduction units when sup-
plying more than one important customer.
102 Air intakes for the compressors are to be so located
as to minimise the intake of air contaminated by oil, water
or gas.
103 Pipes between the compressors and pressure vessels
are not to have connections to other machinery.
104 Valves on the' air receivers are to be designed such
that detrimental pressure shock does not arise in the pipes
when the valves are opened.
105 Pipes from air compressors with automatic start are to
be fitted with a separator or similar device to prevent con-
densate from draining into the compressors.
106 If the vessel has a pneumatic auxiliary steering gear,
two starting air compressors with a total capacity sufficient
for normal operation of the auxiliary steering gear are to be
provided.
107 For requirements to pneumatic power supply for re-
mote control and instrumentation, see Pt.4 Ch.S:
I 100 General
101 For diesel engine starting systems, see also Ch.2
Sec.2. For starting up from -dead vessel., see Sec.3 B307.
Electrical starting systems are described in Ch.4.
I 200 Capacity
201 Starting systems for internal combustion engines are
to have capacity for the number of starts specified in Table
11 without reloading of air receivers.
Table 11 Capacity for number of starts
!
Duty of engines Number of starts
Engines for driving main 3 starts each. Total capacity
electric generators and need not exceed 6 starts
engines for other purposes
Engines for driving 6 starts. Automatic
emergency generators attempts are to be limited
to 3 starts
202 If a starting system serves two or more of the above
specified purposes, the capacity of the system is to be the
sum of the capacity requirements.
203 For mUlti-engine propulsion plants the capacity of the
starting air receivers should be sufficient for 3 starts pro en-
gine. However, the total cayacity should not be less than 12
starts and need not exceed 8 starts.
204 Compressors are to be installed with total capacity
sufficient for charging air receivers of capacities specifiea
in 20 I and 202 from atmospheric to full pressure in the
COurse of one (1) hour.
I 300 Redundancy
301 Two or more compressors of total capacity as speci-
fied in 204 are to be installed. The capaCity is to be ap-
proximately equally shared between the compressors. At
least one of the compressors is to be independently driven.
302 Where the engines are arranged for starting by com-
pressed air, at least two starting air receivers of about equal
capacity, and which may be used independantly, are to be
fitted.
I 400 Emergency generators
401 If the emergency generator is arranged for pneumatic
starting, the air supply is to be from a separate air receiver.
402 The air receiver is not to be connected to other pneu-
matic systems, except for the starting system in the engine
room. If such a connection is arranged, the pipeline is to be
provided with a screw-down non-return valve.
J 100 System arrangements
101 Thermal oil systems are to be arranged and installed
in accordance with requirements given in Ch.3.
DEI NORSKE VERITAS
D 800 Drip trays
801 All fuel oil tanks in machinery spaces are to be
equipped with drip trays of sufficient capacity and height for
collecting any leakage of oil which may occur from valves,
fittings etc. The drip trays are to be drained to a closed waste
tank not forming part of an overflow system.
802 Precautions are to be taken against overflow of oil
from the lowest situated drip trays.
803 Drip trays are to be fitted under those parts of the fuel
oil system which are often opened up for cleaning such as
burners, purifiers, filters etc.
D 900 Remote stop of fuel oil pumps and fans
901 Emergency stop of the power supply to the following
pumps and fans is to be arranged from a central place out-
side the engine and boiler room:
- fuel oil transfer pumps,
- fuel oil booster pumps,
- nozzles cooling pumps when fuel oil is used as coolant,
- fuel oil purifiers,
- pumps for oil-burning installations,
- fans for forced draught to boilers,
- fans for ventilation of engine and boiler rooms.
D 1000 Various requirements
1001 Settling tanks are to be fitted with means for draining
of water from the bottom of the tanks. If settling tanks are
not provided, the fuel oil or daily service tanks are to be
fitted with water drains.
1002 Open drains for removing water from oil tanks are to
be fitted with selfdosing valves or cocks, and means are to
E 400 Feed water tanks
401 Feed water tanks are to be separated from oil tanks
by cofferdams.
402 Piping for feed water tanks is to be so arranged that
the water cannot be contaminated by oil or oily water.
E 500 Condensate from steam heating of tanks
501 Where fuel or lubricating oil tanks, heaters or purifiers
are heated by steam in pipe coils, the condensate is to be led
into an observation tank placed in an easily accessible, well
ventilated and well illuminated position where it can easily
be observed whether the condensate is free from oil or not.
The scum pipes are to be led to a waste oil tank.
F. Steam Systems
F 100 General
101 Water pockets in the steam flow lines are to be
avoided as far as practicable in order to prevent water ham-
mer in the system. If this cannot be avoided, drain 'cocks or
valves are to be fitted in such places so that the pipes may
be efficiently drained while in operation.
102 If two or more boilers are connected to a common
header or steam manifold the steam connection to each
boiler is to provided with two shut-off valves with a free
blowing drain in between. The valve nearest the boiler is to
be of the non-return type. See also Ch.3 Sec.6.
be provided for collecting all waste oil in closed tanks. For G. Power Supply
large bunker oil tanks there is to be fitted a stop valve be-
tween the self-closing valve and the tank. G 100 General
1003 The oil burners are to be so arranged that they cannot
be withdrawn unless the oil supply to the burners is cut off.
E 100 Feed water pumps
101 Feed water pumps installed to meet the Rule require-
ments to redundancy and capacity are to be independently
driven.
E 200 Feed water piping
201 Feed water piping is to be fitted with valves at the
boiler inlet, as stated in Ch.3 Sec.5.
E 300 Feed water heating
301 For steam boilers with working pressure above 7 bar
arrangements for preheating and deareation of the feedwater
before entering the boiler are to be provided.
The preheating arrangement is to be capable of maintaining
the temperatore above BOC when boilers are operated at
maximum load during normal platform service.
101 The redundancy requirement in AI02 applies to
pumps, filters and pressure reduction units.
102 Hydraulic systems are to be separated from other
piping systems except lubricating oil systems as specified in
cia!.
103 The hydraulic fluid is not to corrode or attack chemi-
cally the components in the system. It is to have a flash point
not lower than 150C and is to be suitable for operation at
all temperatores to which the system may normally be sub-
jected.
104 Means for filtration and cooling of the fluid are to be
incorporated in the system where found necessary.
105 Excessive pressure surges and pulses generated by
pumps and valve operations are to be avoided. When nec-
essary, pulsation dampers are to be fitted, preferably con-
nected diretly to the source of vibrations.
Design of the system is normally to be such that laminar
flow is obtained.
106 Detachable pipe connections and valves in hydraulc
pressure piping are to be at a safe distance from electrical
appliances, boilers, exhaust pipes and other sources of ig-
nition.
107 Air pipes from hydraulic oil circulation tanks and ex-
pansion tanks are to be lead to safe locations so that any
escaping oil does not reach possible ignition sources.
DEI NORSKE VERITAS

\

) ,,")
- .
) (J
J
C)
) (J
F 200 Arrangement
201 Tanks for such liquids are to be located away from the
accommodation area. The tanks are to be separated from
safe areas by cofferdams.
202 Rooms where tanks and equipment for handling of
such liquids are located, are to be regarded as hazardous
areas, Zone 2. The rooms are to be effectively ventilated.
203 The air pipes to the tanks are to be provided with
pressure/vacuum relief valves. The valves are to be of suf-
ficient capacity to relieve the overpressure-vacuum which
occur dunng filling/emptying at maximum rate.
204 For tanks on open deck, permanently installed and
arranged for filling, the area 1,5 m from the
pressure/vacuum (P/V) valve is to be regarded as hazardous
Pt.4 Ch. 1 Sec.4 - Page 1 5
area Zone 2. For transportable tanks (i.e. not refilled on-
board but replaced by full tanks) P/V valves are ouly for
breathing purposes (small gas quantities) and no hazardous
area will be designated around the P/V valves.
205 Corrosion resistant material, lining or coating may be
required in the tanks and piping systems in order to ensure
proper fuel cleanliness.
206 Gauge glasses with selfdosing cocks for level indi-
cation can be accepted for such tanks located outside of en-
gine rooms or other safe areas.
207 Fuel transfer system for helicopter refueling is to be
earthed.
DEI NORSKE VERITAS
SECTION 5
MACHINERY PIPING SYSTEMS
Contents
A. General
A 100 Redundancy and capacity
B. Cooling Systems
B 100 General
B 200 Sea inlets for cooling water pumps
C. Lubricating Oil System
C 100 General
C 200 Filtering of lubricating oil
C 300 Lubricating oil supply
D. Fuel Oil Systems
D 100 General
D 200 Fuel oil tanks
D 300 Fuel oil piping
D 400 Arrangement of valves, cocks and fittings
D 500 Remotely controlled shut-off arrangement for fuel oil
tanks.
D 600
D 700
D 800
D 900
D 1000
Fuel oil preheaters
Filtering of fuel oil
Drip trays
Remote stop of fuel oil pumps and fans
Various requrremenu
F. Steam Systems
F 100 General
G 100 General
G 200 Steering gear
G 400 Accumulators
H. Poeumatic Power Supply
H 100 General
I. Poeumatic Starting Arrangements
I 100 General
I 200 Capacity
I 300 Redundancy
A. General
101 For definition of redundancy, see Sec. 1 B109.
102 Redundancy is to be arranged as specified in Sec.3
B300, and capacity of redundant components are to be as
specified in the requirements to the different systems.
Applied to piping systems this normally implies that more
than one pump unit is to be installed when failure of such a
unit will result in loss of a main function specified in Pt.l
Ch.l Sec.2.
The capacity is normally to cover demands at maximum
continuous load on the main function when any pump unit
is Qut of service.
103 Redundancy type R2 according to Sec.3 C300 is to
be established, i. e. the time lag involved in restoring the lost
function is not to be more than 10 minutes.
104 For multi-engine plants with engines working inde-
pendently of each other no spare is required for an engine-
driven pump.
B. Cooling Systems
B 100 General
101 Centrifugal sea-water cooling pumps are to be in-
stalled as low as possible in the vessel or other means are to
be provided to prevent, as far as practicable,. that the pumps
loose water in a seaway.
102 For systems using fuel oil as a cooling agent, re-
qnirements in D are also applicable.
103 When generator prime movers are connected to a
common water cooling system, the arrangement is to be
such that the supply of cooling water to the prime movers
will not be affected by damage and leakage in other
of the system.
Guidance note:
It is advised that water cooling systems for generator prime
movers are completely separated from water cooling systems for
other purposes.
-e-n-d---<tf--G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e-n-o-t-e-
104 Cooling systems in self-elevating units are to be so
arranged that the supply of cooling water to the generator
prime moovers will not be affected, even if the fire pumps
are in operation, during lifting and descending of the unit.
In such events the cooling water may be supplied from a
storage tank.
201 Sea-water cooling systems for the machinery are to
be connected to at least two cooling water inlets.
202 Strums are to be fitted to all sea chest openings in the
shell plating. The total area of the strum holes is to be at
least twice the total flow area in the sea water inlet valves.
203 Where sea water is used for cooling the engines, the
cooling water suction lines are to be provided with strainers
which can be cleaned without interrupting the cooling water
supply.
C 100 General
101 Lubricating oil systems are to be separated from other
systems. This requirement does not apply to hydraulic gov-
erning and manoeuvring systems for engines.
102 The lubricating oil tanks are to be entirely separate
tanks unless they are isolated from other tanks by coffer-
dams or other arrangements are made to prevent contam-
ination of the oil.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
t
,
>
.. J ... )
, ""
J ()
.:) I")
/) ()
1
I
201 In systems where the lubricating oil circulates under
pressure, efficient filtering is to be arranged.
202 For non-redundant units it must be possible to clean
the filters without interrupting the oil supply.
301 Each engine or turbine is to be supplied with at least
one lubricating oil pump of sufficient capacity for the maxi-
mum output of the engine.
D. Fuel Oil Systems
D 100 General
101 Fuel oil for machinery and boilers is normally to have
a flash point not lower than 60C (closed cup).
102 For vessels with restricted service where it is known
for certain that the air temperature in the spaces, in which
the fuel is stored or used, cannot rise to 10 C below the fuel
oil's flash point, fuel oils with a flash point down to 43C
will be accepted.
103 Liqnids for specific purposes and whose flash point is
lower than 43C are preferably to be stored outside the
machinery space. If tanks for such liquids are installed in the
machinery space, installation drawings are to be. submitted
for approval in each case.
201 Two fuel oil service tanks for each type of fuel used
on board necessary for propulsion and vital systems or
eqnivalent arrangements are to be provided. Each tank is to
have a capacity sufficient for continuous rating of the pro-
pulsion plant and normal operating load at sea of the gener-
ator plant for a period of not less than 8 hours.
202 Fuel oil tanks are to be separated from fresh water
tanks and lubricating oil tanks by means of cofferdams.
203 Where fuel oil tanks are situated near to boilers or
other hot surfaces, the tanks are to be well insulated. In or-
der to keep the oil temperature well below the flash point,
care is to be taken that the free air circulation is not im-
peded.
204 The plate thickness in tanks is not to be less than 5
mm. For tanks of 2 m' volume or less the plate thickness
may be reduced to 3 =. Sides and bottom of the tanks are
to be well stiffened. Large tanks are to be fitted with wash
bulkheads. The tanks are to be hydraulically tested with a
pressure head to top of air pipe or to the top of the overflow
system, if fitted.
205 Fuel oil daily service tanks for heavy fuel oil are to
be constructed with smooth bottoms with slope towards
drainage outlet required by 1001. Outlets for fuel oil centri-
fuges, if fitted, are to be taken from the lowest point of the
tank bottom.
301 Piping conveying fla=able liquids under pressure in
the engine rooin and boiler room is to be laid in well lit
places, in order that the piping may be kept under observa-
tion.
302 All detachable pipe connections and valves in oil fuel
pressure piping are to be at a safe distance from boilers,
'exhaust pipes or other heated surfaces and electrical appli-

303 The number of detachable pipe connections is to be
limited to those which are necessary for mounting and dis-
mantling.
304 Fuel oil pipes are not to be led through fresh water
tanks.
305 The arrangement of piping and valves is to be such
that oil cannot enter tanks not intended for this purpose.
401 The inlet and outlet pipes connected to fuel oil tanks
at points lower than the outlet of overflow pipes or below the
top of tanks without any overflow pipes, are to be fitted with
shut-off valves located at the tank itself. However, short
length pieces of rigid construction may be accepted. The
length.of such pieces is not to exceed 1,5 D of the pipe.
Guidance note:
For filling lines entering at the top of a tank and with inside
extension towards the bottom, airholes must be drilled in the
pipe near the penetration in order to avoid the siphoning effect.

402 All valves and cocks on oil tanks are to be mounted
and protected in such a way that they cannot be damaged
as the result of an accident. The positioning of valves is to
be such that any possible leakage will not lead to oil spray
on boilers, exhaust pipes or other hot surfaces of the ma-
chinery, or on electric motors and appliances.
403 All valves in the fuel oil system are to be controllable
from positions above the floor plates.
404 Regarding oil gauges of glass, see Sec.4 E507.
D 500 Remotely controlled shut-off arrangement for
fuel oil tanks.
501 All valves mentioned in 401 and which are in open
position during service-, are to be arranged for remote shut-
off. The operation is to be carried out from a central position
outside the machinery space and at a safe distance' from
openings to machinery and boiler spaces. For filling valves
on the tanks remote shut-off may be omitted if non-return
valves are used.
The fuel oil supply to generator prime movers are to be
shared on two suction lines with separate shut-off valves.
502 The arrangement is to be such that paint, corrosion
etc. will not impair the efficiency of the remote operation
of the valves.
503 The use of hydraulic or pneumatic systems for keep-
ing quick-acting shut-off valves in open position will not be
accepted.
D 600 Fuel oil preheaters
601 As regards electric oil heaters, see Ch.4 Sec.8 F.
D 700 Filtering of fuel oil
701 Filters are to be fitted in the supply lines to the ma-
chinery. These are to be arranged in such a way that they
can be cleaned without interrupting the supply of fuel oil.
702 For auxiliary engines one single fuel oil filter for each
engine may be approved.
703 Fuel supply for diesel engines burning residual oil fuel
(heavy fuel) or mixtures containing such oils is to be pro-
vided with snitable means for removal of harmful contam-
inants. These means are additional to the filters required in
D701.
If centrifuges are used for the above purpose the arrange-
ment is to have adequate redundancy.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
SECTION 5
MACHINERY PIPING SYSTEMS
Contents
A. General
B. Cooling Systems
B 100 General
C 100 General
D. Fuel Oil Systems
D 100 General
D 500 Remotely controlled shut-off arrangement for fuel oil
tanks.
D 600
D 700
D 800
D 900
D 1000
Fuel oil preheaters
Filtering of fuel oil
Drip trays
Remote stop of fuel oil pumps and fans
Various requrremenu
F. Steam Systems
F 100 General
G 100 General
G 200 Steering gear
G 400 Accumulators
H. Poeumatic Power Supply
H 100 General
I. Poeumatic Starting Arrangements
I 100 General
I 200 Capacity
I 300 Redundancy
A. General
101 For definition of redundancy, see Sec. 1 B109.
102 Redundancy is to be arranged as specified in Sec.3
B300, and capacity of redundant components are to be as
specified in the requirements to the different systems.
Applied to piping systems this normally implies that more
than one pump unit is to be installed when failure of such a
unit will result in loss of a main function specified in Pt.l
Ch.l Sec.2.
The capacity is normally to cover demands at maximum
continuous load on the main function when any pump unit
is Qut of service.
103 Redundancy type R2 according to Sec.3 C300 is to
be established, i. e. the time lag involved in restoring the lost
function is not to be more than 10 minutes.
104 For multi-engine plants with engines working inde-
pendently of each other no spare is required for an engine-
driven pump.
B. Cooling Systems
B 100 General
101 Centrifugal sea-water cooling pumps are to be in-
stalled as low as possible in the vessel or other means are to
be provided to prevent, as far as practicable,. that the pumps
loose water in a seaway.
102 For systems using fuel oil as a cooling agent, re-
qnirements in D are also applicable.
103 When generator prime movers are connected to a
common water cooling system, the arrangement is to be
such that the supply of cooling water to the prime movers
will not be affected by damage and leakage in other
of the system.
Guidance note:
It is advised that water cooling systems for generator prime
movers are completely separated from water cooling systems for
other purposes.
-e-n-d---<tf--G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e-n-o-t-e-
104 Cooling systems in self-elevating units are to be so
arranged that the supply of cooling water to the generator
prime moovers will not be affected, even if the fire pumps
are in operation, during lifting and descending of the unit.
In such events the cooling water may be supplied from a
storage tank.
201 Sea-water cooling systems for the machinery are to
be connected to at least two cooling water inlets.
202 Strums are to be fitted to all sea chest openings in the
shell plating. The total area of the strum holes is to be at
least twice the total flow area in the sea water inlet valves.
203 Where sea water is used for cooling the engines, the
cooling water suction lines are to be provided with strainers
which can be cleaned without interrupting the cooling water
supply.
C 100 General
101 Lubricating oil systems are to be separated from other
systems. This requirement does not apply to hydraulic gov-
erning and manoeuvring systems for engines.
102 The lubricating oil tanks are to be entirely separate
tanks unless they are isolated from other tanks by coffer-
dams or other arrangements are made to prevent contam-
ination of the oil.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
t
,
>
.. J ... )
, ""
J ()
.:) I")
/) ()
1
I
pressure, efficient filtering is to be arranged.
202 For non-redundant units it must be possible to clean
the filters without interrupting the oil supply.
301 Each engine or turbine is to be supplied with at least
one lubricating oil pump of sufficient capacity for the maxi-
mum output of the engine.
D. Fuel Oil Systems
D 100 General
101 Fuel oil for machinery and boilers is normally to have
a flash point not lower than 60C (closed cup).
102 For vessels with restricted service where it is known
for certain that the air temperature in the spaces, in which
the fuel is stored or used, cannot rise to 10 C below the fuel
oil's flash point, fuel oils with a flash point down to 43C
will be accepted.
103 Liqnids for specific purposes and whose flash point is
lower than 43C are preferably to be stored outside the
machinery space. If tanks for such liquids are installed in the
machinery space, installation drawings are to be. submitted
for approval in each case.
201 Two fuel oil service tanks for each type of fuel used
on board necessary for propulsion and vital systems or
eqnivalent arrangements are to be provided. Each tank is to
have a capacity sufficient for continuous rating of the pro-
pulsion plant and normal operating load at sea of the gener-
ator plant for a period of not less than 8 hours.
202 Fuel oil tanks are to be separated from fresh water
tanks and lubricating oil tanks by means of cofferdams.
203 Where fuel oil tanks are situated near to boilers or
other hot surfaces, the tanks are to be well insulated. In or-
der to keep the oil temperature well below the flash point,
care is to be taken that the free air circulation is not im-
peded.
204 The plate thickness in tanks is not to be less than 5
mm. For tanks of 2 m' volume or less the plate thickness
may be reduced to 3 =. Sides and bottom of the tanks are
to be well stiffened. Large tanks are to be fitted with wash
bulkheads. The tanks are to be hydraulically tested with a
pressure head to top of air pipe or to the top of the overflow
system, if fitted.
205 Fuel oil daily service tanks for heavy fuel oil are to
be constructed with smooth bottoms with slope towards
drainage outlet required by 1001. Outlets for fuel oil centri-
fuges, if fitted, are to be taken from the lowest point of the
tank bottom.
301 Piping conveying fla=able liquids under pressure in
the engine rooin and boiler room is to be laid in well lit
places, in order that the piping may be kept under observa-
tion.
302 All detachable pipe connections and valves in oil fuel
pressure piping are to be at a safe distance from boilers,
'exhaust pipes or other heated surfaces and electrical appli-

303 The number of detachable pipe connections is to be
limited to those which are necessary for mounting and dis-
mantling.
304 Fuel oil pipes are not to be led through fresh water
tanks.
305 The arrangement of piping and valves is to be such
that oil cannot enter tanks not intended for this purpose.
401 The inlet and outlet pipes connected to fuel oil tanks
at points lower than the outlet of overflow pipes or below the
top of tanks without any overflow pipes, are to be fitted with
shut-off valves located at the tank itself. However, short
length pieces of rigid construction may be accepted. The
length.of such pieces is not to exceed 1,5 D of the pipe.
Guidance note:
For filling lines entering at the top of a tank and with inside
extension towards the bottom, airholes must be drilled in the
pipe near the penetration in order to avoid the siphoning effect.

402 All valves and cocks on oil tanks are to be mounted
and protected in such a way that they cannot be damaged
as the result of an accident. The positioning of valves is to
be such that any possible leakage will not lead to oil spray
on boilers, exhaust pipes or other hot surfaces of the ma-
chinery, or on electric motors and appliances.
403 All valves in the fuel oil system are to be controllable
from positions above the floor plates.
404 Regarding oil gauges of glass, see Sec.4 E507.
D 500 Remotely controlled shut-off arrangement for
fuel oil tanks.
501 All valves mentioned in 401 and which are in open
position during service-, are to be arranged for remote shut-
off. The operation is to be carried out from a central position
outside the machinery space and at a safe distance' from
openings to machinery and boiler spaces. For filling valves
on the tanks remote shut-off may be omitted if non-return
valves are used.
The fuel oil supply to generator prime movers are to be
shared on two suction lines with separate shut-off valves.
502 The arrangement is to be such that paint, corrosion
etc. will not impair the efficiency of the remote operation
of the valves.
503 The use of hydraulic or pneumatic systems for keep-
ing quick-acting shut-off valves in open position will not be
accepted.
D 600 Fuel oil preheaters
601 As regards electric oil heaters, see Ch.4 Sec.8 F.
D 700 Filtering of fuel oil
701 Filters are to be fitted in the supply lines to the ma-
chinery. These are to be arranged in such a way that they
can be cleaned without interrupting the supply of fuel oil.
702 For auxiliary engines one single fuel oil filter for each
engine may be approved.
703 Fuel supply for diesel engines burning residual oil fuel
(heavy fuel) or mixtures containing such oils is to be pro-
vided with snitable means for removal of harmful contam-
inants. These means are additional to the filters required in
D701.
If centrifuges are used for the above purpose the arrange-
ment is to have adequate redundancy.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
D 800 Drip trays
801 All fuel oil tanks in machinery spaces are to be
equipped with drip trays of sufficient capacity and height for
collecting any leakage of oil which may occur from valves,
fittings etc. The drip trays are to be drained to a closed waste
tank not forming part of an overflow system.
802 Precautions are to be taken against overflow of oil
from the lowest situated drip trays.
803 Drip trays are to be fitted under those parts of the fuel
oil system which are often opened up for cleaning such as
burners, purifiers, filters etc.
D 900 Remote stop of fuel oil pumps and fans
901 Emergency stop of the power supply to the following
pumps and fans is to be arranged from a central place out-
side the engine and boiler room:
- fuel oil transfer pumps,
- fuel oil booster pumps,
- nozzles cooling pumps when fuel oil is used as coolant,
- fuel oil purifiers,
- pumps for oil-burning installations,
- fans for forced draught to boilers,
- fans for ventilation of engine and boiler rooms.
D 1000 Various requirements
1001 Settling tanks are to be fitted with means for draining
of water from the bottom of the tanks. If settling tanks are
not provided, the fuel oil or daily service tanks are to be
fitted with water drains.
1002 Open drains for removing water from oil tanks are to
be fitted with selfdosing valves or cocks, and means are to
401 Feed water tanks are to be separated from oil tanks
by cofferdams.
501 Where fuel or lubricating oil tanks, heaters or purifiers
are heated by steam in pipe coils, the condensate is to be led
into an observation tank placed in an easily accessible, well
ventilated and well illuminated position where it can easily
be observed whether the condensate is free from oil or not.
The scum pipes are to be led to a waste oil tank.
F. Steam Systems
F 100 General
101 Water pockets in the steam flow lines are to be
avoided as far as practicable in order to prevent water ham-
mer in the system. If this cannot be avoided, drain 'cocks or
valves are to be fitted in such places so that the pipes may
be efficiently drained while in operation.
102 If two or more boilers are connected to a common
header or steam manifold the steam connection to each
boiler is to provided with two shut-off valves with a free
blowing drain in between. The valve nearest the boiler is to
be of the non-return type. See also Ch.3 Sec.6.
be provided for collecting all waste oil in closed tanks. For G. Power Supply
large bunker oil tanks there is to be fitted a stop valve be-
tween the self-closing valve and the tank. G 100 General
1003 The oil burners are to be so arranged that they cannot
be withdrawn unless the oil supply to the burners is cut off.
101 Feed water pumps installed to meet the Rule require-
ments to redundancy and capacity are to be independently
driven.
201 Feed water piping is to be fitted with valves at the
boiler inlet, as stated in Ch.3 Sec.5.
301 For steam boilers with working pressure above 7 bar
arrangements for preheating and deareation of the feedwater
before entering the boiler are to be provided.
The preheating arrangement is to be capable of maintaining
the temperatore above BOC when boilers are operated at
maximum load during normal platform service.
101 The redundancy requirement in AI02 applies to
pumps, filters and pressure reduction units.
102 Hydraulic systems are to be separated from other
piping systems except lubricating oil systems as specified in
cia!.
103 The hydraulic fluid is not to corrode or attack chemi-
cally the components in the system. It is to have a flash point
not lower than 150C and is to be suitable for operation at
all temperatores to which the system may normally be sub-
jected.
104 Means for filtration and cooling of the fluid are to be
incorporated in the system where found necessary.
105 Excessive pressure surges and pulses generated by
pumps and valve operations are to be avoided. When nec-
essary, pulsation dampers are to be fitted, preferably con-
nected diretly to the source of vibrations.
Design of the system is normally to be such that laminar
flow is obtained.
106 Detachable pipe connections and valves in hydraulc
pressure piping are to be at a safe distance from electrical
appliances, boilers, exhaust pipes and other sources of ig-
nition.
107 Air pipes from hydraulic oil circulation tanks and ex-
pansion tanks are to be lead to safe locations so that any
escaping oil does not reach possible ignition sources.
DEI NORSKE VERITAS

\

) ,,")
- .
) (J
J
C)
) (J
F 200 Arrangement
201 Tanks for such liquids are to be located away from the
accommodation area. The tanks are to be separated from
safe areas by cofferdams.
202 Rooms where tanks and equipment for handling of
such liquids are located, are to be regarded as hazardous
areas, Zone 2. The rooms are to be effectively ventilated.
203 The air pipes to the tanks are to be provided with
pressure/vacuum relief valves. The valves are to be of suf-
ficient capacity to relieve the overpressure-vacuum which
occur dunng filling/emptying at maximum rate.
204 For tanks on open deck, permanently installed and
arranged for filling, the area 1,5 m from the
pressure/vacuum (P/V) valve is to be regarded as hazardous
Pt.4 Ch. 1 Sec.4 - Page 1 5
area Zone 2. For transportable tanks (i.e. not refilled on-
board but replaced by full tanks) P/V valves are ouly for
breathing purposes (small gas quantities) and no hazardous
area will be designated around the P/V valves.
205 Corrosion resistant material, lining or coating may be
required in the tanks and piping systems in order to ensure
proper fuel cleanliness.
206 Gauge glasses with selfdosing cocks for level indi-
cation can be accepted for such tanks located outside of en-
gine rooms or other safe areas.
207 Fuel transfer system for helicopter refueling is to be
earthed.
DEI NORSKE VERITAS
206 Pipe tunnels are to be fitted with an air pipe with an
internal diameter not less than 75 mID.
E 300 Overflow pipes, r r n g e r n e n ~
301 Fuel oil and lubricating oil tanks which can be
pumped up and which have openings, for example, for a
float sounding system, are to be fitted with overflow pipes
discharging to an overflow tank or bl)nker oil tank with
surplus capacity. The tank openings are to be situated above
the highest point of the overflow piping.
302 The overflow tanks are to have a capacity large
enough to take an overflow of ten minutes at the normal rate
of filling.
303 The overflow system is to be fitted with an alarm de-
vice or a sight glass, easily visible from the place where the
transfer pump can be stopped.
304 Where tanks for the carriage of oil or water ballast are
connected to an overflow system, the pipe arrangement is to
be such that water ballast cannot overflow into tanks con-
taining oil.
305 The overflow system is to be so arranged that water
from the sea cannot enter through the overflow main line
into tanks located in other separate watertight compartments
in the event of any tanks being damaged.
Guidance note:
This requirement applies if any fuel tank or overflow tank con-
nected to a common overflow line or air vent tank is bounded
by bottom or side plating below the waterline.
In such cases the common overflow line or air vent tank must
be located higher than the deepest waterline, alternatively indi-
vidual tank overflow lines must be arranged with loops extend-
ing above the waterline.
306 The overflow pipes are to be self draining under nor-
mal conditions of trim.
401 The sectional area of overflow pipes is to be at least
25 % greater than the area of the filling pipes.
501 Indication of liquid level in the ballast tanks, draught
and inclination of the vessel is to be provided for safe oper-
ation of the ballasting system.
502 For column stabilised units the indications in 50 I are
to be provided in the centralised control room.
503 Remote sounding systems are to be designed to with-
stand possible overload f.i. from overfilling the tanks.
The number and position of measuring points are to be ar-
ranged to correct for the influence of inclination, as far as
possible.
504 All tanks, cofferdams and pipe tunnels are to be pro-
vided with sounding pipes or other approved means for as-
certaining the level of liqnid in the tanks. Spaces which are
not always accessible, are to be provided with sounding
pipes.
505 The sounding pipes are to be readily accessible at any
time and clearly marked.
Sounding pipes are normally to be led to the upper deck.
Sounding pipes from fuel oil tanks, lubricating oil tanks and
other tanks containing flammable liquids, and which can be
pumped up, are to be led to the open air.
Sounding pipes to tanks containing liqnids which have a
flash point below 60C (closed cup), are always to be led
to the open air. Sounding rods of such tanks are to be of
spark proof material and no gauge glasses are to be fitted to
these tanks if located in machinery spaces.
The sounding pipes are to be fitted with efficient closing
appliances.
506 Short sounding pipes may be fitted to double bottom
tanks, in shaft tunnels and machinery spaces proviped the
pipes are readily accessible.
Sounding pipes to fuel oil and lubricating oil tanks are not
to be placed in the vicinity of boilers, or preheaters, heated
pipes, electric generators or motors with commutator or
collector rings, or electric appliances which are not totally
enclosed. The sounding pipes are to be arranged in such a
way that overflow Or oil spray will not reach any machinery
component mentioned above. The sounding pipes are to be
fitted with self-closing cocks having cylindrical plugs with
weight-loaded levers permanently attached and with pedals
for opening or other approved arrangement. Short sounding
pipes to tanks not intended for oil are to be fitted with a
screw cap attached by chain to the pipe or with shut-off
cocks.
507 If oil gauges of glass are used for ascertaining the
level of oil in storage, settling or daily service tanks for fuel
and lubricating oil, the glasses are to be of heat-resisting
material, snitably protected and fitted with self-closing cocks
at the lower ends and also at the top ends, if the connections
to the tanks are below the maximum oil level. The gauges
are to be adequately supported.
508 Striking plates with a minimum thickness of 15 mID
or a similar arrangement are to be fitted under sounding
pipes in order to absorb the impact of the sounding rod.
Where sounding pipes terminate in a bend, the bend is to
be adequately fastened and supported and of sufficient
thickness for taking the wear from the sounding rod. Such
sounding pipes, however, are not to be used for deep tanks,
unless they are sitoated within closed cofferdams or within
tanks containing similar liqnids.
509 Remote sounding system of approved type may re-
place ordinary sounding pipes or gauges as follows:
a) For tanks accessible for checking of level through e.g.
manholes, one remote sounding system may be accepted.
b) For tanks not always accessible for checking oflevel, two
independent remote sounding systems are required. In the
case of remote sounding based on the air-bubble princi-
ple, two air bubble lines per tank may be accepted pro-
vided sufficient redundancy in the central unit is
provided.
510 Means are to be provided for sounding and draining
of water-tight structural members such as bracings of col-
umn stabilised platforms.
601 The internal diameter of sounding pipes is not to be
less than 32 mID. In special cases, the surveyor may reqnire
larger size.
602 Where a sounding pipe exceeds 20 m in length, the
internal diaroeter is not to be less than 50 mID.
F. Storage and Transfer Systems for Liquids
with Flashpoint Below 60C (e.g. Helicopter
Fuel)
F 100 General
101 Tanks and pipe systems for such liqnids are to be in
accordance with relevant reqnirements given elsewhere in
this chapter.
DEI NORSKE VERITAS

:J /J
,) 'J
/J (/)
/) ()

G 200 Steering gear
See Pt.3 Ch.2 Sec.4.
301 Anchor windlasses may be approved with one power
unit.
302 Remotely controlled windlasses are to be arranged for
manual operation.
G 400 Accwnulators
401 Materials, design and testing are to be in accordance
with Ch.3.
402 For hydraulic accumulators of the gaslhydraulic fluid
type the two media are to be suitably separated if their mix-
ture would be dangerous or would result in the contam-
ination of the hydraulic fluid andlor loss of gas through
absorption.
403 Each accumulator is to be protected on both gas and
hydraulic fluid side by a safety device such as relief valve,
fuse plug or rupture disc to prevent excess pressure if over-
heated. When the accumulator is an integral part of a system
with such a safety device, the accumulator itself need not
be supplied with a safety device.
404 The gas bottles for charging accumulators are to be in
accordance with Ch.3. Such bottles are to be clearly marked
to prevent mixing up with other types of gas bottles on
board.
405 Cast accumulators are to have an inside coating.
H 100 General
101 The redundancy requirement in AI02 applies for
compressors, filters and pressure reduction units when sup-
plying more than one important customer.
102 Air intakes for the compressors are to be so located
as to minimise the intake of air contaminated by oil, water
or gas.
103 Pipes between the compressors and pressure vessels
are not to have connections to other machinery.
104 Valves on the' air receivers are to be designed such
that detrimental pressure shock does not arise in the pipes
when the valves are opened.
105 Pipes from air compressors with automatic start are to
be fitted with a separator or similar device to prevent con-
densate from draining into the compressors.
106 If the vessel has a pneumatic auxiliary steering gear,
two starting air compressors with a total capacity sufficient
for normal operation of the auxiliary steering gear are to be
provided.
107 For requirements to pneumatic power supply for re-
mote control and instrumentation, see Pt.4 Ch.S:
I 100 General
101 For diesel engine starting systems, see also Ch.2
Sec.2. For starting up from -dead vessel., see Sec.3 B307.
Electrical starting systems are described in Ch.4.
I 200 Capacity
201 Starting systems for internal combustion engines are
to have capacity for the number of starts specified in Table
11 without reloading of air receivers.
Table 11 Capacity for number of starts
!
Duty of engines Number of starts
Engines for driving main 3 starts each. Total capacity
electric generators and need not exceed 6 starts
engines for other purposes
Engines for driving 6 starts. Automatic
emergency generators attempts are to be limited
to 3 starts
202 If a starting system serves two or more of the above
specified purposes, the capacity of the system is to be the
sum of the capacity requirements.
203 For mUlti-engine propulsion plants the capacity of the
starting air receivers should be sufficient for 3 starts pro en-
gine. However, the total cayacity should not be less than 12
starts and need not exceed 8 starts.
204 Compressors are to be installed with total capacity
sufficient for charging air receivers of capacities specifiea
in 20 I and 202 from atmospheric to full pressure in the
COurse of one (1) hour.
I 300 Redundancy
301 Two or more compressors of total capacity as speci-
fied in 204 are to be installed. The capaCity is to be ap-
proximately equally shared between the compressors. At
least one of the compressors is to be independently driven.
302 Where the engines are arranged for starting by com-
pressed air, at least two starting air receivers of about equal
capacity, and which may be used independantly, are to be
fitted.
401 If the emergency generator is arranged for pneumatic
starting, the air supply is to be from a separate air receiver.
402 The air receiver is not to be connected to other pneu-
matic systems, except for the starting system in the engine
room. If such a connection is arranged, the pipeline is to be
provided with a screw-down non-return valve.
101 Thermal oil systems are to be arranged and installed
in accordance with requirements given in Ch.3.
DEI NORSKE VERITAS
SECTION 6
PIPES, PUMPS, VALVES, FLEXIBLE HOSES AND DETACHABLE PIPE CON-
NECTIONS ETC.
Contents
General
A. Pipes
A 100
A 200
A 300
Calculation of wall thickness of pipes being subject to
internal pressure
A 400 Plastic pipes
B. Pumps
B 100 General
B 200 Relief valves
C. Valves
C 100 Valve design
e 300 Certification of valves
D. Flexible Hoses
D 100 General
D 200 Installation
F 100 General
G 100 General
A.Pipes
A 100 General
101 The wall thicknesses of pipes are to comply with the
requirements in this section.
102 For special applications and in cases where the pipes
may be subject to excessive external loadings or are inac-
cessible during service, greater wall thicknesses than given
in the following may be required.
103 Dismantled portions of multitubes to be mechanically
protected. .
A 200 Minimmn wall thicknesses
201 The rniuiruum wall thickness is generally not to be less
than that given in Tables AI, A2 and A3, respectively.
202 The outer diameters and wall thicknesses given in the
tables are in accordance with ISO-standards. For pipes cov-
ered by other standards thickness slightly less may be ac-
cepted.
203 Bilge pipes, ballast pipes and fittings of nodular cast
iron are to have a minimum wall thickness of not less than:
t = K (0,5 + 0,001 DN) (mm)
where
DN = nominal diameter in mm
K = 9 for pipes
12 for fittings other than tees
= 14 for tees.
A 300 Calculation of wall thickness of pipes being
subject to internal pressure
301 The wall thickness of pipes subjected to internal pres-
sure is to be calculated as specified in this subsection. The
nominal wall thickness is, however, not to be less than spe-
cified in A200.
302 Definition of symbols:
to = strength thickness in mm.
t = minimum required wall thickness in mm.
c = corrosion allowance in mm.
b = bending allowance in mm.
at = permissible stress in N/=2.
ab specified rniuiruum tensile strength of the mate-
rial in N/mm
2
at 20C.
aft specified rniuiruum yield stress or 0,2 % proof
stress of the material in N/mm
2
at design mate-
rial temperature.
D = outer diameter of pipe in =.
ab 100000 = average value for stress to rupture after 100 000
hours at design material temperature.
a = percentage negative manufacturing tolerance.
e = strength ratio.
303 The design pressure p to be used in the formula in
306, is defined as the maximum working pressure, and is
not to be less than the highest set pressure of the safety valve
or relief device. For special cases, the design pressure will
be specially considered.
For pipes which are conoected to pumps, p is to be taken
equal to the maximum pump pressure, i.e. the safety valve
set pressure for displacement pumps, and for centrifugal
pumps the maximum pressure on the head-<:apacity charac-
teristic.
When determiniug the maximum working pressure p, con-
sideration is to be given to possible pressure surges in the
piping. .
For steam pipes between boiler and superheater, and for
steam pipes leading from the superheater, where the super-
heater safety valve is controlled by a pilot valve operated
by the steam pressure in the saturated stearn drum, the de-
sign pressure is to be taken equal to the set pressure of this
safety valve.
For pipes without safety valves and pressure gauges on the
low-pressure side of pressure-reducing valves, p is to be
taken equal to the pressure on the high-pressure side of the
pressure-reducing valve.
For feed pipes, p is to be taken equal to the greater of: 1,25
times the boiler design pressure or the boiler design pressure
+ 7 bar.
304 The design temperature to be considered for deter-
mining the permissible stresses, is normally to be the maxi-
mum temperature of the medium inside the pipe. For
special cases, the design temperature will be specially con-
sidered.
DEY NORSKE VERITAS
)
C)

(J
) C)
)
(J
- high level alarm,
- high, high level alarm, and,
- auto-pump cut-off at high, high level
- filling directly down the venting pipe is not permitted in
- the method of hydrostatic testing of the tanks is to be
approved (see Pt.3 Ch.! Sec.!O H300).
C 400 Bilge system
401 The bilge system is to be so arranged that essential
rooms in lower hulls, e.g. pump rooms, can be emptied
even in flooded condition. The control and position-indica-
tion systems for the bilge valves are to be designed to oper-
ate also if the equipment should become submerged.
D. Ballast and Bilge Systems for Self-elevating
Units
D 100 General
101 The general requirements in Sec.3 A and Sec.4 B
above are to be complied with, uuless otherwise specified in
this subsection.
102 The unit is to be provided with means for emptying
of engine rooms and watertight compartments and tanks
which provide essential buoyancy.
201 Alternative methods for drainage of preload tanks,
e.g. by means of bottom valves, may be accepted upon
special
D 300 Bilge system
301 The uoit is to be equipped with bilge reduodant
pumping systems and means for draining all compartments
and watertight sections.
Compartments containing liquids as cooling water, oil fuel
or liquid cargo are to have their own separate pumping sys-
tem.
302 A graphic panel showing all components and ar-
rangements of bilge and drainage system are to be suitably
positioned at the bilge pumping station.
101 Air pipes are to be fitted to all tanks, cofferdams and
pipe tunoels. For small dry compartments without piping
installations the reqnirement for fitting air pipes may be
dispensed with.
Tank air pipes are to be placed at the highest part of the tank
and as far away as possible from the filling pipes.
Where the tank top is uousual or of irregnlar profile or of
great length, the number and positions of the air pipes will
be decided in each case. Pipe tunnels of great length are to
be fitted with air pipes in the fore and after ends.
102 Air pipes from tanks which can be filled from the sea
and from sea chests are to be carried up to above the free-
board deck.
103 Air pipes from fuel oil and lubricating oil tanks, dou-
ble bottom tanks, cofferdams and all other tanks which can
be pumped up and to pipe tunnels, are to be carried above
the freeboard deck and led to the open air.
Air pipes from fuel oil daily service tanks are to terminate
at positions suffiently high to avoid the possibility of ingress
of seawater.
The height is at least to satisfy the requirements in the Load
Line Convention fur ventilation openings not required to be
fitted with closing arrangements. The air pipes are to be so
arranged that possible ingress of sea water or rainwater
through a broken pipe does not reach the fuel oil service
tanks. If lubrication oil tanks have air pipes extending to the
open deck the same requirements as for fuel oil apply.
104 Air pipes from lubricating oil tanks and fuel oil
draining tanks with a volume less than 2 m
3
and which
canoot be pumped up, may terminate in the engine room.
105 For height of air pipes above deck, see Pt.3 Ch.2.
106 The ends of the air pipes are to be so designed or so
located that ingress of water is prevented. Automatic vent
heads with ball floats or similar devices are to be of ap-
proved design.
107 Air pipes from fuel oil, cargo oil and ballast tanks
where anodes for cathodic protection are installed, are to be
fitted with fine-meshed wire gauze easily removable for
cleaning or renewal. The wire gauze is to be placed near to
the outlet, and the area of the pipe end opening is to be en-
larged to twice the pipe cross section. The open ends are to
be situated in positions where no danger will occur as a
consequence of escaping oil vapour or gas.
108 Where ouly one air pipe is fitted, it is not to be used
as a filling pipe.
109 All air pipes are to be clearly marked at the upper end.
110 Air pipes are to be self draining uoder normal condi-
tions of triro.
111 Air pipes are not to be used as priruary means for
souoding.
201 Air pipes of tanks which can be overfilled by pumping
are to be so dimensioned that the sum of the static and dy-
namic pressure will not exceed the design pressure of the
tank as specified in Pt.3 Ch.! Sec.4 D.
For tanks which can be filled by pumps not installed in the'
vessel, the maximum allowable pump capacity is to be stated
on signboards at the filling pipe conoection. The restrictions
will also be stated in the .Appendix to the Class
Certificate .
202 Short air pipes for tanks which can be filled by
pumping, e.g. tanks in barges and self-elevating units, are
to have a sectional area at least 25 % greater than the effec-
tive sectional area of the filling pipes. The velocity of the
liquid flow in the air pipe is not to exceed 4 mlsec when the
tank is pumped over with the largest pump available.
203 Air pipes from ballast tanks filled by free flooding
only, may have less air pipe area, but in no cases less than
25 % of the sectional area of filling pipe.
204 Air pipes are to have an internal diameter not less than
50=.
205 Where overflow pipes are fitted as specified in 300 the
sectional area of the air pipes is to be at least 20% of that
of the filling pipes.
When an air pipe serves several tanks all having overflow
pipes as specified in 300 the sectional area of the air pipe is
to be 'at least 20 % of the combined area of the two largest
filling pipes for the separate tanks.
DEY NORSKE VERITAS
The pump capacity Q io m
3
lhour may be determioed from
the formula:
S,7S d
2
Q =.::...:.:..::..,;:-
10
3
d = bore of bilge pipe io mm accordiog to 600.
706 Where large centrifugal pumps are arranged for suc-
tion, the pump characteristics together with calculations of
the pressure losses in the pipe system are to be submitted for
approval in those cases where the water velocity in the main
bilge line will exceed S mls. Arrangement plans of systems
for air evacuation, cooliog of bearings, etc. are to be sub-
mitted for approval.
B 800 Bilge wells, mud boxes, valves etc.
801 Bilge pipes for draioage of machioery spaces, pump
rooms and shaft or pipe tunnels are to be led to mud boxes.
The mud boxes are to have straight tail pipes to the bilges
and are to be arranged for easy iospection and cleaniog.
Strums or rose boxes are not to be fitted to the lower end
of these pipes or to emergency bilge suctions.
802 Strums or rose boxes are to be fitted to the ends of
bilge suction pipes io compartments iotended for storage of
supplies, and arranged for easy iospection and cleaniog. The
open area is to be at least twice the internal sectional area
of the pipe. The diameter of the holes are to be approx. 10
mm.
803 The distance between the open ends of the bilge suc-
tion pipes and the bottom of the bilge or wells is to be ade-
quate to allow a full flow of water and to facilitate cleaniog.
804 Valves, cocks and mud boxes are to be located in
readily accessible positions above or on the same level as the
floor plates. Where this is not practicable, they may be
placed ionnediately below, provided that the floor plates in
question can be easily removed and are fitted with a name
plate which iodicates the presence of these fittiogs.
C. Ballast and Bilge Systems for Column Sta-
bilised Units
C 100 General
101 The general requirements io Sec.3 A and Sec.4 A and
B above are to be complied with, unless otherwise specified
io this subsection.
102 The ballast system is to provide the capability to bring
the unit, while in an intact condition, from the maximum
normal operatiog draught to a severe storm draught, within
3 hours.
201 A central ballast control station is to be provided. It
should be located above the worst damage waterline and in
a space not within the assumed extent of damage referred to
io Pt.3 Ch.2 Sec.6 and adequately protected from weather.
It is to be provided with the following control and indicating
systems where applicable:
1) bilge and ballast pump control system,
2) pump status-iodicating system,
3) valve control system,
4) valve position-iodicating system,
S) tank level iodicating system,
6) draught iodicaling system,
7) heel and trim iodicators,
8) power availability indicating system (maio and emer-
gency),
9) hydraulic/pneumatic pressure-iodicating system,
10) monitoring systems, e.g. machioery alarm, fire and gas
detection system etc.
202 The valves io the ballast system are to be of the self-
closiog type or operated by a system with stored energy for
closiog of the valves during emergency conditions.
203 The remote control system for ballast and bilge valves
is to be arranged with power supply from both maio- and
emergency switchboards.
204 Short circuit of one electrically remote operated valve
shall not iohibit the function of other valves.
Guidance note:
It is advised to arrange separate fusing in each valve control
circuit.
205 Orders given from the remote control panel are to be
clearly iodicated.
206 Propulsion rooms and pump rooms io' lower hulls
which are normally unattended, are to be provided with two
iodependent high level bilge alarms.
301 The ballast system is to be capable of operating after
damage condition (with maximum ioclination 17 io any
direction) as specified io Pt.3 Ch.2 Sec.6 and have capabil-
ity of restoring the unit to a level trim and safe draught
condition without takiog additional ballast and with anyone.
pump iooperable.
Guidance note:
This also applies if flooding of a pump room may occur.
302 The sea water inlets to the ballast system is normally
to be separated from other systems. A common ballast and
sea water cooliog system may be accepted upon special
consideration.
303 The ballast system should be arranged and operated
so as to prevent ioadvertent transfer of ballast water from
one tank or hull to another, which could result io moment
shifts leadiog to excessive angles of heel or trim.
304 For 'free floodiog' ballast systems, (see Pt.3 Ch.2
Sec.2 C301, Case 2, where h002 < hopl), the following
criteria are normally to be applicable io connection with tank
- all pump filliog connections to the tank are physically
disconnected (blanks iostalled)
- filling directly down the venting pipe is not permitted io
- the method of hydrostatic testiog of the tanks is to be io
accordance with Pt.3 Ch.l Sec.l0 H300.
305 For 'load-on-top' ballast systems, (see Pt.3 Ch.2
Sec.2 C301, Case 2, where < hopl), the following
criteria is normally to be applicable io connection with tank
- an approved 'load-on-top' system is iostalled as the ouly
means of ballasting the tank. Direct filliog above a given
level (hop) is not to be physically possible
- in order to avoid dynamic load effects (from filliog) the
following are to be installed and approved:
DET NORSKE VERITAS
:) <)
:J
/) ()
)
(:)
For steel pipes and pipes of copper and copper alloys, whose
workiog temperatore is lower than SOC, the design tem-
perature is to be taken equal to SOC.
For saturated steam, the design temperature is to be equal
to the saturation temperature.
For superheated steam with manual steam temperature reg-
ulation, the design temperature is to be taken at least equal
to the steam temperature + ISoC. For iostallations with au-
tomatic temperature control of the superheated steam, the
design temperature may normally be equal to the steam
temperature +SOC. It is assumed that any temperature fluc-
tuations greater than ISOC or SoC, respectively, above the
normal working temperature will be of short duration.
305 The minimum wall thickness of a straight or bent pipe
is not to be less thao:
t=to+
c
If to be bent, the minimum wall thickness before bendiog is
t+ b
306 The strength thickness, t", is not to be less than cal-
culated by the followiog formura:
pD
to = 20 "I e + p
The formula is valid for pipes having a ratio of wall thick-
ness to outside diameter ofO, 17 or less. For higher ratios the
calculation of wall thickness will be given special consider-
ation.
Table AI Minimum wall thickness for pipes of copper
and copper alloys
External pipe diameter D
Minimum wall
thickness (mm)
(mm)
Copper Copper alloy
D < 10 1 0,8
10 < D $ 20 1,2 1
20 < D < 44,5 1,5 1,2
44,5 < D $ 76,1 2 1,5
76,1 < D $ 108 2,S 2
108<D< 159 3 2,5
159<D$267 3,5 3
267<D$457 4 3,5
470 4 3,5
508 4,5 4
Table A2 Minimum wall thickness for steel pipes (except pipes covered by Load Line Regulations)
External diameter Pipes in Air, overflow and Bilge, ballast and Bilge, air, overflow and sounding pipes through ballast
D (mm) sounding pipes [rr general seawgter and fuel oil tanks, ballast lines throu;\{uel oil tanks and
)5)6)7)
structural tanks ) 2)
pipes I) 3) 4) ) 7) fuel oil lines through ballast tanks 1 3) 4) 5) 1) 8) 9)
8) 3) 5) 8) 8)
10,2-12 1,6
13,5-17,2 1,8
20 2
21,3-25 2 2
26,9-33,7 2 3,2
38-44,5 2 4,5 3,6 6,3
48,3 2,3 4,5 3,6 6,3
51-63,5 2,3 4,5 4 6,3
70 2,6 4,5 4 6,3
76,1-82,5 2,6 4,5 4,5 6,3
88,9-108 2,9 4,5 4,5 7,1
114,3-127 3,2 4,5 4,5 8
133-139,7 3,6 4,5 4,5 8
152,4-168,3 4 4,5 4 8,8
177,8 4,5 5 5 8,8
193,7 4,5 5,4 5,4 8,8
219,1 4,5 5,9 5,9 8,8
244,5-273 5 6,3 6,3 8,8
298,5-368 5,6 6,3 6,3 8,8
406,4-457 6,3 6,3 6,3 8,8
1) For pipes efficiently protected against corrosion, the thickness may be reduced by an amount up to not more than 1 mm.
2) For sounding pipes, the minimum wall thickness is intended to apply to the part outside the tank.
3) For threaded pipes, where allowed, the minimum wall thickness is to be measured at the bottom of the thread.
4) The minimum wall thickness for bilge lines and ballast lines through deep tanks and for cargo lines is subject to special consideration.
5) For larger diameters the minimum wall thickness is subject to special consideration.
6) The wall thickness of hydraulic pipes in oil tanks in systems for remote control of oil valves is 10_ be no less tHan:
Steel pipes: 4 mm. .
Stainless steel pipes: 2 mm.
7) For inlets and sanitary discharges, see Pt.3 Ch.2.
8) For stainless steel pipes, the minimum wall thickness will be specially considered, but it is in general not to be less than given in TabJe A3, however,
0,5 mm will be accepted for D S 10mm.
9) For air pipes on exposed decks, see Pt.3 Ch.2.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
Table A3 Minimum wall thickness for stainless steel pipes
External diameter D (mm) Minimum wall thickness (mmJ
10,2 to 17,2 1,0
21,3 to 48,3 1,6
60,3 to 88,9 2,0
114,3 to 168,3 2,3
219,1 2,6
273,0 2,9
323,9 to 406,4 3,6
over 406,4 4,0
Note:
The external diameters and thickness have been selected from ISO-Stan-
dard 1127:1980. For pipes covered by other standards, thickness slightly
less may be accepted.
307 For steel pipes the permissible stress, a" is iu general
to be based on the lower valne of the followiug criteria:
"b "ft . . "ft
2 7 and 16 for austemnc and 18 for others,
" ,
and ab 100000
1,8
Permissible stresses are given iu Table A4, which refers to
the grades of steel specified iu Pt.2 Ch.2 5ec.4.
308 For pipes made of copper and copper alloys the per-
missible stresses are given iu Table AS which refers to cop-
per and copper alloys specified iu Pt.2 Ch.2 5ec.1O.
Table A4 Permissible stress in steel pipes at elevated temperature
Steel grade 2) Heat Wall Pennissible stress in Nlmm
2
treatment thickness,
Temperature C
t

600
Unalloyed steel
TS/1W 360 N t S 16 131 103 92 81 71 64 61 43
-
-
-
16 < I S 40
125 102 91 81 71 64 61 43 -
-
-
40<1<60
119 96 88 81 71 64 61 43 -
- -
TS/1W 410-1 N IS 16 142 120 108 95 84 78 74 43 -
-
-
16 < t S 40
136 118 107 95 84 78 74 43 - - -
4O<IS60
131 113 104 95 84 78 74 43 -
-
-
TS/1W 510 N IS 60 172 150 142 131 119 111 99 47 23 - -
Alloy steel
TS 440 N+T IS 60 161 128 122 117 102 94 91 89 81 30
-
TS 450-1 N 1<60 150 132 124 114 96 88 86 83 56 -
-
TS 450-2, TE N+T IS 60
156 134 129 124 122 118 115 108 76 38 19
TS 500, TE N+T t S 60 217 - 186 183 181 179 176 156 93 49 19
TS 690 N+T IS 60 272 ,-194 182 176 172

162 132 71 33
-- -- -- --
Table AS Tensile strength and permissible stress in pipes of copper and copper alloys
Minimum Design temperature (0C) 1)
Pipe material
tensile
up to 50 75 L 100 11251150 1 175 200 1 225 250 2751300
strengtf,
(N/mm j Permissible stress (Nlmm2)
Copper, annealed 220 42 42 41 41 35 28 19
Copper, semi-hard:. 250 42 42 41 41 35 28 19
Aluminium-Brass 2) annealed 330 80 80 80. 80 80 52 25
Copper-Nicke190/10 annealed 290 70 70 69 67 65 63 60 57 53 49 45
Copper-Nickel 70/30 annealed 360 83 81 79 77 75 73 71 69 67 65 63
1) For pipes conveying compressed air, the permissible stresses are to be reduced by 50% if the pressure is pulsating.
2t Cu: 76,_,!-79.0; 1,8-2,3; As: 0,02-0,06; Zn:
309 For pipes made of materials other than steel, copper
and copper alloys the permissible stresses will be specially
considered.
310 When the allowance for bendiug b is not determined
by a more accurate procednre, or when the bendiug is not
carried out by a bendiug procedure ensuring a control of the
wall thickness, the allowance is not to be less than:
where
b = D
2,5 If 10
R = mean radius of the bend iu mm.
In case the bendiug ratio
--- --
D
R

is not given, this ratio will be taken eqnal to 1:3.
311 For steel pipes the corrosion allowance c is to be as
specified iu Table A6.
For pipes of copper, brasses, copper-tin alloys and Cu-Ni
alloys with Ni-content < 10% the corrosion allowance is 0,8
mm. For pipes of Cu-Ni alloys with Ni'<:ontent 10 % the
corrosion allowance is 0,5 mm. For media with small cor-
rosive action in respect of the material employed, the cor-
rosion allowance may upon approval be reduced down to
zero.
For pipes where there is a risk of heavy corrosion and/or
erosion, a greater corrosion allowance may be required.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
) C)
JO
)
I)

)
o
307 At least two branch bilge suctions are to be provided
for emptyiug of rooms for essential machinery, e.g. pumps
and propulsion machiuery. In small compartments one bilge
suction may be accepted.
308 An emergency bilge suction is to be arranged iu ad-
dition to the suctions required iu 307 for pump- and engiue
room. The suction is to be connected to the largest available
and suitable pump other than the bilge pumps.
309 Draiuage of hazardous areas should be given special
consideration haviug regard to the risk of explosion (see Pt.5
Ch.3).
B 400 Draiuage of dry compartments above maiu deck
401 Dry watertight compartments below damage water
line may be draiued by one of the followiug methods:
- by permanently installed bilge system,
- by draiuiug directly to sea throngh easily accessible
closeable non-return valves,
- by draiuiug to lower compartments with adequate bilge
pumpiug capacity.
501 All bilge pump connections to the bilge lines are to
be fitted with screw-down non-retum valves.
502 The bilge pumps are to be so arranged one can
be used while the other is beiug overhauled.
503 Centrifugal bilge pumps are to be located as low as
possible iu the unit and be of the self-priming type.
Guidance note:
It is advised that at least one of the bilge pumps be of the reci-
procating type. Large centrifugal pumps should preferably not
be used as bilge pumps.
504 Where pnmps, necessary for propulsion, cooling of
power generating plant or ballasting, are connected to a
common suction or discharge chest or other piping, the ar-
rangement is to be such that the functioniug of any pump is
not affected by other pumps iu operation at the same time.
505 The arrangement is to be so that no sea water can
uniutentionally enter dry compartments or pass from one
compartment to another.
The following requirements are to be complied with:
- Two non-return valves in series are to be installed be-
tween sea or ballast system and. bilge suctions in com-
partments.
- For emergency bilge suctions one non-return valve be-
tween sea or ballast system and the snction will be ac-
ceptable.
- Bilge distribution chest valves are to be screw-down
non-return valves.
- All bilge suctions not leadiug to a bilge distribution chest
are to be fitted with screw-down non-return valves.
- Bilge pipes through deep tanks, see 605.
506 Remotely controlled valves iu bilge suction liues are
to be screw-down non-return valves or shut-off and non-re-
turn valves connected in series.
B 600 Bilge pipes
601 The iuternal diameter of bilge suctions from each
compartment is not to be less than stipulated by the follow-
ing formula, to the nearest 5 mm:
d = 2,15.fA + 25 (mm)
where A is wetted surface iu m
2
of the compartment when
the compartment is half way filled with water. The iuternal
diameter of any bilge liue is not to be less than 50 mm. For
irregnlary shaped compartments A will be specially consid-
ered.
602 The cross-sectional area of the maiu bilge liues is not
to be less than the combiued area of the two largest branch
suctions.
603 Direct bilge suctions are to have aniuternal diameter
of not less than 1,4 d but need not exceed the diameter of
the maiu bilge lines.
604 The diameter of emergency bilge suction is not to be
less than that of the suction side of the pump, bnt need not
exceed 400 mm.
605 Bilge suction pipes are, as far as practicable, not to
be carried through double bottom tanks. Where this cannot
be avoided, the pipe wall thickness is to be as stipulated iu
8ec.6, Table Al, column 4.
606 In deep tanks used for water ballast or fuel oil the
bilge pipes are to be led through pipe tunnels or made of
steel with a wall thickness according to 8ec.6, Table Al,
and if possible consist of a siugle pipe length, or be welded
together. Expansion bends or approved expansion bellows
are to be fitted to the bilge pipes within the tanks. The open
ends of these snction pipes iu the dry compartments are to
be provided with non-return valves.
607 The pipes are to be iustalled iu convenient lengths iu
such a way that they may easily be dismantled for cleaniug
and repair.
B 700 Bilge pumps
701 Each pnmp unit may consist of one or more pumps
connected to the maiu bilge line, provided their combiued
capacity is sufficiently large.
702 One of the bilge pumps may be a bilge ejector, pro-
vided that there is a separate pump delivering sufficient wa-
ter for operating the ejector.
703 The capacity of each of the bilge pumps is to be suf-
ficiently large to give the water, under ordiuary workiug
conditions, a velocity of at least 2 m/s through pipes of di-
mensions as stipulated iu 600.
704 Where the capacity of one pump is somewhat less than
reqnired, the deficiency may be made up for by the other
pump. The capacity of the smaller pump, however, is not
to be less than one third of the combiued pumpiug capacity.
705 Pump capacity as a function ofrequired pipe diameter
is given iu Table B 1.
Table Bl Pipe diameter and corresponding bilge pump
I
capacity
I
Bore of Capacity of Bore of Capacity of I
bilge pipe each pump bilge pipe eacfPump
(mm) (m
3
/hour) (mm) (m /hour)
50 15 90 47
55 18 95 52
60 21 100 58
65 25 105 64
70 29 110 70
75 33 115 76
80 37 120 83
85 42 125 90
-
DET NORSKE VERITAS
Page 10 - PtA Ch.1 Sec A
SECTION 4
PLATFORM PIPING SYSTEMS
Contents
A. General
A 100 Scope
B 400 Drainage of dry compartments above main deck
B 600 Bilge pipes
B 700 Bilge pumps
S 800 Bilge wells, mud boxes, valves etc.
C. Ballast and Bilge Systems for Column Stabilised Units
C 100 General
C 400 Bilge system
D. Ballast and Bilge Systems for Self-elevating Units
D 100 General
D 300 Bilge system
E 300 Overflow pipes, arrangement
Below 60'C (e.g. Helicopter Fuel)
F 100 General
F 200 Arrangement
A. General
A 100 Scope
piping systems for tanks and dry compartments.
102 For requirements to sanitary discharges and scuppers,
see Pt.3 Ch.2.
201 All parts of the piping and remote control systems are
normally to be kept outside the damage penetration zones
which are defined under .Damage assumptions> given in
Pt.3 Ch.2. Exemptions may be considered in each case if the
uoit can maintain the necessary ballasting capacity and ac-
ceptable stability conditions with damage to the s!mctures
and the pipes concerned, taking into accouot possible pro-
gressive flooding.
101 An efficient system to empty all tanks and watertight
compartments is to be provided.
102 The system required by 101 is to be so arranged that
tanks and compartments can be effectively emptied through
at least one suction even if the unit has an inclination of 5
degrees in any direction.
103 In the case of dry compartments, the suctions required
by 102 may, except where otherwise stated, be branch bilge
suctions, i.e. suctions connected to a main bilge line.
104 The systems are to be so designed that one single fai-
lure or maloperation of equipment will not lead to uocon-
trolled liquid movement, e.g. a series of tanks or a single
tank shall not be filled unintentionally if that may result in
a critical condition of the unit.
105 Means are to be provided to prevent outlet of oily
water to sea.
201 The unit is to be provided with a ballast system so
arranged that any tank can be de-ballasted or ballasted by
either of at least two independently driven pumps or by
controlled free flow.
202 The capacity of each of the ballast pumps is to be
sufficient to provide safe handling and operation of the unit.
203 Ballast pumps of centrifugal type are to be self-prim-
ing, by means of an automatic vacuum priming system.
301 Dry compartments below main deck on self-elevating
units and below the lowest continuous deck on column sta-
bilised uoits, containing essential equipment for operation
and safety of the vessel, or providing essential buoyancy,
are to have a permanently installed bilge or drainage system.
302 The compartments dealt with in 301 are to be emptied
with at least two independently driven bilge pumps or simi-
lar eqnipment. One of the pumps is to be arranged solely for
bilge pumping.
303 Dry .compartments other than machinery spaces and
pump rooms may be arranged with drain pipes leading to a
bilge well in the main bilge system.
304 Where an open drain pipe is carried through a water-
tight bulkhead or deck, it is to be fitted with an easily ac-
cessible self-closing valve at the bulkhead or deck, or a
valve closeable from above the damage water line.
305 Drainage or bilge lines from chainlockers are not to
be connected to the bilge pumps required in 302.
306 Smaller void spaces, chainiockers on self-elevating
units, etc. may be emptied by portable pumps or perma-
nently installed pumps or ejectors. When emptying by port-
able pumps is intended, two units are to be available
onboard.
Small compartments may be emptied by suitable hand
pumps.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
:J

:J
.)
'.

()
) !J
Table A6 Corrosion allowance c for steel pipes
Piping service c (mm)
Saturated steam 0,8
Stearn coils in oil tanks 2
Feed water and blowdown
pipes (for boilers) 1,5
Compressed air 1
Hydraulic oil 0,3
Lubricating oil 0,3
Fuel oil 1
Refrigerants 0,3
Fresh water 0,8
Sea water in general 3
1) For pipes passing through tanks, an additional allowance for ex-
ternal corrosion is to be considered according to the figures given
in the Table, depending on the external medium. I
2) For pipes efficiently protected against corrosion, the corrosion I
allowance may upon approval be reduced up to 50%.
3) For stainless steels the corrosion allowance may be omitted.
312 For seamless pipes and for welded pipes delivered by
manufacturer approved for making welded pipes which are
considered equivalent to seamless pipes the strength ratio e
=1.
For welded pipes from other approved pipe manufacturers
e = 0,9.
313 The value oft does not accouot for any negative ma-
nufacturing tolerance, therefore the nominal wall thickness,
t
l
, is not to be less than:
t = a
1 1- 100
314 The minimum wall thickness of branch pipe and main
pipe in way of branch connections are to be determined ac-
cording to a recognised standard and using permissible
stresses in accordance with 307. Alternatively, the thick-
nesses may be calculated according to 315. However, the
validity of 315 is limited by a maximum ratio for branch
lines wall thickness/main line wall thickness of 2.
315 The minimum pipe wall thickness of main pipes at a
branch connection is not to be less than:
t=to+c (mm)
pD
to 20 at e + p (mm)
e, the strength ratio, is expressed by the formula:
el
y
d
max
, dmin=
. 1,25
e=el smy d
1
25 + max '"mm
,
basic Its variation with the pa-
rameter DB/-JD It, is shown in Fig. 1
angle between centre lines of main pipe and
branch. y is not to be less than 45
0
maximum and minimum diameter, respec-
tively, of extruded opening in the main pipe,
see Fig. 2.
The wall thickness to of the main pipe is to have an exten-
sion not less than:
.j(D-to) to
from the branch, see Fig. 2.
The branch thickness tb is to have an extension not less than:
1,25 .j(DB-Ij,) Ij,
from the main pipe, see Fig. 2.
1,0
e
1
.0, 9
0,. I
0, 7
0"
;
; 0,5

0,4
0,3
0,2
o
Fig. 1
1\
Hules lor MODlle UTTsnore UniIS I I
\
'\

'"
2 3 4 5

i'-...
.......
'----
6 7

-vo.tb
8
Basic strength ratio
tho
o
MIN"I,2S'/lOb-
1
bltb
I-V MIN . V ID - t.lt.
I
it.
Fig. 2
Details of main pipe and branch pipe
A 400 Plastic pipes
401 The nominal internal pressure for a pipe is to be de-
termined by dividing the short-term hydrostatic test failure
pressure by a safety factor of 4 or the long-term hydrostatic
(> 100 000 h) test failure pressure by a safety factor 2,5
whichever is the lesser. The hydrostatic test failure pressure
is to be verified experimentally or by a combination of test-
ing and calculation methods according to a recognised stan-
dard.
402 The nominal external pressure for a pipe is not to be
less than 1 bar and is to be determined by dividing the col-
lapse test pressure by a safety factor of 3. The collapse test
pressure is to be verified experimentally or by a combination
of testing and calculation methods according to a recognised
standard.
403 High temperature limits and pressure reductions rela-
tive to nominal pressures are to be according to the recog-
nised standard, but in each case the maximum working
temperature is to be at least 20'C lower than the minimum
heat distortion temperature (determined according to ISO 75
method A, or equivalent) of the resin or plastic material.
The minimum heat distortion temperature is not to be less
than SO'C.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
Page 24 - PtA Ch.l Sec.6
404 Temperature limits and pressure reductions are indi-
cated in Table A7 and AS for some material types. The
limits may be extended on basis of acceptable documentation
from the Jlipe manufacturer. The permissible temperatures
are stated for long term service. Sliort periods of marginally
higher. temperatures may be accepted by case to case con-
sIderatIons.
405 Glassfibre reinforced epoxy and polyester pipes are
considerably more eXfosed to damage frpm impact and local
overloading than stee . Wall thickness of piping and fittings
shall be equivalent to nominal pressure 10 bar and piping
> 100 = shall be rigid enough to carry a load of 100 kg
at midspan, where midspan is taken from manufacturers re-
co=endation. The susceptibility to impact damage must
be duly taken into consideration when handling, installing,
and inspecting.
406 The tables are related to water service only. Services
involving other media are to be considered case by case.
407 If thermoplastic pipes are to be installed in external
areas, the pipes are either to be particularly approved for
external use or be protected against ultraviolet radiation.
408 Plastic pipes are normally made of electrically insu-
lating materials and are as such not acceptable for service in
gas hazardous areas. Special conductive qualities can be
permitted if in accordance with the following principles:
- Piping systems in or through gas hazardous areas carry-
ing conductive fluids are to be electrically conductive on
the outside.
- Piping systems in/through gas hazardous areas carrying
non-conductive fluids, e.g. refined oil products and dis-
tillates, are to be electrically conductive on the inside and
outside.
Where conductive piping is required, the resistance per unit
length of pipe, fitting, etc. is not to exceed 10
5
ohm/m, and
the resistance to earth from any point in the piping system
is not to exceed 10
6
ohm.
409 The need for expansion elements must be specially
considered with respect to the large thermal expansion co-
efficient of the plastic materials.
410 In cases where design loads incorporate a significant
cyclic or fluctuating component, fatigue is to be considered
in material selection and installation design.
411 Piping materials' compatibility with the fluid to be
carried or in which it will be immersed, is to be ensured
(e.g. for other liquids/gases than the normal such as water
and co=on hydrocarbons).
Table A7 Thermoplastic pipes. Permissible pressures and temperature limits
Nominal
Permissible working pressure,
Material pressure 1)
bar
bar
-20 to OC 30"e 40C 50"e 60"e 70C 80"e
PVC
10 7,5 6
16 12 9 6
ABS
10 7,5 7,5 7 6
16 12 12 10,5 9 7,5 6
HDPE
10 7,5 6
16 12 9,5 6
1) According to recognised standards for water supply on shore.
Table AS Glassfibre reinforced epoxy I) and polyester pipes (GRP). Permissible pressures and temperature limits
Min. heat Pennissible working pressure,
I
distortion Nominal bar
temp. of resin pressure 2)
ISO 75 PN
-50 to 30"e 40
0
e 50"e 60"e 70"e 80
0
e 90"e
we I
Method A
10 10 9
80 16 16 14
25 16 16
10 10 10
100 16 16 16
25 16 16
10 10 10
135 16 16 16
25 16 16
1) Min. heat distortion temperature 135.
2) According to recognised standards for marine use.
B. Pumps
B 100 General
101 The following pumps are to be delivered with the So-
ciety's certificate if contributing to the functions as required
for the main class:
- sea-water cooling pumps for main engine
- fresh-water cooling pumps for main engine
- feed-water pumps
- circulating pumps for boilers with forced circulation
- fuel oil transfer pumps and booster pumps
- fuel oil service pumps
7,5
12
16
9,5
15
16
10
16
16
6
9,5
15
8,5 7 6
13,5 11 9,5
16 16 15
10 9,5 8,5 7 6
16 15 13,5 11 9,5
16 16 16 16 16
- fuel injection valve cooling pumps
- lubricating oil pumps for main engine and main reduction
gear
- bilge pumps
- ballast pumps
- fire pumps and emergency fire pumps ,
- hydraulic pumps and motors for steering gears, wind-
lasses, variable pitch propellers, and thmsters
- circnlation pumps for thermal-oil
- other pumps considered necessary for performance of the
functions listed in Pt.l Ch.l Sec.2.
Drawings of pumps are normally not required submitted for
approval.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
_) CJ
) (J
J 0
J C)
506 Materials with low heat resistance are not to be used
in components where fire may cause outflow of fla=able
or health hazardous fluids, flooding of any watertight com-
partment or destruction of watertight integrity.
C 100 Application
101 The requirements to reliability and availability apply
to machinery for the functions stated in Pt.l Ch.l Sec.2 in
general and to machinery for which these requirements are
made applicable specifically in the rules.
201 For novel and non-conventional machinery documen-
tation on reliability and availability is to be submitted upon
request.
202 Generally recognised methods and formnlae are to be
used in the calculation of reliability, availability and related
parameters.
203 The documentation is to include a failure mode and
effect analysis (FMEA) of the component concerned.
204 When numerical calculations cannot be performed due
to insufficient data, approval may be granted on the basis
of qualitative failure analyses of the component or system.
205 Documentation of calculation methods and computer
progra=es is to be submitted upon request.
301 Redundancy types are defined by the time lag ac-
cepted upon restoring a lost function due to failure in a re-
dundant system.
Redundancy Time lag in re-establishmenJ o/function
type
RO none (continuously available redundancy)
Rl 0-30 seconds
R2 up to 10 minutes
R3 up to 3 hours
not defmed more than 3 hours
C 400 Machinery not required redundant. Tentative
Rules
401 Critical reliability
When according to the rules a single component can perform
a function without redundancy, this component is to have
an expected critical reliability over a time period of 5 years
according to the following table:
Engine output Minimwn critical reliability
<400kW 2: 0,90
2:400kW 2: 0,95
These criteria are to be demonstrated valid with a confidence
level equal to or not less than 75 %. When several compo-
nents replace the components mentioned above, the total
critical reliability of this group of components is not to be
less than specified in the table above.
402 TIme to critical failure
In addition to the specified requirements of critical reliability
in 401, non-redundant components or groups of components
replacing a non-redundant component are to have an ex-
pected mean time to critical failure of at least 50 years.
This criterion is to be demonstrated valid with a confidence
level equal to or not less than 75 %.
In some non-redundant components wear on certain parts
may cause the probability of critical failures of the compo-
nent to increase.
When these parts which are subject to wear, cannot be con-
sidered to be repairable on board, but still are intended to
be replaced during the life of the non-redundant component,
the expected life time of these parts is to be at least twice the
survey interval of the non-redundant component.
501 Avaiklbility and redundancy
Redundant components or systems are to have a total avail-
ability better than 0,9995 between periodic surveys.
Redundant components and systems are normally to be ar-
ranged as redundancy type RZ.
When interruption of function of some redundant component
involves considerable hazard to other components or to the
vessel, redundancy type Rl is to be arranged.
When a single component or a system in a redundant in-
stallation alone has an availability better than 0,9995 be-
tween periodic surveys, the installation can be arranged as
redundancy type R3 of acceptable when considering the
machinery as a whole.
502 Capacity
Redundant components and systems are to be so dimen-
sioned that in the event of one single failure sufficient ca-
pacity is left to cover demands at maximum continuous load.
503 Independence
When two or more components are performing the same
function, these are to be mutually independent and at least
one is to be independently driven. ,
Redundant components only performing auxiliary functions
to a main unit, can be directly powered by the main unit
through separate power transmissions on the condition that
the redundant components are not necessary for the starting
of the main unit.
D 100 General
101 Machinery, boilers and associated piping systems are
to be so installed and protected as to reduce to a minimum
any danger to persons onboard, due regard being paid to
moving parts, hot surfaces and other hazards.
'DET NORSKE VERITAS
201 All components and systems covered by the main
class are to be designed to operate under the following en-
vironmental conditions if not otherwise specified in the detail
requirements for the component or system:
- ambient air temperature in the machinery space between
5C and 55C,
- relative humidity of air in the machinery space up to
96%,
- sea water temperature up to 32C,
- inclination of 15 in any direction.
Test results or other relevant documentation confirming the
components suitability for their intended purpose may be
required.
202 The emergency generator is, in addition to the re-
quirements in 201, to operate satisfactorily when the vessel
has an inclination of 22,5 in any direction.
203 Where the rules have requirements to capacity or ef-
fect of machinery, these are to be determined at the follow-
ing ambient reference conditions:
- Total barometric pressure:
- Ambient air temperature:
- Relative humidity of air:
- Sea water temperature:
1 bar
45C
60%
32C
Engine manufacturers are not expected to provide simulated
ambient reference conditions at a test bed.
so arranged that water cannot be trapped in local structures
or machinery exposed to the ambient temperature.
Unless it is documented that the arrangement of water tanks
and piping is such that freezing cannot occur, precautions
to prevent freezing are to be provided for:
- Water tanks with piping above light transit waterline ex-
posed to ambient air temperature below:
- 5C for fresh water tanks,
- 10C for ballast tanks.
- Fresh water tanks with piping below light transit waterline
when sea water temperature is specified below DoC.
- Fresh water cooling pipes for essential services exposed
to ambient air temperature below _5C.
301 Components and systems are in general to be arranged
with redundancy so that a single failure of any active com-
ponent does not cause loss of any main function specified in
Pt.1 Ch.l Sec.2 for a longer period of time. Active compo-
nents in this context are any components transforming en-
ergy as for instance pumps, fans, electric motors and
generators, combustion engines, turbines and boilers.
Heat exchangers of any design and function are not to be
considered as active components.
302 The following active components are general ex-
ceptions to 301 and are not required redundant unless oth-
erwise specified in the rules:
- propulsion machinery,
=
- machinery for emergency power supply,
- thruster.
303 The machinery is to be so arranged and designed that
all functions specified in Pt.1 Ch.l Sec.2 can be maintained
simultaneously in normal service at sea.
304 Maintenance tasks normally expected to occur at short
intervals, e.g. weekly, are to be carried out without loss of
essential functions.
305 Change from one norroal operational mode to another
normal operational mode of the machinery is to be possible
without interruption in propulsion or steering.
306 Machinery or equipment having normally remote or
automatic control, is in addition to have alternative pro-
visions for attendance and operation.
307 The machinery is to be so arranged that it can be
brought into operation from the .dead ship. condition within
30 minutes using only the facilities available on board.
.Dead ship. condition is understood to mean that the entire
machinery installation, including the power supply, is out
of operation and that auxiliary services such as compressed
air, starting current from batteries etc., for bringing the main
propulsion into operation and for the restoration of the main
power supply are not available.
In order to restore operation from the .dead ship. condition,
an emergency generator may be used provided that it is en-
sured that the emergency power supply from it is available
at all times. It is assumed that means are available to start
the emergency generator at all times.
Guidance note:
In case only electric starting is arranged for all generator en-
gines, starting current may be assumed to be available when two
or more independent battery units are provided each unit having
its own charging equipment.
--e-n-d---o-f-G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e-n-o-t-e-
308 The performance and capacity of auxiliary systems are
to be adopted to the needs of the machinery installations
served.
401 In the event of failure, components and systems are
to enter the least hazardous of the possible failure modes
with regard to machinery, personnel and environment.
402 The probability that failure in a component causes
damage or failure to other components, is to be acceptably
low.
403 Failure of one component in a redundant system is not
to lead to failure or damage to backup or parallell compo-
nents or systems.
501 Components are to be designed with respect to the
loads and ambient conditions which are expected to occur.
Generally accepted safety margins are to be used.
502 Exceptional conditions are to be considered when
justified by the risk of damage or the consequences of dam-
age.
503 Where no specific requirements are given in the Rules
regarding dimensioning and choice of materials, generally
recognized standards and engineering principles may be ap-
plied.
504 If acceptable accuracy cannot be obtained by strength
calculations, special tests for the determination of the
strength of the design may be required.
505 When it is essential for the safety of the vessel that the
function of a component is maintained as long as possible
in the event of fire, materials with high heat resistance are
to be used.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

..")
J
') C)
)

B 200 Relief valves
201 Displacement pumps are to be fitted with relief valves.
For pumps transporting flammable liquids, the discharge
from the relief valve is normally to be led back to suction
side of the pump.
301 Pump housings are to be hydrostatically tested at a
pressure of 1,5 times the maximum working pressure.
However, the test pressure need not exceed the maximum
working pressure by more than 70 bar.
For centrifugal pumps the maximum pressure is to be the
maximum pressure head on the head-<:apacity curve. For
displacement pumps the maximum working pressure is not
to be taken less than the relief valve opening pressure.
The steamside of steam-driven pumps is to be hydraulically
tested to 1,5 times the steam pressure.
401 Pump capacities are to be checked with the pump
running at design condition (rated speed and pressure head,
viscosity, etc.)
Capacity test may be dispensed with for pumps produced in
series when previous satisfactory tests have been carried out
on similar pumps.
For centrifugal pumps having capacities less than 1000
m
3
/h, the pump characteristic (head-<:apacity curve) is to be
determined for each type of pump. For centrifugal pumps
having capacities equal to or greater than 1000 m
3
/h, the
pump characteristic is to be determined over a suitable range
on each side of the design point, for each pump.
402 Special survey arrangement for testing of pumps may
be agreed upon.
C. Valves
C 100 Valve design
101 Drawings and specifications are to be submitted for
approval for valves of new type or unconventional design
and for valves of welded construction fitted on vessel's side
and bottom.
102 Pressure-temperature ratings for valves are to be in
accordance with a recognised national standard.
103 Screwed-on valve bonnets arenorroally not to be used
for valves with nominal diameter exceeding 40 mm in Class
I piping systems, for valves on vessel's side and bottom and
for valves in systems for flammable fluids.
104 Screwed-on valve bonnets are to be secured against
loosening when the valve is operated.
105 Valves are normally to be closed by turning the
handwheel clockwise.
106 Indicators are to be provided to show the open and
closed position of the valve, unless this can be observed in
some other way, e.g. by a distinctly rising valve stem.
107 Handles on cocks are to be removable ouly when the
cocks are in closed position.
108 Welded necks of valve bodies are to be sufficiently
long to ensure that the valves are not distorted as reuslt of
welding and subsequent heat treatment of the joints.
201 All valve bodies are to be subjected by the manufac-
turer to a hydrostatic test at a pressure equal to 1,5 times the
nominal pressure (The nominal pressure is the maximum
allowable working pressure at room temperature). The test
pressure need not be more than 70 bar in excess of the no-
minal pressure.
For valves fitted on vessel's side and bottom the test pres-
sure is not to be less than 5 bar.
202 Butterfly valves fitted on vessel's side and bottom are
also to be hydrostatically tested at a pressure equal to 5 bar
applied independently on each side of the closed disc.
301 DNV product certificates are required for valves with
DN > 100 nun and PN > 16 bar and for ship side valves
regardless of pressure rating. For other valves manufactur-
ers certificate may be accepted.
302 A DNV material certificate is required for valves
when DN > 100 mm and t > 400C. Other valves will be
accepted with a material test report.
D. Flexible Hoses
D 100 General
101 Short lengths of flexible hoses of approved type may
be used when necessary to admit relative movements be-
tween machinery and fixed piping systems.
102 Hoses of non-metallic materials used in systems con-
taining flammable fluids or sea water are to have at least one
ply internal wire braid.
103 Flexible hoses are to be provided with couplings of
approved type.
104 In cooling water lines for diesel engines and com-
pressors the requirements in 102 and 103 may be dispensed
with and rubber hoses with internal textile reinforcement
fitted by means of hose clamps may be accepted provided
the hose is a short and reasonably stra ight length fitted be-
tween two metallic pipes.
105 New types of non-metallic hoses are to be subjected
to a prototype test. The bursting pressure is to be at least 4
times the maximum working pressure. Fire tests may be re-
quired for hoses intended for systems conveying flammable
liquids or for use in sea water cooling systems.
106 For hoses of non-metallic materials, drawings and
specifications, showing the suitability of the hose for its in-
tended use, are to be submitted for approval.
107 Every hose is to be hydrostatically tested at a hydros-
tatic pressure of 1,5 times the working pressure.
D 200 Installation
201 Flexible hoses are to be accessible for inspection.
202 Flexible hoses are not to be used in bilge- and ballast
systems.
203 Means are to be provided to isolate flexible hoses used
in systems for fuel oil, lubricating oil, sea-water cooling and
compressed air.
204 One spare flexible hose of each type installed are to
be available onboard. The spare hoses are to be ready for
mounting.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
101 Flanges with their pressure-temperature ratings in ac-
cordance with a recognised national standard will normally
be accepted.
201 Pipe couplings may be permitted as in Table El.
202 The use of these types of couplings/joints outside the
limits stated in Table El will be considered in each partic-
ular case.
Guidance note:
Threaded sIeve joint is defmed as a joint where packed threads
perfonn the sealing.
Table El Permitted use of pipe couplings
Coupling types
I
I
Class I
Compression joints:
- Nipple type, welded or brazed ODmax 61 mm
- Flared type ODmax 31 mm
- Bite type OD
max
61mm
Threaded joints:
- Tapered
I
ODmax 25 mm ,)
- Parallel
I
no
Sleeve Joints:
_ Grip Type 1), 2), 3)
no
OD = outer diameter
I
I
I
1) Not for flammable fluids within machinery spaces of Category A.
2) Not for bilge suction lines.
Not on cooling water systems for essential machinery.
F 100 General
101 Plans and material specifications are to be submitted
for approval.
102 The design pressure of strainers applied in seawater
systems is not to be less than the expected maximum pres-
sure in the piping system (static pressure and dynamic pres-
sure due to water hammer).
103 Strainer housings are not to be of grey cast iron.
104 Strainers are to be protected against intemal corro-
sion.
201 For all strainers, the manufacturer is to carry out a
hydrostatic test to a pressure equal to 1,5 times the nominal
pressure (the nominal pressure is the maximum allowable
pressure at room temperature). The test pressure need not
be more than 70 bar in excess of the nominal pressure.
301 The use of expansion joints and bellows is to be re-
stricted as far as practicable.
In any case, the use. of slip type expansion joints is sul?jected
to the same restncl10ns as for gnp type sleeve couplii:tgs m
Table El.
302 Expansion joints and bellows are subject to approval
for their intended use. The joints and bellows are to be so
designed and installed that pulling or blowing out is pre-
vented.
Thel.ipeline in which an expansion joint or bellow is to be
fitte , is to be adequately adjusted, aligned and clamped.
When found necessary, protection against mechanical dam-
age of the expansion Joints may be required.
303 The positions of expansion joints and bellows are to
be clearly shown on the drawing of the piping systems.
304 Expansion joints and bellows are in general only to
be used in readily accessible spaces. Exceptions to the above
are ballast tanks and pipe tunnels.
Classes of piping systems
Class II
I
Class III
ODmax 61mm yes '
OD_61mm yes
OD
max
61mm yes
ODmax 2S 'mm ,)
ODmax 61 mm '
no
I
ODmax 61 mm 1)
Pmax 16 bar
Yes
1m", 12SC
202 The manufacturer's certificate for hydrostatic test will
be accepted.
G 100 General
101 Slip-on sleeve welded joints may be used for class I,
II and III pipes with an outer diameter of 51 mm and less.
102 Slip-on sleeve welded joints may be used for class III
pipes wit):1.an outer diameter greater than 51 mm in the fol-
lowmg plpmg systems:
- bilge and ballast systems
- air, sounding and overflow pipes
- fuel oil systems
- steam, feed water and condensate systems
- cooling water systems.
103 Joint designs and socket dimensions in accordance
with a recognised national standard will normally be ac-
cepted.
104 Socket welded joints and slip-on sleeve welded joints
in stainless steel pipes will be subject to the Society'S con-
sideration in eacn case.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
,,] 0
] C]
\
J
)
o
:]
302 Axial forces due to internal pressure, change in di-
rection or cross-sectional area and movement of the vessel
are to betaken into consideration when mounting the piping
system.
303 The support of the piping system is to be such that
detrimental vibrations will not arise in the system.
304 Pipes are to be connected by welding or brazing in
accordance with Sec.S A and B or by detacbable connections
in accordance with Sec.6 E.
305 Installation of pipes for water, steam or oil behind or
above electric switchboards is to be avoided as far as possi-
ble. If this is impracticable, all detachable pipe joints and
valves are to be at a safe distance from the switchboard or
well shielded from it.
306 Water pipes and air and sounding pipes through
freezing chambers are to be avoided.
307 Piping systems which may contain flammable gases
or liquids with a flash point below 60C, are to be entirely
separate from all other piping systems on board and from
all safe areas.
401 Open or closed position of valves is to be easily visi-
ble at the valves.
402 If a valve's function in the system is not evident, there
is to be adequate information on a name plate attached to the
valve.
403 All connections to sea are to be marked SEA
DIRECT.
404 Jnlets and discbarges below the deep waterline in
normally unattended rooms are to be provided with remote
controlled valves wbich are to be operable from a readily
accessible position above the deep waterline, preferably
from the ballast control room.
405 For remotely controlled valves, failure in power sup-
ply is not to cause:
- opening of closed valves,
- closing of open valves on fuel oil tanks and in cooling
water systems for propulsion and power generating ma-
chinery.
indications for open and. closed valve positions at the control
station. For valves on the vessel's side and bilge the indi-
cation Signals are to be directly produced by the valve
movement.
407 Systems for indication of valve positions are normally
to be independent of the activating system.
means for local emergency operation by e.g. hand pump.
Guidance note:
In lower hulls and pontoons it is advised to install a locally op-
erated shut-off valve in series with the remote controlled valve,
nearest to the shell plating, in order to facilitate maiI.Itenance.
409 Sea inlet imd discharge valves, bilge valves and valves
on the fuel oil and lubricating oil tanks which are subject to
static pressure from the tank fluid are to be arranged for di-
rect manual operation by means of mechanical device or per
manently installed handpump. The cbange-<lver to manual
operation from possible remote control arrangement is to be
simple to execute.
501 All outlets and sea inlets are to bave easily accessible
valves or cocks fitted:
- to the shell plating on steel pads welded to the plating
with spigots passing through the plating
- to integral sea chests of rigid construction with pads
welded on.
Drainage from open deck may be accepted without valves
provided the pipes have substantial wall thickness. See Pt. 3
Ch.2 Sec.7 F.
502 Distance pieces of steel of short, rigid construction
may be fitted between the valves and the shell plating. The
thickness of the distance piece is not to be less than given
in Pt.3 Ch.2 Sec.7 F204.
The distance pieces are to be arranged with spigots passing
through the shell plating. Stud holes are not to penetrate the
shell plating or the sea chest plating.
503 Valves and cocks for blow down of boilers located
below the deep waterline are to have a protection ring fitted
on the outside of the sbell plating through which the spigot
is to be carried. The spigot is to tenninate flush with the
outer side of the ring.
504 Suction and discharge valves of steel and sea chests
and distance pieces are to be protected against corrosion by
an efficient coating or equivalent.
505 All suction and discharge pipes are to be adequately
protected where they are liable to be damaged by cargo etc.
506 Sea inlets are to be so designed and arranged as to
limit turbulence and to avoid entry of air due to the vessel's
movements.
507 Scuppers and sanitary discharges, see Pt.3 Ch.2
Sec.6.
508 All outlets and sea inlet valves are to be such that
piping inboard of the valves may be disconnected without
interferring the watertight integrity of the shell.
601 No drain valve or cock is to be fitted to watertight
bulkheads unless it is accessible at all times and capable of
being closed from above the deep load line. Indication of
open and closed position of the valves and cocks is to be
provided.
602 The fastening of fittings, pipes, etc. to bulkheads or
tunnel plating by using bolts passing through clearing holes
in the plating, will not be accepted.
B 100 General
101 The machinery is to be so designed, installed and
protected that risks of fire, explosions, accidental pollution,
leakages and accidents thereof will be acceptably low.
102 Reliability and availability of the machinery are to be
adapted according to considerations of the consequences
from machinery failures and disturbances.
103 The design arrangement of machinery foundations,
shaft connections, piping and dueting is to take into account
the effects of thermal expansion, vibrations, misalignment
and hull interaction to ensure operation within safe limits.
Bolts and nuts exposed to dynamic forces and vibrations are
to be properly secured.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
SECTION 3
DESIGN PRINCIPLES
A. Arrangement
A 100 General
Contents
B 100 General
C 100 Application
C 400 Machinery not required redundant. Tentative Rules
D 100 General
A. Arrangement
A 100 General
101 All equipment and parts which are to be operated or
subject to inspection and maintenance on board are to be
installed and arranged for easy access.
102 All components in a system are to be satisfactorily
matched with regard to function, capacity and strength.
Relative motions between parts of the machinery are to be
allowed for without inducing detrimental stresses.
103 All machinery is to be equipped with indicating in-
struments considered necessary for safe operation of the
machinery.
104 All spaces, from which machinery is operated and
where flammable or toxic gases or vapours may accuniulate,
are to be provided with adequate ventilation under all con-
ditions.
105 The machinery is to be so arranged that one single
maIoperation of the equipment will not lead to a critical sit-
uation for the vessel.
106 The machinery and piping systems are to be arranged
to prevent sea water from reaching dry spaces of the vessel
or oils or chemicals from being discharged overboard as a
consequence of maloperation.
107 Systems and tanks are to be so arranged that leakage
or operation of valves will not directly lead to increased risk
of damage to machinery, vessel or personnel due to mixing
of different fluids.
201 Facilities for the safe storage and handling of flamm-
able fluids are to be found on board.
202 All spaces where oil-burning installations, settling
tanks or daily service fuel oil tanks are located, are to be
easily accessible and well ventilated.
203 Where small leaks of flammable fluids may occur
during normal service or routine maintenance work, special
arrangements are to be made to prevent these fluids from
reaching other parts of the machinery where danger of ig-
nition may arise.
204 Piping and other installations for the transport of
flammable fluids are to be so located that the fire hazard
resulting from rupture and other failures, is acceptably low.
205 For arrangement of fuel oil piping, see Sec.5 D301
and 302.
206 Exhaust pipes are not to be led in the viciuity of tanks
for fuel oil or other flammable fluids.
207 All surfaces which may reach a temperature of 220C
or more, are to be insulated or equivalently protected so that
flammable fluids cannot be ignited.
208 Where oil absorbing insulating material is used, the
insulation is to be covered by sheet metal.
209 All other possible iguition sources of the machinery
are to be protected in order to prevent iguition of flammable
fluids.
210 Flammable or oil absorbing materials are not to be
used in floors, gratings etc. in boiler and engine rooms,
tunnels or in compartments where settling tanks are in-
stalled.
211 Fire protection, detection and extinction is to comply
with the requirements given in Ch.6.
212 Fuel oil purifiers for heated .fuel oil or hydraulic
power aggregates with pressure higher than 15 bar and
power delivery higher than 5 kW located within the bound-
aries of machinery space of category A, are to be placed in
separate rooms enclosed by steel bulkheads extending from
deck to deck and provided with self-closing doors. The
rooms are to be provided with:
- independent mechanical ventilation
- fire detection system
- fixed fire extingnishing installation.
The extingnishing installation is to be capable of being acti-
vated from outside the room and separately from the fire
extinguishing of the engine room.
From the same position it is also to be possible to stop fuel
pumps, ventilation fans, oil purifiers or hydraulic pumps
located in the room.
213 If it is impracticable to locate the installations ad-
dressed in 212 in separate rooms, special considerations are
to be given with regard to location and shielding against
leakages hitting sources of iguition. The installations are to
be covered by a fire extingnishing system capable of being
activated automatically or activated manually from the ma-
chinery control position or from another suitable location.
If automatic release is provided, additional manual release
is to be arranged.
301 Piping systems are to consist of permanently installed
pipes and fittings supported in such a way that their weight
is not taken by connected machinery or that heavy valves
and fittings do not cause large additional stresses in adjacent
pipes.
DEf NORSKE VERITAS
:)
. ~
,J
J
~
o
J
!J
SECTION 7
MANUFACTURE, WORKMANSIllP, INSPECTION AND TESTING
Contents
A. Welding
A 100 General
B 100 General
C. Pipe Bending
C 100 General
D 100 General
F. Functional TestiIig
F 100 General
A 100 General
A. Welding
101 The welding of joints is to be carried out by qualified
welders using approved welding procedures and welding
consumables, see Pt.2 Ch.3. Sec.! and Sec.2. Welding of
steels having a minimum specified yield strength above 400
MPa require welding procedure qualification testing per-
formed on the actual material and welding consumables to
be used as for production welding.
102 Oxy-acetylene welding is not to be used for steel pipes
in class I and II with outer diameter greater than 101,6 mm
or wall thickness exceeding 10 mm.
103 Welding of pipes of copper and copper-uickel may be
carried out by gas tungsten arc welding (GTA W) and for
greater wall thicknesses by gas metal arc welding (GMA W)
or by other approved welding processes.
104 Welding of pipes of aluminium-brass is subject to
special consideration and requires approval based on weld-
ing procedure qualification testing (WPQT). Testing is to be
performed in accordance with Pt.2 Ch.3 and a recoguised
standard.
105 Welding of a material grade where the welding shops
have limited experience, requires the welding procedures to
be based on welding procedure qualification testing. The
welding shop is to establish a plan for training and quali-
fication of welders and for qualification of the welding pro-
cedures to be applied.
201 Welded butt joints are to be of the full penetration
type. For Class I pipes special provisions are to be taken to
ensure a high quality of the root side.
202 Branches are to be welded to the main pipe by means
of full penetration welds. For Class I and II pipes a welding
procedure test (wpQn may be required. For reinforcement
in way of branches, see Sec.6 A.
203 Joint preparation and alignment are to be in accord-
ance with a recoguised national standard.
204 If the parts to be joined differ in wall thickness, the
thicker wall is to be gradually tapered to that of the thinner
of the butt joint with a slope not steeper than 1 :4.
205 Assembling for welding is to be appropriate and
within prescribed tolerances. Tack welds should be made
with welding consumables suitable for the base material.
Tack welds that form part of the finished weld should be
made using approved procedures. When welding materials
require preheating, the same preheating should be applied
during tack welding.
301 Preheating of the different types of steel will be de-
pendent upon their thickness and chemical composition as
indicated in Table AI. In any case, dryness is to be ensured
using, if necessary, suitable preheating.
302 The values in Table Al are based on use of low hy-
drogen processes; consideration should be given to using
higher preheating temperatures when low hydrogen proc-
esses are not used.
Table Al Preheating prior to welding of steel pipes
Thickness of
Minimum
Type of steel thicker part
preheating
(mm)
temperature
(OC)
C and C/Mn Steel,
<!20 2)
50
C+ ~ n 50,40
C and C/Mn Steel,
<!20 2)
100
C+ ~ >0,40
0,3Mo >13
2
) 100
ICr 0,5Mo
<13 100
<!13
ISO
2,25Cr lMo and <13 ISO

0,5Cr 0,5Mo 0,25V 1) <!13 200
1) For these materials, Freheating may be omitted for thicknesses up to
6 mm if the results 0 hardness tests carried out on welding procedure
qualification are considered acceptable.
2) For .welding in ambient temperature below DOC, the minimum pre-
heating temperature is required independent of the thickness unless
specially approved by the Society.
303 Austenitic stainless steel is not to be preheated.
304 The heating procedure and the temperature control are
to be to the satisfaction of the surveyor.
401 The heat treatments are not to impair the specified
properties of the material; verifications may be required to
this effect as necessary.
The heat treatments are preferably to be carried out in suit-
able furnaces provided with temperature recording equip-
ment. However, also localised heat treatments on a sufficient
portion of the length in way of the welded joint, carried out"
with approved procedures, can be accepted. The width of
DEf NORSKE VERITAS
Page 28 - Pt.4 Ch. 1 Sec.7
the heated circumferential band is to be at least 75 mm on
both sides of the weld.
402 For austenitic stainless steel heat treatment after
welding is normally not reqnired.
403 For other alloy steel grades the necessary heat treat-
ment after welding will be considered in each case.
404 Stress relieving heat treatment after welding for other
than the oxy-acetylene welding process is reqnired as indi-
cated in Table A2 depending on the type of steel and thick-
ness. Unless otherwise specified, for oxy-acetylene welding,
the heat treatment indicated in Table A3 depending on the
type of steel is required.
The stress relieving heat treatment is to consist of heating the
piping slowly and uniformly to a temperature within the
range indicated in the table, soaking at this temperature for
a suitable period, in general one hour per 25 mm of thick-
ness with minimum half an hour, cooling slowly and uni-
formly in the furnace to a temperature not exceeding 400
0
e
and subsequently cooling in still air.
In any case, the heat treatment temperature is not to be
higher than tr - 20
0
e where tr is the temperature of the final
tempering treatment of the material.
Table A2 Stress relieving heat treatment after forming and
welding
Thickness
Stress relief
Type of sleel of Ihicker
heat treatment
temperature
part (mm)
(OC)
C and C/Mn Steel
>15 I) 3)
550 to 620 ,
0,3Mo >15 I)
580 to 640
1Cr 0,5Mo >8 620 to 680
2,25Cr IMo and
any 2)
650 to 720
0,5Cr 0,5Mo 0,25V
I
1) When steel with specified Charpy V notch impact properties at low
temperature is used, the thickness above which post-weld heat treat-
ment shall be applied may be increased by special agreement.
2) H ~ a t treatment may he omitted for pipes having thickness :58 mm,
diameter :5100 mm and minimum service temperature above 450C. I
3) For C and C-Mn steel, stress relieving heat treatment may he omitted!
up to 30 mm thickness by special agreement.
Table A4 NDT of heating coils
Material in coils Butt welds I)
Table A3 Full heat treatment after forming and welding
Heat treatment
Type of sleel and temperature
(OC)
C and C/Mn Steel Nonnalising 880 to 940
0,3Mo Nonnalising 900 to 940
1Cr 0,5Mo
2,25Cr 1Mo
0,5Cr 0,5Mo 0,25V
501 In general, the welded joints including the inside
wherever possible shall be visually examined. Non-destruc-
tive tests will be required depending on the class of pipes
and type of joints as hereunder indicated:
Butt welded joints:
- for class I pipes with an outer diameter greater than 76, I
mm, 100 % radiographic testing (RT) is reqnired.
:<;;76,1 mm, at least 10% random radiographic testing is
required. More stringent requirements may be applied at
the surveyors discretion depending On the kind of mate-
rials, welding procedure and controls during the fabri-
cation.
Fillet welds:
- for fillet welds of flange type connections in class I pipes
with an outer diameter greater than 76,1 mm, 100%
magnetic particle testing (MT) is required.
:<;;76,1 mm, random magnetic particle testing at the dis-
cretion of the surveyor is required.
In addition welded joints in pipes for thermal oil are to be
subject to at least 10 % random radiographic testing.
502 Heating coils in cargo tanks are to be subject to NDT
in accordance with Table A4.
Joint types
SleevelLap type welded or brazed joints
Erection welds Shop welds Erection joints Shop welded/brazed joints
Mild steel 10 % 5% 10 % 5%
Stainless steel 10% 5% 10 % 5%
Cu-Ni or Al brass 10% 5% Spot-check NDT. Stearn testing onboard 2)
Notes:
1) If automatic welding is used, the percentage may be reduced at the surveyors discretion.
2) Experience shows that pressure tests do not always revealleaks in joints because a capillary gap can be temporarily sealed by flux residues. A re-
commended part of the procedure for testing a heating coil system should therefore be to apply a steam test, which will dissolve flux residues and
reveal leaks.
503 An approved ultrasonic testing (UT) procedure may
be accepted, at the discretion of the Society, in lieu of radi-
ographic testing when the conditions are such that a compa-
rable level of weld quality is assured.
For non-magnetic materials dye-penetrant testing (PT) is to
be used in lieu of magnetic particle examination.
504 Non-destructive testing is to be performed by opera-
tors certified in accordance with a recognised scheme, using
suitable eqnipment and procedures. The radiographs are to
be marked in such a way that their position on the pipe line
may easily be located.
505 The radiographs are to be judged according to ISO
5817 "Arc-welded joints in steel- Gnidance on quality levels
for imperfections", and. are at least to meet the requirements
for quality level B for welds in class I piping and for quality
level e otherwise.
The results from surface examination (e.g. MT, PT) are to
satisfy the requirements of level B ofISO 5817.
] 0
J 0
~ ~
o
J:J
ABBREVIATIONS
LI
L2
1.3
o
NA
X
Fire endurance test in wet conditions, 30 min, Appendix 2 of IMO Res. A.753(18)
No fire endurance test required
Not applicable
Metallic materials having a melting point greater than 925C.
FOOTNOTES TO TABLE C1
1) Where non-metallic piping is used, remotely controlled valves to be provided at hull side (valve is to be controlled from outside space).
2) For drains serving only the space concerned, <4<(h. may replace .. Lh.
3) When controlling functions are not required by statutory requirements or guidelines, <4<(h. may replace .. Lb.
4) For pipe between machinery space and deck water seal, .. (h. may replace Lb.
5) Scuppers serving open decks in positions 1 and 2, as defined in regulation 13 of the International Convention on Load Lines, 1966, should be -0{,.
throughout unless fitted at the upper end with the means of closing capable of being operated from a position above the freeboard deck in order to
prevent downflooding.
6) For essential services, such as fuel oil tank heating, x,. is to replace .. (h..
LOCATION DEFINITIONS USED IN TABLE C1
Location Definition
A - Machinery spaces of category A Machinery spaces of category A as defmed in IMO MODU Code.
B - Other machinery spaces Spaces, other than category A machinery spaces and cargo pump rooms, containing
propUlsion machinery, boilers, steam and internal combustion engines, generators and
major electrical machinery, pumps, oil filling stations, refrigerating, stabilizing, ven-
tilation and air-conditioning machinery, and similar spaces, and trunks to such spaces.
C - Fuel oi/lanks All spaces used for fuel oil (excluding cargo tanks) and trunks to such spaces.
D - Ballast water tanks All spaces used for ballast water and trunks to such spaces.
E - Cofferdams, voids spaces, pipe tunnels and Cofferdams and voids are those empty spaces between two bulkheads separating two
ducts adjacent compartments.
F - Accommodation spaces, service spaces and Accommodation spaces, service spaces and control stations as defmed in IMO Modu
control stations Code.
G - Open decks Open deck spaces as used in IMO Modu Code.
Table e2 Material certificates
Class of
Nominal
Design
Type of docwnentation
Component Material piping
diameter
tempera-
NV Works Test
system ture C
certificate certificate report
I >50 x
Pipes
I)
II, III >50 x
I, II, III :S50 x
>400 x
Flanges and bolts
:S 400 x
Steel I
> 100 >400 x
:S 100 >400 x
Bodies of valves and fittings 1),
Steel!
> 100 :S 400 x
I, II
source materials of steel nodular
:S 100 :S 400 x
expansion bellows, other
cast iron
III
pressure containing components
x
not considered as Cast iron III x
pressure vessels
>50 x
Copper
I, II
:S 50
alloys
x
III x
Pump housings
I x
II, III x
1) Pipes and bodies of valves fitted on vessel's side and bottom are to be _ provided with documentation as required for Class II piping syste!!l_s. __
,
Plastic Pipes on Ships" except for the requirements to:
flame spread, smoke generation and toxicity.
Alternatively the approach for establishing design perform-
ance requirements given in UKOOA document
.Specification and Recommended Practice for use of GRP
piping offshore. may be employed.
702 In addition to the use permitted by Table Cl, plastic
pipes may be used for the following services:
- pipes for pneumatic and hydraulic instrumentation sys-
tems, see Ch.5 Sec.5 D within control cabinets located
in control rooms or engine rooms with the following
ceptions:
- systems for steering gear
- systems for remote control of:
Table Cl Fire endurance requirements matrix
A
'&

Piping systems

E}
(:>-.:

'- '"

FLAMMABLE LIQUIDS (flash point > 60C)
1 Fuel oil X
2 Lubricating oil X
3 Hydraulic oil X
SEAWATER 1)
4 Bilge main and branches L1
5 Fire main and water spray L1
6 Foam system L1
7 Sprink1er system L1
8 Ballast L3
FRESHWATER
12 Condensate return L3
SANITARY/DRAINS/SCUPPERS
B

E}

.5

..
"
OS
Cl
X
X
X
L1
L1
LI
L1
L3
L3
0
L3
L3
0
- seawater valves
- valves on fuel oil service tanks
- valves in bilge and fuel oil systems
- fire extingnishing.
703 Plastic pipes used in piping systems subject to classi-
fication within the limitations of Table Cl shall be of ap-
proved type and tested to an approved specification
observing the requirements in Sec.6 A700.
801 The materials used in piping systems are to be fur-
uished with documentation according to Table C2. For de-
fiuition of types of documentation of material quality and
testing, see Pt.1 Ch.l Sec.3.
Location
C D E F G

gts
..
.t!

-
S

.\!
.g E}
-""
{l"
S

"'I::

{j

.. 9
8

-;;
'"
" e""
.:: "l

-.:5 &
.
0 0 0 L1 L1
NA NA 0 LI L1
0 0 0 LI L1
0 0 0 NA L1
NA 0 0 X L1
NA NA 0 L1 L1
NA 0 0 L3 L3
0 0 0 L2 L2
NA 0 0 NA L2
0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 L3 L3
NA NA 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0
14 Deck drains (internal)
L1 2) L1 2)
0 0 0 0 0
15 Sanitary drains (internal) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
16 Scuppers and discharges (overboard)
0
1
) ') 0
1
) ')
0 0 0
01) 5)
0
SOUNDING/AIR
17 Water tanks/dry spaces 0
I
0 0
I
0
I
0
I
0 0
18 Oil tanks (flash point> 60 C) X
I
X 0
I
0
I
0
I
X X
MISCELLANEOUS
19 Control air
L1 3) L1 3)
0 0 0 Ll L1
20 Service air (non-essential) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
21 Brine 0 0 NA NA 0 0 0
22 Auxiliary low pressure steam (:S 7 bar) L2 L2 0 0 0
0
6
) 0
6
)
DEI NORSKE VERITAS
J
)
..
')
/)
... =:>
:J
506 The repair of defects revealed during non-destructive
testing is to be carried out according to agreement with the
surveyor; All such weld repairs are to be examined using the
relevant testing method.
B 100 General
101 The clearance between surfaces to be brazed is to be
as recommended for the selected type of filler material, to
ensure complete capillary distribution of the filler material.
For lap joints, the lap length is to be 3 to 5 t, where t is the
wall thickness of the pipes to be joined.
102 Filler materials .to be used in contact with sulphur-
containing oil at a operating temperature above 100C and
maximum 200C (such as heating coil systems) is to be of
type BAg in accordance with AWS 5.8, or equivalent. Only
filler materials where sufficient corrosion resistance can be
documented, from either relevant service experience or
testing, are to be used .
103 The brazing is to be carried out by qualified brazers
using approved brazing procedures (e.g. ASME IX). The
filler material is to have a melting point above 450C.
Brazing of copper alloys containing aluminium (AI-bronze
and AI-brass) require use of a flux type FB4-A according to
A WS 5.31 or equivalent.
C. Pipe Bending
C 100 General
101 The bending procedure is to be such that the flatteuing
of the pipe cross-section is as small as possible.
Guidance note:
For Class I and II pipes the out-of-roundness, '1 should prefer-
ably not exceed 7% where '1 is defmed by:
D -D
11 = 2 max mm 100 %
Dmax+Dmin
D = outer pipe diameter.
--e-n-d--o-f---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e--n-o-t-e--
102 Pipe bends in Class I and II pipes are to be free from
wrinkles on the inner side of the bend.
103 Copper alloy pipes in systems are as far as
possible to be free from wrinkles.
104 For tolerances in wall thickness and allowance for
bending, see Sec.6, paragraphs A305 and A310 ..
201 Hot forming is generally to be carried out in the tem-
perature range 850C - 1000C for all grades; however,
the temperature may decrease to 750C during the forming
process. When the hot forming is carried out within this
temperature range, the following generally applies:
- For C, C-Mn and C-Mo steel, no subsequent stress re-
lieving heat treatment is required.
- For Cr-Mo and Cr-Mo-V steel, a subsequent stress re-
lieving heat treatment in accordance with Table A2 is
required.
- For other alloy steel heat treatment after bending will be
When the hot forming is carried out outside the above tem-
perature range, a subsequent new heat treatment in accord-
ance with Table A3 is generally required for all grades.
202 After cold forming, when r ? 4D (where r is the mean
bending radius and D is the outside diameter of pipe) con-
sideration is to be given to a complete heat treatment in ac-
cordance with Table A3; in any case, a stress relieving heat
treatment in accordance with Table A2 is required for all
grades other than carbon -manganese steel with minimum
specified tensile strength, 410 N/mm
2
or less.
203 Aluminium-brass pipes are to be stress-relieved or soft
annealed at a temperature of 350 to 400C or 600 to 650C
respectively, after cold working.
204 Normalising is normally to be performed in a furnace.
Stress-relieving may be performed locally covering the de-
formed zone. Method of heat-treatment and temperature
control are to be to the satisfactiori of the surveyor.
205 Hot forming of austeuitic stainless steel is to be carried
out in the temperature range 850-1150C. Cold forming
may be carried out when r ;:: 2,5D (where r is the mean
bending radius and D is the outside diameter of pipe).
D 100 General
101 Joining or bonding of plastic pipes by welding, glu-
ing, lamination or similar method
- is to be carried out in accordance with the pipe man-
ufacturer's installation guidelines
- is to be carried out by qualified personnel certified by the
manufacturer.
102 Each joininglbonding procedure is to be qualified be-
fore the installation commences.
103 Joininglbonding operator's (installator's) certificate
shall contain:
- the name of the holder
- the type of joining the holder is qualified for
- reference to joining/installation procedure (procedure
date of issue to be stated)
- date of issue and validity period for certificate
- pipe manufacturer's stamp and signature.
In addition to being certified, each joininglbonding operator
shall make a. test assembly consisting of one pipe-to-pipe
joint and one pipe-to-fitting joint in accordance with
joininglbonding procedure qualified according to 104-105.
The test procedure and acceptance criterion shall be as de-
scribed in 104-105.
104 Procedure qualification testing.
Each joininglbonding operator shall make a test assembly
fabricated in accordance with the joininglbonding procedure
to be qualified, consisting of at least
- one pipe-to-pipe joint
- one pipe-to-fitting joint.
After curing, the assembly shall be subjected to a hydrostatic
test pressure at a safety factor of 4 times the nominal pres-
sure rating (pressure class) of the piping system. The test
duration shall be no less than 1 hour. Acceptance criterion:
No leakage or separation of joints.
105 Pipe size for procedure qualification test assembly:
- When the largest size to be joined is S 200 mm nominal
outside diameter, the test assembly shall be the largest
piping size to be joined.
DEI NORSKE VERITAS
- When the largest size to be joined is > 200 mm, the size
of the test assembly shall be either 200 mm or 25 % of
the largest piping size to be joined, whichever is greater.
106 The joiningfbonding procedure is to include:
- materials and suppliers
- tools and equipment
- environmental requirements
- joint preparation including surface treatment and cleanli-
ness
- dimensional requirements and tolerances
- curing time and temperature
- tests and examinations with acceptance criteria.
107 Any change in the joiningfbonding procedure which
may affect the physical or mechanical properties of the
jointfbond will imply requalification of the procedure.
108 The pipe manufacturer should maintain a record of
earlier certifications of procedures and operators.
109 Electrical conductivity
Piping systems in or through gas hazardous areas are to be
electrically conductive according to Sec.6 A408. After in-
stallation, the conductivity of the piping system shall be
measured,. and the resistance to earth from any point in the
piping system is not to exceed 10
6
ohm.
101 All Class I and II pipes and integral fittings, after
completion of manufacture but before insulation and coat-
ing, if any, are to be subjected to a hydrostatic test in the
presence of the surveyor at the following pressure:
P
H
= 1,5p
where:
PH = test pressure in bar.
p = design pressure in bar as defined in Sec.6 A303.
For steel pipes and integral fittings for design temperatures
above 300C the test pressure is to be determined by the
following formula but need not exceed 2p:
where:
"t100
PH = 1,5 -,,- P
t
"t100 = permissible stress at 100C.
"t = permissible stress at the design temperature.
The value of the test pressure may be reduced with the ap-
proval of the surveyor, to 1,5 p in order to avoid excessive
stress in way of bends, branches etc,
In any case the membrane stress is not to exceed 0,9 the
yield stress at the testing temperature.
102 Pressure testing of small bore pipes (less than about
50 mm) may be waived at the discretion of the surveyor,
depending on the application.
103 Non-integral fittings and pressure containing compo-
nents other than valves, pump housing and pressure vessels
are to be tested as specified in 101. The requirements for
hydrostatic testing of valves and pumps are given in Sec.6
Band C.
201 The piping is to be hydrostatically tested in the pres-
ence of the surveyor after installation on board, according
to Table El.
Table El Hydrostatic testing after installation on board
Piping system Test pressure I
Fuel oil piping
Heating coils in tanks
Bilge and fIre pipes
Class III pipelines for
pressure, minimum 4 bar
steam, compressed air
and feed water.
Hydraulic piping
pressure.
The test pressure need not
I
exceed the working pressure
by more than 70 bar
Piping systems made from
non metallic material
pressure.
!
(plastic)
Minimum 6 bar.
Minimum duration 1 hour.
202 If pipes specified in 101, are being welded together
during assembly on board, they are to be hydraulically
tested as specified in 101 after welding. If a 100% radio-
graphic examination and heat treatment after welding is
carried out, the surveyor may refrain from the hydraulic
test.
203 Separate pipe lengths, which have been hydraulically
tested in the workshop, may be insulated before the hyd-
rostatic test is carried out, except for connections between
the pipe lengths.
F 100 General
101 All piping systems are to be properly flushed, checked
for leakage and functionally tested under working conditions
to the satisfaction of the surveyor.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
J 0
) ()
] 0
) ~
,
SECTION 2
MATERIALS
Contents
A. General
B. Machinery Parts
B 100 General
c. Piping Systems
C 100 General
C 400 Grey cast iron.
C 700 Plastic pipes
A. General
101 Materials to be used in the construction of machinery
and piping systems are to be manufactured and tested in ac-
cordance with the requirements in Pt.2.
102 Materials for which provision is not made in Pt.2 may
be accepted, provided that they comply with an approved
specification and such tests as may be considered necessary.
B. Machinery Parts
B 100 General
101 Requirements for documentation of quality and testing
of materials intended for:
- Propulsion and Auxiliary Machinery
- Boilers and Pressure Vessels
- Electrical Installations
- Instrumentation and Automation
- Fire Protection, Detection and Extinction
are given in the respective chapters of this Pt.4.
C. Piping Systems
C 100 General
101 The materials to be used in piping systems are to be
suitable for the medium and service for wbich the system is
intended.
102 Non-ferrous metallic materials with melting points
higher than 925C may be accepted in piping systems as an
alternative to steel except where specific limitations are
given elsewhere in the rules.
Non-ferrous metallic materials with melting point lower than
925C may be used under the same restrictions as for plastic
pipes. See 701 and 702.
201 Steel pipes for classes I and II are to be seamless
drawn or fabricated by a welding method considered equiv-
alent to seamless pipes. See Pt.2 Ch.2 Sec.4.
202 Steel pipes, valves and fittings may be used within the
temperature limits given in Sec.6.
301 Copper and copper alloy pipes for classes I and II are
to be seamless drawn.
302 Copper and copper alloys are in general not to be used
for media having temperature above the following limits:
- copper and aluminium brass: 200C
- copper nickel: 300C.
Special bronze suitable for high temperature service may be
used for media having temperature up to 260C.
303 Pipes for starting air are not to be of copper or copper
alloys when the outer diameter exceeds 44,5 mm.
C 400 Grey cast iron
401 Grey cast iron is not to be used for class I and II pip-
ing with the following exceptions:
- components in hydraulic piping systems after special
consideration in each case
fuel pump housings for temperatures not exceeding
120C.
402 Grey cast iron may in general be used for class ill
piping, with the following exceptions:
- pipes and valves fitted on ship sides and bottom and on
sea chests
- valves fitted on collision bulkhead
- valves under static head fitted on the external wall of fuel
tanks
- valves for fluids with temperatures in excess of 120C.
501 Nodular cast iron of the ferritic type, with specifIed
minimum elongation of 12 %, may be used in class II and
ill piping and in pipes and valves located on the ship's side
and bottom and valves on the collision bulkhead. The use
of nodular cast iron in class I piping will be subject to con-
sideration for approval in each case.
502 Nodular cast iron is not to be used for media having
a temperature exceeding 350C.
503 The use of nodular cast iron for media having a tem-
perature below OC will be considered in each particular
case.
pearlitic type
601 Nodular cast iron of the ferritic/pearlitic and pearlitic
type is in general subject to the limitation of use as grey cast
iron as specified in 400.
C 700 Plastic pipes
701 Plastic pipes may be used in systems and locations
according to Table C 1 provided the fire endurance require-
ments therein specifIed are met. The permitted use and the
requirements for the piping are in conformance with IMO
Resolution A.753(18) "Guidelines for the Application of
DET NORSKE VERITAS
Table BI Classes of piping systems
Piping system for Ckzss I')
P bar tC
Steam :>16 or >300
Fuel oil >16 or > 150
Other media 2) 3)
>40 or >300
p - Design pressure, as defmed in Sec.6 A303.
t = Design temperature, as defined in Sec.6 A30!1-.
Ckzss II') Ckzss III .)
p bar tC p bar tC
and and
and and
and and
1) For Class II and III piping both specified conditions are to be met, for Class I piping one condition only is sufficient.
2) Air, water, lubricating oil and hydraulic oil.
3) Drains, overflows, vents, pipes etc. independently of the pressure and temperature, are pertaining to Class m.
c. Documentation
101 The following plans are to be submitted for informa-
tion:
- Machinery arrangement of propulsion rooIDS, engine
rooms, pump rooms and other rooms containing essential
equipment or systems.
These are to show layout of machinery components such
as engines, boilers, fans, heat exchangers, generators,
switchboards, pumps, purifiers, filters etc., but excluding
pipes, valves and accessories.
- Tank plan
The plans are to be accompanied by a list of the components
and specification of make and type.
ted for approval:
- Bilge and ballast piping system.
- Air, sounding and overflow piping.
- Sea and fresh water cooling system.
- Lubricating oil systems.
- Fuel oil piping and fuel oil tanks.
- Arrangement of fuel oil piping systems in connection with
oil burning installations.
- Steam and condensate piping system.
- Co,mpressed air piping system.
- Arrangement of exhaust pipe systems.
- Hydraulic or pneumatic systems for:
- jacking machinery,
- windlasses,
- steering gear,
- variable pitch propellers,
- thrusters,
- starting of engines,
- remote control of engines, valves and watertight
doors.
- Plans showing scantlings of settling tanks, daily service
tanks and other fuel oil tanks not integrated with the
vessel's structure and tanks for lubricating oil with a ca-
pacity larger than5-m
3
, --- - - --
- Sea inlets, discharges and scupper pipes showing distance
pieces between valves and hull plating.
- Seawater strainers, design, scantlings and materials.
- Storage and transfer system for liquids with flash point
below 60C (closed cup test).
The piping diagrams, and are to include the following par-
ticulars:
- Outside diameters and wall thicknesses of pipes.
- Materials used in pipes, valve bodies and fittings.
- Pump type and capacity.
- Type of -valves and fittings.
- Type of expansion elements.
- Maximum working pressure, if exceeding 7 bar, and
temperature if exceeding IOOC.
Hydrostatic test pressure after installation on board,
where required according to Sec.7 E200.
For plastic pipes shown on system drawings the following
information is to be specified:
- Fire class
- Conductive or non-conductive grade
- Maximum working pressure and working temperature.
103 Analyses of reliability and availability are to be sub-
mitted upon request when considered necessary by the So-
ciety. These analyses are to include information on possible
numerical background material.
104 Documentation may be required to show the suitability
of piping systems when subjected to considerable dynamic
forces in combination with static forces (pressures).
The documentation should include system information, such
as:
- Fluid particulars, velocities and flow rates.
- Operational data for valves, f.inst. closing times.
- Pressure variations and other dynamic forces.
- Resistance data for all parts in the system.
- Piping arrangement with dimensions.
105 Additional plans and specifications necessary to verify
compliance with the rules are listed in the chapters 2 to 4
ofPt.4.
D. Signboards
D 100 General
101 Signboards provide information or-certain conditions
to be complied with for the safe handling of machinery
components and systems ..
Some signboards are required by the rules, others may be
required by the Society in each particular case.
In Sec. I of each chapte, a summary of the signboards re-
quired by the Rules in that chapter is introduced.
D 200 References
- Sec.3 A403 regarding connections to sea.
DEI" NORSKE VERITAS

J
,J
-J
--
'J
-")
/)
/)
Contents
A. General
SECTION 8

102 For general guidance purposes, machinery and elec-
trical installations in vessels intended for conunon world
wide trading are suggested to be provided with inventory of
spare parts as listed in the Tables Al to A4, including the
necessary tools and instructions for replacement.
A. General
103 For important systems and components, account
should be taken of the reconunendations of the manufac-
turer.
101 Spare parts are not mandatory for retention of class.
It is, however, assumed that an inventory of spare parts
sufficient to meet the needs posed by the ship's plans of
operation is maintained onboard. Its content should be de-
cided taking into consideration:
104 Any applicable statutory requirement of the country
of registration of the vessel is also to be considered.
201 Spare parts for internal combustion engines driving
electric generators, see Table AI.
- the probability of need as a consequence of likely failures
- the likely failures' effect on the main functions, and
- the possibility of the ships's staff to effect the necessary
202 Spare parts for various machinery equipment, see Ta-
ble A3.
repairs.
203 Spare parts for electrical installations, see Table A4.
Table Al Spare Parts for Internal Combustion Engines Driving Electric Generators
Item Specification
Quantity
Main bearings Main bearings or shells for one bearing of each size and type fitted, complete with shims,
bolts and nuts 1
Cylinder valves Exhaust valves, complete with casings, seats, springs and other fittings for one cylinder 2 sets
Air inlet valves, complete with casings, seats, springs and other fittings for. one cylinder I set
Starting air valve, complete with casing, seat, springs and other fittings I
Relief valve, complete I
Fuel valves of each size and type fitted, complete, with all fittings, for one engine 112 set
Connecting Bottom end bearings or shells of each size and type fitted, complete with shims, bolts and
rod nuts, for one cylinder 1 set
bearings Top end bearings or shells of each type fitted, complete with shims, bolts and nuts, for
one cylinder I set
Trunk piston type: Gudgeon pin with bushing for one cylinder I set
Piston rings Piston rings, for one cylinder 1 set
Piston cooling Telescopic cooling pipes and fittings or their equivalent, for one cylinder unit 1 set
Fuel injection
pumps
Fuel pump complete or, when replacement at sea is practicable, a complete set of working
parts for one pump (plunger, sleeve, valve springs, etc.) 1
Fuel injection High pressure fuel pipe of each size and type fitted, complete with couplings
piping I
Gaskets and Special gaskets and packings of each size and type fitted, for cylinder covers and cylinder
packings liners, for one cylinder 1 set
1) Where the number of generators of adequate capacity fitted for essential service exceeds the required number, no spare parts are required for the
auxiliary engines.
Table A2 Spare parts for boilers essential to the functions listed in Pt.l Ch.l
Item Specification Quantity
Safety valves Springs of each size I set
Gauge glasses Gauge glasses with packings for each boiler where gauge glasses of the round
type are used 3 sets
Gauge glasses with packings for every two boilers where gauge glasses of the flat
type are used 1 set
Strainers Strainer basket of each size for fuel oil system 1
Oil fuel burners Oil fuel burners complete for one boiler I set
Nozzles and burner caps Nozzles and burner caps 6
Pressure gauges Pressure gauge for steam drum I
Tube stoppers Tube stoppers or plugs of each size used for boilers, superheater and economiser 20
DET NORSKE VERITAS
Table A3 Spare parts for various machinery equipment
Item Specification
Pumps 1)
Piston pumps:
Valve with seats and springs each size fitted
- fuel oil transfer
Piston rings each type and size for one piston
-"feed water
Centrifugal pumps:
- cooling water
- bilge water
Bearings of each ty'p'e and size
- lubricating oil
Gear Iype pumps:
Bearings of each type and size
Air compressors for Suction and delivery valves complete for each size fitted in one unit
essential service Piston rings for each type and size fitted for one piston .
Flexible hoses and Each type of flexible hoses and rubber bellows that are installed
rubber bellows
1) When sufficiently rated standby pump is available, the spare parts may be dispensed with, see also Sec.S AlOO.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
Quantity
1 set
1 set
1
1
1
1
112 sel
1 set
1 of esch Iype
ready for mounting
) ()
--)
'-
(J
J CJ
)
/)
2
SECTION 1
A. Classification
A 100 Application
B. DeI"mitions
B 100 Terms
C. Documentation
Contents
D. Signboards
D 100 General
D 200 References
A. Classification
A 100 Application
101 The rules in this chapter apply in general to machinery
and systems as required for the assignment of main class.
102 The rules give system requirements and prescribe mi-
nimum requirements for materials, design, manufacture, in-
spection and testing.
B. DerInitions
B 100 Terms
101 Failure in the rule context is an event to a component
or a system causing one or both of the following effects:
- loss of component or system function,
- deterioration of functional capability to such an extent
that the safety of the ship, personnel or environment is
siguificantly reduced.
102 Repairable failure in the machinery is a failure which
is planned to be repaired on board aod for which the fol-
lowing conditions are fulfilled:
- the machinery is arranged and designed to allow for re-
pair work at sea,
- spare parts or complete spare units necessary for perma-
nent or provisional repair are kept on board also to the
extent that these spare parts exceed specific Rule re-
quirements for the actoal components,
- tools, instruction material aod other necessary facilities
to perform the repair work are found on board.
103 Critical failure is a failure which involves loss or sig-
uificant deterioration of required function, aod which cannot
be considered repairable on board.
104 Mean time to failure (MTIF) is the mean value of
service time until failure occurs.
In the rule context, MTTF is considered to be equal to meao
time hetween failures (MTBF).
105 Mean time necessary to repair (MTTR) is the mean
value of time from occurrence of failure to reestablishment
of lost function.
106 Reliability is the ability of a component or a system to
perform its required function without failure during a speci-
fied time interval.
107 Critical reliability of a component or a system is the
probability that a critical failure as defined in 103, will not
occur to the component or system during a specified time
interval.
108 Availability is the ratio of actual service time to ex-
pected service time at sea.
Availability may be calculated from the following formula:
MTTF
A = MTTF + MTTR
109 Redundancy is the ability of a component or system
to maintain or restore its function when one failure has oc-
curred ..
Redundancy can be achieved for instance by installation of
more units or alternative means for performing a function.
110 Independent operation of a component is when the
function of the component aod the power supply of the
component is independent of main engine.
111 Mutual independence between components meaos that
the function of the components aod their power supply is not
dependent on some common component or system except
for a central power supply.
112 Confidence level is the probability, in %, that a given
observation is not the result of sampling error. A confidence
level of 75% meaos that there is a probability of 25 % that
sampling error (chance fluctoations of sampling and testing)
could have produced the result.
113 Piping is defined to include the following components:
- pipes
- flaoges and bolting aod other pipe connections
- expansion elements
- valves, including hydraulic aod pneumatic actoators, 'and
fittings .
- haogers and supports
- flexible hoses
- pump housings
114 A piping system is defined to include piping, as well
as components in direct connection to the piping such as
pumps, heat exchangers, independent evaporators, tanks etc.
with the exception of main components such as steam and
gas turbines, diesel engines, reduction gears aod boilers.
For com'ponents which are subject to internal pressure and
are not mcluded in the piping, the design requirements in
Ch.3 apply.
115 Classes of piping systems. For the purpose of testing,
type of joint to be adopted, heat treatment aod welding pro-
cedure , piping is subdivided into three classes as indicated
in Table BI where:
lc = design temperature in DC.
Open ended pipes (drains, overflows, vents, boiler escape
pipes etc.) independently of the pressure and temperature,
are pertaining to Class III.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
to internal pressure
A 400 Plastic pipes
.............. 20
23

B 200 Relief valves ........................... .".................. 25
B 300 Hydrostatic tests ......................................... 25
B 400 Capacity tests ............................................. 25
C. Valves .................. ............. 25
25 C 100 Valve design ...
............ 25
.. 25
D. Flexible Hoses .................................................... 25
D 100 General .................................................... 25
D 200 Installation.......... ................................... ... 25
E. Detachable Pipe Connections ........ ........................ 26
E 100 Flange connections ............... '....................... 26
E 200 Pipe couplings other than flanges ..................... 26
E 300 Expansion joints and bellows .......................... 26
F. Seawater Strainers ........ ...... ... . . 26
F 100 General.. .................................. ......... ....... 26
F 200 Hydrostatic tests ......................................... 26
G. Socket Welded Joints ........ , ........... 26
G 100 General.................................... ................ 26
SEC. 7 MANUFACTURE, WORKMANSIDP, IN
SPECTION AND TESTING ............ 27
A. Welding .. ................ ..... ................... 27
A 100 General............................................ ........ 27
A 200 Welded connections .......... :., ........................ 27
A 300 Preheating of steel pipes .......................... , ..... 27
A 400 Heat treatment after welding of steel pipes .......... 27
A 500 Non-destructive testing ............................ ...... 28
B. Brazing of Copper and Copper Alloys ..... 29
B 100 General ...................... . 29
C. Pipe Bending .................. 29
C 100 General....................................... ............. 29
C 200 Heat treatment after bending ........................... 29
D. Joining of Plastic Pipes ................. 29
D 100 General.................................................... 29
E. Hydrostatic Tests of Piping , ................ 30
E 100 Hydrostatic testing before installation on board .... 30
E 200 Hydrostatic testing after assembly on board ........ 30
F. Functional Testing .................. 30
F 100 General..................... ......................... ...... 30
SEC. 8 RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS ...... 31
A. General ......................... , ...... 31
A 100 Machinery and electrical installations ................ 31
A 200 Tables of recommended spare parts .................. 31
..
:)
""

,)
':J

Table A4 Spare parts for electrical installations
Item Specification
The spare parts are generally to be supplied for
each size and type of generator required
according to Ch.4, except that spare parts may
be omitted, if the number of generators of
adequate capacity exceeds the required number.
Generators
For generators having excitation and voltage
regulation equipment with semiconductors, the
following will generally be required as a
minimum.
For each repairable circuit-breaker on each pole:
Switchboards
For each type of non-repairable circuit-breaker
(e.g . miniaturl> circuit-breakers):
For each type of fuses:
Cables
For each essential and important D.C. and A.C.
motor with commutator or slipring:
Motors
In addition to the spares stated above for
essential and important D.C. and A.C. motors
are required for each size of steering gear motor
and motorgenerator, if no standby electrical
machine is installed:
For each repairable control gear of motors and
other consumers, intended for essential and
important sexvices:
Control gear
For each type of non-repairable control gear of
motors and other consumers intended for
essential and important sexvices (e.g. some types
of small motor starters):
Portable
insulation-
resistance
measuring
instrument
For navigation lights with their pilot lamps:
Miscellaneous
Where the emergency lighting voltage is different
from the main lighling voltage:
Quantity
1 set of brushes,
1 set of any special tools required,
1 set of necessary spare parts for excitation and
automatic voltage regulation equipment, an
agreement to be made for each make.
113 of the number of main diodes for excitation,
1 complete set of all other semiconductor
components, or alternatively
1 complete specimen of each assembled unit of
such components, if the units are such that it is
impracticable to carry out repairs on board.
1 set of contacts, subject to wear,
1 set of other parts, subject to wear,
1 set of springs,
1 coil of each type used,
1 resistance element of each type used.
For 6 or less circuits-breakers of same type, 1 set
of such spare parts is accepted.
5% of each size with a minimum of 2 of each size
used.
10% of each size with a minimum of 12 of each
size used,
3 fuse-bases of each size used.
1 set of any special tools and equipment for
repairing mineral-insulated cables, where such
cables are installed.
1 set of brushes,
1 set of any special tools required.
For 6 or less motors of the same size and type, 1
set of such spare parts is accepted.
D. C. machinery:
1 annature of each size fitted, complete with
shaft and halt coupling,
1 field coil of each type fitted,
A. C. machinery:
1 stator complete of each size fitted.
1 set of the contacts which are subject to wear.
1 set of springs.
10% of each different resistance element, with at
least 1 of each,
1 of each type coil used.
When 6 or less motors or other consumers are
fitted with control gear having interchangeable
parts, it is accepted to provide one set of spares
for the control gear which is provided with the
greatest number of parts.
5 % of each size with a minimum of 2 of each size
used.
Vessels with electrical installation of 100 kW and
above are to carry insulation-resistance
measuring instrument, having aD. C. test voltage
of not less than the installation's voltage.
1 complete set of lamps.
10% of the emergency lamps, with
a minimum of 10.
.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
)
<J
)
" -_/
~ J
J
C)
J
..... )
'-
CONTENTS
SEC. 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ..... 1
A. Classification '" ... ..... . 1
A 100 Application.............. ... ....................... ......... 1
B. Defmitions .............. 1
B 100 Terms.............................. ........ ................. 1
C. Documentation ... ........ ... ................. 2
C 100 Plans and particulars ............................ ......... 2
D. Signboards ............... 2
D 100 General........ .................. ..................... ...... 2
D 200 References................ ................................. 2
SEC.2 MATERIALS ............................................ 3
A. General................ ..... ..... .. 3
A 100 Material requirements ........................... ......... 3
B. Machinery Parts ..... . .... .... 3
B 100 General.............. ................................. ...... 3
C. Piping Systems ... . ... .. .. .. 3
C 100 General.................. ..... .............................. 3
C 200 Carbon and low alloy steels ............................. 3
C 300 Copper and copper alloys ............................... 3
C 400 Grey cast iron ............................................. 3
C 500 Nodular cast iron of the ferritic type .................. 3
C 600 Nodular cast iron of theferritic/pearlitic and ........ 3
C 700 Plastic pipes ................................................ 3
C 800 Material eertificates .............................. .......... 4
A. Arrangement ...... .. .... . .. 6
A 100 General.................... .. ........................... .... 6
A 200 Fire protection ............................................. 6
A 300 Piping systems ............................................ 6
A 400 Operation and indication of valves ..................... 7
A 500 Valves on the vessel's sides and bottom ....... " ..... 7
A 600 Fittings on watertight bulkheads ....................... 7
B. Construdion and Function .......... 7
B 100 General .................... :............... ................. 7
B 200 Environmental conditions ............................ .-... 8
B 300 Functional capability ..................................... 8
B 400 Failure effects ............................................. 8
B 500 Component design ........................................ 8
C. Reliability and Availability.................................... 9
C 100 Application.......................................... ....... 9
C 200 Reliability and availability analysis .................... 9
C 300 Redundancy types ......................................... 9
C 400 Machinery not required redundant. Tentative Rules 9
C 500 Machinery required redundant .......................... 9
D. Personnel Protection ........................ 9
D 100 General.... ................................................. 9
SEC. 4 PLATFORM PIPING SYSTEMS ...... 10
A. General ................ 10
A 100 Scope........................... ........... ................. 10
A 200 Location of piping and control systems .............. 10
B. Ballast, Bilge and Drainage Systems General............ 10
B 100 Basic requirements................... .................... 10
B 200 Ballast systems ........................................... 10
B 300 Drainage of dry compartments below main deck .. 10
B 400 Drainage of dry compartments above main deck ... 11
B 500 Pumping and. piping arrangement ..................... 11
B 600 Bilge pipes ................................................ 11
B 700 Bilge pumps .............................................. 11
B 800 Bilge wells, mud boxes, valves etc. .................. 12
C. Ballast and Bilge Systems for Column Stabilised Units 12
C 100 General................... ................... .... .......... 12
C 200 Remote control and monitoring ....................... 12
C 300 Ballast system ............................................ 12
C 400 Bilge system ............ ..... ...... .......... ...... ....... 13
D. BaDast and Bilge Systems for Self-elevating Units 13
D 100 General..... ................................ ........ ....... 13
D 200 Preload system ........................................... 13
D 300 Bilge system ........... ..... .............................. 13
E. Air, Overflow and Sounding Pipes ..... 13
E 100 Air pipes, arrangement ................................. 13
E 200 Air pipes, seCtional area .......................... ...... 13
E 300 Overflow pipes, arrangement .......................... 14
E 400 Overflow pipes, sectional area ........................ 14
E 500 Sounding arrangements ............. ............ ........ 14
E 600 Sounding pipes, sectional area ............ ........ ..... 14
F. Storage and Transfer Systems for Liquids with
Flashpoint Below 60C (e.g. He1icopter Fuel) .... 14
F 100 General.................. .............. .................... 14
F 200 Arrangement........... .. ................................. 15
SEC. 5 MACHINERY PIPING SYSTEMS ........ 16
A. General ............................................................ 16
A 100 Redundancy and capacity ............................... 16
B. Cooling Systems ........... 16
B 100 General.. .................................................. 16
B 200 Sea inlets for cooling water pumps ...... ............. 16
C. Lubricating Oil System : ..... : ... 16
C 100 General.. .................................................. 16
C 200 Filtering of lubricating oil ........... ..... .............. 17
C 300 Lubricating oil supply ................................... 17
D. Fuel Oil Systems ................................................ 17
D 100 General.................................................... 17
D 200 Fuel oil tanks ............................................. 17
D 300 Fuel oil piping ............................................ 17
D 400 Arrangement of valves, cocks and fittings .......... 17
D 500 Remotely controlled shut-off arrangement for fuel
D 600
D 700
D 800
D 900
D 1000
oil tanks. .................................................. 17
Fuel oil preheaters ....................................... 17
Filtering of fuel oil .... .................................. 17
Drip trays ...... _.......................................... 18
Remote stop of fuel oil pumps and fans ............. 18
Various requirements .......................... ......... 18
E. Feed Water and Condensate Systems ..... .... 18
E 100 Feed water pumps ....................... ...... .......... 18
E 200 Feed water piping ............... ......................... 18
E 300 Feed water heating ...................................... 18
E 400 Feed water tanks ......................................... 18
E 500 Condensate from steam heating of tanks ............. 18
F. Steam Systems ......... 18
F 100 General ................................... ................. 18
G. Hydraulic Power Supply.... .. ....... 18
G 100 General.................................................... 18
G 200 Steering gear ........ ...................................... 19
G 300 Anchor windlass ......................................... 19
G 400 Aocumulators.............. ........ ....................... 19
H. Pneumatic Power Supply ... ... .................. 19
H 100 General ................. ................................... 19
I. Pneumatic Starting Arrangements . . ... 19
I 100 General .................................................... 19
I 200 Capacity.......................................... ......... 19
I 300 Redundancy.......................................... ..... 19
I 400 Emergency generators .................................. 19
J. Thermal Oil Systems ......... 19
J 100 System arrangements ....... ................ ............. 19
SEC. 6 PIPES, PUMPS, VALVES, FLEXIBLE HOSES
AND DETACHABLE PIPE CONNECTIONS
ETC ................. 20
A. Pipes
A 100
A 200
A 300
.................. 20
General ...................... .
Calculation of wall thickness of pipes being subject
20
20
General
decided by the Board as of June 1998 and supersedes the January
The Rule change will come into force on 1 January 1999.
each year.
Revised chapters will be forwarded to all subscribers to the rules.
Buyers of reprints are advised to check the updated list of rule
current.
Main changes
- Paragraph CI02 on requirements for documentation of instru-
mentation systems has been amended, and a new paragraph
CI06 has been added.
Sec.2 Materials
- Subsection C containing requirements for materials used in piping
systems has been rewritten.
- In Table C2 giving requirements for certification, the criterion
on diameter for steel valves and fittings has been amended.
- Paragraphs A212 and A2l3 on fIre protection and A50l con-
cerning valves have been amended.
Paragraph B307 concerning "dead ship condition" has been
amended and B308 added. concerning functional capability of
machinery systems.
- A new subsection D on persOimel protection has been added.
Comments to the Rules may be sent bye-mail todJp203@dnv.com.
Sec.4 Platform Piping' Systems
- EI03. on the arrangement .. ofair pipes and ES09 on sounding
systcins have been amended. '.
- D20l and D204 concerning fuel tanks has been added and
amended, respectively.
- E301 and HlOl have been amended, and 1203 has been rewritten.
Sec.6 Pipes, Pumps, Valves, Flexible Hoses and Detachable
Pipe Connections etco
- Paragraph A201 giving reference to tables for minimum wall
thickness has been amended.
- Tables Al,A2 and A4 (former A3) have been amended, a new
Table A3 on minimum thickness of stainless steel pipes has been
introduced and former Tables A4 to AS have been renumbered
AS to A9, respectively.
- In item A400 concerning plastic pipes, paragraphs 402 and 408
have been amended, and a new 405 added.
- Paragraphs C203 to C204 has been replaced by the new item
C300 'Certification of valves' .
- Item E200 has been renamed "Pipe couplings other than flanges"
and paragraphs E20l-E202 has been replaced by a new E201.
A new Table EI showing permitted use of pipe couplings has
been added.
- Paragraphs AIOI and A104 giving general requirements for
welding have been amended, and new paragraphs AIOS and
A20S have been added.
- ASOI and A505 (A504) on non-destructive testing have been
amended and new AS02 and Table A4 have been added.
- Subsection B concerning copper alloy brazing has been rewritten.
- Paragraphs C202 and C203 have been amended.
- Paragraph Dl09 on electrical conductivity has been amended.
- Table EI on hydrostatic testing of piping systems has been
amended.
For subscription orders or information about subscription terms, please use distribution@dnv.com.
~ Det Norske Veritas AS
7.98.2000
If any person suffers loss' or dlmlge which is proved to have been clused by Iny negligent act or omission of Det Norlke Veritls, then Det Norske Veritls shall PlY compensation to
such person for his proved direct loss or dlmlge. However, the compensltion shall not exceed In amount equal to ten times the fee chlrged for the! service in question, provided that
thl! maximum compenll8tion shill never exceed USD 2 million .
In this p.,ovislon Dat Norske Verlt .. - shill meln the Foundstion Det Norske VeritlS IS well IS all its subsidilrles. directors, oHicera. employees, Igents Ind any other acting on behalf
of Det Norske Veritn. ,
.:)
.:>
/)
~
~
..")
J
f:J
fJ
,..j
I
) '.:J.

]
J
)
.:/J-
'.
I
LiGrary
RULES FOR
CLASSIFICATION OF
'})).fIl o/ung r[ au MOBILE OFFSHORE UNITS
@mW!
'" . '.., .... ""'E
: Til J! Ibj

.. ...... -----.
PART 4 CHAPTER 1
MACHINERY AND
SYSTEMS DESIGN, GENERAL
JULY 1998
SECTIONS
MAIN CLASS
PAGE
2 Materials .................... " ................. " ........................................... .......... " . . . .. . . . 3
4 Platform Piping Systems ...................................................................................... 10
5 Machinery Piping Systems .................................................................................. 16
6 Pipes, Pumps, Valves, Flexible Hoses and Detachable Pipe Connections etc .................... 20
7 Manufacture, Workmanship, Inspection and Testing .................................................. 27
8 Recommended Spare Parts .................................................................................. 31
DET NORSKE VERITAS
Veritasveien 1, N-1322 H",dk, Norway Tel.: +4767579900 Fax: +47675799 11
Page 48 - Pt.4 Ch.2 Sec.ll
102 An alarm system for overheating of the electric motors all alarms, brake functions and interlocks (C101), if any, are
is to be provided. to be checked. Shock pad deflections, electro motor input
103 1.'he power supply to each electric motor is to. have torque and speed, and the pinion-rack meshes are to be
protection agamst harmful effects of a pOSSIble short CIrCUIt. checked for all load conditions.
E. Testing onboard
E 100 Jacking test
101 The elevating machinery is to be function tested for
at least one complete cycle of all the specified conditions
mentioned in 0101 and with the preload. During these tests
102 After lifting test, the brake torques are to be checked
and adjusted if necessary.
..
DET NORSKE VERITAS
) "'J
--" '
\
j
)

J
))
i
'I
.----------. ------_._- ---
Li6rary
RULES FOR
CLASSIFICATION OF
Wi 0/ o/ung cr au

PART 4 CHAPTER 2
-

, a
-. -,
PROPULSION AND
AUXILIARY MACHINERY
JANUARY 1996
SECTIONS
MAIN CLASS
PAGE'
2 Diesel Engines .................................................................................................. 4
3 Steam Turbines ................................................................................................ 14
4 Gas Turbines ................................................................................................... 15
5 Gear Transmissions ........................................................................................... 16
6 Shafting and Vibrations ...................................................................................... 22
7 Propellers. . ...... . .. . . ... . . ...... . . ..... .. .... .. .. .... . . . . .. .. . . .. ... . .. .. ... . . . .. . ... .... ... . . ... . ... .. . . ... . .. 35
8 Thrusters ........................................................................................................ 38
9 Turbochargers .................................................................................................. 41
10 Compressors .................................................................................................... 43
11 Jacking Machinery ............................................................................................ 46
DET NORSKE VERITAS
Veritasveien 1, N-1322 Hevik, Norway Tel.: +4767579900 Fax: +4767579911
General
decided by the Board as of December 1995 and supersedes the July
each year.
Revised chapters will be fOIwarded to all subscribers to the Rules.
current.
Main changes
- A new item DIDO on criticality has been added.
- A new subsection E on Control and Monitoring has been added.
- In item A203 plans for resilient mounts and calculation of natural
frequencies have been added.
- Subsection E on Control and Monitoring has been rearranged.
- Item Fll1 has been extended.
Sec.4 Gas Turbines
- Previous text has been replaced by a general reference to the
Rules for Classification of Ships.
- Item A203 has been supplemented with a reference to faceload
distribution.
- A new item A304 on tooth contact has been added.
- Item B305 on X-ray tests has been amended.
- Item B405 on case hardening has been amended.
- Item D604 has been amended ....
- Table EI om monitoring has been amended.
Sec.6 Shafting and Vibrations
- A new item BI04 on certificates for couplings and clutches has
been added.
- Table BI has been amended.
- Item C200 on shaft alignment has been amended.
- In item C303 the text on gear transmission has been revised and
extended.
- Item C40I on torsional impact levels has been made more re-
strictive.
- Item C700 on rotor critical speeds has been extended.
- New items DI02-104 on shafting design in general have been
added.
- Item D301 has been amended.
- Item D903 on keyless mounting has been amended.
- Item DllOI on shrink fit couplings has been amended.
- Item DI50I has been amended with respect to emergency claw
devices.
- A new item D 1506 on membrane and plate element couplings
has been added.
- A new item F202 on fitting of couplings has been added.
- Item F302 on vibration measurements has been amended.
Sec.8 Thrusters
- Item A20I on plans has been amended.
- Item D301 on gear transmission safety factors has been amended.
Sec.9 Turbochargers
Item BI02 on the quality system of manufacturers has been
amended.
Sec.11 Jacking Machinery
Item BIOI on the quality system of manufacturers has been
amended.
In addition to th'e above stated rule amendments, some detected er-
1.96.2QOO
It is agreed thst save as provided below Det Norske Veritas. its subsidiaries, bodies, officers, directors. employees snd agents shall have no liability for any loss, damage or expense

pensation to such person a sum representing his proved loss. * In the event Det Norske Veritas or its subsidiaries may be held liable in accordance with the sections above. the amount
of compensation shall under no circumstances exceed the amolSlt of the fee, if any, charged for that particular service. decision, advice or information. * Under no circumstances
:)
.
J
/)
J
J
.."J
/)
C 200 Design loads
201 Dynamic loads
A relevant load-time spectrum for the fatigue life is to be
specified. This spectrum is at least to contain the estimated
necessary time and load for:
- lifting of the legs
- descending of the legs
- lifting of the platform
- descending of the platform
- variable load during holding (if no fixation rack system)
- exceptional use, such as working with one or more units
out of service
- compensating leg penetration during preloading by lifting
with full or part preload, if applicable.
The influence of friction is to be included for all mentioned
conditions.
202 Static loads
The preload of the legs is to be defined. For self elevating
units not equipped with a fixation rack system, the maximum
load is defmed as the maximum reaction between a leg and
the jacking machinery in a storm condition (maximum
weight + storm reaction).
For self elevating units equipped with a fixation rack system,
the maximum load is defmed as the preload.
203 Electric motors lifting capacity is the maximum con-
tinuous output power which the motor can deliver in the
working period with specified temperature rise for the motor
temperature class.
204 For self elevating units without a fixation rack system,
the required holding capacity is to be based on the maximum
load. The brake capacity (static friction torque) is not to be
less than 1,3 times the maximum load, considering the me-
chanical efficiency of the drive gear.
205 For self elevating units with a fixation rack system the
required holding capacity is to be based on the preload. The
brake capacity (static friction torque) is not to be less than
1,2 times the preload, mechanical efficiency considered.
C 300 Electric motor capacity
301 The capacity of the electric motor is to be sufficient
for the lifting requirements such as:
- lifting platform with uneven leg load (but within approved
tolerances) for the specified duration
- lifting in preload, if specified, with a specified duration.
The friction between legs and guides as well as the effi-
ciency of the gear transmissions are to be considered.
302 The torque characteristics of the electric motors are to
be such that the motor is not able to damage any part in the
transmission or pinion-rack in case of a mechanically
blocked lifting system.
C 400 Gearing
401 Details on calculation of gearing are given in Classi-
fication Note 41.2. This contains information on calculation
of tooth root strength (fractures) and flank surface durability
(pitting, spalling and case-crushing) for enclosed gear units.
402 The gearing safety factors SF against tooth fractures
and SH against pitting, spalling and case-crushing are to be
at least:
SH
Storm holding load (applies to rigs without flxa-
1,5 1,0
tion rack system)
Preload holding (applies to rigs with flxation rack
1,4 1,0
system)
Accumulated lifting loads 1,5 1,0
For the main pinions and the rack the requirement to SF also
applies. The contact stresses for pinion-rack are subject to
special consideration.
Guidance note:
It is adviced to have a higher static overload capacity in an en-
closed gear transmission than in the open mesh (pinion-rack).
Then in case of an unexpected overload (well beyond the maxi-
mum holding), it will only be necessary to inspect the open
meshes.
---e-n-d--o-f--G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e--n-o-t-c---
C 500 Shafts and shaft connections
501 Shafts are to fulfill the criteria in Sec.6 D with the
safety factor of 1,5.
502 For keys, flange couplings etc. see Sec.6 D .
503 Shrinkfit connections are to have a minimum friction
torque of twice the torque corresponding to the maximum
load.
C 600 Gear casings
601 Welded gear casings are to be stress relieved.
602 The casings are to be designed to prevent deflections
which may be harmful for the gear meshings.
603 If practical, inspection openings are to be provided.
C 700 Bearings
701 Rolling bearings are to have a lifetime (with 90 %
survival probability) of 5 times the specified lifetime of the
jacking unit. The entire load spectrum is to be considered,
as well as the influence of the lubricant.
The static load carrying capacity (corresponding to a defor-
mation of approximately 0,1%0 of the roller diameter) is to
be at least 1,5 times the load due to the maximum applicable
load.
702 The surface pressure in plain bearings is not to exceed
50% of the yield strength (0,2 % proof stress) of the bearing
material when the maximum load is applied.
The plain bearings are to be designed in such a way that the
dynamic loads do not result in any significant wear which
may be hannful for the gear meshings.
D 100 Load control
101 The following is to be siated in the Appendix to the
Classification Certificate:
- for the purpose of load equalization between the jacking
units, the unit torque (at electric motor) is to be checked
and adjusted if necessary. This is to be done after lifting
of the platform, and after being subjected to weather
conditions which may have altered the distribution.
This requirement does not apply if an automatic load
control device is used.
DEf NORSKE VERITAS
Page 46 - PtA Ch.2 Sec.11
SECTION 11
JACKING MACffiNERY
Contents
A. General
A 100 Application
A 200 Documentation
B 100 Geneml
B 200 Certification
B 300 Testing and inspections
C 100 General
C 200 Design loads
C 400 Gearing
C 600 Gear casings
C 700 Bearings
D 100 Load control
E. Testing onboard
E 100 Jacking test
A 100 Application
A. General
101 The requirements in this section are applicable to lift-
ing machinery for self elevating units of the pinion-rack
type. All other types will be specially considered. For gen-
eral hydraulic systems requirements, see Ch.1 Sec.S and
Sec.6.
A 200 Documentation
ted for approval:
- jacking machinery arrangement
- assembly arrangement (cross sections) of jacking unit
- pinions and gear wheels (for details, see Sec.S)
- all other power transmitting parts
- bearing specifications
- casings, in particular the parts subjected to significant
reaction forces
- electric motor including brake.
202 The following calculations are to be submitted for ap-
proval:
- calculation of load distribution between the jacking units
on one leg during the various load conditions such as
storm load and soil penetration during preload.
B 100 General
101 The manufacturer must have implemented a quality
system accepted or certificated by the Society.
102 A MSA (see Sec.l CI0S) should specify all details on
testing and inspection inclusive acceptance criteria.
B 200 Certification
201 Each jacking unit (gear transmission inclusive main
pinion) is to be delivered with Det Norske Veritas certif-
icate, category A (see Sec. 1 CIOO). The motor is to be cer-
tified in accordance with the relevant rule section.
202 The amount of and type of certificates (NV, W or TR,
see Sec. 1 CI03) for individual parts and inspections is to
be outlined in a MSA.
301 Basically the amount of testing and inspections re-
quired in Sec.S B3pO to BSOO apply. However, depending
on stress levels in the various components, certain release
may be given. The principle is that parameters vital for safe
operation of the unit are to be verified. Parameters which
are less vital or when the specification is most likely to be
fulfllled, may be randomly verified.
Guidance note:
As the amount of testing may depend on the design and the stress
levels, it is advised to settle the MSA after the design approval.
---e-n-d--o-f--G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---
302 Special tests may be required for units designed for
operation at low temperatures such as below _10C.
C 100 General
101 The system is to be designed so that overloading of
components is avoided during all kinds of operations.
Items to be considered in t ~ s respect are:
- flexible mounting of jacking units
- characteristics of electric motors
- brake torque
- interlock between electric motors and fixation rack sys-
tem (if any) etc.
102 The brakes are to engage automatically in case of
power supply failure to the lifting machinery.
103 Jacking machinery and related auxiliaries important
for the function are to be considered as main function ac-
cording to Pt.1 Ch.l Sec.2. Active components and systems
are in general to be arranged with redundancy so that a sin-
gle failure does not cause loss of jacking function. The
principles laid down in Ch.l Sec.3 are to be applied for the
design and construction.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
."",
)
)
)
CONTENTS
SEC. 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ............... ....... 1
A. General ............................................................ 15
A 100 Application ........... ............ .......... ...... ... ...... 15
A. Classification .... .................... ...... ............... .... .... 1
A 100 Application...... .. .. .. ...... ...... .... .... ...... ..... ...... I
A 200 Power ratings .............................................. 1
A 300 Overload capacity ......................................... 1
A 400 Astern power .............................................. 1
A 500 Environmental conditions ................................ 1
SEC. 5 GEAR TRANSMISSIONS .................... ....... 16
A. General......... ............................ ..... .............. .... 16
A 100 Application ........... .......... ............ ...... ... ...... 16
A 200 Documentation.. .. .. .. ........ .. .. ........ ........ .. ..... 16
B. Documentation .. ... .......... ...... ............ ....... ........ 1
A 300 Documentation to be submitted upon request ....... 17
B 100 Documentation for approval... .... .... ...... ...... ..... 1 B. Certification and Testing ............... .................. ..... 17
B 100 General..... .... .. .. .. .......... .. ....... ... ... ...... ...... 17
C. Certification .... ............ .......... .... ......... .......... ...... 2 B 200 Certification...... .. .. .. .. .. ...... .. .. .. ........ ...... ... .. 17
C 100 Certification of products and components .. .......... 2
D. Design and Construction ...... ...... ........................... 2
D 100 Criticality.......... .. .. ........ .... ........ .. .... .. ..... .... 2
B 300 Testing and inspection of elements other than gear-
~ .................................................... I7
B 400 Testing and inspection of gearing .. .... ........ ....... 18
B 500 Assembly and testing in workshop .... .......... ..... 19
)
)
E. Control and Monitoring ......... ...... .... .... ...... ...... ..... 2
E 100 Remote control of machinery, general requirements 2
E 200 Bridge control of machinery ............................ 3
E 300 Bridge control of propulsion machinery .............. 3
F. Testing .............................................................. 3
F 100 Testing generally .......................................... 3
F 200 Testing of materials ...................................... 3
F 300 Testing onboard ........................................... 3
G. Signboards ... ...................................................... 3
G 100 References.. ..... ..... .. .. ...... .... .... ....... .... .. .... .. 3
SEC.2 DIESEL ENGINES ..................................... 4
C. Arrangement of Machinery..................... ............. 20
C 100 Installation and fastening ............................... 20
D. Design and Construction ........... .................... ....... 20
D 100 Gearing. ...... .......... .. .. .. ...... .. .. .. ..... .. .. ........ 20
D 200 Shafts and shaft connections ........................... 20
D 300 Gear wheel................................................ 20
D 400 Bearings.. .... .. .. .. .. .. .... .... .. .. ........ ..... .... .. .. .. 20
D 500 Gear casings .............................................. 20
D 600 Lubrication............. .. .. .. ...... .. .. .. .... .. .. ....... .. 20
E. Monitoring ..... .... ................ ............ ........... ........ 21
E 100 Monitoring of gears ..................................... 21
A. General............................................................. 4
A 100 Application............ .. ...... .. .... .... .... ...... ... .... .. 4
A 200 Documentation......... .. ...... .... .... ...... ...... ....... 4
F. Assembly and Testing Onboard ... ....... .... .... ........... 21
F 100 Installation onboard ...................................... 21
F 200 Sea trial .................................................... 21
B. Certification and Testing ....................................... 5
B 100 Geneml...... .... .. .. ...... .. ...... .... .... ... .... .. .... .. .. 5
B 200 Certification....... .. .. ........ .............. ...... ....... .. 5
B 300 Testing and Inspection ................................... 6
B 400 Type testing of engines with special sUIvey arrange-
ment ......................................................... 7
B 500 Type testing of engines without alternative survey
arrangement ............................ .-................... 8
B 600 Workshop testing ......................................... 9
SEC. 6 SHAFTING AND VIBRATIONS .................. 22
A. General ............................................................ 22
A 100 Application ................................................ 22
A 200 Documentation.. .... .. .. .. .. ........ .. .. .... .. .. ......... 22
B. Certification and Testing .. ..... .............. ........ ......... 22
B 100 General... .... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ...... .. .. .. .... ... ........ .. .. 22
B 200 Certification............................................... 22
B 300 Testing and inspection .................................. 23
)
C. Arrangement ............... ......................... ...... ....... 10
C 100 Fastening of propulsion engines .. ..... ........ ........ 10
C 200 Flexibly mounted engines . ..... .... ...... ...... ........ 10
C 300 Exhaust pipes ......... ........ ...... ........ ........ ...... 10
C 400 Fire protection............................................ 10
D. Design and Construction .......... ...................... ...... 10
D 100 Geneml.. .... .. .. .. .. ...... .. ...... .... .... ... .... .. ...... . 10
D 200 Structure... .. .. .. .. .. ........ .. .... .......... ....... .. .... . 10
D 300 Crankcase, strength, ventilation and safety valves 10
D 400 Signboard................................................. 11
D 500 Fire extinguishing system for scavenge manifolds 11
D 600 Cylinders and pistons ................................... 11
D 700 Lubrication................................................ 11
D 800 Fuel system - cams and valve train ................... 11
D 900 Starting air ................................................ 11
)
C. Shafting Arrangement and Vibrations ... ................. 24
C 100 Arrangement... .. .. .. .. .......... .. .. .. .... .. .. ...... ..... 24
C 200 Shaft alignment ........................................... 24
C 300 Torsional vibrations ..................................... 24
C 400 Torsional impact vibrations ............................ 25
C 500 Axial vibrations .......................................... 26
C 600 Whirling vibmtions ...................................... 26
C 700 Rotor critical speeds ..................................... 26
D. Design and Scantlings ............ .......................... ... 26
D 100 General... .... .. .. .... .. .. .. .. ... ... .. .. .. ....... .. .. .... .. 26
D 200 Cmnkshafts............ .. .. .. .. .......... ........ ... .. .. .. 26
D 300 Shafts other than crankshafts .......................... 26
D 400 Propeller shafts ........................................... 29
D 500 Intennediate shafts ....................................... 29
D 600 Shafts for auxiliary machinery......................... 30
E. Control and Monitoring ....................................... 11
E 100 Geneml.................................................... 11
E 200 Speed governing of propulsion engines .............. 11
E 300 Overspeed protection of propulsion engines ........ 11
E 400 Speed governing of generator prime movers ........ 12
E 500 Overspeed protection of auxiliary engines... ........ 12
E 600 Monitoring of propulsion engines..................... 12
E 700 Monitoring of auxiliary engines ....................... 12
D 700 Propeller shaft liners .................................... 30
D 800 Stem tube and bearings ................................. 30
D 900 Fitting of propeller to the shaft........................ 31
D 1000 Flange couplings ......................................... 32
D 1100 Shrink fit couplings ...................................... 32
D 1200 Clamp couplings ......................................... 32
D 1300 Keyway connections ..................................... 32
D 1400 Spline connections ....................................... 33
D 1500 Elastic couplings ......................................... 33
F. Testing Onboard ................................................ 12
F 100 Onboard trials .............. .... ...... ...... ...... ........ 12
D 1600 Tooth couplings .......................................... 33
D 1700 Clutches ................................................... 33
D 1800 Rotors of electric machines ............................ 33
SEC. 3 STEAM TURBINES .................................. 14
E. Monitoring ......................................... ............... 34
A. General.......... .................... ...... ..... ...... ........ ..... 14
E 100 Monitoring of shafting elements ...................... 34
A 100 Application.. .... .. .. .. .. .. .... .. ........ .. .. .. .. .. ........ 14
F. Assembly and Testing Onboard ............................. 34
SEC. 4 GAS TURBINES ........... ...... ...... ...... .......... 15
F 100 Shaft alignment........................................... 34
F 200 Assembly of shafting components .................... 34 B. Certification and Testing ......... .......... ...... ...... 41
F 300 Testing of system stability ............................. 34 B 100 General. ............ ........ ........ ........ ..... ...... .... 41
SEC. 7 PROPELLERS ......... ........ ........ ............ 3S
B 200 Testing of components .................................. 41
B 300 Function testing .......................................... 41
A. General ................................................. 3S
C. Arrangement .......... .... ...... ......... ...... .......... 41
A 100 Application.. .. ........ .. ...... .. ...... .. .......... ... ..... 35
C 100 General. .. .. .......... .. ...... ........ .. ...... ... .. .. ...... 41
A 200 Documentation....... .. .. ...... ........ ............ ...... 35
D. Design. .... .......... ........ ........ .............. 41
B. Certification and Testing .................. ..... ....... 3S
D 100 General .................................................... 41
B 100 General.. ...... .. ........ .. ...... ........ .. ..... ...... .. ... 35
B 200 Certificates................................................ 35
B 300 Assembly and testing in workshop ................... 35
E. Control and Monitoring .......... ............................. 42
E 100 General .................................................... 42
C. Arrangement and General Design ................... 36
SEC. 10 COMPRESSORS .... .... ................. 43
C 100 Arrangement or propeller .............................. 36
C 200 General design ........................................... 36
A. General ........................................... 43
A 100 Application........... ........ ........ .. .... .. ............. 43
D. Scantlings .......... ........ ....... ....... ........... 36
A 200 Documentation...... .......... ........ .... .. ...... ....... 43
D 100 Blade thickness ..................................... ...... 36
B. Certification and Testing ...... ..... ........ .... ..... 43
E. Control and Monitoring ................................ 37
E 100 General.................................................... 37
B 100 General... .. .. .......... ........ .. ...... ....... .. .. .. ...... 43
B 200 Certification. ... ........ ........ .. ...... ...... .. .. .. ..... .. 43
F 100 Fitting of propeller ...................................... 37
F 200 Sea trial .................................................... 37
B 400 Workshop testing ........................................ 43
C. Compressor Arrangement and General Layout .. .... . 43
C 100 General ............................. " .. .... ........... .... 43
J
SEC. 8 THRUSTERS.. ... ..... ...... ............... 38
C 200 Starting air compressors ................................ 44
C 300 Compressors for breathing gas systems ............. 44
A. General ....................................... 38
A 100 Application........................................ ........ 38
A 200 Documentation........................................... 38
D. Design and Scantlings ..... ........ ...... .... .... ..... 44
D 100 Crankshaft.. .......... .. ........ ........ ...... .. ... .. .... .. 44
D 200 Rotors...................................................... 45 . ~
D 300 Rotor casing .............................................. 45
B. Certification and Testing ......................... ... 38
B 100 General.................................................... 38
E. Control and Monitoring. ......... ...... ... ......... 4S
B 200 Certification......................................... ...... 38
E 100 General c.................................................. 45
F. Assembly and Testing Onboard ................... 4S
F 100 General ............................. " .... .. ........... .... 45
C. Thruster Arrangement and General Layout . ........ .... 39
C 100 Arrangement.... .. .. ........ .. ...... .. ...... ...... .. ...... 39
SEC. 11 JACKING MACHINERy................ .... ....... 46
C 200 Propulsion thrusters ..................................... 39
A. General ............................................ 46
D. Design and Construction ........ ...... .... .... ......... 39
D 100 General .................................................... 39
A 100 Application........... ........ ........ .. .... .. ....... .... .. 46
A 200 Documentation...... .......... ........ ...... ...... ..... .. 46
D 200 Shafting.... .......... .. .. ........ ........ ....... ........ ... 40
D 300 Gear transmissions ...................................... 40
D 400 Propeller.. ... .......... .. .. ...... .. ...... .. .... .. .......... 40
D 500 Azimuth steering gear ................................... 40
B. Certification and Testing ....... ...... .... .......... 46
B 100 General... .. .. .. ........ .. ...... .. ...... .. ....... .. .. .. .... 46
B 200 Certification.......................................... ..... 46
B 300 Testing and inspections ................................. 46
E. Control and Monitoring .. ..................................... 40
E 100 General...... .. .......... .. ........ .. .. .... ....... .. ....... 40
E 200 Monitoring.......................................... ...... 40
E 300 Bridge control ........................................ .... 40
C. Design and Construction ......................... ...... ....... 46
C 100 General....... .... .. ...... .. ........ .. .. .... ............... 46
C 200 Design loads .............................................. 47
C 300 Electric motor capacity ................................. 47
~ )
F. Assembly and Testing Onboard .......................... 40
F 200 Sea trial .................................................... 40
SEC.9 TURBOCHARGERS .............................. 41
C 400 Gcaring .................................................... 47
C 500 Shafts and shaft connections ........................... 47
C 600 Gear casings .............................................. 47
C 700 Bearings........................... ........................ 47
D. Control and Monitoring ................ ...... ............. 47
/)
D 100 Load control ....... ,...................................... 47
A. General...... .... ........ ........ ......... ........ ..... 41
A 100 Application.... .. .. .. .......... .......... ............. .. ... 41
E. Testing onboard .. ... ..... ......... ....... 48
A 200 Documentation ............... " .... .. .. ...... ...... .. .... 41 E 100 Jacking test ................................................ 48
~
~
~
~
103 For keyway connection, see Sec.6 D1300.
D 200 Rotors
201 The scantlings of the rotors are to give sufficient saf-
ety against fatigue.
202 Calculation of the rotor strength may be carried out
in accordance with recognized standards.
D 300 Rotor casing
301 The thickness of the casing is to be suitable for the
design pressure.
302 The strength of the casing may be documented by
calculations in accordance with recognized standards.
303 Proof tests may be used to establish the allowable de-
sign pressure of the rotor casing. The proof test may be
carried out in accordance with the ASME Boiler and Pres-
sure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division I, or other recog-
nized standards.
Pt.4 Ch.2 Sec.1 0 - Page 45
E 100 General
101 The requirements of Ch.S are to be complied with
where applicable.
F 100 General
101 After installation onboard the compressor and the
system to which it is connected, is to be function tested un-
der working conditions. See also Ch.! Sec.s.
102 The function test is to include testing of any control
and safety functions.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
Page 44 - Pt.4 Ch.2 Sec. 1 0
Guidance note:
The design pressure must be sufficiently higher than the maxi-
mum working pressure in order to have suitable margins for
setting of the safety valve.
---e-n-d--o-f---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e--
103 The piping to and from the compressor is to be ar-
ranged in a way which prevents access of condensate into
the cylinders.
C 200 Starting air compressors
201 Starting air compressors are to satisfY the reqmre-
ments of Ch.l Sec.5 1100 to 1400.
C 300 Compressors for breathing gas systems
301 Compressors intended for breathing gas systems are
to comply with the requirements in the Rules for Certif-
ication of Diving Systems Sec.S ElOO.
D 100 Crankshaft
101 Crankshafts are to have satisfactory safety against fa-
tigue failures. Various calculation methods may be used. In
102 is given one method for evaluation of safety against fu-
tigue in the web fillets. The method applies for crankshafts
made of forged and cast steel and nodular cast iron intended
for one or multistage compressors with the cylinders ar-
ranged in line, V or W. More detailed methods may be
specially considered.
102
Guidance note:
The stresses in the crankpin fIllet are to fulfil the following cri-
terion:
CTf
u b ~
Ub = the bending stress amplitude in the fillet (N/mm2)
CTf = the fatigue strength (N/mm2)
S = the minimum safety factor.
For the fatigue criteria mentioned below, the following minimum
safety factor applies:
S=l,4
This safety factor includes the influence of torsional stresses in
the fillets, which for the sake of simplicity are neglected in this
method.
The fatigue strength is to be calculated as follows:
CTf = (0,33 CTB + 40) ~
where
CTB = ultimate tensile strength of the material (N/mm2)
Table Dl
Material
"'"
Forged steel 1,0
Cast steel 0,8
Nodular cast iron 0,9
{s:
b=V,ICTnomGC
where
0,7 = factor to correlate the pulsating bending stress range into
an equivalent single amplitude reversed stress
GC = fatigue notch factor for bending
CT
nom
= MB I WB (N/mm
2
)
MB = bending moment in the middle of the web nearest the
center of the bearing span
WE = sectional modulus of the web
kd1rD2Pab
MB= 40L
= cylinder bore (mm)
= design pressure (bar)
D 1)
P 1)
L distance between the centers of two adjacent bearings
(mm), see Fig.1
a = distance from the center of a bearing to the center of
the web nearest the center of the bearing span (mm),
see Fig. 1
b
~
= L - a, (b 2: a) (mm)
= design factor, see Table D2
1) For multicylinder arrangements on one bearing span, use the
maximum of the individual pD2.
W
B
=B
W2
/ 6
B = width of the web (mm), see Fig. I
W = thickness of the web (mm).
Table D2
Design
In line
V-90, W-90
V-60, W-60
V-45,W-45
kd
1,00
1,15
1,50
1,75
The fatigue notch factor for bending may be calculated as fol-
lows:
a = 1 + (a!h - I)
11 = notch sensitivity factor
GCth = theoretical stress concentration factor (referred to web
bending stress)
~ ;= 0,62 + 0,2 log R + CT
y
lO-
4
log{400/R)
(if calculated > I, ~ = I applies)
U y = the yield strength of the material (N/mm2)
R = the actual fillet radius (mm)
a!h = 3,0 f{A/d) f{W/d) f{B/d) f{R/d)
f!A/d) = 1 - 0,8 Aid
f Wid) = 1 + 2,2 (W/d-O,35)
f Bid) = 1+ OA (B/d-IA5)
(
I
)
0,22
fRd =--
~
A = pin overlap (mm), see Fig. I
d = diameter of the crankpin (mm).
I
r
~
"0
i
-
:
,
i
I
.-j---
"r--
I-
Jl
--
.... _ ... -
._ .. __ .
-
a b

L
Fig. 1
Crank throw for compressor
--e-n-d---o-f-G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e-n-o-t-e--
B.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
:)
)
- _/
,)
C)
J
i)
)
()
SECTION 1
A. Classification
A 100 Application
A 200 Power ratings
A 300 Overload capacity
A 400 Astern power
Contents
A 500 Environmental conditions
B. Documentation
B 100 Documentation for approval
C. Certification
C 100 Certification of products and components
D 100 Criticality
E 100 Remote control of machinery, general requirements
E 200 Bridge control of machinery
E 300 Bridge control of propulsion machinery
F. Testing
F 100 Testing generally
F 200 Testing of materials
F 300 Testing onboard
G. Signboards
G 100 References
A. Classification
A 10.9' Application
101 The rules in this chapter apply to machinery for
functions such as:
- power generation
- propulsion
- steering (including thrusters)
- fire detection and extinction
- ballasting and cargo pumping
- jacking machinery for jackups.
The rules apply to prime movers, couplings, gear trans-
missions, shafting, thrusters, propellers and all related dy-
namics and system analysis.
102 Spare parts for machinery covered by this chapter, see
Ch.l Sec.S.
A 200 Power ratings
201 Where requirements to dimensions in this chapter are
based on power and revolutions per minute, denoted by P
and Do, the values to be applied are maximum continuous
power (kW) measured on engine output shaft and corre-
sponding revolutions per minute.
The maximum continuous power for which the engine is to
be approved is defmed as in ISO 3046/1 for diesel engines
and ISO 3977 for gas turbines.
For plants where overload is used frequently, the scantling
criteria in this chapter may have to be based on the overload,
due to accumulated fatigue.
301 Prime movers of electric generators are to be capable
of developing 10% overload for a short period of time (15
ririnutes). The 110% refer to the power of the generator set.
This is to be demonstrated during workshop tests.
A 400 Astern power
401 Sufficient power for going astern is to be provided to
secure proper control of the unit under all normal circum-
stances.
402 For the main propulsion systems with reversing gears,
controllable pitch propellers, or electric propeller drive,
running astern is not to lead to overload of the propulsion
machinery.
403 The ability of the machinery to reverse the direction
of thrust of the propeller in sufficient time, and so to bring
the unit to rest within a reasonable distance from maximum
ahead service speed, is to be demonstrated and recorded.
404 The stopping times, headings and distances recorded
on trials, together with the results of trials to determine the
ability of units having multiple propellers to navigate and
manoeuvre with one or more propellers inoperative, are to
be available on board for the use of the master or designated
personnel.
501 The design and function of propUlsion and auxiliary
machinery are in general to be suitable for operation under
the environmental conditions as laid down in Ch.l Sec.3.
B. Documentation
B 100 Docmnentation for approval
101 Plans and particulars which are to be submitted for
approval or information are specified under subsection A in
the respective sections of this chapter.
102 When type approval has been granted for a product
and no request for submission of plans is stated on the type
approval certificates, plans and particulars for this product
need not be submitted for approval. For general information
on type approval, see Pt.1 Ch.l Sec.3 A400.
103 When the rules require calculations andlor analysis,
this documentation is to contain objectives, premises, as-
sumptions and the conclusions.
104 Materials and material testing may be specified ac-
cording to Pt.2. Material specification and testing and in-
spection different from the requirements in Pt. 2 as well as
Ch.2 may be approved if considered suitable for its purpose.
If required by the Society, a specification covering the ma-
terial data including tolerances, the production process de-
scription (forging process, heat treatment, etc.) as well as
the intended testing and inspection scheme is to be submitted
for approval.
Guidance note:
It is advised to have such arrangements settled on a general basis
by means of a manufacturing survey arrangement (MSA) , see
C105.
---e-n-d--o-f--G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e-n-o-t-e---
DET NORSKE VERITAS
C. Certification
101 la this chapter the following hierarchical certification
system applies to all functions mentioned in A100:
- category A: certificates for assemblies such as turbine,
diesel engine, gear transmission, propeller, thruster, etc.
- category B: certificates for components such as crank-
shafts, turbochargers, flexible couplings, clutches,
pinions/wheels, etc.
- category C: certificates covering material properties. ul-
trasonic testing, magnetic particle inspection, dimen-
sional inspection, etc.
A category A certificate is based on the required category
Band C certificates. A category B certificate is based on the
required category C certificates.
These certificates cover the items as delivered from the ma-
nufacturer.
102 The required certification is specified under subsection
B in the respective sections of this chapter.
103 Defmition of certificates:
Det Norske Veritas certificate (NV):
A document signed by a surveyor which states:
- conformity with the rule requirements
product itself
- that tests are made in the presence of the surveyor or in
accordance with special agreements.
Works' certificate (W):
A document signed by the manufacturer which states:
- that the tests are carried out on the certified product itself
product itself
- that the tests are witnessed and signed by a qualified de-
partment.
Test report (TR):
- that the tests are carried out on samples from the current
production.
104 Where the rules require work certificate (W) or test
report (TR) , this is based on the assumption that the
manufacturers/suppliers have in operation a quality system
according to at least ISO 9003 or equivalent.
The surveyor may at any time require tests to be carried out
in his presence and/or check the elements of quality system
in operation.
105 As an alternative, certification may be based on a
manufacturing survey arrangement (MSA) , subject to ap-
proval by the Society.
Guidance note:
A MSA is a written agreement relating to the survey and certif-
ication. Further information is given in Certification Note No.
1.1.
--e-n-d--o-f--G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---
106 For type approved components, for which NV product
certificate is required and the testing and inspection neces-
sary for obtaining the required reliability is not comprehen-
sive, alternative certification procedures laid down in a
manufacturing survey arrangement (MSA) may be ap-
proved.
D 100 Criticality
101 All machinery is to be designed so that expected de-
viations of influence parameters do not result in unaccepta-
ble reduction of the reliability/safety.
.afety
I
-..1
minimu'-;-i - - - - +
required I 1
p.-----
1
Fig. 1
I 1
I 1
I --"'1
I 1

... normal .....
range
Range of acceptable conditions
1 possible
IJ deviation

1
influence
parameter
la Fig.1 the curve drawn into the range of possible deviation
indicates unacceptable conditions, whilst dotted curve indi-
cates acceptable conditions.
Influence parameters can be e.g.:
- power
- speed
- number of passings through a barred speed range
- machining notches in inaccessible areas
- diesel engine misfiring
- variation of elastic coupling characteristics
- variation of damper characteristics.
E 100 Remote control of machinery, general
requirements
101 The requirements in this chapter are additional to
those given in Ch.S and are applicable when remote control
is installed.
102 The engine control room is the main command lo-
cation for the engine room.
103 The manoeuvring procedure is to consist of simple
operations.
104 ladicators are to be fitted on the bridge for propeller
speed, direction of rotation for fixed pitch propeller or pitch
position for controllable pitch propeller.
105 Remote starting of the propulsion machinery is to be
automatically inhibited if conditions exist which may hazard
the machinery, e.g. turning gear engaged.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
. :)
,J
:]
/)

.. :J
\
'-../
J
Pt.4 Ch.2 Sec. 1 0 - Page 43
SECTION 10
COMPRESSORS
Contents
A. General
A 100 Application
A 200 Documentation
B 100 Geneml
B 200 Certification
B 300 Testing and inspection
B 400 Workshop testing
C 100 Geneml
D 100 Crankshaft
D 200 Rotors
D 300 Rotor casing
E 100 Geneml
F 100 Geneml
A. General
A 100 Application
101 The rules apply to all types of compressors intended
for the following systems:
- starJing air
- instrument air
- breathing gas (monobaric and hyperbaric systems).
102 The rules also apply to all types of compressors in-
tended for systems with pressure above 40 bars, irrespective
of the functions mentioned in 101.
A 200 Documentation
ted:
Plans:
- compressor assembly (sectional drawings)
- crankshaft
- connecting rod
- cylinder head with bolts
- male and female rotors
- rotor casing with end covers.
The plans are to include necessary details with regard to
scantlings and arrangement as well as material specifications
and heat treatments,
Particulars:
- type of medium to be compressed
- design pressure for all stages
- working temperature and capacity
- maximum power with corresponding r.p.m.
Calculations:
- strength calculations of the crankshaft, the rotors and the
rotor casing are to be submitted upon request.
For compressors of special type and design, the extent of the
documentation is to be considered in each case.
B 100 General
101 A MSA (see Sec.1 ClOS) should specify all details on
testing and inspection, inclusive acceptance criteria for all
items mentioned in 200 to 400.
102 For type approved compressors, see Sec. 1 C106.
B 200 Certification
201 The compressor is to be delivered with NV certificate,
category A, see Sec. 1 ClOO.
301 Material certificates, see Sec. 1 ClOO, contammg
chemical composition and mechanical properties (see Sec. I
F200), are required for:
- crankshaft (NV)
- connecting rod (TR)
- cylinder with cover (TR, or W if specially required)
- housing (TR, or W if specially required)
- rotors (NV)
- rotor casing (W).
302 The crankshafts and the rotors are subject to non-des-
tructive testing and visual inspection as established in the
MSA.
303 All parts subject to pressure of the compressors are to
be hydraulically pressure tested (W) to 1,5 times the design
pressure for the respective parts. The test pressure need not
exceed the design pressure by more than 70 bars.
401 Function testing and setting of the safety valves are to
be carried out on each compressor in the presence of the
surveyor.
402 A capacity test is to be carried out with the compres-
sor running at design condition (rated speed, pressure, tem-
perature, type of gas, etc.). The capacity test may be waived
for compressors produced in series and when previous tests
have been carried out on similar compressors with satisfac-
tory result.
The capacity test is to be witnessed by the surveyor.
C. Compressor Arrangement and General Lay-
out
C 100 General
101 Air compressors are to be arranged and located as to
minimize the intake of oil or water contaminated air.
102 All compressors are to be protected by suitable safety
valves. The safety valves are to be set to open at the design
pressure. For starting air compressors, see also Ch.3 Sec.6
B200.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
102 The R & A is to be proved through a design analysis
supplemented with results from development testing as well
as full scale testing. This applies to all allowable operating
conditions as specified in A200.
E 100 General
101 For turbochargers fitted on engines with power in ex-
cess of 2000 kW, the following instruments are required:
- speed indicating (r.p.m.)
- lubrication oil temperature (if journal bearings only).
DEY NORSKE VERITAS
1
)
~ ]
) ]
)
i)
106 In case of a failure of the remote control system, the
pre-set speed and direction of thrust are, where practical, to
be maintained until local command location is in operation.
107 The number of consecutive automatic attempts which
fail to produce a start, is to be limited in order to ensure that
sufficient quantity of starting air is left for 6 manual starts.
The air consumption of each starting attempt is to be limited.
108 It is to be prevented that the starting air receivers are
emptied by faulty operations.
201 Under all sailing conditions, including manoeuvring,
the speed, direction of thrust and, if applicable, pitch of the
propeller are to be fully controllable from the bndge.
202 Means are to be [Jrovided for stopping of the propul-
sion from the bridge inoependent of the bridge control sys-
tem.
203 Overload is to be indicated on the bridge if automatic
load limitation is not arranged for.
204 Alarm is to be released on the bridge and in the engine
room at starting failure.
301 Operations following any setting of the bridge control
device including reversing from the maximum ahead service
speed in case of emergency are to take place in an automatic
sequence and with time intervals acceptable to the machin-
ery.
302 Switchover from bridge control to engine room con-
trol or vice versa is only to be possible from the engine
room.
303 Propulsion orders from the bridge are to be indicated
in the control room.
F. Testing
101 All required tests and inspections are to be wituessed
by the surveyor unless otherwise stated in the rules, or oth-
erwise approved, see BI04.
Rules for Mobile Ottshore Units, January 1996
201 Requirements for testing of materials and acceptance
criteria are given in Pt.2 Ch.2.
Alternatively the extent of testing and acceptance criteria are
to meet approved specifications, see BI04.
202 The test specimens are to be as representative as pos-
sible for the highly stressed areas of the actual components.
This means that they are to be taken in a depth and direction
which is suitable for the actual case.
For certain cases more strict requirements than in Pt.2 may
apply.
203 In sections 2 to 10 the subsection B (Certification and
Testing) describes the documentation requirements for ma-
terials' components and assembly as well as workshop test-
ing of the complete units.
301 Final acceptance is subject to successful testing and
sea trials.
The required testing onboard is specified under subsection
F in the respective sections in this chapter.
302 All required fimctions as well as functions which may
influence these, are to be demonstrated.
G. Signboards
G 100 References
- Sec.2 D400 concerning opening of hot crankcase
- Sec.6 C304 concerning barred speed range andlor re-
stricted driving conditions for engines.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
SECTION 2
DIESEL ENGINES
Contents
A. General
A 100 Application
A 200 Documentation
B 100 General
B 200 Certification
B 300 Testing and Inspection
B 400 Type testing of engines with special survey arrangement
B 500 Type testing of engines without alternative survey ar-
rangement
c. Arrangement
C 100 Fastening of propulsion engines
C 200 Flexibly mounted engines
C 300 Exhaust pipes
C 400 Fire protection
D 100 General
D 200 Structure
D 300 Crankcase, strength, ventilation and safety valves
D 400 Signboard
D 500 Fire extinguishing system for scavenge manifolds
D 600 Cylinders and pistons
D 700 Lubrication
D 800 Fuel system - cams and valve train
D 900 Starting air
E 100 General
E 200 Speed governing of propulsion engines
E 300 Overspeed protection of propulsion engines
E 400 Speed governing of generator prime movers
E 500 Overspeed protection of auxiliary engines
E 600 Monitoring of propulsion engines
E 700 Monitoring of auxiliary engines
F. Testing Onboard
F 100 Onboard trials
A. General
A 100 Application
101 The rules apply to conventional diesel engines used
as propulsion engines and for driving auxiliaries (see Sec. 1
AlOO).
102 Subject to approval is the diesel engine itself with
foundation arrangement, fuel oil systems, lubricating oil
systems, cooling systems, starting systems, governing and
monitoring systems.
103 Requirements to:
- crankshafts, see Sec.6
- exhaust driven turbochargers, see Sec.9
- electric starting arrangements, see Ch.4 Sec.3.
A 200 Docwnentation
201 Plans and particulars are to be submitted according to
Table AI.
202 The plans are to show clearly the proposed scantlings
and material specifications as well as arrangements.
203 For important components of welded construction, full
detail of the joints, welding procedure, filler metal partic-
ulars and heat treatment after welding are to be specified on
the plans.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
)
,)
/)
rJ
.. =:>
,)
J
)
SECTION 9
TURBOCHARGERS
Contents
A. General
A 100 Application
A 200 Documentation
B 100 General
8 200 Testing of components
B 300 Function testing
C. Arrangement
C 100 General
D. Design
D 100 General
E 100 General
A. General
A 100 Application
101 The rules apply to turbochargers fitted on diesel en-
gines ;:: 1000 kW subject to certification.
102 Turbochargers are to be type approved, either sepa-
rately or together with the diesel engine.
A 200 Docwnentation
201 The following is to be submitted:
- cross sectional drawings with principal dimensions
- drawings with necessary dimensions and material spec-
ifications as well as welding details of the rotating parts
(shaft, wheels and blades)
- technical specifications and limitations, including tem-
perature and pressures during normal full load operation,
as well as maximum allowable list and trim (degrees),
rolling and pitching (degrees!s), and acceleration.
202 When type approval is requested, the type test report
is to be submitted in addition.
B 100 General
101 Turbochargers intended for engines;:: 1000 kW are
to be delivered with NV certificate. Below 1000 kW, TR
is required, see Sec. I ClOO.
102 The manufacturer is to have in operation a certified
quality system. Should the manufacturer not be in possession
of a valid quality system certificate, an assessment of the
quality system elements which are in operation at the man-
ufacturer's works is to be made. Based on this assessment a
survey arrangement with the manufacturer maybe estab-
lished.
B 200 Testing of components
201 Properties of materials, including non-destructive
testing of power transmitting parts and parts subject to
pressure, are to be proved and documented through the
manufacturer's quality system.
202 The cooling space of each gas inlet and outlet casings
is to be hydraulically tested at pressure of either 4 bar or 1,5
times the maximum working pressure, whichever is the
greater.
203 Each shaft and bladed wheel, as well as complete ro-
tating assembly, has to be dynamically balanced in accord-
ance with the approved procedure for quality control.
All wheels (impellers and inducers) have to undergo an ov-
erspeed test during 3 minutes at 20 % over the maximum
speed at room temperature, or 10 % over the maximum
speed at working temperature.
301 Each individual unit is to be tested by the manufac-
turer and documented. The following bench tests are to be
carried out:
- a mechanical running test of each unit during 20 minutes
at maximum speed. The duration may be reduced to 10
minutes, provided the manufacturer verifies the distrib-
ution of defects established during the running tests on
the basis of a sufficient number of tested turbochargers
- for manufacturers who have facilities for testing the tur-
bocharger on an engine for which the turbocharger is
intended, the bench test may be replaced by a test run
of 20 minutes at overload (110 % of the rated output) on
this engine.
302 Turbochargers subjected to type approval are to be
tested as follows:
The type test is to be carried out on a standard unit taken
from the assembly line. As a rule, the type test is to consist
of a hot running test during one hour at maximum permis-
sible speed and maximum permissible temperature. After the
test the turbocharger is to be opened up and examined.
For manufacturers who have facilities for testing the turbo-
charger unit on an engine for which the turbocharger is to
be type approved, substitution of a hot running test by a test
run on the engine of one hour's duration at overload (110%
of the rated output) may be considered.
C. Arrangement
C 100 General
101 The arrangement is to be such as to prevent environ-
mental loads from exceeding the limit acceptable to the tur-
bocharger assembly.
D. Design
D 100 General
101 The design and construction is to be such as to enable
the turbocharger to meet the general requirements with re-
gard to environmental conditions, functional capability and
to reliability and availability (R & A) as outlined in Ch.1
Sec.3 Band Sec.3 C.
DET NORSKE VERIT AS
Page 40 - PtA Ch.2 Sec.S
D 200 Shafting
201 The dimensions of the shafts and the shafting compo-
nents are to be in accordance with Sec.6.
D 300 Gear transmissions
301 The gear transmissions are to be in accordance with
the requirements in Sec.5 D and Sec.5 E as far as applica-
ble.
The safety factors SF al;:ainst tooth fracture, SH against
pitting/spalling/case crushing and Ss against scuffmg are to
be at least:
SF SH Ss
Propulsion thrusters and thrusters
for dynamic positioning
(class notation DYNPOS) 1,55 1,20 1,5
Auxiliary thrusters 1,40 1,15 1,3
Azimuth steering gear
- for surface hardened 1,5 1,15
- for not surface hardened 1,5 1,0
D 400 Propeller
401 The propeller and propeller components are to meet
the dimenslOnal requirements in Sec. 7.
D 500 Azimuth steering gear
501 Azimuth thrusters designed for reversing the thrust by
turning the unit, are to be able to do so at a speed of mim-
mum 2. r.p.m.
502 Azimuth steering gears are to have a margin against
self-locking, unless overload protection is provided.
503 Azimuth steering gears for class notation DYNPOS
are to be designed for continuous running.
E 100 General
101 The systems are to comply with the requirements of
Ch.5. Additional requirements for units with class notation
DYNPOS, see separate rules.
102 The items for control and monitoring specified in 200,
are to be complied with.
E 200 Monitoring
201 . Alarm is to be for the following faults:
- stop of prime mover
- power failure of remote control system
- power failure of alarm system
- low level in lubrication oil tank (if provided)
- low lubrication oil pressure (if forced lubrication oil sys-
tem)
- low level in hydraulic supply tank
- low pressure in hydraulic system
- high level in bilge well.
Additionally for propulsion thruster azimuth gear power
units:
- power failure
- phase failure
- motor overload
- high lubrication oil inlet temperature.
202 Any alarm condition in the thruster plant is to release
alarm on the bridge with individual or groupwise indication.
203 Individual indication on the bridge is required for:
- overload of prime mover and servo unit if automatic load
limitation is not provided
- propeller pitch for controllable pitch propeller plants
- direction of rotation and r.p.m. for fixed propeller plants
- power failure of alarm system.
E 300 Bridge control
301 It is to be possible to stop the propeller from the
bridge by means of a system independent of the remote
control system.
F 100 Installation onboard
101 For thruster gears, the requirements in Sec.5 FIOO
apply. For shaft alignment and assembly of shafting com-
ponents, the requirements in Sec.6 FIOO and F200 apply.
F 200 Sea trial
201 The requirements in Sec.5 F200, Sec.6 F300, Sec.7
F200 and Pt.3 Ch.3 Sec.2 K400 apply.
202 Steering and reversing functions are to be tested under
the most severe permissible conditions.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
'1
,,]
J
J
)
/
()
iJ
!)
Table Al Plans and particulars to be submitted
Plans:
- engine transverse cross-section
- engine longitudinal section
- bedplate or crankcase, cast
- bedplate or crankcase, welded with welding details and
quality control instructions
- thrust bearing assembly I)
- thrust bearing bedplate, cast
- thrust bearing bedplate, welded with welding details and
quality control instructions 1)
- frame/column. cast 2)
- frame/column, welded with welding details and quality
control instructions 2)
- tie rod
- cylinder cover, assembly
- cylinder jacket or engine block 2) 3)
- cylinder liner 3)
- torsional vibration damper with characteristics (when
applicable) see Sec.6 4)
- axial vibration damper with characteristics (when applicable)
- crankshaft, details, each cylinder No.
- crankshaft, assembly, each cylinder No.
- thrust shaft (if integral with engine)
- coupling bolts
- counterweights (if not integral with crankshaft)
- connecting rod
- connecting rod, assembly 3)
- crosshead, assembly 3)
- piston rod, assembly 3)
- piston, assembly
- camshaft drive assembly
- camshaft and cams
- auxiliary blower
- fastening arrangement (for propulsion engines only)
- resilient mounts for engine (see also C200) 4)
:..- calculation of natural frequencies for resiliently mounted
engines (not applicable to engine - generator sets rigidly
mounteed on a frame which is resiliently mounted onboard)
- schematic layout or other equivalent documents
of starting air system on the engine 5)
oyfuel oil system on the engine 5)
- schematic layout or other equivalent documents of lubricating
oil system on the engine 5)
of cooling water system on the engine 5)
- schematic diagram of engine control and safety
system on the engine 5)
- shielding and insulation of exhaust pipes, assembly
- shielding of high pressure fuel pipes, assembly
- arrangement of crankcase explosion relief valve 6)
- operation and service manuals.
1) if integral with engine and not integrated in the bedplate
2) only for one cylinder
3) only necessary if sufficient details are not shown on the transverse
cross section and longitudinal section
4) type approval required for standard designs
5) and the entire system, if this is part of the goods to be supplied by the
engine manufacturer.
6) only for engines with a bore exceeding 200 mm
Particulars:
- maximum continuous output from the shaft flange, and the
corresponding speed
- mean indicated pressure at maximum continuous output
- maximum cylinder pressure
- valve timing angles
- compression pressure and scavenging air pressure
- cylinder diameter
- stroke
.- number and arrangement of cylinders
- firing order or angles
- compression ratio
- weight of reciprocating parts, per cylinder
- weight of rotating part of the connecting rod, referred
to the crank radius
- unbalanced weight of one crank, referred to the crank
radius (excluding counterweights)
- data for calculation of torsional vibrations
See Sec.6 C300 (including damper)
- camshaft calculation regarding cam fatigue (if specially
required).
B 100 General
101 A MSA (see Sec.1 CI05) should specify all details on
testing of materials, components and complete units for
which certificates are required.
102 For definition of categories of certificates and for NV,
Wand TR, see Sec. I CIOO.
B 200 Certification
201 Diesel engines are to have NV certificates, category
A.
202 NV certificates, category B, are required for:
- crankshafts (see Sec.6)
- turbo chargers (see Sec.9)
- torsional vibration damper (see Sec.6).
For pumps, heat exchangers, pressure vessels, electrical
components and instrumentation equipment, see Ch.l, Ch.3,
Ch.4 and Ch.5.
203 For type approved engines below 1000 kW, see Sec. I
CI06.
204 Testing mentioned in 300 is to be documented with
category C certificates.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
Table BI Engine parts subject to material tests
ParI Mechanical properties and Ultrasonic 1) Magnetic particle or
chemical composition 1) liquid penelrant 1)
Coupling bolts for crankshafts Above 400 mm
Steel piston crowns Above 400 mm 0) All Above 400 mm (W)
Piston rods Above 400 mm 0) Above 400 mm Above 400 mm (W)
Connecting rods
2)
All 6)
Above 400 mm All (W)
Crossheads Above 400 mm 6)
Cylinder liners, steel parts Above 300 mm 0)
Steel cylinder covers Above 300 mm 0) All Above 400 mm(W)
Bed plates of welded construction: Plates and transverse
All All
3)
All
3) (NV)
bearing girders made of forged or cast steel
Frame and crankcase of welded construction All All All (NV)
Entablatures of welded construction All
Tie rods All Above 400 mm
4) (W).
Bolts and studs for: Cylinder cover, crossheads, main
Above 300 mm Above 400 mm (W)
bearings, connecting rod bearings
Gear wheels of steel for camshaft drives Above 400 mm 5) Above 400 mm (W)
For pipes, see Ch.1 Scc.2 Table CI
1) For engines with cylinder diameter.
2) Together with connecting rod bearing caps (only 4-stroke engines).
3) Cast steel elements - including their welded connections.
4) Tie rods - at each threaded portion twice the length of the threads.
5) For surface hardened gears, the surface hardness, the hardness depth and the core properties are also to be documented.
6) No impact testing required.
301 NV material certificates covering mechanical proper-
ties (see Sec. I F2DD) and chemical composition are required
as per table B 1.
302 The manufacturer's ultrasonic test certificate (W) is
required as per Table BI.
The ultrasonic test is to be carried out at an appropriate stage
of the manufacturing process. The certificate is to refer to a
recognized standard and approved acceptance levels.
303 Surface crack detection in finished condition by means
of magnetic particle inspection or dye penetrant is required
as per Table B 1. The inspection is to be carried out in way
of zones with stress raisers andlor where experience shows
that defects are likely to occur.
For connecting rods with serrations only magnetic particle
inspection applies, and the acceptance criteria are to be
specially agreed upon.
304 Iffound necessary, X-ray of welds may be required.
305 Hydraulic pressure tests (W) are normally to be car-
ried out as per Table B2. Modifications to test requirements
(extent or pressure) may be specially agreed upon.
306 Dimensional check and visual inspection is to be car-
ried out with particular emphasis on highly stressed areas (as
e.g. serrations in connecting rods).
DEf NORSKE VERITAS
,)
:)
J
')
~
~
:J
J
203 Category C certificates apply for testing and m-
spection.
301 Material certificates containing chemical composition
and mechanical properties (see Sec. I F2DD) are required for:
- undeIWater housing (W)
- inboard housing (W)
- outer housing (non rotating) (NV)
- steering column/rotating support (NV)
- propeller shaft (W)
- other shafts (W)
- bolts, keys and shear pins (TR)
- piping, see Ch.I Sec.2 C8DD
- impeller (NV if propulsion, otheIWise W)
- propeller nozzle (NV).
302 Ultrasonic test certificate (W) is required for:
- propeller shafts
- other shafts, if propulsion
- steering column.
of the manufacturing process. The test certificate is to refer
to a recognized standard and approved acceptance levels.
303 Welding test procedures are to be carried out upon
request.
304 Surface crack detection (MPI or dye penetrant) is re-
quired in way of zones with stress raisers or welded con-
nections, for:
- shafting components, see Sec.6 B3DO
- steering column
- housings of welded type (upon request).
/
305 Visual inspection is to be carried out to the extent as
established in the MSA.
B 400 Assembly and testing in workshop
401 Gear transmissions, see Sec.S BSOO.
402 Controllable pitch propellers, see Sec.7.
403 The thruster unit is to be subjected to internal hy-
draulic pressure testing at 1,5 bar.
404 Fitting of prope!!er to the shaft, see Sec.6 D90D.
C. Thruster Arrangement and General Layout
C 100 Arrangement
101 The installation of a thruster, including alignment, is
to be such as to give satisfactory performance under all op-
erating conditions.
102 A type approved shaft sealing box is to be installed to
prevent water from gaining access to internal parts of the
thruster or into the unit.
The sealing arrangement is to protect steel shafts from sea
water, unless corrosion-resistant steel specially approved by
the Society is used.
103 The arrangement of flexibly mounted side thrusters is
to provide effective protection against flooding. Such thrus-
ters are to be placed in separate watertight compartment,
unless the flexible sealing arrangement contains two separate
effective sealing elements. An arrangement for indication
ofleakage into the space between the inner and outer sealing
is to be provided. .
The arrangement is to allow inspection of such sealings
during bottom survey without extensive dismantling.
C 200 Propulsion thrusters
201 When propulsion is provided by thrusters only, there
are normally to be at least 2 separate thruster units. This
does not apply to wateIjets.
202 Propulsion thrusters are to be provided with means for
local control of steering gear and propeller pitch from the
thruster compartment. Necessary indications of azimuth and
propeller pitch positions and means for communication with
the navigation bridge are to be provided.
203 Azimuth steering gears are to comply with the rules
for steering gears in Pt.3 Ch.2 Sec.4 with respect to the ar-
rangement, performance and other general requirements as
applicable. It must be possible to lock the unit in all required
positions.
D 100 General
101 The thruster is to be capable of withstanding the loads
imposed by all possible operational modes.
102 Thrusters, e.g. such as side thrusters, may be de-
signed for a limited lifetime. In principle, any specified
load-time characteristic may form the basis for the approval.
Alternatively the load spectrum may be categorized as fol-
lows:
- specified total use per year
Category Hours
I $50
II 50-500
III ",500
- an average lifetime of 15 years may be assumed
- amount of time with high load (torque) applied within the
specific total use per year:
Torque
80-100% 60-80% <60%
High 25% 50% 25%
Low 10% 30% 60%
Guidance note:
High will normally apply to fIxed pitch propellers.
Low will normally apply to controllable pitch propellers.
--e-n-d---o-f--G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e-n-o-t-e--
103 Inspection of thruster gears is to be made possible ei-
ther through proper inspection openings, or by other means
(e.g. fibre optical instruments) without extensive dismantl-
mg.
104 Water jets for propulsion are to be provided with in-
spection openings (preferably transparent) enabling in-
spection of the impeller.
DEf NORSKE VERITAS
I
I
,
SECTION 8
THRUSTERS
Contents
A. General
A 100 Application
A 200 Documentation
B 100 General
B 200 Certification
C 100 Arrangement
D 100 General
D 200 Shafting
D 400 Propeller
E 100 General
E 200 Monitoring
F 200 Sea trial
A. General
A 100 Application
101 The rules apply to thruster plants intended for main
propulsion and steering for all types of units.
102 Thrusters are regarded as part of the steering function.
Thrusters include azimuth propellers, tunnel propellers and
water jets.
103 Defmitions
A thruster is a unit equipped with a propeller or an impeller
in order to produce thrust. Note that a propeller alone is not
to be considered as a thruster.
A propulsion thruster is a thruster which is mainly assigned
to propulsion of the unit. The propulsion thruster may also
contain the steering function.
A dynamic positioning thruster is a thruster which is a part
of a dynamic positioning system with class notation DYN-
POS.
An auxiliary thruster is a thruster for all other purposes than
propUlsion and dynamic positioning.
104 For ice dass notations, see Pt.5 Ch.l.
A 200 Documentation
201 Plans and particulars of the following items are to be
submitted:
Plans:
- thruster arrangement
- assembly (sectional drawings)
- structural drawings (gear housing, etc.) and connections
to the tunnel/nozzle
- steering column
- steering (azimuth) gear assembly
- gears inclusive azimuth gear (as required in Sec.5)
- shafts, couplings * etc.
- impeller
- propeller (as required in Sec.7)
- bearing arrangement
- sealing boxes exposed to sea *
- mounting to the hull
- sealing arrangement for flexibly mounted thrusters
- propeller nozzle (see Pt.3 Ch.2 Sec.4).
* Type approval required for standard designs.
Diagram and data:
- piping diagrams for cooling, lubrication and hydraulic
systems
- hydraulic function diagrams for pitch and azimuth
- torque characteristic and starting procedure for electrical
motors for propeller drive
- functional deSCription of control system and monitoring
Calculations:
- torsional vibration calculation, see Sec.6 C301.
- calculated life times of rolling bearings.
202 The following calculations are to be submitted upon
request:
- torsional impact vibrations
- whirling vibrations
- axial vibrations
- pendelum vibrations
- component strength.
B 100 General
101 A MSA (see Sec. I C 105) should specify all details on
Materials used in piping systems are to comply with the re-
quirements of Pt.2 Ch.2.
102 The prime mover is to be certified in accordance with
relevant rule section.
103 For type approved thrusters, see Sec. I C106.
B 200 Certification
201 A thruster is to be delivered with Det Norske Veritas
(NV) certificate, category A, see Sec. I CIOO.
202 NV category B certificates are required for:
- pinions and wheels, see Sec.5
- clutches, see Sec.6
"- couplings, see Sec.6
- propeller, see Sec. 7
- propeller nozzle
- hydraulic motor for azimuth.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
)
'J
,)
C)
)
!)
) ()
Table B2 Hydraulic tests, diesel engine parts
No. It ern
1)
I Cylinder cover, cooling space
4)
2 Cylinder liner, over whole length of cooling space
3 Cylinder jacket, cooling space
4 Exhaust valve, cooling space
5
Piston crown, cooling space.
(Where piston rod seals cooling space, test after assembly)
Fuel injection pump' body,
pressure side 6)
6
High pressure fuel injection
Fuel injection valve
system
Fuel injection pipes
High pressure piping
7 Hydraulic system for hydraulic drive
of exhaust gas valves
8 Scavenge pump cylinder
9 Turboblower, cooling space
10 Exhaust pipe, cooling space
Engine integrated air Air side
1!
compressor (cylinders,
covers,
Water side
and aftercoolers) )
12 Coolers, each side
5)
13 Engine driven pumps (oil, water, fuel, bilge)
Pressure 2)
(bar) 3)
7
7
4
but not less than 1,5 P
4
7
1,5 ParP + 300
whichever is the less
1,5 PorP + 300
1,5 ParP + 300
1,5 P
4
4
4
1,5 P
4
4
4
1) In general, items are to be tested by hydraulic pressure as indicated in the table. Where design or testing features may require modification of these
test requirements, special consideration will be given.
2) P is the maximum working pressure in the part concerned.
3) 1 bar = 0,1 MPa = 0,1 N/mm
2
.
4) For forged steel cylinder covers test methods other than pressure testing may be accepted.
5) Charge air coolers need only be tested on the water side.
6) May be omitted for pumps made of forged parts provided material soundness is verified by ultrasonic test (W).
I
B 400 Type testing of engines with special survey
arrangement
testing of minimum speed for main propulsion engines
and the idling speed for auxiliary engines.
401 Engines for which the manufacturer has requested
certification according to an alternative survey arrangement
based on a specified quality system and MSA (see Sec. I
CI05), which gives the manufacturer the permission to carry
out all testing and inspection and completion of the certif-
icate without the presence of the surveyor, are to be type
tested in the presence of the surveyor. The selection of the
engine to be tested from the production line, the test pro-
gram and the parameters to be measured and recorded, are
to be agreed upon with the surveyor, but are at least to
comply with 404.
402 The duration and program of tests is in principle as
follows:
- 80 h at rated output
- 8 h at II 0 % overload
- 10 h at partial loads (114, 112, 3/4 and 9/10 of rated
output)
- 2 h at intermittent loads
- starting tests
- reverse running of direct reversing engines
- testing of regulator - overspeed device - lubricating oil
system failure alarm device
- testing of the engine with turbocharger out of action when
applicable
The tests listed above may be grouped together in working
cycles and subsequently repeated until the required durations
of the tests are accumulated. The overload is to be alter-
nately carried out with:
- 110 % of rated output and 103 % r.p.m.
- 1l0% of rated output and 100% r.p.m.
403 The following particulars are to be recorded:
- ambient air temperature
- ambient air pressure
- atmospheric humidity
- external cooling water temperature
- fuel and lubrication oil characteristics.
404 In addition to those mentioned in 403, at least the
following are to be measured and recorded:
- engine r.p.m.
- torque
- maximum combustion pressure
- indicated pressure diagrams where practicable
- exhaust smoke (with an approved smoke meter)
- lubricating oil pressure and temperature
DET NORsKE VERITAS
- cooling water pressure and temperatures
- exhaust gas temperature in exhaust manifold, and, where
facilities are available, from each cylinder
- r.p.m. of turbocharger where practicable
- air temperature and pressures before and after turbo-
charger and cooler
- exhaust gas temperatures and pressures before and after
turbine, charge air cooler, and cooling water inlet tem-
perature.
405 After the type test, the main parts and especially those
subject to wear, are to be dismantled and examined.
Guidance note:
1) For engines to be approved for different purposes (multi-
purpose engines). and having different performances for each
purpose, the program and duration of test will be modified
to cover the whole range of the engine performance taking
into account the most severe values.
2) The rated output for which the engine is to be tested is the
power corresponding to that declared by the manufacturer
and approved by the Society, i.e. actual maximum power
which the engine is capable of delivering continuously be-
tween the normal maintenance intervals stated by the man-
ufacturer at speed and under the stated ambient conditions.
---e-n-d-o-f---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e--n-o-t-e--
406 For engines which may operate on heavy fuel oil,
their suitability for this has to be proved in an appropriate
way (e.g. onboard trials).
B 500 Type testing of engines without alternative
survey arrangement
501 General
Upon fmalization of the engine design for production of
every new engine type intended for the installation on board
units, one engine is to be presented for type testing.
This type testing also applies for engines for which type
approval has been requested.
Engines which are subjected to type testing are to be tested
in accordance with the scope as specified below.
It is assumed that:
- this engine is optimised as required for the condition of
the type
- the investigations and measurements required for reliable
engine operation have been carried out during internal
tests by the engine manufacturer and
- the approval has been obtained for the engine in question
on the basis of documentation requested and the Society
has been informed about the nature and extent of inves-
tigations carried out during the pre-production stages.
The type test is subdivided into three stages, namely:
- Stage A - Internal tests
Functional tests and collection of operating values including
test hours during the internal tests, the relevant results of
which are to be presented to the surveyor during the type
test.
Testing hours of components which are inspected according
to 504 are to be stated.
- Stage B - Type test
Type test in the presence of the surveyor.
- Stage C - Component inspection
Component inspections by the surveyor after completion of
the test programme. The engine manufacturer will have to
compile all results in a type test report, which will have to
be handed over to the surveyor.
502 Stage A - Internal tests
Functional tests and collection of operating data during the
internal tests.
During the internal tests the engine is to be operated at the
load points important for the engine manufacturer and the
pertaining operating values are recorded. The load points
may be selected according to the range of application.
If an engine can be satisfactorily operated at all load points
without using mechanically driven cylinder lubricators this
is to be verified.
For engines which may operate on heavy fuel oil their suit-
ability for this has to be proved in an appropriate way (e.g.
onboard trials).
1) Normal case
The normal case includes:
- the load points 25, 50, 75, 100 and 110% of the
maximum rated power:
i) along the nominal (theoretical) propeller curve and
at constant speed for propUlsion engines.
ii) at constant speed for engines intended for generat-
ing sets.
- the limit points of the permissible operating range.
These limit points are to be defined by the engine
manufacturer.
2) Emergency situations
For turbocharged engines the achievable continuous out-
put is to be determined in the case of turbocharger dam-
age:
- engines with one turbocharger, when rotor is blocked
or removed
- engines with two or more turbochargers, when one
damaged turbocharger is shut off.
503 Stage B - Type test
During the type test the tests listed below are to be carried
out in the presence of the surveyor and the results achieved
are to be recorded and signed by the attending represen-
tatives. Deviations from this program, if any, are to be
agreed between the engine manufacturer and the surveyor.
1) Load points
Load points at which the engine is to be operated ac-
cording to the power/speed diagram (Fig. 1). The data to
be measured and recorded when testing the engine at
various load points are to include all major parameters
for the engine operation.
The operating time per load point depends on the engine
size (achievement of steany-state condition) and on the
time for collection of the operating values.
Normally, an operating time of 0,5 to 1 hour can be as-
sumed per load point.
- rated power, i.e. 100% output at 100% torque and
100 % speed corresponding to load point 1
- 100 % power at maximum permissible speed corre-
sponding to load point 2
- maximum permissible torque (normally 110 %) at
100% speed corresponding to load point 3, or maxi-
mum permissible power (normally 110%) and speed
according to nominal propeller curve corresponding
to load point 3 a
DET NORSKE VERITAS
) )
:)

/)
"J
/) /)
Table D3 Material properties
Material
Tensile strength
Nlmm
2
minimwn
Material constant U 1
Nlmm
2
Material constant U
2
Mn-bronze (brass) 440
Ni-Mn-bronze (brass) 520
Ni-Al-bronze 590
Mn-Al-bronze 620
Grey cast iron 250
Carbon steel and lowalloy steel 540
Ferritic/rnartensitic stainless steel 590
Austenitic stainless steel 440
Austenitic/rnartensitic stainless steel
I)
See also Pt.2 Ch.2.
1) Subject to special consideration.
2) Without cathodic protection.
3) With cathodic protection.
4) For stainless materials, the following increase of U 1 can be made:
i) For individually cast blades with a net weight> 600 kg: 5 %
ii) For individually cast blades with a net weight 600 kg: 10 %
iii) For solid propeller with a net weight 600 kg: 5 %.
E 100 General
101 For controllable pitch propellers, governing and
monitoring systems are to comply with the requirements of
Ch.S.
F. Testing Onboard
F 100 Fitting of propeller
101 For propellers mounted on a cone, the contact mark-
ing and the pull up length is to be verified in presence of the
surveyor, see also Sec.6 D900.
43 0,145
43 0,145
64 0,185
61 0,185
24 0,23
26 2)
0,20
44
3)
53 4)
0,195
48 4)
0,23
53
4)
0,195
102 For flange mounted propellers, the pretensioning of
the bolts is to be made in presence of the surveyor.
103 For blade bolt pretensioning, see B301.
F 200 Sea trial
201 For controllable pitch propellers the pitch function is
to be demonstrated to the surveyor.
202 During the sea trial, the pitch behavior with inactive
servo is to be demonstrated to the surveyor.
203 The performance of the propeller is to be tested during
sea trial with full ahead running and reversing at maximum
permissible astern r.p.m. and for controllable pitch propel-
lers at maximum astern pitch of maximum permissible
r.p.m.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
C 100 Arrangement or propeller
101 The arrangement and design of the propeller is to be
such that satisfactory performance is maintained under all
operating conditions.
Regarding fitting of propeller to the shaft, see Sec.6 D900.
102 The arrangement of attached free wheeling propellers
will be specially considered.
C 200 General design
201 The combination of materials is to be such as to min-
imize galvanic corrosion.
202 The surface of the hub, conical bores, fillets and
blades is to be smoothly finished.
203 For controllable pitch propellers all connections are to
be properly sealed.
204 Bolts and nuts are to be properly secured.
D. Scantlings
D 100 Blade thickness
101 The scantling rules mentioned in 101 apply to propel-
lers of normal design for single and multi screw main pro-
pulsion of conventional arrangement. Other types of
propellers, such as highly skewed propellers, propellers for
light craft and planing craft, will be specially considered.
The thickness t, of the cylindrical section at 25 % radius for
propellers cast m one piece, 35 % radius for propellers with
separately cast blades, and 60% radius (for both types) is
t,,=C
I
D (U
2
K3 + m
t
K
I
)
Zc
r
(U
I
-U
2
S
R
)
(mm)
This formula is based on a fatigue diagram where:
UI
U2
m,KI
K3
SR
reversed stress
influence of mean stress on fatigue
cyclic load
mean load
mean load
For the relative radii mentioned above, the following calcu-
lation method may apply. Other relative radii are subject to
(
n D )2
SR = I ~ O (C2
0
+ C3)
K3 = (KI + K2) C4
m, = 0,033 Vs for Vs <e: 17 knots
= 0,56 for Vs < 17 knots
KI = AldTho+A2To/R
K2 = Tw (Al d + 0,16 A2)
Tw = 455 D (1,00 + 10gIO no)
A = qO + ql d + q2 d
2
+ q3 d
3
d = 3,14D/HR
D = 2 R = diameter in meters of propeller
c, = width in meters of expanded cylindrical section at
radius in question
Z = number of blades
o = rake in degrees at blade tip (backward rake positive)
HR = pitch in meters at radius in question
P = maximum continuous power (kW) for which the
machinery is to be approved
no = corresponding revolutions per minute of propeller
T 110= mean propeller thrust in N at no' and may be calcu-
lated as 6 To I Ho 7
To = mean propeller to;que in Nm at no
V s = speed of unit in knots corresponding to maximum
continuous power.
CI, C2, C3, C4= see Table D!.
qO, ql, q2, q3 = see Table D2.
UI, U2 = see Table D3.
If the blade chord is much curved, a reduction of the re-
quired thickness may be considered, based on submitted
calculations.
Table Dl Values of C" Co, C" C.
r 0,25 R 0,35 R 0,6 R
C
I
0,278 0,258 0,150
C
2
0,026 0,025 0,020
C
3
0,055 0,049 0,034
C.
1,38 1,48 1,69
Table D2 Values of qo. ql' q2' q3
rlR
qo
q
q2
q,
0,25
Al
8,30 0,370 -0,340 0,030
0,25
A2
63,80 -4,500 -0,640 0,0845
0,35
Al
9,55 -0,015 -0,339 0,0322
0,35
A2
57,30 -7,470 -0,069 0,0472
0,6
Al
14,60 -1,720 -0,103 0,0203
0,6 ' A? 52,90 -10,300 0,667 0,0
102 Propellers working in a tunnel are to meet the fol-
- the nominal (mean) bending stress in the blade root sec-
tion is not to exceed 17% of the u.t.s. (ultimate tensile
strength, lower specified limit) of the material
- the radial location of the middle point of thrust force of
each blade is normally taken as follows, if the exact po-
sition is not known:
I) 0,82 R for controllable pitch propellers
2) 0,75 R for fixed pitch propellers
- a specific thrust of ISO NIkW absorbed by the propeller,
may be used for the bending stress calculation, if the
exact thrust force is not known.
103 The blade thickness t, as determined in 101 and 102
applies to cylindrical sections. When measuring thickness
of blades, the increased thickness due to the radius of the
fillets at the root of the blades is not to be taken into account.
104 The radius at the blade root is to be at least 3/4 of the
required blade thickness at 0,25 R or 0,35 R. Constant stress
fillets may also be approved.
DEI NORSKE VERITAS
,
I
)
)
I)
()
'.)
,
~
minimum permissible speed at 100 % torque, corre-
minimum permissible speed at 90% torque corre-
- part loads, e.g. 75%,50%, 25% of rated power and
speed according to nominal propeller curve corre-
sponding to points 6,7 and 8 and at rated speed with
constant governor setting corresponding to point 9,
10 and I!.
2) Emergency operation
Maximum achievable power when operating along the
nominal propeller curve and when operating with con-
stant governor setting for rated speed as per 502 2).
3) Functional tests:
- lowest engine speed according to nominal propeller
curve
- starting tests, for non-reversible engines andlor start-
ing and reversing tests, for reversible engines
- governor test
- testing the safety system, particularly for overspeed
and low lubrication oil pressure.
Guidance Dote:
For engines, intended to be used for emergency services sup-
plementary tests according to the regulations of administration
may be required.
---c-n-d---o-f--G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---
504 Stage C - component inspection
Immediately after the testrun the components of one cylinder
for in-line engines and two cylinders for V-engines are to
be presented for inspection.
The following components are concerned:
- piston removed and dismantled
- crosshead bearing, dismantled
- crank bearing and main bearing, dismantled
- cyli}1der liner in the installed condition
- cyrmder head, valves disassembled
- control gear, camshaft and crankcase with opened covers.
If deemed necessary by the surveyor further dismantling of
the engine may be required.
If a type tested engine which has proven reliability in ser-
vice, is increased in output by less than 10 %, a new type test
is not necessary. The agreement for granting an increased
output will be subject to prior approval.
601 Engines, which are not produced under an alternative
survey arrangement as mentioned in 400, are to be tested in
accordance with the scope as specified in 602 to 608. Mo-
difications of the test procedure maybe agreed with the
surveyor.
602 Scope of works trials
For all ratings for which the engine is going to be tested, the
pertaining operational values are to be measured and re-
corded by the engine manufaclurer. All results are to be
compiled in a test acceptance protocol to be issued by the
engine manufacturer. In each case all measurements con-
ducted at the various ratings, are to be carried out at steady
operating conditions. The readings for 100 % power (rated
power at rated speed) are to be taken twice at an interval of
at least 30 minutes.
603 Main engines driving propellers
I) 100 % power (rated power) at rated engines speed no:
at least 60 minutes - after having reached steady condi-
tions.
I
~
i
Q,
Fig. 1
Rules for Mobile Ott shore Units, January 1996
110 106.5
100 lOll
speed ICl/.) _
CD = range of continuous operation
range of intermitted operation
@ = range 01 short-time overload operation
Power/Speed diagram
2) 110% power at engine speed n = 1,032 x no:
30 minutes - after having reached steady conditions.
After running on the test bed, the fuel delivery system
of main engines is normally to be so adjusted that over-
load power cannot be obtained in service.
3) 90% (or normal continuous cruise power), 75%, 50%
and 25 % power in accordance with the nominal propeller
curve
4) Starting and reversing manoeuvres.
5) Testing of governor and independent overspeed protective
device.
6) Shut down device.
604 Main engines driving generators for propulsion
The test is to be performed at rated speed with a constant
governor setting under conditions of:
I) 100% power (rated power) at rated engine speed: at least
2) 110% power: 30 minutes after having reached steady
conditions.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
of diesel engines driving generators shall be adjusted so
that overload (110%) power can be given in service after
installation on board and in order, that the governing
characteristics including the activation of generator pro-
tective devices can be fulfilled at all times.
3) 75%, 50% and 25% power and idle run.
4) Start-up tests.
device.
6) Warning, shut down and stop devices.
605 Engines driving auxiliaries
Tests to be performed in accordance with 604.
After running on the test bed, the fuel delivery system of
diesel engines driving generators is to be adjusted so that
overload (11 0 %) power can be given in service after instal-
lation on board, so that the governing characteristics in-
cluding the activation of generator protective devices can be
fulfilled at all times.
606 Depending on the type of plant concerned, the Society
reserves the right to call for a special test schedule.
607 Extent of random checks of components to be pre-
sented for inspection after the works trials, is to be agreed
with the surveyor.
608 The data to be measured and recorded, when testing
the engine at various ratings are to include all necessary
parameters for the engine operation. The crankshaft de-
flection is to be checked when required by the surveyor and
according to the manufacturers procedures.
C. Arrangement
101 The dynamic forces which are imposed by the engine
are to be taken into account in the engine seating design.
The bedplate is to be securely bolted to the seating so that
no dynamic movement is possible between the bedplate and
the seating. All bedplate chocks are to be of sufficient
thickness and to have uniform fit before the bolts are tight-
ened. The arrangement of fitted bolts is to allow for thermal
expansion.
102 For mounting on epoxy resin the surface pressure and
thickness are to be within the approved specifications of the
epoxy. The epoxy resin is to be type approved.
103 Side and end-chocks are normally required and are to
be regarded as safety devices in case of relative movement
between engine and foundation caused by loosened bolts.
104 Top stays if any, are to be designed in such a way that
the engine is not damaged if the unit's side is pressed in by
a collision. The securing of the stay to the engine is to be
designed in such a way as to avoid risks of cracks at the
fastening points.
201 Critical vibrations are to be avoided in the actual
speed range. Possible irregular driving conditions as e.g.
misfiring are also to be considered.
202 All piping to the engine (exhaust, fuel, etc.) is to be
designed to compensate for the maximum possible engine
movement.
203 The flexible mounting of the engine is to comply with
the requirements in Ch.1 Sec.3 B. This may be required
verified by calculations or measurements.
C 300 Exhaust pipes
301 Where exhaust pipes are led overboard near the water
line, means are to be provided to avoid the possibility of
water entering the engine.
302 Exhaust pipes from several engines are not to be
connected, but are to have separate outlets, unless precau-
tions are taken to prevent the return of exhaust gases to an
idle engine.
401 For insulation of hot surfaces, see Ch.1 Sec.3 A200.
D 100 General
the diesel engine to meet the general requirements with re-
to reliability and availability as outlined in Ch.1 Sec.3 Band
Sec.3 C.
102 Depending On experience, special analysis may be
required for design features as e.g. serrations in connecting
rods and main bearing caps.
D 200 Structure
201 Transverse girders, cylinder blocks and columns are
normally to be stress-relieved after welding. Consideration
may be given in special cases to omission of the stress-re-
lieving heat treatment depending on welding procedures,
material thicknesses, grade of steel and whether the engine
is fitted with stay-bolts.
D 300 Crankcase, strength, ventilation and safety
valves
301 Crankcase and crankcase doors are to be of sufficient
strength and crankcase doors are to be securely fastened, so
that they will not be readily displaced by an explosion.
302 Ventilation of crankcase, and any arrangement which
could produce a flow of external air within the crankcase,
is in principle forbidden. If vent pipes from the crankcase
are provided, these are to be as small as practicable. If a
forced extraction of the gases is provided (for smoke-detec-
tion purposes for instance), the vacuum in the crankcase is
not to exceed 2,5 mbar.
Guidance note:
For the main machinery, the oil vapour from the ventilation pipe
should preferably be led to free air.
-e-n-d--a-. f --G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-a-. t-e---
303 Crankcase safety valves are to be designed and built
to open quickly at an overpressure of not more than 0,2 bar
in the crankcase and to close quickly and automatically in
order to avoid inrush of air into the crankcase. They are to
be of an approved type. Crankcase safety valve discharges
are to be properly shielded in order to reduce the possible
danger from emmission of flame.
304 Internal combustion engines of a Cl.;linder diameter of
200 mm or a crankcase volume of 0,6 m and above are to
be provided with crankcase explosion relief valves of a sui-
table type with sufficient relief area. The relief valves are to
be arranged or provided with means to ensure that discharge
from them is so directed as to minimise the possibility of
injury to personnel.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
,) )
,] ,]
)

/)
)
SECTION 7
PROPELLERS
Contents
A. General
A 100 Application
A 200 Documentation
B 100 Geneml
B 200 Certificates
D. Scantlings
E 100 General
F. Testing Onboard
F 200 Sea trial
A. General
A 100 Application
101 The rules apply to propellers for propulsion, steering
and manoeuvering.
102 Subject to approval is the propeller with hub, blades,
blade bolts and pitch control mechanism (if any).
103 Propeller for units with ice strengthening, see Pt.5
Ch.l.
A 200 Documentation
ted:
Material certificate
- propellers cast in one piece
- blades, bolts and hub for built and controllable pitch
propellers
- blade bolt pretensioning and procedure
- pitch control mechanism
- data and calculations for fitting of propeller to the shaft
(see Sec.6 D900)
- arrangement of attached free wheeling propeller, if ap-
plicable.
The plans are to give full details of scantlings and arrange-
ment as well as material specifications and heat treatment.
The manufacturing tolerance class (ISO 4841112) is to be
specified on the propeller drawings.
B 100 General
101 Materials for propellers and propeller blades are to
comply with the requirements in Pt.2 Ch.2.
For other materials, particulars of mechanical properties and
chemical compositions are to be submitted to the Society,
and if required, also fatigue properties to be verified by fa-
tigue tests approved by the Society.
102 For type approved propellers, see Sec. 1 CI06.
B 200 Certificates
201 Propellers are to have NV certificates, category A, see
Sec.1 CIOO.
202 NV certificates, category B, are required for separate
blades.
203 Category C certificates are required as per table:
Magnetic particle Vrsual and
(chemical composition Ultrasonic testing
inspection or dye dimensional
and
mechanical properties)
Propellers cast in one piece NY
Separate blades NY
Separate hubs NVIW
1)
Blade bolts NVIW
1)
Crank disc, push pull rod,
actuator cylinder and other W
parts if found necessary
1) NV if propUlsion
B 300 Assembly and testing in worksbop
301 Blade bolt pretensioning is to be made in presence of
the surveyor.
302 The complete propeller is to be statically balanced in
accordance with ISO 484 (or equivalent) in presence of the
surveyor. Dynamic balancing may be required for propul-
sion propellers with tip speed exceeding 60 m/s.
For controllable pitch or built-up propellers, the required
static balancing of the complete propeller may be replaced
of steel
penetrant inspection
W NV NV
W NV NV
W NVIW
1)
W W
W W
by an individual control of blade weight and gravity centre
position. The manufacturer is to satisfy the surveyor that the
assembled propeller will be within the specified limits.
303 The complete controllable pitch propeller system is to
be function tested and pressure tested as follows in the
presence of the surveyor:
- hydraulic pitch control to 1,5 times design pressure
- tightness of propeller subject to 1 bar.
DEf NORSKE VERITAS
E. Monitoring
E 100 Monitoring of shafting elements
101 Alarm for low operatiog pressure io clutches is re-
quired.
102 Alarm for excessive torsional vibrations may be spe-
cially required.
103 For monitoriog of possible stem tube lubricatiog oil
contamioation by water, a test kit for that purpose to be
provided on board.
F 100 Shaft alignment
101 When shaft alignment calculations have been ap-
proved, the alignment is to be verified by measurements in
presence of the surveyor.
102 Alignment is normally to be verified in afloat condi-
tion. Checking of alignment may also be required in certain
load conditions.
F 200 Assembly of shafting components
201 The fitting of the propeller to the shaft and the pro-
peller pull-up distance and nut tighteniog, alternatively bolt
prestressiog for flanged propellers, is to be verified io the
202 Fittiog of all couplings for propUlsion such as shrinkfit
coupling, tapered connections, bolted connections etc., is to
be verified in the presence of the surveyor.
203 The alignment of elastic coupliogs, tooth coupliogs,
universal shafts, etc. is to be verified by the surveyor. For
flexibly mounted engioes, the settiog of the rubber pads and
the crankshaft center movement due to external torque have
to be taken iotu account when the alignment is carried out.
normal operatiog range iocludiog misfiring (see C301) of
one cylioder (per engioe), and duriog impacts due to en-
gagiog clutches etc. (see C401).
Guidance note:
continuous rating.
-e-n-d---crf---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e-n-o-t-e---
Measurements of vibration velocities are to be carried out
for all shaft generators. The measurements are to be per-
formed at the stator housing, as close to bearing support as
possible, at both ends of the generator. Measurements are
to document acceptable vibration levels io lateral and axial
direction for the speed range -20 to + 15 % of nominal speed
as outlined io 303.
303 Maximum permissible level of vibration io shaft gen-
erators is 4,6 mm!s root mean square (RMS) withio the fre-
quency range 10 to 1000 Hz, for contiouous operation. This
applies io the full speed range 20 % .
Guidance note:
Most power take-off (PTO) systems can only be tested up to
+ 15 % of nominal' speed due to speed restrictions for driving
member (engine). For such arrangements measured values for
+ 15% of nominal speed can be extrapolated to the +20% no-
minal speed level and used as documentation. For systems where
up to + 15 % of nominal speed can not be made,
the procedure for testing and evaluation of results shall be sub-
ject to special evaluation and approval on a case-by-case basis.
---e-n-d---o-f---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e--n-o-t-e-
DET NORSKE VERITAS
'/)1
'-.-./

"
,

:J)
:JI
)1
).
o
,)
305 Engioes having cylioders with a bore exceediog 200
mm, but not exceeding 250 mm, are to have at least one
safety valve near each end of the crankcase. If the engioe
has more than 8 crank throws, an additional valve is to be
fitted near the middle of the engine. Engioes with cylinder
bore exceediog 250 mm, but not exceediog 300 mm, are to
have at least one safety valve in way of each alternate crank
throw, with a minimum of two valves. Engines with cylinder
bore exceediog 300 mm are to have at least one safety valve
io way of each crank throw. Additional safety valves are to
be fitted on separate spaces, not io open connection to the
crank case, such as gear or chain cases for camshaft or si-
milar devices, when the gross volume of such spaces ex-
ceeds 0,6 m
3
.
306 The free area of each crankcase safety valve is not to
be less than 45 cm
2
. The combined free area of the valves
fitted on an engioe is not to be less than 115 cm
2
per m
3
of
the crankcase gross volume. When calculating the gross
volume of the crankcase, the volume of stationary parts
withio the crankcase may be deducted.
Each one of the safety valves to be fitted as required above,
may be replaced by not more than two safety valves of
smaller area, provided that the free area of each valve is not
less than 45 cm
2
.
307 On two-stroke engines, scavenge spaces in open con-
nection to the cylinders are to be fitted with safety valves.
The valves are to open quickly in case of an explosion.
D 400 Signboard
401 A signboard is to be fitted io a clearly visible position
on each engine. warning against opening of a crankcase for
a specified period of time after shutdown due to overheating.
The time is to be sufficient to permit adequate cooliog after
stopping the engioe. The notice is also to warn agaiost re-
starting an overheated engine until the cause of overheating
has been found.
501 For crosshead type engines, scavenge spaces in open
connection to the cylinder are to be connected to an ap-
proved fire-extioguishing system which is to be entirely se-
parate from the fire-extinguishiog system of the engioe
room.
601 Cylioder lioers, cylinder covers, pistons and other
parts subjected to high thermal loads and stresses are to be
designed for the stresses and temperatures to which they are
exposed. Abrupt changes of wall thicknesses and small fillet
radii are to be avoided for these parts.
602 Diesel engioe cy Iinders haviog a bore exceediog 230
mm are to be provided with a sentinel valve. The valves are
to open at a pressure not more than 40 % above the com-
bustion pressure at maximum continuous output. The valves
are to discharge where no damage can occur.
For indication of overpressure in the cylinder the sentinel
valves may be replaced by type approved warniog devices
(audible or visible).
603 Piston rod packiog boxes which are subjected to
pressure from scavenging air. are to be of a design ensuring
that air will not leak ioto the crankcase.
D 700 Lubrication
701 The lubricating oil supply is to be so arranged that it
can be efficiently controlled and monitored.
702 The lubricating oil drain pipes from the engioe sump
to the drain tank are to be submerged at their outlet ends.
Where two or more engines are installed, vent pipes, if fit-
ted, and lubricatiog oil draio pipes, are to be laid iodepend-
ently of each other to avoid iotercommunication between
crankcases.
801 On maio and auxiliary engioes haviog cylinder bore
of 250 mm and above, the high pressure fuel oil pipiog is
to be effectively shielded and secured. For maio and auxil-
iary engines intended for unattended operation, the above
applies irrespectively of cylioder bore.
802 The protection accordiog to 801 is to prevent fuel oil
or fuel oil mist from reaching a source of ignition on the
engine or its surroundings. If flexible hoses are used for
shieldiog purposes, these are to be type approved.
Suitable draioage arrangements should be made for draioiog
any fuel oil leakage and for preventiog contamioation of lu-
bricatiog oil by fuel oil. Leakages from high pressure fuel
oil pipes should, where practicable, be collected and ar-
rangements provided for an alarm to be given.
803 When, in return pipiog, the pulsation of pressure with
peak to peak values exceeds 20 bar, shieldiog of this pipiog
is also required.
D 900 Starting air
901 In order to protect starting air maios agaiost explosion
arisiog from improper functioniog of startiog valves, the
following devices are to be fitted:
- an isolating non-return valve or equivalent at the starting
air supply connection to each engine
- a bursting disc or flame arrestor in way of the starting
valve of each cylioder for direct reversing engioes haviog
a main starting manifold, or at the supply inlet to the
starting air manifold for nonreversing engines. Bursting
discs or flame arrestors may be omitted for engines hav-
ing a bore not exceeding 230 mm.
E 100 General
those given io Ch.5.
E 200 Speed governiog of propulsion engines
201 Each propUlsion engioe is to be fitted with a speed
governor so adjusted that the engioe speed cannot exceed the
rated speed by more than 15 %.
301 A separate overspeed protective device is required for
engioes with a rated power of 220 kW and above, when:
- the engine can be declutched, or
- driviog a controllable pitch propeller, or
- has a flexible coupling which may cause complete sepa-
ration in case of failure.
DET NORSKE VERIT AS
.... /::1 ......
Contents
A. General
A 100 Application
SECTION 3
STEAM TURBINES
A 100 Application
A. General
101 The requirements to steam turbines are in general to
be in accordance with the Rules for Classification of Ships
Pt.4 Ch.2 Sec.3.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
0
1
::}
J)
~
))
J
))
')
Where the material has proven satisfactory testing and op-
erating experience, consideration may be given to an in-
creased bearing pressure.
803 For water lubricated bearings comprising staves of
wood (known as lignum vitae), the length of the bearing is
to be not less than 4 times the rule diameter of the shaft in
way of the bearing.
Guidance note:
Lignum vitae is the generic name for several dense, resinous
hardwoods with good lubricating properties. The original high
quality lignum vitae is almost unobtainable and other types of
wood such as bulnesia sarmiento (or palo santo or bulnesia ar-
aberia) are commonly used now.
---e-n-d---o-f---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e--n-o-t-e---
804 For water lubricated bearings of synthetic materials
which are approved for use as water lubricated stem bush
bearings such as rubber or plastics the length of the bearing
is to be not less than 4 times the rule diameter of the shaft
in way of the bearing. For a bearing design substantiated by
experiments to the satisfaction of the Society, consideration
may be given to a bearing length not less than 2 times the
rule diameter of the shaft in way of the bearing.
D 900 Fitting of propeller to the shaft
901 For cone mounted propellers, the following applies:
a) The roughness of the mating surfaces is not to exceed
3,5I-'m(RA), and the forward edge at the bore of the hub
is to be rounded.
b) The contact between the mating surfaces prior to final
pull-up is to be checked by contact marking compound
(e.g. toolmaker's blue). Circumferential or full length
non-contact bands are not acceptable. Total contact area
is to be at least 70 % of the theoretical contact area.
c) After fmal pull-up the propeller is to be secured by a nut
on ./he propeller shaft. The nut should be tightened to an
arial nut force corresponding approximately to the axial
component of the contact force on the cone. The nut is
to be secured to the shaft.
d) Coefficients of friction are to be taken as follows:
p.
Bronze hub oil injection method key mounting 0,13
0,15
Cast steel hub oil injection method key mounting 0,14
0,15
If glycerine replaces oil, and the surfaces are carefully
degreased to the satisfaction of the surveyor, the value
of p. may be increased by 0,04.
e) The surface pressure is preferably not to be less than 20
N/mm
2
(at 15C), even if a relief groove is used at the
front of the hub.
t) The maximum equivalent uniaxial stress ere (von Mises
criterion) in the hub at sea-water temperature of OC may
be calculated according to:
G =
e
Po ~ J 3 + ~ y
po = mean surface pressure between shaft and hub at OC
d
p
= propeller shaft diameter at the front of the hub
DH = propeller hub diameter at the front of the hub.
902 Key mounted propellers
The taper of the shaft cone is normally not to be steeper than
1:12 on the diameter. For shaft diameters smaller than ap-
proximately 200 mm", I: 10 may be accepted.
The dimensions of the key are to. fulfIl the criteria in 1301.
The propeller pull-up on the cone is to be at least sufficient
to create a friction torque of the magnitude T + Tv at a sea-
,ater temperature of 35C. The friction torque is assumed
to be transferred by the hub area in front of the hollow space
only (if any), i.e. excluding the area aft of the keyway.
G
e
, see 901, is not to exceed the following percentage of the
yield strength or the 0,2 % proof stress of the hub material:
- bronze and austenitic steel: 45 %
- other steels: 35 %.
There is to be clearance between the top of the key and the
hub. The bottoms of keyway in the hub and shaft are to be
parallel. The forward end is to be smoothened out from side
to side. On round-ended keyways the forward end is to be
machined down at 45 degree angle from side to side to a
depth at least 0,7 times the keyway centre depth. Remaining
edges are to be smoothened. The keyway is not to be carried
through at the aft end of the hub unless proper sealing is
provided. There is to be no play between the sides of the
key and the keyway in the hub. The keyway in the shaft is
not to extend forward to a distance closer than 0,2 times
shaft diameter from the beginning of the taper. The fillet in
the bottom on the keyway in the shaft and hub is to have a
radius not less than the maximum of 18 % of the depth of the
keyway at its centre and 0,0125 of the propeller shaft di-
ameter at top of its cone. The key is to be bolted to the shaft.
The distance from the bolt holes to the forward end of the
key is not to be less than 1/3 of the length of the key. The
edges of the shaft holes are to be rounded.
903 Keyless connections
The taper of the shaft cone is not to be steeper than I: 15 on
the diameter.
The friction connection is to be able to transmit both torque
and thrust as defined below, at a seawater temperature of
35C. The axial force component from the shrinkage is to
be compensated by the prestressing of the nut (see 901).
The torque to be applied is 2,8 To, or the maximum of
2 (T + Tv) in the entire speed range, whichever is greater,
see also C300.
The axial force (thrust) is to be calculated as the nominal
torque T (i.e. not included the vibratory torque) times
6/propeller pitch in metre and times a safety factor of 2.
Thus the required surface pressure at 35C is:
P35 =
where
.JFl+FA2
AI-'
FT the tangential force due to the torque as defined
above
FA the axial force as defmed above
A = the total contact area between hub and shaft (disre-
garding oil grooves). "
G
e
, see 901, is not to exceed 70% of the yield strength or
the 0,2 % proof stress of the hub material.
904 For bolted propeller hubs, the bolt connection is at
least to have the same torsional and bending strength as re-
quired for the aft end of the propeller shaft. If the flange
connection is based on friction only, the friction torque is
not to be less than 2,8 To, or the maximum of2 (T + Tv) in
the entire speed range, whichever is greater, see also C300.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
Different intermediate shaft design factors
Design k ck
- plain shaft
- at flange with
fillet radius not 1,0 1,0
less than 0,08 d
- at shrink fit coupling
- at keyway with bottom fillet
radius not less than 0,0125 d
1,10 0,60
(applicable within a distance
of 0,2 d from end of keyway)
- at radial or transverse hole
(hole diameter:=; 0,3 d, and
1,10 0,7
edge rounding radius> 0,3 of
hole radius
- at both sides of a thrust collar.
- in way of axial bearing where
1,10 0,85
a roller bearing is used as
a thrust bearing
503 The vibratory torsional stress amplitudes are not to
exceed the values of T[ (N/mm
2
) for continuous operation
or T2 (N/mm
2
) for transient operation:
O'B + 160
TI = 18 ck cd 1,38 for 0,9"; 1,.; 1,05
O'B+ 160 2
TI = 18 ck
c
d(3-21) for 1<0,9
where:
O'B = see 502, however, for the purpose of calculating
permissible vibratory stresses is not to be taken as
more than 600
Ck = factor for different shaft design features, see 502
Cd = size factor = 0,35 + 0,93 d( - 0.2)
d = shaft diameter (mm)
1 = speed ratio = nino = speed in question/rated speed.
If a vessel is operated predominantly in the lower speed
range, special considerations may be given to the permissi-
ble vibratory stresses for continuous operation in this speed
range. In certain cases the values for 1 > 0,9 may apply.
Where the vibratory torsional stresses exceed the limiting
values of Tj, barred speed ranges are to be imposed which
are only allowed to be passed through rapidly.
Barred speed ranges are not acceptable for 0,8 < 1 ,.; 1,05.
For transient operation the vibratory torsional stress ampli-
tudes are not to exceed:
1,7 TI
T2=---
.../ck
See also premises in 301.
for 1,.; 0,8
D 600 Shafts for auxiliary machinery
601 If the shaft design is not documented according to
300, the simplified rules in 600 apply, as far as covered with
shaft design factors k and ck'
602 The minimum shaft diameter can be calculated as for
intermediate shafts, see 502.
exceed those given for intermediate shafts, see 503, whereby
the Tl limit for 1 > 0,9 applies over the entire speed range
for continuous operation.
No barred speed range is acceptable in the range
0,9"; 1,.; 1,05.
Transient vibr<)1Qry torsional stress amplitudes
exceed 1,7/...jCk times those permissible for
operation.
D 700 Propeller shaft liners
are not to
continuous
701 Bronze liners are to be made of a high grade compo-
sition free from porosity and other defects. The liners are to
withstand a hydraulic pressure of 2 bar without showing
cracks or leaks.
702 The thickness of a liner fitted on a propeller shaft or
on a shaft through the stem tube is, in way of the bearings,
t= ~ 2 3 0
32 (mm)
d
p
= propeller shaft diameter in mm.
The thickness of a continuous liner between the bearings is
not to be less than 0,7:; t.
703 Continuous liners are preferably to be cast in one
length. If made of several lengths, the joining of the sepa-
rate pieces is to be made by fusion through the whole
thickness of the liner before shrinking.
704 If the tiner does not fit the shaft tightly between the
bearing portions in the stem tube, the space between the
shaft and the liner -is to be filled with a plastic insoluble
non-corrosive compound.
705 Liners are to be carefully shrunk or forced upon the
shaft by hydraulic pressure, and they are not to be secured
by pins.
706 Effective means are to be provided to prevent water
from gaining access to the shaft at the part between the aft
end of the liner and the propeller hub.
Guidance note:
To protect the propeller shaft the bronze liner should preferably
extend aft into a counterbore in the propeller hub.
-*e-n-d--o-f--G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---
D 800 Stern tube and bearings
801 The length of the aft oil lubricated white metal lined
bearings is normally not to be less than 2 times the rule di-
ameter of the shaft in way of the bearing.
Shorter bearings may be accepted provided the nominal
bearing pressure is not more than 8 bar as determined by
static bearing reaction calculation taking into account shaft
and propeller weight which is deemed to be exerted solely
on the aft bearing divided by the projected area of the shaft.
However, the minimum length is to be not less than 1,5
times the actual diameter.
The stem tube bearing is to be provided with proper grooves
for oil, air and possible accumulation of dirt. Pipes and
cocks for supply and draining of oil as well as air, are to be
fitted, and the sealing box is to be protected by a securely
attached steel plate.
802 For oil lubricated aft bearings of synthetic rubber, re-
inforced resin or plastics materials which are approved for
use as oil lubricated stem bush bearings, the length of the
bearing is normally not to be less than 2 times the rule di-
The length of bearing may be less provided the nominal
DET NORSKE VERITAS
"
'----....--/'
~ J
~
')
(J
(J
o
!)
~
Contents
A. General
A 100 Application
SECTION 4
GAS TURBINES
A. General
A 100 Application
101 The requirements for gas turbines are in general to be
in accordance with relevant parts of the Rules for Classi-
fication of Ships PtA Ch.2 Sec.4.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
SECTION 5
GEAR TRANSMISSIONS
Contents
A. General
A 100 Application
A 200 Documentation
A 300 Documentation to be submitted upon request
B 100 General
B 200 Certification
B 300 Testing and inspection of elements other than gearing
B 400 Testing and inspection of gearing
C 100 Installation and fastening
D 100 Gearing
D 200 Shafts and shaft connections
D 300 Gear wheel
D 400 Bearings
D 500 Gear casings
D 600 Lubrication
E. Monitoring
E 100 Monitoring of gears
F 200 Sea trial
A. General
A 100 Application
101 The rules apply to gear transmissions for propulsion
and auxiliary machinery as specified in Sec. 1 A100.
102 This section applies to the gearing, shafts, other power
transmitting elements, bearings, monitoring and lub oil sys-
tem and casing used in gear transmissions.
103 For units with ice strengthening, see Pt.5 Ch.1.
104 For gear rating calculations a Classification Note 41.2
is available.
A 200 Documentation
201 The following plans and particulars of the gear trans-
mission are to be submitted:
Plans:
- arrangement (longitudinal and transverse sections)
- pinion(s) and wheel(s)
- shafts
- hub(s)
- clutch(es) and/or coupling(s)
- other power transmitting parts
- gear casing, including propeller thrust bearing housing,
if applicable
- fastening of gear transmission (applicable to propulsion
gears only).
The plans are to show clearly all details as e.g. fillets and
other stress raisers as well as material type and mechanical
properties.
Particulars (for each gear stage):
Loads:
P = maximum continuous power (kW) on pinion
no = corresponding r.p.m. on pinion
- load-time characteristics if designed for a limited life time
- specified limits of shock and vibratory loads (if not given,
the upper limits given in these rules apply.
Faceload distribution:
- the specified maximum permissible faceload distribution
factor KHP at rated load (for bevel gears it is sufficient
to specify the minimum permissible facewidth in %).
Dimensions:
z = number of teeth for pinion or wheel
a = centre distance (mm)
b = active (common) facewidth (mm) at operating pitch
diameter
bl,2 = facewidths (mm) at tooth root for pinion or wheel
B = total facewidths (mm) including gap, if any
d
a
= tip diameters (mm)
ha = addenda (mm)
- specified minimum and maximum backlash.
Tool:
mn = normal module (mm)
!X
n
= pressure angle in normal section on reference cy lin-
der
P = helix angle on reference cylinder
hao = addendum of tool, referred to mn
PaD = radius at tip of tool, referred to mn
pro = protuberance, referred to m
x = addendum modification coefficient, referred to I11n.
If a pinion type cutter is used, additionally:
Zc = number of teeth of cutter
Xc = addendum modification coefficient of cutter.
For bevel gears, additionally:
:E = angle between shafts
Pm = helix angle in the mid-section
Ok = angle modification
Il1t = transversal module (mm) at outer end.
Material:
- material specifications
- heat treatment method
- for not surface hardened steel:
- minimum mechanical properties (ultimate tensile
strength, yield strength, elongation, contraction and
impact energy) in final condition
- for surface hardened steel:
- minimum and maximum surface hardness (HV or
HRC)
- minimum core hardness (HV)
- minimum impact energy (KV) of core material (cou-
pon test) at 20'C
- minimum and maximum hardness profile (HV versus
depth) after finishing process. To be presented by a
curve, or by depths at 550 HV, 400 HV and 300 HV.
Welding:
- for important components of welded construction, full
details of the joints, welding procedure, filler metal par-
DET NORSKE VERITAS
)
.J

J J
J
)
- straight shaft with shrink-fitted hub (no relief groove or
shaft diameter step):
a,= 1,25
ab = 2,2.
D 400 Propeller shafts
401 If the propeller shaft design is not documented ac-
cording to 300, these simplified rules in 400 apply.
402 The minimum diameter of the propeller shaft is not to
be less than:
1
100k(l
nO
I )3
1-(d
i
/d)4
560
O"B + 160
where:
d
p
= minimum diameter (mm)
k = factor for different shaft design features
no = rated speed (r.p.m.)
p = rated power (kW)
O"B = tensile strength (N/mm2) of the shaft material as
taken for calculation (for unprotected stainless steel
shafts, see 404)
di = actual diameter (mm) of shaft bore
d = actual outer shaft diameter (mm).
If di:S 0,4 d the expression 1-(di/d)4 may be taken unity.
In general, the tensile of the steel used is to be be-
tween 400 and 800 N/mm . For the calculation of the di-
ameter as well as for calculation of permissible vibratory
torsional stresses (see 403), GB is not to be taken as greater
than 600 N/mm
2
In general, the part of the propeller shaft located forward
of the forward stem tube seal may be gradually reduced to
the diameter of the required intermediate shaft (provided it
is calculated with the same material).
k-factors for propeller shafts which are oil lubricated and
provided with an approved sealing box, or fitted with a
continuous liner:
k = 1,22 for keyless fitted or flange mounted propellers
k = 1,26 for key mounted propellers.
The above k-values apply to the portion of propeller shaft
between the forward edge of the aftmost shaft bearing and
the forward face of the propeller hub or, if applicable, the
forward face of the propeller shaft flange, subject to a min-
imum of 2,5 d .
k = I, IS appRes to the portion of propeller and tube shaft
between the forward edge of the forward stem tube seal and
the forward edge of the aftmost shaft bearing.
exceed the values of (N/mm
2
or (N/mm2) for transient operation:
O"B + 160
= 18 ck Cd 1,38 for 0,9:S,l:S 1,05

where:
O"B + 160
18
ck Cd (3-2 ,l2)
GB =, see 402 including restrictions
for ,l < 0,9
Ck = 0,55 when k-factors 1,22 and 1,26.
= 0,72 when k-factor 1,15.
Cd = size factor = 0,35 + 0,93 d( -0,2)
,l = speed ratio = nino = speed in question/rated speed.
range. In certain cases the values for ,l > 0,9 may apply.
values of 'q, barred speed ranges are to be imposed which
Barred speed ranges are not acceptable in the speed range
0,8 < ,l :S 1,05.

= 1,7 --rc;
See also premises in 30 l.
for ,l:S 0,8
404 Propeller shafts with special stress raisers not men-
tioned above, such as e.g. radial holes, longitudinal slots
etc., having geometrical stress concentration factors in tor-
sion in excess of 1,5, are not covered by 400, and it is re-
ferred to 300.
Unprotected stainless steel shafts are specially considered,
particularly on basis of time limited fatigue in sea water.
The criteria in 300 are to be followed as far as applicable,
but the stress - number of cycle - characteristics of the actual
steel in sea water is to be considered in the fatigue criteria.
405 The requirements in 400 do not take into account
possible influence of whirling which may necessitate modi-
fied dimensions. See also C600.
D 500 Intermediate shafts
501 If the intermediate shaft design is not documented ac-
cording to 300, these simplified rules in 500 apply. How-
ever, if the limitations (k, c0 for this simplified method are
exceeded, i.e. if the design is not covered by table in 502,
it is necessary to apply 300.
502 The minimum diameter dmin (mm) of an intermediate
shaft is not to be less than:
1
d =Fk(!
mm '""""U
1 ) 3
1-(d
i
/d)4
560
O"B + 160
where:
d = actual outer shaft diameter (mm)
If di:S 0,4 d, the expression 1-(di/d)4 may be taken
unity
F = 95 for turbine propulsion, diesel propulsion with slip
type coupling, electric propulsion
F 100 for all other diesel propulsion
k factor for different shaft design features, see table
below
O"B = tensile strength (N/mm2) of shaft material.
In general, the tensile strength is to be between 400 and 800
N/mm
2
. Values in excess of 800 N/mm
2
will not be con-
sidered for the purpose of diameter calculation.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
O"B ( O"B)
-rT =.J3 2- 1200
Regarding -rf
If reliable values (50 % survival probability) for -rf are not
available, -rf may be calculated on basis of O"y and O"B taking
into account the surface fInish, size effect and the fibre di-
rection influence as follows:
-rf = f (O"y) f (R
y
, O"B) f (d, r) f ( fibre direction)
f( O"B) = 0,25 O"y + 45 for forged or hot rolled steel.
= 0,15 O"B + 40 for cast steel.
(fatigue strength of 10 mm diameter plain spec-
imen with Ry = 10 micron and f (fibre direc-
tion) = 1)
The formulae are only valid for steels heat
treated in snch a way that a fine grain structure
and high toughness is obtained. The impact
energy is to meet a level which is representative
fur the actual type of steel.
O"B
f(Ry, O"B) = 1- 4000 10g(Ry/lO)
(surface roughness factor)
fed, r) = 0,8 + 2/d
(size factor for plain shafts including shafts with
flanges)
fed, r) = 0,9 + lIr
(size factor for notched shafts)
(if r < 10, use fed, r) = 1)
Usually f (fibre direction) = 0,9.
However, 1,0 may be used if the material has
a sufficiently high toughness (impact energy) in
the direction of the maximum principal stress.
Sufficiently high means a level of at least the
prescribed minimum in the longitudinal grain
flow direction according to the actual material
standard.
Regarding -r
y
, static strength
For less than 10
3
cycles the static strength amplitude of
O"y
-ry = .J3
applies, where O"y is not to be taken more than 2/3 O"B in this
formula.
307 Guidance and explanations to the notch factors
Regarding p" Pb
When reliable values are not available, the notch factors may
be evaluated as:
P
t
= 1 + 'It (at-I)
Pb = 1 + '1b (ab- I)
'It = 1-0,6 (I-'1b) = 0,4 + 0,6'1b
'1b = 0,62 + 0,2 log(r) + O"y 10-
4
log(400/r)
If calculated> 1, '1b = 1 applies.
(for holes and slots, r = d
h
/2 and e/2, respectively)
Regarding Pm
The <static. notch factor 10
3
cycles) may be calculated
as:
Pm = 1 + (at-I) (O"y/IOOO)2
If calculated> a" Pm = at applies.
308 For use in criterion C and D the shaft futigue strength
for limited life can be found by linear interpolation in a
10g-r-logN diagram between <static. strength for < 10
3
cy-
cles and endurance strength for> 10
7
cycles.
I""
l!(NL)IPcJ

-----..-
raP,
.---.-L._ ... _ .. __ oj. _____ _
Ii!

I
i
Ii'
Nuo
4
NT 10
6
10
7
Mathematically expressed for x cycles
TyP
t
0,25Iog--
-rf(x) =.2 ( 10
7
) Pm Tf
P
x
P
t
X
Regarding at. ab
log N
The geometrical stress concentration factors can he docu-
mented by measurements or taken from recognized literature
or from the following simplified guidance which covers the
most common shaft stress raisers:
- keyway in shaft:
at = 2,15 + 0,0125 d/r
- shaft with flange or diameter increase of 50% or more,
and inner bore of less than 50% of the smaller outer di-
ameter d:
at = 1,03 + 0,04 d/r
valid for rid <e: 0,08
- shaft with shoulder fillet with diameter increase up to
20% (Did < 1,2):
1
at = 1+ 0,15 (1 + 0,1 d/r) [10 ( - 1) r
valid for rid> 0,01
- shaft with radial hole, central bore less than 50% of d,
hole diameter dh in the range 0,05 to 0,25 of d, and edge
rounding radius r in the range 0,1 to 0,6 of dh:
at = 2,4 (1,04 - 0,4 r/dhl
(if the radial bore intersects with an eccentric axial bore
the at should be increased by 5-10% for an eccentricity
of 50-75 % of the outer radius)
- shaft with longitudinal slot. L = total length of slot, e
= breath of slot. The ends of the slot are to be semicir-
cular, and the rounding edge radius r in the range 0,1 to
0,6 of e:
at = [2,4 + 2,2 (L-e)/d] (1,04-0,4 r/e)
valid for
central bore d
i
< 0,5d
slot width e = 0,05d - 0,I5d
DET NORSKE VERITAS
)
.
()
) !J
)
t)
ticulars and heat treatment after welding are to be speci-
fied on the plans.
Finishing process:
- finishing method of tooth flanks
- shot peening parameters, if applicable
- maximum mean surface roughness Rz of tooth flanks
- maximum surface roughness Ry of tooth root fillets
- amount of tooth flank correchons (tip-relief, end-relief,
root-relief, crowning and helix correction), if any
- specified grade of accuracy according to ISO 1328 - 1975
(if the facewidths exceed 160 mm, the alignment toler-
ances should be specially given for both gearing and
housing bore)
- special flank alignment tolerances due to special control
procedure and requirements to the assembled and
mounted gear, if any
- amount of shrinkage with tolerances in case of shrink-
fitted pinions, wheel rims or hubs
- information regarding procedure for shrinking of gear
wheel rims and! or measures proposed for securing the
rim.
Lubrication:
- specified grade of oil
- kinematic viscosity (mm2/s) at 40"C
- minimum scuffing class (FZG or equivalent)
- expected maximum oil inlet temperature COC) when op-
erating at maximum continuous power
- lubrication oil system, schematic
- alarm high level (if applicable) on lubrication oil inlet
temperature.
Bearings:
- calculated lifetime (BIO) of rolling bearings
- material specification and clearances (tolerances) for plain
bearings.
202 /For gear transmissions which have been given a type
approval on the basis of plans and particulars listed in 201,
no drawings will normally be required, provided no signif-
icant alterations of arrangement, design, scantlings or mate-
rials have been made.
301 If the approval is to be based on fatigue data from
tests, all particulars on the tests are to be submitted for
consideration. The fatigue data are to be evaluated with re-
spect to a 99 % survival probability.
302 Gear rating factors which are different from those
used in Classification Note 41.2, are to be presented to-
gether with a brief documentation.
303 Calculation of safety against micromovement of
shrinkfitted rims.
304 Tooth contact pattern requirements at defined part
load(s). This is to verify that the specified maximum per-
missible faceload distribution factor is not exceeded.
B 100 General
101 The MSA (see Sec. 1 C 105) should specify all details
on testing and inspection, inclusive acceptance criteria for
all items mentioned in 100 to 500.
102 For case hardened steels of approved high grade (see
Classification Note 41.2) used in gearing designed for infi-
nite life, it is provided that:
- the cleanness as per ISO 4967 is checked for every
charge
- the grain size is No.6 or fmer per ISO 643 or ASTM
E1l2. Random tests are required.
103 For type approved gears, see Sec. 1 C106.
B 200 Certification
201 A gear transmission is to have Det Norske Veritas
(NV) category A certificate, see Sec. 1 CIOO.
202 NV certificates category B are required for
- pinions and wheels
- built in clutches (see Sec.6 B200 and B300)
- built in tooth couplings (see Sec.6 B200 and B300).
spection.
B 300 Testing and inspection of elements other than
gearing
301 The requirements in 300 apply to all transmission
components other than the toothed parts of pinions and
wheels. For instance for welded gear wheels the require-
ments to welding tests are found in 300, and the require-
ments of the toothed rims in 400.
302 Testing of chemical compositions and mechanical
properties (see Sec. 1 F200) are required for:
- shafts (yI)
- hubs (yI)
- power transmitting bolts and shearpins (TR)
- casings for propUlsion gears (yI).
303 Ultrasonic test (!IV) is required for shafts, and if spe-
cially required, also for hubs.
304 Stress relieving of welded components such as gear
wheels and casings is to be documented (W) by time-temp-
erature diagrams.
305 X-ray or ultrasonic tests (yI) of welds is required in
power transmitting parts as e.g. gearwheels. The welds are
to be judged according to ISO 5817 .arc-welded joints in
steel-guidance on quality levels for imperfections, and are
at least to meet the requirements for quality level B.
306 Surface crack detection (yI) by means of wet floures-
cent magnetic particle method is required for:
- shafts (in way of stress raisers)
- hubs (in way of stress raisers)
- shrink fit surfaces
- welds in power transmitting parts (100 % to be tested)
- welds in casings in way of bearings (at least 10% to be
tested).
Upon request, liquid penetrant may replace m.p.i. for not
surface hardened components ..
307 Surface hardness measurements (!IV) are required for
surface hardened shafts. The depth of the hardened layer is
to be documented (TR) by a suitable method.
308 Documentation of chrome plating or similar is subject
to .gpecial consideration.
309 Dimension of shrink fit connections, and adherence to
tolerances for keyed connections, spline connections and
bearings are to be documented (yI).
DET NORSKE VERITAS
agreed with the surveyor.
401 The requirements in 400 apply to the toothed parts of
pinions and wheels, see also 301.
402 The following certificates (W) are required for all
kinds of steel:
- chemical composition
- ultrasonic test.
For steels which are not subjected to further core heat
treatment (i.e. soft unhardened steels, nitrided steels,
flame-or induction hardened steels), the mechanical proper-
ties (see Sec. 1 F200) are also to be certified (NV for trans-
mitted power > 1000 kW, otherwise W).
403 For non surface hardened steels a certificate of me-
chanical properties after fmal heat treatment is required (NV
for transmitted power> 1000 kW, otherwise W) (see Sec. 1
F200).
404 For case hardening it is required that:
- core hardenability (Jominy) is randomly checked
- suitable heat treatment is made prior to machining in or-
der to avoid excessive distortions during quenching
- carburizing is made in a controlled furnace atmosphere.
The furnace is to be equipped with carbon potential con-
trols and continuously recorded
- the entire case hardening process is checked by means
of coupons (see 405) at regular intervals (e.g. every 5th
batch) with regard to:
- the surface microstructure:
- to be martensitic with allowance for up to 20 % re-
tained austenite. A higher amount of retained aus-
tenite, up to 30 %, may be considered for
acceptance provided that the endurance limits used
in Classification Note 41.2 Pt.2 Sec.7 and Pt.3
Sec.7 are reduced with 5% and 10% respectively
(note that the coupon surface has to be represen-
tative for the fmished surface of the tooth flank
respectively root). Further, the scuffmg is influ-
enced as mentioned in Classification Note 41.2
PtA Sec.2 C
- net or bone (semi- or non-continuous) carbides are
not to be visible at a magnification of 500. Only
fme dispersed individual carbides are allowed
- decarburization is not to be visible at a magnifica-
tion of 500
- oxidation, maximum 0,02 mm
- the core microstructure:
- to be martensitic/bainitic with no free ferrite.
The manufacturer is to have quality control procedures
which foresee the above mentioned, and the surveyor is to
carry out regular audits.
405 The case hardening process is normally to be docu-
mented for each hardening batch and each material charge
with a certificate containing:
- hardness profile
- core impact energy (KV) (regarding extent, see also end
of this paragraph).
NV certificate is required when the transmitted power ex-
ceeds 1000 k W, otherwise W.
If no alternative procedure is approved, the certificate is to
be based on a coupon test.
The coupon is normally to be made of material from the
same charge as the actual gear and heat treated along with
it. The coupon is to be taken in tangential (see also Sec. 1
F202) direction and is not to be separately forged.
The coupon diameter is not to be less than 2II\t, minimum
20 mm. Further, the size is to be sufficient for making 2 test
pieces for impact energy (KV) of the. core.
The hardness profile (hardness as a function of depth) is to
be determined by hardness measurements with a load of 10
to 50 N. The measurements are to be made from the surface
to the core. The expected amount of grinding is to be sub-
tracted.
It is required that the depths to 550 HV, 400 HV and 300
HV, and the core hardness are documented to be within the
approved specification. Further, the hardness at any point
below the surface is not to exceed the surface hardness (be-
fore grinding) with more than 30 HV. The core impact en-
ergy is not to be less than approved specification but not less
than 30 J unless specially approved (see also Sec. 1 F202).
As mentioned above, the case hardening process (the cou-
pons) is normally to be documented for each hardening
batch and each material charge. The use of coupons made
of same material type but not same charge may be accepted
provided that the manufacturer has a quality system which
ensures sufficient reproducability. In particular, the limits
of elements in the chemical composition combined with the
respective heat treatment processes must ensure that the re-
quired core properties are obtained and documented. A re-
duced extent of impact'testing may also be considered for
gears with shallow or medium case depth (e.g. less than 1,5
mm to 550 HV), provided that relevant conditions are de-
fined in a MSA. These conditions relate to specifications of
incoming material and the heat heatment control.
406 Case hardened gears are to have a minimum tooth root
space hardness of 58 HRC over the entire facewidth, other-
wise a reduction of permissible tooth root stresses applies,
see Classification Note 41.2 Part 3, Sec.7.
Manufacturers may carry out NV approved procedure tests
in order to document the permissible sizes for their various
material types. Components of smaller sizes than the ap-
proved need no documentation of tooth root hardness.
If a component exceeds the approved size, or the manufac-
turer has not carried out an approved procedure test, the
tooth root space hardness is to be checked at midface in the
presence of the surveyor. If this hardness is less than the
approved minimum (58 HRC if nothing else is specified),
this measurement is to be carried out over the entire facew-
idth.
407 For nitrided gears the process is to be documented for
each nitriding batch and material charge with a certificate
(W) containing:
- hardness profile
- white layer thickness.
it.
The coupon diameter is not to be less than 2m
n
. The hard-
ness profile (hardness as a function of depth) is to be deter-
mined by hardness measurements with a load of 10 to 50
N. The measurements are to be made from the surface to the
core. If further grinding is intended (and is approved), the
expected amount is to be subtracted.
It is reqnired that the depth to 400 HV and the core hardness
are documented to be within the approved specification.
The white layer thickness (as tested on coupon) is not to
exceed 20/Lm .
DET NORSKE VERITAS
)
J
,)
J
/)
J
) )
To be specially considered:
- credit for surface hardened parts
- stainless steel exposed to sea water
- chrome plating, metal spraying or similar.
303 Defmitions and symbols
All stresses are in N/mm
2
.
Tm = nominal mean torsional stress (at any given driving
condition)
Td = nominal dynamic torsional stress amplitude (at any
given driving condition)
This includes all cyclic repetitive stresses as found
by measurements or by calculations. For diesel
engines this also comprises the misfiring condi-
tion, i.e. where one cylinder acts without fuel in-
jection but with compression impulses. For plants
where an analysis indicates no significant torsional
dynamics, there are to be considered a minimum
of Td due to torque fluctuations owing to rough
sea, etc. Td ~ 0,1 Tm (Td has a wider meaning than
Tv (vibratory) as Tv is only due to torsional vi-
brations, whilst Td also comprises the possible re-
petitive shock loads (ice, clutching in, etc.), and
repetitive overloads)
Tde equivalent torsional stress amplitude according to
von Mises
A l' nominal shear stress range, being the range be-
tween the outmost positive T max and the outmost
negative Tmin torsional stress, within the entire
speed range covering all possible driving condi-
tions and possible shock loads
TL\ m = nominal mean torsional stress referring to AT (i.e.
Tt. m = 0,5 (Tmax + Tmin)
Tf fatigue strength limit ( > 10
7
cycles) in reversed
torsion of an unnotched shaft
Tt{NL}= fatigue strength with NL stress cycles in reversed
Tt{N-yj = fatigue strength with NT stress cycles in reversed
NL = number of cycles with the stress range" T
NT = number of cycles with the vibratory torque of the
transient driving condition
TT = reference torsional strength for fatigue diagrams
"B = ultimate tensile strength of shaft material
"y = yield strength or 0,2 % proof stress of shaft mate-
rial
ad = nominal reversed bending stress amplitude
at = geometrical strest concentration factor in torsion
(Xb = geometrical stress concentration factor in bending
f3t = notch factor in torsion, referring to > 10
7
cycles
f3b = notch factor in bending, referring to > 10
7
cycles
13 m = notch factor in torsion, referring to < 10
3
cycles
f3nl = notch factor in torsion, referring to NL cycles
f3nt = notch factor in torsion, referring to NT cycles
'1t = notch sensitivity factor in torsion
'1b = notch sensitivity factor in bending
S = safety factor against fatigue (referred to stresses)
n = actual r.p.m.
no = r. p.m. corresponding to full power
.l = speed ratio n ~
d . = shaft dIameter ill mm
r = notch radius in nun
Ry = surface roughness peak to valley in micron.
304 Scantling criteria
The following four criteria are to be fulfilled for the entire
speed range covering all actual driving conditions.
The following safety factors S apply to all four criteria:
P1.4 Ch.2 Sec.6 - Page 27
S 1,8 for propeller shafts in way of propeller cone or
propeller flange, including the aft stem tube bearing
1,7 for propeller shafts inside stern tube
1,6 for propeller shafts in front of the forward stern
tube sealing box
1,5 for all other shafts (i.e. intermediate shafts and
shafts for auxiliaries). .
Criterion A:
The peak stresses for continuous running are limited to:
"y
Tm
+ Td:S: {3 13
m
S
The value of "y used in this formula is not to exceed 2/3 of
"B
Criterion B:
The high cycle (> 10
7
) dynamic stresses (i.e. continuous
operation) are limited to:
Tf ( ITml)
T d:S: 13 t S 1- ----:r.r-
If this limit is exceeded, that particular speed range or driv-
ing condition is to be barred for continuous operation. For
propulsion plants the speed range .l > 0,8 is not to be
barred for normal operation.
Criterion C:
The dynamic stresses with an accumulated number of NT
cycles 10
7
) due to transient conditions such as passing
through barred speed ranges or limited use of any barred
driving condition (e.g. cylinder misfiring), are to meet:
Tf(NT) ( ITml)
Td< 1---
- f3
nt
S TT
Criterion D:
The stress range with an accumulated number of NL cycles
1 0 7) due to start, stop, reversing, ice shock loads etc.
is limited to:
"T:S:2
Tf(NJ (1
f3n z
S
ITLl.m
l
)
TT
Special consideration to be given to extended. numbers of
running up to full load, e.g. short range ferries.
305 Bending influence
For shafts where the bending moment influence cannot be
neglected, Td is to be replaced with:
2 1 (f3b"d)2
Tde=.1 Td +"3 --p;-
306 Guidances and explanations to the stresses
Regarding" T
The extreme positive torsional stress may be due to full
power and misfiring condition, ice impact shocks, clutch
engaging shocks, etc. The extreme negative torsional stress
may be due to vibratory torques in the low speed range or
with zero pitch for controllable pitch propellers, or due to
vibratory torques in the low speed range or when reversing
with high power for fixed pitch propellers.
Regarding TT
May be calculated as
DET NORSKE VERITAS
If an impact vibration is expected to result in a high vibra-
tory velocity at the speed sensor of the governor, documen-
tation of the stability of the entire system (closed loop) may
be required.
C 500 Axial vibrations
501 Axial vibration calculations of the shafting system
may be required. As a minimum, such calculations are to
include (natural) frequency tables of all critical vibration
modes. All important data are to be given, such as estimated
masses, stiffnesses and damping. Significant data which
cannot be determined with sufficient reliability, are to be
used as a variable in a parameter study (this could e.g. apply
to the thrust bearing and foundation stiffness). The most
important excitation forces are to be determined and a forced
vibration analysis of these individual orders may be re-
quired.
502 Speed ranges where the axial vibrations exceed the
approved permissible limits, are to be barred for continuous
operation.
503 Axial vibrations may be reduced to permissible levels
for continuous operations by means of dampers.
504 Axial vibration measurements may be required. In-
struments, location of pick ups and measurement program
are to be agreed with the Society. A complete report on
measurements and analysis as well as conclusions is to be
submitted.
C 600 Whirling vibrations
601 Calculation of the natural whirling frequencies for the
shafting system may be required. The extent of the calcu-
lations is to be agreed in each case. Significant data which
cannot be reliably determined, are usually to be used as
variables in a parameter study.
602 Speed ranges where unacceptable whirling occurs, are
to be barred for continuous operation.
603 Whirling vibration measurements, outboard as well as
inboard, may be required. The extent and method are to be
specially agreed with the Society in each case.
C 700 Rotor critical speeds
701 Calculation of rotor critical speeds may be requested
for all shaft generators. However, this is mandatory for
some designs (see 702).
Critical speeds are to be at least 20 % off the actual speed
range. For electric machines the requirements in Sec.2 A200
with regard to accelerations apply.
702 For shaft generators larger than 600 kW with rota-
tional speed of 1200 r.p.m. or higher, calculations of crit-
ical speeds are to be carried out as outlined in 701.
Guidance note:
Calculations of rotor critical speed should take the stiffness of
generator housing and foundation into due consideration by a
parameter study.
---e-n-d---o-f---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e--n-o-t-e--
D 100 General
101 Shafts and shafting components are to be designed for
all relevant load conditions, e.g. rated power or overload,
including all driving conditions under which the plant may
be operated. Satisfactory safety against fatigue and slipping
is to be provided.
102 Shafts and shafting components are to be designed so
as to avoid fretting corrosion due to micro-movements be-
tween mating parts. Rotating bending moments and vibra-
tory torques may result in micro-movements under hubs,
sleeves, webs, bearing rings, etc. if the local friction stress
(pressure times coefficient of friction) is repeatedly exceeded
by the local shear stress in the mating surface.
103 In the following items 200 to 600 (included) accept-
ance criteria for various types of shafts are given. These
criteria are tailor made and simplified for the respective ap-
plications. If desired, these simplified methods may be re-
placed by more elaborate and accurate methods provided
that they are sufficiently substantiated and documented.
104 The simplified methods in 200 to 600 are based on
general fatigue technology assuming materials with appro-
priate cleanness and no significant imperfections.
D 200
201 Requirements and calculation methods for crankshafts
are described in Classification Note 41.3. These methods
apply to solid or semibuilt crankshafts of forged or cast
steel, and with each crank throw between main bearings.
Other types will be specially considered on basis of equiv-
alence with the above mentioned requirements.
202 Classification Note 41.3 covers scantling of crank-
shafts based on an evaluation of safety against fatigue in the
crankpin fillets, journal fillets and in the oil bores. When
applicable, highly slressed areas as e.g. fillets between offset
crankpins, welds in journals etc. are subject to special con-
sideration.
The fatigue criteria used in Classification Note 41.3, assume
that maximum -'and minimum bending stresses occur simul-
taneously with the maximum and minimum torsional
stresses, respectively (this assumption yields results which
are more or less on the safe side). If properly documented,
evaluation of fatigue under multiaxial stress conditions and
with rotating principal stress axis may replace the criteria
applied here.
Regarding safety versus slippage of semibuilt crankshafts,
Classification Note 41.3 also contains requirements. Fully
built crankshafts will be considered on basis of equivalence
with these requirements.
D 300 other than crankshafts
301 Generally, the methods outlined in 300 can be applied
to all kinds of shafts within the premises outlined in 302.
Shafts may also be approved on the basis of the simplified
methods described in the respective parts as 400 Propeller
shafts, 500 Intermediate shafts, and 600 Shafts for auxiliary
machinery.
400 to 600 include acceptance levels for transient conditions
such as passing through barred speed ranges. These accept-
ance levels apply only for a low number of accumulated
stress cycles. The use of these criteria is restricted to ap-
plications which accumulate less than approximately 10
5
cycles.
302 Shaft dimensions may be approved on the basis of
documentation of relevant fatigue considerations or, where
necessary, of fracture mechanics. Unless a special method
is preferred, the method outlined in 304 to 307 may be ap-
plied, provided the following conditions are met:
- materials are to be ductile ( > 5 % elongation)
- employed steel to be forged and to have ultimate tensile
strength not less than 400 N/mm
2
- no fretting or corrosion.
Regarding shaft areas to be crack detected, see B303.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
1
iJ
,J
o
J
(J
/)
(-)
As mentioned above, the nitriding process (the coupons) is
normally to be documented for each hardening batch and
each material charge. The use of coupons made of same
material type but not same charge may be accepted provided
that the manufacturer has a quality system which ensures
sufficient reproducability, see also 405 bottom.
408 For flame- or induction-hardened gears the process is
to be documented with a certificate (NV) containing:
- hardness profile at the flank
- hardness profile at the tooth root.
Before, respectively after each hardening batch, a represen-
tative test component normally from the same charge as the
actual gear is to be tested (a representative test component
is to have the same flank and root profile, but not necessarily
the same facewidth as the actual gear). The hardness as a
function of the depth is to be determined at the middle of the
flank and at the tooth root fillet at both forward (F) and
astern (A) flank of the tested tooth.
Those hardness measurements (HV with 10 to 50 N) are to
be made in 3 normal sections of the tooth, one module from
each end and one in the middle of the facewidth.
The depth measurements at each end, at one module from
each end and at tooth midsection are not to vary more than
+ 1- 10% from the average at that particular tooth flank (F
Table HI Summary of certification requirements
or A). Further, the difference between the depths at each
flank (F or A) is not to be more than 10 % of the mean value.
Each section being investigated is to be etched in order to
verify the uniformity of the depth of the hardened layer over
the whole flank and fillet.
Random tests by etching on the tooth ends of actual com-
ponents may be required by the surveyor.
As mentioned above the representative test component is
normally to be made from the same charge as the actual
gear. The use of same material type but not same charge
may be considered as mentioned in 405 bottom.
409 For summary of requirements for the certification of
materials and heat treatment of gearing, see Table B1.
410 100 % surface crack detection (W) by means of wet
fluorescent magnetic particle method is required for the
toothed area including ends of teeth. Upon request, liquid
penetrant may be considered. No cracks acceptable.
In case of shot peening, crack detection has to be made prior
to the peening process.
411 The tooth accuracy of pinions and wheels is to be
documented (TR in general, but W/NV may be required)
with reference to ISO 1328-1975 (preferably) or corre-
sponding national standard (if not fully covered by ISO).
Heat treatment
Flame- or
Test
Case Through
hardening
Nitriding induction
hardening
None
hardening
Chern. Camp. W W W W W
Ultrasonic W W W W W
Mechanical properties NVrw NV/W NV/W NVrw
Impact energy only NVrw
Hardness profile NV/W NV/W NV
Root space hardness NV
Flank hardness NVrw NVrw NV/W NV/W
.- ----
412 The fmal flank hardness to be measured directly on
the flanks at each 90 and with one measurement near each
end and one midface. The hardness may be measured using
a suitable portable hardness tester. Low force testers are
acceptable provided suitable surface fmish. Documentation
by (W) for transmitted power below 4000 kW, otherwise
(NV). In case of a low local surface hardness, a grinding
bum inspection may be required.
413 Visual inspection (NV) is to be carried out with spe-
cial attention to:
- surface roughness of flanks
- surface roughness of root fillets
- root fillet radius
- possible grinding notches of root fillet. Any grinding in
the root fillet area, and in particular when leaving notches
will result in reduction of permissible stresses. See Clas-
sification Note 41. 2 Pt. 3 Sec. 7.
501 Balancing of rotating parts is normally to be docu-
mented as follows:
Tip speed mls Static Dynamic
'" 50
W
> 40. and machined to give
concentric and unifonn cross W
sections
> 25, and not machined to give
I
sections
502 The accuracy of meshing is to be verified for all
meshes. This is to be done in the workshop in presence of
the surveyor. The journals are to be in their expected
working positions in the bearings. The mesh contact should
be consistent with that which would result in the required
load distribution at full load.
503 The gear transmission is normally to be spin tested in
the workshop in presence of the surveyor. Exceptions may
be considered on basis of the manufacturer's quality control.
During the spin test, the initial tooth contact pattern is to be
checked by means of a suitable lacquer applied before the
test.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
101 The gear is to be installed so that appropriate align-
ment and running conditions for the gear are maintained
under all operating conditions. In case of flexible mounting,
harmful vibrations are to be avoided.
102 Propulsion gears are normally to be secured with end
and side chocks. End chocks transmitting propeller thrust
are to be capable to transmit 3 times nominal thrust.
103 Excessive movements of flexibly mounted gears are
to be limited by stopper arrangements.
D 100 Gearing
101 Details on calculation of gearing is given in Classi-
of tooth root strength (fractures), surface durability (pitting,
spalling and case crushing), and scuffmg.
102 The gearing safety factors SF against tooth fracture,
SH against pitting/spalling/case crushing and Ss against
scuffing, are to be at least: .
s" S'"
Ss
Propulsion gears 1,55 1,20 1,5
Auxiliary gears 1,40 1,15 1,3
If an auxiliary gear is arranged as a power take-{)ff from the
main propulsion system, and a fracture of the auxiliary gear
may cause a consequential damage to the propulsion system,
the safety factor SF = 1,55 is to be applied also for the
auxiliary gear.
For scuffmg calculations the (FZG) class is assumed to drop
one class level during an oil change interval.
Regarding limitations of permissible torsional vibrations and
torsional impact vibrations, see Sec.6 C300 and Sec.6 C400,
respectively.
Safety factors for other purposes as those mentioned above
are found in the respective sections (e.g. Thrusters in Sec.S,
Jacking Gears in Sec. 11).
103 Reliability of gears documented by approved tests may
be accepted. Calculation methods other than given in Clas-
sification Note 41.2 may also be used. Required safety
margins will be specially considered.
201 Shafts are to fulfill the criteria in Sec.6 D.
respectively.
202 Shaft connections such as keyways, flange couplings,
shrinkfits (hub-shaft), clutches etc., see Sec.6.
D 300 Gear wheel
301 Welded gear wheels are to be stress relieved.
302 Shrink fitted rims are to have a safety factor of at least
2,0 against micromovements, based on the specified repeti-
tive peak torque and coefficients of friction as per following
table:
Steel!cast
Steel/Steel
iron incl.
nodular
cast iron
Rim heated in oil 0,13 0,10
Rim heated in gas furnace (but not
protected against oil penetration into
the mating surface)
0,15 0,12
Surfaces degreased and protected
0,18 0,14
against oil penetration
As an alternative to the analytical safety factor, the reliability
may be documented by full scale tests with an approved el-
evated torque.
D 400 Bearings
401 The thrust bearing and its foundation are to be of
sufficient stiffness to prevent harmful deflection and longi-
tudinal shaft vibrations.
402 Rolling bearings for propulsion purpose are normally
to have a full load calculated lifetime BlO of at least ap-
proximately:
- 40 000 h for propeller thrust bearing
- 30 000 h for other bearings.
Shorter lifetimes may be considered if suitable condition
monitoring devices are fitted, or if the service manual pre-
scribes suitable inspection intervals.
For astern propUlsion 5 % of these lifetimes are required.
For special vessels, as for instance units with the additional
class notation DYNPOS, shorter calculated lifetime will be
considered on basis of specified load characteristics and in-
spection intervals.
D 500 Gear casings
501 The gear casing with foundation is to be designed to
achieve appropriate alignment and rwming conditions for the
gear at all operating conditions.
502 Gear casings of welded constructions are normally to
be stress relieved. Cast casings may be required stress-re-
lieved.
503 Inspection openings are to be provided (if practicable)
to enable examination of the teeth of pinions and wheels.
504 Highly stressed fillets are to be smooth and without
unnecessary stress raisers.
505 Cast casings are to have gradual and smooth transi-
tions between thick and thin sections.
D 600 Lubrication
601 The lubrication oil is to be adequately distributed to
all bearings, gear meshes and other parts requiring lubri-
cation. The lubricating oil system is to be so arranged that
it will function satisfactorily, with the environmental condi-
tions as stated in Ch.l Sec.3 B201.
602 For gears with moderate flank loads and speeds, and
with rolling bearings all over a splash oil system may be
accepted.
pressure, efficient filtering is to be arranged. For nonre-
dundant units it must be possible to clean the filters without
interrupting the oil supply.
604 Single propulsion gears are to have a standby oil
pump (redundancy type Rl, i.e. maximum 30 s to re-es-
tablish function).
DET NORsKE VERITAS
,

J
,J
J
)
J
.)
)
,
This definition may also be used for nonlinear vibrations and
for synthesized linear vibrations where the average torque
(which is the average between the maximum and the mini-
mum torque) differs considerably from the effective driving
torque (often referred to as mean torque). In such cases, the
mean torque used in the various fatigue criteria (e.g. D300)
should be the above mentioned average torque.
TORQUE
_________ max

TIME
Transient conditions of importance in this context are:
- acceleration or deceleration through a barred speed range
- short term use of load or driving conditions which are
restricted for continuous operation.
303 Summary of permissible torsional vibrations for the
various components:
Crankshafts:
The requirements in D200 refer to Classification Note 41.3
for specific calculation of crankshafts. The following applies
to the entire speed range:
For type approved engines, the level of vibratory torsional
stresses is not to exceed the level which was the limit for the
type approval.
For case by case approvals, the vibratory torsional stresses
are to be used in the crankshaft scantling criteria, or, if de-
sired, the scantling criteria can be used in order to fmd the
maximum permissible vibratory torsional
Shafts:
Shaft scantlings are to meet the criteria in D300, or the cri-
teria in D400, D500 and D600.
For a given shaft design, the criteria in D300 can be used
to fmd the level of permissible torsional vibration stresses.
Alternatively, the respective direct formulae for permissible
torsional vibrations in D400, D500 and D600 can be ap-
plied.
Gear transmissions:
Torsional vibrations in gear transmissions affect the
pinion/wheels, shafts, couplings and bearings. Unless oth-
erwise approved the level of steady state torsional vibrations
are limited to:
- 35 % of the rated torque
- the mean torque at any low part load (no gear hammer)
- negative torques of 10% of To in unloaded branches (e.g.
power take-off) (applicable to normal conditions, for
temporary (misfiring) conditions, 15 % applies).
With this first limitation the highest permissible application
factor KA = 1,35. Note that the application factor used in
this connection only refers to the influence of torsional vi-
brations. Higher permissible values due to ice shocks (if ice
class notations) are acceptable and even required.
The above mentioned negative torques (torque reversals) in
unloaded branches may be increased if the bearings are sui-
table for the reSUlting lateral vibrations, and that the back-
lash in the gearing is relatively small.
For transient conditions such as passing quickly through a
resonance higher vibration levels may be accepted.
For shock loads, see 400.
Tooth couplings, clutches, friction connection, etc.:
In general the torsional vibration level is not to exceed the
premises for the approval of the actual components. Addi-
tionally, components with backlash are not to suffer cyclic
torque reversals in excess of 20 % of To unless specially
approved.
Elastic couplings:
The permissible vibratory torques (approved by the Society)
are not to be exceeded. The heat development is also to be
within the approved limits.
Vibration dampers:
Dampers having specially high dynamic load in the full
speed range, are to be considered against fatigue strength
of spring elements, influence of heat development, wear,
etc.
Alarm for unacceptable torsional vibrations may be re-
quired.
304 Engine speed ranges, driving conditions (for instance,
with attached machinery) or load conditions, where the lim-
itations mentioned in 303 are exceeded, are to be barred for
continuous operation.
If a barred speed range, a barred driving or load condition
is required, a corresponding signboard is to be fitted at the
manoeuvring stand and all tachometers are to be marked
with red, correspondingly, and the tachometers are to be
accurate within the tolerance: 0,01 no.
There is to be no barred speed range for normal propulsion
driving conditions in the operational range above 0,8 no.
For constant speed plants, the required non-barred speed
range will be specially considered, dependent on kind of
application (possible ice shocks etc.). However, no re-
striction in the operational range above 0,9 no is acceptable.
For transient conditions (see 302), the permissible vibration
levels are defined for components as shafts and gears etc.
Components where this is not defined, will be specially
considered dependent on kind of transient conditions.
305 Torsional vibration measurements may be required.
Types of instruments. location of measurements and the
measurement program are to be agreed to by the Society.
A complete report on measurements and analysis as well as
conclusions is to be submitted.
306 The governing system is to be stable during possible
internal or external disturbances (one cylinder misfiring.
shock loads, etc.). The stability of the system verified by
means of measurements (see 305) may be required.
C 400 Torsional impact vibrations
401 Calculations of torsional impact vibrations may be re-
quired. This applies to plants where significant shock loads
can occur, such as:
- short circuit in power take-off driven shaft generators
- switching star-delta in electric prime movers of thrusters
- clutching in with rapidly engaging clutch
- clutching in of shaft generators.
Such calculations are to take into account any kind of non-
linearities as e.g. progressive couplings or couplings with
abruptly changing characteristics.
The systems are generally to be laid out so as to avoid peak
loads in excess of 1,5 times the rated torque, unless all
components in the system are specially approved for higher
peak loads.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
c. Shafting Arrangement and Vibrations
C 100 Arrangement
101 The machinery and shafting are to be arranged so that
neither external nor internal (self generated) forces can cause
harmful effects to the performance of machinery and shaft-
ing.
The shafting system has to be evaluated for any external or
internal forces which may have an influence on the reliabil-
ity of the shafting system. For instance, the effects of ther-
mal expansion, misalignment forces, tooth coupling forces,
universal joint forces, flexible coupling reaction forces, hy-
drodynamic forces on propeller and uncovered propeller
shafts, movement of flexibly mounted machinery, distortion
of flexible pads, etc. are to be taken into account wherever
applicable.
102 A shaft sealing is to be arranged to prevent water from
gaining access to the internal spaces of the unit.
103 An effective sealing is to be provided to prevent sea-
water from gaining access to steel shafts, unless specially
approved corrosion-resistant steel is used. Hollow spaces
between propeller hub and shaft cone are to be filled with a
non-corrosive mineral grease.
104 A cover for the propeller nut with efficient sealing
against the hub is to be fitted. The cover is to be filled with
a non-corrosive mineral grease.
C 200 Shaft alignment
201 The shaft alignment is to result in acceptable bearing
reactions and bending moments.
For all propulsion plants the shaft alignment specification is
to be submitted. This is to contain all foreseen offsets from
a defined reference line, as well as the foreseen gap and sag
values, jacking loads etc.
202 Shaft alignment calculations are required approved for
propulsion plants comprising elements which are sensitive
to significant external bending moments. The calculations
are to ensure that proper bearing reactions and bending
moments are maintained under all operating conditions.
203 Shaft alignment calculations are always required for
approval of propulsion plants with:
- gear transmissions with 2 or more pinions driving the
output wheel
- direct coupled diesel engines with intermediate shafts di-
ameter > 400 mm.
204 The shaft alignment calculations are to include static
bending moments, bearing reactions, as well as proposed
alignment and are to take into account thermal rise when
applicable.
The calculations are to be made for the condition for which
the alignment takes place, as well as for the relevant unit
loading conditions, including propeller thrust when found
necessary.
Upper and lower permissible bearing reactions and bending
moments in the relevant unit loading conditions are to be
stated.
Guidance note:
In the case of very low bearing reactions the possible influence
on whirling resonances should be considered.
205 If a shaft alignment calculation is required approved,
the alignment is to be verified according to a reliable meas-
urement method in presence of the surveyor. Otherwise, the
manufacturers documentation of adherence to the shaft
alignment plan is sufficient.
C 300 Torsional vibrations
301 Torsional vibration calculations are to be submitted
for:
- all propulsion installations
- all auxiliary machinery systems of more than 200 kW,
which include reciprocating machinery andlor propeller.
The calculations are to include the entire plant and all pos-
sible combinations with attached machinery. When cou-
plings with nonlinear stiffness are used, the natural
frequency calculations are to be carried out at least for both
maximum and minimum occuring torsional stiffnesses.
Consideration should be given to the influence of tolerances
and ageing of elastic couplings.
For tunnel thrusters driven by electric or hydraulic motors,
calculation of the lowest natural frequency is sufficient.
All important data are to be given, such as estimated mass
moments of inertia, torsional stiffnesses, damping data and
necessary engine data for consideration of the excitations.
The calculations are to include frequency tables and vector
summations for all relevant vibration modes and orders.
Vibratory torques (stresses) for all significant orders are to
be calculated. If necessary, synthesis of all significant vi-
bratory torque components (orders) at different speeds in the
actual range are to be made.
For diesel engine installations the torsional vibrations in the
system are to be considered also with one cylinder misfiring
(misfiring = no fuel injection), i.e. a pure compres-
sion/expansion pressure curve.
1n addition to the pure misfiring condition which is a failure
mode, a certain irregularity is to be considered as a normal
mode. This irregularity is based on the assumption of an
arbitrary variation of cylinder pressures within one engine.
For multi-engine plants, the engines are to be assumed to
work in the least favourable phases.
The influence of this stochastic irregularity is to be taken as
a fraction of the result of the pure misfiring calculation, de-
pending on number of cylinders as:
TV = [T Vrnisfiring - T Videaa 2 ~ + T Videal
z = the number of cylinders
If any vibration condition is expected to result in a high vi-
bratory velocity at the position of the speed sensor of the
governor, documentation of the influence of the governing
system on the torsional vibrations, as well as the stability of
the entire system (closed loop), may be required.
302 Symbols and defmitions:
n
T
Tv
T
Tv
= revolutions per minute at which torsional character-
istics are considered.
= mean torque (Nm) at n r.p.m.
= vibratory torque amRlitude (Nm) at n r.p.m.
= shear stress (N/mm ) corresponding to T
= shear stress (N/mm2) corresponding to Tv.
T and Tv (T and Tv) are to be understood as functions of n.
The index 0 refers to maximum rated power and corre-
sponding r.p.m. The torque amplitude Tv may be deter-
mined from a synthesis of all relevant harmonic torque
components from all actual excitation sources in the plant.
Tv = 0,5 (maximum torque - minimum torque) during a
time interval covering the period of the lowest order
(including possible low beat orders).
DET NORSKE VERITAS
~

,]
,:]
/J
'J

i,]
~ .
. ...J
(J
o
For gears in redundant propulsion system where windmilling
can be hazardous, the units are to be provided with either
- shaft brake, or
- standby pump type Rl.
Redundant oil pumps are to have independent power sup-
plies.
E. Monitoring
101 The requirements are given in Table El.
Table El Monitoring of gear transmissions
Indi-
Automatic
Item Alarm start of Comments
cation
standby pump
Lubricating
See also
oil pressure, x x x
D604
low
Oil inlet and
if forced lu-
outlet tem- x
brication
perature
Sump level if splash lu-
and tcmper- x brication
ature only
if total output
All Journal
exceeding 20
and plain
MW or sin-
thrust bearing x x
gle input ex-
temperatures,
ceeding 12
high
MW
Rules for Mobile Otfshore Units, January 1996
101 The mounling of the gear" on its foundation is to be
inspected by the surveyor.
102 The function of the lubricating oil system and the
monitoring is to be verified by the surveyor.
103 For all gears where mesh inspection is possible in as-
sembled condition (i.e. excluding some kinds of epicyclic
gears and underwater thruster gears), the inspection men-
tioned in B503 is to be repeated after completed installation
including connection of all shafts.
F 200 Sea trial
201 For gears as mentioned in 103 all tooth contact pat-
terns are to be verified by the surveyor by using a thin suit-
able lacquer applied before the test. Usually the lacquer is
to be applied at a few teeth at every 90 degrees of pinion
andlor wheel.
In general the contact patterns are to be verified at least after
one part load and after full load running. If found necessary,
verification may be required at several part loads, andlor it
may be required to have the face load distribution verified
by strain gauge measurements. The tooth contact patterns
are to meet the approved specifications.
202 After the sea trial, the gear teeth are to be inspected
by the surveyor for possible wear marks or scuffmg (scor-
ing).
203 Shrunk on rims are to be inspected by the surveyor for
possible movement relative to the hub. Accessible rolling
bearings are normally to be inspected for possible rotation
of outer rings.
204 Oil temperature and casing temperature in way of
bearings are to be checked during the full load test.
DEY NORSKE VERITAS
SECTION 6
SHAFTING AND VIBRATIONS
Contents
A. General
A 100 Application
A 200 Documentation
B 100 General
B 200 Certification
C 100 Arrangement
D 100 General
D 200 Crankshafts
D 300 Shafts other than crankshafts
D 500 Intennediate shafts
D 800 Stem tube and bearings
D 1000 Flange couplings
D 11 00 Shrink fit couplings
D 1200 Clamp couplings
D 1300 Keyway connections
D 1400 Spline connections.
D 1500 Elastic couplings
D 1600 Tooth couplings
D 1700 Clutches
D 1800 Rotors of electric machines
E. Monitoring
A. General
A 100 Application
101 The rules apply to shafts, shaft couplings, clutches,
other power transmitting parts and systems for propulsion
and auxiliary machinery as specified in Sec.! AIOO.
102 For shafting components in turbines, gear trans-
missions and thrusters, see also respective sections. For
units with ice strengthening see Pt. 5 Ch.1.
A 200 Documentation
submitted:
Plans:
- shafting arrangement
- crankshaft WIth flanges, bolts and counterweights to-
gether with all data necessary for calculations, see Clas-
sification Note 41.3
- shafts for proI;JUlsion
- shafts for auxIliaries for which approval is required
- separate thrust bearings
- stem tube with bearings
- stem tube oil sealing boxes *
- gas-tight sealing boxes *
- clutches with particulars (see D !700) *
- elastic couplings with particulars (see D!500) *
- tooth couplings *
- other shaft couplings
- vibration damper (torsional or axial) with characteristics
(when applicable) *
- section of shaft generators, including details of shaft,
bearing arrangement and lubrication
- power take-off generators driven from the main ettgine
reduction gear, mcluding details oflubrication
- shaft alignment specification (see C200).
... Type approval required for standard designs.
The plans are to include relevant material data of all power
transmitting components.
Calculations:
- torsional vibration calculation (see C300)
- shaft alignment calculation (see C200)
- rotor critical speeds of shaft generator shafting (see
C700).
202 The following documentation is to be submitted upon
request:
- design concept evaluation (see C!ol)
- torslOnal impact vibration
- whirling vibrations calculation
- axial vibrations calculation
- component strength calculation
- system stability
- rotor critical speeds.
B 100 General
101 A MSA (see Sec.! C105) should specify all details on
items in 100 to 300.
102 Shafting components are to have Det Norske Veritas
(NV) category B certificates. For definitions, see Sec.!
CIOI. The category C certificates are to be NV or Work
certificates C'N). For definition of NV and W respectively,
see Sec.! C103.
103 For type approved components, see Sec.! C106.
104 Category B or C certificates (as listed in 200 and 300)
are not required for type aPl'roved couplings and clutches
for auxiliary purposes transIllltting less than 200 kW. How-
ever, the products must be marked traceable to the type ap-
proval certificate.
B 200 Certification
201 Certificates category B are required for:
- crankshafts
- power transmitting shafts for propUlsion
- flexible COUplings *
- tooth couplmgs *
- fluid couplings *
- flange couphngs, clamp couplings, shrink fit couplings,
etc. *
- clutches. *
... Certificate is not required for type approved couplings for auxiliary pur-
poses transmitting less than 200kW.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

,,)
[
.)

) )
) )
t
J
202 Category C certificates are required for testing and
inspection.
and mechanical properties (see Sec.! F200) are required for:
- crankshafts with integral coupling bolts (NV)
- propeller shafts (NV)
- intermediate shafts for propulsion (NV)
- shafts for auxiliaries C'N if transmitting > 100 kW, oth-
erwise TR)
- separate thrust bearing housings (yV)
and for major power transmitting parts in
- flexible couplings for propulsion (normally W, but NV
may be required for special designs)
- flexible couplings for auxiliary purpose (W) *
- tooth couplings (yV) *
- fluid couplings C'N) *
- flange couplings, clamp couplings, shrink fit couplings,
etc. (yV) *
- clutches for propulsion (normally W, but NV may be re-
quired for special designs)
- clutches for auxiliaries (yV). *
302 The manufacturer's ultrasonic test certificate is re-
quired for the following components:
- crankshafts
- propeller shafts
- intermediate shafts for propulsion
- shafts for auxiliaries.
Tab1e BI Summary of requirements in B200 and B300
Type
303 Surface crack detection by means of magnetic particle
inspection or dye penetrant is required for the following
components in way of zones with stress raisers:
- crankshafts (NVY.
- all shafts ** (NV), except auxiliary which requires C'N)
- all coupliJ:t$.s (yV) *
- clutches (W). *
...... For shafts with the pJain portions dimensioned close to the minimum
possible according to D300, crack detection may be reequired for the whole
shaft length.
No cracks acceptable.
304 In addition to visual and dimensional inspection
shafting components are subject to specially required in-
spections as e.g.:
- surface hardness and procedure tests for surface treated
crankshaft fillets (NV or W)
- torque twist characteristics for flexible couplings (NV or
- steel bonding (if applicable) for flexible couplings
(NV orW) *
- tooth accuracy for tooth (yV) *
- welding test procedures (N
- tests for oil sealing boxes
- pressure tests for gas tight sealing boxes C'N)
- the sterntube to be hydraulically tested to !,5 bar (W)
- lateral stiffness of laminated plates/membrane element
flexible couplings **
- axial stiffness of laminated plates/membrane element
- torsional stiffness of laminated plates/membrane element
flexible couplings. **
'" Certificate is not required for type approved couplings for auxiliary pur-
"' ... In the case where testing of the stiffness may not be an adequate method
Or may cause dama8"e to the partially assembled coupling, FEM analysis
may be used to satisty the reqUIrements.
The extent of these tests is subject to special agreements.
Category of certificate
e
of component
B
Material Ul1rasonic Surface crack Dimensional Special
certificate testing detection inspection inspection
Crankshaft NV NV W NV NV
if applicable
NVorW
Propeller shaft NV
NV")
W NV NV
Intermediate shaft NV NV") W NV NV
Shaft for auxiliary, transmitting> 100 kW W W W W
Shaft for auxiliary, transmitting < 100 kW TR
Separate thrust bearing NV W NV
Clutches * NV
NV
1)
W W
orW
Flexible couplings * NV
NV
1)
W W
orW
NVorW
Tooth couplings * NV W W W W
Other couplings * NV W W W
Bolts, keys and shear pins TR W
Stem tube w/bearings W W
Stem tube oil sealing boxes, outer and inner W
Gas-tight sealing boxes W
I) if specially required.
2) W may be accepted upon request when < 1000 kW.
... Certificate is not required for type approved couplings for auxiliary purposes transmitting less than 200 kW.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
SECTION 6
SHAFTING AND VIBRATIONS
Contents
A. General
A 100 Application
A 200 Documentation
B 100 General
B 200 Certification
C 100 Arrangement
D 100 General
D 200 Crankshafts
D 300 Shafts other than crankshafts
D 500 Intennediate shafts
D 800 Stem tube and bearings
D 1000 Flange couplings
D 11 00 Shrink fit couplings
D 1200 Clamp couplings
D 1300 Keyway connections
D 1400 Spline connections.
D 1500 Elastic couplings
D 1600 Tooth couplings
D 1700 Clutches
D 1800 Rotors of electric machines
E. Monitoring
A. General
A 100 Application
101 The rules apply to shafts, shaft couplings, clutches,
other power transmitting parts and systems for propulsion
and auxiliary machinery as specified in Sec.! AIOO.
102 For shafting components in turbines, gear trans-
missions and thrusters, see also respective sections. For
units with ice strengthening see Pt. 5 Ch.1.
A 200 Documentation
submitted:
Plans:
- shafting arrangement
- crankshaft WIth flanges, bolts and counterweights to-
gether with all data necessary for calculations, see Clas-
sification Note 41.3
- shafts for proI;JUlsion
- shafts for auxIliaries for which approval is required
- stem tube with bearings
- stem tube oil sealing boxes *
- gas-tight sealing boxes *
- clutches with particulars (see D !700) *
- elastic couplings with particulars (see D!500) *
- tooth couplings *
- other shaft couplings
- vibration damper (torsional or axial) with characteristics
(when applicable) *
- section of shaft generators, including details of shaft,
bearing arrangement and lubrication
- power take-off generators driven from the main ettgine
reduction gear, mcluding details oflubrication
- shaft alignment specification (see C200).
... Type approval required for standard designs.
The plans are to include relevant material data of all power
transmitting components.
Calculations:
- torsional vibration calculation (see C300)
- shaft alignment calculation (see C200)
- rotor critical speeds of shaft generator shafting (see
C700).
202 The following documentation is to be submitted upon
request:
- design concept evaluation (see C!ol)
- torslOnal impact vibration
- whirling vibrations calculation
- axial vibrations calculation
- component strength calculation
- system stability
- rotor critical speeds.
B 100 General
101 A MSA (see Sec.! C105) should specify all details on
items in 100 to 300.
102 Shafting components are to have Det Norske Veritas
(NV) category B certificates. For definitions, see Sec.!
CIOI. The category C certificates are to be NV or Work
certificates C'N). For definition of NV and W respectively,
see Sec.! C103.
103 For type approved components, see Sec.! C106.
104 Category B or C certificates (as listed in 200 and 300)
are not required for type aPl'roved couplings and clutches
for auxiliary purposes transIllltting less than 200 kW. How-
ever, the products must be marked traceable to the type ap-
proval certificate.
B 200 Certification
201 Certificates category B are required for:
- crankshafts
- power transmitting shafts for propUlsion
- flexible COUplings *
- tooth couplmgs *
- fluid couplings *
- flange couphngs, clamp couplings, shrink fit couplings,
etc. *
- clutches. *
DET NORSKE VERITAS

,,)
[
.)

) )
) )
t
J
202 Category C certificates are required for testing and
inspection.
and mechanical properties (see Sec.! F200) are required for:
- crankshafts with integral coupling bolts (NV)
- propeller shafts (NV)
- intermediate shafts for propulsion (NV)
- shafts for auxiliaries C'N if transmitting > 100 kW, oth-
erwise TR)
- separate thrust bearing housings (yV)
and for major power transmitting parts in
- flexible couplings for propulsion (normally W, but NV
may be required for special designs)
- flexible couplings for auxiliary purpose (W) *
- tooth couplings (yV) *
- fluid couplings C'N) *
- flange couplings, clamp couplings, shrink fit couplings,
etc. (yV) *
- clutches for propulsion (normally W, but NV may be re-
quired for special designs)
- clutches for auxiliaries (yV). *
302 The manufacturer's ultrasonic test certificate is re-
quired for the following components:
- crankshafts
- propeller shafts
- intermediate shafts for propulsion
- shafts for auxiliaries.
Tab1e BI Summary of requirements in B200 and B300
Type
303 Surface crack detection by means of magnetic particle
inspection or dye penetrant is required for the following
components in way of zones with stress raisers:
- crankshafts (NVY.
- all shafts ** (NV), except auxiliary which requires C'N)
- all coupliJ:t$.s (yV) *
- clutches (W). *
...... For shafts with the pJain portions dimensioned close to the minimum
possible according to D300, crack detection may be reequired for the whole
shaft length.
No cracks acceptable.
304 In addition to visual and dimensional inspection
shafting components are subject to specially required in-
spections as e.g.:
- surface hardness and procedure tests for surface treated
crankshaft fillets (NV or W)
- torque twist characteristics for flexible couplings (NV or
- steel bonding (if applicable) for flexible couplings
(NV orW) *
- tooth accuracy for tooth (yV) *
- welding test procedures (N
- tests for oil sealing boxes
- pressure tests for gas tight sealing boxes C'N)
- the sterntube to be hydraulically tested to !,5 bar (W)
- lateral stiffness of laminated plates/membrane element
- axial stiffness of laminated plates/membrane element
- torsional stiffness of laminated plates/membrane element
flexible couplings. **
'" Certificate is not required for type approved couplings for auxiliary pur-
"' ... In the case where testing of the stiffness may not be an adequate method
Or may cause dama8"e to the partially assembled coupling, FEM analysis
may be used to satisty the reqUIrements.
The extent of these tests is subject to special agreements.
Category of certificate
e
of component
B
Material Ul1rasonic Surface crack Dimensional Special
certificate testing detection inspection inspection
Crankshaft NV NV W NV NV
if applicable
NVorW
Propeller shaft NV
NV")
W NV NV
Intermediate shaft NV NV") W NV NV
Shaft for auxiliary, transmitting> 100 kW W W W W
Shaft for auxiliary, transmitting < 100 kW TR
Separate thrust bearing NV W NV
Clutches * NV
NV
1)
W W
orW
Flexible couplings * NV
NV
1)
W W
orW
NVorW
Tooth couplings * NV W W W W
Other couplings * NV W W W
Bolts, keys and shear pins TR W
Stem tube w/bearings W W
Stem tube oil sealing boxes, outer and inner W
Gas-tight sealing boxes W
I) if specially required.
2) W may be accepted upon request when < 1000 kW.
... Certificate is not required for type approved couplings for auxiliary purposes transmitting less than 200 kW.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
c. Shafting Arrangement and Vibrations
C 100 Arrangement
101 The machinery and shafting are to be arranged so that
neither external nor internal (self generated) forces can cause
harmful effects to the performance of machinery and shaft-
ing.
The shafting system has to be evaluated for any external or
internal forces which may have an influence on the reliabil-
ity of the shafting system. For instance, the effects of ther-
mal expansion, misalignment forces, tooth coupling forces,
universal joint forces, flexible coupling reaction forces, hy-
drodynamic forces on propeller and uncovered propeller
shafts, movement of flexibly mounted machinery, distortion
of flexible pads, etc. are to be taken into account wherever
applicable.
102 A shaft sealing is to be arranged to prevent water from
gaining access to the internal spaces of the unit.
103 An effective sealing is to be provided to prevent sea-
water from gaining access to steel shafts, unless specially
approved corrosion-resistant steel is used. Hollow spaces
between propeller hub and shaft cone are to be filled with a
non-corrosive mineral grease.
104 A cover for the propeller nut with efficient sealing
against the hub is to be fitted. The cover is to be filled with
a non-corrosive mineral grease.
201 The shaft alignment is to result in acceptable bearing
reactions and bending moments.
For all propulsion plants the shaft alignment specification is
to be submitted. This is to contain all foreseen offsets from
a defined reference line, as well as the foreseen gap and sag
values, jacking loads etc.
202 Shaft alignment calculations are required approved for
propulsion plants comprising elements which are sensitive
to significant external bending moments. The calculations
are to ensure that proper bearing reactions and bending
moments are maintained under all operating conditions.
203 Shaft alignment calculations are always required for
approval of propulsion plants with:
- gear transmissions with 2 or more pinions driving the
output wheel
- direct coupled diesel engines with intermediate shafts di-
ameter > 400 mm.
204 The shaft alignment calculations are to include static
bending moments, bearing reactions, as well as proposed
alignment and are to take into account thermal rise when
applicable.
The calculations are to be made for the condition for which
the alignment takes place, as well as for the relevant unit
loading conditions, including propeller thrust when found
necessary.
Upper and lower permissible bearing reactions and bending
moments in the relevant unit loading conditions are to be
stated.
Guidance note:
In the case of very low bearing reactions the possible influence
on whirling resonances should be considered.
205 If a shaft alignment calculation is required approved,
the alignment is to be verified according to a reliable meas-
urement method in presence of the surveyor. Otherwise, the
manufacturers documentation of adherence to the shaft
alignment plan is sufficient.
301 Torsional vibration calculations are to be submitted
for:
- all propulsion installations
- all auxiliary machinery systems of more than 200 kW,
which include reciprocating machinery andlor propeller.
The calculations are to include the entire plant and all pos-
sible combinations with attached machinery. When cou-
plings with nonlinear stiffness are used, the natural
frequency calculations are to be carried out at least for both
maximum and minimum occuring torsional stiffnesses.
Consideration should be given to the influence of tolerances
and ageing of elastic couplings.
For tunnel thrusters driven by electric or hydraulic motors,
calculation of the lowest natural frequency is sufficient.
All important data are to be given, such as estimated mass
moments of inertia, torsional stiffnesses, damping data and
necessary engine data for consideration of the excitations.
The calculations are to include frequency tables and vector
summations for all relevant vibration modes and orders.
Vibratory torques (stresses) for all significant orders are to
be calculated. If necessary, synthesis of all significant vi-
bratory torque components (orders) at different speeds in the
actual range are to be made.
For diesel engine installations the torsional vibrations in the
system are to be considered also with one cylinder misfiring
(misfiring = no fuel injection), i.e. a pure compres-
sion/expansion pressure curve.
1n addition to the pure misfiring condition which is a failure
mode, a certain irregularity is to be considered as a normal
mode. This irregularity is based on the assumption of an
arbitrary variation of cylinder pressures within one engine.
For multi-engine plants, the engines are to be assumed to
work in the least favourable phases.
The influence of this stochastic irregularity is to be taken as
a fraction of the result of the pure misfiring calculation, de-
pending on number of cylinders as:
TV = [T Vrnisfiring - T Videaa 2 ~ + T Videal
z = the number of cylinders
If any vibration condition is expected to result in a high vi-
bratory velocity at the position of the speed sensor of the
governor, documentation of the influence of the governing
system on the torsional vibrations, as well as the stability of
the entire system (closed loop), may be required.
302 Symbols and defmitions:
n
T
Tv
T
Tv
= revolutions per minute at which torsional character-
istics are considered.
= mean torque (Nm) at n r.p.m.
= vibratory torque amRlitude (Nm) at n r.p.m.
= shear stress (N/mm ) corresponding to T
= shear stress (N/mm2) corresponding to Tv.
T and Tv (T and Tv) are to be understood as functions of n.
The index 0 refers to maximum rated power and corre-
sponding r.p.m. The torque amplitude Tv may be deter-
mined from a synthesis of all relevant harmonic torque
components from all actual excitation sources in the plant.
Tv = 0,5 (maximum torque - minimum torque) during a
time interval covering the period of the lowest order
(including possible low beat orders).
DET NORSKE VERITAS
~

,]
,:]
/J
'J

i,]
~ .
. ...J
(J
o
For gears in redundant propulsion system where windmilling
can be hazardous, the units are to be provided with either
- shaft brake, or
- standby pump type Rl.
Redundant oil pumps are to have independent power sup-
plies.
E. Monitoring
101 The requirements are given in Table El.
Table El Monitoring of gear transmissions
Indi-
Automatic
Item Alarm start of Comments
cation
standby pump
Lubricating
See also
oil pressure, x x x
D604
low
Oil inlet and
if forced lu-
outlet tem- x
brication
perature
Sump level if splash lu-
and tcmper- x brication
ature only
if total output
All Journal
exceeding 20
and plain
MW or sin-
thrust bearing x x
gle input ex-
temperatures,
ceeding 12
high
MW
Rules for Mobile Otfshore Units, January 1996
101 The mounling of the gear" on its foundation is to be
inspected by the surveyor.
102 The function of the lubricating oil system and the
monitoring is to be verified by the surveyor.
103 For all gears where mesh inspection is possible in as-
sembled condition (i.e. excluding some kinds of epicyclic
gears and underwater thruster gears), the inspection men-
tioned in B503 is to be repeated after completed installation
including connection of all shafts.
F 200 Sea trial
201 For gears as mentioned in 103 all tooth contact pat-
terns are to be verified by the surveyor by using a thin suit-
able lacquer applied before the test. Usually the lacquer is
to be applied at a few teeth at every 90 degrees of pinion
andlor wheel.
In general the contact patterns are to be verified at least after
one part load and after full load running. If found necessary,
verification may be required at several part loads, andlor it
may be required to have the face load distribution verified
by strain gauge measurements. The tooth contact patterns
are to meet the approved specifications.
202 After the sea trial, the gear teeth are to be inspected
by the surveyor for possible wear marks or scuffmg (scor-
ing).
203 Shrunk on rims are to be inspected by the surveyor for
possible movement relative to the hub. Accessible rolling
bearings are normally to be inspected for possible rotation
of outer rings.
204 Oil temperature and casing temperature in way of
bearings are to be checked during the full load test.
DEY NORSKE VERITAS
101 The gear is to be installed so that appropriate align-
ment and running conditions for the gear are maintained
under all operating conditions. In case of flexible mounting,
harmful vibrations are to be avoided.
102 Propulsion gears are normally to be secured with end
and side chocks. End chocks transmitting propeller thrust
are to be capable to transmit 3 times nominal thrust.
103 Excessive movements of flexibly mounted gears are
to be limited by stopper arrangements.
D 100 Gearing
101 Details on calculation of gearing is given in Classi-
of tooth root strength (fractures), surface durability (pitting,
spalling and case crushing), and scuffmg.
102 The gearing safety factors SF against tooth fracture,
SH against pitting/spalling/case crushing and Ss against
scuffing, are to be at least: .
s" S'"
Ss
Propulsion gears 1,55 1,20 1,5
Auxiliary gears 1,40 1,15 1,3
If an auxiliary gear is arranged as a power take-{)ff from the
main propulsion system, and a fracture of the auxiliary gear
may cause a consequential damage to the propulsion system,
the safety factor SF = 1,55 is to be applied also for the
auxiliary gear.
For scuffmg calculations the (FZG) class is assumed to drop
one class level during an oil change interval.
respectively.
Safety factors for other purposes as those mentioned above
are found in the respective sections (e.g. Thrusters in Sec.S,
Jacking Gears in Sec. 11).
103 Reliability of gears documented by approved tests may
be accepted. Calculation methods other than given in Clas-
sification Note 41.2 may also be used. Required safety
margins will be specially considered.
201 Shafts are to fulfill the criteria in Sec.6 D.
respectively.
202 Shaft connections such as keyways, flange couplings,
shrinkfits (hub-shaft), clutches etc., see Sec.6.
D 300 Gear wheel
301 Welded gear wheels are to be stress relieved.
302 Shrink fitted rims are to have a safety factor of at least
2,0 against micromovements, based on the specified repeti-
tive peak torque and coefficients of friction as per following
table:
Steel!cast
Steel/Steel
iron incl.
nodular
cast iron
Rim heated in oil 0,13 0,10
Rim heated in gas furnace (but not
protected against oil penetration into
the mating surface)
0,15 0,12
Surfaces degreased and protected
0,18 0,14
against oil penetration
As an alternative to the analytical safety factor, the reliability
may be documented by full scale tests with an approved el-
evated torque.
D 400 Bearings
401 The thrust bearing and its foundation are to be of
sufficient stiffness to prevent harmful deflection and longi-
tudinal shaft vibrations.
402 Rolling bearings for propulsion purpose are normally
to have a full load calculated lifetime BlO of at least ap-
proximately:
- 40 000 h for propeller thrust bearing
- 30 000 h for other bearings.
Shorter lifetimes may be considered if suitable condition
monitoring devices are fitted, or if the service manual pre-
scribes suitable inspection intervals.
For astern propUlsion 5 % of these lifetimes are required.
For special vessels, as for instance units with the additional
class notation DYNPOS, shorter calculated lifetime will be
considered on basis of specified load characteristics and in-
spection intervals.
D 500 Gear casings
501 The gear casing with foundation is to be designed to
achieve appropriate alignment and rwming conditions for the
gear at all operating conditions.
502 Gear casings of welded constructions are normally to
be stress relieved. Cast casings may be required stress-re-
lieved.
503 Inspection openings are to be provided (if practicable)
to enable examination of the teeth of pinions and wheels.
504 Highly stressed fillets are to be smooth and without
unnecessary stress raisers.
505 Cast casings are to have gradual and smooth transi-
tions between thick and thin sections.
D 600 Lubrication
601 The lubrication oil is to be adequately distributed to
all bearings, gear meshes and other parts requiring lubri-
cation. The lubricating oil system is to be so arranged that
it will function satisfactorily, with the environmental condi-
tions as stated in Ch.l Sec.3 B201.
602 For gears with moderate flank loads and speeds, and
with rolling bearings all over a splash oil system may be
accepted.
pressure, efficient filtering is to be arranged. For nonre-
dundant units it must be possible to clean the filters without
interrupting the oil supply.
604 Single propulsion gears are to have a standby oil
pump (redundancy type Rl, i.e. maximum 30 s to re-es-
tablish function).
DET NORsKE VERITAS
,

J
,J
J
)
J
.)
)
,
This definition may also be used for nonlinear vibrations and
for synthesized linear vibrations where the average torque
(which is the average between the maximum and the mini-
mum torque) differs considerably from the effective driving
torque (often referred to as mean torque). In such cases, the
mean torque used in the various fatigue criteria (e.g. D300)
should be the above mentioned average torque.
TORQUE
_________ max

TIME
Transient conditions of importance in this context are:
- acceleration or deceleration through a barred speed range
- short term use of load or driving conditions which are
restricted for continuous operation.
303 Summary of permissible torsional vibrations for the
various components:
Crankshafts:
The requirements in D200 refer to Classification Note 41.3
for specific calculation of crankshafts. The following applies
to the entire speed range:
For type approved engines, the level of vibratory torsional
stresses is not to exceed the level which was the limit for the
type approval.
For case by case approvals, the vibratory torsional stresses
are to be used in the crankshaft scantling criteria, or, if de-
sired, the scantling criteria can be used in order to fmd the
maximum permissible vibratory torsional
Shafts:
Shaft scantlings are to meet the criteria in D300, or the cri-
teria in D400, D500 and D600.
For a given shaft design, the criteria in D300 can be used
to fmd the level of permissible torsional vibration stresses.
Alternatively, the respective direct formulae for permissible
torsional vibrations in D400, D500 and D600 can be ap-
plied.
Gear transmissions:
Torsional vibrations in gear transmissions affect the
pinion/wheels, shafts, couplings and bearings. Unless oth-
erwise approved the level of steady state torsional vibrations
are limited to:
- 35 % of the rated torque
- the mean torque at any low part load (no gear hammer)
- negative torques of 10% of To in unloaded branches (e.g.
power take-off) (applicable to normal conditions, for
temporary (misfiring) conditions, 15 % applies).
With this first limitation the highest permissible application
factor KA = 1,35. Note that the application factor used in
this connection only refers to the influence of torsional vi-
brations. Higher permissible values due to ice shocks (if ice
class notations) are acceptable and even required.
The above mentioned negative torques (torque reversals) in
unloaded branches may be increased if the bearings are sui-
table for the reSUlting lateral vibrations, and that the back-
lash in the gearing is relatively small.
For transient conditions such as passing quickly through a
resonance higher vibration levels may be accepted.
For shock loads, see 400.
Tooth couplings, clutches, friction connection, etc.:
In general the torsional vibration level is not to exceed the
premises for the approval of the actual components. Addi-
tionally, components with backlash are not to suffer cyclic
torque reversals in excess of 20 % of To unless specially
approved.
Elastic couplings:
The permissible vibratory torques (approved by the Society)
are not to be exceeded. The heat development is also to be
within the approved limits.
Vibration dampers:
Dampers having specially high dynamic load in the full
speed range, are to be considered against fatigue strength
of spring elements, influence of heat development, wear,
etc.
Alarm for unacceptable torsional vibrations may be re-
quired.
304 Engine speed ranges, driving conditions (for instance,
with attached machinery) or load conditions, where the lim-
itations mentioned in 303 are exceeded, are to be barred for
continuous operation.
If a barred speed range, a barred driving or load condition
is required, a corresponding signboard is to be fitted at the
manoeuvring stand and all tachometers are to be marked
with red, correspondingly, and the tachometers are to be
accurate within the tolerance: 0,01 no.
There is to be no barred speed range for normal propulsion
driving conditions in the operational range above 0,8 no.
For constant speed plants, the required non-barred speed
range will be specially considered, dependent on kind of
application (possible ice shocks etc.). However, no re-
striction in the operational range above 0,9 no is acceptable.
For transient conditions (see 302), the permissible vibration
levels are defined for components as shafts and gears etc.
Components where this is not defined, will be specially
considered dependent on kind of transient conditions.
305 Torsional vibration measurements may be required.
Types of instruments. location of measurements and the
measurement program are to be agreed to by the Society.
A complete report on measurements and analysis as well as
conclusions is to be submitted.
306 The governing system is to be stable during possible
internal or external disturbances (one cylinder misfiring.
shock loads, etc.). The stability of the system verified by
means of measurements (see 305) may be required.
401 Calculations of torsional impact vibrations may be re-
quired. This applies to plants where significant shock loads
can occur, such as:
- short circuit in power take-off driven shaft generators
- switching star-delta in electric prime movers of thrusters
- clutching in with rapidly engaging clutch
- clutching in of shaft generators.
Such calculations are to take into account any kind of non-
linearities as e.g. progressive couplings or couplings with
abruptly changing characteristics.
The systems are generally to be laid out so as to avoid peak
loads in excess of 1,5 times the rated torque, unless all
components in the system are specially approved for higher
peak loads.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
If an impact vibration is expected to result in a high vibra-
tory velocity at the speed sensor of the governor, documen-
tation of the stability of the entire system (closed loop) may
be required.
501 Axial vibration calculations of the shafting system
may be required. As a minimum, such calculations are to
include (natural) frequency tables of all critical vibration
modes. All important data are to be given, such as estimated
masses, stiffnesses and damping. Significant data which
cannot be determined with sufficient reliability, are to be
used as a variable in a parameter study (this could e.g. apply
to the thrust bearing and foundation stiffness). The most
important excitation forces are to be determined and a forced
vibration analysis of these individual orders may be re-
quired.
502 Speed ranges where the axial vibrations exceed the
approved permissible limits, are to be barred for continuous
operation.
503 Axial vibrations may be reduced to permissible levels
for continuous operations by means of dampers.
504 Axial vibration measurements may be required. In-
struments, location of pick ups and measurement program
are to be agreed with the Society. A complete report on
measurements and analysis as well as conclusions is to be
submitted.
601 Calculation of the natural whirling frequencies for the
shafting system may be required. The extent of the calcu-
lations is to be agreed in each case. Significant data which
cannot be reliably determined, are usually to be used as
variables in a parameter study.
602 Speed ranges where unacceptable whirling occurs, are
to be barred for continuous operation.
603 Whirling vibration measurements, outboard as well as
inboard, may be required. The extent and method are to be
specially agreed with the Society in each case.
701 Calculation of rotor critical speeds may be requested
for all shaft generators. However, this is mandatory for
some designs (see 702).
Critical speeds are to be at least 20 % off the actual speed
range. For electric machines the requirements in Sec.2 A200
with regard to accelerations apply.
702 For shaft generators larger than 600 kW with rota-
tional speed of 1200 r.p.m. or higher, calculations of crit-
ical speeds are to be carried out as outlined in 701.
Guidance note:
Calculations of rotor critical speed should take the stiffness of
generator housing and foundation into due consideration by a
parameter study.
---e-n-d---o-f---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e--n-o-t-e--
D 100 General
101 Shafts and shafting components are to be designed for
all relevant load conditions, e.g. rated power or overload,
including all driving conditions under which the plant may
be operated. Satisfactory safety against fatigue and slipping
is to be provided.
102 Shafts and shafting components are to be designed so
as to avoid fretting corrosion due to micro-movements be-
tween mating parts. Rotating bending moments and vibra-
tory torques may result in micro-movements under hubs,
sleeves, webs, bearing rings, etc. if the local friction stress
(pressure times coefficient of friction) is repeatedly exceeded
by the local shear stress in the mating surface.
103 In the following items 200 to 600 (included) accept-
ance criteria for various types of shafts are given. These
criteria are tailor made and simplified for the respective ap-
plications. If desired, these simplified methods may be re-
placed by more elaborate and accurate methods provided
that they are sufficiently substantiated and documented.
104 The simplified methods in 200 to 600 are based on
general fatigue technology assuming materials with appro-
priate cleanness and no significant imperfections.
D 200
201 Requirements and calculation methods for crankshafts
are described in Classification Note 41.3. These methods
apply to solid or semibuilt crankshafts of forged or cast
steel, and with each crank throw between main bearings.
Other types will be specially considered on basis of equiv-
alence with the above mentioned requirements.
202 Classification Note 41.3 covers scantling of crank-
shafts based on an evaluation of safety against fatigue in the
crankpin fillets, journal fillets and in the oil bores. When
applicable, highly slressed areas as e.g. fillets between offset
crankpins, welds in journals etc. are subject to special con-
sideration.
The fatigue criteria used in Classification Note 41.3, assume
that maximum -'and minimum bending stresses occur simul-
taneously with the maximum and minimum torsional
stresses, respectively (this assumption yields results which
are more or less on the safe side). If properly documented,
evaluation of fatigue under multiaxial stress conditions and
with rotating principal stress axis may replace the criteria
applied here.
Regarding safety versus slippage of semibuilt crankshafts,
Classification Note 41.3 also contains requirements. Fully
built crankshafts will be considered on basis of equivalence
with these requirements.
D 300 other than crankshafts
301 Generally, the methods outlined in 300 can be applied
to all kinds of shafts within the premises outlined in 302.
Shafts may also be approved on the basis of the simplified
methods described in the respective parts as 400 Propeller
shafts, 500 Intermediate shafts, and 600 Shafts for auxiliary
machinery.
400 to 600 include acceptance levels for transient conditions
such as passing through barred speed ranges. These accept-
ance levels apply only for a low number of accumulated
stress cycles. The use of these criteria is restricted to ap-
plications which accumulate less than approximately 10
5
cycles.
302 Shaft dimensions may be approved on the basis of
documentation of relevant fatigue considerations or, where
necessary, of fracture mechanics. Unless a special method
is preferred, the method outlined in 304 to 307 may be ap-
plied, provided the following conditions are met:
- materials are to be ductile ( > 5 % elongation)
- employed steel to be forged and to have ultimate tensile
strength not less than 400 N/mm
2
- no fretting or corrosion.
Regarding shaft areas to be crack detected, see B303.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
1
iJ
,J
o
J
(J
/)
(-)
As mentioned above, the nitriding process (the coupons) is
normally to be documented for each hardening batch and
each material charge. The use of coupons made of same
material type but not same charge may be accepted provided
that the manufacturer has a quality system which ensures
sufficient reproducability, see also 405 bottom.
408 For flame- or induction-hardened gears the process is
to be documented with a certificate (NV) containing:
- hardness profile at the flank
- hardness profile at the tooth root.
Before, respectively after each hardening batch, a represen-
tative test component normally from the same charge as the
actual gear is to be tested (a representative test component
is to have the same flank and root profile, but not necessarily
the same facewidth as the actual gear). The hardness as a
function of the depth is to be determined at the middle of the
flank and at the tooth root fillet at both forward (F) and
astern (A) flank of the tested tooth.
Those hardness measurements (HV with 10 to 50 N) are to
be made in 3 normal sections of the tooth, one module from
each end and one in the middle of the facewidth.
The depth measurements at each end, at one module from
each end and at tooth midsection are not to vary more than
+ 1- 10% from the average at that particular tooth flank (F
Table HI Summary of certification requirements
or A). Further, the difference between the depths at each
flank (F or A) is not to be more than 10 % of the mean value.
Each section being investigated is to be etched in order to
verify the uniformity of the depth of the hardened layer over
the whole flank and fillet.
Random tests by etching on the tooth ends of actual com-
ponents may be required by the surveyor.
As mentioned above the representative test component is
normally to be made from the same charge as the actual
gear. The use of same material type but not same charge
may be considered as mentioned in 405 bottom.
409 For summary of requirements for the certification of
materials and heat treatment of gearing, see Table B1.
410 100 % surface crack detection (W) by means of wet
fluorescent magnetic particle method is required for the
toothed area including ends of teeth. Upon request, liquid
penetrant may be considered. No cracks acceptable.
In case of shot peening, crack detection has to be made prior
to the peening process.
411 The tooth accuracy of pinions and wheels is to be
documented (TR in general, but W/NV may be required)
with reference to ISO 1328-1975 (preferably) or corre-
sponding national standard (if not fully covered by ISO).
Heat treatment
Flame- or
Test
Case Through
hardening
Nitriding induction
hardening
None
hardening
Chern. Camp. W W W W W
Ultrasonic W W W W W
Mechanical properties NVrw NV/W NV/W NVrw
Impact energy only NVrw
Hardness profile NV/W NV/W NV
Root space hardness NV
Flank hardness NVrw NVrw NV/W NV/W
.- ----
412 The fmal flank hardness to be measured directly on
the flanks at each 90 and with one measurement near each
end and one midface. The hardness may be measured using
a suitable portable hardness tester. Low force testers are
acceptable provided suitable surface fmish. Documentation
by (W) for transmitted power below 4000 kW, otherwise
(NV). In case of a low local surface hardness, a grinding
bum inspection may be required.
413 Visual inspection (NV) is to be carried out with spe-
cial attention to:
- surface roughness of flanks
- surface roughness of root fillets
- root fillet radius
- possible grinding notches of root fillet. Any grinding in
the root fillet area, and in particular when leaving notches
will result in reduction of permissible stresses. See Clas-
sification Note 41. 2 Pt. 3 Sec. 7.
501 Balancing of rotating parts is normally to be docu-
mented as follows:
Tip speed mls Static Dynamic
'" 50
W
> 40. and machined to give
sections
> 25, and not machined to give
I
sections
502 The accuracy of meshing is to be verified for all
meshes. This is to be done in the workshop in presence of
the surveyor. The journals are to be in their expected
working positions in the bearings. The mesh contact should
be consistent with that which would result in the required
load distribution at full load.
503 The gear transmission is normally to be spin tested in
the workshop in presence of the surveyor. Exceptions may
be considered on basis of the manufacturer's quality control.
During the spin test, the initial tooth contact pattern is to be
checked by means of a suitable lacquer applied before the
test.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
agreed with the surveyor.
401 The requirements in 400 apply to the toothed parts of
pinions and wheels, see also 301.
402 The following certificates (W) are required for all
kinds of steel:
- chemical composition
- ultrasonic test.
For steels which are not subjected to further core heat
treatment (i.e. soft unhardened steels, nitrided steels,
flame-or induction hardened steels), the mechanical proper-
ties (see Sec. 1 F200) are also to be certified (NV for trans-
mitted power > 1000 kW, otherwise W).
403 For non surface hardened steels a certificate of me-
chanical properties after fmal heat treatment is required (NV
for transmitted power> 1000 kW, otherwise W) (see Sec. 1
F200).
404 For case hardening it is required that:
- core hardenability (Jominy) is randomly checked
- suitable heat treatment is made prior to machining in or-
der to avoid excessive distortions during quenching
- carburizing is made in a controlled furnace atmosphere.
The furnace is to be equipped with carbon potential con-
trols and continuously recorded
- the entire case hardening process is checked by means
of coupons (see 405) at regular intervals (e.g. every 5th
batch) with regard to:
- the surface microstructure:
- to be martensitic with allowance for up to 20 % re-
tained austenite. A higher amount of retained aus-
tenite, up to 30 %, may be considered for
acceptance provided that the endurance limits used
in Classification Note 41.2 Pt.2 Sec.7 and Pt.3
Sec.7 are reduced with 5% and 10% respectively
(note that the coupon surface has to be represen-
tative for the fmished surface of the tooth flank
respectively root). Further, the scuffmg is influ-
enced as mentioned in Classification Note 41.2
PtA Sec.2 C
- net or bone (semi- or non-continuous) carbides are
not to be visible at a magnification of 500. Only
fme dispersed individual carbides are allowed
- decarburization is not to be visible at a magnifica-
tion of 500
- oxidation, maximum 0,02 mm
- the core microstructure:
- to be martensitic/bainitic with no free ferrite.
The manufacturer is to have quality control procedures
which foresee the above mentioned, and the surveyor is to
carry out regular audits.
405 The case hardening process is normally to be docu-
mented for each hardening batch and each material charge
with a certificate containing:
- hardness profile
- core impact energy (KV) (regarding extent, see also end
of this paragraph).
NV certificate is required when the transmitted power ex-
ceeds 1000 k W, otherwise W.
it. The coupon is to be taken in tangential (see also Sec. 1
F202) direction and is not to be separately forged.
The coupon diameter is not to be less than 2II\t, minimum
20 mm. Further, the size is to be sufficient for making 2 test
pieces for impact energy (KV) of the. core.
The hardness profile (hardness as a function of depth) is to
be determined by hardness measurements with a load of 10
to 50 N. The measurements are to be made from the surface
to the core. The expected amount of grinding is to be sub-
tracted.
It is required that the depths to 550 HV, 400 HV and 300
HV, and the core hardness are documented to be within the
approved specification. Further, the hardness at any point
below the surface is not to exceed the surface hardness (be-
fore grinding) with more than 30 HV. The core impact en-
ergy is not to be less than approved specification but not less
than 30 J unless specially approved (see also Sec. 1 F202).
As mentioned above, the case hardening process (the cou-
pons) is normally to be documented for each hardening
batch and each material charge. The use of coupons made
of same material type but not same charge may be accepted
provided that the manufacturer has a quality system which
ensures sufficient reproducability. In particular, the limits
of elements in the chemical composition combined with the
respective heat treatment processes must ensure that the re-
quired core properties are obtained and documented. A re-
duced extent of impact'testing may also be considered for
gears with shallow or medium case depth (e.g. less than 1,5
mm to 550 HV), provided that relevant conditions are de-
fined in a MSA. These conditions relate to specifications of
incoming material and the heat heatment control.
406 Case hardened gears are to have a minimum tooth root
space hardness of 58 HRC over the entire facewidth, other-
wise a reduction of permissible tooth root stresses applies,
see Classification Note 41.2 Part 3, Sec.7.
Manufacturers may carry out NV approved procedure tests
in order to document the permissible sizes for their various
material types. Components of smaller sizes than the ap-
proved need no documentation of tooth root hardness.
If a component exceeds the approved size, or the manufac-
turer has not carried out an approved procedure test, the
tooth root space hardness is to be checked at midface in the
presence of the surveyor. If this hardness is less than the
approved minimum (58 HRC if nothing else is specified),
this measurement is to be carried out over the entire facew-
idth.
407 For nitrided gears the process is to be documented for
each nitriding batch and material charge with a certificate
(W) containing:
- hardness profile
- white layer thickness.
it.
The coupon diameter is not to be less than 2m
n
. The hard-
ness profile (hardness as a function of depth) is to be deter-
mined by hardness measurements with a load of 10 to 50
N. The measurements are to be made from the surface to the
core. If further grinding is intended (and is approved), the
expected amount is to be subtracted.
It is reqnired that the depth to 400 HV and the core hardness
are documented to be within the approved specification.
The white layer thickness (as tested on coupon) is not to
exceed 20/Lm .
DET NORSKE VERITAS
)
J
,)
J
/)
J
) )
To be specially considered:
- credit for surface hardened parts
- stainless steel exposed to sea water
- chrome plating, metal spraying or similar.
303 Defmitions and symbols
All stresses are in N/mm
2
.
Tm = nominal mean torsional stress (at any given driving
condition)
Td = nominal dynamic torsional stress amplitude (at any
given driving condition)
This includes all cyclic repetitive stresses as found
by measurements or by calculations. For diesel
engines this also comprises the misfiring condi-
tion, i.e. where one cylinder acts without fuel in-
jection but with compression impulses. For plants
where an analysis indicates no significant torsional
dynamics, there are to be considered a minimum
of Td due to torque fluctuations owing to rough
sea, etc. Td ~ 0,1 Tm (Td has a wider meaning than
Tv (vibratory) as Tv is only due to torsional vi-
brations, whilst Td also comprises the possible re-
petitive shock loads (ice, clutching in, etc.), and
repetitive overloads)
Tde equivalent torsional stress amplitude according to
von Mises
A l' nominal shear stress range, being the range be-
tween the outmost positive T max and the outmost
negative Tmin torsional stress, within the entire
speed range covering all possible driving condi-
tions and possible shock loads
TL\ m = nominal mean torsional stress referring to AT (i.e.
Tt. m = 0,5 (Tmax + Tmin)
Tf fatigue strength limit ( > 10
7
cycles) in reversed
Tt{NL}= fatigue strength with NL stress cycles in reversed
Tt{N-yj = fatigue strength with NT stress cycles in reversed
NL = number of cycles with the stress range" T
NT = number of cycles with the vibratory torque of the
transient driving condition
TT = reference torsional strength for fatigue diagrams
"B = ultimate tensile strength of shaft material
"y = yield strength or 0,2 % proof stress of shaft mate-
rial
ad = nominal reversed bending stress amplitude
at = geometrical strest concentration factor in torsion
(Xb = geometrical stress concentration factor in bending
f3t = notch factor in torsion, referring to > 10
7
cycles
f3b = notch factor in bending, referring to > 10
7
cycles
13 m = notch factor in torsion, referring to < 10
3
cycles
f3nl = notch factor in torsion, referring to NL cycles
f3nt = notch factor in torsion, referring to NT cycles
'1t = notch sensitivity factor in torsion
'1b = notch sensitivity factor in bending
S = safety factor against fatigue (referred to stresses)
n = actual r.p.m.
no = r. p.m. corresponding to full power
.l = speed ratio n ~
d . = shaft dIameter ill mm
r = notch radius in nun
Ry = surface roughness peak to valley in micron.
304 Scantling criteria
The following four criteria are to be fulfilled for the entire
speed range covering all actual driving conditions.
The following safety factors S apply to all four criteria:
P1.4 Ch.2 Sec.6 - Page 27
S 1,8 for propeller shafts in way of propeller cone or
propeller flange, including the aft stem tube bearing
1,7 for propeller shafts inside stern tube
1,6 for propeller shafts in front of the forward stern
tube sealing box
1,5 for all other shafts (i.e. intermediate shafts and
shafts for auxiliaries). .
Criterion A:
The peak stresses for continuous running are limited to:
"y
Tm
+ Td:S: {3 13
m
S
The value of "y used in this formula is not to exceed 2/3 of
"B
Criterion B:
The high cycle (> 10
7
) dynamic stresses (i.e. continuous
operation) are limited to:
Tf ( ITml)
T d:S: 13 t S 1- ----:r.r-
If this limit is exceeded, that particular speed range or driv-
ing condition is to be barred for continuous operation. For
propulsion plants the speed range .l > 0,8 is not to be
barred for normal operation.
Criterion C:
The dynamic stresses with an accumulated number of NT
cycles 10
7
) due to transient conditions such as passing
through barred speed ranges or limited use of any barred
driving condition (e.g. cylinder misfiring), are to meet:
Tf(NT) ( ITml)
Td< 1---
- f3
nt
S TT
Criterion D:
The stress range with an accumulated number of NL cycles
1 0 7) due to start, stop, reversing, ice shock loads etc.
is limited to:
"T:S:2
Tf(NJ (1
f3n z
S
ITLl.m
l
)
TT
Special consideration to be given to extended. numbers of
running up to full load, e.g. short range ferries.
305 Bending influence
For shafts where the bending moment influence cannot be
neglected, Td is to be replaced with:
2 1 (f3b"d)2
Tde=.1 Td +"3 --p;-
306 Guidances and explanations to the stresses
Regarding" T
The extreme positive torsional stress may be due to full
power and misfiring condition, ice impact shocks, clutch
engaging shocks, etc. The extreme negative torsional stress
may be due to vibratory torques in the low speed range or
with zero pitch for controllable pitch propellers, or due to
vibratory torques in the low speed range or when reversing
with high power for fixed pitch propellers.
Regarding TT
May be calculated as
DET NORSKE VERITAS
O"B ( O"B)
-rT =.J3 2- 1200
Regarding -rf
If reliable values (50 % survival probability) for -rf are not
available, -rf may be calculated on basis of O"y and O"B taking
into account the surface fInish, size effect and the fibre di-
rection influence as follows:
-rf = f (O"y) f (R
y
, O"B) f (d, r) f ( fibre direction)
f( O"B) = 0,25 O"y + 45 for forged or hot rolled steel.
= 0,15 O"B + 40 for cast steel.
(fatigue strength of 10 mm diameter plain spec-
imen with Ry = 10 micron and f (fibre direc-
tion) = 1)
The formulae are only valid for steels heat
treated in snch a way that a fine grain structure
and high toughness is obtained. The impact
energy is to meet a level which is representative
fur the actual type of steel.
O"B
f(Ry, O"B) = 1- 4000 10g(Ry/lO)
(surface roughness factor)
fed, r) = 0,8 + 2/d
(size factor for plain shafts including shafts with
flanges)
fed, r) = 0,9 + lIr
(size factor for notched shafts)
(if r < 10, use fed, r) = 1)
Usually f (fibre direction) = 0,9.
However, 1,0 may be used if the material has
a sufficiently high toughness (impact energy) in
the direction of the maximum principal stress.
Sufficiently high means a level of at least the
prescribed minimum in the longitudinal grain
flow direction according to the actual material
standard.
Regarding -r
y
, static strength
For less than 10
3
cycles the static strength amplitude of
O"y
-ry = .J3
applies, where O"y is not to be taken more than 2/3 O"B in this
formula.
307 Guidance and explanations to the notch factors
Regarding p" Pb
When reliable values are not available, the notch factors may
be evaluated as:
P
t
= 1 + 'It (at-I)
Pb = 1 + '1b (ab- I)
'It = 1-0,6 (I-'1b) = 0,4 + 0,6'1b
'1b = 0,62 + 0,2 log(r) + O"y 10-
4
log(400/r)
If calculated> 1, '1b = 1 applies.
(for holes and slots, r = d
h
/2 and e/2, respectively)
Regarding Pm
The <static. notch factor 10
3
cycles) may be calculated
as:
Pm = 1 + (at-I) (O"y/IOOO)2
If calculated> a" Pm = at applies.
308 For use in criterion C and D the shaft futigue strength
for limited life can be found by linear interpolation in a
10g-r-logN diagram between <static. strength for < 10
3
cy-
cles and endurance strength for> 10
7
cycles.
I""
l!(NL)IPcJ

-----..-
raP,
.---.-L._ ... _ .. __ oj. _____ _
Ii!

I
i
Ii'
Nuo
4
NT 10
6
10
7
Mathematically expressed for x cycles
TyP
t
0,25Iog--
-rf(x) =.2 ( 10
7
) Pm Tf
P
x
P
t
X
Regarding at. ab
log N
The geometrical stress concentration factors can he docu-
mented by measurements or taken from recognized literature
or from the following simplified guidance which covers the
most common shaft stress raisers:
- keyway in shaft:
at = 2,15 + 0,0125 d/r
- shaft with flange or diameter increase of 50% or more,
and inner bore of less than 50% of the smaller outer di-
ameter d:
at = 1,03 + 0,04 d/r
valid for rid <e: 0,08
- shaft with shoulder fillet with diameter increase up to
20% (Did < 1,2):
1
at = 1+ 0,15 (1 + 0,1 d/r) [10 ( - 1) r
valid for rid> 0,01
- shaft with radial hole, central bore less than 50% of d,
hole diameter dh in the range 0,05 to 0,25 of d, and edge
rounding radius r in the range 0,1 to 0,6 of dh:
at = 2,4 (1,04 - 0,4 r/dhl
(if the radial bore intersects with an eccentric axial bore
the at should be increased by 5-10% for an eccentricity
of 50-75 % of the outer radius)
- shaft with longitudinal slot. L = total length of slot, e
= breath of slot. The ends of the slot are to be semicir-
cular, and the rounding edge radius r in the range 0,1 to
0,6 of e:
at = [2,4 + 2,2 (L-e)/d] (1,04-0,4 r/e)
valid for
central bore d
i
< 0,5d
slot width e = 0,05d - 0,I5d
DET NORSKE VERITAS
)
.
()
) !J
)
t)
ticulars and heat treatment after welding are to be speci-
fied on the plans.
Finishing process:
- finishing method of tooth flanks
- shot peening parameters, if applicable
- maximum mean surface roughness Rz of tooth flanks
- maximum surface roughness Ry of tooth root fillets
- amount of tooth flank correchons (tip-relief, end-relief,
root-relief, crowning and helix correction), if any
- specified grade of accuracy according to ISO 1328 - 1975
(if the facewidths exceed 160 mm, the alignment toler-
ances should be specially given for both gearing and
housing bore)
- special flank alignment tolerances due to special control
procedure and requirements to the assembled and
mounted gear, if any
- amount of shrinkage with tolerances in case of shrink-
fitted pinions, wheel rims or hubs
- information regarding procedure for shrinking of gear
wheel rims and! or measures proposed for securing the
rim.
Lubrication:
- specified grade of oil
- kinematic viscosity (mm2/s) at 40"C
- minimum scuffing class (FZG or equivalent)
- expected maximum oil inlet temperature COC) when op-
erating at maximum continuous power
- lubrication oil system, schematic
- alarm high level (if applicable) on lubrication oil inlet
temperature.
Bearings:
- calculated lifetime (BIO) of rolling bearings
- material specification and clearances (tolerances) for plain
bearings.
202 /For gear transmissions which have been given a type
approval on the basis of plans and particulars listed in 201,
no drawings will normally be required, provided no signif-
icant alterations of arrangement, design, scantlings or mate-
rials have been made.
301 If the approval is to be based on fatigue data from
tests, all particulars on the tests are to be submitted for
consideration. The fatigue data are to be evaluated with re-
spect to a 99 % survival probability.
302 Gear rating factors which are different from those
used in Classification Note 41.2, are to be presented to-
gether with a brief documentation.
303 Calculation of safety against micromovement of
shrinkfitted rims.
304 Tooth contact pattern requirements at defined part
load(s). This is to verify that the specified maximum per-
missible faceload distribution factor is not exceeded.
B 100 General
101 The MSA (see Sec. 1 C 105) should specify all details
on testing and inspection, inclusive acceptance criteria for
all items mentioned in 100 to 500.
102 For case hardened steels of approved high grade (see
Classification Note 41.2) used in gearing designed for infi-
nite life, it is provided that:
- the cleanness as per ISO 4967 is checked for every
charge
- the grain size is No.6 or fmer per ISO 643 or ASTM
E1l2. Random tests are required.
103 For type approved gears, see Sec. 1 C106.
B 200 Certification
201 A gear transmission is to have Det Norske Veritas
(NV) category A certificate, see Sec. 1 CIOO.
202 NV certificates category B are required for
- pinions and wheels
- built in clutches (see Sec.6 B200 and B300)
- built in tooth couplings (see Sec.6 B200 and B300).
spection.
B 300 Testing and inspection of elements other than
gearing
301 The requirements in 300 apply to all transmission
components other than the toothed parts of pinions and
wheels. For instance for welded gear wheels the require-
ments to welding tests are found in 300, and the require-
ments of the toothed rims in 400.
302 Testing of chemical compositions and mechanical
properties (see Sec. 1 F200) are required for:
- shafts (yI)
- hubs (yI)
- power transmitting bolts and shearpins (TR)
- casings for propUlsion gears (yI).
303 Ultrasonic test (!IV) is required for shafts, and if spe-
cially required, also for hubs.
304 Stress relieving of welded components such as gear
wheels and casings is to be documented (W) by time-temp-
erature diagrams.
305 X-ray or ultrasonic tests (yI) of welds is required in
power transmitting parts as e.g. gearwheels. The welds are
to be judged according to ISO 5817 .arc-welded joints in
steel-guidance on quality levels for imperfections, and are
at least to meet the requirements for quality level B.
306 Surface crack detection (yI) by means of wet floures-
cent magnetic particle method is required for:
- shafts (in way of stress raisers)
- hubs (in way of stress raisers)
- shrink fit surfaces
- welds in power transmitting parts (100 % to be tested)
- welds in casings in way of bearings (at least 10% to be
tested).
Upon request, liquid penetrant may replace m.p.i. for not
surface hardened components ..
307 Surface hardness measurements (!IV) are required for
surface hardened shafts. The depth of the hardened layer is
to be documented (TR) by a suitable method.
308 Documentation of chrome plating or similar is subject
to .gpecial consideration.
309 Dimension of shrink fit connections, and adherence to
tolerances for keyed connections, spline connections and
bearings are to be documented (yI).
DET NORSKE VERITAS
SECTION 5
GEAR TRANSMISSIONS
Contents
A. General
A 100 Application
A 200 Documentation
B 100 General
B 200 Certification
B 300 Testing and inspection of elements other than gearing
D 100 Gearing
D 300 Gear wheel
D 400 Bearings
D 500 Gear casings
D 600 Lubrication
E. Monitoring
F 200 Sea trial
A. General
A 100 Application
101 The rules apply to gear transmissions for propulsion
and auxiliary machinery as specified in Sec. 1 A100.
102 This section applies to the gearing, shafts, other power
transmitting elements, bearings, monitoring and lub oil sys-
tem and casing used in gear transmissions.
103 For units with ice strengthening, see Pt.5 Ch.1.
104 For gear rating calculations a Classification Note 41.2
is available.
A 200 Documentation
201 The following plans and particulars of the gear trans-
mission are to be submitted:
Plans:
- arrangement (longitudinal and transverse sections)
- pinion(s) and wheel(s)
- shafts
- hub(s)
- clutch(es) and/or coupling(s)
- other power transmitting parts
- gear casing, including propeller thrust bearing housing,
if applicable
- fastening of gear transmission (applicable to propulsion
gears only).
The plans are to show clearly all details as e.g. fillets and
other stress raisers as well as material type and mechanical
properties.
Particulars (for each gear stage):
Loads:
P = maximum continuous power (kW) on pinion
no = corresponding r.p.m. on pinion
- load-time characteristics if designed for a limited life time
- specified limits of shock and vibratory loads (if not given,
the upper limits given in these rules apply.
Faceload distribution:
- the specified maximum permissible faceload distribution
factor KHP at rated load (for bevel gears it is sufficient
to specify the minimum permissible facewidth in %).
Dimensions:
z = number of teeth for pinion or wheel
a = centre distance (mm)
b = active (common) facewidth (mm) at operating pitch
diameter
bl,2 = facewidths (mm) at tooth root for pinion or wheel
B = total facewidths (mm) including gap, if any
d
a
= tip diameters (mm)
ha = addenda (mm)
- specified minimum and maximum backlash.
Tool:
mn = normal module (mm)
!X
n
= pressure angle in normal section on reference cy lin-
der
P = helix angle on reference cylinder
hao = addendum of tool, referred to mn
PaD = radius at tip of tool, referred to mn
pro = protuberance, referred to m
x = addendum modification coefficient, referred to I11n.
If a pinion type cutter is used, additionally:
Zc = number of teeth of cutter
Xc = addendum modification coefficient of cutter.
For bevel gears, additionally:
:E = angle between shafts
Pm = helix angle in the mid-section
Ok = angle modification
Il1t = transversal module (mm) at outer end.
Material:
- material specifications
- heat treatment method
- for not surface hardened steel:
- minimum mechanical properties (ultimate tensile
strength, yield strength, elongation, contraction and
impact energy) in final condition
- for surface hardened steel:
- minimum and maximum surface hardness (HV or
HRC)
- minimum core hardness (HV)
- minimum impact energy (KV) of core material (cou-
pon test) at 20'C
- minimum and maximum hardness profile (HV versus
depth) after finishing process. To be presented by a
curve, or by depths at 550 HV, 400 HV and 300 HV.
Welding:
- for important components of welded construction, full
details of the joints, welding procedure, filler metal par-
DET NORSKE VERITAS
)
.J

J J
J
)
- straight shaft with shrink-fitted hub (no relief groove or
shaft diameter step):
a,= 1,25
ab = 2,2.
401 If the propeller shaft design is not documented ac-
cording to 300, these simplified rules in 400 apply.
402 The minimum diameter of the propeller shaft is not to
be less than:
1
100k(l
nO
I )3
1-(d
i
/d)4
560
O"B + 160
where:
d
p
= minimum diameter (mm)
k = factor for different shaft design features
O"B = tensile strength (N/mm2) of the shaft material as
taken for calculation (for unprotected stainless steel
shafts, see 404)
d = actual outer shaft diameter (mm).
If di:S 0,4 d the expression 1-(di/d)4 may be taken unity.
In general, the tensile of the steel used is to be be-
tween 400 and 800 N/mm . For the calculation of the di-
ameter as well as for calculation of permissible vibratory
torsional stresses (see 403), GB is not to be taken as greater
than 600 N/mm
2
In general, the part of the propeller shaft located forward
of the forward stem tube seal may be gradually reduced to
the diameter of the required intermediate shaft (provided it
is calculated with the same material).
k-factors for propeller shafts which are oil lubricated and
provided with an approved sealing box, or fitted with a
continuous liner:
k = 1,22 for keyless fitted or flange mounted propellers
k = 1,26 for key mounted propellers.
The above k-values apply to the portion of propeller shaft
between the forward edge of the aftmost shaft bearing and
the forward face of the propeller hub or, if applicable, the
forward face of the propeller shaft flange, subject to a min-
imum of 2,5 d .
k = I, IS appRes to the portion of propeller and tube shaft
between the forward edge of the forward stem tube seal and
the forward edge of the aftmost shaft bearing.
exceed the values of (N/mm
2
or (N/mm2) for transient operation:
O"B + 160
= 18 ck Cd 1,38 for 0,9:S,l:S 1,05

where:
O"B + 160
18
ck Cd (3-2 ,l2)
GB =, see 402 including restrictions
for ,l < 0,9
Ck = 0,55 when k-factors 1,22 and 1,26.
= 0,72 when k-factor 1,15.
Cd = size factor = 0,35 + 0,93 d( -0,2)
,l = speed ratio = nino = speed in question/rated speed.
range. In certain cases the values for ,l > 0,9 may apply.
values of 'q, barred speed ranges are to be imposed which
Barred speed ranges are not acceptable in the speed range
0,8 < ,l :S 1,05.

= 1,7 --rc;
See also premises in 30 l.
for ,l:S 0,8
404 Propeller shafts with special stress raisers not men-
tioned above, such as e.g. radial holes, longitudinal slots
etc., having geometrical stress concentration factors in tor-
sion in excess of 1,5, are not covered by 400, and it is re-
ferred to 300.
Unprotected stainless steel shafts are specially considered,
particularly on basis of time limited fatigue in sea water.
The criteria in 300 are to be followed as far as applicable,
but the stress - number of cycle - characteristics of the actual
steel in sea water is to be considered in the fatigue criteria.
405 The requirements in 400 do not take into account
possible influence of whirling which may necessitate modi-
fied dimensions. See also C600.
D 500 Intermediate shafts
501 If the intermediate shaft design is not documented ac-
cording to 300, these simplified rules in 500 apply. How-
ever, if the limitations (k, c0 for this simplified method are
exceeded, i.e. if the design is not covered by table in 502,
it is necessary to apply 300.
502 The minimum diameter dmin (mm) of an intermediate
shaft is not to be less than:
1
d =Fk(!
mm '""""U
1 ) 3
1-(d
i
/d)4
560
O"B + 160
where:
d = actual outer shaft diameter (mm)
If di:S 0,4 d, the expression 1-(di/d)4 may be taken
unity
F = 95 for turbine propulsion, diesel propulsion with slip
type coupling, electric propulsion
F 100 for all other diesel propulsion
k factor for different shaft design features, see table
below
O"B = tensile strength (N/mm2) of shaft material.
In general, the tensile strength is to be between 400 and 800
N/mm
2
. Values in excess of 800 N/mm
2
will not be con-
sidered for the purpose of diameter calculation.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
Different intermediate shaft design factors
Design k ck
- plain shaft
- at flange with
fillet radius not 1,0 1,0
less than 0,08 d
- at shrink fit coupling
- at keyway with bottom fillet
radius not less than 0,0125 d
1,10 0,60
(applicable within a distance
of 0,2 d from end of keyway)
- at radial or transverse hole
(hole diameter:=; 0,3 d, and
1,10 0,7
edge rounding radius> 0,3 of
hole radius
- at both sides of a thrust collar.
- in way of axial bearing where
1,10 0,85
a roller bearing is used as
a thrust bearing
exceed the values of T[ (N/mm
2
or T2 (N/mm
2
) for transient operation:
O'B + 160
TI = 18 ck cd 1,38 for 0,9"; 1,.; 1,05
O'B+ 160 2
TI = 18 ck
c
d(3-21) for 1<0,9
where:
O'B = see 502, however, for the purpose of calculating
permissible vibratory stresses is not to be taken as
more than 600
Ck = factor for different shaft design features, see 502
Cd = size factor = 0,35 + 0,93 d( - 0.2)
1 = speed ratio = nino = speed in question/rated speed.
range. In certain cases the values for 1 > 0,9 may apply.
values of Tj, barred speed ranges are to be imposed which
Barred speed ranges are not acceptable for 0,8 < 1 ,.; 1,05.
1,7 TI
T2=---
.../ck
for 1,.; 0,8
601 If the shaft design is not documented according to
300, the simplified rules in 600 apply, as far as covered with
shaft design factors k and ck'
602 The minimum shaft diameter can be calculated as for
intermediate shafts, see 502.
exceed those given for intermediate shafts, see 503, whereby
the Tl limit for 1 > 0,9 applies over the entire speed range
for continuous operation.
No barred speed range is acceptable in the range
0,9"; 1,.; 1,05.
Transient vibr<)1Qry torsional stress amplitudes
exceed 1,7/...jCk times those permissible for
operation.
are not to
continuous
701 Bronze liners are to be made of a high grade compo-
sition free from porosity and other defects. The liners are to
withstand a hydraulic pressure of 2 bar without showing
cracks or leaks.
702 The thickness of a liner fitted on a propeller shaft or
on a shaft through the stem tube is, in way of the bearings,
t= ~ 2 3 0
32 (mm)
d
p
= propeller shaft diameter in mm.
The thickness of a continuous liner between the bearings is
not to be less than 0,7:; t.
703 Continuous liners are preferably to be cast in one
length. If made of several lengths, the joining of the sepa-
rate pieces is to be made by fusion through the whole
thickness of the liner before shrinking.
704 If the tiner does not fit the shaft tightly between the
bearing portions in the stem tube, the space between the
shaft and the liner -is to be filled with a plastic insoluble
non-corrosive compound.
705 Liners are to be carefully shrunk or forced upon the
shaft by hydraulic pressure, and they are not to be secured
by pins.
706 Effective means are to be provided to prevent water
from gaining access to the shaft at the part between the aft
end of the liner and the propeller hub.
Guidance note:
To protect the propeller shaft the bronze liner should preferably
extend aft into a counterbore in the propeller hub.
-*e-n-d--o-f--G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---
D 800 Stern tube and bearings
801 The length of the aft oil lubricated white metal lined
bearings is normally not to be less than 2 times the rule di-
Shorter bearings may be accepted provided the nominal
The stem tube bearing is to be provided with proper grooves
for oil, air and possible accumulation of dirt. Pipes and
cocks for supply and draining of oil as well as air, are to be
fitted, and the sealing box is to be protected by a securely
attached steel plate.
802 For oil lubricated aft bearings of synthetic rubber, re-
inforced resin or plastics materials which are approved for
use as oil lubricated stem bush bearings, the length of the
bearing is normally not to be less than 2 times the rule di-
The length of bearing may be less provided the nominal
DET NORSKE VERITAS
"
'----....--/'
~ J
~
')
(J
(J
o
!)
~
Contents
A. General
A 100 Application
SECTION 4
GAS TURBINES
A. General
A 100 Application
101 The requirements for gas turbines are in general to be
in accordance with relevant parts of the Rules for Classi-
fication of Ships PtA Ch.2 Sec.4.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
.... /::1 ......
Contents
A. General
A 100 Application
SECTION 3
STEAM TURBINES
A 100 Application
A. General
101 The requirements to steam turbines are in general to
be in accordance with the Rules for Classification of Ships
Pt.4 Ch.2 Sec.3.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
0
1
::}
J)
~
))
J
))
')
Where the material has proven satisfactory testing and op-
erating experience, consideration may be given to an in-
creased bearing pressure.
803 For water lubricated bearings comprising staves of
wood (known as lignum vitae), the length of the bearing is
to be not less than 4 times the rule diameter of the shaft in
way of the bearing.
Guidance note:
Lignum vitae is the generic name for several dense, resinous
hardwoods with good lubricating properties. The original high
quality lignum vitae is almost unobtainable and other types of
wood such as bulnesia sarmiento (or palo santo or bulnesia ar-
aberia) are commonly used now.
---e-n-d---o-f---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e--n-o-t-e---
804 For water lubricated bearings of synthetic materials
which are approved for use as water lubricated stem bush
bearings such as rubber or plastics the length of the bearing
is to be not less than 4 times the rule diameter of the shaft
in way of the bearing. For a bearing design substantiated by
experiments to the satisfaction of the Society, consideration
may be given to a bearing length not less than 2 times the
rule diameter of the shaft in way of the bearing.
901 For cone mounted propellers, the following applies:
a) The roughness of the mating surfaces is not to exceed
3,5I-'m(RA), and the forward edge at the bore of the hub
is to be rounded.
b) The contact between the mating surfaces prior to final
pull-up is to be checked by contact marking compound
(e.g. toolmaker's blue). Circumferential or full length
non-contact bands are not acceptable. Total contact area
is to be at least 70 % of the theoretical contact area.
c) After fmal pull-up the propeller is to be secured by a nut
on ./he propeller shaft. The nut should be tightened to an
arial nut force corresponding approximately to the axial
component of the contact force on the cone. The nut is
to be secured to the shaft.
d) Coefficients of friction are to be taken as follows:
p.
Bronze hub oil injection method key mounting 0,13
0,15
Cast steel hub oil injection method key mounting 0,14
0,15
If glycerine replaces oil, and the surfaces are carefully
degreased to the satisfaction of the surveyor, the value
of p. may be increased by 0,04.
e) The surface pressure is preferably not to be less than 20
N/mm
2
(at 15C), even if a relief groove is used at the
front of the hub.
t) The maximum equivalent uniaxial stress ere (von Mises
criterion) in the hub at sea-water temperature of OC may
be calculated according to:
G =
e
Po ~ J 3 + ~ y
po = mean surface pressure between shaft and hub at OC
d
p
= propeller shaft diameter at the front of the hub
DH = propeller hub diameter at the front of the hub.
902 Key mounted propellers
The taper of the shaft cone is normally not to be steeper than
1:12 on the diameter. For shaft diameters smaller than ap-
proximately 200 mm", I: 10 may be accepted.
The dimensions of the key are to. fulfIl the criteria in 1301.
The propeller pull-up on the cone is to be at least sufficient
to create a friction torque of the magnitude T + Tv at a sea-
,ater temperature of 35C. The friction torque is assumed
to be transferred by the hub area in front of the hollow space
only (if any), i.e. excluding the area aft of the keyway.
G
e
, see 901, is not to exceed the following percentage of the
yield strength or the 0,2 % proof stress of the hub material:
- bronze and austenitic steel: 45 %
- other steels: 35 %.
There is to be clearance between the top of the key and the
hub. The bottoms of keyway in the hub and shaft are to be
parallel. The forward end is to be smoothened out from side
to side. On round-ended keyways the forward end is to be
machined down at 45 degree angle from side to side to a
depth at least 0,7 times the keyway centre depth. Remaining
edges are to be smoothened. The keyway is not to be carried
through at the aft end of the hub unless proper sealing is
provided. There is to be no play between the sides of the
key and the keyway in the hub. The keyway in the shaft is
not to extend forward to a distance closer than 0,2 times
shaft diameter from the beginning of the taper. The fillet in
the bottom on the keyway in the shaft and hub is to have a
radius not less than the maximum of 18 % of the depth of the
keyway at its centre and 0,0125 of the propeller shaft di-
ameter at top of its cone. The key is to be bolted to the shaft.
The distance from the bolt holes to the forward end of the
key is not to be less than 1/3 of the length of the key. The
edges of the shaft holes are to be rounded.
903 Keyless connections
The taper of the shaft cone is not to be steeper than I: 15 on
the diameter.
The friction connection is to be able to transmit both torque
and thrust as defined below, at a seawater temperature of
35C. The axial force component from the shrinkage is to
be compensated by the prestressing of the nut (see 901).
The torque to be applied is 2,8 To, or the maximum of
2 (T + Tv) in the entire speed range, whichever is greater,
see also C300.
The axial force (thrust) is to be calculated as the nominal
torque T (i.e. not included the vibratory torque) times
6/propeller pitch in metre and times a safety factor of 2.
Thus the required surface pressure at 35C is:
P35 =
where
.JFl+FA2
AI-'
FT the tangential force due to the torque as defined
above
FA the axial force as defmed above
A = the total contact area between hub and shaft (disre-
garding oil grooves). "
G
e
, see 901, is not to exceed 70% of the yield strength or
the 0,2 % proof stress of the hub material.
904 For bolted propeller hubs, the bolt connection is at
least to have the same torsional and bending strength as re-
quired for the aft end of the propeller shaft. If the flange
connection is based on friction only, the friction torque is
not to be less than 2,8 To, or the maximum of2 (T + Tv) in
the entire speed range, whichever is greater, see also C300.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
E. Monitoring
101 Alarm for low operatiog pressure io clutches is re-
quired.
102 Alarm for excessive torsional vibrations may be spe-
cially required.
103 For monitoriog of possible stem tube lubricatiog oil
contamioation by water, a test kit for that purpose to be
provided on board.
101 When shaft alignment calculations have been ap-
proved, the alignment is to be verified by measurements in
102 Alignment is normally to be verified in afloat condi-
tion. Checking of alignment may also be required in certain
load conditions.
201 The fitting of the propeller to the shaft and the pro-
peller pull-up distance and nut tighteniog, alternatively bolt
prestressiog for flanged propellers, is to be verified io the
202 Fittiog of all couplings for propUlsion such as shrinkfit
coupling, tapered connections, bolted connections etc., is to
be verified in the presence of the surveyor.
203 The alignment of elastic coupliogs, tooth coupliogs,
universal shafts, etc. is to be verified by the surveyor. For
flexibly mounted engioes, the settiog of the rubber pads and
the crankshaft center movement due to external torque have
to be taken iotu account when the alignment is carried out.
normal operatiog range iocludiog misfiring (see C301) of
one cylioder (per engioe), and duriog impacts due to en-
gagiog clutches etc. (see C401).
Guidance note:
continuous rating.
-e-n-d---crf---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e-n-o-t-e---
Measurements of vibration velocities are to be carried out
for all shaft generators. The measurements are to be per-
formed at the stator housing, as close to bearing support as
possible, at both ends of the generator. Measurements are
to document acceptable vibration levels io lateral and axial
direction for the speed range -20 to + 15 % of nominal speed
as outlined io 303.
303 Maximum permissible level of vibration io shaft gen-
erators is 4,6 mm!s root mean square (RMS) withio the fre-
quency range 10 to 1000 Hz, for contiouous operation. This
applies io the full speed range 20 % .
Guidance note:
Most power take-off (PTO) systems can only be tested up to
+ 15 % of nominal' speed due to speed restrictions for driving
member (engine). For such arrangements measured values for
+ 15% of nominal speed can be extrapolated to the +20% no-
minal speed level and used as documentation. For systems where
up to + 15 % of nominal speed can not be made,
the procedure for testing and evaluation of results shall be sub-
ject to special evaluation and approval on a case-by-case basis.
---e-n-d---o-f---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e--n-o-t-e-
DET NORSKE VERITAS
'/)1
'-.-./

"
,

:J)
:JI
)1
).
o
,)
305 Engioes having cylioders with a bore exceediog 200
mm, but not exceeding 250 mm, are to have at least one
safety valve near each end of the crankcase. If the engioe
has more than 8 crank throws, an additional valve is to be
fitted near the middle of the engine. Engioes with cylinder
bore exceediog 250 mm, but not exceediog 300 mm, are to
have at least one safety valve in way of each alternate crank
throw, with a minimum of two valves. Engines with cylinder
bore exceediog 300 mm are to have at least one safety valve
io way of each crank throw. Additional safety valves are to
be fitted on separate spaces, not io open connection to the
crank case, such as gear or chain cases for camshaft or si-
milar devices, when the gross volume of such spaces ex-
ceeds 0,6 m
3
.
306 The free area of each crankcase safety valve is not to
be less than 45 cm
2
. The combined free area of the valves
fitted on an engioe is not to be less than 115 cm
2
per m
3
of
the crankcase gross volume. When calculating the gross
volume of the crankcase, the volume of stationary parts
withio the crankcase may be deducted.
Each one of the safety valves to be fitted as required above,
may be replaced by not more than two safety valves of
smaller area, provided that the free area of each valve is not
less than 45 cm
2
.
307 On two-stroke engines, scavenge spaces in open con-
nection to the cylinders are to be fitted with safety valves.
The valves are to open quickly in case of an explosion.
D 400 Signboard
401 A signboard is to be fitted io a clearly visible position
on each engine. warning against opening of a crankcase for
a specified period of time after shutdown due to overheating.
The time is to be sufficient to permit adequate cooliog after
stopping the engioe. The notice is also to warn agaiost re-
starting an overheated engine until the cause of overheating
has been found.
501 For crosshead type engines, scavenge spaces in open
connection to the cylinder are to be connected to an ap-
proved fire-extioguishing system which is to be entirely se-
parate from the fire-extinguishiog system of the engioe
room.
601 Cylioder lioers, cylinder covers, pistons and other
parts subjected to high thermal loads and stresses are to be
designed for the stresses and temperatures to which they are
exposed. Abrupt changes of wall thicknesses and small fillet
radii are to be avoided for these parts.
602 Diesel engioe cy Iinders haviog a bore exceediog 230
mm are to be provided with a sentinel valve. The valves are
to open at a pressure not more than 40 % above the com-
bustion pressure at maximum continuous output. The valves
are to discharge where no damage can occur.
For indication of overpressure in the cylinder the sentinel
valves may be replaced by type approved warniog devices
(audible or visible).
603 Piston rod packiog boxes which are subjected to
pressure from scavenging air. are to be of a design ensuring
that air will not leak ioto the crankcase.
D 700 Lubrication
701 The lubricating oil supply is to be so arranged that it
can be efficiently controlled and monitored.
702 The lubricating oil drain pipes from the engioe sump
to the drain tank are to be submerged at their outlet ends.
Where two or more engines are installed, vent pipes, if fit-
ted, and lubricatiog oil draio pipes, are to be laid iodepend-
ently of each other to avoid iotercommunication between
crankcases.
801 On maio and auxiliary engioes haviog cylinder bore
of 250 mm and above, the high pressure fuel oil pipiog is
to be effectively shielded and secured. For maio and auxil-
iary engines intended for unattended operation, the above
applies irrespectively of cylioder bore.
802 The protection accordiog to 801 is to prevent fuel oil
or fuel oil mist from reaching a source of ignition on the
engine or its surroundings. If flexible hoses are used for
shieldiog purposes, these are to be type approved.
Suitable draioage arrangements should be made for draioiog
any fuel oil leakage and for preventiog contamioation of lu-
bricatiog oil by fuel oil. Leakages from high pressure fuel
oil pipes should, where practicable, be collected and ar-
rangements provided for an alarm to be given.
803 When, in return pipiog, the pulsation of pressure with
peak to peak values exceeds 20 bar, shieldiog of this pipiog
is also required.
D 900 Starting air
901 In order to protect starting air maios agaiost explosion
arisiog from improper functioniog of startiog valves, the
following devices are to be fitted:
- an isolating non-return valve or equivalent at the starting
air supply connection to each engine
- a bursting disc or flame arrestor in way of the starting
valve of each cylioder for direct reversing engioes haviog
a main starting manifold, or at the supply inlet to the
starting air manifold for nonreversing engines. Bursting
discs or flame arrestors may be omitted for engines hav-
ing a bore not exceeding 230 mm.
E 100 General
those given io Ch.5.
E 200 Speed governiog of propulsion engines
201 Each propUlsion engioe is to be fitted with a speed
governor so adjusted that the engioe speed cannot exceed the
rated speed by more than 15 %.
301 A separate overspeed protective device is required for
engioes with a rated power of 220 kW and above, when:
- the engine can be declutched, or
- driviog a controllable pitch propeller, or
- has a flexible coupling which may cause complete sepa-
ration in case of failure.
DET NORSKE VERIT AS
of diesel engines driving generators shall be adjusted so
that overload (110%) power can be given in service after
installation on board and in order, that the governing
characteristics including the activation of generator pro-
tective devices can be fulfilled at all times.
3) 75%, 50% and 25% power and idle run.
4) Start-up tests.
device.
6) Warning, shut down and stop devices.
605 Engines driving auxiliaries
Tests to be performed in accordance with 604.
After running on the test bed, the fuel delivery system of
diesel engines driving generators is to be adjusted so that
overload (11 0 %) power can be given in service after instal-
lation on board, so that the governing characteristics in-
cluding the activation of generator protective devices can be
fulfilled at all times.
606 Depending on the type of plant concerned, the Society
reserves the right to call for a special test schedule.
607 Extent of random checks of components to be pre-
sented for inspection after the works trials, is to be agreed
with the surveyor.
608 The data to be measured and recorded, when testing
the engine at various ratings are to include all necessary
parameters for the engine operation. The crankshaft de-
flection is to be checked when required by the surveyor and
according to the manufacturers procedures.
C. Arrangement
101 The dynamic forces which are imposed by the engine
are to be taken into account in the engine seating design.
The bedplate is to be securely bolted to the seating so that
no dynamic movement is possible between the bedplate and
the seating. All bedplate chocks are to be of sufficient
thickness and to have uniform fit before the bolts are tight-
ened. The arrangement of fitted bolts is to allow for thermal
expansion.
102 For mounting on epoxy resin the surface pressure and
thickness are to be within the approved specifications of the
epoxy. The epoxy resin is to be type approved.
103 Side and end-chocks are normally required and are to
be regarded as safety devices in case of relative movement
between engine and foundation caused by loosened bolts.
104 Top stays if any, are to be designed in such a way that
the engine is not damaged if the unit's side is pressed in by
a collision. The securing of the stay to the engine is to be
designed in such a way as to avoid risks of cracks at the
fastening points.
201 Critical vibrations are to be avoided in the actual
speed range. Possible irregular driving conditions as e.g.
misfiring are also to be considered.
202 All piping to the engine (exhaust, fuel, etc.) is to be
designed to compensate for the maximum possible engine
movement.
203 The flexible mounting of the engine is to comply with
the requirements in Ch.1 Sec.3 B. This may be required
verified by calculations or measurements.
C 300 Exhaust pipes
301 Where exhaust pipes are led overboard near the water
line, means are to be provided to avoid the possibility of
water entering the engine.
302 Exhaust pipes from several engines are not to be
connected, but are to have separate outlets, unless precau-
tions are taken to prevent the return of exhaust gases to an
idle engine.
401 For insulation of hot surfaces, see Ch.1 Sec.3 A200.
D 100 General
the diesel engine to meet the general requirements with re-
to reliability and availability as outlined in Ch.1 Sec.3 Band
Sec.3 C.
102 Depending On experience, special analysis may be
required for design features as e.g. serrations in connecting
rods and main bearing caps.
D 200 Structure
201 Transverse girders, cylinder blocks and columns are
normally to be stress-relieved after welding. Consideration
may be given in special cases to omission of the stress-re-
lieving heat treatment depending on welding procedures,
material thicknesses, grade of steel and whether the engine
is fitted with stay-bolts.
D 300 Crankcase, strength, ventilation and safety
valves
301 Crankcase and crankcase doors are to be of sufficient
strength and crankcase doors are to be securely fastened, so
that they will not be readily displaced by an explosion.
302 Ventilation of crankcase, and any arrangement which
could produce a flow of external air within the crankcase,
is in principle forbidden. If vent pipes from the crankcase
are provided, these are to be as small as practicable. If a
forced extraction of the gases is provided (for smoke-detec-
tion purposes for instance), the vacuum in the crankcase is
not to exceed 2,5 mbar.
Guidance note:
For the main machinery, the oil vapour from the ventilation pipe
should preferably be led to free air.
-e-n-d--a-. f --G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-a-. t-e---
303 Crankcase safety valves are to be designed and built
to open quickly at an overpressure of not more than 0,2 bar
in the crankcase and to close quickly and automatically in
order to avoid inrush of air into the crankcase. They are to
be of an approved type. Crankcase safety valve discharges
are to be properly shielded in order to reduce the possible
danger from emmission of flame.
304 Internal combustion engines of a Cl.;linder diameter of
200 mm or a crankcase volume of 0,6 m and above are to
be provided with crankcase explosion relief valves of a sui-
table type with sufficient relief area. The relief valves are to
be arranged or provided with means to ensure that discharge
from them is so directed as to minimise the possibility of
injury to personnel.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
,) )
,] ,]
)

/)
)
SECTION 7
PROPELLERS
Contents
A. General
A 100 Application
A 200 Documentation
B 100 Geneml
B 200 Certificates
D. Scantlings
E 100 General
F. Testing Onboard
F 200 Sea trial
A. General
A 100 Application
101 The rules apply to propellers for propulsion, steering
and manoeuvering.
102 Subject to approval is the propeller with hub, blades,
blade bolts and pitch control mechanism (if any).
103 Propeller for units with ice strengthening, see Pt.5
Ch.l.
A 200 Documentation
ted:
Material certificate
- propellers cast in one piece
- blades, bolts and hub for built and controllable pitch
propellers
- blade bolt pretensioning and procedure
- pitch control mechanism
- data and calculations for fitting of propeller to the shaft
(see Sec.6 D900)
- arrangement of attached free wheeling propeller, if ap-
plicable.
The plans are to give full details of scantlings and arrange-
ment as well as material specifications and heat treatment.
The manufacturing tolerance class (ISO 4841112) is to be
specified on the propeller drawings.
B 100 General
101 Materials for propellers and propeller blades are to
comply with the requirements in Pt.2 Ch.2.
For other materials, particulars of mechanical properties and
chemical compositions are to be submitted to the Society,
and if required, also fatigue properties to be verified by fa-
tigue tests approved by the Society.
102 For type approved propellers, see Sec. 1 CI06.
B 200 Certificates
201 Propellers are to have NV certificates, category A, see
Sec.1 CIOO.
202 NV certificates, category B, are required for separate
blades.
203 Category C certificates are required as per table:
Magnetic particle Vrsual and
(chemical composition Ultrasonic testing
inspection or dye dimensional
and
mechanical properties)
Propellers cast in one piece NY
Separate blades NY
Separate hubs NVIW
1)
Blade bolts NVIW
1)
Crank disc, push pull rod,
actuator cylinder and other W
parts if found necessary
1) NV if propUlsion
B 300 Assembly and testing in worksbop
301 Blade bolt pretensioning is to be made in presence of
the surveyor.
302 The complete propeller is to be statically balanced in
accordance with ISO 484 (or equivalent) in presence of the
surveyor. Dynamic balancing may be required for propul-
sion propellers with tip speed exceeding 60 m/s.
For controllable pitch or built-up propellers, the required
static balancing of the complete propeller may be replaced
of steel
penetrant inspection
W NV NV
W NV NV
W NVIW
1)
W W
W W
by an individual control of blade weight and gravity centre
position. The manufacturer is to satisfy the surveyor that the
assembled propeller will be within the specified limits.
303 The complete controllable pitch propeller system is to
be function tested and pressure tested as follows in the
presence of the surveyor:
- hydraulic pitch control to 1,5 times design pressure
- tightness of propeller subject to 1 bar.
DEf NORSKE VERITAS
101 The arrangement and design of the propeller is to be
such that satisfactory performance is maintained under all
operating conditions.
Regarding fitting of propeller to the shaft, see Sec.6 D900.
102 The arrangement of attached free wheeling propellers
will be specially considered.
201 The combination of materials is to be such as to min-
imize galvanic corrosion.
202 The surface of the hub, conical bores, fillets and
blades is to be smoothly finished.
203 For controllable pitch propellers all connections are to
be properly sealed.
204 Bolts and nuts are to be properly secured.
D. Scantlings
101 The scantling rules mentioned in 101 apply to propel-
lers of normal design for single and multi screw main pro-
pulsion of conventional arrangement. Other types of
propellers, such as highly skewed propellers, propellers for
light craft and planing craft, will be specially considered.
The thickness t, of the cylindrical section at 25 % radius for
propellers cast m one piece, 35 % radius for propellers with
separately cast blades, and 60% radius (for both types) is
t,,=C
I
D (U
2
K3 + m
t
K
I
)
Zc
r
(U
I
-U
2
S
R
)
(mm)
This formula is based on a fatigue diagram where:
UI
U2
m,KI
K3
SR
reversed stress
influence of mean stress on fatigue
cyclic load
mean load
mean load
For the relative radii mentioned above, the following calcu-
lation method may apply. Other relative radii are subject to
(
n D )2
SR = I ~ O (C2
0
+ C3)
K3 = (KI + K2) C4
m, = 0,033 Vs for Vs <e: 17 knots
= 0,56 for Vs < 17 knots
KI = AldTho+A2To/R
K2 = Tw (Al d + 0,16 A2)
Tw = 455 D (1,00 + 10gIO no)
A = qO + ql d + q2 d
2
+ q3 d
3
d = 3,14D/HR
D = 2 R = diameter in meters of propeller
c, = width in meters of expanded cylindrical section at
radius in question
Z = number of blades
o = rake in degrees at blade tip (backward rake positive)
HR = pitch in meters at radius in question
P = maximum continuous power (kW) for which the
machinery is to be approved
no = corresponding revolutions per minute of propeller
T 110= mean propeller thrust in N at no' and may be calcu-
lated as 6 To I Ho 7
To = mean propeller to;que in Nm at no
V s = speed of unit in knots corresponding to maximum
continuous power.
CI, C2, C3, C4= see Table D!.
qO, ql, q2, q3 = see Table D2.
UI, U2 = see Table D3.
If the blade chord is much curved, a reduction of the re-
quired thickness may be considered, based on submitted
calculations.
Table Dl Values of C" Co, C" C.
r 0,25 R 0,35 R 0,6 R
C
I
0,278 0,258 0,150
C
2
0,026 0,025 0,020
C
3
0,055 0,049 0,034
C.
1,38 1,48 1,69
Table D2 Values of qo. ql' q2' q3
rlR
qo
q
q2
q,
0,25
Al
8,30 0,370 -0,340 0,030
0,25
A2
63,80 -4,500 -0,640 0,0845
0,35
Al
9,55 -0,015 -0,339 0,0322
0,35
A2
57,30 -7,470 -0,069 0,0472
0,6
Al
14,60 -1,720 -0,103 0,0203
0,6 ' A? 52,90 -10,300 0,667 0,0
102 Propellers working in a tunnel are to meet the fol-
- the nominal (mean) bending stress in the blade root sec-
tion is not to exceed 17% of the u.t.s. (ultimate tensile
strength, lower specified limit) of the material
- the radial location of the middle point of thrust force of
each blade is normally taken as follows, if the exact po-
sition is not known:
I) 0,82 R for controllable pitch propellers
2) 0,75 R for fixed pitch propellers
- a specific thrust of ISO NIkW absorbed by the propeller,
may be used for the bending stress calculation, if the
exact thrust force is not known.
103 The blade thickness t, as determined in 101 and 102
applies to cylindrical sections. When measuring thickness
of blades, the increased thickness due to the radius of the
fillets at the root of the blades is not to be taken into account.
104 The radius at the blade root is to be at least 3/4 of the
required blade thickness at 0,25 R or 0,35 R. Constant stress
fillets may also be approved.
DEI NORSKE VERITAS
,
I
)
)
I)
()
'.)
,
~
minimum permissible speed at 100 % torque, corre-
minimum permissible speed at 90% torque corre-
- part loads, e.g. 75%,50%, 25% of rated power and
speed according to nominal propeller curve corre-
sponding to points 6,7 and 8 and at rated speed with
constant governor setting corresponding to point 9,
10 and I!.
2) Emergency operation
Maximum achievable power when operating along the
nominal propeller curve and when operating with con-
stant governor setting for rated speed as per 502 2).
3) Functional tests:
- lowest engine speed according to nominal propeller
curve
- starting tests, for non-reversible engines andlor start-
ing and reversing tests, for reversible engines
- governor test
- testing the safety system, particularly for overspeed
and low lubrication oil pressure.
Guidance Dote:
For engines, intended to be used for emergency services sup-
plementary tests according to the regulations of administration
may be required.
---c-n-d---o-f--G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---
504 Stage C - component inspection
Immediately after the testrun the components of one cylinder
for in-line engines and two cylinders for V-engines are to
be presented for inspection.
The following components are concerned:
- piston removed and dismantled
- crosshead bearing, dismantled
- crank bearing and main bearing, dismantled
- cyli}1der liner in the installed condition
- cyrmder head, valves disassembled
- control gear, camshaft and crankcase with opened covers.
If deemed necessary by the surveyor further dismantling of
the engine may be required.
If a type tested engine which has proven reliability in ser-
vice, is increased in output by less than 10 %, a new type test
is not necessary. The agreement for granting an increased
output will be subject to prior approval.
601 Engines, which are not produced under an alternative
survey arrangement as mentioned in 400, are to be tested in
accordance with the scope as specified in 602 to 608. Mo-
difications of the test procedure maybe agreed with the
surveyor.
602 Scope of works trials
For all ratings for which the engine is going to be tested, the
pertaining operational values are to be measured and re-
corded by the engine manufaclurer. All results are to be
compiled in a test acceptance protocol to be issued by the
engine manufacturer. In each case all measurements con-
ducted at the various ratings, are to be carried out at steady
operating conditions. The readings for 100 % power (rated
power at rated speed) are to be taken twice at an interval of
at least 30 minutes.
603 Main engines driving propellers
I) 100 % power (rated power) at rated engines speed no:
at least 60 minutes - after having reached steady condi-
tions.
I
~
i
Q,
Fig. 1
110 106.5
100 lOll
speed ICl/.) _
CD = range of continuous operation
range of intermitted operation
@ = range 01 short-time overload operation
Power/Speed diagram
2) 110% power at engine speed n = 1,032 x no:
of main engines is normally to be so adjusted that over-
load power cannot be obtained in service.
3) 90% (or normal continuous cruise power), 75%, 50%
and 25 % power in accordance with the nominal propeller
curve
4) Starting and reversing manoeuvres.
device.
6) Shut down device.
604 Main engines driving generators for propulsion
The test is to be performed at rated speed with a constant
governor setting under conditions of:
I) 100% power (rated power) at rated engine speed: at least
2) 110% power: 30 minutes after having reached steady
conditions.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
- cooling water pressure and temperatures
- exhaust gas temperature in exhaust manifold, and, where
facilities are available, from each cylinder
- r.p.m. of turbocharger where practicable
- air temperature and pressures before and after turbo-
charger and cooler
- exhaust gas temperatures and pressures before and after
turbine, charge air cooler, and cooling water inlet tem-
perature.
405 After the type test, the main parts and especially those
subject to wear, are to be dismantled and examined.
Guidance note:
1) For engines to be approved for different purposes (multi-
purpose engines). and having different performances for each
purpose, the program and duration of test will be modified
to cover the whole range of the engine performance taking
into account the most severe values.
2) The rated output for which the engine is to be tested is the
power corresponding to that declared by the manufacturer
and approved by the Society, i.e. actual maximum power
which the engine is capable of delivering continuously be-
tween the normal maintenance intervals stated by the man-
ufacturer at speed and under the stated ambient conditions.
---e-n-d-o-f---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e--n-o-t-e--
406 For engines which may operate on heavy fuel oil,
their suitability for this has to be proved in an appropriate
way (e.g. onboard trials).
B 500 Type testing of engines without alternative
survey arrangement
501 General
Upon fmalization of the engine design for production of
every new engine type intended for the installation on board
units, one engine is to be presented for type testing.
This type testing also applies for engines for which type
approval has been requested.
Engines which are subjected to type testing are to be tested
in accordance with the scope as specified below.
It is assumed that:
- this engine is optimised as required for the condition of
the type
- the investigations and measurements required for reliable
engine operation have been carried out during internal
tests by the engine manufacturer and
- the approval has been obtained for the engine in question
on the basis of documentation requested and the Society
has been informed about the nature and extent of inves-
tigations carried out during the pre-production stages.
The type test is subdivided into three stages, namely:
- Stage A - Internal tests
Functional tests and collection of operating values including
test hours during the internal tests, the relevant results of
which are to be presented to the surveyor during the type
test.
Testing hours of components which are inspected according
to 504 are to be stated.
- Stage B - Type test
Type test in the presence of the surveyor.
- Stage C - Component inspection
Component inspections by the surveyor after completion of
the test programme. The engine manufacturer will have to
compile all results in a type test report, which will have to
be handed over to the surveyor.
502 Stage A - Internal tests
Functional tests and collection of operating data during the
internal tests.
During the internal tests the engine is to be operated at the
load points important for the engine manufacturer and the
pertaining operating values are recorded. The load points
may be selected according to the range of application.
If an engine can be satisfactorily operated at all load points
without using mechanically driven cylinder lubricators this
is to be verified.
For engines which may operate on heavy fuel oil their suit-
ability for this has to be proved in an appropriate way (e.g.
onboard trials).
1) Normal case
The normal case includes:
- the load points 25, 50, 75, 100 and 110% of the
maximum rated power:
i) along the nominal (theoretical) propeller curve and
at constant speed for propUlsion engines.
ii) at constant speed for engines intended for generat-
ing sets.
- the limit points of the permissible operating range.
These limit points are to be defined by the engine
manufacturer.
2) Emergency situations
For turbocharged engines the achievable continuous out-
put is to be determined in the case of turbocharger dam-
age:
- engines with one turbocharger, when rotor is blocked
or removed
- engines with two or more turbochargers, when one
damaged turbocharger is shut off.
503 Stage B - Type test
During the type test the tests listed below are to be carried
out in the presence of the surveyor and the results achieved
are to be recorded and signed by the attending represen-
tatives. Deviations from this program, if any, are to be
agreed between the engine manufacturer and the surveyor.
1) Load points
Load points at which the engine is to be operated ac-
cording to the power/speed diagram (Fig. 1). The data to
be measured and recorded when testing the engine at
various load points are to include all major parameters
for the engine operation.
The operating time per load point depends on the engine
size (achievement of steany-state condition) and on the
time for collection of the operating values.
Normally, an operating time of 0,5 to 1 hour can be as-
sumed per load point.
- rated power, i.e. 100% output at 100% torque and
100 % speed corresponding to load point 1
- 100 % power at maximum permissible speed corre-
- maximum permissible torque (normally 110 %) at
100% speed corresponding to load point 3, or maxi-
mum permissible power (normally 110%) and speed
according to nominal propeller curve corresponding
to load point 3 a
DET NORSKE VERITAS
) )
:)

/)
"J
/) /)
Table D3 Material properties
Material
Tensile strength
Nlmm
2
minimwn
Material constant U 1
Nlmm
2
Material constant U
2
Mn-bronze (brass) 440
Ni-Mn-bronze (brass) 520
Ni-Al-bronze 590
Mn-Al-bronze 620
Grey cast iron 250
Carbon steel and lowalloy steel 540
Ferritic/rnartensitic stainless steel 590
Austenitic stainless steel 440
Austenitic/rnartensitic stainless steel
I)
See also Pt.2 Ch.2.
1) Subject to special consideration.
2) Without cathodic protection.
3) With cathodic protection.
4) For stainless materials, the following increase of U 1 can be made:
i) For individually cast blades with a net weight> 600 kg: 5 %
ii) For individually cast blades with a net weight 600 kg: 10 %
iii) For solid propeller with a net weight 600 kg: 5 %.
E 100 General
101 For controllable pitch propellers, governing and
monitoring systems are to comply with the requirements of
Ch.S.
F. Testing Onboard
101 For propellers mounted on a cone, the contact mark-
ing and the pull up length is to be verified in presence of the
surveyor, see also Sec.6 D900.
43 0,145
43 0,145
64 0,185
61 0,185
24 0,23
26 2)
0,20
44
3)
53 4)
0,195
48 4)
0,23
53
4)
0,195
102 For flange mounted propellers, the pretensioning of
the bolts is to be made in presence of the surveyor.
103 For blade bolt pretensioning, see B301.
F 200 Sea trial
201 For controllable pitch propellers the pitch function is
to be demonstrated to the surveyor.
202 During the sea trial, the pitch behavior with inactive
servo is to be demonstrated to the surveyor.
203 The performance of the propeller is to be tested during
sea trial with full ahead running and reversing at maximum
permissible astern r.p.m. and for controllable pitch propel-
lers at maximum astern pitch of maximum permissible
r.p.m.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
SECTION 8
THRUSTERS
Contents
A. General
A 100 Application
A 200 Documentation
B 100 General
B 200 Certification
C 100 Arrangement
D 100 General
D 200 Shafting
D 400 Propeller
E 100 General
E 200 Monitoring
F 200 Sea trial
A. General
A 100 Application
101 The rules apply to thruster plants intended for main
propulsion and steering for all types of units.
102 Thrusters are regarded as part of the steering function.
Thrusters include azimuth propellers, tunnel propellers and
water jets.
103 Defmitions
A thruster is a unit equipped with a propeller or an impeller
in order to produce thrust. Note that a propeller alone is not
to be considered as a thruster.
A propulsion thruster is a thruster which is mainly assigned
to propulsion of the unit. The propulsion thruster may also
contain the steering function.
A dynamic positioning thruster is a thruster which is a part
of a dynamic positioning system with class notation DYN-
POS.
An auxiliary thruster is a thruster for all other purposes than
propUlsion and dynamic positioning.
104 For ice dass notations, see Pt.5 Ch.l.
A 200 Documentation
submitted:
Plans:
- thruster arrangement
- assembly (sectional drawings)
- structural drawings (gear housing, etc.) and connections
to the tunnel/nozzle
- steering column
- steering (azimuth) gear assembly
- gears inclusive azimuth gear (as required in Sec.5)
- shafts, couplings * etc.
- impeller
- propeller (as required in Sec.7)
- bearing arrangement
- sealing boxes exposed to sea *
- mounting to the hull
- sealing arrangement for flexibly mounted thrusters
- propeller nozzle (see Pt.3 Ch.2 Sec.4).
* Type approval required for standard designs.
Diagram and data:
- piping diagrams for cooling, lubrication and hydraulic
systems
- hydraulic function diagrams for pitch and azimuth
- torque characteristic and starting procedure for electrical
motors for propeller drive
- functional deSCription of control system and monitoring
Calculations:
- torsional vibration calculation, see Sec.6 C301.
- calculated life times of rolling bearings.
202 The following calculations are to be submitted upon
request:
- torsional impact vibrations
- whirling vibrations
- axial vibrations
- pendelum vibrations
- component strength.
B 100 General
101 A MSA (see Sec. I C 105) should specify all details on
Materials used in piping systems are to comply with the re-
quirements of Pt.2 Ch.2.
102 The prime mover is to be certified in accordance with
relevant rule section.
103 For type approved thrusters, see Sec. I C106.
B 200 Certification
201 A thruster is to be delivered with Det Norske Veritas
(NV) certificate, category A, see Sec. I CIOO.
202 NV category B certificates are required for:
- pinions and wheels, see Sec.5
- clutches, see Sec.6
"- couplings, see Sec.6
- propeller, see Sec. 7
- propeller nozzle
- hydraulic motor for azimuth.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
)
'J
,)
C)
)
!)
) ()
Table B2 Hydraulic tests, diesel engine parts
No. It ern
1)
I Cylinder cover, cooling space
4)
2 Cylinder liner, over whole length of cooling space
3 Cylinder jacket, cooling space
4 Exhaust valve, cooling space
5
Piston crown, cooling space.
(Where piston rod seals cooling space, test after assembly)
Fuel injection pump' body,
pressure side 6)
6
High pressure fuel injection
Fuel injection valve
system
Fuel injection pipes
High pressure piping
7 Hydraulic system for hydraulic drive
of exhaust gas valves
8 Scavenge pump cylinder
9 Turboblower, cooling space
10 Exhaust pipe, cooling space
Engine integrated air Air side
1!
compressor (cylinders,
covers,
Water side
and aftercoolers) )
12 Coolers, each side
5)
13 Engine driven pumps (oil, water, fuel, bilge)
Pressure 2)
(bar) 3)
7
7
4
4
7
1,5 ParP + 300
1,5 PorP + 300
1,5 ParP + 300
1,5 P
4
4
4
1,5 P
4
4
4
1) In general, items are to be tested by hydraulic pressure as indicated in the table. Where design or testing features may require modification of these
test requirements, special consideration will be given.
2) P is the maximum working pressure in the part concerned.
3) 1 bar = 0,1 MPa = 0,1 N/mm
2
.
4) For forged steel cylinder covers test methods other than pressure testing may be accepted.
5) Charge air coolers need only be tested on the water side.
6) May be omitted for pumps made of forged parts provided material soundness is verified by ultrasonic test (W).
I
B 400 Type testing of engines with special survey
arrangement
testing of minimum speed for main propulsion engines
and the idling speed for auxiliary engines.
401 Engines for which the manufacturer has requested
certification according to an alternative survey arrangement
based on a specified quality system and MSA (see Sec. I
CI05), which gives the manufacturer the permission to carry
out all testing and inspection and completion of the certif-
icate without the presence of the surveyor, are to be type
tested in the presence of the surveyor. The selection of the
engine to be tested from the production line, the test pro-
gram and the parameters to be measured and recorded, are
to be agreed upon with the surveyor, but are at least to
comply with 404.
402 The duration and program of tests is in principle as
follows:
- 80 h at rated output
- 8 h at II 0 % overload
- 10 h at partial loads (114, 112, 3/4 and 9/10 of rated
output)
- 2 h at intermittent loads
- starting tests
- reverse running of direct reversing engines
- testing of regulator - overspeed device - lubricating oil
system failure alarm device
- testing of the engine with turbocharger out of action when
applicable
The tests listed above may be grouped together in working
cycles and subsequently repeated until the required durations
of the tests are accumulated. The overload is to be alter-
nately carried out with:
- 110 % of rated output and 103 % r.p.m.
- 1l0% of rated output and 100% r.p.m.
403 The following particulars are to be recorded:
- ambient air temperature
- ambient air pressure
- atmospheric humidity
- external cooling water temperature
- fuel and lubrication oil characteristics.
404 In addition to those mentioned in 403, at least the
following are to be measured and recorded:
- engine r.p.m.
- torque
- maximum combustion pressure
- indicated pressure diagrams where practicable
- exhaust smoke (with an approved smoke meter)
- lubricating oil pressure and temperature
DET NORsKE VERITAS
Table BI Engine parts subject to material tests
ParI Mechanical properties and Ultrasonic 1) Magnetic particle or
chemical composition 1) liquid penelrant 1)
Coupling bolts for crankshafts Above 400 mm
Steel piston crowns Above 400 mm 0) All Above 400 mm (W)
Piston rods Above 400 mm 0) Above 400 mm Above 400 mm (W)
Connecting rods
2)
All 6)
Above 400 mm All (W)
Crossheads Above 400 mm 6)
Cylinder liners, steel parts Above 300 mm 0)
Steel cylinder covers Above 300 mm 0) All Above 400 mm(W)
Bed plates of welded construction: Plates and transverse
All All
3)
All
3) (NV)
bearing girders made of forged or cast steel
Frame and crankcase of welded construction All All All (NV)
Entablatures of welded construction All
Tie rods All Above 400 mm
4) (W).
Bolts and studs for: Cylinder cover, crossheads, main
Above 300 mm Above 400 mm (W)
bearings, connecting rod bearings
Gear wheels of steel for camshaft drives Above 400 mm 5) Above 400 mm (W)
For pipes, see Ch.1 Scc.2 Table CI
1) For engines with cylinder diameter.
2) Together with connecting rod bearing caps (only 4-stroke engines).
3) Cast steel elements - including their welded connections.
4) Tie rods - at each threaded portion twice the length of the threads.
5) For surface hardened gears, the surface hardness, the hardness depth and the core properties are also to be documented.
6) No impact testing required.
301 NV material certificates covering mechanical proper-
ties (see Sec. I F2DD) and chemical composition are required
as per table B 1.
302 The manufacturer's ultrasonic test certificate (W) is
required as per Table BI.
of the manufacturing process. The certificate is to refer to a
recognized standard and approved acceptance levels.
303 Surface crack detection in finished condition by means
of magnetic particle inspection or dye penetrant is required
as per Table B 1. The inspection is to be carried out in way
of zones with stress raisers andlor where experience shows
that defects are likely to occur.
For connecting rods with serrations only magnetic particle
inspection applies, and the acceptance criteria are to be
specially agreed upon.
304 Iffound necessary, X-ray of welds may be required.
305 Hydraulic pressure tests (W) are normally to be car-
ried out as per Table B2. Modifications to test requirements
(extent or pressure) may be specially agreed upon.
306 Dimensional check and visual inspection is to be car-
ried out with particular emphasis on highly stressed areas (as
e.g. serrations in connecting rods).
DEf NORSKE VERITAS
,)
:)
J
')
~
~
:J
J
spection.
and mechanical properties (see Sec. I F2DD) are required for:
- undeIWater housing (W)
- inboard housing (W)
- outer housing (non rotating) (NV)
- steering column/rotating support (NV)
- propeller shaft (W)
- other shafts (W)
- piping, see Ch.I Sec.2 C8DD
- impeller (NV if propulsion, otheIWise W)
- propeller nozzle (NV).
302 Ultrasonic test certificate (W) is required for:
- propeller shafts
- other shafts, if propulsion
- steering column.
303 Welding test procedures are to be carried out upon
request.
304 Surface crack detection (MPI or dye penetrant) is re-
quired in way of zones with stress raisers or welded con-
nections, for:
- shafting components, see Sec.6 B3DO
- steering column
- housings of welded type (upon request).
/
established in the MSA.
401 Gear transmissions, see Sec.S BSOO.
402 Controllable pitch propellers, see Sec.7.
403 The thruster unit is to be subjected to internal hy-
draulic pressure testing at 1,5 bar.
404 Fitting of prope!!er to the shaft, see Sec.6 D90D.
C 100 Arrangement
101 The installation of a thruster, including alignment, is
to be such as to give satisfactory performance under all op-
erating conditions.
102 A type approved shaft sealing box is to be installed to
prevent water from gaining access to internal parts of the
thruster or into the unit.
The sealing arrangement is to protect steel shafts from sea
water, unless corrosion-resistant steel specially approved by
the Society is used.
103 The arrangement of flexibly mounted side thrusters is
to provide effective protection against flooding. Such thrus-
ters are to be placed in separate watertight compartment,
unless the flexible sealing arrangement contains two separate
effective sealing elements. An arrangement for indication
ofleakage into the space between the inner and outer sealing
is to be provided. .
The arrangement is to allow inspection of such sealings
during bottom survey without extensive dismantling.
201 When propulsion is provided by thrusters only, there
are normally to be at least 2 separate thruster units. This
does not apply to wateIjets.
202 Propulsion thrusters are to be provided with means for
local control of steering gear and propeller pitch from the
thruster compartment. Necessary indications of azimuth and
propeller pitch positions and means for communication with
the navigation bridge are to be provided.
203 Azimuth steering gears are to comply with the rules
for steering gears in Pt.3 Ch.2 Sec.4 with respect to the ar-
rangement, performance and other general requirements as
applicable. It must be possible to lock the unit in all required
positions.
D 100 General
101 The thruster is to be capable of withstanding the loads
imposed by all possible operational modes.
102 Thrusters, e.g. such as side thrusters, may be de-
signed for a limited lifetime. In principle, any specified
load-time characteristic may form the basis for the approval.
Alternatively the load spectrum may be categorized as fol-
lows:
- specified total use per year
Category Hours
I $50
II 50-500
III ",500
- an average lifetime of 15 years may be assumed
- amount of time with high load (torque) applied within the
specific total use per year:
Torque
80-100% 60-80% <60%
High 25% 50% 25%
Low 10% 30% 60%
Guidance note:
High will normally apply to fIxed pitch propellers.
Low will normally apply to controllable pitch propellers.
--e-n-d---o-f--G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e-n-o-t-e--
103 Inspection of thruster gears is to be made possible ei-
ther through proper inspection openings, or by other means
(e.g. fibre optical instruments) without extensive dismantl-
mg.
104 Water jets for propulsion are to be provided with in-
spection openings (preferably transparent) enabling in-
spection of the impeller.
DEf NORSKE VERITAS
I
I
,
Page 40 - PtA Ch.2 Sec.S
D 200 Shafting
201 The dimensions of the shafts and the shafting compo-
nents are to be in accordance with Sec.6.
301 The gear transmissions are to be in accordance with
the requirements in Sec.5 D and Sec.5 E as far as applica-
ble.
The safety factors SF al;:ainst tooth fracture, SH against
pitting/spalling/case crushing and Ss against scuffmg are to
be at least:
SF SH Ss
Propulsion thrusters and thrusters
for dynamic positioning
(class notation DYNPOS) 1,55 1,20 1,5
Auxiliary thrusters 1,40 1,15 1,3
Azimuth steering gear
- for surface hardened 1,5 1,15
- for not surface hardened 1,5 1,0
D 400 Propeller
401 The propeller and propeller components are to meet
the dimenslOnal requirements in Sec. 7.
501 Azimuth thrusters designed for reversing the thrust by
turning the unit, are to be able to do so at a speed of mim-
mum 2. r.p.m.
502 Azimuth steering gears are to have a margin against
self-locking, unless overload protection is provided.
503 Azimuth steering gears for class notation DYNPOS
are to be designed for continuous running.
E 100 General
101 The systems are to comply with the requirements of
Ch.5. Additional requirements for units with class notation
DYNPOS, see separate rules.
102 The items for control and monitoring specified in 200,
are to be complied with.
E 200 Monitoring
201 . Alarm is to be for the following faults:
- stop of prime mover
- power failure of remote control system
- power failure of alarm system
- low level in lubrication oil tank (if provided)
- low lubrication oil pressure (if forced lubrication oil sys-
tem)
- low level in hydraulic supply tank
- low pressure in hydraulic system
- high level in bilge well.
Additionally for propulsion thruster azimuth gear power
units:
- power failure
- phase failure
- motor overload
- high lubrication oil inlet temperature.
202 Any alarm condition in the thruster plant is to release
alarm on the bridge with individual or groupwise indication.
203 Individual indication on the bridge is required for:
- overload of prime mover and servo unit if automatic load
limitation is not provided
- propeller pitch for controllable pitch propeller plants
- direction of rotation and r.p.m. for fixed propeller plants
- power failure of alarm system.
301 It is to be possible to stop the propeller from the
bridge by means of a system independent of the remote
control system.
101 For thruster gears, the requirements in Sec.5 FIOO
apply. For shaft alignment and assembly of shafting com-
ponents, the requirements in Sec.6 FIOO and F200 apply.
F 200 Sea trial
201 The requirements in Sec.5 F200, Sec.6 F300, Sec.7
F200 and Pt.3 Ch.3 Sec.2 K400 apply.
202 Steering and reversing functions are to be tested under
the most severe permissible conditions.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
'1
,,]
J
J
)
/
()
iJ
!)
Table Al Plans and particulars to be submitted
Plans:
- engine transverse cross-section
- engine longitudinal section
- bedplate or crankcase, cast
- bedplate or crankcase, welded with welding details and
quality control instructions
- thrust bearing assembly I)
- thrust bearing bedplate, cast
- thrust bearing bedplate, welded with welding details and
quality control instructions 1)
- frame/column. cast 2)
- frame/column, welded with welding details and quality
control instructions 2)
- tie rod
- cylinder cover, assembly
- cylinder jacket or engine block 2) 3)
- cylinder liner 3)
- torsional vibration damper with characteristics (when
applicable) see Sec.6 4)
- axial vibration damper with characteristics (when applicable)
- crankshaft, details, each cylinder No.
- crankshaft, assembly, each cylinder No.
- thrust shaft (if integral with engine)
- coupling bolts
- counterweights (if not integral with crankshaft)
- connecting rod
- connecting rod, assembly 3)
- crosshead, assembly 3)
- piston rod, assembly 3)
- piston, assembly
- camshaft drive assembly
- camshaft and cams
- auxiliary blower
- fastening arrangement (for propulsion engines only)
- resilient mounts for engine (see also C200) 4)
:..- calculation of natural frequencies for resiliently mounted
engines (not applicable to engine - generator sets rigidly
mounteed on a frame which is resiliently mounted onboard)
of starting air system on the engine 5)
oyfuel oil system on the engine 5)
- schematic layout or other equivalent documents of lubricating
oil system on the engine 5)
of cooling water system on the engine 5)
- schematic diagram of engine control and safety
system on the engine 5)
- shielding and insulation of exhaust pipes, assembly
- shielding of high pressure fuel pipes, assembly
- arrangement of crankcase explosion relief valve 6)
- operation and service manuals.
1) if integral with engine and not integrated in the bedplate
2) only for one cylinder
3) only necessary if sufficient details are not shown on the transverse
cross section and longitudinal section
4) type approval required for standard designs
5) and the entire system, if this is part of the goods to be supplied by the
engine manufacturer.
6) only for engines with a bore exceeding 200 mm
Particulars:
- maximum continuous output from the shaft flange, and the
corresponding speed
- mean indicated pressure at maximum continuous output
- maximum cylinder pressure
- valve timing angles
- compression pressure and scavenging air pressure
- cylinder diameter
- stroke
.- number and arrangement of cylinders
- firing order or angles
- compression ratio
- weight of reciprocating parts, per cylinder
- weight of rotating part of the connecting rod, referred
to the crank radius
- unbalanced weight of one crank, referred to the crank
radius (excluding counterweights)
- data for calculation of torsional vibrations
See Sec.6 C300 (including damper)
- camshaft calculation regarding cam fatigue (if specially
required).
B 100 General
101 A MSA (see Sec.1 CI05) should specify all details on
testing of materials, components and complete units for
which certificates are required.
102 For definition of categories of certificates and for NV,
Wand TR, see Sec. I CIOO.
B 200 Certification
201 Diesel engines are to have NV certificates, category
A.
202 NV certificates, category B, are required for:
- crankshafts (see Sec.6)
- turbo chargers (see Sec.9)
- torsional vibration damper (see Sec.6).
For pumps, heat exchangers, pressure vessels, electrical
components and instrumentation equipment, see Ch.l, Ch.3,
Ch.4 and Ch.5.
203 For type approved engines below 1000 kW, see Sec. I
CI06.
204 Testing mentioned in 300 is to be documented with
category C certificates.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
SECTION 2
DIESEL ENGINES
Contents
A. General
A 100 Application
A 200 Documentation
B 100 General
B 200 Certification
B 400 Type testing of engines with special survey arrangement
B 500 Type testing of engines without alternative survey ar-
rangement
c. Arrangement
C 300 Exhaust pipes
D 100 General
D 200 Structure
D 300 Crankcase, strength, ventilation and safety valves
D 400 Signboard
D 700 Lubrication
D 900 Starting air
E 100 General
E 200 Speed governing of propulsion engines
E 400 Speed governing of generator prime movers
E 500 Overspeed protection of auxiliary engines
E 600 Monitoring of propulsion engines
E 700 Monitoring of auxiliary engines
F. Testing Onboard
F 100 Onboard trials
A. General
A 100 Application
101 The rules apply to conventional diesel engines used
as propulsion engines and for driving auxiliaries (see Sec. 1
AlOO).
102 Subject to approval is the diesel engine itself with
foundation arrangement, fuel oil systems, lubricating oil
systems, cooling systems, starting systems, governing and
monitoring systems.
103 Requirements to:
- crankshafts, see Sec.6
- exhaust driven turbochargers, see Sec.9
- electric starting arrangements, see Ch.4 Sec.3.
A 200 Docwnentation
201 Plans and particulars are to be submitted according to
Table AI.
202 The plans are to show clearly the proposed scantlings
and material specifications as well as arrangements.
203 For important components of welded construction, full
detail of the joints, welding procedure, filler metal partic-
ulars and heat treatment after welding are to be specified on
the plans.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
)
,)
/)
rJ
.. =:>
,)
J
)
SECTION 9
TURBOCHARGERS
Contents
A. General
A 100 Application
A 200 Documentation
B 100 General
8 200 Testing of components
C. Arrangement
C 100 General
D. Design
D 100 General
E 100 General
A. General
A 100 Application
101 The rules apply to turbochargers fitted on diesel en-
gines ;:: 1000 kW subject to certification.
102 Turbochargers are to be type approved, either sepa-
rately or together with the diesel engine.
A 200 Docwnentation
201 The following is to be submitted:
- cross sectional drawings with principal dimensions
- drawings with necessary dimensions and material spec-
ifications as well as welding details of the rotating parts
(shaft, wheels and blades)
- technical specifications and limitations, including tem-
perature and pressures during normal full load operation,
as well as maximum allowable list and trim (degrees),
rolling and pitching (degrees!s), and acceleration.
202 When type approval is requested, the type test report
is to be submitted in addition.
B 100 General
101 Turbochargers intended for engines;:: 1000 kW are
to be delivered with NV certificate. Below 1000 kW, TR
is required, see Sec. I ClOO.
102 The manufacturer is to have in operation a certified
quality system. Should the manufacturer not be in possession
of a valid quality system certificate, an assessment of the
quality system elements which are in operation at the man-
ufacturer's works is to be made. Based on this assessment a
survey arrangement with the manufacturer maybe estab-
lished.
B 200 Testing of components
201 Properties of materials, including non-destructive
testing of power transmitting parts and parts subject to
pressure, are to be proved and documented through the
manufacturer's quality system.
202 The cooling space of each gas inlet and outlet casings
is to be hydraulically tested at pressure of either 4 bar or 1,5
times the maximum working pressure, whichever is the
greater.
203 Each shaft and bladed wheel, as well as complete ro-
tating assembly, has to be dynamically balanced in accord-
ance with the approved procedure for quality control.
All wheels (impellers and inducers) have to undergo an ov-
erspeed test during 3 minutes at 20 % over the maximum
speed at room temperature, or 10 % over the maximum
speed at working temperature.
301 Each individual unit is to be tested by the manufac-
turer and documented. The following bench tests are to be
carried out:
- a mechanical running test of each unit during 20 minutes
at maximum speed. The duration may be reduced to 10
minutes, provided the manufacturer verifies the distrib-
ution of defects established during the running tests on
the basis of a sufficient number of tested turbochargers
- for manufacturers who have facilities for testing the tur-
bocharger on an engine for which the turbocharger is
intended, the bench test may be replaced by a test run
of 20 minutes at overload (110 % of the rated output) on
this engine.
302 Turbochargers subjected to type approval are to be
tested as follows:
The type test is to be carried out on a standard unit taken
from the assembly line. As a rule, the type test is to consist
of a hot running test during one hour at maximum permis-
sible speed and maximum permissible temperature. After the
test the turbocharger is to be opened up and examined.
For manufacturers who have facilities for testing the turbo-
charger unit on an engine for which the turbocharger is to
be type approved, substitution of a hot running test by a test
run on the engine of one hour's duration at overload (110%
of the rated output) may be considered.
C. Arrangement
C 100 General
101 The arrangement is to be such as to prevent environ-
mental loads from exceeding the limit acceptable to the tur-
bocharger assembly.
D. Design
D 100 General
the turbocharger to meet the general requirements with re-
to reliability and availability (R & A) as outlined in Ch.1
Sec.3 Band Sec.3 C.
DET NORSKE VERIT AS
102 The R & A is to be proved through a design analysis
supplemented with results from development testing as well
as full scale testing. This applies to all allowable operating
conditions as specified in A200.
E 100 General
101 For turbochargers fitted on engines with power in ex-
cess of 2000 kW, the following instruments are required:
- speed indicating (r.p.m.)
- lubrication oil temperature (if journal bearings only).
DEY NORSKE VERITAS
1
)
~ ]
) ]
)
i)
106 In case of a failure of the remote control system, the
pre-set speed and direction of thrust are, where practical, to
be maintained until local command location is in operation.
107 The number of consecutive automatic attempts which
fail to produce a start, is to be limited in order to ensure that
sufficient quantity of starting air is left for 6 manual starts.
The air consumption of each starting attempt is to be limited.
108 It is to be prevented that the starting air receivers are
emptied by faulty operations.
201 Under all sailing conditions, including manoeuvring,
the speed, direction of thrust and, if applicable, pitch of the
propeller are to be fully controllable from the bndge.
202 Means are to be [Jrovided for stopping of the propul-
sion from the bridge inoependent of the bridge control sys-
tem.
203 Overload is to be indicated on the bridge if automatic
load limitation is not arranged for.
204 Alarm is to be released on the bridge and in the engine
room at starting failure.
301 Operations following any setting of the bridge control
device including reversing from the maximum ahead service
speed in case of emergency are to take place in an automatic
sequence and with time intervals acceptable to the machin-
ery.
302 Switchover from bridge control to engine room con-
trol or vice versa is only to be possible from the engine
room.
303 Propulsion orders from the bridge are to be indicated
in the control room.
F. Testing
101 All required tests and inspections are to be wituessed
by the surveyor unless otherwise stated in the rules, or oth-
erwise approved, see BI04.
201 Requirements for testing of materials and acceptance
criteria are given in Pt.2 Ch.2.
Alternatively the extent of testing and acceptance criteria are
to meet approved specifications, see BI04.
202 The test specimens are to be as representative as pos-
sible for the highly stressed areas of the actual components.
This means that they are to be taken in a depth and direction
which is suitable for the actual case.
For certain cases more strict requirements than in Pt.2 may
apply.
203 In sections 2 to 10 the subsection B (Certification and
Testing) describes the documentation requirements for ma-
terials' components and assembly as well as workshop test-
ing of the complete units.
301 Final acceptance is subject to successful testing and
sea trials.
The required testing onboard is specified under subsection
F in the respective sections in this chapter.
302 All required fimctions as well as functions which may
influence these, are to be demonstrated.
G. Signboards
G 100 References
- Sec.2 D400 concerning opening of hot crankcase
- Sec.6 C304 concerning barred speed range andlor re-
stricted driving conditions for engines.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
C. Certification
101 la this chapter the following hierarchical certification
system applies to all functions mentioned in A100:
- category A: certificates for assemblies such as turbine,
diesel engine, gear transmission, propeller, thruster, etc.
- category B: certificates for components such as crank-
shafts, turbochargers, flexible couplings, clutches,
pinions/wheels, etc.
- category C: certificates covering material properties. ul-
trasonic testing, magnetic particle inspection, dimen-
sional inspection, etc.
A category A certificate is based on the required category
Band C certificates. A category B certificate is based on the
required category C certificates.
These certificates cover the items as delivered from the ma-
nufacturer.
102 The required certification is specified under subsection
B in the respective sections of this chapter.
103 Defmition of certificates:
Det Norske Veritas certificate (NV):
A document signed by a surveyor which states:
product itself
- that tests are made in the presence of the surveyor or in
accordance with special agreements.
Works' certificate (W):
- that the tests are carried out on the certified product itself
product itself
- that the tests are witnessed and signed by a qualified de-
partment.
Test report (TR):
- that the tests are carried out on samples from the current
production.
104 Where the rules require work certificate (W) or test
report (TR) , this is based on the assumption that the
manufacturers/suppliers have in operation a quality system
according to at least ISO 9003 or equivalent.
The surveyor may at any time require tests to be carried out
in his presence and/or check the elements of quality system
in operation.
105 As an alternative, certification may be based on a
manufacturing survey arrangement (MSA) , subject to ap-
proval by the Society.
Guidance note:
A MSA is a written agreement relating to the survey and certif-
ication. Further information is given in Certification Note No.
1.1.
--e-n-d--o-f--G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---
106 For type approved components, for which NV product
certificate is required and the testing and inspection neces-
sary for obtaining the required reliability is not comprehen-
sive, alternative certification procedures laid down in a
manufacturing survey arrangement (MSA) may be ap-
proved.
D 100 Criticality
101 All machinery is to be designed so that expected de-
viations of influence parameters do not result in unaccepta-
ble reduction of the reliability/safety.
.afety
I
-..1
minimu'-;-i - - - - +
required I 1
p.-----
1
Fig. 1
I 1
I 1
I --"'1
I 1

... normal .....
range
Range of acceptable conditions
1 possible
IJ deviation

1
influence
parameter
la Fig.1 the curve drawn into the range of possible deviation
indicates unacceptable conditions, whilst dotted curve indi-
cates acceptable conditions.
Influence parameters can be e.g.:
- power
- speed
- number of passings through a barred speed range
- machining notches in inaccessible areas
- diesel engine misfiring
- variation of elastic coupling characteristics
- variation of damper characteristics.
E 100 Remote control of machinery, general
requirements
those given in Ch.S and are applicable when remote control
is installed.
102 The engine control room is the main command lo-
cation for the engine room.
103 The manoeuvring procedure is to consist of simple
operations.
104 ladicators are to be fitted on the bridge for propeller
speed, direction of rotation for fixed pitch propeller or pitch
position for controllable pitch propeller.
105 Remote starting of the propulsion machinery is to be
automatically inhibited if conditions exist which may hazard
the machinery, e.g. turning gear engaged.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
. :)
,J
:]
/)

.. :J
\
'-../
J
Pt.4 Ch.2 Sec. 1 0 - Page 43
SECTION 10
COMPRESSORS
Contents
A. General
A 100 Application
A 200 Documentation
B 100 Geneml
B 200 Certification
C 100 Geneml
D 100 Crankshaft
D 200 Rotors
D 300 Rotor casing
E 100 Geneml
F 100 Geneml
A. General
A 100 Application
101 The rules apply to all types of compressors intended
for the following systems:
- starJing air
- instrument air
- breathing gas (monobaric and hyperbaric systems).
102 The rules also apply to all types of compressors in-
tended for systems with pressure above 40 bars, irrespective
of the functions mentioned in 101.
A 200 Documentation
ted:
Plans:
- compressor assembly (sectional drawings)
- crankshaft
- connecting rod
- cylinder head with bolts
- male and female rotors
- rotor casing with end covers.
The plans are to include necessary details with regard to
scantlings and arrangement as well as material specifications
and heat treatments,
Particulars:
- type of medium to be compressed
- design pressure for all stages
- working temperature and capacity
- maximum power with corresponding r.p.m.
Calculations:
- strength calculations of the crankshaft, the rotors and the
rotor casing are to be submitted upon request.
For compressors of special type and design, the extent of the
documentation is to be considered in each case.
B 100 General
101 A MSA (see Sec.1 ClOS) should specify all details on
102 For type approved compressors, see Sec. 1 C106.
B 200 Certification
201 The compressor is to be delivered with NV certificate,
category A, see Sec. 1 ClOO.
301 Material certificates, see Sec. 1 ClOO, contammg
chemical composition and mechanical properties (see Sec. I
F200), are required for:
- crankshaft (NV)
- connecting rod (TR)
- cylinder with cover (TR, or W if specially required)
- housing (TR, or W if specially required)
- rotors (NV)
- rotor casing (W).
302 The crankshafts and the rotors are subject to non-des-
tructive testing and visual inspection as established in the
MSA.
303 All parts subject to pressure of the compressors are to
be hydraulically pressure tested (W) to 1,5 times the design
pressure for the respective parts. The test pressure need not
exceed the design pressure by more than 70 bars.
401 Function testing and setting of the safety valves are to
be carried out on each compressor in the presence of the
surveyor.
402 A capacity test is to be carried out with the compres-
sor running at design condition (rated speed, pressure, tem-
perature, type of gas, etc.). The capacity test may be waived
for compressors produced in series and when previous tests
have been carried out on similar compressors with satisfac-
tory result.
The capacity test is to be witnessed by the surveyor.
C. Compressor Arrangement and General Lay-
out
C 100 General
101 Air compressors are to be arranged and located as to
minimize the intake of oil or water contaminated air.
102 All compressors are to be protected by suitable safety
valves. The safety valves are to be set to open at the design
pressure. For starting air compressors, see also Ch.3 Sec.6
B200.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
Page 44 - Pt.4 Ch.2 Sec. 1 0
Guidance note:
The design pressure must be sufficiently higher than the maxi-
mum working pressure in order to have suitable margins for
setting of the safety valve.
103 The piping to and from the compressor is to be ar-
ranged in a way which prevents access of condensate into
the cylinders.
201 Starting air compressors are to satisfY the reqmre-
ments of Ch.l Sec.5 1100 to 1400.
301 Compressors intended for breathing gas systems are
to comply with the requirements in the Rules for Certif-
ication of Diving Systems Sec.S ElOO.
D 100 Crankshaft
101 Crankshafts are to have satisfactory safety against fa-
tigue failures. Various calculation methods may be used. In
102 is given one method for evaluation of safety against fu-
tigue in the web fillets. The method applies for crankshafts
made of forged and cast steel and nodular cast iron intended
for one or multistage compressors with the cylinders ar-
ranged in line, V or W. More detailed methods may be
specially considered.
102
Guidance note:
The stresses in the crankpin fIllet are to fulfil the following cri-
terion:
CTf
u b ~
Ub = the bending stress amplitude in the fillet (N/mm2)
CTf = the fatigue strength (N/mm2)
S = the minimum safety factor.
For the fatigue criteria mentioned below, the following minimum
safety factor applies:
S=l,4
This safety factor includes the influence of torsional stresses in
the fillets, which for the sake of simplicity are neglected in this
method.
The fatigue strength is to be calculated as follows:
CTf = (0,33 CTB + 40) ~
where
CTB = ultimate tensile strength of the material (N/mm2)
Table Dl
Material
"'"
Forged steel 1,0
Cast steel 0,8
Nodular cast iron 0,9
{s:
b=V,ICTnomGC
where
0,7 = factor to correlate the pulsating bending stress range into
an equivalent single amplitude reversed stress
GC = fatigue notch factor for bending
CT
nom
= MB I WB (N/mm
2
)
MB = bending moment in the middle of the web nearest the
center of the bearing span
WE = sectional modulus of the web
kd1rD2Pab
MB= 40L
= cylinder bore (mm)
= design pressure (bar)
D 1)
P 1)
L distance between the centers of two adjacent bearings
(mm), see Fig.1
a = distance from the center of a bearing to the center of
the web nearest the center of the bearing span (mm),
see Fig. 1
b
~
= L - a, (b 2: a) (mm)
= design factor, see Table D2
1) For multicylinder arrangements on one bearing span, use the
maximum of the individual pD2.
W
B
=B
W2
/ 6
B = width of the web (mm), see Fig. I
W = thickness of the web (mm).
Table D2
Design
In line
V-90, W-90
V-60, W-60
V-45,W-45
kd
1,00
1,15
1,50
1,75
The fatigue notch factor for bending may be calculated as fol-
lows:
a = 1 + (a!h - I)
11 = notch sensitivity factor
GCth = theoretical stress concentration factor (referred to web
bending stress)
~ ;= 0,62 + 0,2 log R + CT
y
lO-
4
log{400/R)
(if calculated > I, ~ = I applies)
U y = the yield strength of the material (N/mm2)
R = the actual fillet radius (mm)
a!h = 3,0 f{A/d) f{W/d) f{B/d) f{R/d)
f!A/d) = 1 - 0,8 Aid
f Wid) = 1 + 2,2 (W/d-O,35)
f Bid) = 1+ OA (B/d-IA5)
(
I
)
0,22
fRd =--
~
A = pin overlap (mm), see Fig. I
d = diameter of the crankpin (mm).
I
r
~
"0
i
-
:
,
i
I
.-j---
"r--
I-
Jl
--
.... _ ... -
._ .. __ .
-
a b

L
Fig. 1
Crank throw for compressor
--e-n-d---o-f-G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e-n-o-t-e--
B.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
:)
)
- _/
,)
C)
J
i)
)
()
SECTION 1
A. Classification
A 100 Application
A 200 Power ratings
A 400 Astern power
Contents
B. Documentation
B 100 Documentation for approval
C. Certification
D 100 Criticality
E 100 Remote control of machinery, general requirements
F. Testing
G. Signboards
G 100 References
A. Classification
A 10.9' Application
101 The rules in this chapter apply to machinery for
functions such as:
- power generation
- propulsion
- steering (including thrusters)
- fire detection and extinction
- ballasting and cargo pumping
- jacking machinery for jackups.
The rules apply to prime movers, couplings, gear trans-
missions, shafting, thrusters, propellers and all related dy-
namics and system analysis.
102 Spare parts for machinery covered by this chapter, see
Ch.l Sec.S.
A 200 Power ratings
201 Where requirements to dimensions in this chapter are
based on power and revolutions per minute, denoted by P
and Do, the values to be applied are maximum continuous
power (kW) measured on engine output shaft and corre-
sponding revolutions per minute.
The maximum continuous power for which the engine is to
be approved is defmed as in ISO 3046/1 for diesel engines
and ISO 3977 for gas turbines.
For plants where overload is used frequently, the scantling
criteria in this chapter may have to be based on the overload,
due to accumulated fatigue.
301 Prime movers of electric generators are to be capable
of developing 10% overload for a short period of time (15
ririnutes). The 110% refer to the power of the generator set.
This is to be demonstrated during workshop tests.
A 400 Astern power
401 Sufficient power for going astern is to be provided to
secure proper control of the unit under all normal circum-
stances.
402 For the main propulsion systems with reversing gears,
controllable pitch propellers, or electric propeller drive,
running astern is not to lead to overload of the propulsion
machinery.
403 The ability of the machinery to reverse the direction
of thrust of the propeller in sufficient time, and so to bring
the unit to rest within a reasonable distance from maximum
ahead service speed, is to be demonstrated and recorded.
404 The stopping times, headings and distances recorded
on trials, together with the results of trials to determine the
ability of units having multiple propellers to navigate and
manoeuvre with one or more propellers inoperative, are to
be available on board for the use of the master or designated
personnel.
501 The design and function of propUlsion and auxiliary
machinery are in general to be suitable for operation under
the environmental conditions as laid down in Ch.l Sec.3.
B. Documentation
B 100 Docmnentation for approval
101 Plans and particulars which are to be submitted for
approval or information are specified under subsection A in
the respective sections of this chapter.
102 When type approval has been granted for a product
and no request for submission of plans is stated on the type
approval certificates, plans and particulars for this product
need not be submitted for approval. For general information
on type approval, see Pt.1 Ch.l Sec.3 A400.
103 When the rules require calculations andlor analysis,
this documentation is to contain objectives, premises, as-
sumptions and the conclusions.
104 Materials and material testing may be specified ac-
cording to Pt.2. Material specification and testing and in-
spection different from the requirements in Pt. 2 as well as
Ch.2 may be approved if considered suitable for its purpose.
If required by the Society, a specification covering the ma-
terial data including tolerances, the production process de-
scription (forging process, heat treatment, etc.) as well as
the intended testing and inspection scheme is to be submitted
for approval.
Guidance note:
It is advised to have such arrangements settled on a general basis
by means of a manufacturing survey arrangement (MSA) , see
C105.
---e-n-d--o-f--G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e-n-o-t-e---
DET NORSKE VERITAS
F 200 Assembly of shafting components .................... 34 B. Certification and Testing ......... .......... ...... ...... 41
F 300 Testing of system stability ............................. 34 B 100 General. ............ ........ ........ ........ ..... ...... .... 41
SEC. 7 PROPELLERS ......... ........ ........ ............ 3S
B 200 Testing of components .................................. 41
B 300 Function testing .......................................... 41
A. General ................................................. 3S
C. Arrangement .......... .... ...... ......... ...... .......... 41
A 100 Application.. .. ........ .. ...... .. ...... .. .......... ... ..... 35
C 100 General. .. .. .......... .. ...... ........ .. ...... ... .. .. ...... 41
A 200 Documentation....... .. .. ...... ........ ............ ...... 35
D. Design. .... .......... ........ ........ .............. 41
B. Certification and Testing .................. ..... ....... 3S
D 100 General .................................................... 41
B 100 General.. ...... .. ........ .. ...... ........ .. ..... ...... .. ... 35
B 200 Certificates................................................ 35
E. Control and Monitoring .......... ............................. 42
E 100 General .................................................... 42
C. Arrangement and General Design ................... 36
SEC. 10 COMPRESSORS .... .... ................. 43
C 100 Arrangement or propeller .............................. 36
C 200 General design ........................................... 36
A. General ........................................... 43
A 100 Application........... ........ ........ .. .... .. ............. 43
D. Scantlings .......... ........ ....... ....... ........... 36
A 200 Documentation...... .......... ........ .... .. ...... ....... 43
D 100 Blade thickness ..................................... ...... 36
B. Certification and Testing ...... ..... ........ .... ..... 43
E. Control and Monitoring ................................ 37
E 100 General.................................................... 37
B 100 General... .. .. .......... ........ .. ...... ....... .. .. .. ...... 43
B 200 Certification. ... ........ ........ .. ...... ...... .. .. .. ..... .. 43
F 100 Fitting of propeller ...................................... 37
F 200 Sea trial .................................................... 37
B 400 Workshop testing ........................................ 43
C. Compressor Arrangement and General Layout .. .... . 43
C 100 General ............................. " .. .... ........... .... 43
J
SEC. 8 THRUSTERS.. ... ..... ...... ............... 38
C 200 Starting air compressors ................................ 44
C 300 Compressors for breathing gas systems ............. 44
A. General ....................................... 38
A 100 Application........................................ ........ 38
A 200 Documentation........................................... 38
D. Design and Scantlings ..... ........ ...... .... .... ..... 44
D 100 Crankshaft.. .......... .. ........ ........ ...... .. ... .. .... .. 44
D 200 Rotors...................................................... 45 . ~
D 300 Rotor casing .............................................. 45
B. Certification and Testing ......................... ... 38
B 100 General.................................................... 38
E. Control and Monitoring. ......... ...... ... ......... 4S
B 200 Certification......................................... ...... 38
E 100 General c.................................................. 45
F. Assembly and Testing Onboard ................... 4S
F 100 General ............................. " .... .. ........... .... 45
C. Thruster Arrangement and General Layout . ........ .... 39
C 100 Arrangement.... .. .. ........ .. ...... .. ...... ...... .. ...... 39
SEC. 11 JACKING MACHINERy................ .... ....... 46
C 200 Propulsion thrusters ..................................... 39
A. General ............................................ 46
D. Design and Construction ........ ...... .... .... ......... 39
D 100 General .................................................... 39
A 100 Application........... ........ ........ .. .... .. ....... .... .. 46
A 200 Documentation...... .......... ........ ...... ...... ..... .. 46
D 200 Shafting.... .......... .. .. ........ ........ ....... ........ ... 40
D 300 Gear transmissions ...................................... 40
D 400 Propeller.. ... .......... .. .. ...... .. ...... .. .... .. .......... 40
D 500 Azimuth steering gear ................................... 40
B. Certification and Testing ....... ...... .... .......... 46
B 100 General... .. .. .. ........ .. ...... .. ...... .. ....... .. .. .. .... 46
B 200 Certification.......................................... ..... 46
B 300 Testing and inspections ................................. 46
E. Control and Monitoring .. ..................................... 40
E 100 General...... .. .......... .. ........ .. .. .... ....... .. ....... 40
E 200 Monitoring.......................................... ...... 40
E 300 Bridge control ........................................ .... 40
C. Design and Construction ......................... ...... ....... 46
C 100 General....... .... .. ...... .. ........ .. .. .... ............... 46
C 200 Design loads .............................................. 47
C 300 Electric motor capacity ................................. 47
~ )
F. Assembly and Testing Onboard .......................... 40
F 200 Sea trial .................................................... 40
SEC.9 TURBOCHARGERS .............................. 41
C 400 Gcaring .................................................... 47
C 500 Shafts and shaft connections ........................... 47
C 600 Gear casings .............................................. 47
C 700 Bearings........................... ........................ 47
D. Control and Monitoring ................ ...... ............. 47
/)
D 100 Load control ....... ,...................................... 47
A. General...... .... ........ ........ ......... ........ ..... 41
A 100 Application.... .. .. .. .......... .......... ............. .. ... 41
E. Testing onboard .. ... ..... ......... ....... 48
A 200 Documentation ............... " .... .. .. ...... ...... .. .... 41 E 100 Jacking test ................................................ 48
~
~
~
~
103 For keyway connection, see Sec.6 D1300.
D 200 Rotors
201 The scantlings of the rotors are to give sufficient saf-
ety against fatigue.
202 Calculation of the rotor strength may be carried out
in accordance with recognized standards.
D 300 Rotor casing
301 The thickness of the casing is to be suitable for the
design pressure.
302 The strength of the casing may be documented by
calculations in accordance with recognized standards.
303 Proof tests may be used to establish the allowable de-
sign pressure of the rotor casing. The proof test may be
carried out in accordance with the ASME Boiler and Pres-
sure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division I, or other recog-
nized standards.
Pt.4 Ch.2 Sec.1 0 - Page 45
E 100 General
101 The requirements of Ch.S are to be complied with
where applicable.
F 100 General
101 After installation onboard the compressor and the
system to which it is connected, is to be function tested un-
der working conditions. See also Ch.! Sec.s.
102 The function test is to include testing of any control
and safety functions.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
SECTION 11
JACKING MACffiNERY
Contents
A. General
A 100 Application
A 200 Documentation
B 100 Geneml
B 200 Certification
C 100 General
C 200 Design loads
C 400 Gearing
C 600 Gear casings
C 700 Bearings
D 100 Load control
E. Testing onboard
E 100 Jacking test
A 100 Application
A. General
101 The requirements in this section are applicable to lift-
ing machinery for self elevating units of the pinion-rack
type. All other types will be specially considered. For gen-
eral hydraulic systems requirements, see Ch.1 Sec.S and
Sec.6.
A 200 Documentation
ted for approval:
- jacking machinery arrangement
- assembly arrangement (cross sections) of jacking unit
- pinions and gear wheels (for details, see Sec.S)
- all other power transmitting parts
- bearing specifications
- casings, in particular the parts subjected to significant
reaction forces
- electric motor including brake.
202 The following calculations are to be submitted for ap-
proval:
- calculation of load distribution between the jacking units
on one leg during the various load conditions such as
storm load and soil penetration during preload.
B 100 General
101 The manufacturer must have implemented a quality
system accepted or certificated by the Society.
102 A MSA (see Sec.l CI0S) should specify all details on
testing and inspection inclusive acceptance criteria.
B 200 Certification
201 Each jacking unit (gear transmission inclusive main
pinion) is to be delivered with Det Norske Veritas certif-
icate, category A (see Sec. 1 CIOO). The motor is to be cer-
tified in accordance with the relevant rule section.
202 The amount of and type of certificates (NV, W or TR,
see Sec. 1 CI03) for individual parts and inspections is to
be outlined in a MSA.
301 Basically the amount of testing and inspections re-
quired in Sec.S B3pO to BSOO apply. However, depending
on stress levels in the various components, certain release
may be given. The principle is that parameters vital for safe
operation of the unit are to be verified. Parameters which
are less vital or when the specification is most likely to be
fulfllled, may be randomly verified.
Guidance note:
As the amount of testing may depend on the design and the stress
levels, it is advised to settle the MSA after the design approval.
---e-n-d--o-f--G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---
302 Special tests may be required for units designed for
operation at low temperatures such as below _10C.
C 100 General
101 The system is to be designed so that overloading of
components is avoided during all kinds of operations.
Items to be considered in t ~ s respect are:
- flexible mounting of jacking units
- characteristics of electric motors
- brake torque
- interlock between electric motors and fixation rack sys-
tem (if any) etc.
102 The brakes are to engage automatically in case of
power supply failure to the lifting machinery.
103 Jacking machinery and related auxiliaries important
for the function are to be considered as main function ac-
cording to Pt.1 Ch.l Sec.2. Active components and systems
are in general to be arranged with redundancy so that a sin-
gle failure does not cause loss of jacking function. The
principles laid down in Ch.l Sec.3 are to be applied for the
design and construction.
DET NORSKE VERITAS
."",
)
)
)
CONTENTS
SEC. 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ............... ....... 1
A. General ............................................................ 15
A 100 Application ........... ............ .......... ...... ... ...... 15
A. Classification .... .................... ...... ............... .... .... 1
A 100 Application...... .. .. .. ...... ...... .... .... ...... ..... ...... I
A 200 Power ratings .............................................. 1
A 300 Overload capacity ......................................... 1
A 400 Astern power .............................................. 1
A 500 Environmental conditions ................................ 1
SEC. 5 GEAR TRANSMISSIONS .................... ....... 16
A. General......... ............................ ..... .............. .... 16
A 100 Application ........... .......... ............ ...... ... ...... 16
A 200 Documentation.. .. .. .. ........ .. .. ........ ........ .. ..... 16
B. Documentation .. ... .......... ...... ............ ....... ........ 1
A 300 Documentation to be submitted upon request ....... 17
B 100 Documentation for approval... .... .... ...... ...... ..... 1 B. Certification and Testing ............... .................. ..... 17
B 100 General..... .... .. .. .. .......... .. ....... ... ... ...... ...... 17
C. Certification .... ............ .......... .... ......... .......... ...... 2 B 200 Certification...... .. .. .. .. .. ...... .. .. .. ........ ...... ... .. 17
C 100 Certification of products and components .. .......... 2
D. Design and Construction ...... ...... ........................... 2
D 100 Criticality.......... .. .. ........ .... ........ .. .... .. ..... .... 2
B 300 Testing and inspection of elements other than gear-
~ .................................................... I7
B 400 Testing and inspection of gearing .. .... ........ ....... 18
B 500 Assembly and testing in workshop .... .......... ..... 19
)
)
E. Control and Monitoring ......... ...... .... .... ...... ...... ..... 2
E 100 Remote control of machinery, general requirements 2
E 200 Bridge control of machinery ............................ 3
E 300 Bridge control of propulsion machinery .............. 3
F. Testing .............................................................. 3
F 100 Testing generally .......................................... 3
F 200 Testing of materials ...................................... 3
F 300 Testing onboard ........................................... 3
G. Signboards ... ...................................................... 3
G 100 References.. ..... ..... .. .. ...... .... .... ....... .... .. .... .. 3
SEC.2 DIESEL ENGINES ..................................... 4
C. Arrangement of Machinery..................... ............. 20
C 100 Installation and fastening ............................... 20
D. Design and Construction ........... .................... ....... 20
D 100 Gearing. ...... .......... .. .. .. ...... .. .. .. ..... .. .. ........ 20
D 200 Shafts and shaft connections ........................... 20
D 300 Gear wheel................................................ 20
D 400 Bearings.. .... .. .. .. .. .. .... .... .. .. ........ ..... .... .. .. .. 20
D 500 Gear casings .............................................. 20
D 600 Lubrication............. .. .. .. ...... .. .. .. .... .. .. ....... .. 20
E. Monitoring ..... .... ................ ............ ........... ........ 21
E 100 Monitoring of gears ..................................... 21
A. General............................................................. 4
A 100 Application............ .. ...... .. .... .... .... ...... ... .... .. 4
A 200 Documentation......... .. ...... .... .... ...... ...... ....... 4
F. Assembly and Testing Onboard ... ....... .... .... ........... 21
F 200 Sea trial .................................................... 21
B. Certification and Testing ....................................... 5
B 100 Geneml...... .... .. .. ...... .. ...... .... .... ... .... .. .... .. .. 5
B 200 Certification....... .. .. ........ .............. ...... ....... .. 5
B 300 Testing and Inspection ................................... 6
B 400 Type testing of engines with special sUIvey arrange-
ment ......................................................... 7
B 500 Type testing of engines without alternative survey
arrangement ............................ .-................... 8
B 600 Workshop testing ......................................... 9
SEC. 6 SHAFTING AND VIBRATIONS .................. 22
A. General ............................................................ 22
A 100 Application ................................................ 22
A 200 Documentation.. .... .. .. .. .. ........ .. .. .... .. .. ......... 22
B. Certification and Testing .. ..... .............. ........ ......... 22
B 100 General... .... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ...... .. .. .. .... ... ........ .. .. 22
B 200 Certification............................................... 22
)
C. Arrangement ............... ......................... ...... ....... 10
C 100 Fastening of propulsion engines .. ..... ........ ........ 10
C 200 Flexibly mounted engines . ..... .... ...... ...... ........ 10
C 300 Exhaust pipes ......... ........ ...... ........ ........ ...... 10
C 400 Fire protection............................................ 10
D. Design and Construction .......... ...................... ...... 10
D 100 Geneml.. .... .. .. .. .. ...... .. ...... .... .... ... .... .. ...... . 10
D 200 Structure... .. .. .. .. .. ........ .. .... .......... ....... .. .... . 10
D 300 Crankcase, strength, ventilation and safety valves 10
D 400 Signboard................................................. 11
D 500 Fire extinguishing system for scavenge manifolds 11
D 600 Cylinders and pistons ................................... 11
D 700 Lubrication................................................ 11
D 800 Fuel system - cams and valve train ................... 11
D 900 Starting air ................................................ 11
)
C. Shafting Arrangement and Vibrations ... ................. 24
C 100 Arrangement... .. .. .. .. .......... .. .. .. .... .. .. ...... ..... 24
C 200 Shaft alignment ........................................... 24
C 300 Torsional vibrations ..................................... 24
C 400 Torsional impact vibrations ............................ 25
C 500 Axial vibrations .......................................... 26
C 600 Whirling vibmtions ...................................... 26
C 700 Rotor critical speeds ..................................... 26
D. Design and Scantlings ............ .......................... ... 26
D 100 General... .... .. .. .... .. .. .. .. ... ... .. .. .. ....... .. .. .... .. 26
D 200 Cmnkshafts............ .. .. .. .. .......... ........ ... .. .. .. 26
D 300 Shafts other than crankshafts .......................... 26
D 400 Propeller shafts ........................................... 29
D 500 Intennediate shafts ....................................... 29
D 600 Shafts for auxiliary machinery......................... 30
E. Control and Monitoring ....................................... 11
E 100 Geneml.................................................... 11
E 200 Speed governing of propulsion engines .............. 11
E 300 Overspeed protection of propulsion engines ........ 11
E 400 Speed governing of generator prime movers ........ 12
E 500 Overspeed protection of auxiliary engines... ........ 12
E 600 Monitoring of propulsion engines..................... 12
E 700 Monitoring of auxiliary engines ....................... 12
D 700 Propeller shaft liners .................................... 30
D 800 Stem tube and bearings ................................. 30
D 900 Fitting of propeller to the shaft........................ 31
D 1000 Flange couplings ......................................... 32
D 1100 Shrink fit couplings ...................................... 32
D 1200 Clamp couplings ......................................... 32
D 1300 Keyway connections ..................................... 32
D 1400 Spline connections ....................................... 33
D 1500 Elastic couplings ......................................... 33
F 100 Onboard trials .............. .... ...... ...... ...... ........ 12
D 1600 Tooth couplings .......................................... 33
D 1700 Clutches ................................................... 33
D 1800 Rotors of electric machines ............................ 33
SEC. 3 STEAM TURBINES .................................. 14
E. Monitoring ......................................... ............... 34
A. General.......... .................... ...... ..... ...... ........ ..... 14
E 100 Monitoring of shafting elements ...................... 34
A 100 Application.. .... .. .. .. .. .. .... .. ........ .. .. .. .. .. ........ 14
F. Assembly and Testing Onboard ............................. 34
SEC. 4 GAS TURBINES ........... ...... ...... ...... .......... 15
F 100 Shaft alignment........................................... 34
General
decided by the Board as of December 1995 and supersedes the July
each year.
Revised chapters will be fOIwarded to all subscribers to the Rules.
current.
Main changes
- A new item DIDO on criticality has been added.
- A new subsection E on Control and Monitoring has been added.
- In item A203 plans for resilient mounts and calculation of natural
frequencies have been added.
- Subsection E on Control and Monitoring has been rearranged.
- Item Fll1 has been extended.
Sec.4 Gas Turbines
- Previous text has been replaced by a general reference to the
Rules for Classification of Ships.
- Item A203 has been supplemented with a reference to faceload
distribution.
- A new item A304 on tooth contact has been added.
- Item B305 on X-ray tests has been amended.
- Item B405 on case hardening has been amended.
- Item D604 has been amended ....
- Table EI om monitoring has been amended.
Sec.6 Shafting and Vibrations
- A new item BI04 on certificates for couplings and clutches has
been added.
- Table BI has been amended.
- Item C200 on shaft alignment has been amended.
- In item C303 the text on gear transmission has been revised and
extended.
- Item C40I on torsional impact levels has been made more re-
strictive.
- Item C700 on rotor critical speeds has been extended.
- New items DI02-104 on shafting design in general have been
added.
- Item D301 has been amended.
- Item D903 on keyless mounting has been amended.
- Item DllOI on shrink fit couplings has been amended.
- Item DI50I has been amended with respect to emergency claw
devices.
- A new item D 1506 on membrane and plate element couplings
has been added.
- A new item F202 on fitting of couplings has been added.
- Item F302 on vibration measurements has been amended.
Sec.8 Thrusters
- Item A20I on plans has been amended.
- Item D301 on gear transmission safety factors has been amended.
Sec.9 Turbochargers
Item BI02 on the quality system of manufacturers has been
amended.
Sec.11 Jacking Machinery
Item BIOI on the quality system of manufacturers has been
amended.
In addition to th'e above stated rule amendments, some detected er-
1.96.2QOO
It is agreed thst save as provided below Det Norske Veritas. its subsidiaries, bodies, officers, directors. employees snd agents shall have no liability for any loss, damage or expense

pensation to such person a sum representing his proved loss. * In the event Det Norske Veritas or its subsidiaries may be held liable in accordance with the sections above. the amount
of compensation shall under no circumstances exceed the amolSlt of the fee, if any, charged for that particular service. decision, advice or information. * Under no circumstances
:)
.
J
/)
J
J
.."J
/)
C 200 Design loads
201 Dynamic loads
A relevant load-time spectrum for the fatigue life is to be
specified. This spectrum is at least to contain the estimated
necessary time and load for:
- lifting of the legs
- descending of the legs
- lifting of the platform
- descending of the platform
- variable load during holding (if no fixation rack system)
- exceptional use, such as working with one or more units
out of service
- compensating leg penetration during preloading by lifting
with full or part preload, if applicable.
The influence of friction is to be included for all mentioned
conditions.
202 Static loads
The preload of the legs is to be defined. For self elevating
units not equipped with a fixation rack system, the maximum
load is defmed as the maximum reaction between a leg and
the jacking machinery in a storm condition (maximum
weight + storm reaction).
For self elevating units equipped with a fixation rack system,
the maximum load is defmed as the preload.
203 Electric motors lifting capacity is the maximum con-
tinuous output power which the motor can deliver in the
working period with specified temperature rise for the motor
temperature class.
204 For self elevating units without a fixation rack system,
the required holding capacity is to be based on the maximum
load. The brake capacity (static friction torque) is not to be
less than 1,3 times the maximum load, considering the me-
chanical efficiency of the drive gear.
205 For self elevating units with a fixation rack system the
required holding capacity is to be based on the preload. The
brake capacity (static friction torque) is not to be less than
1,2 times the preload, mechanical efficiency considered.
301 The capacity of the electric motor is to be sufficient
for the lifting requirements such as:
- lifting platform with uneven leg load (but within approved
tolerances) for the specified duration
- lifting in preload, if specified, with a specified duration.
The friction between legs and guides as well as the effi-
ciency of the gear transmissions are to be considered.
302 The torque characteristics of the electric motors are to
be such that the motor is not able to damage any part in the
transmission or pinion-rack in case of a mechanically
blocked lifting system.
C 400 Gearing
401 Details on calculation of gearing are given in Classi-
of tooth root strength (fractures) and flank surface durability
(pitting, spalling and case-crushing) for enclosed gear units.
402 The gearing safety factors SF against tooth fractures
and SH against pitting, spalling and case-crushing are to be
at least:
SH
Storm holding load (applies to rigs without flxa-
1,5 1,0
tion rack system)
Preload holding (applies to rigs with flxation rack
1,4 1,0
system)
Accumulated lifting loads 1,5 1,0
For the main pinions and the rack the requirement to SF also
applies. The contact stresses for pinion-rack are subject to
Guidance note:
It is adviced to have a higher static overload capacity in an en-
closed gear transmission than in the open mesh (pinion-rack).
Then in case of an unexpected overload (well beyond the maxi-
mum holding), it will only be necessary to inspect the open
meshes.
---e-n-d--o-f--G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e--n-o-t-c---
501 Shafts are to fulfill the criteria in Sec.6 D with the
safety factor of 1,5.
502 For keys, flange couplings etc. see Sec.6 D .
503 Shrinkfit connections are to have a minimum friction
torque of twice the torque corresponding to the maximum
load.
C 600 Gear casings
601 Welded gear casings are to be stress relieved.
602 The casings are to be designed to prevent deflections
which may be harmful for the gear meshings.
603 If practical, inspection openings are to be provided.
C 700 Bearings
701 Rolling bearings are to have a lifetime (with 90 %
survival probability) of 5 times the specified lifetime of the
jacking unit. The entire load spectrum is to be considered,
as well as the influence of the lubricant.
The static load carrying capacity (corresponding to a defor-
mation of approximately 0,1%0 of the roller diameter) is to
be at least 1,5 times the load due to the maximum applicable
load.
702 The surface pressure in plain bearings is not to exceed
50% of the yield strength (0,2 % proof stress) of the bearing
material when the maximum load is applied.
The plain bearings are to be designed in such a way that the
dynamic loads do not result in any significant wear which
may be hannful for the gear meshings.
D 100 Load control
101 The following is to be siated in the Appendix to the
Classification Certificate:
- for the purpose of load equalization between the jacking
units, the unit torque (at electric motor) is to be checked
and adjusted if necessary. This is to be done after lifting
of the platform, and after being subjected to weather
conditions which may have altered the distribution.
This requirement does not apply if an automatic load
control device is used.
DEf NORSKE VERITAS
Page 48 - Pt.4 Ch.2 Sec.ll
102 An alarm system for overheating of the electric motors all alarms, brake functions and interlocks (C101), if any, are
is to be provided. to be checked. Shock pad deflections, electro motor input
103 1.'he power supply to each electric motor is to. have torque and speed, and the pinion-rack meshes are to be
protection agamst harmful effects of a pOSSIble short CIrCUIt. checked for all load conditions.
E. Testing onboard
E 100 Jacking test
101 The elevating machinery is to be function tested for
at least one complete cycle of all the specified conditions
mentioned in 0101 and with the preload. During these tests
102 After lifting test, the brake torques are to be checked
and adjusted if necessary.
..
DET NORSKE VERITAS
) "'J
--" '
\
j
)

J
))
i
'I
.----------. ------_._- ---
Li6rary
RULES FOR
CLASSIFICATION OF
Wi 0/ o/ung cr au

PART 4 CHAPTER 2
-

, a
-. -,
PROPULSION AND
AUXILIARY MACHINERY
JANUARY 1996
SECTIONS
MAIN CLASS
PAGE'
2 Diesel Engines .................................................................................................. 4
3 Steam Turbines ................................................................................................ 14
4 Gas Turbines ................................................................................................... 15
5 Gear Transmissions ........................................................................................... 16
6 Shafting and Vibrations ...................................................................................... 22
7 Propellers. . ...... . .. . . ... . . ...... . . ..... .. .... .. .. .... . . . . .. .. . . .. ... . .. .. ... . . . .. . ... .... ... . . ... . ... .. . . ... . .. 35
8 Thrusters ........................................................................................................ 38
9 Turbochargers .................................................................................................. 41
10 Compressors .................................................................................................... 43
11 Jacking Machinery ............................................................................................ 46
DET NORSKE VERITAS
Veritasveien 1, N-1322 Hevik, Norway Tel.: +4767579900 Fax: +4767579911

Mobile Offshore Units

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Исходное описание:

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Mobile Offshore Units

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Rules for Mobile Offshore Units. -.

HAZ- :m'" V-NOTCH

HAZ- :m'" V-NOTCH

2,25Cr lMo and <13 ISO

2,25Cr lMo and <13 ISO

Вам также может понравиться